CATALOGUE 2009
This catalogue is intended as procedure documentation for dealers. Our terms of payment, sales and delivery shall apply. Our publications are intended to provide information to the best of our knowledge and are in no way intended to be legally binding. Illustrations are not binding, especially with regard to colour, size and equipment of the products shown. Industrial property rights exist for many of the products. We reserve the right to make technical and formal changes to our products in the interest of technical progress. All items in this catalogue which are subject to CE regulations bear the CE mark on their packaging label and on the product itself.
Inserts
Standard ranges
Surface ranges
ABOUT US
4-11
MODULE inserts
12-31
House electronics
32-57
MODUL 2
58-93
BERKER S.1
94-99
BERKER B.1 100-105
BERKER B.3 106-109
BERKER B.7 GLAS 110-113 Centre inserts BERKER S.1/B.1/B.3/B.7 GLAS 114-153
BERKER Q.1 154-185 BERKER K.1, K.5 186-193 Centre inserts BERKER K.1, K.5 194-233
BERKER ARSYS
234-273
TWINPOINT 274-293
Flush-mounted special ranges
Serie 1930, Glasserie, Palazzo 294-305 BERKER TS, TS CRYSTAL, TS CRYSTAL BALL, TS SENSOR 306-329
Building system technology
Motion detectors 330-339
Radio bus 340-371
INSTABUS KNX/EIB 372-457
Alarm system 458-465 Built-in systems
BERKER INTEGRO 466-479 MOBIL R TWIN 480-483
Splash-protected flush-mounted range
splash-protected flush-mounted ip 44 484-497
Splash-protected surface-mounted ranges
AQUATEC ip 44 / Diecast 498-513 ISO-Panzer ip 44/ ip 66 514-521
Surface-mounted range
Surface-mounted 522-529
Connection boxes and connecting devices
Connecting systems 530-535 Cleaning instructions, Technical specifications, Mounting plates, General terms and conditions of business, Product summary 536-633
Ideas, perfection, but above all a passion for excellent Design: Berker – the right way.
4
Berker AWARDS
berker B.1, B.3, B.IQ, s.1, TS Sensor
berker K.1, TS Sensor
berker B.IQ, eib push-buttons, k.1, K.5, S.1, TS sensor
berker K.5, serie 1930 porzellan made by rosenthal, ts crystal ball
berker B.IQ, TS, TS sensor
berker B.Iq
berker B.IQ, K.5, ts Sensor, serie 1930 porzellan made by rosenthal, ts crystal ball
berker Ts Sensor 5
Berker switches and systems. Shining examples of individualistic home comfort.
Do you know how to design rooms with exceptional ease and with a more individual style? At Berker we have been working on that since 1919 – and we have found some highly attractive answers.
Berker switches and systems are in use all over the world, making life more beautiful, easier and more comfortable. We place the utmost emphasis on quality, design and innovation. This is confirmed by the numerous awards we have received both at home and abroad.
Berker is a leading supplier of high-quality electrical installations – from timelessly classic switch design through to intelligent building management systems. All new developments are created with just one thing in mind: the satisfaction of our customers. After all, we want you to feel at home with our products for decades to come.
Don’t just let your life be guided by taste, but also by state-of-the-art technology, with Berker - the right way.
6
Our future-oriented corporate philosophy is mattched by our state-ofthe-art production processes. At our headquarters in Schalksmühle, Germany, advanced computer-aided design methods are applied to develop and design state-of-the-art switch systems. Berker also invests in extensive research and development to create new products and product systems, as well as in new technologies and their possible applications.
The quality and safety of the finished products are of primary importance. Berker was one of the first companies to implement a quality management system for DIN ISO 9001 that meets all the requirements of certification. Accreditation by the German Accreditation Council (DAR) underscores the high technical standard of our central laboratory.
The quality of Berker‘s products has quickly become known not only in Germany, but also in the rest of Europe and overseas. Holdings in other electrical and electronics engineering companies also permit Berker to benefit from cross-product technology transfer, thereby opening up additional opportunities in the market. Whether in residential buildings, conference centres, museums, in motorhomes or on yachts – Berker products are in use all over the world.
7
The proven benefits of Berker switch inserts at a glance.
As the inventor of the module system, Berker is the only manufacturer to have retained its philosophy unchanged right through to the present. Even years later, it is still possible to adapt the switch to a new interior design look. The actual inserts are left in the wall. Only the surfaces are replaced. Even if a control switch or illuminated switch is desired, the switch insert always remains the same. For you that means:
■ No wrong inserts on site ■ Minimal stockholding ■ Lasting customer satisfaction
Outstanding functionality and easy handling are what set the switch inserts apart. The tried and tested modular design and extremely flat switching angle of only 3.5° make the switch appear very flat on the wall. To ensure low-cost installation, the concept of the patented Flexolift claws was integrated (as in the earthed SCHUKO socket outlet). This concept means the claws are flush fitting, with no rubber ring, and are forced automatically back into position when released. On the backside of the switch is a laser engraving of the circuit diagram, the graphical symbol, the article number and the conductor stripping length. A cable guard around the claw screws prevents damage to the conductors. The conductor release forces have also been substantially reduced by means of special, moulded-on lever release catches. The neon lamp unit clicks in place on the support ring for exact positioning of the unit. Precise seating of the switching rockers ensures easy switching.
8
■ 10 AX, 250 V~ switch 10 A, 250 V~ button with 1 mm thick supporting ring
■ 3.5° switching angle for a flatter appearance
■ Modular design suitable for all rocker types
■ Large clearance around the claw screw with combination cross-head srews (+/-) ■ Precise seating of rockers made possible by variable four-pin mount
■ Position of the neon/glow unit exact positioning by click-in-place; can be used as indicator or orientation light ■ Moulded-on lever release catches reduced release forces
■ Switch labelled on The backside order no., circuit diagram/graphical symbol, stripping length ■ Cable guard prevents damage to conductors by claw screws
■ Flexolift flush fitting claws; positive reset on release ® claws
■ MINIMAL INSTALLATION DEPTH plenty of space for installation of an insert for hollow-wall mounting
9
MODULAR ASSEMBLED DESIGN: FROM APPLICATION …
IN ONLY THREE STEPS In the following, we will show you how three selected complete products are put together and how the items making up the products can be ordered through the catalogue. It‘s as easy as one-two-three!
1
2
APPLICATION SELECT INSERT in chapter:
CHOOSE FRAME DESIGN e.g., in chapter:
MODULE INSERTS
BERKER B.3
:
:
Light switch Example: Rocker switches change-over order no.: 3036
HOUSE ELECTRONICS
Example: Frame aluminium/polar white, 1gang order no.: 1011 39 04
Berker K.1
: Time switch for blinds Example: RolloTec ® standard insert order no.: 2925
HOUSE ELECTRONICS
remote controlled dimmer
Example: Frame polar white, 1gang order no.: 1313 70 09
BERKER S.1
: Example: BLC universal touch dimmer order no.: 2902
10
:
: Example: Frame polar white, matt, 1gang order no.: 1011 99 09
… TO COMPLETE PRODUCT
3 FIND A SUITABLE COVER in chapter:
COMPLETE PRODUCT
BERKER S.1/B.1/B.3/B.7 GLas Rockers and centre inserts
= Example: Rocker polar white, matt order no.: 1620 19 09
Rocker switch change-over Design: BERKER B.3
BERKER K.1/K.5 Rockers and centre inserts
=
Example: RolloTec ® time switch Easy with display, polar white order no.: 1762 71 09
RolloTec ® time switch Easy with display Design: BERKER K.1
BERKER S.1/B.1/B.3/B.7 GLas RADIO BUS SYSTEM Rockers and centre inserts Transmitter
= Example: BLC radio button, polar white, matt BLC radio universal touch dimmer Remote operation for order no.: 1760 19 09 Design: BERKER S.1 Radio hand-held transmitter order no.: 2766
11
12
Module inserts
Inserts for standard and surface ranges
Berker MODULE system: An adjustable installation system that features covers you can mount on already installed inserts – even at the last minute.
■ Frame and cover are easy to change ■ Permits subsequent design changes ■ Once installed, the insert remains in the wall
Please note: Only mount in conjunction with commercially available flush-mounted boxes according to DIN 49073 Part 1.
13
MODULE INSERTS Order no.
Packing unit
Order no.
Switches
Rocker switch
Rocker switches
3pole on/off
on page T3
3031 3036 3037 3032
10 10 10 10
on page T4
10 AX, 250 V~
Rockers switches Rockers switch series
for illumination and monitoring circuit with plug-in terminals
3036 50
10
10 AX, 250 V~
on page T4
Can be illuminated using neon and incandescent lamp units with N-terminal order no. 1675 .., 1676 ..
series
3035 50
10
10 AX, 250 V~
10 10 10
on page T4
10 AX, 250 V~ on page T3
Can be illuminated using neon and incandescent lamp units with N-terminal order no. 1675 .., 1676 .. Can be illuminated using series LED unit with N terminal order no. 1680
Rockers switch for installation in hollow-walls
Rocker switch 61 3036 61 3032 61 3037
10
for illumination and monitoring circuit with plug-in terminals
for illumination and monitoring circuit without spreader claws low installation depth with plug-in terminals
change-over 2pole on/off intermediate
3035
10 AX, 250 V~
Rocker switch for installation in hollow-walls
on page T3
Can be illuminated using neon lamp unit order no. 1600
for illumination and monitoring circuit with screw terminals
Can be illuminated using neon and incandescent lamp units with N-terminal order no. 1675 .., 1676 ..
change-over
10
16 AX, 400 V~
Rocker switch on/off change-over intermediate 2pole on/off
3033 03
Packing unit
Can be illuminated using neon and incandescent lamp units with N-terminal order no. 1675 .., 1676 .. Can be illuminated using series LED unit with N terminal order no. 1680
for illumination and monitoring circuit without spreader claws low installation depth with plug-in terminals
For the Netherlands! Can be illuminated using neon and incandescent lamp units with N-terminal order no. 1675 .., 1676 ..
Rockers switch for illumination and monitoring circuit without spreader claws with plug-in terminals
series
3032 12
10
on page T3
16 AX, 250 V~ For switching of 16 A socket outlets, for example. on page T4
for illumination and monitoring circuit with screw terminals
Rockers switch double change-over, isolated input terminals
Rocker switch 67 3039 09
Can be illuminated using neon and incandescent lamp units with N-terminal order no. 1675 .., 1676 .. Can be illuminated using series LED unit with N terminal order no. 1680
for illumination without spreader claws with plug-in terminals
Can be illuminated using neon lamp unit order no. 1600 02
2pole change-over
10
For the Netherlands!
Rocker switch 2pole on/off
61 3035
10 AX, 250 V~
3038 08
10
10 AX, 250 V~
10
10 AX, 250 V~ Can be illuminated using neon lamp unit order no. 1600 02
for illumination with screw terminals
14
on page T4
Can be illuminated using neon lamp unit order no. 1600 02
for illumination with screw terminals
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
MODULE INSERTS Order no.
Packing unit
on page T4
Packing unit
Rotary switches
Rockers switch double change-over, isolated input terminals
Order no.
61 3038 08
10
Rotary switch
10 AX, 250 V~
20 A for 2.5 - 4 mm² 25 A for 2.5 - 6 mm²
For the Netherlands!
250 V~ Switching angle 60 °
Can be illuminated using neon lamp unit order no. 1600 02
Note! Wall boxes must be mounted at least 43 mm deep.
2pole on/off with screw terminals without spreader claws
Rockers switch 63 3023
10 10
Centre plate order no. 1150 ..
for illumination without spreader claws with screw terminals
3gang on/off
3862 3862 01
10
3-step switches
16 AX, 400 V~
3-step switch
For rockers order no. 1465 .., 1665 ..
with neutral-position: 0-1-2-3
3861
10
without 0-position: 2-1-3
3861 01
10
with screw terminals
16 A, 250 V~ on page T5
Pullcord switches Pullcord switch change-over 2pole on/off
3966 3962
For air conditioners and fans, for example. 61 3861 01 for the Netherlands!
10 10
Centre plate without 0-position for order no. 1084 .., 1088 .. Centre plate with 0-position for order no. 1087 .., 1096 ..
10 AX, 250 V~ Pullcord connection 14 cm on page T4 Centre plate order no. 1146 .., 1147 .., 1149 .. Can be illuminated using neon and incandescent lamp units with N-terminal order no. 1605 1..
with screw terminals
Key switches Key switch for profile half cylinders
for illumination and monitoring circuit for wall and ceiling mounting with plug-in terminals
2pole change-over
61 3966 61 3962
10 10
on page T5
10 AX, 250 V~ Pullcord connection 14 cm on page T4
10
Not suitable for flush-mounted splash protected!
Pullcord switch change-over 2pole on/off
3826 10
10 A, 250 V~
Centre plate order no. 1505 .., 1507 .. Profile half cylinder see module inserts / accessories order no. 1818 01, 1818
for master-key systems without spreader claws with screw terminals
Neon and incandescent lamp units with N-terminal see module inserts accessories. For the Netherlands! Centre plate order no. 1146 .., 1147 .., 1149 .. Can be illuminated using neon and incandescent lamp units with N-terminal order no. 1605 1..
for illumination and monitoring circuit for wall and ceiling mounting without spreader claws with plug-in terminals
Lighting units Incandescent lamp units NEW
Incandescent lamp unit with N-terminal brown, 6 V, 35 mA yellow, 12 V, 65 mA green, 24 V, 35 mA red, 48 V, 25 mA
on page T3
* 1676 * 1676 02 * 1676 01 * 1676 03
10 10 10 10
Not suitable for push-button and pullcord switches, rocker switches and rocker push-buttons from the years 1985 to 1995. for rocker switches change-over, intermediate, 2pole on/off 10 AX for illuminated rockers switches series for rocker push-buttons and rockers push-buttons except order no. 503404, 503808 for illumination and monitoring circuit
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
15
MODULE INSERTS Order no.
Packing unit
Order no.
Neon lamp units
Neon lamp unit clear transparent, 400 V~, 0.5 mA
Neon lamp unit with N-terminal grey, 230 V~, 1 mA orange, 230 V~, 0.4 mA
on page T3
1675 1675 04
10 10
If several neon lamp units are used the lamp current may result in malfunctioning of the relay/pulse relay. Remedy: Insert a neutral conductor or connect a capacitor 230 V, 1 µF per 10 mA neon lamp current in parallel with the coil. Not suitable for push-button and pullcord switches, rocker switches and rocker push-buttons from the years 1985 to 1995.
on page T4
for rocker switches change-over, intermediate, 2pole on/off 10 AX for illuminated rockers switches series for rocker push-buttons and rockers push-buttons except order no. 503404, 503808 for illumination and monitoring circuit
*
on page T3
If several neon lamp units are used the lamp current may result in malfunctioning of the relay/pulse relay. Remedy: Connect a capacitor 230 V, 1 µF per 10 mA neon lamp current in parallel with the coil.
Series LED unit with N terminal black, 230 V~, 0.9 mA per LED
on page T3
Suitable for push-button and pullcord switches, rocker switches and rocker push-buttons from the years 1985 to 1995.
for control circuit per series with screw terminal
timers Mechanical timer
on page T4
for rocker switches change-over, intermediate, 2pole on/off 10 AX for illuminated rockers switches series for rocker push-buttons and rockers push-buttons except order no. 503404, 503808 for illumination and monitoring circuit
running time 0-15 minutes
2040
1
running time 0-120 minutes
2041
1
16 A, 250 V~ Running accuracy +/- 10 % Centre plate 15 minutes order no. 1632 .., 1634 .. Centre plate 120 minutes order no. 1633 .., 1635 ..
reset with slip-clutch with through terminal without spreader claws with screw terminals 2pole on/off
Neon lamp unit
on page T4
1600 02
10
When using several neon lamp units, the lamp power may result in malfunctioning of the relay/pulse relay. Remedy: Switching a capacitor 230 V, 1 µF per 10 mA neon lamp current in parallel with the coil.
for rocker switch 2pole on/off 16 AX for rockers switches double change-over for rockers push-buttons double change-over for illumination and monitoring circuit
1
For rockers switch series order no. 3035 .., 6130 35
Suitable for push-button and pullcord switches, rocker switches and rocker push-buttons from the years 1985 to 1995.
grey, 230 V~, 0.9 mA
* 1680
Neutral conductor necessary!
10 10
If several neon lamp units are used the lamp current may result in malfunctioning of the relay/pulse relay. Remedy: Insert a neutral conductor or connect a capacitor 230 V, 1 µF per 10 mA neon lamp current in parallel with the coil.
10
LED units
Neon lamp unit with N-terminal grey, 230 V~, 1 mA * 1605 10 orange, 230 V~, 0.4 mA 1605 14
1600
for rocker switch 3pole on/off for illumination and monitoring circuit
NEW
NEW
Packing unit
Push-buttons Rocker push-buttons Rocker push-button
on page T4
NO contact change-over contact, usable as NC or NO
5031 5036
10 10
NO, with 2 separate signalling contacts
5031 01
10
1 NO, 1 NC, separate input terminals
5032 03
10
10 A, 250 V~ Can be illuminated using neon and incandescent lamp units with N-terminal order no. 1675 .., 1676 ..
for illumination and monitoring circuit with plug-in terminals 16
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
MODULE INSERTS Order no.
Packing unit
Order no.
Rocker push-button for installation in hollowwalls NO contact
5031 50
Group rockers push-button 4 NO, common input terminal
10
10 A, 250 V~ on page T4
on page T5
61 5031
10
Push-button insert for hotel card switch cover
10 A, 250 V~
Push-button insert for hotel card switch cover
For the Netherlands! Can be illuminated using neon and incandescent lamp units with N-terminal order no. 1675 .., 1676 .. on page T6
for illumination and monitoring circuit without spreader claws with plug-in terminals
5051 02 5056 01
10 10
NO, with 2 separate signalling contacts
5051 03
10
1 NO, 1 NC, separate input terminals
5052 01
10
10 A Design on request.
Rockers push-button 2 NO contacts, common input terminal
5035
10
1 NO, 1 NC, separate input terminals
5035 01
10
2 NO contacts, separate input terminals
5035 03
10
Can be illuminated using neon and incandescent lamp units with N-terminal order no. 1675 .., 1676 .. Centre plate order no. 1640 .., 1641 ..
for illumination and monitoring circuit with plug-in terminals
Pullcord push-buttons
10 A, 250 V~
Pullcord push-button change-over contact, with separate signal contact
Can be illuminated using neon and incandescent lamp units with N-terminal order no. 1675 .., 1676 ..
for illumination with plug-in terminals
on page T5
3956 19
10
10 A, 250 V~ Pullcord connection 14 cm Neon and incandescent lamp units with N-terminal see module inserts accessories.
Rockers push-button
on page T5
NO contact change-over contact, usable as NC or NO
2 A, 250 V~
Rockers push-buttons
double change-over contact, usable as NC or NO with separate input terminals 10 A, 250 V~
Follow the motor manufacturers‘ instructions!
with 0-position (rocker centre bearing) also suitable as push-button for shutters 2gang for illumination with screw terminals
Rocker push-button
on page T5
10
Can be illuminated using neon lamp unit order no. 1600 02
for illumination and monitoring circuit without spreader claws low installation depth with plug-in terminals
on page T4
5034 04
10 A, 250 V~
Can be illuminated using neon and incandescent lamp units with N-terminal order no. 1675 .., 1676 ..
NO contact
Packing unit
5038 08
Can be illuminated using neon lamp unit order no. 1600 02
for illumination with screw terminals
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
10
For wall and ceiling mounting. Centre plate order no. 1146 .., 1147 .., 1149 .. Can be illuminated using neon and incandescent lamp units with N-terminal order no. 1675 .., 1676 ..
can be illuminated using neon and glow lamp unit with N-terminal for illumination and monitoring circuit with plug-in terminals
17
MODULE INSERTS Order no.
Packing unit
Key push-buttons
3856 20
Key switches for shutters Key switch for shutters for profile half cylinders
10
2pole
10 A, 250 V~
3822 10
10
10 A, 250 V~
on page T5 Centre plate order no. 1505 .., 1507 .., 1519 .. Profile half cylinder see module inserts / accessories order no. 1818 01, 1818
on page T5
Follow the motor manufacturers‘ instructions!
with neutral-position for master-key systems with push lock function without spreader claws with screw terminals
Switches for shutters Rockers switches for shutters Rockers switch for shutters 3035 20
Not suitable for flush-mounted splash protected IP44!
Centre plate order no. 1504 .., 1506 .. Profile half cylinder see module inserts / accessories order no. 1818 01, 1818
for master-key systems without spreader claws with screw terminals
1pole
Packing unit
Switches for shutters
Key push-button for profile half cylinders with additional earth contact change-over contact, usable as NC or NO
Order no.
10
Key switches/key push-buttons for shutters
10 A, 250 V~
Key switch for shutters
Follow the motor manufacturers‘ instructions!
1pole 2pole
on page T5
3851 3852
10 10
10 A, 250 V~
with mechanical and electrical interlocking to prevent mutual switch on with plug-in terminals
on page T5
Follow the motor manufacturers‘ instructions! Centre plate with lock order no. 1077 .., 1079 .., 1081 .., 1082 .., 1083 .., 1089 ..
Rotary switches/rotary push-buttons for shutters Rotary switch for shutters 1pole 2pole
3841 3842
10 10
with neutral-position for centre plate with lock the centre plate used determines the function of switch or push-button with push lock function with screw terminals
10 A, 250 V~ on page T5
Follow the motor manufacturers‘ instructions! Centre plate order no. 1077 .., 1080 .., 1529 ..
Push-buttons for shutters Rockers push-buttons for shutters
with neutral-position for centre plate with rotary knob with push lock function with screw terminals
Rockers push-button for shutters 1pole
Accessories: Interlock disk for rotary switch for shutters for conversion to rotary push-button for shutters
1861
5035 20
10
10 A, 250 V~
10
Follow the motor manufacturers‘ instructions! on page T5
with mechanical and electrical interlocking to prevent mutual activation with plug-in terminals
Group rockers push-button 4 NO, common input terminal
5034 04
10
10 A, 250 V~ on page T5
Follow the motor manufacturers‘ instructions! Can be illuminated using neon lamp unit order no. 1600 02
with 0-position (rocker centre bearing) also suitable as push-button for shutters 2gang for illumination with screw terminals
18
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
MODULE INSERTS Order no.
Packing unit
Order no.
NEW
Key push-buttons for shutters
1pole 2pole
3831 10 3832 10
10 10
yellow green
10 A, 250 V~ on page T5
LED lamp E10 white red
Key push-button for shutters for profile half cylinders
blue
Not suitable for flush-mounted splash protected IP44!
Packing unit
10 10
* 1678 * 1678 01 * 1678 02 * 1678 03 * 1678 04
10 10 10
230 V~/=, 4 mA Operating temperature -40 - +70 °C; LED service life¹ white/coloured approx. 20000/50000 hours
Follow the motor manufacturers‘ instructions! Centre plate order no. 1504 .., 1506 .. Profile half cylinder see module inserts / accessories order no. 1818 01, 1818
For push-button and pilot lamp E10 order no. 5100 40, 5101 .., 5104 .., 5112 15
for master-key systems without spreader claws with screw terminals
for push-button and pilot lamp E10 ¹ Typ. up to approx. 50 % of the output brightness
Pilot lamps
Cover for push-button and pilot lamp E10
Push-buttons and pilot lamps
clear transparent red transparent yellow transparent green transparent
Push-button and pilot lamp E10 NO contact NO, with separate signalling contacts on page T5
5101 5101 10
10 10
10 10 10 10
1280 1281 1282 1283
For push-button and pilot lamp E10 order no. 5100 40, 5101 .., 5112 15
250 V~ Momentary-contact current max. 2 A; Incandescent lamp power max. 2 W
Knob for push-button and pilot lamp E10 clear transparent red transparent green transparent
Centre plate order no. 1124 .., 1165 .., 1168 .., 1234 .., 1235 .., 1530 .. Cover order no. 1247 00 04, 1280, 1281, 1282, 1283 Push-button order no. 1279 .. LEDs and neon lamps E10 - see Modul inserts / accessories order no. 1601, 1678 ..
can be illuminated with neon lamp E10 for illumination and monitoring circuit with screw terminals
10 10 10
1279 02 1279 1279 03
button diameter 26,5 mm For push-button and pilot lamp E10 order no. 5100 40, 5101 .., 5112 15
Pilot lamp E 14 Pilot lamp E14 10
5131 02
Accessories
250 V~ Incandescent lamp power max. 3 W; Lamp base length max. 23,5 mm
Neon lamp E10 1601
100
230 V~, 1,35 mA
Centre plate order no. 1167 .., 1169 .., 1198 .. Cover order no. 1220, 1230, 1231, 1232 LEDs and glow lamps E14 - see Modul inserts / accessories order no. 1610 .., 1679 ..
For push-button and pilot lamp E10 order no. 5100 40, 5101 .., 5104 .., 5112 15
with screw terminals
for push-button and pilot lamp E10
Accessories Incandescent lamp E14 for pilot lamp with flat cover
1610 03
100
only for pilot lamp with high cover
1610 13
100
230 V~, 3 W For pilot lamp E14 order no. 5130 40, 5131 02, 5152, 5172 15
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
19
MODULE INSERTS Order no.
NEW
Packing unit
yellow green blue
* 1679 * 1679 01 * 1679 02 * 1679 03 * 1679 04
10 10
Info pilot lamp
10
230 V~, 50/60 Hz Use only in conjunction with info pilot lamp cover.
10 on page T29
Accessories Cover plate for info pilot lamp cover red green
for light signal with flat and high cover ¹ Typ. up to approx. 50 % of the output brightness
10 10 10 10
Cable outlet 4470
with cable clamp for lines dia. max. 9 mm without terminal block
LED orientation light 1
Cable outlet built-in
230 V~, 50 Hz Power consumption 1,8 W/2 VA; Light intensity (white) 1,2 cd; Operating temperature -15 - +40 °C
4468
10
Centre plate order no. 1004 .., 1005 .., 1019 .., 1037 ..
Cover order no. 1248 ..
e.g. for lighting of steps or as a point of reference in dark rooms light colours white, blue, red, green, orange and colour sequence adjustable via control input individual colour from colour sequence can be saved permanently via control input LED brightness continuously adjustable with 4 RGB LEDs
with cable clamp for lines dia. max. 9 mm space-saving for relays, etc. without terminal block
TV/audio Loudspeaker sockets Loudspeaker connection box polar white anthracite
LED signal light
* 2952
10
Centre plate order no. 1004 .., 1005 .., 1019 ..
LED pilot lamps
NEW
10 10
Cable outlets
For pilot lamp E14 order no. 5130 40, 5131 02, 5172 15
* 2951
1289 1289 03
Info pilot light cover order no. 1345 ..
Cover for pilot lamp E14 1220 1230 1231 1232
Info pilot light cover order no. 1345 .. Cover plate order no. 1289 ..
with screw terminals
For pilot lamp E14 order no. 5130 40, 5131 02, 5152, 5172 15
clear transparent, flat clear transparent, High red transparent, High green transparent, High
1
2949
10
230 V~/=, 4,2 mA Operating temperature -40 - +70 °C; LED service life¹ white/coloured approx. 20000/50000 hours
NEW
Packing unit
Info pilot lamp
LED lamp E14 white red
Order no.
10 10
Conductor cross-section max. 10 mm²
1
230 V~, 50 Hz Power consumption 1 W/5,6 VA; Light intensity (red/green) 0,1 cd/0,3 cd; Operating temperature -15 - +40 °C
4572 09 4572 06
on page T6
Centre plate order no. 1033 .., 1034 .., 1035 .., 1040 .. Central plate order no. 1458 ..
with plug-in terminals (on backside with screw terminals)
Cover order no. 1248 ..
signalling systems for surgeries, conference rooms, hotel rooms, etc. homogenous illumination of the separately switchable red and green halves with 4 monochrome LEDs
Stereo loudspeaker connection box polar white anthracite
4573 09 4573 06
10 10
Conductor cross-section max. 10 mm² on page T6
Centre plate order no. 1033 .., 1034 .., 1035 .., 1040 .. Central plate order no. 1458 ..
with plug-in terminals (on backside with screw terminals) 20
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
MODULE INSERTS Order no.
Packing unit
on page T6
10
Loudspeaker jack
Transition resistance terminals < 0,1 mΩ; Transition resistance insert < 0,15 mΩ; Conductor cross-section max. 10 mm²; Installation depth 31 mm
black
10
For miniature connector insert order no. 4505, 4508 .. on page T6
Jack and plug with red or black identification ring, as well as a plug connection are suitable for protection low voltage. Centre plate order no. 1184 .., 1185 .., 1186 .., 1187 .., 1196 .., 1197 ..
Cinch sockets Cinch module set polar white/red
on page T63
Stereo loudspeaker socket outlet Conductor cross-section max. 2,5 mm² For only 1 loudspeaker socket use miniature connector insert order no. 4505 and loudspeaker socket order no. 1800.
1
with 2 Cinch sockets and module carriers with tool free cutting terminals NEW
Video cinch module polar white/yellow
DIN EN 60130-9 with 2 integral speaker sockets with screw terminals
1989
Conductor diameter 0,5 - 0,65 mm (AWG 24-22); Conductor cross-section 0,2 - 0,325 mm² (AWG 24-22); Module dimensions (W x H x D) 15 x 18 x 35 mm Central plate order no. 1427 .. Supporting plate order no. 0945 59 ..
10
Centre plate order no. 1184 .., 1185 .., 1186 .., 1187 .., 1196 .., 1197 ..
DIN EN 60130-9 for miniature connector insert with screw terminals
with 2 metal banana sockets, gold-plated design with 2 metal banana plugs, gold-plated design with 2 metal cable lugs, gold-plated design banana sockets also suitable for screw connection
on page T6
1800
Conductor cross-section max. 2,5 mm²
Recommendation: use deep box.
4505 01
Packing unit
TV/audio
Loudspeaker socket outlet High End 4505 02
Order no.
on page T63
Data-/telecommunications
* 1992
1
Conductor diameter 0,5 - 0,65 mm (AWG 24-22); Conductor cross-section 0,2 - 0,325 mm² (AWG 24-22); Dimensions (W x H x D) 15 x 18 x 35 mm Central plate order no. 1427 .. Supporting plate order no. 0945 59 ..
Connector inserts Miniature connector insert 4505
with cinch socket and module carrier with tool free cutting terminals
10
Centre plate order no. 1184 .., 1185 .., 1186 .., 1187 .., 1196 .., 1197 .. Loudspeaker socket order no. 1800
Graphics sockets NEW
polar white/black
For flange cover with 22.2 mm hole pitch to DIN 51529 Circular plug-in connector: Cannon; Conrad Electronic; Dr. Ing. Sieger; Farnell; Hirschmann; Lumberg; Monacor; RS Components for 1 or 2 connectors for loudspeaker sockets for diode plug-in devices for miniature plug-in devices
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
VGA module
* 1994
1
Dimensions (W x H x D) 31 x 18 x 35 mm; Conductor cross-section max. 1,5 mm² on page T62
Central plate order no. 1427 .. Supporting plate order no. 0945 59 ..
with a 15pole D-subminiature socket SVGA compatible occupies 2 MINI-COM module spaces in the cover with screw-in lift terminals
21
MODULE INSERTS Order no.
NEW
Order no.
S-Video module polar white/black
on page T62
Packing unit
Aerial socket 2-hole throughpass socket
* 1993
1
Conductor diameter 0,5 - 0,65 mm (AWG 24-22); Conductor cross-section 0,2 - 0,325 mm² (AWG 24-22); Dimensions (W x H x D) 15 x 18 x 35 mm
4515
on page T61
Central plate order no. 1427 .. Supporting plate order no. 0945 59 ..
Aerial sockets
75 Ω Broadband technology 4 - 2400 MHz; Attenuation 15 dB; Attenuation at 950-2200 MHz 2 dB; Attenuation at 4-40 MHz 1 dB; Attenuation at 47-862 MHz 0,8 dB; Reverse channel compatible 4 - 2400 MHz
IEC 169-2 and EN 50083-1, 2/A1 Shielding efficiency EMC safety class A
Aerial socket 2-hole single box HI FS1B
10
Centre plate order no. 1039 .., 1200 .., 1201 .., 1202 .., 1203 .. Central plate order no. 1486 .. Terminating resistor order no. 4503
with S-Video and module carrier with tool free cutting terminals
10
for community and broadband cable systems for SAT house distributors for terrestrial reception for analogue and digital transmission in tree structure and trunk lines disables DC voltage with decoupling device with screw terminals
75 Ω Attenuation 0,8 - 1,8 dB on page T66
Packing unit
Only to be procured through Belgium via Vecolux! Tested by ELECTRABEL. Centre plate order no. 1039 .., 1200 .., 1201 .., 1202 .., 1203 .. Central plate order no. 1486 ..
Aerial socket 3-hole single box
IEC 169-2 and EN 50083-1
4522
for community and broadband cable systems for terrestrial reception in star structure or decoupled spur lines with screw terminals
on page T61
1
75 Ω Broadband technology 5 - 2400 MHz; Attenuation at 4-40 MHz 2 dB; Attenuation at 47-862 MHz 1,5 dB; Attenuation at 950-2200 MHz 2,5 dB
Aerial socket 2-hole single box 4502
on page T61
10
75 Ω Broadband technology 4 - 2400 MHz; Attenuation at 4-862 MHz 4 dB; Attenuation at 950-2200 MHz 5 dB; Reverse channel compatible 4 - 2400 MHz Not suitable as terminal box. Centre plate order no. 1039 .., 1200 .., 1201 .., 1202 .., 1203 .. Central plate order no. 1486 ..
IEC 169-2 and EN 50083-1 Shielding efficiency EMC safety class A
Centre plate order no. 1039 .., 1200 .., 1201 .., 1202 .., 1203 ..
IEC 169-2 and EN 50083-1, -2, -4 Shielding efficiency EMC safety class A for single and distributor SAT systems for community and broadband cable systems for terrestrial reception for analogue and digital transmission in star structure or decoupled spur lines remote supply via F-socket DC voltage conducting with screw terminals
for community and broadband cable systems for single and distributor SAT systems for terrestrial reception for analogue and digital transmission in star structure or decoupled spur lines remote supply via output socket DC voltage conducting with screw terminals
22
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
MODULE INSERTS Order no.
Packing unit
Order no.
Aerial socket 3-hole throughpass socket 4523
on page T61
Aerial socket 4-hole single box 1
75 Ω Broadband technology 40 - 2400 MHz; Attenuation at 40-862 MHz 10 dB; Attenuation at 950-2400 MHz 11 dB; Attenuation at 40-470 MHz 1,5 dB; Attenuation at 470-862 MHz 2 dB; Attenuation at 950-2400 MHz 3,5 dB
4594
on page T61
IEC 169-2 and EN 50083-2,-4 Shielding efficiency EMC safety class A for single and distributor SAT systems for community and broadband cable systems for terrestrial reception for analogue and digital transmission in star structure or decoupled spur lines remote supply via F-sockets for multi-switch systems for simultaneous connection of radio and TV receiver as well as 2 independent SAT receivers with 2 independent SAT outputs (F-sleeves) with 2 equal IEC outputs (socket and plug) also to add SAT programmes in broadband cable systems DC voltage conducting with screw terminals
for SAT house distributors for community and broadband cable systems for terrestrial reception for analogue and digital transmission in tree structure and trunk lines disables DC voltage with decoupling device with screw terminals
Aerial socket 3-hole throughpass socket 1
75 Ω Broadband technology 40 - 2400 MHz; Attenuation at 40-862 MHz 10 dB; Attenuation at 950-2400 MHz 11 dB; Attenuation at 40-470 MHz 1,5 dB; Attenuation at 470-862 MHz 2 dB; Attenuation at 950-2400 MHz 3,5 dB Centre plate order no. 1039 .., 1200 .., 1201 .., 1202 .., 1203 .. Use aerial socket 3-hole single box as terminal box order no. 4522
Terminating resistors Terminating resistor 4503
1
75 Ω Broadband technology 0,15 - 2400 MHz on page T61
IEC 169-2 and EN 50083-1, -2, -4 Shielding efficiency EMC safety class A for SAT house distributors for community and broadband cable systems for terrestrial reception for analogue and digital transmission in tree structure and trunk lines DC voltage conducting with decoupling device with screw terminals
75 Ω Broadband technology 5 - 2400 MHz; Attenuation terrestrial/BC 2 - 3 dB; Attenuation, SAT range 2 - 6 dB
Central plate order no. 1484 .. Centre plate order no. 1704 ..
IEC 169-2 and EN 50083-1, -2, -4 Shielding efficiency EMC safety class A
on page T61
1
Not suitable as terminal box.
Centre plate order no. 1039 .., 1200 .., 1201 .., 1202 .., 1203 .. Terminating resistor order no. 4503
4593
Packing unit
For aerial socket 2-hole throughpass socket order no. 4515 For aerial socket 3-hole throughpass socket order no. 4523
for use in last through-box for non-reflective termination of a trunk cable
Data-/telecommunications TAE socket outlets TAE socket outlet 6F+N white polar white black on page T63
4487 02 4487 09 4487 05
10 10 10
125 V, 10 VA Transition resistance < 20/30 mΩ; Conductor diameter max. 1 mm; Installation depth 22 mm Centre plate order no. 1033 .., 1034 .., 1035 .., 1040 .., 1458 .. Central plate order no. 1457 ..
Design to DIN 41715 for 1 telephone or 1 add-on unit 6pole for 1 outside line with screw terminals
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
23
MODULE INSERTS Order no.
Packing unit
on page T63
4500 02 4500 09 4500 05
10 10 10
125 V, 10 VA Transition resistance < 20/30 mΩ; Conductor diameter max. 1 mm; Installation depth 22 mm
FCC socket outlet 8(4)pole white
on page T63
Centre plate order no. 1407 .., 1408 .. Central plate order no. 1468 ..
Design to DIN 41715
Design to DIN EN 60603-7 and IEC 603-7
TAE socket outlet 2 x 6/6NFF 4544 02 4544 09 4544 05
10 10 10
125 V, 10 VA Transition resistance < 20/30 mΩ; Conductor diameter max. 1 mm; Installation depth 22 mm
FCC socket outlet 8pole white
on page T63
Centre plate order no. 1033 .., 1034 .., 1035 .., 1040 .. Central plate order no. 1458 ..
cat.3 for connectors RJ11, RJ12 and RJ45, ISDN-compatible with 45° oblique outlet with screw terminals
FCC 8(6)/TAE 6 F+N socket outlet
on page T63
10
Design to DIN EN 60603-7 and IEC 603-7
for 2 telephones and 1 add-on unit 2 x 6/6pole for 2 outside lines with screw terminals
4588 02 4588 09 4588 05
4538
125 V=, 1 A Transmission bandwidth up to 16 MHz; Transition resistance < 20 mΩ; Conductor diameter max. 1 mm; Installation depth 22 mm Centre plate order no. 1407 .., 1408 .. Central plate order no. 1468 ..
Design to DIN 41715
white polar white black
10
cat.3 for connectors RJ11, RJ12 and RJ45, ISDN-compatible with 45° oblique outlet with screw terminals
for 1 telephone and 2 add-on units 3 x 6pole for 1 outside line with screw terminals
on page T63
4568
125 V=, 1 A Transmission bandwidth up to 16 MHz; Transition resistance < 20 mΩ; Conductor diameter max. 1 mm; Installation depth 22 mm
Centre plate order no. 1033 .., 1034 .., 1035 .., 1040 .. Central plate order no. 1458 ..
white polar white black
Packing unit
FCC socket outlets
TAE socket outlet 3 x 6NFN white polar white black
Order no.
10 10 10
125 V=, 1 A Transmission bandwidth up to 16 MHz; Transition resistance < 20 mΩ; Cable diameter max. 1 mm; Installation depth 22 mm
FCC socket outlet 2 x 8(4)pole white
on page T63
Centre plate order no. 1033 .., 1034 .., 1035 .., 1040 .. Central plate order no. 1458 ..
4562
10
125 V=, 1 A Transmission bandwidth up to 16 MHz; Transition resistance < 20 mΩ; Conductor diameter max. 1 mm; Installation depth 22 mm Centre plate order no. 1409 .., 1410 .. Central plate order no. 1469 ..
Design to DIN EN 60603-7 and IEC 603-7
cat.3 for connectors RJ11, RJ12 and RJ45, ISDN-compatible for 2 devices, telephones or optional features 2 x 6/6pole for 2 outside lines with screw terminals
cat.3 for connectors RJ11, RJ12 and RJ45, ISDN-compatible parallel contacted sockets with 45° oblique outlet with screw terminals
RTT socket outlets RTT socket outlet BE RTT0 1
10
Can only be purchased in Belgium by Vecolux! Centre plate order no. 6710 .., 6711 ..
for 1 telephone or 1 add-on unit 5pole for one outside line used by Belgacom 24
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
MODULE INSERTS Order no.
on page T63
Packing unit
Order no.
FCC socket outlet 2 x 8(4)pole with switchable resistors
FCC socket outlet 8pole shielded
white
72 V=, 0,75 A Transmission bandwidth up to 250 MHz; Transition resistance < 20 mΩ; Conductor diameter 0,4 - 0,63 mm (AWG 26-22); Installation depth 31 mm
4592
4586
10
125 V=, 1 A Transmission bandwidth up to 16 MHz; Transition resistance < 20 mΩ; Resistor 100 Ω; Conductor diameter max. 1 mm; Installation depth 22 mm
on page T64
Cat.5 DIN EN 50173-1:2003 and ISO/IEC 11801, 2nd edition real.cat.6a E DIN IEC 60603-7-5 Protective screen DIN EN 55022 class B Colour code A and B EIA/TIA 568A
Design to DIN EN 60603-7 and IEC 603-7 as socket outlet for ISDN-So-Bus installations for telephone installations as single box cat.3 for connectors RJ11, RJ12 and RJ45, ISDN-compatible parallel contacted sockets with 45° oblique outlet with screw terminals
housing out of tin diecasting real.cat.6a for RJ45 plugs with 45° oblique outlet with LSA + terminals
FCC socket outlet 8pole shielded
FCC socket outlet 8/8pole white
4539
on page T64
Cat.6 DIN EN 50173-1:2003 and ISO/IEC 11801, 2nd edition Protective screen DIN EN 55022 class B Colour code A and B EIA/TIA 568A
Design to DIN EN 60603-7 and IEC 603-7 cat.3 for connectors RJ11, RJ12 and RJ45, ISDN-compatible with 45° oblique outlet with screw terminals
housing out of tin diecasting cat.6 for RJ45 plugs with 45° oblique outlet without spreader claws with LSA + terminals
FCC socket outlet 8pole shielded 10
72 V=, 0,75 A Transmission bandwidth up to 100 MHz; Transition resistance < 20 mΩ; Conductor diameter 0,4 - 0,63 mm (AWG 26-22); Installation depth 31 mm Centre plate order no. 1407 .., 1408 .. Central plate order no. 1468 ..
Cat.5 DIN EN 50173-1:2003 and ISO/IEC 11801, 2nd edition Protective screen DIN EN 55022 class B Colour code A and B EIA/TIA 568A housing out of tin diecasting cat.5e class D for RJ45 plugs with 45° oblique outlet with LSA + terminals
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
Transmission bandwidth up to 250 MHz; Transition resistance < 20 mΩ; Conductor diameter 0,4 - 0,65 mm (AWG 26-22); Installation depth 31,5 mm Centre plate order no. 1407 .., 1408 .. Central plate order no. 1468 ..
Centre plate order no. 1409 .., 1410 .. Central plate order no. 1469 ..
on page T64
1
4590
10
125 V=, 1 A Transmission bandwidth up to 16 MHz; Transition resistance < 20 mΩ; Conductor diameter max. 1 mm; Installation depth 22 mm
4554
10
Centre plate order no. 1407 .., 1408 .. Central plate order no. 1468 ..
Centre plate order no. 1409 .., 1410 .. Central plate order no. 1469 ..
on page T63
Packing unit
FCC socket outlet 8/8pole shielded 4555
on page T64
10
72 V=, 0,75 A Transmission bandwidth up to 100 MHz; Transition resistance < 20 mΩ; Conductor diameter 0,4 - 0,63 mm (AWG 26-22); Installation depth 31 mm Centre plate order no. 1409 .., 1410 .. Central plate order no. 1469 ..
Cat.5 DIN EN 50173-1:2003 and ISO/IEC 11801, 2nd edition Protective screen DIN EN 55022 class B Colour code A and B EIA/TIA 568A housing out of tin diecasting cat.5e class D for RJ45 plugs with 45° oblique outlet with LSA + terminals
25
MODULE INSERTS Order no.
Packing unit
Order no.
FCC socket outlet 8/8pole shielded 4587
on page T64
Modular jack 8pole black
10
72 V=, 0,75 A Transmission bandwidth up to 250 MHz; Transition resistance < 20 mΩ; Conductor diameter 0,4 - 0,63 mm (AWG 26-22); Installation depth 31 mm
on page T64
Modular jack 8pole
on page T64
FCC socket outlet 8/8pole shielded
Cat.6 DIN EN 50173-1:2003 and ISO/IEC 11801, 2nd edition Protective screen DIN EN 55022 class B Colour code A EIA/TIA 568A
Centre plate order no. 1409 .., 1410 .. Central plate order no. 1469 ..
RJ45, cat.6, shielded housing, lid, cable clamp and screened contact out of tin diecasting with screen contacting 360° and cable clamp with optional dust protection cover for RJ45 plugs cable feed from 90 to -90° with tool free cutting terminals
Cat.6 DIN EN 50173-1:2003 and ISO/IEC 11801, 2nd edition Protective screen DIN EN 55022 class B Colour code A and B EIA/TIA 568A housing out of tin diecasting cat.6 for RJ45 plugs with 45° oblique outlet without spreader claws with LSA + terminals
NEW
Modular jacks Modular jack 6pole 5
Conductor diameter 0,4 - 0,65 mm (AWG 25-22); Indexing dimension (W x H) approx. 14,9 x 19,4 mm on page T64
Mounting plates see acessories order no. 1111 16 For supporting plate 1gang order no. 4540 01 For supporting plate 2gang order no. 4541 01
Modular jacks: AMP, order no. 216000-2 RJ12, cat.3 with cutting terminals
26
1
Cable external diameter 5 - 9 mm; Core diameter 0,7 - 1,6 mm; Copper conductor diameter 0,4 - 0,65 mm (AWG 26-22); Indexing dimension (W x H) approx. 14,7 x 19,3 mm Mounting plates see acessories order no. 1111 16 Central plate order no. 1464 .. Centre plate order no. 1513 1.. For supporting plate 1gang order no. 4540 01 For supporting plate 2gang order no. 4541 01
1
Transmission bandwidth up to 250 MHz; Transition resistance < 20 mΩ; Conductor diameter 0,4 - 0,65 mm (AWG 26-22); Installation depth 31,5 mm
1829
Mounting plates see acessories order no. 1111 16 For supporting plate 1gang order no. 4540 01 For supporting plate 2gang order no. 4541 01
1854 01
housing out of tin diecasting real.cat.6a for RJ45 plugs with 45° oblique outlet with LSA + terminals
black
5
Modular jacks: AMP, order no. 216005-4 RJ45, cat.3, ISDN-compatible with cutting terminals
Cat.5 DIN EN 50173-1:2003 and ISO/IEC 11801, 2nd edition real.cat.6a E DIN IEC 60603-7-5 Protective screen DIN EN 55022 class B Colour code A and B EIA/TIA 568A
4591
1833
Conductor diameter 0,4 - 0,65 mm (AWG 25-22); Indexing dimension (W x H) approx. 14,9 x 19,4 mm
Centre plate order no. 1409 .., 1410 .. Central plate order no. 1469 ..
on page T64
Packing unit
on page T64
Mini jack 8pole black RJ45, cat.5e, shielded (AWG 24-22)
1980 1984
1 1
RJ45, cat.6, shielded (AWG 26)
* 1985
1
Central plate order no. 1427 .. Supporting plate order no. 0945 59 ..
Cat.5 DIN EN 50173-1:2003 and ISO/IEC 11801, 2nd edition Cat.6 DIN EN 50173-1:2003 and ISO/IEC 11801, 2nd edition Protective screen DIN EN 55022 class B Colour code A and B EIA/TIA 568A with cutting terminals
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
MODULE INSERTS Order no.
Packing unit
Supporting plates for modular jacks
Order no.
Packing unit
Supporting plate with grey reception 1gang
Supporting plate with red reception 1gang 4540 01
4540 03
10
Indexing dimension (W x H) approx. 15,5 x 19,5 mm
Centre plate order no. 1170 ..
Centre plate order no. 1170 .. Modular jack order no. 1829, 1833, 1854 01
Modular jacks: AMP, order no. 216811 for centre plate with dust protector slider for AMP modular jacks cat.3 without spreader claws
Modular jacks: AMP, order no. 216005, 216000-2; Asyco; BTR; Dätwyler; Dr. Ing. Sieger; Drivex; EFB Electronic; Erni; Hubbell; ICS; Intracom; Radiall; Rutenbeck; Setec; Telegärtner; Eline 600 GG45 jacks: Kerpen; LANmark 7 (only with Keystone-Clip): Nexans; Keystone Jack: Kerpen
Supporting plate with grey reception 2gang 4541 03
Modular jacks: AMP, order no. 216811 for centre plate with dust protector sliders for AMP modular jacks cat.3 without spreader claws
Supporting plate with white reception 1gang 4540 02
Centre plate order no. 1170 ..
10
Indexing dimension (W x H) approx. 15,5 x 19,5 mm
Modular jacks: AMP, order no. 216000-2, 216005; Asyco; BTR; Dätwyler; Dr. Ing. Sieger; Drivex; EFB Electronic; Erni; Hubbell; ICS; Intracom; Radiall; Rutenbeck; Setec; Telegärtner; Eline 600 GG45 jacks: Kerpen; LANmark 7 (only with Keystone-Clip): Nexans; Keystone Jack: Kerpen
10
Indexing dimension (W x H) approx. 14,9 x 20,7 mm
Supporting plate with red reception 2gang
Centre plate order no. 1181 .., 1182 .. Modular jack order no. 1829, 1833, 1854 01
10
Centre plate order no. 1181 .., 1182 ..
for centre plate with dust protector slider for AMP modular jacks cat.3 without spreader claws
4541 01
10
MT-RJ jack: AMP; Intracom; Telena; Modular jacks: Brand-Rex; CobiNet; EFB Electronic; Schumann; Standard 110 Connect jack: AMP; SL series toolless jack: AMP; EMT modular jack: AMP; SL series 110 Connect Jack: AMP for centre plate with dust protector slider for AMP modular jacks series 110 Connect cat.3, cat.5, cat.5e and cat.6 without spreader claws
for centre plate with dust protector sliders for AMP modular jacks cat.3 without spreader claws
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
27
MODULE INSERTS Order no.
Packing unit
Supporting plate with white reception 2gang 4541 05
Order no.
Packing unit
Supporting plate with brown reception 2gang
10
4541 07
10
Indexing dimension (W x H) approx. 14,9 x 20,7 mm
Indexing dimension (W x H) approx. 14,9 x 19,5 mm
Centre plate order no. 1181 .., 1182 ..
Centre plate order no. 1181 .., 1182 ..
MT-RJ jack: AMP; Intracom; Telena; Modular jacks: Brand-Rex; CobiNet; EFB Electronic; Schumann; SL series toolless jack: AMP; SL series toolless jack with dust protection: AMP; Standard 110 Connect jack: AMP; SL series 110 Connect Jack: AMP
Modular jacks: Krone; Reichle&De-Massari; Thomas & Betts; Fibre-optic couplings: 3M; Krone; mvk for centre plate with dust protector sliders for Krone modular jacks cat.5, cat.5e and cat.6 without spreader claws
Supporting plate with blue reception 2gang # 4541 06 Centre plate order no. 1181 .., 1182 ..
for centre plate with dust protector sliders for AMP modular jacks series 110 Connect cat.3, cat.5, cat.5e and cat.6 without spreader claws
Supporting plate with green reception 1gang 4540 04
10
Indexing dimension (W x H) approx. 17 x 18 mm Previously AVAYA before that Lucent Technologies
Modular jacks: Commscope-Systimax, gigaSpeed, PowerSUM, order no. MGS300BH-..., M1BH-..., MPS100E-..., MGS500-..., MGS400-... for centre plate with dust protector slider for AVAYA modular jacks cat.5 and cat.6 without spreader claws
for centre plate with dust protector sliders for ITT Cannon modular jacks cat.5 and cat.6 without spreader claws
Connector inserts 4505
10
Centre plate order no. 1184 .., 1185 .., 1186 .., 1187 .., 1196 .., 1197 .. Loudspeaker socket order no. 1800
For flange cover with 22.2 mm hole pitch to DIN 51529
Supporting plate with green reception 2gang 10
Indexing dimension (W x H) approx. 17 x 18 mm Previously AVAYA before that Lucent Technologies Centre plate order no. 1181 .., 1182 ..
Modular jacks: Commscope-Systimax, gigaSpeed, PowerSUM, order no. MGS300BH-..., M1BH-..., MPS100E-..., MGS400-..., MGS500-... for centre plate with dust protector sliders for AVAYA modular jacks cat.5 and cat.6 without spreader claws
Modular jacks: ITT Cannon, Mk3, Mk2, order no. JSCS80801CON03; Nexans, LANconnect-5
Miniature connector insert
Centre plate order no. 1170 ..
4541 04
10
Circular plug-in connector: Cannon; Conrad Electronic; Dr. Ing. Sieger; Farnell; Hirschmann; Lumberg; Monacor; RS Components for 1 or 2 connectors for loudspeaker sockets for diode plug-in devices for miniature plug-in devices
BNC/TNC connector insert white, for shaft Ø 10 mm white, for shaft Ø 13 mm
4577 4579
10 10
For threaded shaft lengths > 8 mm Centre plate order no. 1184 .., 1185 .., 1186 .., 1187 .., 1196 .., 1197 .. BNC built-in jack order no. 1840
for non-rotating installation of BNC and TNC sockets
28
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
MODULE INSERTS Order no.
Packing unit
Data connectors
Order no.
Accessories
BNC panel jack
Patch cable
with shaft Ø 10 mm
1840
grey
10
50 Ω
on page T64
IEC 196-8
1839 1835 1834
1 1 1
Switch Switch 5-port, RMD
Conductor diameter max. 0,85 mm (AWG 20)
light grey
Centre plate order no. 1072 .. Mounting plates see acessories order no. 1111 01, 1111 02, 1111 03 Central plate order no. 1411 .., 1470 ..
with mounting adapter with interlock bolt for screw plug M 3 with solder connection
1841 1842
1 1
Centre plate order no. 1072 .. Central plate order no. 1411 .., 1470 ..
Network technics Patch panels Patch panel 6 port, RMD # 1996
on page T64
# 1995
1
230 V~, 50/60 Hz Data rate 10 / 100 Mbit/s auto-negotation; Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C; RMD 6 modules; Dimensions (W x H x D) 107,5 x 91 x 73 mm; Assembling height as from DIN rail 67 mm For patch cable order no. 1997
Mounting adapter for D-subminiature connector
light grey
For switch order no. 1995 For patch panel order no. 1996 For router order no. 1998, 1999
to connect switch and patch panel shielded with foil and shield cat.5e class D, shielded
D-subminiature connector
for 9pole for 15pole
10
DIN EN 50173: 2000
with solder connection
9pole 15pole 25pole (without mounting adapter)
# 1997
Cable length approx. 350 mm
For mounting plate order no. 1112 14 For BNC/TNC connector insert order no. 4577
on page T64
Packing unit
1
Transmission bandwidth up to 100 MHz; RMD 6 modules; Dimensions (W x H x D) 107,5 x 90 x 73 mm; Assembling height as from DIN rail 67 mm; Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C
for home and office networks for installation in distribution box with store and forward principle for forwarding of complete data only automatic switchover from half / full duplex automatic port switch-off in case of error simple commissioning by means of automatic setting of data/function parameters with LED for ON indication and service functions with integral power supply cascadable for PC- and Mac-Systems, expandable for up to 4096 terminal units cat.5e class D with 5 RJ45 ports shielded with 45° oblique outlet with dust protection cover
For switch order no. 1995 For patch cable order no. 1997
Cat.5 DIN EN 50173-1:2003 and ISO/IEC 11801, 2nd edition Colour code A and B EIA/TIA 568A for installation in distribution box cat.5e class D, shielded with 6 RJ45 ports with 45° oblique outlet with dust protection cover with LSA + terminals
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
29
MODULE INSERTS Order no.
Packing unit
Routers light grey
Socket outlets for floating output
# 1998
1
Double pole socket outlet for floating output
230 V~, 50/60 Hz Ethernet data rate 10/100 Mbit/s; Data rate Vmax. 8 Mbit/s downstream; Data rate Vmax. 1 Mbit/s upstream; Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C; RMD 6 modules; Dimensions (W x H x D) 107 x 91 x 70 mm; Assembling height as from DIN rail 64 mm
1061
For separate earthing of medical-technical equipment and lab equipment. Central plate order no. 1403 .. Centre plate order no. 1705 .. Right angle plug order no. 4605
Connection pins DIN 42801 without spreader claws with screw terminals
UR2
Built-in socket for floating output
for Internet access for all network users via DSL with integrated DSL modem for installation in distribution box simple entry of operating and access data using standard browser software updates available by download with firewall with LED for ON indication and service functions with integral power supply with 2 RJ45 ports with 45° oblique outlet with dust protection cover with RJ45 connection for ADSL splitter and LAN, alternatively screw fitting for ADSL splitter
1
4604 Conductor cross-section max. 6 mm²
For separate earthing of medical-technical equipment and lab equipment. Centre plate order no. 1063 .., 1070 .. Central plate order no. 1431 .. Right angle plug order no. 4605
Connection pins DIN 42801 for centre plate with cut-out dia. 18.8 mm with green-yellow signal ring
Right angle plug for floating output
RMD router light grey
10
Conductor cross-section max. 6 mm²
For switch order no. 1995 For patch cable order no. 1997
on page T65
Packing unit
Hospital installation RMD router with DSL modem
on page T65
Order no.
# 1999
Conductor cross-section max. 6 mm²
230 V~, 50/60 Hz Ethernet data rate 10/100 Mbit/s; Data rate Vmax. 8 Mbit/s downstream (DSL); Data rate Vmax. 1 Mbit/s upstream (DSL); Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C; RMD 6 modules; Dimensions (W x H x D) 107 x 91 x 70 mm; Assembling height as from DIN rail 64 mm
For separate earthing of medical-technical equipment and lab equipment. For built-in socket for floating output order no. 1061 For double pole socket outlet for floating output order no. 4604
For connection pins according to DIN 42801 with crimped connection for socket outlet for floating output and wall box
For switch order no. 1995 For patch cable order no. 1997
AnnexB/UR2 for Internet access for all network users via ISDN, ISDN and/or DSL with additional modem for installation in distribution box simple entry of operating and access data using standard browser DynDNS-compatible, e.g. for IP central unit RMD, IP cameras software updates available by download with firewall with LED for ON indication and service functions with integral power supply with 3 RJ45 ports with 45° oblique outlet with dust protection cover with RJ45 connection for DSL modem, ISDN SO bus and LAN, alternatively screw fitting for ISDN SO bus
1
4605
1
Accessories Neon lamp units Neon lamp unit for SCHUKO-socket outlet with indicator lamp polar white, 230 V~, 1.5 mA
1609
10
1818 1818 01
1 1
for replacement need
Profile half cylinder Profile half cylinder with differing closures with same closures Length 40 mm on page T5
With 5 tumblers to DIN 18252 with 3 keys
30
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
MODULE INSERTS Order no.
Packing unit
Order no.
Packing unit
Extension claws Push-on extension claw 1913
50
Extension 15 mm Not for electronics inserts!
Blank module Blank module polar white, 1gang
1990
1
Dimensions (W x H x D) 15 x 18 x 35 mm Central plate order no. 1427 .. Supporting plate order no. 0945 59 ..
Protective covers Protective cover for switches, push-buttons, push-button BCU and group push-button BCU grey
1847
10
Protective cover against dirt contamination and damage of flush-mounted inserts without cover during interior decoration or renovation work.
Protective cover for SCHUKO-socket outlets grey
1848
10
Protective cover against dirt contamination and damage of flush-mounted inserts without cover during interior decoration or renovation work.
Bottom plates Self-extinguishing base plate 1gang white
1021 12
10
For surface-mounted frames of design lines Modul 2, Arsys and Twinpoint. For flush-mounted frames 1gang order no. 1029 ..
with imprint suitable for mounting on flammable base surface
Self-extinguishing base plate 2gang white
1021 22
10
For surface-mounted frames of design lines Modul 2, Arsys and Twinpoint. For flush-mounted frames 2gang order no. 1030 ..
with imprint suitable for mounting on flammable base surface
Self-extinguishing base plate 3gang white
1021 32
10
For surface-mounted frames of design lines Modul 2, Arsys and Twinpoint. For flush-mounted frames 3gang order no. 1031 00 65
with imprint suitable for mounting on flammable base surface
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
31
32
House electronics
Inserts for standard and surface ranges
Electronic technology opens up new opportunities for modern building installations. High-quality electronic devices from Berker, for example, offer a practical alternative to conventional switch elements.
■ More functions made possible by intelligent control electronics ■ More variability made possible by functional covers that can be changed as needed (controller, radio button, presence detector etc.) ■ More flexibility for modernisation, renovation and expansion
Please note: Only mount in conjunction with standard commercial flush-mounted boxes according to DIN 49073 Part 1.
33
HOUSE ELECTRONICS Order no.
Packing unit
Order no.
Rotary dimmers
Rotary dimmer
Rotary dimmer
2830 10 2819 01
Possible to change fuse without removing cover. Cover plate order no. 1130 .. Centre plate order no. 1134 .., 1135 .., 1137 ..
Possible to change fuse without removing cover. Cover plate order no. 1130 .. Centre plate order no. 1134 .., 1135 .., 1137 ..
7
G
1
J
G
J
with change-over pressure switch short-circuit and overload proof (fine-wire fuse) phase cut-on with screw terminals
with rotary on/off switch bulb-preserving soft startup short-circuit and overload proof (fine-wire fuse) phase cut-on with screw terminals
Rotary dimmer 2860 10
Rotary dimmer with cover plate and setting knob S.1 white, glossy polar white, glossy polar white, matt on page T9
2819 89 82 2819 89 89 2819 99 09
1 1 1
Possible to change fuse without removing cover. Cover plate order no. 1130 .. Centre plate order no. 1134 .., 1135 .., 1137 ..
1
G
J
with rotary on/off switch bulb-preserving soft startup short-circuit and overload proof (fine-wire fuse) phase cut-on with screw terminals
on page T9
2819 02 2819 09
2875
1 1
230 V~, 50 Hz 230 V incandescent and halogen lamps 60 - 400 W; LV power boosters Eb max. 10; Axial dimension diameter 4 mm Cover plate order no. 1130 .. Centre plate order no. 1134 .., 1135 .., 1137 ..
1
7
G
J
J
Rotary dimmer with soft-lock
Rotary dimmer with cover plate and setting knob Modul 2 white, glossy polar white, glossy
G
with change-over pressure switch short-circuit and overload proof (fine-wire fuse) phase cut-on with screw terminals
Cover plate order no. 1130 .. Centre plate order no. 1134 .., 1135 .., 1137 ..
7
1
230/240 V~, 50/60 Hz 230 V incandescent and halogen lamps 60 - 600 W; LV power boosters Eb max. 10; Axial dimension diameter 4 mm
230 V~, 50 Hz 230 V incandescent and halogen lamps 60 - 400 W; LV power boosters Eb max. 10; Axial dimension diameter 4 mm
1
1
230/240 V~, 50/60 Hz 230 V incandescent and halogen lamps 60 - 400 W; LV power boosters Eb max. 10; Axial dimension diameter 4 mm
10
230 V~, 50 Hz 230 V incandescent and halogen lamps 60 - 400 W; LV power boosters Eb max. 10; Axial dimension diameter 4 mm
1
Packing unit
on page T9
1
230 V~, 50 Hz 230 V incandescent and halogen lamps 60 - 600 W; Tronic or LV power boosters built-in/RMD max. 10; Axial dimension diameter 4 mm Possible to change fuse without removing cover. Cover plate order no. 1130 .. Centre plate order no. 1134 .., 1135 .., 1137 ..
1
G
J
with change-over pressure switch short-circuit and overload proof (fine-wire fuse) with spare fuse phase cut-on voltage test possible without dismantling with plug-in terminals
with rotary on/off switch bulb-preserving soft startup short-circuit and overload proof (fine-wire fuse) phase cut-on with screw terminals
34
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
HOUSE ELECTRONICS Order no.
Packing unit
Order no.
Rotary dimmer with soft-lock
on page T9
Tronic rotary dimmer 1
2885
2867 10
1
230/240 V~, 50 Hz 230 V incandescent and halogen lamps 100 - 1000 W; Tronic or LV power boosters built-in/RMD max. 10; Axial dimension diameter 4 mm
230/240 V~, 50 Hz 230 V incandescent and halogen lamps 20 - 360 W; Electronic transformers 20 - 360 W; Universal power boosters max. 10 á 500 W; Tronic power boosters Eb max. 10; Axial dimension diameter 4 mm
Cover plate order no. 1130 .. Centre plate order no. 1134 .., 1135 .., 1137 ..
Trouble-free operation will be obtained only with Berker Tronic transformers.
1
Cover plate order no. 1130 .. Centre plate order no. 1134 .., 1135 .., 1137 ..
G
J
with change-over pressure switch short-circuit and overload proof (electronic fuse) phase cut-off with screw terminals
3
2866 10
1
230/240 V~, 50/60 Hz 230 V incandescent and halogen lamps 20 - 500 W; Dimmable conventional transformers 20 - 500 VA; LV power boosters Eb max. 10; Axial dimension diameter 4 mm
G
J
on page T9
1
230 V~, 50 Hz 230 V incandescent and halogen lamps 20 - 525 W; Electronic transformers 20 - 525 W; Universal power boosters max. 10 á 500 W; Tronic power boosters Eb max. 10; Axial dimension diameter 4 mm Trouble-free operation will be obtained only with Berker Tronic transformers.
L
with change-over pressure switch short-circuit and overload proof (fine-wire fuse) phase cut-on with screw terminals
Cover plate order no. 1130 .. Centre plate order no. 1134 .., 1135 .., 1137 ..
3
Rotary dimmer LV with soft-lock 1
2873
R
2874
In case of excessive making currents use making current limiters order no. 0185.
2
J
Tronic rotary dimmer with soft-lock
Possible to change fuse without removing cover.
Cover plate order no. 1130 .. Centre plate order no. 1134 .., 1135 .., 1137 ..
G
with change-over pressure switch bulb-preserving soft startup very low noise short-circuit and overload proof (electronic fuse) phase cut-off expandable by universal power boosters RMD Plus with load cable switched in parallel with screw terminals
Rotary dimmer LV
on page T9
Packing unit
230 V~, 50 Hz 230 V incandescent and halogen lamps 40 - 500 W; Dimmable conventional transformers 40 - 500 VA; LV power boosters Eb max. 10; Axial dimension diameter 4 mm Possible to change fuse without removing cover. In case of excessive making currents use making current limiters order no. 0185.
G
J
R
with change-over pressure switch bulb-preserving soft startup very low noise short-circuit and overload proof (electronic fuse) phase cut-off with terminal for base load from mains isolator voltage test possible without dismantling expandable by universal power boosters RMD Plus with load cable switched in parallel with plug-in terminals
Cover plate order no. 1130 .. Centre plate order no. 1134 .., 1135 .., 1137 ..
2
G
J
L
with change-over pressure switch short-circuit and overload proof (fine-wire fuse) with spare fuse phase cut-on with terminal for base load from mains isolator voltage test possible without dismantling with plug-in terminals
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
35
HOUSE ELECTRONICS Order no.
Packing unit
1
2861 10
230 V~, 50/60 Hz 230 V incandescent and halogen lamps 50 - 420 W; Electronic transformers 50 - 420 W; Dimmable conventional transformers 50 - 420 VA; Universal power boosters max. 10 phase cut-off á 500 W; Universal power boosters max. 5 phase cut-on á 420 VA; Tronic or LV power boosters built-in/RMD max. 10 for same load type; Axial dimension diameter 4 mm
NEW
on page T10
Do not connect conventional transformers together with electronic transformers to one output. Button order no. 1765 ..
Do not connect conventional transformers together with electronic transformers.
4
J
L
R
with extension unit input for universal rotary dimmer extension unit with incremental encoder with brightness memory bulb-preserving soft startup very low noise short-circuit and overload proof (electronic fuse) phase cut-on or cut-off according to load type, self-learning voltage test possible without dismantling expandable by universal power boosters RMD Plus with load cable switched in parallel with plug-in terminals
Rotary dimmer extension units
2862 10
on page T10
230 V~, 50/60 Hz Number of extension units max. 5; Axial dimension diameter 4 mm Cover plate order no. 1130 .. Centre plate order no. 1134 .., 1135 .., 1137 ..
as extension unit for universal rotary dimmer with incremental encoder voltage test possible without dismantling with plug-in terminals
36
1
G
J
L
R
Speed controllers Speed controller 2968 01
on page T8
Universal rotary dimmer extension unit with soft-lock
7
for 2 independent lighting groups an extension input for both series by means of BLC extension unit switch-on brightness retained for series on mains power failure bulb-preserving soft startup very low noise short-circuit and overload proof (electronic fuse) phase cut-on or cut-off per series according to load type, self-learning with screw terminals
Cover plate order no. 1130 .. Centre plate order no. 1134 .., 1135 .., 1137 ..
G
1
230 V~, 50/60 Hz 230 V incandescent and halogen lamps 50 - 260 W; Electronic transformers 50 - 260 W; Dimmable conventional transformers 50 - 260 VA; Universal power boosters max. 10 phase cut-off 1gang á 500 W; Tronic or LV power boosters built-in/RMD max. 10 for same load type Trouble-free operation will be obtained only with Berker Tronic transformers.
Case of excessive making currents (for conv. transformers), use making current limiters order no. 0185.
7
Universal series touch dimmer
* 2901
Trouble-free operation only with Berker Tronic transformers.
4
Packing unit
Universal series touch dimmers
Universal rotary dimmer with soft-lock
on page T10
Order no.
1
230/240 V~, 50/60 Hz Rated motor current and segment current, max. 0,1 - 2,7 A; Axial dimension diameter 4 mm Possible to change fuse without removing cover. Centre plate order no. 1134 00 2.., 1135 00 2.., 1135 00 89, 1135 72 .., 1137 14 24, 1137 16 26, 1137 19 29, 1137 2.., 1137 60 79, 1137 89 2..
5
7
with rotary on/off switch for devices with motory drive additional switching contact for blade control basic speed adjustable short-circuit and overload proof (fine-wire fuse) with spare fuse phase cut-on with plug-in terminals
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
HOUSE ELECTRONICS Order no.
Packing unit
Order no.
DALI control units
Push-button rotary potentiometer 1-10 V with soft-lock
Rotary potentiometer DALI 2897
on page T29
2896 10
1
DALI voltage 16 V= (9.5...22.5 V=); Current consumption < 2 mA; DALI devices max. 64; Cable length DALI at 1.5 mm² max. 200 m; Axial dimension diameter 4 mm
on page T28
Ensure same illumination, use only electronic ballasts and fluorescent lamps from the same manufacturers.
Cover plate order no. 1130 .. Centre plate order no. 1134 .., 1135 .., 1137 ..
Possible to change fuse without removing cover.
DALI draft DIN IEC 60929 Power supply required to DALI specifications IEC 60929
When using of LV halogen lamps we recommend Berker Tronic transformer with 1-10 V interface order no. 2977.
with soft-lock with on/off pressure switch for switching and controlling electr. ballasts and Tronic transformer with DALI interface e.g. for fluorescent lamps and LV halogen lamps control is effected by central telegram (broadcast) for wiring in parallel (last potentiometer setting applicable) basic brightness programmable short-circuit and overload proof (fine-wire fuse) with spare fuse with screw terminals
Cover plate order no. 1130 .. Centre plate order no. 1134 .., 1135 .., 1137 ..
Interface to DIN EN 60928
M
Rotary potentiometer 1-10 V with soft-lock 1
Push-button control unit 1-10 V built-in
230 V~, 50/60 Hz Switching current 6 A; Control current 50 mA; Axial dimension diameter 4 mm In case of excessive making currents use making current limiters order no. 0185. Ensure same illumination, use only electronic ballasts and fluorescent lamps from the same manufacturers. Possible to change fuse without removing cover. When using of LV halogen lamps we recommend Berker Tronic transformer with 1-10 V interface order no. 2977. Cover plate order no. 1130 .. Centre plate order no. 1134 .., 1135 .., 1137 ..
Interface to DIN EN 60928
M
R
with on/off pressure switch for switching and controlling electronic ballasts and Tronic transformers with 1-10 V interface e.g. for fluorescent lamps and LV halogen lamps basic brightness programmable short-circuit and overload proof (fine-wire fuse) with spare fuse with screw terminals
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
R
with push-button (NO) for activation of pulse relays for controlling electronic ballasts and Tronic transformers with 1-10 V interface e.g. for fluorescent lamps and LV halogen lamps short-circuit and overload proof (fine-wire fuse) with spare fuse with screw terminals
Control units 1-10 V
on page T28
1
230/240 V~, 50/60 Hz Momentary-contact current max. 2 A; Control current 50 mA; Axial dimension diameter 4 mm In case of excessive making currents use making current limiters order no. 0185.
Not suitable for combining with other DALI sensors or centres.
2891 10
Packing unit
polar white
on page T28
2872
1
230 V~, 50/60 Hz Control current 200 mA; Switching current 10 A; Dimensions (L x W x H) 175 x 42 x 18 mm In case of excessive making currents use making current limiters order no. 0185. Ensure same illumination, use only electronic ballasts and fluorescent lamps from the same manufacturers. When using of LV halogen lamps we recommend Berker Tronic transformer with 1-10 V interface order no. 2977. Neutral conductor necessary! Interface to DIN EN 60928
8
M
R
with extension unit input for BLC extension unit and push-but.(NO) and 1 push-but. operation concept for switching and controlling electronic ballasts and Tronic transformers with 1-10 V interface e.g. for fluorescent lamps and LV halogen lamps with selectable brightness memory bulb-preserving soft startup basic brightness programmable with screw terminals
37
HOUSE ELECTRONICS Order no.
Packing unit
Order no.
BLC Berker Light Control
BLC touch dimmer LV
BLC dim inserts 2903
1
230 V~, 50/60 Hz Control current 50 mA; Switching current 3,04 A; Operating temperature 5 - 35 °C Light scene function (on/off, dimming value) in conjunction with BLC radio button. In case of excessive making currents use making current limiters order no. 0185. To ensure same illumination, use only electronic ballasts and fluorescent lamps from the same manufacturers. On usage of LV halogen lamps we recommend Berker Tronic transformer with 1-10 V interface order no. 2977. Neutral conductor necessary! BLC presence detector with constant light control order no. 1701 10 BLC ceiling controller order no. 1701 11 BLC radio button order no. 1760 .. BLC button order no. 1761 .. BLC controller 180 order no. 1783 .., 1786 .. BLC controller 180 IP44 order no. 1783 61 89, 1786 61 89 BLC controller comfort 180 order no. 1784 .., 1787 .. BLC controller 180 comfort IP44 order no. 1784 61 89, 1787 61 89
Interface to DIN EN 60928
8
M
R
with extension unit input for BLC extension unit, BLC control extension unit and push-button (NO) for switching and controlling electronic ballasts and Tronic transformers with 1-10 V interface e.g. for fluorescent lamps and LV halogen lamps start-up brightness can be stored after power failure basic brightness programmable when cover is detached, the switch status is retained (wallpaper function) with screw terminals
38
1
2904
BLC push-button control unit 1-10 V
on page T12
Packing unit
on page T12
230 V~, 50/60 Hz 230 V incandescent and halogen lamps 20 - 500 W; Dimmable conventional transformers 20 - 500 VA; LV power boosters Eb max. 10; Operating temperature -20 - +45 °C Light scene function (on/off, dimming value) in conjunction with BLC radio button. Possible to change fuse without removing cover. In case of excessive making currents (for conv. transformers) use switch-on current limiters order no. 0185. BLC presence detector with constant light control order no. 1701 10 BLC ceiling controller order no. 1701 11 BLC radio button order no. 1760 .. BLC button order no. 1761 .. BLC controller 180 order no. 1783 .., 1786 .. BLC controller 180 IP44 order no. 1783 61 89, 1786 61 89 BLC controller comfort 180 order no. 1784 .., 1787 .. BLC controller 180 comfort IP44 order no. 1784 61 89, 1787 61 89
2
7
G
J
L
with extension unit input for BLC extension unit, BLC control extension unit and push-button (NO) switch-on brightness memory function bulb-preserving soft startup when cover is detached, the switch status is retained (wallpaper function) short-circuit and overload proof (fine-wire fuse) with spare fuse phase cut-on with screw terminals
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
HOUSE ELECTRONICS Order no.
Packing unit
1
2902
230 V~, 50/60 Hz 230 V incandescent and halogen lamps 50 - 420 W; Electronic transformers 50 - 420 W; Dimmable conventional transformers 50 - 420 VA; Universal power boosters max. 10 phase cut-off á 500 W; Universal power boosters max. 5 phase cut-on á 420 VA; Tronic or LV power boosters built-in/RMD max. 10 for same load type; Operating temperature -20 - +45 °C; Installation depth 22 mm
BLC triac switch insert LV
on page T12
Fuse can be changed without removing cover. BLC presence detector with constant light control order no. 1701 10 BLC ceiling controller order no. 1701 11 BLC radio button order no. 1760 .. BLC button order no. 1761 .. BLC controller 180 order no. 1783 .., 1786 .. BLC controller 180 IP44 order no. 1783 61 89, 1786 61 89 BLC controller comfort 180 order no. 1784 .., 1787 .. BLC controller 180 comfort IP44 order no. 1784 61 89, 1787 61 89
BLC presence detector with constant light control order no. 1701 10 BLC ceiling controller order no. 1701 11 BLC radio button order no. 1760 .. BLC button order no. 1761 .. BLC controller 180 order no. 1783 .., 1786 .. BLC controller 180 IP44 order no. 1783 61 89, 1786 61 89 BLC controller comfort 180 order no. 1784 .., 1787 .. BLC controller 180 comfort IP44 order no. 1784 61 89, 1787 61 89
G
J
L
7
G
J
L
with extension unit input for BLC extension unit, BLC control extension unit and push-button (NO) bulb-preserving soft startup when cover is detached, the switch status is retained (wallpaper function) short-circuit and overload proof (fine-wire fuse) with spare fuse with screw terminals
R
with extension unit input for BLC extension unit, BLC control extension unit and push-button (NO) start-up brightness can be stored after power failure when cover is detached, the switch status is retained (wallpaper function) bulb-preserving soft startup very low noise short-circuit and overload proof (electronic fuse) phase cut-on or cut-off according to load type, self-learning expandable by universal power boosters RMD Plus with load cable switched in parallel with screw terminals
230 V~, 50/60 Hz 230 V incandescent and halogen lamps 40 - 400 W; Dimmable conventional transformers 40 - 400 VA; Operating temperature -20 - +45 °C Light scene functions (on/off) in conjunction with BLC radio buttons.
Do not connect conventional transformers together with electronic transformers.
7
1
2905
Light scene functions (on/off, dimming value) in conjunction with BLC radio button. trouble-free operation we recommend Berker Tronic transformers.
4
Packing unit
BLC switch inserts
BLC universal touch dimmer
on page T12
Order no.
BLC tronic switch insert 1
2916
on page T12
230 V~, 50/60 Hz 230 V incandescent and halogen lamps 50 - 420 W; Electronic transformers 50 - 420 W; Operating temperature -20 - +45 °C Light scene function (on/off) in conjunction with BLC radio button. For trouble-free operation we recommend Berker Tronic transformers. BLC presence detector with constant light control order no. 1701 10 BLC ceiling controller order no. 1701 11 BLC radio button order no. 1760 .. BLC button order no. 1761 .. BLC controller 180 order no. 1783 .., 1786 .. BLC controller 180 IP44 order no. 1783 61 89, 1786 61 89 BLC controller comfort 180 order no. 1784 .., 1787 .. BLC controller 180 comfort IP44 order no. 1784 61 89, 1787 61 89
7
G
J
R
with extension unit input for BLC extension unit, BLC control extension unit and push-button (NO) bulb-preserving soft startup when cover is detached, the switch status is retained (wallpaper function) very low noise short-circuit and overload proof (electronic fuse) phase cut-off with screw terminals
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
39
HOUSE ELECTRONICS Order no.
Packing unit
Order no.
BLC relay switch insert 2906
on page T12
Neutral conductor necessary! BLC presence detector with constant light control order no. 1701 10 BLC ceiling controller order no. 1701 11 BLC radio button order no. 1760 .. BLC button order no. 1761 .. BLC controller 180 order no. 1783 .., 1786 .. BLC controller 180 IP44 order no. 1783 61 89, 1786 61 89 BLC controller comfort 180 order no. 1784 .., 1787 .. BLC controller 180 comfort IP44 order no. 1784 61 89, 1787 61 89
G
J
L
M
R
with extension unit input for BLC extension unit, BLC control extension unit and push-button (NO) also usable as push-button relay switch when cover is detached, the switch status is retained (wallpaper function) with screw terminals
40
2906 10
on page T12
For electronic ballasts and energy-saving lamps with excessive switch-on currents use switch-on current limiters order no. 0185. Light scene function (on/off) in conjunction with BLC radio button.
8
BLC relay switch insert with potential-free contact
1
230 V~, 50/60 Hz 230 V incandescent and halogen lamps 2300 W; Electronic transformers 1500 W; Conventional transformers 1000 VA; Fluorescent lamps in duo configuration 2300 VA; Fluorescent lamps uncompensated 1200 VA; Fluorescent lamps parallel compensated 920 VA; Operating temperature -20 - +45 °C; Installation depth 22 mm
Packing unit
1
230 V~, 50/60 Hz 230 V incandescent lamps 800 W; 230 V halogen lamps 750 W; Minimum load 12 V, 100 mA; Operating temperature 5 - 35 °C For electronic ballasts and energy-saving lamps with excessive switch-on currents use switch-on current limiters order no. 0185. Light scene function (on/off) in conjunction with BLC radio button. Neutral conductor necessary! BLC presence detector with constant light control order no. 1701 10 BLC ceiling controller order no. 1701 11 BLC radio button order no. 1760 .. BLC button order no. 1761 .. BLC controller 180 order no. 1783 .., 1786 .. BLC controller 180 IP44 order no. 1783 61 89, 1786 61 89 BLC controller comfort 180 order no. 1784 .., 1787 .. BLC controller 180 comfort IP44 order no. 1784 61 89, 1787 61 89
8
G
J
with extension unit input for BLC extension unit, BLC control extension unit and push-button (NO) potential-free contact for function extra-low voltage FELV (only change-over voltage) suitable also usable as push-button relay switch when cover is detached, the switch status is retained (wallpaper function) with screw terminals
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
HOUSE ELECTRONICS Order no.
Packing unit
Order no.
BLC relay switch insert HVAC (heating/ ventilation/air conditioning)
on page T12
BLC controller extension unit
230 V~, 50/60 Hz 230 V incandescent and halogen lamps 1000 W; Electronic transformers 750 W; Conventional transformers 750 VA; Fluorescent lamps in duo configuration 1000 VA; Fluorescent lamps uncompensated 500 VA; 230 V incandescent lamps (HVAC-channel) 800 W; 230 V halogen lamps (HVAC-channel) 750 W; Motor switching current (HVAC-channel) 2,1 A; Switch on delay HVAC-channel 0/3 min.; Delay time heating/ventilation/air conditioning ch 2/10/30/60/120 min. For electronic ballasts and energy-saving lamps with excessive switch-on currents use switch-on current limiters order no. 0185. Light scene function (on/off) in conjunction with BLC radio button. Neutral conductor necessary!
G
J
L
on page T12
1
230 V~, 50/60 Hz Number of extension units max. 10 (5 with order no. 2902); Cable length between main device and extension uni 100 m; Installation depth 22 mm Neutral conductor necessary! BLC presence detector with constant light control order no. 1701 10 BLC ceiling controller order no. 1701 11 BLC controller 180 order no. 1783 .., 1786 .. BLC controller 180 IP44 order no. 1783 61 89, 1786 61 89 BLC controller comfort 180 order no. 1784 .., 1787 .. BLC controller 180 comfort IP44 order no. 1784 61 89, 1787 61 89
with screw terminals
Hand-held transmitters
BLC presence detector with constant light control order no. 1701 10 BLC ceiling controller order no. 1701 11 BLC radio button order no. 1760 .. BLC button order no. 1761 .. BLC controller 180 order no. 1783 .., 1786 .. BLC controller 180 IP44 order no. 1783 61 89, 1786 61 89 BLC controller comfort 180 order no. 1784 .., 1787 .. BLC controller 180 comfort IP44 order no. 1784 61 89, 1787 61 89
8
2908
1
2912
Packing unit
M
R
with extension unit input for BLC extension unit, BLC control extension unit and push-button (NO) potential-free HVAC contact suitable for function extra-low voltage FELV (only alternating voltage) also usable as push-button relay switch with delay time HVAC relay contact for e.g. valve drive switch on delay for HVAC channel can be activated/deactivated permanently with BLC button when cover is detached, the switch status is retained (wallpaper function) with screw terminals
IR hand-held transmitter anthracite, matt
2779
1
Operating voltage 6 V=; Battery life approx. 3 years; IR channels 24; IR range approx. 10 m; Dimensions (L x W x H) 192 x 53 x 23 mm The required batteries 4 x Micro, Alkaline (LR 03) are not supplied. For battery-operated IR remote control of all assigned IR receivers. For IR gateway order no. 7566 03 .. For B.IQ IR push-buttons order no. 7566 36 .., 7566 46 .., 7566 56 ..
for IR gateway and BIQ IR push-button RC5 code with 8 channel buttons (on/off; dimmer) with 3 channel group buttons A, B, C with 3 channel group LEDs (also transmission and battery status LEDs) with child lock
BLC extension units BLC extension unit 2907
1
230 V~, 50/60 Hz Installation depth 22 mm on page T12
BLC button order no. 1761 ..
as extension unit for BLC inserts with screw terminals
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
41
HOUSE ELECTRONICS Order no.
Packing unit
BLC stair light system
on page T19
Inserts 1
0163 01
230 V~, 50 Hz 230 V incandescent and halogen lamps 2300 W; Electronic transformers 1500 W; Conventional transformers 1000 VA; Electronic ballasts (EVG) 700 W; Fluorescent lamps in duo configuration 2300 W; Fluorescent lamps uncompensated 1200 VA; Fluorescent lamps parallel compensated 920 W; Switch-on time ED 100 %; Delay time adjustable approx. 10 sec.- 15 min. ; RMD 1 modules
Controller system insert 2939
Flush-mounted controllers see Design lines. on page T20
Accessories Making current limiter black
on page T33
For BLC stair light time switching impulse insert order no. 2934 10
M
Radio interference suppressor for controller
with slide switch for off/automatic/automatic with switch-off pre-warning/continuous on With switch-off pre-warning, flash at 30, 20, and 10 secs before switch off NO contact with screw terminals
BLC stair light time switching impuls insert
light grey
0123
1
250 V~, 50/60 Hz, 100 Ω, 0,047 µF Pre-assembled cables approx. 95 mm; Dimensions (diameter x H) 18 x 37 mm on page T24
For connection of mains-parallel inductivities (e.g. conventional transformers) when they cause the Controller to reactivate.
1
230 V~, 50 Hz Control line length max. 100 m; Installation depth 22 mm on page T19
1
to limit switch-on currents for problem loads, e.g. energy-saving lamps, electronic ballasts, etc.
R
2934 10
0185
230 V~, 50/60 Hz, 200 VA Pre-assembled cable approx. 80 mm; Dimensions housing (W x H x D) approx. 51 x 25 x 13 mm Based on small design, suitable for installation in a 40 mm flush-mounted box, e.g. behind universal insert with relay contact, and BLC relay switching insert. Also suitable for surface-mounted movement controllers and RMD automatic stair light control.
For upgrading of stair light and pulse circuits without additional wiring.
L
Use only in conjunction with controller system power pack order no. 0150 29, 0155, 0159 Controller 180 system cover order no. 1715 .., 1718 ..
with screw terminals
Neutral conductor necessary!
J
1
15 V=
For electronic ballasts and energy-saving lamps with excessive switch-on currents use switch-on current limiters order no. 0185. For contact screening (arc breaking), we recommend the suppressor order no. 0123. For connection of stair light pulsed inserts and push-buttons (NO contacts). For 3-conductor circuit with neutral conductor and for 4-conductor circuit with neutral conductor or with phase.
G
Packing unit
Controller system
BLC Automatic stair light switch RMD Plus light grey
Order no.
RC element
For 3-conductor circuit with neutral conductor and for 4-conductor circuit with neutral conductor or phase. Only suitable for BLC monitor 180 with imprint release issue „R3“. For upgrading of stair light and pulse circuits without additional wiring. Use only in conjunction with the BLC automatic stair light switch RMD order no. 0163 01 BLC presence detector with constant light control order no. 1701 10 BLC ceiling controller order no. 1701 11 BLC button order no. 1761 .. BLC controller 180 order no. 1783 .., 1786 .. BLC controller 180 IP44 order no. 1783 61 89, 1786 61 89 BLC controller comfort 180 order no. 1784 .., 1787 .. BLC controller 180 comfort IP44 order no. 1784 61 89, 1787 61 89
with screw terminals
42
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
HOUSE ELECTRONICS Order no.
Packing unit
Order no.
Mains decouplers
Mains decoupler comfort RMD light grey
Mains decoupler standard RMD light grey
on page T10
Packing unit
0187 00
1
230 V~, 50 Hz, 16 A 230 V incandescent and halogen lamps 2300 W; Electronic transformers 1000 W; Conventional transformers 800 W; Fluorescent lamps in duo configuration 1600 W; Fluorescent lamps uncompensated 1000 W; Fluorescent lamps parallel compensated 700 W; Electronic ballast switch-on current < 10 ms, max. 70 A; Energy-saving lamps max. 160 W; Motors at cos φ 0.4 max. 1400 W; Monitoring voltage 230 V=; Residual ripple typical 8 mV; Monitoring current max. 8 mA; Operating temperature 0 - +40 °C; RMD 2 modules; Dimensions (W x H x D) 35 x 90 x 65 mm
on page T10
0187 01
1
230 V~, 50 Hz, 16 A 230 V incandescent and halogen lamps 2300 W; Electronic transformers 1000 W; Conventional transformers 800 W; Fluorescent lamps in duo configuration 1600 W; Fluorescent lamps uncompensated 1000 W; Fluorescent lamps uncompensated 700 W; Electronic ballast switch-on current < 10 ms, max. 70 A; Energy-saving lamps max. 160 W; Motors at cos φ 0.4 max. 1400 W; Monitoring voltage 230 V=; Residual ripple typical 4 mV; Monitoring current max. 8 mA; Operating temperature 0 - +40 °C; RMD 2 modules; Dimensions (W x H x D) 35 x 90 x 65 mm If a universal touch dimmer is to be de-coupled, the extension unit line length on extension units must be < 20 m.
If a universal touch dimmer is to be de-coupled, the extension unit line length on extension units must be < 20 m.
To prevent heat problems due to mains overvoltage, the distance to other RMD units should be 1/2 modules.
To prevent heat problems due to mains overvoltage, the distance to other RMD units should be 1/2 modules.
Only suitable for BLC universal touch dimmer with printing R3 and universal rotary dimmer with printing R1.
Only suitable for BLC universal touch dimmer with printing R3 and universal rotary dimmer with printing R1.
Advices for application possibilities see technical appendix.
Advices for application possibilities see technical appendix.
for order no. 0167 01, 0188, 2873, 2875, 2891 10, 2896 10 Without extension unit with order no. 2834 1.., 2861 10 With control module with order no. 2874, 2907 Only with BLC button with order no. 2902
for order no. 0167 01, 0188, 2873, 2875, 2891 10, 2896 10 Without extension unit with order no. 2834 1.., 2861 10 With control module with order no. 2874, 2907 Only with BLC button with order no. 2902
switches without loads to DC voltage without electric and electromagnetic fields for bedroom and child‘s room in the home for mechanical switches, dimmer, current impulse switching, vacuum cleaners, etc. for illuminated switches/push-buttons with a neon lamp current of max. 8 mA with manual selection switch for automatic (decoupling) on/off with green operation LED with green status LED for decoupling with 2 yellow residual current indicator LED with overheating protection monitoring voltage measurable with Duspol
switches without loads to DC voltage without electric and electromagnetic fields for bedroom and child‘s room in the home for mechanical switches, dimmer, current impulse switching, vacuum cleaners, etc. for illuminated switches/push-buttons with a neon lamp current of max. 8 mA with green status LED for decoupling with overheating protection monitoring voltage measurable with Duspol
Accessories Control module for mains decoupler black
0188
1
230 V~, 50 Hz Pre-assembled cable approx. 80 mm; Dimensions housing (W x H x D) approx. 45 x 28 x 9 mm For mains decoupler order no. 0187 ..
required for loads with small switch-on currents for connection between phase and load line from dimmer
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
43
HOUSE ELECTRONICS Order no.
Packing unit
Dimmers
Order no.
Built-in power boosters RMD
Built-in dimmers RMD
Universal power booster RMD Plus light grey
Universal touch dimmer RMD Plus light grey
on page T11
Packing unit
1
0167 01
230/240 V~, 50/60 Hz 230 V incandescent and halogen lamps 50 - 500 W; Electronic transformers 50 - 500 W; Dimmable conventional transformers 50 - 500 VA; Universal power boosters max. 10 phase cut-off á 500 W; Universal power boosters max. 5 phase cut-on á 420 VA; Load cable length max. 100 m; Control line length max. 100 m; RMD 2 modules; Dimensions (W x H x D) 36 x 90 x 70 mm; Assembling height as from DIN rail 63 mm
on page T11
Trouble-free operation will be obtained only with Berker Tronic transformers. Do not connect conventional transformers together with electronic transformers.
Trouble-free operation will be obtained only with Berker Tronic transformers.
When using multiple dimmer or power boosters with a control cabinet, maintain a minimum spacing of 1 module width.
Do not connect conventional transformers together with electronic transformers.
for order no. 0128, 0167 01, 0181, 2834 .., 2861 10, 2867 10, 2874, 2885, 2902, 2943, 7531 10 07, 7531 20 07, 7531 40 17, 9455 01 00
When using multiple dimmer or power boosters with a control cabinet, maintain a minimum spacing of 1 module width.
4
Universal booster RMD Plus order no. 0165 01
4
7
G
J
L
7
G
J
L
R
common load switching for dimmer and booster with selectable brightness memory bulb-preserving soft startup very low noise short-circuit and overload proof (electronic fuse) phase cut-on or cut-off according to load type, self-learning with screw terminals
R
with 2 manual buttons (2-push-button operation concept) for ON (brighter) / OFF (darker) BLC extension push-but.(NO) on extension input with 1 push-but.operation conc. BLC extension unit on extension input with 2 push-but. operation conc. expandable by universal power boosters RMD Plus with load cable switched in parallel start-up brightness can be stored after power failure bulb-preserving soft startup with green indicator LED very low noise short-circuit and overload proof (electronic fuse) phase cut-on or cut-off according to load type, self-learning with screw terminals
1
0165 01
230/240 V~, 50/60 Hz 230 V incandescent and halogen lamps 200 - 500 W; Electronic transformers 200 - 500 W; Dimmable conventional transformers 200 - 420 VA; Load cable length max. 100 m; Control line length max. 100 m; RMD 2 modules; Dimensions (W x H x D) 36 x 90 x 70 mm; Assembling height as from DIN rail 63 mm
Built-in dimmers Tronic touch dimmer built-in polar white
on page T11
1
2943
230 V~, 50 Hz 230 V incandescent and halogen lamps 50 - 700 W; Electronic transformers 50 - 700 W; Universal power boosters max. 10 á 400 W; Power boosters built-in/RMD max. 10; Dimensions (L x W x H) 212 x 48,5 x 46 mm Trouble-free operation will be obtained only with Berker Tronic transformers.
3
7
G
J
R
with extension unit input for BLC extension unit and push-but.(NO) and 1 push-but. operation concept with selectable brightness memory bulb-preserving soft startup very low noise short-circuit and overload proof (electronic fuse) phase cut-off expandable by universal power boosters RMD Plus with load cable switched in parallel with screw terminals
44
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
HOUSE ELECTRONICS Order no.
Packing unit
Built-in power booster polar white
Corded transformer, dimmable 20-70 W 1
2868
230 V~, 50/60 Hz 230 V incandescent and halogen lamps 100 - 700 W; Electronic transformers 100 - 700 W; Dimensions (L x W x H) 212 x 48,5 x 46 mm Trouble-free operation will be obtained only with Berker Tronic transformers. Neutral conductor necessary!
3
7
G
J
R
1
2869
230 V~, 50 Hz 230 V incandescent and halogen lamps 100 - 600 W; Dimmable conventional transformers 100 - 600 VA; Dimensions (L x W x H) 212 x 48,5 x 46 mm In case of excessive switch-on currents use switch-on current limiters order no. 0185.
7
G
J
L
Corded slide dimmer LV 1 1 1
2744 09 2744 2744 18
230 V~, 50 Hz 230 V incandescent and halogen lamps 20 - 500 W; Dimmable conventional transformers 20 - 500 VA; Dimensions (L x W x H) 126 x 60 x 30 mm
7
G
J
L
for table and standing lamps for hand and foot operation bulb-preserving soft startup with cable clamp short-circuit and overload proof (fine-wire fuse) with temperature protection phase cut-on with screw terminals
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
Tronic transformer with sliding controller for table and standing lamps for hand and foot operation input and output electrically isolated with overheating protection short-circuit and overload proof (electronic fuse) no-load proof with overvoltage protection very low noise bulb-preserving soft startup with cable clamp with screw terminals
2743 09 2743 2743 18
1 1 1
230 V~, 50 Hz Secondary 3,1 - 11,8 V~ eff.; Frequency secondary approx. 40 kHz; 12 V halogen lamps 20 - 105 W; Secondary cable length max. 2 m; Dimensions (L x W x H) 150 x 70 x 36 mm Safety transformer to VDE 0712-24 Spike-resistant to 1500 V according to EN 61047
Corded dimmers
2
O
polar white black gold
bulb-preserving soft startup short-circuit and overload proof (electronic fuse) phase cut-on with screw terminals
polar white black gold
1 1 1
Corded transformer, dimmable 20-105 W
Neutral conductor necessary!
2
2742 09 2742 2742 18
230 V~, 50 Hz Secondary 3,1 - 11,8 V~ eff.; Frequency secondary approx. 40 kHz; 12 V halogen lamps 20 - 70 W; Secondary cable length max. 2 m; Dimensions (L x W x H) 150 x 70 x 36 mm
N
LV power booster built-in polar white
polar white black gold
Safety transformer to VDE 0712-24 Spike-resistant to 1500 V according to EN 61047
bulb-preserving soft startup very low noise short-circuit and overload proof (electronic fuse) phase cut-off with screw terminals
on page T11
Packing unit
Corded dimmer transformers
Tronic power booster built-in
on page T11
Order no.
N
O
Tronic transformer with sliding controller for table and standing lamps for hand and foot operation input and output electrically isolated with overheating protection short-circuit and overload proof (electronic fuse) no-load proof with overvoltage protection very low noise bulb-preserving soft startup with cable clamp with screw terminals
45
HOUSE ELECTRONICS Order no.
Packing unit
Order no.
Transformers
Tronic transformer 20-70 W
Tronic transformers
polar white
on page T30
2915
1
230 V~, 50/60 Hz Primary current 0,18 A; Secondary 11,7 V~ eff.; Frequency secondary approx. 40 kHz; 12 V halogen lamps 10 - 40 W; Ambient temperature max. 50 °C; Pre-assembled primary line approx. 200 mm; pre-assembled secondary line approx. 200 mm; Secondary cable length max. 2 m; Dimensions (L x W x H) 73 x 35,5 x 18 mm
Dimmable with Berker Tronic dimmer and Berker universal dimmer.
Dimmable with Berker Tronic dimmer and Berker universal dimmer.
Safety transformer to VDE 0712-24 Spike-resistant to 1500 V according to EN 61047
6
Safety transformer to VDE 0712-24 Spike-resistant to 1500 V according to EN 61047
6
N
bulb-preserving soft startup very low noise input and output electrically isolated with overheating protection short-circuit and overload proof (electronic fuse) no-load proof with overvoltage protection
on page T30
polar white 1
230 V~, 50/60 Hz Primary current 0,3 A; Secondary 11,7 V~ eff.; Frequency secondary approx. 40 kHz; 12 V halogen lamps 20 - 70 W; Ambient temperature max. 40 °C; Pre-assembled primary line approx. 200 mm; pre-assembled secondary line approx. 200 mm; Secondary cable length max. 2 m; Dimensions (L x W x H) 49 x 48 x 28 mm
on page T30
2921
1
230/240 V~, 50/60 Hz Primary current 0,45 A; Secondary 11,3/11,8 V~ eff.; Frequency secondary approx. 40 kHz; 12 V halogen lamps 20 - 105 W; Ambient temperature max. 50 °C; 1 primary screw terminal pair to max. 2,5 mm²; 1 secondary screw terminal pair to max. 2,5 mm²; Secondary cable length max. 2 m; Dimensions (L x W x H) 105 x 50 x 29 mm
Dimmable with Berker Tronic dimmer and Berker universal dimmer.
Dimmable according to the phase cut-on and phase cut-off operation with Berker Tronic dimmer, Berker LV dimmer and Berker universal dimmer.
Safety transformer to VDE 0712-24 Spike-resistant to 1500 V according to EN 61047
Safety transformer to VDE 0712-24 Spike-resistant to 1500 V according to EN 61047
6
N
O
bulb-preserving soft startup very low noise input and output electrically isolated with overheating protection short-circuit and overload proof (electronic fuse) no-load proof with overvoltage protection
46
O
Berker Igel 20-105 W
Tronic transformer 20-70 W 2918
N
bulb-preserving soft startup very low noise input and output electrically isolated with overheating protection short-circuit and overload proof (electronic fuse) no-load proof with overvoltage protection with primary and secondary side cable clamp with screw terminals
O
polar white
10
230 V~, 50/60 Hz Primary current 0,3 A; Secondary 11,6 V~ eff.; Frequency secondary approx. 40 kHz; 12 V halogen lamps 20 - 70 W; Ambient temperature max. 45 °C; 1 primary screw terminal pair to max. 2,5 mm²; 2 secondary screw terminal pairs to max. 2,5 mm²; Secondary cable length max. 2 m; Dimensions (L x W x H) 145 x 55 x 19 mm
Tronic transformer 10-40 W polar white
2926 10
Packing unit
4
N
O
input and output electrically isolated with overheating protection short-circuit and overload proof (electronic fuse) no-load proof very low noise with overvoltage protection bulb-preserving soft startup with primary and secondary side cable clamp with screw terminals
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
HOUSE ELECTRONICS Order no.
Packing unit
Order no.
Tronic transformer 35-105 W polar white
on page T30
2927
Tronic transformer 20-105 W polar white
1
2927 10
10
230 V~, 50/60 Hz Primary current 0,45 A; Secondary 11,8 V~ eff.; Frequency secondary approx. 40 kHz; 12 V halogen lamps 35 - 105 W; Ambient temperature max. 50 °C; 2 primary screw terminal pairs to max. 2,5 mm²; pre-assembled secondary line approx. 200 mm; Secondary cable length max. 2 m; Dimensions (L x W x H) 165 x 42 x 18 mm
230 V~, 50/60 Hz Primary current 0,46 A; Secondary 11,6 V~ eff.; Frequency secondary approx. 40 kHz; 12 V halogen lamps 20 - 105 W; Ambient temperature max. 45 °C; 2 primary screw terminal pairs to max. 2,5 mm²; 3 secondary screw terminal pairs to max. 2,5 mm²; Secondary cable length max. 2 m; Dimensions (L x W x H) 145 x 55 x 19 mm
Dimmable with Berker Tronic dimmer and Berker universal dimmer.
Dimmable with Berker Tronic dimmer and Berker universal dimmer. Safety transformer to VDE 0712-24 Spike-resistant to 1500 V according to EN 61047
Safety transformer to VDE 0712-24 Spike-resistant to 1500 V according to EN 61047
6
N
6
O
polar white
2974 01
1
230/240 V~, 50/60 Hz Primary current 0,45 A; Secondary 11,8 V~ eff.; Frequency secondary approx. 40 kHz; 12 V halogen lamps 20 - 105 W; Ambient temperature max. 50 °C; 2 primary screw terminal pairs to max. 2,5 mm²; 3 secondary screw terminal pairs to max. 2,5 mm²; Secondary cable length max. 1 m; Dimensions (L x W x H) 175 x 42 x 18 mm
O
Tronic transformer 20-105 W with 1-10 V interface
Tronic transformer 20-105 W polar white
N
bulb-preserving soft startup very low noise input and output electrically isolated with overheating protection short-circuit and overload proof (electronic fuse) no-load proof with overvoltage protection with primary and secondary side cable clamp with screw terminals
bulb-preserving soft startup very low noise input and output electrically isolated with overheating protection short-circuit and overload proof (electronic fuse) no-load proof with overvoltage protection flat shape with imprint on the backside with primary side cable clamp with primary side screw terminals
on page T30
Packing unit
on page T30
2977
Dimmable with Berker Tronic dimmer and Berker universal dimmer.
Dimmable with Berker 110 V control units.
Safety transformer to VDE 0712-24 Spike-resistant to 1500 V according to EN 61047
Interface to DIN EN 60928 Safety transformer to VDE 0712-24 Spike-resistant to 1500 V according to EN 61047
6
N
O
bulb-preserving soft startup very low noise input and output electrically isolated with overheating protection short-circuit and overload proof (electronic fuse) no-load proof with overvoltage protection flat shape with primary and secondary side cable clamp with screw terminals
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
1
230 V~, 50 Hz Secondary 11,7 V~ eff.; Frequency secondary approx. 40 kHz; 12 V halogen lamps 20 - 105 W; Control current 0,8 mA; Load current primary max. 0,31 A; Ambient temperature max. 50 °C; 2 primary screw terminal pairs to max. 2,5 mm²; 3 secondary screw terminal pairs to max. 2,5 mm²; 1 screw terminal pair 1-10 V to max. 2,5 mm²; Secondary cable length max. 1 m; Dimensions (L x W x H) 216 x 42 x 32 mm
N
O
bulb-preserving soft startup very low noise input and output electrically isolated with overheating protection short-circuit and overload proof (electronic fuse) no-load proof with overvoltage protection with cable clamp with screw terminals
47
HOUSE ELECTRONICS Order no.
Packing unit
Order no.
Tronic transformer 20-120 W polar white polar white
2928 10 87 2928 10
Tronic transformer 50-200 W polar white
40 1
230 V~, 50/60 Hz Primary current 0,52 A; Secondary 11,6 V~ eff.; Frequency secondary approx. 40 kHz; 12 V halogen lamps 20 - 120 W; Ambient temperature max. 45 °C; 2 primary screw terminal pairs to max. 2,5 mm²; 3 secondary screw terminal pairs to max. 2,5 mm²; Secondary cable length max. 2 m; Dimensions (L x W x H) 186 x 45 x 19,5 mm
on page T30
Dimmable with Berker Tronic dimmer and Berker universal dimmer. Safety transformer to VDE 0712-24 Spike-resistant to 1500 V according to EN 61047
N
O
bulb-preserving soft startup very low noise input and output electrically isolated with overheating protection short-circuit and overload proof (electronic fuse) no-load proof with overvoltage protection with primary and secondary side cable clamp with screw terminals
48
Tronic dimmer transformer 35-105 W
1
230 V~, 50/60 Hz Primary current 0,71 A; Secondary 11,7 V~ eff.; Frequency secondary approx. 40 kHz; 12 V halogen lamps 20 - 150 W; Ambient temperature max. 50 °C; 2 primary screw terminal pairs to max. 2,5 mm²; 3 secondary screw terminal pairs to max. 2,5 mm²; Secondary cable length max. 1 m; Dimensions (L x W x H) 175 x 42 x 38 mm
6
O
Tronic dim transformers
Tronic transformer 20-150 W
on page T30
N
bulb-preserving soft startup very low noise input and output electrically isolated with overheating protection short-circuit and overload proof (electronic fuse) no-load proof with overvoltage protection with primary and secondary side cable clamp with screw terminals
bulb-preserving soft startup very low noise input and output electrically isolated with overheating protection short-circuit and overload proof (electronic fuse) no-load proof with overvoltage protection with primary and secondary side cable clamp with screw terminals
2976
230 V~, 50 Hz Primary current 0,96 A; Secondary 11,5 V~ eff.; Frequency secondary approx. 40 kHz; 12 V halogen lamps 50 - 200 W; Ambient temperature max. 50 °C; 2 primary screw terminal pairs to max. 2,5 mm²; 2 secondary screw terminal pairs to max. 2,5 mm²; Secondary cable length max. 2 m; Dimensions (L x W x H) 212 x 48,5 x 46 mm
6
O
polar white
1
Safety transformer to VDE 0712-24 Spike-resistant to 1500 V according to EN 61047
Safety transformer to VDE 0712-24 Spike-resistant to 1500 V according to EN 61047
N
2972
Dimmable with Berker Tronic dimmer and Berker universal dimmer.
Dimmable with Berker Tronic dimmer and Berker universal dimmer.
6
Packing unit
polar white
on page T32
2856
1
230 V~, 50/60 Hz Primary current 0,5 A; Secondary 11,7 V~ eff.; Frequency secondary approx. 40 kHz; 12 V halogen lamps 35 - 105 W; Ambient temperature max. 50 °C; 1 primary screw terminal pair to max. 2,5 mm²; 1 control screw terminal pair to max. 2,5 mm²; 2 secondary screw terminal pairs to max. 2,5 mm²; Secondary cable length max. 2 m; Dimensions, built-in device (L x W x H) 190 x 44 x 38 mm for order no. 2857, 2859
Safety transformer to VDE 0712-24 Spike-resistant to 1500 V according to EN 61047
N
O
with extension unit input for push-button (NO) 1-push-button operation concept expandable with Tronic dimming transformer power enhancements with brightness memory bulb-preserving soft startup very low noise input and output electrically isolated with overheating protection short-circuit and overload proof (electronic fuse) no-load proof with overvoltage protection with screw terminals
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
HOUSE ELECTRONICS Order no.
Packing unit
Order no.
Tronic dimmer transformer 50-150 W polar white
on page T32
2858
Tronic dimmer transformer power enhancement 50-150 W
1
230 V~, 50/60 Hz Primary current 0,72 A; Secondary 11,7 V~ eff.; Frequency secondary approx. 40 kHz; 12 V halogen lamps 50 - 150 W; Ambient temperature max. 50 °C; 1 control screw terminal pair to max. 2,5 mm²; 3 secondary screw terminal pairs to max. 2,5 mm²; Secondary cable length max. 2 m; Dimensions, built-in device (L x W x H) 215 x 50 x 42 mm
polar white
on page T32
for order no. 2857, 2859
with extension unit input for push-button (NO) 1-push-button operation concept expandable with Tronic dimming transformer power enhancements with brightness memory bulb-preserving soft startup very low noise input and output electrically isolated with overheating protection short-circuit and overload proof (electronic fuse) no-load proof with overvoltage protection with screw terminals
N
on page T32
Transformer accessories LV distributor 5gang for transformers polar white
1
230 V~, 50/60 Hz Primary current 0,5 A; Secondary 11,7 V~ eff.; Frequency secondary approx. 40 kHz; 12 V halogen lamps 35 - 105 W; Ambient temperature max. 50 °C; 1 primary screw terminal pair to max. 2,5 mm²; 1 control screw terminal pair to max. 2,5 mm²; 2 secondary screw terminal pairs to max. 2,5 mm²; Secondary cable length max. 2 m; Dimensions, built-in device (L x W x H) 190 x 44 x 38 mm for order no. 2856, 2858
Safety transformer to VDE 0712-24 Spike-resistant to 1500 V according to EN 61047
N
O
as power enhancement for Tronic dimming transformers bulb-preserving soft startup very low noise input and output electrically isolated with overheating protection short-circuit and overload proof (electronic fuse) no-load proof with overvoltage protection with screw terminals
Tronic dimmer transformer power enhancement 35-105 W 2857
1
Safety transformer to VDE 0712-24 Spike-resistant to 1500 V according to EN 61047
O
polar white
2859
230 V~, 50/60 Hz Primary current 0,72 A; Secondary 11,7 V~ eff.; Frequency secondary approx. 40 kHz; 12 V halogen lamps 50 - 150 W; Ambient temperature max. 50 °C; 1 primary screw terminal pair to max. 2,5 mm²; 1 control screw terminal pair to max. 2,5 mm²; 3 secondary screw terminal pairs to max. 2,5 mm²; Secondary cable length max. 2 m; Dimensions (L x W x H) 215 x 50 x 42 mm for order no. 2856, 2858
Safety transformer to VDE 0712-24 Spike-resistant to 1500 V according to EN 61047
N
Packing unit
on page T30
0162
1
Rated voltage < 25 V; Input current max. 16 A; Branch-off current max. 16 A; Max. connected load 12 V~ 192 W; Conductor cross-section max. 2,5 mm²; Dimensions (W x H x D) 48 x 40 x 16 mm The LV distributor 5gang offers time and cost saving installation benefits when installing branched lighting systems. Connecting material according to VDE 0613 for rigid and flexible conductors (without conductor sleeve) for secondary side connection of up to 5 LV halogen lamps with plug-in terminals
O
as power enhancement for Tronic dimming transformers bulb-preserving soft startup very low noise input and output electrically isolated with overheating protection short-circuit and overload proof (electronic fuse) no-load proof with overvoltage protection with screw terminals
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
49
HOUSE ELECTRONICS Order no.
Packing unit
on page T30
0140
1
< 42 V~ Input current max. 17 A; Branch-off current max. 8,5 A; Max. connected load 12 V~ 200 W; Ambient temperature max. 50 °C; Conductor cross-section flexible max. 1,5 mm²; Conductor cross-section rigid max. 2,5 mm²; Pre-assembled cable approx. 80 mm; Dimensions housing (W x H x D) approx. 86 x 40 x 29 mm
Electronic ballast EVG polar white, EVG 6 W polar white, EVG 8 W polar white, EVG 11 W polar white, EVG 13 W on page T29
on page T30
230/240 V~, 50/60 Hz, 176 - 274 V= Max. output cable length 1,5 m; Dimensions (L x W x H) 220 x 28 x 16 mm
With electronic ballasts pay attention to excessive switch-on currents; use switch-on current limiters order no. 0185 as necessary. Not dimmable! Neutral conductor necessary!
Overvoltage protection module 0142
M
1
230 V~, 50/60 Hz Leakage current IS(8/20) 4,5 KA (1x); Leakage current IS(8/20) 1 KA (100x); Residual voltage at IS 1 KA approx. 1000 V; Pre-assembled cable approx. 80 mm; Dimensions housing (W x H x D) 46 x 25 x 23 mm
for Tronic transformers/dimmer and universal dimmer for parallel operation with inductive loads
N
for mini fluorescent lamps dia. 7 mm e.g. T2 with overheating protection short-circuit and overload proof (electronic fuse) automatic switch-off for: lamp ageing, lighting error, excessive pin current, defective filament no-load proof with cable clamp with screw terminals
Thermostats Thermostat accessories
RCD protection switch
Floor temperature sensor/remote sensor
RCD protection switch 2844
on page T60
Tested conform VDE 0664 (EN 61008) Suitable for use according to DIN VDE 0100-410 to protect downstream loads without spreader claws with plug-in terminals
1
0161 1
16 A, 250 V~, 50/60 Hz Rated fault current 30 mA; Switch off time <= 30 ms; Short-circuit resistance 3 kA (by main fuse 16 AgL); Surge current firmness 250 A (8/20) µs; Operating temperature -25 - +40 °C; Installation depth 32 mm Central plate order no. 1493 ..
50
1 1 1 1
# 2999 06 # 2999 08 # 2999 11 # 2999 13
Also suitable for direct voltage operation, e.g. with emergency power supply.
for rigid and flexible conductors (without conductor sleeve) for secondary side connection of up to 6 LV halogen lamps pre-assembled, with 2-core flexible wire with plug-in terminals
light grey
Packing unit
Electronic ballast
LV distributor 6gang for transformers polar white
Order no.
Sensor cable length 4 m; At 25 °C 33 on page T34
for thermostat time-controlled for floor temperature thermostat (replacement)
Sensor insert Sensor insert 7594 10 01
10
Central plate order no. 7594 ..
for e.g. temperature sensor PT100 without spreader claws with plug-in terminals
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
HOUSE ELECTRONICS Order no.
Packing unit
Valve drives
Order no.
Packing unit
Valve drive accessories Valve drive 230 V polar white
Valve adapter 7590 00 76
grey, VA10, Dumser, Simplex, Beulco (from 2005) dark grey, VA50 Cazzaniga, Honeywell & Braukmann, Landis & Gyr, Frese, Reich (distributor), KaMo light grey, VA80, Comap, Empur, Heimeier, Herb, IVAR, MNG, Onda, Oventrop, Schlösser, Strawa, TA, Thermot. polar white, VA78, flange, for Danfoss valves Type: RA
1
230 V~, 0-60 Hz, 230 V= Power consumption 1,8 W; Stroke 4 mm; Running time 45 s/mm; Medium temperature max. 0 - 100 °C; Operating temperature 0 - 60 °C; Pre-assembled cables approx. 1 m; Dimensions (W x H x D) 44 x 60 x 61 mm Neutral conductor necessary! Order valve adapter separately.
Room thermostat with change-over order no. 2026 .. Room thermostat with NC contact order no. 2030 .. Floor thermostat with NO contact order no. 2034 .. Thermostat time-controlled with NO contact order no. 2043 .. Heating actuator 6gang order no. 7531 60 03
1
7590 00 73
1
7590 00 75
1
7590 00 74
1
Union nut M30 x 1,5 mm
IP54
For valve drive order no. 7590 00 76, 7590 00 77
with state indication (opened or closed) with anti-dismantling protection closed in de-energized state with overheating protection thermoelectric mode of operation for plug-in cover pluggable connection cable
for valve drive 230 V or actuator drive 24 V
RolloTec RolloTec inserts RolloTec standard insert 2925
Valve drive 24 V polar white
7590 00 72
7590 00 77
Order valve adapter separately. Room thermostat with NC contact order no. 2031 .. Heating actuator 12gang order no. 7533 00 01 Heating actuator 6gang order no. 7533 60 01
IP54 with state indication (opened or closed) with anti-dismantling protection closed in de-energized state with overheating protection thermoelectric mode of operation for plug-in cover pluggable connection cable
230 V~, 50/60 Hz Switching power max. 1 motor 1000 W
1
24 V~, 50/60 Hz, 24 V= Power consumption 1,8 W; Stroke 4 mm; Running time 45 s/mm; Medium temperature max. 0 - 100 °C; Operating temperature 0 - 60 °C; Pre-assembled cables approx. 1 m; Max. cable length 200 m; Dimensions (W x H x D) 44 x 60 x 61 mm
1
on page T37
Recommendation: use deep box. Light scene function (up/down) in connection with RolloTec radio button. Neutral conductor necessary! Not suitable for wind speed and precipitation sensors. RolloTec time switch order no. 1754 .. RolloTec time switch with sensor connection order no. 1755 .. RolloTec memory button order no. 1756 .. RolloTec memory button with sensor connection order no. 1757 .. RolloTec radio button order no. 1758 .. RolloTec radio button with sensor connection order no. 1759 .. RolloTec easy time switch order no. 1762 .. RolloTec button comfort order no. 1770 .. RolloTec button comfort with sensor connection order no. 1771 .. RolloTec time switch comfort order no. 1774 .. RolloTec time switch comfort with sensor connection order no. 1775 ..
with 2 mechanically interlocked NO contacts without 230 V extension unit inputs for single and master controls with screw terminals
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
51
HOUSE ELECTRONICS Order no.
Packing unit
Order no.
RolloTec standard insert without neutral conductor connection 2911
RolloTec comfort insert 2975
1
Recommendation: use deep box. Light scene function (up/down) in connection with RolloTec radio button. On motors with limit switches, perform a brief inspection of the motor as is described in the technical appendix. On drives with electrically isolated trip lines, or when activation high-resistance cutoff relay windings, the coupler capacitor set, Order No. 0118 can be used. Not suitable for wind speed and precipitation sensors. RolloTec time switch order no. 1754 .. RolloTec time switch with sensor connection order no. 1755 .. RolloTec memory button order no. 1756 .. RolloTec memory button with sensor connection order no. 1757 .. RolloTec radio button order no. 1758 .. RolloTec radio button with sensor connection order no. 1759 .. RolloTec easy time switch order no. 1762 .. RolloTec button comfort order no. 1770 .. RolloTec button comfort with sensor connection order no. 1771 .. RolloTec time switch comfort order no. 1774 .. RolloTec time switch comfort with sensor connection order no. 1775 ..
1
230 V~, 50/60 Hz Switching power max. 1 motor 1000 W
230 V~, 50 Hz Switching power max. 1 motor 1000 W on page T37
Packing unit
on page T37
Recommendation: use deep box. Light scene function (up/down) in connection with RolloTec radio button. Neutral conductor necessary! RolloTec wind sensor interface order no. 0173 RolloTec precipitation sensor order no. 0183 01 RolloTec time switch order no. 1754 .. RolloTec time switch with sensor connection order no. 1755 .. RolloTec memory button order no. 1756 .. RolloTec memory button with sensor connection order no. 1757 .. RolloTec radio button order no. 1758 .. RolloTec radio button with sensor connection order no. 1759 .. RolloTec easy time switch order no. 1762 .. RolloTec button comfort order no. 1770 .. RolloTec button comfort with sensor connection order no. 1771 .. RolloTec time switch comfort order no. 1774 .. RolloTec time switch comfort with sensor connection order no. 1775 ..
with 2 mechanically interlocked NO contacts with 230 V extension unit inputs for up, down and sensors for single, group and master controls suitable for multi-phase mode with screw terminals
with 2 mechanically interlocked NO contacts without 230 V extension unit inputs for single control on motor with limit switches! with screw terminals
52
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
HOUSE ELECTRONICS Order no.
Packing unit
on page T37
Packing unit
RolloTec sensors
RolloTec comfort insert for direct current drives 2975 01
Order no.
RolloTec brightness sensor
1
polar white
24 V= Current consumption (idle) approx. 30 mA; Current consumption (operation) approx. 100 mA; Switching current at 24 V=: max. 3 A Recommendation: use deep box.
on page T37
Light scene function (up/down) in connection with RolloTec radio button.
Only suitable for covers with sensor connection.
An external power supply 24 V = with protective disconnection is necessary!
Timer with sensor connection order no. 1738 .. RolloTec time switch with sensor connection order no. 1755 .., 1775 .. RolloTec memory button with sensor connection order no. 1757 .. RolloTec radio button with sensor connection order no. 1759 .. RolloTec button comfort with sensor connection order no. 1771 ..
Recommendation of power supply units: Messrs. Elka type: SV230-24.1500DC order no.: 14001910 Messrs. Phoenix type: STEP-PS-100240AC/24DC/1.5 order no.: 2938947
for 24 V reverse polarity motors with limit switches with 2 reverse polarity change-over relays with 24 V reverse polarity extension unit inputs for up and down for single, group and master controls with screw terminals
1
Before mounting, clean window pane with spirit and sensor with washing up liquid, then dip sensor in clear water and stick onto window pane.
Follow the motor manufacturers‘ instructions!
RolloTec time switch order no. 1754 .. RolloTec time switch with sensor connection order no. 1755 .. RolloTec memory button order no. 1756 .. RolloTec memory button with sensor connection order no. 1757 .. RolloTec radio button order no. 1758 .. RolloTec radio button with sensor connection order no. 1759 .. RolloTec easy time switch order no. 1762 .. RolloTec button comfort order no. 1770 .. RolloTec button comfort with sensor connection order no. 1771 .. RolloTec time switch comfort order no. 1774 .. RolloTec time switch comfort with sensor connection order no. 1775 ..
0169
Internal resistance approx. 12 kΩ; Nominal current (light) approx. 2 mA; Nominal current (dark) approx. 0,5 mA; Cable length 2 m; Extendable cable length max. 10 m; Sensor dimensions (diameter x H) 45 x 25 mm
IP54 with photodiode for suction cover to window pane pre-assembled, with cable and plug
RolloTec brightness sensor surface-mounted polar white
on page T37
0184
1
Internal resistance approx. 12 kΩ; Nominal current (light) approx. 2 mA; Nominal current (dark) approx. 0,5 mA; Max. cable length 10 m; Sensor dimensions (W x H x D) 27 x 84,5 x 30 mm Only suitable for covers with sensor connection. Timer with sensor connection order no. 1738 .. RolloTec time switch with sensor connection order no. 1755 .., 1775 .. RolloTec memory button with sensor connection order no. 1757 .. RolloTec radio button with sensor connection order no. 1759 .. RolloTec button comfort with sensor connection order no. 1771 ..
IP54 with photodiode with mounting bracket with screw terminals
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
53
HOUSE ELECTRONICS Order no.
Packing unit
Order no.
Magnetic contact
RolloTec glass breakage sensor polar white, NC contact
on page T37
0170
polar white brown
1
Action radius 2 m; Cable length 2 m; Extendable cable length max. 10 m; Dimensions, sensor (L x W x H) 37 x 19 x 12 mm
on page T40
Breaking the window causes the shutter to move e.g. to the lower end position.
Attention! Please use the following adhesive sets only. Loctite, www.loctite.com
Switching voltage max. 40 V=; Switching current max. 500 mA; Max. switching capacity 10 W; Cable length 3 m; Dimensions, sensor (L x W x H) 44 x 15 x 15 mm
To monitor window and door opening. RolloTec time switch with sensor connection order no. 1755 .., 1775 .. RolloTec memory button with sensor connection order no. 1757 .. RolloTec radio button with sensor connection order no. 1759 .. RolloTec button comfort with sensor connection order no. 1771 .. Connection e.g. with universal interface order no. 7564 .0 01 to alarm central unit EIB order no. 7573 00 10 For alarm central unit order no. 9020
In case of glass breakage the blind is moved down and the extension unit inputs are locked. RolloTec time switch with sensor connection order no. 1755 .., 1775 .. RolloTec memory button with sensor connection order no. 1757 .. RolloTec radio button with sensor connection order no. 1759 .. RolloTec button comfort with sensor connection order no. 1771 ..
IP67 built-on/built-in pre-assembled, with cable in the isolated state the contact is open
IP67 pre-assembled, with cable and plug
RolloTec adapter for sensors
RolloTec precipitation sensor
1
grey
Cable length 5 m Only suitable for covers with sensor connection. on page T37
1 1
Suitable for RolloTec covers with sensor connection.
29691 Glas-Metal adhesive set consisting of: 319 adhesive and 7649 activator
0171
9251 02 9251 01
RolloTec function: When window is open, blind moves to the lower end position for example.
Only suitable for covers with sensor connection.
polar white
Packing unit
Timer with sensor connection order no. 1738 .. RolloTec time switch with sensor connection order no. 1755 .., 1775 .. RolloTec memory button with sensor connection order no. 1757 .. RolloTec radio button with sensor connection order no. 1759 .. RolloTec button comfort with sensor connection order no. 1771 ..
for brightness sensor and glass breakage sensor for the connection of RolloTec brightness and glass-break sensor to an cover pre-assembled, with cable, plug and 2 sockets
on page T37
0183 01
1
230 V~, 50/60 Hz Switching current 30 V= ohmic max. 3 A ; Switching current 250 V~ ohmic max. 6 A ; Making current 250 V~ ohmic max. 15 A ; Power consumption incl. additional heating max. 4,5 W; Pre-assembled cables approx. 2,9 m; Mast diameter max. 62 mm; Dimensions, sensor (L x W x H) 82 x 60 x 57,5 mm; Dimensions, mounting angle (W x H x D) 90 x 91 x 78 mm Neutral conductor necessary! When it begins to rain, snow etc. the contact is closed. To protect against mildew on awnings, roller shutters etc. For Rollotec comfort insert order no. 2975
8 IP65 with potential-free change-over contact heated pre-assembled, with cables with stainless steel mounting bracket approx. 70° with pipe clamp for mast fixing
54
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
HOUSE ELECTRONICS Order no.
Packing unit
Order no.
RolloTec wind sensor white
RolloTec cutoff relay RMD 0172 01
1
2931
Wind strength measuring range 3 - 10 Bft; Wind speed measuring range 0,5 - 40 m/s; Pre-assembled cable approx. 3 m on page T37
on page T36
To be used only in connection with wind sensor interface order no. 0173 Mast adapter order no. 7590 00 46
reed contact (frequency measurement) with fitting material confectioned with wire LIYY 2 x 0.5 mm² and conductor sleeves
on page T37
0173
230 V~, 50/60 Hz Current consumption (operation) approx. 10 mA; Switching current at cos φ 0.6 max. 3 A; Switching current at cos φ 1 max. 8 A; Switch-on time ED 100 %; Activation change-over time up/down min. 0,5 sec.; RMD 2,5 modules; Dimensions (W x H x D) 45 x 71 x 42 mm; Assembling height as from DIN rail 38 mm
with separate mains power supply to operate 2 shutter/blind control motors with master input e.g. for RolloTec timer without extension unit outgoing feeders for single operation with screw terminals
1
230 V~, 50/60 Hz Wind speeds adjustable 3 - 10 Bft; Switching current 2 A; Dimensions (W x H x D) 110 x 94 x 38 mm Also suitable for Thies heated wind speed sensor order no. 4.3515.50.000. Neutral conductor necessary! When the wind speed is reached the contact is closed. To protect against excessive wind, e. g. for shutters, awnings, etc. For RolloTec wind sensor order no. 0172 01 For Rollotec comfort insert order no. 2975
IP55 with potential-free contact 2 NO contacts, common input terminal with test mode with fitting material with screw terminals
timers Timer relay switch insert 2948 10
1
230/240 V~, 50/60 Hz 230 V incandescent lamps 1500 W; 230 V halogen lamps 300 W; Electronic transformers 1500 W; Conventional transformers 1000 VA; Fluorescent lamps in duo configuration 1000 VA; Fluorescent lamps uncompensated 500 VA; Fluorescent lamps parallel compensated 150 VA; Delay time adjustable approx. 1 - 60 min. ; Axial dimension diameter 4 mm For electronic ballasts and energy-saving lamps with excessive switch-on currents use making current limiters order no. 0185. Neutral conductor necessary! Centre plate order no. 1674 ..
RolloTec cutoff relay RolloTec cutoff relay 2930
on page T36
1
Neutral conductor necessary!
RolloTec wind sensor interface polar white
Packing unit
1
230 V~, 50/60 Hz Current consumption (operation) approx. 10 mA; Switching current at cos φ 0.6 max. 3 A; Switching current at cos φ 1 max. 8 A; Switch-on time ED 100 %; Activation change-over time up/down min. 0,5 sec.; Dimensions (W x H x D) 50 x 52 x 22 mm
electronic timer with on/off pressure switch if actuated in switched-on state, it is switched off with extension unit input for push-button (NO contact) with red control LED very low noise short-circuit and overload proof (fine-wire fuse) with spare fuse
Neutral conductor necessary!
with separate mains power supply to operate 2 shutter/blind control motors with master input e.g. for RolloTec timer without extension unit outgoing feeders for single operation with screw terminals
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
55
HOUSE ELECTRONICS Order no.
Packing unit
Packing unit
Smoke detectors
Insert for timer 1
2948
on page T7
Order no.
230 V~, 50/60 Hz 230 V incandescent and halogen lamps 1000 W; Electronic transformers 750 W; Conventional transformers 500 VA; Fluorescent lamps in duo configuration 1000 VA; Fluorescent lamps uncompensated 500 VA; Fluorescent lamps parallel compensated 400 VA
Smoke detector RM.1 polar white
on page T45
For electronic ballasts and energy-saving lamps with excessive switch-on currents use switch-on current limiters order no. 0185.
0191 09
1
9 V= Max. monitoring area 60 m²; Acoustic alarm > 85 dBA/3 m; Network cable, e.g. JY-ST-Y 2x2x0,6 mm; Max. network cable length 450 m; Battery life approx. 2 years; Operating temperature -10 - +60 °C; Dimensions (diameter x assembling height) 100 x 51 mm
Recommendation: Use a deep box!
Fixing of the smoke detector on the bottom part is only possible with a battery.
Neutral conductor necessary!
The smoke detector RM.1 is a home smoke detector designed for application in closed living quarters as e.g. flats, residential houses.
Timer easy order no. 1735 .. Timer order no. 1736 .. Timer with sensor connection order no. 1738 ..
8
G
J
L
M
It is for early detection of smouldering fires and open fires producing smoke in interiors.
R Approval according to ISO 12239
with potential-free contact with 230 V extension unit inputs for on and off with screw terminals
IP43 VdS certified Nr. G203023 not dependent on mains power works on stray light principle (Tyndall effect) with no radioactive compounds loud warning tone in case of alarm with red alarm LED with block battery 9 V with networking terminal for forwarding of alarm and service signals, max. 40 smoke detectors RM.1 optional push-on radio networking module for forwarding of alarm and service signals pluggable optional push-on relay module for external signal generators or connection to/networking via KNX/EIB automatic self-test function contamination and fault display with antistatic insect screen with battery change indicator min. 30 days with button for manual function test with sealing with fitting material for ceiling mounting
Smoke detector accessories Relay module for smoke detector RM.1 0191 51
1
Switching voltage max. 30 V=; Switching current max. 2 A; Operating temperature -10 - +60 °C on page T45
For smoke detector order no. 0191 09 Connection e.g. with universal interface order no. 7564 .. .. to alarm central unit KNX/EIB order no. 7573 00 10 Connection to alarm central unit order no. 9020
for connection of external signal generators such as horns, flash lights, vibration pads etc. for connection to and networking via KNX/EIB with potential-free change-over contact
56
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
HOUSE ELECTRONICS Order no.
Packing unit
Order no.
Packing unit
Radio networking module for smoke detector RM.1 0191 50
on page T45
1
Radio transmission/reception frequency 868 MHz; Radio signal transmission power < 1 mW; Radio signal transmission range (free field) max. 200 m; Radio transmission range (building) max. 30 m; Operating temperature -10 - +60 °C; Dimensions (W x H x D) 54 x 22 x 5 mm For the function with smoke detector RM.1 a lithium block battery 9 V is obligatory! For smoke detector order no. 0191 09 Replacement Lithium block battery see radio bus / accessories order no. 9209
Approval according to R&TTE for wireless forwarding of alarm and service signals for max. 8 detector groups with selective repeater function with lithium block battery 9 V
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
57
Surfaces Frames/covers/centre inserts Plastic, glossy
58
white
similar to RAL 1013
polar white
similar to RAL 9010
red
similar to RAL 3003
green
similar to RAL 6029
orange
similar to RAL 2003
yellow
similar to RAL 1004
black
similar to RAL 9005
Modul 2
Standard range Flush-mounted system
A standard range with clear lines meeting all your requirements for modern electrical installation.
■ Suitable for living and functional buildings ■ Frames and device covers suitable for flush-mounted module inserts ■ Combination frames allow you to combine up to 5 devices vertically or horizontally ■ Available surfaces: white and polar white
59
MODUL 2 Order no.
Packing unit
Frames
Packing unit
Frame Frame
on page T66
Order no.
white, glossy, 1gang white, glossy, 2gang white, glossy, 3gang white, glossy, 4gang white, glossy, 5gang
1011 02 1012 02 1013 02 1014 02 1015 02
10 10 10 2 2
polar white, glossy, 1gang
1011 29
10
polar white, glossy, 2gang
1012 29
2
polar white, glossy, 3gang
1013 29
2
Not suitable for surface-mounted frames. for vertical and horizontal mounting
for vertical and horizontal mounting suitable for cable ducts with lid 80
Frame
on page T66
polar white, glossy, 1gang
1011 09
10
Frame
polar white, glossy, 2gang
1012 09
10
red, glossy, 1gang red, glossy, 2gang
polar white, glossy, 3gang
1013 09
10
Not suitable for surface-mounted frames.
polar white, glossy, 4gang
1014 09
2
polar white, glossy, 5gang
1015 09
2
1011 72 1012 72
10 2
for vertical and horizontal mounting suitable for cable ducts with lid 80 for emphasising special switches, socket outlets, etc.
Surface-mounted frames Surface-mounted frame 1gang
for vertical and horizontal mounting
Frame
on page T66
red, glossy, 1gang red, glossy, 2gang red, glossy, 3gang red, glossy, 4gang red, glossy, 5gang
1011 62 1012 62 1013 62 1014 62 1015 62
10 10 10 2 2
for vertical and horizontal mounting for emphasising special switches, socket outlets, etc.
Contrast frame 1gang black, glossy
1011 45
10
white, glossy polar white, glossy red, glossy black, glossy
1029 00 02 1029 00 69 1029 00 62 # 1029 00 65
10 10 10 10
Installation depth 33,5 mm For suitable tube-entries and replacement for cable and duct entries refer to the dry surface-mounted range. Flush-mounted devices can be used with surfacemounted frames for surface-mounted installation.
Self-extinguishing base plate see module inserts / accessories order no. 1021 12
with cable and duct entry entry at top and bottom possible
Surface-mounted frame 2gang white, glossy polar white, glossy red, glossy
Barrier-free building based on DIN 18025 on page T66
for barrier-free construction
1011 22 1012 22 1013 22
Not suitable for surface-mounted frames. for vertical and horizontal mounting suitable for cable ducts with lid 80
60
10 10 10
Installation depth 33,5 mm
Frame white, glossy, 1gang white, glossy, 2gang white, glossy, 3gang
1030 00 02 1030 00 69 1030 00 62
10 2 2
For suitable tube-entries and replacement for cable and duct entries refer to the dry surface-mounted range. Flush-mounted devices can be used with surfacemounted frames for surface-mounted installation.
Self-extinguishing base plate see module inserts / accessories order no. 1021 22
with cable and duct entry entry at top, bottom and 2 x each side possible for vertical and horizontal mounting
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
MODUL 2 Order no.
Packing unit
NEW
Surface-mounted frame 3gang white, glossy polar white, glossy red, glossy
Order no.
1031 00 02 1031 00 69 1031 00 62
SCHUKO-socket outlet polar white, glossy, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1
5 5 5
Packing unit
* 73 4123 09
10
16 A, 250 V~
Installation depth 33,5 mm For suitable tube-entries and replacement for cable and duct entries refer to the dry surface-mounted range.
on page T6
Connection terminals IEC 60884-1
Flush-mounted devices can be used with surfacemounted frames for surface-mounted installation.
with screw-in lift terminals
Self-extinguishing base plate see module inserts / accessories order no. 1021 32
with cable and duct entry entry at top, bottom and at each side in the middle possible for vertical and horizontal mounting
For South Tyrol only.
SCHUKO-socket outlet with imprint
on page T6
green, glossy, with imprint „SV“
4743 13
10
orange, glossy, with imprint „ZSV“
4743 14
10
16 A, 250 V~ Insert colour-coded.
Socket outlets SCHUKO-socket outlets
Connection terminals IEC 60884-1
SCHUKO-socket outlet
on page T6
white, glossy, without spreader claws
61 4743 02
10
polar white, glossy, without spreader claws
61 4743 09
10
white, glossy polar white, glossy red, glossy green, glossy orange, glossy white, glossy, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1 polar white, glossy, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1 green, glossy, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1 orange, glossy, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1
4743 02 4743 09 4743 05 4743 03 4743 04 4723 02
10 10 10 10 10 10
4723 09
10
4723 03
10
4723 04
10
with plug-in terminals
SCHUKO-socket outlet with centre plate 50 x 50 mm white, glossy polar white, glossy 16 A, 250 V~ on page T6
Suitable for installation without frame in Ackermann and Tehalit 50 x 50 mm cable ducts. With centre plate as per DIN 49075 Connection terminals IEC 60884-1
SCHUKO-socket outlet with centre plate 50 x 50 mm white, glossy, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1 on page T6
4123
10
16 A, 250 V~ Suitable for installation without frame in Ackermann and Tehalit 50 x 50 mm cable ducts.
The insert of the red, green and orange socket outlets is colour-coded. 61 4743 02 and 61 4743 09 for the Netherlands!
With centre plate as per DIN 49075 Connection terminals IEC 60884-1
Connection terminals IEC 60884-1
with screw terminals
with plug-in terminals
SCHUKO-socket outlet 45°
SCHUKO-socket outlet 4143 02 4143 09
white, glossy polar white, glossy
10 10 on page T6
Connection terminals IEC 60884-1 with screw terminals
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
4727 02 4727 09
10 10
16 A, 250 V~
16 A, 250 V~ on page T6
10 10
with plug-in terminals
16 A, 250 V~
white, glossy polar white, glossy
4703 4703 09
Specially suited for combining several socket outlets if right angle plugs are used. Connection terminals IEC 60884-1 for diagonal installation with plug-in terminals
61
MODUL 2 Order no.
Packing unit
Order no.
SCHUKO-socket outlet with labelling field
on page T6
white, glossy polar white, glossy red, glossy green, glossy orange, glossy white, glossy, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1 polar white, glossy, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1
4749 02 4749 09 4749 05 4749 03 4749 04 4756 02
10 10 10 10 10 10
4756 09
10
SCHUKO-socket outlet with indicator lamp and imprint
on page T6
10
orange, glossy, with imprint „ZSV“
4124 14
10
16 A, 250 V~ Neon lamp current 1,5 mA
Execution SV, ZSV to VDE 0100-710 Connection terminals IEC 60884-1 with neon lamp unit with screw-in lift terminals
Labelling field height arranged for 6 mm P-touch strips.
SCHUKO-socket outlet with indicator lamp and labelling field
Connection terminals IEC 60884-1 with plug-in terminals
SCHUKO-socket outlet with „EDV“ imprint and labelling field 4749 15
on page T6
10
16 A, 250 V~
white, glossy polar white, glossy red, glossy green, glossy
4159 02 4159 09 4159 62 4159 03
10 10 10 10
16 A, 250 V~ Neon lamp current 1,5 mA
Insert colour-coded.
The insert of the red and green socket outlets is colour-coded.
Labelling field height arranged for 6 mm P-touch strips.
Labelling field height arranged for 6 mm P-touch strips.
Connection terminals IEC 60884-1
Replacement neon lamp unit see module inserts / accessories order no. 1609
Connection terminals IEC 60884-1
with plug-in terminals
with neon lamp unit with screw-in lift terminals
SCHUKO-socket outlet with indicator lamp green, glossy, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1 on page T6
4124 13
Replacement neon lamp unit see module inserts / accessories order no. 1609
The insert of the red, green and orange socket outlets is colour-coded.
on page T6
green, glossy, with imprint „SV“
Insert colour-coded.
16 A, 250 V~
red, glossy
Packing unit
4124 03
10
SCHUKO-socket outlets with safety device SCHUKO-socket outlet for fine-wire fuse
16 A, 250 V~ Neon lamp current 1,5 mA
white, glossy polar white, glossy
with neon lamp unit with screw-in lift terminals
10 10
16 A, 250 V~ Fine-wire fuse max. 10 A
Replacement neon lamp unit see module inserts / accessories order no. 1609
Connection terminals IEC 60884-1
4105 02 4105 09
on page T6
Without fine-wire fuse. Not suitable for surface-mounted frames. Fine-wire fuses DIN 41572 Connection terminals IEC 60884-1 with fuse holder for fine-wire fuses with screw terminals
62
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
MODUL 2 Order no.
Packing unit
on page T33
SCHUKO-socket outlet with hinged cover and touchable symbol socket outlet
1 1 1
4108 02 4108 09 4108 62
polar white, glossy
Labelling field height arranged for 6 mm P-touch strips.
on page T6
SCHUKO-socket outlet with hinged cover and touchable symbol socket outlet polar white, glossy, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1
SCHUKO-socket outlet with RCD protection switch 1
4708 02
on page T6
for barrier-free construction mounting orientation of insert selectable in 45° steps with plug-in terminals
SCHUKO-socket outlets SCHUKO-socket outlet with cover plate
to protect connected and downstream loads with plug-in terminals on page T6
SCHUKO-socket outlet with hinged cover 10 10
16 A, 250 V~
Barrier-free building based on DIN 18025 Connection terminals IEC 60884-1
Through-wired socket outlets are also protected.
SCHUKO-socket outlets
10
An optical accentuation can be achieved by using a contrast frame order no. 1011 45
16 A, 250 V~, 50/60 Hz Rated fault current 30 mA; Switch off time <= 30 ms; Short-circuit resistance 3 kA (with pre-fuse 20 AgL); Surge current firmness 250 A (8/20) µs
Suitable for use according to DIN VDE 0100-410 Tested conform VDE 0664 (EN 61008) Connection terminals IEC 60884-1
4744 49
Specially suited for combining several socket outlets if right angle plugs are used.
1
4708 09
4744 02 4744 09
An optical accentuation can be achieved by using a contrast frame order no. 1011 45
for barrier-free construction with plug-in terminals
with imprint with indicator LED for „on/error“ with acoustic fault signal with screw terminals
white, glossy polar white, glossy
10
Barrier-free building based on DIN 18025 Connection terminals IEC 60884-1
Overvoltage protection to EN 61643-11 and VDE 0675-6, -11 Connection terminals IEC 60884-1
on page T60
4786 49
16 A, 250 V~
16 A, 250 V~, 50/60 Hz
white, glossy, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1 polar white, glossy, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1
Packing unit
Barrier-free construction
SCHUKO-socket outlet with overvoltage protection and labelling field white, glossy polar white, glossy red, glossy
Order no.
white, glossy polar white, glossy white, glossy, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1 polar white, glossy, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1
4742 02 4742 09 4722 02
10 10 10
4722 09
10
16 A, 250 V~
16 A, 250 V~ on page T6
Connection terminals IEC 60884-1 Connection terminals IEC 60884-1
with plug-in terminals
with imprint with plug-in terminals
SCHUKO-socket outlet with change-over switch and cover plate
SCHUKO-socket outlet with hinged cover and labelling field white, glossy polar white, glossy
4746 02 4746 09
10 10
16 A, 250 V~ on page T6
Labelling field height arranged for 9 mm P-touch strips. Connection terminals IEC 60884-1
white, glossy
4306
10
16 A, 250 V~ Switching current 16 A For fitting in standard wall boxes according to DIN 49073-1 Connection terminals IEC 60884-1 change-over switch and socket outlet with common input terminal with screw terminals
with plug-in terminals
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
63
MODUL 2 Order no.
Packing unit
Order no.
Combination switch/socket outlet
Double SCHUKO-socket outlet, flat, with cover plate
SCHUKO-socket outlet with rocker switch and cover plate white, glossy polar white, glossy
61 4356 02 61 4356 09
white, glossy polar white, glossy
10 10
Connection terminals IEC 60884-1 flat design for Attema and Haf wall boxes without spreader claws with plug-in terminals
for vertical mounting with change-over switch without spreader claws with screw terminals
SCHUKO-socket outlet 3gang with cover plate white, glossy polar white, glossy
SCHUKO-socket outlet with rockers switch and cover plate 61 4355 02 61 4355 09
10 10
5 5
For fitting in standard wall boxes according to DIN 49073-1 Connection terminals IEC 60884-1
For fitting in standard wall boxes according to DIN 49073-1 Connection terminals IEC 60884-1
round without spreader claws with screw terminals
for vertical mounting with series switch without spreader claws with screw terminals
SCHUKO-socket outlets for cable ducts SCHUKO-socket outlet combination 2gang with frame
SCHUKO-socket outlets
white, glossy polar white, glossy
Double SCHUKO-socket outlet with cover plate white, glossy polar white, glossy white, glossy, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1 polar white, glossy, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1 white, glossy, without spreader claws
4754 02 4754 09 4729 02
10 10 10
4729 09
10
61 4754 02
10
polar white, glossy, without spreader claws
61 4754 09
10
4720 02 4720 09
5 5
16 A, 250 V~ For installation in cable duct mounting boxes and in standard commercially available 2gang hollow wall boxes, also in 2gang flush-mounted boxes. Connection terminals IEC 60884-1 without spreader claws 2 x 1gang, wired-through with plug-in terminals
SCHUKO-socket outlet 3gang with cover plate white, glossy polar white, glossy
16 A, 250 V~ 61 4754 02 and 61 4754 09 for the Netherlands! For fitting in 1gang wall boxes according to DIN 49073-1 Connection terminals IEC 60884-1
61 4160 61 4160 09
16 A, 250 V~ Pre-assembled cables approx. 1 m; Conductor cross-section 2,5 mm²; Installation time approx. 2 min.
16 A, 250 V~ Switching current 10 A
with plug-in terminals
10 10
Suitable for Attema (UK40 and PVK40) and Haf (H150) wall boxes.
For fitting in standard wall boxes according to DIN 49073-1 Connection terminals IEC 60884-1
on page T6
61 4730 02 61 4730 09
16 A, 250 V~
16 A, 250 V~ Switching current 10 A
white, glossy polar white, glossy
Packing unit
on page T6
4766 02 4766 09
5 5
16 A, 250 V~ Pre-assembled cables approx. 1 m; Conductor cross-section 2,5 mm²; Installation time approx. 2 min. For installation in cable duct mounting boxes and in standard commercially available 2gang hollow wall boxes, also in 2gang flush-mounted boxes. Connection terminals IEC 60884-1 without mounting box common base, connected-through through-wiring possible without spreader claws with plug-in terminals
64
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
MODUL 2 Order no.
Packing unit
Socket outlets without earth contact
Order no.
Combination switch/socket outlet
Socket outlet without earth contact white, glossy polar white, glossy
61 6103 02 61 6103 09
Socket outlet without earth contact with rocker switch and cover plate
10 10
white, glossy polar white, glossy
16 A, 250 V~ Mirror depth 7,8 mm
Connection terminals according to IEC 60884-1
socket outlet 2pole for vertical mounting with change-over switch without spreader claws with screw terminals
Socket outlet without earth contact 61 6176 02
10
61 6176 09
10
Socket outlet without earth contact with rockers switch and cover plate white, glossy polar white, glossy
16 A, 250 V~ Mirror depth 14,5 mm
2pole without spreader claws with screw terminals
on page T6
socket outlet 2pole for vertical mounting with series switch without spreader claws with screw terminals
10 10
16 A, 250 V~ Mirror depth 7,6 mm
Socket outlets without earth contact Double socket outlet without earth contact with cover plate
Connection terminals according to IEC 60884-1
white, glossy polar white, glossy
2pole without spreader claws with screw terminals
Socket outlet without earth contact with cover plate
on page T6
white, glossy, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1 polar white, glossy, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1
10 10
For fitting in standard wall boxes according to DIN 49073-1 Connection terminals according to IEC 60884-1
Socket outlet without earth contact with cover plate 61 6102 02 61 6102 09
61 4365 02 61 4365 09
16 A, 250 V~ Switching current 10 A; Mirror depth 6 mm
Connection terminals according to IEC 60884-1
white, glossy white, glossy
10 10
For fitting in standard wall boxes according to DIN 49073-1 Connection terminals according to IEC 60884-1
2pole without spreader claws with screw terminals
on page T6
61 4366 02 61 4366 09
16 A, 250 V~ Switching current 10 A; Mirror depth 6 mm
on page T6
white, glossy, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1 polar white, glossy, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1
Packing unit
61 6172 02
10
61 6172 09
10
on page T6
61 6754 02 61 6754 09
10 10
16 A, 250 V~ Mirror depth 5,7 mm
For fitting in standard wall boxes according to DIN 49073-1 Connection terminals according to IEC 60884-1 2pole without spreader claws with plug-in terminals
16 A, 250 V~ Mirror depth 14,5 mm
Connection terminals according to IEC 60884-1 2pole without spreader claws with screw terminals
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
65
MODUL 2 Order no.
Packing unit
3gang socket outlet without earth contact with cover plate white, glossy polar white, glossy on page T6
61 6160 61 6160 09
Order no.
NEW
5 5
16 A, 250 V~ Mirror depth 4,7 mm
on page T6
white, glossy, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1
10
10
on page T6
NEW
2pole + earth with screw-in lift terminals
white, glossy, enhanced * 67 6876 02 contact protection IEC 60884-1 polar white, glossy, * 67 6876 09 enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1
10
on page T6
10
Socket outlet with earth pin and cover plate 67 6572 02
10
67 6572 09
10
2pole + earth with screw-in lift terminals
66
16 A, 250 V~
British Standard socket outlets NEW
2pole + earth with plug-in terminals
Connection terminals according to IEC 60884-1
10
2pole + earth with plug-in terminals
Connection terminals according to IEC 60884-1
16 A, 250 V~
Socket outlet with earth pin and centre plate 50 x 50 mm
With centre plate as per DIN 49075 Connection terminals according to IEC 60884-1
16 A, 250 V~
on page T6
16 A, 250 V~
white, glossy, enhanced * 67 6876 01 contact protection IEC 60884-1
Socket outlet with earth pin
white, glossy, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1 polar white, glossy, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1
10
2pole + earth with screw-in lift terminals
Connection terminals according to IEC 60884-1
on page T6
67 6576 01
With centre plate as per DIN 49075 Connection terminals according to IEC 60884-1
16 A, 250 V~
NEW
10
Socket outlet with earth pin and centre plate 50 x 50 mm
Socket outlet with earth pin
on page T6
10
2pole + earth with plug-in terminals
Socket outlets with earth pin
67 6576 09
white, glossy, enhanced * 67 6872 02 contact protection IEC 60884-1 polar white, glossy, * 67 6872 09 enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1
Connection terminals according to IEC 60884-1
2pole round with screw terminals without spreader claws
67 6576 02
Socket outlet with earth pin and cover plate
16 A, 250 V~
For fitting in standard wall boxes according to DIN 49073-1 Connection terminals according to IEC 60884-1
white, glossy, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1 polar white, glossy, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1
Packing unit
on page T6
Socket outlet with earth contact, British Standard, can be switched off white, with enhanced contact protection
* 6347 02
10
polar white, with enhanced contact protection
* 6347 09
10
13 A, 250 V~ Equates to standard BS 1363: Part 2. For fitting in standard wall boxes according to DIN 49073-1 2pole + earth without neon lamp without spreader claws with screw terminals
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
MODUL 2 Order no.
Packing unit
Euro-American socket outlets
4171 02 4171 09
10 10
15 A, 125 V~ on page T6
2pole with screw terminals
4170
10
Labelling field height arranged for 9 mm P-touch strips for labelling with names, notes etc.
white, glossy polar white, glossy
1621 12 1621 19
10 10
for rocker switches change-over, intermediate for rocker push-buttons for push-button BCU 1gang and group push-button BCU 1gang for illumination and monitoring circuit
Connection terminals according to IEC 60884-1 2pole with screw terminals
NEMA socket outlets
Rocker with 5 lenses attached and labelling field
Socket outlet with earth contact, USA/CANADA, NEMA 5-15 R 4166 02 4166 09
10 10
15 A, 125 V~
white, glossy polar white, glossy
1628 02 1628 09
10 10
Labelling field height arranged for 9 mm P-touch strips for labelling with names, notes etc.
on page T6
Equates to standard NEMA 5-15 R
Lenses with symbol for light, bell, door and neutral in clear, also neutral in red transparent.
2pole + earth without spreader claws with screw terminals
Socket outlet with earth contact, USA/CANADA, NEMA 5-20 R white, glossy polar white, glossy
10 10
Lenses with symbol for light, bell, door and neutral in clear, also neutral in red transparent.
15 A, 125 V~
white, glossy polar white, glossy
1626 02 1626 09
Rocker with 5 lenses attached
Socket outlet without earth contact „Euro-American Standard“ with cover plate
on page T6
white, glossy polar white, glossy
for rocker switches change-over, intermediate for rocker push-buttons for push-button BCU 1gang and group push-button BCU 1gang
Connection terminals according to IEC 60884-1
white, glossy
Packing unit
Rocker with labelling field
Socket outlet without earth contact „Euro-American Standard“ white, glossy polar white, glossy
Order no.
4168 02 4168 09
10 10
20 A, 125 V~
for rocker switches change-over, intermediate for push-button BCU 1gang and group push-button BCU 1gang for rocker push-buttons for illumination and monitoring circuit
Rocker with imprint „0“ and „1“ white, glossy polar white, glossy
on page T6
1622 02 1622 09
10 10
Equates to standard NEMA 5-20 R 2pole + earth without spreader claws with screw terminals
for rocker switch 2- and 3pole on/off
Rocker with red lens and „0“ and „1“ imprint white, glossy polar white, glossy
Covers for switches / push-buttons Rockers
1624 02 1624 09
10 10
Rocker white, glossy polar white, glossy
1620 02 1620 09
10 10
for rocker switch 2- and 3pole on/off for group push-button BCU 1gang for illumination and monitoring circuit
for rocker switches change-over, intermediate for rocker push-buttons for push-button BCU 1gang and group push-button BCU 1gang
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
67
MODUL 2 Order no.
Packing unit
Rotary switches
Order no.
Packing unit
Rockers screw-on
Centre plate with rotary knob for rotary switch
Rocker screw-on
white, glossy polar white, glossy
white, glossy polar white, glossy
1 1
1150 02 1150 09
1570 02 1570 09
10 10
For rotary switch order no. 3862 ..
with cover plug for screw fitting for rocker switches change-over, intermediate for rocker push-buttons
with imprint „0“ and „1“
Rockers
Rocker screw-on with 5 lenses attached
Rockers white, glossy polar white, glossy
1623 02 1623 09
10 10
for rockers switches for rockers push-buttons and group rockers pushbuttons for push-button BCU 2gang and group push-button BCU 2gang
Rockers with red lens white, glossy polar white, glossy
1627 02 1627 09
10 10
for rockers switches for rockers push-buttons and group rockers pushbuttons for illumination and monitoring circuit for push-button BCU 2gang and group push-button BCU 2gang
Rockers with imprinted symbol arrow white, glossy polar white, glossy
1625 02 1625 09
10 10
For rockers switch for shutters order no. 3035 20 For rockers push-button for shutters order no. 5035 20 For push-button BCU 2gang order no. 7514 20 00
Rocker with imprinted symbol arrows white, glossy polar white, glossy
1620 22 1620 29
10 10
For group push-button BCU 1gang order no. 7514 11 00
Rockers with imprinted symbol arrows white, glossy polar white, glossy
1644 02 1644 09
10 10
white, glossy polar white, glossy
1572 02 1572 09
10 10
Lenses with symbol for light, bell, door and neutral in clear, also neutral in red transparent. with cover plug for screw fitting for rocker switches change-over, intermediate for rocker push-buttons for illumination and monitoring circuit
Rocker screw-on with imprint „0“ and „1“ white, glossy polar white, glossy
1573 02 1573 09
10 10
with cover plug for screw fitting for rocker switch 2- and 3pole on/off
Rocker screw-on with red lens and „0 und 1“ imprint white, glossy polar white, glossy
1577 02 1577 09
10 10
with cover plug for screw fitting for rocker switch 2- and 3pole on/off for illumination and monitoring circuit
Rockers screw-on white, glossy polar white, glossy
1571 02 1571 09
10 10
with cover plug for screw fitting for rockers switches for rockers push-buttons and group rockers pushbuttons
For group rockers push-button as 2pole rockers push-button for shutters with middle positions order no. 5034 04 For group push-button BCU 2gang order no. 7514 21 00
68
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
MODUL 2 Order no.
Packing unit
Barrier-free construction
Order no.
Hotel card switch
Rocker with 5 lenses attached and mouth-held rod polar white, glossy
1661 49
Hotel card switch cover with imprint and red lens white, glossy polar white, glossy
10
Lenses with symbol for light, bell, door and neutral in clear, also neutral in red transparent. An optical accentuation can be achieved by using a contrast frame order no. 1011 45
Barrier-free building based on DIN 18025 for barrier-free construction for rocker switches change-over, intermediate for rocker push-buttons for push-button BCU 1gang and group push-button BCU 1gang for illumination and monitoring circuit
Rocker with red lens and touchable symbol light polar white, glossy
1651 49
10
An optical accentuation can be achieved by using a contrast frame order no. 1011 45
Barrier-free building based on DIN 18025 for barrier-free construction for rocker switches change-over, intermediate for rocker push-buttons for illumination and monitoring circuit for push-button BCU 1gang and group push-button BCU 1gang
on page T6
1651 59
10
An optical accentuation can be achieved by using a contrast frame order no. 1011 45
Barrier-free building based on DIN 18025
Other imprint on request! For push-button insert for hotel card switch covers order no. 5051 02, 5051 03, 5052 01, 5056 01
Pullcord switches/pullcord push-buttons Centre plate for pullcord switch and pullcord push-button white, glossy polar white, glossy
10
An optical accentuation can be achieved by using a contrast frame order no. 1011 45
Barrier-free building based on DIN 18025 for barrier-free construction for illuminated rocker push-buttons for push-button BCU 1gang
1146 02 1146 09
10 10
For pullcord push-button order no. 3956 19 For pullcord switch order no. 3962, 3966, 6139 ..
Pullcord switch with centre plate white, glossy, changeover
61 3966 02
10
polar white, glossy, change-over
61 3966 09
10
10 AX, 250 V~ Pullcord connection 14 cm For wall and ceiling mounting. with plug-in terminals without spreader claws
Centre plate with red lens for pullcord switch and pullcord push-button white, glossy polar white, glossy
1149 02 1149 09
10 10
For pullcord push-button order no. 3956 19 For pullcord switch order no. 3962, 3966, 6139 ..
Rocker with red lens and touchable symbol door polar white, glossy
10 10
Can be used with incandescent lamp unit with N terminal order no. 1606 01 as pullcord push-button with quiet lamp 24 V.
for barrier-free construction for illuminated rocker push-buttons for push-button BCU 1gang
1651 69
1640 02 1640 09
Max. card width 54 mm; Card strength 0,5 - 1,4 mm
Rocker with red lens and touchable symbol bell polar white, glossy
Packing unit
3-step switches Centre plate with rotary knob for 3-step switch white, glossy, without 0-position
1084 02
1
polar white, glossy, without 0-position
1084 09
1
white, glossy, with neutral-position
1096 02
1
polar white, glossy, with neutral-position
1096 09
1
For 3-step switch with 0-position order no. 3861 For 3-step switch without 0-position order no. 3861 01
with imprint
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
69
MODUL 2 Order no.
Packing unit
Rotary switches/rotary push-buttons for shutters Centre plate with rotary knob for rotary switch for shutters white, glossy polar white, glossy
1080 02 1080 09
1 1
Centre plate for key switch/key push-button for shutters white, glossy polar white, glossy
1506 12 1506 19
10 10
Profile half cylinders see module inserts.
with imprint for profile half cylinders for master-key systems
with imprint
Key switches/key push-buttons for shutters Centre plate with lock for key switch for shutters
Key switches/key push-buttons
1081 02
1
polar white, glossy, key removable in mid position white, glossy, key removable in 3 positions
1081 09
1
1082 02
1
polar white, glossy, key removable in 3 positions
1082 09
1
Centre plate for key switch/key push-button white, glossy polar white, glossy
1507 12 1507 19
10 10
Profile half cylinders see module inserts. For key switch order no. 3826 10 For key push-button order no. 3856 20
for profile half cylinders for master-key systems
For key switch for shutters order no. 3851, 3852
Emergency heating control switches Emergency heating control switch with red lens and imprint
with imprint with push lock function with 2 keys
Centre plate with lock for key switch for shutters
white, glossy, on/off polar white, glossy, on/off
3541 02 3541 09
10 10
3542 02
10
white, glossy, key removable in mid position
1083 02
1
white, glossy, 2pole on/off with imprint „0“
polar white, glossy, key removable in mid position
1083 09
1
10 A, 250 V~ Neon lamp current 1 mA Or use glass pane protected heating emergency switch from programme ranges Arsys, flush-mounted splash-protected IP44, Aquatec IP44.
For key switch for shutters order no. 3851, 3852
Not suitable for heating systems > 50 kW.
with imprint only push-button function with 2 keys
with imprint „Heizung Notschalter“ complete with neon lamp unit with N terminal order no. 1675, frame and rocker with plug-in terminals
Centre plate with lock for key switch for shutters white, glossy, key removable in 3 positions
Packing unit
For key switch for shutters order no. 3822 10 For key push-button for shutters order no. 3831 10, 3832 10
Interlock disk for conversion to push-button see module inserts order no. 1861 Rotary switch for shutters order no. 3841, 3842
white, glossy, key removable in mid position
Order no.
1082 32
For key switch for shutters order no. 3851, 3852
without imprint with push lock function with 2 keys
1
Emergency heating control switch with red lens and imprint white, glossy, 3pole on/off
3543 12
10
polar white, glossy, 3pole on/off
3543 19
10
16 A, 400 V~ Neon lamp current 0,5 mA Or use glass pane protected heating emergency switch from programme ranges Arsys, flush-mounted splash-protected IP44, Aquatec IP44. Not suitable for heating systems > 50 kW. with imprint „Heizung Notschalter“ and „0“ complete with neon lamp unit order no. 1600, frame and rocker with screw terminals
70
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
MODUL 2 Order no.
Packing unit
Order no.
Blank plates
Packing unit
Info pilot lamp cover with 5 label sheets white, glossy polar white, glossy
Blank plate with centre plate white, glossy, without base and spreader claws polar white, glossy, without base and spreader claws white, glossy, with base and spreader claws
1009 02
polar white, glossy, with base and spreader claws
20
1009 09
20
67 1009 02
10
67 1009 09
10
1345 02 1345 09
1 1
Current input 25 mA; LED output 800 mW on page T29
Labels supplied: „Nicht eintreten“, „Besetzt“, „Bitte eintreten“, „Bitte Ruhe“, „Bitte warten“. Coloured cover plate see module inserts order no. 1289 .. For insert info pilot lamp order no. 2949
with 4 light intensity LED very long LED lifetime with clear cover plate
on supporting plate without cut-out centre plate plug-in fixing
timers Centre plate with setting knob for mechanical timer
Pilot lamps
white, glossy, max. 15 minutes
1632 02
1
polar white, glossy, max. 15 minutes
1632 09
1
Cut-out diameter 27,3 mm
white, glossy, max. 120 minutes
1633 02
1
Push-buttons, LEDs, neon lamps and covers see module inserts.
polar white, glossy, max. 120 minutes
1633 09
1
Centre plate for push-button and pilot lamp E10 white, glossy polar white, glossy
1234 02 1234 09
10 10
For push-button and pilot lamp E10 order no. 5101 ..
Mechanical timer 15 minutes order no. 2040 Mechanical timer 120 minutes order no. 2041
centre plate plug-in fixing
Centre plate with labelling field for pushbutton and pilot lamp E10 white, glossy polar white, glossy
1235 02 1235 09
with time scale imprint 10 10
Easy timer with display
Cut-out diameter 27,3 mm
white, glossy polar white, glossy
Push-buttons, LEDs, neon lamps and covers see module inserts.
Per programme block 2 switching times for „on/off“; Power reserve approx. 4 hrs., maintenance-free; Operating temperature 5 - 35 °C
Labelling field height arranged for 9 mm P-touch strips.
For push-button and pilot lamp E10 order no. 5101 ..
on page T7
1735 02 1735 09
1 1
For manual and timer programmed switching of electrical loads. For insert for timer order no. 2948
centre plate plug-in fixing
Centre plate for pilot lamp E14 white, glossy polar white, glossy
1198 02 1198 09
10 10
LEDs, incandescent lamps and covers see module inserts. For pilot lamp E14 order no. 5131 02
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
simple programming of switching times with quick programming mode can be programmed up to 4 hours after pulling from the insert 2 programme blocks Mon. - Fri. and Sat. - Sun. with automatic summer-/winter time switching (can be switched off) large-area display with symbols display of next switching time with slide switch for manual/automatic
71
MODUL 2 Order no.
Packing unit
on page T7
1736 02 1736 09
1 1
Centre plate with setting knob for rotary dimmer white, glossy polar white, glossy
Switching times 18 for on/off; Random generator +/- 15 min.; Astronomic time shift +/- 2 hrs.; Power reserve approx. 24 hrs.; Countdown function 0 - 23 hrs. 59 min.
with imprint in German with pre-set base programme 2 independent programme memories for everyday/ holidays with week and day programme with slide switch from summer to winter time astro programme for sunrise/sundown switching large-area display with symbols with slide switch for manual/automatic
Cover plate with setting knob for rotary dimmer white, glossy polar white, glossy
10 10
For rotary dimmer order no. 2819 .., 2830 10, 2860 10, 2875, 2885 For universal rotary dimmer order no. 2861 10 For universal rotary dimmer extension unit order no 2862 10 For rotary dimmer LV order no. 2866 10, 2873 For Tronic rotary dimmer order no. 2867 10, 2874 For rotary potentiometer 1-10 V order no. 2891 10 For push-button rotary potentiometer 1-10 V order no. 2896 10 For rotary potentiometer DALI order no. 2897
1 1
Setting range twilight approx. 6 - 300 Lux; Switching times 18 for on/off; Random generator +/- 15 min.; Astronomic time shift +/- 2 hrs.; Power reserve approx. 24 hrs.; Countdown function 0 - 23 hrs. 59 min. For manual and timer programmed switching of electrical loads.
Rotary dimmer with cover plate and setting knob Modul 2
For RolloTec brightness sensors order no. 0169, 0184 For insert for timer order no. 2948
with imprint in German with pre-set base programme 2 independent programme memories for everyday/ holidays with week and day programme with slide switch from summer to winter time astro programme for sunrise/sundown switching large-area display with symbols with slide switch for manual/automatic for sensor connection to socket contact or terminal block connected RolloTec brightness sensor can be used for twilight-controlled switching-on
1130 02 1130 09
Axial dimension diameter 4 mm
Timer with display and sensor connection
on page T7
10 10
For rotary dimmer order no. 2819 .., 2830 10, 2860 10, 2875, 2885 For universal rotary dimmer order no. 2861 10 For universal rotary dimmer extension unit order no. 2862 10 For rotary dimmer LV order no. 2866 10, 2873 For Tronic rotary dimmer order no. 2867 10, 2874 For rotary potentiometer 1-10 V order no. 2891 10 For push-button rotary potentiometer 1-10 V order no. 2896 10 For rotary potentiometer DALI order no. 2897
For insert for timer order no. 2948
1738 02 1738 09
1137 02 1137 09
Axial dimension diameter 4 mm
For manual and timer programmed switching of electrical loads.
white, glossy polar white, glossy
Packing unit
Rotary dimmers
Timer with display white, glossy polar white, glossy
Order no.
white, glossy polar white, glossy on page T9
1 1
2819 02 2819 09
230 V~, 50 Hz 230 V incandescent and halogen lamps 60 - 400 W; LV power boosters Eb max. 10; Axial dimension diameter 4 mm Cover plate order no. 1130 .. Centre plate order no. 1134 .., 1135 .., 1137 ..
1
7
G
J
with rotary on/off switch bulb-preserving soft startup short-circuit and overload proof (fine-wire fuse) phase cut-on with screw terminals
Speed controllers Centre plate with setting knob for speed controller white, glossy polar white, glossy
1137 22 1137 29
1 10
Axial dimension diameter 4 mm For speed controller order no. 2968 01
with imprinted symbol curve
72
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
MODUL 2 Order no.
Packing unit
Universal series touch dimmers NEW
* 1765 02 1765 09
*
BLC controller 180
for 2 independent lighting groups with 2-push-buttons operation concept per series
BLC Berker Light Control Buttons BLC button
on page T12
1761 02 1761 09
white, glossy polar white, glossy
1 1
For universal series touch dimmer order no. 2901
white, glossy polar white, glossy
Packing unit
BLC Controllers
Button for universal series touch dimmer white, glossy polar white, glossy
on page T10
Order no.
1 1
on page T15
1783 02 1783 09
1 1
Nominal mounting height 1,1 m; Range frontal approx. 10 m; Range lateral each approx. 6 m; Detection field semi-oval shaped approx. 10 x 12 m; Detection angle 180 °; Detection levels 2; Switching segments 72; Response sensitivity programmable approx. 20 - 100 % ; Response brightness adjustable approx. 0 - 80 / unlimited Lux; Delay time approx. 2 min.; Operating temperature -20 - +45 °C; Dimensions assembling height 23,5 mm Switches on for the duration of the controller delay time in case minimum response brightness level is infringed and if movement of people is detected. In conjunction with a BLC relay switch unit HVAC, the HVAC-channel is also switched on for the duration of its delay time independent of response brightness.
For BLC universal touch dimmer order no. 2902 For BLC touch control unit 1-10 V order no. 2903 For BLC touch dimmer LV order no. 2904 For BLC triac switch insert LV order no. 2905 for BLC relay switch insert order no. 2906 For BLC relay switch insert with potential-free contact order no. 2906 10 For BLC extension unit order no 2907 For BLC relay switch insert HVAC order no. 2912 For BLC Tronic switch insert order no. 2916 For BLC stair light time switching impulse insert order no. 2934 10
with 2-push-buttons operation concept start-up brightness will be stored after power failure with BLC relay switch insert HVAC used as timer as well
Radio buttons
For BLC universal touch dimmer order no. 2902 For BLC touch control unit 1-10 V order no. 2903 For BLC touch dimmer LV order no. 2904 For BLC triac switch insert LV order no. 2905 for BLC relay switch insert order no. 2906 For BLC relay switch insert with potential-free contact order no. 2906 10 For BLC controller extension unit order no. 2908 For BLC relay switch insert HVAC order no. 2912 For BLC Tronic switch insert order no. 2916 For BLC stair light time switching impulse insert order no. 2934 10
U BLC radio button white, glossy polar white, glossy
1760 02 1760 09
1 1
with cover to limit detection angle to 90°
Radio signal reception frequency 433,42 MHz; Learnable radio transmitters 30 on page T12
Extension unit operation with BLC extension unit and push-button (NO) possible as of release R2.1. For actuation via button and radio transmitter. For BLC universal touch dimmer order no. 2902 For BLC touch control unit 1-10 V order no. 2903 For BLC touch dimmer LV order no. 2904 For BLC triac switch insert LV order no. 2905 for BLC relay switch insert order no. 2906 For BLC relay switch insert with potential-free contact order no. 2906 10 For BLC relay switch insert HVAC order no. 2912 For BLC Tronic switch insert order no. 2916
with 2-push-buttons operation concept with 5 light scenes for „on/off“, dimming value retrieving light scenes only by using radio transmitter radio signal of taught-in radio controllers causes switch on for 1 min. (retriggering) start-up brightness will be stored after power failure reset function (to factory setting)
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
73
MODUL 2 Order no.
Packing unit
Order no.
BLC controller 180 comfort with slide switch for off/automatic/on white, glossy polar white, glossy on page T15
1784 02 1784 09
BLC controller 180 white, glossy polar white, glossy
1 1
Nominal mounting height 1,1 m; Range frontal approx. 10 m; Range lateral each approx. 6 m; Detection field semi-oval shaped approx. 10 x 12 m; Detection angle 180 °; Detection levels 2; Switching segments 72; Response sensitivity programmable approx. 20 - 100 % ; Response brightness adjustable approx. 0 - 80 / unlimited Lux; Delay time adjustable approx. 10 sec.- 30 min. ; Time to dim down 30 sec.; Step operation 0,5 sec.; Immunity time approx. 3 sec.; Operating temperature -20 - +45 °C; Dimensions assembling height 23,5 mm Switches on for the duration of the delay time set on the controller in case minimum response brightness level is infringed and if movement of people is detected. In conjunction with a BLC relay switch unit HVAC, the HVAC-channel is also switched on for the duration of its delay time independent of response brightness. For BLC universal touch dimmer order no. 2902 For BLC touch control unit 1-10 V order no. 2903 For BLC touch dimmer LV order no. 2904 For BLC triac switch insert LV order no. 2905 for BLC relay switch insert order no. 2906 For BLC relay switch insert with potential-free contact order no. 2906 10 For BLC controller extension unit order no. 2908 For BLC relay switch insert HVAC order no. 2912 For BLC Tronic switch insert order no. 2916 For BLC stair light time switching impulse insert order no. 2934 10
U
Packing unit
on page T15
1786 02 1786 09
1 1
Nominal mounting height 2,2 m; Range frontal approx. 12 m; Range lateral each approx. 6 m; At assembly height 1,1 m; Range frontal approx. 6 m; Range lateral each approx. 3 m; Detection field semi-oval shaped approx. 12 x 12 m; Detection angle 180 °; Detection levels 3; Switching segments 104; Response sensitivity programmable approx. 20 - 100 % ; Response brightness adjustable approx. 0 - 80 / unlimited Lux; Delay time approx. 2 min.; Operating temperature -20 - +45 °C; Dimensions assembling height 23,5 mm Switches on for the duration of the controller delay time in case minimum response brightness level is infringed and if movement of people is detected. In conjunction with a BLC relay switch unit HVAC, the HVAC-channel is also switched on for the duration of its delay time independent of response brightness. For BLC universal touch dimmer order no. 2902 For BLC touch control unit 1-10 V order no. 2903 For BLC touch dimmer LV order no. 2904 For BLC triac switch insert LV order no. 2905 for BLC relay switch insert order no. 2906 For BLC relay switch insert with potential-free contact order no. 2906 10 For BLC controller extension unit order no. 2908 For BLC relay switch insert HVAC order no. 2912 For BLC Tronic switch insert order no. 2916 For BLC stair light time switching impulse insert order no. 2934 10
V with cover to limit detection angle to 90°
microprocessor controlled mode of oper.(detection signal evaluation and interfering signal suppres.) glare-proof e.g. against a torch no switching with unforeseeable short shadows with adaptive sensitivity adjustment with teach function for response brightness step operation with immunity time (e.g. for bell) switch-on brightness in conjunction with BLC dimmer inserts can only be saved via BLC extension unit with dimming function (soft-off) when using BLC dimmer inserts with cover to limit detection angle to 90°
74
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
MODUL 2 Order no.
Packing unit
BLC controller 180 comfort with slide switch for off/automatic/on white, glossy polar white, glossy on page T15
1787 02 1787 09
Order no.
Thermostats NEW
1 1
Nominal mounting height 2,2 m; Range frontal approx. 12 m; Range lateral each approx. 6 m; At assembly height 1,1 m; Range frontal approx. 6 m; Range lateral each approx. 3 m; Detection field semi-oval shaped approx. 12 x 12 m; Detection angle 180 °; Detection levels 3; Switching segments 104; Response sensitivity programmable approx. 20 - 100 % ; Response brightness adjustable approx. 0 - 80 / unlimited Lux; Delay time adjustable approx. 10 sec.- 30 min. ; Time to dim down 30 sec.; Step operation 0,5 sec.; Immunity time approx. 3 sec.; Operating temperature -20 - +45 °C; Dimensions assembling height 23,5 mm Switches on for the duration of the delay time set on the controller in case minimum response brightness level is infringed and if movement of people is detected. In conjunction with a BLC relay switch unit HVAC, the HVAC-channel is also switched on for the duration of its delay time independent of response brightness. For BLC universal touch dimmer order no. 2902 For BLC touch control unit 1-10 V order no. 2903 For BLC touch dimmer LV order no. 2904 For BLC triac switch insert LV order no. 2905 for BLC relay switch insert order no. 2906 For BLC relay switch insert with potential-free contact order no. 2906 10 For BLC controller extension unit order no. 2908 For BLC relay switch insert HVAC order no. 2912 For BLC Tronic switch insert order no. 2916 For BLC stair light time switching impulse insert order no. 2934 10
V microprocessor controlled mode of oper.(detection signal evaluation and interfering signal suppres.) glare-proof e.g. against a torch no switching with unforeseeable short shadows with adaptive sensitivity adjustment with teach function for response brightness step operation with immunity time (e.g. for bell) switch-on brightness in conjunction with BLC dimmer inserts can only be saved via BLC extension unit with dimming function (soft-off) when using BLC dimmer inserts with cover to limit detection angle to 90°
Packing unit
Room thermostat with NC contact, centre plate, rocker switch and LED white, glossy polar white, glossy
on page T34
* 2030 02 * 2030 09
1 1
5 - 30 °C, 50/60 Hz Rated voltage 250 V~; Switching current 10 A; Inductive load at cos φ 0,6 max. 4 A; Switching temperature difference approx. 0,5 °C; Night lowering approx. 4 °C Neutral conductor necessary! If the pre-set temperature is reached the contact opens. Replacement centre plate order no. 1671 02, 1671 09 Suitable valve drive order no. 7590 00 76
with imprint setting knob with temperature range limitation with on/off switch and indicator LED for „on“ with thermal return with separate connection for night lowering e.g. for valve drives closed in de-energized state without spreader claws with plug-in terminals NEW
Room thermostat 24 V with NC contact, centre plate, rocker switch and LED white, glossy polar white, glossy
on page T34
* 2031 02 * 2031 09
1 1
5 - 30 °C, 50/60 Hz Rated voltage 24 V~; Switching current 10 A~; Rated voltage 24 V=; Switching current 4 A=; Switching temperature difference approx. 0,5 °C; Night lowering approx. 4 °C If the pre-set temperature is reached the contact opens. Replacement centre plate order no. 1671 02, 1671 09 Suitable valve drive order no. 7590 00 77
with imprint setting knob with temperature range limitation with on/off switch and indicator LED for „on“ with control LED for „on“ with thermal return with separate connection for night lowering e.g. for valve drives closed in de-energized state without spreader claws with plug-in terminals
Centre plate with setting knob, rocker and lens for room thermostat with NC contact white, glossy polar white, glossy
1671 02 1671 09
1 1
Replacement demand for order no. 2030 02, 2030 09, 2031 02, 2031 09
with imprint setting knob with temperature range limitation
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
75
MODUL 2 Order no.
NEW
on page T34
Packing unit
Centre plate with setting knob, rocker and lenses for floor temperature thermostat
white, glossy polar white, glossy
white, glossy polar white, glossy
* 2026 02 * 2026 09
1 1
5 - 30 °C, 50/60 Hz Rated voltage 250 V~; Switching current „heating“ 10 A (4 A at cosphi=0,6); Switching current „cooling“ 5 A (2 A at cosphi=0,6); Switching temperature difference approx. 0,5 °C
Thermostat time-controlled with NO contact and centre plate white, glossy polar white, glossy
Replacement centre plate order no. 1670 02, 1670 09 Suitable valve drive order no. 7590 00 76
0 - 40 °C, 50/60 Hz Rated voltage 230 V~; Switching current 8 A; Inductive load at cos φ 0,6 max. 2 A; Switching temperature difference approx. 0,5 °C; Time ranges 6 per day/week
white, glossy polar white, glossy
1670 02 1670 09
1 1
Replacement demand for order no. 2026 02, 2026 09
with imprint setting knob with temperature range limitation
Floor thermostat with NO contact, centre plate, rocker switch, 2 LEDs and floor temperature sensor
white, glossy polar white, glossy
* 2034 02 * 2034 09
1 1
10 - 50 °C, 50/60 Hz Rated voltage 250 V~; Switching current 10 A; Switching temperature difference approx. 1 °C; Night lowering approx. 5 °C; Sensor cable length 4 m Neutral conductor necessary! If the pre-set temperature is reached the contact closes. Replacement floor temperature sensor / remote sensor order no. 0161 Replacement centre plate order no. 1672 02, 1672 09 Suitable valve drive order no. 7590 00 76
with imprint setting knob with temperature range limitation with on/off switch and 2 LEDs with LED for heating and LED for night lowering with separate connection for night lowering e.g. for valve drives closed in de-energized state without spreader claws with plug-in terminals
1 1
with imprint setting knob with temperature range limitation
If the pre-set temperature is reached the contact changes.
Centre plate with setting knob for room thermostat with change-over contact
76
1672 02 1672 09
Replacement demand for order no. 2034 02, 2034 09
NEW
with imprint setting knob with temperature range limitation for heating or cooling mode e.g. for valve drives closed in de-energized state with thermal return without spreader claws with plug-in terminals
on page T34
Packing unit
Room thermostat with change-over and centre plate
Neutral conductor necessary!
NEW
Order no.
on page T35
* 2043 02 * 2043 09
1 1
Neutral conductor necessary! Replacement centre plate order no. 1116 02, 1116 09 Suitable floor temperature sensor / remote sensor order no. 0161 Suitable valve drive order no. 7590 00 76
with imprint for heating or cooling mode for room and floor heaters for floor heating, control using room and/or floor temperature possible e.g. for valve drives closed in de-energized state large-area display with symbols with thermal return via software with pre-set base programme with week and day programme with slide switch for manual/automatic with party function with valve protection function with frost protection function display of set or actual temperature with operating hours meter fuzzy logic comfort, standard and night temperature with self-teaching heating curve with integrated temperature sensor with additional connection for external floor temperature sensor/remote sensor without spreader claws with plug-in terminals
Centre plate for thermostat time-controlled white, glossy polar white, glossy
1116 02 1116 09
1 1
Replacement demand for order no. 2043 02, 2043 09
with imprint
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
MODUL 2 Order no.
Packing unit
Order no.
Sensor insert
RolloTec button comfort with sensor connection
Central plate for sensor insert white, glossy polar white, glossy
7594 04 02 7594 04 09
Packing unit
white, glossy polar white, glossy
1 1
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range.
on page T37
1771 02 1771 09
1 1
Brightness value sun approx. 5 - 80 kLux; Learnable running time 4 sec.- 2 min.; Lamella adjustment with signal < 1 sec.; Locked for 2 min. upon actuation 1 - 4 Sec.
Labelling field not usable. Sensor insert order no. 7594 10 01
For RolloTec brightness sensors order no. 0169, 0184 For RolloTec glass breakage sensor order no. 0170 For RolloTec adapter for sensors order no. 0171 For RolloTec standard insert without neutral conductor connection order no. 2911 For RolloTec standard insert order no. 2925 For Rollotec comfort insert order no. 2975 For RolloTec comfort insert for direct current drives order no. 2975 01 For magnetic contact order no. 9251 ..
with slots for air circulation for e.g. temperature sensor PT100
RolloTec Comfort buttons RolloTec button comfort flat design white, glossy polar white, glossy
on page T37
1770 12 1770 49
1 1
with embossed arrows with lock-out protection e.g. for shutter control terrace door activation of lock-out protection in upper end pos. via buttons in „up“ direction min. 3 secs. with indicator LED for lock-out protection brightness value for sunblind individually adjustable on brightness sensor surface-mounted, the taught-in running time for sun protection movement is used no twilight sensor function for sensor connection to socket contact or terminal block
Learnable running time 0,5 sec.- 2 min.; Lamella adjustment with signal < 1 sec.; Self-sustaining for 2 min. with signal > 1 - 4 sec. For RolloTec standard insert without neutral conductor connection order no. 2911 For RolloTec standard insert order no. 2925 For Rollotec comfort insert order no. 2975 For RolloTec comfort insert for direct current drives order no. 2975 01
with imprinted symbol arrows with lock-out protection e.g. for shutter control terrace door activation of lock-out protection in upper end pos. via buttons in „up“ direction min. 3 secs. with indicator LED for lock-out protection
Radio buttons RolloTec radio button, flat design white, glossy polar white, glossy
RolloTec button comfort with sensor connection, flat design white, glossy polar white, glossy on page T37
1771 12 1771 49
1 1
Brightness value sun approx. 5 - 80 kLux; Learnable running time 4 sec.- 2 min.; Lamella adjustment with signal < 1 sec.; Locked for 2 min. upon actuation 1 - 4 Sec. For RolloTec brightness sensors order no. 0169, 0184 For RolloTec glass breakage sensor order no. 0170 For RolloTec adapter for sensors order no. 0171 For RolloTec standard insert without neutral conductor connection order no. 2911 For RolloTec standard insert order no. 2925 For Rollotec comfort insert order no. 2975 For RolloTec comfort insert for direct current drives order no. 2975 01 For magnetic contact order no. 9251 ..
on page T37
1758 12 1758 49
1 1
Radio signal reception frequency 433,42 MHz; Learnable radio transmitters 30 ; Lamella adjustment with signal < 1 sec.; Self-sustaining for 2 min. with signal > 1 sec. For actuation via button and radio transmitter. For RolloTec standard insert without neutral conductor connection order no. 2911 For RolloTec standard insert order no. 2925 For Rollotec comfort insert order no. 2975 For RolloTec comfort insert for direct current drives order no. 2975 01
with imprinted symbol arrows with 5 light scenes for „open/close“ retrieving light scenes only by using radio transmitter
with imprinted symbol arrows with lock-out protection e.g. for shutter control terrace door activation of lock-out protection in upper end pos. via buttons in „up“ direction min. 3 secs. with indicator LED for lock-out protection brightness value for sunblind individually adjustable on brightness sensor surface-mounted, the taught-in running time for sun protection movement is used no twilight sensor function only for sensor connection to terminal block
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
77
MODUL 2 Order no.
Packing unit
RolloTec radio button with sensor connection, flat design white, glossy polar white, glossy on page T37
1759 12 1759 49
Order no.
Memory buttons RolloTec memory button, flat design
1 1
Radio signal reception frequency 433,42 MHz; Learnable radio transmitters 30; Brightness value sun approx. 5 - 80 kLux; Lamella adjustment with signal < 1 sec.; Self-sustaining for 2 min. with signal > 1 sec.
white, glossy polar white, glossy
on page T37
For actuation via button and radio transmitter.
on page T37
1756 12 1756 49
Lamella adjustment with signal < 1 sec.; Self-sustaining for 2 min. with signal > 1 sec.; Storage of „up/down“ time with signal > 3,5 sec. Stored „up“ and/or „down“ time is run daily in automatic operation.
For RolloTec standard insert without neutral conductor connection order no. 2911 For RolloTec standard insert order no. 2925 For Rollotec comfort insert order no. 2975 For RolloTec comfort insert for direct current drives order no. 2975 01
with imprinted symbol arrows
RolloTec memory button, sensor connection, flat design white, glossy polar white, glossy
1757 12 1757 49
RolloTec radio button with sensor connection
Brightness value sun approx. 20 kLux; Lamella adjustment with signal < 1 sec.; Self-sustaining for 2 min. with signal > 1 sec.; Storage of „up/down“ time with signal > 3,5 sec.
white, glossy polar white, glossy
Stored „up“ and/or „down“ time is run daily in automatic operation.
1759 02 1759 09
1 1
Radio signal reception frequency 433,42 MHz; Learnable radio transmitters 30; Brightness value sun approx. 5 - 80 kLux; Lamella adjustment with signal < 1 sec.; Self-sustaining for 2 min. with signal > 1 sec. For actuation via button and radio transmitter. For RolloTec brightness sensors order no. 0169, 0184 For RolloTec glass breakage sensor order no. 0170 For RolloTec adapter for sensors order no. 0171 For RolloTec standard insert without neutral conductor connection order no. 2911 For RolloTec standard insert order no. 2925 For Rollotec comfort insert order no. 2975 For RolloTec comfort insert for direct current drives order no. 2975 01 For magnetic contact order no. 9251 ..
1 1
For manual and timer programmed running of awnings, shutters and blinds.
For RolloTec brightness sensors order no. 0169, 0184 For RolloTec glass breakage sensor order no. 0170 For RolloTec adapter for sensors order no. 0171 For RolloTec standard insert without neutral conductor connection order no. 2911 For RolloTec standard insert order no. 2925 For Rollotec comfort insert order no. 2975 For RolloTec comfort insert for direct current drives order no. 2975 01 For magnetic contact order no. 9251 ..
with imprinted symbol arrows with 5 light scenes for „open/close“ retrieving light scenes only by using radio transmitter brightness value for sunblind individually adjustable no twilight sensor function only for sensor connection to terminal block
Packing unit
on page T37
1 1
For manual and timer programmed running of awnings, shutters and blinds. For RolloTec brightness sensors order no. 0169, 0184 For RolloTec glass breakage sensor order no. 0170 For RolloTec adapter for sensors order no. 0171 For RolloTec standard insert without neutral conductor connection order no. 2911 For RolloTec standard insert order no. 2925 For Rollotec comfort insert order no. 2975 For RolloTec comfort insert for direct current drives order no. 2975 01 For magnetic contact order no. 9251 ..
with imprinted symbol arrows no twilight sensor function only for sensor connection to terminal block
with embossed arrows with 5 light scenes for „open/close“ retrieving light scenes only by using radio transmitter brightness value for sunblind individually adjustable no twilight sensor function for sensor connection to socket contact or terminal block
78
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
MODUL 2 Order no.
Packing unit
Order no.
RolloTec memory button with sensor connection white, glossy polar white, glossy on page T37
1757 02 1757 09
RolloTec timer comfort with display white, glossy polar white, glossy
1 1
1774 02 1774 09
1 1
Stored „up“ and/or „down“ time is run daily in automatic operation.
Operation times 18 up/down; Random generator +/- 15 min.; Power reserve approx. 3 hrs., maintenance-free; Astronomic time shift +/- 2 hrs.; Learnable down time 1 sec.- 6 min.; Lamella adjusting time 0 - 5 sec.; Lamella adjustment with signal < 1 sec.; Lock at touching > 1 sec.
For manual and timer programmed running of awnings, shutters and blinds.
For manual and timer programmed running of awnings, shutters and blinds.
For RolloTec brightness sensors order no. 0169, 0184 For RolloTec glass breakage sensor order no. 0170 For RolloTec adapter for sensors order no. 0171 For RolloTec standard insert without neutral conductor connection order no. 2911 For RolloTec standard insert order no. 2925 For Rollotec comfort insert order no. 2975 For RolloTec comfort insert for direct current drives order no. 2975 01 For magnetic contact order no. 9251 ..
For RolloTec standard insert without neutral conductor connection order no. 2911 For RolloTec standard insert order no. 2925 For Rollotec comfort insert order no. 2975 For RolloTec comfort insert for direct current drives order no. 2975 01
Brightness value sun approx. 20 kLux; Lamella adjustment with signal < 1 sec.; Self-sustaining for 2 min. with signal > 1 sec.; Storage of „up/down“ time with signal > 3,5 sec.
on page T37
with embossed arrows no twilight sensor function for sensor connection to socket contact or terminal block
Timer switches RolloTec easy timer with display white, glossy polar white, glossy
on page T37
Packing unit
1762 02 1762 09
1 1
Operation times 2 up/down; Power reserve approx. 6 hrs., maintenance-free; Lamella adjustment with signal < 1 sec.; Self-sustaining for 2 min. with signal > 1 sec.
with German display text with totally 3 independent programme memories 2 programme memories pre-set programming according to week and days possible programme memory network failure proved with automatic summer-/winter time switching (can be switched off) astro programme for sunrise/sundown running large-area display with symbols indication of the next operation schedule under consideration of astro and coincidence function with slide switch for manual/automatic lock out protection because evaluation of the centre or extension unit commands can be switched off lamella position programmable at down operation times
No extension units and sensor signals or central commands will be processed. For manual and timer programmed running of awnings, shutters and blinds. For RolloTec standard insert without neutral conductor connection order no. 2911 For RolloTec standard insert order no. 2925 For Rollotec comfort insert order no. 2975 For RolloTec comfort insert for direct current drives order no. 2975 01
with imprint in German with pre-set base programme simple programming of operation times with quick programming mode programming possible up to 6 hours after pulling from the insert 2 programme blocks Mon. - Fri. and Sat. - Sun. large-area display with slide switch for manual/automatic
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
79
MODUL 2 Order no.
Packing unit
Order no.
RolloTec timer comfort with display and sensor connection white, glossy polar white, glossy on page T37
Frame 1gang with hinged cover for centre plate 50 x 50 mm white, glossy polar white, glossy
1 1
1775 02 1775 09
Setting range sun approx. 1 - 76 kLux; Setting range twilight approx. 6 - 300 Lux; Operation times 18 up/down; Random generator +/- 15 min.; Power reserve approx. 3 hrs., maintenance-free; Astronomic time shift +/- 2 hrs.; Learnable down time 1 sec.- 6 min.; Lamella adjusting time 0 - 5 sec.; Lamella adjustment with signal < 1 sec.; Lock at touching > 1 sec.
For RolloTec brightness sensors order no. 0169, 0184 For RolloTec glass breakage sensor order no. 0170 For RolloTec adapter for sensors order no. 0171 For RolloTec standard insert without neutral conductor connection order no. 2911 For RolloTec standard insert order no. 2925 For Rollotec comfort insert order no. 2975 For RolloTec comfort insert for direct current drives order no. 2975 01 For magnetic contact order no. 9251 ..
with German display text with totally 3 independent programme memories 2 programme memories pre-set programming according to week and days possible programme memory network failure proved with automatic summer-/winter time switching (can be switched off) astro programme for sunrise/sundown running large-area display with symbols indication of the next operation schedule under consideration of astro and coincidence function with slide switch for manual/automatic lock out protection because evaluation of the centre or extension unit commands can be switched off lamella position programmable at down operation times with surface-mounted RolloTec brightness sensor additionally settable with shutter and lamella pos. connected RolloTec brightness sensor can be used for twilight-controlled lowering con.surface-mounted RolloTec brightness sensor suitable for twilight-controlled raising and lowering for the sensor connection on the clamping block in the insert
Intermediate rings Adapter ring for centre plate 50 x 50 mm 1143 02 1143 09
10 10
1022 1022 09
10 10
For centre plate as per DIN 49075
Intermediate ring for central plate white, glossy polar white, glossy
1109 02 1109 09
10 10
labelling field latchable also suitable for 50 x 50 mm centre plate with square cut-out
For manual and timer programmed running of awnings, shutters and blinds.
white, glossy polar white, glossy
Packing unit
Labelling fields Labelling field for flush installation in intermediate ring for central plate white, glossy polar white, glossy
1905 02 1905 69
10 10
Labelling field height arranged for 9 mm P-touch strips.
Signalling and command units Central plate for transmitting and control device Ø 18.8 mm white, glossy polar white, glossy
1431 02 1431 09
10 10
Screw distance 36 mm Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range. Suitable for installation of equipotential bonding built-in socket order no. 4604
Circular plug-in connector: Amphenol-Tuchel; Binder; Cannon; Farnell; Hirose; Hirschmann; Lumberg; Monacor; RS Components; Extra low voltage jack: PRO-CAR with supporting plate with cut-out dia. 18.8 mm without spreader claws
Attention! Not suitable for Berker central plates. For centre plate as per DIN 49075 for other centre plates with external size 50 x 50 mm and SCHUKO-socket outlet
80
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
MODUL 2 Order no.
Packing unit
Central plate for signalling and control device Ø 22.5 mm white, glossy polar white, glossy yellow, glossy
1432 02 1432 09 1432 07
10 10 10
Order no.
Packing unit
Centre plate for aerial socket 1-hole white, glossy polar white, glossy
1499 42 1499 49
10 10
Screw distance 36 mm Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range. Signalling and command units: Kraus-Naimer; Lumitas; Schlegel; Overvoltage protection devices: Dehn, order no. NM DK 280; OBO-Bettermann, order no. KNS/IS-D with supporting plate with cut-out dia. 22.5 mm without spreader claws
Central plate for aerial socket 4-hole white, glossy polar white, glossy 10 10
Cut-out diameter 23,6 mm; Distance between screws (horizontal/vertical) 19 / 24 mm Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range.
1483 02 1483 09
10 10
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range. Aerial sockets: Hirschmann with 2 additional SAT outputs (F-sockets)
Central plate for aerial socket 4-hole white, glossy polar white, glossy
Circular plug-in connector: Cannon; Deltron; Farnell; Hirose; Monacor; Neutrik; RS Components with supporting plate speakon and jack connector without spreader claws
1484 02 1484 09
10 10
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range. For aerial socket 4-hole single box order no. 4594
Centre plate for loudspeaker socket outlet and miniature connector insert white, glossy, 1gang, 1 knock out opening
1196 02
10
polar white, glossy, 1gang, 1 knock out opening white, glossy, 2gang polar white, glossy, 2gang
1196 09
10
1197 02 1197 09
10 10
For miniature connector insert order no. 4505 For stereo loudspeaker socket outlet order no. 4505 01 For loudspeaker socket outlet High End order no. 4505 02 For BNC/TNC connector insert order no. 4577, 4579
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
10 10
with knock out SAT input
Central plate for XLR round connectors D series 1412 02 1412 09
1200 02 1200 09
For aerial socket 2-hole single box order no. 4502, HIFS 1B For aerial socket 2-hole throughpass socket order no. 4515 For aerial socket 3-hole single box order no. 4522 For aerial socket 3-hole throughpass socket order no. 4523, 4593
TV/audio
white, glossy polar white, glossy
Centre plate for aerial socket 2- and 3-hole white, glossy polar white, glossy
Aerial sockets: Ankaro; Astro; Axing; Delta; Schwaiger with 2 additional SAT outputs (F-sockets)
Central plate for broadband modem box white, glossy polar white, glossy
1439 02 1439 09
10 10
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range. Broadband modem socket: Wisi with additional multimedia output
81
MODUL 2 Order no.
Packing unit
Data-/telecommunications
1019 02 1019 09
10 10
For cable outlet order no. 4468, 4470
Centre plate for TAE socket outlet and loudspeaker connection box 1033 02 1033 09
10 10
For TAE socket outlet order no. 4487 .., 4500 .., 4544 .. For loudspeaker connection box order no. 4572 .., 4573 .. For FCC/TAE socket outlet order no. 4588 .. For USB data interface flush-mounted order no. 7504 00 04
EAD socket outlets: Drivex; Fröhlich + Walter; Intracom; TAE and FCC overvoltage protection sockets: Dehn; FCC socket outlets: Dätwyler; Rutenbeck
1457 02 1457 09
10 10
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range.
EAD socket outlets: Drivex; Fröhlich + Walter; Intracom; TAE and FCC overvoltage protection sockets: Dehn; FCC socket outlets: Dätwyler; Rutenbeck for USB data interface flush-mounted 1 knock out opening
white, glossy polar white, glossy
# 1477 02 # 1477 09
10 10
Identifies the 1st TAE socket outlet inside an apartment/property. 10 10
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range. For TAE socket outlet order no. 4487 ..
1458 02 1458 09
Central plate for 1st TAE socket outlet (Telekom)
Central plate for TAE socket outlet 6F+N white, glossy polar white, glossy
white, glossy polar white, glossy
For TAE socket outlet order no. 4487 .., 4500 .., 4544 .. For loudspeaker connection box order no. 4572 .., 4573 .. For FCC/TAE socket outlet order no. 4588 .. For USB data interface flush-mounted order no. 7504 00 04
VDo connection boxes: Rutenbeck with outlet
white, glossy polar white, glossy
Packing unit
Central plate for TAE socket outlet 6/6FF and 6/6NF and loudspeaker connection box
Centre plate for cable outlet and VDo connection box white, glossy polar white, glossy
Order no.
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range. with imprint 2 knock out openings
Centre plate for PTT socket outlet „Netherlands“ white, glossy polar white, glossy
61 1036 02 61 1036 09
10 10
universal for standard commercially available PTT socket outlets
Centre plate for RTT socket outlet „Belgium“ white, glossy polar white, glossy
67 1103 02 67 1103 09
10 10
For RTT socket outlet order no. BERT T0 1
82
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
MODUL 2 Order no.
Packing unit
Central plate for FCC socket outlet white, glossy polar white, glossy
1468 02 1468 09
10 10
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range.
For FCC socket outlet order no. 4538, 4568 For FCC socket outlet shielded order no. 4554, 4586, 4590
FCC socket outlets: Ackermann; AMP; BTR; Crack-IT; Rutenbeck; Telegärtner; Telena with 45° oblique outlet for 1gang socket outlet cat.3, cat.5e and cat.6
Central plate FCC/E-DAT design/Telekom ISDN socket outlet white, glossy polar white, glossy
1469 02 1469 09
10 10
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range.
For FCC socket outlet order no. 4539, 4562, 4592 For FCC socket outlet shielded order no. 4555, 4587, 4591
ISDN socket outlets (Rutenbeck): Telekom; FCC socket outlets: Ackermann; AMP; BTR; CobiNet; Corning; Crack-IT; CTI Netzwerksysteme; Dätwyler; EFB Electronic; eku Kabel & Systeme; Elmat; Rutenbeck; Setec; Süveg; Telegärtner; Telena with 45° oblique outlet for 2gang socket outlet cat.3, cat.5e and cat.6
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
Order no.
Packing unit
Central plate for FCC and Telekom ISDN socket outlet (IAE) white, glossy polar white, glossy
1429 02 1429 09
10 10
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range. ISDN socket outlets (ZE Kommunikationstechnik): Telekom; FCC socket outlets: Telena; ZE Kommunikationstechnik with 25° oblique outlet for 2gang socket outlet cat.3
Central plate for FCC and Telekom ISDN socket outlet (IAE) white, glossy polar white, glossy
1430 02 1430 09
10 10
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range. ISDN socket outlets (Kräcker): Telekom; FCC socket outlets: Farnell; Kräcker with 45° oblique outlet for 2gang socket outlet cat.3
Central plate for FCC/IAE/FCC-DAT 300E socket outlet white, glossy polar white, glossy
1446 02 1446 09
10 10
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range. FCC socket outlets: BTR; Farnell; Fröhlich + Walter; Krone; Schumann; Telena with 45° oblique outlet for 1gang socket outlet cat.3 and cat.6
83
MODUL 2 Order no.
Packing unit
Central plate for FCC/IAE/Telekom ISDN socket outlet white, glossy polar white, glossy
1467 02 1467 09
10 10
10 10
10 10
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range. FCC socket outlets: Ackermann; Quante; Telena
Central plate for WAEG5 and WAEG6 socket outlet with labelling field white, glossy polar white, glossy
Central plate for E-DAT plus socket outlet with labelling field 10 10
Labelling field height arranged for 6 mm P-touch strips. Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range.
with 45° oblique outlet with dust protection cover for 1gang or 2gang socket outlet cat.6
# 1489 02 # 1489 09
with 45° oblique outlet 1 knock out opening for 1gang or 2gang socket outlet cat.5
FCC socket outlets: BTR; Farnell; Fröhlich + Walter; Krone; Schumann; Telena with 45° oblique outlet for 2gang socket outlet cat.6
FCC socket outlets: BTR; Fröhlich + Walter; Telena
10 10
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range.
white, glossy polar white, glossy
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range.
1413 02 1413 09
1420 02 1420 09
Central plate for WAEG2 socket outlet
Central plate for FCC-DAT 300E socket outlet
white, glossy polar white, glossy
white, glossy polar white, glossy
FCC socket outlets: Ackermann; CobiNet; Quante; Telena with 45° oblique outlet 1 knock out opening for 1gang or 2gang socket outlet cat.3
ISDN socket outlets (BTR): Telekom; FCC socket outlets: BTR; EFB Electronic; Farnell; Fröhlich + Walter; Krone; Monacor; Telena with 45° oblique outlet for 2gang socket outlet cat.3
1478 02 1478 09
Packing unit
Central plate for FCC socket outlet
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range.
white, glossy polar white, glossy
Order no.
# 1421 02 # 1421 09
10 10
Labelling field height arranged for 6 mm P-touch strips. Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range. FCC socket outlets: Ackermann; Elmat; Süveg; Telena with 45° oblique outlet with dust protection cover for 1gang or 2gang socket outlet cat.6
Central plate for EMJ45 socket outlet white, glossy polar white, glossy
1422 02 1422 09
10 10
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range. FCC socket outlets: Telegärtner; Telena with 45° oblique outlet for 1gang or 2gang socket outlet cat.5e
84
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
MODUL 2 Order no.
Packing unit
Central plate for VAD socket outlet with labelling field white, glossy polar white, glossy
1423 02 1423 09
10 10
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range. FCC socket outlets: Lanconnect; Schumann; Telegärtner; Telena with 45° oblique outlet with dust protection cover for 1gang or 2gang socket outlet cat.6
Central plate for FCC socket outlet 1419 02 1419 09
Packing unit
Central plate for 3 MINI-COM modules
Labelling field height arranged for 6 mm P-touch strips.
white, glossy polar white, glossy
Order no.
10 10
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range. FCC socket outlets: Brand-Rex; CobiNet; Drivex; EFB Electronic; Fröhlich + Walter; Fröschel; Intracom; OTRA; Schumann; Setec; Sevex; Siemens; Sonepar; ZE Kommunikationstechnik with 40° oblique outlet for 1gang or 2gang socket outlet cat.5, cat.5e and cat.6
white, glossy polar white, glossy
1427 02 1427 09
10 10
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range. For mini jack order no. 1980, 1984, 1985 For cinch module set order no. 1989 For blank module order no. 1990 For video cinch module order no. 1992 For S-Video module order no. 1993 For VGA module order no. 1994
Modules: Panduit with supporting plate for Mini-Com jacks cat.3, cat.5e, cat.6, cat.6 10Gig for Mini-Com fibre-optic modules for Mini-Com BNC connector modules for Mini-Com 3.5 mm stereo connection/coupling modules for Mini-Com loudspeaker cables / banana plug modules for Mini-Com F-plug coupling modules for Mini-Com Cinch connection/coupling modules for Mini-Com S-Video connection/coupling modules for Mini-Com D-Subminiature connectors 15pole for Mini-Com dummy modules 1gang with 30° oblique outlet without spreader claws
Central plate for 1 or 2 single modules Reichle&De-Massari white, glossy polar white, glossy
1472 02 1472 09
10 10
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range. Modules: Reichle&De-Massari with supporting plate for connecting modules RJ45 cat.5e and cat.6 for fibre-optic modules with 30° oblique outlet without spreader claws
Central plate for double modules Reichle&De-Massari white, glossy polar white, glossy
1461 02 1461 09
10 10
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range. Modules: Diamond; Reichle&De-Massari with supporting plate for connecting modules RJ45 cat.5e and cat.6 for fibre-optic modules with 30° oblique outlet without spreader claws
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
85
MODUL 2 Order no.
Packing unit
Central plate for AMP modular jacks white, glossy polar white, glossy
1463 02 1463 09
Order no.
Packing unit
Central plate for Krone modular jacks 10 10
white, glossy polar white, glossy
1464 02 1464 09
10 10
Indexing dimension (W x H) approx. 14,7 x 20,7 mm
Indexing dimension (W x H) approx. 14,7 x 19,4 mm
Shielded versions touch each other.
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range.
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range. MT-RJ jack: AMP; Intracom; Telena; Modular jacks: CobiNet; EFB Electronic; Schumann; Standard 110 Connect jack: AMP; SL series toolless jack: AMP; SL series 110 Connect Jack: AMP; SL series toolless jack with dust protection: AMP with supporting plate for AMP modular jacks series 110 Connect cat.3, cat.5, cat.5e and cat.6 for AMP fibre-optic couplings MT-RJ jacks 2gang, with 30° oblique outlet without spreader claws
For modular jack order no. 1854 01
Modular jacks: 3M; Asyco; BTR; Dätwyler; EFB Electronic; Erni; Hubbell; ICS; Krone; Setec; Telegärtner; Thomas & Betts; Eline 600 GG45 jacks: Kerpen; Keystone Jack: Kerpen; LANmark 5, 6 and 7 (only with with Keystone-Clip): Nexans; Fibre-optic couplings: 3M; Krone; mvk with supporting plate for Krone modular jacks cat.5, cat.5e and cat.6 for Krone fibre-optic couplings MT-RJ jacks for 3M fibre-optic couplings Volition 2gang, with 30° oblique outlet without spreader claws
Central plate for Drahtex modular jacks white, glossy polar white, glossy
1462 02 1462 09
10 10
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range. Installation only possible with Drahtex mounting or coding frame. Modular jacks: CobiNet; Drahtex with supporting plate for Drahtex modular jacks cat.5, cat.5e, cat.6 and cat.7 for fibre-optic modules 2gang, with 30° oblique outlet without spreader claws
86
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
MODUL 2 Order no.
Packing unit
Central plate for IBM connecting modules GFP white, glossy polar white, glossy
1537 02 1537 09
10 10
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range. Connecting module GFP MiniC: IBM; Connecting module GFP MT-RJ coupling: IBM; Connecting module GFP RJ45: IBM with supporting plate for IBM connecting modules GFP RJ45 cat.5e and cat.6 for IBM connecting module GFP MiniC class F 600 MHz for IBM connecting module GFP MT-RJ coupling 2gang, with 30° oblique outlet without spreader claws
Central plate for LEXCOM HOME modules white, glossy polar white, glossy
1441 02 1441 09
10 10
Attention! Can only be used with intermediate ring and central plate of the corresponding range. Installation is only possible in connection with the assembly frame of Messrs. Lexel. with supporting plate 2gang, with 30° oblique outlet without spreader claws LEXCOM HOME® Registered trademark of Messrs. Lexel A/S.
1498 02 1498 09
Packing unit
Centre plate with dust protection slider and labelling field white, glossy polar white, glossy
1170 02 1170 09
10 10
Labelling field height arranged for 9 mm P-touch strips. For supporting plate 1gang order no. 4540 ..
for supporting plates with coloured mount 1gang
Centre plate with dust protection sliders and labelling field white, glossy polar white, glossy
1181 02 1181 09
10 10
Labelling field height arranged for 9 mm P-touch strips. For supporting plate 2gang order no. 4541 ..
for supporting plates with coloured mounts 2gang
Centre plate for AMP-ACO with labelling field white, glossy polar white, glossy
1180 02 1180 09
10 10
Labelling field height arranged for 9 mm P-touch strips. ACO and CO Plus inserts: AMP, order no. 0-1394581-1, 2-1394581-1; Anixter; Dr. Ing. Sieger; Schumann; Telena cat.5, cat.6 and cat.7 centre plate plug-in fixing
Central plate for AMP-ACO
Central plate for Eline and GiCon4 jacks white, glossy polar white, glossy
Order no.
10 10
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range! Installation only in conjunction with BTR and Kerpen clips. GiCon4 jacks: BTR; Eline 1200- and 250 jacks: Kerpen
white, glossy polar white, glossy
1494 02 1494 09
10 10
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range. Labelling field not usable. ACO and CO Plus inserts: AMP, order no. 0-1394580-1, 2-1394580-1, 0-0336627-3, 0-0336627-1, 2-0336627-1 cat.5, cat.6 and cat.7 central plates plug-in fixing
with supporting plate for ELine and GiCon4 sockets cat.5e, cat.6, cat.7 2gang, with 30° oblique outlet without spreader claws
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
87
MODUL 2 Order no.
Packing unit
Central plate for AMP-ACO with labelling field white, glossy polar white, glossy
1495 02 1495 09
10 10
Labelling field height arranged for 6 mm P-touch strips. Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range. ACO and CO Plus inserts: AMP, order no. 0-0336627-1, 2-0336627-1, 0-0336627-3 cat.5, cat.6 and cat.7
Central plate for fibre-optic couplings Simplex ST white, glossy polar white, glossy
1492 02 1492 09
10 10
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range. Fibre-optic couplings: Ackermann; AMP; Brand-Rex; BTR; CobiNet; Corning; Diamond; Drahtex; Huber+Suhner; Quante; Telegärtner with supporting plate with 30° oblique outlet for 2 fibre-optic couplings without spreader claws
Order no.
Packing unit
Central plate for fibre-optic couplings Duplex SC white, glossy polar white, glossy
1480 02 1480 09
10 10
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range. Fibre-optic couplings: Ackermann; AMP; Brand-Rex; BTR; CobiNet; Corning; Diamond; Drahtex; FiberCraft; Huber+Suhner; Krone; Quante; Telegärtner with supporting plate with 30° oblique outlet 1 knock out opening for 1 or 2 fibre-optic couplings without spreader claws
Central plate for round connector Ø 30 mm white, glossy polar white, glossy
# 1433 02 # 1433 09
10 10
Cut-out diameter 30 mm; Screw distance 36 mm Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range. Signalling and command units: Kraus-Naimer; Lumitas; Schlegel; Overvoltage protection devices: Dehn, order no. NM DK 280; OBO-Bettermann, order no. KNS/IS-D with supporting plate without spreader claws
Central plate for 1 D-subminiature connector white, glossy polar white, glossy
1411 02 1411 09
10 10
D-subminiature connectors see module inserts. Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range. For D-subminiature connector order no. 1834, 1835, 1839 For mounting adapter order no. 1841, 1842
with supporting plate without spreader claws
88
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
MODUL 2 Order no.
Packing unit
Central plate for 2 D-subminiature connector white, glossy polar white, glossy
1470 02 1470 09
10 10
Order no.
Messrs. Ackermann Centre plate for databus termination splitter/ empty unit polar white, glossy
D-subminiature connectors see module inserts. Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range. Labelling field not usable. For D-subminiature connector order no. 1834, 1835, 1839 For mounting adapter order no. 1841, 1842
Packing unit
1204 49
10
Nurse call system: Ackermann, clino opt 90, 99 / clino phon 95, order no. 72642B; Nurse call systems: Ackermann, clino opt 90, 99 / clino phon 95, order no. 71197A, 72639A, 72642C centre plate plug-in fixing
Centre plate for databus connection unit with plug-in opening
with supporting plate without spreader claws
polar white, glossy
1298 49
10
Communication technics Data connector housings Data connector housing with labelling field white, glossy polar white, glossy
1119 02 1119 09
10 10
Centre plate for plug-and-socket connector
Labelling field height arranged for 9 mm P-touch strips. Mounting plates see acessories order no. 1111 .., 1112 ..
with supporting plate for mounting plates without spreader claws
Central plate for double pole socket outlet for floating output 1403 02 1403 09
10 10
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range. For double pole socket outlet for floating output order no. 1061
For double pole socket outlet according to DIN 42801 with imprint
1305 49
10
Nurse call system: Ackermann, clino opt 99, order no. 74189A a-coded for dropping plug-and-socket connector centre plate plug-in fixing
1474 02 1474 09
10 10
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range. Nurse call system: Ackermann, clino opt 99, order no. 71008C3; Nurse call systems: Ackermann, clino opt 90, clino phon 95, order no. 71008C; Siedle, order no. AD 306-0; 6pole socket outlets: Hirschmann, Medu 600, Medu 600 GSK
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
white, glossy polar white, glossy
# 1476 02 # 1476 09
10 10
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range. Nurse call systems: Ackermann, clino opt 90, clino phon 95, order no. 74199A for pear push or multiple push-button for bed operator units with self-detaching plug
Centre plate with 2 plug-in openings and imprint
Central plate for 6pole socket outlet white, glossy polar white, glossy
polar white, glossy
Central plate for plug eject system
Hospital installation
white, glossy polar white, glossy
Nurse call system: Ackermann, clino opt 99, order no. 73070A centre plate plug-in fixing
polar white, glossy
1244 49
10
Nurse call system: Ackermann, clino opt 99, order no. 73020G, 73021G, 73075C, 73075D for call unit with 2 diagnostic plug-in contacts centre plate plug-in fixing
89
MODUL 2 Order no.
Packing unit
Centre plate with red call push-button at top and a plug-in opening polar white, glossy
1217 49
10
Nurse call system: Ackermann, clino opt 99, order no. 73071E, 73071E2, 73075A, 73073E for call push-button with plug-in contact for call module with call push-button and monitored auxiliary plug-in contact button with lens centre plate plug-in fixing
Centre plate with red call button and 2 plug-in openings polar white, glossy
1218 49
10
Nurse call system: Ackermann, clino opt 99, order no. 73071D, 73071D2, 73075B, 73073D for call push-button with diagnostic and auxiliary plug-in contact for call module with call push-button and plug-in contacts button with lens with imprint centre plate plug-in fixing
Centre plate with red call push-button at top polar white, glossy
1216 49
10
Nurse call system: Ackermann, clino opt 99, order no. 73071F, 73071F2, 73073F for call module with call push-button button with lens centre plate plug-in fixing
Centre plate with red call push-button at bottom polar white, glossy
1219 49
10
Nurse call system: Ackermann, clino opt 99, order no. 73022A, 73022A2 for call push-button button with lens centre plate plug-in fixing
Centre plate with green shut-off button polar white, glossy
1251 49
10
Order no.
Packing unit
Centre plate with yellow shut-off button polar white, glossy
1252 49
10
Nurse call system: Ackermann, clino opt 99, order no. 73642D for shut-off push-button button with lens centre plate plug-in fixing
Centre plate for call unit with blue doctor call button polar white, glossy
1223 49
10
Nurse call system: Ackermann, clino opt 99, order no. 73022A, 73022A2 for call push-button button with lens with imprint centre plate plug-in fixing
Centre plate with acknowledge button white polar white, glossy
1308 49
10
Nurse call system: Ackermann, clino opt 99, order no. 73640J for office unit button with lens with imprint „SU-AUS WARTEN“ centre plate plug-in fixing
Centre plate with red call button and green shut-off button polar white, glossy
1249 49
10
Nurse call system: Ackermann, clino opt 99, order no. 73642B2 for call push-button and shut-off push-button buttons with lens centre plate plug-in fixing
Centre plate with green and yellow shut-off button polar white, glossy
1253 49
10
Nurse call system: Ackermann, clino opt 99, order no. 73642E for shut-off push-button buttons with lens centre plate plug-in fixing
Nurse call system: Ackermann, clino opt 99, order no. 73642C for shut-off push-button button with lens centre plate plug-in fixing
90
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
MODUL 2 Order no.
Packing unit
Centre plate with green presence button/white acknowledge button polar white, glossy
1299 49
10
Order no.
Packing unit
Messrs. Total Walther (Zettler) Centre plate for 15pole socket outlet white, glossy polar white, glossy
1288 22 1288 29
Nurse call system: Ackermann, clino opt 99, order no. 73642B for office unit buttons with lens with imprint „SU-AUS WARTEN“ centre plate plug-in fixing
Nurse call systems: Total Walther, Zettler Medicall 800, order no. 125.891xS, 125.850xS for pear push-button, diagnostic units etc. centre plate plug-in fixing
Centre plate for pneumatic call switch with lens
Centre plate for call push-button/shut-off push-button with 15pole socket outlet
polar white, glossy
1236 49
10
Nurse call system: Ackermann, clino opt 99, order no. 70006C; Nurse call systems: Ackermann, clino opt 90, 99 / clino phon 95, order no. 70006A, 70006B centre plate plug-in fixing
1149 02 1149 09
10 10
Can be used with incandescent lamp unit with N terminal order no. 1606 01 as pullcord push-button with quiet lamp 24 V. For pullcord push-button order no. 3956 19 For pullcord switch order no. 3962, 3966, 6139 ..
Centre plate for pullcord push-button with lens polar white, glossy
1233 49
10
Nurse call systems: Ackermann, clino opt 90, 99 / clino phon 95, order no. 70045A3, 70046A, 70046A3 for pullcord push-button with pullcord and knob centre plate plug-in fixing
Centre plate for radio programme system with small sound system polar white, glossy
1300 49
10
Nurse call systems: Ackermann, clino opt 90, 99 / clino phon 95, order no. 73120C, 73120H for earpiece and volume control with imprinted symbol curve centre plate plug-in fixing
1301 49
Nurse call systems: Ackermann, clino opt 90, 99 / clino phon 95, order no. 73120A with imprint „0-1-2-3-4-5“ centre plate plug-in fixing "#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
10 10
Centre plate for call/service/cancel/doctor call push-button with 15pole socket outlet white, glossy polar white, glossy
1288 42 1288 49
10 10
Nurse call systems: Total Walther, Zettler Medicall 800, order no. 125.830xS, 125.831xS, 125.832xS for pear push-button, diagnostic units etc. centre plate plug-in fixing
Centre plate for presence push-butto/cancel push-button/personnel call push-button call/ service call and doctor call push-button
white, glossy polar white, glossy
1288 02 1288 09
10 10
Nurse call systems: Total Walther, Zettler Medicall 800, order no. 125.893xS, 125.814xS, 125.815xS, 125.816xS, 125.892xS, 125.810xS, 125.811xS, 125.812xS, 125.813xS centre plate plug-in fixing
Centre plate for presence push-button, call/ presence push-button call shut-off pushbutton etc.
white, glossy polar white, glossy
Centre plate for radio programme selector switch polar white, glossy
1288 32 1288 39
Nurse call systems: Total Walther, Zettler Medicall 800, order no. 125.840xS, 125.841xS, 125.842xS, 125.843xS for pear push-button, diagnostic units etc. centre plate plug-in fixing
Centre plate with red lens for pullcord switch and pullcord push-button white, glossy polar white, glossy
white, glossy polar white, glossy
10 10
10
1288 12 1288 19
10 10
Nurse call systems: Total Walther, Zettler Medicall 800, order no. 125.892xS, 125.893xS, 125.820xS, 125.821xS, 125.822xS, 125.823xS, 125.824xS, 125.825xS, 125.826xS, 125.827xS, 125.891xS centre plate plug-in fixing
91
MODUL 2 Order no.
Packing unit
Order no.
Packing unit
Centre plate for pneumatic call switch with quiet lamp white, glossy polar white, glossy
1288 52 1288 59
10 10
Nurse call systems: Total Walther, Zettler Medicall 800, order no. 125.860xS, 125.861xS centre plate plug-in fixing
Centre plate for buzzer white, glossy polar white, glossy
1288 62 1288 69
10 10
Nurse call systems: Total Walther, Zettler Medicall 800, order no. 125.800xS centre plate plug-in fixing
92
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
Order no.
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
Packing unit
Order no.
Packing unit
93
Surfaces Frames/covers/centre inserts Plastic, matt polar white
similar to RAL 9010
Plastic, glossy white
similar to RAL 1013
polar white
similar to RAL 9010
red
similar to RAL 3003
anthracite
similar to RAL 7021
Centre plates Plastic, matt lacquered polar white
similar to RAL 9010
Plastic, glossy
94
white
similar to RAL 1013
polar white
similar to RAL 9010
Berker S.1
Standard range Flush-mounted system
Pure, timeless, functional – the simple form of the Berker S.1 is what makes the standard range a modern classic. Winner of the iF-Award 2000 and the Good Design Award 2001, the Berker S.1 continues to impress with superior design.
■ Modular concept, ergonomic design and square shape guarantee ease of handling ■ Clean form harmonises with the most diverse surroundings and is suitable for many applications ■ Available surfaces: matt in polar white, glossy in white and polar white
95
BERKER S.1 Order no.
Packing unit
Order no.
Frames
Frame with labelling field Frame white, glossy, 1gang white, glossy, 2gang white, glossy, 3gang white, glossy, 4gang white, glossy, 5gang
1011 89 82 1012 89 82 1013 89 82 1014 89 82 1015 89 82
10 10 10 2 2
for vertical and horizontal mounting
Frame
on page T66
Packing unit
polar white, glossy, 1gang
1011 89 19
10
polar white, glossy, 2gang vertical
1012 89 19
10
polar white, glossy, 3gang vertical
1013 89 19
10
polar white, glossy, 2gang horizontal
1022 89 19
10
polar white, glossy, 3gang horizontal
1023 89 19
10
polar white, matt, 1gang polar white, matt, 2gang vertical
1011 99 19 1012 99 19
10 10
polar white, glossy, 1gang
1011 89 89
10
polar white, glossy, 2gang
1012 89 89
10
polar white, matt, 3gang vertical
1013 99 19
10
polar white, glossy, 3gang
1013 89 89
10
polar white, matt, 2gang horizontal
1022 99 19
10
polar white, glossy, 4gang
1014 89 89
2
polar white, matt, 3gang horizontal
1023 99 19
10
polar white, glossy, 5gang
1015 89 89
2
polar white, matt, 1gang polar white, matt, 2gang polar white, matt, 3gang polar white, matt, 4gang polar white, matt, 5gang
1011 99 09 1012 99 09 1013 99 09 1014 99 09 1015 99 09
10 10 10 10 2
Labelling field height arranged for 6 mm P-touch strips.
Frame with large cut-out Frame with large cut-out white, glossy
1309 89 82
10
Not suitable for surface-mounted housing. for vertical and horizontal mounting
on page T66
Frame
on page T66
red, glossy, 1gang red, glossy, 2gang red, glossy, 3gang red, glossy, 4gang red, glossy, 5gang
1011 89 62 1012 89 62 1013 89 62 1014 89 62 1015 89 62
10 2 2 2 2
For push-button 4gang order no. 7516 43 80 For push-button 4gang comfort order no. 7516 47 80 For light scene push-button 8gang order no. 7516 88 80 For push-button 3gang with RTR order no. 7566 37 80 For push-button 5gang with RTR order no. 7566 57 80
for vertical mounting
Frame with large cut-out polar white, glossy polar white, matt
for vertical and horizontal mounting for emphasising special switches, socket outlets, etc.
Contrast frame 1gang anthracite, matt
1011 99 45
More versions available upon request! on page T66
Barrier-free building based on DIN 18025
10 10
Not suitable for surface-mounted housing. on page T66
10
1309 89 89 1309 99 09
For push-button 4gang order no. 7516 43 80 For push-button 4gang comfort order no. 7516 47 80 For light scene push-button 8gang order no. 7516 88 80 For push-button 3gang with RTR order no. 7566 37 80 For push-button 5gang with RTR order no. 7566 57 80
for barrier-free construction for vertical mounting
Frame with labelling field
96
white, glossy, 1gang white, glossy, 2gang vertical
1011 89 12 1012 89 12
10 10
white, glossy, 3gang vertical
1013 89 12
10
white, glossy, 2gang horizontal
1022 89 12
10
white, glossy, 3gang horizontal
1023 89 12
10
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
BERKER S.1 Order no.
Packing unit
Surface-mounted housings
SCHUKO-socket outlets
1041 89 82 1041 89 89 1041 99 09
10 10 10
SCHUKO-socket outlet with cover plate
Installation depth 37 mm For suitable tube-entries and replacement for cable and duct entries refer to the dry surface-mounted range. Flush-mounted devices can be used with the surfacemounted housings for surface-mounted installation. with cable and duct entry entry at top and bottom possible suitable for mounting on flammable base surface
Surface-mounted housing 2gang white, glossy polar white, glossy polar white, matt
1042 89 82 1042 89 89 1042 99 09
5 5 5
on page T6
white, glossy polar white, glossy polar white, matt white, glossy, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1 polar white, glossy, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1 polar white, matt, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1
4742 89 82 4742 89 89 4742 99 09 4722 89 82
10 10 10 10
4722 89 89
10
4722 99 09
10
16 A, 250 V~
Connection terminals IEC 60884-1 with plug-in terminals
Combination switch/socket outlet
Installation depth 37 mm For suitable tube-entries and replacement for cable and duct entries refer to the dry surface-mounted range. Flush-mounted devices can be used with the surfacemounted housings for surface-mounted installation. with cable and duct entry entry at top, bottom and at each side in the middle possible for vertical and horizontal mounting suitable for mounting on flammable base surface
Surface-mounted housing 3gang white, glossy polar white, glossy polar white, matt
Packing unit
Socket outlets
Surface-mounted housing 1gang white, glossy polar white, glossy polar white, matt
Order no.
1043 89 82 1043 89 89 1043 99 09
5 5 5
SCHUKO-socket outlet with rocker switch and cover plate white, glossy polar white, glossy polar white, matt
61 4356 89 42 61 4356 89 49 61 4356 19 49
10 10 10
16 A, 250 V~ Switching current 10 A For fitting in standard wall boxes according to DIN 49073-1 Connection terminals IEC 60884-1 for vertical mounting with change-over switch without spreader claws with screw terminals
Installation depth 37 mm
SCHUKO-socket outlet with rockers switch and cover plate
For suitable tube-entries and replacement for cable and duct entries refer to the dry surface-mounted range.
white, glossy polar white, glossy polar white, matt
Flush-mounted devices can be used with the surfacemounted housings for surface-mounted installation. with cable and duct entry entry at top, bottom and at each side in the middle possible for vertical and horizontal mounting suitable for mounting on flammable base surface
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
61 4355 89 42 61 4355 89 49 61 4355 19 49
10 10 10
16 A, 250 V~ Switching current 10 A For fitting in standard wall boxes according to DIN 49073-1 Connection terminals IEC 60884-1 for vertical mounting with series switch without spreader claws with screw terminals
97
BERKER S.1 Order no.
Packing unit
SCHUKO-socket outlets
polar white, matt
white, glossy polar white, glossy polar white, matt white, glossy, without spreader claws
4754 89 82 4754 89 89 4754 99 09 61 4754 89 82
10 10 10 10
polar white, glossy, without spreader claws
61 4754 89 89
10
polar white, matt, without spreader claws
61 4754 99 09
10
white, glossy, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1 polar white, glossy, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1 polar white, matt, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1
4729 89 82
10
4729 89 89
10
4729 99 09
10
without mounting box common base, connected-through through-wiring possible without spreader claws with plug-in terminals
Combination switch/socket outlet Socket outlet without earth contact with rocker switch and cover plate
16 A, 250 V~ Switching current 10 A; Mirror depth 6 mm
61 4366 89 82 61 4366 89 89
Double SCHUKO-socket outlet, flat, with cover plate 10 10 10
socket outlet 2pole for vertical mounting with change-over switch without spreader claws with screw terminals
16 A, 250 V~
Socket outlet without earth contact with rockers switch and cover plate
Suitable for Attema (UK40 and PVK40) and Haf (H150) wall boxes.
white, glossy polar white, glossy
flat design for Attema and Haf wall boxes without spreader claws with plug-in terminals
10 10
For fitting in standard wall boxes according to DIN 49073-1 Connection terminals according to IEC 60884-1
SCHUKO-socket outlets for cable ducts SCHUKO-socket outlet combination 2gang with frame 4720 89 82 4720 89 89 4720 99 09
61 4365 89 82 61 4365 89 89
16 A, 250 V~ Switching current 10 A; Mirror depth 6 mm
Connection terminals IEC 60884-1
white, glossy polar white, glossy polar white, matt
10 10
For fitting in standard wall boxes according to DIN 49073-1 Connection terminals according to IEC 60884-1
with plug-in terminals
on page T6
Connection terminals IEC 60884-1
61 4754 89 82, 61 4754 89 89 and 61 4754 99 09 for the Netherlands!
61 4730 89 82 61 4730 89 89 61 4730 99 09
5
For installation in cable duct mounting boxes and in standard commercially available 2gang hollow wall boxes, also in 2gang flush-mounted boxes.
white, glossy polar white, glossy
For fitting in 1gang wall boxes according to DIN 49073-1 Connection terminals IEC 60884-1
4766 19 09
16 A, 250 V~ Pre-assembled cables approx. 1 m; Conductor cross-section 2,5 mm²; Installation time approx. 2 min.
16 A, 250 V~
white, glossy polar white, glossy polar white, matt
Packing unit
SCHUKO-socket outlet 3gang with cover plate
Double SCHUKO-socket outlet with cover plate
on page T6
Order no.
5 5 5
16 A, 250 V~
socket outlet 2pole for vertical mounting with series switch without spreader claws with screw terminals
For installation in cable duct mounting boxes and in standard commercially available 2gang hollow wall boxes, also in 2gang flush-mounted boxes. Connection terminals IEC 60884-1 without spreader claws 2 x 1gang, wired-through with plug-in terminals
98
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
BERKER S.1 Order no.
Packing unit
Socket outlets without earth contact
Order no.
Packing unit
Rotary dimmers
Double socket outlet without earth contact with cover plate
Cover plate with setting knob for rotary dimmer
white, glossy polar white, glossy polar white, matt
white, glossy polar white, glossy polar white, matt
61 6754 89 82 61 6754 89 89 61 6754 99 09
10 10 10
For rotary dimmer order no. 2819 .., 2830 10, 2860 10, 2875, 2885 For universal rotary dimmer order no. 2861 10 For universal rotary dimmer extension unit order no 2862 10 For rotary dimmer LV order no. 2866 10, 2873 For Tronic rotary dimmer order no. 2867 10, 2874 For rotary potentiometer 1-10 V order no. 2891 10 For push-button rotary potentiometer 1-10 V order no. 2896 10 For rotary potentiometer DALI order no. 2897
For fitting in standard wall boxes according to DIN 49073-1 Connection terminals according to IEC 60884-1 2pole without spreader claws with plug-in terminals
British Standard socket outlets Socket outlet with earth contact, British Standard 2pole switchable with cover plate 6391 99 09
white, glossy polar white, glossy polar white, matt on page T9
Equates to standard BS 1363: Part 2. For Asia! For installation into wall boxes according to BS 4662 2pole + earth rocker with switch position indicator hidden screw fastening via supporting plate in flush-mounted box 1gang with screw terminals
2gang socket outlet with earth contact, British Standard 2pole switchable with cover plate 6392 99 09
Rotary dimmer with cover plate and setting knob S.1
10
13 A, 250 V~ Bolt spacing 60,3 mm; Dimensions (L x W) 87 x 87 mm
polar white, matt, with enhanced contact protection
10 10 10
Axial dimension diameter 4 mm
16 A, 250 V~ Mirror depth 5,8 mm
polar white, matt, with enhanced contact protection
1130 89 82 1130 89 89 1130 99 09
2819 89 82 2819 89 89 2819 99 09
1 1 1
230 V~, 50 Hz 230 V incandescent and halogen lamps 60 - 400 W; LV power boosters Eb max. 10; Axial dimension diameter 4 mm Cover plate order no. 1130 .. Centre plate order no. 1134 .., 1135 .., 1137 ..
1
7
G
J
with rotary on/off switch bulb-preserving soft startup short-circuit and overload proof (fine-wire fuse) phase cut-on with screw terminals
10
13 A, 250 V~ Bolt spacing 120,6 mm; Dimensions (L x W) 87 x 147 mm Equates to standard BS 1363: Part 2. For Asia! For installation into wall boxes according to BS 4662 2pole + earth rockers with switch position indicator hidden screw fastening via supporting plate in flush-mounted box 2gang with screw terminals
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
99
Surfaces Frames
Centre plates Plastic, matt lacquered
Plastic, matt polar white lacquered aluminium anthracite
similar to RAL 9010
polar white
similar to RAL 9010
similar to RAL 9006
aluminium
similar to RAL 9006
similar to RAL 7021
anthracite
similar to RAL 7021
Frame decoration Plastic, matt polar white
similar to RAL 9010
anthracite
similar to RAL 7021
matt lacquered aluminium
similar to RAL 9006
Covers/centre inserts Plastic, matt
100
polar white
similar to RAL 9010
lacquered aluminium
similar to RAL 9006
anthracite
similar to RAL 7021
Berker B.1
Surface range Flush-mounted system
The inspired symbiosis of form and colour of the Berker B.1 allows you to create the perfect atmosphere in your rooms. The soft colours and first-rate technology are everything you could wish for.
■ The successful symbiosis of form and colour. ■ Reduced stockholding due to use of matt rockers and centre inserts from the S.1, B.1, B.3, B.7 GLAS ranges.
101
BERKER B.1 Order no.
Packing unit
Order no.
Frame with large cut-out
Frames Frame
on page T66
Frame with large cut-out
polar white, matt, 1gang polar white, matt, 2gang vertical
1011 19 09 1012 19 09
10 10
polar white, matt, 3gang vertical
1013 19 09
10
polar white, matt, 4gang vertical
1014 19 09
2
polar white, matt, 5gang vertical
1015 19 09
2
polar white, matt, 2gang horizontal
1022 19 09
10
polar white, matt, 3gang horizontal
1023 19 09
10
polar white, matt, 4gang horizontal
1024 19 09
2
polar white, matt, 5gang horizontal
1025 19 09
2
polar white, matt
1
on page T66
For push-button 4gang order no. 7516 43 80 For push-button 4gang comfort order no. 7516 47 80 For light scene push-button 8gang order no. 7516 88 80 For push-button 3gang with RTR order no. 7566 37 80 For push-button 5gang with RTR order no. 7566 57 80
for vertical mounting
Frame with large cut-out anthracite, matt
1309 16 06
1
Not suitable for surface-mounted housing.
anthracite, matt, 1gang anthracite, matt, 2gang vertical
1011 16 06 1012 16 06
10 10
anthracite, matt, 3gang vertical
1013 16 06
10
anthracite, matt, 4gang vertical
1014 16 06
2
anthracite, matt, 5gang vertical
1015 16 06
2
anthracite, matt, 2gang horizontal
1022 16 06
10
anthracite, matt, 3gang horizontal
1023 16 06
10
anthracite, matt, 4gang horizontal
1024 16 06
2
anthracite, matt, 5gang horizontal
1025 16 06
2
aluminium, matt, 1gang aluminium, matt, 2gang vertical
1011 14 04 1012 14 04
10 10
aluminium, matt, 3gang vertical
1013 14 04
10
aluminium, matt, 4gang vertical
1014 14 04
2
aluminium, matt, 5gang vertical
1015 14 04
2
aluminium, matt, 2gang horizontal
1022 14 04
10
aluminium, matt, 3gang horizontal
1023 14 04
10
aluminium, matt, 4gang horizontal
1024 14 04
2
aluminium, matt, 5gang horizontal
1025 14 04
2
Frame
on page T66
1309 19 09
Not suitable for surface-mounted housing.
Frame
on page T66
Packing unit
on page T66
For push-button 4gang order no. 7516 43 85 For push-button 4gang comfort order no. 7516 47 85 For light scene push-button 8gang order no. 7516 88 85 For push-button 3gang with RTR order no. 7566 37 85 For push-button 5gang with RTR order no. 7566 57 85
for vertical mounting
Frame with large cut-out aluminium, matt
1309 14 04
1
Not suitable for surface-mounted housing. on page T66
For push-button 4gang order no. 7516 43 85 For push-button 4gang comfort order no. 7516 47 85 For light scene push-button 8gang order no. 7516 88 85 For push-button 3gang with RTR order no. 7566 37 85 For push-button 5gang with RTR order no. 7566 57 85
for vertical mounting
Surface-mounted housings Surface-mounted housing 1gang polar white, matt anthracite, matt aluminium, matt
1041 19 09 1041 16 06 1041 14 04
10 10 10
Installation depth 37 mm For suitable tube-entries and replacement for cable and duct entries refer to the dry surface-mounted range. Flush-mounted devices can be used with the surfacemounted housings for surface-mounted installation. with cable and duct entry entry at top and bottom possible suitable for mounting on flammable base surface
102
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
BERKER B.1 Order no.
Packing unit
Order no.
Surface-mounted housing 2gang polar white, matt anthracite, matt aluminium, matt
1042 19 09 1042 16 06 1042 14 04
Packing unit
Surface-mounted housing 3gang polar white, matt anthracite, matt aluminium, matt
5 5 5
5 5 5
1053 19 09 1053 16 06 1053 14 04
Installation depth 37 mm
Installation depth 37 mm
For suitable tube-entries and replacement for cable and duct entries refer to the dry surface-mounted range.
For suitable tube-entries and replacement for cable and duct entries refer to the dry surface-mounted range. Not suitable for B.3!
With B.3 also suitable for horizontal mounting!
Flush-mounted devices can be used with the surfacemounted housings for surface-mounted installation.
Flush-mounted devices can be used with the surfacemounted housings for surface-mounted installation. with cable and duct entry entry at top, bottom and at each side in the middle possible for vertical mounting suitable for mounting on flammable base surface
Socket outlets
Surface-mounted housing 3gang polar white, matt anthracite, matt aluminium, matt
1043 19 09 1043 16 06 1043 14 04
with cable and duct entry entry at top, bottom and at each side in the middle possible for horizontal mounting suitable for mounting on flammable base surface
5 5 5
SCHUKO-socket outlets Double SCHUKO-socket outlet with frame
Installation depth 37 mm For suitable tube-entries and replacement for cable and duct entries refer to the dry surface-mounted range.
on page T6
With B.3 also suitable for horizontal mounting! Flush-mounted devices can be used with the surfacemounted housings for surface-mounted installation. with cable and duct entry entry at top, bottom and at each side in the middle possible for vertical mounting suitable for mounting on flammable base surface
polar white, matt anthracite, matt aluminium, matt polar white, matt, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1 anthracite, matt, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1 aluminium, matt, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1 aluminium/anthracite, matt, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1 (design similar to B.3) 16 A, 250 V~
4754 19 09 4754 16 06 4754 14 04 4729 19 09
10 10 10 10
4729 16 06
10
4729 14 04
10
4729 16 04
10
Surface-mounted housing 2gang polar white, matt anthracite, matt aluminium, matt
1052 19 09 1052 16 06 1052 14 04
5 5 5
For fitting in 1gang wall boxes according to DIN 49073-1 Connection terminals IEC 60884-1
Installation depth 37 mm
with plug-in terminals
For suitable tube-entries and replacement for cable and duct entries refer to the dry surface-mounted range.
Double SCHUKO-socket outlet with frame polar white, matt anthracite, matt aluminium, matt
Not suitable for B.3! Flush-mounted devices can be used with the surfacemounted housings for surface-mounted installation. with cable and duct entry entry at top, bottom and at each side in the middle possible for horizontal mounting suitable for mounting on flammable base surface
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
4150 19 09 4150 16 06 4150 14 04
10 10 10
16 A, 250 V~ on page T6
For fitting in 1gang wall boxes according to DIN 49073-1 Connection terminals IEC 60884-1 with screw terminals
103
BERKER B.1 Order no.
Packing unit
Order no.
Packing unit
Socket outlets without earth contact Double socket outlet without earth contact with frame polar white, matt anthracite, matt aluminium, matt
61 6754 19 09 61 6754 16 06 61 6754 14 04
10 10 10
16 A, 250 V~ Mirror depth 5,8 mm For fitting in standard wall boxes according to DIN 49073-1 Connection terminals according to IEC 60884-1 2pole without spreader claws with plug-in terminals
104
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
Order no.
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
Packing unit
Order no.
Packing unit
105
Surfaces Frames
Centre plates Metal, aluminium
Plastic, matt lacquered
natural anodised aluminium/anthracite
gold, anodised
anthracite
similar to RAL 7021
Covers/centre inserts aluminium/polar white Plastic, matt
polar white
similar to RAL 9010
aluminium/anthracite anthracite
similar to RAL 7021
aluminium/polar white
aluminium/polar white
polar white
polar white
similar to RAL 9010
Plastic, glossy aluminium/polar white polar white
106
Plastic, glossy
similar to RAL 9010
similar to RAL 9010
Berker B.3
Surface range Flush-mounted system
The gentle gleam of the metal and the clear lines of the Berker B.3 in real aluminium are truly impressive. The pure brilliance of the design lends your room a timeless elegance.
■ Incisive design with high-quality aluminium frame. ■ Integrates perfectly into any modern interior design style – whether in the home or office ■ Available surface combinations: aluminium/anthracite,
aluminium/polar white and gold/polar white
107
BERKER B.3 Order no.
Packing unit
Frames
Order no.
Frame with large cut-out Frame
on page T66
Packing unit
Frame with large cut-out
aluminium/polar white, 1gang
1011 39 04
10
aluminium/polar white
aluminium/polar white, 2gang
1012 39 04
10
Not suitable for surface-mounted housing.
aluminium/polar white, 3gang
1013 39 04
10
aluminium/polar white, 4gang
1014 39 04
2
aluminium/polar white, 5gang
1015 39 04
2
on page T66
1309 39 04
1
For push-button 4gang order no. 7516 43 80 For push-button 4gang comfort order no. 7516 47 80 For light scene push-button 8gang order no. 7516 88 80 For push-button 3gang with RTR order no. 7566 37 80 For push-button 5gang with RTR order no. 7566 57 80
for vertical mounting for vertical and horizontal mounting metal, aluminum profile
Frame with large cut-out aluminium/anthracite
Frame
on page T66
aluminium/anthracite, 1gang
1011 30 04
10
aluminium/anthracite, 2gang
1012 30 04
10
aluminium/anthracite, 3gang
1013 30 04
10
aluminium/anthracite, 4gang
1014 30 04
2
aluminium/anthracite, 5gang
1015 30 04
2
1309 30 04
1
Not suitable for surface-mounted housing. on page T66
For push-button 4gang order no. 7516 43 85 For push-button 4gang comfort order no. 7516 47 85 For light scene push-button 8gang order no. 7516 88 85 For push-button 3gang with RTR order no. 7566 37 85 For push-button 5gang with RTR order no. 7566 57 85
for vertical mounting
Frame with large cut-out gold, metal/polar white
for vertical and horizontal mounting metal, aluminum profile
gold, metal/polar white, 1gang
1011 30 46
10
gold, metal/polar white, 2gang
1012 30 46
10
gold, metal/polar white, 3gang
1013 30 46
10
gold, metal/polar white, 4gang
1014 30 46
2
gold, metal/polar white, 5gang
1015 30 46
2
on page T66
For push-button 4gang order no. 7516 43 80 For push-button 4gang comfort order no. 7516 47 80 For light scene push-button 8gang order no. 7516 88 80 For push-button 3gang with RTR order no. 7566 37 80 For push-button 5gang with RTR order no. 7566 57 80
for vertical mounting
Surface-mounted housings Surface-mounted housing 1gang polar white, matt anthracite, matt
for vertical and horizontal mounting metal, aluminum profile anodized
1
Not suitable for surface-mounted housing.
Frame
on page T66
1309 30 46
1041 19 09 1041 16 06
10 10
Installation depth 37 mm For suitable tube-entries and replacement for cable and duct entries refer to the dry surface-mounted range. Flush-mounted devices can be used with the surfacemounted housings for surface-mounted installation. with cable and duct entry entry at top and bottom possible suitable for mounting on flammable base surface
108
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
BERKER B.3 Order no.
Packing unit
Surface-mounted housing 2gang polar white, matt anthracite, matt
5 5
1042 19 09 1042 16 06
Installation depth 37 mm
Order no.
2gang socket outlet with earth contact, British Standard 2pole switchable with cover plate aluminium/anthracite, with enhanced contact protection
6392 24 04
For suitable tube-entries and replacement for cable and duct entries refer to the dry surface-mounted range.
13 A, 250 V~ Bolt spacing 120,6 mm; Dimensions (L x W) 87 x 147 mm
With B.3 also suitable for horizontal mounting!
Equates to standard BS 1363: Part 2.
Flush-mounted devices can be used with the surfacemounted housings for surface-mounted installation.
For Asia!
with cable and duct entry entry at top, bottom and at each side in the middle possible for vertical mounting suitable for mounting on flammable base surface
Packing unit
10
For installation into wall boxes according to BS 4662 2pole + earth rockers with switch position indicator hidden screw fastening via supporting plate in flush-mounted box 2gang with screw terminals
Surface-mounted housing 3gang polar white, matt anthracite, matt
5 5
1043 19 09 1043 16 06
Installation depth 37 mm For suitable tube-entries and replacement for cable and duct entries refer to the dry surface-mounted range. With B.3 also suitable for horizontal mounting! Flush-mounted devices can be used with the surfacemounted housings for surface-mounted installation. with cable and duct entry entry at top, bottom and at each side in the middle possible for vertical mounting suitable for mounting on flammable base surface
Socket outlets British Standard socket outlets Socket outlet with earth contact, British Standard 2pole switchable with cover plate aluminium/anthracite, with enhanced contact protection
6391 24 04
10
13 A, 250 V~ Bolt spacing 60,3 mm; Dimensions (L x W) 87 x 87 mm Equates to standard BS 1363: Part 2. For Asia! For installation into wall boxes according to BS 4662 2pole + earth rocker with switch position indicator hidden screw fastening via supporting plate in flush-mounted box 1gang with screw terminals
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
109
Centre plates
Surfaces Frames Glass, glossy, imprint on backside
Plastic, matt
polar white
similar to RAL 9010
polar white
similar to RAL 9010
black
similar to RAL 9005
anthracite
similar to RAL 7021
aluminium
similar to RAL 9006
aluminium, lacquered
similar to RAL 9006
Plastic, glossy Covers/centre inserts polar white Plastic, matt polar white
similar to RAL 9010
anthracite
similar to RAL 7021
aluminium, lacquered
similar to RAL 9006
Plastic, glossy polar white
110
similar to RAL 9010
similar to RAL 9010
Berker B.7 GLAS
Surface range Flush-mounted system
The classic form of the B. series, combined with the elegant glass of Berker B.7 Glas, imbues your living spaces with a very special appeal, with a clean design that fits perfectly into the most diverse interior styles. Take a clear view.
■ Appealing design with high-quality glass frame ■ Timeless classic form ■ Glass is a matterial that creates an exclusive look in interior design
111
BERKER B.7 GLAS Order no.
Packing unit
Order no.
NEW
Frames
on page T66
polar white, 1gang polar white, 2gang polar white, 3gang polar white, 4gang polar white, 5gang
1011 69 09 1012 69 09 1013 69 09 1014 69 09 1015 69 09
10 5 5 1 1
aluminium, 3gang aluminium, 4gang on page T66
Not suitable for surface-mounted housing.
for vertical and horizontal mounting toughened glass
for vertical and horizontal mounting toughened glass
polar white/anthracite, 1gang
# 1011 66 06
10
polar white/anthracite, 2gang
# 1012 66 06
5
polar white/anthracite, 3gang
# 1013 66 06
5
polar white/anthracite, 4gang
# 1014 66 06
1
polar white/anthracite, 5gang
# 1015 66 06
1
polar white
on page T66
NEW
10
polar white/aluminium, 2gang
# 1012 64 04
5
polar white/aluminium, 3gang
# 1013 64 04
5
polar white/aluminium, 4gang
# 1014 64 04
1
polar white/aluminium, 5gang
# 1015 64 04
1
on page T66
Glass frame with large cut-out
* 1309 66 16
2
For push-button 4gang order no. 7516 43 85 For push-button 4gang comfort order no. 7516 47 85 For light scene push-button 8gang order no. 7516 88 85 For push-button 3gang with RTR order no. 7566 37 85 For push-button 5gang with RTR order no. 7566 57 85
for vertical mounting toughened glass NEW
for vertical and horizontal mounting toughened glass
Glass frame with large cut-out aluminium
* 1309 64 14
2
Not suitable for surface-mounted housing.
Glass frame
black, 5gang
2
Not suitable for surface-mounted housing.
Not suitable for surface-mounted housing.
on page T66
1309 69 09
For push-button 4gang comfort order no. 7516 43 80, 7516 47 80 For light scene push-button 8gang order no. 7516 88 80 For push-button 3gang with RTR order no. 7566 37 80 For push-button 5gang with RTR order no. 7566 57 80
black # 1011 64 04
black, 4gang
1
for vertical mounting toughened glass
polar white/aluminium, 1gang
black, 3gang
1
Glass frame with large cut-out
Glass frame
black, 1gang black, 2gang
5
Not suitable for surface-mounted housing.
for vertical and horizontal mounting toughened glass
NEW
10 5
Glass frame with large cut-out
Not suitable for surface-mounted housing.
on page T66
aluminium, 5gang
* 1011 64 14 * 1012 64 14 * 1013 64 14 * 1014 64 14 * 1015 64 14
Not suitable for surface-mounted housing.
Glass frame
on page T66
Glass frame aluminium, 1gang aluminium, 2gang
Glass frame
Packing unit
* 1011 66 16 * 1012 66 16 * 1013 66 16 * 1014 66 16 * 1015 66 16
Not suitable for surface-mounted housing.
10 5 5 1 1
on page T66
For push-button 4gang order no. 7516 43 85 For push-button 4gang comfort order no. 7516 47 85 For light scene push-button 8gang order no. 7516 88 85 For push-button 3gang with RTR order no. 7566 37 85 For push-button 5gang with RTR order no. 7566 57 85
for vertical mounting toughened glass
for vertical and horizontal mounting toughened glass
112
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
BERKER B.7 GLAS Order no.
Packing unit
Order no.
Packing unit
Frame with large cut-out Glass frame with large cut-out polar white/anthracite
1309 66 06
2
Not suitable for surface-mounted housing. on page T66
For push-button 4gang order no. 7516 43 85 For push-button 4gang comfort order no. 7516 47 85 For light scene push-button 8gang order no. 7516 88 85 For push-button 3gang with RTR order no. 7566 37 85 For push-button 5gang with RTR order no. 7566 57 85
for vertical mounting toughened glass
Glass frame with large cut-out polar white/aluminium
1309 64 04
2
Not suitable for surface-mounted housing. on page T66
For push-button 4gang order no. 7516 43 85 For push-button 4gang comfort order no. 7516 47 85 For light scene push-button 8gang order no. 7516 88 85 For push-button 3gang with RTR order no. 7566 37 85 For push-button 5gang with RTR order no. 7566 57 85
for vertical mounting toughened glass
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
113
Surfaces Covers/centre inserts Plastic, matt polar white
similar to RAL 9010
anthracite
similar to RAL 7021
aluminium, lacquered
similar to RAL 9006
red
similar to RAL 3003
green
similar to RAL 6029
orange
similar to RAL 2003
yellow
similar to RAL 1004
Plastic, glossy
114
white
similar to RAL 1013
polar white
similar to RAL 9010
red
similar to RAL 3003
green
similar to RAL 6029
orange
similar to RAL 2003
yellow
similar to RAL 1004
Berker S.1/B.1/B.3/B.7 glas
Rockers and
centre inserts
The square design conceals a modular system structure. That means: All rockers and centre inserts shown on the following pages are colour-matched and compatible with the frames of the Berker S.1, B.1, B.3 and B.7 Glas switch ranges. For you the advantages are twofold: a wide product range with minimal stockholding.
We recommend the following colour combinations:
Standard range S.1
Rockers and centre inserts: white, glossy
polar white, matt/glossy
Frames and other devices: from page 94
Rockers and centre inserts:
Surface range B.1
polar white matt, anthracite, matt, aluminium
Frames and other devices: from page 100
Rockers and centre inserts:
Surface range B.3
for aluminium/anthracite – anthracite, matt
for aluminium/polar white – polar white, matt/
glossy
for gold/polar white - polar white, matt/glossy
Frames and other devices: from page 106
Surface range B.7
Rockers and centre inserts:
for glass/polar white – polar white, matt/glossy
for glass/black - anthracite, matt
for glass/aluminium - aluminium, matt
Frames and other devices: from page 110 115
BERKER S.1/B.1/B.3/B.7 GLAS Order no.
Packing unit
Order no.
Socket outlets
SCHUKO-socket outlet for installation in hollow-walls
SCHUKO-socket outlets SCHUKO-socket outlet
on page T6
white, glossy polar white, glossy red, glossy green, glossy orange, glossy white, glossy, without spreader claws
4743 89 82 4743 89 89 4743 89 12 4743 89 13 4743 89 14 61 4743 89 82
10 10 10 10 10 10
polar white, glossy, without spreader claws
61 4743 89 89
10
polar white, matt, without spreader claws
61 4743 19 09
10
polar white, matt anthracite, matt aluminium, matt red, matt green, matt orange, matt white, glossy, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1 polar white, glossy, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1 orange, glossy, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1 polar white, matt, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1 anthracite, matt, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1 aluminium, matt, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1 orange, matt, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1
4743 19 09 4743 16 06 4743 14 04 4743 19 12 4743 19 13 4743 19 14 4723 89 82
10 10 10 10 10 10 10
4723 89 89
10
4723 89 14
10
4723 19 09
10
4723 16 06
10
4723 14 04
10
on page T6
white, glossy polar white, glossy polar white, matt white, glossy, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1 polar white, glossy, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1 polar white, matt, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1
4743 89 52 4743 89 59 4743 19 59 4723 89 52
10 10 10 10
4723 89 59
10
4723 19 59
10
16 A, 250 V~
4723 19 14
10
16 A, 250 V~ The insert of the red, green and orange socket outlets is colour-coded. 61 4743 19 09, 61 4743 89 82 and 61 4743 89 89 for the Netherlands! Connection terminals IEC 60884-1 with plug-in terminals
Packing unit
Connection terminals IEC 60884-1 without spreader claws with plug-in terminals
SCHUKO-socket outlet
on page T6
white, glossy polar white, glossy red, glossy green, glossy orange, glossy polar white, matt anthracite, matt aluminium, matt red, matt green, matt orange, matt white, glossy, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1 polar white, glossy, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1 polar white, matt, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1 anthracite, matt, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1 aluminium, matt, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1
4143 89 82 4143 89 89 4143 89 12 4143 89 13 4143 89 14 4143 19 09 4143 16 06 4143 14 04 4143 19 12 4143 19 13 4143 19 14 4123 89 82
10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
4123 89 89
10
4123 19 09
10
4123 16 06
10
4123 14 04
10
16 A, 250 V~ The insert of the red, green and orange socket outlets is colour-coded. Connection terminals IEC 60884-1 with screw terminals
116
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
BERKER S.1/B.1/B.3/B.7 GLAS Order no.
NEW
on page T6
Packing unit
Order no.
SCHUKO-socket outlet white, glossy, enhanced * 73 4123 89 82 contact protection IEC 60884-1 polar white, glossy, * 73 4123 89 89 enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1
SCHUKO-socket outlet with labelling field 10
10 on page T6
polar white, matt, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1
* 73 4123 19 09
10
anthracite, matt, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1
* 73 4123 16 06
10
aluminium, matt, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1
* 73 4123 14 04
10
orange, matt, enhanced 73 4123 19 14 * contact protection IEC 60884-1
10
16 A, 250 V~ For South Tyrol only. Connection terminals IEC 60884-1 with screw-in lift terminals
4750 89 82 4750 89 89 4750 89 02 4750 89 03 4750 89 07 4750 19 09 4750 16 06 4750 14 04 4750 19 02 4750 19 03 4750 19 07 4749 89 82
10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
4749 89 89
10
4749 19 09
10
4749 16 06
10
4749 14 04
10
red, glossy, with imprint „EDV“
4743 89 22
10
The insert of the red, green and orange socket outlets is colour-coded.
green, glossy, with imprint „SV“
4743 89 03
10
orange, glossy, with imprint „ZSV“
4743 89 07
10
Labelling field height arranged for 6 mm P-touch strips.
red, matt, with imprint „EDV“
4743 19 22
10
green, matt, with imprint „SV“
4743 19 03
10
4743 19 07
10
orange, matt, with imprint „ZSV“
Connection terminals IEC 60884-1 with plug-in terminals
SCHUKO-socket outlet with labelling field
16 A, 250 V~ Insert colour-coded.
on page T6
Connection terminals IEC 60884-1 with plug-in terminals
SCHUKO-socket outlet 45°
on page T6
white, glossy polar white, glossy red, glossy green, glossy orange, glossy polar white, matt anthracite, matt aluminium, matt red, matt green, matt orange, matt white, glossy, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1 polar white, glossy, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1 polar white, matt, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1 anthracite, matt, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1 aluminium, matt, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1 16 A, 250 V~
SCHUKO-socket outlet with imprint
on page T6
Packing unit
white, glossy polar white, glossy polar white, matt anthracite, matt aluminium, matt
4727 89 82 4727 89 89 4727 19 09 4727 16 06 4727 14 04
10 10 10 10 10
16 A, 250 V~ Specially suited for combining several socket outlets if right angle plugs are used. Connection terminals IEC 60884-1
white, glossy, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1 polar white, glossy, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1 polar white, matt, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1 anthracite, matt, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1 aluminium, matt, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1
4149 89 82
10
4149 89 89
10
4149 19 09
10
4149 16 06
10
4149 14 04
10
16 A, 250 V~ Labelling field height arranged for 6 mm P-touch strips. Connection terminals IEC 60884-1 with screw terminals
for diagonal installation with plug-in terminals
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
117
BERKER S.1/B.1/B.3/B.7 GLAS Order no.
Packing unit
Order no.
SCHUKO-socket outlet with imprint and labelling field
on page T6
SCHUKO-socket outlet with indicator lamp, labelling field and imprint
red, glossy, with imprint „EDV“
4750 89 15
10
green, glossy, with imprint „SV“
4159 89 13
10
green, glossy, with imprint „SV“
4750 89 13
10
orange, glossy, with imprint „ZSV“
4159 89 14
10
orange, glossy, with imprint „ZSV“
4750 89 14
10
green, matt, with imprint „SV“
4159 19 13
10
red, matt, with imprint „EDV“
4750 19 15
10
orange, matt, with imprint „ZSV“
4159 19 14
10
green, matt, with imprint „SV“
4750 19 13
10
orange, matt, with imprint „ZSV“
4750 19 14
10
16 A, 250 V~ Neon lamp current 1,5 mA
on page T6
Labelling field height arranged for 6 mm P-touch strips.
16 A, 250 V~
Insert is colour-coded.
Labelling field height arranged for 6 mm P-touch strips.
Replacement neon lamp unit see module inserts / accessories order no. 1609
Insert is colour-coded.
Execution SV, ZSV to VDE 0100-710 Connection terminals IEC 60884-1
Connection terminals IEC 60884-1
with neon lamp unit with screw-in lift terminals
with plug-in terminals
SCHUKO-socket outlet with indicator lamp and imprint
on page T6
green, glossy, with imprint „SV“
4124 89 03
10
orange, glossy, with imprint „ZSV“
4124 89 07
10
green, matt, with imprint „SV“
4124 19 03
10
orange, matt, with imprint „ZSV“
4124 19 07
10
SCHUKO-socket outlet with overvoltage protection and labelling field 4108 89 82 4108 89 89 4108 89 62 4108 19 09 4108 16 06 4108 14 04 4108 19 62
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Labelling field height arranged for 6 mm P-touch strips.
Replacement neon lamp unit see module inserts / accessories order no. 1609
Execution SV, ZSV to VDE 0100-710 Connection terminals IEC 60884-1 with neon lamp unit with screw-in lift terminals
SCHUKO-socket outlet with indicator lamp and labelling field 4159 89 82 4159 89 89 4159 19 09 4159 16 06 4159 14 04
white, glossy polar white, glossy red, glossy polar white, matt anthracite, matt aluminium, matt red, matt 16 A, 250 V~, 50/60 Hz
Insert colour-coded.
white, glossy polar white, glossy polar white, matt anthracite, matt aluminium, matt
SCHUKO-socket outlets with safety device
on page T33
16 A, 250 V~ Neon lamp current 1,5 mA
on page T6
Packing unit
Overvoltage protection to EN 61643-11 and VDE 0675-6, -11 Connection terminals IEC 60884-1 with imprint with indicator LED for „on/error“ with acoustic fault signal with screw terminals
10 10 10 10 10
16 A, 250 V~ Neon lamp current 1,5 mA Labelling field height arranged for 6 mm P-touch strips. Replacement neon lamp unit see module inserts / accessories order no. 1609
Connection terminals IEC 60884-1 with neon lamp unit with screw-in lift terminals 118
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
BERKER S.1/B.1/B.3/B.7 GLAS Order no.
Packing unit
Order no.
SCHUKO-socket outlet with RCD protection switch
on page T60
white, glossy, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1 polar white, glossy, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1 polar white, matt, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1
4708 89 82
1
4708 89 89
1
SCHUKO-socket outlet with hinged cover
on page T6
SCHUKO-socket outlets on page T6
10 10 10
16 A, 250 V~ on page T6
Connection terminals IEC 60884-1 with imprint with plug-in terminals
white, glossy, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1 polar white, glossy, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1 polar white, matt, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1 anthracite, matt, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1 aluminium, matt, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1
4746 89 82
10
4746 89 89
10
4746 19 09
10
4746 16 06
10
4746 14 04
10
16 A, 250 V~
SCHUKO-socket outlet with hinged cover
on page T6
10
SCHUKO-socket outlet with hinged cover and labelling field
to protect connected and downstream loads with plug-in terminals
white, glossy, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1 polar white, glossy, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1 polar white, matt, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1 anthracite, matt, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1 aluminium, matt, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1
4144 89 89
with imprint mounting orientation of insert selectable in 45° steps when opening hinged cover, it can be arrested in end position with screw terminals
Suitable for use according to DIN VDE 0100-410 Tested conform VDE 0664 (EN 61008) Connection terminals IEC 60884-1
4751 89 82 4751 89 89 4751 19 09
10
Connection terminals IEC 60884-1
Through-wired socket outlets are also protected.
white, glossy polar white, glossy polar white, matt
4144 89 82
Specially suited for combining several socket outlets if right angle plugs are used.
16 A, 250 V~, 50/60 Hz Rated fault current 30 mA; Switch off time <= 30 ms; Short-circuit resistance 3 kA (with pre-fuse 20 AgL); Surge current firmness 250 A (8/20) µs
SCHUKO-socket outlet with hinged cover
white, glossy, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1 polar white, glossy, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1 16 A, 250 V~
1
4708 19 09
Packing unit
4744 89 82
10
Specially suited for combining several socket outlets if right angle plugs are used.
4744 89 89
10
Labelling field height arranged for 6 mm P-touch strips.
4744 19 09
10
4744 16 06
10
4744 14 04
10
Connection terminals IEC 60884-1 with imprint mounting orientation of insert selectable in 45° steps when opening hinged cover, it can be arrested in end position with plug-in terminals
Barrier-free construction
16 A, 250 V~
SCHUKO-socket outlet with hinged cover and touchable symbol socket outlet
Specially suited for combining several socket outlets if right angle plugs are used.
polar white, matt
Connection terminals IEC 60884-1 with imprint mounting orientation of insert selectable in 45° steps when opening hinged cover, it can be arrested in end position with plug-in terminals "#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
4786 19 49
10
16 A, 250 V~ on page T6
An optical accentuation can be achieved by using a contrast frame order no. 1011 99 45
Barrier-free building based on DIN 18025 Connection terminals IEC 60884-1 for barrier-free construction with plug-in terminals 119
BERKER S.1/B.1/B.3/B.7 GLAS Order no.
Packing unit
SCHUKO-socket outlet with hinged cover and touchable symbol socket outlet polar white, matt, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1 on page T6
4744 19 49
Socket outlet with earth pin
16 A, 250 V~
An optical accentuation can be achieved by using a contrast frame order no. 1011 99 45
Barrier-free building based on DIN 18025 Connection terminals IEC 60884-1 for barrier-free construction mounting orientation of insert selectable in 45° steps when opening hinged cover, it can be arrested in end position with plug-in terminals
Socket outlets without earth contact Socket outlet without earth contact white, glossy polar white, glossy polar white, matt polar white, matt, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1 anthracite, matt, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1 aluminium, matt, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1
Packing unit
Socket outlets with earth pin
10
Specially suited for combining several socket outlets if right angle plugs are used.
on page T6
Order no.
on page T6
white, glossy, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1 polar white, glossy, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1 red, glossy, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1 green, glossy, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1 polar white, matt, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1 anthracite, matt, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1 aluminium, matt, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1 red, matt, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1 green, matt, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1
67 6576 89 82
10
67 6576 89 89
10
67 6576 89 62
10
67 6576 89 63
10
67 6576 19 09
10
67 6576 16 06
10
67 6576 14 04
10
67 6576 00 62
10
67 6576 00 63
10
61 6703 89 82 61 6703 89 89 61 6703 19 09 61 6733 19 09
10 10 10 10
61 6733 16 06
10
16 A, 250 V~
61 6733 14 04
10
Connection terminals according to IEC 60884-1
16 A, 250 V~ Mirror depth 8 mm
2pole + earth with screw-in lift terminals
Connection terminals according to IEC 60884-1 2pole without spreader claws with plug-in terminals
120
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
BERKER S.1/B.1/B.3/B.7 GLAS Order no.
NEW
on page T6
Packing unit
* 67 6876 19 09
10
* 67 6876 16 06
10
aluminium, matt, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1
* 67 6876 14 04
10
red, matt, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1
* 67 6876 00 62
10
green, matt, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1
* 67 6876 00 63
10
white, glossy, enhanced 67 6876 89 82 * contact protection IEC 60884-1
10
polar white, glossy, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1
* 67 6876 89 89
10
red, glossy, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1
67 6876 89 62
10
NEW
white, glossy polar white, glossy polar white, matt 15 A, 125 V~
10 10 10
2pole + earth without spreader claws with screw terminals
Socket outlet with earth contact, USA/CANADA, NEMA 5-20 R white, glossy polar white, glossy polar white matt, lacquered
*
* 4168 89 82 * 4168 89 89 * 4168 19 09
10 10 10
Equates to standard NEMA 5-20 R 2pole + earth without spreader claws with screw terminals
10
Euro-American socket outlets NEW
Connection terminals according to IEC 60884-1 2pole + earth with plug-in terminals
British Standard socket outlets Socket outlet with earth contact, British Standard, can be switched off
aluminium, matt, with enhanced contact protection
* 4166 89 82 * 4166 89 89 * 4166 19 09
Equates to standard NEMA 5-15 R
NEW
16 A, 250 V~
polar white, matt, with enhanced contact protection anthracite, matt, with enhanced contact protection
Socket outlet with earth contact, USA/CANADA, NEMA 5-15 R
20 A, 125 V~
green, glossy, enhanced 67 6876 89 63 * contact protection IEC 60884-1
NEW
Packing unit
NEMA socket outlets
Socket outlet with earth pin polar white, matt, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1 anthracite, matt, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1
Order no.
* 6347 19 09
10
* 6347 16 06
10
Socket outlet without earth contact „Euro-American Standard“ polar white, matt, enhanced contact protection anthracite, matt, enhanced contact protection
* 33 4171 19 09
10
* 33 4171 16 06
10
aluminium, matt, enhanced contact protection
* 33 4171 14 04
10
10 A, 250 V~ Connection terminals according to IEC 60884-1
* 6347 14 04
13 A, 250 V~
10
2pole centre plate plug-in fixing without spreader claws with screw terminals
Equates to standard BS 1363: Part 2. For fitting in standard wall boxes according to DIN 49073-1 2pole + earth without neon lamp without spreader claws with screw terminals
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
121
BERKER S.1/B.1/B.3/B.7 GLAS Order no.
Packing unit
NEW
Chinese socket outlets NEW
Order no.
Socket outlet with earth contact, China polar white, matt, enhanced contact protection anthracite, matt, enhanced contact protection aluminium, matt, enhanced contact protection
* 33 4213 19 09
10
* 33 4213 16 06
10
* 33 4213 14 04
10
aluminium, matt, with enhanced contact protection
* 33 4214 19 09
10
33 4214 16 06
10
* 33 4214 14 04
10
*
10
* 51 6002 14 04
10
Rockers Rocker white, glossy polar white, glossy polar white, matt anthracite, matt aluminium, matt
1620 89 82 1620 89 89 1620 19 09 1620 16 06 1620 14 04
10 10 10 10 10
for rocker switches change-over, intermediate for rocker push-buttons for push-button BCU 1gang and group push-button BCU 1gang
2pole + earth centre plate plug-in fixing without spreader claws with screw terminals
Rocker with labelling field
* 51 6001 19 09
10
white, glossy polar white, glossy polar white, matt anthracite, matt aluminium, matt
* 51 6001 16 06
10
Labelling field height arranged for 6 mm P-touch strips for labelling with names, notes etc.
* 51 6001 14 04
10
Socket outlet with earth contact, „Indian Standard“ 10 A polar white, matt, with enhanced contact protection anthracite, matt, with enhanced contact protection aluminium, matt, with enhanced contact protection
* 51 6002 16 06
Covers for switches / push-buttons
16 A, 250 V~
NEW
10
2pole + earth centre plate plug-in fixing without spreader claws with screw-in lift terminals
Socket outlet with earth contact, China
aluminium, matt, enhanced contact protection
* 51 6002 19 09
16 A, 250 V~
2pole + earth centre plate plug-in fixing without spreader claws with screw terminals
polar white, matt, enhanced contact protection anthracite, matt, enhanced contact protection
Socket outlet with earth contact, „Indian Standard“ 16 A polar white, matt, with enhanced contact protection anthracite, matt, with enhanced contact protection
10 A, 250 V~
NEW
Packing unit
10 A, 250 V~
2pole + earth centre plate plug-in fixing without spreader claws with screw-in lift terminals
1626 89 82 1626 89 89 1626 19 09 1626 16 06 1626 14 04
10 10 10 10 10
for rocker switches change-over, intermediate for rocker push-buttons for push-button BCU 1gang and group push-button BCU 1gang
Rocker with 5 lenses attached white, glossy polar white, glossy polar white, matt anthracite, matt aluminium, matt
1621 89 82 1621 89 89 1621 19 09 1621 16 06 1621 14 04
10 10 10 10 10
Lenses with symbol for light, bell, door and neutral in clear, also neutral in red transparent. for rocker switches change-over, intermediate for rocker push-buttons for push-button BCU 1gang and group push-button BCU 1gang for illumination and monitoring circuit
122
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
BERKER S.1/B.1/B.3/B.7 GLAS Order no.
Packing unit
Order no.
Rocker with red lens and „Heizung Notschalter“ imprint red, glossy red, matt
1621 89 02 1621 19 02
Rocker with red lens and imprint „0“ white, glossy polar white, glossy polar white, matt anthracite, matt aluminium, matt
10 10
Or use glass pane protected heating emergency switch from programme ranges Arsys, flush-mounted splash-protected IP44, Aquatec IP44.
for rocker switches change-over, intermediate for rocker push-buttons for push-button BCU 1gang and group push-button BCU 1gang for monitoring circuit
Centre plate with rotary knob for rotary switch white, glossy polar white, glossy polar white, matt anthracite, matt aluminium, matt
10 10 10 10 10
Labelling field height arranged for 6 mm P-touch strips for labelling with names, notes etc. Lenses with symbol for light, bell, door and neutral in clear, also neutral in red transparent. for rocker switches change-over, intermediate for rocker push-buttons for push-button BCU 1gang and group push-button BCU 1gang for illumination and monitoring circuit
Rocker with 5 lenses attached and large labelling field white, glossy polar white, glossy polar white, matt anthracite, matt aluminium, matt
1696 89 82 1696 89 89 1696 19 09 1696 16 06 1696 14 04
10 10 10 10 10
Labelling field (w x h) approx. 50,8 x 25,5 mm Labelling field height arranged for 12 mm P-touch strips for labelling with names, notes etc. Lenses with symbol for light, bell, door and neutral in clear, also neutral in red transparent. for rocker switches change-over, intermediate for rocker push-buttons for push-button BCU 1gang and group push-button BCU 1gang for illumination and monitoring circuit
1622 89 82 1622 89 89 1622 19 09 1622 16 06 1622 14 04
1150 89 82 1150 89 89 1150 19 09 1150 16 06 1150 14 04
1 1 1 1 1
For rotary switch order no. 3862 ..
with imprint „0“ and „1“
Rockers Rockers white, glossy polar white, glossy polar white, matt anthracite, matt aluminium, matt
1623 89 82 1623 89 89 1623 19 09 1623 16 06 1623 14 04
10 10 10 10 10
for rockers switches for rockers push-buttons and group rockers pushbuttons for push-button BCU 2gang and group push-button BCU 2gang
Rockers with red lens white, glossy polar white, glossy polar white, matt anthracite, matt aluminium, matt
1627 89 82 1627 89 89 1627 19 09 1627 16 06 1627 14 04
10 10 10 10 10
for rockers switches for rockers push-buttons and group rockers pushbuttons for illumination and monitoring circuit for push-button BCU 2gang and group push-button BCU 2gang
Rockers for rockers switch 3gang on/off
Rocker with imprint „0“ white, glossy polar white, glossy polar white, matt anthracite, matt aluminium, matt
10 10 10 10 10
Rotary switches
Rocker with 5 lenses attached and labelling field 1628 89 82 1628 89 89 1628 19 09 1628 16 06 1628 14 04
1624 89 82 1624 89 89 1624 19 09 1624 16 06 1624 14 04
for rocker switch 2- and 3pole on/off for group push-button BCU 1gang for illumination and monitoring circuit
Not suitable for heating systems > 50 kW.
white, glossy polar white, glossy polar white, matt anthracite, matt aluminium, matt
Packing unit
10 10 10 10 10
white, glossy polar white, glossy polar white, matt anthracite, matt aluminium, matt
1665 89 82 1665 89 89 1665 19 09 1665 16 06 1665 14 04
10 10 10 10 10
For rockers switch 3gang on/off order no. 6330 23
for rocker switch 2- and 3pole on/off
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
123
BERKER S.1/B.1/B.3/B.7 GLAS Order no.
Packing unit
Rockers with imprinted symbol arrow white, glossy polar white, glossy polar white, matt anthracite, matt aluminium, matt
1625 89 82 1625 89 89 1625 19 09 1625 16 06 1625 14 04
Rocker with imprinted symbol arrows 1620 89 12 1620 89 19 1620 19 19 1620 16 16 1620 14 14
10 10 10 10 10
For group push-button BCU 1gang order no. 7514 11 00
1644 89 82 1644 89 89 1644 19 09 1644 16 06 1644 14 04
10 10 10 10 10
For group rockers push-button as 2pole rockers push-button for shutters with middle positions order no. 5034 04 For group push-button BCU 2gang order no. 7514 21 00
Rockers screw-on 1570 19 09 1570 16 06 1570 14 04
10 10 10
with cover plug for screw fitting for rocker switches change-over, intermediate for rocker push-buttons
Rocker screw-on with 5 lenses attached polar white, matt anthracite, matt aluminium, matt
1572 19 09 1572 16 06 1572 14 04
10 10 10
Lenses with symbol for light, bell, door and neutral in clear, also neutral in red transparent. with cover plug for screw fitting for rocker switches change-over, intermediate for rocker push-buttons for illumination and monitoring circuit
124
1573 19 09 1573 16 06 1573 14 04
10 10 10
with cover plug for screw fitting for rocker switch 2- and 3pole on/off
Rocker screw-on with red lens and imprint „0“ polar white, matt anthracite, matt aluminium, matt
1577 19 09 1577 16 06 1577 14 04
10 10 10
with cover plug for screw fitting for rocker switch 2- and 3pole on/off for illumination and monitoring circuit
polar white, matt anthracite, matt aluminium, matt
1571 19 09 1571 16 06 1571 14 04
10 10 10
with cover plug for screw fitting for rockers switches for rockers push-buttons and group rockers pushbuttons
Barrier-free construction Rocker with 5 lenses attached and mouth-held rod polar white, matt
Rocker screw-on polar white, matt anthracite, matt aluminium, matt
polar white, matt anthracite, matt aluminium, matt
Rockers screw-on
Rockers with imprinted symbol arrows white, glossy polar white, glossy polar white, matt anthracite, matt aluminium, matt
Packing unit
Rocker screw-on with imprint „0“ 10 10 10 10 10
For rockers switch for shutters order no. 3035 20 For rockers push-button for shutters order no. 5035 20 For push-button BCU 2gang order no. 7514 20 00
white, glossy polar white, glossy polar white, matt anthracite, matt aluminium, matt
Order no.
1661 19 49
10
Lenses with symbol for light, bell, door and neutral in clear, also neutral in red transparent. An optical accentuation can be achieved by using a contrast frame order no. 1011 99 45
Barrier-free building based on DIN 18025 for barrier-free construction for rocker switches change-over, intermediate for rocker push-buttons for push-button BCU 1gang and group push-button BCU 1gang for illumination and monitoring circuit
Rocker with red lens and touchable symbol light polar white, matt
1651 19 49
10
An optical accentuation can be achieved by using a contrast frame order no. 1011 99 45
Barrier-free building based on DIN 18025 for barrier-free construction for rocker switches change-over, intermediate for rocker push-buttons for illumination and monitoring circuit for push-button BCU 1gang and group push-button BCU 1gang
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
BERKER S.1/B.1/B.3/B.7 GLAS Order no.
Packing unit
Rocker with red lens and touchable symbol bell polar white, matt
1651 19 59
10
Packing unit
3-step switches Centre plate with rotary knob for 3-step switch 1084 89 82
1
An optical accentuation can be achieved by using a contrast frame order no. 1011 99 45
white, glossy, without 0-position polar white, glossy, without 0-position
1084 89 89
1
Barrier-free building based on DIN 18025
polar white, matt, without 0-position
1084 19 09
1
anthracite, matt, without 0-position
1084 16 06
1
aluminium, matt, without 0-position
1084 14 04
1
white, glossy, with neutral-position
1096 89 82
1
polar white, glossy, with neutral-position
1096 89 89
1
polar white, matt, with neutral-position
1096 19 09
1
anthracite, matt, with neutral-position
1096 16 06
1
aluminium, matt, with neutral-position
1096 14 04
1
for barrier-free construction for illuminated rocker push-buttons for push-button BCU 1gang
Rocker with red lens and touchable symbol door polar white, matt
1651 19 69
10
An optical accentuation can be achieved by using a contrast frame order no. 1011 99 45
Barrier-free building based on DIN 18025 for barrier-free construction for illuminated rocker push-buttons for push-button BCU 1gang
Hotel card switch Hotel card switch cover with imprint and red lens
on page T6
Order no.
white, glossy polar white, glossy polar white, matt anthracite, matt aluminium, matt
1640 89 82 1640 89 89 1640 19 09 1640 16 06 1640 14 04
10 10 10 10 10
Max. card width 54 mm; Card strength 0,5 - 1,4 mm Other imprint on request! For push-button insert for hotel card switch covers order no. 5051 02, 5051 03, 5052 01, 5056 01
Pullcord switches/pullcord push-buttons Centre plate for pullcord switch and pullcord push-button white, glossy polar white, glossy polar white, matt anthracite, matt aluminium, matt
1146 89 82 1146 89 89 1146 19 09 1146 16 06 1146 14 04
10 10 10 10 10
For 3-step switch with 0-position order no. 3861 For 3-step switch without 0-position order no. 3861 01
with imprint
Rotary switches/rotary push-buttons for shutters Centre plate with rotary knob for rotary switch for shutters white, glossy polar white, glossy polar white, matt anthracite, matt aluminium, matt
1080 89 82 1080 89 89 1080 19 09 1080 16 06 1080 14 04
1 1 1 1 1
Interlock disk for conversion to push-button see module inserts order no. 1861 Rotary switch for shutters order no. 3841, 3842
with imprint
For pullcord push-button order no. 3956 19 For pullcord switch order no. 3962, 3966, 6139 ..
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
125
BERKER S.1/B.1/B.3/B.7 GLAS Order no.
Packing unit
Key switches/key push-buttons for shutters
Packing unit
Key switches/key push-buttons
Centre plate with lock for key switch for shutters
Centre plate for key switch/key push-button white, glossy polar white, glossy polar white, matt anthracite, matt aluminium, matt
1507 89 82 1507 89 89 1507 19 09 1507 16 06 1507 14 04
10 10 10 10 10
white, glossy, key removable in mid position
1081 89 82
1
polar white, glossy, key removable in mid position polar white, matt, key removable in mid position anthracite, matt, key removable in mid position aluminium, matt, key removable in mid position white, glossy, key removable in 3 positions
1081 89 89
1
1081 19 09
1
1082 89 82
1
50 x 50 mm centre plate for RCD protection switch
polar white, glossy, key removable in 3 positions
1082 89 89
1
polar white, matt, key removable in 3 positions
1082 19 09
1
white, glossy polar white, glossy polar white, matt/velvety anthracite, matt aluminium, matt
1081 16 06
1
1081 14 04
1
For key switch order no. 3826 10 For key push-button order no. 3856 20
for profile half cylinders for master-key systems
Blank plates Blank plate with centre plate
white, glossy, key removable in mid position
1083 89 82
1
polar white, glossy, key removable in mid position polar white, matt, key removable in mid position
1083 89 89
1
1083 19 09
1
For key switch for shutters order no. 3851, 3852
with imprint only push-button function with 2 keys
Centre plate for key switch/key push-button for shutters 10 10 10 10 10
Profile half cylinders see module inserts. For key switch for shutters order no. 3822 10 For key push-button for shutters order no. 3831 10, 3832 10
with imprint for profile half cylinders for master-key systems
1 1 1 1 1
For RCD protection switch order no. 2844
Centre plate with lock for key switch for shutters
1506 89 82 1506 89 89 1506 19 09 1506 16 06 1506 14 04
1493 02 1493 09 1493 19 09 1493 16 06 1493 14 04
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for 50 x 50 mm centre plate of the corresponding range.
with imprint with push lock function with 2 keys
white, glossy polar white, glossy polar white, matt anthracite, matt aluminium, matt
Profile half cylinders see module inserts.
RCD protection switch
For key switch for shutters order no. 3851, 3852
126
Order no.
white, glossy, without base and spreader claws polar white, glossy, without base and spreader claws polar white, matt, without base and spreader claws anthracite, matt, without base and spreader claws aluminium, matt, without base and spreader claws white, glossy, with base and spreader claws polar white, glossy, with base and spreader claws polar white, matt, with base and spreader claws anthracite, matt, with base and spreader claws aluminium, matt, with base and spreader claws
1009 89 82
20
1009 89 89
20
1009 19 09
20
1009 16 06
20
1009 14 04
20
67 1009 89 82
10
67 1009 89 89
10
67 1009 19 09
10
67 1009 16 06
10
67 1009 14 04
10
on supporting plate without cut-out centre plate plug-in fixing
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
BERKER S.1/B.1/B.3/B.7 GLAS Order no.
Packing unit
Order no.
Packing unit
Blank plate with centre plate and screw-fixing
Info pilot lamp cover with 5 label sheets
white, glossy polar white, glossy polar white, matt anthracite, matt aluminium, matt
white, glossy polar white, glossy polar white, matt anthracite, matt aluminium, matt
1009 89 12 1009 89 19 1009 19 19 1009 16 16 1009 14 14
20 20 10 10 10
on supporting plate with large cut-out for customised cut-outs or holes when installing special solutions space-saving for relays, etc. with cover plug for screw fitting without spreader claws
Pilot lamps Centre plate for push-button and pilot lamp E10 white, glossy polar white, glossy polar white, matt anthracite, matt aluminium, matt
1124 89 82 1124 89 89 1124 19 09 1124 16 06 1124 14 04
10 10 10 10 10
Cut-out diameter 27,2 mm Push-buttons, LEDs, neon lamps and covers see module inserts. For push-button and pilot lamp E10 order no. 5101 ..
centre plate plug-in fixing
1198 89 82 1198 89 89 1198 19 09 1198 16 06 1198 14 04
1 1 1 1 1
Current input 25 mA; LED output 800 mW Labels supplied: „Nicht eintreten“, „Besetzt“, „Bitte eintreten“, „Bitte Ruhe“, „Bitte warten“. Coloured cover plate see module inserts order no. 1289 .. For insert info pilot lamp order no. 2949
with 4 light intensity LED very long LED lifetime with clear cover plate
Intercom device Centre plate for voice section insert polar white, matt anthracite, matt aluminium, matt
1733 19 09 1733 16 06 1733 14 04
1 1 1
The Ritto flush-mounted intercom insert and control insert are installed in 2 wall boxes. The control insert with integral TwinBus coupling unit is covered with a 2gang push-button. Operation at the push-button: talk, mute, switch light, open door. For double combinations an additional 2gang pushbutton is required, order no. 7516 ..
Centre plate for pilot lamp E14 white, glossy polar white, glossy polar white, matt anthracite, matt aluminium, matt
on page T29
1345 89 82 1345 89 89 1345 19 09 1345 16 06 1345 14 04
10 10 10 10 10
Flush-mounting inserts for intercom points for switch systems: Ritto, TwinBus, order no. 17133/00 with microphone and loudspeaker with labelling field insert for push-button 2gang printed with symbols for talk and open door
LEDs, incandescent lamps and covers see module inserts. For pilot lamp E14 order no. 5131 02 NEW
Cover for LED orientation light and LED signal light transparent
* 1248 19 00
1
For LED orientation light order no. 2951 For LED signal light order no. 2952
with printed labels „Bitte warten / Bitte eintreten“ and „Do not disturb / make up room“ with milky foil, for individual labelling
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
127
BERKER S.1/B.1/B.3/B.7 GLAS Order no.
Packing unit
Order no.
timers
Easy timer with display Centre plate with setting knob for mechanical timer white, glossy, max. 15 minutes
1632 89 82
1
polar white, glossy, max. 15 minutes
1632 89 89
1
polar white, matt, max. 15 minutes
1632 19 09
1
anthracite, matt, max. 15 minutes
1632 16 06
1
aluminium, matt, max. 15 minutes
1632 14 04
1
white, glossy, max. 120 minutes
1633 89 82
1
polar white, glossy, max. 120 minutes
1633 89 89
1
polar white, matt, max. 120 minutes
1633 19 09
1
anthracite, matt, max. 120 minutes
1633 16 06
1
aluminium, matt, max. 120 minutes
1633 14 04
1
on page T7
Per programme block 2 switching times for „on/off“; Power reserve approx. 4 hrs., maintenance-free; Operating temperature 5 - 35 °C
simple programming of switching times with quick programming mode can be programmed up to 4 hours after pulling from the insert 2 programme blocks Mon. - Fri. and Sat. - Sun. with automatic summer-/winter time switching (can be switched off) large-area display with symbols display of next switching time with slide switch for manual/automatic
10 10 10 10 10
on page T7
white, glossy polar white, glossy polar white, matt anthracite, matt aluminium, matt
1736 89 82 1736 89 89 1736 19 09 1736 16 06 1736 14 04
1 1 1 1 1
Switching times 18 for on/off; Random generator +/- 15 min.; Astronomic time shift +/- 2 hrs.; Power reserve approx. 24 hrs.; Countdown function 0 - 23 hrs. 59 min.
Axial dimension diameter 4 mm
For manual and timer programmed switching of electrical loads.
for order no. 2948 10
For insert for timer order no. 2948
with imprint with clear lens
1 1 1 1 1
Timer with display
Centre plate with push-button for timer relay switch insert white, glossy polar white, glossy polar white, matt anthracite, matt aluminium, matt
1735 89 82 1735 89 89 1735 19 09 1735 16 06 1735 14 04
For insert for timer order no. 2948
with time scale imprint
1674 89 82 1674 89 89 1674 19 09 1674 16 06 1674 14 04
white, glossy polar white, glossy polar white, matt anthracite, matt aluminium, matt
For manual and timer programmed switching of electrical loads.
Mechanical timer 15 minutes order no. 2040 Mechanical timer 120 minutes order no. 2041
128
Packing unit
with imprint in German with pre-set base programme 2 independent programme memories for everyday/ holidays with week and day programme with slide switch from summer to winter time astro programme for sunrise/sundown switching large-area display with symbols with slide switch for manual/automatic
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
BERKER S.1/B.1/B.3/B.7 GLAS Order no.
Packing unit
on page T7
1738 89 82 1738 89 89 1738 19 09 1738 16 06 1738 14 04
1 1 1 1 1
Setting range twilight approx. 6 - 300 Lux; Switching times 18 for on/off; Random generator +/- 15 min.; Astronomic time shift +/- 2 hrs.; Power reserve approx. 24 hrs.; Countdown function 0 - 23 hrs. 59 min.
NEW
polar white, matt anthracite, matt on page T10
aluminium, matt
* 1765 89 82 * 1765 89 89 * 1765 19 09 * 1765 16 06 * 1765 14 04
1 1 1 1 1
For universal series touch dimmer order no. 2901
for 2 independent lighting groups with 2-push-buttons operation concept per series
For RolloTec brightness sensors order no. 0169, 0184 For insert for timer order no. 2948
with imprint in German with pre-set base programme 2 independent programme memories for everyday/ holidays with week and day programme with slide switch from summer to winter time astro programme for sunrise/sundown switching large-area display with symbols with slide switch for manual/automatic for sensor connection to socket contact or terminal block connected RolloTec brightness sensor can be used for twilight-controlled switching-on
Rotary dimmers Centre plate with setting knob for rotary dimmer 1137 89 82 1137 89 89 1137 19 09 1137 16 06 1137 14 04
Button for universal series touch dimmer white, glossy polar white, glossy
For manual and timer programmed switching of electrical loads.
white, glossy polar white, glossy polar white, matt anthracite, matt aluminium, matt
Packing unit
Universal series touch dimmers
Timer with display and sensor connection white, glossy polar white, glossy polar white, matt anthracite, matt aluminium, matt
Order no.
10 10 10 10 10
BLC Berker Light Control Buttons BLC button
on page T12
white, glossy polar white, glossy polar white, matt anthracite, matt aluminium, matt
1761 89 82 1761 89 89 1761 19 09 1761 16 06 1761 14 04
1 1 1 1 1
For BLC universal touch dimmer order no. 2902 For BLC touch control unit 1-10 V order no. 2903 For BLC touch dimmer LV order no. 2904 For BLC triac switch insert LV order no. 2905 for BLC relay switch insert order no. 2906 For BLC relay switch insert with potential-free contact order no. 2906 10 For BLC extension unit order no 2907 For BLC relay switch insert HVAC order no. 2912 For magnetic contact order no. 2916, 2934 10
with 2-push-buttons operation concept start-up brightness will be stored after power failure with BLC relay switch insert HVAC used as timer as well
Axial dimension diameter 4 mm For rotary dimmer order no. 2819 .., 2830 10, 2860 10, 2875, 2885 For universal rotary dimmer order no. 2861 10 For universal rotary dimmer extension unit order no 2862 10 For rotary dimmer LV order no. 2866 10, 2873 For Tronic rotary dimmer order no. 2867 10, 2874 For rotary potentiometer 1-10 V order no. 2891 10 For push-button rotary potentiometer 1-10 V order no. 2896 10 For rotary potentiometer DALI order no. 2897
Speed controllers Centre plate with setting knob for speed controller white, glossy polar white, glossy polar white, matt anthracite, matt aluminium, matt
1137 89 22 1137 89 29 1137 19 29 1137 16 26 1137 14 24
10 10 10 10 10
Axial dimension diameter 4 mm For speed controller order no. 2968 01
with imprinted symbol curve
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
129
BERKER S.1/B.1/B.3/B.7 GLAS Order no.
Packing unit
Radio buttons
Order no.
BLC Controllers BLC radio button
on page T12
Packing unit
white, glossy polar white, glossy polar white, matt anthracite, matt aluminium, matt
BLC controller 180 1760 89 82 1760 89 89 1760 19 09 1760 16 06 1760 14 04
1 1 1 1 1
Radio signal reception frequency 433,42 MHz; Learnable radio transmitters 30 Extension unit operation with BLC extension unit and push-button (NO) possible as of release R2.1. For actuation via button and radio transmitter. For BLC universal touch dimmer order no. 2902 For BLC touch control unit 1-10 V order no. 2903 For BLC touch dimmer LV order no. 2904 For BLC triac switch insert LV order no. 2905 for BLC relay switch insert order no. 2906 For BLC relay switch insert with potential-free contact order no. 2906 10 For BLC relay switch insert HVAC order no. 2912 For BLC Tronic switch insert order no. 2916
with 2-push-buttons operation concept with 5 light scenes for „on/off“, dimming value retrieving light scenes only by using radio transmitter radio signal of taught-in radio controllers causes switch on for 1 min. (retriggering) start-up brightness will be stored after power failure reset function (to factory setting)
on page T15
white, glossy polar white, glossy polar white, matt anthracite, matt aluminium, matt
1783 89 82 1783 89 89 1783 19 09 1783 16 06 1783 14 04
1 1 1 1 1
Nominal mounting height 1,1 m; Range frontal approx. 10 m; Range lateral each approx. 6 m; Detection field semi-oval shaped approx. 10 x 12 m; Detection angle 180 °; Detection levels 2; Switching segments 72; Response sensitivity programmable approx. 20 - 100 % ; Response brightness adjustable approx. 0 - 80 / unlimited Lux; Delay time approx. 2 min.; Operating temperature -20 - +45 °C; Dimensions assembling height 23,5 mm Switches on for the duration of the controller delay time in case minimum response brightness level is infringed and if movement of people is detected. In conjunction with a BLC relay switch unit HVAC, the HVAC-channel is also switched on for the duration of its delay time independent of response brightness. For BLC universal touch dimmer order no. 2902 For BLC touch control unit 1-10 V order no. 2903 For BLC touch dimmer LV order no. 2904 For BLC triac switch insert LV order no. 2905 for BLC relay switch insert order no. 2906 For BLC relay switch insert with potential-free contact order no. 2906 10 For BLC controller extension unit order no. 2908 For BLC relay switch insert HVAC order no. 2912 For BLC Tronic switch insert order no. 2916 For BLC stair light time switching impulse insert order no. 2934 10
U with cover to limit detection angle to 90°
130
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
BERKER S.1/B.1/B.3/B.7 GLAS Order no.
Packing unit
Order no.
BLC controller 180 comfort with slide switch for off/automatic/on
on page T15
white, glossy polar white, glossy polar white, matt anthracite, matt aluminium, matt
1784 89 82 1784 89 89 1784 19 09 1784 16 06 1784 14 04
1 1 1 1 1
Nominal mounting height 1,1 m; Range frontal approx. 10 m; Range lateral each approx. 6 m; Detection field semi-oval shaped approx. 10 x 12 m; Detection angle 180 °; Detection levels 2; Switching segments 72; Response sensitivity programmable approx. 20 - 100 % ; Response brightness adjustable approx. 0 - 80 / unlimited Lux; Delay time adjustable approx. 10 sec.- 30 min. ; Time to dim down 30 sec.; Step operation 0,5 sec.; Immunity time approx. 3 sec.; Operating temperature -20 - +45 °C; Dimensions assembling height 23,5 mm Switches on for the duration of the delay time set on the controller in case minimum response brightness level is infringed and if movement of people is detected. In conjunction with a BLC relay switch unit HVAC, the HVAC-channel is also switched on for the duration of its delay time independent of response brightness. For BLC universal touch dimmer order no. 2902 For BLC touch control unit 1-10 V order no. 2903 For BLC touch dimmer LV order no. 2904 For BLC triac switch insert LV order no. 2905 for BLC relay switch insert order no. 2906 For BLC relay switch insert with potential-free contact order no. 2906 10 For BLC controller extension unit order no. 2908 For BLC relay switch insert HVAC order no. 2912 For BLC Tronic switch insert order no. 2916 For BLC stair light time switching impulse insert order no. 2934 10
U
Packing unit
BLC controller 180
on page T15
white, glossy polar white, glossy polar white, matt anthracite, matt aluminium, matt
1786 89 82 1786 89 89 1786 19 09 1786 16 06 1786 14 04
1 1 1 1 1
Nominal mounting height 2,2 m; Range frontal approx. 12 m; Range lateral each approx. 6 m; At assembly height 1,1 m; Range frontal approx. 6 m; Range lateral each approx. 3 m; Detection field semi-oval shaped approx. 12 x 12 m; Detection angle 180 °; Detection levels 3; Switching segments 104; Response sensitivity programmable approx. 20 - 100 % ; Response brightness adjustable approx. 0 - 80 / unlimited Lux; Delay time approx. 2 min.; Operating temperature -20 - +45 °C; Dimensions assembling height 23,5 mm Switches on for the duration of the controller delay time in case minimum response brightness level is infringed and if movement of people is detected. In conjunction with a BLC relay switch unit HVAC, the HVAC-channel is also switched on for the duration of its delay time independent of response brightness. For BLC universal touch dimmer order no. 2902 For BLC touch control unit 1-10 V order no. 2903 For BLC touch dimmer LV order no. 2904 For BLC triac switch insert LV order no. 2905 for BLC relay switch insert order no. 2906 For BLC relay switch insert with potential-free contact order no. 2906 10 For BLC controller extension unit order no. 2908 For BLC relay switch insert HVAC order no. 2912 For BLC Tronic switch insert order no. 2916 For BLC stair light time switching impulse insert order no. 2934 10
V with cover to limit detection angle to 90°
microprocessor controlled mode of oper.(detection signal evaluation and interfering signal suppres.) glare-proof e.g. against a torch no switching with unforeseeable short shadows with adaptive sensitivity adjustment with teach function for response brightness step operation with immunity time (e.g. for bell) switch-on brightness in conjunction with BLC dimmer inserts can only be saved via BLC extension unit with dimming function (soft-off) when using BLC dimmer inserts with cover to limit detection angle to 90°
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
131
BERKER S.1/B.1/B.3/B.7 GLAS Order no.
Packing unit
BLC controller 180 comfort with slide switch for off/automatic/on
on page T15
white, glossy polar white, glossy polar white, matt anthracite, matt aluminium, matt
1787 89 82 1787 89 89 1787 19 09 1787 16 06 1787 14 04
Switches on for the duration of the delay time set on the controller in case minimum response brightness level is infringed and if movement of people is detected. In conjunction with a BLC relay switch unit HVAC, the HVAC-channel is also switched on for the duration of its delay time independent of response brightness. For BLC universal touch dimmer order no. 2902 For BLC touch control unit 1-10 V order no. 2903 For BLC touch dimmer LV order no. 2904 For BLC triac switch insert LV order no. 2905 for BLC relay switch insert order no. 2906 For BLC relay switch insert with potential-free contact order no. 2906 10 For BLC controller extension unit order no. 2908 For BLC relay switch insert HVAC order no. 2912 For BLC Tronic switch insert order no. 2916 For BLC stair light time switching impulse insert order no. 2934 10
V microprocessor controlled mode of oper.(detection signal evaluation and interfering signal suppres.) glare-proof e.g. against a torch no switching with unforeseeable short shadows with adaptive sensitivity adjustment with teach function for response brightness step operation with immunity time (e.g. for bell) switch-on brightness in conjunction with BLC dimmer inserts can only be saved via BLC extension unit with dimming function (soft-off) when using BLC dimmer inserts with cover to limit detection angle to 90°
Packing unit
Thermostats NEW
1 1 1 1 1
Nominal mounting height 2,2 m; Range frontal approx. 12 m; Range lateral each approx. 6 m; At assembly height 1,1 m; Range frontal approx. 6 m; Range lateral each approx. 3 m; Detection field semi-oval shaped approx. 12 x 12 m; Detection angle 180 °; Detection levels 3; Switching segments 104; Response sensitivity programmable approx. 20 - 100 % ; Response brightness adjustable approx. 0 - 80 / unlimited Lux; Delay time adjustable approx. 10 sec.- 30 min. ; Time to dim down 30 sec.; Step operation 0,5 sec.; Immunity time approx. 3 sec.; Operating temperature -20 - +45 °C; Dimensions assembling height 23,5 mm
132
Order no.
Room thermostat with NC contact, centre plate, rocker switch and LED white, glossy polar white, glossy polar white, matt
on page T34
anthracite, matt aluminium, matt
* 2030 89 82 * 2030 89 89 * 2030 19 09 * 2030 16 06 * 2030 14 04
1 1 1 1 1
5 - 30 °C, 50/60 Hz Rated voltage 250 V~; Switching current 10 A; Inductive load at cos φ 0,6 max. 4 A; Switching temperature difference approx. 0,5 °C; Night lowering approx. 4 °C Neutral conductor necessary! If the pre-set temperature is reached the contact opens. Replacement centre plate order no. 1671 1.., 1671 89 .. Suitable valve drive order no. 7590 00 76
with imprint setting knob with temperature range limitation with on/off switch and indicator LED for „on“ with thermal return with separate connection for night lowering e.g. for valve drives closed in de-energized state without spreader claws with plug-in terminals NEW
Room thermostat 24 V with NC contact, centre plate, rocker switch and LED white, glossy polar white, glossy polar white, matt
on page T34
anthracite, matt aluminium, matt
* 2031 89 82 * 2031 89 89 * 2031 19 09 * 2031 16 06 * 2031 14 04
1 1 1 1 1
5 - 30 °C, 50/60 Hz Rated voltage 24 V~; Switching current 10 A~; Rated voltage 24 V=; Switching current 4 A=; Switching temperature difference approx. 0,5 °C; Night lowering approx. 4 °C If the pre-set temperature is reached the contact opens. Replacement centre plate order no. 1671 1.., 1671 89 .. Suitable valve drive order no. 7590 00 77
with imprint setting knob with temperature range limitation with on/off switch and indicator LED for „on“ with control LED for „on“ with thermal return with separate connection for night lowering e.g. for valve drives closed in de-energized state without spreader claws with plug-in terminals
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
BERKER S.1/B.1/B.3/B.7 GLAS Order no.
Packing unit
Centre plate with setting knob, rocker and lens for room thermostat with NC contact white, glossy polar white, glossy polar white, matt anthracite, matt aluminium, matt
1671 89 82 1671 89 89 1671 19 09 1671 16 06 1671 14 04
1 1 1 1 1
with imprint setting knob with temperature range limitation
Room thermostat with change-over and centre plate white, glossy polar white, glossy polar white, matt
on page T34
anthracite, matt aluminium, matt
* 2026 89 82 2026 89 89
* * 2026 19 09 * 2026 16 06 * 2026 14 04
1 1 1 1 1
5 - 30 °C, 50/60 Hz Rated voltage 250 V~; Switching current „heating“ 10 A (4 A at cosphi=0,6); Switching current „cooling“ 5 A (2 A at cosphi=0,6); Switching temperature difference approx. 0,5 °C Neutral conductor necessary! If the pre-set temperature is reached the contact changes. Replacement centre plate order no. 1670 1.., 1670 89 .. Suitable valve drive order no. 7590 00 76
Centre plate with setting knob for room thermostat with change-over contact 1670 89 82 1670 89 89 1670 19 09 1670 16 06 1670 14 04
Floor thermostat with NO contact, centre plate, rocker switch, 2 LEDs and floor temperature sensor
white, glossy polar white, glossy on page T34
Packing unit
polar white, matt anthracite, matt
* 2034 89 82 * 2034 89 89 * 2034 19 09 * 2034 16 06 * 2034 14 04
1 1 1 1 1
10 - 50 °C, 50/60 Hz Rated voltage 250 V~; Switching current 10 A; Switching temperature difference approx. 1 °C; Night lowering approx. 5 °C; Sensor cable length 4 m Neutral conductor necessary! If the pre-set temperature is reached the contact closes. Replacement floor temperature sensor / remote sensor order no. 0161 Replacement centre plate order no. 1672 1.., 1672 89 .. Suitable valve drive order no. 7590 00 76
with imprint setting knob with temperature range limitation with on/off switch and 2 LEDs with LED for heating and LED for night lowering with separate connection for night lowering e.g. for valve drives closed in de-energized state without spreader claws with plug-in terminals
Centre plate with setting knob, rocker and lenses for floor temperature thermostat
with imprint setting knob with temperature range limitation for heating or cooling mode e.g. for valve drives closed in de-energized state with thermal return without spreader claws with plug-in terminals
white, glossy polar white, glossy polar white, matt anthracite, matt aluminium, matt
NEW
aluminium, matt
Replacement demand for order no. 2030 1.., 2030 89 8.., 2031 1.., 2031 89 8..
NEW
Order no.
1 1 1 1 1
white, glossy polar white, glossy polar white, matt anthracite, matt aluminium, matt
1672 89 82 1672 89 89 1672 19 09 1672 16 06 1672 14 04
1 1 1 1 1
Replacement demand for order no. 2034 1.., 2034 89 8..
with imprint setting knob with temperature range limitation
Replacement demand for order no. 2026 1.., 2026 89 8..
with imprint setting knob with temperature range limitation
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
133
BERKER S.1/B.1/B.3/B.7 GLAS Order no.
NEW
Thermostat time-controlled with NO contact and centre plate white, glossy polar white, glossy polar white, matt
on page T35
Packing unit
anthracite, matt aluminium, matt
* 2043 89 82 * 2043 89 89 * 2043 19 09 * 2043 16 06 * 2043 14 04
Order no.
Packing unit
Sensor insert Central plate for sensor insert
1 1
white, glossy polar white, glossy polar white, matt/velvety anthracite, matt aluminium, matt
1 1 1
0 - 40 °C, 50/60 Hz Rated voltage 230 V~; Switching current 8 A; Inductive load at cos φ 0,6 max. 2 A; Switching temperature difference approx. 0,5 °C; Time ranges 6 per day/week
7594 04 02 7594 04 09 7594 04 89 7594 04 85 7594 04 83
1 1 1 1 1
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range. Labelling field not usable.
Sensor insert order no. 7594 10 01
Neutral conductor necessary! Suitable floor temperature sensor / remote sensor order no. 0161 Replacement centre plate order no. 1116 1.., 1116 89 .. Suitable valve drive order no. 7590 00 76
with imprint for heating or cooling mode for room and floor heaters for floor heating, control using room and/or floor temperature possible e.g. for valve drives closed in de-energized state large-area display with symbols with thermal return via software with pre-set base programme with week and day programme with slide switch for manual/automatic with party function with valve protection function with frost protection function display of set or actual temperature with operating hours meter fuzzy logic comfort, standard and night temperature with self-teaching heating curve with integrated temperature sensor with additional connection for external floor temperature sensor/remote sensor without spreader claws with plug-in terminals
with slots for air circulation for e.g. temperature sensor PT100
RolloTec Comfort buttons RolloTec button comfort
on page T37
white, glossy polar white, glossy polar white, matt anthracite, matt aluminium, matt
1770 89 82 1770 89 89 1770 19 09 1770 16 06 1770 14 04
1 1 1 1 1
Learnable running time 0,5 sec.- 2 min.; Lamella adjustment with signal < 1 sec.; Self-sustaining for 2 min. with signal > 1 - 4 sec. For RolloTec standard insert without neutral conductor connection order no. 2911 For RolloTec standard insert order no. 2925 For Rollotec comfort insert order no. 2975 For RolloTec comfort insert for direct current drives order no. 2975 01
with lock-out protection e.g. for shutter control terrace door activation of lock-out protection in upper end pos. via buttons in „up“ direction min. 3 secs. with indicator LED for lock-out protection
Centre plate for thermostat time-controlled aluminium, matt anthracite, matt polar white, matt white, glossy polar white, glossy
1116 14 04 1116 16 06 1116 19 09 1116 89 82 1116 89 89
1 1 1 1 1
Replacement demand for order no. 2043 1.., 2043 89 8..
with imprint
134
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
BERKER S.1/B.1/B.3/B.7 GLAS Order no.
Packing unit
Order no.
RolloTec button comfort with sensor connection
on page T37
white, glossy polar white, glossy polar white, matt anthracite, matt aluminium, matt
1771 89 82 1771 89 89 1771 19 09 1771 16 06 1771 14 04
RolloTec radio button with sensor connection 1 1 1 1 1
on page T37
Brightness value sun approx. 5 - 80 kLux; Learnable running time 4 sec.- 2 min.; Lamella adjustment with signal < 1 sec.; Locked for 2 min. upon actuation 1 - 4 Sec.
with lock-out protection e.g. for shutter control terrace door activation of lock-out protection in upper end pos. via buttons in „up“ direction min. 3 secs. with indicator LED for lock-out protection brightnesses individually adjustable on brightness sensor surface-mounted, the taught-in running time for sun protection movement is used no twilight sensor function for sensor connection to socket contact or terminal block
on page T37
Radio signal reception frequency 433,42 MHz; Learnable radio transmitters 30 ; Lamella adjustment with signal < 1 sec.; Self-sustaining for 2 min. with signal > 1 sec. For actuation via button and radio transmitter. For RolloTec standard insert without neutral conductor connection order no. 2911 For RolloTec standard insert order no. 2925 For Rollotec comfort insert order no. 2975 For RolloTec comfort insert for direct current drives order no. 2975 01
1 1 1 1 1
Radio signal reception frequency 433,42 MHz; Learnable radio transmitters 30; Brightness value sun approx. 5 - 80 kLux; Lamella adjustment with signal < 1 sec.; Self-sustaining for 2 min. with signal > 1 sec.
with 5 light scenes for „open/close“ retrieving light scenes only by using radio transmitter brightness value for sunblind individually adjustable no twilight sensor function for sensor connection to socket contact or terminal block
Memory buttons RolloTec memory button
RolloTec radio button 1 1 1 1 1
1759 89 82 1759 89 89 1759 19 09 1759 16 06 1759 14 04
For RolloTec brightness sensors order no. 0169, 0184 For RolloTec glass breakage sensor order no. 0170 For RolloTec adapter for sensors order no. 0171 For RolloTec standard insert without neutral conductor connection order no. 2911 For RolloTec standard insert order no. 2925 For Rollotec comfort insert order no. 2975 For RolloTec comfort insert for direct current drives order no. 2975 01 For magnetic contact order no. 9251 ..
Radio buttons 1758 89 82 1758 89 89 1758 19 09 1758 16 06 1758 14 04
white, glossy polar white, glossy polar white, matt anthracite, matt aluminium, matt
For actuation via button and radio transmitter.
For RolloTec brightness sensors order no. 0169, 0184 For RolloTec glass breakage sensor order no. 0170 For RolloTec adapter for sensors order no. 0171 For RolloTec standard insert without neutral conductor connection order no. 2911 For RolloTec standard insert order no. 2925 For Rollotec comfort insert order no. 2975 For RolloTec comfort insert for direct current drives order no. 2975 01 For magnetic contact order no. 9251 ..
white, glossy polar white, glossy polar white, matt anthracite, matt aluminium, matt
Packing unit
on page T37
white, glossy polar white, glossy polar white, matt anthracite, matt aluminium, matt
1756 89 82 1756 89 89 1756 19 09 1756 16 06 1756 14 04
1 1 1 1 1
Lamella adjustment with signal < 1 sec.; Self-sustaining for 2 min. with signal > 1 sec.; Storage of „up/down“ time with signal > 3,5 sec. Stored „up“ and/or „down“ time is run daily in automatic operation. For manual and timer programmed running of awnings, shutters and blinds. For RolloTec standard insert without neutral conductor connection order no. 2911 For RolloTec standard insert order no. 2925 For Rollotec comfort insert order no. 2975 For RolloTec comfort insert for direct current drives order no. 2975 01
with 5 light scenes for „open/close“ retrieving light scenes only by using radio transmitter
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
135
BERKER S.1/B.1/B.3/B.7 GLAS Order no.
Packing unit
Order no.
RolloTec memory button with sensor connection
on page T37
white, glossy polar white, glossy polar white, matt anthracite, matt aluminium, matt
1757 89 82 1757 89 89 1757 19 09 1757 16 06 1757 14 04
RolloTec timer comfort with display 1 1 1 1 1
on page T37
white, glossy polar white, glossy polar white, matt anthracite, matt aluminium, matt
1774 89 82 1774 89 89 1774 19 09 1774 16 06 1774 14 04
1 1 1 1 1
Stored „up“ and/or „down“ time is run daily in automatic operation.
Operation times 18 up/down; Random generator +/- 15 min.; Power reserve approx. 3 hrs., maintenance-free; Astronomic time shift +/- 2 hrs.; Learnable down time 1 sec.- 6 min.; Lamella adjusting time 0 - 5 sec.; Lamella adjustment with signal < 1 sec.; Lock at touching > 1 sec.
For manual and timer programmed running of awnings, shutters and blinds.
For manual and timer programmed running of awnings, shutters and blinds.
For RolloTec brightness sensors order no. 0169, 0184 For RolloTec glass breakage sensor order no. 0170 For RolloTec adapter for sensors order no. 0171 For RolloTec standard insert without neutral conductor connection order no. 2911 For RolloTec standard insert order no. 2925 For Rollotec comfort insert order no. 2975 For RolloTec comfort insert for direct current drives order no. 2975 01 For magnetic contact order no. 9251 ..
For RolloTec standard insert without neutral conductor connection order no. 2911 For RolloTec standard insert order no. 2925 For Rollotec comfort insert order no. 2975 For RolloTec comfort insert for direct current drives order no. 2975 01
Brightness value sun approx. 20 kLux; Lamella adjustment with signal < 1 sec.; Self-sustaining for 2 min. with signal > 1 sec.; Storage of „up/down“ time with signal > 3,5 sec.
no twilight sensor function for sensor connection to socket contact or terminal block
Timer switches RolloTec easy timer with display
on page T37
Packing unit
white, glossy polar white, glossy polar white, matt anthracite, matt aluminium, matt
1762 89 82 1762 89 89 1762 19 09 1762 16 06 1762 14 04
1 1 1 1 1
Operation times 2 up/down; Power reserve approx. 6 hrs., maintenance-free; Lamella adjustment with signal < 1 sec.; Self-sustaining for 2 min. with signal > 1 sec.
with German display text with totally 3 independent programme memories 2 programme memories pre-set programming according to week and days possible programme memory network failure proved with automatic summer-/winter time switching (can be switched off) astro programme for sunrise/sundown running large-area display with symbols indication of the next operation schedule under consideration of astro and coincidence function with slide switch for manual/automatic lock out protection because evaluation of the centre or extension unit commands can be switched off lamella position programmable at down operation times
No extension units and sensor signals or central commands will be processed. For manual and timer programmed running of awnings, shutters and blinds. For RolloTec standard insert without neutral conductor connection order no. 2911 For RolloTec standard insert order no. 2925 For Rollotec comfort insert order no. 2975 For RolloTec comfort insert for direct current drives order no. 2975 01
with imprint in German with pre-set base programme simple programming of operation times with quick programming mode programming possible up to 6 hours after pulling from the insert 2 programme blocks Mon. - Fri. and Sat. - Sun. large-area display with slide switch for manual/automatic
136
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
BERKER S.1/B.1/B.3/B.7 GLAS Order no.
Packing unit
on page T37
1775 89 82 1775 89 89 1775 19 09 1775 16 06 1775 14 04
NEW
1 1 1 1 1
polar white, matt anthracite, matt aluminium, matt
with German display text with totally 3 independent programme memories 2 programme memories pre-set programming according to week and days possible programme memory network failure proved with automatic summer-/winter time switching (can be switched off) astro programme for sunrise/sundown running large-area display with symbols indication of the next operation schedule under consideration of astro and coincidence function with slide switch for manual/automatic lock out protection because evaluation of the centre or extension unit commands can be switched off lamella position programmable at down operation times with surface-mounted RolloTec brightness sensor additionally settable with shutter and lamella position connected RolloTec brightness sensor can be used for twilight-controlled lowering connected surface-mounted RolloTec brightness sensor suitable for twilight-controlled raising and lowering for the sensor connection on the clamping block in the insert
* 1109 90 82 * 1109 90 89 1109 19 19 1109 16 16 1109 14 14
10 10 10 10 10
Attention! Not suitable for Berker central plates. For centre plate as per DIN 49075 for other centre plates with external size 50 x 50 mm and SCHUKO-socket outlet
Intermediate ring for central plate white, glossy polar white, glossy polar white, matt anthracite, matt aluminium, matt
For manual and timer programmed running of awnings, shutters and blinds. For RolloTec brightness sensors order no. 0169, 0184 For RolloTec glass breakage sensor order no. 0170 For RolloTec adapter for sensors order no. 0171 For RolloTec standard insert without neutral conductor connection order no. 2911 For RolloTec standard insert order no. 2925 For Rollotec comfort insert order no. 2975 For RolloTec comfort insert for direct current drives order no. 2975 01 For magnetic contact order no. 9251 ..
Adapter ring for centre plate 50 x 50 mm white, glossy polar white, glossy
Setting range sun approx. 1 - 76 kLux; Setting range twilight approx. 6 - 300 Lux; Operation times 18 up/down; Random generator +/- 15 min.; Power reserve approx. 3 hrs., maintenance-free; Astronomic time shift +/- 2 hrs.; Learnable down time 1 sec.- 6 min.; Lamella adjusting time 0 - 5 sec.; Lamella adjustment with signal < 1 sec.; Lock at touching > 1 sec.
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
Packing unit
Intermediate rings
RolloTec timer comfort with display and sensor connection white, glossy polar white, glossy polar white, matt anthracite, matt aluminium, matt
Order no.
1109 89 82 1109 89 89 1109 19 09 1109 16 06 1109 14 04
10 10 10 10 10
labelling field latchable
Labelling fields Labelling field for flush installation in intermediate ring for central plate white, glossy polar white, glossy
1905 00 02 1905 00 69
10 10
Labelling field height arranged for 6 mm P-touch strips.
137
BERKER S.1/B.1/B.3/B.7 GLAS Order no.
Packing unit
Signalling and command units
Packing unit
Central plate for signalling and control device Ø 22.5 mm
Central plate for transmitting and control device Ø 18.8 mm
white, glossy polar white, glossy polar white, matt/velvety
1432 02 1432 09 1432 19 09
10 10 10
1432 16 06
10
10
anthracite matt, lacquered aluminium matt, lacquered
1432 14 04
10
10
yellow, glossy
1432 07
10
white, glossy polar white, glossy polar white, matt/velvety
1431 02 1431 09 1431 19 09
10 10 10
anthracite matt, lacquered
1431 16 06
aluminium matt, lacquered
1431 14 04
Screw distance 36 mm
Screw distance 36 mm Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range. Suitable for installation of equipotential bonding built-in socket order no. 4604
Circular plug-in connector: Amphenol-Tuchel; Binder; Cannon; Farnell; Hirose; Hirschmann; Lumberg; Monacor; RS Components; Extra low voltage jack: PRO-CAR
10 10 10
Screw distance 36 mm Suitable for installation of equipotential bonding built-in socket order no. 4604
Circular plug-in connector: Amphenol-Tuchel; Binder; Cannon; Farnell; Hirose; Hirschmann; Lumberg; Monacor; RS Components; Extra low voltage jack: PRO-CAR
Signalling and command units: Kraus-Naimer; Lumitas; Schlegel; Overvoltage protection devices: Dehn, order no. NM DK 280; OBO-Bettermann, order no. KNS/IS-D with supporting plate with cut-out dia. 22.5 mm without spreader claws
polar white, matt anthracite, matt aluminium, matt yellow, matt
Centre plate for signalling and control device Ø 18.8 mm 1063 19 09 1063 16 06 1063 14 04
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range.
Centre plate for signalling and control device Ø 22.5 mm
with supporting plate with cut-out dia. 18.8 mm without spreader claws
polar white, matt anthracite, matt aluminium, matt
Order no.
1062 19 09 1062 16 06 1062 14 04 1062 19 07
10 10 10 10
Screw distance 36 mm Signalling and command units: Kraus-Naimer; Lumitas; Schlegel; Overvoltage protection devices: Dehn, order no. NM DK 280; OBO-Bettermann, order no. KNS/IS-D with supporting plate with cut-out dia. 22.5 mm without spreader claws
with supporting plate with cut-out dia. 18.8 mm without spreader claws
138
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
BERKER S.1/B.1/B.3/B.7 GLAS Order no.
Packing unit
TV/audio
Order no.
Packing unit
Centre plate for aerial socket 2- and 3-hole Central plate for XLR round connectors D series white, glossy polar white, glossy polar white, matt/velvety anthracite, matt aluminium, matt
1412 02 1412 09 1412 19 09 1412 16 06 1412 14 04
10 10 10 10 10
Cut-out diameter 23,6 mm; Distance between screws (horizontal/vertical) 19 / 24 mm Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range. Circular plug-in connector: Cannon; Deltron; Farnell; Hirose; Monacor; Neutrik; RS Components with supporting plate speakon and jack connector without spreader claws
white, glossy polar white, glossy polar white, matt anthracite, matt aluminium, matt
1203 89 82 1203 89 89 1203 19 09 1203 16 06 1203 14 04
10 10 10 10 10
For aerial socket 2-hole single box order no. 4502, HIFS 1B For aerial socket 2-hole throughpass socket order no. 4515 For aerial socket 3-hole single box order no. 4522 For aerial socket 3-hole throughpass socket order no. 4523, 4593
with knock out SAT input
Central plate for aerial socket 4-hole white, glossy polar white, glossy polar white, matt/velvety anthracite, matt aluminium, matt
1483 02 1483 09 1483 19 09 1483 16 06 1483 14 04
10 10 10 10 10
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range.
Centre plate for loudspeaker socket outlet and miniature connector insert white, glossy, 1gang, 1 knock out opening
1196 89 82
10
polar white, glossy, 1gang, 1 knock out opening polar white, matt, 1gang, 1 knock out opening
1196 89 89
10
1196 19 09
10
anthracite, matt, 1gang, 1 knock out opening
1196 16 06
10
aluminium, matt, 1gang, 1 knock out opening
1196 14 04
10
white, glossy, 2gang polar white, glossy, 2gang
1197 89 82 1197 89 89
10 10
polar white, matt, 2gang anthracite, matt, 2gang aluminium, matt, 2gang
1197 19 09 1197 16 06 1197 14 04
10 10 10
For miniature connector insert order no. 4505 For stereo loudspeaker socket outlet order no. 4505 01 For loudspeaker socket outlet High End order no. 4505 02 For BNC/TNC connector insert order no. 4577, 4579
Centre plate for aerial socket 1-hole white, glossy polar white, glossy polar white, matt
1499 89 82 1499 89 89 1499 19 09
10 10 10
anthracite, matt
1499 16 06
10
aluminium, matt
1499 14 04
10
Aerial sockets: Hirschmann with 2 additional SAT outputs (F-sockets)
Central plate for aerial socket 4-hole white, glossy polar white, glossy polar white, matt/velvety anthracite, matt aluminium, matt
1484 02 1484 09 1484 19 09 1484 16 06 1484 14 04
10 10 10 10 10
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range. For aerial socket 4-hole single box order no. 4594
Aerial sockets: Ankaro; Astro; Axing; Delta; Schwaiger with 2 additional SAT outputs (F-sockets)
Central plate for broadband modem box white, glossy polar white, glossy polar white, matt/velvety anthracite, matt aluminium, matt
1439 02 1439 09 1439 19 09 1439 16 06 1439 14 04
10 10 10 10 10
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range. Broadband modem socket: Wisi with additional multimedia output
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
139
BERKER S.1/B.1/B.3/B.7 GLAS Order no.
Packing unit
NEW
Data-/telecommunications Centre plate for cable outlet and VDo connection box white, glossy polar white, glossy polar white, matt anthracite, matt aluminium, matt
1019 89 82 1019 89 89 1019 19 09 1019 16 06 1019 14 04
10 10 10 10 10
For cable outlet order no. 4468, 4470
white, glossy polar white, glossy polar white, matt/velvety anthracite matt, lacquered aluminium matt, lacquered
1457 02 1457 09 1457 19 09
* * 1457 16 06 * 1457 14 04
10 10 10 10 10
Central plate for TAE socket outlet 6/6FF and 6/6NF and loudspeaker connection box
1033 19 09 1033 16 06 1033 14 04
10 10 10
For TAE socket outlet order no. 4487 .., 4500 .., 4544 .. For loudspeaker connection box order no. 4572 .., 4573 .. For FCC/TAE socket outlet order no. 4588 .. For USB data interface flush-mounted order no. 7504 00 04
EAD socket outlets: Drivex; Fröhlich + Walter; Intracom; TAE and FCC overvoltage protection sockets: Dehn; FCC socket outlets: Dätwyler; Rutenbeck
Centre plate for TAE socket outlet and loudspeaker connection box 1033 89 12 1033 89 19
10 10
For TAE socket outlet order no. 4487 .., 4500 .., 4544 .. For loudspeaker connection box order no. 4572 .., 4573 .. For FCC/TAE socket outlet order no. 4588 .. For USB data interface flush-mounted order no. 7504 00 04
EAD socket outlets: Drivex; Fröhlich + Walter; Intracom; TAE and FCC overvoltage protection sockets: Dehn; FCC socket outlets: Dätwyler; Rutenbeck
white, glossy polar white, glossy polar white, matt/velvety anthracite, matt aluminium, matt
1458 02 1458 09 1458 19 09 1458 16 06 1458 14 04
10 10 10 10 10
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range. For TAE socket outlet order no. 4487 .., 4500 .., 4544 .. For loudspeaker connection box order no. 4572 .., 4573 .. For FCC/TAE socket outlet order no. 4588 .. For USB data interface flush-mounted order no. 7504 00 04
EAD socket outlets: Drivex; Fröhlich + Walter; Intracom; TAE and FCC overvoltage protection sockets: Dehn; FCC socket outlets: Dätwyler; Rutenbeck
2 knock out openings
140
Central plate for TAE socket outlet 6F+N
For TAE socket outlet order no. 4487 ..
Centre plate for TAE socket outlet and loudspeaker connection box
white, glossy polar white, glossy
Packing unit
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range.
VDo connection boxes: Rutenbeck with outlet
polar white, matt anthracite, matt aluminium, matt
Order no.
for USB data interface flush-mounted 1 knock out opening
Central plate for 1st TAE socket outlet (Telekom) # 1477 02 white, glossy # 1477 09 polar white, glossy polar white, matt/velvety # 1477 19 09 # 1477 16 06 anthracite, matt # 1477 14 04 aluminium, matt
10 10 10 10 10
Identifies the 1st TAE socket outlet inside an apartment/property. Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range. with imprint 2 knock out openings
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
BERKER S.1/B.1/B.3/B.7 GLAS Order no.
Packing unit
Centre plate for PTT socket outlet „Netherlands“ white, glossy polar white, glossy polar white, matt anthracite, matt aluminium, matt
61 1036 89 82 61 1036 89 89 61 1036 19 09 61 1036 16 06 61 1036 14 04
10 10 10 10 10
Centre plate for RTT socket outlet „Belgium“ 67 1103 89 82 67 1103 89 89 67 1103 19 09 67 1103 16 06 67 1103 14 04
10 10 10 10 10
For RTT socket outlet order no. BERT T0 1
Centre plate for FCC socket outlet white, glossy polar white, glossy polar white, matt anthracite, matt aluminium, matt
1407 89 82 1407 89 89 1407 19 09 1407 16 06 1407 14 04
10 10 10 10 10
For FCC socket outlet order no. 4538, 4568 For FCC socket outlet shielded order no. 4554, 4586, 4590
FCC socket outlets: Ackermann; AMP; BTR; Crack-IT; Rutenbeck; Telegärtner; Telena with 45° oblique outlet for 1gang socket outlet cat.3, cat.5e and cat.6
Central plate for FCC socket outlet white, glossy polar white, glossy polar white, matt/velvety anthracite, matt aluminium, matt
1468 02 1468 09 1468 19 09 1468 16 06 1468 14 04
10 10 10 10 10
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range.
For FCC socket outlet order no. 4538, 4568 For FCC socket outlet shielded order no. 4554, 4586, 4590
FCC socket outlets: Ackermann; AMP; BTR; Crack-IT; Rutenbeck; Telegärtner; Telena with 45° oblique outlet for 1gang socket outlet cat.3, cat.5e and cat.6
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
Packing unit
Centre plate for FCC/E-DAT design/Telekom ISDN socket outlet
universal for standard commercially available PTT socket outlets
white, glossy polar white, glossy polar white, matt anthracite, matt aluminium, matt
Order no.
white, glossy polar white, glossy polar white, matt anthracite, matt aluminium, matt
1409 89 82 1409 89 89 1409 19 09 1409 16 06 1409 14 04
10 10 10 10 10
For FCC socket outlet order no. 4539, 4562, 4592 For FCC socket outlet shielded order no. 4555, 4587, 4591
ISDN socket outlets (Rutenbeck): Telekom; FCC socket outlets: Ackermann; AMP; BTR; CobiNet; Corning; Crack-IT; CTI Netzwerksysteme; Dätwyler; EFB Electronic; eku Kabel & Systeme; Elmat; Rutenbeck; Setec; Süveg; Telegärtner; Telena with 45° oblique outlet for 2gang socket outlet cat.3, cat.5e and cat.6
Central plate FCC/E-DAT design/Telekom ISDN socket outlet white, glossy polar white, glossy polar white, matt/velvety anthracite, matt aluminium, matt
1469 02 1469 09 1469 19 09 1469 16 06 1469 14 04
10 10 10 10 10
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range.
For FCC socket outlet order no. 4539, 4562, 4592 For FCC socket outlet shielded order no. 4555, 4587, 4591
ISDN socket outlets (Rutenbeck): Telekom; FCC socket outlets: Ackermann; AMP; BTR; CobiNet; Corning; Crack-IT; CTI Netzwerksysteme; Dätwyler; EFB Electronic; eku Kabel & Systeme; Elmat; Rutenbeck; Setec; Süveg; Telegärtner; Telena with 45° oblique outlet for 2gang socket outlet cat.3, cat.5e and cat.6
141
BERKER S.1/B.1/B.3/B.7 GLAS Order no.
Packing unit
Central plate for FCC and Telekom ISDN socket outlet (IAE) white, glossy polar white, glossy polar white, matt/velvety anthracite, matt aluminium, matt
1429 02 1429 09 1429 19 09 1429 16 06 1429 14 04
Order no.
Packing unit
Central plate for FCC/IAE/Telekom ISDN socket outlet 10 10 10 10 10
white, glossy polar white, glossy polar white, matt/velvety anthracite, matt aluminium, matt
1467 02 1467 09 1467 19 09 1467 16 06 1467 14 04
10 10 10 10 10
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range.
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range.
ISDN socket outlets (ZE Kommunikationstechnik): Telekom; FCC socket outlets: Telena; ZE Kommunikationstechnik with 25° oblique outlet for 2gang socket outlet cat.3
ISDN socket outlets (BTR): Telekom; FCC socket outlets: BTR; EFB Electronic; Farnell; Fröhlich + Walter; Krone; Monacor; Telena with 45° oblique outlet for 2gang socket outlet cat.3
Central plate for FCC and Telekom ISDN socket outlet (IAE) white, glossy polar white, glossy polar white, matt/velvety anthracite, matt aluminium, matt
1430 02 1430 09 1430 19 09 1430 16 06 1430 14 04
10 10 10 10 10
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range. ISDN socket outlets (Kräcker): Telekom; FCC socket outlets: Farnell; Kräcker with 45° oblique outlet for 2gang socket outlet cat.3
1446 02 1446 09 1446 19 09 1446 16 06 1446 14 04
10 10 10 10 10
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range. FCC socket outlets: BTR; Farnell; Fröhlich + Walter; Krone; Schumann; Telena with 45° oblique outlet for 1gang socket outlet cat.3 and cat.6
white, glossy polar white, glossy polar white, matt/velvety anthracite, matt aluminium, matt
1478 02 1478 09 1478 19 09 1478 16 06 1478 14 04
10 10 10 10 10
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range.
Central plate for FCC/IAE/FCC-DAT 300E socket outlet white, glossy polar white, glossy polar white, matt/velvety anthracite, matt aluminium, matt
Central plate for FCC-DAT 300E socket outlet
FCC socket outlets: BTR; Farnell; Fröhlich + Walter; Krone; Schumann; Telena with 45° oblique outlet for 2gang socket outlet cat.6
Central plate for E-DAT plus socket outlet with labelling field white, glossy polar white, glossy polar white, matt/velvety anthracite, matt aluminium, matt
1413 02 1413 09 1413 19 09 1413 16 06 1413 14 04
10 10 10 10 10
Labelling field height arranged for 6 mm P-touch strips. Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range. FCC socket outlets: BTR; Fröhlich + Walter; Telena with 45° oblique outlet with dust protection cover for 1gang or 2gang socket outlet cat.6
142
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
BERKER S.1/B.1/B.3/B.7 GLAS Order no.
Packing unit
Central plate for FCC socket outlet white, glossy polar white, glossy polar white, matt/velvety anthracite, matt aluminium, matt
1420 02 1420 09 1420 19 09 1420 16 06 1420 14 04
Order no.
Packing unit
Central plate for EMJ45 socket outlet 10 10 10 10 10
white, glossy polar white, glossy polar white, matt/velvety anthracite, matt aluminium, matt
1422 02 1422 09 1422 19 09 1422 16 06 1422 14 04
10 10 10 10 10
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range.
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range.
FCC socket outlets: Ackermann; CobiNet; Quante; Telena with 45° oblique outlet 1 knock out opening for 1gang or 2gang socket outlet cat.3
FCC socket outlets: Telegärtner; Telena with 45° oblique outlet for 1gang or 2gang socket outlet cat.5e
Central plate for VAD socket outlet with labelling field
Central plate for WAEG2 socket outlet white, glossy polar white, glossy
# 1489 02 # 1489 09
10 10
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range. FCC socket outlets: Ackermann; Quante; Telena
1423 02 1423 09 1423 19 09 1423 16 06 1423 14 04
10 10 10 10 10
Labelling field height arranged for 6 mm P-touch strips. Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range.
with 45° oblique outlet 1 knock out opening for 1gang or 2gang socket outlet cat.5
Central plate for WAEG5 and WAEG6 socket outlet with labelling field white, glossy polar white, glossy polar white, matt
white, glossy polar white, glossy polar white, matt/velvety anthracite, matt aluminium, matt
# 1421 02 # 1421 09 # 1421 19 09
10 10 10
FCC socket outlets: Lanconnect; Schumann; Telegärtner; Telena with 45° oblique outlet with dust protection cover for 1gang or 2gang socket outlet cat.6
Labelling field height arranged for 6 mm P-touch strips. Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range. FCC socket outlets: Ackermann; Elmat; Süveg; Telena with 45° oblique outlet with dust protection cover for 1gang or 2gang socket outlet cat.6
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
143
BERKER S.1/B.1/B.3/B.7 GLAS Order no.
Packing unit
Central plate for FCC socket outlet white, glossy polar white, glossy polar white, matt/velvety anthracite, matt aluminium, matt
1419 02 1419 09 1419 19 09 1419 16 06 1419 14 04
10 10 10 10 10
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range. FCC socket outlets: Brand-Rex; CobiNet; Drivex; EFB Electronic; Fröhlich + Walter; Fröschel; Intracom; OTRA; Schumann; Setec; Sevex; Siemens; Sonepar; ZE Kommunikationstechnik with 40° oblique outlet for 1gang or 2gang socket outlet cat.5, cat.5e and cat.6
Central plate for 3 MINI-COM modules white, glossy polar white, glossy polar white, matt/velvety anthracite, matt aluminium, matt
1427 02 1427 09 1427 19 09 1427 16 06 1427 14 04
10 10 10 10 10
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range. For mini jack order no. 1980, 1984, 1985 For cinch module set order no. 1989 For blank module order no. 1990 For video cinch module order no. 1992 For S-Video module order no. 1993 For VGA module order no. 1994
Modules: Panduit with supporting plate for Mini-Com jacks cat.3, cat.5e, cat.6, cat.6 10Gig for Mini-Com fibre-optic modules for Mini-Com BNC connector modules for Mini-Com 3.5 mm stereo connection/coupling modules for Mini-Com loudspeaker cables / banana plug modules for Mini-Com F-plug coupling modules for Mini-Com Cinch connection/coupling modules for Mini-Com S-Video connection/coupling modules for Mini-Com D-Subminiature connectors 15pole for Mini-Com dummy modules 1gang with 30° oblique outlet without spreader claws
144
Order no.
Packing unit
Central plate for 1 or 2 single modules Reichle&De-Massari white, glossy polar white, glossy polar white, matt/velvety
1472 02 1472 09 1472 19 09
10 10 10
anthracite matt, lacquered
1472 16 06
10
aluminium, matt
1472 14 04
10
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range. Modules: Reichle&De-Massari with supporting plate for connecting modules RJ45 cat.5e and cat.6 for fibre-optic modules with 30° oblique outlet without spreader claws
Centre plate for 1 or 2 single modules Reichle&De-Massari with labelling field polar white, matt anthracite, matt aluminium, matt
1533 19 09 1533 16 06 1533 14 04
10 10 10
Labelling field height arranged for 6 mm P-touch strips. Modules: Reichle&De-Massari with supporting plate for connecting modules RJ45 cat.5e and cat.6 for fibre-optic modules with 30° oblique outlet without spreader claws
Central plate for double modules Reichle&De-Massari white, glossy polar white, glossy polar white, matt/velvety
1461 02 1461 09 1461 19 09
10 10 10
anthracite matt, lacquered
1461 16 06
10
aluminium, matt
1461 14 04
10
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range. Modules: Diamond; Reichle&De-Massari with supporting plate for connecting modules RJ45 cat.5e and cat.6 for fibre-optic modules with 30° oblique outlet without spreader claws
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
BERKER S.1/B.1/B.3/B.7 GLAS Order no.
Packing unit
Centre plate for double module Reichle&De-Massari with labelling field polar white, matt anthracite, matt aluminium, matt
1511 19 09 1511 16 06 1511 14 04
Order no.
Packing unit
Centre plate for AMP modular jacks with labelling field 10 10 10
Labelling field height arranged for 6 mm P-touch strips. Modules: Diamond; Reichle&De-Massari with supporting plate for connecting modules RJ45 cat.5e and cat.6 for fibre-optic modules with 30° oblique outlet without spreader claws
Central plate for AMP modular jacks white, glossy polar white, glossy polar white, matt/velvety
1463 02 1463 09 1463 19 09
10 10 10
anthracite matt, lacquered
1463 16 06
10
aluminium matt, lacquered
1463 14 04
10
Indexing dimension (W x H) approx. 14,7 x 20,7 mm Shielded versions touch each other. Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range.
polar white, matt anthracite, matt aluminium, matt
1512 19 09 1512 16 06 1512 14 04
10 10 10
Indexing dimension (W x H) approx. 14,7 x 20,7 mm Shielded versions touch each other. Labelling field height arranged for 6 mm P-touch strips. MT-RJ jack: AMP; Intracom; Telena; Modular jacks: CobiNet; EFB Electronic; Schumann; Standard 110 Connect jack: AMP; SL series toolless jack: AMP; SL series 110 Connect Jack: AMP; SL series toolless jack with dust protection: AMP with supporting plate for AMP modular jacks series 110 Connect cat.3, cat.5, cat.5e and cat.6 for AMP fibre-optic couplings MT-RJ jacks 2gang, with 30° oblique outlet without spreader claws
MT-RJ jack: AMP; Intracom; Telena; Modular jacks: CobiNet; EFB Electronic; Schumann; Standard 110 Connect jack: AMP; SL series toolless jack: AMP; SL series 110 Connect Jack: AMP; SL series toolless jack with dust protection: AMP with supporting plate for AMP modular jacks series 110 Connect cat.3, cat.5, cat.5e and cat.6 for AMP fibre-optic couplings MT-RJ jacks 2gang, with 30° oblique outlet without spreader claws
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
145
BERKER S.1/B.1/B.3/B.7 GLAS Order no.
Packing unit
Central plate for Krone modular jacks white, glossy polar white, glossy polar white, matt/velvety
1464 02 1464 09 1464 19 09
10 10 10
anthracite matt, lacquered
1464 16 06
10
aluminium, matt
1464 14 04
10
Indexing dimension (W x H) approx. 14,7 x 19,4 mm Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range. For modular jack order no. 1854 01
Modular jacks: 3M; Asyco; BTR; Dätwyler; EFB Electronic; Erni; Hubbell; ICS; Krone; Setec; Telegärtner; Thomas & Betts; Eline 600 GG45 jacks: Kerpen; Keystone Jack: Kerpen; LANmark 5, 6 and 7 (only with with Keystone-Clip): Nexans; Fibre-optic couplings: 3M; Krone; mvk with supporting plate for Krone modular jacks cat.5, cat.5e and cat.6 for Krone fibre-optic couplings MT-RJ jacks for 3M fibre-optic couplings Volition 2gang, with 30° oblique outlet without spreader claws
Order no.
Packing unit
Centre plate for Krone modular jacks with labelling field polar white, matt anthracite, matt aluminium, matt
1513 19 09 1513 16 06 1513 14 04
10 10 10
Indexing dimension (W x H) approx. 14,7 x 19,4 mm Labelling field height arranged for 6 mm P-touch strips. For modular jack order no. 1854 01
Modular jacks: 3M; Asyco; BTR; Dätwyler; EFB Electronic; Erni; Hubbell; ICS; Krone; Setec; Telegärtner; Thomas & Betts; Eline 600 GG45 jacks: Kerpen; Keystone Jack: Kerpen; LANmark 5, 6 and 7 (only with with Keystone-Clip): Nexans; Fibre-optic couplings: 3M; Krone; mvk with supporting plate for Krone modular jacks cat.5, cat.5e and cat.6 for Krone fibre-optic couplings MT-RJ jacks for 3M fibre-optic couplings Volition 2gang, with 30° oblique outlet without spreader claws
Central plate for Drahtex modular jacks white, glossy polar white, glossy polar white, matt/velvety
1462 02 1462 09 1462 19 09
10 10 10
anthracite matt, lacquered
1462 16 06
10
aluminium matt, lacquered
1462 14 04
10
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range. Installation only possible with Drahtex mounting or coding frame. Modular jacks: CobiNet; Drahtex with supporting plate for Drahtex modular jacks cat.5, cat.5e, cat.6 and cat.7 for fibre-optic modules 2gang, with 30° oblique outlet without spreader claws
146
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
BERKER S.1/B.1/B.3/B.7 GLAS Order no.
Packing unit
Centre plate for Drahtex modular jacks with labelling field polar white, matt anthracite, matt aluminium, matt
1516 19 09 1516 16 06 1516 14 04
10 10 10
Labelling field height arranged for 6 mm P-touch strips. Installation only possible with Drahtex mounting or coding frame. Modular jacks: CobiNet; Drahtex with supporting plate for Drahtex modular jacks cat.5, cat.5e, cat.6 and cat.7 for fibre-optic modules 2gang, with 30° oblique outlet without spreader claws
Central plate for LEXCOM HOME modules white, glossy polar white, glossy polar white, matt/velvety
1441 02 1441 09 1441 19 09
10 10 10
anthracite matt, lacquered
1441 16 06
10
aluminium matt, lacquered
1441 14 04
10
Attention! Can only be used with intermediate ring and central plate of the corresponding range. Installation is only possible in connection with the assembly frame of Messrs. Lexel.
LEXCOM HOME® Registered trademark of Messrs. Lexel A/S.
Centre plate for LEXCOM HOME module with labelling field 1538 89 82 1538 89 89 1538 19 09 1538 16 06 1538 14 04
Packing unit
Central plate for Eline and GiCon4 jacks white, glossy polar white, glossy polar white, matt/velvety
1498 02 1498 09 1498 19 09
10 10 10
anthracite matt, lacquered
1498 16 06
10
aluminium matt, lacquered
1498 14 04
10
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range! Installation only in conjunction with BTR and Kerpen clips. GiCon4 jacks: BTR; Eline 1200- and 250 jacks: Kerpen with supporting plate for ELine and GiCon4 sockets cat.5e, cat.6, cat.7 2gang, with 30° oblique outlet without spreader claws
Centre plate for ELine and GiCon4 jacks with labelling field polar white, matt anthracite, matt aluminium, matt
1522 19 09 1522 16 06 1522 14 04
10 10 10
Labelling field height arranged for 6 mm P-touch strips. Installation only in conjunction with BTR and Kerpen clips. GiCon4 jacks: BTR; Eline 1200- and 250 jacks: Kerpen
with supporting plate 2gang, with 30° oblique outlet without spreader claws
white, glossy polar white, glossy polar white, matt anthracite, matt aluminium, matt
Order no.
10 10 10 10 10
Labelling field height arranged for 6 mm P-touch strips. Installation only possible in conjunction with mounting frame from Lexel.
with supporting plate for ELine and GiCon4 sockets cat.5e, cat.6, cat.7 2gang, with 30° oblique outlet without spreader claws
Centre plate with dust protection slider and labelling field polar white, matt anthracite, matt aluminium, matt
1170 19 09 1170 16 06 1170 14 04
10 10 10
Labelling field height arranged for 6 mm P-touch strips. For supporting plate 1gang order no. 4540 ..
for supporting plates with coloured mount 1gang
Modular jacks: Lexel Electric with supporting plate 2gang, with 30° oblique outlet without spreader claws LEXCOM HOME® Registered trademark of Messrs. Lexel A/S.
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
147
BERKER S.1/B.1/B.3/B.7 GLAS Order no.
Packing unit
Packing unit
Centre plate with dust protection sliders and labelling field
Centre plate for AMP-ACO and Siemens SML cabling system with labelling field
white, glossy polar white, glossy polar white, matt anthracite, matt aluminium, matt
polar white, matt anthracite, matt aluminium, matt
1181 89 82 1181 89 89 1181 19 09 1181 16 06 1181 14 04
10 10 10 10 10
Labelling field height arranged for 6 mm P-touch strips. For supporting plate 2gang order no. 4541 ..
for supporting plates with coloured mounts 2gang
Central plate for AMP-ACO white, glossy polar white, glossy polar white, matt/velvety anthracite, matt aluminium, matt
1494 02 1494 09 1494 19 09 1494 16 06 1494 14 04
10 10 10 10 10
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range. Labelling field not usable. ACO and CO Plus inserts: AMP, order no. 0-1394580-1, 2-1394580-1, 0-0336627-3, 0-0336627-1, 2-0336627-1 cat.5, cat.6 and cat.7 central plates plug-in fixing
Central plate for AMP-ACO with labelling field white, glossy polar white, glossy polar white, matt/velvety anthracite, matt aluminium, matt
1495 02 1495 09 1495 19 09 1495 16 06 1495 14 04
10 10 10 10 10
Labelling field height arranged for 6 mm P-touch strips. Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range. ACO and CO Plus inserts: AMP, order no. 0-0336627-1, 2-0336627-1, 0-0336627-3 cat.5, cat.6 and cat.7
148
Order no.
1153 19 09 1153 16 06 1153 14 04
10 10 10
Labelling field height arranged for 6 mm P-touch strips. ACO and CO Plus inserts: AMP, order no. 0-1394582-1, 0-1394763-1, 2-1394582-1; Schumann; Telena; SML inserts: Siemens with supporting plate cat.5, cat.6 and cat.7 with 30° oblique outlet for screw cover without spreader claws
Central plate for fibre-optic couplings Simplex ST white, glossy polar white, glossy polar white, matt/velvety
1492 02 1492 09 1492 19 09
10 10 10
anthracite matt, lacquered
1492 16 06
10
aluminium matt, lacquered
1492 14 04
10
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range. Fibre-optic couplings: Ackermann; AMP; Brand-Rex; BTR; CobiNet; Corning; Diamond; Drahtex; Huber+Suhner; Quante; Telegärtner with supporting plate with 30° oblique outlet for 2 fibre-optic couplings without spreader claws
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
BERKER S.1/B.1/B.3/B.7 GLAS Order no.
Packing unit
Centre plate for fibre-optic couplings Simplex ST with labelling field polar white, matt anthracite, matt aluminium, matt
1521 19 09 1521 16 06 1521 14 04
Order no.
Packing unit
Centre plate for fibre-optic couplings Duplex SC with labelling field 10 10 10
polar white, matt anthracite, matt aluminium, matt
1523 19 09 1523 16 06 1523 14 04
10 10 10
Labelling field height arranged for 6 mm P-touch strips.
Labelling field height arranged for 6 mm P-touch strips.
Fibre-optic couplings: Ackermann; AMP; Brand-Rex; BTR; CobiNet; Corning; Diamond; Drahtex; Huber+Suhner; Quante; Telegärtner
Fibre-optic couplings: Ackermann; AMP; Brand-Rex; BTR; CobiNet; Corning; Diamond; Drahtex; Huber+Suhner; Krone; Quante; Telegärtner with supporting plate with 30° oblique outlet 1 knock out opening for 1 or 2 fibre-optic couplings without spreader claws
with supporting plate with 30° oblique outlet for 2 fibre-optic couplings without spreader claws
Central plate for fibre-optic couplings Duplex SC
Central plate for round connector Ø 30 mm
white, glossy polar white, glossy polar white, matt/velvety
1480 02 1480 09 1480 19 09
10 10 10
anthracite matt, lacquered
1480 16 06
10
Cut-out diameter 30 mm; Screw distance 36 mm
aluminium matt, lacquered
1480 14 04
10
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range.
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range. Fibre-optic couplings: Ackermann; AMP; Brand-Rex; BTR; CobiNet; Corning; Diamond; Drahtex; FiberCraft; Huber+Suhner; Krone; Quante; Telegärtner with supporting plate with 30° oblique outlet 1 knock out opening for 1 or 2 fibre-optic couplings without spreader claws
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
white, glossy polar white, glossy
# 1433 02 # 1433 09
10 10
Signalling and command units: Kraus-Naimer; Lumitas; Schlegel; Overvoltage protection devices: Dehn, order no. NM DK 280; OBO-Bettermann, order no. KNS/IS-D with supporting plate without spreader claws
Centre plate for round connector Ø 30 mm polar white, matt anthracite, matt aluminium, matt
# 1066 19 09 # 1066 16 06 # 1066 14 04
10 10 10
Cut-out diameter 30 mm; Screw distance 36 mm Circular plug-in connector: Amphenol-Tuchel; Binder; Cannon; Conrad Electronic; Farnell; Monacor; RS Components with supporting plate without spreader claws
149
BERKER S.1/B.1/B.3/B.7 GLAS Order no.
Packing unit
Central plate for 1 D-subminiature connector white, glossy polar white, glossy polar white, matt/velvety anthracite, matt aluminium, matt
1411 02 1411 09 1411 19 09 1411 16 06 1411 14 04
10 10 10 10 10
Order no.
Packing unit
Hospital installation Central plate for double pole socket outlet for floating output
D-subminiature connectors see module inserts.
white, glossy polar white, glossy polar white, matt/velvety anthracite, matt aluminium, matt
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range.
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range.
For D-subminiature connector order no. 1834, 1835, 1839 For mounting adapter order no. 1841, 1842
with supporting plate without spreader claws
1470 02 1470 09 1470 19 09 1470 16 06 1470 14 04
10 10 10 10 10
D-subminiature connectors see module inserts. Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range. Labelling field not usable. For D-subminiature connector order no. 1834, 1835, 1839 For mounting adapter order no. 1841, 1842
with supporting plate without spreader claws
For double pole socket outlet for floating output order no. 1061
For double pole socket outlet according to DIN 42801
Central plate for 6pole socket outlet white, glossy polar white, glossy polar white, matt/velvety anthracite, matt aluminium, matt
1474 02 1474 09 1474 19 09 1474 16 06 1474 14 04
10 10 10 10 10
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range. Nurse call system: Ackermann, clino opt 99, order no. 71008C3; Nurse call systems: Ackermann, clino opt 90, clino phon 95, order no. 71008C; Siedle, order no. AD 306-0; 6pole socket outlets: Hirschmann, Medu 600, Medu 600 GSK
Messrs. Ackermann Centre plate for databus termination splitter/ empty unit
Communication technics Data connector housings Data connector housing with labelling field white, glossy polar white, glossy polar white, matt anthracite, matt aluminium, matt
10 10 10 10 10
with imprint
Central plate for 2 D-subminiature connector white, glossy polar white, glossy polar white, matt/velvety anthracite, matt aluminium, matt
1403 02 1403 09 1403 19 09 1403 16 06 1403 14 04
1110 89 82 1110 89 89 1110 19 09 1110 16 06 1110 14 04
10 10 10 10 10
Labelling field height arranged for 6 mm P-touch strips. Mounting plates see acessories order no. 1111 .., 1112 ..
with supporting plate for mounting plates without spreader claws
white, glossy polar white, glossy polar white, matt
1204 89 82 1204 89 89 1204 99 09
10 10 10
Nurse call system: Ackermann, clino opt 90, 99 / clino phon 95, order no. 72642B; Nurse call systems: Ackermann, clino opt 90, 99 / clino phon 95, order no. 72642C, 72639A, 71197A centre plate plug-in fixing
Centre plate for databus connection unit with plug-in opening white, glossy polar white, glossy polar white, matt
1298 89 82 1298 89 89 1298 99 09
10 10 10
Nurse call system: Ackermann, clino opt 99, order no. 73070A centre plate plug-in fixing
150
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
BERKER S.1/B.1/B.3/B.7 GLAS Order no.
Packing unit
Centre plate for plug-and-socket connector white, glossy polar white, glossy polar white, matt
1305 89 82 1305 89 89 1305 99 09
10 10 10
Nurse call system: Ackermann, clino opt 99, order no. 74189A a-coded for dropping plug-and-socket connector centre plate plug-in fixing
Central plate for plug eject system white, glossy polar white, glossy
# 1476 02 # 1476 09
10 10
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range. Nurse call systems: Ackermann, clino opt 90, clino phon 95, order no. 74199A for pear push or multiple push-button for bed operator units with self-detaching plug
Centre plate with 2 plug-in openings and imprint white, glossy polar white, glossy polar white, matt
1244 89 82 1244 89 89 1244 99 09
10 10 10
Order no.
Packing unit
Centre plate with red call button and 2 plug-in openings white, glossy polar white, glossy polar white, matt
1218 89 82 1218 89 89 1218 99 09
10 10 10
Nurse call system: Ackermann, clino opt 99, order no. 73071D, 73071D2, 73075B, 73073D for call push-button with diagnostic and auxiliary plug-in contact for call module with call push-button and plug-in contacts button with lens with imprint centre plate plug-in fixing
Centre plate with red call push-button at top white, glossy polar white, glossy polar white, matt
1216 89 82 1216 89 89 1216 99 09
10 10 10
Nurse call system: Ackermann, clino opt 99, order no. 73071F, 73071F2, 73073F for call module with call push-button button with lens centre plate plug-in fixing
Centre plate with red call push-button at bottom
Nurse call system: Ackermann, clino opt 99, order no. 73075C, 73020G, 73021G, 73075D for call unit with 2 diagnostic plug-in contacts centre plate plug-in fixing
white, glossy polar white, glossy polar white, matt
Centre plate with red call push-button at top and a plug-in opening
Nurse call system: Ackermann, clino opt 99, order no. 73022A, 73022A2 for call push-button button with lens centre plate plug-in fixing
white, glossy polar white, glossy polar white, matt
1217 89 82 1217 89 89 1217 99 09
10 10 10
1219 89 82 1219 89 89 1219 99 09
10 10 10
Centre plate with green shut-off button Nurse call system: Ackermann, clino opt 99, order no. 73071E, 73071E2, 73075A, 73073E for call push-button with plug-in contact for call module with call push-button and monitored auxiliary plug-in contact button with lens centre plate plug-in fixing
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
white, glossy polar white, glossy polar white, matt
1251 89 82 1251 89 89 1251 99 09
10 10 10
Nurse call system: Ackermann, clino opt 99, order no. 73642C for shut-off push-button button with lens centre plate plug-in fixing
151
BERKER S.1/B.1/B.3/B.7 GLAS Order no.
Packing unit
Centre plate with yellow shut-off button white, glossy polar white, glossy polar white, matt
1252 89 82 1252 89 89 1252 99 09
10 10 10
Nurse call system: Ackermann, clino opt 99, order no. 73642D for shut-off push-button button with lens centre plate plug-in fixing
Centre plate for call unit with blue doctor call button white, glossy polar white, glossy polar white, matt
1223 89 82 1223 89 89 1223 99 09
10 10 10
Nurse call system: Ackermann, clino opt 99, order no. 73022A, 73022A2 for call push-button button with lens with imprint centre plate plug-in fixing
Centre plate with acknowledge button white white, glossy polar white, glossy polar white, matt
1308 89 82 1308 89 89 1308 99 09
10 10 10
Nurse call system: Ackermann, clino opt 99, order no. 73640J, 73640J2 for office unit button with lens with imprint „SU-AUS WARTEN“ centre plate plug-in fixing
Centre plate with red call button and green shut-off button white, glossy polar white, glossy polar white, matt
1249 89 82 1249 89 89 1249 99 09
10 10 10
Nurse call system: Ackermann, clino opt 99, order no. 73642B2 for call push-button and shut-off push-button buttons with lens centre plate plug-in fixing
Centre plate with green and yellow shut-off button white, glossy polar white, glossy polar white, matt
1253 89 82 1253 89 89 1253 99 09
Nurse call system: Ackermann, clino opt 99, order no. 73642E for shut-off push-button buttons with lens centre plate plug-in fixing
152
10 10 10
Order no.
Packing unit
Centre plate with green presence button/white acknowledge button white, glossy polar white, glossy polar white, matt
1299 89 82 1299 89 89 1299 99 09
10 10 10
Nurse call system: Ackermann, clino opt 99, order no. 73642B for office unit buttons with lens with imprint „SU-AUS WARTEN“ centre plate plug-in fixing
Centre plate for pneumatic call switch with lens white, glossy polar white, glossy polar white, matt
1236 89 82 1236 89 89 1236 99 09
10 10 10
Nurse call system: Ackermann, clino opt 99, order no. 70006C; Nurse call systems: Ackermann, clino opt 90, 99 / clino phon 95, order no. 70006A, 70006B centre plate plug-in fixing
Centre plate for pullcord push-button with lens white, glossy polar white, glossy polar white, matt
1233 89 82 1233 89 89 1233 99 09
10 10 10
Nurse call systems: Ackermann, clino opt 90, 99 / clino phon 95, order no. 70045A3, 70046A3, 70046A for pullcord push-button with pullcord and knob centre plate plug-in fixing
Centre plate for radio programme system with small sound system white, glossy polar white, glossy polar white, matt
1300 89 82 1300 89 89 1300 99 09
10 10 10
Nurse call systems: Ackermann, clino opt 90, 99 / clino phon 95, order no. 73120C, 73120H for earpiece and volume control with imprinted symbol curve centre plate plug-in fixing
Centre plate for radio programme selector switch white, glossy polar white, glossy polar white, matt
1301 89 82 1301 89 89 1301 99 09
10 10 10
Nurse call systems: Ackermann, clino opt 90, 99 / clino phon 95, order no. 73120A with imprint „0-1-2-3-4-5“ centre plate plug-in fixing "#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
BERKER S.1/B.1/B.3/B.7 GLAS Order no.
Packing unit
Messrs. Total Walther (Zettler) Centre plate for 15pole socket outlet white, glossy polar white, glossy polar white, matt
1288 89 22 1288 89 29 1288 19 29
10 10 10
Nurse call systems: Total Walther, Zettler Medicall 800, order no. 125.891xS, 125.850xS for pear push-button, diagnostic units etc. centre plate plug-in fixing
1288 89 32 1288 89 39 1288 19 39
10 10 10
Nurse call systems: Total Walther, Zettler Medicall 800, order no. 125.840xS, 125.841xS, 125.842xS, 125.843xS for pear push-button, diagnostic units etc. centre plate plug-in fixing
1288 89 42 1288 89 49 1288 19 49
Centre plate for presence push-button, call/ presence push-button call shut-off pushbutton etc.
white, glossy polar white, glossy polar white, matt
1288 89 12 1288 89 19 1288 19 19
10 10 10
Centre plate for pneumatic call switch with quiet lamp white, glossy polar white, glossy polar white, matt
1288 89 52 1288 89 59 1288 19 59
10 10 10
Nurse call systems: Total Walther, Zettler Medicall 800, order no. 125.860xS, 125.861xS centre plate plug-in fixing
Centre plate for call/service/cancel/doctor call push-button with 15pole socket outlet white, glossy polar white, glossy polar white, matt
Packing unit
Nurse call systems: Total Walther, Zettler Medicall 800, order no. 125.892xS, 125.893xS, 125.820xS, 125.821xS, 125.822xS, 125.823xS, 125.824xS, 125.825xS, 125.826xS, 125.827xS, 125.891xS centre plate plug-in fixing
Centre plate for call push-button/shut-off push-button with 15pole socket outlet white, glossy polar white, glossy polar white, matt
Order no.
10 10 10
Nurse call systems: Total Walther, Zettler Medicall 800, order no. 125.830xS, 125.831xS, 125.832xS for pear push-button, diagnostic units etc. centre plate plug-in fixing
Centre plate for buzzer polar white, matt
1288 19 69
10
Nurse call systems: Total Walther, Zettler Medicall 800, order no. 125.800xS centre plate plug-in fixing
Centre plate for presence push-butto/cancel push-button/personnel call push-button call/ service call and doctor call push-button
white, glossy polar white, glossy polar white, matt
1288 89 82 1288 89 89 1288 19 09
10 10 10
Nurse call systems: Total Walther, Zettler Medicall 800, order no. 125.810xS, 125.811xS, 125.812xS, 125.813xS, 125.814xS, 125.815xS, 125.816xS, 125.892xS, 125.893xS centre plate plug-in fixing
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
153
Surfaces Frames/covers/centre inserts Plastic, velvety polar white
similar to RAL 9010
BERKER Q.1
Surface range Flush-mounted system
With its pleasing lines, the new Berker Q.1 will inspire and excite all those who are searching for switches with a wide range of applications. Its soft, rounded contours is like love at first sight. Its heavy-duty construction and extensive product variations make the Berker Q.1 ideal for a wide range of application areas. It features a unique velvety surface made of polar white plastic. In short: the new Berker Q.1 is a true all-round talent.
■ Suitable for living and functional buildings ■ Frames and device covers suitable for flush-mounted module inserts ■ Combination frames allow you to combine up to 5 devices vertically or horizontally ■ Available colour: polar white
Marked items are suitable for installation of splash-protected flush-mounted IP 44 when used in conjunction with corresponding sealing set.
BERKER Q.1 Order no.
BERKER Q.1 Packing
Order no.
Packing unit
TOP
unit
Flush-mounted wall box according to DIN 49073 part 1
SCHUKOsocket insert SCHUKO-centre plate with self-closing hinged cover
Sealing set K.1/K.5/Q.1 for socket outlets and centre plates (packing unit)
Frame
TOP Rocker switch/ push-button
Flush-mounted wall box according to DIN 49073 part 1
Rocker
Frame Sealing set K.1/K.5/Q.1 for rocker switch/push-button (packing unit)
Flush-mounted wall box according to DIN 49073 part 1
OBEN/TOP Key switch/ key pushbutton Centre plate for key switch/ key push-button
Profile half cylinder
TOP/OB EN
Frame Sealing set K.1/K.5/Q.1 for key switches/ key push-button (packing unit)
Application IP44 protection is reached by using the sealing set and installing in flush-mounted wall box according to DIN 49073 part 1 on smooth, even, vertically walls in finery-concisely inserted flush mounted wall boxes IP44 protection is not guaranteed for floor assembly, ceiling mounting and assembly in hollow wall boxes.
156
Attention IP44 protection is reached only if all installed articles are IP44 suitable (check markings) and the installation instruction is observed. "#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
BERKER Q.1 Order no.
Packing unit
Sealings IP44
Order no.
Packing unit
Sealing set K. 1/K. 5/Q. 1 for rocker switch/ rocker push-button
Sealings Sealing set K. 1/K. 5/Q. 1 for socket outlets and centre plates transparent
1010 72 00
1
For blind plug with centre plate and screw fixing order no. 1009 60 79, 1045 7.. For blind plug with centre plate order no. 1009 60 89, 1045 7.., 6710 45 70 .., 6710 09 60 89 For centre plate with rotary knob for rotary switch for shutters order no. 1077 71 .., 1080 60 89 For centre plate with rotary knob for 3-step switch order no. 1084 60 89, 1087 7.., 1088 7.., 1096 60 89 For centre plate with setting knob for rotary dimmer order no. 1135 7.., 1137 60 .. For centre plate with setting knob for speed controller order no. 1135 7.., 1137 60 79 For centre plate for pilot lamp E14 order no. 1167 7.., 1198 60 89 For centre plate for key switch/push-button for shutters order no. 1506 60 89 For centre plate for key switch/push-button order no. 1507 60 89 For SCHUKO socket outlet with hinged cover order no. 4751 72 .. For SCHUKO socket outlet with hinged cover and labelling field order no. 4752 72 ..
for socket outlets with self-closing hinged covers for 3-step switches for rotary switch for shutters for pilot lamp E14 for rotary dimmer, rotary dimmer LV and Tronic rotary dimmer for universal rotary dimmer and universal rotary dimmer extension unit for speed controllers
transparent
1010 71 00
1
For rocker order no. 1405 7.., 1620 60 89 For rocker with imprinted symbol arrows order no. 1405 7.. For rocker with 5 lenses attached order no. 1415 70 .. For rocker with 5 lenses attached and labelling field order no. 1415 71 .. For rocker with red lens and imprint „0“ order no. 1417 7.. For rocker with imprint „0“ order no. 1425 7.., 1622 60 89 For rocker with red lens and imprint „Heizung Notschalter“ order no. 1488 71 15 For rocker with 5 lenses attached and large labelling field order no. 1496 .. For rocker with imprinted symbol light order no. 1620 60 49 For rocker with imprinted symbol bell order no. 1620 60 59 For rocker with imprinted symbol door order no. 1620 60 69 For rocker with orange lens and imprint „Heizung Notschalter“ order no. 1621 60 69 For rocker with 2 lenses attached and imprinted symbol light order no. 1621 60 79 For rocker with 2 lenses attached order no. 1621 60 89 For rocker with orange lens and imprint „0“ order no. 1624 60 89 For rocker with labelling field order no. 1626 60 89 For rocker with 2 lenses attached and labelling field order no. 1628 60 .. For rocker with orange lens and touchable symbol light order no. 1651 60 49 For rocker with orange lens and touchable symbol bell order no. 1651 60 59 For rocker with orange lens and touchable symbol door order no. 1651 60 69 For rocker with 2 lenses attached and guide for mouth-held rod order no. 1661 60 49 For rocker with 2 lenses attached and large labelling field order no. 1696 60 79
with IP44 fixing piece to screw on for rocker switches change-over, intermediate, 2pole on/off 10 AX for rocker push-buttons for push-button BCU 1gang and group push-button BCU 1gang
Sealing set K. 1/K. 5/Q. 1 for key switch/key push-button transparent
1010 70 00
1
For centre plate for key switch/push-button for shutters order no. 1504 7.., 1506 60 89 For centre plate for key switch/push-button order no. 1505 7.., 1507 60 89
for key switches/key push-buttons for profile half cylinders with additional earth contact for key switches/key push-buttons for shutters for profile half cylinders with additional earth contact
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
157
BERKER Q.1 Order no.
Packing unit
NEW
Frames NEW
Order no.
Frame
polar white, velvety, 1gang
* 1011 60 19
10
* 1011 60 89
10
*
1012 60 89
10
polar white, velvety, 2gang vertical
* 1012 60 19
10
polar white, velvety, 2gang polar white, velvety, 3gang
*
2
polar white, velvety, 3gang vertical
* 1013 60 19
10
1013 60 89
* 1014 60 89
2
* 1014 60 19
2
polar white, velvety, 4gang
polar white, velvety, 4gang vertical
* 1015 60 89
2
* 1015 60 19
2
polar white, velvety, 5gang
polar white, velvety, 5gang vertical polar white, velvety, 2gang horizontal
* 1022 60 19
10
IP44 protection when using a sealing set order no. 1010 7..
polar white, velvety, 3gang horizontal
* 1023 60 19
10
Available from 04/2009
polar white, velvety, 4gang horizontal
* 1024 60 19
2
polar white, velvety, 5gang horizontal
* 1025 60 19
2
Frame red, velvety, 1gang red, velvety, 2gang red, velvety, 3gang red, velvety, 4gang red, velvety, 5gang
* 1011 60 62 * 1012 60 62 * 1013 60 62 * 1014 60 62 * 1015 60 62
10 10
2
Frame with large cut-out Frame with large cut-out polar white, velvety
Contrast frame 1gang
More versions available upon request!
Available from 04/2009
NEW
for vertical and horizontal mounting for emphasising special switches, socket outlets, etc.
* 1011 60 45
IP44 protection when using a sealing set order no. 1010 7..
2
Available from 04/2009
anthracite, velvety
Labelling field height arranged for 6 mm P-touch strips.
2
IP44 protection when using a sealing set order no. 1010 7..
NEW
Frame with labelling field
polar white, velvety, 1gang
for vertical and horizontal mounting NEW
Packing unit
10
* 1309 60 89
10
For push-button 3gang with RTR order no. 7566 37 29 For push-button 5gang with RTR order no. 7566 57 29 Available from 04/2009
for vertical mounting
IP44 protection when using a sealing set order no. 1010 7..
Barrier-free building based on DIN 18025 Available from 04/2009
for barrier-free construction
158
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
BERKER Q.1 Order no.
Packing unit
Order no.
Socket outlets
Socket outlets
SCHUKO-socket outlets
NEW
NEW
SCHUKO-socket outlet polar white, velvety red, velvety green, velvety orange, velvety polar white, velvety, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1
* 4743 60 89 * 4743 60 12 * 4743 60 13 * 4743 60 14 * 4723 60 89
10 10 10 10 10
16 A, 250 V~ The insert of the red, green and orange socket outlets is colour-coded. 61 4743 19 09, 61 4743 89 82 and 61 4743 89 89 for the Netherlands! Connection terminals IEC 60884-1 with plug-in terminals
* 4743 60 59 * 4723 60 59
NEW
* 4743 60 07
10
polar white, velvety, with 4743 60 09 * imprint „EDV“ in black
10
polar white, velvety, with 4743 60 39 * imprint „SV“ in green
10
polar white, velvety, with 4743 60 49 * imprint „ZSV“ in orange
10
polar white, velvety, with 4743 60 79 * imprint „EDV“ in red
10
SCHUKO-socket outlet 45°
* 4143 60 89 * 4143 60 12 * 4143 60 13 * 4143 60 14 * 4123 60 89
* 4727 60 89
10
Connection terminals IEC 60884-1 Available from 04/2009
10 10 10 10 10
for diagonal installation with plug-in terminals NEW
SCHUKO-socket outlet with labelling field polar white, velvety, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1 red, velvety green, velvety orange, velvety 16 A, 250 V~
The insert of the red, green and orange socket outlets is colour-coded.
* 4749 60 89
10
* 4750 60 02 * 4750 60 03 * 4750 60 07
10 10 10
The insert of the red, green and orange socket outlets is colour-coded.
Connection terminals according to IEC 60884-1
Labelling field height arranged for 6 mm P-touch strips.
Available from 04/2009
with screw terminals
Connection terminals IEC 60884-1
SCHUKO-socket outlet polar white, velvety, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1
orange, velvety, with imprint „ZSV“
Specially suited for combining several socket outlets if right angle plugs are used.
16 A, 250 V~
NEW
10
16 A, 250 V~
SCHUKO-socket outlet
polar white, velvety, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1
* 4743 60 03
polar white, velvety
without spreader claws with plug-in terminals
orange, velvety
green, velvety, with imprint „SV“
with plug-in terminals
Available from 04/2009
green, velvety
10
Available from 04/2009
10 10
Connection terminals IEC 60884-1
polar white, velvety red, velvety
* 4743 60 22
Connection terminals IEC 60884-1
16 A, 250 V~
NEW
red, velvety, with imprint „EDV“
Insert colour-coded.
SCHUKO-socket outlet for installation in hollow-walls polar white, velvety polar white, velvety, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1
SCHUKO-socket outlet with imprint
16 A, 250 V~
Available from 04/2009
NEW
Packing unit
* 73 4123 60 89
Available from 04/2009
10
with plug-in terminals
16 A, 250 V~ For South Tyrol only. Connection terminals IEC 60884-1 Available from 04/2009
with screw-in lift terminals "#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
159
BERKER Q.1 Order no.
NEW
Packing unit
SCHUKO-socket outlet with labelling field polar white, velvety, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1
* 4149 60 89
Order no.
NEW
10
16 A, 250 V~ Labelling field height arranged for 6 mm P-touch strips.
with screw terminals
10
orange, velvety, with imprint „ZSV“
* 4159 60 14
10
Replacement neon lamp unit see module inserts / accessories order no. 1609
red, velvety, with imprint „EDV“
* 4750 60 15
10
green, velvety, with imprint „SV“
* 4750 60 13
10
orange, velvety, with imprint „ZSV“
* 4750 60 14
10
Execution SV, ZSV to VDE 0100-710 Connection terminals IEC 60884-1 Available from 04/2009
with neon lamp unit with screw-in lift terminals
SCHUKO-socket outlets with safety device NEW
Labelling field height arranged for 6 mm P-touch strips.
* 4108 60 89 * 4108 60 62
1 1
16 A, 250 V~, 50/60 Hz
Connection terminals IEC 60884-1
Labelling field height arranged for 6 mm P-touch strips.
Available from 04/2009
with plug-in terminals
Overvoltage protection to EN 61643-11 and VDE 0675-6, -11 Connection terminals IEC 60884-1
SCHUKO-socket outlet with indicator lamp and imprint green, velvety, with imprint „SV“
* 4124 60 03
10
orange, velvety, with imprint „ZSV“
* 4124 60 07
10
16 A, 250 V~ Neon lamp current 1,5 mA
Available from 04/2009
with imprint with indicator LED for „on/error“ with acoustic fault signal with screw terminals NEW
Insert colour-coded. Replacement neon lamp unit see module inserts / accessories order no. 1609
Execution SV, ZSV to VDE 0100-710 Connection terminals IEC 60884-1
SCHUKO-socket outlet with RCD protection switch polar white, velvety, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1
* 4708 60 89
1
16 A, 250 V~, 50/60 Hz Rated fault current 30 mA; Switch off time <= 30 ms; Short-circuit resistance 3 kA (with pre-fuse 20 AgL); Surge current firmness 250 A (8/20) µs
Available from 04/2009
with neon lamp unit with screw-in lift terminals
SCHUKO-socket outlet with indicator lamp and labelling field
* 4159 60 89
SCHUKO-socket outlet with overvoltage protection and labelling field polar white, velvety red, velvety
Insert is colour-coded.
polar white, velvety
* 4159 60 13
Insert is colour-coded.
SCHUKO-socket outlet with imprint and labelling field
16 A, 250 V~
NEW
green, velvety, with imprint „SV“
Labelling field height arranged for 6 mm P-touch strips.
Available from 04/2009
NEW
SCHUKO-socket outlet with indicator lamp, labelling field and imprint
16 A, 250 V~ Neon lamp current 1,5 mA
Connection terminals IEC 60884-1
NEW
Packing unit
10
16 A, 250 V~ Neon lamp current 1,5 mA
Labelling field height arranged for 6 mm P-touch strips.
Through-wired socket outlets are also protected. Suitable for use according to DIN VDE 0100-410 Tested conform VDE 0664 (EN 61008) Connection terminals IEC 60884-1 Available from 04/2009
to protect connected and downstream loads with plug-in terminals
Replacement neon lamp unit see module inserts / accessories order no. 1609
Connection terminals IEC 60884-1 Available from 04/2009
with neon lamp unit with screw-in lift terminals 160
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
BERKER Q.1 Order no.
Packing unit
NEW
SCHUKO-socket outlets NEW
Order no.
SCHUKO-socket outlet with hinged cover polar white, velvety, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1
* 4751 60 89
Connection terminals IEC 60884-1
IP44 protection when using sealing set order no. 1010 72 00
Available from 04/2009
Connection terminals IEC 60884-1
with imprint with self-closing hinged covers with plug-in terminals
Available from 04/2009
with imprint with self-closing hinged covers with plug-in terminals
SCHUKO-socket outlet with hinged cover polar white, velvety, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1
* 4751 60 79
10
Barrier-free construction NEW
16 A, 250 V~
Connection terminals IEC 60884-1
Barrier-free building based on DIN 18025 Connection terminals IEC 60884-1
SCHUKO-socket outlet with hinged cover
Available from 04/2009
10
16 A, 250 V~
for barrier-free construction with plug-in terminals
SCHUKO-socket outlets
Specially suited for combining several socket outlets if right angle plugs are used.
NEW
Available from 04/2009
For fitting in 1gang wall boxes according to DIN 49073-1 Connection terminals IEC 60884-1
Labelling field height arranged for 6 mm P-touch strips. Connection terminals IEC 60884-1 Available from 04/2009
with imprint mounting orientation of insert selectable in 45° steps with hinged cover that falls back with plug-in terminals "#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
Available from 04/2009
10
Specially suited for combining several socket outlets if right angle plugs are used.
10
61 4754 89 82, 61 4754 89 89 and 61 4754 99 09 for the Netherlands!
SCHUKO-socket outlet with hinged cover and labelling field
16 A, 250 V~
* 4729 60 89
16 A, 250 V~
with imprint mounting orientation of insert selectable in 45° steps with hinged cover that falls back with plug-in terminals
* 4746 60 89
Double SCHUKO-socket outlet with cover plate polar white, velvety, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1
Connection terminals IEC 60884-1
polar white, velvety, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1
10
An optical accentuation can be achieved by using a contrast frame order no. 1011 60 45
with imprint with hinged cover that falls back with plug-in terminals
NEW
* 4744 60 49
16 A, 250 V~
Available from 04/2009
* 4744 60 89
SCHUKO-socket outlet with hinged cover and touchable symbol socket outlet polar white, velvety, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1
on page T6
polar white, velvety, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1
10
Labelling field height arranged for 6 mm P-touch strips.
IP44 protection when using sealing set order no. 1010 72 00
NEW
* 4752 60 89
16 A, 250 V~
16 A, 250 V~
NEW
SCHUKO-socket outlet with hinged cover and labelling field polar white, velvety, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1
10
Packing unit
with plug-in terminals
SCHUKO-socket outlets for cable ducts NEW
SCHUKO-socket outlet combination 2gang with frame polar white, velvety 16 A, 250 V~
* 4720 60 89
5
For installation in cable duct mounting boxes and in standard commercially available 2gang hollow wall boxes, also in 2gang flush-mounted boxes. Connection terminals IEC 60884-1 Available from 04/2009
without spreader claws 2 x 1gang, wired-through with plug-in terminals 161
BERKER Q.1 Order no.
Packing unit
NEW
Socket outlets without earth contact NEW
Order no.
polar white, velvety 16 A, 250 V~ Mirror depth 8 mm
* 61 6103 60 89
Socket outlet with earth pin and hinged cover polar white, velvety, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1
Socket outlet without earth contact 10
Packing unit
* 67 6583 60 89
10
16 A, 250 V~ Available from 04/2009
Connection terminals IEC 60884-1
with imprint 2pole + earth with hinged cover that falls back with screw-in lift terminals
Available from 04/2009
2pole with screw terminals NEW
NEMA socket outlets
Socket outlet without earth contact polar white, velvety polar white, velvety, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1
* 61 6703 60 89 61 6733 60 89 *
10 10
NEW
Socket outlet with earth contact, USA/CANADA, NEMA 5-15 R polar white, velvety 15 A, 125 V~
16 A, 250 V~ Mirror depth 8 mm
Available from 04/2009
2pole + earth without spreader claws with screw terminals
Available from 04/2009
2pole without spreader claws with plug-in terminals
NEW
Socket outlet with earth contact, USA/CANADA, NEMA 5-20 R
Socket outlets with earth pin
polar white, velvety
NEW
20 A, 125 V~
Socket outlet with earth pin 16 A, 250 V~
10
Equates to standard NEMA 5-15 R
Connection terminals IEC 60884-1
polar white, velvety
* 4166 60 89
* 67 6380 60 89
* 4168 60 89
10
10 Equates to standard NEMA 5-20 R Available from 04/2009
2pole + earth without spreader claws with screw terminals
Available from 04/2009
2pole + earth with screw-in lift terminals NEW
Covers for switches / push-buttons
Socket outlet with earth pin polar white, velvety, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1 red, velvety, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1
* 67 6576 60 89
green, velvety, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1
* 67 6576 60 13
orange, velvety, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1
* 67 6576 60 14
10
Rockers NEW
Rocker polar white, velvety
*
67 6576 60 12
16 A, 250 V~
10
Available from 04/2009
2pole + earth with screw-in lift terminals
10
IP44 protection when using sealing set order no. 1010 71 00
10
Available from 04/2009
for rocker switches change-over, intermediate for rocker push-buttons for push-button BCU 1gang and group push-button BCU 1gang
10
NEW
Rocker with labelling field polar white, velvety
Connection terminals IEC 60884-1
* 1620 60 89
* 1626 60 89
10
Labelling field height arranged for 6 mm P-touch strips for labelling with names, notes etc. IP44 protection when using sealing set order no. 1010 71 00 Available from 04/2009
for rocker switches change-over, intermediate for rocker push-buttons for push-button BCU 1gang and group push-button BCU 1gang
162
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
BERKER Q.1 Order no.
NEW
Packing unit
NEW
Rocker with imprinted symbol light polar white, velvety
* 1620 60 49
Order no.
10
for rocker switches change-over, intermediate for rocker push-buttons for push-button BCU 1gang and group push-button BCU 1gang
* 1620 60 59
IP44 protection when using neon lamp unit order no. 1675 .. and sealing set order no. 1010 71 00 Available from 04/2009
for rocker switches change-over, intermediate for rocker push-buttons for push-button BCU 1gang and group push-button BCU 1gang for monitoring circuit
10
IP44 protection when using sealing set order no. 1010 71 00 NEW
Available from 04/2009
for rocker switches change-over, intermediate for rocker push-buttons for push-button BCU 1gang and group push-button BCU 1gang NEW
Rocker with imprinted symbol door polar white, velvety
* 1620 60 69
10
Not suitable for heating systems > 50 kW.
Rocker with imprinted symbol bell polar white, velvety
* 1621 60 69
Or use glass pane protected heating emergency switch from programme ranges Arsys, flush-mounted splash-protected IP44, Aquatec IP44.
Available from 04/2009
NEW
Rocker with orange lens and „Heizung Notschalter“ imprint polar white, velvety
IP44 protection when using sealing set order no. 1010 71 00
Packing unit
Rocker with 2 lenses attached and labelling field polar white, velvety, with * 1628 60 79 imprinted symbol bell
10
polar white, velvety
10
* 1628 60 89
Labelling field height arranged for 6 mm P-touch strips for labelling with names, notes etc.
10
Lenses in orange and clear attached.
IP44 protection when using sealing set order no. 1010 71 00
IP44 protection when using neon lamp unit order no. 1675 .. and sealing set order no. 1010 71 00
Available from 04/2009 Available from 04/2009
for rocker switches change-over, intermediate for rocker push-buttons for push-button BCU 1gang and group push-button BCU 1gang NEW
Rocker with 2 lenses attached polar white, velvety
* 1621 60 89
10
Lenses in orange and clear attached. IP44 protection when using sealing set order no. 1010 71 00 Available from 04/2009
for rocker switches change-over, intermediate for rocker push-buttons for illumination and monitoring circuit for push-button BCU 1gang and group push-button BCU 1gang NEW
for rocker switches change-over, intermediate for rocker push-buttons for push-button BCU 1gang and group push-button BCU 1gang for illumination and monitoring circuit
Rocker with 2 lenses attached and imprinted symbol light polar white, velvety
* 1621 60 79
10
Lenses in orange and clear attached. IP44 protection when using neon lamp unit order no. 1675 .. and sealing set order no. 1010 71 00 Available from 04/2009
for rocker switches change-over, intermediate for rocker push-buttons for illumination and monitoring circuit for push-button BCU 1gang and group push-button BCU 1gang
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
NEW
Rocker with 2 lenses attached and large labelling field polar white, velvety, with * 1696 60 79 imprinted symbol bell
10
polar white, velvety
10
* 1696 60 89
Labelling field (w x h) approx. 50,8 x 25,5 mm For labelling with names, notes etc. Labelling field height arranged for two 18 mm P-touch strips. Lenses in orange and clear attached.
IP44 protection when using neon lamp unit order no. 1675 .. and sealing set order no. 1010 71 00 Available from 04/2009
for rocker switches change-over, intermediate for rocker push-buttons for push-button BCU 1gang and group push-button BCU 1gang for illumination and monitoring circuit
163
BERKER Q.1 Order no.
NEW
Packing unit
NEW
Rocker with imprint „0“ polar white, velvety
* 1622 60 89
Order no.
IP44 protection when using rocker switch order no. 3032 and sealing set order no. 1010 71 00
for rocker switch 2- and 3pole on/off
* 1624 60 89
10
Available from 04/2009
Rocker with orange lens and imprint „0“ polar white, velvety
* 1620 60 79
IP44 protection when using sealing set order no. 1010 71 00 For group push-button BCU 1gang order no. 7514 11 00
Available from 04/2009
NEW
Rocker with imprinted symbol arrows polar white, velvety
10
Packing unit
NEW
10
Rockers with imprinted symbol arrows polar white, velvety
Lenses in orange and clear attached.
* 1644 60 89
10
For group rockers push-button as 2pole rockers push-button for shutters with middle positions order no. 5034 04 For group push-button BCU 2gang order no. 7514 21 00
IP44 protection when using rocker switch order no. 3032, neon lamp unit order no. 1675 .. and sealing set order no. 1010 71 00 Available from 04/2009
Available from 04/2009
for rocker switch 2- and 3pole on/off for group push-button BCU 1gang for illumination and monitoring circuit NEW
Barrier-free construction NEW
Rockers polar white, velvety
* 1623 60 89
Rocker with 2 lenses attached and mouth-held rod polar white, velvety
10
* 1661 60 49
10
Lenses in orange and clear attached. IP44 protection when using neon lamp unit order no. 1675 .. and sealing set order no. 1010 71 00 An optical accentuation can be achieved by using a contrast frame order no. 1011 60 45
Available from 04/2009
for rockers switches for rockers push-buttons and group rockers pushbuttons for push-button BCU 2gang and group push-button BCU 2gang NEW
Barrier-free building based on DIN 18025 Available from 04/2009
for barrier-free construction for rocker switches change-over, intermediate for rocker push-buttons for push-button BCU 1gang and group push-button BCU 1gang for illumination and monitoring circuit
Rockers with orange lens polar white, velvety
* 1627 60 89
10
Illumination possible only by 1 neon lamp unit. Available from 04/2009
for rockers switches for rockers push-buttons and group rockers pushbuttons for illumination and monitoring circuit for push-button BCU 2gang and group push-button BCU 2gang NEW
Rockers for rockers switch 3gang on/off polar white, velvety
* 1665 60 89
10
For rockers switch 3gang on/off order no. 6330 23 Available from 04/2009 NEW
Rockers with imprinted symbol arrow polar white, velvety
* 1625 60 89
10
NEW
Rocker with orange lens and touchable symbol light polar white, velvety
* 1651 60 49
10
IP44 protection when using neon lamp unit order no. 1675 .. and sealing set order no. 1010 71 00 An optical accentuation can be achieved by using a contrast frame order no. 1011 60 45
Barrier-free building based on DIN 18025 Available from 04/2009
for barrier-free construction for rocker switches change-over, intermediate for rocker push-buttons for illumination and monitoring circuit for push-button BCU 1gang and group push-button BCU 1gang
For rockers switch for shutters order no. 3035 20 For rockers push-button for shutters order no. 5035 20 For push-button BCU 2gang order no. 7514 20 00 Available from 04/2009
164
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
BERKER Q.1 Order no.
NEW
Packing unit
* 1651 60 59
NEW
10
* 1084 60 89
1
IP44 protection when using neon lamp unit order no. 1675 .. and sealing set order no. 1010 71 00 An optical accentuation can be achieved by using a contrast frame order no. 1011 60 45
polar white, velvety, with 1096 60 89 * neutral-position
1
Barrier-free building based on DIN 18025
IP44 protection when using sealing set order no. 1010 72 00 For 3-step switch with 0-position order no. 3861 For 3-step switch without 0-position order no. 3861 01
for barrier-free construction for illuminated rocker push-buttons for push-button BCU 1gang
Available from 04/2009
with imprint
Rocker with orange lens and touchable symbol door polar white, velvety
* 1651 60 69
10
Rotary switches/rotary push-buttons for shutters NEW
IP44 protection when using neon lamp unit order no. 1675 .. and sealing set order no. 1010 71 00 An optical accentuation can be achieved by using a contrast frame order no. 1011 60 45
for barrier-free construction for illuminated rocker push-buttons for push-button BCU 1gang
with imprint
Key switches/key push-buttons for shutters
Hotel card switch cover with imprint and orange lens
NEW
10
Centre plate with lock for key switch for shutters polar white, velvety, * 1081 60 89 key removable in mid position polar white, velvety, key * 1082 60 89 removable in 3 positions
Max. card width 54 mm; Card strength 0,5 - 1,4 mm on page T6
1
Available from 04/2009
Hotel card switch
* 1640 60 89
* 1080 60 89
IP44 protection when using sealing set order no. 1010 72 00 Interlock disk for conversion to push-button see module inserts order no. 1861 Rotary switch for shutters order no. 3841, 3842
Available from 04/2009
polar white, velvety
Centre plate with rotary knob for rotary switch for shutters polar white, velvety
Barrier-free building based on DIN 18025
NEW
Centre plate with rotary knob for 3-step switch polar white, velvety, without 0-position
Available from 04/2009
NEW
Packing unit
3-step switches
Rocker with orange lens and touchable symbol bell polar white, velvety
Order no.
Other imprint on request! For push-button insert for hotel card switch covers order no. 5051 02, 5051 03, 5052 01, 5056 01
1
1
For key switch for shutters order no. 3851, 3852
Pullcord switches/pullcord push-buttons NEW
polar white, velvety
* 1146 60 89
with imprint with push lock function with 2 keys
10
For pullcord push-button order no. 3956 19 For pullcord switch order no. 3962, 3966, 6139 ..
NEW
Centre plate with lock for key switch for shutters polar white, velvety, key removable in mid position
Available from 04/2009
Rotary switches NEW
Available from 04/2009
Centre plate for pullcord switch and pullcord push-button
* 1083 60 89
1
Centre plate with rotary knob for rotary switch polar white, velvety
* 1150 60 89
For rotary switch order no. 3862 .. Available from 04/2009
with imprint „0“ and „1“
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
1
For key switch for shutters order no. 3851, 3852 Available from 04/2009
with imprint only push-button function with 2 keys
165
BERKER Q.1 Order no.
NEW
Packing unit
Centre plate for key switch/key push-button for shutters polar white, velvety
* 1506 60 89
Order no.
NEW
IP44 protection when using sealing set order no. 1010 70 00 For key switch for shutters order no. 3822 10 For key push-button for shutters order no. 3831 10, 3832 10
with imprint for profile half cylinders for master-key systems
on supporting plate with large cut-out for customised cut-outs or holes when installing special solutions space-saving for relays, etc. with cover plug for screw fitting without spreader claws
Pilot lamps NEW
Key switches/key push-buttons Centre plate for key switch/key push-button
* 1507 60 89
10
Push-buttons, LEDs, neon lamps and covers see module inserts. For push-button and pilot lamp E10 order no. 5101 .. Available from 04/2009
centre plate plug-in fixing
Available from 04/2009
for profile half cylinders for master-key systems
NEW
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for 50 x 50 mm centre plate of the corresponding range.
Available from 04/2009 NEW
Blank plates
Cover for LED orientation light and LED signal light polar white, velvety
Blank plate with centre plate
* 1248 60 89
* 1009 60 89
20
For LED orientation light order no. 2951 For LED signal light order no. 2952
* 67 1009 60 89
10
Available from 04/2009
IP44 protection when using sealing set order no. 1010 72 00
10
IP44 protection when using sealing set order no. 1010 72 00 For pilot lamp E14 order no. 5131 02
1
For RCD protection switch order no. 2844
* 1198 60 89
LEDs, incandescent lamps and covers see module inserts.
50 x 50 mm centre plate for RCD protection switch 1493 19 09
Centre plate for pilot lamp E14 polar white, velvety
RCD protection switch
polar white, velvety, without base and spreader claws polar white, velvety, with base and spreader claws
* 1124 60 89
Cut-out diameter 27,2 mm
IP44 protection when using sealing set order no. 1010 70 00 For key switch order no. 3826 10 For key push-button order no. 3856 20
NEW
Centre plate for push-button and pilot lamp E10 polar white, velvety
10
Profile half cylinders see module inserts.
polar white, matt/velvety
20
Available from 04/2009
Available from 04/2009
polar white, velvety
* 1009 60 79
IP44 protection when using sealing set order no. 1010 72 00
Profile half cylinders see module inserts.
NEW
Blank plate with centre plate and screw-fixing polar white, velvety
10
Packing unit
1
with printed labels „Bitte warten / Bitte eintreten“ and „Do not disturb / make up room“ with milky foil, for individual labelling NEW
Info pilot lamp cover with 5 label sheets polar white, velvety
Available from 04/2009
Current input 25 mA; LED output 800 mW
on supporting plate without cut-out centre plate plug-in fixing on page T29
* 1345 60 89
1
Labels supplied: „Nicht eintreten“, „Besetzt“, „Bitte eintreten“, „Bitte Ruhe“, „Bitte warten“. Coloured cover plate see module inserts order no. 1289 .. For insert info pilot lamp order no. 2949
with 4 light intensity LED very long LED lifetime with clear cover plate
166
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
BERKER Q.1 Order no.
Packing unit
NEW
timers NEW
Order no.
Centre plate with setting knob for mechanical timer
Packing unit
Centre plate with setting knob for rotary dimmer polar white, velvety
* 1137 60 69
10
polar white, velvety, max. 15 minutes
* 1632 60 89
1
Axial dimension diameter 6 mm
polar white, velvety, max. 120 minutes
* 1633 60 89
1
IP44 protection when using sealing set order no. 1010 72 00 Available from 04/2009
Mechanical timer 15 minutes order no. 2040 Mechanical timer 120 minutes order no. 2041
Speed controllers NEW
Available from 04/2009
with time scale imprint NEW
Centre plate with setting knob for speed controller polar white, velvety
* 1137 60 79
Axial dimension diameter 4 mm
Centre plate with push-button for timer relay switch insert Axial dimension diameter 4 mm
IP44 protection when using sealing set order no. 1010 72 00 For speed controller order no. 2968 01
for order no. 2948 10
Available from 04/2009
polar white, velvety
* 1674 60 89
10
10
with imprinted symbol curve Available from 04/2009
Universal series touch dimmers
with imprint with clear lens NEW
NEW
Easy timer with display polar white, velvety
* 1735 60 89
1
Per programme block 2 switching times for „on/off“; Power reserve approx. 4 hrs., maintenance-free; Operating temperature 5 - 35 °C on page T7
Button for universal series touch dimmer polar white, velvety
* 1765 60 89
1
For universal series touch dimmer order no. 2901 on page T10
Available from 04/2009
for 2 independent lighting groups with 2-push-buttons operation concept per series
For manual and timer programmed switching of electrical loads.
BLC Berker Light Control
For insert for timer order no. 2948
Buttons simple programming of switching times with quick programming mode can be programmed up to 4 hours after pulling from the insert 2 programme blocks Mon. - Fri. and Sat. - Sun. with automatic summer-/winter time switching (can be switched off) large-area display with symbols display of next switching time with slide switch for manual/automatic
Rotary dimmers NEW
Centre plate with setting knob for rotary dimmer polar white, velvety
* 1137 60 89
10
Axial dimension diameter 4 mm
IP44 protection when using sealing set order no. 1010 72 00 For rotary dimmer order no. 2819 .., 2830 10, 2860 10, 2875, 2885 For universal rotary dimmer order no. 2861 10 For universal rotary dimmer extension unit order no 2862 10 For rotary dimmer LV order no. 2866 10, 2873 For Tronic rotary dimmer order no. 2867 10, 2874 For rotary potentiometer 1-10 V order no. 2891 10 For push-button rotary potentiometer 1-10 V order no. 2896 10 For rotary potentiometer DALI order no. 2897
NEW
BLC button polar white, velvety
on page T12
* 1761 60 89
1
For BLC universal touch dimmer order no. 2902 For BLC touch control unit 1-10 V order no. 2903 For BLC touch dimmer LV order no. 2904 For BLC triac switch insert LV order no. 2905 for BLC relay switch insert order no. 2906 For BLC relay switch insert with potential-free contact order no. 2906 10 For BLC extension unit order no 2907 For BLC relay switch insert HVAC order no. 2912 For BLC Tronic switch insert order no. 2916 For magnetic contact order no. 2916, 2934 10 For BLC stair light time switching impulse insert order no. 2934 10
with 2-push-buttons operation concept start-up brightness will be stored after power failure with BLC relay switch insert HVAC used as timer as well
Available from 04/2009 "#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
167
BERKER Q.1 Order no.
Packing unit
NEW
Radio buttons NEW
Order no.
polar white, velvety
* 1760 60 89
1
Radio signal reception frequency 433,42 MHz; Learnable radio transmitters 30 on page T12
Extension unit operation with BLC extension unit and push-button (NO) possible as of release R2.1. For actuation via button and radio transmitter. For BLC universal touch dimmer order no. 2902 For BLC touch control unit 1-10 V order no. 2903 For BLC touch dimmer LV order no. 2904 For BLC triac switch insert LV order no. 2905 for BLC relay switch insert order no. 2906 For BLC relay switch insert with potential-free contact order no. 2906 10 For BLC relay switch insert HVAC order no. 2912 For BLC Tronic switch insert order no. 2916 Available from 04/2009
with 2-push-buttons operation concept with 5 light scenes for „on/off“, dimming value retrieving light scenes only by using radio transmitter radio signal of taught-in radio controllers causes switch on for 1 min. (retriggering) start-up brightness will be stored after power failure reset function (to factory setting)
BLC Controllers NEW
BLC controller 180 polar white, velvety
on page T15
BLC controller 180 polar white, velvety
BLC radio button
* 1783 60 89
1
Nominal mounting height 1,1 m; Range frontal approx. 10 m; Range lateral each approx. 6 m; Detection field semi-oval shaped approx. 10 x 12 m; Detection angle 180 °; Detection levels 2; Switching segments 72; Response sensitivity programmable approx. 20 - 100 % ; Response brightness adjustable approx. 0 - 80 / unlimited Lux; Delay time approx. 2 min.; Operating temperature -20 - +45 °C; Dimensions assembling height 23,5 mm
on page T15
Packing unit
* 1786 60 89
1
Nominal mounting height 2,2 m; Range frontal approx. 12 m; Range lateral each approx. 6 m; At assembly height 1,1 m; Range frontal approx. 6 m; Range lateral each approx. 3 m; Detection field semi-oval shaped approx. 12 x 12 m; Detection angle 180 °; Detection levels 3; Switching segments 104; Response sensitivity programmable approx. 20 - 100 % ; Response brightness adjustable approx. 0 - 80 / unlimited Lux; Delay time approx. 2 min.; Operating temperature -20 - +45 °C; Dimensions assembling height 23,5 mm Switches on for the duration of the controller delay time in case minimum response brightness level is infringed and if movement of people is detected. In conjunction with a BLC relay switch unit HVAC, the HVAC-channel is also switched on for the duration of its delay time independent of response brightness. For BLC universal touch dimmer order no. 2902 For BLC touch control unit 1-10 V order no. 2903 For BLC touch dimmer LV order no. 2904 For BLC triac switch insert LV order no. 2905 for BLC relay switch insert order no. 2906 For BLC relay switch insert with potential-free contact order no. 2906 10 For BLC controller extension unit order no. 2908 For BLC relay switch insert HVAC order no. 2912 For BLC Tronic switch insert order no. 2916 For BLC stair light time switching impulse insert order no. 2934 10
V with cover to limit detection angle to 90°
Switches on for the duration of the controller delay time in case minimum response brightness level is infringed and if movement of people is detected. In conjunction with a BLC relay switch unit HVAC, the HVAC-channel is also switched on for the duration of its delay time independent of response brightness. For BLC universal touch dimmer order no. 2902 For BLC touch control unit 1-10 V order no. 2903 For BLC touch dimmer LV order no. 2904 For BLC triac switch insert LV order no. 2905 for BLC relay switch insert order no. 2906 For BLC relay switch insert with potential-free contact order no. 2906 10 For BLC controller extension unit order no. 2908 For BLC relay switch insert HVAC order no. 2912 For BLC Tronic switch insert order no. 2916 For BLC stair light time switching impulse insert order no. 2934 10
U with cover to limit detection angle to 90° 168
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
BERKER Q.1 Order no.
NEW
BLC controller 180 comfort with slide switch for off/automatic/on polar white, velvety
on page T15
Packing unit
* 1784 60 89
NEW
Switches on for the duration of the delay time set on the controller in case minimum response brightness level is infringed and if movement of people is detected. In conjunction with a BLC relay switch unit HVAC, the HVAC-channel is also switched on for the duration of its delay time independent of response brightness. For BLC universal touch dimmer order no. 2902 For BLC touch control unit 1-10 V order no. 2903 For BLC touch dimmer LV order no. 2904 For BLC triac switch insert LV order no. 2905 for BLC relay switch insert order no. 2906 For BLC relay switch insert with potential-free contact order no. 2906 10 For BLC controller extension unit order no. 2908 For BLC relay switch insert HVAC order no. 2912 For BLC Tronic switch insert order no. 2916 For BLC stair light time switching impulse insert order no. 2934 10
U microprocessor controlled mode of oper.(detection signal evaluation and interfering signal suppres.) glare-proof e.g. against a torch no switching with unforeseeable short shadows with adaptive sensitivity adjustment with teach function for response brightness step operation with immunity time (e.g. for bell) switch-on brightness in conjunction with BLC dimmer inserts can only be saved via BLC extension unit with dimming function (soft-off) when using BLC dimmer inserts with cover to limit detection angle to 90°
on page T15
Packing unit
BLC controller 180 comfort with slide switch for off/automatic/on polar white, velvety
1
Nominal mounting height 1,1 m; Range frontal approx. 10 m; Range lateral each approx. 6 m; Detection field semi-oval shaped approx. 10 x 12 m; Detection angle 180 °; Detection levels 2; Switching segments 72; Response sensitivity programmable approx. 20 - 100 % ; Response brightness adjustable approx. 0 - 80 / unlimited Lux; Delay time adjustable approx. 10 sec.- 30 min. ; Time to dim down 30 sec.; Step operation 0,5 sec.; Immunity time approx. 3 sec.; Operating temperature -20 - +45 °C; Dimensions assembling height 23,5 mm
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
Order no.
* 1787 60 89
1
Nominal mounting height 2,2 m; Range frontal approx. 12 m; Range lateral each approx. 6 m; At assembly height 1,1 m; Range frontal approx. 6 m; Range lateral each approx. 3 m; Detection field semi-oval shaped approx. 12 x 12 m; Detection angle 180 °; Detection levels 3; Switching segments 104; Response sensitivity programmable approx. 20 - 100 % ; Response brightness adjustable approx. 0 - 80 / unlimited Lux; Delay time adjustable approx. 10 sec.- 30 min. ; Time to dim down 30 sec.; Step operation 0,5 sec.; Immunity time approx. 3 sec.; Operating temperature -20 - +45 °C; Dimensions assembling height 23,5 mm Switches on for the duration of the delay time set on the controller in case minimum response brightness level is infringed and if movement of people is detected. In conjunction with a BLC relay switch unit HVAC, the HVAC-channel is also switched on for the duration of its delay time independent of response brightness. For BLC universal touch dimmer order no. 2902 For BLC touch control unit 1-10 V order no. 2903 For BLC touch dimmer LV order no. 2904 For BLC triac switch insert LV order no. 2905 for BLC relay switch insert order no. 2906 For BLC relay switch insert with potential-free contact order no. 2906 10 For BLC controller extension unit order no. 2908 For BLC relay switch insert HVAC order no. 2912 For BLC Tronic switch insert order no. 2916 For BLC stair light time switching impulse insert order no. 2934 10
V microprocessor controlled mode of oper.(detection signal evaluation and interfering signal suppres.) glare-proof e.g. against a torch no switching with unforeseeable short shadows with adaptive sensitivity adjustment with teach function for response brightness step operation with immunity time (e.g. for bell) switch-on brightness in conjunction with BLC dimmer inserts can only be saved via BLC extension unit with dimming function (soft-off) when using BLC dimmer inserts with cover to limit detection angle to 90°
169
BERKER Q.1 Order no.
NEW
* 1783 61 89
Switches on for the duration of the controller delay time in case minimum response brightness level is infringed and if movement of people is detected. In conjunction with a BLC relay switch unit HVAC, the HVAC-channel is also switched on for the duration of its delay time independent of response brightness.
U IP44 Available from 04/2009
with cover to limit detection angle to 90°
on page T15
Packing unit
BLC controller 180 comfort IP44 polar white, velvety
1
Nominal mounting height 1,1 m; Range frontal approx. 10 m; Range lateral each approx. 6 m; Detection field semi-oval shaped approx. 10 x 12 m; Detection angle 180 °; Detection levels 2; Switching segments 72; Response sensitivity programmable approx. 20 - 100 % ; Response brightness adjustable approx. 0 - 80 / unlimited Lux; Delay time approx. 2 min.; Operating temperature -20 - +45 °C; Dimensions assembling height 23,5 mm
For BLC universal touch dimmer order no. 2902 For BLC touch control unit 1-10 V order no. 2903 For BLC touch dimmer LV order no. 2904 For BLC triac switch insert LV order no. 2905 for BLC relay switch insert order no. 2906 For BLC relay switch insert with potential-free contact order no. 2906 10 For BLC controller extension unit order no. 2908 For BLC relay switch insert HVAC order no. 2912 For BLC Tronic switch insert order no. 2916 For BLC stair light time switching impulse insert order no. 2934 10
Order no.
NEW
BLC controller 180 IP44 polar white, velvety
on page T15
Packing unit
* 1784 61 89
1
Nominal mounting height 1,1 m; Range frontal approx. 10 m; Range lateral each approx. 6 m; Detection field semi-oval shaped approx. 10 x 12 m; Detection angle 180 °; Detection levels 2; Switching segments 72; Response sensitivity programmable approx. 20 - 100 % ; Response brightness adjustable approx. 0 - 80 / unlimited Lux; Delay time adjustable approx. 10 sec.- 30 min. ; Time to dim down 30 sec.; Step operation 0,5 sec.; Immunity time approx. 3 sec.; Operating temperature -20 - +45 °C; Dimensions assembling height 23,5 mm Switches on for the duration of the delay time set on the controller in case minimum response brightness level is infringed and if movement of people is detected. In conjunction with a BLC relay switch unit HVAC, the HVAC-channel is also switched on for the duration of its delay time independent of response brightness. For BLC universal touch dimmer order no. 2902 For BLC touch control unit 1-10 V order no. 2903 For BLC touch dimmer LV order no. 2904 For BLC triac switch insert LV order no. 2905 for BLC relay switch insert order no. 2906 For BLC relay switch insert with potential-free contact order no. 2906 10 For BLC controller extension unit order no. 2908 For BLC relay switch insert HVAC order no. 2912 For BLC Tronic switch insert order no. 2916 For BLC stair light time switching impulse insert order no. 2934 10
U IP44 Available from 04/2009
microprocessor controlled mode of oper.(detection signal evaluation and interfering signal suppres.) glare-proof e.g. against a torch no switching with unforeseeable short shadows with adaptive sensitivity adjustment with teach function for response brightness step operation with immunity time (e.g. for bell) switch-on brightness in conjunction with BLC dimmer inserts can only be saved via BLC extension unit with dimming function (soft-off) when using BLC dimmer inserts with cover to limit detection angle to 90°
170
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
BERKER Q.1 Order no.
NEW
* 1786 61 89
Switches on for the duration of the delay time set on the controller in case minimum response brightness level is infringed and if movement of people is detected. In conjunction with a BLC relay switch unit HVAC, the HVAC-channel is also switched on for the duration of its delay time independent of response brightness.
V IP44 Available from 04/2009
with cover to limit detection angle to 90°
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
on page T15
Packing unit
BLC controller 180 comfort IP44 polar white, velvety
1
Nominal mounting height 2,2 m; Range frontal approx. 12 m; Range lateral each approx. 6 m; At assembly height 1,1 m; Range frontal approx. 6 m; Range lateral each approx. 3 m; Detection field semi-oval shaped approx. 12 x 12; Detection angle 180 °; Detection levels 3; Switching segments 104; Response sensitivity programmable approx. 20 - 100 % ; Response brightness adjustable approx. 0 - 80 / unlimited Lux; Delay time approx. 2 min.; Operating temperature -20 - +45 °C; Dimensions assembling height 23,5 mm
For BLC universal touch dimmer order no. 2902 For BLC touch control unit 1-10 V order no. 2903 For BLC touch dimmer LV order no. 2904 For BLC triac switch insert LV order no. 2905 for BLC relay switch insert order no. 2906 For BLC relay switch insert with potential-free contact order no. 2906 10 For BLC controller extension unit order no. 2908 For BLC relay switch insert HVAC order no. 2912 For BLC Tronic switch insert order no. 2916 For BLC stair light time switching impulse insert order no. 2934 10
Order no.
NEW
BLC controller 180 IP44 polar white, velvety
on page T15
Packing unit
* 1787 61 89
1
Nominal mounting height 2,2 m; Range frontal approx. 12 m; Range lateral each approx. 6 m; At assembly height 1,1 m; Range frontal approx. 6 m; Range lateral each approx. 3 m; Detection field semi-oval shaped approx. 12 x 12 m; Detection angle 180 °; Detection levels 3; Switching segments 104; Response sensitivity programmable approx. 20 - 100 % ; Response brightness adjustable approx. 0 - 80 / unlimited Lux; Delay time adjustable approx. 10 sec.- 30 min. ; Time to dim down 30 sec.; Step operation 0,5 sec.; Immunity time approx. 3 sec.; Operating temperature -20 - +45 °C; Dimensions assembling height 23,5 mm For BLC universal touch dimmer order no. 2902 For BLC touch control unit 1-10 V order no. 2903 For BLC touch dimmer LV order no. 2904 For BLC triac switch insert LV order no. 2905 for BLC relay switch insert order no. 2906 For BLC relay switch insert with potential-free contact order no. 2906 10 For BLC controller extension unit order no. 2908 For BLC relay switch insert HVAC order no. 2912 For BLC Tronic switch insert order no. 2916 For BLC stair light time switching impulse insert order no. 2934 10
V IP44 Available from 04/2009
microprocessor controlled mode of oper.(detection signal evaluation and interfering signal suppres.) glare-proof e.g. against a torch no switching with unforeseeable short shadows with adaptive sensitivity adjustment with teach function for response brightness step operation with immunity time (e.g. for bell) switch-on brightness in conjunction with BLC dimmer inserts can only be saved via BLC extension unit with dimming function (soft-off) when using BLC dimmer inserts with cover to limit detection angle to 90°
171
BERKER Q.1 Order no.
Packing unit
NEW
Thermostats NEW
Order no.
Room thermostat with NC contact, centre plate, rocker switch and LED polar white, velvety
* 2030 60 89
5 - 30 °C, 50/60 Hz Rated voltage 250 V~; Switching current 10 A; Inductive load at cos φ 0,6 max. 4 A; Switching temperature difference approx. 0,5 °C; Night lowering approx. 4 °C
on page T34
Available from 04/2009
with imprint setting knob with temperature range limitation for heating or cooling mode e.g. for valve drives closed in de-energized state with thermal return without spreader claws with plug-in terminals
Available from 04/2009
with imprint setting knob with temperature range limitation with on/off switch and indicator LED for „on“ with thermal return with separate connection for night lowering e.g. for valve drives closed in de-energized state without spreader claws with plug-in terminals
on page T34
on page T34
with imprint setting knob with temperature range limitation with on/off switch and indicator LED for „on“ with control LED for „on“ with thermal return with separate connection for night lowering e.g. for valve drives closed in de-energized state without spreader claws with plug-in terminals
Centre plate with setting knob, rocker and lens for room thermostat with NC contact
with imprint setting knob with temperature range limitation
172
Floor thermostat with NO contact, centre plate, rocker switch, 2 LEDs and floor temperature sensor polar white, velvety
Available from 04/2009
Replacement demand for order no. 2030 60 89, 2031 60 89
1
Replacement demand for order no. 2026 60 89
NEW
Replacement centre plate order no. 1671 60 89 Suitable valve drive order no. 7590 00 77
*1671 60 89
*1670 60 89
with imprint setting knob with temperature range limitation
5 - 30 °C, 50/60 Hz Rated voltage 24 V~; Switching current 10 A~; Rated voltage 24 V=; Switching current 4 A=; Switching temperature difference approx. 0,5 °C; Night lowering approx. 4 °C
polar white, velvety
Centre plate with setting knob for room thermostat with change-over contact polar white, velvety
1
If the pre-set temperature is reached the contact opens.
NEW
NEW
Room thermostat 24 V with NC contact, centre plate, rocker switch and LED
* 2031 60 89
1
Replacement centre plate order no. 1670 60 89 Suitable valve drive order no. 7590 00 76
Replacement centre plate order no. 1671 60 89 Suitable valve drive order no. 7590 00 76
2031 60 89 1
* 2026 60 89
5 - 30 °C, 50/60 Hz Rated voltage 250 V~; Switching current „heating“ 10 A (4 A at cosphi=0,6); Switching current „cooling“ 5 A (2 A at cosphi=0,6); Switching temperature difference approx. 0,5 °C
If the pre-set temperature is reached the contact changes.
If the pre-set temperature is reached the contact opens.
polar white, velvety
2026 60 89 1
Neutral conductor necessary!
Neutral conductor necessary!
NEW
Room thermostat with change-over and centre plate polar white, velvety
1
Packing unit
1
* 2034 60 89
1
10 - 50 °C, 50/60 Hz Rated voltage 250 V~; Switching current 10 A; Switching temperature difference approx. 1 °C; Night lowering approx. 5 °C; Sensor cable length 4 m Neutral conductor necessary! If the pre-set temperature is reached the contact closes. Replacement floor temperature sensor / remote sensor order no. 0161 Replacement centre plate order no. 1672 60 89 Suitable valve drive order no. 7590 00 76 Available from 04/2009
with imprint setting knob with temperature range limitation with on/off switch and 2 LEDs with LED for heating and LED for night lowering with separate connection for night lowering e.g. for valve drives closed in de-energized state without spreader claws with plug-in terminals
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
BERKER Q.1 Order no.
NEW
Packing unit
NEW
Centre plate with setting knob, rocker and lenses for floor temperature thermostat polar white, velvety
* 1672 60 89
Order no.
Replacement demand for order no. 2034 60 89
with imprint setting knob with temperature range limitation
on page T37
Sensor insert 7594 04 89
1
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range. Labelling field not usable.
Sensor insert order no. 7594 10 01
RolloTec Comfort buttons RolloTec button comfort polar white, velvety
* 1770 60 89
1
Learnable running time 0,5 sec.- 2 min.; Lamella adjustment with signal < 1 sec.; Self-sustaining for 2 min. with signal > 1 - 4 sec. on page T37
1
with lock-out protection e.g. for shutter control terrace door activation of lock-out protection in upper end pos. via buttons in „up“ direction min. 3 secs. with indicator LED for lock-out protection brightnesses individually adjustable on brightness sensor surface-mounted, the taught-in running time for sun protection movement is used no twilight sensor function for sensor connection to socket contact or terminal block
with slots for air circulation for e.g. temperature sensor PT100
NEW
* 1771 60 89
Brightness value sun approx. 5 - 80 kLux; Learnable running time 4 sec.- 2 min.; Lamella adjustment with signal < 1 sec.; Locked for 2 min. upon actuation 1 - 4 Sec. For RolloTec brightness sensors order no. 0169, 0184 For RolloTec glass breakage sensor order no. 0170 For RolloTec adapter for sensors order no. 0171 For RolloTec standard insert without neutral conductor connection order no. 2911 For RolloTec standard insert order no. 2925 For Rollotec comfort insert order no. 2975 For RolloTec comfort insert for direct current drives order no. 2975 01 For magnetic contact order no. 9251 ..
Central plate for sensor insert polar white, matt/velvety
RolloTec button comfort with sensor connection polar white, velvety
1
Packing unit
Radio buttons For RolloTec standard insert without neutral conductor connection order no. 2911 For RolloTec standard insert order no. 2925 For Rollotec comfort insert order no. 2975 For RolloTec comfort insert for direct current drives order no. 2975 01
with lock-out protection e.g. for shutter control terrace door activation of lock-out protection in upper end pos. via buttons in „up“ direction min. 3 secs. with indicator LED for lock-out protection
NEW
RolloTec radio button polar white, velvety
on page T37
* 1758 60 89
1
Radio signal reception frequency 433,42 MHz; Learnable radio transmitters 30 ; Lamella adjustment with signal < 1 sec.; Self-sustaining for 2 min. with signal > 1 sec. For actuation via button and radio transmitter. For RolloTec standard insert without neutral conductor connection order no. 2911 For RolloTec standard insert order no. 2925 For Rollotec comfort insert order no. 2975 For RolloTec comfort insert for direct current drives order no. 2975 01 Available from 04/2009
with 5 light scenes for „open/close“ retrieving light scenes only by using radio transmitter
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
173
BERKER Q.1 Order no.
NEW
RolloTec radio button with sensor connection polar white, velvety
on page T37
Packing unit
* 1759 60 89
Order no.
NEW
1
Radio signal reception frequency 433,42 MHz; Learnable radio transmitters 30; Brightness value sun approx. 5 - 80 kLux; Lamella adjustment with signal < 1 sec.; Self-sustaining for 2 min. with signal > 1 sec. For actuation via button and radio transmitter.
NEW
For RolloTec brightness sensors order no. 0169, 0184 For RolloTec glass breakage sensor order no. 0170 For RolloTec adapter for sensors order no. 0171 For RolloTec standard insert without neutral conductor connection order no. 2911 For RolloTec standard insert order no. 2925 For Rollotec comfort insert order no. 2975 For RolloTec comfort insert for direct current drives order no. 2975 01 For magnetic contact order no. 9251 ..
Timer switches NEW
* 1756 60 89
RolloTec timer comfort with display polar white, velvety
1
Lamella adjustment with signal < 1 sec.; Self-sustaining for 2 min. with signal > 1 sec.; Storage of „up/down“ time with signal > 3,5 sec. on page T37
no twilight sensor function for sensor connection to socket contact or terminal block
RolloTec memory button polar white, velvety
Stored „up“ and/or „down“ time is run daily in automatic operation. For manual and timer programmed running of awnings, shutters and blinds. For RolloTec standard insert without neutral conductor connection order no. 2911 For RolloTec standard insert order no. 2925 For Rollotec comfort insert order no. 2975 For RolloTec comfort insert for direct current drives order no. 2975 01
1
For manual and timer programmed running of awnings, shutters and blinds.
Available from 04/2009
Memory buttons
* 1757 60 89
Brightness value sun approx. 20 kLux; Lamella adjustment with signal < 1 sec.; Self-sustaining for 2 min. with signal > 1 sec.; Storage of „up/down“ time with signal > 3,5 sec. Stored „up“ and/or „down“ time is run daily in automatic operation.
For RolloTec brightness sensors order no. 0169, 0184 For RolloTec glass breakage sensor order no. 0170 For RolloTec adapter for sensors order no. 0171 For RolloTec standard insert without neutral conductor connection order no. 2911 For RolloTec standard insert order no. 2925 For Rollotec comfort insert order no. 2975 For RolloTec comfort insert for direct current drives order no. 2975 01 For magnetic contact order no. 9251 ..
with 5 light scenes for „open/close“ retrieving light scenes only by using radio transmitter brightness value for sunblind individually adjustable no twilight sensor function for sensor connection to socket contact or terminal block
RolloTec memory button with sensor connection polar white, velvety
on page T37
Packing unit
on page T37
* 1774 60 89
1
Operation times 18 up/down; Random generator +/- 15 min.; Power reserve approx. 3 hrs., maintenance-free; Astronomic time shift +/- 2 hrs.; Learnable down time 1 sec.- 6 min.; Lamella adjusting time 0 - 5 sec.; Lamella adjustment with signal < 1 sec.; Lock at touching > 1 sec. For manual and timer programmed running of awnings, shutters and blinds. For RolloTec standard insert without neutral conductor connection order no. 2911 For RolloTec standard insert order no. 2925 For Rollotec comfort insert order no. 2975 For RolloTec comfort insert for direct current drives order no. 2975 01
with German display text with totally 3 independent programme memories 2 programme memories pre-set programming according to week and days possible programme memory network failure proved with automatic summer-/winter time switching (can be switched off) astro programme for sunrise/sundown running large-area display with symbols indication of the next operation schedule under consideration of astro and coincidence function with slide switch for manual/automatic lock out protection because evaluation of the centre or extension unit commands can be switched off lamella position programmable at down operation times
174
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
BERKER Q.1 Order no.
NEW
* 1775 60 89
Order no.
NEW
RolloTec timer comfort with display and sensor connection polar white, velvety
on page T37
Packing unit
Setting range sun approx. 1 - 76 kLux; Setting range twilight approx. 6 - 300 Lux; Operation times 18 up/down; Random generator +/- 15 min.; Power reserve approx. 3 hrs., maintenance-free; Astronomic time shift +/- 2 hrs.; Learnable down time 1 sec.- 6 min.; Lamella adjusting time 0 - 5 sec.; Lamella adjustment with signal < 1 sec.; Lock at touching > 1 sec.
with German display text with totally 3 independent programme memories 2 programme memories pre-set programming according to week and days possible programme memory network failure proved with automatic summer-/winter time switching (can be switched off) astro programme for sunrise/sundown running large-area display with symbols indication of the next operation schedule under consideration of astro and coincidence function with slide switch for manual/automatic lock out protection because evaluation of the centre or extension unit commands can be switched off lamella position programmable at down operation times with surface-mounted RolloTec brightness sensor additionally settable with shutter and lamella position connected RolloTec brightness sensor can be used for twilight-controlled lowering connected surface-mounted RolloTec brightness sensor suitable for twilight-controlled raising and lowering for the sensor connection on the clamping block in the insert
Intermediate rings Adapter ring for centre plate 50 x 50 mm
* 1109 60 79
Attention! Not suitable for Berker central plates. For centre plate as per DIN 49075 Available from 04/2009
for other centre plates with external size 50 x 50 mm and SCHUKO-socket outlet
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
10
labelling field latchable
Labelling fields Labelling field for flush installation in intermediate ring for central plate polar white, glossy
1905 00 69
10
Labelling field height arranged for 6 mm P-touch strips.
For RolloTec brightness sensors order no. 0169, 0184 For RolloTec glass breakage sensor order no. 0170 For RolloTec adapter for sensors order no. 0171 For RolloTec standard insert without neutral conductor connection order no. 2911 For RolloTec standard insert order no. 2925 For Rollotec comfort insert order no. 2975 For RolloTec comfort insert for direct current drives order no. 2975 01 For magnetic contact order no. 9251 ..
polar white, velvety
* 1109 60 89
Available from 04/2009
For manual and timer programmed running of awnings, shutters and blinds.
NEW
Intermediate ring for central plate polar white, velvety
1
Packing unit
10
Signalling and command units NEW
Central plate for transmitting and control device Ø 18.8 mm polar white, matt/velvety * 1431 19 09
10
Screw distance 36 mm
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range. Suitable for installation of equipotential bonding built-in socket order no. 4604
Circular plug-in connector: Amphenol-Tuchel; Binder; Cannon; Farnell; Hirose; Hirschmann; Lumberg; Monacor; RS Components; Extra low voltage jack: PRO-CAR Available from 04/2009
with supporting plate with cut-out dia. 18.8 mm without spreader claws NEW
Central plate for signalling and control device Ø 22.5 mm polar white, matt/velvety * 1432 19 09 1432 07 yellow, glossy
10 10
Screw distance 36 mm Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range. Signalling and command units: Kraus-Naimer; Lumitas; Schlegel; Overvoltage protection devices: Dehn, order no. NM DK 280; OBO-Bettermann, order no. KNS/IS-D Available from 04/2009
with supporting plate with cut-out dia. 22.5 mm without spreader claws
175
BERKER Q.1 Order no.
Packing unit
Order no.
TV/audio
Central plate for aerial socket 4-hole polar white, matt/velvety
Central plate for XLR round connectors D series polar white, matt/velvety
1412 19 09
Aerial sockets: Ankaro; Astro; Axing; Delta; Schwaiger with 2 additional SAT outputs (F-sockets)
Circular plug-in connector: Cannon; Deltron; Farnell; Hirose; Monacor; Neutrik; RS Components with supporting plate speakon and jack connector without spreader claws
Central plate for broadband modem box polar white, matt/velvety
* 1196 60 89
10
* 1197 60 89
10
Data-/telecommunications NEW
Centre plate for cable outlet and VDo connection box polar white, velvety
* 1019 60 89
10
For cable outlet order no. 4468, 4470
VDo connection boxes: Rutenbeck
Available from 04/2009
with outlet
Available from 04/2009
Centre plate for aerial socket 2- and 3-hole
* 1203 60 89
10
For aerial socket 2-hole single box order no. 4502, HIFS 1B For aerial socket 2-hole throughpass socket order no. 4515 For aerial socket 3-hole single box order no. 4522 For aerial socket 3-hole throughpass socket order no. 4523, 4593 Available from 04/2009
with knock out SAT input
Central plate for aerial socket 4-hole polar white, matt/velvety
10
Broadband modem socket: Wisi with additional multimedia output
Centre plate for loudspeaker socket outlet and miniature connector insert
polar white, velvety
1439 19 09
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range.
For miniature connector insert order no. 4505 For stereo loudspeaker socket outlet order no. 4505 01 For loudspeaker socket outlet High End order no. 4505 02 For BNC/TNC connector insert order no. 4577, 4579
NEW
10
For aerial socket 4-hole single box order no. 4594
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range.
polar white, velvety, 1gang, 1 knock out opening polar white, velvety, 2gang
1484 19 09
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range.
10
Cut-out diameter 23,6 mm; Distance between screws (horizontal/vertical) 19 / 24 mm
NEW
Packing unit
1483 19 09
10
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range.
NEW
Centre plate for TAE socket outlet and loudspeaker connection box polar white, velvety
* 1033 60 89
10
For TAE socket outlet order no. 4487 .., 4500 .., 4544 .. For loudspeaker connection box order no. 4572 .., 4573 .. For FCC/TAE socket outlet order no. 4588 .. For USB data interface flush-mounted order no. 7504 00 04
EAD socket outlets: Drivex; Fröhlich + Walter; Intracom; TAE and FCC overvoltage protection sockets: Dehn; FCC socket outlets: Dätwyler; Rutenbeck Available from 04/2009
Aerial sockets: Hirschmann with 2 additional SAT outputs (F-sockets)
176
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
BERKER Q.1 Order no.
NEW
Packing unit
NEW
Central plate for TAE socket outlet 6F+N polar white, matt/velvety * 1457 19 09
Order no.
Centre plate for FCC socket outlet polar white, velvety
10
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range.
Packing unit
* 1407 60 89
10
For FCC socket outlet order no. 4538, 4568 For FCC socket outlet shielded order no. 4554, 4586, 4590
For TAE socket outlet order no. 4487 ..
FCC socket outlets: Ackermann; AMP; BTR; Crack-IT; Rutenbeck; Telegärtner; Telena with 45° oblique outlet for 1gang socket outlet cat.3, cat.5e and cat.6
Available from 04/2009
Central plate for TAE socket outlet 6/6FF and 6/6NF and loudspeaker connection box polar white, matt/velvety
1458 19 09
10
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range. For TAE socket outlet order no. 4487 .., 4500 .., 4544 .. For loudspeaker connection box order no. 4572 .., 4573 .. For FCC/TAE socket outlet order no. 4588 .. For USB data interface flush-mounted order no. 7504 00 04
Central plate for FCC socket outlet polar white, matt/velvety
For FCC socket outlet order no. 4538, 4568 For FCC socket outlet shielded order no. 4554, 4586, 4590
FCC socket outlets: Ackermann; AMP; BTR; Crack-IT; Rutenbeck; Telegärtner; Telena with 45° oblique outlet for 1gang socket outlet cat.3, cat.5e and cat.6
for USB data interface flush-mounted 1 knock out opening
Central plate for 1st TAE socket outlet (Telekom) 10
Centre plate for FCC/E-DAT design/Telekom ISDN socket outlet polar white, velvety
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range.
For FCC socket outlet order no. 4539, 4562, 4592 For FCC socket outlet shielded order no. 4555, 4587, 4591
Centre plate for PTT socket outlet „Netherlands“ polar white, velvety
* 61 1036 60 89
10
Available from 04/2009
universal for standard commercially available PTT socket outlets NEW
NEW
Identifies the 1st TAE socket outlet inside an apartment/property.
with imprint 2 knock out openings NEW
10
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range.
EAD socket outlets: Drivex; Fröhlich + Walter; Intracom; TAE and FCC overvoltage protection sockets: Dehn; FCC socket outlets: Dätwyler; Rutenbeck
polar white, matt/velvety # 1477 19 09
1468 19 09
Centre plate for RTT socket outlet „Belgium“ polar white, velvety
* 67 1103 60 89
For RTT socket outlet order no. BERT T0 1
10
* 1409 60 89
10
ISDN socket outlets (Rutenbeck): Telekom; FCC socket outlets: Ackermann; AMP; BTR; CobiNet; Corning; Crack-IT; CTI Netzwerksysteme; Dätwyler; EFB Electronic; eku Kabel & Systeme; Elmat; Rutenbeck; Setec; Süveg; Telegärtner; Telena Available from 04/2009
Available from 04/2009
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
with 45° oblique outlet for 2gang socket outlet cat.3, cat.5e and cat.6
177
BERKER Q.1 Order no.
Packing unit
Central plate FCC/E-DAT design/Telekom ISDN socket outlet polar white, matt/velvety
1469 19 09
10
For FCC socket outlet order no. 4539, 4562, 4592 For FCC socket outlet shielded order no. 4555, 4587, 4591
ISDN socket outlets (Rutenbeck): Telekom; FCC socket outlets: Ackermann; AMP; BTR; CobiNet; Corning; Crack-IT; CTI Netzwerksysteme; Dätwyler; EFB Electronic; eku Kabel & Systeme; Elmat; Rutenbeck; Setec; Süveg; Telegärtner; Telena with 45° oblique outlet for 2gang socket outlet cat.3, cat.5e and cat.6
Central plate for FCC and Telekom ISDN socket outlet (IAE) 1429 19 09
10
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range. ISDN socket outlets (ZE Kommunikationstechnik): Telekom; FCC socket outlets: Telena; ZE Kommunikationstechnik with 25° oblique outlet for 2gang socket outlet cat.3
Central plate for FCC and Telekom ISDN socket outlet (IAE) polar white, matt/velvety
1430 19 09
Packing unit
Central plate for FCC/IAE/FCC-DAT 300E socket outlet
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range.
polar white, matt/velvety
Order no.
10
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range.
polar white, matt/velvety
1446 19 09
10
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range. FCC socket outlets: BTR; Farnell; Fröhlich + Walter; Krone; Schumann; Telena with 45° oblique outlet for 1gang socket outlet cat.3 and cat.6
Central plate for FCC/IAE/Telekom ISDN socket outlet polar white, matt/velvety
1467 19 09
10
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range. ISDN socket outlets (BTR): Telekom; FCC socket outlets: BTR; EFB Electronic; Farnell; Fröhlich + Walter; Krone; Monacor; Telena with 45° oblique outlet for 2gang socket outlet cat.3
Central plate for FCC-DAT 300E socket outlet polar white, matt/velvety
1478 19 09
10
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range. FCC socket outlets: BTR; Farnell; Fröhlich + Walter; Krone; Schumann; Telena with 45° oblique outlet for 2gang socket outlet cat.6
ISDN socket outlets (Kräcker): Telekom; FCC socket outlets: Farnell; Kräcker with 45° oblique outlet for 2gang socket outlet cat.3
178
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
BERKER Q.1 Order no.
Packing unit
Central plate for E-DAT plus socket outlet with labelling field polar white, matt/velvety
1413 19 09
10
Labelling field height arranged for 6 mm P-touch strips. Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range. FCC socket outlets: BTR; Fröhlich + Walter; Telena with 45° oblique outlet with dust protection cover for 1gang or 2gang socket outlet cat.6
Central plate for FCC socket outlet polar white, matt/velvety
1420 19 09
10
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range.
10
FCC socket outlets: Telegärtner; Telena with 45° oblique outlet for 1gang or 2gang socket outlet cat.5e
Central plate for VAD socket outlet with labelling field 1423 19 09
polar white, matt/velvety
1419 19 09
10
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range. FCC socket outlets: Brand-Rex; CobiNet; Drivex; EFB Electronic; Fröhlich + Walter; Fröschel; Intracom; OTRA; Schumann; Setec; Sevex; Siemens; Sonepar; ZE Kommunikationstechnik with 40° oblique outlet for 1gang or 2gang socket outlet cat.5, cat.5e and cat.6
1427 19 09
10
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range.
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range.
polar white, matt/velvety
Central plate for FCC socket outlet
polar white, matt/velvety
Central plate for EMJ45 socket outlet 1422 19 09
Packing unit
Central plate for 3 MINI-COM modules
FCC socket outlets: Ackermann; CobiNet; Quante; Telena with 45° oblique outlet 1 knock out opening for 1gang or 2gang socket outlet cat.3
polar white, matt/velvety
Order no.
10
Labelling field height arranged for 6 mm P-touch strips.
For mini jack order no. 1980, 1984, 1985 For cinch module set order no. 1989 For blank module order no. 1990 For video cinch module order no. 1992 For S-Video module order no. 1993 For VGA module order no. 1994
Modules: Panduit with supporting plate for Mini-Com jacks cat.3, cat.5e, cat.6, cat.6 10Gig for Mini-Com fibre-optic modules for Mini-Com BNC connector modules for Mini-Com 3.5 mm stereo connection/coupling modules for Mini-Com loudspeaker cables / banana plug modules for Mini-Com F-plug coupling modules for Mini-Com Cinch connection/coupling modules for Mini-Com S-Video connection/coupling modules for Mini-Com D-Subminiature connectors 15pole for Mini-Com dummy modules 1gang with 30° oblique outlet without spreader claws
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range. FCC socket outlets: Lanconnect; Schumann; Telegärtner; Telena with 45° oblique outlet with dust protection cover for 1gang or 2gang socket outlet cat.6
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
179
BERKER Q.1 Order no.
NEW
Packing unit
NEW
Central plate for 1 or 2 single modules Reichle&De-Massari polar white, matt/velvety * 1472 19 09
Order no.
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range. For modular jack order no. 1854 01
Eline 600 GG45 jacks: Kerpen; Modular jacks: 3M; Asyco; BTR; Dätwyler; EFB Electronic; Erni; Hubbell; ICS; Krone; Setec; Telegärtner; Thomas & Betts; Keystone Jack: Kerpen; LANmark 5, 6 and 7 (only with with Keystone-Clip): Nexans; Fibre-optic couplings: 3M; Krone; mvk
Available from 04/2009
with supporting plate for connecting modules RJ45 cat.5e and cat.6 for fibre-optic modules with 30° oblique outlet without spreader claws
Central plate for double modules Reichle&De-Massari 10
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range. Modules: Diamond; Reichle&De-Massari
Available from 04/2009
with supporting plate for connecting modules RJ45 cat.5e and cat.6 for fibre-optic modules with 30° oblique outlet without spreader claws NEW
Available from 04/2009
with supporting plate for Krone modular jacks cat.5, cat.5e and cat.6 for Krone fibre-optic couplings MT-RJ jacks for 3M fibre-optic couplings Volition 2gang, with 30° oblique outlet without spreader claws
Central plate for AMP modular jacks polar white, matt/velvety * 1463 19 09
10
Indexing dimension (W x H) approx. 14,7 x 19,4 mm
Modules: Reichle&De-Massari
polar white, matt/velvety * 1461 19 09
Central plate for Krone modular jacks polar white, matt/velvety * 1464 19 09
10
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range.
NEW
Packing unit
10
Indexing dimension (W x H) approx. 14,7 x 20,7 mm Shielded versions touch each other. Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range. MT-RJ jack: AMP; Intracom; Telena; Modular jacks: CobiNet; EFB Electronic; Schumann; Standard 110 Connect jack: AMP; SL series toolless jack: AMP; SL series 110 Connect Jack: AMP; SL series toolless jack with dust protection: AMP
NEW
Central plate for Drahtex modular jacks polar white, matt/velvety * 1462 19 09
10
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range. Installation only possible with Drahtex mounting or coding frame. Modular jacks: CobiNet; Drahtex
Available from 04/2009
with supporting plate for Drahtex modular jacks cat.5, cat.5e, cat.6 and cat.7 for fibre-optic modules 2gang, with 30° oblique outlet without spreader claws
Available from 04/2009
with supporting plate for AMP modular jacks series 110 Connect cat.3, cat.5, cat.5e and cat.6 for AMP fibre-optic couplings MT-RJ jacks 2gang, with 30° oblique outlet without spreader claws
180
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
BERKER Q.1 Order no.
NEW
Packing unit
Central plate for LEXCOM HOME modules
Central plate for AMP-ACO
polar white, matt/velvety * 1441 19 09
polar white, matt/velvety
10
1494 19 09
Packing unit
10
Attention! Can only be used with intermediate ring and central plate of the corresponding range.
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range.
Installation is only possible in connection with the assembly frame of Messrs. Lexel.
Labelling field not usable.
Available from 04/2009
with supporting plate 2gang, with 30° oblique outlet without spreader claws LEXCOM HOME® Registered trademark of Messrs. Lexel A/S. NEW
Order no.
Central plate for AMP-ACO with labelling field polar white, matt/velvety
Central plate for Eline and GiCon4 jacks polar white, matt/velvety * 1498 19 09
ACO and CO Plus inserts: AMP, order no. 0-0336627-1, 2-0336627-1, 0-0336627-3, 0-1394580-1, 2-1394580-1 cat.5, cat.6 and cat.7 central plates plug-in fixing
10
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range! Installation only in conjunction with BTR and Kerpen clips. GiCon4 jacks: BTR; Eline 1200- and 250 jacks: Kerpen
1495 19 09
10
Labelling field height arranged for 6 mm P-touch strips. Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range. ACO and CO Plus inserts: AMP, order no. 0-0336627-1, 2-0336627-1, 0-0336627-3 cat.5, cat.6 and cat.7
Available from 04/2009
with supporting plate for LANmark-6 and LANmark-7 jacks Eline 600 GG45 jacks for ELine and GiCon4 sockets cat.5e, cat.6, cat.7 2gang, with 30° oblique outlet without spreader claws NEW
Centre plate with dust protection slider and labelling field polar white, velvety
* 1170 60 89
10
Labelling field height arranged for 6 mm P-touch strips. For supporting plate 1gang order no. 4540 .. Available from 04/2009
for supporting plates with coloured mount 1gang NEW
Centre plate with dust protection sliders and labelling field polar white, velvety
* 1181 60 89
10
Labelling field height arranged for 6 mm P-touch strips. For supporting plate 2gang order no. 4541 .. Available from 04/2009
for supporting plates with coloured mounts 2gang
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
181
BERKER Q.1 Order no.
NEW
Packing unit
Order no.
Central plate for fibre-optic couplings Simplex ST polar white, matt/velvety * 1492 19 09
Central plate for 2 D-subminiature connector polar white, matt/velvety
10
Fibre-optic couplings: Ackermann; AMP; Brand-Rex; BTR; CobiNet; Corning; Diamond; Drahtex; Huber+Suhner; Quante; Telegärtner
10
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range. Labelling field not usable. For D-subminiature connector order no. 1834, 1835, 1839 For mounting adapter order no. 1841, 1842
with supporting plate without spreader claws
Communication technics Data connector housings
Available from 04/2009
NEW
with supporting plate with 30° oblique outlet for 2 fibre-optic couplings without spreader claws
polar white, matt/velvety * 1480 19 09
Data connector housing with labelling field polar white, velvety
* 1110 60 89
10
Labelling field height arranged for 6 mm P-touch strips. Mounting plates see acessories order no. 1111 .., 1112 ..
Central plate for fibre-optic couplings Duplex SC 10
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range.
Available from 04/2009
with supporting plate for mounting plates without spreader claws
Hospital installation
Fibre-optic couplings: Ackermann; AMP; Brand-Rex; BTR; CobiNet; Corning; Diamond; Drahtex; FiberCraft; Huber+Suhner; Krone; Quante; Telegärtner
Central plate for double pole socket outlet for floating output polar white, matt/velvety
1403 19 09
10
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range. For double pole socket outlet for floating output order no. 1061
For double pole socket outlet according to DIN 42801 with imprint
Available from 04/2009
Central plate for 6pole socket outlet
with supporting plate with 30° oblique outlet 1 knock out opening for 1 or 2 fibre-optic couplings without spreader claws
polar white, matt/velvety
1411 19 09
1474 19 09
10
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range.
Central plate for 1 D-subminiature connector polar white, matt/velvety
1470 19 09
D-subminiature connectors see module inserts.
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range.
NEW
Packing unit
10
D-subminiature connectors see module inserts. Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range.
Nurse call system: Ackermann, clino opt 99, order no. 71008C3; Nurse call systems: Ackermann, clino opt 90, clino phon 95, order no. 71008C; Siedle, order no. AD 306-0; 6pole socket outlets: Hirschmann, Medu 600, Medu 600 GSK
For D-subminiature connector order no. 1834, 1835, 1839 For mounting adapter order no. 1841, 1842
with supporting plate without spreader claws 182
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
BERKER Q.1 Order no.
Packing unit
NEW
Messrs. Ackermann NEW
Order no.
Centre plate for databus termination splitter/ empty unit polar white, velvety
* 1204 60 89
polar white, velvety
for call push-button with diagnostic and auxiliary plug-in contact for call module with call push-button and plug-in contacts button with lens with imprint centre plate plug-in fixing
Centre plate for databus connection unit with plug-in opening 10
NEW
centre plate plug-in fixing
for call module with call push-button button with lens centre plate plug-in fixing
10 NEW
Nurse call system: Ackermann, clino opt 99, order no. 74189A a-coded for dropping plug-and-socket connector centre plate plug-in fixing
* 1244 60 89
for call push-button button with lens centre plate plug-in fixing
10
NEW
Centre plate with green shut-off button polar white, velvety
Available from 04/2009
for call unit with 2 diagnostic plug-in contacts centre plate plug-in fixing
* 1217 60 89
* 1251 60 89
10
Nurse call system: Ackermann, clino opt 99, order no. 73642C Available from 04/2009
Centre plate with red call push-button at top and a plug-in opening polar white, velvety
10
Available from 04/2009
Nurse call system: Ackermann, clino opt 99, order no. 73075C, 73020G, 73021G, 73075D
NEW
* 1219 60 89
Nurse call system: Ackermann, clino opt 99, order no. 73022A, 73022A2
Centre plate with 2 plug-in openings and imprint polar white, velvety
Centre plate with red call push-button at bottom polar white, velvety
Available from 04/2009
NEW
10
Available from 04/2009
Centre plate for plug-and-socket connector
* 1305 60 89
* 1216 60 89
Nurse call system: Ackermann, clino opt 99, order no. 73071F, 73071F2, 73073F
Available from 04/2009
polar white, velvety
Centre plate with red call push-button at top polar white, velvety
Nurse call system: Ackermann, clino opt 99, order no. 73070A
NEW
10
Available from 04/2009
centre plate plug-in fixing
* 1298 60 89
* 1218 60 89
Nurse call system: Ackermann, clino opt 99, order no. 73071D, 73071D2, 73075B, 73073D
Available from 04/2009
polar white, velvety
Centre plate with red call button and 2 plug-in openings
10
Nurse call system: Ackermann, clino opt 90, 99 / clino phon 95, order no. 72642B; Nurse call systems: Ackermann, clino opt 90, 99 / clino phon 95, order no. 72642C, 72639A, 71197A
NEW
Packing unit
for shut-off push-button button with lens centre plate plug-in fixing
10
Nurse call system: Ackermann, clino opt 99, order no. 73071E, 73071E2, 73075A, 73073E
NEW
Centre plate with yellow shut-off button polar white, velvety
* 1252 60 89
10
Available from 04/2009
for call push-button with plug-in contact for call module with call push-button and monitored auxiliary plug-in contact button with lens centre plate plug-in fixing
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
Nurse call system: Ackermann, clino opt 99, order no. 73642D Available from 04/2009
for shut-off push-button button with lens centre plate plug-in fixing
183
BERKER Q.1 Order no.
NEW
Packing unit
Centre plate for call unit with blue doctor call button polar white, velvety
* 1223 60 89
Order no.
NEW
Nurse call system: Ackermann, clino opt 99, order no. 73022A, 73022A2 for call push-button button with lens with imprint centre plate plug-in fixing
* 1308 60 89
centre plate plug-in fixing NEW
for pullcord push-button with pullcord and knob centre plate plug-in fixing NEW
Centre plate with red call button and green shut-off button
polar white, velvety
for earpiece and volume control with imprinted symbol curve centre plate plug-in fixing
Centre plate with green and yellow shut-off button 10
NEW
Centre plate for radio programme selector switch polar white, velvety
* 1301 60 89
10
Nurse call systems: Ackermann, clino opt 90, 99 / clino phon 95, order no. 73120A
Nurse call system: Ackermann, clino opt 99, order no. 73642E Available from 04/2009
Available from 04/2009
for shut-off push-button buttons with lens centre plate plug-in fixing NEW
10
Available from 04/2009
for call push-button and shut-off push-button buttons with lens centre plate plug-in fixing
* 1253 60 89
* 1300 60 89
Nurse call systems: Ackermann, clino opt 90, 99 / clino phon 95, order no. 73120C, 73120H
Available from 04/2009
polar white, velvety
Centre plate for radio programme system with small sound system
10
Nurse call system: Ackermann, clino opt 99, order no. 73642B2
NEW
10
Available from 04/2009
for office unit button with lens with imprint „SU-AUS WARTEN“ centre plate plug-in fixing
* 1249 60 89
* 1233 60 89
Nurse call systems: Ackermann, clino opt 90, 99 / clino phon 95, order no. 70045A3, 70046A3, 70046A
Available from 04/2009
polar white, velvety
Centre plate for pullcord push-button with lens polar white, velvety
10
Nurse call system: Ackermann, clino opt 99, order no. 73640J, 73640J2
NEW
10
Available from 04/2009
Centre plate with acknowledge button white polar white, velvety
* 1236 60 89
Nurse call system: Ackermann, clino opt 99, order no. 70006C; Nurse call systems: Ackermann, clino opt 90, 99 / clino phon 95, order no. 70006A, 70006B
Available from 04/2009
NEW
Centre plate for pneumatic call switch with lens polar white, velvety
10
Packing unit
with imprint „0-1-2-3-4-5“ centre plate plug-in fixing
Centre plate with green presence button/white acknowledge button polar white, velvety
* 1299 60 89
10
Nurse call system: Ackermann, clino opt 99, order no. 73642B Available from 04/2009
for office unit buttons with lens with imprint „SU-AUS WARTEN“ centre plate plug-in fixing
184
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
Order no.
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
Packing unit
Order no.
Packing unit
185
Surfaces Frames /covers/centre inserts Plastic, glossy white
similar to RAL 1013
polar white similar to RAL 9010
Plastic, matt lacquered
186
anthracite
similar to RAL 7021
aluminium
similar to RAL 9006
Berker K.1
Surface range Flush-mounted system
Sharp edges, square corners and straight-lined balance with deliberate renunciation of all other design attributes: these are the prominent design characteristics of the Berker K.1 surface range.
Berker‘s new interpretation of a timeless design responds to the desire of many builders and architects for rooms with a clear and straight forward character – the hallmark of timeless design.
■ Flat, glossy / matt surfaces ■ High breaking resistance and long life ■ Available surfaces: polar white, white, anthracite and aluminium ■ Available in splash-protected IP 44 version
Marked items are suitable for installation of splash-protected flush-mounted IP 44 when used in conjunction with corresponding sealing set. 187
BERKER K.1 Order no.
Packing unit
NEW
Frames 10 2
aluminium, matt, 1gang aluminium, matt, 2gang vertical
* 1313 70 24 * 1323 70 24
10 2
white, glossy, 3gang vertical
1333 70 02
2
aluminium, matt, 3gang vertical
* 1333 70 24
2
white, glossy, 4gang vertical
1343 70 02
2
aluminium, matt, 4gang vertical
* 1343 70 24
2
white, glossy, 5gang vertical
1353 70 02
2
aluminium, matt, 5gang vertical
* 1353 70 24
2
white, glossy, 2gang horizontal
1363 70 02
2
* 1363 70 24
2
white, glossy, 3gang horizontal
1373 70 02
2
aluminium, matt, 2gang horizontal
* 1373 70 24
2
white, glossy, 4gang horizontal
1383 70 02
2
aluminium, matt, 3gang horizontal
1393 70 02
2
* 1383 70 24
2
white, glossy, 5gang horizontal
aluminium, matt, 4gang horizontal aluminium, matt, 5gang horizontal
* 1393 70 24
2
Frame
on page T71
IP44 protection when using a sealing set order no. 1010 7..
polar white, glossy, 1gang
1313 70 09
10
polar white, glossy, 2gang vertical
1323 70 09
2
polar white, glossy, 3gang vertical
1333 70 09
2
polar white, glossy, 4gang vertical
1343 70 09
2
polar white, glossy, 5gang vertical
1353 70 09
2
polar white, glossy, 2gang horizontal
1363 70 09
2
polar white, glossy, 3gang horizontal
1373 70 09
2
polar white, glossy, 4gang horizontal
1383 70 09
2
polar white, glossy, 5gang horizontal
1393 70 09
2
Frame with large cut-out Frame with large cut-out white, glossy
on page T68
Frame
on page T68
188
1
For push-button 4gang order no. 7516 43 70 For push-button 4gang comfort order no. 7516 47 70 For light scene push-button 8gang order no. 7516 88 70 For push-button 3gang with RTR order no. 7566 37 70 For push-button 5gang with RTR order no. 7566 57 70
for vertical mounting
Frame with large cut-out polar white, glossy
1309 70 09
1
Not suitable for surface-mounted housing. on page T68
anthracite, matt, 1gang anthracite, matt, 2gang vertical
* 1313 70 06 * 1323 70 06
10 2
anthracite, matt, 3gang vertical
* 1333 70 06
2
anthracite, matt, 4gang vertical
* 1343 70 06
2
anthracite, matt, 5gang vertical
*
1353 70 06
2
anthracite, matt, 2gang horizontal
* 1363 70 06
2
anthracite, matt, 3gang horizontal
* 1373 70 06
2
anthracite, matt, 4gang horizontal
* 1383 70 06
2
anthracite, matt, 5gang horizontal
* 1393 70 06
2
IP44 protection when using a sealing set order no. 1010 7..
1309 70 02
Not suitable for surface-mounted housing.
IP44 protection when using a sealing set order no. 1010 7.. NEW
Frame
1313 70 02 1323 70 02
IP44 protection when using a sealing set order no. 1010 7..
on page T68
Packing unit
white, glossy, 1gang white, glossy, 2gang vertical
Frame
on page T68
Order no.
For push-button 4gang order no. 7516 43 70 For push-button 4gang comfort order no. 7516 47 70 For light scene push-button 8gang order no. 7516 88 70 For push-button 3gang with RTR order no. 7566 37 70 For push-button 5gang with RTR order no. 7566 57 70
for vertical mounting NEW
Frame with large cut-out anthracite, matt
* 1309 70 06
1
Not suitable for surface-mounted housing. on page T68
For push-button 4gang order no. 7516 43 75 For push-button 4gang comfort order no. 7516 47 75 For light scene push-button 8gang order no. 7516 88 75 For push-button 3gang with RTR order no. 7566 37 75 For push-button 5gang with RTR order no. 7566 57 75
for vertical mounting
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
BERKER K.1 Order no.
NEW
Packing unit
NEW
Frame with large cut-out aluminium, matt
* 1309 70 24
Order no.
Not suitable for surface-mounted housing. on page T68
aluminium, matt
For push-button 4gang order no. 7516 43 74 For push-button 4gang comfort order no. 7516 47 74 For light scene push-button 8gang order no. 7516 88 74 For push-button 3gang with RTR order no. 7566 37 74 For push-button 5gang with RTR order no. 7566 57 74
aluminium, matt
* * 1041 70 24
10 10 10 10
with cable and duct entry entry at top, bottom and at each side in the middle possible for vertical mounting suitable for mounting on flammable base surface NEW
For suitable tube-entries and replacement for cable and duct entries refer to the dry surface-mounted range.
aluminium, matt
* * 1042 70 24
with cable and duct entry entry at top, bottom and at each side in the middle possible for horizontal mounting suitable for mounting on flammable base surface
5 5 5 5
Installation depth 36 mm
For suitable tube-entries and replacement for cable and duct entries refer to the dry surface-mounted range. Flush-mounted devices can be used with the surfacemounted housings for surface-mounted installation. with cable and duct entry entry at top, bottom and at each side in the middle possible for vertical mounting suitable for mounting on flammable base surface
5
Flush-mounted devices can be used with the surfacemounted housings for surface-mounted installation.
Surface-mounted housing 2gang
aluminium, matt
* * 1052 70 24
5 5 5
For suitable tube-entries and replacement for cable and duct entries refer to the dry surface-mounted range.
with cable and duct entry entry at top and bottom possible suitable for mounting on flammable base surface
1042 70 02 1042 70 09 1042 70 06
1052 70 02 1052 70 09 1052 70 06
Installation depth 36 mm
Flush-mounted devices can be used with the surfacemounted housings for surface-mounted installation.
white, glossy polar white, glossy anthracite, matt
Surface-mounted housing 2gang white, glossy polar white, glossy anthracite, matt
Installation depth 36 mm
NEW
5
Flush-mounted devices can be used with the surfacemounted housings for surface-mounted installation.
Surface-mounted housing 1gang 1041 70 02 1041 70 09 1041 70 06
* * 1043 70 24
5 5 5
For suitable tube-entries and replacement for cable and duct entries refer to the dry surface-mounted range.
Surface-mounted housings white, glossy polar white, glossy anthracite, matt
1043 70 02 1043 70 09 1043 70 06
Installation depth 36 mm
for vertical mounting
NEW
Surface-mounted housing 3gang white, glossy polar white, glossy anthracite, matt
1
Packing unit
NEW
Surface-mounted housing 3gang white, glossy polar white, glossy anthracite, matt aluminium, matt
1053 70 02 1053 70 09 1053 70 06
* * 1053 70 24
5 5 5 5
Installation depth 36 mm
For suitable tube-entries and replacement for cable and duct entries refer to the dry surface-mounted range. Flush-mounted devices can be used with the surfacemounted housings for surface-mounted installation. with cable and duct entry entry at top, bottom and at each side in the middle possible for horizontal mounting suitable for mounting on flammable base surface
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
189
Surfaces Frames/covers/centre inserts Stainless steel, matt finish Individual items that cannot be coated for technical reasons are lacquered.
190
Berker K.5
Surface range Flush-mounted system
Clear contours. Consistent design. Cultivated appearance. The Berker K.5 is perfect for all those who value both fine forms and superior matterial quality
■ Stainless steel version of the classic Berker K.1 design ■ Unique combination of sharp-edged contours and matt-shiny surface ■ Available in splash-protected IP 44 version
Marked items are suitable for installation of splash-protected flush-mounted IP 44 when used in conjunction with corresponding sealing set.
191
BERKER K.5 Order no.
Packing unit
Frames stainless steel, 1gang stainless steel, 2gang vertical
1313 70 04 1323 70 04
10 2
stainless steel, 3gang vertical
1333 70 04
2
stainless steel, 4gang vertical
1343 70 04
2
stainless steel, 5gang vertical
1353 70 04
2
stainless steel, 2gang horizontal
1363 70 04
2
stainless steel, 3gang horizontal
1373 70 04
2
stainless steel, 4gang horizontal
1383 70 04
2
stainless steel, 5gang horizontal
1393 70 04
2
Frame with large cut-out 1309 70 04
1
Not suitable for surface-mounted housing. For push-button 4gang order no. 7516 43 73 For push-button 4gang comfort order no. 7516 47 73 For light scene push-button 8gang order no. 7516 88 73 For push-button 3gang with RTR order no. 7566 37 73 For push-button 5gang with RTR order no. 7566 57 73
5
Installation depth 36 mm For suitable tube-entries and replacement for cable and duct entries refer to the dry surface-mounted range. Flush-mounted devices can be used with the surfacemounted housings for surface-mounted installation. with cable and duct entry entry at top, bottom and at each side in the middle possible for vertical mounting suitable for mounting on flammable base surface
Surface-mounted housing 3gang stainless steel, lacquered
1043 70 04
5
Flush-mounted devices can be used with the surfacemounted housings for surface-mounted installation. with cable and duct entry entry at top, bottom and at each side in the middle possible for vertical mounting suitable for mounting on flammable base surface
Surface-mounted housing 2gang stainless steel, lacquered
1052 70 04
5
Installation depth 36 mm
for vertical mounting
Surface-mounted housings Surface-mounted housing 1gang stainless steel, lacquered
1042 70 04
For suitable tube-entries and replacement for cable and duct entries refer to the dry surface-mounted range.
Frame with large cut-out stainless steel
stainless steel, lacquered
Installation depth 36 mm
IP44 protection when using a sealing set order no. 1010 ..
on page T68
Packing unit
Surface-mounted housing 2gang Frame
on page T68
Order no.
1041 70 04
10
Installation depth 36 mm For suitable tube-entries and replacement for cable and duct entries refer to the dry surface-mounted range. Flush-mounted devices can be used with the surfacemounted housings for surface-mounted installation.
For suitable tube-entries and replacement for cable and duct entries refer to the dry surface-mounted range. Flush-mounted devices can be used with the surfacemounted housings for surface-mounted installation. with cable and duct entry entry at top, bottom and at each side in the middle possible for horizontal mounting suitable for mounting on flammable base surface
with cable and duct entry entry at top and bottom possible suitable for mounting on flammable base surface
192
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
BERKER K.5 Order no.
Packing unit
Order no.
Packing unit
Surface-mounted housing 3gang stainless steel, lacquered
1053 70 04
5
Installation depth 36 mm For suitable tube-entries and replacement for cable and duct entries refer to the dry surface-mounted range. Flush-mounted devices can be used with the surfacemounted housings for surface-mounted installation. with cable and duct entry entry at top, bottom and at each side in the middle possible for horizontal mounting suitable for mounting on flammable base surface
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
193
Surfaces Covers/centre inserts Plastic, glossy white
similar to RAL 1013
polar white
similar to RAL 9010
red
similar to RAL 3003
green
similar to RAL 6029
orange
similar to RAL 2003
yellow
similar to RAL 1004
Stainless steel, matt finish
194
Berker K.1/K.5
Rockers and
centre inserts
Surface range K.1
Rockers and centre inserts:
white and polar white, glossy,
anthracite and aluminium, matt lacquered.
Frames and other devices: from page 158
Surface range K.5
Rockers and centre inserts:
stainless steel
Frames and other devices: from page 164
Marked items are suitable for installation of
splash-protected flush-mounted IP 44 when used
in conjunction with corresponding sealing set.
195
BERKER K.1/K.5 Order no.
Packing BERKER K.1/K.5
Order no.
Packing unit
TOP
unit
Flush-mounted wall box according to DIN 49073 part 1
SCHUKOsocket insert SCHUKO-centre plate with self-closing hinged cover
Sealing set K.1/K.5/Q.1 for socket outlets and centre plates (packing unit)
Frame
TOP
Flush-mounted wall box according to DIN 49073 part 1
Rocker switch/ push-button
Rocker
Frame Sealing set K.1/K.5/Q.1 for rocker switch/push-button (packing unit)
Flush-mounted wall box according to DIN 49073 part 1
TOP Key switch/ key pushbutton Centre plate for key switch/ key push-button
Profile half cylinder
TOP/OB EN
Frame Sealing set K.1/K.5/Q.1 for key switches/ key push-button (packing unit)
Application IP44 protection is reached by using the sealing set and installing in flush-mounted wall box according to DIN 49073 part 1 on smooth, even, vertically walls in finery-concisely inserted flush mounted wall boxes IP44 protection is not guaranteed for floor assembly, ceiling mounting and assembly in hollow wall boxes.
196
Attention IP44 protection is reached only if all installed articles are IP44 suitable (check markings) and the installation instruction is observed. "#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
BERKER K.1/K.5 Order no.
Packing unit
Sealings IP44
Order no.
Packing unit
Sealing set K. 1/K. 5/Q. 1 for rocker switch/ rocker push-button
Sealings Sealing set K. 1/K. 5/Q. 1 for socket outlets and centre plates transparent
1010 72 00
1
For blind plug with centre plate and screw fixing order no. 1009 60 79, 1045 7.. For blind plug with centre plate order no. 1009 60 89, 1045 7.., 6710 45 70 .., 6710 09 60 89 For centre plate with rotary knob for rotary switch for shutters order no. 1077 71 .., 1080 60 89 For centre plate with rotary knob for 3-step switch order no. 1084 60 89, 1087 7.., 1088 7.., 1096 60 89 For centre plate with setting knob for rotary dimmer order no. 1135 7.., 1137 60 .. For centre plate with setting knob for speed controller order no. 1135 7.., 1137 60 79 For centre plate for pilot lamp E14 order no. 1167 7.., 1198 60 89 For centre plate for key switch/push-button for shutters order no. 1506 60 89 For centre plate for key switch/push-button order no. 1507 60 89 For SCHUKO socket outlet with hinged cover order no. 4751 72 .. For SCHUKO socket outlet with hinged cover and labelling field order no. 4752 72 ..
for socket outlets with self-closing hinged covers for 3-step switches for rotary switch for shutters for pilot lamp E14 for rotary dimmer, rotary dimmer LV and Tronic rotary dimmer for universal rotary dimmer and universal rotary dimmer extension unit for speed controllers
transparent
1010 71 00
1
For rocker order no. 1405 7.., 1620 60 89 For rocker with imprinted symbol arrows order no. 1405 7.. For rocker with 5 lenses attached order no. 1415 70 .. For rocker with 5 lenses attached and labelling field order no. 1415 71 .. For rocker with red lens and imprint „0“ order no. 1417 7.. For rocker with imprint „0“ order no. 1425 7.., 1622 60 89 For rocker with red lens and imprint „Heizung Notschalter“ order no. 1488 71 15 For rocker with 5 lenses attached and large labelling field order no. 1496 .. For rocker with imprinted symbol light order no. 1620 60 49 For rocker with imprinted symbol bell order no. 1620 60 59 For rocker with imprinted symbol door order no. 1620 60 69 For rocker with orange lens and imprint „Heizung Notschalter“ order no. 1621 60 69 For rocker with 2 lenses attached and imprinted symbol light order no. 1621 60 79 For rocker with 2 lenses attached order no. 1621 60 89 For rocker with orange lens and imprint „0“ order no. 1624 60 89 For rocker with labelling field order no. 1626 60 89 For rocker with 2 lenses attached and labelling field order no. 1628 60 .. For rocker with orange lens and touchable symbol light order no. 1651 60 49 For rocker with orange lens and touchable symbol bell order no. 1651 60 59 For rocker with orange lens and touchable symbol door order no. 1651 60 69 For rocker with 2 lenses attached and guide for mouth-held rod order no. 1661 60 49 For rocker with 2 lenses attached and large labelling field order no. 1696 60 79
with IP44 fixing piece to screw on for rocker switches change-over, intermediate, 2pole on/off 10 AX for rocker push-buttons for push-button BCU 1gang and group push-button BCU 1gang
Sealing set K. 1/K. 5/Q. 1 for key switch/key push-button transparent
1010 70 00
1
For centre plate for key switch/push-button for shutters order no. 1504 7.., 1506 60 89 For centre plate for key switch/push-button order no. 1505 7.., 1507 60 89
for key switches/key push-buttons for profile half cylinders with additional earth contact for key switches/key push-buttons for shutters for profile half cylinders with additional earth contact
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
197
BERKER K.1/K.5 Order no.
Packing unit
Order no.
NEW
Socket outlets SCHUKO-socket outlets NEW
on page T6
SCHUKO-socket outlet 4715 70 02 white, glossy 4715 70 09 polar white, glossy anthracite, matt * 4715 70 06 aluminium, matt * 4715 70 24 4715 70 04 stainless steel 4715 70 15 red, glossy 4715 70 13 green, glossy 4715 70 14 orange, glossy white, glossy, enhanced 4735 70 02 contact protection IEC 60884-1 4735 70 09 polar white, glossy, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1 anthracite, matt, * 4735 70 06 enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1
10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
aluminium, matt, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1
* 4735 70 24
10
stainless steel, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1
4735 70 04
10
on page T6
10
aluminium, matt, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1
* 73 4135 70 24
10
stainless steel, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1
* 73 4135 70 04
10
10
10
orange, glossy, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1
* 73 4135 70 14
10
16 A, 250 V~ For South Tyrol only. Connection terminals IEC 60884-1 with screw-in lift terminals
SCHUKO-socket outlet with imprint
with plug-in terminals
on page T6
10
10
Connection terminals IEC 60884-1 on page T6
4115 70 02 4115 70 09 4115 70 06
* * 4115 70 24
red, glossy, with imprint „EDV“
4715 71 15
10
green, glossy, with imprint „SV“
4715 71 13
10
orange, glossy, with imprint „ZSV“
4715 71 14
10
16 A, 250 V~
SCHUKO-socket outlet
aluminium, matt
white, glossy, enhanced * 73 4135 70 02 contact protection IEC 60884-1 polar white, glossy, * 73 4135 70 09 enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1
* 73 4135 70 06
The insert of the red, green and orange socket outlets is colour-coded.
white, glossy polar white, glossy anthracite, matt
SCHUKO-socket outlet
anthracite, matt, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1
16 A, 250 V~
NEW
Packing unit
10 10 10 10
4115 70 04 stainless steel white, glossy, enhanced 4135 70 02 contact protection IEC 60884-1 4135 70 09 polar white, glossy, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1 anthracite, matt, * 4135 70 06 enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1
10 10
aluminium, matt, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1
* 4135 70 24
10
stainless steel, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1
4135 70 04
10
Insert colour-coded. Connection terminals IEC 60884-1 with plug-in terminals
10
10
16 A, 250 V~
Connection terminals IEC 60884-1 with screw terminals
198
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
BERKER K.1/K.5 Order no.
NEW
SCHUKO-socket outlet with labelling field white, glossy polar white, glossy anthracite, matt aluminium, matt
on page T6
Packing unit
stainless steel, lacquered
4739 70 02 4739 70 09 4739 70 06
* * 4739 70 24
Order no.
NEW
white, glossy polar white, glossy
10
aluminium, matt
10
4739 70 15 red, glossy 4739 70 13 green, glossy 4739 70 14 orange, glossy white, glossy, enhanced 4738 70 02 contact protection IEC 60884-1 4738 70 09 polar white, glossy, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1 anthracite, matt, * 4738 70 06 enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1
10 10 10 10
aluminium, matt, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1
* 4738 70 24
10
stainless steel, lacquered, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1 16 A, 250 V~
4738 70 04
10
anthracite, matt stainless steel, lacquered
* 4728 71 02 * 4728 71 09 * 4728 71 06 * 4728 71 24 * 4728 71 04
10 10 10 10 10
16 A, 250 V~ Specially suited for combining several socket outlets if right angle plugs are used. Labelling field height arranged for 6 mm P-touch strips.
10
Connection terminals IEC 60884-1 10
for diagonal installation with plug-in terminals
SCHUKO-socket outlet with indicator lamp and imprint
on page T6
The insert of the red, green and orange socket outlets is colour-coded.
green, glossy, with imprint „SV“
4126 71 13
10
orange, glossy, with imprint „ZSV“
4126 71 14
10
16 A, 250 V~ Neon lamp current 1,5 mA Insert colour-coded. Replacement neon lamp unit see module inserts / accessories order no. 1609
Labelling field height arranged for 6 mm P-touch strips.
Execution SV, ZSV to VDE 0100-710 Connection terminals IEC 60884-1
Connection terminals IEC 60884-1
with neon lamp unit with screw-in lift terminals
with plug-in terminals
SCHUKO-socket outlet with imprint and labelling field
on page T6
SCHUKO socket outlet 45° with labelling field
10 10 10
4739 70 04
Packing unit
NEW
red, glossy, with imprint „EDV“
4739 71 15
10
green, glossy, with imprint „SV“
4739 71 13
10
orange, glossy, with imprint „ZSV“
4739 71 14
10
16 A, 250 V~
SCHUKO-socket outlet with indicator lamp and labelling field white, glossy polar white, glossy anthracite, matt
on page T6
aluminium, matt stainless steel, lacquered
4161 70 02 4161 70 09 4161 70 06
* * 4161 70 24 * 4161 70 04
10 10 10 10 10
Insert colour-coded.
16 A, 250 V~ Neon lamp current 1,5 mA
Labelling field height arranged for 6 mm P-touch strips.
Labelling field height arranged for 6 mm P-touch strips.
Connection terminals IEC 60884-1
Replacement neon lamp unit see module inserts / accessories order no. 1609
with plug-in terminals
Connection terminals IEC 60884-1 with neon lamp unit with screw-in lift terminals
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
199
BERKER K.1/K.5 Order no.
Packing unit
SCHUKO-socket outlet with indicator lamp, labelling field and imprint
on page T6
green, glossy, with imprint „SV“
4161 71 13
10
orange, glossy, with imprint „ZSV“
4161 71 14
10
Order no.
NEW
on page T60
16 A, 250 V~ Neon lamp current 1,5 mA Insert colour-coded. Labelling field height arranged for 6 mm P-touch strips. Replacement neon lamp unit see module inserts / accessories order no. 1609
Execution SV, ZSV to VDE 0100-710 Connection terminals IEC 60884-1 with neon lamp unit with screw-in lift terminals
SCHUKO-socket outlet with overvoltage protection and labelling field white, glossy polar white, glossy anthracite, matt
on page T33
aluminium, matt stainless steel, lacquered
4152 71 02 4152 71 09 4152 71 06
* * 4152 71 24
red, glossy
1
1
1
aluminium, matt, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1
* 4708 70 24
1
stainless steel, lacquered, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1
* 4708 70 04
1
Suitable for use according to DIN VDE 0100-410 Tested conform VDE 0664 (EN 61008) Connection terminals IEC 60884-1
1 1
4152 71 15
1
16 A, 250 V~, 50/60 Hz The insert of the red socket outlet is colour-coded.
to protect connected and downstream loads with plug-in terminals
SCHUKO-socket outlets NEW
Labelling field height arranged for 6 mm P-touch strips.
with imprint with indicator LED for „on/error“ with acoustic fault signal with screw terminals
white, glossy, enhanced 4708 70 02 contact protection IEC 60884-1 4708 70 09 polar white, glossy, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1 anthracite, matt, * 4708 70 06 enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1
Through-wired socket outlets are also protected.
1 1 1
4152 71 04
Overvoltage protection to EN 61643-11 and VDE 0675-6, -11 Connection terminals IEC 60884-1
SCHUKO-socket outlet with RCD protection switch
16 A, 250 V~, 50/60 Hz Rated fault current 30 mA; Switch off time <= 30 ms; Short-circuit resistance 3 kA (with pre-fuse 20 AgL); Surge current firmness 250 A (8/20) µs
SCHUKO-socket outlets with safety device NEW
Packing unit
on page T6
SCHUKO-socket outlet with hinged cover white, glossy, enhanced 4751 71 02 contact protection IEC 60884-1 4751 71 09 polar white, glossy, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1 anthracite, matt, * 4751 71 06 enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1
10
10
10
aluminium, matt, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1
* 4751 71 24
10
stainless steel, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1
4751 71 04
10
16 A, 250 V~
Connection terminals IEC 60884-1 with imprint when opening hinged cover, it can be arrested in end position with plug-in terminals
200
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
BERKER K.1/K.5 Order no.
NEW
on page T6
Packing unit
NEW
SCHUKO-socket outlet with hinged cover white, glossy, enhanced 4751 72 02 contact protection IEC 60884-1 4751 72 09 polar white, glossy, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1 anthracite, matt, * 4751 72 06 enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1
Order no.
10
10 on page T6
10
aluminium, matt, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1
* 4751 72 24
10
stainless steel, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1
4751 72 04
10
16 A, 250 V~
white, glossy, enhanced 4752 71 02 contact protection IEC 60884-1 4752 71 09 polar white, glossy, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1 anthracite, matt, * 4752 71 06 enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1
10
10
10
aluminium, matt, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1
* 4752 71 24
10
stainless steel, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1
4752 71 04
10
Labelling field height arranged for 6 mm P-touch strips.
Connection terminals IEC 60884-1
Connection terminals IEC 60884-1
with imprint with self-closing hinged covers with plug-in terminals
on page T6
SCHUKO-socket outlet with hinged cover and labelling field
16 A, 250 V~
IP44 protection when using sealing set order no. 1010 72 00
NEW
Packing unit
with imprint when opening hinged cover, it can be arrested in end position with plug-in terminals
SCHUKO-socket outlet with hinged cover white, glossy, enhanced 4747 71 02 contact protection IEC 60884-1 4747 71 09 polar white, glossy, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1 anthracite, matt, * 4747 71 06 enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1
10
10
10
aluminium, matt, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1
* 4747 71 24
10
stainless steel, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1
4747 71 04
10
16 A, 250 V~ Specially suited for combining several socket outlets if right angle plugs are used. Connection terminals IEC 60884-1 with imprint mounting orientation of insert selectable in 45° steps when opening hinged cover, it can be arrested in end position with plug-in terminals
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
NEW
on page T6
SCHUKO-socket outlet with hinged cover and labelling field white, glossy, enhanced 4752 72 02 contact protection IEC 60884-1 4752 72 09 polar white, glossy, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1 anthracite, matt, * 4752 72 06 enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1
10
10
10
aluminium, matt, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1
* 4752 72 24
10
stainless steel, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1
4752 72 04
10
16 A, 250 V~ Labelling field height arranged for 6 mm P-touch strips. IP44 protection when using sealing set order no. 1010 72 00
Connection terminals IEC 60884-1 with imprint with self-closing hinged covers with plug-in terminals
201
BERKER K.1/K.5 Order no.
NEW
on page T6
Packing unit
SCHUKO-socket outlet with hinged cover and labelling field white, glossy, enhanced 4748 71 02 contact protection IEC 60884-1 4748 71 09 polar white, glossy, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1 anthracite, matt, * 4748 71 06 enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1 aluminium, matt, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1 stainless steel, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1
*
4748 71 24
4748 71 04
Order no.
SCHUKO-socket outlets NEW
10
on page T6
10
10
16 A, 250 V~ Labelling field height arranged for 6 mm P-touch strips. Suited for combining several socket outlets if right angle plugs are used. Connection terminals IEC 60884-1 with imprint mounting orientation of insert selectable in 45° steps when opening hinged cover, it can be arrested in end position with plug-in terminals
4786 71 02
10
4786 71 09
10
16 A, 250 V~
Barrier-free building based on DIN 18025 Connection terminals IEC 60884-1 for barrier-free construction when opening hinged cover, it can be arrested in end position with plug-in terminals
202
stainless steel, lacquered
* * 4753 70 24
10 10 10 10
4753 70 04
10
white, glossy, enhanced 4729 70 02 contact protection IEC 60884-1 4729 70 09 polar white, glossy, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1 anthracite, matt, * 4729 70 06 enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1
10
aluminium, matt, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1
* 4729 70 24
10
stainless steel, lacquered, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1 16 A, 250 V~
4729 70 04
10
10
10
with plug-in terminals
SCHUKO-socket outlet with hinged cover and touchable symbol socket outlet
on page T6
aluminium, matt
4753 70 02 4753 70 09 4753 70 06
For fitting in 1gang wall boxes according to DIN 49073-1 Connection terminals IEC 60884-1
Barrier-free construction
white, glossy, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1 polar white, glossy, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1
Double SCHUKO-socket outlet with cover plate white, glossy polar white, glossy anthracite, matt
10
10
Packing unit
Socket outlets without earth contact NEW
Socket outlet without earth contact white, glossy polar white, glossy anthracite, matt aluminium, matt
on page T6
stainless steel, lacquered
61 6715 70 02 61 6715 70 09 61 6715 70 06
* * 61 6715 70 24 61 6715 70 04
10 10 10 10 10
16 A, 250 V~ Mirror depth 8 mm
Connection terminals according to IEC 60884-1 2pole without spreader claws with plug-in terminals
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
BERKER K.1/K.5 Order no.
Packing unit
NEW
Socket outlets with earth pin NEW
on page T6
Order no.
Socket outlet with earth pin white, glossy, enhanced 67 6575 70 02 contact protection IEC 60884-1 67 6575 70 09 polar white, glossy, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1 anthracite, matt, * 67 6575 70 06 enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1 aluminium, matt, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1
*
stainless steel, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1
67 6575 70 24
67 6575 70 04
10
10
on page T6
10
Packing unit
Socket outlet with earth pin and hinged cover white, glossy, enhanced 67 6577 71 02 contact protection IEC 60884-1 67 6577 71 09 polar white, glossy, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1 anthracite, matt, * 67 6577 71 06 enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1
10
10
10
aluminium, matt, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1
* 67 6577 71 24
10
10
67 6577 71 04
10
10
stainless steel, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1 16 A, 250 V~
16 A, 250 V~ Connection terminals according to IEC 60884-1 Connection terminals according to IEC 60884-1
with imprint 2pole + earth when opening hinged cover, it can be arrested in end position with screw-in lift terminals
2pole + earth with screw-in lift terminals NEW
on page T6
Socket outlet with earth pin white, glossy, enhanced * 67 6875 70 02 contact protection IEC 60884-1 polar white, glossy, * 67 6875 70 09 enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1 anthracite, matt, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1
* 67 6875 70 06
aluminium, matt, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1
* 67 6875 70 24
stainless steel, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1
* 67 6875 70 04
16 A, 250 V~
10
NEW
10
10
on page T6
Socket outlet with earth pin and hinged cover white, glossy, enhanced * 67 6877 71 02 contact protection IEC 60884-1 polar white, glossy, * 67 6877 71 09 enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1
10
10
* 67 6877 71 06
10
10
anthracite, matt, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1
* 67 6877 71 24
10
10
aluminium, matt, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1 stainless steel, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1
* 67 6877 71 04
10
16 A, 250 V~ Connection terminals according to IEC 60884-1 2pole + earth with plug-in terminals
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
Connection terminals according to IEC 60884-1 with imprint 2pole + earth when opening hinged cover, it can be arrested in end position with plug-in terminals
203
BERKER K.1/K.5 Order no.
Packing unit
NEW
British Standard socket outlets NEW
on page T6
Order no.
white, glossy, with enhanced contact protection polar white, glossy, with enhanced contact protection
* 6347 70 02
10
* 6347 70 09
10
anthracite, matt, with enhanced contact protection
* 6347 70 06
10
aluminium, matt, with enhanced contact protection
* 6347 70 24
10
stainless steel, lacquered, with enhanced contact protection
6347 70 04
2pole + earth centre plate plug-in fixing without spreader claws with screw terminals
Covers for switches / push-buttons Rockers
10
Equates to standard BS 1363: Part 2.
for rocker switches change-over, intermediate for rocker push-buttons for push-button BCU 1gang and group push-button BCU 1gang NEW
Euro-American socket outlets Socket outlet without earth contact „Euro-American Standard“ 1
white, glossy polar white, glossy anthracite, matt stainless steel
* * 1426 70 24 1426 70 04
10 10 10 10 10
Not suitable for rocker push-button switches.
2pole centre plate plug-in fixing without spreader claws with screw terminals
IP44 protection when using sealing set order no. 1010 71 00
Chinese socket outlets Socket outlet with earth contact, China
* 33 4208 80 09
1426 70 02 1426 70 09 1426 70 06
Labelling field height arranged for 6 mm P-touch strips for labelling with names, notes etc.
Connection terminals according to IEC 60884-1
polar white, glossy, enhanced contact protection
Rocker with labelling field
aluminium, matt
10 A, 250 V~
NEW
10 10 10 10 10
IP44 protection when using sealing set order no. 1010 71 00
2pole + earth without neon lamp without spreader claws with screw terminals
* 33 4207 80 09
1405 70 02 1405 70 09 * 1405 70 06 * 1405 70 24 1405 70 04
Not suitable for rocker push-button switches.
For fitting in standard wall boxes according to DIN 49073-1
polar white, glossy, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1
Rocker white, glossy polar white, glossy anthracite, matt aluminium, matt stainless steel
13 A, 250 V~
NEW
1
* 33 4209 80 09
16 A, 250 V~
NEW
*
Socket outlet with earth contact, China polar white, glossy, enhanced contact protection
Socket outlet with earth contact, British Standard, can be switched off
Packing unit
1
for rocker switches change-over, intermediate for rocker push-buttons for push-button BCU 1gang and group push-button BCU 1gang
10 A, 250 V~
2pole + earth centre plate plug-in fixing without spreader claws with screw terminals
204
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
BERKER K.1/K.5 Order no.
NEW
Packing unit
NEW
Rocker with 5 lenses attached white, glossy polar white, glossy anthracite, matt aluminium, matt stainless steel
1415 70 02 1415 70 09 1415 70 06
* * 1415 70 24 1415 70 04
Order no.
10 10 10
aluminium, matt
10
stainless steel, lacquered
Lenses with symbol for light, bell, door and neutral in clear, also neutral in red transparent.
IP44 protection when using neon lamp unit order no. 1675 .. and sealing set order no. 1010 71 00
for rocker switches change-over, intermediate for rocker push-buttons for push-button BCU 1gang and group push-button BCU 1gang for illumination and monitoring circuit
10
NEW
Not suitable for rocker push-button switches.
aluminium, matt
IP44 protection when using neon lamp unit order no. 1675 .. and sealing set order no. 1010 71 00
stainless steel
aluminium, matt stainless steel
1415 71 02 1415 71 09 1415 71 06
* * 1415 71 24 1415 71 04
10 10 10 10 10
Labelling field height arranged for 6 mm P-touch strips for labelling with names, notes etc. Lenses with symbol for light, bell, door and neutral in clear, also neutral in red transparent. Not suitable for rocker push-button switches. IP44 protection when using neon lamp unit order no. 1675 .. and sealing set order no. 1010 71 00
1425 71 02 1425 71 09 1425 71 06
* * 1425 71 24 1425 71 04
10 10 10 10 10
Not suitable for rocker push-button switches.
for rocker switches change-over, intermediate for rocker push-buttons for push-button BCU 1gang and group push-button BCU 1gang for monitoring circuit
white, glossy polar white, glossy anthracite, matt
Rocker with imprint „0“ white, glossy polar white, glossy anthracite, matt
Not suitable for heating systems > 50 kW.
Rocker with 5 lenses attached and labelling field
10
Not suitable for rocker push-button switches.
Rocker with red lens and „Heizung Notschalter“ imprint
NEW
1496 70 04
10
Lenses with symbol for light, bell, door and neutral in clear, also neutral in red transparent.
for rocker switches change-over, intermediate for rocker push-buttons for push-button BCU 1gang and group push-button BCU 1gang for illumination and monitoring circuit
Or use glass pane protected heating emergency switch from programme ranges Arsys, flush-mounted splash-protected IP44, Aquatec IP44.
* * 1496 70 24
10 10 10
Labelling field height arranged for 2 9 mm P-touch strips.
IP44 protection when using neon lamp unit order no. 1675 .. and sealing set order no. 1010 71 00
1488 71 15
1496 70 02 1496 70 09 1496 70 06
Labelling field (w x h) approx. 49,5 x 20,3 mm
Not suitable for rocker push-button switches.
red, glossy
Rocker with 5 lenses attached and large labelling field white, glossy polar white, glossy anthracite, matt
10
Packing unit
IP44 protection when using rocker switch order no. 3032 and sealing set order no. 1010 71 00
for rocker switch 2- and 3pole on/off NEW
Rocker with red lens and imprint „0“ white, glossy polar white, glossy anthracite, matt aluminium, matt stainless steel
1417 71 02 1417 71 09 1417 71 06
* * 1417 71 24 1417 71 04
10 10 10 10 10
Not suitable for rocker push-button switches. IP44 protection when using rocker switch order no. 3032, neon lamp unit order no. and sealing set order no. 1010 71 00
for rocker switch 2- and 3pole on/off for group push-button BCU 1gang for illumination and monitoring circuit
for rocker switches change-over, intermediate for rocker push-buttons for push-button BCU 1gang and group push-button BCU 1gang for illumination and monitoring circuit
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
205
BERKER K.1/K.5 Order no.
NEW
Packing unit
NEW
Rockers white, glossy polar white, glossy anthracite, matt aluminium, matt stainless steel
Order no.
1435 70 02 1435 70 09 1435 70 06
* * 1435 70 24 1435 70 04
white, glossy polar white, glossy anthracite, matt
10
aluminium, matt
10
stainless steel
for rockers switches for rockers push-buttons and group rockers pushbuttons for push-button BCU 2gang and group push-button BCU 2gang NEW
Rockers with red lens white, glossy polar white, glossy anthracite, matt aluminium, matt stainless steel, lacquered
1437 70 02 1437 70 09 1437 70 06
* * 1437 70 24 * 1437 70 04
aluminium, matt stainless steel, lacquered
* * 1465 70 24 1465 70 04
10
aluminium, matt stainless steel
1435 71 02 1435 71 09 1435 71 06
* * 1435 71 24 1435 71 04
IP44 protection when using sealing set order no. 1010 71 00 For group push-button BCU 1gang order no. 7514 11 00 NEW
Rockers with imprinted symbol arrows white, glossy polar white, glossy anthracite, matt
1435 72 02 1435 72 09 1435 72 06
* * 1435 72 24
10 10 10
stainless steel
1435 72 04
10 10
Barrier-free construction
10 10 10 10 10
Rockers with imprinted symbol arrow white, glossy polar white, glossy anthracite, matt
10
For group rockers push-button as 2pole rockers push-button for shutters with middle positions order no. 5034 04 For group push-button BCU 2gang order no. 7514 21 00
For rockers switch 3gang on/off order no. 6330 23 NEW
1405 71 04
10
10
Rockers for rockers switch 3gang on/off 1465 70 02 1465 70 09 1465 70 06
* * 1405 71 24
10 10 10
aluminium, matt
for rockers switches for rockers push-buttons and group rockers pushbuttons for illumination and monitoring circuit for push-button BCU 2gang and group push-button BCU 2gang
white, glossy polar white, glossy anthracite, matt
1405 71 02 1405 71 09 1405 71 06
10 10 10
Not suitable for rockers push-button switches.
NEW
Rocker with imprinted symbol arrows
10 10 10
Not suitable for rockers push-button switches.
Packing unit
10 10 10 10 10
For rockers switch for shutters order no. 3035 20 For rockers push-button for shutters order no. 5035 20 For push-button BCU 2gang order no. 7514 20 00
Rocker with 5 lenses attached and mouth-held rod white, glossy polar white, glossy
1661 71 02 1661 71 09
10 10
Lenses with symbol for light, bell, door and neutral in clear, also neutral in red transparent. Not suitable for rocker push-button switches. IP44 protection when using sealing set order no. 1010 71 00
Barrier-free building based on DIN 18025 for barrier-free construction for rocker switches change-over, intermediate for rocker push-buttons for push-button BCU 1gang and group push-button BCU 1gang for illumination and monitoring circuit
Rocker with red lens and touchable symbol light white, glossy polar white, glossy
1651 71 02 1651 71 09
10 10
Not suitable for rocker push-button switches. IP44 protection when using sealing set order no. 1010 71 00
Barrier-free building based on DIN 18025 for barrier-free construction for rocker switches change-over, intermediate for rocker push-buttons for illumination and monitoring circuit for push-button BCU 1gang and group push-button BCU 1gang
206
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
BERKER K.1/K.5 Order no.
Packing unit
Rocker with red lens and touchable symbol bell white, glossy polar white, glossy
1651 72 02 1651 72 09
Order no.
Rotary switches NEW
10 10
aluminium, matt stainless steel
Barrier-free building based on DIN 18025 for barrier-free construction for illuminated rocker push-buttons for push-button BCU 1gang
10 10
for barrier-free construction for illuminated rocker push-buttons for push-button BCU 1gang
Hotel card switch Hotel card switch cover with imprint and red lens
on page T6
aluminium, matt stainless steel, lacquered
1641 71 02 1641 71 09 1641 71 06
* * 1641 71 24 1641 71 04
1150 71 04
1 1
3-step switches NEW
Barrier-free building based on DIN 18025
white, glossy polar white, glossy anthracite, matt
* * 1150 71 24
1 1 1
with imprint „0“ and „1“
IP44 protection when using sealing set order no. 1010 71 00
NEW
1150 71 02 1150 71 09 1150 71 06
For rotary switch order no. 3862 ..
Rocker with red lens and touchable symbol door 1651 73 02 1651 73 09
Centre plate with rotary knob for rotary switch white, glossy polar white, glossy anthracite, matt
IP44 protection when using sealing set order no. 1010 71 00
white, glossy polar white, glossy
Packing unit
10 10 10 10 10
Max. card width 54 mm; Card strength 0,5 - 1,4 mm Other imprint on request!
Centre plate with rotary knob for 3-step switch white, glossy, without 0-position
1088 71 02
1
polar white, glossy, without 0-position
1088 71 09
1
anthracite, matt, without 0-position
* 1088 71 06
1
aluminium, matt, without 0-position
* 1088 71 24
1
stainless steel, without 0-position
1088 71 04
1
white, glossy, with neutral-position
1087 71 02
1
polar white, glossy, with neutral-position
1087 71 09
1
anthracite, matt, with neutral-position
* 1087 71 06
1
aluminium, matt, with neutral-position
* 1087 71 24
1
stainless steel, with neutral-position
1087 71 04
1
IP44 protection when using sealing set order no. 1010 72 00 For 3-step switch with 0-position order no. 3861 For 3-step switch without 0-position order no. 3861 01
For push-button insert for hotel card switch covers order no. 5051 02, 5051 03, 5052 01, 5056 01
Pullcord switches/pullcord push-buttons NEW
Centre plate for pullcord switch and pullcord push-button white, glossy polar white, glossy anthracite, matt aluminium, matt
1147 70 02 1147 70 09 1147 70 06
* * 1147 70 24
10 10 10 10
For pullcord push-button order no. 3956 19 For pullcord switch order no. 3962, 3966, 6139 ..
with imprint
Rotary switches/rotary push-buttons for shutters NEW
Centre plate with rotary knob for rotary switch for shutters white, glossy polar white, glossy anthracite, matt aluminium, matt stainless steel
1077 71 02 1077 71 09 1077 71 06
* * 1077 71 24 1077 71 04
1 1 1 1 1
IP44 protection when using sealing set order no. 1010 72 00 Interlock disk for conversion to push-button see module inserts order no. 1861 Rotary switch for shutters order no. 3841, 3842
with imprint
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
207
BERKER K.1/K.5 Order no.
Packing unit
NEW
Key switches/key push-buttons for shutters NEW
Centre plate with lock for key switch for shutters 1079 71 02
1
white, glossy polar white, glossy anthracite, matt
polar white, glossy, key removable in mid position anthracite, matt, key removable in mid position
1079 71 09
1
aluminium, matt
* 1079 71 06
1
aluminium, matt, key removable in mid position
* 1079 71 24
1
stainless steel, key removable in mid position white, glossy, key removable in 3 positions
1079 71 04
1
1079 72 02
1
polar white, glossy, key removable in 3 positions
1079 72 09
1
anthracite, matt, key * 1079 72 06 removable in 3 positions
1
aluminium, matt, key * 1079 72 24 removable in 3 positions
1
stainless steel, key removable in 3 positions
1
1079 72 04
1504 71 04
10 10
with imprint for profile half cylinders for master-key systems
Key switches/key push-buttons NEW
Centre plate for key switch/key push-button white, glossy polar white, glossy anthracite, matt stainless steel, lacquered
1505 70 02 1505 70 09 1505 70 06
* * 1505 70 24 1505 70 04
10 10 10 10 10
Profile half cylinders see module inserts.
white, glossy, key removable in mid position
1079 73 02
1
polar white, glossy, key removable in mid position anthracite, matt, key removable in mid position
1079 73 09
1
* 1079 73 06
1
1079 73 24
1
1079 73 04
1
IP44 protection when using sealing set order no. 1010 70 00 For key switch order no. 3826 10 For key switch for protection class IP44 order no. 3836 20 For key push-button for protection class IP44 order no. 3856 20
for profile half cylinders for master-key systems
RCD protection switch
*
For key switch for shutters order no. 3851, 3852
with imprint only push-button function with 2 keys
208
* * 1504 71 24
10 10 10
IP44 protection when using sealing set order no. 1010 70 00 For key switch for shutters for protection class IP44 order no. 3821 20 For key switch for shutters order no. 3822 10 For key push-button for shutters order no. 3831 10, 3832 10 For key push-button for shutters for protection class IP44 order no. 3831 20
aluminium, matt
Centre plate with lock for key switch for shutters
stainless steel, key removable in mid position
stainless steel, lacquered
1504 71 02 1504 71 09 1504 71 06
Profile half cylinders see module inserts.
with imprint with push lock function with 2 keys
aluminium, matt, key removable in mid position
Packing unit
Centre plate for key switch/key push-button for shutters
white, glossy, key removable in mid position
For key switch for shutters order no. 3851, 3852
NEW
Order no.
50 x 50 mm centre plate for RCD protection switch white, glossy polar white, glossy anthracite, matt aluminium, matt stainless steel, lacquered
1493 02 1493 09 1493 16 06 1493 14 04 1493 04
1 1 1 1 1
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for 50 x 50 mm centre plate of the corresponding range. For RCD protection switch order no. 2844
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
BERKER K.1/K.5 Order no.
Packing unit
Order no.
Blank plates
Pilot lamps
NEW
NEW
Blank plate with centre plate white, glossy, without base and spreader claws polar white, glossy, without base and spreader claws anthracite, matt, without base and spreader claws
1045 70 02
20
1045 70 09
20
white, glossy polar white, glossy anthracite, matt aluminium, matt stainless steel, lacquered
20
aluminium, matt, without 1045 70 24 * base and spreader claws
20
stainless steel, without base and spreader claws white, glossy, with base and spreader claws
1045 70 04
20
67 1045 70 02
10
polar white, glossy, with base and spreader claws anthracite, matt, with base and spreader claws
67 1045 70 09
10
white, glossy polar white, glossy anthracite, matt
* 67 1045 70 06
10
aluminium, matt
* 67 1045 70 24
10
67 1045 70 04
10
stainless steel, with base and spreader claws
1165 70 02 1165 70 09 1165 70 06
* * 1165 70 24 1165 70 04
10 10
Push-buttons, LEDs, neon lamps and covers see module inserts. For push-button and pilot lamp E10 order no. 5101 ..
centre plate plug-in fixing NEW
Centre plate for pilot lamp E14
stainless steel, lacquered
1167 70 02 1167 70 09 1167 70 06
* * 1167 70 24 1167 70 04
white, glossy polar white, glossy anthracite, matt
* 1248 70 02 * 1248 70 09 * 1248 70 06 * 1248 70 24 * 1248 70 04
white, glossy polar white, glossy anthracite, matt
10 10 10
stainless steel, lacquered
10
For LED orientation light order no. 2951 For LED signal light order no. 2952
IP44 protection when using sealing set order no. 1010 72 00
on supporting plate with large cut-out for customised cut-outs or holes when installing special solutions space-saving for relays, etc. with cover plug for screw fitting without spreader claws
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
10
Cover for LED orientation light and LED signal light
Blank plate with centre plate and screw-fixing
* * 1045 71 24
10
IP44 protection when using sealing set order no. 1010 72 00 For pilot lamp E14 order no. 5131 02
aluminium, matt
1045 71 02 1045 71 09 1045 71 06
10 10 10
LEDs, incandescent lamps and covers see module inserts.
NEW
on supporting plate without cut-out centre plate plug-in fixing
aluminium, matt
10 10 10
Cut-out diameter 27,2 mm
IP44 protection when using sealing set order no. 1010 72 00
NEW
Centre plate for push-button and pilot lamp E10
* 1045 70 06
aluminium, matt, with base and spreader claws
Packing unit
1 1 1 1 1
with printed labels „Bitte warten / Bitte eintreten“ and „Do not disturb / make up room“ with milky foil, for individual labelling
209
BERKER K.1/K.5 Order no.
NEW
aluminium, matt stainless steel, lacquered
1345 70 02 1345 70 09 1345 70 06
* * 1345 70 24 1345 70 04
Order no.
NEW
Info pilot lamp cover with 5 label sheets white, glossy polar white, glossy anthracite, matt
on page T29
Packing unit
white, glossy polar white, glossy anthracite, matt
1
aluminium, matt on page T7
Current input 25 mA; LED output 800 mW
1
simple programming of switching times with quick programming mode can be programmed up to 4 hours after pulling from the insert 2 programme blocks Mon. - Fri. and Sat. - Sun. with automatic summer-/winter time switching (can be switched off) large-area display with symbols display of next switching time with slide switch for manual/automatic
timers
210
1735 70 04
1
For insert for timer order no. 2948
with 4 light intensity LED very long LED lifetime with clear cover plate
Centre plate with setting knob for mechanical timer white, glossy, max. 15 minutes
1634 71 02
1
polar white, glossy, max. 15 minutes
1634 71 09
1
anthracite, matt, max. 15 minutes
* 1634 71 06
1
aluminium, matt, max. 15 minutes
* 1634 71 24
1
stainless steel, max. 15 minutes
1634 71 04
1
white, glossy, max. 120 minutes
1635 71 02
1
polar white, glossy, max. 120 minutes
1635 71 09
1
anthracite, matt, max. 120 minutes
* 1635 71 06
1
aluminium, matt, max. 120 minutes
* 1635 71 24
1
stainless steel, max. 120 minutes
1635 71 04
1
with time scale imprint
* * 1735 70 24
1 1 1
For manual and timer programmed switching of electrical loads.
Coloured cover plate see module inserts order no. 1289 .. For insert info pilot lamp order no. 2949
Mechanical timer 15 minutes order no. 2040 Mechanical timer 120 minutes order no. 2041
stainless steel, lacquered
1735 70 02 1735 70 09 1735 70 06
Per programme block 2 switching times for „on/off“; Power reserve approx. 4 hrs., maintenance-free; Operating temperature 5 - 35 °C
Labels supplied: „Nicht eintreten“, „Besetzt“, „Bitte eintreten“, „Bitte Ruhe“, „Bitte warten“.
NEW
Easy timer with display
1 1 1 1
Packing unit
NEW
Timer with display white, glossy polar white, glossy anthracite, matt aluminium, matt
on page T7
stainless steel, lacquered
1736 71 02 1736 71 09 1736 71 06
* * 1736 71 24 1736 71 04
1 1 1 1 1
Switching times 18 for on/off; Random generator +/- 15 min.; Astronomic time shift +/- 2 hrs.; Power reserve approx. 24 hrs.; Countdown function 0 - 23 hrs. 59 min. For manual and timer programmed switching of electrical loads. For insert for timer order no. 2948
with imprint in German with pre-set base programme 2 independent programme memories for everyday/ holidays with week and day programme with slide switch from summer to winter time astro programme for sunrise/sundown switching large-area display with symbols with slide switch for manual/automatic
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
BERKER K.1/K.5 Order no.
NEW
aluminium, matt stainless steel, lacquered
1738 71 02 1738 71 09 1738 71 06
* * 1738 71 24 1738 71 04
Order no.
1 1 1
NEW
1
aluminium, matt stainless steel
1135 72 04
10 10
with imprinted symbol curve
with imprint in German with pre-set base programme 2 independent programme memories for everyday/ holidays with week and day programme with slide switch from summer to winter time astro programme for sunrise/sundown switching large-area display with symbols with slide switch for manual/automatic for sensor connection to socket contact or terminal block connected RolloTec brightness sensor can be used for twilight-controlled switching-on
Universal series touch dimmers NEW
Button for universal series touch dimmer white, glossy polar white, glossy anthracite, matt aluminium, matt
on page T10
stainless steel
* 1765 70 02 * 1765 70 09 * 1765 70 06 * 1765 70 24 * 1765 70 04
1 1 1 1 1
For universal series touch dimmer order no. 2901
for 2 independent lighting groups with 2-push-buttons operation concept per series
BLC Berker Light Control
Rotary dimmers
Buttons
Centre plate with setting knob for rotary dimmer
stainless steel
* * 1135 72 24
10 10 10
IP44 protection when using sealing set order no. 1010 72 00 For speed controller order no. 2968 01
For RolloTec brightness sensors order no. 0169, 0184 For insert for timer order no. 2948
aluminium, matt
1135 72 02 1135 72 09 1135 72 06
Axial dimension diameter 4 mm
For manual and timer programmed switching of electrical loads.
white, glossy polar white, glossy anthracite, matt
Centre plate with setting knob for speed controller white, glossy polar white, glossy anthracite, matt
1
Setting range twilight approx. 6 - 300 Lux; Switching times 18 for on/off; Random generator +/- 15 min.; Astronomic time shift +/- 2 hrs.; Power reserve approx. 24 hrs.; Countdown function 0 - 23 hrs. 59 min.
NEW
Packing unit
Speed controllers
Timer with display and sensor connection white, glossy polar white, glossy anthracite, matt
on page T7
Packing unit
1135 70 02 1135 70 09 1135 70 06
* * 1135 70 24 1135 70 04
NEW
10 10 10 10 10
Axial dimension diameter 4 mm IP44 protection when using sealing set order no. 1010 72 00 For rotary dimmer order no. 2819 .., 2830 10, 2860 10, 2875, 2885 For universal rotary dimmer order no. 2861 10 For universal rotary dimmer extension unit order no 2862 10 For rotary dimmer LV order no. 2866 10, 2873 For Tronic rotary dimmer order no. 2867 10, 2874 For rotary potentiometer 1-10 V order no. 2891 10 For push-button rotary potentiometer 1-10 V order no. 2896 10 For rotary potentiometer DALI order no. 2897
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
on page T12
BLC button white, glossy polar white, glossy anthracite, matt aluminium, matt stainless steel
1761 70 02 1761 70 09 * 1761 70 06 * 1761 70 24 1761 70 04
1 1 1 1 1
For BLC universal touch dimmer order no. 2902 For BLC touch control unit 1-10 V order no. 2903 For BLC touch dimmer LV order no. 2904 For BLC triac switch insert LV order no. 2905 for BLC relay switch insert order no. 2906 For BLC relay switch insert with potential-free contact order no. 2906 10 For BLC extension unit order no 2907 For BLC relay switch insert HVAC order no. 2912 For BLC Tronic switch insert order no. 2916 For BLC stair light time switching impulse insert order no. 2934 10
with 2-push-buttons operation concept start-up brightness will be stored safe after power failure with BLC relay switch insert HVAC used as timer as well
211
BERKER K.1/K.5 Order no.
Packing unit
Radio buttons
Packing unit
BLC Controllers NEW
BLC radio button
on page T12
Order no.
white, glossy polar white, glossy anthracite, matt aluminium, matt stainless steel
1760 70 02 1760 70 09 1760 70 06 1760 70 24 1760 70 04
1 1 1 1 1
Radio signal reception frequency 433,42 MHz; Learnable radio transmitters 30 Extension unit operation with BLC extension unit and push-button (NO) possible as of release R2.1. For actuation via button and radio transmitter. For BLC universal touch dimmer order no. 2902 For BLC touch control unit 1-10 V order no. 2903 For BLC touch dimmer LV order no. 2904 For BLC triac switch insert LV order no. 2905 for BLC relay switch insert order no. 2906 For BLC relay switch insert with potential-free contact order no. 2906 10 For BLC relay switch insert HVAC order no. 2912 For BLC Tronic switch insert order no. 2916
with 2-push-buttons operation concept with 5 light scenes for „on/off“, dimming value retrieving light scenes only by using radio transmitter radio signal of taught-in radio controllers causes switch on for 1 min. (retriggering) start-up brightness will be stored after power failure reset function (to factory setting)
BLC controller 180 white, glossy polar white, glossy anthracite, matt aluminium, matt
on page T15
stainless steel, lacquered
1783 70 02 1783 70 09 1783 70 06
* * 1783 70 24 1783 70 04
1 1 1 1 1
Nominal mounting height 1,1 m; Range frontal approx. 10 m; Range lateral each approx. 6 m; Detection field semi-oval shaped approx. 10 x 12 m; Detection angle 180 °; Detection levels 2; Switching segments 72; Response sensitivity programmable approx. 20 - 100 % ; Response brightness adjustable approx. 0 - 80 / unlimited Lux; Delay time approx. 2 min.; Operating temperature -20 - +45 °C; Dimensions assembling height 23,5 mm Switches on for the duration of the controller delay time in case minimum response brightness level is infringed and if movement of people is detected. In conjunction with a BLC relay switch unit HVAC, the HVAC-channel is also switched on for the duration of its delay time independent of response brightness. For BLC universal touch dimmer order no. 2902 For BLC touch control unit 1-10 V order no. 2903 For BLC touch dimmer LV order no. 2904 For BLC triac switch insert LV order no. 2905 for BLC relay switch insert order no. 2906 For BLC relay switch insert with potential-free contact order no. 2906 10 For BLC controller extension unit order no. 2908, 2934 10 For BLC relay switch insert HVAC order no. 2912 For BLC Tronic switch insert order no. 2916
U with cover to limit detection angle to 90°
212
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
BERKER K.1/K.5 Order no.
NEW
BLC controller 180 comfort with slide switch for off/automatic/on white, glossy polar white, glossy anthracite, matt
on page T15
Packing unit
aluminium, matt stainless steel, lacquered
1784 70 02 1784 70 09 1784 70 06
* * 1784 70 24 1784 70 04
Order no.
NEW
1 1
Nominal mounting height 1,1 m; Range frontal approx. 10 m; Range lateral each approx. 6 m; Detection field semi-oval shaped approx. 10 x 12 m; Detection angle 180 °; Detection levels 2; Switching segments 72; Response sensitivity programmable approx. 20 - 100 % ; Response brightness adjustable approx. 0 - 80 / unlimited Lux; Delay time adjustable approx. 10 sec.- 30 min. ; Time to dim down 30 sec.; Step operation 0,5 sec.; Immunity time approx. 3 sec.; Operating temperature -20 - +45 °C; Dimensions assembling height 23,5 mm Switches on for the duration of the delay time set on the controller in case minimum response brightness level is infringed and if movement of people is detected. In conjunction with a BLC relay switch unit HVAC, the HVAC-channel is also switched on for the duration of its delay time independent of response brightness. For BLC universal touch dimmer order no. 2902 For BLC touch control unit 1-10 V order no. 2903 For BLC touch dimmer LV order no. 2904 For BLC triac switch insert LV order no. 2905 for BLC relay switch insert order no. 2906 For BLC relay switch insert with potential-free contact order no. 2906 10 For BLC controller extension unit order no. 2908 For BLC relay switch insert HVAC order no. 2912 For BLC Tronic switch insert order no. 2916 For BLC stair light time switching impulse insert order no. 2934 10
U
BLC controller 180 white, glossy polar white, glossy anthracite, matt
1 1 1
aluminium, matt on page T15
Packing unit
stainless steel, lacquered
1786 70 02 1786 70 09 1786 70 06
* * 1786 70 24 1786 70 04
1 1 1 1 1
Nominal mounting height 2,2 m; Range frontal approx. 12 m; Range lateral each approx. 6 m; At assembly height 1,1 m; Range frontal approx. 6 m; Range lateral each approx. 3 m; Detection field semi-oval shaped approx. 12 x 12 m; Detection angle 180 °; Detection levels 3; Switching segments 104; Response sensitivity programmable approx. 20 - 100 % ; Response brightness adjustable approx. 0 - 80 / unlimited Lux; Delay time approx. 2 min.; Operating temperature -20 - +45 °C; Dimensions assembling height 23,5 mm Switches on for the duration of the controller delay time in case minimum response brightness level is infringed and if movement of people is detected. In conjunction with a BLC relay switch unit HVAC, the HVAC-channel is also switched on for the duration of its delay time independent of response brightness. For BLC universal touch dimmer order no. 2902 For BLC touch control unit 1-10 V order no. 2903 For BLC touch dimmer LV order no. 2904 For BLC triac switch insert LV order no. 2905 for BLC relay switch insert order no. 2906 For BLC relay switch insert with potential-free contact order no. 2906 10 For BLC controller extension unit order no. 2908 For BLC relay switch insert HVAC order no. 2912 For BLC Tronic switch insert order no. 2916 For BLC stair light time switching impulse insert order no. 2934 10
V with cover to limit detection angle to 90°
microprocessor controlled mode of oper.(detection signal evaluation and interfering signal suppres.) glare-proof e.g. against a torch no switching with unforeseeable short shadows with adaptive sensitivity adjustment with teach function for response brightness step operation with immunity time (e.g. for bell) switch-on brightness in conjunction with BLC dimmer inserts can only be saved via BLC extension unit with dimming function (soft-off) when using BLC dimmer inserts with cover to limit detection angle to 90°
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
213
BERKER K.1/K.5 Order no.
NEW
BLC controller 180 comfort with slide switch for off/automatic/on white, glossy polar white, glossy anthracite, matt
on page T15
Packing unit
aluminium, matt stainless steel, lacquered
1787 70 02 1787 70 09 1787 70 06
* * 1787 70 24 1787 70 04
Order no.
Thermostats NEW
white, glossy polar white, glossy
1
anthracite, matt
1
aluminium, matt
on page T34
stainless steel, lacquered
Nominal mounting height 2,2 m; Range frontal approx. 12 m; Range lateral each approx. 6 m; At assembly height 1,1 m; Range frontal approx. 6 m; Range lateral each approx. 3 m; Detection field semi-oval shaped approx. 12 x 12 m; Detection angle 180 °; Detection levels 3; Switching segments 104; Response sensitivity programmable approx. 20 - 100 % ; Response brightness adjustable approx. 0 - 80 / unlimited Lux; Delay time adjustable approx. 10 sec.- 30 min. ; Time to dim down 30 sec.; Step operation 0,5 sec.; Immunity time approx. 3 sec.; Operating temperature -20 - +45 °C; Dimensions assembling height 23,5 mm
For BLC universal touch dimmer order no. 2902 For BLC touch control unit 1-10 V order no. 2903 For BLC touch dimmer LV order no. 2904 For BLC triac switch insert LV order no. 2905 for BLC relay switch insert order no. 2906 For BLC relay switch insert with potential-free contact order no. 2906 10 For BLC controller extension unit order no. 2908 For BLC relay switch insert HVAC order no. 2912 For BLC Tronic switch insert order no. 2916 For BLC stair light time switching impulse insert order no. 2934 10
V microprocessor controlled mode of oper.(detection signal evaluation and interfering signal suppres.) glare-proof e.g. against a torch no switching with unforeseeable short shadows with adaptive sensitivity adjustment with teach function for response brightness step operation with immunity time (e.g. for bell) switch-on brightness in conjunction with BLC dimmer inserts can only be saved via BLC extension unit with dimming function (soft-off) when using BLC dimmer inserts with cover to limit detection angle to 90°
214
Room thermostat with NC contact, centre plate, rocker switch and LED
1 1 1
Switches on for the duration of the delay time set on the controller in case minimum response brightness level is infringed and if movement of people is detected. In conjunction with a BLC relay switch unit HVAC, the HVAC-channel is also switched on for the duration of its delay time independent of response brightness.
Packing unit
* 2030 71 02 * 2030 71 09 * 2030 71 06 * 2030 71 24 * 2030 71 04
1 1 1 1 1
5 - 30 °C, 50/60 Hz Rated voltage 250 V~; Switching current 10 A; Inductive load at cos φ 0,6 max. 4 A; Switching temperature difference approx. 0,5 °C; Night lowering approx. 4 °C Neutral conductor necessary! If the pre-set temperature is reached the contact opens. Replacement centre plate order no. 1671 71 .. Suitable valve drive order no. 7590 00 76
with imprint setting knob with temperature range limitation with on/off switch and indicator LED for „on“ with thermal return with separate connection for night lowering e.g. for valve drives closed in de-energized state without spreader claws with plug-in terminals NEW
Room thermostat 24 V with NC contact, centre plate, rocker switch and LED white, glossy polar white, glossy anthracite, matt
on page T34
aluminium, matt stainless steel, lacquered
* 2031 71 02 * 2031 71 09 * 2031 71 06 * 2031 71 24 * 2031 71 04
1 1 1 1 1
5 - 30 °C, 50/60 Hz Rated voltage 24 V~; Switching current 10 A~; Rated voltage 24 V=; Switching current 4 A=; Switching temperature difference approx. 0,5 °C; Night lowering approx. 4 °C If the pre-set temperature is reached the contact opens. Replacement centre plate order no. 1671 71 .. Suitable valve drive order no. 7590 00 77
with imprint setting knob with temperature range limitation with on/off switch and indicator LED for „on“ with control LED for „on“ with thermal return with separate connection for night lowering e.g. for valve drives closed in de-energized state without spreader claws with plug-in terminals
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
BERKER K.1/K.5 Order no.
Packing unit
Centre plate with setting knob, rocker and lens for room thermostat with NC contact white, glossy polar white, glossy anthracite, matt aluminium, matt stainless steel, lacquered
1671 71 02 1671 71 09 1671 71 06 1671 71 24 1671 71 04
1 1 1 1 1
with imprint setting knob with temperature range limitation
Room thermostat with change-over and centre plate white, glossy polar white, glossy anthracite, matt
on page T34
aluminium, matt stainless steel, lacquered
* 2026 71 02 2026 71 09
* * 2026 71 06 * 2026 71 24 * 2026 71 04
1 1 1 1 1
5 - 30 °C, 50/60 Hz Rated voltage 250 V~; Switching current „heating“ 10 A (4 A at cosphi=0,6); Switching current „cooling“ 5 A (2 A at cosphi=0,6); Switching temperature difference approx. 0,5 °C Neutral conductor necessary! If the pre-set temperature is reached the contact changes.
with imprint setting knob with temperature range limitation for heating or cooling mode e.g. for valve drives closed in de-energized state with thermal return without spreader claws with plug-in terminals
Centre plate with setting knob for room thermostat with change-over contact 1670 71 02 1670 71 09 1670 71 06 1670 71 24 1670 71 04
Floor thermostat with NO contact, centre plate, rocker switch, 2 LEDs and floor temperature sensor
white, glossy polar white, glossy on page T34
Packing unit
anthracite, matt aluminium, matt
* 2034 71 02 * 2034 71 09 * 2034 71 06 * 2034 71 24 * 2034 71 04
1 1 1 1 1
10 - 50 °C, 50/60 Hz Rated voltage 250 V~; Switching current 10 A; Switching temperature difference approx. 1 °C; Night lowering approx. 5 °C; Sensor cable length 4 m Neutral conductor necessary! If the pre-set temperature is reached the contact closes. Replacement floor temperature sensor / remote sensor order no. 0161 Replacement centre plate order no. 1672 71 .. Suitable valve drive order no. 7590 00 76
with imprint setting knob with temperature range limitation with on/off switch and 2 LEDs with LED for heating and LED for night lowering with separate connection for night lowering e.g. for valve drives closed in de-energized state without spreader claws with plug-in terminals
Centre plate with setting knob, rocker and lenses for floor temperature thermostat
Replacement centre plate order no. 1670 71 .. Suitable valve drive order no. 7590 00 76
white, glossy polar white, glossy anthracite, matt aluminium, matt stainless steel, lacquered
NEW
stainless steel, lacquered
Replacement demand for order no. 2030 71 .., 2031 71 ..
NEW
Order no.
1 1 1 1 1
white, glossy polar white, glossy anthracite, matt aluminium, matt stainless steel, lacquered
1672 71 02 1672 71 09 1672 71 06 1672 71 24 1672 71 04
1 1 1 1 1
Replacement demand for order no. 2034 71 ..
with imprint setting knob with temperature range limitation
Replacement demand for order no. 2026 71 ..
with imprint setting knob with temperature range limitation
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
215
BERKER K.1/K.5 Order no.
NEW
Thermostat time-controlled with NO contact and centre plate white, glossy polar white, glossy anthracite, matt
on page T35
Packing unit
aluminium, matt stainless steel, lacquered
* 2043 71 02 * 2043 71 09 * 2043 71 06 * 2043 71 24 * 2043 71 04
Order no.
Packing unit
Sensor insert Central plate for sensor insert
1 1
white, glossy polar white, glossy anthracite, matt aluminium, matt stainless steel, lacquered
1 1 1
0 - 40 °C, 50/60 Hz Rated voltage 230 V~; Switching current 8 A; Inductive load at cos φ 0,6 max. 2 A; Switching temperature difference approx. 0,5 °C; Time ranges 6 per day/week
7594 04 02 7594 04 09 7594 04 85 7594 04 83 7594 04 03
1 1 1 1 1
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range. Labelling field not usable.
Sensor insert order no. 7594 10 01
Neutral conductor necessary! Suitable floor temperature sensor / remote sensor order no. 0161 Replacement centre plate order no. 1116 71 .. Suitable valve drive order no. 7590 00 76
with imprint for heating or cooling mode for room and floor heaters for floor heating, control using room and/or floor temperature possible e.g. for valve drives closed in de-energized state large-area display with symbols with thermal return via software with pre-set base programme with week and day programme with slide switch for manual/automatic with party function with valve protection function with frost protection function display of set or actual temperature with operating hours meter fuzzy logic comfort, standard and night temperature with self-teaching heating curve with integrated temperature sensor with additional connection for external floor temperature sensor/remote sensor without spreader claws with plug-in terminals
with slots for air circulation for e.g. temperature sensor PT100
RolloTec Comfort buttons NEW
on page T37
RolloTec button comfort white, glossy polar white, glossy anthracite, matt aluminium, matt stainless steel
1770 70 02 1770 70 09 * 1770 70 06 * 1770 70 24 1770 70 04
1 1 1 1 1
Learnable running time 0,5 sec.- 2 min.; Lamella adjustment with signal < 1 sec.; Self-sustaining for 2 min. with signal > 1 - 4 sec. For RolloTec standard insert without neutral conductor connection order no. 2911 For RolloTec standard insert order no. 2925 For Rollotec comfort insert order no. 2975 For RolloTec comfort insert for direct current drives order no. 2975 01
with lock-out protection e.g. for shutter control terrace door activation of lock-out protection in upper end pos. via buttons in „up“ direction min. 3 secs. with indicator LED for lock-out protection
Centre plate for thermostat time-controlled white, glossy polar white, glossy anthracite, matt aluminium, matt stainless steel, lacquered
1116 71 02 1116 71 09 1116 71 06 1116 71 24 1116 71 04
1 1 1 1 1
Replacement demand for order no. 2043 71 ..
with imprint
216
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
BERKER K.1/K.5 Order no.
NEW
Order no.
RolloTec button comfort with sensor connection white, glossy polar white, glossy anthracite, matt
on page T37
Packing unit
aluminium, matt stainless steel
1771 70 02 1771 70 09 1771 70 06
* * 1771 70 24 1771 70 04
Packing unit
RolloTec radio button with sensor connection 1 1 1 1 1
on page T37
Brightness value sun approx. 5 - 80 kLux; Learnable running time 4 sec.- 2 min.; Lamella adjustment with signal < 1 sec.; Locked for 2 min. upon actuation 1 - 4 Sec.
white, glossy polar white, glossy anthracite, matt aluminium, matt stainless steel
1759 70 02 1759 70 09 1759 70 06 1759 70 24 1759 70 04
1 1 1 1 1
Radio signal reception frequency 433,42 MHz; Learnable radio transmitters 30; Brightness value sun approx. 5 - 80 kLux; Lamella adjustment with signal < 1 sec.; Self-sustaining for 2 min. with signal > 1 sec. For actuation via button and radio transmitter.
For RolloTec brightness sensors order no. 0169, 0184 For RolloTec glass breakage sensor order no. 0170 For RolloTec adapter for sensors order no. 0171 For RolloTec standard insert without neutral conductor connection order no. 2911 For RolloTec standard insert order no. 2925 For Rollotec comfort insert order no. 2975 For RolloTec comfort insert for direct current drives order no. 2975 01 For magnetic contact order no. 9251 ..
with lock-out protection e.g. for shutter control terrace door activation of lock-out protection in upper end pos. via buttons in „up“ direction min. 3 secs. with indicator LED for lock-out protection brightnesses individually adjustable on brightness sensor surface-mounted, the taught-in running time for sun protection movement is used no twilight sensor function only for sensor connection to terminal block
For RolloTec brightness sensors order no. 0169, 0184 For RolloTec glass breakage sensor order no. 0170 For RolloTec adapter for sensors order no. 0171 For RolloTec standard insert without neutral conductor connection order no. 2911 For RolloTec standard insert order no. 2925 For Rollotec comfort insert order no. 2975 For RolloTec comfort insert for direct current drives order no. 2975 01 For magnetic contact order no. 9251 ..
with 5 light scenes for „open/close“ retrieving light scenes only by using radio transmitter brightness value for sunblind individually adjustable no twilight sensor function only for sensor connection to terminal block
Memory buttons NEW
white, glossy polar white, glossy anthracite, matt
Radio buttons RolloTec radio button
on page T37
white, glossy polar white, glossy anthracite, matt aluminium, matt stainless steel
1758 70 02 1758 70 09 1758 70 06 1758 70 24 1758 70 04
1 1 1 1 1
Radio signal reception frequency 433,42 MHz; Learnable radio transmitters 30 ; Lamella adjustment with signal < 1 sec.; Self-sustaining for 2 min. with signal > 1 sec. For actuation via button and radio transmitter. For RolloTec standard insert without neutral conductor connection order no. 2911 For RolloTec standard insert order no. 2925 For Rollotec comfort insert order no. 2975 For RolloTec comfort insert for direct current drives order no. 2975 01
RolloTec memory button
aluminium, matt on page T37
stainless steel
1756 70 02 1756 70 09 1756 70 06
* * 1756 70 24 1756 70 04
1 1 1 1 1
Lamella adjustment with signal < 1 sec.; Self-sustaining for 2 min. with signal > 1 sec.; Storage of „up/down“ time with signal > 3,5 sec. Stored „up“ and/or „down“ time is run daily in automatic operation. For manual and timer programmed running of awnings, shutters and blinds. For RolloTec standard insert without neutral conductor connection order no. 2911 For RolloTec standard insert order no. 2925 For Rollotec comfort insert order no. 2975 For RolloTec comfort insert for direct current drives order no. 2975 01
with 5 light scenes for „open/close“ retrieving light scenes only by using radio transmitter
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
217
BERKER K.1/K.5 Order no.
NEW
aluminium, matt stainless steel
1757 70 02 1757 70 09 1757 70 06
* * 1757 70 24 1757 70 04
1 1
For manual and timer programmed running of awnings, shutters and blinds. For RolloTec brightness sensors order no. 0169, 0184 For RolloTec glass breakage sensor order no. 0170 For RolloTec adapter for sensors order no. 0171 For RolloTec standard insert without neutral conductor connection order no. 2911 For RolloTec standard insert order no. 2925 For Rollotec comfort insert order no. 2975 For RolloTec comfort insert for direct current drives order no. 2975 01 For magnetic contact order no. 9251 ..
no twilight sensor function only for sensor connection to terminal block
Timer switches RolloTec easy timer with display
aluminium, matt on page T37
stainless steel, lacquered
1762 71 02 1762 71 09 1762 71 06
* * 1762 71 24 1762 71 04
stainless steel, lacquered
1774 70 02 1774 70 09 1774 70 06
* * 1774 70 24 1774 70 04
1 1 1 1 1
Operation times 18 up/down; Random generator +/- 15 min.; Power reserve approx. 3 hrs., maintenance-free; Astronomic time shift +/- 2 hrs.; Learnable down time 1 sec.- 6 min.; Lamella adjusting time 0 - 5 sec.; Lamella adjustment with signal < 1 sec.; Lock at touching > 1 sec.
Stored „up“ and/or „down“ time is run daily in automatic operation.
white, glossy polar white, glossy anthracite, matt
aluminium, matt on page T37
Packing unit
RolloTec timer comfort with display white, glossy polar white, glossy anthracite, matt
1 1 1
Brightness value sun approx. 20 kLux; Lamella adjustment with signal < 1 sec.; Self-sustaining for 2 min. with signal > 1 sec.; Storage of „up/down“ time with signal > 3,5 sec.
NEW
Order no.
NEW
RolloTec memory button with sensor connection white, glossy polar white, glossy anthracite, matt
on page T37
Packing unit
1 1 1 1 1
Operation times 2 up/down; Power reserve approx. 6 hrs., maintenance-free; Lamella adjustment with signal < 1 sec.; Self-sustaining for 2 min. with signal > 1 sec.
For manual and timer programmed running of awnings, shutters and blinds. For RolloTec standard insert without neutral conductor connection order no. 2911 For RolloTec standard insert order no. 2925 For Rollotec comfort insert order no. 2975 For RolloTec comfort insert for direct current drives order no. 2975 01
with German display text with totally 3 independent programme memories 2 programme memories pre-set programming according to week and days possible programme memory network failure proved with automatic summer-/winter time switching (can be switched off) astro programme for sunrise/sundown running large-area display with symbols indication of the next operation schedule under consideration of astro and coincidence function with slide switch for manual/automatic lock out protection because evaluation of the centre or extension unit commands can be switched off lamella position programmable at down operation times
No extension units and sensor signals or central commands will be processed. For manual and timer programmed running of awnings, shutters and blinds. For RolloTec standard insert without neutral conductor connection order no. 2911 For RolloTec standard insert order no. 2925 For Rollotec comfort insert order no. 2975 For RolloTec comfort insert for direct current drives order no. 2975 01
with imprint in German with pre-set base programme simple programming of operation times with quick programming mode programming possible up to 6 hours after pulling from the insert 2 programme blocks Mon. - Fri. and Sat. - Sun. large-area display with slide switch for manual/automatic
218
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
BERKER K.1/K.5 Order no.
NEW
aluminium, matt stainless steel, lacquered
1775 70 02 1775 70 09 1775 70 06
* * 1775 70 24 1775 70 04
Order no.
NEW
1 1 1
aluminium, matt
1
stainless steel, lacquered
with German display text with totally 3 independent programme memories 2 programme memories pre-set programming according to week and days possible programme memory network failure proved with automatic summer-/winter time switching (can be switched off) astro programme for sunrise/sundown running large-area display with symbols indication of the next operation schedule under consideration of astro and coincidence function with slide switch for manual/automatic lock out protection because evaluation of the centre or extension unit commands can be switched off lamella position programmable at down operation times with surface-mounted RolloTec brightness sensor additionally settable with shutter and lamella position connected RolloTec brightness sensor can be used for twilight-controlled lowering connected surface-mounted RolloTec brightness sensor suitable for twilight-controlled raising and lowering for the sensor connection on the clamping block in the insert
1108 71 02 1108 71 09 1108 71 06
* * 1108 71 24 1108 71 04
10 10 10 10 10
Attention! Not suitable for Berker central plates. For centre plate as per DIN 49075 for other centre plates with external size 50 x 50 mm and SCHUKO-socket outlet NEW
Intermediate ring for central plate white, glossy polar white, glossy anthracite, matt
For manual and timer programmed running of awnings, shutters and blinds. For RolloTec brightness sensors order no. 0169, 0184 For RolloTec glass breakage sensor order no. 0170 For RolloTec adapter for sensors order no. 0171 For RolloTec standard insert without neutral conductor connection order no. 2911 For RolloTec standard insert order no. 2925 For Rollotec comfort insert order no. 2975 For RolloTec comfort insert for direct current drives order no. 2975 01 For magnetic contact order no. 9251 ..
Adapter ring for centre plate 50 x 50 mm white, glossy polar white, glossy anthracite, matt
1
Setting range sun approx. 1 - 76 kLux; Setting range twilight approx. 6 - 300 Lux; Operation times 18 up/down; Random generator +/- 15 min.; Power reserve approx. 3 hrs., maintenance-free; Astronomic time shift +/- 2 hrs.; Learnable down time 1 sec.- 6 min.; Lamella adjusting time 0 - 5 sec.; Lamella adjustment with signal < 1 sec.; Lock at touching > 1 sec.
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
Packing unit
Intermediate rings
RolloTec timer comfort with display and sensor connection white, glossy polar white, glossy anthracite, matt
on page T37
Packing unit
aluminium, matt stainless steel, lacquered
1108 70 02 1108 70 09 1108 70 06
* * 1108 70 24 1108 70 04
10 10 10 10 10
labelling field latchable
Labelling fields Labelling field for flush installation in intermediate ring for central plate white, glossy polar white, glossy stainless steel, lacquered
1905 00 02 1905 00 69 1905 70 04
10 10 10
Labelling field height arranged for 6 mm P-touch strips.
Intermediate rings NEW
Intermediate ring with hinged cover and labelling field for central plate and centre plate 50 x 50 mm
white, glossy polar white, glossy anthracite, matt aluminium, matt stainless steel
1154 71 02 1154 71 09 1154 71 06
* * 1154 71 24 1154 71 04
10 10 10 10 10
Labelling field height arranged for 6 mm P-touch strips. with imprint when opening hinged cover, it can be arrested in end position
219
BERKER K.1/K.5 Order no.
Packing unit
Signalling and command units NEW
Order no.
TV/audio
Central plate for transmitting and control device Ø 18.8 mm
Central plate for XLR round connectors D series
1431 02 1431 09 1431 16 06
10 10 10
white, glossy polar white, glossy anthracite, matt aluminium, matt
aluminium matt, lacquered
* 1431 14 04
10
stainless steel, lacquered
1431 04
10
Cut-out diameter 23,6 mm; Distance between screws (horizontal/vertical) 19 / 24 mm
white, glossy polar white, glossy anthracite matt, lacquered
*
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range.
NEW
with supporting plate with cut-out dia. 18.8 mm without spreader claws
Central plate for signalling and control device Ø 22.5 mm white, glossy polar white, glossy anthracite matt, lacquered
1432 02 1432 09 1432 16 06
10 10 10
1432 14 04
10
stainless steel, lacquered
1432 04
10
yellow, glossy
1432 07
10
aluminium matt, lacquered
* *
Screw distance 36 mm Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range. Signalling and command units: Kraus-Naimer; Lumitas; Schlegel; Overvoltage protection devices: Dehn, order no. NM DK 280; OBO-Bettermann, order no. KNS/IS-D with supporting plate with cut-out dia. 22.5 mm without spreader claws
220
10 10 10 10
Circular plug-in connector: Cannon; Deltron; Farnell; Hirose; Monacor; Neutrik; RS Components with supporting plate speakon and jack connector without spreader claws
Suitable for installation of equipotential bonding built-in socket order no. 4604
Circular plug-in connector: Amphenol-Tuchel; Binder; Cannon; Farnell; Hirose; Hirschmann; Lumberg; Monacor; RS Components; Extra low voltage jack: PRO-CAR
1412 02 1412 09 1412 16 06 1412 14 04
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range.
Screw distance 36 mm
NEW
Packing unit
Centre plate for loudspeaker socket outlet and miniature connector insert white, glossy, 1gang, 1 knock out opening
1184 70 02
10
polar white, glossy, 1gang, 1 knock out opening anthracite, matt, 1gang, 1 knock out opening
1184 70 09
10
* 1184 70 06
10
aluminium, matt, 1gang, 1184 70 24 * 1 knock out opening
10
stainless steel, 1gang, 1 knock out opening
1184 70 04
10
white, glossy, 2gang polar white, glossy, 2gang
1186 70 02 1186 70 09
10 10
* 1186 70 06 aluminium, matt, 2gang * 1186 70 24
10
anthracite, matt, 2gang
stainless steel, 2gang
1186 70 04
10 10
For miniature connector insert order no. 4505 For stereo loudspeaker socket outlet order no. 4505 01 For loudspeaker socket outlet High End order no. 4505 02 For BNC/TNC connector insert order no. 4577, 4579
centre plate plug-in fixing
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
BERKER K.1/K.5 Order no.
NEW
Packing unit
Order no.
Centre plate for aerial socket 2- and 3-hole
Data-/telecommunications
white, glossy polar white, glossy anthracite, matt
NEW
aluminium, matt stainless steel
1201 70 02 1201 70 09 1201 70 06
* * 1201 70 24 1201 70 04
10 10 10 10
aluminium, matt stainless steel, lacquered
For aerial socket 2-hole single box order no. 4502, HIFS 1B For aerial socket 2-hole throughpass socket order no. 4515 For aerial socket 3-hole single box order no. 4522 For aerial socket 3-hole throughpass socket order no. 4523, 4593
white, glossy polar white, glossy anthracite, matt aluminium, matt stainless steel, lacquered
1483 02 1483 09 1483 16 06 1483 14 04 1483 04
NEW
10 10 10 10 10
white, glossy polar white, glossy anthracite, matt aluminium, matt
10 10 10 10 10
Aerial sockets: Ankaro; Astro; Axing; Delta; Schwaiger with 2 additional SAT outputs (F-sockets)
Central plate for broadband modem box white, glossy polar white, glossy anthracite, matt aluminium, matt
1439 02 1439 09 1439 16 06 1439 14 04
10 10 10 10
10
1035 70 02 1035 70 09 1035 70 06
* * 1035 70 24 1035 70 04
10 10 10 10 10
EAD socket outlets: Drivex; Fröhlich + Walter; Intracom; TAE and FCC overvoltage protection sockets: Dehn; FCC socket outlets: Dätwyler; Rutenbeck
Central plate for aerial socket 4-hole
For aerial socket 4-hole single box order no. 4594
10
For TAE socket outlet order no. 4487 .., 4500 .., 4544 .. For loudspeaker connection box order no. 4572 .., 4573 .. For FCC/TAE socket outlet order no. 4588 .. For USB data interface flush-mounted order no. 7504 00 04
Aerial sockets: Hirschmann with 2 additional SAT outputs (F-sockets)
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range.
1005 70 04
Centre plate for TAE socket outlet and loudspeaker connection box
stainless steel
1484 02 1484 09 1484 16 06 1484 14 04 1484 04
* * 1005 70 24
10 10 10
VDo connection boxes: Rutenbeck with outlet
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range.
white, glossy polar white, glossy anthracite, matt aluminium, matt stainless steel, lacquered
1005 70 02 1005 70 09 1005 70 06
For cable outlet order no. 4468, 4470
with knock out SAT input
Central plate for aerial socket 4-hole
Centre plate for cable outlet and VDo connection box white, glossy polar white, glossy anthracite, matt
10
Packing unit
NEW
Central plate for TAE socket outlet 6F+N white, glossy polar white, glossy anthracite matt, lacquered
1457 02 1457 09 1457 16 06
10 10 10
aluminium matt, lacquered
* 1457 14 04
10
stainless steel, lacquered
1457 04
10
*
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range. For TAE socket outlet order no. 4487 ..
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range. Broadband modem socket: Wisi with additional multimedia output "#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
221
BERKER K.1/K.5 Order no.
Packing unit
Central plate for TAE socket outlet 6/6FF and 6/6NF and loudspeaker connection box white, glossy polar white, glossy anthracite, matt aluminium, matt stainless steel, lacquered
1458 02 1458 09 1458 16 06 1458 14 04 1458 04
EAD socket outlets: Drivex; Fröhlich + Walter; Intracom; TAE and FCC overvoltage protection sockets: Dehn; FCC socket outlets: Dätwyler; Rutenbeck
Central plate for 1st TAE socket outlet (Telekom) # 1477 02 # 1477 09 # 1477 16 06 # 1477 14 04 # 1477 04
10 10 10 10 10
Identifies the 1st TAE socket outlet inside an apartment/property. Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range. with imprint 2 knock out openings
Centre plate for PTT socket outlet „Netherlands“
aluminium, matt
Centre plate for RTT socket outlet „Belgium“ white, glossy polar white, glossy anthracite, matt aluminium, matt stainless steel
67 1025 70 02 67 1025 70 09 67 1025 70 06
* * 67 1025 70 24 67 1025 70 04
10 10 10 10 10
61 1026 70 02 61 1026 70 09 61 1026 70 06
* * 61 1026 70 24
NEW
Centre plate for FCC socket outlet white, glossy polar white, glossy anthracite, matt aluminium, matt stainless steel
1407 70 02 1407 70 09 1407 70 06
* * 1407 70 24 1407 70 04
10 10 10 10 10
For FCC socket outlet order no. 4538, 4568 For FCC socket outlet shielded order no. 4554, 4586, 4590
FCC socket outlets: Ackermann; AMP; BTR; Crack-IT; Rutenbeck; Telegärtner; Telena with 45° oblique outlet for 1gang socket outlet cat.3, cat.5e and cat.6
for USB data interface flush-mounted 1 knock out opening
white, glossy polar white, glossy anthracite, matt
Packing unit
For RTT socket outlet order no. BERT T0 1
For TAE socket outlet order no. 4487 .., 4500 .., 4544 .. For loudspeaker connection box order no. 4572 .., 4573 .. For FCC/TAE socket outlet order no. 4588 .. For USB data interface flush-mounted order no. 7504 00 04
NEW
NEW
10 10 10 10 10
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range.
white, glossy polar white, glossy anthracite, matt aluminium, matt stainless steel, lacquered
Order no.
10 10 10 10
Central plate for FCC socket outlet white, glossy polar white, glossy anthracite, matt aluminium, matt stainless steel, lacquered
1468 02 1468 09 1468 16 06 1468 14 04 1468 04
10 10 10 10 10
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range.
For FCC socket outlet order no. 4538, 4568 For FCC socket outlet shielded order no. 4554, 4586, 4590
FCC socket outlets: Ackermann; AMP; BTR; Crack-IT; Rutenbeck; Telegärtner; Telena with 45° oblique outlet for 1gang socket outlet cat.3, cat.5e and cat.6
universal for standard commercially available PTT socket outlets
222
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
BERKER K.1/K.5 Order no.
NEW
Packing unit
Order no.
Packing unit
Centre plate for FCC/E-DAT design/Telekom ISDN socket outlet
Central plate FCC/E-DAT design/Telekom ISDN socket outlet
white, glossy polar white, glossy anthracite, matt
white, glossy polar white, glossy anthracite, matt aluminium, matt stainless steel, lacquered
aluminium, matt stainless steel
1409 70 02 1409 70 09 1409 70 06
* * 1409 70 24 1409 70 04
10 10 10 10 10
For FCC socket outlet order no. 4539, 4562, 4592 For FCC socket outlet shielded order no. 4555, 4587, 4591
ISDN socket outlets (Rutenbeck): Telekom; FCC socket outlets: Ackermann; AMP; BTR; CobiNet; Corning; Crack-IT; CTI Netzwerksysteme; Dätwyler; EFB Electronic; eku Kabel & Systeme; Elmat; Rutenbeck; Setec; Süveg; Telegärtner; Telena with 45° oblique outlet for 2gang socket outlet cat.3, cat.5e and cat.6
1469 02 1469 09 1469 16 06 1469 14 04 1469 04
10 10 10 10 10
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range.
For FCC socket outlet order no. 4539, 4562, 4592 For FCC socket outlet shielded order no. 4555, 4587, 4591
ISDN socket outlets (Rutenbeck): Telekom; FCC socket outlets: Ackermann; AMP; BTR; CobiNet; Corning; Crack-IT; CTI Netzwerksysteme; Dätwyler; EFB Electronic; eku Kabel & Systeme; Elmat; Rutenbeck; Setec; Süveg; Telegärtner; Telena with 45° oblique outlet for 2gang socket outlet cat.3, cat.5e and cat.6
Central plate for FCC and Telekom ISDN socket outlet (IAE) white, glossy polar white, glossy anthracite, matt aluminium, matt
1429 02 1429 09 1429 16 06 1429 14 04
10 10 10 10
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range. ISDN socket outlets (ZE Kommunikationstechnik): Telekom; FCC socket outlets: Telena; ZE Kommunikationstechnik with 25° oblique outlet for 2gang socket outlet cat.3
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
223
BERKER K.1/K.5 Order no.
Packing unit
Central plate for FCC and Telekom ISDN socket outlet (IAE) white, glossy polar white, glossy anthracite, matt aluminium, matt
1430 02 1430 09 1430 16 06 1430 14 04
10 10 10 10
ISDN socket outlets (Kräcker): Telekom; FCC socket outlets: Farnell; Kräcker with 45° oblique outlet for 2gang socket outlet cat.3
Central plate for FCC/IAE/FCC-DAT 300E socket outlet 1446 02 1446 09 1446 16 06 1446 14 04 1446 04
10 10 10 10 10
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range. FCC socket outlets: BTR; Farnell; Fröhlich + Walter; Krone; Schumann; Telena with 45° oblique outlet for 1gang socket outlet cat.3 and cat.6
1467 02 1467 09 1467 16 06 1467 14 04 1467 04
224
1478 02 1478 09 1478 16 06 1478 14 04 1478 04
10 10 10 10 10
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range. FCC socket outlets: BTR; Farnell; Fröhlich + Walter; Krone; Schumann; Telena with 45° oblique outlet for 2gang socket outlet cat.6
Central plate for E-DAT plus socket outlet with labelling field white, glossy polar white, glossy anthracite, matt aluminium, matt
1413 02 1413 09 1413 16 06 1413 14 04
10 10 10 10
Labelling field height arranged for 6 mm P-touch strips.
FCC socket outlets: BTR; Fröhlich + Walter; Telena with 45° oblique outlet with dust protection cover for 1gang or 2gang socket outlet cat.6 10 10 10 10 10
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range. ISDN socket outlets (BTR): Telekom; FCC socket outlets: BTR; EFB Electronic; Farnell; Fröhlich + Walter; Krone; Monacor; Telena with 45° oblique outlet for 2gang socket outlet cat.3
white, glossy polar white, glossy anthracite, matt aluminium, matt stainless steel, lacquered
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range.
Central plate for FCC/IAE/Telekom ISDN socket outlet white, glossy polar white, glossy anthracite, matt aluminium, matt stainless steel, lacquered
Packing unit
Central plate for FCC-DAT 300E socket outlet
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range.
white, glossy polar white, glossy anthracite, matt aluminium, matt stainless steel, lacquered
Order no.
Central plate for FCC socket outlet white, glossy polar white, glossy anthracite, matt aluminium, matt
1420 02 1420 09 1420 16 06 1420 14 04
10 10 10 10
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range. FCC socket outlets: Ackermann; CobiNet; Quante; Telena with 45° oblique outlet 1 knock out opening for 1gang or 2gang socket outlet cat.3
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
BERKER K.1/K.5 Order no.
Packing unit
Central plate for WAEG2 socket outlet white, glossy polar white, glossy
# 1489 02 # 1489 09
10 10
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range. FCC socket outlets: Ackermann; Quante; Telena
Central plate for WAEG5 and WAEG6 socket outlet with labelling field # 1421 02 # 1421 09
10 10
Labelling field height arranged for 6 mm P-touch strips. Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range. FCC socket outlets: Ackermann; Elmat; Süveg; Telena with 45° oblique outlet with dust protection cover for 1gang or 2gang socket outlet cat.6
1422 02 1422 09 1422 16 06 1422 14 04
10 10 10 10
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range. FCC socket outlets: Telegärtner; Telena with 45° oblique outlet for 1gang or 2gang socket outlet cat.5e
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
Central plate for VAD socket outlet with labelling field white, glossy polar white, glossy anthracite, matt aluminium, matt
1423 02 1423 09 1423 16 06 1423 14 04
10 10 10 10
Labelling field height arranged for 6 mm P-touch strips.
FCC socket outlets: Lanconnect; Schumann; Telegärtner; Telena with 45° oblique outlet with dust protection cover for 1gang or 2gang socket outlet cat.6
Central plate for FCC socket outlet white, glossy polar white, glossy anthracite, matt aluminium, matt
1419 02 1419 09 1419 16 06 1419 14 04
10 10 10 10
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range.
Central plate for EMJ45 socket outlet white, glossy polar white, glossy anthracite, matt aluminium, matt
Packing unit
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range.
with 45° oblique outlet 1 knock out opening for 1gang or 2gang socket outlet cat.5
white, glossy polar white, glossy
Order no.
FCC socket outlets: Brand-Rex; CobiNet; Drivex; EFB Electronic; Fröhlich + Walter; Fröschel; Intracom; OTRA; Schumann; Setec; Sevex; Siemens; Sonepar; ZE Kommunikationstechnik with 40° oblique outlet for 1gang or 2gang socket outlet cat.5, cat.5e and cat.6
225
BERKER K.1/K.5 Order no.
Packing unit
NEW
Central plate for 3 MINI-COM modules white, glossy polar white, glossy anthracite, matt aluminium, matt
1427 02 1427 09 1427 16 06 1427 14 04
Order no.
10 10 10 10
aluminium, matt stainless steel, lacquered
For mini jack order no. 1980, 1984, 1985 For cinch module set order no. 1989 For blank module order no. 1990 For video cinch module order no. 1992 For S-Video module order no. 1993 For VGA module order no. 1994
Central plate for 1 or 2 single modules Reichle&De-Massari white, glossy polar white, glossy anthracite matt, lacquered aluminium, matt
1472 02 1472 09 1472 16 06
10 10 10
* 1472 14 04
10
*
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range. Modules: Reichle&De-Massari with supporting plate for connecting modules RJ45 cat.5e and cat.6 for fibre-optic modules with 30° oblique outlet without spreader claws
226
1461 02 1461 09 1461 16 06
10 10 10
* 1461 14 04
10
*
1461 04
10
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range.
Modules: Panduit with supporting plate for Mini-Com jacks cat.3, cat.5e, cat.6, cat.6 10Gig for Mini-Com fibre-optic modules for Mini-Com BNC connector modules for Mini-Com 3.5 mm stereo connection/coupling modules for Mini-Com loudspeaker cables / banana plug modules for Mini-Com F-plug coupling modules for Mini-Com Cinch connection/coupling modules for Mini-Com S-Video connection/coupling modules for Mini-Com D-Subminiature connectors 15pole for Mini-Com dummy modules 1gang with 30° oblique outlet without spreader claws NEW
Central plate for double modules Reichle&De-Massari white, glossy polar white, glossy anthracite matt, lacquered
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range.
Packing unit
Modules: Diamond; Reichle&De-Massari with supporting plate for connecting modules RJ45 cat.5e and cat.6 for fibre-optic modules with 30° oblique outlet without spreader claws NEW
Central plate for AMP modular jacks white, glossy polar white, glossy anthracite matt, lacquered
1463 02 1463 09 1463 16 06
10 10 10
aluminium matt, lacquered
* 1463 14 04
10
stainless steel, lacquered
1463 04
10
*
Indexing dimension (W x H) approx. 14,7 x 20,7 mm Shielded versions touch each other. Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range. MT-RJ jack: AMP; Intracom; Telena; Modular jacks: CobiNet; EFB Electronic; Schumann; Standard 110 Connect jack: AMP; SL series toolless jack: AMP; SL series 110 Connect Jack: AMP; SL series toolless jack with dust protection: AMP with supporting plate for AMP modular jacks series 110 Connect cat.3, cat.5, cat.5e and cat.6 for AMP fibre-optic couplings MT-RJ jacks 2gang, with 30° oblique outlet without spreader claws
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
BERKER K.1/K.5 Order no.
NEW
Packing unit
NEW
Central plate for Krone modular jacks white, glossy polar white, glossy anthracite matt, lacquered aluminium, matt
Order no.
1464 02 1464 09 1464 16 06
white, glossy polar white, glossy anthracite matt, lacquered
* 1464 14 04
10
Indexing dimension (W x H) approx. 14,7 x 19,4 mm Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range. Modular jacks: 3M; Asyco; BTR; Dätwyler; EFB Electronic; Erni; Hubbell; ICS; Krone; Setec; Telegärtner; Thomas & Betts; Eline 600 GG45 jacks: Kerpen; Keystone Jack: Kerpen; LANmark 5, 6 and 7 (only with with Keystone-Clip): Nexans; Fibre-optic couplings: 3M; Krone; mvk with supporting plate for Krone modular jacks cat.5, cat.5e and cat.6 for Krone fibre-optic couplings MT-RJ jacks for 3M fibre-optic couplings Volition 2gang, with 30° oblique outlet without spreader claws
aluminium matt, lacquered
1462 02 1462 09 1462 16 06
10 10 10
* 1462 14 04
10
*
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range. Installation only possible with Drahtex mounting or coding frame. Modular jacks: CobiNet; Drahtex with supporting plate for Drahtex modular jacks cat.5, cat.5e, cat.6 and cat.7 for fibre-optic modules 2gang, with 30° oblique outlet without spreader claws
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
10 10 10
aluminium matt, lacquered
* 1441 14 04
10
stainless steel, lacquered
1441 04
10
*
Installation is only possible in connection with the assembly frame of Messrs. Lexel. with supporting plate 2gang, with 30° oblique outlet without spreader claws LEXCOM HOME® Registered trademark of Messrs. Lexel A/S. NEW
Central plate for Eline and GiCon4 jacks white, glossy polar white, glossy anthracite matt, lacquered aluminium matt, lacquered
1498 02 1498 09 1498 16 06
10 10 10
* 1498 14 04
10
*
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range! Installation only in conjunction with BTR and Kerpen clips. GiCon4 jacks: BTR; Eline 1200- and 250 jacks: Kerpen
Central plate for Drahtex modular jacks white, glossy polar white, glossy anthracite matt, lacquered
1441 02 1441 09 1441 16 06
Attention! Can only be used with intermediate ring and central plate of the corresponding range.
For modular jack order no. 1854 01
NEW
Central plate for LEXCOM HOME modules
10 10 10
*
Packing unit
with supporting plate for ELine and GiCon4 sockets cat.5e, cat.6, cat.7 2gang, with 30° oblique outlet without spreader claws NEW
Centre plate with dust protection slider and labelling field white, glossy polar white, glossy anthracite, matt aluminium, matt stainless steel, lacquered
1170 70 02 1170 70 09 1170 70 06
* * 1170 70 24 1170 70 04
10 10 10 10 10
Labelling field height arranged for 6 mm P-touch strips. For supporting plate 1gang order no. 4540 ..
for supporting plates with coloured mount 1gang
227
BERKER K.1/K.5 Order no.
NEW
Packing unit
Centre plate with dust protection sliders and labelling field white, glossy polar white, glossy anthracite, matt aluminium, matt stainless steel, lacquered
1182 70 02 1182 70 09 1182 70 06
* * 1182 70 24 1182 70 04
Order no.
NEW
Packing unit
Centre plate for AMP-ACO and Siemens SML cabling system with labelling field
10 10 10
white, glossy polar white, glossy anthracite, matt
10
aluminium, matt
10
stainless steel, lacquered
1153 70 02 1153 70 09 1153 70 06
* * 1153 70 24 1153 70 04
10 10 10 10 10
Labelling field height arranged for 6 mm P-touch strips.
Labelling field height arranged for 6 mm P-touch strips. For supporting plate 2gang order no. 4541 ..
ACO and CO Plus inserts: AMP, order no. 0-1394582-1, 0-1394763-1, 2-1394582-1; Schumann; Telena; SML inserts: Siemens with supporting plate cat.5, cat.6 and cat.7 with 30° oblique outlet for screw cover without spreader claws
for supporting plates with coloured mounts 2gang
Central plate for AMP-ACO white, glossy polar white, glossy anthracite, matt aluminium, matt
1494 02 1494 09 1494 16 06 1494 14 04
10 10 10 10
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range. NEW
Labelling field not usable.
Central plate for fibre-optic couplings Simplex ST white, glossy polar white, glossy anthracite matt, lacquered
ACO and CO Plus inserts: AMP, order no. 0-1394580-1, 2-1394580-1, 0-0336627-3, 0-0336627-1, 2-0336627-1 cat.5, cat.6 and cat.7 central plates plug-in fixing
aluminium matt, lacquered
1492 02 1492 09 1492 16 06
10 10 10
* 1492 14 04
10
*
Central plate for AMP-ACO with labelling field white, glossy polar white, glossy anthracite, matt aluminium, matt
1495 02 1495 09 1495 16 06 1495 14 04
10 10 10 10
Labelling field height arranged for 6 mm P-touch strips. Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range. ACO and CO Plus inserts: AMP, order no. 0-0336627-1, 2-0336627-1, 0-0336627-3 cat.5, cat.6 and cat.7
228
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range. Fibre-optic couplings: Ackermann; AMP; Brand-Rex; BTR; CobiNet; Corning; Diamond; Drahtex; Huber+Suhner; Quante; Telegärtner with supporting plate with 30° oblique outlet for 2 fibre-optic couplings without spreader claws
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
BERKER K.1/K.5 Order no.
NEW
Packing unit
Order no.
Central plate for fibre-optic couplings Duplex SC
Packing unit
Central plate for 1 D-subminiature connector
1480 02 1480 09 1480 16 06
10 10 10
white, glossy polar white, glossy anthracite, matt aluminium, matt
aluminium matt, lacquered
* 1480 14 04
10
D-subminiature connectors see module inserts.
stainless steel, lacquered
1480 04
10
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range.
white, glossy polar white, glossy anthracite matt, lacquered
*
10 10 10 10
For D-subminiature connector order no. 1834, 1835, 1839 For mounting adapter order no. 1841, 1842
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range.
with supporting plate without spreader claws
Fibre-optic couplings: Ackermann; AMP; Brand-Rex; BTR; CobiNet; Corning; Diamond; Drahtex; FiberCraft; Huber+Suhner; Krone; Quante; Telegärtner
Central plate for 2 D-subminiature connector white, glossy polar white, glossy anthracite, matt aluminium, matt stainless steel, lacquered
1470 02 1470 09 1470 16 06 1470 14 04 1470 04
10 10 10 10 10
D-subminiature connectors see module inserts. Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range.
with supporting plate with 30° oblique outlet 1 knock out opening for 1 or 2 fibre-optic couplings without spreader claws
Labelling field not usable. For D-subminiature connector order no. 1834, 1835, 1839 For mounting adapter order no. 1841, 1842
Central plate for round connector Ø 30 mm white, glossy polar white, glossy
1411 02 1411 09 1411 16 06 1411 14 04
# 1433 02 # 1433 09
10 10
Cut-out diameter 30 mm; Screw distance 36 mm Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range. Signalling and command units: Kraus-Naimer; Lumitas; Schlegel; Overvoltage protection devices: Dehn, order no. NM DK 280; OBO-Bettermann, order no. KNS/IS-D with supporting plate without spreader claws
with supporting plate without spreader claws
Communication technics Data connector housings NEW
Data connector housing with labelling field white, glossy polar white, glossy anthracite, matt aluminium, matt stainless steel, lacquered
1126 70 02 1126 70 09 * 1126 70 06 * 1126 70 24 1126 70 04
10 10 10 10 10
Labelling field height arranged for 6 mm P-touch strips. Mounting plates see acessories order no. 1111 .., 1112 ..
with supporting plate for mounting plates without spreader claws
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
229
BERKER K.1/K.5 Order no.
Packing unit
Hospital installation Central plate for double pole socket outlet for floating output white, glossy polar white, glossy polar white, matt/velvety anthracite, matt aluminium, matt
1403 02 1403 09 1403 19 09 1403 16 06 1403 14 04
10 10 10 10 10
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range. For double pole socket outlet for floating output order no. 1061
Order no.
Packing unit
Centre plate for databus connection unit with plug-in opening white, glossy polar white, glossy
1298 70 02 1298 70 09
10 10
Nurse call system: Ackermann, clino opt 99, order no. 73070A centre plate plug-in fixing
Centre plate for plug-and-socket connector white, glossy polar white, glossy
1305 70 02 1305 70 09
10 10
For double pole socket outlet according to DIN 42801 with imprint
Central plate for 6pole socket outlet white, glossy polar white, glossy anthracite, matt aluminium, matt stainless steel, lacquered
1474 02 1474 09 1474 16 06 1474 14 04 1474 04
10 10 10 10 10
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range. Nurse call system: Ackermann, clino opt 99, order no. 71008C3; Nurse call systems: Ackermann, clino opt 90, clino phon 95, order no. 71008C; Siedle, order no. AD 306-0; 6pole socket outlets: Hirschmann, Medu 600, Medu 600 GSK
10 10
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range. Nurse call systems: Ackermann, clino opt 90, clino phon 95, order no. 74199A for pear push or multiple push-button for bed operator units with self-detaching plug
Centre plate for databus termination splitter/ empty unit white, glossy polar white, glossy
1204 70 02 1204 70 09
Nurse call system: Ackermann, clino opt 90, 99 / clino phon 95, order no. 72642B; Nurse call systems: Ackermann, clino opt 90, 99 / clino phon 95, order no. 71197A, 72642C, 72639A centre plate plug-in fixing
230
white, glossy polar white, glossy
1244 71 02 1244 71 09
10 10
Nurse call system: Ackermann, clino opt 99, order no. 73075D, 73075C, 73020G, 73021G for call unit with 2 diagnostic plug-in contacts centre plate plug-in fixing
white, glossy polar white, glossy
Central plate for plug eject system # 1476 02 # 1476 09
Centre plate with 2 plug-in openings and imprint
Centre plate with red call push-button at top and a plug-in opening
Messrs. Ackermann white, glossy polar white, glossy
Nurse call system: Ackermann, clino opt 99, order no. 74189A a-coded for dropping plug-and-socket connector centre plate plug-in fixing
10 10
1217 70 02 1217 70 09
10 10
Nurse call system: Ackermann, clino opt 99, order no. 73073E, 73071E, 73071E2, 73075A for call push-button with plug-in contact for call module with call push-button and monitored auxiliary plug-in contact button with lens centre plate plug-in fixing
Centre plate with red call button and 2 plug-in openings white, glossy polar white, glossy
1218 71 02 1218 71 09
10 10
Nurse call system: Ackermann, clino opt 99, order no. 73073D, 73071D, 73071D2, 73075B for call push-button with diagnostic and auxiliary plug-in contact for call module with call push-button and plug-in contacts button with lens with imprint centre plate plug-in fixing
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
BERKER K.1/K.5 Order no.
Packing unit
Centre plate with red call push-button at top white, glossy polar white, glossy
1216 70 02 1216 70 09
10 10
Order no.
Packing unit
Centre plate with red call button and green shut-off button white, glossy polar white, glossy
1249 70 02 1249 70 09
10 10
Nurse call system: Ackermann, clino opt 99, order no. 73071F, 73071F2, 73073F for call module with call push-button button with lens centre plate plug-in fixing
Nurse call system: Ackermann, clino opt 99, order no. 73642B2 for call push-button and shut-off push-button buttons with lens centre plate plug-in fixing
Centre plate with red call push-button at bottom
Centre plate with green and yellow shut-off button
white, glossy polar white, glossy
1219 70 02 1219 70 09
10 10
white, glossy polar white, glossy
1253 70 02 1253 70 09
10 10
Nurse call system: Ackermann, clino opt 99, order no. 73022A, 73022A2 for call push-button button with lens centre plate plug-in fixing
Nurse call system: Ackermann, clino opt 99, order no. 73642E for shut-off push-button buttons with lens centre plate plug-in fixing
Centre plate with green shut-off button
Centre plate with green presence button/white acknowledge button
white, glossy polar white, glossy
1251 70 02 1251 70 09
10 10
Nurse call system: Ackermann, clino opt 99, order no. 73642C for shut-off push-button button with lens centre plate plug-in fixing
1252 70 02 1252 70 09
10 10
Centre plate for call unit with blue doctor call button 1223 71 02 1223 71 09
10 10
Nurse call system: Ackermann, clino opt 99, order no. 73022A, 73022A2 for call push-button button with lens with imprint centre plate plug-in fixing
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
10 10
Centre plate for pneumatic call switch with lens white, glossy polar white, glossy
Nurse call system: Ackermann, clino opt 99, order no. 73642D for shut-off push-button button with lens centre plate plug-in fixing
white, glossy polar white, glossy
1299 71 02 1299 71 09
Nurse call system: Ackermann, clino opt 99, order no. 73642B for office unit buttons with lens with imprint „SU-AUS WARTEN“ centre plate plug-in fixing
Centre plate with yellow shut-off button white, glossy polar white, glossy
white, glossy polar white, glossy
1236 70 02 1236 70 09
10 10
Nurse call system: Ackermann, clino opt 99, order no. 70006C; Nurse call systems: Ackermann, clino opt 90, 99 / clino phon 95, order no. 70006A, 70006B centre plate plug-in fixing
Centre plate for pullcord push-button with lens white, glossy polar white, glossy
1233 70 02 1233 70 09
10 10
Nurse call systems: Ackermann, clino opt 90, 99 / clino phon 95, order no. 70045A3, 70046A3, 70046A for pullcord push-button with pullcord and knob centre plate plug-in fixing
231
BERKER K.1/K.5 Order no.
Packing unit
Order no.
Packing unit
Centre plate for radio programme system with small sound system white, glossy polar white, glossy
1300 71 02 1300 71 09
10 10
Nurse call systems: Ackermann, clino opt 90, 99 / clino phon 95, order no. 73120C, 73120H for earpiece and volume control with imprinted symbol curve centre plate plug-in fixing
Centre plate for radio programme selector switch white, glossy polar white, glossy
1301 71 02 1301 71 09
10 10
Nurse call systems: Ackermann, clino opt 90, 99 / clino phon 95, order no. 73120A with imprint „0-1-2-3-4-5“ centre plate plug-in fixing
232
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
Order no.
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
Packing unit
Order no.
Packing unit
233
Surfaces Frames/covers/ centre inserts Plastic, glossy white
similar to RAL 1013
polar white
similar to RAL 9010
brown
similar to RAL 8011
red
similar to RAL 3003
green
similar to RAL 6029
orange
similar to RAL 2003
yellow
similar to RAL 1004
metal, matt finish aluminium light bronze lacquered aluminium gold anodised stainless steel Individual items that cannot be cladded for technical reasons are lacquered.
234
Berker Arsys
Surface range Flush-mounted system
The elegant design, timelessly appealing colours and matterials such as stainless steel offer you a wide variety of products to suit the most diverse interior styles. ■ Available surfaces: white, polar white, brown, metal gold, stainless steel, metal light bronze Berker ARSYS GOLD ■ T he metallic version for customers who wish to add a touch of luxury to their interior design, right down to the last detail Berker Arsys IP44 The splash-protected flush-mounted range has been developed for installation on smooth continuous surfaces. Areas of application include tiled rooms with special requirements with respect to cleaning or hygiene. ■ Use of module inserts
■ Easy hygienic cleaning of the stainless steel surface
■ Available surface: stainless steel
It must be ensured that the sealing lies flush.
Installation spanning irregularities such as joints between
tiles should be avoided. 235
BERKER ARSYS Order no.
Packing unit
Order no.
Frames
Frame Frame
on page T68
236
1314 00 01
10
light bronze, metal, 2gang vertical
1324 00 01
2
light bronze, metal, 3gang vertical
1334 00 01
2
1313 00 02 1323 00 02
10 2
white, glossy, 3gang vertical
1333 00 02
2
white, glossy, 4gang vertical
1343 00 02
2
light bronze, metal, 4gang vertical
1344 00 01
2
white, glossy, 5gang vertical
1353 00 02
2
light bronze, metal, 5gang vertical
1354 00 01
2
white, glossy, 2gang horizontal
1363 00 02
2
light bronze, metal, 2gang horizontal
1364 00 01
2
white, glossy, 3gang horizontal
1373 00 02
2
light bronze, metal, 3gang horizontal
1374 00 01
2
white, glossy, 4gang horizontal
1383 00 02
2
light bronze, metal, 4gang horizontal
1384 00 01
2
white, glossy, 5gang horizontal
1393 00 02
2
light bronze, metal, 5gang horizontal
1394 00 01
2
polar white, glossy, 1gang
1313 00 69
10
1314 00 04 1324 00 04
10 2
polar white, glossy, 2gang vertical
1323 00 69
2
stainless steel, 1gang stainless steel, 2gang vertical
2
1333 00 69
2
stainless steel, 3gang vertical
1334 00 04
polar white, glossy, 3gang vertical
1344 00 04
2
polar white, glossy, 4gang vertical
1343 00 69
2
stainless steel, 4gang vertical
2
1353 00 69
2
stainless steel, 5gang vertical
1354 00 04
polar white, glossy, 5gang vertical
1364 00 04
2
polar white, glossy, 2gang horizontal
1363 00 69
2
stainless steel, 2gang horizontal
2
1373 00 69
2
stainless steel, 3gang horizontal
1374 00 04
polar white, glossy, 3gang horizontal
1384 00 04
2
polar white, glossy, 4gang horizontal
1383 00 69
2
stainless steel, 4gang horizontal
2
1393 00 69
2
stainless steel, 5gang horizontal
1394 00 04
polar white, glossy, 5gang horizontal
gold, metal, 1gang gold, metal, 2gang vertical
1314 00 02 1324 00 02
10 2
gold, metal, 3gang vertical
1334 00 02
2
gold, metal, 4gang vertical
1344 00 02
2
gold, metal, 5gang vertical
1354 00 02
2
gold, metal, 2gang horizontal
1364 00 02
2
gold, metal, 3gang horizontal
1374 00 02
2
gold, metal, 4gang horizontal
1384 00 02
2
gold, metal, 5gang horizontal
1394 00 02
2
on page T68
Frame
on page T68
Frame
Frame
on page T68
light bronze, metal, 1gang
white, glossy, 1gang white, glossy, 2gang vertical
Frame
on page T68
Packing unit
brown, glossy, 1gang brown, glossy, 2gang vertical
1313 00 01 1323 00 01
10 2
brown, glossy, 3gang vertical
1333 00 01
2
brown, glossy, 4gang vertical
1343 00 01
2
brown, glossy, 5gang vertical
1353 00 01
2
brown, glossy, 2gang horizontal
1363 00 01
2
brown, glossy, 3gang horizontal
1373 00 01
2
brown, glossy, 4gang horizontal
1383 00 01
2
brown, glossy, 5gang horizontal
1393 00 01
2
on page T68
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
BERKER ARSYS Order no.
Packing unit
Frame
on page T68
Packing unit
Surface-mounted frame 2gang
red, glossy, 1gang red, glossy, 2gang vertical
1313 00 62 1323 00 62
10 2
red, glossy, 2gang horizontal
1363 00 62
2
for emphasising special switches, socket outlets, etc.
Sealing ring for wall-tight mounting of flushmounted devices black, for 1gang frame black, for 2gang frame black, for 3gang frame
Order no.
1056 00 1057 00 1058 00
10 2 2
When disinfecting smooth walls, the rubber rings prevent detergent from penetrating the installation. for vertical and horizontal mounting
white, glossy polar white, glossy brown, glossy light bronze, lacquered stainless steel, lacquered
1030 00 02 1030 00 69 1030 00 01 1030 90 11 1030 90 04
10 10 10 10 10
red, glossy
1030 00 62
10
Installation depth 33,5 mm For suitable tube-entries and replacement for cable and duct entries refer to the dry surface-mounted range. Flush-mounted devices can be used with surfacemounted frames for surface-mounted installation.
Self-extinguishing base plate see module inserts / accessories order no. 1021 22
with cable and duct entry entry at top, bottom and 2 x each side possible for vertical and horizontal mounting
Surface-mounted frame 3gang
Surface-mounted frames Surface-mounted frame 1gang white, glossy polar white, glossy brown, glossy light bronze, lacquered stainless steel, lacquered
1029 00 02 1029 00 69 1029 00 01 1029 90 11 1029 90 04
red, glossy
1029 00 62
10 10 10 10 10 10
Installation depth 33,5 mm For suitable tube-entries and replacement for cable and duct entries refer to the dry surface-mounted range. Flush-mounted devices can be used with surfacemounted frames for surface-mounted installation.
Self-extinguishing base plate see module inserts / accessories order no. 1021 12
with cable and duct entry entry at top and bottom possible
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
white, glossy polar white, glossy brown, glossy light bronze, lacquered stainless steel, lacquered
1031 00 02 1031 00 69 1031 00 01 1031 90 11 1031 90 04
5 5 5 5 5
red, glossy
1031 00 62
5
Installation depth 33,5 mm For suitable tube-entries and replacement for cable and duct entries refer to the dry surface-mounted range. Flush-mounted devices can be used with surfacemounted frames for surface-mounted installation.
Self-extinguishing base plate see module inserts / accessories order no. 1021 32
with cable and duct entry entry at top, bottom and at each side in the middle possible for vertical and horizontal mounting
237
BERKER ARSYS Order no.
Packing unit
Order no.
NEW
Socket outlets SCHUKO-socket outlets SCHUKO-socket outlet
on page T6
polar white, glossy white, glossy brown, glossy light bronze, metal stainless steel gold, metal red, glossy polar white, glossy, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1 white, glossy, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1 brown, glossy, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1 light bronze, metal, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1 stainless steel, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1 gold, metal, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1
4715 00 69 4715 00 02 4715 00 01 4714 00 01 4714 00 04 4714 00 02 4715 00 62 4735 00 69
10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
4735 00 02
on page T6
polar white, glossy, * 73 4135 00 69 enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1 white, glossy, enhanced 73 4135 00 02 * contact protection IEC 60884-1
10
10
* 73 4134 00 01
10
orange, glossy, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1
* 73 4135 00 77
10
10
stainless steel, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1
* 73 4134 00 04
10
4735 00 01
10
16 A, 250 V~
4734 00 01
10
4734 00 04
10
4734 00 02
10
For South Tyrol only. Connection terminals IEC 60884-1
The insert of the red socket outlet is colour-coded.
with screw-in lift terminals
SCHUKO-socket outlet with imprint
on page T6
red, glossy, with imprint „EDV“
4715 00 82
10
green, glossy, with imprint „SV“
4715 00 73
10
orange, glossy, with imprint „ZSV“
4715 00 77
10
16 A, 250 V~
Connection terminals IEC 60884-1 with plug-in terminals
Insert colour-coded.
SCHUKO-socket outlet
on page T6
SCHUKO-socket outlet
light bronze, metal, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1
16 A, 250 V~
polar white, glossy white, glossy brown, glossy light bronze, metal stainless steel polar white, glossy, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1 white, glossy, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1 brown, glossy, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1 light bronze, metal, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1 stainless steel, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1 gold, metal, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1
Packing unit
4115 00 69 4115 00 02 4115 00 01 4114 00 01 4114 00 04 4135 00 69
10 10 10 10 10 10
4135 00 02
10
4135 00 01
10
Connection terminals IEC 60884-1 with plug-in terminals
SCHUKO-socket outlet 45° white, glossy polar white, glossy brown, glossy
4728 00 02 4728 00 69 4728 00 01
10 10 10
16 A, 250 V~ on page T6
Specially suited for combining several socket outlets if right angle plugs are used. Connection terminals IEC 60884-1
4134 00 01
10
4134 00 04
10
4134 00 02
10
for diagonal installation with plug-in terminals
16 A, 250 V~
Connection terminals IEC 60884-1 with screw terminals
238
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
BERKER ARSYS Order no.
Packing unit
Order no.
SCHUKO-socket outlet with labelling field
on page T6
white, glossy polar white, glossy brown, glossy stainless steel, lacquered
4739 00 02 4739 00 69 4739 00 01 4739 90 04
10 10 10 10
red, glossy green, glossy white, glossy, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1 polar white, glossy, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1 brown, glossy, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1
4739 00 62 4739 00 63 4738 00 02
10 10 10
4738 00 69
10
SCHUKO-socket outlet with indicator lamp and labelling field white, glossy polar white, glossy brown, glossy on page T6
4161 00 02 4161 00 69 4161 00 01
10 10 10
16 A, 250 V~ Neon lamp current 1,5 mA Labelling field height arranged for 6 mm P-touch strips. Replacement neon lamp unit see module inserts / accessories order no. 1609
Connection terminals IEC 60884-1 4738 00 01
10
16 A, 250 V~
with neon lamp unit with screw-in lift terminals
SCHUKO-socket outlets with safety device SCHUKO-socket outlet with overvoltage protection and labelling field
The insert of the red and green socket outlets is colour-coded. Labelling field height arranged for 6 mm P-touch strips. on page T33
Connection terminals IEC 60884-1
SCHUKO-socket outlet with indicator lamp 4162 00 01 4162 00 04
white, glossy polar white, glossy brown, glossy stainless steel, lacquered
4152 00 02 4152 00 69 4152 00 01 4152 90 04
1 1 1 1
16 A, 250 V~, 50/60 Hz
with plug-in terminals
light bronze, metal stainless steel
Packing unit
10 10
16 A, 250 V~ Neon lamp current 1,5 mA on page T6 Replacement neon lamp unit see module inserts / accessories order no. 1609
Connection terminals IEC 60884-1
Labelling field height arranged for 6 mm P-touch strips. Overvoltage protection to EN 61643-11 and VDE 0675-6, -11 Connection terminals IEC 60884-1 with imprint with indicator LED for „on/error“ with acoustic fault signal with screw terminals
with neon lamp unit with screw-in lift terminals
SCHUKO-socket outlet with indicator lamp and imprint
on page T6
red, glossy, with white imprint „EDV“
4161 01 82
10
green, glossy, with imprint „SV“
4126 00 73
10
orange, glossy, with imprint „ZSV“
4126 00 77
10
16 A, 250 V~ Neon lamp current 1,5 mA Insert colour-coded. Replacement neon lamp unit see module inserts / accessories order no. 1609
Execution SV, ZSV to VDE 0100-710 Connection terminals IEC 60884-1 with neon lamp unit with screw-in lift terminals
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
239
BERKER ARSYS Order no.
Packing unit
Order no.
SCHUKO-socket outlets
SCHUKO-socket outlet with hinged cover and labelling field
SCHUKO-socket outlet with hinged cover
on page T6
white, glossy, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1 polar white, glossy, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1 brown, glossy, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1 light bronze, metal, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1 stainless steel, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1 gold, metal, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1
4747 00 02
10
4747 00 69
10
4747 00 01
10
4757 00 01
10
4757 00 04
10
4757 00 02
10
on page T6
10
4748 00 69
10
4748 00 01
10
4758 00 01
10
4758 00 04
10
4758 00 02
10
Labelling field height arranged for 6 mm P-touch strips.
Connection terminals IEC 60884-1 with imprint mounting orientation of insert selectable in 45° steps when opening hinged cover, it can be arrested in end position with plug-in terminals
Connection terminals IEC 60884-1 with imprint mounting orientation of insert selectable in 45° steps when opening hinged cover, it can be arrested in end position with plug-in terminals
SCHUKO-socket outlet with hinged cover 4147 00 02
10
Double SCHUKO-socket outlet with frame 4147 00 69
10
4147 00 01
10
16 A, 250 V~ Specially suited for combining several socket outlets if right angle plugs are used. Connection terminals IEC 60884-1 with imprint with screw terminals
4748 00 02
Specially suited for combining several socket outlets if right angle plugs are used.
Specially suited for combining several socket outlets if right angle plugs are used.
on page T6
white, glossy, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1 polar white, glossy, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1 brown, glossy, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1 light bronze, metal, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1 stainless steel, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1 gold, metal, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1 16 A, 250 V~
16 A, 250 V~
white, glossy, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1 polar white, glossy, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1 brown, glossy, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1
Packing unit
on page T6
white, glossy polar white, glossy brown, glossy white, glossy, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1 polar white, glossy, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1 brown, glossy, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1 light bronze, lacquered, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1 stainless steel, lacquered, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1 16 A, 250 V~
4753 00 02 4753 00 69 4753 00 01 4729 00 02
10 10 10 10
4729 00 69
10
4729 00 01
10
4729 90 11
10
4729 90 04
10
For fitting in 1gang wall boxes according to DIN 49073-1 Connection terminals IEC 60884-1 with plug-in terminals
240
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
BERKER ARSYS Order no.
Packing unit
Socket outlets without earth contact
Order no.
Socket outlets with earth pin
Socket outlet without earth contact
on page T6
white, glossy polar white, glossy brown, glossy light bronze, metal stainless steel white, glossy, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1 polar white, glossy, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1 brown, glossy, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1 light bronze, metal, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1 stainless steel, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1
Socket outlet with earth pin
61 6115 00 02 61 6115 00 69 61 6115 00 01 61 6114 00 01 61 6114 00 04 61 6115 01 02
10 10 10 10 10 10
61 6115 01 69
10
61 6115 01 01
10
61 6114 01 01
10
61 6114 01 04
10
on page T6
16 A, 250 V~ Mirror depth 8 mm
white, glossy, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1 polar white, glossy, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1 brown, glossy, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1 light bronze, metal, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1 stainless steel, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1 red, glossy, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1 green, glossy, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1
67 6575 00 02
10
67 6575 00 69
10
67 6575 00 01
10
67 6574 00 01
10
67 6574 00 04
10
67 6575 00 62
10
67 6575 00 63
10
16 A, 250 V~ The insert of the red and green socket outlets is colour-coded.
Connection terminals according to IEC 60884-1 2pole without spreader claws with screw terminals
Connection terminals according to IEC 60884-1 2pole + earth with screw-in lift terminals
Double socket outlet without earth contact with frame white, glossy polar white, glossy brown, glossy
Packing unit
61 6155 00 02 61 6155 00 69 61 6155 00 01
16 A, 250 V~ Mirror depth 6 mm For fitting in standard wall boxes according to DIN 49073-1 Connection terminals according to IEC 60884-1 2pole without spreader claws with screw terminals
NEW
10 10 10 on page T6
Socket outlet with earth pin white, glossy, enhanced * 67 6875 00 02 contact protection IEC 60884-1 polar white, glossy, * 67 6875 00 69 enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1
10
10
brown, glossy, enhanced 67 6875 00 01 * contact protection IEC 60884-1
10
light bronze, metal, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1
* 67 6874 00 01
10
stainless steel, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1
* 67 6874 00 04
10
red, glossy, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1
* 67 6875 00 62
10
green, glossy, enhanced 67 6875 00 63 * contact protection IEC 60884-1
10
16 A, 250 V~ The insert of the red and green socket outlets is colour-coded. Connection terminals according to IEC 60884-1 2pole + earth with plug-in terminals
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
241
BERKER ARSYS Order no.
Packing unit
Order no.
British Standard socket outlets NEW
on page T6
Socket outlet with earth contact, USA/CANADA, NEMA 5-20 R
Socket outlet with earth contact, British Standard, can be switched off white, glossy, with enhanced contact protection polar white, glossy, with enhanced contact protection
* 6347 00 02
10
* 6347 00 69
10
brown, glossy, with enhanced contact protection
* 6347 00 01
10
light bronze, lacquered, with enhanced contact protection
* 6347 90 11
10
stainless steel, lacquered, with enhanced contact protection
* 6347 90 04
10
on page T6
Covers for switches / push-buttons Rocker adapters/rockers adapters Rocker adapter
white, for rocker switch 2- and 3pole on/off
1867 00 01
10
1868 00 01
10
For area rockers with „pin“ (from 1967) on module switch inserts with „small rocker“ (1963-1983). 10 10 10 10 10
15 A, 125 V~
Connection terminals according to IEC 60884-1 2pole with screw terminals
Rockers Rocker white, glossy polar white, glossy brown, glossy light bronze, metal stainless steel gold, metal
1405 00 02 1405 00 69 1405 00 01 1404 00 01 1404 00 04 1404 00 02
10 10 10 10 10 10
for rocker switches change-over, intermediate for rocker push-buttons for push-button BCU 1gang and group push-button BCU 1gang
NEMA socket outlets Socket outlet with earth contact, USA/CANADA, NEMA 5-15 R 10 10 10 10
Rocker with labelling field
15 A, 125 V~
white, glossy polar white, glossy brown, glossy light bronze, metal stainless steel gold, metal
Equates to standard NEMA 5-15 R
Labelling field height arranged for 6 mm P-touch strips for labelling with names, notes etc.
2pole + earth without spreader claws with screw terminals
242
10
Rockers adapter
Socket outlet without earth contact „Euro-American Standard“
4167 00 02 4167 00 69 4167 90 11 4167 90 04
1866 00 01
for rockers switches and rockers push-buttons
Euro-American socket outlets
4170 00 02 4170 00 69 4170 00 01 4174 00 01 4174 00 04
black, for rocker switch and rocker push-button
For area rockers with „pin“ (from 1967) on module switch inserts with „small rocker“ (1963-1983).
2pole + earth without neon lamp without spreader claws with screw terminals
on page T6
10 10 10 10
2pole + earth without spreader claws with screw terminals
For fitting in standard wall boxes according to DIN 49073-1
white, glossy polar white, glossy light bronze, lacquered stainless steel, lacquered
4169 00 02 4169 00 69 4169 90 11 4169 90 04
Equates to standard NEMA 5-20 R
Equates to standard BS 1363: Part 2.
on page T6
white, glossy polar white, glossy light bronze, lacquered stainless steel, lacquered 20 A, 125 V~
13 A, 250 V~
white, glossy polar white, glossy brown, glossy light bronze, metal stainless steel
Packing unit
1426 00 02 1426 00 69 1426 00 01 1436 00 01 1436 00 04 1436 00 02
10 10 10 10 10 10
for rocker switches change-over, intermediate for rocker push-buttons for push-button BCU 1gang and group push-button BCU 1gang
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
BERKER ARSYS Order no.
Packing unit
1487 00
10
Centre plate with glass screen, rocker and adhesive label sheets
Labelling field height arranged for two 24-mm P-touch strips for labelling with names, notes etc.
red, glossy
In case of danger break glass and press rocker!
10 10 10 10 10 10
Lenses with symbol for light, bell, door and neutral in clear, also neutral in red transparent. for rocker switches change-over, intermediate for rocker push-buttons for push-button BCU 1gang and group push-button BCU 1gang for illumination and monitoring circuit
for rocker switches change-over, intermediate for rocker push-buttons for push-button BCU 1gang and group push-button BCU 1gang
Rockers Rocker with imprint „0“ white, glossy polar white, glossy brown, glossy light bronze, metal stainless steel gold, metal
Rocker with red lens and „Heizung Notschalter“ imprint red, glossy
1488 00 62
Not suitable for heating systems > 50 kW. for rocker switches change-over, intermediate for rocker push-buttons for push-button BCU 1gang and group push-button BCU 1gang for monitoring circuit
Rocker with 5 lenses attached and labelling field white, glossy polar white, glossy brown, glossy light bronze, metal stainless steel
1415 02 02 1415 02 69 1415 02 01 1416 02 01 1416 02 04
10 10 10 10 10
Labelling field height arranged for 6 mm P-touch strips for labelling with names, notes etc. Lenses with symbol for light, bell, door and neutral in clear, also neutral in red transparent. for rocker switches change-over, intermediate for rocker push-buttons for push-button BCU 1gang and group push-button BCU 1gang for illumination and monitoring circuit
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
1425 00 02 1425 00 69 1425 00 01 1424 00 01 1424 00 04 1424 00 02
10 10 10 10 10 10
for rocker switch 2- and 3pole on/off
10
Or use glass pane protected heating emergency switch.
10
Not suitable for heating systems > 50 kW.
Rocker with 5 lenses attached 1415 00 02 1415 00 69 1415 00 01 1416 00 01 1416 00 04 1416 00 02
1297 00 00
Adhesive label sheets, text white: „Notschalter“, „Rauchabzug“, „Feuerschutztür schließen“, „Feuerabschluss schließen“, „Heizung“, „Lichtkuppel“, „Hausalarm“ und „Öffnen“ supplied.
for rocker switches change-over, intermediate for rocker push-buttons for push-button BCU 1gang and group push-button BCU 1gang
white, glossy polar white, glossy brown, glossy light bronze, metal stainless steel gold, metal
Packing unit
Emergency switch covers
Rocker with large labelling field clear
Order no.
Rocker with red lens and imprint „0“ white, glossy polar white, glossy brown, glossy light bronze, metal stainless steel gold, metal
1417 00 02 1417 00 69 1417 00 01 1418 00 01 1418 00 04 1418 00 02
10 10 10 10 10 10
for rocker switch 2- and 3pole on/off for group push-button BCU 1gang for illumination and monitoring circuit
Rotary switches Centre plate with rotary knob for rotary switch white, glossy polar white, glossy brown, glossy light bronze, metal stainless steel gold, metal/polar white
1150 00 02 1150 00 69 1150 00 01 1150 10 01 1150 10 04 1150 10 02
1 1 1 1 1 1
for order no. 3862 ..
with imprint „0“ and „1“
243
BERKER ARSYS Order no.
Packing unit
Order no.
Rockers
Packing unit
Rockers with imprinted symbol arrows white, glossy polar white, glossy brown, glossy light bronze, metal stainless steel gold, metal
Rockers white, glossy polar white, glossy brown, glossy light bronze, metal stainless steel gold, metal
1435 00 02 1435 00 69 1435 00 01 1434 00 01 1434 00 04 1434 00 02
10 10 10 10 10 10
for rockers switches for rockers push-buttons and group rockers pushbuttons for push-button BCU 2gang and group push-button BCU 2gang
1437 00 02 1437 00 69 1437 00 01
Rockers screw-on Rocker screw-on stainless steel
10 10 10
10
Rocker screw-on with 5 lenses attached stainless steel
1414 00 10
10
Lenses with symbol for light, bell, door and neutral in clear, also neutral in red transparent. with cover plug for screw fitting for rocker switches change-over, intermediate for rocker push-buttons for illumination and monitoring circuit
Rockers for rockers switch 3gang on/off white, glossy polar white, glossy brown, glossy light bronze, lacquered stainless steel, lacquered
1404 00 10
with cover plug for screw fitting for rocker switches change-over, intermediate for rocker push-buttons
for rockers switches for rockers push-buttons and group rockers pushbuttons for illumination and monitoring circuit for push-button BCU 2gang and group push-button BCU 2gang
1465 00 02 1465 00 69 1465 00 01 1465 90 11 1465 90 04
10 10 10 10 10 10
For group rockers push-button as 2pole rockers push-button for shutters with middle positions order no. 5034 04 For group push-button BCU 2gang order no. 7514 21 00
Rockers with red lens white, glossy polar white, glossy brown, glossy
1435 03 02 1435 03 69 1435 03 01 1434 03 01 1434 03 04 1434 03 02
10 10 10 10 10
Rockers screw-on stainless steel
1434 00 10
10
For rockers switch 3gang on/off order no. 6330 23
with cover plug for screw fitting for rockers switches for rockers push-buttons and group rockers pushbuttons
Rockers with imprinted symbol arrow white, glossy polar white, glossy brown, glossy light bronze, metal stainless steel gold, metal
1435 01 02 1435 01 69 1435 01 01 1434 01 01 1434 01 04 1434 01 02
10 10 10 10 10 10
For rockers switch for shutters order no. 3035 20 For rockers push-button for shutters order no. 5035 20 For push-button BCU 2gang order no. 7514 20 00
Rocker with imprinted symbol arrows white, glossy polar white, glossy brown, glossy light bronze, metal stainless steel gold, metal
1405 03 02 1405 03 69 1405 03 01 1404 03 01 1404 03 04 1404 03 02
10 10 10 10 10 10
Hotel card switch Hotel card switch cover with imprint and red lens
on page T6
white, glossy polar white, glossy brown, glossy light bronze, lacquered stainless steel, lacquered
1641 00 02 1641 00 69 1641 00 01 1641 90 11 1641 90 04
10 10 10 10 10
Max. card width 54 mm; Card strength 0,5 - 1,4 mm Other imprint on request! For push-button insert for hotel card switch covers order no. 5051 02, 5051 03, 5052 01, 5056 01
For group push-button BCU 1gang order no. 7514 11 00
244
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
BERKER ARSYS Order no.
Packing unit
Pullcord switches/pullcord push-buttons
Order no.
Packing unit
Key switches/key push-buttons for shutters
Centre plate for pullcord switch and pullcord push-button
Centre plate with lock for key switch for shutters
white, glossy polar white, glossy brown, glossy light bronze, lacquered stainless steel, lacquered
white, glossy, key removable in mid position
1079 00 02
1
polar white, glossy, key removable in mid position brown, glossy, key removable in mid position light bronze, metal, key removable in mid position stainless steel, key removable in mid position gold, metal/polar white, key removable in mid position white, glossy, key removable in 3 positions
1079 00 69
1
1079 00 01
1
1079 03 01
1
1079 03 04
1
1079 03 02
1
1079 01 02
1
1147 00 02 1147 00 69 1147 00 01 1147 90 11 1147 90 04
10 10 10 10 10
For pullcord push-button order no. 3956 19 For pullcord switch order no. 3962, 3966, 6139 ..
3-step switches Centre plate with rotary knob for 3-step switch white, glossy, without 0-position
1088 00 02
1
polar white, glossy, without 0-position
1088 00 69
1
brown, glossy, without 0-position
1088 00 01
1
light bronze, metal, without 0-position
1088 01 01
1
polar white, glossy, key removable in 3 positions
1079 01 69
1
stainless steel, without 0-position
1088 01 04
1
brown, glossy, key removable in 3 positions
1079 01 01
1
gold, metal/polar white, without 0-position
1088 01 02
1
light bronze, metal, key removable in 3 positions
1079 04 01
1
white, glossy, with neutral-position
1087 00 02
1
stainless steel, key removable in 3 positions
1079 04 04
1
polar white, glossy, with neutral-position
1087 00 69
1
1079 04 02
1
brown, glossy, with neutral-position
1087 00 01
1
gold, metal/polar white, key removable in 3 positions
light bronze, metal, with neutral-position
1087 01 01
1
For key switch for shutters order no. 3851, 3852
stainless steel, with neutral-position
1087 01 04
1
gold, metal/polar white, with neutral-position
1087 01 02
1
Centre plate with lock for key switch for shutters
For 3-step switch with 0-position order no. 3861 For 3-step switch without 0-position order no. 3861 01
with imprint
Rotary switches/rotary push-buttons for shutters Centre plate with rotary knob for rotary switch for shutters white, glossy polar white, glossy brown, glossy light bronze, metal stainless steel gold, metal/polar white
1077 00 02 1077 00 69 1077 00 01 1077 01 01 1077 01 04 1077 01 02
Interlock disk for conversion to push-button see module inserts order no. 1861 Rotary switch for shutters order no. 3841, 3842
with imprint
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
with imprint with push lock function with 2 keys
1 1 1 1 1 1
white, glossy, key removable in mid position
1079 02 02
1
polar white, glossy, key removable in mid position brown, glossy, key removable in mid position light bronze, metal, key removable in mid position stainless steel, key removable in mid position gold, metal/polar white, key removable in mid position
1079 02 69
1
1079 02 01
1
1079 05 01
1
1079 05 04
1
1079 05 02
1
For key switch for shutters order no. 3851, 3852
with imprint only push-button function with 2 keys
245
BERKER ARSYS Order no.
Packing unit
Centre plate for key switch/key push-button for shutters white, glossy polar white, glossy brown, glossy light bronze, lacquered stainless steel, lacquered
1504 00 12 1504 00 79 1504 00 11 1504 90 21 1504 90 14
Order no.
Blank plates Blank plate with centre plate
10 10 10 10 10
white, glossy, without base and spreader claws polar white, glossy, without base and spreader claws brown, glossy, without base and spreader claws light bronze, metal, without base and spreader claws stainless steel, without base and spreader claws gold, metal, without base and spreader claws
Profile half cylinders see module inserts. For key switch for shutters order no. 3822 10 For key push-button for shutters order no. 3831 10, 3832 10
with imprint for profile half cylinders for master-key systems
Key switches/key push-buttons Centre plate for key switch/key push-button white, glossy polar white, glossy brown, glossy light bronze, lacquered stainless steel, lacquered
1505 00 12 1505 00 79 1505 00 11 1505 90 21 1505 90 14
10 10 10 10 10
Profile half cylinders see module inserts. For key switch order no. 3826 10 For key push-button order no. 3856 20
for profile half cylinders for master-key systems
50 x 50 mm centre plate for RCD protection switch 1493 02 1493 09 1493 01 1493 11 1493 04
1045 00 02
20
1045 00 69
20
1045 00 01
20
1044 00 01
20
1044 00 04
20
1044 00 02
20
white, glossy, with base and spreader claws
67 1045 00 02
10
polar white, glossy, with base and spreader claws brown, glossy, with base and spreader claws
67 1045 00 69
10
67 1045 00 01
10
light bronze, metal, with base and spreader claws stainless steel, with base and spreader claws
67 1044 00 01
10
67 1044 00 04
10
on supporting plate without cut-out centre plate plug-in fixing
RCD protection switch
white, glossy polar white, glossy brown, glossy light bronze, lacquered stainless steel, lacquered
Packing unit
Blank plate with centre plate and screw-fixing white, glossy polar white, glossy brown, glossy
1 1 1 1 1
1045 01 02 1045 01 69 1045 01 01
10 10 10
on supporting plate with large cut-out for customised cut-outs or holes when installing special solutions space-saving for relays, etc. with cover plug for screw fitting without spreader claws
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for 50 x 50 mm centre plate of the corresponding range. For RCD protection switch order no. 2844
Pilot lamps Centre plate for push-button and pilot lamp E10 light bronze, metal stainless steel gold, metal
1165 01 01 1165 01 04 1165 01 02
10 10 10
Cut-out diameter 27,2 mm Push-buttons, LEDs, neon lamps and covers see module inserts. For push-button and pilot lamp E10 order no. 5101 ..
centre plate plug-in fixing
246
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
BERKER ARSYS Order no.
Packing unit
1165 00 02 1165 00 69 1165 00 01
Centre plate with setting knob for mechanical timer
10 10 10
Cut-out diameter 27,2 mm Buttons and covers see module inserts. For push-buttons with hinged cover, use hinged cover order no. 1140 .. . Labelling field height arranged for 6 mm P-touch strips. For push-button and pilot lamp E10 order no. 5101 ..
centre plate plug-in fixing
Cover for push-button and pilot lamp E10 clear
1247 00 04
10
The mirror image texts on the backside only become visible when the signal is illuminated. With 10 labelling fields: „Bitte warten“, „Bitte eintreten“, „Nicht eintreten“, „Bitte Ruhe“, „Der Nächste bitte“, „Aufzug kommt“, symbol arrow, „Besetzt“, 2x neutral. For push-button and pilot lamp E10 order no. 5101
Centre plate for pilot lamp E14 white, glossy polar white, glossy brown, glossy light bronze, lacquered stainless steel, lacquered
1167 00 02 1167 00 69 1167 00 01 1167 90 11 1167 90 04
on page T29
Current input 25 mA; LED output 800 mW Labels supplied: „Nicht eintreten“, „Besetzt“, „Bitte eintreten“, „Bitte Ruhe“, „Bitte warten“. Coloured cover plate see module inserts order no. 1289 .. For insert info pilot lamp order no. 2949
with 4 light intensity LED very long LED lifetime with clear cover plate
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
1 1 1 1 1
1
polar white, glossy, max. 15 minutes
1634 00 69
1
brown, glossy, max. 15 minutes
1634 00 01
1
light bronze, metal, max. 15 minutes
1634 01 01
1
stainless steel, max. 15 minutes
1634 01 04
1
gold, metal/polar white, max. 15 minutes
1634 01 02
1
white, glossy, max. 120 minutes
1635 00 02
1
polar white, glossy, max. 120 minutes
1635 00 69
1
brown, glossy, max. 120 minutes
1635 00 01
1
light bronze, metal, max. 120 minutes
1635 01 01
1
stainless steel, max. 120 minutes
1635 01 04
1
gold, metal/polar white, max. 120 minutes
1635 01 02
1
Easy timer with display
on page T7
1345 00 02 1345 00 69 1345 00 01 1345 90 11 1345 90 04
1634 00 02
with time scale imprint
For pilot lamp E14 order no. 5131 02
Info pilot lamp cover with 5 label sheets
white, glossy, max. 15 minutes
Mechanical timer 15 minutes order no. 2040 Mechanical timer 120 minutes order no. 2041
10 10 10 10 10
LEDs, incandescent lamps and covers see module inserts.
white, glossy polar white, glossy brown, glossy light bronze, lacquered stainless steel, lacquered
Packing unit
timers
Centre plate with labelling field for pushbutton and pilot lamp E10 white, glossy polar white, glossy brown, glossy
Order no.
white, glossy polar white, glossy brown, glossy light bronze, lacquered stainless steel, lacquered
1735 00 02 1735 00 69 1735 00 01 1735 90 11 1735 90 04
1 1 1 1 1
Per programme block 2 switching times for „on/off“; Power reserve approx. 4 hrs., maintenance-free; Operating temperature 5 - 35 °C For manual and timer programmed switching of electrical loads. For insert for timer order no. 2948
simple programming of switching times with quick programming mode can be programmed up to 4 hours after pulling from the insert 2 programme blocks Mon. - Fri. and Sat. - Sun. with automatic summer-/winter time switching (can be switched off) large-area display with symbols display of next switching time with slide switch for manual/automatic
247
BERKER ARSYS Order no.
Packing unit
on page T7
1736 00 02 1736 00 69 1736 00 01 1736 90 11 1736 90 04
1 1 1 1 1
Centre plate with setting knob for rotary dimmer white, glossy polar white, glossy brown, glossy light bronze, metal stainless steel gold, metal
Switching times 18 for on/off; Random generator +/- 15 min.; Astronomic time shift +/- 2 hrs.; Power reserve approx. 24 hrs.; Countdown function 0 - 23 hrs. 59 min.
with imprint in German with pre-set base programme 2 independent programme memories for everyday/ holidays with week and day programme with slide switch from summer to winter time astro programme for sunrise/sundown switching large-area display with symbols with slide switch for manual/automatic
Speed controllers Centre plate with setting knob for speed controller white, glossy polar white, glossy brown, glossy light bronze, metal stainless steel gold, metal
Timer with display and sensor connection
on page T7
1 1 1 1 1
Setting range twilight approx. 6 - 300 Lux; Switching times 18 for on/off; Random generator +/- 15 min.; Astronomic time shift +/- 2 hrs.; Power reserve approx. 24 hrs.; Countdown function 0 - 23 hrs. 59 min.
For RolloTec brightness sensors order no. 0169, 0184 For insert for timer order no. 2948
with imprint in German with pre-set base programme 2 independent programme memories for everyday/ holidays with week and day programme with slide switch from summer to winter time astro programme for sunrise/sundown switching large-area display with symbols with slide switch for manual/automatic for sensor connection to socket contact or terminal block connected RolloTec brightness sensor can be used for twilight-controlled switching-on
1135 00 22 1135 00 89 1135 00 21 1134 00 21 1134 00 24 1134 00 22
10 10 10 10 10 10
Axial dimension diameter 4 mm For speed controller order no. 2968 01
with imprinted symbol curve
Universal series touch dimmers Button for universal series touch dimmer
For manual and timer programmed switching of electrical loads.
248
10 10 10 10 10 10
For rotary dimmer order no. 2819 .., 2830 10, 2860 10, 2875, 2885 For universal rotary dimmer order no. 2861 10 For universal rotary dimmer extension unit order no 2862 10 For rotary dimmer LV order no. 2866 10, 2873 For Tronic rotary dimmer order no. 2867 10, 2874 For rotary potentiometer 1-10 V order no. 2891 10 For push-button rotary potentiometer 1-10 V order no. 2896 10 For rotary potentiometer DALI order no. 2897
For insert for timer order no. 2948
1738 00 02 1738 00 69 1738 00 01 1738 90 11 1738 90 04
1135 00 02 1135 00 69 1135 00 01 1134 00 01 1134 00 04 1134 00 02
Axial dimension diameter 4 mm
For manual and timer programmed switching of electrical loads.
white, glossy polar white, glossy brown, glossy light bronze, lacquered stainless steel, lacquered
Packing unit
Rotary dimmers
Timer with display white, glossy polar white, glossy brown, glossy light bronze, lacquered stainless steel, lacquered
Order no.
on page T10
white, glossy polar white, glossy brown, glossy light bronze, metal stainless steel gold, metal
1765 00 02 1765 00 69 1765 00 01 1765 00 11 1765 00 04 1765 00 12
1 1 1 1 1 1
For universal series touch dimmer order no. 2901
for 2 independent lighting groups with 2-push-buttons operation concept per series
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
BERKER ARSYS Order no.
Packing unit
BLC Berker Light Control
Order no.
BLC Controllers
Buttons
BLC controller 180 BLC button
on page T12
white, glossy polar white, glossy brown, glossy light bronze, metal stainless steel gold, metal
1761 00 02 1761 00 69 1761 00 01 1761 00 11 1761 00 04 1761 00 12
1 1 1 1 1 1
For BLC universal touch dimmer order no. 2902 For BLC touch control unit 1-10 V order no. 2903 For BLC touch dimmer LV order no. 2904 For BLC triac switch insert LV order no. 2905 for BLC relay switch insert order no. 2906 For BLC relay switch insert with potential-free contact order no. 2906 10 For BLC extension unit order no 2907 For BLC relay switch insert HVAC order no. 2912 For BLC Tronic switch insert order no. 2916 For BLC stair light time switching impulse insert order no. 2934 10
with 2-push-buttons operation concept start-up brightness will be stored after power failure with BLC relay switch insert HVAC used as timer as well
Radio buttons BLC radio button
on page T12
Packing unit
white, glossy polar white, glossy brown, glossy light bronze, metal stainless steel gold, metal
1760 00 02 1760 00 69 1760 00 01 1760 00 11 1760 00 04 1760 00 12
1 1 1 1 1 1
Radio signal reception frequency 433,42 MHz; Learnable radio transmitters 30 Extension unit operation with BLC extension unit and push-button (NO) possible as of release R2.1. For actuation via button and radio transmitter.
on page T15
white, glossy polar white, glossy brown, glossy light bronze, lacquered stainless steel, lacquered
1783 00 02 1783 00 69 1783 00 01 1783 90 11 1783 90 04
1 1 1 1 1
Nominal mounting height 1,1 m; Range frontal approx. 10 m; Range lateral each approx. 6 m; Detection field semi-oval shaped approx. 10 x 12 m; Detection angle 180 °; Detection levels 2; Switching segments 72; Response sensitivity programmable approx. 20 - 100 % ; Response brightness adjustable approx. 0 - 80 / unlimited Lux; Delay time approx. 2 min.; Operating temperature -20 - +45 °C; Dimensions assembling height 23,5 mm Switches on for the duration of the controller delay time in case minimum response brightness level is infringed and if movement of people is detected. In conjunction with a BLC relay switch unit HVAC, the HVAC-channel is also switched on for the duration of its delay time independent of response brightness. For BLC universal touch dimmer order no. 2902 For BLC touch control unit 1-10 V order no. 2903 For BLC touch dimmer LV order no. 2904 For BLC triac switch insert LV order no. 2905 for BLC relay switch insert order no. 2906 For BLC relay switch insert with potential-free contact order no. 2906 10 For BLC controller extension unit order no. 2908 For BLC relay switch insert HVAC order no. 2912 For BLC Tronic switch insert order no. 2916 For BLC stair light time switching impulse insert order no. 2934 10
U with cover to limit detection angle to 90°
For BLC universal touch dimmer order no. 2902 For BLC touch control unit 1-10 V order no. 2903 For BLC touch dimmer LV order no. 2904 For BLC triac switch insert LV order no. 2905 for BLC relay switch insert order no. 2906 For BLC relay switch insert with potential-free contact order no. 2906 10 For BLC relay switch insert HVAC order no. 2912 For BLC Tronic switch insert order no. 2916
with 2-push-buttons operation concept with 5 light scenes for „on/off“, dimming value retrieving light scenes only by using radio transmitter radio signal of taught-in radio controllers causes switch on for 1 min. (retriggering) start-up brightness will be stored after power failure reset function (to factory setting)
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
249
BERKER ARSYS Order no.
Packing unit
Order no.
BLC controller 180 comfort with slide switch for off/automatic/on
on page T15
white, glossy polar white, glossy brown, glossy light bronze, lacquered stainless steel, lacquered
1784 00 02 1784 00 69 1784 00 01 1784 90 11 1784 90 04
1 1 1 1 1
Nominal mounting height 1,1 m; Range frontal approx. 10 m; Range lateral each approx. 6 m; Detection field semi-oval shaped approx. 10 x 12 m; Detection angle 180 °; Detection levels 2; Switching segments 72; Response sensitivity programmable approx. 20 - 100 % ; Response brightness adjustable approx. 0 - 80 / unlimited Lux; Delay time adjustable approx. 10 sec.- 30 min. ; Time to dim down 30 sec.; Step operation 0,5 sec.; Immunity time approx. 3 sec.; Operating temperature -20 - +45 °C; Dimensions assembling height 23,5 mm Switches on for the duration of the delay time set on the controller in case minimum response brightness level is infringed and if movement of people is detected. In conjunction with a BLC relay switch unit HVAC, the HVAC-channel is also switched on for the duration of its delay time independent of response brightness. For BLC universal touch dimmer order no. 2902 For BLC touch control unit 1-10 V order no. 2903 For BLC touch dimmer LV order no. 2904 For BLC triac switch insert LV order no. 2905 for BLC relay switch insert order no. 2906 For BLC relay switch insert with potential-free contact order no. 2906 10 For BLC controller extension unit order no. 2908 For BLC relay switch insert HVAC order no. 2912 For BLC Tronic switch insert order no. 2916 For BLC stair light time switching impulse insert order no. 2934 10
U
Packing unit
BLC controller 180
on page T15
white, glossy polar white, glossy brown, glossy light bronze, lacquered stainless steel, lacquered
1786 00 02 1786 00 69 1786 00 01 1786 90 11 1786 90 04
1 1 1 1 1
Nominal mounting height 2,2 m; Range frontal approx. 12 m; Range lateral each approx. 6 m; At assembly height 1,1 m; Range frontal approx. 6 m; Range lateral each approx. 3 m; Detection field semi-oval shaped approx. 12 x 12 m; Detection angle 180 °; Detection levels 3; Switching segments 104; Response sensitivity programmable approx. 20 - 100 % ; Response brightness adjustable approx. 0 - 80 / unlimited Lux; Delay time approx. 2 min.; Operating temperature -20 - +45 °C; Dimensions assembling height 23,5 mm Switches on for the duration of the controller delay time in case minimum response brightness level is infringed and if movement of people is detected. In conjunction with a BLC relay switch unit HVAC, the HVAC-channel is also switched on for the duration of its delay time independent of response brightness. For BLC universal touch dimmer order no. 2902 For BLC touch control unit 1-10 V order no. 2903 For BLC touch dimmer LV order no. 2904 For BLC triac switch insert LV order no. 2905 for BLC relay switch insert order no. 2906 For BLC relay switch insert with potential-free contact order no. 2906 10 For BLC controller extension unit order no. 2908 For BLC relay switch insert HVAC order no. 2912 For BLC Tronic switch insert order no. 2916 For BLC stair light time switching impulse insert order no. 2934 10
V with cover to limit detection angle to 90°
microprocessor controlled mode of oper.(detection signal evaluation and interfering signal suppres.) glare-proof e.g. against a torch no switching with unforeseeable short shadows with adaptive sensitivity adjustment with teach function for response brightness step operation with immunity time (e.g. for bell) switch-on brightness in conjunction with BLC dimmer inserts can only be saved via BLC extension unit with dimming function (soft-off) when using BLC dimmer inserts with cover to limit detection angle to 90°
250
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
BERKER ARSYS Order no.
Packing unit
BLC controller 180 comfort with slide switch for off/automatic/on
on page T15
white, glossy polar white, glossy brown, glossy light bronze, lacquered stainless steel, lacquered
1787 00 02 1787 00 69 1787 00 01 1787 90 11 1787 90 04
Order no.
Thermostats Room thermostat with NC contact, centre plate, rocker switch and LED
1 1 1 1 1 on page T34
Nominal mounting height 2,2 m; Range frontal approx. 12 m; Range lateral each approx. 6 m; At assembly height 1,1 m; Range frontal approx. 6 m; Range lateral each approx. 3 m; Detection field semi-oval shaped approx. 12 x 12 m; Detection angle 180 °; Detection levels 3; Switching segments 104; Response sensitivity programmable approx. 20 - 100 % ; Response brightness adjustable approx. 0 - 80 / unlimited Lux; Delay time adjustable approx. 10 sec.- 30 min. ; Time to dim down 30 sec.; Step operation 0,5 sec.; Immunity time approx. 3 sec.; Operating temperature -20 - +45 °C; Dimensions assembling height 23,5 mm
V microprocessor controlled mode of oper.(detection signal evaluation and interfering signal suppres.) glare-proof e.g. against a torch no switching with unforeseeable short shadows with adaptive sensitivity adjustment with teach function for response brightness step operation with immunity time (e.g. for bell) switch-on brightness in conjunction with BLC dimmer inserts can only be saved via BLC extension unit with dimming function (soft-off) when using BLC dimmer inserts with cover to limit detection angle to 90°
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
white, glossy polar white, glossy brown, glossy light bronze, lacquered stainless steel, lacquered
2030 00 02 2030 00 69 2030 00 01 2030 90 11 2030 90 04
1 1 1 1 1
5 - 30 °C, 50/60 Hz Rated voltage 250 V~; Switching current 10 A; Inductive load at cos φ 0,6 max. 4 A; Switching temperature difference approx. 0,5 °C; Night lowering approx. 4 °C Neutral conductor necessary! If the pre-set temperature is reached the contact opens. Replacement centre plate order no. 1671 00 .., 1671 90 .. Suitable valve drive order no. 7590 00 76
with imprint setting knob with temperature range limitation with on/off switch and indicator LED for „on“ with thermal return with separate connection for night lowering e.g. for valve drives closed in de-energized state without spreader claws with plug-in terminals
Switches on for the duration of the delay time set on the controller in case minimum response brightness level is infringed and if movement of people is detected. In conjunction with a BLC relay switch unit HVAC, the HVAC-channel is also switched on for the duration of its delay time independent of response brightness. For BLC universal touch dimmer order no. 2902 For BLC touch control unit 1-10 V order no. 2903 For BLC touch dimmer LV order no. 2904 For BLC triac switch insert LV order no. 2905 for BLC relay switch insert order no. 2906 For BLC relay switch insert with potential-free contact order no. 2906 10 For BLC controller extension unit order no. 2908 For BLC relay switch insert HVAC order no. 2912 For BLC Tronic switch insert order no. 2916 For BLC stair light time switching impulse insert order no. 2934 10
Packing unit
Room thermostat 24 V with NC contact, centre plate, rocker switch and LED
on page T34
white, glossy polar white, glossy brown, glossy light bronze, lacquered stainless steel, lacquered
2031 00 02 2031 00 69 2031 00 01 2031 90 11 2031 90 04
1 1 1 1 1
5 - 30 °C, 50/60 Hz Rated voltage 24 V~; Switching current 10 A~; Rated voltage 24 V=; Switching current 4 A=; Switching temperature difference approx. 0,5 °C; Night lowering approx. 4 °C If the pre-set temperature is reached the contact opens. Replacement centre plate order no. 1671 00 .., 1671 90 .. Suitable valve drive order no. 7590 00 77
with imprint setting knob with temperature range limitation with on/off switch and indicator LED for „on“ with control LED for „on“ with thermal return with separate connection for night lowering e.g. for valve drives closed in de-energized state without spreader claws with plug-in terminals
251
BERKER ARSYS Order no.
Packing unit
Order no.
Centre plate with setting knob, rocker and lens for room thermostat with NC contact white, glossy polar white, glossy brown, glossy light bronze, lacquered stainless steel, lacquered
1671 00 02 1671 00 69 1671 00 01 1671 90 11 1671 90 04
1 1 1 1 1
Replacement demand for order no. 2030 00 .., 2030 90 .., 2031 00 .., 2031 90 ..
with imprint setting knob with temperature range limitation
Room thermostat with change-over and centre plate
on page T34
white, glossy polar white, glossy brown, glossy light bronze, lacquered stainless steel, lacquered
2026 00 02 2026 00 69 2026 00 01 2026 90 11 2026 90 04
1 1 1 1 1
5 - 30 °C, 50/60 Hz Rated voltage 250 V~; Switching current „heating“ 10 A (4 A at cosphi=0,6); Switching current „cooling“ 5 A (2 A at cosphi=0,6); Switching temperature difference approx. 0,5 °C Neutral conductor necessary! If the pre-set temperature is reached the contact changes. Replacement centre plate order no. 1670 00 .., 1670 90 .. Suitable valve drive order no. 7590 00 76
with imprint setting knob with temperature range limitation for heating or cooling mode e.g. for valve drives closed in de-energized state with thermal return without spreader claws with plug-in terminals
Centre plate with setting knob for room thermostat with change-over contact white, glossy polar white, glossy brown, glossy light bronze, lacquered stainless steel, lacquered
1670 00 02 1670 00 69 1670 00 01 1670 90 11 1670 90 04
1 1 1 1 1
Packing unit
Floor thermostat with NO contact, centre plate, rocker switch, 2 LEDs and floor temperature sensor
on page T34
white, glossy polar white, glossy brown, glossy light bronze, lacquered stainless steel, lacquered
2034 00 02 2034 00 69 2034 00 01 2034 90 11 2034 90 04
1 1 1 1 1
10 - 50 °C, 50/60 Hz Rated voltage 250 V~; Switching current 10 A; Switching temperature difference approx. 1 °C; Night lowering approx. 5 °C; Sensor cable length 4 m Neutral conductor necessary! If the pre-set temperature is reached the contact closes. Replacement floor temperature sensor / remote sensor order no. 0161 Replacement centre plate order no. 1672 00 .., 1672 90 .. Suitable valve drive order no. 7590 00 76
with imprint setting knob with temperature range limitation with on/off switch and 2 LEDs with LED for heating and LED for night lowering with separate connection for night lowering e.g. for valve drives closed in de-energized state without spreader claws with plug-in terminals
Centre plate with setting knob, rocker and lenses for floor temperature thermostat white, glossy polar white, glossy brown, glossy light bronze, lacquered stainless steel, lacquered
1672 00 02 1672 00 69 1672 00 01 1672 90 11 1672 90 04
1 1 1 1 1
Replacement demand for order no. 2034 00 .., 2034 90 ..
with imprint setting knob with temperature range limitation
Replacement demand for order no. 2026 00 .., 2026 90 ..
with imprint setting knob with temperature range limitation
252
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
BERKER ARSYS Order no.
Packing unit
Thermostat time-controlled with NO contact and centre plate
on page T35
white, glossy polar white, glossy brown, glossy light bronze, lacquered stainless steel, lacquered
2043 00 02 2043 00 69 2043 00 01 2043 90 11 2043 90 04
Order no.
Sensor insert Central plate for sensor insert
1 1 1 1 1
white, glossy polar white, glossy light bronze, lacquered stainless steel, lacquered
0 - 40 °C, 50/60 Hz Rated voltage 230 V~; Switching current 8 A; Inductive load at cos φ 0,6 max. 2 A; Switching temperature difference approx. 0,5 °C; Time ranges 6 per day/week Neutral conductor necessary!
1 1 1 1
Labelling field not usable.
Sensor insert order no. 7594 10 01
with imprint for heating or cooling mode for room and floor heaters for floor heating, control using room and/or floor temperature possible e.g. for valve drives closed in de-energized state large-area display with symbols with thermal return via software with pre-set base programme with week and day programme with slide switch for manual/automatic with party function with valve protection function with frost protection function display of set or actual temperature with operating hours meter fuzzy logic comfort, standard and night temperature with self-teaching heating curve with integrated temperature sensor with additional connection for external floor temperature sensor/remote sensor without spreader claws with plug-in terminals
Centre plate for thermostat time-controlled 1116 00 02 1116 00 69 1116 00 01 1116 90 11 1116 90 04
7594 04 02 7594 04 09 7594 04 04 7594 04 03
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range.
Replacement centre plate order no. 1116 00 .., 1116 90 .. Suitable floor temperature sensor / remote sensor order no. 0161 Suitable valve drive order no. 7590 00 76
white, glossy polar white, glossy brown, glossy light bronze, lacquered stainless steel, lacquered
Packing unit
with slots for air circulation for e.g. temperature sensor PT100
RolloTec Comfort buttons RolloTec button comfort flat design
on page T37
white, glossy polar white, glossy brown, glossy light bronze, metal stainless steel gold, metal
1770 00 12 1770 00 79 1770 00 11 1770 90 21 1770 90 14 1770 90 12
1 1 1 1 1 1
Learnable running time 0,5 sec.- 2 min.; Lamella adjustment with signal < 1 sec.; Self-sustaining for 2 min. with signal > 1 - 4 sec. For RolloTec standard insert without neutral conductor connection order no. 2911 For RolloTec standard insert order no. 2925 For Rollotec comfort insert order no. 2975 For RolloTec comfort insert for direct current drives order no. 2975 01
with imprinted symbol arrows with lock-out protection e.g. for shutter control terrace door activation of lock-out protection in upper end pos. via buttons in „up“ direction min. 3 secs. with indicator LED for lock-out protection
1 1 1 1 1
Replacement demand for order no. 2043 00 .., 2043 90 ..
with imprint
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
253
BERKER ARSYS Order no.
Packing unit
Order no.
RolloTec button comfort with sensor connection, flat design
on page T37
white, glossy polar white, glossy brown, glossy light bronze, metal stainless steel gold, metal
1771 00 12 1771 00 79 1771 00 11 1771 90 21 1771 90 14 1771 90 12
Packing unit
RolloTec button comfort with sensor connection 1 1 1 1 1 1
on page T37
white, glossy polar white, glossy brown, glossy light bronze, lacquered stainless steel, lacquered
1771 00 02 1771 00 69 1771 00 01 1771 90 11 1771 90 04
1 1 1 1 1
Brightness value sun approx. 5 - 80 kLux; Learnable running time 4 sec.- 2 min.; Lamella adjustment with signal < 1 sec.; Locked for 2 min. upon actuation 1 - 4 Sec.
Brightness value sun approx. 5 - 80 kLux; Learnable running time 0,5 sec.- 2 min.; Lamella adjustment with signal < 1 sec.; Locked for 2 min. upon actuation 1 - 4 Sec.
For RolloTec brightness sensors order no. 0169, 0184 For RolloTec glass breakage sensor order no. 0170 For RolloTec adapter for sensors order no. 0171 For RolloTec standard insert without neutral conductor connection order no. 2911 For RolloTec standard insert order no. 2925 For Rollotec comfort insert order no. 2975 For RolloTec comfort insert for direct current drives order no. 2975 01 For magnetic contact order no. 9251 ..
For RolloTec brightness sensors order no. 0169, 0184 For RolloTec glass breakage sensor order no. 0170 For RolloTec adapter for sensors order no. 0171 For RolloTec standard insert without neutral conductor connection order no. 2911 For RolloTec standard insert order no. 2925 For Rollotec comfort insert order no. 2975 For RolloTec comfort insert for direct current drives order no. 2975 01 For magnetic contact order no. 9251 ..
with imprinted symbol arrows with lock-out protection e.g. for shutter control terrace door activation of lock-out protection in upper end pos. via buttons in „up“ direction min. 3 secs. with indicator LED for lock-out protection brightnesses individually adjustable on brightness sensor surface-mounted, the taught-in running time for sun protection movement is used no twilight sensor function only for sensor connection to terminal block
with embossed arrows with lock-out protection e.g. for shutter control terrace door activation of lock-out protection in upper end pos. via buttons in „up“ direction min. 3 secs. with indicator LED for lock-out protection brightness value for sunblind individually adjustable on brightness sensor surface-mounted, the taught-in running time for sun protection movement is used no twilight sensor function for sensor connection to socket contact or terminal block
Radio buttons RolloTec radio button, flat design
on page T37
white, glossy polar white, glossy brown, glossy light bronze, metal stainless steel gold, metal
1758 00 12 1758 00 79 1758 00 11 1758 90 21 1758 90 14 1758 90 12
1 1 1 1 1 1
Radio signal reception frequency 433,42 MHz; Learnable radio transmitters 30 ; Lamella adjustment with signal < 1 sec.; Self-sustaining for 2 min. with signal > 1 sec. For actuation via button and radio transmitter. For RolloTec standard insert without neutral conductor connection order no. 2911 For RolloTec standard insert order no. 2925 For Rollotec comfort insert order no. 2975 For RolloTec comfort insert for direct current drives order no. 2975 01
with imprinted symbol arrows with 5 light scenes for „open/close“ retrieving light scenes only by using radio transmitter
254
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
BERKER ARSYS Order no.
Packing unit
RolloTec radio button with sensor connection, flat design
on page T37
white, glossy polar white, glossy brown, glossy light bronze, metal stainless steel gold, metal
1759 00 12 1759 00 79 1759 00 11 1759 90 21 1759 90 14 1759 90 12
1 1 1 1 1 1
Order no.
Memory buttons RolloTec memory button, flat design
on page T37
Radio signal reception frequency 433,42 MHz; Learnable radio transmitters 30; Brightness value sun approx. 5 - 80 kLux; Lamella adjustment with signal < 1 sec.; Self-sustaining for 2 min. with signal > 1 sec.
with imprinted symbol arrows with 5 light scenes for „open/close“ retrieving light scenes only by using radio transmitter brightness value for sunblind individually adjustable no twilight sensor function only for sensor connection to terminal block
RolloTec radio button with sensor connection
on page T37
1756 00 12 1756 00 79 1756 00 11 1756 90 21 1756 90 14 1756 90 12
1 1 1 1 1 1
Stored „up“ and/or „down“ time is run daily in automatic operation. For manual and timer programmed running of awnings, shutters and blinds.
For RolloTec brightness sensors order no. 0169, 0184 For RolloTec glass breakage sensor order no. 0170 For RolloTec adapter for sensors order no. 0171 For RolloTec standard insert without neutral conductor connection order no. 2911 For RolloTec standard insert order no. 2925 For Rollotec comfort insert order no. 2975 For RolloTec comfort insert for direct current drives order no. 2975 01 For magnetic contact order no. 9251 ..
1759 00 02 1759 00 69 1759 00 01 1759 90 11 1759 90 04
white, glossy polar white, glossy brown, glossy light bronze, metal stainless steel gold, metal
Lamella adjustment with signal < 1 sec.; Self-sustaining for 2 min. with signal > 1 sec.; Storage of „up/down“ time with signal > 3,5 sec.
For actuation via button and radio transmitter.
white, glossy polar white, glossy brown, glossy light bronze, lacquered stainless steel, lacquered
Packing unit
1 1 1 1 1
Radio signal reception frequency 433,42 MHz; Learnable radio transmitters 30; Brightness value sun approx. 5 - 80 kLux; Lamella adjustment with signal < 1 sec.; Self-sustaining for 2 min. with signal > 1 sec. For actuation via button and radio transmitter. For RolloTec brightness sensors order no. 0169, 0184 For RolloTec glass breakage sensor order no. 0170 For RolloTec adapter for sensors order no. 0171 For RolloTec standard insert without neutral conductor connection order no. 2911 For RolloTec standard insert order no. 2925 For Rollotec comfort insert order no. 2975 For RolloTec comfort insert for direct current drives order no. 2975 01 For magnetic contact order no. 9251 ..
For RolloTec standard insert without neutral conductor connection order no. 2911 For RolloTec standard insert order no. 2925 For Rollotec comfort insert order no. 2975 For RolloTec comfort insert for direct current drives order no. 2975 01
with imprinted symbol arrows
RolloTec memory button, sensor connection, flat design
on page T37
white, glossy polar white, glossy brown, glossy light bronze, metal stainless steel gold, metal
1757 00 12 1757 00 79 1757 00 11 1757 90 21 1757 90 14 1757 90 12
1 1 1 1 1 1
Brightness value sun approx. 20 kLux; Lamella adjustment with signal < 1 sec.; Self-sustaining for 2 min. with signal > 1 sec.; Storage of „up/down“ time with signal > 3,5 sec. Stored „up“ and/or „down“ time is run daily in automatic operation. For manual and timer programmed running of awnings, shutters and blinds. For RolloTec brightness sensors order no. 0169, 0184 For RolloTec glass breakage sensor order no. 0170 For RolloTec adapter for sensors order no. 0171 For RolloTec standard insert without neutral conductor connection order no. 2911 For RolloTec standard insert order no. 2925 For Rollotec comfort insert order no. 2975 For RolloTec comfort insert for direct current drives order no. 2975 01 For magnetic contact order no. 9251 ..
with imprinted symbol arrows no twilight sensor function only for sensor connection to terminal block
with embossed arrows with 5 light scenes for „open/close“ retrieving light scenes only by using radio transmitter brightness value for sunblind individually adjustable no twilight sensor function for sensor connection to socket contact or terminal block
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
255
BERKER ARSYS Order no.
Packing unit
Order no.
RolloTec memory button with sensor connection
on page T37
white, glossy polar white, glossy brown, glossy light bronze, lacquered stainless steel, lacquered
1757 00 02 1757 00 69 1757 00 01 1757 90 11 1757 90 04
RolloTec timer comfort with display 1 1 1 1 1
on page T37
white, glossy polar white, glossy brown, glossy light bronze, lacquered stainless steel, lacquered
1774 00 02 1774 00 69 1774 00 01 1774 90 11 1774 90 04
1 1 1 1 1
Stored „up“ and/or „down“ time is run daily in automatic operation.
Operation times 18 up/down; Random generator +/- 15 min.; Power reserve approx. 3 hrs., maintenance-free; Astronomic time shift +/- 2 hrs.; Learnable down time 1 sec.- 6 min.; Lamella adjusting time 0 - 5 sec.; Lamella adjustment with signal < 1 sec.; Lock at touching > 1 sec.
For manual and timer programmed running of awnings, shutters and blinds.
For manual and timer programmed running of awnings, shutters and blinds.
For RolloTec brightness sensors order no. 0169, 0184 For RolloTec glass breakage sensor order no. 0170 For RolloTec adapter for sensors order no. 0171 For RolloTec standard insert without neutral conductor connection order no. 2911 For RolloTec standard insert order no. 2925 For Rollotec comfort insert order no. 2975 For RolloTec comfort insert for direct current drives order no. 2975 01 For magnetic contact order no. 9251 ..
For RolloTec standard insert without neutral conductor connection order no. 2911 For RolloTec standard insert order no. 2925 For Rollotec comfort insert order no. 2975 For RolloTec comfort insert for direct current drives order no. 2975 01
Brightness value sun approx. 20 kLux; Lamella adjustment with signal < 1 sec.; Self-sustaining for 2 min. with signal > 1 sec.; Storage of „up/down“ time with signal > 3,5 sec.
with embossed arrows no twilight sensor function for sensor connection to socket contact or terminal block
Timer switches RolloTec easy timer with display
on page T37
Packing unit
white, glossy polar white, glossy brown, glossy light bronze, lacquered stainless steel, lacquered
1762 00 02 1762 00 69 1762 00 01 1762 90 11 1762 90 04
1 1 1 1 1
with German display text with totally 3 independent programme memories 2 programme memories pre-set programming according to week and days possible programme memory network failure proved with automatic summer-/winter time switching (can be switched off) astro programme for sunrise/sundown running large-area display with symbols indication of the next operation schedule under consideration of astro and coincidence function with slide switch for manual/automatic lock out protection because evaluation of the centre or extension unit commands can be switched off lamella position programmable at down operation times
Operation times 2 up/down; Power reserve approx. 6 hrs., maintenance-free; Lamella adjustment with signal < 1 sec.; Self-sustaining for 2 min. with signal > 1 sec. No extension units and sensor signals or central commands will be processed. For manual and timer programmed running of awnings, shutters and blinds. For RolloTec standard insert without neutral conductor connection order no. 2911 For RolloTec standard insert order no. 2925 For Rollotec comfort insert order no. 2975 For RolloTec comfort insert for direct current drives order no. 2975 01
with imprint in German with pre-set base programme simple programming of operation times with quick programming mode programming possible up to 6 hours after pulling from the insert 2 programme blocks Mon. - Fri. and Sat. - Sun. large-area display with slide switch for manual/automatic
256
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
BERKER ARSYS Order no.
Packing unit
on page T37
1775 00 02 1775 00 69 1775 00 01 1775 90 11 1775 90 04
Packing unit
Intermediate rings
RolloTec timer comfort with display and sensor connection white, glossy polar white, glossy brown, glossy light bronze, lacquered stainless steel, lacquered
Order no.
1 1 1 1 1
Setting range sun approx. 1 - 76 kLux; Setting range twilight approx. 6 - 300 Lux; Operation times 18 up/down; Random generator +/- 15 min.; Power reserve approx. 3 hrs., maintenance-free; Astronomic time shift +/- 2 hrs.; Learnable down time 1 sec.- 6 min.; Lamella adjusting time 0 - 5 sec.; Lamella adjustment with signal < 1 sec.; Lock at touching > 1 sec. For manual and timer programmed running of awnings, shutters and blinds. For RolloTec brightness sensors order no. 0169, 0184 For RolloTec glass breakage sensor order no. 0170 For RolloTec adapter for sensors order no. 0171 For RolloTec standard insert without neutral conductor connection order no. 2911 For RolloTec standard insert order no. 2925 For Rollotec comfort insert order no. 2975 For RolloTec comfort insert for direct current drives order no. 2975 01 For magnetic contact order no. 9251 ..
with German display text with totally 3 independent programme memories 2 programme memories pre-set programming according to week and days possible programme memory network failure proved with automatic summer-/winter time switching (can be switched off) astro programme for sunrise/sundown running large-area display with symbols indication of the next operation schedule under consideration of astro and coincidence function with slide switch for manual/automatic lock out protection because evaluation of the centre or extension unit commands can be switched off lamella position programmable at down operation times with surface-mounted RolloTec brightness sensor additionally settable with shutter and lamella pos. connected RolloTec brightness sensor can be used for twilight-controlled lowering con.surface-mounted RolloTec brightness sensor suitable for twilight-controlled raising and lowering for the sensor connection on the clamping block in the insert
Hinged cover with labelling field, flat design white, glossy polar white, glossy brown, glossy stainless steel, lacquered
1140 00 02 1140 00 69 1140 00 01 1140 90 04
10 10 10 10
light bronze, lacquered
1140 90 11
10
To be used for push-buttons with hinged cover, for example. Labelling field height arranged for 6 mm P-touch strips. For post-installation clipping into centre plates with labelling field. with imprint
Hinged cover with labelling field, high design white, glossy polar white, glossy brown, glossy stainless steel, lacquered
1141 00 02 1141 00 69 1141 00 01 1141 90 04
10 10 10 10
light bronze, lacquered
1141 90 11
10
Labelling field height arranged for 6 mm P-touch strips. For post-installation clipping into centre plates with labelling field. with imprint
Adapter ring for centre plate 50 x 50 mm white, glossy polar white, glossy brown, glossy light bronze, lacquered stainless steel, lacquered
1108 01 02 1108 01 69 1108 01 01 1108 91 11 1108 91 04
10 10 10 10 10
Attention! Not suitable for Berker central plates. For centre plate as per DIN 49075 for other centre plates with external size 50 x 50 mm and SCHUKO-socket outlet
Intermediate ring for central plate white, glossy polar white, glossy brown, glossy light bronze, lacquered stainless steel, lacquered
1108 00 02 1108 00 69 1108 00 01 1108 90 11 1108 90 04
10 10 10 10 10
labelling field latchable
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
257
BERKER ARSYS Order no.
Packing unit
Labelling fields
Packing unit
Signalling and command units Labelling field for flush installation in intermediate ring for central plate white, glossy polar white, glossy stainless steel, lacquered
1905 00 02 1905 00 69 1905 70 04
Central plate for transmitting and control device Ø 18.8 mm 10 10 10
Labelling field height arranged for 6 mm P-touch strips.
Intermediate rings Intermediate ring with hinged cover flat design for central plate and centre plate 50 x 50 mm white, glossy polar white, glossy brown, glossy light bronze, metal stainless steel gold, metal
1154 00 02 1154 00 69 1154 00 01 1154 10 01 1154 10 04 1154 10 02
10 10 10 10 10 10
with imprint
Intermediate ring with hinged cover and labelling field flat execution white, glossy polar white, glossy brown, glossy light bronze, metal stainless steel gold, metal
1155 00 02 1155 00 69 1155 00 01 1155 10 01 1155 10 04 1155 10 02
10 10 10 10 10 10
Labelling field height arranged for 6 mm P-touch strips. with imprint
white, glossy polar white, glossy brown, glossy light bronze, lacquered stainless steel, lacquered
1155 01 02 1155 01 69 1155 01 01 1155 91 11 1155 91 04
10 10 10 10 10
Labelling field height arranged for 6 mm P-touch strips. with imprint with cable outlet
white, glossy polar white, glossy stainless steel, lacquered
1431 02 1431 09 1431 04
10 10 10
Screw distance 36 mm Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range. Suitable for installation of equipotential bonding built-in socket order no. 4604
Circular plug-in connector: Amphenol-Tuchel; Binder; Cannon; Farnell; Hirose; Hirschmann; Lumberg; Monacor; RS Components; Extra low voltage jack: PRO-CAR with supporting plate with cut-out dia. 18.8 mm without spreader claws
Centre plate for signalling and control device Ø 18.8 mm light bronze, metal stainless steel gold, metal
1070 01 01 1070 01 04 1070 01 02
10 10 10
Screw distance 36 mm Suitable for installation of equipotential bonding built-in socket order no. 4604
Intermediate ring with hinged cover and labelling field dome execution
258
Order no.
Circular plug-in connector: Amphenol-Tuchel; Binder; Cannon; Farnell; Hirose; Hirschmann; Lumberg; Monacor; RS Components; Extra low voltage jack: PRO-CAR with supporting plate with cut-out dia. 18.8 mm without spreader claws
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
BERKER ARSYS Order no.
Packing unit
Order no.
Packing unit
Central plate for signalling and control device Ø 22.5 mm
Centre plate for loudspeaker socket outlet and miniature connector insert with labelling field
white, glossy polar white, glossy stainless steel, lacquered
1432 02 1432 09 1432 04
10 10 10
white, glossy, 1gang, 1 knock out opening
1185 00 02
10
1185 00 69
10
yellow, glossy
1432 07
10
polar white, glossy, 1gang, 1 knock out opening brown, glossy, 1gang, 1 knock out opening
1185 00 01
10
white, glossy, 2gang polar white, glossy, 2gang
1187 00 02 1187 00 69
10 10
brown, glossy, 2gang
1187 00 01
10
Screw distance 36 mm Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range. Signalling and command units: Kraus-Naimer; Lumitas; Schlegel; Overvoltage protection devices: Dehn, order no. NM DK 280; OBO-Bettermann, order no. KNS/IS-D with supporting plate with cut-out dia. 22.5 mm without spreader claws
Labelling field height arranged for 6 mm P-touch strips. For miniature connector insert order no. 4505 For stereo loudspeaker socket outlet order no. 4505 01 For loudspeaker socket outlet High End order no. 4505 02 For BNC/TNC connector insert order no. 4577, 4579
Centre plate for loudspeaker socket outlet and miniature connector insert
Centre plate for signalling and control device Ø 22.5 mm light bronze, metal stainless steel gold, metal
1071 01 01 1071 01 04 1071 01 02
light bronze, metal, 1gang, 1 knock out opening stainless steel, 1gang, 1 knock out opening
10 10 10
Screw distance 36 mm Signalling and command units: Kraus-Naimer; Lumitas; Schlegel; Overvoltage protection devices: Dehn, order no. NM DK 280; OBO-Bettermann, order no. KNS/IS-D with supporting plate with cut-out dia. 22.5 mm without spreader claws NEW
Central plate for XLR round connectors D series 1412 02 1412 09
10 10
Cut-out diameter 23,6 mm; Distance between screws (horizontal/vertical) 19 / 24 mm Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range. Circular plug-in connector: Cannon; Deltron; Farnell; Hirose; Monacor; Neutrik; RS Components with supporting plate speakon and jack connector without spreader claws
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
10
1184 00 04
10
gold, metal, 1gang, 1 knock out opening
1184 00 02
10
light bronze, metal, 2gang
1186 00 01
10
stainless steel, 2gang gold, metal, 2gang
1186 00 04 1186 00 02
10 10
For miniature connector insert order no. 4505 For stereo loudspeaker socket outlet order no. 4505 01 For loudspeaker socket outlet High End order no. 4505 02 For BNC/TNC connector insert order no. 4577, 4579
TV/audio
white, glossy polar white, glossy
1184 00 01
Centre plate for aerial socket 1-hole white, glossy polar white, glossy light bronze, metal stainless steel
* 1499 00 02 * 1499 00 69 * 1499 01 01 * 1499 00 04
10 10 10 10
Centre plate for aerial socket 2- and 3-hole white, glossy polar white, glossy brown, glossy light bronze, metal stainless steel gold, metal
1201 01 02 1201 01 69 1201 01 01 1202 00 01 1202 00 04 1202 00 02
10 10 10 10 10 10
For aerial socket 2-hole single box order no. 4502, HIFS 1B For aerial socket 2-hole throughpass socket order no. 4515 For aerial socket 3-hole single box order no. 4522 For aerial socket 3-hole throughpass socket order no. 4523, 4593
with knock out SAT input
259
BERKER ARSYS Order no.
Packing unit
Centre plate for aerial socket 2- and 3-hole with labelling field white, glossy polar white, glossy brown, glossy
1201 00 02 1201 00 69 1201 00 01
10 10 10
Labelling field height arranged for 6 mm P-touch strips. For aerial socket 2-hole single box order no. 4502, HIFS 1B For aerial socket 2-hole throughpass socket order no. 4515 For aerial socket 3-hole single box order no. 4522 For aerial socket 3-hole throughpass socket order no. 4523, 4593
with knock out SAT input
Central plate for aerial socket 4-hole white, glossy polar white, glossy brown light bronze, lacquered stainless steel, lacquered
1483 02 1483 09 1483 01 1483 11 1483 04
10 10 10 10 10
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range. Aerial sockets: Hirschmann with 2 additional SAT outputs (F-sockets)
Central plate for aerial socket 4-hole white, glossy polar white, glossy brown light bronze, lacquered stainless steel, lacquered
1484 02 1484 09 1484 01 1484 11 1484 04
10 10 10 10 10
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range. For aerial socket 4-hole single box order no. 4594
Aerial sockets: Ankaro; Astro; Axing; Delta; Schwaiger with 2 additional SAT outputs (F-sockets)
1439 02 1439 09
10 10
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range. Broadband modem socket: Wisi with additional multimedia output
260
Packing unit
Data-/telecommunications Centre plate for cable outlet and VDo connection box white, glossy polar white, glossy brown, glossy light bronze, lacquered stainless steel, lacquered
1005 00 02 1005 00 69 1005 00 01 1004 90 11 1004 90 04
10 10 10 10 10
For cable outlet order no. 4468, 4470
VDo connection boxes: Rutenbeck with outlet
Centre plate for TAE socket outlet and loudspeaker connection box white, glossy polar white, glossy brown, glossy light bronze, metal stainless steel gold, metal
1035 01 02 1035 01 69 1035 01 01 1034 00 01 1034 00 04 1034 00 02
10 10 10 10 10 10
For TAE socket outlet order no. 4487 .., 4500 .., 4544 .. For loudspeaker connection box order no. 4572 .., 4573 .. For FCC/TAE socket outlet order no. 4588 .. For USB data interface flush-mounted order no. 7504 00 04
EAD socket outlets: Drivex; Fröhlich + Walter; Intracom; TAE and FCC overvoltage protection sockets: Dehn; FCC socket outlets: Dätwyler; Rutenbeck
Centre plate for TAE socket outlet and loudspeaker connection box white, glossy polar white, glossy brown, glossy
1035 00 02 1035 00 69 1035 00 01
10 10 10
Labelling field height arranged for 6 mm P-touch strips.
Central plate for broadband modem box white, glossy polar white, glossy
Order no.
For TAE socket outlet order no. 4487 .., 4500 .., 4544 .. For loudspeaker connection box order no. 4572 .., 4573 .. For FCC/TAE socket outlet order no. 4588 .. For USB data interface flush-mounted order no. 7504 00 04
EAD socket outlets: Drivex; Fröhlich + Walter; Intracom; TAE and FCC overvoltage protection sockets: Dehn; FCC socket outlets: Dätwyler; Rutenbeck
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
BERKER ARSYS Order no.
Packing unit
Central plate for TAE socket outlet 6F+N white, glossy polar white, glossy brown, glossy light bronze, lacquered stainless steel, lacquered
1457 02 1457 09 1457 01 1457 11 1457 04
10 10 10 10 10
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range. For TAE socket outlet order no. 4487 ..
Central plate for TAE socket outlet 6/6FF and 6/6NF and loudspeaker connection box white, glossy polar white, glossy brown, glossy light bronze, lacquered stainless steel, lacquered
1458 02 1458 09 1458 01 1458 11 1458 04
10 10 10 10 10
Packing unit
Centre plate for PTT socket outlet „Netherlands“ white, glossy polar white, glossy brown, glossy light bronze, lacquered stainless steel, lacquered
61 1026 00 02 61 1026 00 69 61 1026 00 01 61 1026 90 11 61 1026 90 04
10 10 10 10 10
universal for standard commercially available PTT socket outlets
Centre plate for RTT socket outlet „Belgium“ white, glossy polar white, glossy light bronze, lacquered stainless steel, lacquered
67 1025 00 02 67 1025 00 69 67 1025 90 11 67 1025 90 04
10 10 10 10
For RTT socket outlet order no. BERT T0 1
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range. For TAE socket outlet order no. 4487 .., 4500 .., 4544 .. For loudspeaker connection box order no. 4572 .., 4573 .. For FCC/TAE socket outlet order no. 4588 .. For USB data interface flush-mounted order no. 7504 00 04
1407 00 02 1407 00 69 1407 00 01 1408 00 01 1408 00 04 1408 00 02
10 10 10 10 10 10
FCC socket outlets: Ackermann; AMP; BTR; Crack-IT; Rutenbeck; Telegärtner; Telena with 45° oblique outlet for 1gang socket outlet cat.3, cat.5e and cat.6
for USB data interface flush-mounted 1 knock out opening
Central plate for 1st TAE socket outlet (Telekom) # 1477 02 # 1477 09 # 1477 01 # 1477 11 # 1477 04
Centre plate for FCC socket outlet white, glossy polar white, glossy brown, glossy light bronze, metal stainless steel gold, metal
For FCC socket outlet order no. 4538, 4568 For FCC socket outlet shielded order no. 4554, 4586, 4590
EAD socket outlets: Drivex; Fröhlich + Walter; Intracom; TAE and FCC overvoltage protection sockets: Dehn; FCC socket outlets: Dätwyler; Rutenbeck
white, glossy polar white, glossy brown, glossy light bronze, lacquered stainless steel, lacquered
Order no.
10 10 10 10 10
Identifies the 1st TAE socket outlet inside an apartment/property. Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range. with imprint 2 knock out openings
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
261
BERKER ARSYS Order no.
Packing unit
Central plate for FCC socket outlet white, glossy polar white, glossy brown, glossy light bronze, lacquered stainless steel, lacquered
1468 02 1468 09 1468 01 1468 11 1468 04
10 10 10 10 10
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range.
For FCC socket outlet order no. 4538, 4568 For FCC socket outlet shielded order no. 4554, 4586, 4590
FCC socket outlets: Ackermann; AMP; BTR; Crack-IT; Rutenbeck; Telegärtner; Telena with 45° oblique outlet for 1gang socket outlet cat.3, cat.5e and cat.6
Centre plate for FCC/E-DAT design/Telekom ISDN socket outlet white, glossy polar white, glossy brown, glossy light bronze, metal stainless steel gold, metal
1409 00 02 1409 00 69 1409 00 01 1410 00 01 1410 00 04 1410 00 02
10 10 10 10 10 10
For FCC socket outlet order no. 4539, 4562, 4592 For FCC socket outlet shielded order no. 4555, 4587, 4591
ISDN socket outlets (Rutenbeck): Telekom; FCC socket outlets: Ackermann; AMP; BTR; CobiNet; Corning; Crack-IT; CTI Netzwerksysteme; Dätwyler; EFB Electronic; eku Kabel & Systeme; Elmat; Rutenbeck; Setec; Süveg; Telegärtner; Telena with 45° oblique outlet for 2gang socket outlet cat.3, cat.5e and cat.6
262
Order no.
Packing unit
Central plate FCC/E-DAT design/Telekom ISDN socket outlet white, glossy polar white, glossy brown, glossy light bronze, lacquered stainless steel, lacquered
1469 02 1469 09 1469 01 1469 11 1469 04
10 10 10 10 10
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range.
For FCC socket outlet order no. 4539, 4562, 4592 For FCC socket outlet shielded order no. 4555, 4587, 4591
ISDN socket outlets (Rutenbeck): Telekom; FCC socket outlets: Ackermann; AMP; BTR; CobiNet; Corning; Crack-IT; CTI Netzwerksysteme; Dätwyler; EFB Electronic; eku Kabel & Systeme; Elmat; Rutenbeck; Setec; Süveg; Telegärtner; Telena with 45° oblique outlet for 2gang socket outlet cat.3, cat.5e and cat.6
Central plate for FCC and Telekom ISDN socket outlet (IAE) white, glossy polar white, glossy
1429 02 1429 09
10 10
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range. ISDN socket outlets (ZE Kommunikationstechnik): Telekom; FCC socket outlets: Telena; ZE Kommunikationstechnik with 25° oblique outlet for 2gang socket outlet cat.3
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
BERKER ARSYS Order no.
Packing unit
Central plate for FCC and Telekom ISDN socket outlet (IAE) white, glossy polar white, glossy
1430 02 1430 09
10 10
Central plate for FCC/IAE/FCC-DAT 300E socket outlet 10 10 10 10 10
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range. FCC socket outlets: BTR; Farnell; Fröhlich + Walter; Krone; Schumann; Telena with 45° oblique outlet for 1gang socket outlet cat.3 and cat.6
1467 02 1467 09 1467 01 1467 11 1467 04
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
10 10 10 10 10
FCC socket outlets: BTR; Farnell; Fröhlich + Walter; Krone; Schumann; Telena with 45° oblique outlet for 2gang socket outlet cat.6
Central plate for E-DAT plus socket outlet with labelling field white, glossy polar white, glossy
1413 02 1413 09
10 10
Labelling field height arranged for 6 mm P-touch strips.
FCC socket outlets: BTR; Fröhlich + Walter; Telena with 45° oblique outlet with dust protection cover for 1gang or 2gang socket outlet cat.6 10 10 10 10 10
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range. ISDN socket outlets (BTR): Telekom; FCC socket outlets: BTR; EFB Electronic; Farnell; Fröhlich + Walter; Krone; Monacor; Telena with 45° oblique outlet for 2gang socket outlet cat.3
1478 02 1478 09 1478 01 1478 11 1478 04
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range.
Central plate for FCC/IAE/Telekom ISDN socket outlet white, glossy polar white, glossy brown, glossy light bronze, lacquered stainless steel, lacquered
white, glossy polar white, glossy brown, glossy light bronze, lacquered stainless steel, lacquered
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range.
ISDN socket outlets (Kräcker): Telekom; FCC socket outlets: Farnell; Kräcker with 45° oblique outlet for 2gang socket outlet cat.3
1446 02 1446 09 1446 01 1446 11 1446 04
Packing unit
Central plate for FCC-DAT 300E socket outlet
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range.
white, glossy polar white, glossy brown, glossy light bronze, lacquered stainless steel, lacquered
Order no.
Central plate for FCC socket outlet white, glossy polar white, glossy
1420 02 1420 09
10 10
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range. FCC socket outlets: Ackermann; CobiNet; Quante; Telena with 45° oblique outlet 1 knock out opening for 1gang or 2gang socket outlet cat.3
263
BERKER ARSYS Order no.
Packing unit
Central plate for WAEG2 socket outlet white, glossy polar white, glossy
# 1489 02 # 1489 09
10 10
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range.
with 45° oblique outlet 1 knock out opening for 1gang or 2gang socket outlet cat.5
Central plate for WAEG5 and WAEG6 socket outlet with labelling field # 1421 02 # 1421 09
10 10
Labelling field height arranged for 6 mm P-touch strips. Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range. FCC socket outlets: Ackermann; Elmat; Süveg; Telena with 45° oblique outlet with dust protection cover for 1gang or 2gang socket outlet cat.6
Central plate for EMJ45 socket outlet white, glossy polar white, glossy
1422 02 1422 09
10 10
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range. FCC socket outlets: Telegärtner; Telena with 45° oblique outlet for 1gang or 2gang socket outlet cat.5e
264
Packing unit
Central plate for VAD socket outlet with labelling field white, glossy polar white, glossy
1423 02 1423 09
10 10
Labelling field height arranged for 6 mm P-touch strips. Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range.
FCC socket outlets: Ackermann; Quante; Telena
white, glossy polar white, glossy
Order no.
FCC socket outlets: Lanconnect; Schumann; Telegärtner; Telena with 45° oblique outlet with dust protection cover for 1gang or 2gang socket outlet cat.6
Central plate for FCC socket outlet white, glossy polar white, glossy
1419 02 1419 09
10 10
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range. FCC socket outlets: Brand-Rex; CobiNet; Drivex; EFB Electronic; Fröhlich + Walter; Fröschel; Intracom; OTRA; Schumann; Setec; Sevex; Siemens; Sonepar; ZE Kommunikationstechnik with 40° oblique outlet for 1gang or 2gang socket outlet cat.5, cat.5e and cat.6
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
BERKER ARSYS Order no.
Packing unit
Central plate for 3 MINI-COM modules white, glossy polar white, glossy
1427 02 1427 09
10 10
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range. For mini jack order no. 1980, 1984, 1985 For cinch module set order no. 1989 For blank module order no. 1990 For video cinch module order no. 1992 For S-Video module order no. 1993 For VGA module order no. 1994
Central plate for 1 or 2 single modules Reichle&De-Massari 1472 02 1472 09
Central plate for double modules Reichle&De-Massari white, glossy polar white, glossy brown, glossy light bronze, lacquered stainless steel, lacquered
1461 02 1461 09 1461 01 1461 11 1461 04
10 10 10 10 10
Modules: Diamond; Reichle&De-Massari with supporting plate for connecting modules RJ45 cat.5e and cat.6 for fibre-optic modules with 30° oblique outlet without spreader claws
Central plate for AMP modular jacks white, glossy polar white, glossy brown light bronze, lacquered stainless steel, lacquered
1463 02 1463 09 1463 01 1463 11 1463 04
10 10 10 10 10
Indexing dimension (W x H) approx. 14,7 x 20,7 mm Shielded versions touch each other.
10 10
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range. Modules: Reichle&De-Massari with supporting plate for connecting modules RJ45 cat.5e and cat.6 for fibre-optic modules with 30° oblique outlet without spreader claws
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
Packing unit
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range.
Modules: Panduit with supporting plate for Mini-Com jacks cat.3, cat.5e, cat.6, cat.6 10Gig for Mini-Com fibre-optic modules for Mini-Com BNC connector modules for Mini-Com 3.5 mm stereo connection/coupling modules for Mini-Com loudspeaker cables / banana plug modules for Mini-Com F-plug coupling modules for Mini-Com Cinch connection/coupling modules for Mini-Com S-Video connection/coupling modules for Mini-Com D-Subminiature connectors 15pole for Mini-Com dummy modules 1gang with 30° oblique outlet without spreader claws
white, glossy polar white, glossy
Order no.
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range. MT-RJ jack: AMP; Intracom; Telena; Modular jacks: CobiNet; EFB Electronic; Schumann; Standard 110 Connect jack: AMP; SL series toolless jack: AMP; SL series 110 Connect Jack: AMP; SL series toolless jack with dust protection: AMP with supporting plate for AMP modular jacks series 110 Connect cat.3, cat.5, cat.5e and cat.6 for AMP fibre-optic couplings MT-RJ jacks 2gang, with 30° oblique outlet without spreader claws
265
BERKER ARSYS Order no.
Packing unit
Central plate for Krone modular jacks white, glossy polar white, glossy
1464 02 1464 09
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range. For modular jack order no. 1854 01
Modular jacks: 3M; Asyco; BTR; Dätwyler; EFB Electronic; Erni; Hubbell; ICS; Krone; Setec; Telegärtner; Thomas & Betts; Eline 600 GG45 jacks: Kerpen; Keystone Jack: Kerpen; LANmark 5, 6 and 7 (only with with Keystone-Clip): Nexans; Fibre-optic couplings: 3M; Krone; mvk with supporting plate for Krone modular jacks cat.5, cat.5e and cat.6 for Krone fibre-optic couplings MT-RJ jacks for 3M fibre-optic couplings Volition 2gang, with 30° oblique outlet without spreader claws
Central plate for Drahtex modular jacks 1462 02 1462 09
10 10
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range. Installation only possible with Drahtex mounting or coding frame. Modular jacks: CobiNet; Drahtex with supporting plate for Drahtex modular jacks cat.5, cat.5e, cat.6 and cat.7 for fibre-optic modules 2gang, with 30° oblique outlet without spreader claws
266
Packing unit
Central plate for LEXCOM HOME modules 10 10
Indexing dimension (W x H) approx. 14,7 x 19,4 mm
white, glossy polar white, glossy
Order no.
white, glossy polar white, glossy stainless steel, lacquered
1441 02 1441 09 1441 04
10 10 10
Attention! Can only be used with intermediate ring and central plate of the corresponding range. Installation is only possible in connection with the assembly frame of Messrs. Lexel. with supporting plate 2gang, with 30° oblique outlet without spreader claws LEXCOM HOME® Registered trademark of Messrs. Lexel A/S.
Central plate for Eline and GiCon4 jacks white, glossy polar white, glossy
1498 02 1498 09
10 10
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range! Installation only in conjunction with BTR and Kerpen clips. GiCon4 jacks: BTR; Eline 1200- and 250 jacks: Kerpen with supporting plate for ELine and GiCon4 sockets cat.5e, cat.6, cat.7 2gang, with 30° oblique outlet without spreader claws
Centre plate with dust protection sliders and labelling field white, glossy polar white, glossy brown, glossy light bronze, lacquered stainless steel, lacquered
1182 00 02 1182 00 69 1182 00 01 1182 90 11 1182 90 04
10 10 10 10 10
Labelling field height arranged for 6 mm P-touch strips. For supporting plate 2gang order no. 4541 ..
for supporting plates with coloured mounts 2gang
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
BERKER ARSYS Order no.
Packing unit
Centre plate for AMP-ACO with labelling field polar white, glossy polar white, glossy brown, glossy light bronze, lacquered stainless steel, lacquered
1177 00 02 1177 00 69 1177 00 01 1177 90 11 1177 90 04
10 10 10 10 10
Labelling field height arranged for 6 mm P-touch strips. ACO and CO Plus inserts: AMP, order no. 0-1394581-1, 2-1394581-1; Anixter; Dr. Ing. Sieger; Schumann; Telena cat.5, cat.6 and cat.7 centre plate plug-in fixing
Central plate for AMP-ACO white, glossy polar white, glossy
1494 02 1494 09
10 10
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range. Labelling field not usable.
Central plate for AMP-ACO with labelling field 1495 02 1495 09
10 10
Labelling field height arranged for 6 mm P-touch strips. Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range. ACO and CO Plus inserts: AMP, order no. 0-0336627-1, 2-0336627-1, 0-0336627-3 cat.5, cat.6 and cat.7
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
Packing unit
Centre plate for AMP-ACO and Siemens SML cabling system with labelling field white, glossy polar white, glossy brown, glossy light bronze, lacquered stainless steel, lacquered
1153 00 02 1153 00 69 1153 00 01 1153 90 11 1153 90 04
10 10 10 10 10
Labelling field height arranged for 6 mm P-touch strips. ACO and CO Plus inserts: AMP, order no. 0-1394582-1, 0-1394763-1, 2-1394582-1; Schumann; Telena; SML inserts: Siemens with supporting plate cat.5, cat.6 and cat.7 with 30° oblique outlet for screw cover without spreader claws
Central plate for fibre-optic couplings Simplex ST white, glossy polar white, glossy
1492 02 1492 09
10 10
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range.
ACO and CO Plus inserts: AMP, order no. 0-1394580-1, 2-1394580-1, 0-0336627-3, 0-0336627-1, 2-0336627-1 cat.5, cat.6 and cat.7 central plates plug-in fixing
white, glossy polar white, glossy
Order no.
Fibre-optic couplings: Ackermann; AMP; Brand-Rex; BTR; CobiNet; Corning; Diamond; Drahtex; Huber+Suhner; Quante; Telegärtner with supporting plate with 30° oblique outlet for 2 fibre-optic couplings without spreader claws
267
BERKER ARSYS Order no.
Packing unit
Central plate for fibre-optic couplings Duplex SC white, glossy polar white, glossy brown, glossy light bronze, lacquered stainless steel, lacquered
1480 02 1480 09 1480 01 1480 11 1480 04
10 10 10 10 10
Fibre-optic couplings: Ackermann; AMP; Brand-Rex; BTR; CobiNet; Corning; Diamond; Drahtex; FiberCraft; Huber+Suhner; Krone; Quante; Telegärtner
white, glossy polar white, glossy brown, glossy light bronze, lacquered stainless steel, lacquered
1470 02 1470 09 1470 01 1470 11 1470 04
10 10 10 10 10
D-subminiature connectors see module inserts. Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range. Labelling field not usable. For D-subminiature connector order no. 1834, 1835, 1839 For mounting adapter order no. 1841, 1842
with supporting plate without spreader claws
Communication technics Data connector housings Data connector housing with labelling field white, glossy polar white, glossy brown, glossy light bronze, lacquered stainless steel, lacquered
with supporting plate with 30° oblique outlet 1 knock out opening for 1 or 2 fibre-optic couplings without spreader claws
Central plate for round connector Ø 30 mm # 1433 02 # 1433 09
10 10
Cut-out diameter 30 mm; Screw distance 36 mm Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range.
10 10 10 10 10
Labelling field height arranged for 6 mm P-touch strips. Mounting plates see acessories order no. 1111 .., 1112 ..
with supporting plate for mounting plates without spreader claws
Central plate for double pole socket outlet for floating output white, glossy polar white, glossy
1403 02 1403 09
10 10
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range.
Central plate for 1 D-subminiature connector 1411 02 1411 09
1126 00 02 1126 00 69 1126 00 01 1126 90 11 1126 90 04
Hospital installation
Signalling and command units: Kraus-Naimer; Lumitas; Schlegel; Overvoltage protection devices: Dehn, order no. NM DK 280; OBO-Bettermann, order no. KNS/IS-D with supporting plate without spreader claws
white, glossy polar white, glossy
Packing unit
Central plate for 2 D-subminiature connector
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range.
white, glossy polar white, glossy
Order no.
10 10
D-subminiature connectors see module inserts. Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range. For D-subminiature connector order no. 1834, 1835, 1839 For mounting adapter order no. 1841, 1842
For double pole socket outlet for floating output order no. 1061
For double pole socket outlet according to DIN 42801 with imprint
Centre plate for double pole socket outlet for floating output stainless steel
1705 01 04
10
for order no. 1061
with imprint with supporting plate without spreader claws
268
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
BERKER ARSYS Order no.
Packing unit
Central plate for 6pole socket outlet white, glossy polar white, glossy stainless steel, lacquered
1474 02 1474 09 1474 04
Nurse call system: Ackermann, clino opt 99, order no. 71008C3; Nurse call systems: Ackermann, clino opt 90, clino phon 95, order no. 71008C; Siedle, order no. AD 306-0; 6pole socket outlets: Hirschmann, Medu 600, Medu 600 GSK
10 10 10
10 10
Nurse call systems: Ackermann, clino opt 90, clino phon 95, order no. 74199A for pear push or multiple push-button for bed operator units with self-detaching plug
1238 00 02 1238 00 69 1238 90 04
10 10 10
Nurse call system: Ackermann, clino opt 99, order no. 73021D; Nurse call systems: Ackermann, clino opt 99, order no. 73020D for call unit with 2 auxiliary plug-in contacts centre plate plug-in fixing
Nurse call system: Ackermann, clino opt 90, 99 / clino phon 95, order no. 72642B; Nurse call systems: Ackermann, clino opt 90, 99 / clino phon 95, order no. 71197A, 72639A, 72642C centre plate plug-in fixing
Centre plate with 2 plug-in openings and imprint white, glossy polar white, glossy stainless steel, lacquered
Centre plate for databus connection unit with plug-in opening 1298 00 02 1298 00 69 1298 90 04
10 10 10
Centre plate for plug-and-socket connector 1305 00 02 1305 00 69 1305 90 04
10 10 10
Nurse call system: Ackermann, clino opt 99, order no. 74189A a-coded for dropping plug-and-socket connector centre plate plug-in fixing
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
1244 00 02 1244 00 69 1244 90 04
10 10 10
Nurse call system: Ackermann, clino opt 99, order no. 73075C, 73075D, 73020G, 73021G for call unit with 2 diagnostic plug-in contacts centre plate plug-in fixing
Centre plate for call unit, 2 plug-in openings, with printed symbols
Nurse call system: Ackermann, clino opt 99, order no. 73070A centre plate plug-in fixing
white, glossy polar white, glossy stainless steel, lacquered
# 1476 02 # 1476 09
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range.
white, glossy polar white, glossy stainless steel, lacquered
Centre plate for databus termination splitter/ empty unit
white, glossy polar white, glossy stainless steel, lacquered
white, glossy polar white, glossy
Centre plate with 2 plug-in openings
Messrs. Ackermann
1204 00 02 1204 00 69 1204 90 04
Packing unit
Central plate for plug eject system 10 10 10
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range.
white, glossy polar white, glossy stainless steel, lacquered
Order no.
white, glossy polar white, glossy stainless steel, lacquered
1242 00 02 1242 00 69 1242 90 04
10 10 10
Nurse call systems: Ackermann, clino opt 90, 99 / clino phon 95, order no. 73020E for call unit with diagnostic and auxiliary plug-in contact for plug-in cover
269
BERKER ARSYS Order no.
Packing unit
Centre plate with red call push-button at bottom and plug-in opening white, glossy polar white, glossy stainless steel, lacquered
1224 00 02 1224 00 69 1224 90 04
Order no.
Packing unit
Centre plate with red call push-button at bottom 10 10 10
white, glossy polar white, glossy stainless steel, lacquered
1219 00 02 1219 00 69 1219 90 04
10 10 10
Nurse call system: Ackermann, clino opt 99, order no. 73022B, 73023B for call push-button with plug-in contact button with lens centre plate plug-in fixing
Nurse call system: Ackermann, clino opt 99, order no. 73022A2, 73022A for call push-button button with lens centre plate plug-in fixing
Centre plate with red call push-button at top and a plug-in opening
Centre plate with green shut-off button
white, glossy polar white, glossy stainless steel, lacquered
1217 00 02 1217 00 69 1217 90 04
10 10 10
Nurse call system: Ackermann, clino opt 99, order no. 73073E, 73071E2, 73071E, 73075A for call push-button with plug-in contact for call module with call push-button and monitored auxiliary plug-in contact button with lens centre plate plug-in fixing
Centre plate with red call button and 2 plug-in openings white, glossy polar white, glossy stainless steel, lacquered
1218 00 02 1218 00 69 1218 90 04
10 10 10
Nurse call system: Ackermann, clino opt 99, order no. 73071D2, 73073D, 73071D, 73075B for call push-button with diagnostic and auxiliary plug-in contact for call module with call push-button and plug-in contacts button with lens with imprint centre plate plug-in fixing
Centre plate with red call push-button at top white, glossy polar white, glossy stainless steel, lacquered
1216 00 02 1216 00 69 1216 90 04
10 10 10
white, glossy polar white, glossy stainless steel, lacquered
1251 00 02 1251 00 69 1251 90 04
10 10 10
Nurse call system: Ackermann, clino opt 99, order no. 73642C for shut-off push-button button with lens centre plate plug-in fixing
Centre plate with yellow shut-off button white, glossy polar white, glossy stainless steel, lacquered
1252 00 02 1252 00 69 1252 90 04
10 10 10
Nurse call system: Ackermann, clino opt 99, order no. 73642D for shut-off push-button button with lens centre plate plug-in fixing
Centre plate for call unit with blue doctor call button white, glossy polar white, glossy stainless steel, lacquered
1223 00 02 1223 00 69 1223 90 04
10 10 10
Nurse call system: Ackermann, clino opt 99, order no. 73022A2, 73022A for call push-button button with lens with imprint centre plate plug-in fixing
Nurse call system: Ackermann, clino opt 99, order no. 73073F, 73071F2, 73071F for call module with call push-button button with lens centre plate plug-in fixing
270
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
BERKER ARSYS Order no.
Packing unit
Centre plate with acknowledge button white white, glossy polar white, glossy stainless steel, lacquered
1308 00 02 1308 00 69 1308 90 04
10 10 10
Nurse call system: Ackermann, clino opt 99, order no. 73640J2, 73640J for office unit button with lens with imprint „SU-AUS WARTEN“ centre plate plug-in fixing
Centre plate with red call button and green shut-off button white, glossy polar white, glossy stainless steel, lacquered
1249 00 02 1249 00 69 1249 90 04
10 10 10
Order no.
Packing unit
Centre plate for pneumatic call switch with lens white, glossy polar white, glossy stainless steel, lacquered
1236 00 02 1236 00 69 1236 90 04
10 10 10
Nurse call system: Ackermann, clino opt 99, order no. 70006C; Nurse call systems: Ackermann, clino opt 90, 99 / clino phon 95, order no. 70006B, 70006A centre plate plug-in fixing
Centre plate for pullcord push-button with lens white, glossy polar white, glossy stainless steel, lacquered
1233 00 02 1233 00 69 1233 90 04
10 10 10
Nurse call system: Ackermann, clino opt 99, order no. 73642B2 for call push-button and shut-off push-button buttons with lens centre plate plug-in fixing
Nurse call systems: Ackermann, clino opt 90, 99 / clino phon 95, order no. 70045A3, 70046A3, 70046A for pullcord push-button with pullcord and knob centre plate plug-in fixing
Centre plate with green and yellow shut-off button
Centre plate for radio programme system with small sound system
white, glossy polar white, glossy stainless steel, lacquered
1253 00 02 1253 00 69 1253 90 04
10 10 10
Centre plate with green presence button/white acknowledge button 1299 00 02 1299 00 69 1299 90 04
Nurse call system: Ackermann, clino opt 99, order no. 73642B for office unit buttons with lens with imprint „SU-AUS WARTEN“ centre plate plug-in fixing
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
1300 00 02 1300 00 69 1300 90 04
10 10 10
Nurse call systems: Ackermann, clino opt 90, 99 / clino phon 95, order no. 73120C, 73120H for earpiece and volume control with imprinted symbol curve centre plate plug-in fixing
Nurse call system: Ackermann, clino opt 99, order no. 73642E for shut-off push-button buttons with lens centre plate plug-in fixing
white, glossy polar white, glossy stainless steel, lacquered
white, glossy polar white, glossy stainless steel, lacquered
10 10 10
Centre plate for radio programme selector switch white, glossy polar white, glossy stainless steel, lacquered
1301 00 02 1301 00 69 1301 90 04
10 10 10
Nurse call systems: Ackermann, clino opt 90, 99 / clino phon 95, order no. 73120A with imprint „0-1-2-3-4-5“ centre plate plug-in fixing
271
BERKER ARSYS Order no.
Packing unit
Order no.
Packing unit
Centre plate with microphone for interface unit white, glossy polar white, glossy stainless steel, lacquered
1302 00 02 1302 00 69 1302 90 04
1 1 1
Nurse call systems: Ackermann, clino opt 99 / clino phon 95, order no. 71048A, 71049A centre plate plug-in fixing
272
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
BERKER ARSYS IP44 Order no.
Order no.
Packing unit
Packing unit
Installation instructions for ARSYS IP44 SCHUKO-socket insert
TOP
SCHUKO-centre plate with hinged cover
Flush-mounted wall box according to DIN 49073 part 1 Sealing flange
Sealing Frame OBEN
Fixing piece
TOP
Attention! IP44 protection is reached only if the installation instruction is observed.
Packing unit
Rocker
Rocker switch/ Rocker push-button
Covers IP44
SCHUKO-socket outlets
Sealings
SCHUKO-socket outlet with hinged cover stainless steel stainless steel, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1
Sealing set for all ARSYS IP44 devices 1010 00
10
for order no. 1424 10 04, 1436 10 04, 4758 .. on page T6
for rockers and SCHUKO-socket outlets IP44
Rocker 1424 10 04
with imprint with plug-in terminals
SCHUKO-socket outlet with hinged cover and labelling field
IP44 protection is provided only with sealing set order no. 1010 00.
stainless steel
with imprint „IP44“ for rocker switches change-over, intermediate for rocker push-buttons
Rocker with labelling field 1436 10 04
16 A, 250 V~
Connection terminals IEC 60884-1
10
Not suitable for push-button BCU and group push-button BCU.
stainless steel
10 10
IP44 protection is provided only with sealing set order no. 1010 00.
Rockers stainless steel
4758 10 04 4758 30 04
10
Not suitable for push-button BCU and group push-button BCU. Labelling field height arranged for 6 mm P-touch strips.
4758 20 04
10
16 A, 250 V~ on page T6
Labelling field height arranged for 6 mm P-touch strips. IP44 protection is provided only with sealing set order no. 1010 00. Connection terminals IEC 60884-1 with imprint with plug-in terminals
IP44 protection is provided only with sealing set order no. 1010 00. with imprint „IP44“ for rocker switches change-over, intermediate for rocker push-buttons "#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
273
Surfaces Frames /covers/centre inserts Plastic, glossy polar white similar to RAL 9010 red
similar to RAL 3003
black
similar to RAL 9005
Plastic Corian®, glossy sierra grey sierra black Decorative rings plastic, high-gloss polar white similar to RAL 9010 red
similar to RAL 3003
black
similar to RAL 9005
blue
similar to RAL 5013
brown
similar to RAL 8011
yellow
similar to RAL 1004
grey
similar to RAL 7038
green
similar to RAL 6029
Plastic, metallised gold, high-gloss chrome, high-gloss
274
Twinpoint
Surface range Flush-mounted system
A rounded range offering choice of form, colour and design TWINPOINT supports your interior design scheme, right down to the last detail.
■ Interchangeable decorative rings in a variety of colours give your customers flexibility to adapt to an array of interior designs ■ Available surface combinations: polar white, red, black, Corian® grey/black, basic colours can be combined with one another and with decorative rings
275
TWINPOINT Order no.
Packing unit
Order no.
Frames
Frame Frame
on page T67
Packing unit
polar white, glossy, 1gang
# 1312 09
10
polar white, glossy, 2gang
# 1322 09
2
polar white, glossy, 3gang
# 1332 09
2
polar white, glossy, 4gang
# 1342 09
2
polar white, glossy, 5gang
# 1352 09
2
on page T67
sierra black, glossy, 1gang, Corian
# 1312 81
1
sierra black, glossy, 2gang, Corian
# 1322 81
1
sierra black, glossy, 3gang, Corian
# 1332 81
1
sierra black, glossy, 4gang, Corian
# 1342 81
1
sierra black, glossy, 5gang, Corian
# 1352 81
1
Use only with decor ring.
Use only with decor ring. for vertical and horizontal mounting for vertical and horizontal mounting
Decorative rings
Frame
on page T67
red, glossy, 1gang red, glossy, 2gang red, glossy, 3gang red, glossy, 4gang red, glossy, 5gang
Decorative ring # 1312 62 # 1322 62 # 1332 62 # 1342 62 # 1352 62
10 2 2 2 2
Use only with decor ring.
for vertical and horizontal mounting
polar white, glossy red, glossy blue, glossy brown, glossy black, glossy yellow, glossy grey, glossy green, glossy gold, glossy chrome, glossy
# 1139 09 # 1139 62 # 1139 63 # 1139 64 # 1139 65 # 1139 66 # 1139 67 # 1139 68 # 1139 36 # 1139 37
10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
Frame
on page T67
black, glossy, 1gang black, glossy, 2gang black, glossy, 3gang black, glossy, 4gang black, glossy, 5gang
# 1312 65 # 1322 65 # 1332 65 # 1342 65 # 1352 65
10 2 2 2 2
Use only with decor ring.
for frame
Surface-mounted frames Surface-mounted frame 1gang polar white, glossy red, glossy black, glossy
1029 00 69 1029 00 62 1029 00 65
10 10 10
Installation depth 33,5 mm for vertical and horizontal mounting
Frame
on page T67
sierra grey, glossy, 1gang, Corian
# 1312 80
1
sierra grey, glossy, 2gang, Corian
# 1322 80
1
sierra grey, glossy, 3gang, Corian
# 1332 80
1
sierra grey, glossy, 4gang, Corian
# 1342 80
1
sierra grey, glossy, 5gang, Corian
# 1352 80
1
For suitable tube-entries and replacement for cable and duct entries refer to the dry surface-mounted range. Flush-mounted devices can be used with surfacemounted frames for surface-mounted installation.
Self-extinguishing base plate see module inserts / accessories order no. 1021 12
with cable and duct entry entry at top and bottom possible
Use only with decor ring.
for vertical and horizontal mounting
276
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
TWINPOINT Order no.
Packing unit
Order no.
Surface-mounted frame 2gang polar white, glossy red, glossy black, glossy
1030 00 69 1030 00 62 # 1030 00 65
SCHUKO-socket outlet 10 10 10
Installation depth 33,5 mm For suitable tube-entries and replacement for cable and duct entries refer to the dry surface-mounted range.
on page T6
Flush-mounted devices can be used with surfacemounted frames for surface-mounted installation.
Self-extinguishing base plate see module inserts / accessories order no. 1021 22
10 10 10 10
10
10
Connection terminals IEC 60884-1 with screw terminals
Surface-mounted frame 3gang 1031 00 69 1031 00 62 # 1031 00 65
# 4114 09 polar white, glossy # 4114 62 red, glossy # 4114 65 black, glossy # 4135 09 polar white, glossy, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1 red, glossy, enhanced # 4135 62 contact protection IEC 60884-1 black, glossy, enhanced # 4135 65 contact protection IEC 60884-1 16 A, 250 V~
with cable and duct entry entry at top, bottom and 2 x each side possible for vertical and horizontal mounting
polar white, glossy red, glossy black, glossy
Packing unit
5 5 5
NEW
Installation depth 33,5 mm For suitable tube-entries and replacement for cable and duct entries refer to the dry surface-mounted range.
SCHUKO-socket outlet polar white, glossy, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1
* 73 4135 09
10
16 A, 250 V~ on page T6
For South Tyrol only. Connection terminals IEC 60884-1
Flush-mounted devices can be used with surfacemounted frames for surface-mounted installation.
with screw-in lift terminals
Self-extinguishing base plate see module inserts / accessories order no. 1021 32
SCHUKO-socket outlet with „EDV“ imprint red, glossy
with cable and duct entry entry at top, bottom and at each side in the middle possible for vertical and horizontal mounting
SCHUKO-socket outlets
on page T6
16 A, 250 V~
Connection terminals according to IEC 60884-1 with plug-in terminals
SCHUKO-socket outlet # 4714 09 polar white, glossy # 4714 62 red, glossy # 4714 65 black, glossy # 4735 09 polar white, glossy, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1 red, glossy, enhanced # 4735 62 contact protection IEC 60884-1 black, glossy, enhanced # 4735 65 contact protection IEC 60884-1
10
Insert colour-coded. on page T6
Socket outlets
# 4714 72
16 A, 250 V~
10 10 10 10
10
10
SCHUKO-socket outlet with labelling field
on page T6
# 4739 09 polar white, glossy # 4739 62 red, glossy # 4739 65 black, glossy # 4738 09 polar white, glossy, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1 red, glossy, enhanced # 4738 62 contact protection IEC 60884-1 black, glossy, enhanced # 4738 65 contact protection IEC 60884-1
10 10 10 10
10
10
16 A, 250 V~ Connection terminals according to IEC 60884-1 with plug-in terminals
Connection terminals IEC 60884-1 with plug-in terminals
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
277
TWINPOINT Order no.
Packing unit
Order no.
SCHUKO-socket outlet rotating with hinged cover
on page T6
# 4735 39 polar white, glossy, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1 red, glossy, enhanced # 4735 72 contact protection IEC 60884-1 black, glossy, enhanced # 4735 75 contact protection IEC 60884-1
Socket outlet with earth pin
10
10 on page T6
10
Rockers Rocker
Socket outlet without earth contact 10
10
# 1426 19 # 1426 62 # 1426 65
10 10 10
Labelling field height arranged for 6 mm P-touch strips for labelling with names, notes etc.
Socket outlets with earth pin Socket outlet with earth pin
278
10 10 10
for rocker switches change-over, intermediate for rocker push-buttons for push-button BCU 1gang and group push-button BCU 1gang
polar white, glossy red, glossy black, glossy
2pole without spreader claws with screw terminals
2pole + earth with screw-in lift terminals
# 1405 29 # 1405 62 # 1405 65
Rocker with labelling field
Connection terminals according to IEC 60884-1
Connection terminals according to IEC 60884-1
polar white, glossy red, glossy black, glossy
10
16 A, 250 V~ Mirror depth 14,5 mm
16 A, 250 V~
10
Covers for switches / push-buttons
Socket outlets without earth contact
on page T6
10
2pole + earth with plug-in terminals
for vertical and horizontal mounting with imprint with plug-in terminals
# 67 6575 09 polar white, glossy, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1 red, glossy, enhanced # 67 6575 62 contact protection IEC 60884-1 black, glossy, enhanced # 67 6575 65 contact protection IEC 60884-1
10
Connection terminals according to IEC 60884-1
Connection terminals IEC 60884-1
on page T6
# 67 6875 09 polar white, glossy, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1 red, glossy, enhanced # 67 6875 62 contact protection IEC 60884-1 black, glossy, enhanced # 67 6875 65 contact protection IEC 60884-1 16 A, 250 V~
16 A, 250 V~
# 61 6175 09 polar white, glossy, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1 red, glossy, enhanced # 61 6175 62 contact protection IEC 60884-1 black, glossy, enhanced # 61 6175 65 contact protection IEC 60884-1
Packing unit
10
for rocker switches change-over, intermediate for rocker push-buttons for push-button BCU 1gang and group push-button BCU 1gang
Rocker with 5 lenses attached 10
10
polar white, glossy red, glossy black, glossy
# 1415 29 # 1415 62 # 1415 65
10 10 10
Lenses with symbol for light, bell, door and neutral in clear, also neutral in red transparent. for rocker switches change-over, intermediate for rocker push-buttons for push-button BCU 1gang and group push-button BCU 1gang for illumination and monitoring circuit
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
TWINPOINT Order no.
Packing unit
# 1417 72
Rockers
10
polar white, glossy red, glossy black, glossy
Or use glass pane protected heating emergency switch from programme ranges Arsys, flush-mounted splash-protected IP44, Aquatec IP44. Not suitable for heating systems > 50 kW.
10 10 10
for rocker switches change-over, intermediate for rocker push-buttons for push-button BCU 1gang and group push-button BCU 1gang for illumination and monitoring circuit
# 1644 29 # 1644 62 # 1644 65
10 10 10
For group rockers push-button as 2pole rockers push-button for shutters with middle positions order no. 5034 04 For group push-button BCU 2gang order no. 7514 21 00
Hotel card switch Hotel card switch cover with imprint and red lens
Rocker with red lens and imprint „0“ # 1417 19 # 1417 62 # 1417 65
10 10 10
Rockers with imprinted symbol arrows polar white, glossy red, glossy black, glossy
10 10 10
for rocker switch 2- and 3pole on/off
# 1405 39 # 1405 72 # 1405 75
For group push-button BCU 1gang order no. 7514 11 00
Rocker with imprint „0“
polar white, glossy red, glossy black, glossy
10 10 10
Rocker with imprinted symbol arrows polar white, glossy red, glossy black, glossy
Lenses with symbol for light, bell, door and neutral in clear, also neutral in red transparent.
# 1425 19 # 1425 62 # 1425 65
# 1435 39 # 1435 72 # 1435 75
For rockers switch for shutters order no. 3035 20 For rockers push-button for shutters order no. 5035 20 For push-button BCU 2gang order no. 7514 20 00
Labelling field height arranged for 6 mm P-touch strips for labelling with names, notes etc.
polar white, glossy red, glossy black, glossy
10 10 10
Rockers with imprinted symbol arrow polar white, glossy red, glossy black, glossy
Rocker with 5 lenses attached and labelling field # 1428 19 # 1428 62 # 1428 65
# 1435 19 # 1435 62 # 1435 65
for rockers switches for rockers push-buttons and group rockers pushbuttons for push-button BCU 2gang and group push-button BCU 2gang
for rocker switches change-over, intermediate for rocker switches for rocker push-buttons for push-button BCU 1gang and group push-button BCU 1gang for monitoring circuit
polar white, glossy red, glossy black, glossy
Packing unit
Rockers
Rocker with red lens and „Heizung Notschalter“ imprint red, glossy
Order no.
10 10 10
polar white, glossy red, glossy black, glossy on page T6
for rocker switch 2- and 3pole on/off for group push-button BCU 1gang for illumination and monitoring circuit
# 1641 09 # 1641 62 # 1641 65
10 10 10
Max. card width 54 mm; Card strength 0,5 - 1,4 mm Other imprint on request! For push-button insert for hotel card switch covers order no. 5051 02, 5051 03, 5052 01, 5056 01
Rotary switches Centre plate with rotary knob for rotary switch polar white, glossy red, glossy black, glossy
# 1150 19 # 1150 62 # 1150 65
1 1 1
For rotary switch order no. 3862 ..
with imprint „0“ and „1“
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
279
TWINPOINT Order no.
Packing unit
Order no.
3-step switches
Centre plate for key switch/key push-button for shutters
Centre plate with rotary knob for 3-step switch polar white, glossy, with neutral-position
# 1087 19
1
red, glossy, with neutral-position
# 1087 62
1
black, glossy, with neutral-position
# 1087 65
1
Packing unit
polar white, glossy red, glossy black, glossy
# 1504 09 # 1504 62 # 1504 65
10 10 10
Profile half cylinders see module inserts. For key switch for shutters order no. 3822 10 For key push-button for shutters order no. 3831 10, 3832 10
For 3-step switch with 0-position order no. 3861
with imprint for profile half cylinders for master-key systems
with imprint
Rotary switches/rotary push-buttons for shutters Centre plate with rotary knob for rotary switch for shutters polar white, glossy red, glossy black, glossy
# 1077 29 # 1077 62 # 1077 65
Key switches/key push-buttons Centre plate for key switch/key push-button
1 1 1
polar white, glossy red, glossy black, glossy
For key switch order no. 3826 10 For key push-button order no. 3856 20
with imprint
for profile half cylinders for master-key systems
Key switches/key push-buttons for shutters Blank plates
Centre plate with lock for key switch for shutters # 1089 19
1
# 1089 62
1
black, glossy, key remo- # 1089 65 vable in mid position
1
polar white, glossy, key # 1089 29 removable in 3 positions
1
red, glossy, key removable in 3 positions
# 1089 72
1
black, glossy, key remo- # 1089 75 vable in 3 positions
1
# 1044 65
20 20
on supporting plate without cut-out centre plate plug-in fixing
polar white, glossy red, glossy black, glossy
# 1168 09 # 1168 62 # 1168 65
10 10 10
Cut-out diameter 27,2 mm
Centre plate with lock for key switch for shutters 1
Push-buttons, LEDs, neon lamps and covers see module inserts. For push-button and pilot lamp E10 order no. 5101 ..
# 1089 82
1
black, glossy, key remo- # 1089 85 vable in mid position
1
For key switch for shutters order no. 3851, 3852
with imprint only push-button function with 2 keys 280
black, glossy, without base and spreader claws
20
Centre plate for push-button and pilot lamp E10
with imprint with push lock function with 2 keys
# 1089 59
Blank plate with centre plate # 1044 09 polar white, glossy, without base and spreader claws red, glossy, without base # 1044 62 and spreader claws
Pilot lamps
For key switch for shutters order no. 3851, 3852
polar white, glossy, key removable in mid position red, glossy, key removable in mid position
10 10 10
Profile half cylinders see module inserts.
Interlock disk for conversion to push-button see module inserts order no. 1861 Rotary switch for shutters order no. 3841, 3842
polar white, glossy, key removable in mid position red, glossy, key removable in mid position
# 1505 09 # 1505 62 # 1505 65
centre plate plug-in fixing
Centre plate for pilot lamp E14 polar white, glossy red, glossy black, glossy
# 1169 09 # 1169 62 # 1169 65
10 10 10
LEDs, incandescent lamps and covers see module inserts. For pilot lamp E14 order no. 5131 02 "#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
TWINPOINT Order no.
Packing unit
Order no.
Info pilot lamp cover with 5 label sheets polar white, glossy red, glossy black, glossy on page T29
# 1345 19 # 1345 62 # 1345 65
Timer with display and sensor connection polar white, glossy red, glossy black, glossy
1 1 1
Current input 25 mA; LED output 800 mW
on page T7
Labels supplied: „Nicht eintreten“, „Besetzt“, „Bitte eintreten“, „Bitte Ruhe“, „Bitte warten“. Coloured cover plate see module inserts order no. 1289 .. For insert info pilot lamp order no. 2949
polar white, glossy, max. 15 minutes
# 1634 19
1
red, glossy, max. 15 minutes
# 1634 62
1
black, glossy, max. 15 minutes
# 1634 65
1
polar white, glossy, max. 120 minutes
# 1635 19
1
red, glossy, max. 120 minutes
# 1635 62
1
black, glossy, max. 120 minutes
# 1635 65
1
Rotary dimmers Centre plate with setting knob for rotary dimmer polar white, glossy red, glossy black, glossy
Mechanical timer 15 minutes order no. 2040 Mechanical timer 120 minutes order no. 2041
# 1135 09 # 1135 62 # 1135 65
10 10 10
Axial dimension diameter 4 mm
with time scale imprint
For rotary dimmer order no. 2819 .., 2830 10, 2860 10, 2875, 2885 For universal rotary dimmer order no. 2861 10 For universal rotary dimmer extension unit order no 2862 10 For rotary dimmer LV order no. 2866 10, 2873 For Tronic rotary dimmer order no. 2867 10, 2874 For rotary potentiometer 1-10 V order no. 2891 10 For push-button rotary potentiometer 1-10 V order no. 2896 10 For rotary potentiometer DALI order no. 2897
Timer with display 1 1 1
Switching times 18 for on/off; Random generator +/- 15 min.; Astronomic time shift +/- 2 hrs.; Power reserve approx. 24 hrs.; Countdown function 0 - 23 hrs. 59 min.
Universal series touch dimmers
For manual and timer programmed switching of electrical loads.
Button for universal series touch dimmer polar white, glossy red, glossy black, glossy
For insert for timer order no. 2948
with imprint in German with pre-set base programme 2 independent programme memories for everyday/ holidays with week and day programme with slide switch from summer to winter time astro programme for sunrise/sundown switching large-area display with symbols with slide switch for manual/automatic
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
Setting range twilight approx. 6 - 300 Lux; Switching times 18 for on/off; Random generator +/- 15 min.; Astronomic time shift +/- 2 hrs.; Power reserve approx. 24 hrs.; Countdown function 0 - 23 hrs. 59 min.
with imprint in German with pre-set base programme 2 independent programme memories for everyday/ holidays with week and day programme with slide switch from summer to winter time astro programme for sunrise/sundown switching large-area display with symbols with slide switch for manual/automatic for sensor connection to socket contact or terminal block connected RolloTec brightness sensor can be used for twilight-controlled switching-on
Centre plate with setting knob for mechanical timer
on page T7
1 1 1
For RolloTec brightness sensors order no. 0169, 0184 For insert for timer order no. 2948
timers
# 1736 29 # 1736 62 # 1736 65
# 1738 29 # 1738 62 # 1738 65
For manual and timer programmed switching of electrical loads.
with 4 light intensity LED very long LED lifetime with clear cover plate
polar white, glossy red, glossy black, glossy
Packing unit
on page T10
# 1765 29 # 1765 62 # 1765 65
1 1 1
For universal series touch dimmer order no. 2901
for 2 independent lighting groups with 2-push-buttons operation concept per series
281
TWINPOINT Order no.
Packing unit
BLC Berker Light Control
Order no.
BLC Controllers
Buttons
BLC controller 180 polar white, glossy red, glossy black, glossy
BLC button polar white, glossy red, glossy black, glossy
# 1761 19 # 1761 62 # 1761 65
1 1 1 on page T15
on page T12
For BLC universal touch dimmer order no. 2902 For BLC touch control unit 1-10 V order no. 2903 For BLC touch dimmer LV order no. 2904 For BLC triac switch insert LV order no. 2905 for BLC relay switch insert order no. 2906 For BLC relay switch insert with potential-free contact order no. 2906 10 For BLC extension unit order no 2907 For BLC relay switch insert HVAC order no. 2912 For BLC Tronic switch insert order no. 2916 For BLC stair light time switching impulse insert order no. 2934 10
with 2-push-buttons operation concept start-up brightness will be stored after power failure with BLC relay switch insert HVAC used as timer as well
Radio buttons BLC radio button polar white, glossy red, glossy black, glossy on page T12
Packing unit
# 1760 19 # 1760 62 # 1760 65
1 1 1
Radio signal reception frequency 433,42 MHz; Learnable radio transmitters 30 Extension unit operation with BLC extension unit and push-button (NO) possible as of release R2.1. For actuation via button and radio transmitter. For BLC universal touch dimmer order no. 2902 For BLC touch control unit 1-10 V order no. 2903 For BLC touch dimmer LV order no. 2904 For BLC triac switch insert LV order no. 2905 for BLC relay switch insert order no. 2906 For BLC relay switch insert with potential-free contact order no. 2906 10 For BLC relay switch insert HVAC order no. 2912 For BLC Tronic switch insert order no. 2916
# 1783 29 # 1783 62 # 1783 65
1 1 1
Nominal mounting height 1,1 m; Range frontal approx. 10 m; Range lateral each approx. 6 m; Detection field semi-oval shaped approx. 10 x 12 m; Detection angle 180 °; Detection levels 2; Switching segments 72; Response sensitivity programmable approx. 20 - 100 % ; Response brightness adjustable approx. 0 - 80 / unlimited Lux; Delay time approx. 2 min.; Operating temperature -20 - +45 °C; Dimensions assembling height 23,5 mm Switches on for the duration of the controller delay time in case minimum response brightness level is infringed and if movement of people is detected. In conjunction with a BLC relay switch unit HVAC, the HVAC-channel is also switched on for the duration of its delay time independent of response brightness. For BLC universal touch dimmer order no. 2902 For BLC touch control unit 1-10 V order no. 2903 For BLC touch dimmer LV order no. 2904 For BLC triac switch insert LV order no. 2905 for BLC relay switch insert order no. 2906 For BLC relay switch insert with potential-free contact order no. 2906 10 For BLC controller extension unit order no. 2908 For BLC relay switch insert HVAC order no. 2912 For BLC Tronic switch insert order no. 2916 For BLC stair light time switching impulse insert order no. 2934 10
U with cover to limit detection angle to 90°
with 2-push-buttons operation concept with 5 light scenes for „on/off“, dimming value retrieving light scenes only by using radio transmitter radio signal of taught-in radio controllers causes switch on for 1 min. (retriggering) start-up brightness will be stored after power failure reset function (to factory setting)
282
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
TWINPOINT Order no.
Packing unit
Order no.
BLC controller 180 comfort with slide switch for off/automatic/on polar white, glossy red, glossy black, glossy on page T15
# 1784 29 # 1784 62 # 1784 65
BLC controller 180 polar white, glossy red, glossy black, glossy
1 1 1
Nominal mounting height 1,1 m; Range frontal approx. 10 m; Range lateral each approx. 6 m; Detection field semi-oval shaped approx. 10 x 12 m; Detection angle 180 °; Detection levels 2; Switching segments 72; Response sensitivity programmable approx. 20 - 100 % ; Response brightness adjustable approx. 0 - 80 / unlimited Lux; Delay time adjustable approx. 10 sec.- 30 min. ; Time to dim down 30 sec.; Step operation 0,5 sec.; Immunity time approx. 3 sec.; Operating temperature -20 - +45 °C; Dimensions assembling height 23,5 mm Switches on for the duration of the delay time set on the controller in case minimum response brightness level is infringed and if movement of people is detected. In conjunction with a BLC relay switch unit HVAC, the HVAC-channel is also switched on for the duration of its delay time independent of response brightness. For BLC universal touch dimmer order no. 2902 For BLC touch control unit 1-10 V order no. 2903 For BLC touch dimmer LV order no. 2904 For BLC triac switch insert LV order no. 2905 for BLC relay switch insert order no. 2906 For BLC relay switch insert with potential-free contact order no. 2906 10 For BLC controller extension unit order no. 2908 For BLC relay switch insert HVAC order no. 2912 For BLC Tronic switch insert order no. 2916 For BLC stair light time switching impulse insert order no. 2934 10
U
Packing unit
on page T15
# 1786 29 # 1786 62 # 1786 65
1 1 1
Nominal mounting height 2,2 m; Range frontal approx. 12 m; Range lateral each approx. 6 m; At assembly height 1,1 m; Range frontal approx. 6 m; Range lateral each approx. 3 m; Detection field semi-oval shaped approx. 12 x 12 m; Detection angle 180 °; Detection levels 3; Switching segments 104; Response sensitivity programmable approx. 20 - 100 % ; Response brightness adjustable approx. 0 - 80 / unlimited Lux; Delay time approx. 2 min.; Operating temperature -20 - +45 °C; Dimensions assembling height 23,5 mm Switches on for the duration of the controller delay time in case minimum response brightness level is infringed and if movement of people is detected. In conjunction with a BLC relay switch unit HVAC, the HVAC-channel is also switched on for the duration of its delay time independent of response brightness. For BLC universal touch dimmer order no. 2902 For BLC touch control unit 1-10 V order no. 2903 For BLC touch dimmer LV order no. 2904 For BLC triac switch insert LV order no. 2905 for BLC relay switch insert order no. 2906 For BLC relay switch insert with potential-free contact order no. 2906 10 For BLC controller extension unit order no. 2908 For BLC relay switch insert HVAC order no. 2912 For BLC Tronic switch insert order no. 2916 For BLC stair light time switching impulse insert order no. 2934 10
V with cover to limit detection angle to 90°
microprocessor controlled mode of oper.(detection signal evaluation and interfering signal suppres.) glare-proof e.g. against a torch no switching with unforeseeable short shadows with adaptive sensitivity adjustment with teach function for response brightness step operation with immunity time (e.g. for bell) switch-on brightness in conjunction with BLC dimmer inserts can only be saved via BLC extension unit with dimming function (soft-off) when using BLC dimmer inserts with cover to limit detection angle to 90°
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
283
TWINPOINT Order no.
Packing unit
BLC controller 180 comfort with slide switch for off/automatic/on polar white, glossy red, glossy black, glossy on page T15
# 1787 29 # 1787 62 # 1787 65
Order no.
Thermostats Room thermostat with NC contact, centre plate, rocker switch and LED
1 1 1
Nominal mounting height 2,2 m; Range frontal approx. 12 m; Range lateral each approx. 6 m; At assembly height 1,1 m; Range frontal approx. 6 m; Range lateral each approx. 3 m; Detection field semi-oval shaped approx. 12 x 12 m; Detection angle 180 °; Detection levels 3; Switching segments 104; Response sensitivity programmable approx. 20 - 100 % ; Response brightness adjustable approx. 0 - 80 / unlimited Lux; Delay time adjustable approx. 10 sec.- 30 min. ; Time to dim down 30 sec.; Step operation 0,5 sec.; Immunity time approx. 3 sec.; Operating temperature -20 - +45 °C; Dimensions assembling height 23,5 mm
polar white, glossy red, glossy black, glossy on page T34
V microprocessor controlled mode of oper.(detection signal evaluation and interfering signal suppres.) glare-proof e.g. against a torch no switching with unforeseeable short shadows with adaptive sensitivity adjustment with teach function for response brightness step operation with immunity time (e.g. for bell) switch-on brightness in conjunction with BLC dimmer inserts can only be saved via BLC extension unit with dimming function (soft-off) when using BLC dimmer inserts with cover to limit detection angle to 90°
284
# 2030 19 # 2030 62 # 2030 65
1 1 1
5 - 30 °C, 50/60 Hz Rated voltage 250 V~; Switching current 10 A; Inductive load at cos φ 0,6 max. 4 A; Switching temperature difference approx. 0,5 °C; Night lowering approx. 4 °C Neutral conductor necessary! If the pre-set temperature is reached the contact opens. Replacement centre plate order no. 1671 19, 1671 6.. Suitable valve drive order no. 7590 00 76
with imprint setting knob with temperature range limitation with on/off switch and indicator LED for „on“ with thermal return with separate connection for night lowering e.g. for valve drives closed in de-energized state without spreader claws with plug-in terminals
Switches on for the duration of the delay time set on the controller in case minimum response brightness level is infringed and if movement of people is detected. In conjunction with a BLC relay switch unit HVAC, the HVAC-channel is also switched on for the duration of its delay time independent of response brightness. For BLC universal touch dimmer order no. 2902 For BLC touch control unit 1-10 V order no. 2903 For BLC touch dimmer LV order no. 2904 For BLC triac switch insert LV order no. 2905 for BLC relay switch insert order no. 2906 For BLC relay switch insert with potential-free contact order no. 2906 10 For BLC controller extension unit order no. 2908 For BLC relay switch insert HVAC order no. 2912 For BLC Tronic switch insert order no. 2916 For BLC stair light time switching impulse insert order no. 2934 10
Packing unit
Room thermostat 24 V with NC contact, centre plate, rocker switch and LED polar white, glossy red, glossy black, glossy on page T34
# 2031 19 # 2031 62 # 2031 65
1 1 1
5 - 30 °C, 50/60 Hz Rated voltage 24 V~; Switching current 10 A~; Rated voltage 24 V=; Switching current 4 A=; Switching temperature difference approx. 0,5 °C; Night lowering approx. 4 °C If the pre-set temperature is reached the contact opens. Replacement centre plate order no. 1671 19, 1671 6.. Suitable valve drive order no. 7590 00 77
with imprint setting knob with temperature range limitation with on/off switch and indicator LED for „on“ with control LED for „on“ with thermal return with separate connection for night lowering e.g. for valve drives closed in de-energized state without spreader claws with plug-in terminals
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
TWINPOINT Order no.
Packing unit
Order no.
Centre plate with setting knob, rocker and lens for room thermostat with NC contact polar white, glossy red, glossy black, glossy
# 1671 19 # 1671 62 # 1671 65
Floor thermostat with NO contact, centre plate, rocker switch, 2 LEDs and floor temperature sensor
1 1 1
Replacement demand for order no. 2030 6.., 2030 19, 2031 6.., 2031 19
polar white, glossy red, glossy black, glossy on page T34
with imprint setting knob with temperature range limitation
on page T34
# 2026 19 # 2026 62 # 2026 65
10 - 50 °C, 50/60 Hz Rated voltage 250 V~; Switching current 10 A; Switching temperature difference approx. 1 °C; Night lowering approx. 5 °C; Sensor cable length 4 m
Replacement floor temperature sensor / remote sensor order no. 0161 Replacement centre plate order no. 1672 19, 1672 6.. Suitable valve drive order no. 7590 00 76
with imprint setting knob with temperature range limitation with on/off switch and 2 LEDs with LED for heating and LED for night lowering with separate connection for night lowering e.g. for valve drives closed in de-energized state without spreader claws with plug-in terminals
Neutral conductor necessary! If the pre-set temperature is reached the contact changes. Replacement centre plate order no. 1670 19, 1670 6.. Suitable valve drive order no. 7590 00 76
Centre plate with setting knob, rocker and lenses for floor temperature thermostat
with imprint setting knob with temperature range limitation for heating or cooling mode e.g. for valve drives closed in de-energized state with thermal return without spreader claws with plug-in terminals
polar white, glossy red, glossy black, glossy
1 1 1
# 1672 19 # 1672 62 # 1672 65
1 1 1
Replacement demand for order no. 2034 19, 2034 6..
Centre plate with setting knob for room thermostat with change-over contact # 1670 19 # 1670 62 # 1670 65
1 1 1
If the pre-set temperature is reached the contact closes.
1 1 1
5 - 30 °C, 50/60 Hz Rated voltage 250 V~; Switching current „heating“ 10 A (4 A at cosphi=0,6); Switching current „cooling“ 5 A (2 A at cosphi=0,6); Switching temperature difference approx. 0,5 °C
polar white, glossy red, glossy black, glossy
# 2034 19 # 2034 62 # 2034 65
Neutral conductor necessary!
Room thermostat with change-over and centre plate polar white, glossy red, glossy black, glossy
Packing unit
with imprint setting knob with temperature range limitation
RolloTec Comfort buttons RolloTec button comfort flat design
Replacement demand for order no. 2026 19, 2026 6..
polar white, glossy red, glossy black, glossy
with imprint setting knob with temperature range limitation on page T37
# 1770 29 # 1770 72 # 1770 75
1 1 1
Learnable running time 0,5 sec.- 2 min.; Lamella adjustment with signal < 1 sec.; Self-sustaining for 2 min. with signal > 1 - 4 sec. For RolloTec standard insert without neutral conductor connection order no. 2911 For RolloTec standard insert order no. 2925 For Rollotec comfort insert order no. 2975 For RolloTec comfort insert for direct current drives order no. 2975 01
with imprinted symbol arrows with lock-out protection e.g. for shutter control terrace door activation of lock-out protection in upper end pos. via buttons in „up“ direction min. 3 secs. with indicator LED for lock-out protection
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
285
TWINPOINT Order no.
Packing unit
on page T37
# 1771 29 # 1771 72 # 1771 75
RolloTec radio button, flat design
1 1 1
Brightness value sun approx. 5 - 80 kLux; Learnable running time 4 sec.- 2 min.; Lamella adjustment with signal < 1 sec.; Locked for 2 min. upon actuation 1 - 4 Sec.
polar white, glossy red, glossy black, glossy on page T37
with imprinted symbol arrows with lock-out protection e.g. for shutter control terrace door activation of lock-out protection in upper end pos. via buttons in „up“ direction min. 3 secs. with indicator LED for lock-out protection brightnesses individually adjustable on brightness sensor surface-mounted, the taught-in running time for sun protection movement is used no twilight sensor function only for sensor connection to terminal block
RolloTec button comfort with sensor connection
on page T37
# 1771 19 # 1771 62 # 1771 65
# 1758 29 # 1758 72 # 1758 75
1 1 1
Radio signal reception frequency 433,42 MHz; Learnable radio transmitters 30 ; Lamella adjustment with signal < 1 sec.; Self-sustaining for 2 min. with signal > 1 sec. For actuation via button and radio transmitter.
For RolloTec brightness sensors order no. 0169, 0184 For RolloTec glass breakage sensor order no. 0170 For RolloTec adapter for sensors order no. 0171 For RolloTec standard insert without neutral conductor connection order no. 2911 For RolloTec standard insert order no. 2925 For Rollotec comfort insert order no. 2975 For RolloTec comfort insert for direct current drives order no. 2975 01 For magnetic contact order no. 9251 ..
polar white, glossy red, glossy black, glossy
Packing unit
Radio buttons
RolloTec button comfort with sensor connection, flat design polar white, glossy red, glossy black, glossy
Order no.
For RolloTec standard insert without neutral conductor connection order no. 2911 For RolloTec standard insert order no. 2925 For Rollotec comfort insert order no. 2975 For RolloTec comfort insert for direct current drives order no. 2975 01
with imprinted symbol arrows with 5 light scenes for „open/close“ retrieving light scenes only by using radio transmitter
RolloTec radio button with sensor connection, flat design polar white, glossy red, glossy black, glossy on page T37
# 1759 29 # 1759 72 # 1759 75
1 1 1
Radio signal reception frequency 433,42 MHz; Learnable radio transmitters 30; Brightness value sun approx. 5 - 80 kLux; Lamella adjustment with signal < 1 sec.; Self-sustaining for 2 min. with signal > 1 sec. For actuation via button and radio transmitter.
1 1 1
Brightness value sun approx. 5 - 80 kLux; Learnable running time 4 sec.- 2 min.; Lamella adjustment with signal < 1 sec.; Locked for 2 min. upon actuation 1 - 4 Sec. For RolloTec brightness sensors order no. 0169, 0184 For RolloTec glass breakage sensor order no. 0170 For RolloTec adapter for sensors order no. 0171 For RolloTec standard insert without neutral conductor connection order no. 2911 For RolloTec standard insert order no. 2925 For Rollotec comfort insert order no. 2975 For RolloTec comfort insert for direct current drives order no. 2975 01 For magnetic contact order no. 9251 ..
For RolloTec brightness sensors order no. 0169, 0184 For RolloTec glass breakage sensor order no. 0170 For RolloTec adapter for sensors order no. 0171 For RolloTec standard insert without neutral conductor connection order no. 2911 For RolloTec standard insert order no. 2925 For Rollotec comfort insert order no. 2975 For RolloTec comfort insert for direct current drives order no. 2975 01 For magnetic contact order no. 9251 ..
with imprinted symbol arrows with 5 light scenes for „open/close“ retrieving light scenes only by using radio transmitter brightness value for sunblind individually adjustable no twilight sensor function only for sensor connection to terminal block
with embossed arrows with lock-out protection e.g. for shutter control terrace door activation of lock-out protection in upper end pos. via buttons in „up“ direction min. 3 secs. with indicator LED for lock-out protection brightness value for sunblind individually adjustable on brightness sensor surface-mounted, the taught-in running time for sun protection movement is used no twilight sensor function for sensor connection to socket contact or terminal block
286
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
TWINPOINT Order no.
Packing unit
Order no.
RolloTec radio button with sensor connection polar white, glossy red, glossy black, glossy on page T37
# 1759 19 # 1759 62 # 1759 65
RolloTec memory button, sensor connection, flat design
1 1 1
Radio signal reception frequency 433,42 MHz; Learnable radio transmitters 30; Brightness value sun approx. 5 - 80 kLux; Lamella adjustment with signal < 1 sec.; Self-sustaining for 2 min. with signal > 1 sec.
polar white, glossy red, glossy black, glossy on page T37
For actuation via button and radio transmitter.
with imprinted symbol arrows no twilight sensor function only for sensor connection to terminal block
RolloTec memory button with sensor connection polar white, glossy red, glossy black, glossy
RolloTec memory button, flat design
on page T37
Lamella adjustment with signal < 1 sec.; Self-sustaining for 2 min. with signal > 1 sec.; Storage of „up/down“ time with signal > 3,5 sec.
Brightness value sun approx. 20 kLux; Lamella adjustment with signal < 1 sec.; Self-sustaining for 2 min. with signal > 1 sec.; Storage of „up/down“ time with signal > 3,5 sec.
For RolloTec brightness sensors order no. 0169, 0184 For RolloTec glass breakage sensor order no. 0170 For RolloTec adapter for sensors order no. 0171 For RolloTec standard insert without neutral conductor connection order no. 2911 For RolloTec standard insert order no. 2925 For Rollotec comfort insert order no. 2975 For RolloTec comfort insert for direct current drives order no. 2975 01 For magnetic contact order no. 9251 ..
Memory buttons 1 1 1
1 1 1
For manual and timer programmed running of awnings, shutters and blinds.
with embossed arrows with 5 light scenes for „open/close“ retrieving light scenes only by using radio transmitter brightness value for sunblind individually adjustable no twilight sensor function for sensor connection to socket contact or terminal block
# 1756 29 # 1756 72 # 1756 75
# 1757 29 # 1757 72 # 1757 75
Stored „up“ and/or „down“ time is run daily in automatic operation.
For RolloTec brightness sensors order no. 0169, 0184 For RolloTec glass breakage sensor order no. 0170 For RolloTec adapter for sensors order no. 0171 For RolloTec standard insert without neutral conductor connection order no. 2911 For RolloTec standard insert order no. 2925 For Rollotec comfort insert order no. 2975 For RolloTec comfort insert for direct current drives order no. 2975 01 For magnetic contact order no. 9251 ..
polar white, glossy red, glossy black, glossy
Packing unit
on page T37
# 1757 19 # 1757 62 # 1757 65
1 1 1
Brightness value sun approx. 20 kLux; Lamella adjustment with signal < 1 sec.; Self-sustaining for 2 min. with signal > 1 sec.; Storage of „up/down“ time with signal > 3,5 sec.
Stored „up“ and/or „down“ time is run daily in automatic operation.
Stored „up“ and/or „down“ time is run daily in automatic operation.
For manual and timer programmed running of awnings, shutters and blinds.
For manual and timer programmed running of awnings, shutters and blinds.
For RolloTec standard insert without neutral conductor connection order no. 2911 For RolloTec standard insert order no. 2925 For Rollotec comfort insert order no. 2975 For RolloTec comfort insert for direct current drives order no. 2975 01
For RolloTec brightness sensors order no. 0169, 0184 For RolloTec glass breakage sensor order no. 0170 For RolloTec adapter for sensors order no. 0171 For RolloTec standard insert without neutral conductor connection order no. 2911 For RolloTec standard insert order no. 2925 For Rollotec comfort insert order no. 2975 For RolloTec comfort insert for direct current drives order no. 2975 01 For magnetic contact order no. 9251 ..
with imprinted symbol arrows
with embossed arrows no twilight sensor function for sensor connection to socket contact or terminal block
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
287
TWINPOINT Order no.
Packing unit
Order no.
Timer switches
RolloTec timer with display and sensor connection
RolloTec easy timer with display polar white, glossy red, glossy black, glossy on page T37
# 1762 29 # 1762 62 # 1762 65
on page T37
No extension units and sensor signals or central commands will be processed. For manual and timer programmed running of awnings, shutters and blinds. For RolloTec standard insert without neutral conductor connection order no. 2911 For RolloTec standard insert order no. 2925 For Rollotec comfort insert order no. 2975 For RolloTec comfort insert for direct current drives order no. 2975 01
with imprint in German with pre-set base programme simple programming of operation times with quick programming mode programming possible up to 6 hours after pulling from the insert 2 programme blocks Mon. - Fri. and Sat. - Sun. large-area display with slide switch for manual/automatic
RolloTec timer with display
on page T37
# 1754 19 # 1754 62 # 1754 65
polar white, glossy red, glossy black, glossy
1 1 1
Operation times 2 up/down; Power reserve approx. 6 hrs., maintenance-free; Lamella adjustment with signal < 1 sec.; Self-sustaining for 2 min. with signal > 1 sec.
polar white, glossy red, glossy black, glossy
Packing unit
1 1 1
Operation times 18 up/down; Random generator +/- 15 min.; Power reserve approx. 24 hrs., maintenance-free; Astronomic time shift +/- 2 hrs.; Learnable running time 1 sec.- 12 min.; Lamella adjustment with signal < 1 sec.; Self-sustaining for 2 min. with signal > 1 sec. For manual and timer programmed running of awnings, shutters and blinds. For RolloTec standard insert without neutral conductor connection order no. 2911 For RolloTec standard insert order no. 2925 For Rollotec comfort insert order no. 2975 For RolloTec comfort insert for direct current drives order no. 2975 01
# 1755 19 # 1755 62 # 1755 65
1 1 1
Brightness value sun approx. 1 - 76 kLux; Twilight value approx. 6 - 300 Lux; Operation times 18 up/down; Random generator +/- 15 min.; Power reserve approx. 24 hrs., maintenance-free; Astronomic time shift +/- 2 hrs.; Learnable running time 1 sec.- 12 min.; Lamella adjustment with signal < 1 sec.; Self-sustaining for 2 min. with signal > 1 sec. For manual and timer programmed running of awnings, shutters and blinds. For RolloTec brightness sensors order no. 0169, 0184 For RolloTec glass breakage sensor order no. 0170 For RolloTec adapter for sensors order no. 0171 For RolloTec standard insert without neutral conductor connection order no. 2911 For RolloTec standard insert order no. 2925 For Rollotec comfort insert order no. 2975 For RolloTec comfort insert for direct current drives order no. 2975 01 For magnetic contact order no. 9251 ..
with imprint in German with pre-set base programme 3 independent programme memories for everyday/ holidays with week and day programme with slide switch from summer to winter time astro programme for sunrise/sundown running large-area display with symbols with slide switch for manual/automatic for sensor connection to socket contact or terminal block RolloTec brightness sensor for sun blind movement up/down can be connected brightnesses individually adjustable
Intermediate rings Intermediate ring for central plate polar white, glossy red, glossy black, glossy
# 1127 09 # 1127 62 # 1127 65
10 10 10
with imprint in German with pre-set base programme 3 independent programme memories for everyday/ holidays with week and day programme with slide switch from summer to winter time astro programme for sunrise/sundown running large-area display with symbols with slide switch for manual/automatic
288
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
TWINPOINT Order no.
Packing unit
Signalling and command units
# 1071 09 # 1071 62 # 1071 65
Packing unit
Centre plate for aerial socket 2- and 3-hole
Centre plate for signalling and control device Ø 22.5 mm with labelling field polar white, glossy red, glossy black, glossy
Order no.
10 10 10
Screw distance 36 mm Signalling and command units: Kraus-Naimer; Lumitas; Schlegel; Overvoltage protection devices: Dehn, order no. NM DK 280; OBO-Bettermann, order no. KNS/IS-D with supporting plate with cut-out dia. 22.5 mm without spreader claws
polar white, glossy red, glossy black, glossy
# 1201 09 # 1201 62 # 1201 65
10 10 10
For aerial socket 2-hole single box order no. 4502, HIFS 1B For aerial socket 2-hole throughpass socket order no. 4515 For aerial socket 3-hole single box order no. 4522 For aerial socket 3-hole throughpass socket order no. 4523, 4593
with knock out SAT input
Centre plate for aerial socket 4-hole polar white, glossy red, glossy black, glossy
# 1703 09 # 1703 62 # 1703 65
10 10 10
TV/audio with 2 additional SAT outputs (F-sockets)
Central plate for XLR round connectors D series polar white, glossy
# 1412 89
10
Centre plate for aerial socket 4-hole polar white, glossy red, glossy black, glossy
Cut-out diameter 23,6 mm; Distance between screws (horizontal/vertical) 19 / 24 mm Attention! Use only with intermediate ring 1127 09.
# 1704 09 # 1704 62 # 1704 65
Aerial sockets: Ankaro; Astro; Axing; Delta; Schwaiger with 2 additional SAT outputs (F-sockets)
Circular plug-in connector: Cannon; Deltron; Farnell; Hirose; Monacor; Neutrik; RS Components with supporting plate speakon and jack connector without spreader claws
Central plate for broadband modem box polar white, glossy
Centre plate for loudspeaker socket outlet and miniature connector insert
# 1439 89
Broadband modem socket: Wisi with additional multimedia output
# 1185 09
10
# 1185 62
10
black, glossy, 1gang, 1 knock out opening
# 1185 65
10
Centre plate for cable outlet and VDo connection box
polar white, glossy, 2gang
# 1187 09
10
red, glossy, 2gang black, glossy, 2gang
# 1187 62 # 1187 65
10 10
polar white, glossy red, glossy black, glossy
For miniature connector insert order no. 4505 For stereo loudspeaker socket outlet order no. 4505 01 For loudspeaker socket outlet High End order no. 4505 02 For BNC/TNC connector insert order no. 4577, 4579
10
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring 1127 09.
polar white, glossy, 1gang, 1 knock out opening red, glossy, 1gang, 1 knock out opening
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
10 10 10
Data-/telecommunications
# 1005 09 # 1005 62 # 1005 65
10 10 10
For cable outlet order no. 4468, 4470
VDo connection boxes: Rutenbeck with outlet
289
TWINPOINT Order no.
Packing unit
Centre plate for TAE socket outlet and loudspeaker connection box polar white, glossy red, glossy black, glossy
# 1035 09 # 1035 62 # 1035 65
10 10 10
EAD socket outlets: Drivex; Fröhlich + Walter; Intracom; TAE and FCC overvoltage protection sockets: Dehn; FCC socket outlets: Dätwyler; Rutenbeck
polar white, glossy red, glossy black, glossy
# 1468 89 # 1468 62 # 1468 65
10 10 10
Attention! Use only with intermediate rings 1127 09, 1127 62 and 1127 65. for order no. 4538, 4554, 4568, 4586, 4590
FCC socket outlets: Ackermann; AMP; BTR; Crack-IT; Rutenbeck; Telegärtner; Telena with 45° oblique outlet for 1gang socket outlet cat.3, cat.5e and cat.6
Central plate FCC/E-DAT design/Telekom ISDN socket outlet
Central plate for TAE socket outlet 6F+N # 1457 89 # 1457 62 # 1457 65
Packing unit
Central plate for FCC socket outlet
For TAE socket outlet order no. 4487 .., 4500 .., 4544 .. For loudspeaker connection box order no. 4572 .., 4573 .. For FCC/TAE socket outlet order no. 4588 .. For USB data interface flush-mounted order no. 7504 00 04
polar white, glossy red, glossy black, glossy
Order no.
10 10 10
Attention! Use only with intermediate rings 1127 09, 1127 62 and 1127 65.
polar white, glossy red, glossy black, glossy
# 1469 89 # 1469 62 # 1469 65
10 10 10
Attention! Use only with intermediate rings 1127 09, 1127 62 and 1127 65. for order no. 4539, 4555, 4562, 4587, 4591, 4592
for order no. 4487 ..
Central plate for TAE socket outlet 6/6FF and 6/6NF and loudspeaker connection box polar white, glossy red, glossy black, glossy
# 1458 89 # 1458 62 # 1458 65
10 10 10
Attention! Use only with intermediate rings 1127 09, 1127 62 and 1127 65.
for order no. 4487 .., 4500 .., 4544 .., 4572 .., 4573 .., 4588 .., 7504 00 04
EAD socket outlets: Drivex; Fröhlich + Walter; Intracom; TAE and FCC overvoltage protection sockets: Dehn; FCC socket outlets: Dätwyler; Rutenbeck
Central plate for FCC and Telekom ISDN socket outlet (IAE)
for USB data interface flush-mounted 1 knock out opening
polar white, glossy
Centre plate for PTT socket outlet „Netherlands“ polar white, glossy red, glossy black, glossy
# 61 1026 09 # 61 1026 62 # 61 1026 65
10 10 10
universal for standard commercially available PTT socket outlets
290
ISDN socket outlets (Rutenbeck): Telekom; FCC socket outlets: Ackermann; AMP; BTR; CobiNet; Corning; Crack-IT; CTI Netzwerksysteme; Dätwyler; EFB Electronic; eku Kabel & Systeme; Elmat; Rutenbeck; Setec; Süveg; Telegärtner; Telena with 45° oblique outlet for 2gang socket outlet cat.3, cat.5e and cat.6
# 1429 89
10
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring 1127 09. ISDN socket outlets (ZE Kommunikationstechnik): Telekom; FCC socket outlets: Telena; ZE Kommunikationstechnik with 25° oblique outlet for 2gang socket outlet cat.3
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
TWINPOINT Order no.
Packing unit
Central plate for FCC and Telekom ISDN socket outlet (IAE) polar white, glossy
# 1430 89
10
polar white, glossy red, glossy black, glossy
# 1478 89 # 1478 62 # 1478 65
Central plate for FCC/IAE/FCC-DAT 300E socket outlet 10 10 10
Attention! Use only with intermediate rings 1127 09, 1127 62 and 1127 65.
FCC socket outlets: BTR; Farnell; Fröhlich + Walter; Krone; Schumann; Telena with 45° oblique outlet for 2gang socket outlet cat.6
Central plate for EMJ45 socket outlet polar white, glossy
# 1422 89
FCC socket outlets: Telegärtner; Telena with 45° oblique outlet for 1gang or 2gang socket outlet cat.5e
Central plate for FCC/IAE/Telekom ISDN socket outlet
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring 1127 09.
# 1467 89 # 1467 62 # 1467 65
Central plate for FCC socket outlet polar white, glossy
10 10 10
Attention! Use only with intermediate rings 1127 09, 1127 62 and 1127 65. ISDN socket outlets (BTR): Telekom; FCC socket outlets: BTR; EFB Electronic; Farnell; Fröhlich + Walter; Krone; Monacor; Telena with 45° oblique outlet for 2gang socket outlet cat.3
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
10
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring 1127 09.
FCC socket outlets: BTR; Farnell; Fröhlich + Walter; Krone; Schumann; Telena with 45° oblique outlet for 1gang socket outlet cat.3 and cat.6
polar white, glossy red, glossy black, glossy
10 10 10
Attention! Use only with intermediate rings 1127 09, 1127 62 and 1127 65.
ISDN socket outlets (Kräcker): Telekom; FCC socket outlets: Farnell; Kräcker with 45° oblique outlet for 2gang socket outlet cat.3
# 1446 89 # 1446 62 # 1446 65
Packing unit
Central plate for FCC-DAT 300E socket outlet
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring 1127 09.
polar white, glossy red, glossy black, glossy
Order no.
# 1419 89
10
FCC socket outlets: Brand-Rex; CobiNet; Drivex; EFB Electronic; Fröhlich + Walter; Fröschel; Intracom; OTRA; Schumann; Setec; Sevex; Siemens; Sonepar; ZE Kommunikationstechnik with 40° oblique outlet for 1gang or 2gang socket outlet cat.5, cat.5e and cat.6
291
TWINPOINT Order no.
Packing unit
Centre plate for round connector Ø 30 mm with labelling field polar white, glossy red, glossy black, glossy
# 1067 09 # 1067 62 # 1067 65
10 10 10
Order no.
Packing unit
Central plate for 6pole socket outlet polar white, glossy red, glossy black, glossy
# 1474 89 # 1474 62 # 1474 65
10 10 10
Cut-out diameter 30 mm; Screw distance 36 mm
Attention! Use only with intermediate rings 1127 09, 1127 62 and 1127 65.
Circular plug-in connector: Amphenol-Tuchel; Binder; Cannon; Conrad Electronic; Farnell; Monacor; RS Components with supporting plate without spreader claws
Nurse call system: Ackermann, clino opt 99, order no. 71008C3; Nurse call systems: Ackermann, clino opt 90, clino phon 95, order no. 71008C; Siedle, order no. AD 306-0; 6pole socket outlets: Hirschmann, Medu 600, Medu 600 GSK
Centre plate for D-subminiature connectors with labelling field polar white, glossy red, glossy black, glossy
# 1072 09 # 1072 62 # 1072 65
10 10 10
D-subminiature connectors see module inserts. for order no. 1834, 1835, 1839, 1841, 1842
with supporting plate without spreader claws
Communication technics Data connector housings Data connector housing with labelling field polar white, glossy red, glossy black, glossy
# 1126 09 # 1126 62 # 1126 65
10 10 10
Mounting plates see acessories order no. 1111 .., 1112 ..
with supporting plate for mounting plates without spreader claws
Hospital installation Centre plate for double pole socket outlet for floating output polar white, glossy red, glossy black, glossy
# 1705 09 # 1705 62 # 1705 65
10 10 10
for order no. 1061
For double pole socket outlet according to DIN 42801 with imprint
292
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
Order no.
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
Packing unit
Order no.
Packing unit
293
Surfaces Frames/cover plates
Serie 1930 PORZELLAN MADE by Rosenthal
Serie 1930
Porcelain, glossy
Plastic, glossy
Plastic, glossy
polar white similar to RAL 9010 black
similar to RAL 8022
polar white similar to RAL 9010 black
Glasserie Glass, high-gloss Palazzo Duro-Horn® inlay plastic, high-gloss, decorative white marble, decorative black marble, decorative brown root-wood decorative ring, metallised plastic, 24-carat gold-plated
Centre inserts Glasserie/Palazzo/Serie 1930 Plastic, glossy polar white similar to RAL 9010 black
similar to RAL 8022
Metal toggle Brass, refined Brass, clear varnished Brass, chrome-plated
294
similar to RAL 8022
Serie 1930/Glasserie/Palazzo
Special range Flushmounted System Berker Serie 1930
Modern and classic – the Berker Serie 1930 in functional Bauhaus-style design creates a special ambiance and is the perfect combination of the state-of-the-art technology and timeless design. NEW: Now available in genuine Rosenthal porcelain. ■ Available surfaces: polar white, black
Berker GLASSERIE The practical design and the transparency of real glass help your customers to create truly one-of-a-kind interior designs. ■ Replica pf Bauhaus design (around 1920) ■ Suitable for older buildings or modern living spaces ■ Available surface combinations: glass in combination with rotary toggle in polar white, black, chrome or brass. Design: TECNOLUMEN
Berker PALAZZO
An extravagant solution outside the conventional market, suitable for representative living spaces, spas, business premises and restaurants.
■ Ultra-high-grade matterials with marble or mahogany root-wood effects, framed in 24-carat real gold-plated decorative rings ■ Available surface decorations: white marble, black marble, root-wood mahogany brown
295
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS SERIE 1930 PORZELLAN MADE BY ROSENTHAL
Serie 1930 porcelain frames have a larger diameter in order to better highlight the high-quality Rosenthal porcelain. Due to the special impression created by the matterial, we recommend placing each device in a 1gang porcelain frame when combining more than one device. When doing so, please observe the distance dimensions shown below. SPECIAL CONSIDERATIONS FOR INSTALLATION F or flush-mounted installation a centre-to-centre dimension of 91 mm is recommended. In order to maintain the appropriate distance during plastering, flush-mounting boxes from Kaiser with snap-tunnel supports must be used. Their distance can be set easily and optimally using a spacer gland (order no. 1885).
91
20
91
6,5
84,5
F or hollow-wall installation, we also recommend a centre-to-centre dimension of 91 mm. D ue to its diameter of 84.5 mm, the porcelain frame cannot be installed with a Serie 1930 surface-mounted frame.
For integration of additional functions (e.g. socket outlet, rotary dimmer), the porcelain frame can be combined with all Serie 1930 centre inserts made of plastic.
296
SERIE 1930 PORZELLAN MADE BY ROSENTHAL Order no.
Packing unit
Order no.
Packing unit
Covers for switches / push-buttons NEW
Centre plate with toggle for rotary switches and spring-return push-buttons polar white, glossy black, glossy
* 1647 69 * 1647 65
1 1
For group spring-return push-button order no. 3838 00 For spring-return push-button order no. 3846 00 For rotary switch order no. 3875 00, 3876 00, 3877 00, 3893 00
of porcelain
Frames NEW
Porcelain frame 1gang black, glossy polar white, glossy
* 1381 65 * 1381 69
1 1
Attention! In combinations, the spacer gland for Kaiser flush-mounted boxes must be used, see accessories order no. 1885
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
297
SERIE 1930 Order no.
Packing unit
Frames
Order no.
Packing unit
Surface-mounted frames Frame 1gang polar white, glossy black, glossy
Surface-mounted frame 1gang 1381 09 1381 01
polar white, glossy black, glossy
10 10
1001 09 1001 01
10 10
Installation depth 33,5 mm on page T67
Spacer gland for Kaiser flush-mounted boxes for combination mounting of 1gang frames see accessories order no. 1885
on page T67
for single mounting
with cable and duct entry
Centre frame polar white, glossy black, glossy
on page T67
1381 59 1381 51
10 10
Combinations are only to be installed in simple combi boxes.
End frame
on page T67
10 10
Combinations are only to be installed in simple combi boxes.
1331 19 1331 11
10 10
for order no. 1001 ..
Combination connector polar white black
1823 09 1823 05
10 10
Also suitable for units of the surface-mounted range. for order no. 1001 ..
to combine surface-mounted devices
Frame 2gang polar white, glossy black, glossy
1381 29 1381 21
2 2
Cable and duct entry polar white black
1813 09 1813 05
10 10
Also suitable for surface-mounted frames and housings from the flush-mounted ranges.
for vertical and horizontal mounting
for wire or 15 x 15 mm cable duct
Frame 3gang polar white, glossy black, glossy
on page T67
polar white black
Entries/connectors 1381 49 1381 41
for combination mounting
on page T67
Accessories: Self-extinguishing base plate 1gang
with imprint suitable for mounting on flammable base surface
for combination mounting
polar white, glossy black, glossy
Multiple combinations possible with combination connector order no. 1823 05, 1823 09
1381 39 1381 31
for vertical and horizontal mounting
2 2
Tube entry polar white black
1817 09 1817 05
10 10
Distance from wall to centre of pipe 16 mm Suitable tubes for surface mounted installation are available from: www.fraenkische-elektro.de Also suitable for surface-mounted frames and housings from the flush-mounted ranges. for tubes with Ø 15.2 mm (PG 9) and M 16 for tubes with coupling dia. 20.5 mm (PG 13.5) and M 20
298
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
GLASSERIE Order no.
Packing unit
Order no.
Cover plates
Glass end frame clear
Glass cover plate for rotary switch/rotary push-button clear
on page T67
Packing unit
1090
for single mounting with polar white plastic base toughened glass
1094
on page T67
for combination mounting with polar white plastic base toughened glass
Glass frame 2gang clear
Glass end cover plate for rotary switch/rotary push-button clear
10
Combinations are only to be installed in simple combi boxes.
10
Spacer gland for Kaiser flush-mounted boxes for combination mounting of glass cover plates see accessories order no. 1885
1092
10
Combinations are only to be installed in simple combi boxes.
1102
2
for vertical and horizontal mounting with polar white plastic base toughened glass
on page T67
for combination mounting with polar white plastic base toughened glass
Glass centre cover plate for rotary switch/ rotary push-button clear
1095
10
Combinations are only to be installed in simple combi boxes. on page T67
for combination mounting with polar white plastic base toughened glass
Frames Glass frame clear
on page T67
1091
10
Spacer gland for Kaiser flush-mounted boxes for combination mounting of glass frames see accessories order no. 1885
for single mounting with polar white plastic base toughened glass
Glass centre frame clear
1093
10
Combinations are only to be installed in simple combi boxes. on page T67
for combination mounting with polar white plastic base toughened glass
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
299
PALAZZO Order no.
Packing unit
Order no.
Cover plates
Packing unit
Decor end frame white, decor marble black, decor marble brown, decor root-wood
Decor cover plate for rotary switch/rotary push-button white, decor marble black, decor marble brown, decor root-wood
1090 10 1090 12 1090 11
1 10 1
on page T67 Spacer gland for Kaiser flush-mounted boxes for combination mounting of decor cover plates see accessories order no. 1885
on page T67
1092 10 1092 12 1092 11
1 1 1
Combinations are only to be installed in simple combi boxes. for combination mounting
for single mounting
Decor centre cover plate for rotary switch/ rotary push-button white, decor marble black, decor marble brown, decor root-wood on page T67
1095 10 1095 12 1095 11
10 10 1
Combinations are only to be installed in simple combi boxes. for combination mounting
Decor end cover plate for rotary switch/rotary push-button white, decor marble black, decor marble brown, decor root-wood on page T67
1094 10 1094 12 1094 11
1 1 1
Combinations are only to be installed in simple combi boxes. for combination mounting
Frames Decor frame white, decor marble black, decor marble brown, decor root-wood on page T67
1091 10 1091 12 1091 11
1 1 1
Spacer gland for Kaiser flush-mounted boxes for combination mounting of decor frames see accessories order no. 1885
for single mounting
Decor centre frame white, decor marble black, decor marble brown, decor root-wood on page T67
1093 10 1093 12 1093 11
10 10 1
Combinations are only to be installed in simple combi boxes. for combination mounting
300
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
SERIE 1930/GLASSERIE/PALAZZO Order no.
Packing unit
Order no.
Rotary switches
Brass toggle
NEW
brass
Rotary switch change-over intermediate series 2pole on/off 10 AX, 250 V~
* 3876 00 * 3877 00 * 3875 00 * 3893 00
1 1 1 1
for rotary switch/rotary push-button with toggle
Chrome toggle brass, chrome-plated
with screw terminals
Spring return push-button
* 3846 00
1
10 A, 250 V~
for rotary switch/rotary push-button with toggle
Without centre plate also suitable for mounting with glass and decor cover plates.
Switches for shutters Rotary switches/rotary push-buttons for shutters
with screw terminals NEW
Rotary switch for shutters with centre plate and rotary knob
Group spring return push-button 2pole, isolated input terminals
* 3838 00
1
10 A, 250 V~
on page T5
Without centre plate also suitable for mounting with glass and decor cover plates. with neutral-position also suitable as push-button for shutters 2gang with screw terminals
Covers for switches / push-buttons NEW
Centre plate with toggle for rotary switches and spring-return push-buttons polar white, glossy black, glossy
1
1812 01
For group spring-return push-button order no. 3838 00 For spring-return push-button order no. 3846 00 For rotary switch order no. 3875 00, 3876 00, 3877 00, 3893 00
Rotary push-buttons change-over contact, usable as NC or NO
1
1812
For group spring-return push-button order no. 3838 00 For spring-return push-button order no. 3846 00 For rotary switch order no. 3875 00, 3876 00, 3877 00, 3893 00
Switching sequence e.g. for clockwise series switch:> 1 > 1+2 > 2 > 0
NEW
Packing unit
* 1647 * 1647 01
1 1
polar white, glossy, 1pole
3811
1
black, glossy, 1pole polar white, glossy, 2pole
3811 01 3812
1 1
black, glossy, 2pole
3812 01
1
10 A, 250 V~ Follow the motor manufacturers‘ instructions!
with neutral-position with push lock function with screw terminals
Accessories: Interlock disk for rotary switch for shutters for conversion to rotary push-button for shutters
1861
10
For group spring-return push-button order no. 3838 00 For spring-return push-button order no. 3846 00 For rotary switch order no. 3875 00, 3876 00, 3877 00, 3893 00
of plastic NEW
Centre plate with toggle for rotary switches and spring-return push-buttons polar white, glossy black, glossy
* 1647 69 * 1647 65
1 1
For group spring-return push-button order no. 3838 00 For spring-return push-button order no. 3846 00 For rotary switch order no. 3875 00, 3876 00, 3877 00, 3893 00
of porcelain
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
301
SERIE 1930/GLASSERIE/PALAZZO Order no.
Packing unit
Pilot lamps
Order no.
Rotary dimmers
Push-buttons and pilot lamps
Universal rotary dimmer with soft-lock, centre plate and setting knob
Push-button and pilot lamp E10 with centre plate
on page T5
Packing unit
polar white, glossy, NO contact
5104
1
black, glossy, NO contact
5104 01
1
polar white, glossy black, glossy on page T10
250 V~ Momentary-contact current max. 2 A; Incandescent lamp power max. 2 W for order no. 1225 .., 1226, 1227, 1229 .. Can be illuminated using neon lamp E10 see module inserts order no. 1601 Can be illuminated using LED lamp E10 see module inserts order no. 1678 ..
Do not connect conventional transformers together with electronic transformers.
Accessories Knob for push-button and pilot lamp E10 polar white, glossy black, glossy polar white, glossy, Symbol light
1225 1225 01 1226
10 10 10
polar white, glossy, Symbol bell
1227
10
red transparent clear transparent
1229 1229 02
10 10
4
8
G
J
L
R
with extension unit input for universal rotary dimmer extension unit with incremental encoder with brightness memory bulb-preserving soft startup very low noise short-circuit and overload proof (electronic fuse) phase cut-on or cut-off according to load type, self-learning voltage test possible without dismantling expandable by universal power boosters RMD Plus with load cable switched in parallel with plug-in terminals
For push-button and pilot lamp order no. 5104 ..
Cover for push-button and pilot lamp E10 1221 1222
230 V~, 50/60 Hz 230 V incandescent and halogen lamps 50 - 420 W; Electronic transformers 50 - 420 W; Dimmable conventional transformers 50 - 420 VA; Universal power boosters max. 10 phase cut-off á 500 W; Universal power boosters max. 5 phase cut-on á 420 VA; Tronic or LV power boosters built-in/RMD max. 10 for same load type; Axial dimension diameter 4 mm Trouble-free operation will be obtained only with Berker Tronic transformers.
for illumination and monitoring circuit with screw terminals
clear transparent red transparent
1 1
2834 10 2834 11
10 10
Universal rotary dimmer extension unit with soft-lock, centre plate and setting knob
For push-button and pilot lamp order no. 5104 ..
polar white, glossy black, glossy on page T10
2835 10 2835 11
1 1
230 V~, 50/60 Hz Number of extension units max. 5; Axial dimension diameter 4 mm
as extension unit for universal rotary dimmer with incremental encoder voltage test possible without dismantling with plug-in terminals
302
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
SERIE 1930/GLASSERIE/PALAZZO Order no.
Packing unit
Socket outlets
Order no.
Blank plates
SCHUKO-socket outlets
Blank plate with centre plate polar white, glossy, without base and spreader claws black, glossy, without base and spreader claws polar white, glossy, with base and spreader claws black, glossy, with base and spreader claws
SCHUKO-socket outlet
on page T6
polar white, glossy black, glossy polar white, glossy, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1 black, glossy, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1
4745 20 4745 21 4755
10 10 10
4755 01
10
16 A, 250 V~
Connection terminals IEC 60884-1
SCHUKO-socket outlet 4145 20 4145 21
10
67 1009 21
10
4508 20 4508 21
10 10
For flange cover with 22.2 mm hole pitch to DIN 51529
Socket outlet with earth pin 67 6579
10
67 6579 01
10
Circular plug-in connector: Cannon; Conrad Electronic; Dr. Ing. Sieger; Farnell; Hirschmann; Lumberg; Monacor; RS Components
16 A, 250 V~
with supporting ring for 1 or 2 connectors for loudspeaker sockets for diode plug-in devices for miniature plug-in devices 1 knock out opening
Connection terminals according to IEC 60884-1 2pole + earth with screw-in lift terminals
on page T6
67 1009 20
Loudspeaker socket see module inserts order no. 1800
Socket outlets with earth pin
NEW
20
Miniature connector insert with centre plate polar white, glossy black, glossy
with screw terminals
on page T6
1009 21
Connector inserts
Connection terminals IEC 60884-1
polar white, glossy, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1 black, glossy, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1
20
TV/audio 10 10
16 A, 250 V~ on page T6
1009 20
with supporting ring centre plate plug-in fixing
with plug-in terminals
polar white, glossy black, glossy
Packing unit
Socket outlet with earth pin polar white, glossy, * 67 6879 enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1 black, glossy, enhanced 67 6879 01 * contact protection IEC 60884-1
10
10
TV/audio Centre plate for aerial socket 2-hole polar white, glossy black, glossy
1039 20 1039 21
10 10
for order no. 4502, 4515, HIFS 1B
16 A, 250 V~
For aerial socket as per DIN 45330
Connection terminals according to IEC 60884-1
polar white, glossy black, glossy
Centre plate for aerial socket 3-hole 2pole + earth with plug-in terminals
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
1064 20 1064 21
10 10
for order no. 4522, 4523, 4593
303
SERIE 1930/GLASSERIE/PALAZZO Order no.
Packing unit
Order no.
Data-/telecommunications
Centre plate for FCC/E-DAT design/Telekom ISDN socket outlet
Centre plate for cable outlet built-in and VDo connection box polar white, glossy black, glossy
1037 1037 01
polar white, glossy black, glossy
10 10
with outlet
10 10
For TAE socket outlet order no. 4487 .., 4500 .., 4544 .. For loudspeaker connection box order no. 4572 .., 4573 .. For FCC/TAE socket outlet order no. 4588 .. For USB data interface flush-mounted order no. 7504 00 04
EAD socket outlets: Drivex; Fröhlich + Walter; Intracom; TAE and FCC overvoltage protection sockets: Dehn; FCC socket outlets: Dätwyler; Rutenbeck
Flush-mounted wall box HE 450
also for TDO socket outlet 2 knock out openings
1407 1407 01
10
Flush-mounted boxes diameter 60 mm; Flush-mounted boxes installation depth 40 mm; Bolt spacing 60 mm; Combination space 71 mm
Centre plate for FCC socket outlet polar white, glossy black, glossy
10 10
ISDN socket outlets (Rutenbeck): Telekom; FCC socket outlets: Ackermann; AMP; BTR; CobiNet; Corning; Crack-IT; CTI Netzwerksysteme; Dätwyler; EFB Electronic; eku Kabel & Systeme; Elmat; Rutenbeck; Setec; Süveg; Telegärtner; Telena with 45° oblique outlet for 2gang socket outlet cat.3, cat.5e and cat.6
Centre plate for TAE socket outlet and loudspeaker connection box 1040 1040 01
1409 1409 01
For FCC socket outlet order no. 4539, 4562, 4592 For FCC socket outlet shielded order no. 4555, 4587, 4591
For cable outlet order no. 4468
polar white, glossy black, glossy
Packing unit
10 10
Can only be purchased in Belgium by Vecolux! with 8 cut-outs for cable introduction with generous installation space
For FCC socket outlet order no. 4538, 4568 For FCC socket outlet shielded order no. 4554, 4586, 4590
FCC socket outlets: Ackermann; AMP; BTR; Crack-IT; Rutenbeck; Telegärtner; Telena with 45° oblique outlet for 1gang socket outlet cat.3, cat.5e and cat.6
Accessories Spacer gland Spacer gland red
1885
25
Spacing enlargement 20 mm Matching all boxes with SnapTunnel spouts from Kaiser for combinations with full glass cover plates/ glass frames, frames 1gang SERIE 1930 and full Palazzo decor cover plates/decor frames. for flush-mounted boxes from Kaiser
304
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
Order no.
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
Packing unit
Order no.
Packing unit
305
Cover plates Glass, high-gloss polar white similar to RAL 9010
Push-button Metal, brass, galvanised chrome, high-gloss 24-carat gold-plated, high-gloss stainless steel (matt brushed nickel)
306
BERKER TS
Special range Built-in range
An exceptional design created for special design requirements. Fine glass with operating elements in various colour and surface variations allow your customers to take their creativity to new heights.
■ Suitable for installation bus systems and relay circuits with safety extra-low voltage ■ Glass material
307
BERKER TS Order no.
Packing unit
Cover plates
Order no.
Packing unit
Wall boxes
Glass cover plate clear, 1gang clear, 2gang clear, 4gang
Wall box 1 1 1
1391 1392 1394
mounting box, flushmounted (fm), oval
1809
50
hollow-wall box, oval
1824
50
Screw length 25 mm on page T68
on page T68
Other components from the B.7 glass range are available, e.g. SCHUKO-socket outlets. Note dimensional drawings!
plastic
Mount only with mounting boxes order no. 1809, 1824
Screws Two-hole screws 2 x M3.5 x 50 mm
for vertical and horizontal mounting glass with polar white imprint on the backside with polar white plastic base with two-hole screws as dismantling protection and screwdriver each with 2 3.5 x 25 mm screws in chrome, gold and stainless steel
chrome gold stainless steel
on page T68
1 1 1 1 1
1311 1321 1341 1366 1388
Push-button interfaces Radio push-button interface 4gang flushmounted grey
for vertical and horizontal mounting with all-round facet with polar white plastic base with two-hole screws as dismantling protection and screwdriver each with 2 3.5 x 25 mm screws in chrome, gold and stainless steel
on page T47
0126
1
3 V= Battery life approx. 3 years; Radio channels max. 4; Radio signal transmission frequency 433,42 MHz; Radio signal transmission power < 10 mW; Radio signal transmission range (free field) max. 100 m; Contact cleaner power pulse current 3 mA; Operating temperature -20 - +55 °C; Cable length approx. 290 mm; Extendable cable length max. 5 m; Dimensions (diameter x H) 38 x 10 mm For battery-operated radio remote control of all assigned radio bus receivers.
Accessories Buttons Push-button chrome gold stainless steel on page T68
2 pieces for fixing in deeper seated boxes brass, refined
Screw length 25 mm Mount only with mounting boxes order no. 1809, 1824
1 1 1
1895 10 1895 12 1895 13
For glass cover plate order no. 1311, 1321, 1341, 1366, 1388, 1391, 1392, 1394
Glass cover plate clear, 1gang clear, 2gang clear, 4gang clear, 6gang clear, 8gang
For glass cover plate order no. 1311, 1321, 1341, 1366, 1388, 1391, 1392, 1394
1811 10 1811 12 1811 13
10 10 10
24 V Momentary-contact current max. 1,5 A; Installation depth 13 mm Only suitable for safety low voltages! For installation in glass cover plate order no. 1311, 1321, 1341, 1366, 1388, 1391, 1392, 1394
brass, refined NO contact with plug-in terminals
Replacement Lithium coin cell battery see radio bus order no. 1857
including power supply and control electronics each channel can be allocated to as many radio receivers are required functions 1- and 2-push-button oper. for switching and dimming, shutter control, light scenes, master on/off function setting by 5 DIP-switches with lithium coin cell battery 3 V type: CR 2032 with red transmit and battery status LED to connect to max. 4 potential-free contacts with contact cleaner power pulse current for activation pre-assembled, with 4 cable pairs and plug for installation behind flush-mounted inserts
Accessories: Lithium coin cell battery 3 V 1857
10
3 V=, 0,18 Ah type: CR 2032 2 pcs. for replacement
308
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
BERKER TS Order no.
Packing unit
Universal interfaces
7564 20 01
light grey 1
Operating voltage over bus 21 - 32 V=; Input scanning voltage per channel 20 V; Output current per channel max. 0,8 mA; Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C; Cable length approx. 250 mm; Extendable cable length max. 5 m; Dimensions (L x W x H) 43 x 28,5 x 15,5 mm
with 2 independent binary inputs for potential-free contacts 2 binary inputs, 2 outputs or 1 binary input and 1 output parameterisable outputs for LED e.g. as status LED for switch, push-button, dimmer and shutter functions value transmitter for dimming, position, brightness and temperature values 1 and 2 byte functions: impulse counter or switch counter for input 1 for impulse counter function, input 2 is required for the synchronising signal extension unit for light scene push-button cyclic transmission can also be started via switching object single and two push-button operation parameterisable one push-button operation for switching, pushing, shutters and dimming shutter operation concept short-long-short and long-short parameterisable objects for locking individual inputs and outputs objects: switching, forced guidance and feedback of respective output object for logical linking (e.g. OR / AND / AND with return) with programming button and red programming LED bus connection via connecting terminal
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
Packing unit
Universal interface 4gang comfort flushmounted
Universal interface 2gang comfort flushmounted light grey
Order no.
7564 40 01
1
Operating voltage over bus 21 - 32 V=; Input scanning voltage per channel 20 V; Output current for channels 1 and 2, each max. 0,8 mA; Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C; Cable length approx. 250 mm; Extendable cable length max. 5 m; Dimensions (L x W x H) 43 x 28,5 x 15,5
with 4 independent binary inputs for potential-free contacts 4 binary inputs or 2-3 binary inputs and 1-2 outputs parameterisable outputs for LED e.g. as status LED for switch, push-button, dimmer and shutter functions value transmitter for dimming, position, brightness and temperature values 1 and 2 byte functions: impulse counter or switch counter for inputs 1 and 2 for impulse counter function, inputs 3 and 4 are required for the synchronising signal extension unit for light scene push-button cyclic transmission can also be started via switching object single and two push-button operation parameterisable one push-button operation for switching, pushing, shutters and dimming shutter operation concept short-long-short and long-short parameterisable objects for locking individual inputs and outputs objects: switching, forced guidance and feedback of respective output object for logical linking (e.g. OR / AND / AND with return) with programming button and red programming LED bus connection via connecting terminal
309
BERKER TS Order no.
Packing unit
7564 80 01
1
Operating voltage over bus 21 - 32 V=; Input scanning voltage per channel 20 V; Output current per channel max. 0,8 mA; Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C; Max. cable length 10 m; Dimensions (W x H x D) 44 x 48 x 32 mm with 8 independent binary inputs for potential-free contacts 8 binary inputs, 8 outputs or 4 binary inputs and 4 outputs parameterisable outputs for LED e.g. as status LED with programming button and red programming LED for switch, push-button, dimmer and shutter functions dimming / position value transmitter 1 byte extension unit for light scene push-button cyclic transmission can also be started via switching object single and two push-button operation parameterisable one push-button operation for switching, pushing and dimming shutter operation concept short-long-short and long-short parameterisable objects: switching, pos. oper., feedback of respective output (only for applic. 4input/4output) object for audio/video control second operating level by object or 3-button handle (only 8-input application) short-circuit and overload proof (electronic fuse) protected against polarity reversal bus connection via connecting terminal with screw terminals
310
Packing unit
Binary inputs
Universal interface 8gang comfort flushmounted black
Order no.
Binary input 6gang 24 V AC/DC RMD light grey
7521 60 01
1
Operating voltage over bus 21 - 32 V=; Signal voltage 8 - 64 V~/=; Signal current 9 mA; Signal duration 100 % ED; Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C; Input cable length max. 100 m; RMD 2 modules; Dimensions (W x H x D) 36 x 90 x 65 mm; Assembling height as from DIN rail 58 mm External power supply 24 V necessary! Detects the presence of or change in a voltage level at its inputs and, depending on the chosen application, sends telegrams over the instabus KNX/EIB. with 6 independent binary inputs with 2 GND connections with programming button and red programming LED with 6 yellow status LEDs for input states bus connection via connecting terminal with screw terminals
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
Order no.
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
Packing unit
Order no.
Packing unit
311
PUSH-BUTTON Metal, brass, galvanised with Swarovski crystal Stainless steel (nickel, matt brushed) crystal colour: Black Diamond Chrome, high-gloss crystal colour: Crystal 24-carat gold-plated, high-gloss crystal colour: Topaz 24-carat gold-plated, high-gloss crystal colour: Siam
312
Berker TS Crystal
Special range Flush-mounted system
Extravagance becomes manifest not only in a grand gesture, but, above all, in perfect detail. Seen in this way, the new Berker TS Crystal perfects luxury down to the last detail. Designed on the basis of the Berker TS, refined with Crystallized TM – Swarovski Elements. It is, without a doubt, the most glamorous way to switch on a light.
■ Crystalline variation of the Berker TS with glass platform and push-button with fine Swarovski crystals ■ Push-button available in 4 colours
313
BERKER TS CRYSTAL Order no.
Packing unit
Order no.
Packing unit
Accessories Buttons Push-button Crystal chrome
1964 00 01
1
24 V Momentary-contact current max. 1,5 A; Installation depth 13 mm on page T68
Only suitable for safety low voltages! For installation in glass cover plate order no. 1311, 1321, 1341, 1366, 1388, 1391, 1392, 1394
brass, refined with Swarovski crystal NO contact with plug-in terminals
Push-button Black Diamond stainless steel
1966 02 15
1
24 V Momentary-contact current max. 1,5 A; Installation depth 13 mm on page T68
Only suitable for safety low voltages! For installation in glass cover plate order no. 1311, 1321, 1341, 1366, 1388, 1391, 1392, 1394
brass, refined with Swarovski crystal NO contact with plug-in terminals
Push-button Siam gold
1965 02 08
1
24 V Momentary-contact current max. 1,5 A; Installation depth 13 mm on page T68
Only suitable for safety low voltages! For installation in glass cover plate order no. 1311, 1321, 1341, 1366, 1388, 1391, 1392, 1394
brass, refined with Swarovski crystal NO contact with plug-in terminals
Push-button Topaz gold
1965 02 03
1
24 V Momentary-contact current max. 1,5 A; Installation depth 13 mm on page T68
Only suitable for safety low voltages! For installation in glass cover plate order no. 1311, 1321, 1341, 1366, 1388, 1391, 1392, 1394
brass, refined with Swarovski crystal NO contact with plug-in terminals
314
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
Order no.
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
Packing unit
Order no.
Packing unit
315
DECORATIVE PANEL Glass, mirrored
SENSOR SURFACE Glass, mirrored (Swarovski Circle)
316
Berker TS Crystal Ball
Special range Flush-mounted system
Multifaceted switching at its finest: With mirrored platform and control surface made of Crystallized TM – Swarovski Elements, the Berker TS Crystal Ball lends refinement to any atmosphere.
■ A glamorous eye-catcher in any exclusive environment ■ Switch surface made of multifaceted cut Swarovski crystal with optical reflex detector ■ Gentle-touch switching
317
INFORMATION ABOUT ORDERING AND USE BERKER TS CRYSTAL BALL
The Berker TS Crystal Ball can be connected universally to bus systems or also to relay circuits within the limits of the technical specifications. The crystal has an integrated sensor surface that can be used to switch / dim the lighting or to control blinds. The Crystal Ball requires a separate power supply (provided by the user) and must be installed in the 2gang wall box for glass sensor shown here. For installation information, please consult the special section for the Berker TS Sensor. The following table will assist you in ordering and putting products together within the various systems.
Crystal Ball for
Instabus KNX/EIB 1 K NX/EIB universal interface, 2gang, (order no. 7564 20 01) 1 Wall box, 2gang (order no. 1870)
Required devices
Provided by the user
Relay control/ other systems
RADIO BUS 1 R adio push-button interface, flush-mounted, 4gang, (order no. 0126) 1 Wall box, 2gang (order no. 1870)
Power supply (8 to 30 V DC)
1 Wall box, 2gang (order no. 1870)
Power supply (8 to 30 V DC)
Relay/system interface Power supply (8 to 30 V DC)
CONNECTION (see table above for ordering information) It is absolutely essential to provide a separate power supply to the Crystal Ball. The corresponding interface or the relay is connected directly to the terminals of the Crystal Ball. After system commissioning, actions are triggered when the sensor surface is pressed. Depending on the system, the connected interface may not be fully utilised by the Crystal Ball. The remaining interface channels can be used for other applications. optional: Adapter ring for additional anti-dismantling protection or "shadow gap" TS Crystal Ball
Wall box, 2gang, for glass sensor (must be used!) Universal interface, 2gang, comfort flushmounted or Radio push-button interface, flush-mounted, 4gang
318
BERKER TS CRYSTAL BALL Order no.
Packing unit
Order no.
Packing unit
Crystal Ball Crystal Ball Mirror glass, clear
on page T69
1685 78
1
Operating voltage 8 - 30 V=; Current consumption (operation) approx. 18,3 mA; Current consumption (idle) approx. 4,3 mA; Switching voltage max. 30 V=; Momentary-contact current max. 10 mA; Surface adjustment 20 mm for order no. 0126, 7564 20 01 Only suitable for wall box 2gang for glass sensor order no. 1870
separate auxiliary power supply needed operation by gently touching the Crystal Ball with adapter ring for dismantling protection and shadow gap formation with disassembly suction tool with Swarovski crystal NO contact with screw terminals KNX/EIB for for parameterisable functions see universal interface 2gang comfort flush-mounted operation with non-choked output of KNX/EIB voltage supply possible (pay attention to current consum Radio bus for settable functions see the radio push-button interface
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
319
Surfaces
Glass, glossy, imprint on back
320
Glas, polar white
similar to RAL 9010
Glass, black
similar to RAL 9005
Glass, aluminium
similar to RAL 9006
BERKER ts sensor
Special range Built-in range
With the Berker TS Sensor a gentle touch of the plain surface is all that is needed to activate lights, blinds, shutters etc. Completely reduced to a simple smooth surface, this control concept is ideal for especially demanding projects. NEW: Now available with room thermostat and integrated high-end "dark design" display.
■ Suitable for installation bus systems and relay circuits ■ Electronics are placed directly on the backside of the glass plate for exceptional switching reliability ■ Super-flat design enables on-the-wall installation ■ LEDs can be used to show readiness for operation and to display switching states ■ Completely smooth surface made possible by screw-free fastening ■ Labelling on the backside for perfect protection
Design and labelling concept in three variations ■ Basic: delivered without labelling and symbols ■ Customized: pre-defined symbols, colours and labelling can be selected via Web Configurator; for further information, see www.berker.com/ts-sensor Caution: configuration can no longer be changed after the order is placed ■ Manufacture: tailored solutions with choice of fonts, colours and symbols. Contact your Berker sales representative for more information.
321
Information about ordering and use Berker TS Sensor
Design possibilities BASIC The product variants of the Berker TS Sensor can be ordered as a catalogue model in unprinted form with a choice of three background colours: glass, polar white / glass, aluminium / glass, black.
CUSTOMIZED The TS Sensor can be designed in a multitude of ways to meet even the most varied customer needs. This innovative product concept makes it possible to print lettering or symbols for control functions on the back of the glass plate, where they are ideally protected against dirt, wear and damage. This concept means, however, that the functions planned for each control panel are defined together with the customer before ordering. After that, the selected labelling and symbols can no longer be changed, because printing is carried out only once at the time of production.
It is this simple:
1.
Complete planning for the installations ■ ■ Functions of each control panel are permanently defined
2. 3.
Create an individual design using the Web Configurator at www.berker.com/ts-sensor ■ ■ Agree upon design with the customer ■ ■ Save design on the Berker server
Order the sensor ■ ■ Berker sends design number ■ ■ Place order with wholesaler
MANUFACTURE The Web Configurator already offers a wide range of customisation options. If, however, this should still not cover your customers' wishes, then Berker Manufacture is what you need. As far as it is technically feasible, the Berker TS Sensor can be manufactured with customised printing in any colour, even with logos or drawings as a background. Only the colours of the LEDs are predefined for technical reasons. For further information, please contact your regional sales representative.
322
Information about ordering and use Berker TS Sensor
The new Berker TS glass sensors can be connected universally using adapters (accessories) to bus systems, or also to relay circuits within the limits of the technical specifications. Four product variants (1-4gang) make it possible to assign up to eight sensor surfaces according to individual needs. To activate the LEDs, the corresponding outputs must be provided at the interfaces, or else a second interface must be included. The glass sensor requires a separate power supply (provided by the user) and must be installed in the 2gang wall box for glass sensor shown here. The following tables will assist you in ordering and putting products together within the various systems.
Instabus KNX/EIB
Glass sensor, 1gang
Sensor surfaces
2 1
Required devices
Glass sensor, 2gang
1
1
Provided by the user
4
Adapter for KNX/EIB and relay 1
KNX/EIB adapter, 2 x 8gang
(order no. 7590 00 32)
(order no. 7590 00 31)
KNX/EIB universal
Glass sensor, 3gang
1
KNX/EIB universal
6 1
KNX/EIB adapter, 2 x 8gang
2
KNX/EIB universal
interface, 8gang
interfaces, 8gang
(order no. 7564 40 01)
(order no. 7564 80 01)
(order no. 7564 80 01)
1
Wall box, 2gang
8 1
1
Wall box, 2gang
KNX/EIB adapter, 2 x 8gang (order no. 7590 00 31)
(order no. 7590 00 31)
interface, 4gang
Wall box, 2gang
Glass sensor, 4gang
2
KNX/EIB universal interfaces, 8gang (order no. 7564 80 01)
1
Wall box, 2gang
(order no. 1870)
(order no. 1870)
(order no. 1870)
(order no. 1870)
Power supply
Power supply
Power supply
Power supply
(8 to 30 V DC)
(8 to 30 V DC)
(8 to 30 V DC)
(8 to 30 V DC)
In KNX /EIB applications, the white LEDs on the control surfaces can be parameterised as status LEDs via the interfaces.
RADIO BUS
Glass sensor, 1gang
Sensor surfaces
Glass sensor, 2gang
2
4
1
Adapter for KNX/EIB and relay 1
1
Radio push-button
1
Provided by the user
8
Adapter for KNX/EIB and relay 1
(order no. 7590 00 32)
(order no. 7590 00 32) 2
Radio push-button
Adapter for KNX/EIB and relay
2
Radio push-button
interface, flush-mounted,
interface, flush-mounted,
interfaces, flush-mounted,
interfaces, flush-mounted,
4gang,
4gang,
4gang,
4gang,
Wall box, 2gang
1
Wall box, 2gang
(order no. 0126)
(order no. 0126)
(order no. 0126)
(order no. 0126) 1
Radio push-button
Glass sensor, 4gang
6
Adapter for KNX/EIB and relay 1 (order no. 7590 00 32)
(order no. 7590 00 32)
Required devices
Glass sensor, 3gang
1
Wall box, 2gang
1
Wall box, 2gang
(order no. 1870)
(order no. 1870)
(order no. 1870)
(order no. 1870)
Power supply
Power supply
Power supply
Power supply
(8 to 30 V DC)
(8 to 30 V DC)
(8 to 30 V DC)
(8 to 30 V DC)
In the radio bus system, the white LEDs should be operated using the factory setting, that is the LEDs light up for as long as the push-button is pressed and acknowledge that the push-button interface has received a pulse.
Relay circuit/other systems
Glass sensor, 1gang
Sensor surfaces Required devices
Provided by the user
Glass sensor, 2gang
2
Glass sensor, 3gang
4
1
Adapter for KNX/EIB and relay 1
1
Wall box, 2gang
(order no. 7590 00 32)
6
Adapter for KNX/EIB and relay 1 (order no. 7590 00 32)
1
Wall box, 2gang
Glass sensor, 4gang 8
Adapter for KNX/EIB and relay 1 (order no. 7590 00 32)
1
Wall box, 2gang
Adapter for KNX/EIB and relay (order no. 7590 00 32)
1
Wall box, 2gang
(order no. 1870)
(order no. 1870)
(order no. 1870)
(order no. 1870)
Relay/system
Relay/system
Relay/system
Relay/system
interface,
interface,
interface,
interface,
Power supply
Power supply
Power supply
Power supply
(8 to 30 V DC)
(8 to 30 V DC)
(8 to 30 V DC)
(8 to 30 V DC)
For activation via a relay or other system, we recommend operating the white LEDs using the factory setting, that is the LEDs light up for as long as the push-button is pressed and acknowledge that the connected signal has received a pulse.
323
SPECIAL CONSIDERATIONS FOR INSTALLATION Berker TS Sensor
MOUNTING Glass sensors are snapped in place on a "wall box, 2gang, for glass sensor" using adjustable retaining pins in such a way that the glass sensors are seated almost on the wall. The supplied adapter ring provides anti-dismantling protection and gives the glass plate shadow contours. The adjustable retaining pins can be used to compensate for installation depths or irregularities of the wall of up to 20 mm. optional: ADAPTER RING for anti-dismantling protection and "shadow gap" WALL BOX, 2GANG for glass sensor (must be used!)
GLASS SENSOR
EIB adapter 2 X 8GANG or ADAPTER for KNX/EIB and RELAY
UNIVERSAL INTERFACE 8GANG COMFORT FLUSH-MOUNTED (or 4gang, 2gang) or RADIO PUSH-BUTTON INTERFACE, FLUSH-MOUNTED, 4GANG
CONNECTION The glass sensor is connected to the interfaces of the respective systems via an adapter using a ribbon cable (see information about ordering and use). The separate supply voltage should be connected to the respective adapter. optional: ADAPTER RING for anti-dismantling protection and "shadow gap"
GLASS SENSOR with ROOM THERMOSTAT
WALL BOX, 2GANG for glass sensor (must be used!)
CONNECTION The glass sensor with room thermostat is connected directly to the KNX/EIB and separate power supply using the connection terminals located on the back. DISMANTLING To pull glass sensors out of the clamp springs of the wall box, use the supplied dismantling aid with suction cups.
324
BERKER TS SENSOR Order no.
Packing unit
NEW
Glass sensors NEW
Glass sensor 2gang with room thermostat glass, polar white glass, black glass, aluminium glass, polar white, configured glass, black, configured glass, aluminium, configured
Order no.
* 7564 20 39 * 7564 20 35 * 7564 20 34 * 7564 21 39
1 1
7564 21 35
1
* * 7564 21 34
1 1
Operating voltage 18 - 30 V=; Current consumption max. 23 mA; Surface adjustment 20 mm; Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C Only suitable for KNX/EIB! With polar white there are colour deviations from the existing glass ranges. Many options for printing see Web Configurator under www.berker.de/ts-glas-sensor. Customized glass sensors can only be ordered with an order number supplemented by the Web Configurator.
flush wall-mounting possible with wall box 2gang for glass sensor order no. 1870 Available from 03/2009
separate auxiliary power supply needed operation by gently touching the sensor surfaces on the white LED with adapter ring for dismantling protection and shadow gap formation for vertical mounting with disassembly suction tool with one blue ON LED and 4 white status LEDs operation with non-choked output of KNX/EIB voltage supply possible (pay attention to current consum with integral bus coupling unit LED display with symbol display display of operating mode, controller lockout, room/ outside temperature, time (clock required) with 2 additional display sensor surfaces end customer display scope parameterisable for switch, push-button, dimmer, shutter and room thermostat functions value transmitter for dimming, position, brightness and temperature values 1 and 2 byte single and two push-button operation parameterisable sensor surfaces lockable via object for individual single room control controller operating modes: comfort, standby, night and frost/heat protection mode for heating and/or cooling mode with/without auxiliary step control parameter for heating / cooling unit pre-set for continuous (PI) or switched (2-point) control temperature measurement via internal and/ or connectable remote sensor with mean value formation indicator objects for heating and cooling with valve protection function object for controller status with touch lock function bus connection via connecting terminal "#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
Glass sensor 3gang with room thermostat glass, polar white glass, black glass, aluminium glass, polar white, configured glass, black, configured
1
Packing unit
glass, aluminium, configured
* 7564 30 39 * 7564 30 35 * 7564 30 34 * 7564 31 39
1 1
* 7564 31 35 * 7564 31 34
1
1 1
1
Operating voltage 18 - 30 V=; Current consumption max. 23 mA; Surface adjustment 20 mm; Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C Only suitable for KNX/EIB! With polar white there are colour deviations from the existing glass ranges. Many options for printing see Web Configurator under www.berker.de/ts-glas-sensor flush wall-mounting possible with wall box 2gang for glass sensor order no. 1870 Available from 03/2009
separate auxiliary power supply needed operation by gently touching the sensor surfaces on the white LED with adapter ring for dismantling protection and shadow gap formation for vertical mounting with disassembly suction tool with one blue ON LED and 6 white status LEDs operation with non-choked output of KNX/EIB voltage supply possible (pay attention to current consum with integral bus coupling unit LED display with symbol display display of operating mode, controller lockout, room/ outside temperature, time (clock required) with 2 additional display sensor surfaces end customer display scope parameterisable for switch, push-button, dimmer, shutter and room thermostat functions value transmitter for dimming, position, brightness and temperature values 1 and 2 byte single and two push-button operation parameterisable sensor surfaces lockable via object for individual single room control controller operating modes: comfort, standby, night and frost/heat protection mode for heating and/or cooling mode with/without auxiliary step control parameter for heating / cooling unit pre-set for continuous (PI) or switched (2-point) control temperature measurement via internal and/ or connectable remote sensor with mean value formation indicator objects for heating and cooling with valve protection function object for controller status with touch lock function bus connection via connecting terminal
325
BERKER TS SENSOR Order no.
Packing unit
Order no.
Glass sensor 1gang
on page T69
326
Packing unit
Glass sensor 2gang
glass, polar white glass, black glass, aluminium glass, polar white, configured
1681 09 1681 05 1681 07 1691 09
1 1 1 1
glass, black, configured
1691 05
1
glass, aluminium, configured
1691 07
1
on page T69
glass, polar white glass, black glass, aluminium glass, polar white, configured
1682 09 1682 05 1682 07 1692 09
1 1 1 1
glass, black, configured
1692 05
1
glass, aluminium, configured
1692 07
1
Operating voltage 8 - 30 V=; Current consumption (operation) approx. 20 mA; Switching voltage max. 30 V=; Switching current max. 10 mA; LED input voltage max. 5 V~/=; LED input current max. 1 mA; Surface adjustment 20 mm
Operating voltage 8 - 30 V=; Current consumption (operation) approx. 26 mA; Switching voltage max. 30 V=; Switching current max. 10 mA; LED input voltage max. 5 V~/=; LED input current max. 1 mA; Surface adjustment 20 mm
For production-related reasons, with polar white there are colour deviations from the existing glass ranges.
For production-related reasons, with polar white there are colour deviations from the existing glass ranges.
Many options for printing see Web Configurator under www.berker.de/ts-glas-sensor. Customized glass sensors can only be ordered with an order number supplemented by the Web Configurator.
Many options for printing see Web Configurator under www.berker.de/ts-glas-sensor. Customized glass sensors can only be ordered with an order number supplemented by the Web Configurator.
for order no. 7590 00 31, 7590 00 32 flush wall-mounting possible with wall box 2gang for glass sensor order no. 1870
for order no. 7590 00 31, 7590 00 32 flush wall-mounting possible with wall box 2gang for glass sensor order no. 1870
separate auxiliary power supply needed operation by gently touching the sensor surfaces on the white LED the blue LED can be set for Continuously ON or external activation the white LED can be set for Sensor operation or external activation with adapter ring for disassembly protection, shadow jointing and special installation conditions for vertical mounting with disassembly suction tool
separate auxiliary power supply needed operation by gently touching the sensor surfaces on the white LED the blue LED can be set for Continuously ON or external activation the white LED can be set for Sensor operation or external activation with adapter ring for disassembly protection, shadow jointing and special installation conditions for vertical mounting with disassembly suction tool
KNX/EIB with one blue ON LED and 2 white status LEDs for adapting using KNX/EIB adapter 2 x 8gang or wiring with adapter for KNX/EIB and relay for parameterisable functions see universal interfaces operation with non-choked output of KNX/EIB voltage supply possible (pay attention to current consum
KNX/EIB with one blue ON LED and 4 white status LEDs for adapting using KNX/EIB adapter 2 x 8gang or wiring with adapter for KNX/EIB and relay for parameterisable functions see universal interfaces operation with non-choked output of KNX/EIB voltage supply possible (pay attention to current consum
Radio bus with one blue ON LED and 2 white status LEDs, e.g. as orientation or control LED for wiring with adapter for KNX/EIB and relay for settable functions see the radio push-button interface
Radio bus with one blue ON LED and 4 white status LEDs, e.g. as orientation or control LED for wiring with adapter for KNX/EIB and relay for settable functions see the radio push-button interface
Relay with one blue ON LED and 2 white status LEDs, e.g. as orientation or control LED for wiring with adapter for KNX/EIB and relay
Relay with one blue ON LED and 4 white status LEDs, e.g. as orientation or control LED for wiring with adapter for KNX/EIB and relay
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
BERKER TS SENSOR Order no.
Packing unit
Order no.
Glass sensor 3gang
on page T69
Packing unit
Glass sensor 4gang
glass, polar white glass, black glass, aluminium glass, polar white, configured
1683 09 1683 05 1683 07 1693 09
1 1 1 1
glass, black, configured
1693 05
1
glass, aluminium, configured
1693 07
1
on page T69
glass, polar white glass, black glass, aluminium glass, polar white, configured
1684 09 1684 05 1684 07 1694 09
1 1 1 1
glass, black, configured
1694 05
1
glass, aluminium, configured
1694 07
1
Operating voltage 8 - 30 V=; Current consumption (operation) approx. 32 mA; Switching voltage max. 30 V=; Switching current max. 10 mA; LED input voltage max. 5 V~/=; LED input current max. 1 mA; Surface adjustment 20 mm
Operating voltage 8 - 30 V=; Current consumption (operation) approx. 38 mA; Switching voltage max. 30 V=; Switching current max. 10 mA; LED input voltage max. 5 V~/=; LED input current max. 1 mA; Surface adjustment 20 mm
For production-related reasons, with polar white there are colour deviations from the existing glass ranges.
For production-related reasons, with polar white there are colour deviations from the existing glass ranges.
Many options for printing see Web Configurator under www.berker.de/ts-glas-sensor. Customized glass sensors can only be ordered with an order number supplemented by the Web Configurator.
Many options for printing see Web Configurator under www.berker.de/ts-glas-sensor. Customized glass sensors can only be ordered with an order number supplemented by the Web Configurator.
for order no. 7590 00 31, 7590 00 32 flush wall-mounting possible with wall box 2gang for glass sensor order no. 1870
for order no. 7590 00 31, 7590 00 32 flush wall-mounting possible with wall box 2gang for glass sensor order no. 1870
separate auxiliary power supply needed operation by gently touching the sensor surfaces on the white LED the blue LED can be set for Continuously ON or external activation the white LED can be set for Sensor operation or external activation with adapter ring for disassembly protection, shadow jointing and special installation conditions for vertical mounting with disassembly suction tool
separate auxiliary power supply needed operation by gently touching the sensor surfaces on the white LED the blue LED can be set for Continuously ON or external activation the white LED can be set for Sensor operation or external activation with adapter ring for disassembly protection, shadow jointing and special installation conditions for vertical mounting with disassembly suction tool
KNX/EIB with one blue ON LED and 6 white status LEDs for adapting using KNX/EIB adapter 2 x 8gang or wiring with adapter for KNX/EIB and relay for parameterisable functions see universal interfaces operation with non-choked output of KNX/EIB voltage supply possible (pay attention to current consum
KNX/EIB with one blue ON LED and 8 white status LEDs for adapting using KNX/EIB adapter 2 x 8gang or wiring with adapter for KNX/EIB and relay for parameterisable functions see universal interfaces operation with non-choked output of KNX/EIB voltage supply possible (pay attention to current consum
Radio bus with one blue ON LED and 6 white status LEDs, e.g. as orientation or control LED for wiring with adapter for KNX/EIB and relay for settable functions see the radio push-button interface
Radio bus with one blue ON LED and 8 white status LEDs, e.g. as orientation or control LED for wiring with adapter for KNX/EIB and relay for settable functions see the radio push-button interface
Relay with one blue ON LED and 6 white status LEDs, e.g. as orientation or control LED for wiring with adapter for KNX/EIB and relay
Relay with one blue ON LED and 8 white status LEDs, e.g. as orientation or control LED for wiring with adapter for KNX/EIB and relay
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
327
BERKER TS SENSOR Order no.
Packing unit
Accessories
Packing unit
Universal interface 4gang comfort flushmounted
Adapters
light grey
Adapter for KNX/EIB and relay 7590 00 32
1
For flush-mounted radio push-button interface 4gang order no. 0126 For flush-mounted universal interface 2gang comfort order no. 7564 20 01 For flush-mounted universal interface 4gang comfort order no. 7564 40 01 For flush-mounted universal interface 8gang comfort order no. 7564 80 01
for wiring with universal interfaces, radio pushbutton interfaces or conventional relay/PLC
KNX/EIB adapter 2 x 8gang 7590 00 31
1
For flush-mounted universal interface 8gang comfort order no. 7564 80 01
for adapting 1 or 2 universal interfaces 8gang convenience flush-mounted
Universal interfaces Universal interface 2gang comfort flushmounted light grey
7564 20 01
1
Operating voltage over bus 21 - 32 V=; Input scanning voltage per channel 20 V; Output current per channel max. 0,8 mA; Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C; Cable length approx. 250 mm; Extendable cable length max. 5 m; Dimensions (L x W x H) 43 x 28,5 x 15,5 mm
with 2 independent binary inputs for potential-free contacts 2 binary inputs, 2 outputs or 1 binary input and 1 output parameterisable outputs for LED e.g. as status LED for switch, push-button, dimmer and shutter functions value transmitter for dimming, position, brightness and temperature values 1 and 2 byte functions: impulse counter or switch counter for input 1 for impulse counter function, input 2 is required for the synchronising signal extension unit for light scene push-button cyclic transmission can also be started via switching object single and two push-button operation parameterisable one push-button operation for switching, pushing, shutters and dimming shutter operation concept short-long-short and long-short parameterisable objects for locking individual inputs and outputs objects: switching, forced guidance and feedback of respective output object for logical linking (e.g. OR / AND / AND with return) with programming button and red programming LED bus connection via connecting terminal
328
Order no.
7564 40 01
1
Operating voltage over bus 21 - 32 V=; Input scanning voltage per channel 20 V; Output current for channels 1 and 2, each max. 0,8 mA; Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C; Cable length approx. 250 mm; Extendable cable length max. 5 m; Dimensions (L x W x H) 43 x 28,5 x 15,5
with 4 independent binary inputs for potential-free contacts 4 binary inputs or 2-3 binary inputs and 1-2 outputs parameterisable outputs for LED e.g. as status LED for switch, push-button, dimmer and shutter functions value transmitter for dimming, position, brightness and temperature values 1 and 2 byte functions: impulse counter or switch counter for inputs 1 and 2 for impulse counter function, inputs 3 and 4 are required for the synchronising signal extension unit for light scene push-button cyclic transmission can also be started via switching object single and two push-button operation parameterisable one push-button operation for switching, pushing, shutters and dimming shutter operation concept short-long-short and long-short parameterisable objects for locking individual inputs and outputs objects: switching, forced guidance and feedback of respective output object for logical linking (e.g. OR / AND / AND with return) with programming button and red programming LED bus connection via connecting terminal
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
BERKER TS SENSOR Order no.
Packing unit
7564 80 01
Packing unit
Push-button interfaces
Universal interface 8gang comfort flushmounted black
Order no.
Radio push-button interface 4gang flushmounted
1
Operating voltage over bus 21 - 32 V=; Input scanning voltage per channel 20 V; Output current per channel max. 0,8 mA; Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C; Max. cable length 10 m; Dimensions (W x H x D) 44 x 48 x 32 mm
grey
on page T47
with 8 independent binary inputs for potential-free contacts 8 binary inputs, 8 outputs or 4 binary inputs and 4 outputs parameterisable outputs for LED e.g. as status LED with programming button and red programming LED for switch, push-button, dimmer and shutter functions dimming / position value transmitter 1 byte extension unit for light scene push-button cyclic transmission can also be started via switching object single and two push-button operation parameterisable one push-button operation for switching, pushing and dimming shutter operation concept short-long-short and long-short parameterisable objects: switching, pos. oper., feedback of respective output (only for applic. 4input/4output) object for audio/video control second operating level by object or 3-button handle (only 8-input application) short-circuit and overload proof (electronic fuse) protected against polarity reversal bus connection via connecting terminal with screw terminals
1
0126
3 V= Battery life approx. 3 years; Radio channels max. 4; Radio signal transmission frequency 433,42 MHz; Radio signal transmission power < 10 mW; Radio signal transmission range (free field) max. 100 m; Contact cleaner power pulse current 3 mA; Operating temperature -20 - +55 °C; Cable length approx. 290 mm; Extendable cable length max. 5 m; Dimensions (diameter x H) 38 x 10 mm For battery-operated radio remote control of all assigned radio bus receivers. Replacement Lithium coin cell battery see radio bus order no. 1857
including power supply and control electronics each channel can be allocated to as many radio receivers are required functions 1- and 2-push-button oper. for switching and dimming, shutter control, light scenes, mas function setting by 5 DIP-switches with lithium coin cell battery 3 V type: CR 2032 with red transmit and battery status LED to connect to max. 4 potential-free contacts with contact cleaner power pulse current for activation pre-assembled, with 4 cable pairs and plug for installation behind flush-mounted inserts
Accessories: Lithium coin cell battery 3 V 1857
10
3 V=, 0,18 Ah
type: CR 2032 2 pcs. for replacement
Accessories Wall boxes Wall box 2gang for glass sensor and Crystal Ball 1870
on page T69
1
Dimensions (W x H x D) 68 x 136 x 76 mm; Cut hole diameter 2 x 68 mm; Cut hole pitch 71 mm For glass sensor 1gang order no. 1681 .., 1691 .. For glass sensor 2gang order no. 1682 .., 1692 .. For glass sensor 3gang order no. 1683 .., 1693 .. For glass sensor 4gang order no. 1684 .., 1694 .. For Crystal Ball order no. 1685 78 For glass sensor 2gang with room thermostat order no. 7564 .. For glass sensor 3gang with room thermostat order no. 7564 ..
for flush mounting and hollow-wall mounting flush wall-mounting or with adapter ring
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
329
330
MOTION DETECTORS
Controller/ controller system / automatic controller/
presence detector – weatherproof and reliable
Berker controllers register every movement and react quickly and reliably. Thanks to their passive infrared technology they switch on and off again without touch contact. Berker controllers work in all types of weather and are suitable for many applications. ■ Choice of detection angle: 70°, 110°, 180°, 220° or 240° ■ Range up to 16 m ■ Detection field up to 22 x 20 m ■ Surface-mounted installation (up to IP 55 protection class) or flush-mounted installation (up to IP 44 protection class) ■ Coordination of up to 8 controller system sensors using a power pack ■ Wireless installation with radio controllers
The Berker presence detectors measure the ambient brightness and switches on the lighting if the brightness drops below the switch-on brightness and minimal motion is detected. If the ambient brightness exceeds to more than double the set brightness value (e.g. as a result of daylight penetrating the room), the detector switches the lighting off despite any detected motion.
331
MOTION DETECTORS Order no.
Packing unit
Order no.
Controllers
Automatic controller plus 110 polar white
Controller 70 polar white anthracite
on page T21
1 1
0143 09 0143 05
230 V~, 50/60 Hz 230 V incandescent and halogen lamps 1000 W; Electronic transformers 750 W; Conventional transformers 750 VA; Fluorescent lamps in duo configuration 1000 VA; Fluorescent lamps uncompensated 500 VA; Fluorescent lamps parallel compensated 400 VA; Recommended installation height approx. 2,4 m; Range approx. 8 m; Range adjustable in 3 stages, 4, 6 or 8 m; Detection field rectangular shaped approx. 8 x 11 m; Detection angle 70 °; Detection levels 3; Sectors 42; Switching segments 168; Response brightness adjustable approx. 3 - 80 / unlimited Lux; Delay time adjustable approx. 10 sec.- 5 min. ; Dimensions (W x H x D) 62 x 120 x 42 mm For electronic ballasts and energy-saving lamps with excessive switch-on currents use switch-on current limiters order no. 0185. To prevent incorrect switching caused by draughts, the supplied seals must be used under the fastening screws. Neutral conductor necessary! Switches on for the duration of the delay time in case minimum response brightness level is infringed and if people are detected.
8
G
J
L
M
IP55 specially for frontal approach for wall mounting with covers to limit the detection field with cable entry at top and bottom with plug-in terminals
332
Packing unit
R
on page T21
1
0102 09
230 V~, 50 Hz 230 V incandescent lamps 2300 W; 230 V halogen lamps 1000 W; Electronic transformers 1200 W; Conventional transformers 1200 VA; Fluorescent lamps in duo configuration 2300 VA; Fluorescent lamps uncompensated 1200 VA; Fluorescent lamps parallel compensated 920 VA; Recommended installation height approx. 2,5 m; Range approx. 16 m; Detection field width max. 25 m; Detection angle 110 °; Detection levels 3; Sectors 18; Switching segments 72; Response brightness adjustable approx. 5 - 300 / unlimited Lux; Delay time adjustable approx. 12 sec.- 12 min. ; Operating temperature -35 - 50 °C; Dimensions (W x H x D) 90 x 125 x 134 mm With new microprocessor controlled electronics. For electronic ballasts and energy-saving lamps with excessive switch-on currents use making current limiter order No. 0185. Neutral conductor necessary! Switches on for the duration of the delay time in case minimum response brightness level is infringed and if people are detected.
8
G
J
L
M
R
IP54 microprocessor controlled mode of operation digital detection signal evaluation for wall mounting rotating and vertically slewing with covers to limit the detection field with 2 cable entries at bottom with fitting material with screw terminals
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
MOTION DETECTORS Order no.
Packing unit
Berker Control
Packing unit
Controllers Berker control polar white
on page T21
Order no.
BLC ceiling controller 360 1
0190
230 V~, 50/60 Hz 230 V incandescent and halogen lamps 2300 W; Electronic transformers 1200 W; Conventional transformers 1200 VA; Fluorescent lamps in duo configuration 2300 VA; Fluorescent lamps uncompensated 1200 VA; Fluorescent lamps parallel compensated 920 VA; Recommended installation height approx. 2,4 m; Range approx. 16 m; Detection field semi-oval shaped approx. 22 x 20 m; Detection angle 220 °; Detection levels 4; Sectors 145; Switching segments 580; Response brightness adjustable approx. 1 - 1000 / unlimited Lux; Delay time adjustable approx. 2 sec.- 30 min. ; Limit shutdown after max. 90 min.; Step operation 0,5 sec.; Immunity time adjustable 1 sec.- 10 min.; Response sensitivity programmable approx. 20 - 100 % ; Operating temperature -20 - +55 °C; Dimensions (W x H x D) 109 x 112 x 139 mm For electronic ballasts and energy-saving lamps with excessive switch-on currents use making current limiters order no. 0185. Neutral conductor necessary! Switches on for the duration of the delay time in case minimum response brightness level is infringed and if people are detected.
8
G
J
L
M
R
IP55 microprocessor controlled mode of operation digital detection signal evaluation digital interference signal suppression with crawl-under protection with non-weather-dependent range consistency glare-proof e.g. against a torch with LED detection and mode indicator with communication between individual units connected in parallel (controller system formation) for wall and ceiling mounting cable entry from all sides possible vertically slewing and horizontally rotating with cover elements to limit the detection field with 4 operating modes controller operation/4 hrs. on/4 hrs. off/test operation mode change by NC push-button in lead step operation with immunity time adjustment (e.g. for bell) with limit switch-off with fitting material with plug-in terminals
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
polar white
1701 11
1
Installation height approx. 3 m; Range for crossing approx. 10 m; Range for approaching approx. 6 m; Detection angle 360 °; Detection levels 5; Sectors 78; Switching segments 312; Response brightness adjustable approx. 2 - 80 / unlimited Lux; Delay time adjustable approx. 10 sec.- 30 min. ; Step operation 1 sec.; Immunity time approx. 2,5 sec.; Number of extension units max. 10 (5 with order no. 2902); Operating temperature 5 - 35 °C; Dimensions (diameter x assembling height) 103 x 42 mm Switches on for the duration of the delay time set on the controller in case minimum response brightness level is infringed and if movement of people is detected. In conjunction with a BLC relay switch unit HVAC, the HVAC-channel is also switched on for the duration of its delay time independent of response brightness. For BLC universal touch dimmer order no. 2902 For BLC touch control unit 1-10 V order no. 2903 For BLC touch dimmer LV order no. 2904 For BLC triac switch insert LV order no. 2905 for BLC relay switch insert order no. 2906 For BLC relay switch insert with potential-free contact order no. 2906 10 For BLC controller extension unit order no. 2908 For BLC relay switch insert HVAC order no. 2912 For BLC Tronic switch insert order no. 2916 For BLC stair light time switching impulse insert order no. 2934 10
microprocessor controlled mode of oper.(detection signal evaluation and interfering signal suppres.) detection field extension with BLC controller extension unit step operation with immunity time (e.g. for bell) with red detection LED (when minimum response brightness level infringed) on BLC or push-button (NO) extension units can be switched on by retriggering on BLC dimmer inserts, saving of the initial brightness and temporary dimming via BLC extension unit with dimming function (soft-off) when using BLC dimmer inserts for ceiling mounting in 60 surface-mounted or hollow-wall box with push-on cover to limit the detection field for BLC universal touch dimmer and BLC touch dimmer LV for BLC push-button control unit 1-10 V for BLC triac- and tronic switch insert for BLC relay switch insert, -switch insert with potential free contact and -switch insert HVAC for BLC detector extension units and BLC stair light impulse insert
333
MOTION DETECTORS Order no.
Packing unit
Order no.
Radio controllers
Radio controller power pack surface-mounted polar white
Radio controller 180 polar white
on page T47
0174 01 09
1
9 V= Alkaline battery life approx. 3 years; Radio channels 1; Radio signal transmission frequency 433,42 MHz; Radio signal transmission power < 10 mW; Radio signal transmission range (free field) max. 100 m; Recommended installation height approx. 2,4 m; Range approx. 16 m; Detection field semi-circular shaped approx. 16 x 32 m; Detection angle 180 °; Detection levels 3; Sectors 36; Switching segments 144; Response brightness sensor < 80 Lux; Night triggering sensor < 200 Lux; Response sensitivity programmable approx. 20 - 100 % ; Operating temperature -25 - +55 °C; Dimensions (W x H x D) 80 x 75 x 115 mm The required alkaline 9 V block battery (6LR61) is not supplied. If response brightness or movement of people is insufficient, it sends a radio signal to the radio controller power pack unit or other radio bus receivers. Lithium block battery see radio bus / accessories order no. 9209
IP55 not dependent on mains power each channel can be allocated to as many radio receivers are required with LED detection and battery charge indicator for wall mounting rotating and vertically slewing with push-on cover to limit the detection field with fitting material
334
Packing unit
on page T47
1
0175 09
230 V~, 50/60 Hz 230 V incandescent and halogen lamps 2300 W; Electronic transformers 1500 W; Conventional transformers 1000 VA; Fluorescent lamps in duo configuration 2300 VA; Fluorescent lamps uncompensated 1200 VA; Fluorescent lamps parallel compensated 920 VA; Response brightness approx. 3 - 80 Lux ; Delay time adjustable approx. 10 sec.- 15 min. ; Control channels 1; Radio signal reception frequency 433,42 MHz; Learnable radio transmitters 30; Operating temperature -25 - +55 °C; Dimensions (W x H x D) 110 x 94 x 38 mm For electronic ballasts and energy-saving lamps with excessive switch-on currents use making current limiters order no. 0185. Neutral conductor necessary! Switches on when a taught-in radio telegram, such as from radio controller system sensors, is received with the minimum response brightness level infringed and people detected.
8
G
J
L
M
R
IP55 with LED detection and mode indicator with 3 operating modes: controller operation/2 hrs. on/2 hrs. off operating mode change by NC push-button in lead or wall-mounted or hand-held radio transm. with 2 cable entries at bottom with fitting material with screw terminals
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
MOTION DETECTORS Order no.
Packing unit
Presence detectors
Order no.
BLC presence detectors
Presence detectors, surface-mounted
BLC presence detector with constant light regulation
Presence detector surface-mounted polar white
on page T18
Packing unit
1701 08
polar white
1
230 V~, 50/60 Hz 230 V incandescent and halogen lamps 1000 W; Electronic transformers 750 W; Conventional transformers 750 VA; Fluorescent lamps -; Duo circuit KVG 1000 W; uncompensated 500 VA; parallel compensated 400 VA; Switching current (ohmic) max. 10 A; Switch-on current < 4 sec. max. 35 A per min.; Recommended installation height approx. 2,5 m; Detection field on floor approx. diameter 8 m; Detection field at desk height approx. diameter 5 m; Detection angle 360 °; Detection levels 6; Sectors 80; Switching segments 320; Response brightness adjustable approx. 10 - 1000 Lux; Delay time adjustable approx. 10 sec.- 30 min. ; Operating temperature 5 - 35 °C; Dimensions (diameter x assembling height) 103 x 57,5 mm For electronic ballasts and energy-saving lamps with excessive switch-on currents use making current limiters order no. 0185. The purpose of the presence detector is to save energy by switching off lighting when unoccupied or when ambient light level is sufficient. Application areas e.g. office buildings, schools, hotels and nursing homes.
energy saving by means of presence and brightness dependent activation and deactivation of light with communication between individual units connected in parallel (controller system formation) also to be used as ceiling controller in through areas on push-button (NO), extension units can be switched on and off by retriggering with red diagnosis and settings help LED for ceiling assembly (also on a 60 wall box) with push-on cover to limit the detection field with fitting material with plug-in terminals
on page T16
1701 10
1
Recommended installation height approx. 2,5 m; Detection field on floor approx. diameter 8 m; Detection field at desk height approx. diameter 5 m; Detection angle 360 °; Detection levels 6; Sectors 80; Switching segments 320; Response brightness adjustable approx. 10 - 1000 Lux; Delay time adjustable approx. 10 sec.- 30 min. ; Number of extension units max. 10 (5 with order no. 2902); Operating temperature 5 - 35 °C; Dimensions (diameter x assembling height) 103 x 42 mm The purpose of the presence detector with constant light control is to save energy by dimming/switching off lighting when unoccupied or when ambient light level is sufficient. Furthermore, it facilitates presencedependent control of heating/ventilation systems in conjunction with the BLC relay/switch insert HVAC. Application areas e.g. office buildings, schools, hotels and nursing homes. For BLC universal touch dimmer order no. 2902 For BLC touch control unit 1-10 V order no. 2903 For BLC touch dimmer LV order no. 2904 For BLC triac switch insert LV order no. 2905 for BLC relay switch insert order no. 2906 For BLC relay switch insert with potential-free contact order no. 2906 10 For BLC controller extension unit order no. 2908 For BLC relay switch insert HVAC order no. 2912 For BLC Tronic switch insert order no. 2916 For BLC stair light time switching impulse insert order no. 2934 10
energy saving by presence and brightnesscontrolled lighting control with Dia-presentation function detection field extension with BLC controller extension unit also to be used as ceiling controller in through areas on BLC or push-button (NO), extension units can be switched on and off by retriggering on BLC extension units, the brightness setpoint can also be temporarily changed with red diagnosis and settings help LED with dimming function (soft-off) when using BLC dimmer inserts for ceiling mounting in 60 surface-mounted or hollow-wall box with push-on cover to limit the detection field
Built-on installation housings Surface-mounted housing for BLC and KNX/EIB presence detectors polar white
1076 09
1
Dimensions (diameter x H) 103 x 45 mm for order no. 1701 10, 1701 11, 7526 20 01, 7526 40 01
entry bottom and at each side possible
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
335
MOTION DETECTORS Order no.
Packing unit
Radio presence detectors
on page T47
Packing unit
KNX/EIB-presence detectors
Radio presence detector surface-mounted polar white
Order no.
0182 09
Presence detector standard 1
6 V~ Battery life approx. 3 years; Radio channels 1; Radio signal transmission frequency 433,42 MHz; Radio signal transmission power < 10 mW; Radio signal transmission range (free field) max. 100 m; Recommended mounting height approx. 2,5 m; Detection field on floor approx. diameter 8 m; Detection field at desk height approx. diameter 5 m; Detection angle 360 °; Detection levels 6; Sectors 80; Switching segments 320; Response sensitivity programmable approx. 20 - 100 % ; Response brightness adjustable approx. 10 - 2000 Lux; Delay time adjustable approx. 2 - 60 min. ; Operating temperature 0 - 45 °C; Dimensions (diameter x assembling height) 103 x 42 mm The required batteries 4 x Micro, Alkaline (LR03) are not supplied. Only suitable for actuators with imprint release issue „R2“ and higher. Please state with the order. not dependent on mains power for the activation of max. 1 radio receiver energy saving by presence and brightnesscontrolled lighting control constant light control only possible in conjunction with dim actuators or control units with covers to limit the detection field with fitting material
polar white
7526 20 01
1
Recommended mounting height approx. 2,5 m; Detection field on floor approx. diameter 8 m; Detection field at desk height approx. diameter 5 m; Detection angle 360 °; Detection levels 6; Sectors 80; Switching segments 320; Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C; Dimensions (diameter x assembling height) 103 x 42 mm When movement of a person is detected a parameter defined data telegram is sent. For bus coupling unit flush-mounted order no. 7504 00 01
energy saving by means of presence and brightness-dependent switching of light, heating etc. with 2 output channels for which the parameters are to be set independently with 2 operating modes presence detector or ceiling controller with teach object for response brightness with potentiometers for fine adjustment of the response brightness, sensitivity and delay time can only be used as individual unit with push-on cover to limit the detection field
Presence detector comfort polar white
7526 40 01
1
Recommended mounting height approx. 2,5 m; Detection field on floor approx. diameter 8 m; Detection field at desk height approx. diameter 5 m; Detection angle 360 °; Detection levels 6; Sectors 80; Switching segments 320; Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C; Dimensions (diameter x assembling height) 103 x 42 mm When movement of a person is detected a parameter defined data telegram is sent. For bus coupling unit flush-mounted order no. 7504 00 01
energy saving by means of presence and brightness-dependent switching of light, heating etc. with 4 output channels for which parameters are set independently, max. 2 per operating mode with 3 modes - presence detector, ceiling controller and message mode with teach object for response brightness with potentiometers for fine adjustment of the response brightness, sensitivity and delay time can be used as a single unit, main device or extension unit with push-on cover to limit the detection field
336
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
MOTION DETECTORS Order no.
Packing unit
Controller system
Order no.
Controller power packs
Controller system sensor 180 polar white
on page T22
0151 09
Controller system power pack surfacemounted
1
15 V= Detection field semi-circular shaped approx. 16 x 32 m; Recommended installation height approx. 2,4 m; Range approx. 16 m; Detection angle 180 °; Detection levels 3; Sectors 36; Switching segments 144; Operating temperature -25 - +55 °C; Dimensions (W x H x D) 80 x 68 x 92 mm Sends signal to controller system power pack if people are detected. Use only in conjunction with controller system power pack order no. 0150 29, 0155, 0159
IP55 with LED detection indicator for wall mounting rotating and vertically slewing with push-on cover to limit the detection field monitor system sensor line, e.g. JY-ST-Y 2x2x0.8 mm with 2 cable entries at top with fitting material with screw terminals
on page T22
Packing unit
polar white
on page T22
For electronic ballasts and energy-saving lamps with excessive switch-on currents use making current limiters order no. 0185. Neutral conductor necessary! Switches on for the duration of the delay time in case minimum response brightness level is infringed and if people are detected in front of the controller system sensors. For controller system sensor 180 order no. 0151 09 For controller system sensor 240 order no. 0152 09 For controller system insert order no. 2939
Controller system sensor 240
8
polar white
IP55
0152 09
1
15 V= Detection field rectangular shaped approx. 22 x 20 m; Recommended installation height approx. 2,4 m; Range approx. 16 m; Detection angle 240 °; Detection levels 4; Sectors 42; Switching segments 168; Response sensitivity programmable approx. 20 - 100 % ; Operating temperature -25 - +55 °C; Dimensions (W x H x D) 80 x 68 x 117 mm
1
0150 29
230 V~, 50 Hz 230 V incandescent and halogen lamps 2300 W; Electronic transformers 1200 W; Conventional transformers 1200 VA; Fluorescent lamps in duo configuration 2300 VA; Fluorescent lamps uncompensated 1200 VA; Fluorescent lamps parallel compensated 920 VA; Response brightness adjustable approx. 3 - 80 / unlimited Lux; Delay time adjustable approx. 4 sec.- 15 min. ; Limit shutdown after max. 90 min.; Operating temperature -25 - +55 °C; Dimensions (W x H x D) 110 x 94 x 38 mm
G
J
L
M
R
for connection of controller system sensors and controller system inserts: max. 8 pieces with green indicator LED with limit switch-off with 2 cable entries at bottom with fitting material with screw terminals
Sends signal to controller system power pack if people are detected. Use only in conjunction with controller system power pack order no. 0150 29, 0155, 0159
IP55 with crawl-under protection with LED detection indicator for wall mounting rotating and vertically slewing with push-on cover to limit the detection field with cover for crawl under protection monitor system sensor line, e.g. JY-ST-Y 2x2x0.8 mm with 2 cable entries at top with fitting material with screw terminals
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
337
MOTION DETECTORS Order no.
on page T22
Packing unit
Order no.
Packing unit
Controller system power pack RMD 1 channel
Controller system power pack RMD 2 channel
light grey
light grey
1
0155
230 V~, 50 Hz 230 V incandescent and halogen lamps 2300 W; Electronic transformers 1200 W; Conventional transformers 1200 VA; Fluorescent lamps in duo configuration 2300 VA; Fluorescent lamps uncompensated 1200 VA; Fluorescent lamps parallel compensated 920 VA; Response brightness adjustable approx. 3 - 80 / unlimited Lux; Delay time adjustable approx. 4 sec.- 15 min. ; Limit shutdown after max. 90 min.; Operating temperature -25 - +55 °C; RMD 4 modules
on page T22
For electronic ballasts and energy-saving lamps with excessive switch-on currents use making current limiters order no. 0185. Neutral conductor necessary!
Neutral conductor necessary! Switches on the relevant channel for the duration of the delay time in case minimum response brightness level is infringed and if people are detected in front of the controller system sensors.
For controller system sensor 180 order no. 0151 09 For controller system sensor 240 order no. 0152 09 For controller system insert order no. 2939
G
J
L
230 V~, 50 Hz 230 V incandescent and halogen lamps 2300 W/ channel; Electronic transformers 1200 W/channel; Conventional transformers 1200 VA/channel; Fluorescent lamps in duo configuration 2300 VA/ channel; Fluorescent lamps uncompensated 1200 VA/channel; Fluorescent lamps parallel compensated 920 VA/ channel; Response brightness adjustable approx. 3 - 80 / unlimited Lux; Delay time adjustable approx. 4 sec.- 15 min./ channel; Limit shutdown after max. 90 min.; Operating temperature -25 - +55 °C; RMD 4 modules For electronic ballasts and energy-saving lamps with excessive switch-on currents use making current limiters order no. 0185.
Switches on for the duration of the delay time in case minimum response brightness level is infringed and if people are detected in front of the controller system sensors.
8
1
0159
R
For controller system sensor 180 order no. 0151 09 For controller system sensor 240 order no. 0152 09 For controller system insert order no. 2939
with potential-free contact for connection of controller system sensors and controller system inserts: max. 8 pieces with limit switch-off with green indicator LED with limit switch-off with screw terminals
8
G
J
L
M
R
with potential-free and mains-connected contact for connection of controller system sensors and controller system inserts: max. 2x8 pieces with limit switch-off with green indicator LED per channel with screw terminals
Accessories Corner mounting piece for controllers/sensors polar white
on page T26
0149 09
1
For controller system sensor 180 order no. 0151 09 For controller system sensor 240 order no. 0152 09 For radio controller 180 order no. 0174 01 09 For weather station order no. 7549 00 01
for mounting e.g. on building corners
Ceiling mounting angle for controllers/sensors 0148
on page T26
1
For controller system sensor 180 order no. 0151 09 For controller system sensor 240 order no. 0152 09 For radio controller 180 order no. 0174 01 09
for ceiling mounting
338
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
MOTION DETECTORS Order no.
Packing unit
Order no.
Packing unit
Ceiling mounting angle for 2 controllers/ sensors 0158
on page T26
1
For controller system sensor 180 order no. 0151 09 For controller system sensor 240 order no. 0152 09 For radio controller 180 order no. 0174 01 09
for ceiling mounting of 2 controllers 180
Mast fixing for controllers/sensors 0154
1
Mast diameter 50 - 120 mm
on page T26
For controller system sensor 180 order no. 0151 09 For controller system sensor 240 order no. 0152 09 For radio controller 180 order no. 0174 01 09 For weather station order no. 7549 00 01
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
339
340
Radio bus system This innovative system allows you to install the most diverse applications, whether for modernisation or for installation in new buildings.
■ Installation in places where conventional installation would not allow a switch (for example, glass walls) ■ Retrofitted installation of comfort functions can be achieved - without major effort and expenditure ■ Berker hand-held transmitters enable the customer to operate the lighting within the house and in the garden. The customer can activate specific lighting scenes or deactivate all electrical loads on leaving the house
341
RADIO BUS Order no.
Packing unit
Centres
Order no.
Hand-held transmitters HM 1801 polar white, German version
on page T50
Radio hand-held transmitter comfort 2700
anthracite, matt
1
230/240 V~, 50/60 Hz Radio channels 32; Radio transmission/reception frequency 433,42 MHz; Radio signal transmission power < 10 mW; Radio transmission/reception range(free field) max 100 m; Operating temperature 4 - 40 °C; Dimensions (W x H x D) 140 x 230 x 50 mm
on page T47
2766
1
6 V= Battery life approx. 3 years; Radio channels 24; Radio signal transmission frequency 433,42 MHz; Radio signal transmission power < 10 mW; Radio signal transmission range (free field) max. 100 m; Operating temperature 0 - 55 °C; Dimensions (L x W x H) 192 x 53 x 22,5 mm
The required batteries 5 x Micro, Alkaline (LR03) are not supplied.
The required batteries 4 x Micro, Alkaline (LR 03) are not supplied.
Neutral conductor necessary!
For battery-operated radio remote control of all assigned radio bus receivers.
as radio centre for all radio transmitters/actuators switching, dimming, shutter control master on/off, light scenes or scenarios e.g. coming/going light scenes quick selection using keyboard with programmable logical and time operations with chip card for saving and loading configurations/programmes etc. pre-set and freely definable names for transmitter, receiver, rooms, etc. time functions by means of radio time with DCF77 receiver time-dependent controller monitoring presence simulation update for function expansion possible short message function/notepad function with blue Master button either for short messages or coming/going function with child lock integral piezo buzzer with integral radio signal amplifier LC display with illumination indication of the time and room temperature pre-assembled, with cable and plug with screw terminals
Accessories: HM 1801 Mastercard polar white
2700 01
1
For HM 1801 order no. 2700
for saving and loading additional configurations/ programmes etc.
342
Packing unit
each channel can be allocated to as many radio receivers are required with 8 channel buttons (on/off; up/down; dimmer) with 3 channel group buttons A, B, C with 3 channel group LEDs (also transmission and battery status LEDs) with 5 light scene buttons with light scene dimmer button with master on/off function
Radio hand-held transmitter mini anthracite, matt
on page T47
2769
1
3 V= Battery life approx. 5 years; Radio channels 2; Radio signal transmission frequency 433,42 MHz; Radio signal transmission power < 10 mW; Radio signal transmission range (free field) max. 30 m; Operating temperature 0 - 55 °C; Dimensions (L x W x H) 73 x 40 x 19 mm For battery-operated radio remote control of all assigned radio bus receivers. Replacement Lithium coin cell battery see radio bus order no. 1857
each channel can be allocated to as many radio receivers are required with 2 channel buttons (on/off; up/down; dimmer) with red transmit and battery status LED with lithium coin cell battery 3 V type: CR 2032
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
RADIO BUS Order no.
Packing unit
Flush-mounted transmitters
Order no.
Push-button interfaces
Radio wall-transmitter insert black
on page T47
2764
Radio push-button interface 4gang flushmounted
1
6 V= Battery life approx. 3 years; Radio channels 4; Radio signal transmission frequency 433,42 MHz; Radio signal transmission power < 10 mW; Radio signal transmission range (free field) max. 100 m; Operating temperature 0 - 55 °C; ;Installation depth 12 mm
grey
on page T47
Fits in flush-mounted and hollow wall boxes from Kaiser. For battery-operated radio remote control of all assigned radio bus receivers.
on page T47
0124 10
1
230 V~, 50/60 Hz Radio channels 2; Radio signal transmission frequency 433,42 MHz; Radio signal transmission power < 10 mW; Radio signal transmission range (free field) max. 100 m; Operating temperature -20 - +55 °C; Cable length approx. 210 mm; Dimensions (diameter x H) 52 x 23 mm Neutral conductor necessary! The radio transmitter flush-mounted permits an existing installation to be upgraded by radio frequency transmission of control commands. each channel can be allocated to as many radio receivers are required depending on setting with the function as switch, push-button, dimmer or shutter transmitter 1 or 2-push-button operation concept selectable activation through e.g. series switch, rockers pushbutton, timer, RolloTec insert pre-assembled, with cables for installation behind flush-mounted inserts
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
1
Replacement Lithium coin cell battery see radio bus order no. 1857
including power supply and control electronics each channel can be allocated to as many radio receivers are required functions 1- and 2-push-button operation for switching and dimming, shutter control, light scenes, master on/off function setting by 5 DIP-switches with lithium coin cell battery 3 V type: CR 2032 with red transmit and battery status LED to connect to max. 4 potential-free contacts with contact cleaner power pulse current for activation pre-assembled, with 4 cable pairs and plug for installation behind flush-mounted inserts
not dependent on mains power each channel can be allocated to as many radio receivers are required for push-button 1-/2-/3- or 4gang push-button functions: 4 channels / 5 light scenes / master off can be set via DIP switch transmission indicator LED and battery charge indicator in push-button with 2 x lithium coin cell battery 3 V type: CR 2032 mounting as flush/surface/table-top radio transmission with built-on installation housing flat design possible without spreader claws
Radio transmitter with phase-conductor flushmounted
0126
3 V= Battery life approx. 3 years; Radio channels max. 4; Radio signal transmission frequency 433,42 MHz; Radio signal transmission power < 10 mW; Radio signal transmission range (free field) max. 100 m; Contact cleaner power pulse current 3 mA; Operating temperature -20 - +55 °C; Cable length approx. 290 mm; Extendable cable length max. 5 m; Dimensions (diameter x H) 38 x 10 mm For battery-operated radio remote control of all assigned radio bus receivers.
Replacement Lithium coin cell battery see radio bus order no. 1857 For push-buttons order no. 7516 10 .., 7516 11 .., 7516 13 .., 7516 20 .., 7516 21 .., 7516 23 .., 7516 33 .., 7516 40 .., 7516 41 .., 7516 43 ..
grey
Packing unit
Detectors Radio magnetic contacts NEW
Radio magnetic contact polar white
* 9430 01 00
1
9 V= Alkaline battery life approx. 3 years; Radio channels 1; Radio signal transmission frequency 433,42 MHz; Radio signal transmission power < 10 mW; Radio signal transmission range (free field) max. 100 m; Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C; Dimensions (L x W x H) 132 x 36 x 35 mm The required alkaline 9 V block battery (6LR61) is not supplied. When the NO contact is open, sends a radio signal to a taught-in radio bus receiver. Lithium block battery see radio bus / accessories order no. 9209
Window controller according to German Combustion Ordinance (FeuV) §4 not dependent on mains power the channel can be assigned to any number of radio receivers for screw or adhesive fixing with shim to compensate for differences in level with fitting material
343
RADIO BUS Order no.
Packing unit
Signal amplifiers
on page T49
Packing unit
Presence detectors Radio presence detectors
Radio signal amplifiers surface-mounted polar white
Order no.
0177 09
1
230 V~, 50/60 Hz Radio channels 60; Radio transmission/reception frequency 433,42 MHz; Radio signal transmission power < 10 mW; Radio transmission/reception range(free field) max 100 m; Mains cable length 1,5 m; Operating temperature -20 - +55 °C; Dimensions (W x H x D) 110 x 94 x 38 mm Neutral conductor necessary! The radio signal amplifier receives and sends out radio signals from taught-in transmitters at maximum transmission power. max. 1 radio signal amplifier per transmission link to increase radio range only taught-in radio transmitters are amplified including white mains cable with Euro-plug with red receive and green transmission indicator LED with 2 cable entries with fitting material with screw terminals
Radio presence detector surface-mounted polar white
on page T47
0182 09
1
6 V~ Battery life approx. 3 years; Radio channels 1; Radio signal transmission frequency 433,42 MHz; Radio signal transmission power < 10 mW; Radio signal transmission range (free field) max. 100 m; Recommended mounting height approx. 2,5 m; Detection field on floor approx. diameter 8 m; Detection field at desk height approx. diameter 5 m; Detection angle 360 °; Detection levels 6; Sectors 80; Switching segments 320; Response sensitivity programmable approx. 20 - 100 % ; Response brightness adjustable approx. 10 - 2000 Lux; Delay time adjustable approx. 2 - 60 min. ; Operating temperature 0 - 45 °C; Dimensions (diameter x assembling height) 103 x 42 mm The required batteries 4 x Micro, Alkaline (LR03) are not supplied. Only suitable for actuators with imprint release issue „R2“ and higher. Please state with the order. not dependent on mains power for the activation of max. 1 radio receiver energy saving by presence and brightnesscontrolled lighting control constant light control only possible in conjunction with dim actuators or control units with covers to limit the detection field with fitting material
344
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
RADIO BUS Order no.
Packing unit
Radio controllers
Order no.
Radio controller power packs
Radio controller 180 polar white
on page T47
Packing unit
Radio controller power pack surface-mounted 0174 01 09
9 V= Alkaline battery life approx. 3 years; Radio channels 1; Radio signal transmission frequency 433,42 MHz; Radio signal transmission power < 10 mW; Radio signal transmission range (free field) max. 100 m; Recommended installation height approx. 2,4 m; Range approx. 16 m; Detection field semi-circular shaped approx. 16 x 32 m; Detection angle 180 °; Detection levels 3; Sectors 36; Switching segments 144; Response brightness sensor < 80 Lux; Night triggering sensor < 200 Lux; Response sensitivity programmable approx. 20 - 100 % ; Operating temperature -25 - +55 °C; Dimensions (W x H x D) 80 x 75 x 115 mm The required alkaline 9 V block battery (6LR61) is not supplied. If response brightness or movement of people is insufficient, it sends a radio signal to the radio controller power pack unit or other radio bus receivers. Lithium block battery see radio bus / accessories order no. 9209
IP55 not dependent on mains power each channel can be allocated to as many radio receivers are required with LED detection and battery charge indicator for wall mounting rotating and vertically slewing with push-on cover to limit the detection field with fitting material
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
polar white
1
on page T47
1
0175 09
230 V~, 50/60 Hz 230 V incandescent and halogen lamps 2300 W; Electronic transformers 1500 W; Conventional transformers 1000 VA; Fluorescent lamps in duo configuration 2300 VA; Fluorescent lamps uncompensated 1200 VA; Fluorescent lamps parallel compensated 920 VA; Response brightness approx. 3 - 80 Lux ; Delay time adjustable approx. 10 sec.- 15 min. ; Control channels 1; Radio signal reception frequency 433,42 MHz; Learnable radio transmitters 30; Operating temperature -25 - +55 °C; Dimensions (W x H x D) 110 x 94 x 38 mm For electronic ballasts and energy-saving lamps with excessive switch-on currents use making current limiters order no. 0185. Neutral conductor necessary! Switches on when a taught-in radio telegram, such as from radio controller system sensors, is received with the minimum response brightness level infringed and people detected.
8
G
J
L
M
R
IP55 with LED detection and mode indicator with 3 operating modes: controller operation/2 hrs. on/2 hrs. off operating mode change by NC push-button in lead or wall-mounted or hand-held radio transmitter with 2 cable entries at bottom with fitting material with screw terminals
345
RADIO BUS Order no.
Packing unit
Order no.
Switch actuators
Radio switch actuator flush-mounted grey
Radio switch actuator built-in polar white
on page T47
1
0125
230 V~, 50/60 Hz 230 V incandescent and halogen lamps 2300 W; Electronic transformers 1500 W; Conventional transformers 1000 VA; Fluorescent lamps in duo configuration 2300 VA; Fluorescent lamps uncompensated 1200 VA; Fluorescent lamps parallel compensated 920 VA; Control channels 1; Radio signal reception frequency 433,42 MHz; Learnable radio transmitters 30; Operating temperature -20 - +55 °C; Dimensions (L x W x H) 175 x 42 x 18 mm
on page T47
For electronic ballasts and energy-saving lamps with excessive switch-on currents use making current limiters order no. 0185. Neutral conductor necessary!
G
J
L
M
R
with extension unit input for BLC extension unit and push-but.(NO) and 1 push-but. operation concept with 5 light scenes for „on/off“ retrieving light scenes only by using radio transmitter radio signal of taught-in radio controllers causes switch on for 1 min. (retriggering) with programming button and red programming LED programming mode can be activated on device or via extension unit with screw terminals
346
1
0179
230 V~, 50/60 Hz 230 V incandescent and halogen lamps 1000 W; Electronic transformers 750 W; Conventional transformers 750 VA; Fluorescent lamps in duo configuration 1000 VA; Fluorescent lamps uncompensated 500 VA; Fluorescent lamps parallel compensated 400 VA; Control channels 1; Radio signal reception frequency 433,42 MHz; Learnable radio transmitters 14; Operating temperature -20 - +55 °C; Cable length approx. 210 mm; Centre hole diameter 7,5 mm; Dimensions (diameter x H) 52 x 23 mm For electronic ballasts and energy-saving lamps with excessive switch-on currents use making current limiters order no. 0185. Neutral conductor necessary!
For remote controlled switching of electrical loads.
8
Packing unit
For remote controlled switching of electrical loads.
8
G
J
L
M
R
with 5 light scenes for „on/off“ retrieving light scenes only by using radio transmitter radio signal of taught-in radio controllers causes switch on for 1 min. (retriggering) potential-free contact for function extra-low voltage FELV (only change-over voltage) suitable with programming button and red programming LED built into flush-mounted or waterproof junction box pre-assembled, with cables
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
RADIO BUS Order no.
Packing unit
Radio switch actuator 2gang flush-mounted grey
on page T47
Order no.
Push-button actuators
1
0129
Radio push-button actuator flush-mounted
230 V~, 50/60 Hz Max. switching capacity per channel for 230 V~; 230 V incandescent lamps 350 W; 230 V halogen lamps 300 W; Electronic transformers 300 W; Conventional transformers 350 VA; Fluorescent lamps uncompensated 350 VA; Control channels 2; Radio signal reception frequency 433,42 MHz; Learnable radio transmitters 7 Per channel; Operating temperature -20 - +55 °C; Cable length approx. 210 mm; Centre hole diameter 7,5 mm; Dimensions (diameter x H) 52 x 23 mm
grey
For electronic ballasts and energy-saving lamps with excessive switch-on currents use making current limiters order no. 0185.
Neutral conductor necessary! For remote controlled switching of electrical loads.
G
J
L
M
Neutral conductor necessary!
R
For remote controlled button operation of electrical loads.
with 5 light scenes for „on/off“ per channel retrieving light scenes only by using radio transmitter radio signal of taught-in radio controllers causes switch on for 1 min. (retriggering) with programming button and two-colour programming LED built into flush-mounted or waterproof junction box pre-assembled, with cables
Radio adapter plug switch actuator polar white, matt
on page T47
L
M
R
with 5 light scenes for „on/off“ retrieving light scenes only by using radio transmitter radio signal of taught-in radio controllers causes switch on for 1 min. (retriggering) with manual operation on/off with red receive/programming LED short-circuit and overload proof (fine-wire fuse) with spare fuse
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
L
M
R
Radio shutter actuator flush-mounted
on page T47
For remote controlled switching of electrical loads.
J
J
potential-free HVAC contact suitable for function extra-low voltage FELV (only alternating voltage) with programming button and red programming LED built into flush-mounted or waterproof junction box pre-assembled, with cables
grey
For electronic ballasts and energy-saving lamps with excessive switch-on currents use making current limiters order no. 0185.
G
G
Shutter actuators
230 V~, 50/60 Hz 230 V incandescent and halogen lamps 1000 W; Electronic transformers 750 W; Conventional transformers 750 VA; Fluorescent lamps in duo configuration 1000 VA; Fluorescent lamps uncompensated 500 VA; Fluorescent lamps parallel compensated 400 VA; Control channels 1; Radio signal reception frequency 433,42 MHz; Learnable radio transmitters 30; Operating temperature -20 - +55 °C; Dimensions (W x H x D) 70 x 136 x 34,5 mm
8
8
1
0178 09
1
0179 50
230 V~, 50/60 Hz Max. contact duration according to transmitter 4 - 12 sec.; 230 V incandescent and halogen lamps 1000 W; Electronic transformers 750 W; Conventional transformers 750 VA; Fluorescent lamps in duo configuration 1000 VA; Fluorescent lamps uncompensated 500 VA; Fluorescent lamps parallel compensated 400 VA; Contact channels 1; Radio signal reception frequency 433,42 MHz; Learnable radio transmitters 14; Operating temperature -20 - +55 °C; Cable length approx. 210 mm; Centre hole diameter 7,5 mm; Dimensions (diameter x H) 52 x 23 mm
For electronic ballasts and energy-saving lamps with excessive switch-on currents use making current limiters order no. 0185.
8
Packing unit
0127
1
230 V~, 50/60 Hz Switching power max. 1 motor 700 W; Control channels 1; Radio signal reception frequency 433,42 MHz; Learnable radio transmitters 14; Lamella adjustment with signal < 1 sec.; Self-sustaining for 2 min. with signal > 1 sec.; Operating temperature -20 - +55 °C; Cable length approx. 210 mm; Centre hole diameter 7,5 mm; Dimensions (diameter x H) 52 x 23 mm Neutral conductor necessary! For remote controlled movement of shutters and awnings, for example.
8 with 5 light scenes for „open/close“ retrieving light scenes only by using radio transmitter with electrical interlocking to prevent mutual switch on with programming button and two-colour programming LED built into flush-mounted or waterproof junction box pre-assembled, with cables
347
RADIO BUS Order no.
Packing unit
Order no.
Dim actuators
Radio universal corded dimmer
NEW
black
Radio universal dimmer flush-mounted grey
on page T47
1
* 9455 02 00
230 V~, 50/60 Hz 230 V incandescent and halogen lamps 50 - 210 W; Electronic transformers 50 - 210 W; Dimmable conventional transformers 50 - 210 VA; Tronic or LV power boosters built-in/RMD max. 10 for same load type; Radio signal reception frequency 433,42 MHz; Learnable radio transmitters 30; Operating temperature 0 - 55 °C; Cable length approx. 210 mm; Dimensions (diameter x H) 53 x 28 Trouble-free operation will be obtained only with Berker Tronic® transformers. Suitable for universal booster RMD Plus Do not connect conventional transformers together with electronic transformers. For remote controlled switching and dimming of lights.
on page T47
G
J
L
R
IP20 with 5 light scenes for „on/off“, dimming value retrieving light scenes only by using radio transmitter radio signal of taught-in radio controllers causes switch on for 1 min. (retriggering) with programming button and red programming LED switch-on brightness memory function bulb-preserving soft startup very low noise short-circuit and overload proof (electronic fuse) phase cut-on or cut-off according to load type, self-learning pre-assembled, with cables
348
1
0128
230 V~, 50/60 Hz 230 V incandescent and halogen lamps 50 - 315 W; Electronic transformers 50 - 315 W; Dimmable conventional transformers 50 - 315 VA; Tronic or LV power boosters built-in/RMD max. 10 for same load type; Radio signal reception frequency 433,42 MHz; Learnable radio transmitters 30; Operating temperature 0 - 55 °C; Dimensions (L x W x H) 126 x 60 x 28 mm Trouble-free operation will be obtained only with Berker Tronic transformers. Do not connect conventional transformers together with electronic transformers. Neutral conductor required! For remote controlled switching and dimming of lights.
4 4
Packing unit
G
J
L
R
with 5 light scenes for „on/off“, dimming value retrieving light scenes only by using radio transmitter radio signal of taught-in radio controllers causes switch on for 1 min. (retriggering) with extension unit input for BLC extension unit with manual operation on/off with programming button and red programming LED switch-on brightness memory function bulb-preserving soft startup very low noise short-circuit and overload proof (electronic fuse) phase cut-on or cut-off according to load type, self-learning expandable by universal power boosters RMD Plus with load cable switched in parallel with screw terminals
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
RADIO BUS Order no.
Packing unit
Order no.
Radio universal dimmer built-in polar white
on page T47
Radio adapter plug universal dimmer
0181
Trouble-free operation will be obtained only with Berker Tronic transformers. Do not connect conventional transformers together with electronic transformers. For remote controlled switching and dimming of lights.
G
J
polar white, matt
1
230 V~, 50/60 Hz 230 V incandescent and halogen lamps 50 - 315 W; Electronic transformers 50 - 315 W; Dimmable conventional transformers 50 - 315 VA; Universal power boosters max. 10 phase cut-off á 500 W; Universal power boosters max. 5 phase cut-on á 300 VA; Tronic or LV power boosters built-in/RMD max. 10 for same load type; Radio signal reception frequency 433,42 MHz; Learnable radio transmitters 30; Operating temperature 0 - 55 °C; Dimensions (L x W x H) 187 x 28 x 28 mm
4
L
R
with 5 light scenes for „on/off“, dimming value retrieving light scenes only by using radio transmitter radio signal of taught-in radio controllers causes switch on for 1 min. (retriggering) with extension unit input for BLC extension unit 2-area and push-button (NO) 1-push-button operation conception with programming button and red programming LED switch-on brightness memory function bulb-preserving soft startup very low noise short-circuit and overload proof (electronic fuse) phase cut-on or cut-off according to load type, self-learning expandable by universal power boosters RMD Plus with load cable switched in parallel with screw terminals
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
Packing unit
on page T47
1
0178 10 09
230/240 V~, 50/60 Hz 230 V incandescent and halogen lamps 50 - 420 W; Electronic transformers 50 - 420 W; Dimmable conventional transformers 50 - 420 VA; Radio signal reception frequency 433,42 MHz; Learnable radio transmitters 30; Operating temperature 5 - 35 °C; Dimensions (L x W x H) 136 x 70 x 72 mm; Assembling height 34,5 mm Trouble-free operation will be obtained only with Berker Tronic transformers. Do not connect conventional transformers together with electronic transformers. For remote controlled switching and dimming of lights.
4
G
J
L
R
with 5 light scenes for „on/off“, dimming value retrieving light scenes only by using radio transmitter radio signal of taught-in radio controllers causes switch on for 1 min. (retriggering) with manual operation on(initial brightness)/off with red receive/programming LED start-up brightness can be stored safe after power failure bulb-preserving soft startup very low noise short-circuit and overload proof (electronic fuse) phase cut-on or cut-off according to load type, self-learning
349
RADIO BUS Order no.
Packing unit
Control units 1-10 V
Order no.
Antennas
Radio control unit 1-10 V built-in polar white
on page T47
0180
Antenna for radio receiver RMD black
1
230 V~, 50/60 Hz Control current 15 mA; Switching current 8 A; Control channels 1; Radio signal reception frequency 433,42 MHz; Learnable radio transmitters 30; Operating temperature 0 - 55 °C; Dimensions (L x W x H) 187 x 28 x 28 mm
on page T55
For radio receiver RMD order no. 9405 01 00
Ensure same illumination, use only electronic ballasts and fluorescent lamps from the same manufacturers.
for metal distribution boxes and to increase the radio reception range pre-assembled, with cable and SMB plug installation on metal via magnetic base
Switch actuators
When using of LV halogen lamps we recommend Berker Tronic transformer with 1-10 V interface order no. 2977.
Radio switch actuator RMD light grey
Neutral conductor necessary! For remote controlled switching and dimming of lights.
on page T47
Interface to DIN EN 60928 for switching and controlling electronic ballasts and Tronic transformers with 1-10 V interface e.g. for fluorescent lamps and LV halogen lamps with 5 light scenes for „on/off“, dimming value retrieving light scenes only by using radio transmitter radio signal of taught-in radio controllers causes switch on for 1 min. (retriggering) with programming button and red programming LED switch-on brightness memory function with screw terminals
1
9450 01 00
230 V~, 50/60 Hz 230 V incandescent and halogen lamps 2300 W; Electronic transformers 1500 W; Conventional transformers 1000 VA; Fluorescent lamps in duo configuration 2300 VA; Fluorescent lamps uncompensated 1200 VA; Fluorescent lamps parallel compensated 920 VA; Control channels 1; Learnable radio transmitters 30; Operating temperature 0 - +45 °C; RMD 2 modules; Dimensions (W x H x D) 36 x 90 x 68; Assembling height as from DIN rail 61,5 mm For electronic ballasts and energy-saving lamps with excessive switch-on currents use switch-on current limiters order no. 0185. Use only in conjunction with radio receiver RMD. Neutral conductor necessary! For remote controlled switching of electrical loads. for order no. 9405 01 00
Radio system RMD Radio receivers
8
Radio receiver RMD
on page T55
1
9490 01 00
Radio signal reception frequency 433,42 MHz; Radio reception range (free field) max. 100 m; Cable length approx. 2,5 m; Dimensions (L x diameter base) 200 x 30,5 mm
In case of excessive making currents use making current limiters order no. 0185.
light grey
Packing unit
9405 01 00
1
230 V~, 50/60 Hz Radio signal reception frequency 433,42 MHz; Radio reception range (free field) max. 60 m; Receiver for max. 30 System units; Operating temperature 0 - +45 °C; RMD 2 modules; Dimensions (W x H x D) 36 x 90 x 68; Assembling height as from DIN rail 61,5 mm For radio switch actuator RMD order no. 9450 01 00, 9450 02 00 For radio universal dimmer RMD order no. 9455 01 00 For radio shutters actuator RMD order no. 9460 01 00 For radio control unit 1-10 V RMD order no. 9465 01 00
G
J
L
M
R
with extension unit input for BLC extension unit and push-but.(NO) and 1 push-but. operation concept with 5 light scenes for „on/off“ retrieving light scenes only by using radio transmitter radio signal of taught-in radio controllers causes switch on for 1 min. (retriggering) with construction site function on/off with programming button and red programming LED programming mode can be activated on device or via extension unit with screw terminals and plug-in terminals (EIB) for RMD data connection with screw terminals
radio signals are prepared for transmission to the RMD data connection for improving the reception of external radio antenna RMD can be plugged into SMB socket with screw terminals and plug-in terminals (EIB) for RMD data connection with screw terminals
350
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
RADIO BUS Order no.
Packing unit
on page T55
1
9450 02 00
230 V~, 50/60 Hz 230 V incandescent and halogen lamps 2300 W; Electronic transformers 1500 W; Conventional transformers 1000 VA; Fluorescent lamps in duo configuration 2300 VA; Fluorescent lamps uncompensated 1200 VA; Fluorescent lamps parallel compensated 920 VA; Control channels 4; Learnable radio transmitters 30 Per channel; Operating temperature 0 - +45 °C; RMD 4 modules; Dimensions (W x H x D) 72 x 90 x 70; Assembling height as from DIN rail 63 mm
Radio shutter actuator RMD light grey
on page T47
For electronic ballasts and energy-saving lamps with excessive switch-on currents use switch-on current limiters order no. 0185. Use only in conjunction with radio receiver RMD. Neutral conductor necessary!
9460 01 00
Use only in conjunction with radio receiver RMD. Neutral conductor necessary! For remote controlled movement of shutters and awnings, for example. For radio receiver RMD order no. 9405 01 00
For radio receiver RMD order no. 9405 01 00
8
G
J
L
M
R
for switching e.g. 4 independent loads suitable for different external conductors with potential-free normally-open contacts with 5 light scenes for „on/off“ retrieving light scenes only by using radio transmitter radio signal of taught-in radio controllers causes switch on for 1 min. (retriggering) with construction site function on/off with 4 red check/programming LEDs with screw terminals and plug-in terminals (EIB) for RMD data connection with screw terminals
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
1
230 V~, 50/60 Hz Switching power max. 1 motor 700 W; Control channels 1; Learnable radio transmitters 14; Lamella adjustment with signal < 1 sec.; Self-sustaining for 2 min. with signal > 1 sec.; With manual operation < 1 Sec. up/stop/down; Operating temperature 0 - +45 °C; RMD 2 modules; Dimensions (W x H x D) 36 x 90 x 68 mm; Assembling height as from DIN rail 61,5 mm
For remote controlled switching of electrical loads.
8
Packing unit
Shutter actuators
Radio switch actuator 4gang RMD light grey
Order no.
with 5 light scenes for „open/close“ retrieving light scenes only by using radio transmitter with electrical interlocking to prevent mutual switch on with construction site function up/down with programming button and two-colour programming LED with screw terminals and plug-in terminals (EIB) for RMD data connection with screw terminals
351
RADIO BUS Order no.
Packing unit
Dim actuators
Order no.
Control units 1-10 V Radio universal dimmer RMD light grey
on page T47
Packing unit
Radio control unit 1-10 V RMD light grey
1
9455 01 00
230 V~, 50/60 Hz 230 V incandescent and halogen lamps 50 - 400 W; Electronic transformers 50 - 400 W; Dimmable conventional transformers 50 - 400 VA; Universal power boosters max. 10 phase cut-off á 500 W; Universal power boosters max. 5 phase cut-on á 420 VA; Power boosters built-in/RMD max. 10 for same load type; Learnable radio transmitters 30; With manual operation < 1 Sec. on/off; Operating temperature 0 - 45 °C; RMD 4 modules; Dimensions (W x H x D) 73 x 90 x 68 mm; Assembling height as from DIN rail 61,5 mm
on page T47
In case of excessive making currents use making current limiters order no. 0185. Ensure same illumination, use only electronic ballasts and fluorescent lamps from the same manufacturers.
Trouble-free operation only with Berker Tronic transformers.
When using of LV halogen lamps we recommend Berker Tronic transformer with 1-10 V interface order no. 2977.
Use only in conjunction with radio receiver RMD.
Neutral conductor necessary!
Do not connect conventional transformers together with electronic transformers.
Use only in conjunction with radio receiver RMD.
Neutral conductor required!
For remote controlled switching and dimming of lights.
For remote controlled switching and dimming of lights.
For radio receiver RMD order no. 9405 01 00
For radio receiver RMD order no. 9405 01 00
4
G
J
L
Interface to DIN EN 60928
R
with 5 light scenes for „on/off“, dimming value retrieving light scenes only by using radio transmitter radio signal of taught-in radio controllers causes switch on for 1 min. (retriggering) with extension unit input for BLC extension unit and push-but.(NO) and 1 push-but. operation concept with construction site function on/off with programming button and red programming LED switch-on brightness memory function bulb-preserving soft startup very low noise short-circuit and overload proof (electronic fuse) phase cut-on or cut-off according to load type, self-learning expandable by universal power boosters RMD Plus with load cable switched in parallel with screw terminals and plug-in terminals (EIB) for RMD data connection with screw terminals
1
9465 01 00
230 V~, 50/60 Hz Control current 15 mA; Switching current 8 A; Control channels 1; Learnable radio transmitters 30; With manual operation < 1 Sec. on/off; Operating temperature 0 - 45 °C; RMD 4 modules; Dimensions (W x H x D) 73 x 90 x 68; Assembling height as from DIN rail 61,5
for switching and controlling electronic ballasts and Tronic transformers with 1-10 V interface e.g. for fluorescent lamps and LV halogen lamps with 5 light scenes for „on/off“, dimming value retrieving light scenes only by using radio transmitter radio signal of taught-in radio controllers causes switch on for 1 min. (retriggering) with manual operation on/off with programming button and red programming LED switch-on brightness memory function with screw terminals and plug-in terminals (EIB) for RMD data connection with screw terminals
Accessories Lithium coin cell battery 3 V 1857
10
3 V=, 0,18 Ah
type: CR 2032 2 pcs. for replacement
Lithium block battery 9 V 9209
1
9 V=, 1,2 Ah
for replacement need
352
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
RADIO BUS MODUL 2 Order no.
Packing unit
Order no.
BLC Berker Light Control
RolloTec radio button with sensor connection, flat design
Radio buttons
white, glossy polar white, glossy
BLC radio button white, glossy polar white, glossy
1760 02 1760 09
1 1
Radio signal reception frequency 433,42 MHz; Learnable radio transmitters 30 on page T12
on page T37
Extension unit operation with BLC extension unit and push-button (NO) possible as of release R2.1.
RolloTec radio button with sensor connection white, glossy polar white, glossy
RolloTec RolloTec radio button, flat design 1 1
Radio signal reception frequency 433,42 MHz; Learnable radio transmitters 30 ; Lamella adjustment with signal < 1 sec.; Self-sustaining for 2 min. with signal > 1 sec. For actuation via button and radio transmitter. For RolloTec standard insert without neutral conductor connection order no. 2911 For RolloTec standard insert order no. 2925 For Rollotec comfort insert order no. 2975 For RolloTec comfort insert for direct current drives order no. 2975 01
with imprinted symbol arrows with 5 light scenes for „open/close“ retrieving light scenes only by using radio transmitter
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
Radio signal reception frequency 433,42 MHz; Learnable radio transmitters 30; Brightness value sun approx. 5 - 80 kLux; Lamella adjustment with signal < 1 sec.; Self-sustaining for 2 min. with signal > 1 sec.
with imprinted symbol arrows with 5 light scenes for „open/close“ retrieving light scenes only by using radio transmitter brightness value for sunblind individually adjustable no twilight sensor function only for sensor connection to terminal block
with 2-push-buttons operation concept with 5 light scenes for „on/off“, dimming value retrieving light scenes only by using radio transmitter radio signal of taught-in radio controllers causes switch on for 1 min. (retriggering) start-up brightness will be stored safe after power failure reset function (to factory setting)
on page T37
1 1
For RolloTec brightness sensors order no. 0169, 0184 For RolloTec glass breakage sensor order no. 0170 For RolloTec adapter for sensors order no. 0171 For RolloTec standard insert without neutral conductor connection order no. 2911 For RolloTec standard insert order no. 2925 For Rollotec comfort insert order no. 2975 For RolloTec comfort insert for direct current drives order no. 2975 01 For magnetic contact order no. 9251 ..
For BLC universal touch dimmer order no. 2902 For BLC touch control unit 1-10 V order no. 2903 For BLC touch dimmer LV order no. 2904 For BLC triac switch insert LV order no. 2905 for BLC relay switch insert order no. 2906 For BLC relay switch insert with potential-free contact order no. 2906 10 For BLC relay switch insert HVAC order no. 2912 For BLC Tronic switch insert order no. 2916
1758 12 1758 49
1759 12 1759 49
For actuation via button and radio transmitter.
For actuation via button and radio transmitter.
white, glossy polar white, glossy
Packing unit
on page T37
1759 02 1759 09
1 1
Radio signal reception frequency 433,42 MHz; Learnable radio transmitters 30; Brightness value sun approx. 5 - 80 kLux; Lamella adjustment with signal < 1 sec.; Self-sustaining for 2 min. with signal > 1 sec. For actuation via button and radio transmitter. For RolloTec brightness sensors order no. 0169, 0184 For RolloTec glass breakage sensor order no. 0170 For RolloTec adapter for sensors order no. 0171 For RolloTec standard insert without neutral conductor connection order no. 2911 For RolloTec standard insert order no. 2925 For Rollotec comfort insert order no. 2975 For RolloTec comfort insert for direct current drives order no. 2975 01 For magnetic contact order no. 9251 ..
with embossed arrows with 5 light scenes for „open/close“ retrieving light scenes only by using radio transmitter brightness value for sunblind individually adjustable no twilight sensor function for sensor connection to socket contact or terminal block
353
RADIO BUS MODUL 2 Order no.
Packing unit
Radio controllers
Order no.
Wall-transmitters
Radio controller 180 flat white polar white
on page T47
Packing unit
9420 02 9420 09
Radio wall-transmitter 1gang flat with labelling field
1 1
3 V= Battery life approx. 3 years; Radio channels 1; Radio signal transmission frequency 433,42 MHz; Radio signal transmission power < 10 mW; Radio signal transmission range (free field) max. 60 m; Nominal mounting height 1,1 m; Range frontal approx. 10 m; Range lateral each approx. 6 m; Detection field semi-oval shaped approx. 10 x 12 m; Detection angle 180 °; Detection levels 2; Switching segments 72; Response sensitivity programmable approx. 20 - 100 % ; Response brightness adjustable approx. 0 - 80 / unlimited Lux; Dimensions assembling height 23,5 mm
white, glossy polar white, glossy on page T47
1 1
3 V= Battery life approx. 3 years; Radio channels 1; Radio signal transmission frequency 433,42 MHz; Radio signal transmission power < 10 mW; Radio signal transmission range (free field) max. 100 m Replacement Lithium coin cell battery see radio bus order no. 1857
not dependent on mains power each channel can be allocated to as many radio receivers are required push-button functions: 1 channel / 1 light scene / master off can be set via DIP switch changing of light scenes via DIP switch lockable with red transmit and battery status LED with lithium coin cell battery 3 V type: CR 2032 installation with frames on even surface e.g. also for extention of combinations with fitting material, screws, wall plugs and adhesive pad screw fastening via supporting plate possible
If response brightness or movement of people is insufficient, it sends a radio signal to the radio controller power pack unit or other radio bus receivers.
U not dependent on mains power the channel can be assigned to any number of radio receivers with red transmit and battery status LED with a lithium coin cell battery 3 V type: CR 2450 with cover to limit detection angle to 90° with optimised lens installation with frames on even surface e.g. also for extention of combinations with fitting material, screws, wall plugs and adhesive pad screw fastening via supporting plate possible
2721 02 2721 09
Radio wall-transmitter 2gang flat with labelling field white, glossy polar white, glossy on page T47
2722 02 2722 09
1 1
3 V= Battery life approx. 3 years; Radio channels 2; Radio signal transmission frequency 433,42 MHz; Radio signal transmission power < 10 mW; Radio signal transmission range (free field) max. 100 m Replacement Lithium coin cell battery see radio bus order no. 1857
not dependent on mains power each channel can be allocated to as many radio receivers are required push-button functions: 2 channels / 3 light scenes / master off can be set via DIP switch changing of light scenes via DIP switch lockable with red transmit and battery status LED with lithium coin cell battery 3 V type: CR 2032 installation with frames on even surface e.g. also for extention of combinations with fitting material, screws, wall plugs and adhesive pad screw fastening via supporting plate possible
354
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
RADIO BUS MODUL 2 Order no.
Packing unit
Radio wall-transmitter 4gang flat with labelling field white, glossy polar white, glossy on page T47
2724 02 2724 09
Order no.
Packing unit
Push-buttons with labelling field Push-button 1gang with labelling field
1 1
white, glossy polar white, glossy
3 V= Battery life approx. 3 years; Radio channels 4; Radio signal transmission frequency 433,42 MHz; Radio signal transmission power < 10 mW; Radio signal transmission range (free field) max. 100 m
7516 10 12 7516 10 19
1 1
Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C For radio wall-transmitter insert order no. 2764
with anti-dismantling protection with red transmit and battery status LED
Push-button 2gang with labelling field
Replacement Lithium coin cell battery see radio bus order no. 1857
white, glossy polar white, glossy
7516 20 12 7516 20 19
1 1
Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C
not dependent on mains power each channel can be allocated to as many radio receivers are required push-button functions: 4 channels / 5 light scenes / master off can be set via DIP switch changing of light scenes via DIP switch lockable with red transmit and battery status LED with lithium coin cell battery 3 V type: CR 2032 installation with frames on even surface e.g. also for extention of combinations with fitting material, screws, wall plugs and adhesive pad screw fastening via supporting plate possible
For radio wall-transmitter insert order no. 2764
with anti-dismantling protection with 2 red transmit and battery status LEDs
Push-button 4gang with labelling field white, glossy polar white, glossy
7516 40 12 7516 40 19
1 1
Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C For radio wall-transmitter insert order no. 2764
Push-buttons Push-button 1gang white, glossy polar white, glossy
7516 11 12 7516 11 19
with anti-dismantling protection with 4 red transmit and battery status LEDs
1 1
Built-on installation housings
Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C
Built-on installation housing 1gang flat design
For radio wall-transmitter insert order no. 2764
white polar white
with anti-dismantling protection
1002 00 02 1002 00 69
1 1
Height 16 mm
Push-button 2gang white, glossy polar white, glossy
7516 21 12 7516 21 19
1 1
on page T51
For radio wall-transmitter insert order no. 2764
for radio wall-transmitter insert on surface mounted and as table-top radio transmitter with double-sided adhesive pads e.g. for mounting on panes of glass
Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C For radio wall-transmitter insert order no. 2764
with anti-dismantling protection
Push-button 4gang white, glossy polar white, glossy
7516 41 12 7516 41 19
1 1
Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C For radio wall-transmitter insert order no. 2764
with anti-dismantling protection
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
355
RADIO BUS BERKER S.1/B.1/B.3/B.7 GLAS Order no.
Packing unit
Order no.
Packing unit
BLC Berker Light Control
RolloTec radio button with sensor connection
Radio buttons
white, glossy polar white, glossy polar white, matt anthracite, matt aluminium, matt
BLC radio button
on page T12
white, glossy polar white, glossy polar white, matt anthracite, matt aluminium, matt
1760 89 82 1760 89 89 1760 19 09 1760 16 06 1760 14 04
1 1 1 1 1
Radio signal reception frequency 433,42 MHz; Learnable radio transmitters 30 Extension unit operation with BLC extension unit and push-button (NO) possible as of release R2.1.
on page T37
1759 89 82 1759 89 89 1759 19 09 1759 16 06 1759 14 04
1 1 1 1 1
Radio signal reception frequency 433,42 MHz; Learnable radio transmitters 30; Brightness value sun approx. 5 - 80 kLux; Lamella adjustment with signal < 1 sec.; Self-sustaining for 2 min. with signal > 1 sec. For actuation via button and radio transmitter. For RolloTec brightness sensors order no. 0169, 0184 For RolloTec glass breakage sensor order no. 0170 For RolloTec adapter for sensors order no. 0171 For RolloTec standard insert without neutral conductor connection order no. 2911 For RolloTec standard insert order no. 2925 For Rollotec comfort insert order no. 2975 For RolloTec comfort insert for direct current drives order no. 2975 01 For magnetic contact order no. 9251 ..
For actuation via button and radio transmitter. For BLC universal touch dimmer order no. 2902 For BLC touch control unit 1-10 V order no. 2903 For BLC touch dimmer LV order no. 2904 For BLC triac switch insert LV order no. 2905 for BLC relay switch insert order no. 2906 For BLC relay switch insert with potential-free contact order no. 2906 10 For BLC relay switch insert HVAC order no. 2912 For BLC Tronic switch insert order no. 2916
with 2-push-buttons operation concept with 5 light scenes for „on/off“, dimming value retrieving light scenes only by using radio transmitter radio signal of taught-in radio controllers causes switch on for 1 min. (retriggering) start-up brightness will be stored safe after power failure reset function (to factory setting)
with 5 light scenes for „open/close“ retrieving light scenes only by using radio transmitter brightness value for sunblind individually adjustable no twilight sensor function for sensor connection to socket contact or terminal block
RolloTec RolloTec radio button
on page T37
white, glossy polar white, glossy polar white, matt anthracite, matt aluminium, matt
1758 89 82 1758 89 89 1758 19 09 1758 16 06 1758 14 04
1 1 1 1 1
Radio signal reception frequency 433,42 MHz; Learnable radio transmitters 30 ; Lamella adjustment with signal < 1 sec.; Self-sustaining for 2 min. with signal > 1 sec. For actuation via button and radio transmitter. For RolloTec standard insert without neutral conductor connection order no. 2911 For RolloTec standard insert order no. 2925 For Rollotec comfort insert order no. 2975 For RolloTec comfort insert for direct current drives order no. 2975 01
with 5 light scenes for „open/close“ retrieving light scenes only by using radio transmitter
356
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
RADIO BUS BERKER S.1/B.1/B.3/B.7 GLAS Order no.
Packing unit
Radio controllers
Order no.
Wall-transmitters
Radio controller 180 flat
on page T47
white, glossy polar white, glossy polar white, matt anthracite, matt aluminium, matt
Packing unit
9420 89 82 9420 89 89 9420 19 09 9420 16 06 9420 14 04
1 1 1 1 1
3 V= Battery life approx. 3 years; Radio channels 1; Radio signal transmission frequency 433,42 MHz; Radio signal transmission power < 10 mW; Radio signal transmission range (free field) max. 60 m; Nominal mounting height 1,1 m; Range frontal approx. 10 m; Range lateral each approx. 6 m; Detection field semi-oval shaped approx. 10 x 12 m; Detection angle 180 °; Detection levels 2; Switching segments 72; Response sensitivity programmable approx. 20 - 100 % ; Response brightness adjustable approx. 0 - 80 / unlimited Lux; Dimensions assembling height 23,5 mm
Radio wall-transmitter 1gang flat with labelling field for white and polar white for anthracite and aluminium on page T47
1 1
3 V= Battery life approx. 3 years; Radio channels 1; Radio signal transmission frequency 433,42 MHz; Radio signal transmission power < 10 mW; Radio signal transmission range (free field) max. 100 m; Labelling field length (W x H) 52,3 x 52,3 mm Replacement Lithium coin cell battery see radio bus order no. 1857 Sight shielding film for backside e.g. installation on glass see accessories order no. 9498 02 02, 9498 27 30, 9498 28 02
not dependent on mains power each channel can be allocated to as many radio receivers are required push-button functions: 1 channel / 1 light scene / master off can be set via DIP switch changing of light scenes via DIP switch lockable with red transmit and battery status LED with lithium coin cell battery 3 V type: CR 2032 installation with frames on even surface e.g. also for extention of combinations with fitting material, screws, wall plugs and adhesive pad screw fastening via supporting plate possible
If response brightness or movement of people is insufficient, it sends a radio signal to the radio controller power pack unit or other radio bus receivers. Sight shielding film for backside e.g. installation on glass see accessories order no. 9498 02 02, 9498 27 30, 9498 28 02
U not dependent on mains power the channel can be assigned to any number of radio receivers with red transmit and battery status LED with a lithium coin cell battery 3 V type: CR 2450 with cover to limit detection angle to 90° with optimised lens installation with frames on even surface e.g. also for extention of combinations with fitting material, screws, wall plugs and adhesive pad screw fastening via supporting plate possible
2721 10 09 2721 10 06
Radio wall-transmitter 2gang flat with labelling field for white and polar white for anthracite and aluminium on page T47
2722 10 09 2722 10 06
1 1
3 V= Battery life approx. 3 years; Radio channels 2; Radio signal transmission frequency 433,42 MHz; Radio signal transmission power < 10 mW; Radio signal transmission range (free field) max. 100 m; Labelling field length (W x H) 52,3 x 24,9 mm Replacement Lithium coin cell battery see radio bus order no. 1857 Sight shielding film for backside e.g. installation on glass see accessories order no. 9498 02 02, 9498 27 30, 9498 28 02
not dependent on mains power each channel can be allocated to as many radio receivers are required push-button functions: 2 channels / 3 light scenes / master off can be set via DIP switch changing of light scenes via DIP switch lockable with red transmit and battery status LED with lithium coin cell battery 3 V type: CR 2032 installation with frames on even surface e.g. also for extention of combinations with fitting material, screws, wall plugs and adhesive pad screw fastening via supporting plate possible
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
357
RADIO BUS BERKER S.1/B.1/B.3/B.7 GLAS Order no.
on page T47
Packing unit
Order no.
Radio wall-transmitter 3gang flat with labelling field
Radio wall-transmitter 2gang flat with labelling field
for white and polar white for anthracite and aluminium
polar white, matt anthracite, matt aluminium, matt
2723 10 09 2723 10 06
1 1
3 V= Battery life approx. 3 years; Radio channels 3; Radio signal transmission frequency 433,42 MHz; Radio signal transmission power < 10 mW; Radio signal transmission range (free field) max. 100 m; Labelling field length (W x H) 52,3 x 15,6 mm
on page T47
Replacement Lithium coin cell battery see radio bus order no. 1857 Sight shielding film for backside e.g. installation on glass see accessories order no. 9498 02 02, 9498 27 30, 9498 28 02
not dependent on mains power each channel can be allocated to as many radio receivers are required push-button functions: 1 channel / 1 light scene / master off can be set via DIP switch changing of light scenes via DIP switch lockable with red transmit and battery status LED with lithium coin cell battery 3 V type: CR 2032 installation with frames on even surface e.g. also for extention of combinations with fitting material, screws, wall plugs and adhesive pad screw fastening via supporting plate possible
358
polar white, matt anthracite, matt aluminium, matt
1 1 1
3 V= Battery life approx. 3 years; Radio channels 1; Radio signal transmission frequency 433,42 MHz; Radio signal transmission power < 10 mW; Radio signal transmission range (free field) max. 100 m
3 V= Battery life approx. 3 years; Radio channels 2; Radio signal transmission frequency 433,42 MHz; Radio signal transmission power < 10 mW; Radio signal transmission range (free field) max. 100 m
Radio wall-transmitter 4gang flat with labelling field
Radio wall-transmitter 1gang flat with labelling field # 2721 19 09 # 2721 16 06 # 2721 14 04
1 1 1
not dependent on mains power each channel can be allocated to as many radio receivers are required push-button functions: 2 channels / 3 light scenes / master off can be set via DIP switch changing of light scenes via DIP switch lockable with red transmit and battery status LED with lithium coin cell battery 3 V type: CR 2032 installation with frames on even surface e.g. also for extention of combinations with fitting material, screws, wall plugs and adhesive pad screw fastening via supporting plate possible
not dependent on mains power each channel can be allocated to as many radio receivers are required push-button functions: 3 channels / 5 light scenes / master off can be set via DIP switches changing of light scenes via DIP switch lockable with red transmit and battery status LED with lithium coin cell battery 3 V type: CR 2032 installation with frames on even surface e.g. also for extention of combinations with fitting material, screws, wall plugs and adhesive pad screw fastening via supporting plate possible
polar white, matt anthracite, matt aluminium, matt
# 2722 19 09 # 2722 16 06 # 2722 14 04
Replacement Lithium coin cell battery see radio bus order no. 1857 Sight shielding film for backside e.g. installation on glass see accessories order no. 9498 02 02, 9498 27 30, 9498 28 02
Replacement Lithium coin cell battery see radio bus order no. 1857 Sight shielding film for backside e.g. installation on glass see accessories order no. 9498 02 02, 9498 27 30, 9498 28 02
on page T47
Packing unit
on page T47
# 2724 19 09 # 2724 16 06 # 2724 14 04
1 1 1
3 V= Battery life approx. 3 years; Radio channels 4; Radio signal transmission frequency 433,42 MHz; Radio signal transmission power < 10 mW; Radio signal transmission range (free field) max. 100 m Replacement Lithium coin cell battery see radio bus order no. 1857 Sight shielding film for backside e.g. installation on glass see accessories order no. 9498 02 02, 9498 27 30, 9498 28 02
not dependent on mains power each channel can be allocated to as many radio receivers are required push-button functions: 4 channels / 5 light scenes / master off can be set via DIP switch changing of light scenes via DIP switch lockable with red transmit and battery status LED with lithium coin cell battery 3 V type: CR 2032 installation with frames on even surface e.g. also for extention of combinations with fitting material, screws, wall plugs and adhesive pad screw fastening via supporting plate possible
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
RADIO BUS BERKER S.1/B.1/B.3/B.7 GLAS Order no.
Packing unit
Order no.
Push-buttons
Push-button 2gang
Push-buttons with labelling field
polar white, matt anthracite, matt aluminium, matt
Push-button 1gang with labelling field for white and polar white for anthracite and aluminium
7516 13 80 7516 13 85
1 1
Packing unit
# 7516 21 89 # 7516 21 85 # 7516 21 83
1 1 1
Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C For radio wall-transmitter insert order no. 2764
Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C; Labelling field length (W x H) 52,3 x 52,3 mm
with anti-dismantling protection
For radio wall-transmitter insert order no. 2764
Push-button 4gang polar white, matt anthracite, matt aluminium, matt
with anti-dismantling protection with 2 red transmit and battery status LEDs
Push-button 2gang with labelling field for white and polar white
7516 23 80
# 7516 41 89 # 7516 41 85 # 7516 41 83
1 1 1
Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C 1 For radio wall-transmitter insert order no. 2764
Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C; Labelling field length (W x H) 52,3 x 24,9 mm
with anti-dismantling protection
For radio wall-transmitter insert order no. 2764
Push-buttons with labelling field with anti-dismantling protection with 4 red transmit and battery status LEDs
Push-button 1gang with labelling field
Push-button 3gang with labelling field for white and polar white for anthracite and aluminium
7516 33 80 7516 33 85
1 1
1 1 1
Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C
with anti-dismantling protection with red transmit and battery status LED
For radio wall-transmitter insert order no. 2764
Push-button 2gang with labelling field
with anti-dismantling protection with 6 red transmit and battery status LEDs
polar white, matt anthracite, matt aluminium, matt
Push-button 4gang with labelling field 7516 43 80 7516 43 85
# 7516 10 89 # 7516 10 85 # 7516 10 83
For radio wall-transmitter insert order no. 2764
Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C; Labelling field length (W x H) 52,3 x 15,6 mm
for white and polar white for anthracite and aluminium
polar white, matt anthracite, matt aluminium, matt
1 1
Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C; Labelling field length (W x H) 52,3 x 24,9 mm
# 7516 20 89 # 7516 20 85 # 7516 20 83
1 1 1
Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C For radio wall-transmitter insert order no. 2764
with anti-dismantling protection with 2 red transmit and battery status LEDs
Only for flush-mounted installation.
Push-button 4gang with labelling field
For radio wall-transmitter insert order no. 2764
polar white, matt anthracite, matt aluminium, matt
only for frame with large cut-out with anti-dismantling protection with 8 red transmit and battery status LEDs
# 7516 40 89 # 7516 40 85 # 7516 40 83
1 1 1
Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C For radio wall-transmitter insert order no. 2764
Push-buttons Push-button 1gang polar white, matt anthracite, matt aluminium, matt
# 7516 11 89 # 7516 11 85 # 7516 11 83
1 1 1
with anti-dismantling protection with 4 red transmit and battery status LEDs
Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C For radio wall-transmitter insert order no. 2764
with anti-dismantling protection
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
359
RADIO BUS BERKER S.1/B.1/B.3/B.7 GLAS Order no.
Packing unit
Order no.
Packing unit
Built-on installation housings Built-on installation housing 1gang flat design, S.1 polar white, matt
1007 99 09
1
Height 16 mm on page T51
For radio wall-transmitter insert order no. 2764
for radio wall-transmitter insert on surface mounted and as table-top radio transmitter with double-sided adhesive pads e.g. for mounting on panes of glass
Built-on installation housing 1gang flat design, B.1/B.3 polar white, matt anthracite, matt aluminium, matt on page T51
1007 19 09 1007 16 06 1007 14 04
1 1 1
Height 16 mm For radio wall-transmitter insert order no. 2764
for radio wall-transmitter insert on surface mounted and as table-top radio transmitter with double-sided adhesive pads e.g. for mounting on panes of glass
Accessories Adhesive foil for radio wall-transmitters and controllers, flat polar white, for S. 1 black, for B.1/B.3 polar white, for B.7 Glas
9498 02 02 9498 27 30 9498 28 02
1 1 1
The adhesive foil attaches to the frame and when installed on glass or any other transparent base it provides a closed backing surface. To attain an even adhesive surface, it is recommended to flatten the adhesive foil for application 24 hours before installing the wall-transmitter / controller. as sight shielding on backside (e.g. when mounting on glass)
360
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
RADIO BUS BERKER Q.1 Order no.
Packing unit
Order no.
NEW
BLC Berker Light Control Radio buttons NEW
polar white, velvety
* 1760 60 89
1
Radio signal reception frequency 433,42 MHz; Learnable radio transmitters 30 on page T12
RolloTec radio button with sensor connection polar white, velvety
BLC radio button
on page T37
Extension unit operation with BLC extension unit and push-button (NO) possible as of release R2.1.
Packing unit
* 1759 60 89
1
Radio signal reception frequency 433,42 MHz; Learnable radio transmitters 30; Brightness value sun approx. 5 - 80 kLux; Lamella adjustment with signal < 1 sec.; Self-sustaining for 2 min. with signal > 1 sec. For actuation via button and radio transmitter. For RolloTec brightness sensors order no. 0169, 0184 For RolloTec glass breakage sensor order no. 0170 For RolloTec adapter for sensors order no. 0171 For RolloTec standard insert without neutral conductor connection order no. 2911 For RolloTec standard insert order no. 2925 For Rollotec comfort insert order no. 2975 For RolloTec comfort insert for direct current drives order no. 2975 01 For magnetic contact order no. 9251 ..
For actuation via button and radio transmitter. For BLC universal touch dimmer order no. 2902 For BLC touch control unit 1-10 V order no. 2903 For BLC touch dimmer LV order no. 2904 For BLC triac switch insert LV order no. 2905 for BLC relay switch insert order no. 2906 For BLC relay switch insert with potential-free contact order no. 2906 10 For BLC relay switch insert HVAC order no. 2912 For BLC Tronic switch insert order no. 2916
Available from 04/2009
Available from 04/2009
with 2-push-buttons operation concept with 5 light scenes for „on/off“, dimming value retrieving light scenes only by using radio transmitter radio signal of taught-in radio controllers causes switch on for 1 min. (retriggering) start-up brightness will be stored safe after power failure reset function (to factory setting)
with 5 light scenes for „open/close“ retrieving light scenes only by using radio transmitter brightness value for sunblind individually adjustable no twilight sensor function for sensor connection to socket contact or terminal block
RolloTec NEW
RolloTec radio button polar white, velvety
on page T37
* 1758 60 89
1
Radio signal reception frequency 433,42 MHz; Learnable radio transmitters 30 ; Lamella adjustment with signal < 1 sec.; Self-sustaining for 2 min. with signal > 1 sec. For actuation via button and radio transmitter. For RolloTec standard insert without neutral conductor connection order no. 2911 For RolloTec standard insert order no. 2925 For Rollotec comfort insert order no. 2975 For RolloTec comfort insert for direct current drives order no. 2975 01 Available from 04/2009
with 5 light scenes for „open/close“ retrieving light scenes only by using radio transmitter
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
361
RADIO BUS BERKER Q.1 Order no.
Packing unit
Order no.
Packing unit
Radio controllers NEW
Radio controller 180 flat polar white, velvety
* 9420 60 89
1
3 V= Battery life approx. 3 years; Radio channels 1; Radio signal transmission frequency 433,42 MHz; Radio signal transmission power < 10 mW; Radio signal transmission range (free field) max. 60 m; Nominal mounting height 1,1 m; Range frontal approx. 10 m; Range lateral each approx. 6 m; Detection field semi-oval shaped approx. 10 x 12 m; Detection angle 180 °; Detection levels 2; Switching segments 72; Response sensitivity programmable approx. 20 - 100 % ; Response brightness adjustable approx. 0 - 80 / unlimited Lux; Dimensions assembling height 23,5 mm If response brightness or movement of people is insufficient, it sends a radio signal to the radio controller power pack unit or other radio bus receivers. Sight shielding film for backside e.g. installation on glass see accessories order no. 9498 02 02, 9498 27 30, 9498 28 02
U Available from 04/2009
not dependent on mains power the channel can be assigned to any number of radio receivers with red transmit and battery status LED with a lithium coin cell battery 3 V type: CR 2450 with cover to limit detection angle to 90° with optimised lens installation with frames on even surface e.g. also for extention of combinations with fitting material, screws, wall plugs and adhesive pad screw fastening via supporting plate possible
362
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
RADIO BUS BERKER K.1/K.5 Order no.
Packing unit
Order no.
Packing unit
BLC Berker Light Control
RolloTec radio button with sensor connection
Radio buttons
white, glossy polar white, glossy anthracite, matt aluminium, matt stainless steel
BLC radio button
on page T12
white, glossy polar white, glossy anthracite, matt aluminium, matt stainless steel
1760 70 02 1760 70 09 1760 70 06 1760 70 24 1760 70 04
1 1 1 1 1
Radio signal reception frequency 433,42 MHz; Learnable radio transmitters 30 Extension unit operation with BLC extension unit and push-button (NO) possible as of release R2.1.
on page T37
1759 70 02 1759 70 09 1759 70 06 1759 70 24 1759 70 04
1 1 1 1 1
Radio signal reception frequency 433,42 MHz; Learnable radio transmitters 30; Brightness value sun approx. 5 - 80 kLux; Lamella adjustment with signal < 1 sec.; Self-sustaining for 2 min. with signal > 1 sec. For actuation via button and radio transmitter. For RolloTec brightness sensors order no. 0169, 0184 For RolloTec glass breakage sensor order no. 0170 For RolloTec adapter for sensors order no. 0171 For RolloTec standard insert without neutral conductor connection order no. 2911 For RolloTec standard insert order no. 2925 For Rollotec comfort insert order no. 2975 For RolloTec comfort insert for direct current drives order no. 2975 01 For magnetic contact order no. 9251 ..
For actuation via button and radio transmitter. For BLC universal touch dimmer order no. 2902 For BLC touch control unit 1-10 V order no. 2903 For BLC touch dimmer LV order no. 2904 For BLC triac switch insert LV order no. 2905 for BLC relay switch insert order no. 2906 For BLC relay switch insert with potential-free contact order no. 2906 10 For BLC relay switch insert HVAC order no. 2912 For BLC Tronic switch insert order no. 2916
with 2-push-buttons operation concept with 5 light scenes for „on/off“, dimming value retrieving light scenes only by using radio transmitter radio signal of taught-in radio controllers causes switch on for 1 min. (retriggering) start-up brightness will be stored safe after power failure reset function (to factory setting)
with 5 light scenes for „open/close“ retrieving light scenes only by using radio transmitter brightness value for sunblind individually adjustable no twilight sensor function only for sensor connection to terminal block
RolloTec RolloTec radio button
on page T37
white, glossy polar white, glossy anthracite, matt aluminium, matt stainless steel
1758 70 02 1758 70 09 1758 70 06 1758 70 24 1758 70 04
1 1 1 1 1
Radio signal reception frequency 433,42 MHz; Learnable radio transmitters 30 ; Lamella adjustment with signal < 1 sec.; Self-sustaining for 2 min. with signal > 1 sec. For actuation via button and radio transmitter. For RolloTec standard insert without neutral conductor connection order no. 2911 For RolloTec standard insert order no. 2925 For Rollotec comfort insert order no. 2975 For RolloTec comfort insert for direct current drives order no. 2975 01
with 5 light scenes for „open/close“ retrieving light scenes only by using radio transmitter
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
363
RADIO BUS BERKER K.1/K.5 Order no.
Packing unit
Radio controllers
Order no.
Wall-transmitters
Radio controller 180 flat
on page T47
white, glossy polar white, glossy anthracite, matt aluminium, matt stainless steel, lacquered
Packing unit
9420 70 02 9420 70 09 9420 70 06 9420 70 24 9420 70 04
1 1 1 1 1
Radio wall-transmitter 1gang flat with labelling field
on page T47
3 V= Battery life approx. 3 years; Radio channels 1; Radio signal transmission frequency 433,42 MHz; Radio signal transmission power < 10 mW; Radio signal transmission range (free field) max. 60 m; Nominal mounting height 1,1 m; Range frontal approx. 10 m; Range lateral each approx. 6 m; Detection field semi-oval shaped approx. 10 x 12 m; Detection angle 180 °; Detection levels 2; Switching segments 72; Response sensitivity programmable approx. 20 - 100 % ; Response brightness adjustable approx. 0 - 80 / unlimited Lux; Dimensions assembling height 23,5 mm
2721 70 09 2721 70 06 2721 70 24 2721 70 04
1 1 1 1
3 V= Battery life approx. 3 years; Radio channels 1; Radio signal transmission frequency 433,42 MHz; Radio signal transmission power < 10 mW; Radio signal transmission range (free field) max. 100 m; Labelling field length (W x H) 66,8 x 52,8 mm Replacement Lithium coin cell battery see radio bus order no. 1857 Sight shielding film for backside e.g. installation on glass see accessories order no. 9498 33 02, 9498 33 30
not dependent on mains power each channel can be allocated to as many radio receivers are required push-button functions: 1 channel / 1 light scene / master off can be set via DIP switch changing of light scenes via DIP switch lockable with red transmit and battery status LED with lithium coin cell battery 3 V type: CR 2032 installation with frames on even surface e.g. also for extention of combinations with fitting material, screws, wall plugs and adhesive pad screw fastening via supporting plate possible
If response brightness or movement of people is insufficient, it sends a radio signal to the radio controller power pack unit or other radio bus receivers. Sight shielding film for backside e.g. installation on glass see accessories order no. 9498 33 ..
U not dependent on mains power the channel can be assigned to any number of radio receivers with red transmit and battery status LED with a lithium coin cell battery 3 V type: CR 2450 with cover to limit detection angle to 90° with optimised lens installation with frames on even surface e.g. also for extention of combinations with fitting material, screws, wall plugs and adhesive pad screw fastening via supporting plate possible
for white and polar white anthracite aluminium stainless steel
Radio wall-transmitter 2gang flat with labelling field
on page T47
for white and polar white anthracite aluminium stainless steel
2722 70 09 2722 70 06 2722 70 24 2722 70 04
1 1 1 1
3 V= Battery life approx. 3 years; Radio channels 2; Radio signal transmission frequency 433,42 MHz; Radio signal transmission power < 10 mW; Radio signal transmission range (free field) max. 100 m; Labelling field length (W x H) 66,8 x 25 mm Replacement Lithium coin cell battery see radio bus order no. 1857 Sight shielding film for backside e.g. installation on glass see accessories order no. 9498 33 02, 9498 33 30
not dependent on mains power each channel can be allocated to as many radio receivers are required push-button functions: 2 channels / 3 light scenes / master off can be set via DIP switch changing of light scenes via DIP switch lockable with red transmit and battery status LED with lithium coin cell battery 3 V type: CR 2032 installation with frames on even surface e.g. also for extention of combinations with fitting material, screws, wall plugs and adhesive pad screw fastening via supporting plate possible
364
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
RADIO BUS BERKER K.1/K.5 Order no.
Packing unit
Radio wall-transmitter 3gang flat with labelling field
on page T47
for white and polar white anthracite aluminium stainless steel
2723 70 09 2723 70 06 2723 70 24 2723 70 04
Order no.
NEW
aluminium stainless steel
NEW
Push-button 1gang with labelling field for white and polar white 7516 13 70 anthracite * 7516 13 75 aluminium * 7516 13 74 7516 13 73 stainless steel
1 1 1 1
Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C; Labelling field length (W x H) 66,8 x 52,8 mm For radio wall-transmitter insert order no. 2764
1 1
Push-button 4gang with labelling field for white and polar white anthracite aluminium stainless steel
7516 43 70 7516 43 75
* * 7516 43 74 7516 43 73
1 1 1 1
Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C; Labelling field length (W x H) 66,8 x 25 mm Only for flush-mounted installation. For radio wall-transmitter insert order no. 2764
only for frame with large cut-out with anti-dismantling protection with 8 red transmit and battery status LEDs
Accessories Adhesive foil for radio wall-transmitters and controllers, flat polar white, glossy, for K.1
9498 33 02
1
black, for K.1 and K.5
9498 33 30
1
The adhesive foil attaches to the frame and when installed on glass or any other transparent base it provides a closed backing surface. To attain an even adhesive surface, it is recommended to flatten the adhesive foil for application 24 hours before installing the wall-transmitter / controller. as sight shielding on backside (e.g. when mounting on glass)
with anti-dismantling protection with 2 red transmit and battery status LEDs NEW
7516 33 73
with anti-dismantling protection with 6 red transmit and battery status LEDs NEW
Push-buttons with labelling field
* * 7516 33 74
1 1
For radio wall-transmitter insert order no. 2764
Replacement Lithium coin cell battery see radio bus order no. 1857 Sight shielding film for backside e.g. installation on glass see accessories order no. 9498 33 02, 9498 33 30
Push-buttons
7516 33 70 7516 33 75
Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C; Labelling field length (W x H) 66,8 x 15,7 mm
3 V= Battery life approx. 3 years; Radio channels 3; Radio signal transmission frequency 433,42 MHz; Radio signal transmission power < 10 mW; Radio signal transmission range (free field) max. 100 m; Labelling field length (W x H) 66,8 x 15,7 mm
not dependent on mains power each channel can be allocated to as many radio receivers are required push-button functions: 3 channels / 5 light scenes / master off can be set via DIP switches changing of light scenes via DIP switch lockable with red transmit and battery status LED with lithium coin cell battery 3 V type: CR 2032 installation with frames on even surface e.g. also for extention of combinations with fitting material, screws, wall plugs and adhesive pad screw fastening via supporting plate possible
Push-button 3gang with labelling field for white and polar white anthracite
1 1 1 1
Packing unit
Push-button 2gang with labelling field for white and polar white anthracite aluminium stainless steel
7516 23 70 7516 23 75
* * 7516 23 74 7516 23 73
1 1 1 1
Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C; Labelling field length (W x H) 66,8 x 25 mm For radio wall-transmitter insert order no. 2764
with anti-dismantling protection with 4 red transmit and battery status LEDs
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
365
RADIO BUS BERKER ARSYS Order no.
Packing unit
Order no.
BLC Berker Light Control
RolloTec radio button with sensor connection, flat design
Radio buttons BLC radio button
on page T12
white, glossy polar white, glossy brown, glossy light bronze, metal stainless steel gold, metal
1760 00 02 1760 00 69 1760 00 01 1760 00 11 1760 00 04 1760 00 12
1 1 1 1 1 1
on page T37
Extension unit operation with BLC extension unit and push-button (NO) possible as of release R2.1.
with imprinted symbol arrows with 5 light scenes for „open/close“ retrieving light scenes only by using radio transmitter brightness value for sunblind individually adjustable no twilight sensor function only for sensor connection to terminal block
with 2-push-buttons operation concept with 5 light scenes for „on/off“, dimming value retrieving light scenes only by using radio transmitter radio signal of taught-in radio controllers causes switch on for 1 min. (retriggering) start-up brightness will be stored safe after power failure reset function (to factory setting)
RolloTec radio button with sensor connection
RolloTec RolloTec radio button, flat design 1 1 1 1 1 1
Radio signal reception frequency 433,42 MHz; Learnable radio transmitters 30 ; Lamella adjustment with signal < 1 sec.; Self-sustaining for 2 min. with signal > 1 sec. For actuation via button and radio transmitter. For RolloTec standard insert without neutral conductor connection order no. 2911 For RolloTec standard insert order no. 2925 For Rollotec comfort insert order no. 2975 For RolloTec comfort insert for direct current drives order no. 2975 01
with imprinted symbol arrows with 5 light scenes for „open/close“ retrieving light scenes only by using radio transmitter
366
1 1 1 1 1 1
For RolloTec brightness sensors order no. 0169, 0184 For RolloTec glass breakage sensor order no. 0170 For RolloTec adapter for sensors order no. 0171 For RolloTec standard insert without neutral conductor connection order no. 2911 For RolloTec standard insert order no. 2925 For Rollotec comfort insert order no. 2975 For RolloTec comfort insert for direct current drives order no. 2975 01 For magnetic contact order no. 9251 ..
For BLC universal touch dimmer order no. 2902 For BLC touch control unit 1-10 V order no. 2903 For BLC touch dimmer LV order no. 2904 For BLC triac switch insert LV order no. 2905 for BLC relay switch insert order no. 2906 For BLC relay switch insert with potential-free contact order no. 2906 10 For BLC relay switch insert HVAC order no. 2912 For BLC Tronic switch insert order no. 2916
on page T37
1759 00 12 1759 00 79 1759 00 11 1759 90 21 1759 90 14 1759 90 12
For actuation via button and radio transmitter.
For actuation via button and radio transmitter.
1758 00 12 1758 00 79 1758 00 11 1758 90 21 1758 90 14 1758 90 12
white, glossy polar white, glossy brown, glossy light bronze, metal stainless steel gold, metal
Radio signal reception frequency 433,42 MHz; Learnable radio transmitters 30; Brightness value sun approx. 5 - 80 kLux; Lamella adjustment with signal < 1 sec.; Self-sustaining for 2 min. with signal > 1 sec.
Radio signal reception frequency 433,42 MHz; Learnable radio transmitters 30
white, glossy polar white, glossy brown, glossy light bronze, metal stainless steel gold, metal
Packing unit
on page T37
white, glossy polar white, glossy brown, glossy light bronze, lacquered stainless steel, lacquered
1759 00 02 1759 00 69 1759 00 01 1759 90 11 1759 90 04
1 1 1 1 1
Radio signal reception frequency 433,42 MHz; Learnable radio transmitters 30; Brightness value sun approx. 5 - 80 kLux; Lamella adjustment with signal < 1 sec.; Self-sustaining for 2 min. with signal > 1 sec. For actuation via button and radio transmitter. For RolloTec brightness sensors order no. 0169, 0184 For RolloTec glass breakage sensor order no. 0170 For RolloTec adapter for sensors order no. 0171 For RolloTec standard insert without neutral conductor connection order no. 2911 For RolloTec standard insert order no. 2925 For Rollotec comfort insert order no. 2975 For RolloTec comfort insert for direct current drives order no. 2975 01 For magnetic contact order no. 9251 ..
with embossed arrows with 5 light scenes for „open/close“ retrieving light scenes only by using radio transmitter brightness value for sunblind individually adjustable no twilight sensor function for sensor connection to socket contact or terminal block
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
RADIO BUS BERKER ARSYS Order no.
Packing unit
Radio controllers
Order no.
Wall-transmitters
Radio controller 180 flat
on page T47
white, glossy polar white, glossy light bronze, lacquered stainless steel, lacquered
Packing unit
9420 00 02 9420 00 69 9420 90 11 9420 90 04
Radio wall-transmitter 1gang flat with labelling field
1 1 1 1
3 V= Battery life approx. 3 years; Radio channels 1; Radio signal transmission frequency 433,42 MHz; Radio signal transmission power < 10 mW; Radio signal transmission range (free field) max. 60 m; Nominal mounting height 1,1 m; Range frontal approx. 10 m; Range lateral each approx. 6 m; Detection field semi-oval shaped approx. 10 x 12 m; Detection angle 180 °; Detection levels 2; Switching segments 72; Response sensitivity programmable approx. 20 - 100 % ; Response brightness adjustable approx. 0 - 80 / unlimited Lux; Dimensions assembling height 23,5 mm
on page T47
2721 00 02 2721 00 69 2721 90 11 2721 90 04
1 1 1 1
3 V= Battery life approx. 3 years; Radio channels 1; Radio signal transmission frequency 433,42 MHz; Radio signal transmission power < 10 mW; Radio signal transmission range (free field) max. 100 m Replacement Lithium coin cell battery see radio bus order no. 1857 Sight shielding film for backside e.g. installation on glass see accessories order no. 9498 11 ..
not dependent on mains power each channel can be allocated to as many radio receivers are required push-button functions: 1 channel / 1 light scene / master off can be set via DIP switch changing of light scenes via DIP switch lockable with red transmit and battery status LED with lithium coin cell battery 3 V type: CR 2032 installation with frames on even surface e.g. also for extention of combinations with fitting material, screws, wall plugs and adhesive pad screw fastening via supporting plate possible
If response brightness or movement of people is insufficient, it sends a radio signal to the radio controller power pack unit or other radio bus receivers. Sight shielding film for backside e.g. installation on glass see accessories order no. 9498 11 ..
U not dependent on mains power the channel can be assigned to any number of radio receivers with red transmit and battery status LED with a lithium coin cell battery 3 V type: CR 2450 with cover to limit detection angle to 90° with optimised lens installation with frames on even surface e.g. also for extention of combinations with fitting material, screws, wall plugs and adhesive pad screw fastening via supporting plate possible
white, glossy polar white, glossy light bronze, lacquered stainless steel, lacquered
Radio wall-transmitter 2gang flat with labelling field
on page T47
white, glossy polar white, glossy light bronze, lacquered stainless steel, lacquered
2722 00 02 2722 00 69 2722 90 11 2722 90 04
1 1 1 1
3 V= Battery life approx. 3 years; Radio channels 2; Radio signal transmission frequency 433,42 MHz; Radio signal transmission power < 10 mW; Radio signal transmission range (free field) max. 100 m Replacement Lithium coin cell battery see radio bus order no. 1857 Sight shielding film for backside e.g. installation on glass see accessories order no. 9498 11 ..
not dependent on mains power each channel can be allocated to as many radio receivers are required push-button functions: 2 channels / 3 light scenes / master off can be set via DIP switch changing of light scenes via DIP switch lockable with red transmit and battery status LED with lithium coin cell battery 3 V type: CR 2032 installation with frames on even surface e.g. also for extention of combinations with fitting material, screws, wall plugs and adhesive pad screw fastening via supporting plate possible
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
367
RADIO BUS BERKER ARSYS Order no.
Packing unit
Radio wall-transmitter 4gang flat with labelling field
on page T47
white, glossy polar white, glossy light bronze, lacquered stainless steel, lacquered
2724 00 02 2724 00 69 2724 90 11 2724 90 04
1 1 1 1
3 V= Battery life approx. 3 years; Radio channels 4; Radio signal transmission frequency 433,42 MHz; Radio signal transmission power < 10 mW; Radio signal transmission range (free field) max. 100 m
Order no.
Packing unit
Push-button 4gang white, glossy polar white, glossy light bronze, lacquered stainless steel, lacquered
7516 41 42 7516 41 49 7516 41 44 7516 41 43
1 1 1 1
Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C For radio wall-transmitter insert order no. 2764
with anti-dismantling protection
Push-buttons with labelling field Push-button 1gang with labelling field
Replacement Lithium coin cell battery see radio bus order no. 1857 Sight shielding film for backside e.g. installation on glass see accessories order no. 9498 11 ..
not dependent on mains power each channel can be allocated to as many radio receivers are required push-button functions: 4 channels / 5 light scenes / master off can be set via DIP switch changing of light scenes via DIP switch lockable with red transmit and battery status LED with lithium coin cell battery 3 V type: CR 2032 installation with frames on even surface e.g. also for extention of combinations with fitting material, screws, wall plugs and adhesive pad screw fastening via supporting plate possible
Push-buttons
white, glossy polar white, glossy light bronze, lacquered stainless steel, lacquered
7516 10 42 7516 10 49 7516 10 44 7516 10 43
1 1 1 1
Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C For radio wall-transmitter insert order no. 2764
with anti-dismantling protection with red transmit and battery status LED
Push-button 2gang with labelling field polar white, glossy light bronze, lacquered stainless steel, lacquered
7516 20 49 7516 20 44 7516 20 43
1 1 1
Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C
Push-button 1gang white, glossy polar white, glossy stainless steel, lacquered
7516 11 42 7516 11 49 7516 11 43
1 1 1
light bronze, lacquered
7516 11 44
1
Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C
with anti-dismantling protection with 2 red transmit and battery status LEDs
Push-button 4gang with labelling field white, glossy polar white, glossy light bronze, lacquered stainless steel, lacquered
For radio wall-transmitter insert order no. 2764
with anti-dismantling protection
7516 40 42 7516 40 49 7516 40 44 7516 40 43
1 1 1 1
Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C
Push-button 2gang white, glossy polar white, glossy light bronze, lacquered stainless steel, lacquered
For radio wall-transmitter insert order no. 2764
7516 21 42 7516 21 49 7516 21 44 7516 21 43
1 1 1 1
For radio wall-transmitter insert order no. 2764
with anti-dismantling protection with 4 red transmit and battery status LEDs
Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C For radio wall-transmitter insert order no. 2764
with anti-dismantling protection
368
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
RADIO BUS BERKER ARSYS Order no.
Packing unit
Order no.
Packing unit
Built-on installation housings Built-on installation housing 1gang flat design
on page T51
white polar white light bronze, lacquered stainless steel, lacquered
1002 00 02 1002 00 69 1002 90 11 1002 90 04
1 1 1 1
Height 16 mm For radio wall-transmitter insert order no. 2764
for radio wall-transmitter insert on surface mounted and as table-top radio transmitter with double-sided adhesive pads e.g. for mounting on panes of glass
Accessories Adhesive foil for radio wall-transmitters and controllers, flat polar white black
9498 11 02 9498 11 30
1 1
The adhesive foil attaches to the frame and when installed on glass or any other transparent base it provides a closed backing surface. To attain an even adhesive surface, it is recommended to flatten the adhesive foil for application 24 hours before installing the wall-transmitter / controller. as sight shielding on backside (e.g. when mounting on glass)
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
369
RADIO BUS TWINPOINT Order no.
Packing unit
Order no.
BLC Berker Light Control
RolloTec radio button with sensor connection, flat design
Radio buttons
polar white, glossy red, glossy black, glossy
BLC radio button polar white, glossy red, glossy black, glossy on page T12
# 1760 19 # 1760 62 # 1760 65
1 1 1
Radio signal reception frequency 433,42 MHz; Learnable radio transmitters 30
on page T37
Extension unit operation with BLC extension unit and push-button (NO) possible as of release R2.1.
RolloTec radio button with sensor connection polar white, glossy red, glossy black, glossy
RolloTec RolloTec radio button, flat design 1 1 1
Radio signal reception frequency 433,42 MHz; Learnable radio transmitters 30 ; Lamella adjustment with signal < 1 sec.; Self-sustaining for 2 min. with signal > 1 sec. For actuation via button and radio transmitter. For RolloTec standard insert without neutral conductor connection order no. 2911 For RolloTec standard insert order no. 2925 For Rollotec comfort insert order no. 2975 For RolloTec comfort insert for direct current drives order no. 2975 01
with imprinted symbol arrows with 5 light scenes for „open/close“ retrieving light scenes only by using radio transmitter
370
Radio signal reception frequency 433,42 MHz; Learnable radio transmitters 30; Brightness value sun approx. 5 - 80 kLux; Lamella adjustment with signal < 1 sec.; Self-sustaining for 2 min. with signal > 1 sec.
with imprinted symbol arrows with 5 light scenes for „open/close“ retrieving light scenes only by using radio transmitter brightness value for sunblind individually adjustable no twilight sensor function only for sensor connection to terminal block
with 2-push-buttons operation concept with 5 light scenes for „on/off“, dimming value retrieving light scenes only by using radio transmitter radio signal of taught-in radio controllers causes switch on for 1 min. (retriggering) start-up brightness will be stored safe after power failure reset function (to factory setting)
on page T37
1 1 1
For RolloTec brightness sensors order no. 0169, 0184 For RolloTec glass breakage sensor order no. 0170 For RolloTec adapter for sensors order no. 0171 For RolloTec standard insert without neutral conductor connection order no. 2911 For RolloTec standard insert order no. 2925 For Rollotec comfort insert order no. 2975 For RolloTec comfort insert for direct current drives order no. 2975 01 For magnetic contact order no. 9251 ..
For BLC universal touch dimmer order no. 2902 For BLC touch control unit 1-10 V order no. 2903 For BLC touch dimmer LV order no. 2904 For BLC triac switch insert LV order no. 2905 for BLC relay switch insert order no. 2906 For BLC relay switch insert with potential-free contact order no. 2906 10 For BLC relay switch insert HVAC order no. 2912 For BLC Tronic switch insert order no. 2916
# 1758 29 # 1758 72 # 1758 75
# 1759 29 # 1759 72 # 1759 75
For actuation via button and radio transmitter.
For actuation via button and radio transmitter.
polar white, glossy red, glossy black, glossy
Packing unit
on page T37
# 1759 19 # 1759 62 # 1759 65
1 1 1
Radio signal reception frequency 433,42 MHz; Learnable radio transmitters 30; Brightness value sun approx. 5 - 80 kLux; Lamella adjustment with signal < 1 sec.; Self-sustaining for 2 min. with signal > 1 sec. For actuation via button and radio transmitter. For RolloTec brightness sensors order no. 0169, 0184 For RolloTec glass breakage sensor order no. 0170 For RolloTec adapter for sensors order no. 0171 For RolloTec standard insert without neutral conductor connection order no. 2911 For RolloTec standard insert order no. 2925 For Rollotec comfort insert order no. 2975 For RolloTec comfort insert for direct current drives order no. 2975 01 For magnetic contact order no. 9251 ..
with embossed arrows with 5 light scenes for „open/close“ retrieving light scenes only by using radio transmitter brightness value for sunblind individually adjustable no twilight sensor function for sensor connection to socket contact or terminal block
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
RADIO BUS TWINPOINT Order no.
Packing unit
Order no.
Packing unit
Push-buttons Push-button 1gang polar white, glossy red, glossy black, glossy
# 7516 10 69 # 7516 10 66 # 7516 10 65
1 1 1
Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C For radio wall-transmitter insert order no. 2764
with anti-dismantling protection with red transmit and battery status LED
Push-button 2gang polar white, glossy red, glossy black, glossy
# 7516 20 69 # 7516 20 66 # 7516 20 65
1 1 1
Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C For radio wall-transmitter insert order no. 2764
with anti-dismantling protection with 2 red transmit and battery status LEDs
Push-button 4gang polar white, glossy red, glossy black, glossy
# 7516 40 69 # 7516 40 66 # 7516 40 65
1 1 1
Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C For radio wall-transmitter insert order no. 2764
with anti-dismantling protection with 4 red transmit and battery status LEDs
Built-on installation housings Built-on installation housing 1gang flat design polar white red black
1002 00 69 1002 00 62 # 1002 00 65
1 1 1
Height 16 mm on page T51 For radio wall-transmitter insert order no. 2764
for radio wall-transmitter insert on surface mounted and as table-top radio transmitter with double-sided adhesive pads e.g. for mounting on panes of glass
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
371
BERKER WORKSHOPS INSTABUS KNX/EIB
For more information about product training dates, please contact our local representatives or the sales representative for your area.
372
Instabus KNX/EIB
The European Installation Bus. Intelligent building system technology.
Training and service Dedicated corporate training seminars provide detailed product-specific knowledge of the Berker INSTABUS KNX/EIB.
Taking new approaches, exploring new technologies and utilizing them in a targeted way also means acquiring the relevant know-how.
Training and service are the essential prerequisites for innovative and successful cooperation. It is for that reason that we offer comprehensive, target-group-oriented training programmes at special KNX/EIB workshops.
After the theory comes the practice, of course. Our Project Management team is there to assist you. Call our hotline number anytime on ++49 (0) 23 55 905 - 203. We will be happy to provide you with expert advice and information about the manufacturers’ database and Berker Instabus KNX/EIB components. For more information please have a look into our Instabus KNX/EIB technical manual or visit www.berker.com
373
K N X E I B
INSTABUS KNX/EIB Order no.
Packing unit
Order no.
NEW
System components Power supplies
Power supply 640 mA RMD uninterruptible light grey
7501 00 09
1
230 V~, 50/60 Hz Output voltage 28 - 31 V=; Output current max. 320 mA; Bus cables max. 2; Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C; RMD 4 modules; Dimensions (W x H x D) 72 x 90 x 68 mm; Assembling height as from DIN rail 61 mm
with integral reset button with green operation LED, red overload LED and yellow overvoltage LED with green mains LED and green storage battery indicator LED potential-free change-over signalling contact for power failure, storage battery failure, overload/ overvoltage line connection via connecting terminal temperature-controlled charging of the battery connection of a second lead battery to extend the backup power time protected earth conductor must be connected with screw terminals
Power supply 640 mA RMD 7501 00 10
1
230 V~, 50/60 Hz Output voltage 28 - 31 V=; Output current max. 640 mA; Bus cables max. 3; Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C; RMD 7 modules; Dimensions (W x H x D) 126 x 90 x 68 mm; Assembling height as from DIN rail 61 mm
with 2 integrated chokes with 2 integrated reset switches short-circuit and overload proof (electronic fuse) with green operation LED, red overload LED and yellow overvoltage LED with 2 red reset LEDs other 3rd bus line can be connected via terminal other 3rd bus line must be decoupled via a choke protected earth conductor must be connected with screw terminals
1
Basic cable set order no. 7590 00 66 Extension cable set order no. 7590 00 67 for connecting 12 V lead batteries order no. 7590 00 68
with integral choke with integral reset switch short-circuit and overload proof (electronic fuse) with green operation LED, red overload LED and yellow overvoltage LED with red reset LED further bus line connectable with connecting terminal further bus line must be decoupled by choke protected earth conductor must be connected with screw terminals
light grey
* 7501 00 15
230 V~, 50/60 Hz Output voltage 28 - 31 V=; Output current max. 640 mA; Mains buffering approx. 5,5 h/lead battery 12 Ah; Bus cables max. 1; Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C; RMD 8 modules; Dimensions (W x H x D) 144 x 90 x 66 mm; Assembling height as from DIN rail 59 mm
Power supply 320 mA RMD light grey
Packing unit
NEW
Lead battery 12 V
* 7590 00 68
1
Rated voltage 12 V=; Load capacitance 12 Ah; Dimensions (W x H x D) 94 x 151 x 98 mm; Weight approx. 4,2 kg; Service life approx. 5 Years Connection to 640 mA power supply, uninterruptible order no. 7590 00 66 Extension cable set order no. 7590 00 67 NEW
Basic cable set
* 7590 00 66
1
Cable length approx. 2 m, 4 x 0,75 mm² To connect a lead battery order no. 7590 00 68 to the 640 mA power supply, uninterruptible order no. 7501 00 15
with temperature sensor with fuse holder for fine-wire fuses NEW
Extension cable set
* 7590 00 67
1
Cable length approx. 2 m, 2 x 0,75 mm² To connect a second lead battery order no. 7590 00 68 to the 640 mA power supply, uninterruptible order no. 7501 00 15
374
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
INSTABUS KNX/EIB Order no.
Packing unit
Chokes
Packing unit
Data interfaces Choke RMD light grey
Data interface RMD 7501 00 02
1
Operating voltage over bus 21 - 32 V=; Rated current 0,5 A; Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C; RMD 2 modules; Dimensions (W x H x D) 35 x 90 x 61 mm; Assembling height as from DIN rail 55 mm
Coupler RMD 7501 00 14
1
Operating voltage over bus 21 - 32 V=; Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C; RMD 2 modules; Dimensions (W x H x D) 36 x 90 x 70 mm; Assembling height as from DIN rail 63 mm
1
Operating voltage 24 V~/=; Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C; RMD 2 modules; Dimensions (W x H x D) 36 x 90 x 58 mm; Assembling height as from DIN rail 55 mm Needed for operation a power supply of 24 V AC RMD order nr. 7591 00 01
quick communication of lines/areas and systems via data networks (Internet protocols) as interface to PCs and data processing devices for reporting bus voltage failure via data networks Internet protocols supported: ARP, ICMP, IGMP, UDP/IP, DHCP EIBnet/IP according to Konnex specifications: Core, Routing, Tunneling, Device Management can be used as line/area coupler with RJ45 connection for Ethernet/IP networks with programming button and red programming LED with green operation LED and yellow data traffic LED with green, yellow and red LEDs for indicating the IP communication line connection via connecting terminal operating voltage connection via connecting terminal
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
for addressing, programming and diagnosis of KNX/EIB components with interface RS 232 (9pole socket D-subminiature) with programming button and red programming LED with green operation LED and yellow status LED bus connection via connecting terminal
light grey
IP router RMD
* 7501 00 16
1
USB data interface RMD
can be used as line/area coupler or line amplifier with programming button With green operation LED, red programming LED and red diagnosis LED with 2 yellow data traffic LEDs for higher and lower ranking line line connection via connecting terminal
light grey
7501 00 13
For connection of a PC for addressing, programming and diagnosis of instabus components and for visualisation.
Couplers light grey
light grey
Operating voltage over bus 21 - 32 V=; Data transfer rate max. 9,6 kBaud; Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C; Connection cable length max. 15 m; RMD 2 modules; Dimensions (W x H x D) 36 x 90 x 651 mm; Assembling height as from DIN rail 59 mm
decouples line from voltage supply with integral reset switch with red reset LED with pressure contact on data rail
NEW
Order no.
7501 00 12
1
Operating voltage over bus 21 - 32 V=; Data transfer rate max. 9,6 kBaud; Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C; USB cable length max. 5 m; RMD 2 modules; Dimensions (W x H x D) 36 x 90 x 70 mm; Assembling height as from DIN rail 63 mm For connection of a PC for addressing, programming and diagnosis of instabus components and for visualisation. for addressing, programming and diagnosis of KNX/EIB components programmable with ETS3 from V1.0 system requirements: Windows 98, 98 SE, ME, 2000, XP and Vista with B-type USB socket for data traffic (voltage supply via PC) compatible with USB 1.1/2.0 transmission protocols with flash-controller technology
USB data interface flush-mounted black
7504 00 04
1
Operating voltage over bus 21 - 32 V=; Data transfer rate max. 9,6 kBaud; USB cable length max. 5 m; Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C Centre plate order no. 1033 .., 1034 .., 1035 .., 1040 .. Central plate order no. 1458 ..
for addressing, programming and diagnosis of KNX/EIB components programmable with ETS3 from V1.0 system requirements: Windows 98, 98 SE, ME, 2000, XP and Vista with B-type USB socket for data traffic (voltage supply via PC) compatible with USB 1.1/2.0 transmission protocols with flash-controller technology without spreader claws
375
INSTABUS KNX/EIB Order no.
Packing unit
Accessories
Order no.
Packing unit
Push-button BCU 2gang
Data rails
7514 20 00
Data rail with connector length 214 mm (12 modules)
1
7500 00 08
1
Operating voltage over bus 21 - 32 V=; Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C; Installation depth 32 mm Use rockers from flush-mounted ranges. Protective cover see module inserts order no. 1847
For DIN rail 35 x 7.5 mm to DIN EN 60715 self-adhesive with 4 plug-in terminals 4pole
Data rail cover light grey, length 240 mm (13.5 modules)
5
7500 00 04
divisible into 0,5 Module steps
for switch, push-button, dimmer and shutter functions with integral bus coupling unit with programming button with red programming LED and 2 red status LEDs bus connection via connecting terminal
Group push-button BCU‘s Group push-button BCU 1gang
to protect against dirt contamination and interference voltage
Protective covers Protective cover black
1
Use rockers from flush-mounted ranges. 7500 00 07
10
Protective cover see module inserts order no. 1847
50
for switch, push-button, dimmer and shutter functions with integral bus coupling unit with programming button with red programming LED and red status LED with neutral-position bus connection via connecting terminal
for bus coupling units flush-mounted
Connecting terminals Connecting terminal red/black
7514 11 00 Operating voltage over bus 21 - 32 V=; Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C; Installation depth 32 mm
7500 00 05
Number of conductors 2 x 4; Conductor diameter 0,6 - 0,8 mm; Dimensions (L x W x H) 10,2 x 11,5 x 10 mm
Group push-button BCU 2gang 7514 21 00 Operating voltage over bus 21 - 32 V=; Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C; Installation depth 32 mm
2pole for the bus connection of the units can be used as branch terminal polarization red + black with plug-in terminals
Use rockers from flush-mounted ranges. Protective cover see module inserts order no. 1847
Push-buttons BCU / group push-buttons BCU Push-button BCU‘s Push-button BCU 1gang 7514 10 00
1
Operating voltage over bus 21 - 32 V=; Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C; Installation depth 32 mm Use rockers from flush-mounted ranges. Protective cover see module inserts order no. 1847
for switch and push-button functions with integral bus coupling unit with programming button with red programming LED and red status LED bus connection via connecting terminal
1
for switch, push-button, dimmer and shutter functions with integral bus coupling unit with programming button with red programming LED and 2 red status LEDs with neutral-position bus connection via connecting terminal
Bus coupling units Bus coupling unit flush-mounted 7504 00 01
1
Operating voltage over bus 21 - 32 V=; Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C; Installation depth 23 mm Protective cover see accessories order no. 7500 00 07
as interface between INSTABUS EIB user modules and bus line with programming button and red programming LED bus connection via connecting terminal without spreader claws 376
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
INSTABUS KNX/EIB Order no.
Packing unit
1
Operating voltage over bus 21 - 32 V=; Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C; Installation depth 15 mm
Sensor insert 7594 10 01
for e.g. temperature sensor PT100 without spreader claws with plug-in terminals
Not suitable for other user modules!
Protective cover see accessories order no. 7500 00 07 Data interface FTP 1.2 order no. 7506 01 .. IR gateway order no. 7566 03 ..
binary inputs Binary input 4gang 230 V AC RMD light grey
as interface between data interface FTP 1.2 and IR gateway with bus line with programming button and red programming LED bus connection via connecting terminal without spreader claws
Bus coupling unit flush-mounted plus 1
Operating voltage over bus 21 - 32 V=; Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C; Installation depth 20 mm Protective cover see accessories order no. 7500 00 07 Bluetooth gateway order no. 7566 01 .. B.IQ push-button with room thermostat order no. 7566 35 .., 7566 45 .., 7566 55 .. B.IQ IR push-button with room thermostat order no. 7566 36 .., 7566 46 .., 7566 56 ..
for B.IQ push-buttons with room thermostat and display or Bluetooth gateways with programming button and red programming LED bus connection via connecting terminal without spreader claws
Bus coupling unit RMD/logic controller RMD light grey
7502 00 01
1
Operating voltage over bus 21 - 32 V=; Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C; RMD 1 modules; Dimensions (W x H x D) 17,5 x 90 x 65 mm; Assembling height as from DIN rail 58 mm Logic controller applications are to be found in the ETS under: Product family: Controller, Product type: Controller, (order no. 7571 00 01) for order no. 7500 00 08
with programming button and red programming LED with pressure contact on data rail
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
10
Central plate order no. 7594 ..
For special applications with data interface FTP 1.2 order no. 7506 01 .. and IR gateway order no. 7566 02 ..
7504 00 03
Packing unit
Sensor insert
Bus coupling unit flush-mounted version 2 7504 00 02
Order no.
7521 40 08
1
Operating voltage over bus 21 - 32 V=; Signal voltage 110 - 230 V~; Signal frequency 50/60 Hz; Signal current 7 mA; Signal duration 100 % ED; Neon lamp current max. 2 mA; Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C; Input cable length max. 100 m; RMD 2 modules; Dimensions (W x H x D) 36 x 90 x 65 mm; Assembling height as from DIN rail 58 mm Detects the presence of or change in a voltage level at its inputs and, depending on the chosen application, sends telegrams over the instabus KNX/EIB. with 4 independent binary inputs with separate neutral conductor suitable for different external conductors with programming button and red programming LED with 4 yellow status LEDs for input states bus connection via connecting terminal with screw terminals
Binary input 8gang 230 V AC RMD light grey
7521 80 01
1
Operating voltage over bus 21 - 32 V=; Signal voltage 110 - 230 V~; Signal frequency 50/60 Hz; Signal current 7 mA; Signal duration 100 % ED; Neon lamp current max. 2 mA; Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C; Input cable length max. 100 m; RMD 4 modules; Dimensions (W x H x D) 72 x 90 x 65 mm; Assembling height as from DIN rail 58 mm Detects the presence of or change in a voltage level at its inputs and, depending on the chosen application, sends telegrams over the instabus KNX/EIB. with 8 independent binary inputs with separate neutral conductor suitable for different external conductors with programming button and red programming LED with 8 yellow status LEDs for input states bus connection via connecting terminal with screw terminals
377
INSTABUS KNX/EIB Order no.
Packing unit
Binary input 6gang 24 V AC/DC RMD light grey
7521 60 01
1
Operating voltage over bus 21 - 32 V=; Signal voltage 8 - 64 V~/=; Signal current 9 mA; Signal duration 100 % ED; Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C; Input cable length max. 100 m; RMD 2 modules; Dimensions (W x H x D) 36 x 90 x 65 mm; Assembling height as from DIN rail 58 mm
Order no.
Packing unit
Universal interface 4gang comfort flushmounted light grey
7564 40 01
1
Operating voltage over bus 21 - 32 V=; Input scanning voltage per channel 20 V; Output current for channels 1 and 2, each max. 0,8 mA; Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C; Cable length approx. 250 mm; Extendable cable length max. 5 m; Dimensions (L x W x H) 43 x 28,5 x 15,5
External power supply 24 V necessary! Detects the presence of or change in a voltage level at its inputs and, depending on the chosen application, sends telegrams over the instabus KNX/EIB. with 6 independent binary inputs with 2 GND connections with programming button and red programming LED with 6 yellow status LEDs for input states bus connection via connecting terminal with screw terminals
Universal interfaces Universal interface 2gang comfort flushmounted light grey
7564 20 01
1
Operating voltage over bus 21 - 32 V=; Input scanning voltage per channel 20 V; Output current per channel max. 0,8 mA; Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C; Cable length approx. 250 mm; Extendable cable length max. 5 m; Dimensions (L x W x H) 43 x 28,5 x 15,5 mm
with 2 independent binary inputs for potential-free contacts 2 binary inputs, 2 outputs or 1 binary input and 1 output parameterisable outputs for LED e.g. as status LED for switch, push-button, dimmer and shutter functions value transmitter for dimming, position, brightness and temperature values 1 and 2 byte functions: impulse counter or switch counter for input 1 for impulse counter function, input 2 is required for the synchronising signal extension unit for light scene push-button cyclic transmission can also be started via switching object single and two push-button operation parameterisable one push-button operation for switching, pushing, shutters and dimming shutter operation concept short-long-short and long-short parameterisable objects for locking individual inputs and outputs objects: switching, forced guidance and feedback of respective output object for logical linking (e.g. OR / AND / AND with return) with programming button and red programming LED bus connection via connecting terminal
378
with 4 independent binary inputs for potential-free contacts 4 binary inputs or 2-3 binary inputs and 1-2 outputs parameterisable outputs for LED e.g. as status LED for switch, push-button, dimmer and shutter functions value transmitter for dimming, position, brightness and temperature values 1 and 2 byte functions: impulse counter or switch counter for inputs 1 and 2 for impulse counter function, inputs 3 and 4 are required for the synchronising signal extension unit for light scene push-button cyclic transmission can also be started via switching object single and two push-button operation parameterisable one push-button operation for switching, pushing, shutters and dimming shutter operation concept short-long-short and long-short parameterisable objects for locking individual inputs and outputs objects: switching, forced guidance and feedback of respective output object for logical linking (e.g. OR / AND / AND with return) with programming button and red programming LED bus connection via connecting terminal
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
INSTABUS KNX/EIB Order no.
Packing unit
7564 80 01
1
Operating voltage over bus 21 - 32 V=; Input scanning voltage per channel 20 V; Output current per channel max. 0,8 mA; Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C; Max. cable length 10 m; Dimensions (W x H x D) 44 x 48 x 32 mm with 8 independent binary inputs for potential-free contacts 8 binary inputs, 8 outputs or 4 binary inputs and 4 outputs parameterisable outputs for LED e.g. as status LED with programming button and red programming LED for switch, push-button, dimmer and shutter functions dimming / position value transmitter 1 byte extension unit for light scene push-button cyclic transmission can also be started via switching object single and two push-button operation parameterisable one push-button operation for switching, pushing and dimming shutter operation concept short-long-short and long-short parameterisable objects: switching, positive operation, feedback of respective output (only for application 4-input/4-output) object for audio/video control second operating level by object or 3-button handle (only 8-input application) short-circuit and overload proof (electronic fuse) protected against polarity reversal bus connection via connecting terminal with screw terminals
timers Week timer switches Week timer 2gang RMD light grey
7521 20 06
1
Operating voltage over bus 21 - 32 V=; Memory capacity 36; Power reserve approx. 6 years; Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C; RMD 2 modules; Dimensions (W x H x D) 35,8 x 86 x 65 mm; Assembling height as from DIN rail 60 mm
date and time factory pre-programmed with automatic summer/winter time change-over with holiday switching bus connection via connecting terminal with screw terminals display guide German / English
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
Packing unit
Year timer switches
Universal interface 8gang comfort flushmounted black
Order no.
Year timer switch 4gang RMD light grey
7521 40 07
1
Operating voltage over bus 21 - 32 V=; Auxiliary voltage 230 V~; Frequency 50/60 Hz; Memory capacity 324; Weekly programmes 9; Power reserve approx. 1,5 years; Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C; RMD 6 modules; Dimensions (W x H x D) 105 x 86 x 66 mm; Assembling height as from DIN rail 60 mm Programming set for OBELISK order no. 7590 00 48 OBELISK memory card order no. 7590 00 49
with programming button with red programming LED programming at timer or using OBELISK with interface for OBELISK memory card with day, weeks and year programme temporary/permanent manual operation with random programme with automatic summer/winter time change-over with emergency power supply coin cell battery 3 V type: CR 2450 bus connection via connecting terminal with screw terminals German/English/French/Dutch/Italian/Portuguese/ Hungarian/Polish with German display text
Year timer switch 4gang DCF RMD light grey
7521 40 06
1
Operating voltage over bus 21 - 32 V=; Auxiliary voltage 230 V~; Frequency 50/60 Hz; Memory capacity 324; Weekly programmes 9; Power reserve approx. 1,5 years; Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C; RMD 6 modules; Dimensions (W x H x D) 105 x 86 x 66 mm; Assembling height as from DIN rail 60 mm DCF receiver order no. 7590 00 47 Programming set for OBELISK order no. 7590 00 48 OBELISK memory card order no. 7590 00 49
with programming button with red programming LED programming at timer or using OBELISK with interface for OBELISK memory card with day, weeks and year programme temporary/permanent manual operation with random programme with automatic summer/winter time change-over with emergency power supply coin cell battery 3 V type: CR 2450 with connection for DCF receiver bus connection via connecting terminal with screw terminals German/English/French/Dutch/Italian/Portuguese/ Hungarian Swedish/Norwegian/Danish/Finnish/Polish
379
INSTABUS KNX/EIB Order no.
Packing unit
7590 00 49
1
Dimensions (W x H x D) 28 x 60 x 7 mm
Accessories DCF receiver 7590 00 47
1
Max. cable length 200 m; Operating temperature -20 - +70 °C; Dimensions (W x H x D) 64 x 98 x 34 mm
IP54 with radio receiver for the DCF77 signal 4gang DCF for year timer with wall bracket and screw fitting
Programming set for OBELISK 1
For year timer switch 4gang DCF RMD order no. 7521 40 06 For year timer switch 4gang RMD order no. 7521 40 07 For OBELISK memory card order no. 7590 00 49
energy saving by means of presence and brightness-dependent switching of light, heating etc. with 2 output channels for which the parameters are to be set independently with 2 operating modes presence detector or ceiling controller with teach object for response brightness with potentiometers for fine adjustment of the response brightness, sensitivity and delay time can only be used as individual unit with push-on cover to limit the detection field
7526 40 01
1
Recommended mounting height approx. 2,5 m; Detection field on floor approx. diameter 8 m; Detection field at desk height approx. diameter 5 m; Detection angle 360 °; Detection levels 6; Sectors 80; Switching segments 320; Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C; Dimensions (diameter x assembling height) 103 x 42 mm When movement of a person is detected a parameter defined data telegram is sent.
Time transmitter RMD 1
Operating voltage over bus 21 - 32 V=; Power reserve approx. 10 years (lithium battery); RMD 2 modules; Dimensions (W x H x D) 36 x 90 x 66 mm; Assembling height as from DIN rail 60 mm DCF receiver order no. 7590 00 47
transmits time and date to the bus either Quartz operation or radio synchronisation by DCF77 time signal time zone and summer/winter time change-over parameterisable flexibly automatic summer/winter time change-over can be switched off suitable for shade systems with sun level calculation with red status LED for DCF77 reception
380
For bus coupling unit flush-mounted order no. 7504 00 01
polar white
Time transmitter 7591 00 02
1
Presence detector comfort
with programming adapter with OBELISK memory card with PC software on CD-ROM system requirements: min. 486 DX processor; Windows 95/98/2000/XP German/English/French/Dutch/Italian/Portuguese/ Hungarian Swedish/Norwegian/Danish/Finnish
light grey
7526 20 01
Recommended mounting height approx. 2,5 m; Detection field on floor approx. diameter 8 m; Detection field at desk height approx. diameter 5 m; Detection angle 360 °; Detection levels 6; Sectors 80; Switching segments 320; Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C; Dimensions (diameter x assembling height) 103 x 42 mm When movement of a person is detected a parameter defined data telegram is sent.
Attention! Only for connection to year timer switch 4gang DCF order no. 7521 40 06 and time transmitter RMD order no. 7591 00 02.
7590 00 48
Presence detector standard polar white
For year timer switch 4gang RMD order no. 7521 40 06 For year timer switch 4gang DCF RMD order no. 7521 40 07
polar white
Packing unit
Presence detectors
OBELISK memory card light grey
Order no.
For bus coupling unit flush-mounted order no. 7504 00 01
energy saving by means of presence and brightness-dependent switching of light, heating etc. with 4 output channels for which parameters are set independently, max. 2 per operating mode with 3 modes - presence detector, ceiling controller and message mode with teach object for response brightness with potentiometers for fine adjustment of the response brightness, sensitivity and delay time can be used as a single unit, main device or extension unit with push-on cover to limit the detection field
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
INSTABUS KNX/EIB Order no.
Packing unit
Built-on installation housings
1076 09
Brightness and temperature sensor surfacemounted 1
Dimensions (diameter x H) 103 x 45 mm
entry bottom and at each side possible
Brightness sensors
7549 20 01
1
IP54
Brightness sensor 3gang RMD 7521 30 06
1
Operating voltage over bus 21 - 32 V=; Brightness measuring range 1 - 100 Lux; Brightness measuring range 0,1 - 20 kLux; Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C; RMD 2 modules; Sensor dimensions (W x H x D) 27 x 86 x 38 mm; RMD module dimensions (W x H x D) 35,8 x 86 x 66 mm; Assembling height as from DIN rail 60 mm
with integral bus coupling unit with brightness sensor surface-mounted IP65 with programming button and red programming LED bus connection via connecting terminal with screw terminals
Brightness sensor 1gang built-in light grey
polar white
Operating voltage over bus 21 - 32 V=; Brightness measuring range, linear 1 Lux- 100 kLux; Temperature measurement range, linear -25 - +55 °C; Operating temperature -25 - +55 °C; Dimensions (W x H x D) 72 x 110 x 54 mm
for order no. 1701 10, 1701 11, 7526 20 01, 7526 40 01
light grey
Packing unit
Brightness sensor/temperature sensor
Surface-mounted housing for BLC and KNX/EIB presence detectors polar white
Order no.
7543 10 01
1
Operating voltage over bus 21 - 32 V=; Brightness measuring range 0-2 kLux; Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C; Sensor cable length (not extendable) 2 m; Sensor dimensions (W x H x D) 26 x 25 x 77,4 mm; Dimensions, built-in device (L x W x H) 275 x 42 x 28 mm
with brightness sensor built-in, e.g. for intermediate ceiling constant light control only possible in conjunction with dim actuators or control units with programming button and red programming LED bus connection via connecting terminal
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
as brightness sensor 3gang and temperature sensor 2gang with integral bus coupling unit bus connection via connecting terminal with screw terminals
Analogue inputs Analogue input 4gang RMD light grey
7541 40 04
1
Operating voltage over bus 21 - 32 V=; Auxiliary voltage 24 V~; Frequency 50/60 Hz; Inputs voltage 0-1; 0-10 V; Voltage input impedance 18 kΩ; Inputs current 0-20; 4-20 mA; Current input impedance 100 Ω; Sensor output voltage 24 V =; Sensor output current max. 100 mA; Current consumption max. 170 mA; Limiting values per channel 2; Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C; RMD 4 modules; Dimensions (W x H x D) 72 x 90 x 70 mm; Assembling height as from DIN rail 63 mm The analogue input is for the registration and treatment of independent analogue sensor signals. Depending on the input signal, limiting value messages can be transmitted via KNX/EIB. Extendable with an analogue input module 4gang order no. 7542 40 04 Needed for operation a power supply of 24 V AC RMD order nr. 7591 00 01
Input signals to DIN IEC 381-1, -2 inputs parameters can be set individually input 4-20 mA will be controlled for wire break cyclic transmission or transmission at absolute input modification settable with system interface for analogue input module with programming button and red programming LED with green/red status LED (operation/fault) for wind, rain, brightness, temperature, twilight as well as humidity and temperature sensor surface mounted for active sensors bus connection via connecting terminal with screw terminals
381
INSTABUS KNX/EIB Order no.
Packing unit
Analogue input modules 7542 40 04
1
Weather station aluminium
* 7549 00 01
Operating voltage over bus 21 - 32 V=; Auxiliary voltage 24 V~; Frequency 50/60 Hz; Inputs voltage 0-1; 0-10 V; Voltage input impedance 18 kΩ; Inputs current 0-20; 4-20 mA; Current input impedance 100 Ω; Sensor output voltage 24 V =; Sensor output current max. 100 mA; Current consumption max. 170 mA; Limiting values per channel 2; Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C; RMD 4 modules; Dimensions (W x H x D) 72 x 90 x 70 mm; Assembling height as from DIN rail 63 mm
Operating voltage over bus 21 - 32 V=; Rated current (heating incl.) 300 mA; Sensor head rotatable +/-90 °; Brightness measuring range linear (3 times) 0 - 110 kLux (east, south, west); Twilight measuring range linear 0 - 674 Lux; Spectral area approx. 700 - 1050 nm; Wind speed measuring range 1 - 40 m/s; Precipitation (Yes/No) 1 Bit; Temperature measurement range, linear -20 - +55 °C; Operating temperature -20 - +55 °C
Extension for weather station 4gang order no. 7541 40 03 Extension for analogue input 4gang order nr. 7541 40 04
To record wind, precipitation, temperature and brightness, and to process the signals.
Input signals to DIN IEC 381-1, -2 input 4-20 mA will be controlled for wire break with green/red status LED (operation/fault) for wind, rain, brightness, temperature, twilight as well as humidity and temperature sensor surface mounted for active sensors with screw terminals
382
Packing unit
Weather stations NEW
Analogue input module 4gang RMD light grey
Order no.
1
Ensure correct orientation and free-standing installation.
Corner mounting piece order no. 0149 09 Mast adapter order no.: 0154 Condensation detection and heating require power supply 24 V AC RMD order no. 7591 00 01
IP44 with wind, precipitation, twilight, temperature and 3 brightness sensors brightness measuring is possible in 3 directions with integral bus coupling unit with magnet for programming reed contact and red programming LED with heater element for winter operation for wall mounting delay times and hysteresis adjustable with logic gates for linking the limiting value results with blocking modules for filtering input objects depending on blocking objects software protected operation supervision for wind sensor bus connection via connecting terminal with plug-in terminals for power supply
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
INSTABUS KNX/EIB Order no.
Packing unit
7541 40 03
Packing unit
Accessories
Weather station 4gang comfort RMD light grey
Order no.
1
Operating voltage over bus 21 - 32 V=; Auxiliary voltage 24 V~; Frequency 50/60 Hz; Inputs voltage 0-1, 0-10 V; Voltage input impedance 18 kΩ; Inputs current 0-20, 4-20 mA; Current input impedance 100 Ω; Sensor output voltage 24 V =; Sensor output current max. 100 mA; Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C; RMD 4 modules; Dimensions (W x H x D) 72 x 90 x 70 mm; Assembling height as from DIN rail 63 mm; Limiting values per channel 2 To record wind, precipitation, temperature and brightness, and to process the signals. Extendable with an analogue input module 4gang order no. 7542 40 04 Needed for operation a power supply of 24 V AC RMD order nr. 7591 00 01
Input signals to DIN IEC 381-1, -2 inputs parameters can be set individually input 4-20 mA will be controlled for wire break with programming button and red programming LED with green/red status LED (operation/fault) with logic gates for linking the limiting value results delay times and hysteresis adjustable for active and passive sensors for wind, rain, brightness, temperature, twilight as well as humidity and temperature sensor surface mounted processing of the DCF77 time signal of combi sensor for input in KNX/EIB conclusiveness test and cyclic supervision of the combi weather sensor signals software protected operation supervision for wind sensor bus connection via connecting terminal with screw terminals
Power supply 24 V AC RMD light grey
7591 00 01
1
Operating voltage 230 V~; Frequency 50/60 Hz; Output voltage 24 V~; Output current max. 1 A; Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C; RMD 4 modules; Dimensions (W x H x D) 72 x 90 x 70 mm; Assembling height as from DIN rail 63 mm For weather station 4gang comfort RMD order no. 7541 40 03 For analogue input 4gang RMD order no. 7541 40 04 For analogue actuator 4gang RMD order no. 7551 40 01 For surface-mounted wind sensor order no. 7590 00 50 For surface-mounted rain sensor order no. 7590 00 52 For surface-mounted combination weather sensor order no. 7590 00 57
to power supply for the heating on surface-mounted wind sensor and surface-mounted rain sensor short-circuit-proof and overload proof (thermal protection) with screw terminals
Mast adapter black
7590 00 46
1
Mast diameter 42 mm; Dimensions (W x H x D) 70 x 64 x 60 mm For RolloTec wind sensor order no. 0172 01 For surface-mounted wind sensor order no. 7590 00 50 For surface-mounted rain sensor order no. 7590 00 52 For surface-mounted brightness sensor order no. 7590 00 53 For surface-mounted temperature sensor order no. 7590 00 54 For surface-mounted twilight sensor order no. 7590 00 55
for installation of max. 4 surface-mounted sensors
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
383
INSTABUS KNX/EIB Order no.
Packing unit
Sensors
Order no.
Packing unit
Wind sensor surface-mounted white
Combi weather sensor surface-mounted black
7590 00 57
1
Heating voltage via weather station 24 V~; Rated current (heating incl.) 600 mA; Brightness measuring range linear (3 times) 0 - 100 kLux (east, south, west); Twilight measuring range linear 0 - 250 Lux; Spectral area approx. 700 - 1050 nm; Wind speed measuring range 1 - 40 m/s; Precipitation (Yes/No) 1 Bit; Switch on delay approx. 3 little precipitation parts; Precipitation switch off delay approx. 2 min.; Output load voltage > 1,5 kΩ; Operating temperature -40 - +60 °C; Conductor cross-section min. 6 x 0,25 mm²; Cable length 10 m; Max. cable length 50 m; Assembly angle length 150 mm; Dimensions (diameter x H) 130 x 200 mm Ensure correct orientation and free-standing installation. For registration of wind, rainfall, sun and twilight. For weather station 4gang comfort RMD order no. 7541 40 03 Heatable with power supply 24 V AC RMD order nr. 7591 00 01
IP55 for the connection to the weather station 4gang comfort RMD with voltage supply with wind, precipitation, twilight and 3 brightness sensors brightness measuring is possible in 3 directions with radio receiver for the DCF77 signal DCF77 antenna 45° rotatable with magnet and initialisation reed contact with operation/status buzzer conclusiveness test and cyclic supervision of the sensor signals with weather station comfort with PTC heater element for winter operation with mounting angle and pipe clamp for wall and mast assembly confectioned with 6-core wire and plug-in terminals
7590 00 50
1
Operating voltage 24 V=; Rated current (excluding heater) 12 mA; Wind speed measuring range 0,7 - 40 m/s; Output load voltage > 1,5 kΩ; Operating temperature -25 - +60 °C; Cable length 3 m; Conductor cross-section min. 6 x 0,25 mm²; Max. cable length 100 m; Dimensions (diameter x H) 134 x 160 mm; Wall boom length 150 mm To detect wind speed. For analogue input 4gang RMD order no. 7541 40 04 For weather station 4gang comfort RMD order no. 7541 40 03 For analogue input module 4gang RMD order no. 7542 40 04 Mast adapter order no.: 7590 00 46 Heatable with power supply 24 V AC RMD order nr. 7591 00 01
IP65 pre-assembled, with cable passive sensor converts the measured values into 0-10 V signals with PTC heater element for winter operation
Rain sensor surface-mounted grey
7590 00 52
1
Operating voltage 24 V=; Rated current (excluding heater) 10 mA; Output load voltage > 1 kΩ; Operating temperature -30 - +70 °C; Cable length 3 m; Conductor cross-section min. 5 x 0,25 mm²; Max. cable length 100 m; Mast diameter max. 62 mm; Dimensions, sensor (L x W x H) 60 x 82 x 17 mm; Dimensions, mounting angle (W x H x D) 90 x 91 x 78 mm To detect precipitation. For analogue input 4gang RMD order no. 7541 40 04 For weather station 4gang comfort RMD order no. 7541 40 03 For analogue input module 4gang RMD order no. 7542 40 04 Mast adapter order no.: 7590 00 46 Heatable with power supply 24 V AC RMD order nr. 7591 00 01
IP65 pre-assembled, with cable passive sensor converts the measured values into 0 and 10 V signals with PTC heater element for drying with stainless steel mounting bracket approx. 70° with pipe clamp for mast fixing
384
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
INSTABUS KNX/EIB Order no.
Packing unit
Brightness sensor surface-mounted grey
7590 00 53
To detect ambient brightness. For analogue input 4gang RMD order no. 7541 40 04 For weather station 4gang comfort RMD order no. 7541 40 03 For analogue input module 4gang RMD order no. 7542 40 04 Mast adapter order no.: 7590 00 46
IP65 passive sensor converts the measured values into 0-10 V signals with threaded joint dia. 12.5 mm (PG 7) with screw terminals
Twilight sensor surface-mounted 7590 00 55
1
Operating voltage 24 V=; Rated current 5 mA; Brightness measuring range, linear 0 - 255 Lux; Output load voltage > 1 kΩ; Operating temperature -30 - +70 °C; Conductor cross-section min. 3 x 0,25 mm²; Max. cable length 100 m; Dimensions (W x H x D) 58 x 64 x 35 mm To detect ambient brightness. For analogue input 4gang RMD order no. 7541 40 04 For weather station 4gang comfort RMD order no. 7541 40 03 For analogue input module 4gang RMD order no. 7542 40 04 Mast adapter order no.: 7590 00 46
IP65 passive sensor converts the measured values into 0-10 V signals with threaded joint dia. 12.5 mm (PG 7) with screw terminals
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
Packing unit
Temperature sensor surface-mounted 1
Operating voltage 24 V=; Rated current 5 mA; Brightness measuring range, linear 0 - 60000 Lux; Output load voltage > 1 kΩ; Operating temperature -30 - +70 °C; Conductor cross-section min. 3 x 0,25 mm²; Max. cable length 100 m; Dimensions (W x H x D) 58 x 64 x 35 mm
grey
Order no.
grey
7590 00 54
1
Operating voltage 24 V=; Rated current approx. 3 mA; Temperature measurement range, linear -30 - +70 °C; Output load voltage > 1 kΩ; Operating temperature -30 - +70 °C; Conductor cross-section min. 3 x 0,25 mm²; Max. cable length 100 m; Dimensions (W x H x D) 58 x 64 x 35 mm To detect ambient temperature. For analogue input 4gang RMD order no. 7541 40 04 For weather station 4gang comfort RMD order no. 7541 40 03 For analogue input module 4gang RMD order no. 7542 40 04 Mast adapter order no.: 7590 00 46
IP65 passive sensor converts the measured values into 0-10 V signals with threaded joint dia. 12.5 mm (PG 7) with screw terminals
Switch actuators Switch actuator 1gang 16 A flush-mounted light grey
7534 10 01
1
Operating voltage over bus 21 - 32 V=; Max. switching capacity for 230 V, 50/60 Hz; 230 V incandescent lamps 2500 W; 230 V halogen lamps 2200 W; Electronic transformers 1000 W; Conventional transformers 1000 VA; Capacitive load 10 A, max. 105 µF; Making current max. 400 A / 20 ms; Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C; Cable length bus+inputs approx. 33 cm, extendable to max. 5 m; Load cable length approx. 20 cm , 2 x 1,5 mm²; Centre hole diameter 7,5 mm; Dimensions (diameter x H) 53 x 28 mm
with potential-free NO contact as well as NC contact parameterisable with 2 independent binary inputs for potential-free contacts binary input functions: Switching, dimming, shutter control and value transmitter with programming button and red programming LED programmable with ETS2 V1.3 and higher built into flush-mounted or waterproof junction box pre-assembled, with cables
385
INSTABUS KNX/EIB Order no.
Packing unit
Switch actuator 2gang 6 A NO flush-mounted light grey
7534 20 01
1
Operating voltage over bus 21 - 32 V=; Max. switching capacity for 230 V, 50/60 Hz; 230 V incandescent and halogen lamps 1200 W; Electronic transformers 500 W; Conventional transformers 500 VA; Capacitive load 6 A, max. 14 µF; Making current max. 120 A / 20 ms; Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C; Cable length bus+inputs approx. 33 cm, extendable to max. 5 m; Load cable length approx. 20 cm , 3 x 1,5 mm²; Dimensions (diameter x H) 53 x 28 mm
for switching e.g. 2 independent loads with 2 potential-free NO contacts on common entry, as well as NC contact can be parameter with 2 independent binary inputs for potential-free contacts binary input functions: Switching, dimming, shutter control and value transmitter with programming button and red programming LED programmable with ETS2 V1.3 and higher built into flush-mounted or waterproof junction box pre-assembled, with cables NEW
Switch actuator 2gang 16 A NO contact, manual, status, RMD light grey
* 7531 20 08
1
Operating voltage over bus 21 - 32 V=; Making current max. 400 A / 150 µs; Max. switching capacity for 230 V~; 230 V incandescent and halogen lamps 2500 W; Conventional transformers 1200 W; Capacitive load 16 A, max. 140 µF; Electronic transformers 1500 W; Fluorescent lamps -; uncompensated 2500 W; parallel compensated 1300 W / 140 µF; Lead-lag circuit 2300 W / 140 µF; Osram electronic ballast -; QTP 2x58W 11 units; QT-FH 2x28W 17 units; QT-FQ 2x54W 11 units; Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C; RMD 4 modules; Dimensions (W x H x D) 72 x 90 x 70 mm; Assembling height as from DIN rail 63 mm
Order no.
Packing unit
Switch actuator 4gang 16 A NO manual status RMD light grey
7531 40 15
1
Operating voltage over bus 21 - 32 V=; Making current max. 400 A / 150 µs; Max. switching capacity for 230 V~; 230 V incandescent and halogen lamps 2500 W; Conventional transformers 1200 W; Capacitive load 16 A, max. 140 µF; Electronic transformers 1500 W; Fluorescent lamps -; uncompensated 2500 W; parallel compensated 1300 W / 140 µF; Lead-lag circuit 2300 W / 140 µF; Osram electronic ballast -; QTP 2x58W 11 units; QT-FH 2x28W 17 units; QT-FQ 2x54W 11 units; Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C; RMD 4 modules; Dimensions (W x H x D) 72 x 90 x 70 mm; Assembling height as from DIN rail 63 mm Optimised for commissioning with ETS3 from version D patch A. for switching e.g. 4 independent loads suitable to switch different external conductors with potential-free normally-open contacts as well as normally-closed contact can be parameterised with manual selection switch per channel for on/off and status indication manual operation also possible without bus e.g. on building site with programming button and red programming LED bus connection via connecting terminal with screw terminals
Optimised for commissioning with ETS3 from version D patch A. for switching e.g. 2 independent loads suitable to switch different external conductors with potential-free normally-open contacts as well as normally-closed contact can be parameterised with manual selection switch per channel for on/off and status indication manual operation also possible without bus e.g. on building site with programming button and red programming LED bus connection via connecting terminal with screw terminals
386
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
INSTABUS KNX/EIB Order no.
Packing unit
Order no.
Packing unit
Switch actuator 4gang 16 A C load NO manual status RMD with current detection
Switch actuator 8gang 16 A NO manual status RMD
light grey
light grey
7531 40 16
1
7531 80 04
1
Operating voltage over bus 21 - 32 V=; Making current max. 600 A / 150 µs; Max. switching capacity for 230 V~; 230 V incandescent and halogen lamps 3680 W; Conventional transformers 2000 W; Capacitive load 16 A, max. 200 µF; Electronic transformers 2500 W; Fluorescent lamps -; uncompensated 3680 W; Compensated 2500 W / 200 µF; Lead-lag circuit 2500 W / 200 µF; Osram electronic ballast -; QTP 2x58W 17 units; QT-FH 2x28W 25 units; QT-FQ 2x54W 17 units; Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C; RMD 4 modules; Dimensions (W x H x D) 72 x 90 x 70 mm; Assembling height as from DIN rail 63 mm
Operating voltage over bus 21 - 32 V=; Making current max. 400 A / 150 µs; Max. switching capacity for 230 V~; 230 V incandescent and halogen lamps 2500 W; Electronic transformers 1500 W; Conventional transformers 1200 W; Fluorescent lamps -; uncompensated 2500 W; parallel compensated 1300 W / 140 µF; Lead-lag circuit 2300 W / 140 µF; Capacitive load 16 A, max. 140 µF; Osram electronic ballast -; QTP 2x58W 11 units; QT-FH 2x28W 17 units; QT-FQ 2x54W 11 units; Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C; RMD 8 modules; Dimensions (W x H x D) 144 x 90 x 70 mm; Assembling height as from DIN rail 63 mm
Optimised for commissioning with ETS3 from version D patch A.
Optimised for commissioning with ETS3 from version D patch A.
for switching e.g. 4 independent capacitive loads suitable to switch different external conductors with potential-free normally-open contacts as well as normally-closed contact can be parameterised with manual selection switch per channel for on/off and status indication manual operation also possible without bus e.g. on building site with programming button and red programming LED bus connection via connecting terminal with screw terminals
for switching e.g. 8 independent loads suitable to switch different external conductors with potential-free normally-open contacts as well as normally-closed contact can be parameterised with manual selection switch per channel for on/off and status indication manual operation also possible without bus e.g. on building site with programming button and red programming LED bus connection via connecting terminal with screw terminals
Switch actuator 6gang 6 A NO RMD light grey
7531 60 02
1
Operating voltage over bus 21 - 32 V=; Max. switching capacity for 230 V~; 230 V incandescent lamps 1000 W; Fluorescent lamps -; uncompensated at cos φ 0.5 = 500 W; parallel compensated at cos φ 1 = 108 W / 14 µF; Duo circuit at cos φ 1 = 2 x 500 W; with Siemens EVG 15 x 18, 15 x 36, 10 x 58 W; Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C; RMD 4 modules; Dimensions (W x H x D) 72 x 90 x 65 mm; Assembling height as from DIN rail 58 mm
for switching e.g. 6 independent loads suitable to switch different external conductors with potential-free normally-open contacts as well as normally-closed contact can be parameterised with programming button and red programming LED bus connection via connecting terminal with screw terminals
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
387
INSTABUS KNX/EIB Order no.
Packing unit
Packing unit
Switch actuator 8gang 16 A C load NO manual status RMD with current detection
Switch actuator/shutter actuator 8/4gang 16 A NO manual status RMD
light grey
light grey
7531 80 05
1
Operating voltage over bus 21 - 32 V=; Making current max. 600 A / 150 µs; Max. switching capacity for 230 V~; 230 V incandescent and halogen lamps 3680 W; Conventional transformers 2000 VA; Capacitive load 16 A, max. 200 µF; Electronic transformers 2500 W; Fluorescent lamps -; uncompensated 3680 W; Compensated 2500 W / 200 µF; Lead-lag circuit 2500 W / 200 µF; Osram electronic ballast -; QTP 2x58W 17 units; QT-FH 2x28W 25 units; QT-FQ 2x54W 17 units; Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C; RMD 8 modules; Dimensions (W x H x D) 144 x 90 x 70 mm; Assembling height as from DIN rail 63 mm Optimised for commissioning with ETS3 from version D patch A. for switching e.g. 8 independent capacitive loads suitable to switch different external conductors with potential-free normally-open contacts as well as normally-closed contact can be parameterised with manual selection switch per channel for on/off and status indication manual operation also possible without bus e.g. on building site with programming button and red programming LED bus connection via connecting terminal with screw terminals
388
Order no.
7531 80 03
1
Operating voltage over bus 21 - 32 V=; Auxiliary voltage 230 V~; Frequency 50/60 Hz; Making current max. 800 A / 200 µs; Max. switching capacity for 230 V~; 230 V incandescent lamps 3000 W; 230 V halogen lamps 2500 W; Conventional transformers 1500 W; Capacitive load 16 A, max. 140 µF; Electronic transformers 1800 W; Fluorescent lamps -; uncompensated 1000 W; Compensated 1160 W / 140 µF; Lead-lag circuit 2300 W / 140 µF; Osram electronic ballast -; QTP 2x58W 11 units; QT-FH 2x28W 17 units; QT-FQ 2x54W 11 units; electric drives 1300 VA; Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C; RMD 4 modules; Dimensions (W x H x D) 72 x 90 x 70 mm; Assembling height as from DIN rail 63 mm Optimised for commissioning with ETS3 from version D patch A. for switching e.g. 8 independent loads or activation of 4 drives any combined operation from drive and switching functions possible suitable to switch different external conductors with potential-free normally-open contacts as well as normally-closed contact can be parameterised 4 manual operation buttons for channel/device for on/off (up/down) and bus function On/Off manual operation also possible without bus e.g. on building site with programming button and red programming LED with 8 red status LEDs and 3 red LEDs as manual actuation indication bus connection via connecting terminal with screw terminals
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
INSTABUS KNX/EIB Order no.
Packing unit
7531 00 02
Packing unit
Room actuators
Switch actuator/shutter actuator 16/8gang 16 A NO manual status RMD light grey
Order no.
NEW
1
Room actuator 4/2gang 16 A NO contact, manual, status, REG
Operating voltage over bus 21 - 32 V=; Auxiliary voltage 230 V~; Frequency 50/60 Hz; Making current max. 800 A / 200 µs; Max. switching capacity for 230 V~; 230 V incandescent lamps 3000 W; 230 V halogen lamps 2500 W; Conventional transformers 1500 W; Capacitive load 16 A, max. 140 µF; Electronic transformers 1800 W; Fluorescent lamps -; uncompensated 1000 W; Compensated 1160 W / 140 µF; Lead-lag circuit 2300 W / 140 µF; Osram electronic ballast -; QTP 2x58W 11 units; QT-FH 2x28W 17 units; QT-FQ 2x54W 11 units; electric drives 1300 VA; Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C; RMD 8 modules; Dimensions (W x H x D) 144 x 90 x 70 mm; Assembling height as from DIN rail 63 mm
light grey
Optimised for commissioning with ETS3 from version D patch A.
Optimised for commissioning with ETS3 from version D patch A.
for switching e.g. 16 independent loads or activation of 8 drives any combined operation from drive and switching functions possible suitable to switch different external conductors with potential-free normally-open contacts as well as normally-closed contact can be parameterised 4 manual operation buttons for channel/device for on/off (up/down) and bus function On/Off manual operation also possible without bus e.g. on building site with programming button and red programming LED with 16 red status LEDs and 3 red LEDs as manual actuation indication bus connection via connecting terminal with screw terminals
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
* 7531 40 19
1
Operating voltage over bus 21 - 32 V=; Making current max. 800 A / 200 µs; Max. switching capacity for 230 V~; 230 V incandescent lamps 3000 W; 230 V halogen lamps 2500 W; Conventional transformers 1200 W; Electronic transformers 1500 W; Fluorescent lamps uncompensated 1000 W; Fluorescent lamps parallel compensated 1160 W / 140 µF; Lead-lag circuit 2300 W / 140 µF; Osram EVG QTP 2x58W 11 Units; Osram EVG QT-FH 4x14W 10 Stk.; Osram EVG QT-FQ 2x54W 11 Units; Switching current for electronic outputs max. 50 mA; Actuator drives per channel max. 4; Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C; RMD 4 modules; Dimensions (W x H x D) 72 x 90 x 70 mm; Assembling height as from DIN rail 63 mm Comply with the motor manufacturer‘s instructions!
4 outputs for switching independent loads or activation of 2 drives with 4 potential-free NO contacts as well as normally-closed contact can be parameterised any combined operation from drive and switching functions possible suitable to switch different external conductors 2 additional electronic outputs (Triac) for connecting thermoelectric valve drives for individual single room control for continuous (PI) or switched (2-point) control with emergency programme e.g. for sensor or bus failure 4 manual operation buttons for channel/device for on/off (up/down) and bus function On/Off manual operation also possible without bus e.g. on building site with programming button and red programming LED with 6 red status LEDs and 3 red LEDs as manual actuation indication bus connection via connecting terminal with screw terminals
389
INSTABUS KNX/EIB Order no.
Packing unit
Shutter actuators 7534 10 02
1
Operating voltage over bus 21 - 32 V=; Max. switching capacity for 230 V, 50/60 Hz; Switching power max. 1 motor 1000 VA; Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C; Cable length bus+inputs approx. 33 cm, extendable to max. 5 m; Load cable length approx. 20 cm , 3 x 1,5 mm²; Dimensions (diameter x H) 53 x 28 mm Follow the motor manufacturers‘ instructions!
Shutter actuator 4gang 230 V AC / 2gang 12-48 V DC manual status RMD 7531 40 18
light grey
7531 40 11
1
Operating voltage over bus 21 - 32 V=; Supply voltage by channel A1 + 2 with max. 24 V= (+/- 10%); Max. switching current at 24 V=; Switching current max. 6 A; Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C; RMD 4 modules; Dimensions (W x H x D) 72 x 90 x 65 mm; Assembling height as from DIN rail 58 mm Follow the motor manufacturers‘ instructions!
for activation of one 230 V~ drive with 2 potential-free NO contacts mechanically interlocked with each other with 2 independent binary inputs for potential-free contacts binary input functions: Switching, dimming, shutter control and value transmitter operating mode can be set for shutters or blinds switching time on change of direction programmable shutter operation concept short-long-short and long-short parameterisable with programming button and red programming LED programmable with ETS2 V1.3 and higher built into flush-mounted or waterproof junction box pre-assembled, with cable, plug and 2 sockets
light grey
Packing unit
Shutter actuator 4gang 6 A 24 V DC manual status RMD
Shutter actuator 1gang 6 A flush-mounted light grey
Order no.
1
Operating voltage over bus 21 - 32 V=; Auxiliary voltage 230 V~; Frequency 50/60 Hz; Max. switching capacity for 230 V~; Frequency 50/60 Hz; Switching current at cos φ 0.8 max. 6 A; Max. switching current at 24 V=; Switching current max. 6 A; Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C; RMD 4 modules; Dimensions (W x H x D) 72 x 90 x 70 mm; Assembling height as from DIN rail 63 mm
An external power supply 24 V is necessary! Recommandation of power supply units: Messrs. Elka type: SV230-24.1500DC order no.: 14001910 Messrs. Phönix type: STEP-PS-100-240AC/24DC/1.5 order no.: 2938947 for activation of max. 4 independent 24 V= drives 2 x 2-channel operation possible operating mode can be set for shutters or blinds switching time on change of direction programmable shutter operation concept short-long-short and long-short parameterisable switchover with lockout of KNX/EIB function to permanent manual operation including master stop manual operation also possible without bus e.g. on building site with programming button and red programming LED with 8 red status LEDs and 3 red LEDs as manual actuation indication reduced wiring complexity, one entry for every 2 contacts bus connection via connecting terminal with screw terminals
Comply with the motor manufacturer‘s instructions! Optimised for commissioning with ETS3 from version D patch A. for activation max. 4 independent AC or 2 independent DC drives suitable to switch different external conductors 4 manual operation buttons for channel/device for on/off (up/down) and bus function On/Off manual operation also possible without bus e.g. on building site with programming button and red programming LED with 8 red status LEDs and 3 red LEDs as manual actuation indication bus connection via connecting terminal with screw terminals
390
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
INSTABUS KNX/EIB Order no.
NEW
Packing unit
* 7531 80 08
1
Operating voltage over bus 21 - 32 V=; Auxiliary voltage 230 V~; Frequency 50/60 Hz; Max. switching current at 230 V~; Switching current at cos φ 0.8 max. 6 A; Max. switching current at 24 V=; Switching current max. 6 A; Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C; RMD 8 TE; Dimensions (W x H x D) 144 x 90 x 70 mm; Assembling height as from DIN rail 63 mm
For commissioning with the ETS3 for version D patch A. for activation max. 8 independent AC or 4 independent DC drives suitable to switch different external conductors 4 manual operation buttons for channel/device for on/off (up/down) and bus function On/Off manual operation also possible without bus e.g. on building site with programming button and red programming LED with 16 red status LEDs and 3 red LEDs as manual actuation indication bus connection via connecting terminal with screw terminals
Blind actuators Blind actuator 4gang 6 A 230 V manual RMD 7531 40 13
Universal dim actuator 1gang 210 W/VA flush-mounted light grey
Comply with the motor manufacturer‘s instructions!
light grey
Packing unit
Dim actuators
Shutter actuator 8gang 230 V AC / 4gang 12-48 V DC manual, status, RMD light grey
Order no.
1
50/60 Hz Operating voltage over bus 21 - 32 V=; Max. switching current at 110/230 V~; Switching current at cos φ 0.8 max. 6 A; Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C; RMD 4 modules; Dimensions (W x H x D) 72 x 90 x 65 mm; Assembling height as from DIN rail 58 mm
7534 10 03
1
Operating voltage over bus 21 - 32 V=; Control voltage 230 V~; Frequency 50/60 Hz; 230 V incandescent and halogen lamps 50 - 210 W; Electronic transformers 50 - 210 W; Dimmable conventional transformers 50 - 210 VA; Tronic or LV power boosters built-in/RMD max. 10 for same load type; Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C; Cable length bus+inputs approx. 33 cm, extendable to max. 5 m; Load cable length approx. 20 cm , 2 x 1,5 mm²; Dimensions (diameter x H) 53 x 28 mm Trouble-free operation will be obtained only with Berker Tronic transformers. Do not connect conventional transformers together with electronic transformers to one output. with 2 independent binary inputs for potential-free contacts binary input functions: Switching, dimming, shutter control and value transmitter very low noise bulb-preserving soft startup short-circuit and overload proof (electronic fuse) phase cut-on or cut-off according to load type, self-learning with programming button and red programming LED programmable with ETS2 V1.3 and higher for flush-mounted box pre-assembled, with cables
for activation of max. 4 independent 230 V~ drives suitable to switch different external conductors 2 x 2-channel operation possible operating mode only blinds switching time on change of direction programmable shutter operation concept short-long-short and long-short parameterisable switchover with lockout of KNX/EIB function to permanent manual operation including master stop manual operation also possible without bus e.g. on building site with programming button and red programming LED with 8 red status LEDs and 3 red LEDs as manual actuation indication reduced wiring complexity, one entry for every 2 contacts bus connection via connecting terminal with screw terminals
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
391
INSTABUS KNX/EIB Order no.
Packing unit
Packing unit
Universal dim actuator 1gang 500 W/VA RMD
Universal dim actuator 2gang 300 W/VA RMD
light grey
light grey
7531 10 07
1
Operating voltage over bus 21 - 32 V=; Control voltage 230 V~; Frequency 50/60 Hz; 230 V incandescent and halogen lamps 50 - 500 W; Electronic transformers 50 - 500 W; Dimmable conventional transformers 50 - 500 VA; Universal power boosters max. 10 phase cut-off á 500 W; Universal power boosters max. 5 phase cut-on á 420 VA; Tronic or LV power boosters built-in/RMD max. 10 for same load type; Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C; RMD 4 modules; Dimensions (W x H x D) 72 x 90 x 65 mm; Assembling height as from DIN rail 58 mm Trouble-free operation will be obtained only with Berker Tronic transformers. Do not connect conventional transformers together with electronic transformers. very low noise bulb-preserving soft startup short-circuit and overload proof (electronic fuse) phase cut-on or cut-off according to load type, self-learning expandable by universal power boosters RMD Plus with load cable switched in parallel with programming button and red programming LED bus connection via connecting terminal with screw terminals
392
Order no.
7531 20 07
1
Operating voltage over bus 21 - 32 V=; Control voltage 230 V~; Frequency 50/60 Hz; 230 V incandescent and halogen lamps 50 - 300 W/ channel; Electronic transformers 50 - 300 W/channel; Dimmable conventional transformers 50 - 300 VA/ channel; Universal power boosters max. 10 phase cut-off 2gang á 500 W; Universal power boosters max. 10 phase cut-off 1gang á 500 W; Universal power boosters max. 5 phase cut-on 2gang á 250 VA; Universal power boosters max. 5 phase cut-on 1gang á 350 VA; Tronic or LV power boosters built-in/RMD max. 10 for same load type; Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C; RMD 4 modules; Dimensions (W x H x D) 72 x 90 x 65 mm; Assembling height as from DIN rail 58 mm Trouble-free operation will be obtained only with Berker Tronic transformers. Do not connect conventional transformers together with electronic transformers to one output. suitable for different external conductors very low noise bulb-preserving soft startup short-circuit and overload proof (electronic fuse) phase cut-on or cut-off according to load type, self-learning expandable by universal power boosters RMD Plus with load cable switched in parallel with programming button and red programming LED bus connection via connecting terminal with screw terminals
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
INSTABUS KNX/EIB Order no.
Packing unit
7531 40 17
1
Operating voltage over bus 21 - 32 V=; Auxiliary voltage 230 V~; Frequency 50/60 Hz; Control voltage 230 V~; Frequency 50/60 Hz; 230 V incandescent and halogen lamps 20 - 210 W/ channel; Electronic transformers 20 - 210 W/channel; Dimmable conventional transformers 20 - 210 VA/ channel; Universal power boosters max. 10 phase cut-off á 500 W; Tronic or LV power boosters built-in/RMD max. 10 for same load type; Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C; RMD 8 modules; Dimensions (W x H x D) 144 x 90 x 70 mm; Assembling height as from DIN rail 63 mm Trouble-free operation will be obtained only with Berker Tronic transformers. Do not connect conventional transformers together with electronic transformers on the same output. Optimised for commissioning with ETS3 from version D patch A. suitable for different external conductors very low noise bulb-preserving soft startup short-circuit and overload proof (electronic fuse) phase cut-on or cut-off according to load type, self-learning expandable by universal power boosters RMD Plus with load cable switched in parallel 4 manual operation buttons for on/off (brighter/ darker) and bus function on/off per channel / device manual operation also possible without bus e.g. on building site with programming button and red programming LED with 4 red status LEDs and 3 red LEDs as manual actuation indication bus connection via connecting terminal with screw terminals
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
Packing unit
Control units 1-10 V
Universal dim actuator 4gang 210 W/VA manual, status, RMD light grey
Order no.
Control unit 3gang 1-10V 16 A manual status RMD light grey
7531 30 05
1
Operating voltage over bus 21 - 32 V=; Control current per channel 100 mA; Max. switching current at 230 V~; Switching current 16 A; Capacitive load 1000 W, 140 µF; Insta EVG -; EVG TC 1-10 V single flame 15; EVG TC 1-10 V double flame 12; Osram electronic ballast -; QT-FH 1x28W 17 units; QT-FH 2x28W 17 units; QT-FQ 2x80W 11 units; Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C; Input cable length max. 500 m with 0,5 mm²; RMD 4 modules; Dimensions (W x H x D) 72 x 90 x 65 mm; Assembling height as from DIN rail 58 mm Interface to DIN EN 60928 for switching and controlling electronic ballasts and Tronic transformers with 1-10 V interface suitable to switch different external conductors with potential-free normally-open contacts basic brightness programmable with manual selection switch per channel for on/off and status indication manual operation also possible without bus e.g. on building site behaviour in the event of bus voltage failure parameterisable with programming button with red programming LED and red status LED bus connection via connecting terminal with screw terminals
393
INSTABUS KNX/EIB Order no.
Packing unit
Analogue actuators
Packing unit
Valve drives
Analogue actuator 4gang RMD light grey
Order no.
7551 40 01
Valve drive KNX/EIB 1
polar white
7550 00 02
1
Operating voltage over bus 21 - 32 V=; Running time 25 s/mm; Stroke 4,5 mm; Medium temperature max. 100 °C; Operating temperature 0 - 50 °C; Union nut M30 x 1,5 mm; Pre-assembled cables approx. 1 m; Dimensions (W x H x D) 46 x 87 x 60 mm
Operating voltage over bus 21 - 32 V=; Auxiliary voltage 24 V~; Frequency 50/60 Hz; Outputs voltage 0-1; 0-10 V; Output load voltage > 1 kΩ; Outputs current 0-20, 4-20 mA; Output load impedance < 500 Ω; Output current max. 20 mA/channel; Current consumption max. 170 mA; Forced guides (1 bit objects) per channel 2; Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C; RMD 4 modules; Dimensions (W x H x D) 72 x 90 x 70 mm; Assembling height as from DIN rail 63 mm
Required for commissioning programming magnet order no. 7590 00 19
The analogue actuator receives instabus KNX/EIB telegrams and converts them into current and/or voltage signals, e.g. for heating, air conditioning and ventilation systems. Needed for operation a power supply of 24 V AC RMD order nr. 7591 00 01
suitable for Heimeier heater valve tappets with 2 independent binary inputs to connect potential-free contacts (e.g. Reed) with programming reed contact and red programming LED
Accessories: Programming magnet white
7590 00 19
1
Output signals DIN IEC 381 with 4 independant analogue outputs channels can be adjusted independently cyclic supervision of the outputs initial status via status- and/or switch object evaluable extendable with an analogue actuator module 4gang with system interface for analogue actuator module with programming button with red programming LED with green/red status LED (operation/fault) bus connection via connecting terminal with screw terminals
Analogue actuator modules
Valve drive 230 V polar white
7590 00 76
1
230 V~, 0-60 Hz, 230 V= Power consumption 1,8 W; Stroke 4 mm; Running time 45 s/mm; Medium temperature max. 0 - 100 °C; Operating temperature 0 - 60 °C; Pre-assembled cables approx. 1 m; Dimensions (W x H x D) 44 x 60 x 61 mm Neutral conductor necessary!
Analogue actuator module 4gang RMD light grey
for replacement need for programming reed contact
7552 40 01
1
Operating voltage over bus 21 - 32 V=; Auxiliary voltage 24 V~; Frequency 50/60 Hz; Outputs voltage 0-1; 0-10 V; Output load voltage > 1 kΩ; Outputs current 0-20, 4-20 mA; Output load impedance < 500 Ω; Output current max. 20 mA/channel; Current consumption max. 170 mA; Forced guides (1 bit objects) per channel 2; Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C; RMD 4 modules; Dimensions (W x H x D) 72 x 90 x 70 mm; Assembling height as from DIN rail 63 mm
Order valve adapter separately.
Room thermostat with change-over order no. 2026 .. Room thermostat with NC contact order no. 2030 .. Floor thermostat with NO contact order no. 2034 .. Thermostat time-controlled with NO contact order no. 2043 .. Heating actuator 6gang order no. 7531 60 03
IP54 with state indication (opened or closed) with anti-dismantling protection closed in de-energized state with overheating protection thermoelectric mode of operation for plug-in cover pluggable connection cable
Extension for analogue actuator order nr. 7551 40 01
Output signals DIN IEC 381 with 4 independant analogue outputs cyclic supervision of the outputs as extension for analogue actuator 4gang with system plug for connection to the analogue actuator system interface with green/red status LED (operation/fault) with 4 yellow output status LEDs with screw terminals 394
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
INSTABUS KNX/EIB Order no.
Packing unit
7590 00 77
1
24 V~, 50/60 Hz, 24 V= Power consumption 1,8 W; Stroke 4 mm; Running time 45 s/mm; Medium temperature max. 0 - 100 °C; Operating temperature 0 - 60 °C; Pre-assembled cables approx. 1 m; Max. cable length 200 m; Dimensions (W x H x D) 44 x 60 x 61 mm
7531 60 03
1
Operating voltage over bus 21 - 32 V=; Auxiliary voltage 230/240 V~; Frequency 50/60 Hz; Switching current 250 V~ max. 50 mA; Actuator drives per channel max. 4; Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C; RMD 4 modules; Dimensions (W x H x D) 72 x 90 x 65 mm; Assembling height as from DIN rail 58 mm
Room thermostat with NC contact order no. 2031 .. Heating actuator 12gang order no. 7533 00 01 Heating actuator 6gang order no. 7533 60 01
IP54 with state indication (opened or closed) with anti-dismantling protection closed in de-energized state with overheating protection thermoelectric mode of operation for plug-in cover pluggable connection cable
Valve drive accessories
Suitable valve drive order no. 7590 00 76
for individual single room control for continuous (PI) or switched (2-point) control for thermoelectric valve drives 230 V, closed in de-energized state with emergency programme e.g. for sensor or bus failure with programming button and red programming LED bus connection via connecting terminal with screw terminals
Heating actuator 6gang Triac 24 V AC surfacemounted
Valve adapter
light grey, VA80, Comap, Empur, Heimeier, Herb, IVAR, MNG, Onda, Oventrop, Schlösser, Strawa, TA, Thermot. polar white, VA78, flange, for Danfoss valves Type: RA
Heating actuator 6gang Triac 230 V AC RMD light grey
Order valve adapter separately.
grey, VA10, Dumser, Simplex, Beulco (from 2005) dark grey, VA50 Cazzaniga, Honeywell & Braukmann, Landis & Gyr, Frese, Reich (distributor), KaMo
Packing unit
Heating actuators
Valve drive 24 V polar white
Order no.
7590 00 72
1
7590 00 73
1
7590 00 75
1
grey
7533 60 01
1
Operating voltage over bus 21 - 32 V=; Auxiliary voltage 230 V~; Frequency 50/60 Hz; Output voltage 24 V~; Total output current max. 1 A; Actuator drives 24 V max. 13; Actuator drives 24 V per channel max. 4; Operating temperature 0 - 50 °C; Dimensions (W x H x D) 302 x 75 x 70 mm Suitable valve drive order no. 7590 00 77
7590 00 74
Union nut M30 x 1,5 mm For valve drive order no. 7590 00 76, 7590 00 77
for valve drive 230 V or actuator drive 24 V
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
1
for individual single room control for continuous (PI) or switched (2-point) control for valve drives 24 V, closed in de-energized state with emergency programme e.g. for sensor or bus failure with green operation LED and red programming LED with red fuse LED with 6 red heat request LEDs short-circuit and overload proof (fine-wire fuse) with integral transformer bus connection via connecting terminal with plug-in terminals
395
INSTABUS KNX/EIB Order no.
Packing unit
Heating actuator 12gang Triac 24 V AC surface mounted grey
7533 00 01
1
Operating voltage over bus 21 - 32 V=; Auxiliary voltage 230 V~; Frequency 50/60 Hz; Output voltage 24 V~; Total output current max. 1 A; Actuator drives 24 V max. 13; Actuator drives 24 V per channel max. 2; Operating temperature 0 - 50 °C; Dimensions (W x H x D) 302 x 75 x 70 mm
Mini-function module RMD light grey
7572 00 11
1
The unrestricted power supply output and a data rail with connectors (order No. 7500 00 08) is required for the operating voltage. The mini function module RMD is a fully programmable controller with a real-time multitasking operating system for the instabus KNX/EIB. For wide-ranging cost-efficient open-loop control and automation tasks. with programming button with red programming LED and red data flow LED with red operation LED with pressure contact on data rail with screw terminals
Fan coil actuator 2gang 10 A NO, hand, status RMD
Function module RMD
light grey
light grey
1
Operating voltage over bus 21 - 32 V=; Max. switching capacity for 230 V~; 230 V incandescent lamps 2300 W; 230 V halogen lamps 2300 W; Conventional transformers 1200 W; Electronic transformers 1500 W; Fluorescent lamps uncompensated 1000 W; Fluorescent lamps parallel compensated 1160 W / 140 µF; Operating temperature -5 - 45 °C; RMD 4 modules; Dimensions (W x H x D) 72 x 90 x 70 mm; Assembling height as from DIN rail 63 mm Comply with the fan convector manufacturer‘s instructions for commissioning with the ETS3 for version D patch A. For the electric activation of fan convectors for converting RTR control variables into valve positions, fan stages activation of 1 or 2 fan channels with 6 or 3 fan stages for operating modes heating/cooling or heating and cooling manual activation of blow fans using push-buttons or the operating panel use of free channels to control switching loads 4 manual operation buttons for controlling fan stages and bus function on/off manual operation also possible without bus e.g. on building site with programming button and red programming LED with 8 red status LEDs and 3 red LEDs as manual actuation indication bus connection via connecting terminal with screw terminals
396
Function modules
Programming software can be downloaded free-ofcharge from www.Berker.com.
for individual single room control for continuous (PI) or switched (2-point) control for valve drives 24 V, closed in de-energized state with emergency programme e.g. for sensor or bus failure with green operation LED and red programming LED with red fuse LED with 12 red heat request LEDs short-circuit and overload proof (fine-wire fuse) with integral transformer bus connection via connecting terminal with plug-in terminals
* 7531 20 12
Packing unit
Operating voltage (outer conductor pair) 29 V; Function block types 40; Function blocks max. 150; Group addresses max. 200; Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C; RMD 3 modules; Dimensions (W x H x D) 54 x 90 x 65 mm; Assembling height as from DIN rail 58 mm
for order no. 7590 00 77
NEW
Order no.
7572 00 10
1
Operating voltage (outer conductor pair) 29 V; Function block types 50; Function blocks e.g. 2000 with 500 Group addresses; Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C; RMD 3 modules; Dimensions (W x H x D) 54 x 90 x 65 mm; Assembling height as from DIN rail 58 mm Demo programming software available for free download from www.Berker.de. The unrestricted power supply output and a data rail with connectors (order No. 7500 00 08) is required for the operating voltage. The function module RMD is a fully programmable controller with a real-time multitasking operating system for the instabus KNX/EIB. For wide-ranging cost-efficient open-loop and closed-loop control and automation tasks. Tool software order no. 7570 00 11
programmable with tool software with integral real-time clock with programming button with red programming LED and red data flow LED with red operation LED with interface RS 232 (9pole socket D-subminiature) with pressure contact on data rail with screw terminals
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
INSTABUS KNX/EIB Order no.
Packing unit
Order no.
Gateways
IP central unit
Radio receivers
NEW
white
7563 00 04
1
Operating voltage over bus 21 - 32 V=; Function channels 50; Teachable radio transmitters (buttons) 100; Radio signal reception frequency 433,42 MHz; Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C; Dimensions (W x H x D) 110 x 94 x 38 mm For teach-in of radio transmitters a 9 V block battery is required, e.g. order no. 9209. The surface-mounted radio receiver converts signals of taught-in radio bus transmitters into instabus KNX/ EIB telegrams. for order no. 0124 10, 0174 01 09, 2721 .., 2722 .., 2723 .., 2724 .., 2764, 2766, 2769, 9420 .., 9430 01 00
processing the radio signals of hand-held, wallmounted radio transmitters and radio controllers for switch, push-button, dimmer and shutter functions dimming / position value transmitter 1 byte extension unit for light scene push-button with 2-digit, 7-segment function channel display with programming button and function channel selection button with green operation LED and red programming LED with fitting material bus connection via connecting terminal with screw terminals
DALI Gateway DALI gateway RMD light grey
7571 00 03
1
50/60 Hz Operating voltage over bus 21 - 32 V=; Operating voltage 110/240 V~; DALI voltage 16 V= (9.5...22.5 V=); Operating temperature 5 - 45 °C; RMD 4 modules; Dimensions (W x H x D) 72 x 90 x 70 mm; Assembling height as from DIN rail 63 mm Groups 17 to 32 can be implemented with only one DALI device each. for switching and controlling electronic ballasts and Tronic transformer with DALI interface as DALI master and power supply for DALI devices max. 64 DALI devices in max. 16 EIB groups and max. 16 light scenes programmable with ETS3 Patch d DALI device replacement in event of defect or utilisation of ETS is possible 4 manual operation buttons for on/off (brighter/ darker) and bus function on/off per channel / device manual operation also possible without bus e.g. on building site 2 digit red LED display for group indication in manual operation with programming button and red programming LED bus connection via connecting terminal with screw terminals
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
IP control light grey
Radio receiver surface-mounted
Packing unit
* 7571 00 04
1
Operating voltage 10 - 30 V=; Power consumption gr. Same ≥ 5 VA; receiptable addresses 32766; Working memory 64 MB RAM; Operating temperature 0 - +35 °C; RMD 8 modules; Dimensions (W x H x D) 144 x 90 x 64 mm; Assembling height as from DIN rail 58 mm Network technology skills are required for commissioning. EIB server for supplying max. 50 visualisation clients with KNX/EIB data central operating and visualisation unit via web KNX/EIB web browser support of common web browsers (IE, Netscape, Firefox etc.) also usable with Apple Macintosh freely configurable graphic operating surface for representation on the PC monitor integrated element library with standard operating elements up to 20 operating configurations for different applications commissioning and programming without ETS via web browser remote commissioning / maintenance of KNX/EIB systems possible via the Internet configuration tool for installation of IP settings and parameterisations for control and visualisation of e.g.shutters, lights, heating, ventilation, alarm system, physical sensors central functions/scenarios for heating, shutters, illumination, etc. can be configured by end user with integrated controller for logic functions (concatenations, threshold value processing) creation of light scenes with up to 28 telegrams each with week and year timer function time update via Internet NTP server and transmission to the KNX/EIB with event indicator for e.g. status/alarm messages via e-mail integration of network cameras possible linking of external operating units with JAVA support (e.g. PDA) via WLAN control of multimedia applications databank connection to the memory of utilisation/ consumption data of the KNX/EIB for LAN connection of individual KNX/EIB installations administration of 50 users for the control of access authorisation with updatable Flash-Controller for subsequent function expansions with LED status for operational stand-by, data processing, KNX/EIB communication, LAN status with RJ45 Port for LAN connection operation with non-choked output of KNX/EIB voltage supply possible (pay attention to current consum bus connection via connecting terminal with screw terminals
397
INSTABUS KNX/EIB Order no.
Packing unit
KNX/EIB TC phone 7573 00 01
Alarm central unit KNX/EIB 1
Operating voltage over bus 21 - 32 V=; Auxiliary voltage 230 V~; Frequency 50/60 Hz; Switching voltage 24 V; Switching current 50 mA (short-circuit-proof); Message/status texts per 6; Call numbers for alarm 3; Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C; Dimensions (W x H x D) 185 x 215 x 45 mm For alarm central unit KNX/EIB order no. 7573 00 10
control/polling with conventional TSU telephone to alarm neighbours and acquaintances as well as using mobile with password protection using four-digit number on opening with 2-line LC display for status display with 2 instabus KNX/EIB signal inputs with 4 potential-free signal inputs with 6 selectable instabus KNX/EIB outputs with 4 selectable relay outputs (normally open) channels can be adjusted independently analogue, extension unit compatible, e.g. to TAE N socket and FCC socket with TAE N connection cable with plug-in power supply unit bus connection via connecting terminal with screw terminals
Accessories: Handset black
Packing unit
Alarm system KNX/EIB
TC-Phone surface-mounted white
Order no.
7590 00 09
1
to record custom announcement texts standard commercially available telephone receiver with RJ11 plug
polar white/black
7573 00 10
1
Operating voltage 230 V~; Frequency 50/60 Hz; Output voltage 12 V=; Switching current max. 1,8 A; Switching current change-over contact 12 V= max. 5 A; Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C; Max. cable length, alarm units 100 m; Cable length for wired detector, max. 200 m; Max. cable length sabotage 600 m; Dimensions (W x H x D) 210 x 270 x 72 mm To agree upon a training date, please contact your regional Berker field sales representative. To prevent malfunctions, we recommend that only Berker KNX/EIB products are used in connection with the alarm central unit KNX/EIB. for maximum 160 sensors (communication objects) and 4 alarm zones alarm zones can be activated individually or linked history memory with individual sensor identification detector descriptions can be defined as required cyclic sensor monitoring alarm duration and delay times activated/alarm adjustable sensor inputs via binary inputs or universal interfaces activation phone dial unit assault, burglary, fire, malfunction, armed/not armed on potential-free contacts/ KNX/EIB outputs for outside/inside siren and flash light or via KNX/EIB with sabotage protection by contact in cover additional signal input as sabotage protection for mounting place decentral indication and operation, e.g. info display with emergency power storage battery 12 V for maximum 12 hours with integral clock (DCF-compatible using system clock) with green operation LED and red programming LED with control LED per output cascadable with fitting material requirement: ETS2 V1.2a or ETS3 bus connection via connecting terminal with screw terminals
Accessories: Emergency power storage battery 12 V 9200 01
1
12 V=, 1,2 Ah for order no. 7573 00 10
for alarm central unit KNX/EIB for replacement need
398
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
INSTABUS KNX/EIB Order no.
Packing unit
Order no.
Panels
Mini tableau MT701 Plus
Mini control panels
light grey
NEW
* 7574 00 12 * 7574 00 13
1 1
Operating voltage over bus 21 - 32 V=; Auxiliary voltage 230 V~; Frequency 50/60 Hz; Limit values max. 32; Logic operations, cascadable 80; TFT screen 5,7 ‚‘; Graphical display 320 x 240 / 240 x 320 Pixel; Display colours 4096; Graphics memory approx. 4 MB; Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C; Dimensions (W x H x D) 221 x 141 x 46 mm
1
for order no. 7590 00 21, 7594 00 ..
IP54 freely programmable indication and operating panel 50 dialogue pages with 8 function/display lines only 16 lines per page, freely configurable with display illumination button, 2 cursor buttons and 4 programmable buttons with display lighting, operable with KNX/EIB telegram and manually background bitmaps insertable 50 error messages parameterisable with error log for 20 messages text display (ASCII-format) for e.g. switching, dimming, shutters, light scenes, heating, operating modes, date, time for e.g. access control, positive operation, value transmission, value display with limit values or not retrieval, setting and storing of 24 light scenes with up to 32 outputs with synchronisable integral real-time clock with date weekly timer switch with 16 channels 40 time elements with filter, time and blocking parameters parameterisable for switching functions 12 multiplexers with up to 3 channels parameterisable integral piezo buzzer 4 password-protected levels parameterisable as required for each dialog page programmable using PC with free RS 232 interface (from ETS2 V1.2a) or via KNX/EIB bus connection via connecting terminal with screw terminals
for order no. 7590 00 21, 7594 01 01, 7594 01 03
freely programmable indication and operating panel with TFT touch display 50 dialog pages each with up to 16 parameterisable display elements (max. 400) display elements usable for requesting predefined or freely parameterisable functions freely selectable national language (code page) per indication page linking of dialogue pages possible request for dialogue pages via KNX/EIB object display lighting, duration and type of activation and brightness adjustable in 2 stages background bitmaps insertable 50 error messages, can be parameterised indication of the last 20 error messages via message window, audible warning retrieval of e-mails transmission of predefined e-mails indication of up to 8 RSS news feeds text display (ASCII-format) for e.g. switching, dimming, shutters, light scenes, heating, operating modes, date, time for e.g. access control, positive operation, value transmission, value display with/without limit values retrieval, setting and storing of 24 light scenes with up to 32 outputs presence simulation with recording and reproduction type daily sequences Integrated alarm system for monitoring of windows, doors and interiors 4 password levels for differentiated access authorisations parameterisable with synchronisable integral real-time clock with date time switch (weekly) with 16 channels each with 8 switching times astro programme for sunrise/sundown functions intelligent functions e.g. time links, logic functions, multiplexes parameterisable data logger for recording, evaluation and representation of measuring points as diagram remote operation via PC possible with RJ45 Port for LAN connection programmable via USB interface, network or KNX/ EIB integral piezo buzzer bus connection via connecting terminal with screw terminals
7574 00 09
Operating voltage over bus 21 - 32 V=; Auxiliary voltage 230 V~; Frequency 50/60 Hz; Limit values max. 32; Logic operations, cascadable 80; Graphical display 240 x 128 Pixel; Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C; Dimensions (W x H x D) 213 x 125 x 82 mm; Installation depth 60 mm
Berker Master Control polar white anthracite
Packing unit
Accessories Flush-mounted housing for mini tableaus grey
7590 00 21
1
Hallow wall opening (W x H x T) 212 x 124 x 75 mm; Dimensions (W x H x D) 216 x 134 x 75 mm for order no. 7574 00 09, 7574 00 12, 7574 00 13
for flush mounting and hollow-wall mounting with cleaning cover NEW
Frame for Master Control glass, polar white stainless steel
* 7594 01 01 * 7594 01 03
1 1
Glass, high-gloss, backside polar white printed similar to RAL 9010. Stainless, brushed. for order no. 7574 00 12, 7574 00 13
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
399
INSTABUS KNX/EIB Order no.
Packing unit
Order no.
Frame for MT701 plus polar white deep black stainless steel, lacquered
7594 00 09 7594 00 05 7594 00 03
1 1 1
light bronze, lacquered
7594 00 04
1
Packing unit
Indication and operating panel housing surface-mounted for front plates aluminium/grey, for 2 front plates H 310 mm
# 7573 00 02
1
aluminium/grey, for 3 front plates H 435 mm
# 7573 00 03
1
Operating voltage over bus 21 - 32 V=; Auxiliary voltage 230 V~; Frequency 50 Hz; Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C; Dimensions (W x D) 310 x 93 mm
Dimensions (W x H x D) 231 x 146 x 9,6 mm for order no. 7574 00 09
Indication and operating panels Indication and operating panel housing flushmounted for front plates aluminium, for 2 front plates H 320 mm
# 7574 00 02
1
aluminium, for 3 front plates H 445 mm
# 7574 00 03
1
Panel software available for free download from www.Berker.com. for order no. 7570 00 01, 7570 00 02, 7570 00 10, 7590 00 08
programmable using PC with spare RS 232 interface and panel software with integral bus coupling unit including power supply and control electronics with programming button with programming LED red and data transfer (RX/TX) LED red/green with reset button with ON/reset LED red/green with ribbon cable for front plate bus connection via connecting terminal
Operating voltage over bus 21 - 32 V=; Auxiliary voltage 230 V~; Frequency 50 Hz; Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C; Surface compensation max. 20 mm; Dimensions (W x D) 320 x 93 mm For masonry / hollow wall openings subtract 10 mm from W + H. Panel software available for free download from www.Berker.de.
for order no. 7570 00 01, 7570 00 02, 7570 00 10, 7590 00 08
programmable using PC with spare RS 232 interface and panel software with integral bus coupling unit including power supply and control electronics with programming button with programming LED red and data transfer (RX/ TX) LED red/green with reset button with ON/reset LED red/green with ribbon cable for front plate bus connection via connecting terminal
Front panels Front plate L40 for indication and operating panel housing grey
# 7570 00 01
1
Operating voltage via control electronics 5 V=; Power consumption 1,4 W; Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C; Cable length 300 mm; Dimensions (W x H x D) 270 x 124,5 x 28 mm for order no. 7573 00 02, 7573 00 03, 7574 00 02, 7574 00 03
with 40 red LEDs and 40 labelling fields with ribbon cable to connect to control module or indication and operating panel with 2 parallel bus connections
Front plate TL 15 for indication and operating panel housing grey
# 7570 00 02
1
Operating voltage via control electronics 5 V=; Power consumption 1,4 W; Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C; Cable length 300 mm; Dimensions (W x H x D) 270 x 124,5 x 28 mm for order no. 7573 00 02, 7573 00 03, 7574 00 02, 7574 00 03
with 15 buttons, red status LEDs and labelling fields with ribbon cable to connect to control module or indication and operating panel with 2 parallel bus connections
400
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
INSTABUS KNX/EIB Order no.
Packing unit
# 7590 00 08
1
Dimensions (W x H) 270 x 124,5 mm for order no. 7573 00 02, 7573 00 03, 7574 00 02, 7574 00 03
Product database with update service German version English version
7590 00 20 7590 00 60
1 1
For further languages please contact our local representitive!
as blank plate
The product database delivers all current Berker instabus KNX/EIB components for installation in the ETS database.
software EIBTAB panel software EIBTAB panel software German version
Packing unit
Product database
Front panel, neutral, for indication and operating panel housing grey
Order no.
# 7570 00 10
1
CD-ROM from ETS 2.0 available in the Internet
Tender specification texts
for order no. 7573 00 02, 7573 00 03, 7574 00 02, 7574 00 03
Tender specification texts with update service German version
programming software for INSTABUS control electronics system requirements: min. 386 DX processor; Windows 3.1 or higher for PC with spare RS 232 interface included on the product database CD-ROM and available in the Internet
7590 00 12
1
in GAEB or text format included on the product database CD-ROM and available in the Internet
Tool software Tool software for function module 7570 00 11
1
For operation on Windows 2000 and XP, the „FM-Loader for function module“ can be downloaded from www.Berker.com. for order no. 7572 00 10
CD-ROM with dongle with detailed manual with graphical editor for simple programming with documentation function (also suitable for output on a printer) system requirements: min. 486 DX processor; Windows 3.1 to Windows 95/98/2000XP for PC with spare RS 232 interface
Tool software demo version for function module German version
7590 00 17
1
For operation on Windows 2000 and XP, the „FM-Loader for function module“ can be downloaded from www.berker.com. The compiler function and commissioning are not possible. for order no. 7572 00 10, 7572 00 11
CD-ROM without dongle or manual with graphical editor for simple programming with documentation function (also suitable for output on a printer) system requirements: min. 486 DX processor; Windows 3.1 to Windows 95/98/2000XP included on the product database CD-ROM and available in the Internet
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
401
INSTABUS KNX/EIB MODUL 2 Order no.
Packing unit
Data interfaces 7506 00 12 7506 00 19
Bluetooth gateway 1 1
Data transfer rate max. 9,6 kBaud; Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C; Connection cable length max. 15 m
for addressing, programming and diagnosis of KNX/EIB components with anti-dismantling protection with green operation LED with interface RS 232 (9pole socket D-subminiature)
Data transfer rate max. 19,2 kBaud; Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C; Connection cable length max. 15 m For visualisation of object data on a PC. Only for bus coupling unit flush-mounted version 2.0 order no. 7504 00 02
for addressing, programming and diagnosis of KNX/EIB components with anti-dismantling protection with green operation LED with interface RS 232 (9pole socket D-subminiature) only for applications requiring FT 1.2 protocols
402
7566 01 12 7566 01 19
1 1
Usable Bluetooth end unit is at the moment Tungsten T3 and T5 from PALM. Only for bus coupling unit plus order no. 7504 00 03
Bluetooth Standard IEEE 802.15.1-2002
Data interface FTP 1.2 with labelling field 7506 01 12 7506 01 19
white, glossy polar white, glossy
ISM frequency band 2,45 GHz with 79 channels; Secure mode 2; Bluetooth send and receive distance -; approx. 10 m with class 3 remote station; approx. 30 m with class 2 remote station; Learning minimum distance approx. 0,5 m; Transmission power max. 2,5 mW; Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C
For bus coupling unit flush-mounted order no. 7504 00 01
white, glossy polar white, glossy
Packing unit
Gateways
Data interface with labelling field white, glossy polar white, glossy
Order no.
1 1
with anti-dismantling protection with 4-line LC display for gateway status and configuration (16 characters per line) transmits and receives Bluetooth and KNX/EIB signals wireless control/status display of e.g. shutters, lights, heating, ventilation, alarm system KNX/EIB operation by rooms or functions with Bluetooth terminal PALM Tungsten T3 and T5 max. 8 Bluetooth end units can be administered from one gateway Bluetooth end units can administer max. 7 gateways the gateway configures the menu compilation of the Bluetooth end units for e.g. switch, push-button, dimmer, shutter and light scene functions value transmitter for dimming, position, brightness and temperature values 1 and 2 byte extension unit for light scene push-button with password protection through six-digit number with KNX/EIB-BT gateway software for Bluetooth terminals
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
INSTABUS KNX/EIB MODUL 2 Order no.
NEW
Packing unit
IR gateway white, glossy polar white, glossy
Order no.
Packing unit
Push-button 4gang
* 7566 03 12 * 7566 03 19
1 1
white, glossy polar white, glossy
7516 41 12 7516 41 19
1 1
Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C
Transmitting carrier frequency area 20 - 70 ; IR learnable distance approx. 20 cm; IR transmission/reception range approx. 10 m; Transmission and reception angle 30 °; Objects 32
Application as 7516 40 .. For bus coupling unit flush-mounted order no. 7504 00 01
The integration of a home cinema system in a cinema scene for example is interesting. When retrieving this scene, the system and the TV automatically switch on, while the blinds lower and the light is dimmed. Only for bus coupling unit flush-mounted version 2.0 order no. 7504 00 02
with anti-dismantling protection for switch, dimmer and shutter functions dimming / position value transmitter 1 byte extension unit for light scene push-button
Push-buttons with labelling field
transmits and receives IR signals and KNX/EIB telegrams converts KNX/EIB telegrams into IR signals and vice-versa this allows activation of music systems, beamers, etc. and volume control, etc. signal repetitions with interval settings on single actuation settable suitable for IR units/transmitters with RC5 and B&O code IR signals learnable (scan) with reset switch to delete all taught-in IR signals for switch, dimmer and IR unit functions dimming / position value transmitter 1 byte extension unit for light scene push-button with slide switch and three-colour status LED for normal, standby and scan mode for wall and ceiling mounting for bus coupling unit flush-mounted version 2.0
Push-button 1gang with labelling field white, glossy polar white, glossy
7516 10 12 7516 10 19
1 1
Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C For bus coupling unit flush-mounted order no. 7504 00 01
with anti-dismantling protection with green operation LED and red status LED for switch, push-button, dimmer and shutter functions dimming / position value transmitter 1 byte extension unit for light scene push-button
Push-button 2gang with labelling field white, glossy polar white, glossy
7516 20 12 7516 20 19
1 1
Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C
Push-buttons Push-button 1gang white, glossy polar white, glossy
7516 11 12 7516 11 19
1 1
with anti-dismantling protection with green operation LED and 2 red status LEDs for switch, push-button, dimmer and shutter functions dimming / position value transmitter 1 byte extension unit for light scene push-button
Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C Application as 7516 10.. For bus coupling unit flush-mounted order no. 7504 00 01
with anti-dismantling protection for switch, push-button, dimmer and shutter functions dimming / position value transmitter 1 byte extension unit for light scene push-button
Push-button 4gang with labelling field white, glossy polar white, glossy
7516 21 12 7516 21 19
Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C Application as 7516 20 .. For bus coupling unit flush-mounted order no. 7504 00 01
7516 40 12 7516 40 19
1 1
Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C
Push-button 2gang white, glossy polar white, glossy
For bus coupling unit flush-mounted order no. 7504 00 01
1 1
For bus coupling unit flush-mounted order no. 7504 00 01
with anti-dismantling protection with green operation LED and 4 red status LEDs for switch, dimmer and shutter functions dimming / position value transmitter 1 byte extension unit for light scene push-button
with anti-dismantling protection for switch, push-button, dimmer and shutter functions dimming / position value transmitter 1 byte extension unit for light scene push-button
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
403
INSTABUS KNX/EIB MODUL 2 Order no.
Packing unit
Order no.
Push-buttons comfort with labelling field
Push-button 4gang comfort with labelling field white, glossy polar white, glossy
Push-button 1gang comfort with labelling field white, glossy polar white, glossy
7516 16 12 7516 16 19
1 1
For bus coupling unit flush-mounted order no. 7504 00 01
For bus coupling unit flush-mounted order no. 7504 00 01
with anti-dismantling protection with green operation LED and 2 red status LEDs for switch, push-button, dimmer and shutter functions value transmitter for dimming, position, brightness and temperature values 1 and 2 byte extension unit for light scene push-button cyclic transmission can also be started via switching object alarm telegram after disconnection from bus coupling unit 1 bit or 1 byte single and two push-button operation parameterisable one push-button operation for switching, pushing, shutters and dimming activation of second user level via object for bus coupling unit flush-mounted
Push-button 2gang comfort with labelling field 1 1
Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C For bus coupling unit flush-mounted order no. 7504 00 01
with anti-dismantling protection with green operation LED and 4 red status LEDs for switch, push-button, dimmer and shutter functions value transmitter for dimming, position, brightness and temperature values 1 and 2 byte extension unit for light scene push-button cyclic transmission can also be started via switching object alarm telegram after disconnection from bus coupling unit 1 bit or 1 byte single and two push-button operation parameterisable one push-button operation for switching, pushing, shutters and dimming activation of second user level via object
404
1 1
Follow-on type. New application!
Follow-on type. New application!
7516 26 12 7516 26 19
7516 46 12 7516 46 19
Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C
Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C
white, glossy polar white, glossy
Packing unit
with anti-dismantling protection with green operation LED and 8 red status LEDs for switch, push-button, dimmer and shutter functions value transmitter for dimming, position, brightness and temperature values 1 and 2 byte extension unit for light scene push-button cyclic transmission can also be started via switching object lockable via 3-button actuation alarm telegram after disconnection from bus coupling unit 1 bit or 1 byte single and two push-button operation parameterisable one push-button operation for switching, pushing, shutters and dimming activation of second user level via object
Light scene push-buttons NEW
Light scene push-button comfort with labelling field white, glossy polar white, glossy
* 7516 87 12 * 7516 87 19
1 1
Light scenes max. 8; Load groups 8 (are increased in case of cascading); Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C The settings of the individual load groups (light scenes) can be varied by way of the second operating level. For bus coupling unit flush-mounted order no. 7504 00 01
with anti-dismantling protection with green operation LED and 8 red status LEDs retrieval, setting and storing of 8 light scenes dimming / position value transmitter 1 byte light scene push-buttons are cascadable second operating level for setting load groups via 3-button actuation lockable via object
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
INSTABUS KNX/EIB MODUL 2 Order no.
Packing unit
Order no.
Light scene push-button comfort with labelling field polar white, glossy
7516 84 19
Room thermostat with button interface and integral bus coupling unit white, glossy polar white, glossy
1
Light scenes max. 8; Load groups 8 (are increased in case of cascading); Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C
For bus coupling unit flush-mounted order no. 7504 00 01
1 1
Binary input 4 parameter defineable for remote sensor order no. 0161
with anti-dismantling protection with green operation LED and 8 red status LEDs retrieval, setting and storing of 8 light scenes dimming / position value transmitter 1 byte light scene push-buttons are cascadable second operating level for setting load groups via 3-button actuation lockable via object
for individual single room control with anti-dismantling protection operating modes:comfort, standby, night lowering, frost/heat protection, dewpoint displayed with LED status-LED red is for heating, blue is for cooling and yellow is for activation with presence button for switching between comfort and standby mode presence button and setting knob can be programmed to have no functions for continuous (PI) or switched (2-point) control for heating and/or cooling mode heating or cooling possible in 2 stages valve protection can be defined conduct can be defined for bus voltage return with programming button and red programming LED with 4 independent binary inputs for potential-free contacts e.g. window magnetic contact 4 binary inputs or 2-3 binary inputs and 1-2 outputs parameterisable bus connection via connecting terminal without spreader claws binary inputs / outputs with screw terminals
Accessories Labelling field with cover plate clear transparent, for white push-buttons
7596 00 01
1
clear transparent, for polar white push-buttons
7596 00 02
1
Not suitable for push-button comfort and light scene push-buttons comfort. for replacement need
Thermostats Object room thermostat with button interface and integral bus coupling unit 7544 12 12 7544 12 19
7544 11 12 7544 11 19
Set value control by setting knob +/- 0 - 10 K; Output current per channel max. 0,8 mA; Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C; Cable length, inputs/outputs, max. 5 m; Sensor cable length max. 50 m
The settings of the individual load groups (light scenes) can be varied by way of the second operating level.
white, glossy polar white, glossy
Packing unit
1 1
Output current per channel max. 0,8 mA; Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C; Cable length, inputs/outputs, max. 5 m; Sensor cable length max. 50 m Binary input 4 parameter defineable for remote sensor order no. 0161
Sensor insert Central plate for sensor insert white, glossy polar white, glossy
7594 04 02 7594 04 09
1 1
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range. Labelling field not usable.
Sensor insert order no. 7594 10 01
for single room control with anti-dismantling protection operating modes: comfort, standby, night lowering, frost/heat protected, dewpoint for continuous (PI) or switched (2-point) control for heating and/or cooling mode heating or cooling possible in 2 stages valve protection can be defined conduct can be defined for bus voltage return with programming button and red programming LED with 4 independent binary inputs for potential-free contacts e.g. window magnetic contact 4 binary inputs or 2-3 binary inputs and 1-2 outputs parameterisable bus connection via connecting terminal without spreader claws binary inputs / outputs with screw terminals
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
with slots for air circulation for e.g. temperature sensor PT100
405
INSTABUS KNX/EIB MODUL 2 Order no.
Packing unit
Controllers
Packing unit
Controller sensor 180 comfort with slide switch for off/automatic/on
Controller sensor 180 white, glossy polar white, glossy
Order no.
7526 11 12 7526 11 19
1 1
Nominal mounting height 1,1 m; Range frontal approx. 10 m; Range lateral each approx. 6 m; Detection field semi-oval shaped approx. 10 x 12 m; Detection angle 180 °; Detection levels 2; Switching segments 72; Response sensitivity programmable approx. 20 - 100 % ; Delay time 10 sec.; Additional delay time programmable 130 msec.- 152 hrs.; Response brightness programmable 1 - 1000 / unlimited Lux; Lockout time 8 msec.- 140 min.; Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C; Dimensions assembling height 23,5 mm When movement of a person is detected a parameter defined data telegram is sent. For bus coupling unit flush-mounted order no. 7504 00 01
U with cover to limit detection angle to 90° with potentiometer for fine adjustment of the response sensitivity parameter defineable lock function also suitable as extension unit cyclic transmission possible
white, glossy polar white, glossy
7526 15 12 7526 15 19
1 1
Nominal mounting height 1,1 m; Range frontal approx. 10 m; Range lateral each approx. 6 m; Detection field semi-oval shaped approx. 10 x 12 m; Detection angle 180 °; Detection levels 2; Switching segments 72; Response sensitivity programmable approx. 20 - 100 % ; Delay time 10 sec.; Additional delay time programmable 130 msec.- 306 hrs.; Potentiometer for additional delay time +/- 50 %; Response brightness programmable 3 - 100 / unlimited Lux; Response brightness adjustable by potentiometer +/- 50 %; Lockout time 8 msec.- 140 min.; Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C; Dimensions assembling height 23,5 mm Attention: Direct sunshine can lead to false alarms when using alarm application. Avoid using detection field equipment on windows. When movement of a person is detected a parameter defined data telegram is sent. For bus coupling unit flush-mounted order no. 7504 00 01
U with cover to limit detection angle to 90° with potentiometers for fine adjustment of the response brightness, sensitivity and delay time with red diagnostic LED for brightness-independent walk test function and disassembly message parameter defineable lock function with lighting and message mode operating mode switched with object functions for lighting operating mode: Switching, Value transmitter and Light scene call also suitable as extension unit cyclic transmission possible alarm telegram after disconnection from bus coupling unit 1 bit
406
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
INSTABUS KNX/EIB MODUL 2 Order no.
Packing unit
Controller sensor 180 white, glossy polar white, glossy
7526 12 12 7526 12 19
1 1
Nominal mounting height 2,2 m; Range frontal approx. 12 m; Range lateral each approx. 6 m; At assembly height 1,1 m; Range frontal approx. 6 m; Range lateral each approx. 3 m; Detection field semi-oval shaped approx. 12 x12 m; Detection angle 180 °; Detection levels 2; Switching segments 72; Response sensitivity programmable approx. 20 - 100 % ; Delay time 10 sec.; Additional delay time programmable 130 msec.- 152 hrs.; Response brightness programmable 1 - 1000 / unlimited Lux; Lockout time 8 msec.- 140 min.; Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C; Dimensions assembling height 23,5 mm Application as for order no. 7526 11 .. When movement of a person is detected a parameter defined data telegram is sent. For bus coupling unit flush-mounted order no. 7504 00 01
V with cover to limit detection angle to 90° with potentiometer for fine adjustment of the response sensitivity parameter defineable lock function also suitable as extension unit cyclic transmission possible
Order no.
Packing unit
Controller sensor 180 comfort with slide switch for off/automatic/on white, glossy polar white, glossy
7526 16 12 7526 16 19
1 1
Nominal mounting height 2,2 m; Range frontal approx. 12 m; Range lateral each approx. 6 m; At assembly height 1,1 m; Range frontal approx. 6 m; Range lateral each approx. 3 m; Detection field semi-oval shaped approx. 12 x 12 m; Detection angle 180 °; Detection levels 2; Switching segments 72; Response sensitivity programmable approx. 20 - 100 % ; Delay time 10 sec.; Additional delay time programmable 130 msec.- 306 hrs.; Potentiometer for additional delay time +/- 50 %; Response brightness programmable 3 - 100 / unlimited Lux; Response brightness adjustable by potentiometer +/- 50 %; Lockout time 8 msec.- 140 min.; Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C; Dimensions assembling height 23,5 mm Application as for order no. 7526 15 .. Attention: Direct sunlight can lead to false alarms when using alarm application. Alignment of detection field towards window must be avoided. When movement of a person is detected a parameter defined data telegram is sent. For bus coupling unit flush-mounted order no. 7504 00 01
V with cover to limit detection angle to 90° with potentiometers for fine adjustment of the response brightness, sensitivity and delay time with red diagnostic LED for brightness-independent walk test function and disassembly message parameter defineable lock function with lighting and message mode operating mode switched with object functions for lighting operating mode: Switching, Value transmitter and Light scene call also suitable as extension unit cyclic transmission possible alarm telegram after disconnection from bus coupling unit 1 bit
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
407
INSTABUS KNX/EIB MODUL 2 Order no.
Packing unit
Order no.
Packing unit
Info display Info display white, glossy polar white, glossy
7586 00 12 7586 00 19
1 1
Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C Commissioning possible only with ETS3 and ETS2 V1.2 SR A. For bus coupling unit flush-mounted order no. 7504 00 01
with anti-dismantling protection LC display with illumination programmable to 1, 2 or 4 lines 16 characters per line on max. 12 pages to display and initiate actions for max. 48 signalling groups with piezo signal generator visual/acoustic alarm message, with reset German/English
Blank plates Blank plate white, glossy polar white, glossy
7594 02 12 7594 02 19
1 1
For bus coupling unit order no. 7504 00 01, 7504 00 02, 7504 00 03
for bus coupling units flush-mounted
408
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
INSTABUS KNX/EIB BERKER S.1/B.1/B.3/B.7 GLAS Order no.
Packing unit
Data interfaces 7506 00 52 7506 00 59 7506 00 89 7506 00 85 7506 00 83
1 1 1 1 1
Data transfer rate max. 9,6 kBaud; Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C; Connection cable length max. 15 m
For visualisation of object data on a PC. Only for bus coupling unit flush-mounted version 2.0 order no. 7504 00 02
for addressing, programming and diagnosis of KNX/EIB components with anti-dismantling protection with green operation LED with interface RS 232 (9pole socket D-subminiature) only for applications requiring FT 1.2 protocols
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
polar white, matt anthracite, matt aluminium, matt
* 7566 03 52 * 7566 03 59 * 7566 03 89 * 7566 03 85 * 7566 03 83
1 1 1 1 1
Only for bus coupling unit flush-mounted version 2.0 order no. 7504 00 02
Data interface FTP 1.2 with labelling field
Data transfer rate max. 19,2 kBaud; Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C; Connection cable length max. 15 m
white, glossy polar white, glossy
The integration of a home cinema system in a cinema scene for example is interesting. When retrieving this scene, the system and the TV automatically switch on, while the blinds lower and the light is dimmed.
for addressing, programming and diagnosis of KNX/EIB components with anti-dismantling protection with green operation LED with interface RS 232 (9pole socket D-subminiature)
7506 01 52 7506 01 59 7506 01 89 7506 01 85 7506 01 83
IR gateway
Transmitting carrier frequency area 20 - 70 ; IR learnable distance approx. 20 cm; IR transmission/reception range approx. 10 m; Transmission and reception angle 30 °; Objects 32
For bus coupling unit flush-mounted order no. 7504 00 01
white, glossy polar white, glossy polar white, matt anthracite, matt aluminium, matt
Packing unit
Gateways NEW
Data interface with labelling field white, glossy polar white, glossy polar white, matt anthracite, matt aluminium, matt
Order no.
1 1 1 1 1
transmits and receives IR signals and KNX/EIB telegrams converts KNX/EIB telegrams into IR signals and vice-versa this allows activation of music systems, beamers, etc. and volume control, etc. signal repetitions with interval settings on single actuation settable suitable for IR units/transmitters with RC5 and B&O code IR signals learnable (scan) with reset switch to delete all taught-in IR signals for switch, dimmer and IR unit functions dimming / position value transmitter 1 byte extension unit for light scene push-button with slide switch and three-colour status LED for normal, standby and scan mode for wall and ceiling mounting for bus coupling unit flush-mounted version 2.0
409
INSTABUS KNX/EIB BERKER S.1/B.1/B.3/B.7 GLAS Order no.
Packing unit
Bluetooth gateway white, glossy polar white, glossy polar white, matt anthracite, matt aluminium, matt
Packing unit
Push-button 2gang with labelling field 7566 01 52 7566 01 59 7566 01 89 7566 01 85 7566 01 83
1 1 1 1 1
ISM frequency band 2,45 GHz with 79 channels; Secure mode 2; Bluetooth send and receive distance -; approx. 10 m with class 3 remote station; approx. 30 m with class 2 remote station; Learning minimum distance approx. 0,5 m; Transmission power max. 2,5 mW; Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C
for white and polar white for anthracite and aluminium
7516 23 80 7516 23 85
1 1
Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C; Labelling field length (W x H) 52,3 x 24,9 mm For bus coupling unit flush-mounted order no. 7504 00 01
Usable Bluetooth end unit is at the moment Tungsten T3 and T5 from PALM. Only for bus coupling unit plus order no. 7504 00 03
Bluetooth Standard IEEE 802.15.1-2002 with anti-dismantling protection with 4-line LC display for gateway status and configuration (16 characters per line) transmits and receives Bluetooth and KNX/EIB signals wireless control/status display of e.g. shutters, lights, heating, ventilation, alarm system KNX/EIB operation by rooms or functions with Bluetooth terminal PALM Tungsten T3 and T5 max. 8 Bluetooth end units can be administered from one gateway Bluetooth end units can administer max. 7 gateways the gateway configures the menu compilation of the Bluetooth end units for e.g. switch, push-button, dimmer, shutter and light scene functions value transmitter for dimming, position, brightness and temperature values 1 and 2 byte extension unit for light scene push-button with password protection through six-digit number with KNX/EIB-BT gateway software for Bluetooth terminals
with anti-dismantling protection with white operation LED and 4 red status LEDs for switch, push-button, dimmer and shutter functions dimming / position value transmitter 1 byte extension unit for light scene push-button
Push-button 3gang with labelling field for white and polar white for anthracite and aluminium
7516 33 80 7516 33 85
1 1
Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C; Labelling field length (W x H) 52,3 x 15,6 mm For bus coupling unit flush-mounted order no. 7504 00 01
with anti-dismantling protection with white operation LED and 6 red status LEDs for switch, push-button, dimmer and shutter functions dimming / position value transmitter 1 byte extension unit for light scene push-button
Push-button 4gang with labelling field for white and polar white for anthracite and aluminium
7516 43 80 7516 43 85
1 1
Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C; Labelling field length (W x H) 52,3 x 24,9 mm For bus coupling unit flush-mounted order no. 7504 00 01
Push-buttons Push-buttons with labelling field Push-button 1gang with labelling field for white and polar white for anthracite and aluminium
Order no.
7516 13 80 7516 13 85
1 1
Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C; Labelling field length (W x H) 52,3 x 52,3 mm For bus coupling unit flush-mounted order no. 7504 00 01
only for frame with large cut-out for installation in 1gang wall boxes with anti-dismantling protection with white operation LED and 8 red status LEDs for switch, dimmer and shutter functions dimming / position value transmitter 1 byte extension unit for light scene push-button
with anti-dismantling protection with white operation LED and 2 red status LEDs for switch, push-button, dimmer and shutter functions dimming / position value transmitter 1 byte extension unit for light scene push-button
410
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
INSTABUS KNX/EIB BERKER S.1/B.1/B.3/B.7 GLAS Order no.
Packing unit
Push-buttons
Order no.
Packing unit
Push-button 2gang with labelling field Push-button 1gang polar white, matt anthracite, matt aluminium, matt
# 7516 11 89 # 7516 11 85 # 7516 11 83
1 1 1
Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C
For bus coupling unit flush-mounted order no. 7504 00 01
Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C
Push-button 4gang with labelling field
Push-button 2gang 1 1 1
Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C
polar white, matt anthracite, matt aluminium, matt
# 7516 40 89 # 7516 40 85 # 7516 40 83
For bus coupling unit flush-mounted order no. 7504 00 01
Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C
with anti-dismantling protection with green operation LED and 4 red status LEDs for switch, dimmer and shutter functions dimming / position value transmitter 1 byte extension unit for light scene push-button
with anti-dismantling protection for switch, push-button, dimmer and shutter functions dimming / position value transmitter 1 byte extension unit for light scene push-button
Push-buttons comfort with labelling field Push-button 1gang comfort with labelling field
Push-button 4gang # 7516 41 89 # 7516 41 85 # 7516 41 83
1 1 1
for white and polar white for anthracite and aluminium
7516 17 80 7516 17 85
Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C
Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C; Labelling field length (W x H) 52,3 x 52,3 mm
Application as 7516 40 ..
Follow-on type. New application!
For bus coupling unit flush-mounted order no. 7504 00 01
For bus coupling unit flush-mounted order no. 7504 00 01
with anti-dismantling protection for switch, dimmer and shutter functions dimming / position value transmitter 1 byte extension unit for light scene push-button
Push-buttons with labelling field Push-button 1gang with labelling field polar white, matt anthracite, matt aluminium, matt
1 1 1
For bus coupling unit flush-mounted order no. 7504 00 01
Application as 7516 20 ..
polar white, matt anthracite, matt aluminium, matt
1 1 1
with anti-dismantling protection with green operation LED and 2 red status LEDs for switch, push-button, dimmer and shutter functions dimming / position value transmitter 1 byte extension unit for light scene push-button
with anti-dismantling protection for switch, push-button, dimmer and shutter functions dimming / position value transmitter 1 byte extension unit for light scene push-button
# 7516 21 89 # 7516 21 85 # 7516 21 83
# 7516 20 89 # 7516 20 85 # 7516 20 83
For bus coupling unit flush-mounted order no. 7504 00 01
Application as 7516 10..
polar white, matt anthracite, matt aluminium, matt
polar white, matt anthracite, matt aluminium, matt
# 7516 10 89 # 7516 10 85 # 7516 10 83
Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C For bus coupling unit flush-mounted order no. 7504 00 01
with anti-dismantling protection with green operation LED and red status LED for switch, push-button, dimmer and shutter functions dimming / position value transmitter 1 byte extension unit for light scene push-button
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
1 1 1
1 1
with anti-dismantling protection with white operation LED and 2 red status LEDs for switch, push-button, dimmer and shutter functions value transmitter for dimming, position, brightness and temperature values 1 and 2 byte extension unit for light scene push-button cyclic transmission can also be started via switching object alarm telegram after disconnection from bus coupling unit 1 bit or 1 byte single and two push-button operation parameterisable one push-button operation for switching, pushing, shutters and dimming activation of second user level via object for bus coupling unit flush-mounted
411
INSTABUS KNX/EIB BERKER S.1/B.1/B.3/B.7 GLAS Order no.
Packing unit
Order no.
Packing unit
Push-button 2gang comfort with labelling field
Push-button 4gang comfort with labelling field
for white and polar white for anthracite and aluminium
for white and polar white for anthracite and aluminium
7516 27 80 7516 27 85
1 1
7516 47 80 7516 47 85
Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C; Labelling field length (W x H) 52,3 x 24,9 mm
Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C; Labelling field length (W x H) 52,3 x 24,9 mm
Follow-on type. New application!
Follow-on type. New application!
For bus coupling unit flush-mounted order no. 7504 00 01
For bus coupling unit flush-mounted order no. 7504 00 01
with anti-dismantling protection with white operation LED and 4 red status LEDs for switch, push-button, dimmer and shutter functions value transmitter for dimming, position, brightness and temperature values 1 and 2 byte extension unit for light scene push-button cyclic transmission can also be started via switching object alarm telegram after disconnection from bus coupling unit 1 bit or 1 byte single and two push-button operation parameterisable one push-button operation for switching, pushing, shutters and dimming activation of second user level via object
Push-button 3gang comfort with labelling field for white and polar white for anthracite and aluminium
7516 37 80 7516 37 85
1 1
1 1
only for frame with large cut-out for installation in 1gang wall boxes with anti-dismantling protection with white operation LED and 8 red status LEDs for switch, push-button, dimmer and shutter functions value transmitter for dimming, position, brightness and temperature values 1 and 2 byte extension unit for light scene push-button cyclic transmission can also be started via switching object lockable via 3-button actuation alarm telegram after disconnection from bus coupling unit 1 bit or 1 byte single and two push-button operation parameterisable one push-button operation for switching, pushing, shutters and dimming activation of second user level via object
Push-button 1gang comfort with labelling field
Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C; Labelling field length (W x H) 52,3 x 15,6 mm
polar white, matt anthracite, matt aluminium, matt
For bus coupling unit flush-mounted order no. 7504 00 01
Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C
# 7516 16 89 # 7516 16 85 # 7516 16 83
1 1 1
Follow-on type. New application! with anti-dismantling protection with white operation LED and 6 red status LEDs for switch, push-button, dimmer and shutter functions value transmitter for dimming, position, brightness and temperature values 1 and 2 byte extension unit for light scene push-button cyclic transmission can also be started via switching object alarm telegram after disconnection from bus coupling unit 1 bit or 1 byte single and two push-button operation parameterisable one push-button operation for switching, pushing, shutters and dimming activation of second user level via object
412
For bus coupling unit flush-mounted order no. 7504 00 01
with anti-dismantling protection with green operation LED and 2 red status LEDs for switch, push-button, dimmer and shutter functions value transmitter for dimming, position, brightness and temperature values 1 and 2 byte extension unit for light scene push-button cyclic transmission can also be started via switching object alarm telegram after disconnection from bus coupling unit 1 bit or 1 byte single and two push-button operation parameterisable one push-button operation for switching, pushing, shutters and dimming activation of second user level via object for bus coupling unit flush-mounted
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
INSTABUS KNX/EIB BERKER S.1/B.1/B.3/B.7 GLAS Order no.
Packing unit
Push-button 2gang comfort with labelling field polar white, matt anthracite, matt aluminium, matt
# 7516 26 89 # 7516 26 85 # 7516 26 83
1 1 1
Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C Follow-on type. New application!
with anti-dismantling protection with green operation LED and 4 red status LEDs for switch, push-button, dimmer and shutter functions value transmitter for dimming, position, brightness and temperature values 1 and 2 byte extension unit for light scene push-button cyclic transmission can also be started via switching object alarm telegram after disconnection from bus coupling unit 1 bit or 1 byte single and two push-button operation parameterisable one push-button operation for switching, pushing, shutters and dimming activation of second user level via object
Push-button 4gang comfort with labelling field # 7516 46 89 # 7516 46 85 # 7516 46 83
1 1 1
Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C Follow-on type. New application! For bus coupling unit flush-mounted order no. 7504 00 01
with anti-dismantling protection with green operation LED and 8 red status LEDs for switch, push-button, dimmer and shutter functions value transmitter for dimming, position, brightness and temperature values 1 and 2 byte extension unit for light scene push-button cyclic transmission can also be started via switching object lockable via 3-button actuation alarm telegram after disconnection from bus coupling unit 1 bit or 1 byte single and two push-button operation parameterisable one push-button operation for switching, pushing, shutters and dimming activation of second user level via object
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
Packing unit
Light scene push-buttons Light scene push-button 8gang comfort with labelling field for white and polar white for anthracite and aluminium
7516 88 80 7516 88 85
1 1
Light scenes max. 8; Load groups 8 (are increased in case of cascading); Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C; Labelling field length (W x H) 52,3 x 24,9 mm
For bus coupling unit flush-mounted order no. 7504 00 01
polar white, matt anthracite, matt aluminium, matt
Order no.
For bus coupling unit flush-mounted order no. 7504 00 01
only for frame with large cut-out for installation in 1gang wall boxes with anti-dismantling protection with white operation LED and 8 red status LEDs retrieval, setting and storing of 8 light scenes dimming / position value transmitter 1 byte light scene push-buttons are cascadable second operating level for setting load groups via 3-button actuation
Light scene push-button comfort with labelling field polar white, matt anthracite, matt aluminium, matt
# 7516 87 89 # 7516 87 85 # 7516 87 83
1 1 1
Light scenes max. 8; Load groups 8 (are increased in case of cascading); Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C The settings of the individual load groups (light scenes) can be varied by way of the second operating level. For bus coupling unit flush-mounted order no. 7504 00 01
with anti-dismantling protection with green operation LED and 8 red status LEDs retrieval, setting and storing of 8 light scenes dimming / position value transmitter 1 byte light scene push-buttons are cascadable second operating level for setting load groups via 3-button actuation lockable via object
413
INSTABUS KNX/EIB BERKER S.1/B.1/B.3/B.7 GLAS Order no.
Packing unit
Light scene push-button comfort with labelling field polar white, matt anthracite, matt aluminium, matt
# 7516 84 89 # 7516 84 85 # 7516 84 83
1 1 1
Light scenes max. 8; Load groups 8 (are increased in case of cascading); Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C The settings of the individual load groups (light scenes) can be varied by way of the second operating level. For bus coupling unit flush-mounted order no. 7504 00 01
with anti-dismantling protection with green operation LED and 8 red status LEDs retrieval, setting and storing of 8 light scenes dimming / position value transmitter 1 byte light scene push-buttons are cascadable second operating level for setting load groups via 3-button actuation lockable via object
414
Order no.
Packing unit
Push-buttons with room thermostat and display Push-button 2gang with room thermostat, display and labelling field for white and polar white for anthracite and aluminium
7566 27 80 7566 27 85
1 1
Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C; Labelling field length (W x H) 52,3 x 15,6 mm For bus coupling unit flush-mounted order no. 7504 00 01
with anti-dismantling protection with white operation LED and 4 red status LEDs LC display with symbol display display of operating mode, controller lockout, room/ outside temperature, time (clock required) with 2 additional display buttons end customer display scope parameterisable for switch, push-button, dimmer, shutter and room thermostat functions value transmitter for dimming, position, brightness and temperature values 1 and 2 byte extension unit for light scene push-button cyclic transmission can also be started via switching object single and two push-button operation parameterisable one push-button operation for switching, pushing, shutters and dimming area dimming shutter operation concept short-long-short and long-short parameterisable rockers or push-button lockable via object alarm telegram after disconnection from bus coupling unit 1 bit or 1 byte with room temperature timer for individual single room control controller operating modes: comfort, standby, night and frost/heat protection mode for heating and/or cooling mode with/without auxiliary step control parameter for heating / cooling unit pre-set for continuous (PI) or switched (2-point) control of max. 2 control circuits temperature measurement via internal and/or external sensor with mean value formation presence button parameterisable to extend comfort separate window contact object indicator objects for heating and cooling with valve protection function object for controller status with button lock function with flash-controller technology programmable with ETS2 as of V1.2a and ETS3
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
INSTABUS KNX/EIB BERKER S.1/B.1/B.3/B.7 GLAS Order no.
Packing unit
Push-button 3gang with room thermostat, display and labelling field for white and polar white for anthracite and aluminium
7566 37 80 7566 37 85
Order no.
Packing unit
Push-button 5gang with room thermostat, display and labelling field 1 1
for white and polar white for anthracite and aluminium
7566 57 80 7566 57 85
Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C; Labelling field length (W x H) 52,3 x 24,9 mm
Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C; Labelling field length (W x H) 52,3 x 15,6 mm
For bus coupling unit flush-mounted order no. 7504 00 01
For bus coupling unit flush-mounted order no. 7504 00 01
only for frame with large cut-out for installation in 1gang wall boxes with anti-dismantling protection with white operation LED and 6 red status LEDs LC display with symbol display display of operating mode, controller lockout, room/ outside temperature, time (clock required) with 2 additional display buttons end customer display scope parameterisable for switch, push-button, dimmer, shutter and room thermostat functions value transmitter for dimming, position, brightness and temperature values 1 and 2 byte extension unit for light scene push-button cyclic transmission can also be started via switching object single and two push-button operation parameterisable one push-button operation for switching, pushing, shutters and dimming area dimming shutter operation concept short-long-short and long-short parameterisable rockers or push-button lockable via object alarm telegram after disconnection from bus coupling unit 1 bit or 1 byte with room temperature timer for individual single room control controller operating modes: comfort, standby, night and frost/heat protection mode for heating and/or cooling mode with/without auxiliary step control parameter for heating / cooling unit pre-set for continuous (PI) or switched (2-point) control of max. 2 control circuits temperature measurement via internal and/or external sensor with mean value formation presence button parameterisable to extend comfort separate window contact object indicator objects for heating and cooling with valve protection function object for controller status with button lock function with flash-controller technology programmable with ETS2 as of V1.2a and ETS3
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
1 1
only for frame with large cut-out for installation in 1gang wall boxes with anti-dismantling protection with white operation LED and 10 red status LEDs LC display with symbol display display of operating mode, controller lockout, room/ outside temperature, time (clock required) with 2 additional display buttons end customer display scope parameterisable for switch, push-button, dimmer, shutter and room thermostat functions value transmitter for dimming, position, brightness and temperature values 1 and 2 byte extension unit for light scene push-button cyclic transmission can also be started via switching object single and two push-button operation parameterisable one push-button operation for switching, pushing, shutters and dimming area dimming shutter operation concept short-long-short and long-short parameterisable rockers or push-button lockable via object alarm telegram after disconnection from bus coupling unit 1 bit or 1 byte with room temperature timer for individual single room control controller operating modes: comfort, standby, night and frost/heat protection mode for heating and/or cooling mode with/without auxiliary step control parameter for heating / cooling unit pre-set for continuous (PI) or switched (2-point) control of max. 2 control circuits temperature measurement via internal and/or external sensor with mean value formation presence button parameterisable to extend comfort separate window contact object indicator objects for heating and cooling with valve protection function object for controller status with button lock function with flash-controller technology programmable with ETS2 as of V1.2a and ETS3
415
INSTABUS KNX/EIB BERKER S.1/B.1/B.3/B.7 GLAS Order no.
Packing unit
Order no.
Thermostats
Room thermostat with button interface and integral bus coupling unit
Object room thermostat with button interface and integral bus coupling unit white, glossy polar white, glossy polar white, matt anthracite, matt aluminium, matt
7544 12 52 7544 12 59 7544 12 89 7544 12 85 7544 12 83
Packing unit
white, glossy polar white, glossy polar white, matt anthracite, matt aluminium, matt
1 1 1 1 1
7544 11 52 7544 11 59 7544 11 89 7544 11 85 7544 11 83
1 1 1 1 1
Set value control by setting knob +/- 0 - 10 K; Output current per channel max. 0,8 mA; Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C; Cable length, inputs/outputs, max. 5 m; Sensor cable length max. 50 m
Output current per channel max. 0,8 mA; Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C; Cable length, inputs/outputs, max. 5 m; Sensor cable length max. 50 m
Binary input 4 parameter defineable for remote sensor order no. 0161
Binary input 4 parameter defineable for remote sensor order no. 0161
for individual single room control with anti-dismantling protection operating modes:comfort, standby, night lowering, frost/heat protection, dewpoint displayed with LED status-LED red is for heating, blue is for cooling and yellow is for activation with presence button for switching between comfort and standby mode presence button and setting knob can be programmed to have no functions for continuous (PI) or switched (2-point) control for heating and/or cooling mode heating or cooling possible in 2 stages valve protection can be defined conduct can be defined for bus voltage return with programming button and red programming LED with 4 independent binary inputs for potential-free contacts e.g. window magnetic contact 4 binary inputs or 2-3 binary inputs and 1-2 outputs parameterisable bus connection via connecting terminal without spreader claws binary inputs / outputs with screw terminals
for single room control with anti-dismantling protection operating modes: comfort, standby, night lowering, frost/heat protected, dewpoint for continuous (PI) or switched (2-point) control for heating and/or cooling mode heating or cooling possible in 2 stages valve protection can be defined conduct can be defined for bus voltage return with programming button and red programming LED with 4 independent binary inputs for potential-free contacts e.g. window magnetic contact 4 binary inputs or 2-3 binary inputs and 1-2 outputs parameterisable bus connection via connecting terminal without spreader claws binary inputs / outputs with screw terminals
Sensor insert Central plate for sensor insert white, glossy polar white, glossy polar white, matt/velvety anthracite, matt aluminium, matt
7594 04 02 7594 04 09 7594 04 89 7594 04 85 7594 04 83
1 1 1 1 1
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range. Labelling field not usable.
Sensor insert order no. 7594 10 01
with slots for air circulation for e.g. temperature sensor PT100
416
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
INSTABUS KNX/EIB BERKER S.1/B.1/B.3/B.7 GLAS Order no.
Packing unit
Controllers
Packing unit
Controller sensor 180 comfort with slide switch for off/automatic/on
Controller sensor 180 white, glossy polar white, glossy polar white, matt anthracite, matt aluminium, matt
Order no.
7526 11 52 7526 11 59 7526 11 89 7526 11 85 7526 11 83
1 1 1 1 1
Nominal mounting height 1,1 m; Range frontal approx. 10 m; Range lateral each approx. 6 m; Detection field semi-oval shaped approx. 10 x 12 m; Detection angle 180 °; Detection levels 2; Switching segments 72; Response sensitivity programmable approx. 20 - 100 % ; Delay time 10 sec.; Additional delay time programmable 130 msec.- 152 hrs.; Response brightness programmable 1 - 1000 / unlimited Lux; Lockout time 8 msec.- 140 min.; Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C; Dimensions assembling height 23,5 mm When movement of a person is detected a parameter defined data telegram is sent. For bus coupling unit flush-mounted order no. 7504 00 01
U with cover to limit detection angle to 90° with potentiometer for fine adjustment of the response sensitivity parameter defineable lock function also suitable as extension unit cyclic transmission possible
white, glossy polar white, glossy polar white, matt anthracite, matt aluminium, matt
7526 15 52 7526 15 59 7526 15 89 7526 15 85 7526 15 83
1 1 1 1 1
Nominal mounting height 1,1 m; Range frontal approx. 10 m; Range lateral each approx. 6 m; Detection field semi-oval shaped approx. 10 x 12 m; Detection angle 180 °; Detection levels 2; Switching segments 72; Response sensitivity programmable approx. 20 - 100 % ; Delay time 10 sec.; Additional delay time programmable 130 msec.- 306 hrs.; Potentiometer for additional delay time +/- 50 %; Response brightness programmable 3 - 100 / unlimited Lux; Response brightness adjustable by potentiometer +/- 50 %; Lockout time 8 msec.- 140 min.; Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C; Dimensions assembling height 23,5 mm Attention: Direct sunshine can lead to false alarms when using alarm application. Avoid using detection field equipment on windows. When movement of a person is detected a parameter defined data telegram is sent. For bus coupling unit flush-mounted order no. 7504 00 01
U with cover to limit detection angle to 90° with potentiometers for fine adjustment of the response brightness, sensitivity and delay time with red diagnostic LED for brightness-independent walk test function and disassembly message parameter defineable lock function with lighting and message mode operating mode switched with object functions for lighting operating mode: Switching, Value transmitter and Light scene call also suitable as extension unit cyclic transmission possible alarm telegram after disconnection from bus coupling unit 1 bit
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
417
INSTABUS KNX/EIB BERKER S.1/B.1/B.3/B.7 GLAS Order no.
Packing unit
Controller sensor 180 white, glossy polar white, glossy polar white, matt anthracite, matt aluminium, matt
7526 12 52 7526 12 59 7526 12 89 7526 12 85 7526 12 83
1 1 1 1 1
Nominal mounting height 2,2 m; Range frontal approx. 12 m; Range lateral each approx. 6 m; At assembly height 1,1 m; Range frontal approx. 6 m; Range lateral each approx. 3 m; Detection field semi-oval shaped approx. 12 x 12 m; Detection angle 180 °; Detection levels 2; Switching segments 72; Response sensitivity programmable approx. 20 - 100 % ; Delay time 10 sec.; Additional delay time programmable 130 msec.- 152 hrs.; Response brightness programmable 1 - 1000 / unlimited Lux; Lockout time 8 msec.- 140 min.; Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C; Dimensions assembling height 23,5 mm Application as for order no. 7526 11 .. When movement of a person is detected a parameter defined data telegram is sent. For bus coupling unit flush-mounted order no. 7504 00 01
V with cover to limit detection angle to 90° with potentiometer for fine adjustment of the response sensitivity parameter defineable lock function also suitable as extension unit cyclic transmission possible
Order no.
Packing unit
Controller sensor 180 comfort with slide switch for off/automatic/on white, glossy polar white, glossy polar white, matt anthracite, matt aluminium, matt
7526 16 52 7526 16 59 7526 16 89 7526 16 85 7526 16 83
1 1 1 1 1
Nominal mounting height 2,2 m; Range frontal approx. 12 m; Range lateral each approx. 6 m; At assembly height 1,1 m; Range frontal approx. 6 m; Range lateral each approx. 3 m; Detection field semi-oval shaped approx. 12 x 12 m; Detection angle 180 °; Detection levels 2; Switching segments 72; Response sensitivity programmable approx. 20 - 100 % ; Delay time 10 sec.; Additional delay time programmable 130 msec.- 306 hrs.; Potentiometer for additional delay time +/- 50 %; Response brightness programmable 3 - 100 / unlimited Lux; Response brightness adjustable by potentiometer +/- 50 %; Lockout time 8 msec.- 140 min.; Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C; Dimensions assembling height 23,5 mm Application as for order no. 7526 15 .. Attention: Direct sunlight can lead to false alarms when using alarm application. Alignment of detection field towards window must be avoided. When movement of a person is detected a parameter defined data telegram is sent. For bus coupling unit flush-mounted order no. 7504 00 01
V with cover to limit detection angle to 90° with potentiometers for fine adjustment of the response brightness, sensitivity and delay time with red diagnostic LED for brightness-independent walk test function and disassembly message parameter defineable lock function with lighting and message mode operating mode switched with object functions for lighting operating mode: Switching, Value transmitter and Light scene call also suitable as extension unit cyclic transmission possible alarm telegram after disconnection from bus coupling unit 1 bit
418
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
INSTABUS KNX/EIB BERKER S.1/B.1/B.3/B.7 GLAS Order no.
Packing unit
Order no.
Packing unit
Info display Info display white, glossy polar white, glossy polar white, matt anthracite, matt aluminium, matt
7586 00 52 7586 00 59 7586 00 89 7586 00 85 7586 00 83
1 1 1 1 1
Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C Commissioning possible only with ETS3 and ETS2 V1.2 SR A. For bus coupling unit flush-mounted order no. 7504 00 01
with anti-dismantling protection LC display with illumination programmable to 1, 2 or 4 lines 16 characters per line on max. 12 pages to display and initiate actions for max. 48 signalling groups with piezo signal generator visual/acoustic alarm message, with reset German/English
Blank plates Blank plate white, glossy polar white, glossy polar white, matt anthracite, matt aluminium, matt
7594 02 52 7594 02 59 7594 02 89 7594 02 85 7594 02 83
1 1 1 1 1
For bus coupling unit order no. 7504 00 01, 7504 00 02, 7504 00 03
for bus coupling units flush-mounted
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
419
INSTABUS KNX/EIB BERKER Q.1 Order no.
Packing unit
Order no.
Data interfaces
Gateways
NEW
NEW
Data interface with labelling field polar white, velvety
* 7506 00 29
1
Data transfer rate max. 9,6 kBaud; Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C; Connection cable length max. 15 m
Available from 04/2009
for addressing, programming and diagnosis of KNX/EIB components with anti-dismantling protection with green operation LED with interface RS 232 (9pole socket D-subminiature)
* 7506 01 29
Data transfer rate max. 19,2 kBaud; Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C; Connection cable length max. 15 m
For visualisation of object data on a PC. Only for bus coupling unit flush-mounted version 2.0 order no. 7504 00 02 Available from 04/2009
for addressing, programming and diagnosis of KNX/EIB components with anti-dismantling protection with green operation LED with interface RS 232 (9pole socket D-subminiature) only for applications requiring FT 1.2 protocols
420
polar white, velvety
* 7566 01 29
1
Usable Bluetooth end unit is at the moment Tungsten T3 and T5 from PALM. Only for bus coupling unit plus order no. 7504 00 03
Bluetooth Standard IEEE 802.15.1-2002 Available from 04/2009
Data interface FTP 1.2 with labelling field polar white, velvety
Bluetooth gateway ISM frequency band 2,45 GHz with 79 channels; Secure mode 2; Bluetooth send and receive distance -; approx. 10 m with class 3 remote station; approx. 30 m with class 2 remote station; Learning minimum distance approx. 0,5 m; Transmission power max. 2,5 mW; Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C
For bus coupling unit flush-mounted order no. 7504 00 01
NEW
Packing unit
1
with anti-dismantling protection with 4-line LC display for gateway status and configuration (16 characters per line) transmits and receives Bluetooth and KNX/EIB signals wireless control/status display of e.g. shutters, lights, heating, ventilation, alarm system KNX/EIB operation by rooms or functions with Bluetooth terminal PALM Tungsten T3 and T5 max. 8 Bluetooth end units can be administered from one gateway Bluetooth end units can administer max. 7 gateways the gateway configures the menu compilation of the Bluetooth end units for e.g. switch, push-button, dimmer, shutter and light scene functions value transmitter for dimming, position, brightness and temperature values 1 and 2 byte extension unit for light scene push-button with password protection through six-digit number with KNX/EIB-BT gateway software for Bluetooth terminals
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
INSTABUS KNX/EIB BERKER Q.1 Order no.
NEW
Packing unit
NEW
IR gateway polar white, velvety
Order no.
* 7566 03 29
1
Available from 04/2009
with anti-dismantling protection with white operation LED and 6 orange status LEDs for switch, push-button, dimmer and shutter functions dimming / position value transmitter 1 byte extension unit for light scene push-button
Available from 04/2009
NEW
Push-button 4gang with labelling fields and bus coupling unit polar white, velvety
* 7514 42 29
1
Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C; Labelling field length (W x H) 56,4 x 12 mm Labelling field sheets order no. 9498 32 04 separate available. Available from 04/2009
with anti-dismantling protection with white operation LED and 8 orange status LEDs for switch, dimmer and shutter functions dimming / position value transmitter 1 byte extension unit for light scene push-button
Push-buttons comfort with labelling field
Push-buttons
NEW
Push-buttons with labelling field Push-button 1gang with labelling field and bus coupling unit polar white, velvety
* 7514 12 29
1
Labelling field sheets order no. 9498 29 01 separate available. Available from 04/2009
with anti-dismantling protection with white operation LED and 2 orange status LEDs for switch, push-button, dimmer and shutter functions dimming / position value transmitter 1 byte extension unit for light scene push-button
Push-button 2gang with labelling field and bus coupling unit polar white, velvety
* 7514 22 29
Push-button 1gang comfort with labelling field and bus coupling unit polar white, velvety
Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C; Labelling field length (W x H) 56,4 x 56,4 mm
NEW
1
Labelling field sheets order no. 9498 31 03 separate available.
Only for bus coupling unit flush-mounted version 2.0 order no. 7504 00 02
NEW
* 7514 32 29
Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C; Labelling field length (W x H) 56,4 x 17 mm
The integration of a home cinema system in a cinema scene for example is interesting. When retrieving this scene, the system and the TV automatically switch on, while the blinds lower and the light is dimmed.
transmits and receives IR signals and KNX/EIB telegrams converts KNX/EIB telegrams into IR signals and vice-versa this allows activation of music systems, beamers, etc. and volume control, etc. signal repetitions with interval settings on single actuation settable suitable for IR units/transmitters with RC5 and B&O code IR signals learnable (scan) with reset switch to delete all taught-in IR signals for switch, dimmer and IR unit functions dimming / position value transmitter 1 byte extension unit for light scene push-button with slide switch and three-colour status LED for normal, standby and scan mode for wall and ceiling mounting for bus coupling unit flush-mounted version 2.0
Push-button 3gang with labelling fields and bus coupling unit polar white, velvety
Transmitting carrier frequency area 20 - 70 / 455 kHz; IR learnable distance approx. 20 cm; IR transmission/reception range approx. 10 m; Transmission and reception angle 30 °; Objects 32
Packing unit
1
Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C; Labelling field length (W x H) 56,4 x 26,8 mm Labelling field sheets order no. 9498 30 02 separate available.
* 7514 13 29
1
Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C; Labelling field length (W x H) 56,4 x 56,4 mm Labelling field sheets order no. 9498 29 01 separate available. Available from 04/2009
with anti-dismantling protection with white operation LED and 2 orange status LEDs for switch, push-button, dimmer and shutter functions value transmitter for dimming, position, brightness and temperature values 1 and 2 byte retrieval, setting and storing of 8 light scenes extension unit for light scene push-button can be used as a controller extension unit cyclic transmission can also be started via switching object single and two push-button operation parameterisable one push-button operation for switching, pushing, shutters and dimming
Available from 04/2009
with anti-dismantling protection with white operation LED and 4 orange status LEDs for switch, push-button, dimmer and shutter functions dimming / position value transmitter 1 byte extension unit for light scene push-button "#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
421
INSTABUS KNX/EIB BERKER Q.1 Order no.
NEW
Packing unit
NEW
Push-button 2gang comfort with labelling fields and bus coupling unit polar white, velvety
* 7514 23 29
1
Packing unit
Push-button 4gang comfort with labelling fields and bus coupling unit polar white, velvety
* 7514 43 29
1
Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C; Labelling field length (W x H) 56,4 x 26,8 mm
Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C; Labelling field length (W x H) 56,4 x 12 mm
Labelling field sheets order no. 9498 30 02 separate available.
Labelling field sheets order no. 9498 32 04 separate available.
Available from 04/2009
Available from 04/2009
with anti-dismantling protection with white operation LED and 4 orange status LEDs for switch, dimmer and shutter functions value transmitter for dimming, position, brightness and temperature values 1 and 2 byte retrieval, setting and storing of 8 light scenes extension unit for light scene push-button can be used as a controller extension unit cyclic transmission can also be started via switching object single and two push-button operation parameterisable one push-button operation for switching, pushing, shutters and dimming NEW
Order no.
with anti-dismantling protection with white operation LED and 8 orange status LEDs for switch, push-button, dimmer and shutter functions value transmitter for dimming, position, brightness and temperature values 1 and 2 byte retrieval, setting and storing of 8 light scenes extension unit for light scene push-button can be used as a controller extension unit cyclic transmission can also be started via switching object single and two push-button operation parameterisable one push-button operation for switching, pushing, shutters and dimming
Push-button 3gang comfort with labelling fields and bus coupling unit polar white, velvety
* 7514 33 29
1
Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C; Labelling field length (W x H) 56,4 x 17 mm Labelling field sheets order no. 9498 31 03 separate available. Available from 04/2009
with anti-dismantling protection with white operation LED and 6 orange status LEDs for switch, push-button, dimmer and shutter functions value transmitter for dimming, position, brightness and temperature values 1 and 2 byte retrieval, setting and storing of 8 light scenes extension unit for light scene push-button can be used as a controller extension unit cyclic transmission can also be started via switching object single and two push-button operation parameterisable one push-button operation for switching, pushing, shutters and dimming
422
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
INSTABUS KNX/EIB BERKER Q.1 Order no.
Packing unit
NEW
Push-buttons with room thermostat and display NEW
Push-button 2gang with labelling fields, room thermostat, display and bus coupling unit polar white, velvety
* 7566 27 29
1
Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C; Labelling field length (W x H) 56,4 x 17 mm Labelling field sheets order no. 9498 31 03 separate available. Available from 04/2009
with anti-dismantling protection with white operation LED and 4 orange status LEDs LC display with symbol display display of operating mode, controller lockout, room/ outside temperature, time (clock required) with 2 additional display buttons end customer display scope parameterisable for switch, push-button, dimmer, shutter and room thermostat functions value transmitter for dimming, position, brightness and temperature values 1 and 2 byte retrieval, setting and storing of 8 light scenes extension unit for light scene push-button cyclic transmission can also be started via switching object single and two push-button operation parameterisable one push-button operation for switching, pushing, shutters and dimming area dimming shutter operation concept short-long-short and long-short parameterisable rockers or push-button lockable via object with room temperature timer for individual single room control controller operating modes: comfort, standby, night and frost/heat protection mode for heating and/or cooling mode with/without auxiliary step control parameter for heating / cooling unit pre-set for continuous (PI) or switched (2-point) control of max. 2 control circuits temperature measurement via internal and/or external sensor with mean value formation presence button parameterisable to extend comfort separate window contact object indicator objects for heating and cooling with valve protection function object for controller status with button lock function with flash-controller technology programmable with ETS2 as of V1.2a and ETS3
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
Order no.
Packing unit
Push-button 3gang with labelling fields, room thermostat, display and bus coupling unit polar white, velvety
* 7566 37 29
1
Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C; Labelling field length (W x H) 56,4 x 26,8 mm Labelling field sheets order no. 9498 30 02 separate available. Available from 04/2009
only for frame with large cut-out for installation in 1gang wall boxes with anti-dismantling protection with white operation LED and 6 orange status LEDs LC display with symbol display display of operating mode, controller lockout, room/ outside temperature, time (clock required) with 2 additional display buttons end customer display scope parameterisable for switch, push-button, dimmer, shutter and room thermostat functions value transmitter for dimming, position, brightness and temperature values 1 and 2 byte retrieval, setting and storing of 8 light scenes extension unit for light scene push-button cyclic transmission can also be started via switching object single and two push-button operation parameterisable one push-button operation for switching, pushing, shutters and dimming area dimming shutter operation concept short-long-short and long-short parameterisable rockers or push-button lockable via object alarm telegram after disconnection from bus coupling unit 1 bit or 1 byte with room temperature timer for individual single room control controller operating modes: comfort, standby, night and frost/heat protection mode for heating and/or cooling mode with/without auxiliary step control parameter for heating / cooling unit pre-set for continuous (PI) or switched (2-point) control of max. 2 control circuits temperature measurement via internal and/or external sensor with mean value formation presence button parameterisable to extend comfort separate window contact object indicator objects for heating and cooling with valve protection function object for controller status with button lock function with flash-controller technology programmable with ETS2 as of V1.2a and ETS3
423
INSTABUS KNX/EIB BERKER Q.1 Order no.
NEW
Packing unit
Push-button 5gang with labelling fields, room thermostat, display and bus coupling unit polar white, velvety, for white and polar white
* 7566 57 29
Order no.
Thermostats NEW
1
* 7544 12 29
1
Output current per channel max. 0,8 mA; Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C; Cable length, inputs/outputs, max. 5 m; Sensor cable length max. 50 m
Labelling field sheets order no. 9498 31 03 separate available.
Binary input 4 parameter defineable for remote sensor order no. 0161
Available from 04/2009
424
Object room thermostat with button interface and integral bus coupling unit polar white, velvety
Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C; Labelling field length (W x H) 56,4 x 17 mm
only for frame with large cut-out for installation in 1gang wall boxes with anti-dismantling protection with white operation LED and 10 red status LEDs LC display with symbol display display of operating mode, controller lockout, room/ outside temperature, time (clock required) with 2 additional display buttons end customer display scope parameterisable for switch, push-button, dimmer, shutter and room thermostat functions value transmitter for dimming, position, brightness and temperature values 1 and 2 byte retrieval, setting and storing of 8 light scenes extension unit for light scene push-button cyclic transmission can also be started via switching object single and two push-button operation parameterisable one push-button operation for switching, pushing, shutters and dimming area dimming shutter operation concept short-long-short and long-short parameterisable rockers or push-button lockable via object alarm telegram after disconnection from bus coupling unit 1 bit or 1 byte with room temperature timer for individual single room control controller operating modes: comfort, standby, night and frost/heat protection mode for heating and/or cooling mode with/without auxiliary step control parameter for heating / cooling unit pre-set for continuous (PI) or switched (2-point) control of max. 2 control circuits temperature measurement via internal and/or external sensor with mean value formation presence button parameterisable to extend comfort separate window contact object indicator objects for heating and cooling with valve protection function object for controller status with button lock function with flash-controller technology programmable with ETS2 as of V1.2a and ETS3
Packing unit
Available from 04/2009
for single room control with anti-dismantling protection operating modes: comfort, standby, night lowering, frost/heat protected, dewpoint for continuous (PI) or switched (2-point) control for heating and/or cooling mode heating or cooling possible in 2 stages valve protection can be defined conduct can be defined for bus voltage return with programming button and red programming LED with 4 independent binary inputs for potential-free contacts e.g. window magnetic contact 4 binary inputs or 2-3 binary inputs and 1-2 outputs parameterisable bus connection via connecting terminal without spreader claws binary inputs / outputs with screw terminals
Sensor insert Central plate for sensor insert white, glossy polar white, glossy
7594 04 02 7594 04 09
1 1
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range. Labelling field not usable.
Sensor insert order no. 7594 10 01
with slots for air circulation for e.g. temperature sensor PT100
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
INSTABUS KNX/EIB BERKER Q.1 Order no.
Packing unit
NEW
Controllers NEW
Order no.
Controller sensor 180 polar white, velvety
* 7526 12 29
1
Nominal mounting height 2,2 m; Range frontal approx. 12 m; Range lateral each approx. 6 m; At assembly height 1,1 m; Range frontal approx. 6 m; Range lateral each approx. 3 m; Detection field semi-oval shaped approx. 12 x 12 m; Detection angle 180 °; Detection levels 2; Switching segments 72; Response sensitivity programmable approx. 20 - 100 % ; Delay time 10 sec.; Additional delay time programmable 130 msec.- 152 hrs.; Response brightness programmable 1 - 1000 / unlimited Lux; Lockout time 8 msec.- 140 min.; Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C; Dimensions assembling height 23,5 mm Application as for order no. 7526 11 .. When movement of a person is detected a parameter defined data telegram is sent. For bus coupling unit flush-mounted order no. 7504 00 01
V Available from 04/2009
with cover to limit detection angle to 90° with potentiometer for fine adjustment of the response sensitivity parameter defineable lock function also suitable as extension unit cyclic transmission possible
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
Packing unit
Controller sensor 180 comfort with slide switch for off/automatic/on polar white, velvety
* 7526 15 29
1
Nominal mounting height 1,1 m; Range frontal approx. 10 m; Range lateral each approx. 6 m; Detection field semi-oval shaped approx. 10 x 12 m; Detection angle 180 °; Detection levels 2; Switching segments 72; Response sensitivity programmable approx. 20 - 100 % ; Delay time 10 sec.; Additional delay time programmable 130 msec.- 306 hrs.; Potentiometer for additional delay time +/- 50 %; Response brightness programmable 3 - 100 / unlimited Lux; Response brightness adjustable by potentiometer +/- 50 %; Lockout time 8 msec.- 140 min.; Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C; Dimensions assembling height 23,5 mm Attention: Direct sunshine can lead to false alarms when using alarm application. Avoid using detection field equipment on windows. When movement of a person is detected a parameter defined data telegram is sent. For bus coupling unit flush-mounted order no. 7504 00 01
U Available from 04/2009
with cover to limit detection angle to 90° with potentiometers for fine adjustment of the response brightness, sensitivity and delay time with red diagnostic LED for brightness-independent walk test function and disassembly message parameter defineable lock function with lighting and message mode operating mode switched with object functions for lighting operating mode: Switching, Value transmitter and Light scene call also suitable as extension unit cyclic transmission possible alarm telegram after disconnection from bus coupling unit 1 bit
425
INSTABUS KNX/EIB BERKER Q.1 Order no.
NEW
Packing unit
* 7526 16 29
Packing unit
Info display
Controller sensor 180 comfort with slide switch for off/automatic/on polar white, velvety
Order no.
NEW
1
Nominal mounting height 2,2 m; Range frontal approx. 12 m; Range lateral each approx. 6 m; At assembly height 1,1 m; Range frontal approx. 6 m; Range lateral each approx. 3 m; Detection field semi-oval shaped approx. 12 x 12 m; Detection angle 180 °; Detection levels 2; Switching segments 72; Response sensitivity programmable approx. 20 - 100 % ; Delay time 10 sec.; Additional delay time programmable 130 msec.- 306 hrs.; Potentiometer for additional delay time +/- 50 %; Response brightness programmable 3 - 100 / unlimited Lux; Response brightness adjustable by potentiometer +/- 50 %; Lockout time 8 msec.- 140 min.; Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C; Dimensions assembling height 23,5 mm Application as for order no. 7526 15 .. Attention: Direct sunlight can lead to false alarms when using alarm application. Alignment of detection field towards window must be avoided. When movement of a person is detected a parameter defined data telegram is sent.
Info display polar white, velvety
* 7586 00 29
1
Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C
Commissioning possible only with ETS3 and ETS2 V1.2 SR A. For bus coupling unit flush-mounted order no. 7504 00 01 Available from 04/2009
with anti-dismantling protection LC display with illumination programmable to 1, 2 or 4 lines 16 characters per line on max. 12 pages to display and initiate actions for max. 48 signalling groups with piezo signal generator visual/acoustic alarm message, with reset German/English
Blank plates NEW
Blank plate polar white, velvety
* 7594 02 29
1
For bus coupling unit order no. 7504 00 01, 7504 00 02, 7504 00 03 Available from 04/2009
for bus coupling units flush-mounted
For bus coupling unit flush-mounted order no. 7504 00 01
V Available from 04/2009
with cover to limit detection angle to 90° with potentiometers for fine adjustment of the response brightness, sensitivity and delay time with red diagnostic LED for brightness-independent walk test function and disassembly message parameter defineable lock function with lighting and message mode operating mode switched with object functions for lighting operating mode: Switching, Value transmitter and Light scene call also suitable as extension unit cyclic transmission possible alarm telegram after disconnection from bus coupling unit 1 bit
426
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
INSTABUS KNX/EIB BERKER K.1/K.5 Order no.
Packing unit
Order no.
Data interfaces
Gateways
NEW
NEW
Data interface with labelling field white, glossy polar white, glossy anthracite, matt aluminium, matt stainless steel, lacquered
7506 00 72 7506 00 79 7506 00 75
* * 7506 00 74 7506 00 73
white, glossy polar white, glossy
1
aluminium, matt
Data transfer rate max. 9,6 kBaud; Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C; Connection cable length max. 15 m
For bus coupling unit flush-mounted order no. 7504 00 01
aluminium, matt stainless steel, lacquered
* * 7506 01 74 7506 01 73
Data transfer rate max. 19,2 kBaud; Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C; Connection cable length max. 15 m Labelling field height arranged for 6 mm P-touch strips. For visualisation of object data on a PC.
1 1 1
Only for bus coupling unit flush-mounted version 2.0 order no. 7504 00 02
Data interface FTP 1.2 with labelling field 7506 01 72 7506 01 79 7506 01 75
stainless steel, lacquered
1 1
The integration of a home cinema system in a cinema scene for example is interesting. When retrieving this scene, the system and the TV automatically switch on, while the blinds lower and the light is dimmed.
for addressing, programming and diagnosis of KNX/EIB components with anti-dismantling protection with green operation LED with interface RS 232 (9pole socket D-subminiature)
white, glossy polar white, glossy anthracite, matt
anthracite, matt
* 7566 03 72 * 7566 03 79 * 7566 03 75 * 7566 03 74 * 7566 03 73
Transmitting carrier frequency area 20 - 70 ; IR learnable distance approx. 20 cm; IR transmission/reception range approx. 10 m; Transmission and reception angle 30 °; Objects 32
Labelling field height arranged for 6 mm P-touch strips.
NEW
IR gateway
1 1 1 1
Packing unit
1 1 1 1 1
transmits and receives IR signals and KNX/EIB telegrams converts KNX/EIB telegrams into IR signals and vice-versa this allows activation of music systems, beamers, etc. and volume control, etc. signal repetitions with interval settings on single actuation settable suitable for IR units/transmitters with RC5 and B&O code IR signals learnable (scan) with reset switch to delete all taught-in IR signals for switch, dimmer and IR unit functions dimming / position value transmitter 1 byte extension unit for light scene push-button with slide switch and three-colour status LED for normal, standby and scan mode for wall and ceiling mounting for bus coupling unit flush-mounted version 2.0
Only for bus coupling unit flush-mounted version 2.0 order no. 7504 00 02
for addressing, programming and diagnosis of KNX/EIB components with anti-dismantling protection with green operation LED with interface RS 232 (9pole socket D-subminiature) only for applications requiring FT 1.2 protocols
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
427
INSTABUS KNX/EIB BERKER K.1/K.5 Order no.
Packing unit
NEW
Gateways NEW
Order no.
white, glossy polar white, glossy anthracite, matt aluminium, matt stainless steel, lacquered
7566 01 72 7566 01 79 7566 01 75
* * 7566 01 74 7566 01 73
1 1 1
aluminium stainless steel
1 1
* * 7516 23 74 7516 23 73
1 1 1 1
For bus coupling unit flush-mounted order no. 7504 00 01
Usable Bluetooth end unit is at the moment Tungsten T3 and T5 from PALM.
with anti-dismantling protection with white operation LED and 4 red status LEDs for switch, push-button, dimmer and shutter functions dimming / position value transmitter 1 byte extension unit for light scene push-button NEW
Only for bus coupling unit plus order no. 7504 00 03
with anti-dismantling protection with 4-line LC display for gateway status and configuration (16 characters per line) transmits and receives Bluetooth and KNX/EIB signals wireless control/status display of e.g. shutters, lights, heating, ventilation, alarm system KNX/EIB operation by rooms or functions with Bluetooth terminal PALM Tungsten T3 and T5 max. 8 Bluetooth end units can be administered from one gateway Bluetooth end units can administer max. 7 gateways the gateway configures the menu compilation of the Bluetooth end units for e.g. switch, push-button, dimmer, shutter and light scene functions value transmitter for dimming, position, brightness and temperature values 1 and 2 byte extension unit for light scene push-button with password protection through six-digit number with KNX/EIB-BT gateway software for Bluetooth terminals
Push-buttons Push-buttons with labelling field
Push-button 3gang with labelling field for white and polar white anthracite
Bluetooth Standard IEEE 802.15.1-2002
aluminium stainless steel
7516 33 70 7516 33 75
* * 7516 33 74 7516 33 73
1 1 1 1
Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C; Labelling field length (W x H) 66,8 x 15,7 mm For bus coupling unit flush-mounted order no. 7504 00 01
with anti-dismantling protection with white operation LED and 6 red status LEDs for switch, push-button, dimmer and shutter functions dimming / position value transmitter 1 byte extension unit for light scene push-button NEW
Push-button 4gang with labelling field for white and polar white anthracite aluminium stainless steel
7516 43 70 7516 43 75
* * 7516 43 74 7516 43 73
1 1 1 1
Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C; Labelling field length (W x H) 66,8 x 25 mm For bus coupling unit flush-mounted order no. 7504 00 01
Push-button 1gang with labelling field for white and polar white 7516 13 70 anthracite * 7516 13 75 aluminium * 7516 13 74 7516 13 73 stainless steel
7516 23 70 7516 23 75
Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C; Labelling field length (W x H) 66,8 x 25 mm
ISM frequency band 2,45 GHz with 79 channels; Secure mode 2; Bluetooth send and receive distance -; approx. 10 m with class 3 remote station; approx. 30 m with class 2 remote station; Learning minimum distance approx. 0,5 m; Transmission power max. 2,5 mW; Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C
NEW
Push-button 2gang with labelling field for white and polar white anthracite
Bluetooth gateway
Packing unit
1 1 1 1
Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C; Labelling field length (W x H) 66,8 x 52,8 mm For bus coupling unit flush-mounted order no. 7504 00 01
only for frame with large cut-out for installation in 1gang wall boxes with anti-dismantling protection with white operation LED and 8 red status LEDs for switch, dimmer and shutter functions dimming / position value transmitter 1 byte extension unit for light scene push-button
with anti-dismantling protection with white operation LED and 2 red status LEDs for switch, push-button, dimmer and shutter functions dimming / position value transmitter 1 byte extension unit for light scene push-button
428
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
INSTABUS KNX/EIB BERKER K.1/K.5 Order no.
Packing unit
NEW
Push-buttons comfort with labelling field NEW
Order no.
for white and polar white anthracite aluminium stainless steel
7516 17 70 7516 17 75
* * 7516 17 74 7516 17 73
1 1
aluminium
1
Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C; Labelling field length (W x H) 66,8 x 15,7 mm
with anti-dismantling protection with white operation LED and 2 red status LEDs for switch, push-button, dimmer and shutter functions value transmitter for dimming, position, brightness and temperature values 1 and 2 byte extension unit for light scene push-button cyclic transmission can also be started via switching object alarm telegram after disconnection from bus coupling unit 1 bit or 1 byte single and two push-button operation parameterisable one push-button operation for switching, pushing, shutters and dimming activation of second user level via object for bus coupling unit flush-mounted
Push-button 2gang comfort with labelling field
aluminium stainless steel
* * 7516 27 74 7516 27 73
1 1 1 1
Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C; Labelling field length (W x H) 66,8 x 25 mm Follow-on type. New application! For bus coupling unit flush-mounted order no. 7504 00 01
with anti-dismantling protection with white operation LED and 4 red status LEDs for switch, push-button, dimmer and shutter functions value transmitter for dimming, position, brightness and temperature values 1 and 2 byte extension unit for light scene push-button cyclic transmission can also be started via switching object alarm telegram after disconnection from bus coupling unit 1 bit or 1 byte single and two push-button operation parameterisable one push-button operation for switching, pushing, shutters and dimming activation of second user level via object
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
7516 37 73
1 1 1 1
For bus coupling unit flush-mounted order no. 7504 00 01
For bus coupling unit flush-mounted order no. 7504 00 01
7516 27 70 7516 27 75
* * 7516 37 74
stainless steel
Follow-on type. New application!
for white and polar white anthracite
7516 37 70 7516 37 75
1
Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C; Labelling field length (W x H) 66,8 x 52,8 mm
NEW
Push-button 3gang comfort with labelling field for white and polar white anthracite
Push-button 1gang comfort with labelling field
Packing unit
with anti-dismantling protection with white operation LED and 6 red status LEDs for switch, push-button, dimmer and shutter functions value transmitter for dimming, position, brightness and temperature values 1 and 2 byte extension unit for light scene push-button cyclic transmission can also be started via switching object alarm telegram after disconnection from bus coupling unit 1 bit or 1 byte single and two push-button operation parameterisable one push-button operation for switching, pushing, shutters and dimming activation of second user level via object NEW
Push-button 4gang comfort with labelling field for white and polar white anthracite aluminium stainless steel
7516 47 70 7516 47 75
* * 7516 47 74 7516 47 73
1 1 1 1
Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C; Labelling field length (W x H) 66,8 x 25 mm Follow-on type. New application! For bus coupling unit flush-mounted order no. 7504 00 01
only for frame with large cut-out for installation in 1gang wall boxes with anti-dismantling protection with white operation LED and 8 red status LEDs for switch, push-button, dimmer and shutter functions value transmitter for dimming, position, brightness and temperature values 1 and 2 byte extension unit for light scene push-button cyclic transmission can also be started via switching object lockable via 3-button actuation alarm telegram after disconnection from bus coupling unit 1 bit or 1 byte single and two push-button operation parameterisable one push-button operation for switching, pushing, shutters and dimming activation of second user level via object
429
INSTABUS KNX/EIB BERKER K.1/K.5 Order no.
Packing unit
Order no.
Light scene push-buttons
Push-buttons with room thermostat and display
NEW
NEW
Light scene push-button 8gang comfort with labelling field for white and polar white anthracite aluminium stainless steel
7516 88 70 7516 88 75
* * 7516 88 74 7516 88 73
for white and polar white anthracite
1
aluminium
1
stainless steel
For bus coupling unit flush-mounted order no. 7504 00 01
only for frame with large cut-out for installation in 1gang wall boxes with anti-dismantling protection with white operation LED and 8 red status LEDs retrieval, setting and storing of 8 light scenes dimming / position value transmitter 1 byte light scene push-buttons are cascadable second operating level for setting load groups via 3-button actuation
430
Push-button 2gang with room thermostat, display and labelling field
1 1
Light scenes max. 8; Load groups 8 (are increased in case of cascading); Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C; Labelling field length (W x H) 66,8 x 25 mm
Packing unit
7566 27 70 7566 27 75
* * 7566 27 74 7566 27 73
1 1 1 1
Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C; Labelling field length (W x H) 66,8 x 15,7 mm For bus coupling unit flush-mounted order no. 7504 00 01
with anti-dismantling protection with white operation LED and 4 red status LEDs LC display with symbol display display of operating mode, controller lockout, room/ outside temperature, time (clock required) with 2 additional display buttons end customer display scope parameterisable for switch, push-button, dimmer, shutter and room thermostat functions value transmitter for dimming, position, brightness and temperature values 1 and 2 byte extension unit for light scene push-button cyclic transmission can also be started via switching object single and two push-button operation parameterisable one push-button operation for switching, pushing, shutters and dimming area dimming shutter operation concept short-long-short and long-short parameterisable rockers or push-button lockable via object alarm telegram after disconnection from bus coupling unit 1 bit or 1 byte with room temperature timer for individual single room control controller operating modes: comfort, standby, night and frost/heat protection mode for heating and/or cooling mode with/without auxiliary step control parameter for heating / cooling unit pre-set for continuous (PI) or switched (2-point) control of max. 2 control circuits temperature measurement via internal and/or external sensor with mean value formation presence button parameterisable to extend comfort separate window contact object indicator objects for heating and cooling with valve protection function object for controller status with button lock function with flash-controller technology programmable with ETS2 as of V1.2a and ETS3
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
INSTABUS KNX/EIB BERKER K.1/K.5 Order no.
NEW
Packing unit
NEW
Push-button 3gang with room thermostat, display and labelling field for white and polar white anthracite aluminium stainless steel
7566 37 70 7566 37 75
* * 7566 37 74 7566 37 73
for white and polar white anthracite
1
aluminium
1
stainless steel
For bus coupling unit flush-mounted order no. 7504 00 01
only for frame with large cut-out for installation in 1gang wall boxes with anti-dismantling protection with white operation LED and 6 red status LEDs LC display with symbol display display of operating mode, controller lockout, room/ outside temperature, time (clock required) with 2 additional display buttons end customer display scope parameterisable for switch, push-button, dimmer, shutter and room thermostat functions value transmitter for dimming, position, brightness and temperature values 1 and 2 byte extension unit for light scene push-button cyclic transmission can also be started via switching object single and two push-button operation parameterisable one push-button operation for switching, pushing, shutters and dimming area dimming shutter operation concept short-long-short and long-short parameterisable rockers or push-button lockable via object alarm telegram after disconnection from bus coupling unit 1 bit or 1 byte with room temperature timer for individual single room control controller operating modes: comfort, standby, night and frost/heat protection mode for heating and/or cooling mode with/without auxiliary step control parameter for heating / cooling unit pre-set for continuous (PI) or switched (2-point) control of max. 2 control circuits temperature measurement via internal and/or external sensor with mean value formation presence button parameterisable to extend comfort separate window contact object indicator objects for heating and cooling with valve protection function object for controller status with button lock function with flash-controller technology programmable with ETS2 as of V1.2a and ETS3
Packing unit
Push-button 5gang with room thermostat, display and labelling field
1 1
Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
Order no.
7566 57 70 7566 57 75
* * 7566 57 74 7566 57 73
1 1 1 1
Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C; Labelling field length (W x H) 66,8 x 15,7 mm For bus coupling unit flush-mounted order no. 7504 00 01
only for frame with large cut-out for installation in 1gang wall boxes with anti-dismantling protection with white operation LED and 10 red status LEDs LC display with symbol display display of operating mode, controller lockout, room/ outside temperature, time (clock required) with 2 additional display buttons end customer display scope parameterisable for switch, push-button, dimmer, shutter and room thermostat functions value transmitter for dimming, position, brightness and temperature values 1 and 2 byte extension unit for light scene push-button cyclic transmission can also be started via switching object single and two push-button operation parameterisable one push-button operation for switching, pushing, shutters and dimming area dimming shutter operation concept short-long-short and long-short parameterisable rockers or push-button lockable via object alarm telegram after disconnection from bus coupling unit 1 bit or 1 byte with room temperature timer for individual single room control controller operating modes: comfort, standby, night and frost/heat protection mode for heating and/or cooling mode with/without auxiliary step control parameter for heating / cooling unit pre-set for continuous (PI) or switched (2-point) control of max. 2 control circuits temperature measurement via internal and/or external sensor with mean value formation presence button parameterisable to extend comfort separate window contact object indicator objects for heating and cooling with valve protection function object for controller status with button lock function with flash-controller technology programmable with ETS2 as of V1.2a and ETS3
431
INSTABUS KNX/EIB BERKER K.1/K.5 Order no.
Packing unit
NEW
Thermostats NEW
Order no.
Object room thermostat with button interface and integral bus coupling unit white, glossy polar white, glossy anthracite, matt aluminium, matt stainless steel
7544 12 72 7544 12 79 7544 12 75
* * 7544 12 74 7544 12 73
Room thermostat with button interface and integral bus coupling unit white, glossy polar white, glossy anthracite, matt
1 1 1
aluminium, matt
1
stainless steel, lacquered
1
Packing unit
7544 11 72 7544 11 79 7544 11 75
* * 7544 11 74 7544 11 73
1 1 1 1 1
Set value control by setting knob +/- 0 - 10 K; Output current per channel max. 0,8 mA; Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C; Cable length, inputs/outputs, max. 5 m; Sensor cable length max. 50 m
Output current per channel max. 0,8 mA; Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C; Cable length, inputs/outputs, max. 5 m; Sensor cable length max. 50 m Binary input 4 parameter defineable for remote sensor order no. 0161
Binary input 4 parameter defineable for remote sensor order no. 0161
for single room control with anti-dismantling protection operating modes: comfort, standby, night lowering, frost/heat protected, dewpoint for continuous (PI) or switched (2-point) control for heating and/or cooling mode heating or cooling possible in 2 stages valve protection can be defined conduct can be defined for bus voltage return with programming button and red programming LED with 4 independent binary inputs for potential-free contacts e.g. window magnetic contact 4 binary inputs or 2-3 binary inputs and 1-2 outputs parameterisable bus connection via connecting terminal without spreader claws binary inputs / outputs with screw terminals
for individual single room control with anti-dismantling protection operating modes:comfort, standby, night lowering, frost/heat protection, dewpoint displayed with LED status-LED red is for heating, blue is for cooling and yellow is for activation with presence button for switching between comfort and standby mode presence button and setting knob can be programmed to have no functions for continuous (PI) or switched (2-point) control for heating and/or cooling mode heating or cooling possible in 2 stages valve protection can be defined conduct can be defined for bus voltage return with programming button and red programming LED with 4 independent binary inputs for potential-free contacts e.g. window magnetic contact 4 binary inputs or 2-3 binary inputs and 1-2 outputs parameterisable bus connection via connecting terminal without spreader claws binary inputs / outputs with screw terminals
Sensor insert Central plate for sensor insert white, glossy polar white, glossy stainless steel, lacquered
7594 04 02 7594 04 09 7594 04 03
1 1 1
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range. Labelling field not usable.
Sensor insert order no. 7594 10 01
with slots for air circulation for e.g. temperature sensor PT100
432
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
INSTABUS KNX/EIB BERKER K.1/K.5 Order no.
Packing unit
NEW
Controllers NEW
Order no.
Controller sensor 180 white, glossy polar white, glossy anthracite, matt aluminium, matt stainless steel, lacquered
7526 11 72 7526 11 79 7526 11 75
* * 7526 11 74 7526 11 73
1 1 1 1 1
Nominal mounting height 1,1 m; Range frontal approx. 10 m; Range lateral each approx. 6 m; Detection field semi-oval shaped approx. 10 x 12 m; Detection angle 180 °; Detection levels 2; Switching segments 72; Response sensitivity programmable approx. 20 - 100 % ; Delay time 10 sec.; Additional delay time programmable 130- 152 msec.; Response brightness programmable 1 - 1000 / unlimited Lux; Lockout time 8 msec.- 140 min.; Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C; Dimensions assembling height 23,5 mm When movement of a person is detected a parameter defined data telegram is sent. For bus coupling unit flush-mounted order no. 7504 00 01
with cover to limit detection angle to 90° with potentiometer for fine adjustment of the response sensitivity parameter defineable lock function also suitable as extension unit cyclic transmission possible
Packing unit
Controller sensor 180 comfort with slide switch for off/automatic/on white, glossy polar white, glossy anthracite, matt aluminium, matt stainless steel, lacquered
7526 15 72 7526 15 79 7526 15 75
* * 7526 15 74 7526 15 73
1 1 1 1 1
Nominal mounting height 1,1 m; Range frontal approx. 10 m; Range lateral each approx. 6 m; Detection field semi-oval shaped approx. 10 x 12 m; Detection angle 180 °; Detection levels 2; Switching segments 72; Response sensitivity programmable approx. 20 - 100 % ; Delay time 10 sec.; Additional delay time programmable 130 msec.- 306 hrs.; Potentiometer for additional delay time +/- 50 %; Response brightness programmable 3 - 100 / unlimited Lux; Response brightness adjustable by potentiometer +/- 50 %; Lockout time 8 msec.- 140 min.; Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C; Dimensions assembling height 23,5 mm Attention: Direct sunshine can lead to false alarms when using alarm application. Avoid using detection field equipment on windows. When movement of a person is detected a parameter defined data telegram is sent. For bus coupling unit flush-mounted order no. 7504 00 01
with cover to limit detection angle to 90° with potentiometers for fine adjustment of the response brightness, sensitivity and delay time with red diagnostic LED for brightness-independent walk test function and disassembly message parameter defineable lock function with lighting and message mode operating mode switched with object functions for lighting operating mode: Switching, Value transmitter and Light scene call also suitable as extension unit cyclic transmission possible alarm telegram after disconnection from bus coupling unit 1 bit
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
433
INSTABUS KNX/EIB BERKER K.1/K.5 Order no.
NEW
Packing unit
NEW
Controller sensor 180 white, glossy polar white, glossy anthracite, matt aluminium, matt stainless steel, lacquered
Order no.
7526 12 72 7526 12 79 7526 12 75
* * 7526 12 74 7526 12 73
1 1 1 1 1
Nominal mounting height 2,2 m; Range frontal approx. 12 m; Range lateral each approx. 6 m; At assembly height 1,1 m; Range frontal approx. 6 m; Range lateral each approx. 3 m; Detection field semi-oval shaped approx. 12 x12 m; Detection angle 180 °; Detection levels 2; Switching segments 72; Response sensitivity programmable approx. 20 - 100 % ; Delay time 10 sec.; Additional delay time programmable 130 msec.- 152 hrs.; Response brightness programmable 1 - 1000 / unlimited Lux; Lockout time 8 msec.- 140 min.; Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C; Dimensions assembling height 23,5 mm Application as for order no. 7526 11 .. When movement of a person is detected a parameter defined data telegram is sent. For bus coupling unit flush-mounted order no. 7504 00 01
with cover to limit detection angle to 90° with potentiometer for fine adjustment of the response sensitivity parameter defineable lock function also suitable as extension unit cyclic transmission possible
Packing unit
Controller sensor 180 comfort with slide switch for off/automatic/on white, glossy polar white, glossy anthracite, matt aluminium, matt stainless steel, lacquered
7526 16 72 7526 16 79 7526 16 75
* * 7526 16 74 7526 16 73
1 1 1 1 1
Nominal mounting height 2,2 m; Range frontal approx. 12 m; Range lateral each approx. 6 m; At assembly height 1,1 m; Range frontal approx. 6 m; Range lateral each approx. 3 m; Detection field semi-oval shaped approx. 12 x 12 m; Detection angle 180 °; Detection levels 2; Switching segments 72; Response sensitivity programmable approx. 20 - 100 % ; Delay time 10 sec.; Additional delay time programmable 130 msec.- 306 hrs.; Potentiometer for additional delay time +/- 50 %; Response brightness programmable 3 - 100 / unlimited Lux; Response brightness adjustable by potentiometer +/- 50 %; Lockout time 8 msec.- 140 min.; Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C; Dimensions assembling height 23,5 mm Application as for order no. 7526 15 .. Attention: Direct sunlight can lead to false alarms when using alarm application. Alignment of detection field towards window must be avoided. When movement of a person is detected a parameter defined data telegram is sent. For bus coupling unit flush-mounted order no. 7504 00 01
with cover to limit detection angle to 90° with potentiometers for fine adjustment of the response brightness, sensitivity and delay time with red diagnostic LED for brightness-independent walk test function and disassembly message parameter defineable lock function with lighting and message mode operating mode switched with object functions for lighting operating mode: Switching, Value transmitter and Light scene call also suitable as extension unit cyclic transmission possible alarm telegram after disconnection from bus coupling unit 1 bit
434
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
INSTABUS KNX/EIB BERKER K.1/K.5 Order no.
Packing unit
Order no.
Packing unit
Info display NEW
Info display white, glossy polar white, glossy anthracite, matt aluminium, matt stainless steel
7586 00 72 7586 00 79 7586 00 75
* * 7586 00 74 7586 00 73
1 1 1 1 1
Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C Commissioning possible only with ETS3 and ETS2 V1.2 SR A. For bus coupling unit flush-mounted order no. 7504 00 01
with anti-dismantling protection LC display with illumination programmable to 1, 2 or 4 lines 16 characters per line on max. 12 pages to display and initiate actions for max. 48 signalling groups with piezo signal generator visual/acoustic alarm message, with reset German/English
Blank plates NEW
Blank plate white, glossy polar white, glossy anthracite, matt aluminium, matt stainless steel
7594 02 72 7594 02 79 7594 02 75
* * 7594 02 74 7594 02 73
1 1 1 1 1
For bus coupling unit order no. 7504 00 01, 7504 00 02, 7504 00 03
for bus coupling units flush-mounted
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
435
INSTABUS KNX/EIB BERKER ARSYS Order no.
Packing unit
Data interfaces 7506 00 42 7506 00 49 7506 00 44 7506 00 43
Bluetooth gateway 1 1 1 1
Data transfer rate max. 9,6 kBaud; Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C; Connection cable length max. 15 m
for addressing, programming and diagnosis of KNX/EIB components with anti-dismantling protection with green operation LED with interface RS 232 (9pole socket D-subminiature)
Data transfer rate max. 19,2 kBaud; Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C; Connection cable length max. 15 m For visualisation of object data on a PC. Only for bus coupling unit flush-mounted version 2.0 order no. 7504 00 02
for addressing, programming and diagnosis of KNX/EIB components with anti-dismantling protection with green operation LED with interface RS 232 (9pole socket D-subminiature) only for applications requiring FT 1.2 protocols
436
7566 01 42 7566 01 49 7566 01 44 7566 01 43
1 1 1 1
Usable Bluetooth end unit is at the moment Tungsten T3 and T5 from PALM. Only for bus coupling unit plus order no. 7504 00 03
Bluetooth Standard IEEE 802.15.1-2002
Data interface FTP 1.2 with labelling field 7506 01 42 7506 01 49 7506 01 44 7506 01 43
white, glossy polar white, glossy light bronze, lacquered stainless steel, lacquered
ISM frequency band 2,45 GHz with 79 channels; Secure mode 2; Bluetooth send and receive distance -; approx. 10 m with class 3 remote station; approx. 30 m with class 2 remote station; Learning minimum distance approx. 0,5 m; Transmission power max. 2,5 mW; Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C
For bus coupling unit flush-mounted order no. 7504 00 01
white, glossy polar white, glossy light bronze, lacquered stainless steel, lacquered
Packing unit
Gateways
Data interface with labelling field white, glossy polar white, glossy light bronze, lacquered stainless steel, lacquered
Order no.
1 1 1 1
with anti-dismantling protection with 4-line LC display for gateway status and configuration (16 characters per line) transmits and receives Bluetooth and KNX/EIB signals wireless control/status display of e.g. shutters, lights, heating, ventilation, alarm system KNX/EIB operation by rooms or functions with Bluetooth terminal PALM Tungsten T3 and T5 max. 8 Bluetooth end units can be administered from one gateway Bluetooth end units can administer max. 7 gateways the gateway configures the menu compilation of the Bluetooth end units for e.g. switch, push-button, dimmer, shutter and light scene functions value transmitter for dimming, position, brightness and temperature values 1 and 2 byte extension unit for light scene push-button with password protection through six-digit number with KNX/EIB-BT gateway software for Bluetooth terminals
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
INSTABUS KNX/EIB BERKER ARSYS Order no.
NEW
Packing unit
IR gateway white, glossy polar white, glossy light bronze, lacquered stainless steel, lacquered
Order no.
Packing unit
Push-button 2gang
* 7566 03 42 * 7566 03 49 * 7566 03 44 * 7566 03 43
1 1 1 1
white, glossy polar white, glossy light bronze, lacquered stainless steel, lacquered
7516 21 42 7516 21 49 7516 21 44 7516 21 43
1 1 1 1
Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C
Transmitting carrier frequency area 20 - 70 ; IR learnable distance approx. 20 cm; IR transmission/reception range approx. 10 m; Transmission and reception angle 30 °; Objects 32
Application as 7516 20 .. For bus coupling unit flush-mounted order no. 7504 00 01
The integration of a home cinema system in a cinema scene for example is interesting. When retrieving this scene, the system and the TV automatically switch on, while the blinds lower and the light is dimmed. Only for bus coupling unit flush-mounted version 2.0 order no. 7504 00 02
with anti-dismantling protection for switch, push-button, dimmer and shutter functions dimming / position value transmitter 1 byte extension unit for light scene push-button
Push-button 4gang transmits and receives IR signals and KNX/EIB telegrams converts KNX/EIB telegrams into IR signals and vice-versa this allows activation of music systems, beamers, etc. and volume control, etc. signal repetitions with interval settings on single actuation settable suitable for IR units/transmitters with RC5 and B&O code IR signals learnable (scan) with reset switch to delete all taught-in IR signals for switch, dimmer and IR unit functions dimming / position value transmitter 1 byte extension unit for light scene push-button with slide switch and three-colour status LED for normal, standby and scan mode for wall and ceiling mounting for bus coupling unit flush-mounted version 2.0
Push-buttons Push-button 1gang white, glossy polar white, glossy light bronze, lacquered stainless steel, lacquered
7516 11 42 7516 11 49 7516 11 44 7516 11 43
1 1 1 1
Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C Application as 7516 10.. For bus coupling unit flush-mounted order no. 7504 00 01
with anti-dismantling protection for switch, push-button, dimmer and shutter functions dimming / position value transmitter 1 byte extension unit for light scene push-button
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
white, glossy polar white, glossy light bronze, lacquered stainless steel, lacquered
7516 41 42 7516 41 49 7516 41 44 7516 41 43
1 1 1 1
Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C Application as 7516 40 .. For bus coupling unit flush-mounted order no. 7504 00 01
with anti-dismantling protection for switch, dimmer and shutter functions dimming / position value transmitter 1 byte extension unit for light scene push-button
Push-buttons with labelling field Push-button 1gang with labelling field white, glossy polar white, glossy light bronze, lacquered stainless steel, lacquered
7516 10 42 7516 10 49 7516 10 44 7516 10 43
1 1 1 1
Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C For bus coupling unit flush-mounted order no. 7504 00 01
with anti-dismantling protection with green operation LED and red status LED for switch, push-button, dimmer and shutter functions dimming / position value transmitter 1 byte extension unit for light scene push-button
437
INSTABUS KNX/EIB BERKER ARSYS Order no.
Packing unit
Push-button 2gang with labelling field white, glossy polar white, glossy light bronze, lacquered stainless steel, lacquered
7516 20 42 7516 20 49 7516 20 44 7516 20 43
white, glossy polar white, glossy light bronze, lacquered stainless steel, lacquered
7516 26 42 7516 26 49 7516 26 44 7516 26 43
Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C
Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C
For bus coupling unit flush-mounted order no. 7504 00 01
Follow-on type. New application!
7516 40 42 7516 40 49 7516 40 44 7516 40 43
1 1 1 1
Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C For bus coupling unit flush-mounted order no. 7504 00 01
Push-buttons comfort with labelling field Push-button 1gang comfort with labelling field 7516 16 42 7516 16 49 7516 16 44 7516 16 43
with anti-dismantling protection with green operation LED and 4 red status LEDs for switch, push-button, dimmer and shutter functions value transmitter for dimming, position, brightness and temperature values 1 and 2 byte extension unit for light scene push-button cyclic transmission can also be started via switching object alarm telegram after disconnection from bus coupling unit 1 bit or 1 byte single and two push-button operation parameterisable one push-button operation for switching, pushing, shutters and dimming activation of second user level via object
Push-button 4gang comfort with labelling field
with anti-dismantling protection with green operation LED and 4 red status LEDs for switch, dimmer and shutter functions dimming / position value transmitter 1 byte extension unit for light scene push-button
white, glossy polar white, glossy light bronze, lacquered stainless steel, lacquered
1 1 1 1
For bus coupling unit flush-mounted order no. 7504 00 01
Push-button 4gang with labelling field white, glossy polar white, glossy light bronze, lacquered stainless steel, lacquered
Packing unit
Push-button 2gang comfort with labelling field 1 1 1 1
with anti-dismantling protection with green operation LED and 2 red status LEDs for switch, push-button, dimmer and shutter functions dimming / position value transmitter 1 byte extension unit for light scene push-button
1 1 1 1
Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C Follow-on type. New application! For bus coupling unit flush-mounted order no. 7504 00 01
with anti-dismantling protection with green operation LED and 2 red status LEDs for switch, push-button, dimmer and shutter functions value transmitter for dimming, position, brightness and temperature values 1 and 2 byte extension unit for light scene push-button cyclic transmission can also be started via switching object alarm telegram after disconnection from bus coupling unit 1 bit or 1 byte single and two push-button operation parameterisable one push-button operation for switching, pushing, shutters and dimming activation of second user level via object for bus coupling unit flush-mounted
438
Order no.
white, glossy polar white, glossy light bronze, lacquered stainless steel, lacquered
7516 46 42 7516 46 49 7516 46 44 7516 46 43
1 1 1 1
Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C Follow-on type. New application! For bus coupling unit flush-mounted order no. 7504 00 01
with anti-dismantling protection with green operation LED and 8 red status LEDs for switch, push-button, dimmer and shutter functions value transmitter for dimming, position, brightness and temperature values 1 and 2 byte extension unit for light scene push-button cyclic transmission can also be started via switching object lockable via 3-button actuation alarm telegram after disconnection from bus coupling unit 1 bit or 1 byte single and two push-button operation parameterisable one push-button operation for switching, pushing, shutters and dimming activation of second user level via object
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
INSTABUS KNX/EIB BERKER ARSYS Order no.
Packing unit
Light scene push-buttons
Order no.
Packing unit
Thermostats
Light scene push-button comfort with labelling field
Object room thermostat with button interface and integral bus coupling unit
white, glossy polar white, glossy stainless steel, lacquered
7516 87 42 7516 87 49 7516 87 43
1 1 1
white, glossy polar white, glossy light bronze, metal stainless steel
light bronze, lacquered
7516 87 44
1
Output current per channel max. 0,8 mA; Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C; Cable length, inputs/outputs, max. 5 m; Sensor cable length max. 50 m
Light scenes max. 8; Load groups 8 (are increased in case of cascading); Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C The settings of the individual load groups (light scenes) can be varied by way of the second operating level.
7544 12 42 7544 12 49 7544 12 44 7544 12 43
1 1 1 1
Binary input 4 parameter defineable for remote sensor order no. 0161
For bus coupling unit flush-mounted order no. 7504 00 01
with anti-dismantling protection with green operation LED and 8 red status LEDs retrieval, setting and storing of 8 light scenes dimming / position value transmitter 1 byte light scene push-buttons are cascadable second operating level for setting load groups via 3-button actuation lockable via object
Accessories Labelling field with cover plate clear transparent, for white push-buttons
7596 00 03
1
clear transparent, for polar white push-buttons
7596 00 06
1
brown transparent, for light bronze coloured push-buttons grey transparent, for stainless steel coloured push-buttons
7596 00 05
1
7596 00 04
1
for single room control with anti-dismantling protection operating modes: comfort, standby, night lowering, frost/heat protected, dewpoint for continuous (PI) or switched (2-point) control for heating and/or cooling mode heating or cooling possible in 2 stages valve protection can be defined conduct can be defined for bus voltage return with programming button and red programming LED with 4 independent binary inputs for potential-free contacts e.g. window magnetic contact 4 binary inputs or 2-3 binary inputs and 1-2 outputs parameterisable bus connection via connecting terminal without spreader claws binary inputs / outputs with screw terminals
Not suitable for push-button comfort and light scene push-buttons comfort. for replacement need
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
439
INSTABUS KNX/EIB BERKER ARSYS Order no.
Packing unit
Room thermostat with button interface and integral bus coupling unit white, glossy polar white, glossy light bronze, lacquered stainless steel, lacquered
7544 11 42 7544 11 49 7544 11 44 7544 11 43
1 1 1 1
Set value control by setting knob +/- 0 - 10 K; Output current per channel max. 0,8 mA; Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C; Cable length, inputs/outputs, max. 5 m; Sensor cable length max. 50 m Binary input 4 parameter defineable for remote sensor order no. 0161
for individual single room control with anti-dismantling protection operating modes:comfort, standby, night lowering, frost/heat protection, dewpoint displayed with LED status-LED red is for heating, blue is for cooling and yellow is for activation with presence button for switching between comfort and standby mode presence button and setting knob can be programmed to have no functions for continuous (PI) or switched (2-point) control for heating and/or cooling mode heating or cooling possible in 2 stages valve protection can be defined conduct can be defined for bus voltage return with programming button and red programming LED with 4 independent binary inputs for potential-free contacts e.g. window magnetic contact 4 binary inputs or 2-3 binary inputs and 1-2 outputs parameterisable bus connection via connecting terminal without spreader claws binary inputs / outputs with screw terminals
Order no.
Packing unit
Controllers Controller sensor 180 white, glossy polar white, glossy light bronze, lacquered stainless steel, lacquered
7526 11 42 7526 11 49 7526 11 44 7526 11 43
1 1 1 1
Nominal mounting height 1,1 m; Range frontal approx. 10 m; Range lateral each approx. 6 m; Detection field semi-oval shaped approx. 10 x 12 m; Detection angle 180 °; Detection levels 2; Switching segments 72; Response sensitivity programmable approx. 20 - 100 % ; Delay time 10 sec.; Additional delay time programmable 130- 152 msec.; Response brightness programmable 1 - 1000 / unlimited Lux; Lockout time 8 msec.- 140 min.; Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C; Dimensions assembling height 23,5 mm When movement of a person is detected a parameter defined data telegram is sent. For bus coupling unit flush-mounted order no. 7504 00 01
U with cover to limit detection angle to 90° with potentiometer for fine adjustment of the response sensitivity parameter defineable lock function also suitable as extension unit cyclic transmission possible
Sensor insert Central plate for sensor insert white, glossy polar white, glossy light bronze, lacquered stainless steel, lacquered
7594 04 02 7594 04 09 7594 04 04 7594 04 03
1 1 1 1
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range. Labelling field not usable.
Sensor insert order no. 7594 10 01
with slots for air circulation for e.g. temperature sensor PT100
440
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
INSTABUS KNX/EIB BERKER ARSYS Order no.
Packing unit
Controller sensor 180 comfort with slide switch for off/automatic/on white, glossy polar white, glossy light bronze, lacquered stainless steel, lacquered
7526 15 42 7526 15 49 7526 15 44 7526 15 43
Packing unit
Controller sensor 180 1 1 1 1
Nominal mounting height 1,1 m; Range frontal approx. 10 m; Range lateral each approx. 6 m; Detection field semi-oval shaped approx. 10 x 12 m; Detection angle 180 °; Detection levels 2; Switching segments 72; Response sensitivity programmable approx. 20 - 100 % ; Delay time 10 sec.; Additional delay time programmable 130 msec.- 306 hrs.; Potentiometer for additional delay time +/- 50 %; Response brightness programmable 3 - 100 / unlimited Lux; Response brightness adjustable by potentiometer +/- 50 %; Lockout time 8 msec.- 140 min.; Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C; Dimensions assembling height 23,5 mm Attention: Direct sunshine can lead to false alarms when using alarm application. Avoid using detection field equipment on windows. When movement of a person is detected a parameter defined data telegram is sent. For bus coupling unit flush-mounted order no. 7504 00 01
U with cover to limit detection angle to 90° with potentiometers for fine adjustment of the response brightness, sensitivity and delay time with red diagnostic LED for brightness-independent walk test function and disassembly message parameter defineable lock function with lighting and message mode operating mode switched with object functions for lighting operating mode: Switching, Value transmitter and Light scene call also suitable as extension unit cyclic transmission possible alarm telegram after disconnection from bus coupling unit 1 bit
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
Order no.
white, glossy polar white, glossy light bronze, lacquered stainless steel, lacquered
7526 12 42 7526 12 49 7526 12 44 7526 12 43
1 1 1 1
Nominal mounting height 2,2 m; Range frontal approx. 12 m; Range lateral each approx. 6 m; At assembly height 1,1 m; Range frontal approx. 6 m; Range lateral each approx. 3 m; Detection field semi-oval shaped approx. 12 x12 m; Detection angle 180 °; Detection levels 2; Switching segments 72; Response sensitivity programmable approx. 20 - 100 % ; Delay time 10 sec.; Additional delay time programmable 130 msec.- 152 hrs.; Response brightness programmable 1 - 1000 / unlimited Lux; Lockout time 8 msec.- 140 min.; Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C; Dimensions assembling height 23,5 mm Application as for order no. 7526 11 .. When movement of a person is detected a parameter defined data telegram is sent. For bus coupling unit flush-mounted order no. 7504 00 01
V with cover to limit detection angle to 90° with potentiometer for fine adjustment of the response sensitivity parameter defineable lock function also suitable as extension unit cyclic transmission possible
441
INSTABUS KNX/EIB BERKER ARSYS Order no.
Packing unit
7526 16 42 7526 16 49 7526 16 44 7526 16 43
Packing unit
Info display
Controller sensor 180 comfort with slide switch for off/automatic/on white, glossy polar white, glossy light bronze, lacquered stainless steel, lacquered
Order no.
1 1 1 1
Nominal mounting height 2,2 m; Range frontal approx. 12 m; Range lateral each approx. 6 m; At assembly height 1,1 m; Range frontal approx. 6 m; Range lateral each approx. 3 m; Detection field semi-oval shaped approx. 12 x 12 m; Detection angle 180 °; Detection levels 2; Switching segments 72; Response sensitivity programmable approx. 20 - 100 % ; Delay time 10 sec.; Additional delay time programmable 130 msec.- 306 hrs.; Potentiometer for additional delay time +/- 50 %; Response brightness programmable 3 - 100 / unlimited Lux; Response brightness adjustable by potentiometer +/- 50 %; Lockout time 8 msec.- 140 min.; Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C; Dimensions assembling height 23,5 mm Application as for order no. 7526 15 .. Attention: Direct sunlight can lead to false alarms when using alarm application. Alignment of detection field towards window must be avoided. When movement of a person is detected a parameter defined data telegram is sent.
Info display white, glossy polar white, glossy light bronze, lacquered stainless steel, lacquered
7586 00 42 7586 00 49 7586 00 44 7586 00 43
1 1 1 1
Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C Commissioning possible only with ETS3 and ETS2 V1.2 SR A. For bus coupling unit flush-mounted order no. 7504 00 01
with anti-dismantling protection LC display with illumination programmable to 1, 2 or 4 lines 16 characters per line on max. 12 pages to display and initiate actions for max. 48 signalling groups with piezo signal generator visual/acoustic alarm message, with reset German/English
Blank plates Blank plate white, glossy polar white, glossy light bronze, lacquered stainless steel
7594 02 42 7594 02 49 7594 02 44 7594 02 43
1 1 1 1
For bus coupling unit order no. 7504 00 01, 7504 00 02, 7504 00 03
for bus coupling units flush-mounted
For bus coupling unit flush-mounted order no. 7504 00 01
V with cover to limit detection angle to 90° with potentiometers for fine adjustment of the response brightness, sensitivity and delay time with red diagnostic LED for brightness-independent walk test function and disassembly message parameter defineable lock function with lighting and message mode operating mode switched with object functions for lighting operating mode: Switching, Value transmitter and Light scene call also suitable as extension unit cyclic transmission possible alarm telegram after disconnection from bus coupling unit 1 bit
442
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
INSTABUS KNX/EIB TWINPOINT Order no.
Packing unit
Data interfaces # 7506 00 69 # 7506 00 66 # 7506 00 65
1 1 1
Data transfer rate max. 9,6 kBaud; Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C; Connection cable length max. 15 m
1 1 1
Only for bus coupling unit flush-mounted version 2.0 order no. 7504 00 02
Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C For bus coupling unit flush-mounted order no. 7504 00 01
Multifunction push-button 4gang polar white, glossy red, glossy black, glossy
# 7566 41 69 # 7566 41 66 # 7566 41 65
1 1 1
Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C For bus coupling unit flush-mounted order no. 7504 00 01
Push-buttons Push-button 1gang
with green operation LED and red status LED for switch, push-button, dimmer and shutter functions dimming / position value transmitter 1 byte extension unit for light scene push-button
1 1 1
Multifunction push-buttons
for addressing, programming and diagnosis of KNX/EIB components with anti-dismantling protection with green operation LED with interface RS 232 (9pole socket D-subminiature) only for applications requiring FT 1.2 protocols
For bus coupling unit flush-mounted order no. 7504 00 01
# 7516 40 69 # 7516 40 66 # 7516 40 65
with green operation LED and 4 red status LEDs for switch, dimmer and shutter functions dimming / position value transmitter 1 byte extension unit for light scene push-button
For visualisation of object data on a PC.
Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C
Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C
polar white, glossy red, glossy black, glossy
Data transfer rate max. 19,2 kBaud; Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C; Connection cable length max. 15 m
# 7516 10 69 # 7516 10 66 # 7516 10 65
1 1 1
Push-button 4gang
Data interface FTP 1.2 with labelling field
polar white, glossy red, glossy black, glossy
# 7516 20 69 # 7516 20 66 # 7516 20 65
with green operation LED and 2 red status LEDs for switch, push-button, dimmer and shutter functions dimming / position value transmitter 1 byte extension unit for light scene push-button
for addressing, programming and diagnosis of KNX/EIB components with anti-dismantling protection with green operation LED with interface RS 232 (9pole socket D-subminiature)
# 7506 01 69 # 7506 01 66 # 7506 01 65
polar white, glossy red, glossy black, glossy
For bus coupling unit flush-mounted order no. 7504 00 01
For bus coupling unit flush-mounted order no. 7504 00 01
polar white, glossy red, glossy black, glossy
Packing unit
Push-button 2gang
Data interface with labelling field polar white, glossy red, glossy black, glossy
Order no.
1 1 1
buttons (functions) can be programmed individually with green operation LED and 4 red status LEDs
Light scene push-buttons Light scene push-button 8gang polar white, glossy red, glossy black, glossy
# 7566 80 69 # 7566 80 66 # 7566 80 65
1 1 1
Light scenes max. 8 ; Load groups max. 8 ; Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C For bus coupling unit flush-mounted order no. 7504 00 01
for calling up and storing light scenes with green operation LED and 4 red status LEDs
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
443
INSTABUS KNX/EIB TWINPOINT Order no.
Packing unit
Thermostats
Packing unit
Controllers
Room thermostat with button interface and integral bus coupling unit polar white, glossy red, glossy black, glossy
# 7544 11 69 # 7544 11 66 # 7544 11 65
1 1 1
Set value control by setting knob +/- 0 - 10 K; Output current per channel max. 0,8 mA; Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C; Cable length, inputs/outputs, max. 5 m; Sensor cable length max. 50 m Binary input 4 parameter defineable for remote sensor order no. 0161
for individual single room control with anti-dismantling protection operating modes:comfort, standby, night lowering, frost/heat protection, dewpoint displayed with LED status-LED red is for heating, blue is for cooling and yellow is for activation with presence button for switching between comfort and standby mode presence button and setting knob can be programmed to have no functions for continuous (PI) or switched (2-point) control for heating and/or cooling mode heating or cooling possible in 2 stages valve protection can be defined conduct can be defined for bus voltage return with programming button and red programming LED with 4 independent binary inputs for potential-free contacts e.g. window magnetic contact 4 binary inputs or 2-3 binary inputs and 1-2 outputs parameterisable bus connection via connecting terminal without spreader claws binary inputs / outputs with screw terminals
444
Order no.
Controller sensor 180 polar white, glossy red, glossy black, glossy
# 7526 11 69 # 7526 11 66 # 7526 11 65
1 1 1
Nominal mounting height 1,1 m; Range frontal approx. 10 m; Range lateral each approx. 6 m; Detection field semi-oval shaped approx. 10 x 12 m; Detection angle 180 °; Detection levels 2; Switching segments 72; Response sensitivity programmable approx. 20 - 100 % ; Delay time 10 sec.; Additional delay time programmable 130 msec.- 152 hrs.; Response brightness programmable 1 - 1000 / unlimited Lux; Lockout time 8 msec.- 140 min.; Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C; Dimensions assembling height 23,5 mm When movement of a person is detected a parameter defined data telegram is sent. For bus coupling unit flush-mounted order no. 7504 00 01
U with cover to limit detection angle to 90° with potentiometer for fine adjustment of the response sensitivity parameter defineable lock function also suitable as extension unit cyclic transmission possible
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
INSTABUS KNX/EIB TWINPOINT Order no.
Packing unit
Controller sensor 180 comfort with slide switch for off/automatic/on polar white, glossy red, glossy black, glossy
# 7526 13 69 # 7526 13 66 # 7526 13 65
1 1 1
Not to be used in conjunction with alarm central unit EIB! When movement of a person is detected a parameter defined data telegram is sent.
U with cover to limit detection angle to 90° with potentiometers for fine adjustment of the response brightness, sensitivity and delay time with lighting and message mode also suitable as extension unit
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
Packing unit
Controller sensor 180
Nominal mounting height 1,1 m; Range frontal approx. 10 m; Range lateral each approx. 6 m; Detection field semi-oval shaped approx. 10 x 12 m; Detection angle 180 °; Detection levels 2; Switching segments 72; Response sensitivity programmable approx. 20 - 100 % ; Delay time 10 sec.; Additional delay time programmable 130 msec.- 306 hrs.; Potentiometer for additional delay time +/- 50 %; Response brightness programmable 3 - 100 / unlimited Lux; Response brightness adjustable by potentiometer +/- 50 %; Lockout time 8 msec.- 140 min.; Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C; Dimensions assembling height 23,5 mm
For bus coupling unit flush-mounted order no. 7504 00 01
Order no.
polar white, glossy red, glossy black, glossy
# 7526 12 69 # 7526 12 66 # 7526 12 65
1 1 1
Nominal mounting height 2,2 m; Range frontal approx. 12 m; Range lateral each approx. 6 m; At assembly height 1,1 m; Range frontal approx. 6 m; Range lateral each approx. 3 m; Detection field semi-oval shaped approx. 12 x12 m; Detection angle 180 °; Detection levels 2; Switching segments 72; Response sensitivity programmable approx. 20 - 100 % ; Delay time 10 sec.; Additional delay time programmable 130 msec.- 152 hrs.; Response brightness programmable 1 - 1000 / unlimited Lux; Lockout time 8 msec.- 140 min.; Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C; Dimensions assembling height 23,5 mm Application as for order no. 7526 11 .. When movement of a person is detected a parameter defined data telegram is sent. For bus coupling unit flush-mounted order no. 7504 00 01
V with cover to limit detection angle to 90° with potentiometer for fine adjustment of the response sensitivity parameter defineable lock function also suitable as extension unit cyclic transmission possible
445
INSTABUS KNX/EIB TWINPOINT Order no.
Packing unit
Order no.
Packing unit
Controller sensor 180 comfort with slide switch for off/automatic/on polar white, glossy red, glossy black, glossy
# 7526 14 69 # 7526 14 66 # 7526 14 65
1 1 1
Nominal mounting height 2,2 m; Range frontal approx. 12 m; Range lateral each approx. 6 m; At assembly height 1,1 m; Range frontal approx. 6 m; Range lateral each approx. 3 m; Detection field semi-oval shaped approx. 12 x 12 m; Detection angle 180 °; Detection levels 2; Switching segments 72; Response sensitivity programmable approx. 20 - 100 % ; Delay time 10 sec.; Additional delay time programmable 130 msec.- 306 hrs.; Potentiometer for additional delay time +/- 50 %; Response brightness programmable 3 - 100 / unlimited Lux; Response brightness adjustable by potentiometer +/- 50 %; Lockout time 8 msec.- 140 min.; Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C; Dimensions assembling height 23,5 mm Application as for order no. 7526 13 .. Not to be used in conjunction with alarm central unit EIB! When movement of a person is detected a parameter defined data telegram is sent. For bus coupling unit flush-mounted order no. 7504 00 01
V with cover to limit detection angle to 90° with potentiometers for fine adjustment of the response brightness, sensitivity and delay time with lighting and message mode also suitable as extension unit
Blank plates Blank plate polar white, glossy red, glossy black, glossy
# 7594 02 69 # 7594 02 66 # 7594 02 65
1 1 1
For bus coupling unit order no. 7504 00 01, 7504 00 02, 7504 00 03
for bus coupling units flush-mounted
446
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
INSTABUS KNX/EIB B.IQ Order no.
Packing unit
Order no.
Push-buttons
Packing unit
Push-button 4gang standard polar white, matt stainless steel glass, polar white
Push-button 1gang standard polar white, matt stainless steel glass, polar white
7516 10 99 7516 10 93 7516 10 91
1 1 1
Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C
on page T69 For bus coupling unit flush-mounted order no. 7504 00 01 Labelling field see accessories order no. 7590 00 81
For bus coupling unit flush-mounted order no. 7504 00 01 Labelling field see accessories order no. 7590 00 80
for installation in 1gang wall boxes with anti-dismantling protection with blue operation LED and 8 white status LED (labelling field illumination) for switch, push-button, dimmer and shutter functions dimming / position value transmitter 1 byte extension unit for light scene push-button
with anti-dismantling protection with blue operation LED and 2 white status LED (labelling field illumination) for switch, push-button, dimmer and shutter functions dimming / position value transmitter 1 byte extension unit for light scene push-button
Push-buttons comfort
Push-button 2gang standard 7516 20 99 7516 20 93 7516 20 91
Push-button 1gang comfort
1 1 1
polar white, matt stainless steel glass, polar white
Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C For bus coupling unit flush-mounted order no. 7504 00 01 Labelling field see accessories order no. 7590 00 80
with anti-dismantling protection with blue operation LED and 4 white status LED (labelling field illumination) for switch, push-button, dimmer and shutter functions dimming / position value transmitter 1 byte extension unit for light scene push-button
Push-button 3gang standard 7516 30 99 7516 30 93 7516 30 91
7516 15 99 7516 15 93 7516 15 91
1 1 1
Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C
on page T69
polar white, matt stainless steel glass, polar white
1 1 1
Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C
on page T69
polar white, matt stainless steel glass, polar white
7516 40 99 7516 40 93 7516 40 91
1 1 1
Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C on page T69 For bus coupling unit flush-mounted order no. 7504 00 01 Labelling field see accessories order no. 7590 00 80
on page T69 For bus coupling unit flush-mounted order no. 7504 00 01 Labelling field see accessories order no. 7590 00 80
with anti-dismantling protection with blue operation LED and 2 white status LED (labelling field illumination) for switch, push-button, dimmer and shutter functions value transmitter for dimming, position, brightness and temperature values 1 and 2 byte extension unit for light scene push-button cyclic transmission can also be started via switching object alarm telegram after disconnection from bus coupling unit 1 bit or 1 byte single and two push-button operation parameterisable one push-button operation for switching, pushing, shutters and dimming activation of second user level via object
with anti-dismantling protection with blue operation LED and 6 white status LED (labelling field illumination) for switch, push-button, dimmer and shutter functions dimming / position value transmitter 1 byte extension unit for light scene push-button
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
447
INSTABUS KNX/EIB B.IQ Order no.
Packing unit
Order no.
Push-button 2gang comfort polar white, matt stainless steel glass, polar white
7516 25 99 7516 25 93 7516 25 91
Push-button 4gang comfort polar white, matt stainless steel glass, polar white
1 1 1
Operating temperature -5- +45
7516 45 99 7516 45 93 7516 45 91
1 1 1
Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C
on page T69
on page T69 For bus coupling unit flush-mounted order no. 7504 00 01 Labelling field see accessories order no. 7590 00 80
For bus coupling unit flush-mounted order no. 7504 00 01 Labelling field see accessories order no. 7590 00 81
with anti-dismantling protection with blue operation LED and 4 white status LED (labelling field illumination) for switch, push-button, dimmer and shutter functions value transmitter for dimming, position, brightness and temperature values 1 and 2 byte extension unit for light scene push-button cyclic transmission can also be started via switching object alarm telegram after disconnection from bus coupling unit 1 bit or 1 byte single and two push-button operation parameterisable one push-button operation for switching, pushing, shutters and dimming activation of second user level via object
for installation in 1gang wall boxes with anti-dismantling protection with blue operation LED and 8 white status LED (labelling field illumination) for switch, push-button, dimmer and shutter functions value transmitter for dimming, position, brightness and temperature values 1 and 2 byte extension unit for light scene push-button cyclic transmission can also be started via switching object lockable via 3-button actuation alarm telegram after disconnection from bus coupling unit 1 bit or 1 byte single and two push-button operation parameterisable one push-button operation for switching, pushing, shutters and dimming activation of second user level via object
Push-button 3gang comfort polar white, matt stainless steel glass, polar white
7516 35 99 7516 35 93 7516 35 91
1 1 1
Light scene push-buttons Light scene push-button 8gang comfort polar white, matt stainless steel glass, polar white
Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C on page T69 For bus coupling unit flush-mounted order no. 7504 00 01 Labelling field see accessories order no. 7590 00 80
with anti-dismantling protection with blue operation LED and 6 white status LED (labelling field illumination) for switch, push-button, dimmer and shutter functions value transmitter for dimming, position, brightness and temperature values 1 and 2 byte extension unit for light scene push-button cyclic transmission can also be started via switching object alarm telegram after disconnection from bus coupling unit 1 bit or 1 byte single and two push-button operation parameterisable one push-button operation for switching, pushing, shutters and dimming activation of second user level via object
448
Packing unit
on page T69
7516 86 99 7516 86 93 7516 86 91
1 1 1
Light scenes max. 8; Load groups 8 (are increased in case of cascading); Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C For bus coupling unit flush-mounted order no. 7504 00 01 Labelling field see accessories order no. 7590 00 81
for installation in 1gang wall boxes with anti-dismantling protection with blue operation LED and 8 white status LED (labelling field illumination) retrieval, setting and storing of 8 light scenes dimming / position value transmitter 1 byte light scene push-buttons are cascadable second operating level for setting load groups via 3-button actuation
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
INSTABUS KNX/EIB B.IQ Order no.
Packing unit
Order no.
Push-buttons with room thermostat and display
Push-button 4gang with room thermostat and display
Push-button 3gang with room thermostat and display polar white, matt stainless steel glass, polar white on page T69
7566 35 99 7566 35 93 7566 35 91
1 1 1
Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C Only for bus coupling unit plus order no. 7504 00 03 Labelling field see accessories order no. 7590 00 80
for installation in 1gang wall boxes with anti-dismantling protection with blue operation LED and 6 white status LED (labelling field illumination) LC display with symbols and illumination, switchable via object display of operating mode, controller lockout, room/ outside temperature, time (clock required) text display (ASCII-format) with 2 additional display buttons button help function can be activated end customer display scope parameterisable for switch, push-button, dimmer, shutter and room thermostat functions value transmitter for dimming, position, brightness and temperature values 1 and 2 byte extension unit for light scene push-button cyclic transmission can also be started via switching object single and two push-button operation parameterisable one push-button operation for switching, pushing, shutters and dimming area dimming shutter operation concept short-long-short and long-short parameterisable rockers or push-button lockable via object alarm telegram after disconnection from bus coupling unit 1 bit, 1 or 2 byte with room temperature timer and 2-week timer functions for individual single room control controller operating modes: comfort, standby, night and frost/heat protection mode for heating and/or cooling mode with/without auxiliary step control parameter for heating / cooling unit pre-set for continuous (PI) or switched (2-point) control of max. 2 control circuits temperature measurement via internal and/or external sensor with mean value formation presence button parameterisable to extend comfort separate window contact object indicator objects for heating and cooling with valve protection function object for controller status with button lock function with flash-controller technology programmable with ETS2 as of V1.2a and ETS3
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
Packing unit
polar white, matt stainless steel glass, polar white on page T69
7566 45 99 7566 45 93 7566 45 91
1 1 1
Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C Only for bus coupling unit plus order no. 7504 00 03 Labelling field see accessories order no. 7590 00 81
for installation in 1gang wall boxes with anti-dismantling protection with blue operation LED and 8 white status LED (labelling field illumination) LC display with symbols and illumination, switchable via object display of operating mode, controller lockout, room/ outside temperature, time (clock required) text display (ASCII-format) with 2 additional display buttons button help function can be activated end customer display scope parameterisable for switch, push-button, dimmer, shutter and room thermostat functions value transmitter for dimming, position, brightness and temperature values 1 and 2 byte extension unit for light scene push-button cyclic transmission can also be started via switching object single and two push-button operation parameterisable one push-button operation for switching, pushing, shutters and dimming area dimming shutter operation concept short-long-short and long-short parameterisable rockers or push-button lockable via object alarm telegram after disconnection from bus coupling unit 1 bit, 1 or 2 byte with room temperature timer and 2-week timer functions for individual single room control controller operating modes: comfort, standby, night and frost/heat protection mode for heating and/or cooling mode with/without auxiliary step control parameter for heating / cooling unit pre-set for continuous (PI) or switched (2-point) control of max. 2 control circuits temperature measurement via internal and/or external sensor with mean value formation presence button parameterisable to extend comfort separate window contact object indicator objects for heating and cooling with valve protection function object for controller status with button lock function with flash-controller technology programmable with ETS2 as of V1.2a and ETS3
449
INSTABUS KNX/EIB B.IQ Order no.
Packing unit
Push-button 5gang with room thermostat and display polar white, matt stainless steel glass, polar white on page T69
7566 55 99 7566 55 93 7566 55 91
1 1 1
Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C
Packing unit
IR push-buttons with room thermostat and display IR push-button 3gang with room thermostat and display polar white, matt stainless steel glass, polar white
7566 36 99 7566 36 93 7566 36 91
1 1 1
Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C Only for bus coupling unit plus order no. 7504 00 03 Labelling field see accessories order no. 7590 00 82
for installation in 1gang wall boxes with anti-dismantling protection with blue operation LED and 10 white status LED (labelling field illumination) LC display with symbols and illumination, switchable via object display of operating mode, controller lockout, room/ outside temperature, time (clock required) text display (ASCII-format) with 2 additional display buttons button help function can be activated end customer display scope parameterisable for switch, push-button, dimmer, shutter and room thermostat functions value transmitter for dimming, position, brightness and temperature values 1 and 2 byte extension unit for light scene push-button cyclic transmission can also be started via switching object single and two push-button operation parameterisable one push-button operation for switching, pushing, shutters and dimming area dimming shutter operation concept short-long-short and long-short parameterisable rockers or push-button lockable via object alarm telegram after disconnection from bus coupling unit 1 bit, 1 or 2 byte with room temperature timer and 2-week timer functions for individual single room control controller operating modes: comfort, standby, night and frost/heat protection mode for heating and/or cooling mode with/without auxiliary step control parameter for heating / cooling unit pre-set for continuous (PI) or switched (2-point) control of max. 2 control circuits temperature measurement via internal and/or external sensor with mean value formation presence button parameterisable to extend comfort separate window contact object indicator objects for heating and cooling with valve protection function object for controller status with button lock function with flash-controller technology programmable with ETS2 as of V1.2a and ETS3
450
Order no.
IR hand-held transmitter order no. 2779 see house electronics. Only for bus coupling unit plus order no. 7504 00 03 Labelling field see accessories order no. 7590 00 80
for installation in 1gang wall boxes with anti-dismantling protection with blue operation LED and 6 white status LED (labelling field illumination) LC display with symbols and illumination, switchable via object display of operating mode, controller lockout, room/ outside temperature, time (clock required) text display (ASCII-format) with 2 additional display buttons button help function can be activated end customer display scope parameterisable for switch, push-button, dimmer, shutter and room thermostat functions IR telegram with RC5 coding parameterisable per push-button value transmitter for dimming, position, brightness and temperature values 1 and 2 byte extension unit for light scene push-button cyclic transmission can also be started via switching object single and two push-button operation parameterisable one push-button operation for switching, pushing, shutters and dimming area dimming shutter operation concept short-long-short and long-short parameterisable rockers or push-button lockable via object alarm telegram after disconnection from bus coupling unit 1 bit, 1 or 2 byte with room temperature timer and 2-week timer functions for individual single room control controller operating modes: comfort, standby, night and frost/heat protection mode for heating and/or cooling mode with/without auxiliary step control parameter for heating / cooling unit pre-set for continuous (PI) or switched (2-point) control of max. 2 control circuits temperature measurement via internal and/or external sensor with mean value formation presence button parameterisable to extend comfort separate window contact object indicator objects for heating and cooling with valve protection function object for controller status with button lock function with flash-controller technology programmable with ETS2 as of V1.2a and ETS3
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
INSTABUS KNX/EIB B.IQ Order no.
Packing unit
Order no.
Packing unit
IR push-button 4gang with room thermostat and display
IR push-button 5gang with room thermostat and display
polar white, matt stainless steel glass, polar white
polar white, matt stainless steel glass, polar white
7566 46 99 7566 46 93 7566 46 91
1 1 1
7566 56 99 7566 56 93 7566 56 91
1 1 1
Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C
Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C
IR hand-held transmitter order no. 2779 see house electronics.
IR hand-held transmitter order no. 2779 see house electronics.
Only for bus coupling unit plus order no. 7504 00 03 Labelling field see accessories order no. 7590 00 81
Only for bus coupling unit plus order no. 7504 00 03 Labelling field see accessories order no. 7590 00 82
for installation in 1gang wall boxes with anti-dismantling protection with blue operation LED and 8 white status LED (labelling field illumination) LC display with symbols and illumination, switchable via object display of operating mode, controller lockout, room/ outside temperature, time (clock required) text display (ASCII-format) with 2 additional display buttons button help function can be activated end customer display scope parameterisable for switch, push-button, dimmer, shutter and room thermostat functions IR telegram with RC5 coding parameterisable per push-button value transmitter for dimming, position, brightness and temperature values 1 and 2 byte extension unit for light scene push-button cyclic transmission can also be started via switching object single and two push-button operation parameterisable one push-button operation for switching, pushing, shutters and dimming area dimming shutter operation concept short-long-short and long-short parameterisable rockers or push-button lockable via object alarm telegram after disconnection from bus coupling unit 1 bit, 1 or 2 byte with room temperature timer and 2-week timer functions for individual single room control controller operating modes: comfort, standby, night and frost/heat protection mode for heating and/or cooling mode with/without auxiliary step control parameter for heating / cooling unit pre-set for continuous (PI) or switched (2-point) control of max. 2 control circuits temperature measurement via internal and/or external sensor with mean value formation presence button parameterisable to extend comfort separate window contact object indicator objects for heating and cooling with valve protection function object for controller status with button lock function with flash-controller technology programmable with ETS2 as of V1.2a and ETS3
for installation in 1gang wall boxes with anti-dismantling protection with blue operation LED and 10 white status LED (labelling field illumination) LC display with symbols and illumination, switchable via object display of operating mode, controller lockout, room/ outside temperature, time (clock required) text display (ASCII-format) with 2 additional display buttons button help function can be activated end customer display scope parameterisable for switch, push-button, dimmer, shutter and room thermostat functions IR telegram with RC5 coding parameterisable per push-button value transmitter for dimming, position, brightness and temperature values 1 and 2 byte extension unit for light scene push-button cyclic transmission can also be started via switching object single and two push-button operation parameterisable one push-button operation for switching, pushing, shutters and dimming area dimming shutter operation concept short-long-short and long-short parameterisable rockers or push-button lockable via object alarm telegram after disconnection from bus coupling unit 1 bit, 1 or 2 byte with room temperature timer and 2-week timer functions for individual single room control controller operating modes: comfort, standby, night and frost/heat protection mode for heating and/or cooling mode with/without auxiliary step control parameter for heating / cooling unit pre-set for continuous (PI) or switched (2-point) control of max. 2 control circuits temperature measurement via internal and/or external sensor with mean value formation presence button parameterisable to extend comfort separate window contact object indicator objects for heating and cooling with valve protection function object for controller status with button lock function with flash-controller technology programmable with ETS2 as of V1.2a and ETS3
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
451
INSTABUS KNX/EIB B.IQ / AQUATEC IP44 Order no.
Packing unit
Accessories
Packing unit
Push-buttons BCU / group push-buttons BCU Labelling field for B.IQ push-buttons 1gang, 2gang, 3gang clear transparent
7590 00 80
1
Dimensions (W x H x D) 151,6 x 85 x 5,7 mm
Labelling field for B.IQ push-buttons 4gang 7590 00 81
Push-button BCU 1gang light grey
7519 10 00
1
Dimensions (W x H x D) 151,6 x 114,6 x 5,7 mm
can be illuminated by status LED
for order no. 1290 05, 7599 10 00, 7599 11 00, 7599 13 00
for switch and push-button functions with integral bus coupling unit with programming button with red programming LED and red status LED bus connection via connecting terminal Wago clip-in 3-wire connection terminal for wiring
Labelling field for B.IQ push-buttons 5gang
Push-button BCU 2gang
clear transparent
light grey
7590 00 82
Dimensions (W x H x D) 151,6 x 144,2 x 5,7 mm
1
IP44 with rocker.
can be illuminated by status LED
clear transparent
Push-button BCU‘s
Operating voltage over bus 21 - 32 V=; Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C
on page T69
on page T69
Order no.
1
7519 20 00
1
Operating voltage over bus 21 - 32 V=; Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C Degree of protection IP44 with mounted rockers.
on page T69
can be illuminated by status LED
for order no. 7599 20 00, 7599 21 00
for switch, push-button, dimmer and shutter functions with integral bus coupling unit with programming button with red programming LED and 2 red status LEDs bus connection via connecting terminal Wago clip-in 3-wire connection terminal for wiring
Group push-button BCU‘s Group push-button BCU 1gang light grey
7519 11 00
1
Operating voltage over bus 21 - 32 V=; Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C IP44 with rocker. for order no. 1290 05, 7599 10 00, 7599 11 00, 7599 12 00, 7599 13 00
for switch, push-button, dimmer and shutter functions with integral bus coupling unit with programming button with red programming LED and red status LED with neutral-position bus connection via connecting terminal Wago clip-in 3-wire connection terminal for wiring
452
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
INSTABUS KNX/EIB AQUATEC IP44 Order no.
Packing unit
Packing unit
Emergency switch covers
Group push-button BCU 2gang light grey
Order no.
1
7519 21 00
cover with glass screen, rocker and adhesive label sheets
Operating voltage over bus 21 - 32 V=; Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C
red
Degree of protection IP44 with mounted rockers.
1290 05
10
The cover can be replaced with the standard rocker on all rocker switches and rocker push-buttons in this range.
for order no. 7599 20 00, 7599 22 00
for switch, push-button, dimmer and shutter functions with integral bus coupling unit with programming button with red programming LED and 2 red status LEDs with neutral-position bus connection via connecting terminal Wago clip-in 3-wire connection terminal for wiring
Housing bolts made of stainless steel. Adhesive label sheets, text white: „Notschalter“, „Rauchabzug“, „Feuerschutztür schließen“, „Feuerabschluss schließen“, „Heizung“, „Lichtkuppel“, „Hausalarm“ und „Öffnen“ supplied. Not suitable for heating systems > 50 kW.
Rockers
In case of danger break glass and press rocker!
Rocker grey
7599 10 00
10
for rocker switches for rocker push-buttons for push-button BCU 1gang and group push-button BCU 1gang
for order no. 7519 ..
for push-button BCU 1gang and group push-button BCU 1gang
Rocker with imprinted symbol arrows
Rocker with labelling field grey
7599 13 00
10
for order no. 7519 ..
for push-button BCU 1gang and group push-button BCU 1gang
Rocker with 5 lenses attached 7599 11 00
grey
7599 12 00
10
For group push-button BCU 1gang order no. 7519 11 00
For labelling with name, information notice, etc.
grey
Rockers
Rockers grey
7599 20 00
10
for order no. 7519 ..
10
Lenses with symbol for light, bell, door and neutral in clear, also neutral in red transparent. for order no. 7519 ..
for push-button BCU 1gang and group push-button BCU 1gang
for push-button BCU 2gang and group push-button BCU 2gang
Rockers with imprinted symbol arrow grey
7599 21 00
10
For push-button BCU 2gang order no. 7519 20 00
Rockers with imprinted symbol arrows grey
7599 22 00
10
For group push-button BCU 2gang order no. 7519 21 00
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
453
INSTABUS KNX/EIB QUICK OVERVIEW SWITCH / SHUTTER ACTUATORS INSTABUS®KNX/EIB QUICK OVERVIEW SWITCH / SHUTTER ACTUATORS Feature
General - Type of installation - Module width (units) - Manual operation - Rated current - Current detection - Operating voltage - Relay type Functions in application software (only switching) initialisation functions - Relay operating mode (NO / NC contact) - Behaviour after bus power restoration - Behaviour after bus / mains power restoration - Behaviour after ETS download - Behaviour after bus power failure Types of positive operation - Blocking function - Positive operation Logical links - AND - OR - AND with feedback Time functions - Switch-on delay - Switch-off delay - Stairwell function - Stairwell function with switch-on delay - Pre-warning time - Time extension - Variable stairwell time - Variable stairwell time with activation Other functions - Light scene function - Central function - Cyclical monitoring - Operating hours meter Current detection - Measured value detection - Monitoring load range exceeded - Monitoring load range not reached - Teach-in function Manual operation - Blocking function - Status Feedback functions - Relay status (individual) - Relay status (combined) Switching capacities Switching capacities to DIN EN 60669 Switching capacities to DIN EN 60947-4-1. - AC1 - AC3 Mechanical operating life Ohmic load Incandescent lamp load HV halogen lamp LV halogen lamp - on inductive transformers - on electronic transformers Fluorescent lamp - uncompensated - compensated - Duo circuit Fluorescent lamp on electronic ballast - Osram QTP 2x58W - Osram QT-FQ 2x54W - Osram QT-FH 2x28W Capacitive load Maximum making current Current detection - Measuring range - Measuring accuracy 1)
Switch actuator 2gang 16 A, order no. 75312008 Switch actuator 4gang 16 A C load with current Switch actuator 4gang 16 A, order no. 75314015 detection, order no. 75314016 Switch actuator 8gang 16 A, order no. 75318004 Switch actuator 8gang 16 A C load with current detection, order no. 75318005
Switch / shutter actuator 8/4gang 16 A, order no. 75318003 Switch / shutter actuator 16/8gang 16 A, order no. 75310002
RMD 4/8
RMD 4/8
RMD 4/8
16 A Bus bi-stable
16 AX capacitive load
16 A Mains: 110-230 V AC mono-stable
-
-
Bus bi-stable
-
1) 1)
1)
-
-
mechanical Manual operation
mechanical Manual operation
(per channel)
16 A / 140 µF
16 A / 200 µF
16 A / 140 µF
16 A 1,000,000 3600 W 2500 W 2500 W
16 A 16 A 1,000,000 3680 W 3680 W 3680 W
16 A 5,000,000 3000 W 3000 W 2500 W
1200 W 1500 W
2000 W 2500 W
1500 W 1800 W
2500 W 1300 W 2300 W
3680 W 2500 W 2500 W
1000 W 1160 W 2300 W
11 11 17 16 A / 140 µF 400 A / 150 µs
17 17 25 16 A / 200 µF 600 A / 150 µs
11 11 17 16 A / 140 µF 800 A / 150 µs
-
aprox. 250 mA to 20 A aprox. ± 8%
-
Note: With the switch / shutter actuator 16-/8gang (order no. 75310002) these functions are available only on use of the ETS3 Patch d (down loadable under www.konnex.org).
454
INSTABUS KNX/EIB QUICK OVERVIEW SWITCH / SHUTTER ACTUATORS INSTABUS®KNX/EIB QUICK OVERVIEW SWITCH / SHUTTER ACTUATORS Feature
General - Type of installation - Module width (units) - Manual operation - Rated current - Current detection - Operating voltage - Relay type - End position detection (electro-mechanical drives) Functions in application software (only shutter) initialisation functions - Behaviour after bus power restoration - Behaviour after ETS download - Behaviour after bus power failure Direct positive functions - Up / Down / Stop - Blade adjustment - Move to position (blades and shutter) - Positions with end position detection - Central function - Light scene function - Fabric tensioning / ventilation - Shutters / awnings operation - Ventilation flap operation Sun protection function - Simple sun protection Automatic function - Sun protection (extended) - Heating / cooling Security functions - Wind alarms (3 items) - Rain alarm - Frost alarm - Positive operation Feedback functions - Position shutter - Position blades - Invalid position - Drive movement Manual operation - Blocking function - Status Switching capacities Contact load rating Switching capacities to DIN EN 60669 AC switching capacity DC switching capacity Switching capacities to DIN EN 60947-4-1. - AC1 - AC3 Ohmic load Incandescent lamp load HV halogen lamp LV halogen lamp - on inductive transformers - on electronic transformers Fluorescent lamp - uncompensated - compensated - Duo circuit Fluorescent lamp on electronic ballast - Osram QTP 2x58W - Osram QT-FQ 2x54W - Osram QT-FH 2x28W Capacitive load Maximum making current
Shutter actuator 4gang 230 V AC / 2gang 12-48 V DC, order no.75314018 Shutter actuator 8gang 230 V AC / 4gang 12-48 V DC, order no.75318008
Switch / shutter actuator 8/4gang 16 A, order no. 75318003 Switch / shutter actuator 16/8gang 16 A, order no. 75310002
RMD 4
RMD 4/8
6A Mains: 110-230 V AC mono-stable
16 A Mains: 110-230 V AC mono-stable -
-
-
(per channel)
(per channel)
6 A / 230 V AC1 6 A / 230 V AC1 6 A / 230 V (50% switch-on time) 3 A / 230 V (continuous rating) 6 A / 12-48 V DC (50% switch-on time) 3 A / 12-48 V DC (continuous rating)
16 A / 230 V AC1 16 AX / 140 µF 16 A
6A -
16 A 3000 W 3000 W 2500 W
-
1500 W 1800 W
-
1000 W 1160 W 2300 W
-
11 11 17 16 A / 140 µF 800 A / 200 µs
-
455
INSTABUS KNX/EIB QUICK OVERVIEW DIMMING ACTUATORS DALI GATEWAY INSTABUS®KNX/EIB QUICK OVERVIEW DIMMING ACTUATORS DALI GATEWAY Feature General Outputs Type of installation Type of installation Manual operation Operating voltage Functions in application software (only switching) Initialisation functions - Behaviour after bus power restoration - Behaviour after ETS download - Behaviour after bus power failure - Switch-on brightness - Basic brightness - Upper dimming limit Direct functions - On/Off - Relative dimming - absolute dimming Types of positive operation - Blocking function - Positive operation Time functions - Switch-on delay - Switch-off delay - Timed dimming function - Pre-warning time - Time extension - Variable stairwell dimming time - Variable stairwell dimming time with activation - Soft switch-on - Soft switch-off - Switch-off brightness - Characteristic curve correction Other functions - Light scene function - Central function - Setting for type of load - Operating hours meter - Independent binary inputs Manual operation - Blocking function - Status Feedback functions - Switch status feedback - Brightness value feedback - Short circuit feedback - Open circuit feedback DALI-specific functions - Individual DALI device status feedback - DALI power supply status feedback - DALI short circuit feedback Power output / output variables Maximum power per channel Minimum power per channel Universal boosters per channel Max. number of controllable DALI devices Max. number of DALI devices per group 1-16 Max. number of DALI devices per group 17-32
456
Universal dim actuator 4gang, 20-210 W/VA, order no. 75314017
Universal dim actuator 1gang 50-210 W/VA flush-mounted, order no. 75341003
DALI gateway RMD, order no. 75710003
4 RMD 8
1 Flush-mounted 230 V, 50/60 Hz
1 (for max. 64 devices in 32 groups) RMD 4
190-230 V, 50/60 Hz
110-230 V, 50/60 Hz
-
(per channel)
-
(Groups 1-16) (Groups 1-16) -
-
-
2
-
-
-
-
210 W/VA 20 W/VA Phase cut-off max. 10 items @ 500 W -
210 W/VA 50 W/VA -
64 64 1
457
Alarm system wired With the most modern technology this conventional wired alarm system gives reliable protection. The system offers economical monitoring, particularly of smaller properties such as owner-occupied flats, whole-floor flats, holiday homes etc. ■ Economical, wired alarm system ■ Integrated key switch ■ Monitoring both when occupied and when unoccupied ■ Input for emergency / attack button ■ Integrated protection against sabotage; back-up power supply ■ 4 signalling lines with LED displays available Alarm system EIB The EIB alarm central unit is an intelligent and very powerful alarm system. Integrated into the instabus KNX/EIB building system and certified to EIBA directives, the subject enjoys optimum monitoring. ■ Uses the instabus KNX/EIB installation bus ■ Minimises additional wiring work ■ 160 detectors are managed in up to 4 separate security zones ■ Individual identification and monitoring of all detectors ■ Precise time and date records of all events ■ Back-up power supply battery lasts at least 12 hours ■ Local detector input for self-protection of the device ■ Relay contact for additional functions
458
Alarm system wired Alarm system KNX/EIB
With the most modern technology and high-tech design integrated into the living environment, the Berker ALARM SYSTEM provides reliable protection. Insurance offers financial compensation for stolen items, but they cannot replace sentimental value. Therefore it is best to combine good insurance with suitable precautionary measures against break-ins, theft and vandalism.
459
ALARM SYSTEM Order no.
Packing unit
Alarm system wired
on page T43
Packing unit
Alarm system KNX/EIB
Alarm central unit polar white/black
Order no.
Alarm central unit KNX/EIB 9020
1
polar white/black
7573 00 10
1
Operating voltage 230 V~; Frequency 50 Hz; Operating voltage, alternative 12 V=; Output voltage 12 V=; Switching current at 12 V=: max. 1 A; Buzzer volume 85 dBA/10 cm; Siren duration adjustable approx. 0 - 180 sec.; Activation/alarm delay time adjustable 0 - 60 sec.; Pulse duration for inputs min. 0,4 sec.; Operating temperature 0 - 50 °C; Dimensions (W x H x D) 165 x 215 x 48 mm
Operating voltage 230 V~; Frequency 50/60 Hz; Output voltage 12 V=; Switching current max. 1,8 A; Switching current change-over contact 12 V= max. 5 A; Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C; Max. cable length, alarm units 100 m; Cable length for wired detector, max. 200 m; Max. cable length sabotage 600 m; Dimensions (W x H x D) 210 x 270 x 72 mm
Lithium battery pack 14.4 V for emergency power supply - order separately!
To agree upon a training date, please contact your regional Berker field sales representative.
for wired components with 4 signal lines (internal, external, sabotage, 24 h) 2 control centre and 4 signal line status LED emergency power supply from battery with sabotage protection by contact in cover with integrated key switch and 2 keys with buzzer for acknowledgement and internal alarm message flash light on external siren lights until disarmed with fitting material with screw terminals
Accessories: Lithium battery pack 14.4 V 9214 01
1
14,4 V=, 2 Ah Cable length approx. 60 mm
as emergency power supply for alarm central unit
To prevent malfunctions, we recommend that only Berker KNX/EIB products are used in connection with the alarm central unit KNX/EIB. for maximum 160 sensors (communication objects) and 4 alarm zones alarm zones can be activated individually or linked history memory with individual sensor identification detector descriptions can be defined as required cyclic sensor monitoring alarm duration and delay times activated/alarm adjustable sensor inputs via binary inputs or universal interfaces activat. phone dial unit assault, burglary, fire, malfunc.,armed/not armed on potent.-free cont./ KNX outputs for outside/inside siren and flash light or via KNX/EIB with sabotage protection by contact in cover additional signal input as sabotage protection for mounting place decentral indication and operation, e.g. info display with emergency power storage battery 12 V for maximum 12 hours with integral clock (DCF-compatible using system clock) with green operation LED and red programming LED with control LED per output cascadable with fitting material requirement: ETS2 V1.2a or ETS3 bus connection via connecting terminal with screw terminals
Accessories: Emergency power storage battery 12 V 9200 01
1
12 V=, 1,2 Ah for order no. 7573 00 10
for alarm central unit KNX/EIB for replacement need
460
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
ALARM SYSTEM Order no.
Packing unit
Detectors
Order no.
Glass breakage sensors
Magnetic contacts
Glass breakage sensor polar white brown
Magnetic contact polar white brown
on page T40
Packing unit
9251 02 9251 01
1 1
Switching voltage max. 40 V=; Switching current max. 500 mA; Max. switching capacity 10 W; Cable length 3 m; Dimensions, sensor (L x W x H) 44 x 15 x 15 mm RolloTec function: When window is open, blind moves to the lower end position for example. Suitable for RolloTec covers with sensor connection. To monitor window and door opening.
on page T44
9253 02 9253 01
1 1
Switching voltage max. 18 V=; Switching current max. 10 mA; Transition resistance no load max. 30 Ω; Transition resistance alarm state min. 1 MΩ; Opening time 0,5 - 5 Sec. depending on glass type; Cable length 5 m Attention! Please use the following adhesive sets only. www.loctite.com 29691 Glass-metal adhesive set of: 319 adhesive and 7649 activator for order no. 9020 Connection e.g. with universal interface order no. 7564 .. .. to alarm central unit KNX/EIB order no. 7573 00 10
RolloTec time switch with sensor connection order no. 1755 .., 1775 .. RolloTec memory button with sensor connection order no. 1757 .. RolloTec radio button with sensor connection order no. 1759 .. RolloTec button comfort with sensor connection order no. 1771 .. Connection e.g. with universal interface order no. 7564 .0 01 to alarm central unit EIB order no. 7573 00 10 For alarm central unit order no. 9020
IP67 passive glass break sensor with potential-free contacts without auxiliary voltage for bonding on window pane pre-assembled, with cable opens the contact in case of glass breakage
IP67
Motion detectors Motion detector 90°
built-on/built-in pre-assembled, with cable in the isolated state the contact is open
polar white
Gate contact 9252
1
Switching voltage max. 20 V=; Switching current max. 500 mA; Cable length 2 m Connection e.g. with universal interface order no. 7564 .. .. to alarm central unit KNX/EIB order no. 7573 00 10 For alarm central unit order no. 9020
IP67 magnetic contact to monitor opening of gates and roller doors solid metal design for floor mounting with fitting material pre-assembled, with cable in the isolated state the contact is open
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
9155
1
12 V= Recommended installation height approx. 2,3 m; Range approx. 15 m; Detection angle 90 °; Sectors 31; Switching segments 124; Sensitivity adjustable 2 - 4 pulses; Dimensions (W x H x D) 60 x 112 x 42 mm for order no. 9020 Connection e.g. with universal interface order no. 7564 .. .. to alarm central unit KNX/EIB order no. 7573 00 10
IP20 with LED detection indicator with failsafe break contact (NC contact) with sabotage protection by contact in cover with crawl-under protection for wall and corner mounting with cable entry at top, backside and each side with screw terminals
461
ALARM SYSTEM Order no.
Packing unit
Order no.
Smoke detectors
Radio networking module for smoke detector RM.1
Smoke detector RM.1 polar white
on page T45
0191 09
Packing unit
0191 50
1
9 V= Max. monitoring area 60 m²; Acoustic alarm > 85 dBA/3 m; Network cable, e.g. JY-ST-Y 2x2x0,6 mm; Max. network cable length 450 m; Battery life approx. 2 years; Operating temperature -10 - +60 °C; Dimensions (diameter x assembling height) 100 x 51 mm
on page T45
1
Radio transmission/reception frequency 868 MHz; Radio signal transmission power < 1 mW; Radio signal transmission range (free field) max. 200 m; Radio transmission range (building) max. 30 m; Operating temperature -10 - +60 °C; Dimensions (W x H x D) 54 x 22 x 5 mm For the function with smoke detector RM.1 a lithium block battery 9 V is obligatory!
Fixing of the smoke detector on the bottom part is only possible with a battery.
For smoke detector order no. 0191 09 Replacement Lithium block battery see radio bus / accessories order no. 9209
The smoke detector RM.1 is a home smoke detector designed for application in closed living quarters as e.g. flats, residential houses.
Approval according to R&TTE for wireless forwarding of alarm and service signals for max. 8 detector groups with selective repeater function with lithium block battery 9 V
It is for early detection of smouldering fires and open fires producing smoke in interiors. Approval according to ISO 12239
Alarm units
IP43
Sirens
VdS certified Nr. G203023 not dependent on mains power works on stray light principle (Tyndall effect) with no radioactive compounds loud warning tone in case of alarm with red alarm LED with block battery 9 V with networking terminal for forwarding of alarm and service signals, max. 40 smoke detectors RM.1 optional push-on radio networking module for forwarding of alarm and service signals pluggable optional push-on relay module for external signal generators or connection to/networking via KNX/EIB automatic self-test function contamination and fault display with antistatic insect screen with battery change indicator min. 30 days with button for manual function test with sealing with fitting material for ceiling mounting
Smoke detector accessories Relay module for smoke detector RM.1 0191 51
1
External siren with flashlight polar white
on page T44
9051 50
1
12 V= Current consumption max. 600 mA; Flash current consumption 300 mA; Siren current consumption 300 mA; Flash energy 6,7 Ws; Flash alarm duration - Fuzzy; Duration of siren alarm - fuzzy, max. 3 Min.; Sound pressure at 1 metre distance 108 dB; Operating temperature -20 - +50 °C; Weight approx. 2,8 kg; Dimensions (W x H x D) 180 x 390 x 140 mm For alarm central unit KNX/EIB order no. 7573 00 10 For alarm central unit order no. 9020
IP64 for connection to alarm central unit and KNX/EIB alarm central unit with loud pressure-chamber siren with sabotage protection by contact in cover and arcing contact powder-coated stainless steel housing with fitting material with screw terminals
Switching voltage max. 30 V=; Switching current max. 2 A; Operating temperature -10 - +60 °C on page T45
For smoke detector order no. 0191 09 Connection e.g. with universal interface order no. 7564 .. .. to alarm central unit KNX/EIB order no. 7573 00 10 Connection to alarm central unit order no. 9020
for connection of external signal generators such as horns, flash lights, vibration pads etc. for connection to and networking via KNX/EIB with potential-free change-over contact
462
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
ALARM SYSTEM Order no.
Packing unit
9050
1
9 - 14 V=, 140 Switch-on time ED 100 %; Sound pressure at 1 metre distance 110 dB; ;Signal frequency adjustable 2800 - 3100 Hz; Operating temperature -20 - 60 °C; Weight approx. 160 g; Dimensions (W x H x D) 145 x 95 x 30 mm
The indoor siren serves firstly to alarm the residents, for example when there is a smoke alarm. Secondly the loud acoustic signal scares away criminals. For alarm central unit KNX/EIB order no. 7573 00 10 For alarm central unit order no. 9020
IP30 for connection to alarm central unit and KNX/EIB alarm central unit with loud piezo signal generator, dual tone with sabotage protection by contact in cover with break-out cable entry at top/bottom and backside with fitting material with screw terminals
Telephone diallers Automatic telephone dial unit
on page T44
9255
TC-Phone surface-mounted white
The indoor siren can be operated together with the external siren on the alarm central unit.
beige
Packing unit
KNX/EIB TC phone
Internal siren polar white
Order no.
1
230 V~, 50/60 Hz Switching voltage 24 V; Switching current 50 mA (short-circuit-proof); Message/status texts per 6; Call numbers for alarm 3; Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C; Dimensions (W x H x D) 180 x 220 x 40 mm
7573 00 01
1
Operating voltage over bus 21 - 32 V=; Auxiliary voltage 230 V~; Frequency 50/60 Hz; Switching voltage 24 V; Switching current 50 mA (short-circuit-proof); Message/status texts per 6; Call numbers for alarm 3; Operating temperature -5 - +45 °C; Dimensions (W x H x D) 185 x 215 x 45 mm For alarm central unit KNX/EIB order no. 7573 00 10
control/polling with conventional TSU telephone to alarm neighbours and acquaintances as well as using mobile with password protection using four-digit number on opening with 2-line LC display for status display with 2 instabus KNX/EIB signal inputs with 4 potential-free signal inputs with 6 selectable instabus KNX/EIB outputs with 4 selectable relay outputs (normally open) channels can be adjusted independently analogue, extension unit compatible, e.g. to TAE N socket and FCC socket with TAE N connection cable with plug-in power supply unit bus connection via connecting terminal with screw terminals
Accessories: Handset black
For alarm central unit KNX/EIB order no. 7573 00 10 For alarm central unit order no. 9020
7590 00 09
1
to record custom announcement texts standard commercially available telephone receiver with RJ11 plug
control/polling with conventional TSU telephone to alarm neighbours and acquaintances as well as using mobile 2-line LC display with password protection using four-digit number on opening with 4 potential-free signal inputs 4 outputs switchable via telephone analogue, extension unit compatible, e.g. to TAE N socket and FCC socket with TAE N connection cable with plug-in power supply unit with fitting material with screw terminals
Accessories: Handset black
7590 00 09
1
to record custom announcement texts standard commercially available telephone receiver with RJ11 plug
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
463
ALARM SYSTEM Order no.
Packing unit
Order no.
Activation switches
Key switch surface-mounted with LED
Key switches
polar white
Key switch with LED flush-mounted polar white
on page T44
9103 01
1
12 V= Switching current 500 mA/60V=; Current consumption per LED max. 5 mA; Buzzer current consumption 6 mA; Buzzer volume 70 dBA/30 cm; Operating temperature -20 - +60 °C; Flush-mounted housing dimensions (W x H x D) 79 x 113 x 53,5 mm; Front plate dimensions (W x H) 101 x 135 mm Recommendation: Use identical closing to that of the master key system. For suitable alternative profile half cylinders, see module inserts. Profile half cylinder see module inserts / accessories order no. 1818 01, 1818 Connection e.g. with universal interface order no. 7564 .. .. to alarm central unit KNX/EIB order no. 7573 00 10 For alarm central unit order no. 9020
IP54 to connect to alarm central unit with 2 LEDs for free activation, orange and green with protection against drilling and ceiling contact to prevent sabotage with acknowledgement buzzer powder-coated aluminium front plate for profile half cylinders with two-hole screws as dismantling protection and screwdriver with screw terminals
on page T44
Packing unit
9103 02
1
12 V= Switching current 500 mA/60V=; Current consumption per LED max. 5 mA; Buzzer current consumption 6 mA; Buzzer volume 70 dBA/30 cm; Operating temperature -20 - +60 °C; Dimensions (W x H x D) 79,5 x 113,5 x 54 mm Recommendation: Use identical closing to that of the master key system. For suitable alternative profile half cylinders, see module inserts. Profile half cylinder see module inserts / accessories order no. 1818 01, 1818 Connection e.g. with universal interface order no. 7564 .. .. to alarm central unit KNX/EIB order no. 7573 00 10 For alarm central unit order no. 9020
IP54 to connect to alarm central unit with 2 LEDs for free activation, orange and green with protection against drilling and ceiling contact to prevent sabotage with acknowledgement buzzer powder-coated aluminium front plate for profile half cylinders with two-hole screws as dismantling protection and screwdriver with screw terminals
Compulsory activating device Blocking elements Electromechanical blocking element 9108
1
7 - 15 V= Current consumption (idle) approx. 40 mA; Current consumption (closing) approx. 60 mA; Current consumption (blocking) approx. 120 mA; Feedback outputs for bolt position 50 mA; Opening time 0,5 sec.; Operating temperature -25 - 60 °C; Lock bolt distance 12 mm; Distance to the counterpiece max. 8 mm; Cable length approx. 3 m; Dimensions housing (W x H x D) 20 x 134 x 28 mm; Dimensions Stulp (W x H x D) 20 x 175 x 2 mm For activation via switch actuator order no. 7531 60 02 For alarm central unit KNX/EIB order no. 7573 00 10
for activation with static or dynamic signals with integral magnet contact to build into the door frame for alarm central unit KNX/EIB
464
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
ALARM SYSTEM Order no.
Packing unit
Order no.
Packing unit
Bolt switch contact Bolt switch contact NO contact
9107
1
Switching voltage max. 30 V=; Switching current max. 100 mA; Cable length approx. 2 m; Dimensions (W x H x D) 11 x 40 x 22 mm Transfer of contact position to bus e.g. with universal interface order no. 7564 80 01 For alarm central unit KNX/EIB order no. 7573 00 10
is operated by lock bolt to build into the lock plate on the door frame with switch lever extension for alarm central unit KNX/EIB
Accessories Distribution terminals Distribution terminal flush-mounted polar white
9254
1
12 V=
with 8pole through-contacted circuit board with sabotage protection by contact in cover with cover suitable for standard commercially available flushmounted and hollow-wall boxes without spreader claws with screw terminals
Distribution terminal surface-mounted polar white
9259
1
12 V= Dimensions (W x H x D) 36 x 132 x 34 mm
with 8pole through-contacted circuit board with sabotage protection by contact in cover with fitting material with solder connection
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
465
Surfaces Frames /inserts Plastic, matt * brown
similar to RAL 8017
anthracite
similar to RAL 7021
Plastic, glossy * polar white similar to RAL 9010 grey
similar to RAL 7038
red
similar to RAL 3003
green
similar to RAL 6029
orange
similar to RAL 2003
Plastic, metallised chrome, glossy chrome, matt gold, glossy gold, matt * Surface structure differs in some cases
466
berker integro
Built-in system
The Berker Integro built-in range satisfies the most demanding requirements: Modern design, quick installation, integration of modern communications systems. In addition the attractive fashionable colours offer scope for flexible interior design.
■ Ultra-compact design – particularly suitable for use in mobile homes, furniture construction and the field of sanitation ■ Also satisfies special demands such as in boat and ship building, and in laboratories ■ Trouble-free installation with no special tool requirements ■ Flexible potential uses thanks to extremely compact dimensions and minimal installation depth ■ Can be integrated into modern communications systems
467
BERKER INTEGRO Order no.
Packing unit
NEW
Frames NEW
on page T70
brown, matt anthracite, matt grey, glossy polar white, glossy chrome, glossy chrome, matt gold, glossy gold, matt red, glossy orange, glossy
on page T70
09 1827 25 01 09 1827 25 05 09 1827 25 07 09 1827 25 09 09 1827 25 18 09 1827 25 28 09 1827 25 38 09 1827 25 34 09 1827 25 76
* * 09 1827 25 70 * 09 1827 25 74
10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
green, glossy
10
orange, glossy
10
Frame 2gang brown, matt anthracite, matt grey, glossy polar white, glossy chrome, glossy chrome, matt gold, glossy red, glossy green, glossy orange, glossy
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
09 1826 25 11 09 1826 25 15 09 1826 25 07 09 1826 25 19 09 1826 25 18 09 1826 25 28 09 1826 25 38 09 1826 25 76
* * 09 1826 25 70 * 09 1826 25 74
09 1828 25 01 09 1828 25 05 09 1828 25 07 09 1828 25 09 09 1828 25 18 09 1828 25 28 09 1828 25 38 09 1828 25 34 09 1828 25 76
* * 09 1828 25 70 * 09 1828 25 74
10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
for covering on socket outlets
Surface-mounted housings Built-on installation housings Built-on installation housing 1gang high design brown, glossy anthracite, glossy grey, glossy polar white, glossy
2 2
Packing unit
Frame 1gang with hinged cover brown, matt anthracite, matt grey, glossy polar white, glossy chrome, glossy chrome, matt gold, glossy gold, matt red, glossy
Frame 1gang
green, glossy
NEW
Order no.
on page T70
09 1151 25 01 09 1151 25 05 09 1151 25 07 09 1151 25 09
10 10 10 10
Dimensions (W x H x D) 59,5 x 59,5 x 41 mm For suitable tube-entries and replacement for cable and duct entries refer to the dry surface-mounted range.
for vertical and horizontal mounting NEW
on page T70
brown, matt anthracite, matt grey, glossy polar white, glossy chrome, matt chrome, glossy red, glossy green, glossy orange, glossy
2 2 2 2 2 2
09 1819 25 11 09 1819 25 15 09 1819 25 07 09 1819 25 19 09 1819 25 68 09 1819 25 18
* * 09 1819 25 76 * 09 1819 25 70 * 09 1819 25 74
NEW
2 2 2
Wall box order no. 09 1933 not suitable for frames 3gang chrome, glossy order no. 0918 19 25 18
on page T70
Built-on installation housing 1gang high design brown, glossy, with cable clamp
* 09 1151 25 11
10
anthracite, glossy, with cable clamp
* 09 1151 25 15
10
grey, glossy, with cable clamp
* 09 1151 25 17
10
polar white, glossy, with cable clamp
* 09 1151 25 19
10
Dimensions (W x H x D) 59,5 x 59,5 x 41 mm For suitable tube-entries and replacement for cable and duct entries refer to the dry surface-mounted range.
for vertical and horizontal mounting NEW
to built-on installation of devices suitable for mounting on flammable base surface with cable entry
Frame 3gang
Frame 1gang with labelling field anthracite, matt grey, glossy polar white, glossy chrome, matt red, glossy green, glossy orange, glossy
09 1803 25 05 09 1803 25 07 09 1803 25 09 09 1803 25 68
* * 09 1803 25 76
09 1803 25 90 09 1803 25 94
10 10 10 10
to built-on installation of devices suitable for mounting on flammable base surface with cable entry
10 10 10
Labelling field height arranged for 6 mm P-touch strips.
468
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
BERKER INTEGRO Order no.
on page T70
Packing unit
Order no.
Built-on installation housing 1gang flat design
Switches
anthracite, glossy, without cable clamp
09 1152 25 25
10
Rocker switches
polar white, glossy, without cable clamp
09 1152 25 29
10
anthracite, glossy, with cable clamp
09 1152 25 55
10
polar white, glossy, with cable clamp
09 1152 25 59
10
anthracite, glossy, with 2 cable clamps
09 1152 25 65
10
polar white, glossy, with 2 cable clamps
09 1152 25 69
10
Rocker switch
on page T70
Dimensions (W x H x D) 59,5 x 59,5 x 16 mm
to built-on installation of switches and push-buttons suitable for mounting on flammable base surface
Distance rings NEW
on page T70
Surface-mounted spacer ring brown, glossy anthracite, glossy grey, glossy polar white, glossy chrome, matt
*
09 1825 25 11 09 1825 25 15 09 1825 25 06 09 1825 25 12 09 1825 25 68
Packing unit
10 10 10 10 10
Dimensions (W x H x D) 59,5 x 59,5 x 10 mm
for the reduction of the installation depth of the devices and surf.-mount. of switches and push-b.
brown, matt, on/off anthracite, matt, on/off grey, glossy, on/off polar white, glossy, on/off
09 3651 25 01 09 3651 25 05 09 3651 25 07 09 3651 25 09
10 10 10 10
chrome, glossy, on/off chrome, matt, on/off brown, matt, change-over
09 3651 25 18 09 3651 25 28 09 3656 25 01
10 10 10
anthracite, matt, change-over
09 3656 25 05
10
grey, glossy, change-over
09 3656 25 07
10
polar white, glossy, change-over
09 3656 25 09
10
chrome, glossy, change-over
09 3656 25 18
10
chrome, matt, change-over
09 3656 25 28
10
gold, glossy, change-over
09 3656 25 38
10
gold, matt, change-over brown, matt, intermediate
09 3656 25 34 09 3657 25 01
10 10
anthracite, matt, intermediate
09 3657 25 05
10
grey, glossy, intermediate
09 3657 25 07
10
polar white, glossy, intermediate
09 3657 25 09
10
16 AX, 250 V~ Suitable for all Berker Integro wall boxes Ø 45 mm and Ø 49 mm. with screw terminals
Rocker switch
on page T70
brown, matt, 2pole on/off anthracite, matt, 2pole on/off
09 3652 25 01 09 3652 25 05
10 10
grey, glossy, 2pole on/off polar white, glossy, 2pole on/off
09 3652 25 07 09 3652 25 09
10 10
chrome, matt, 2pole on/off
09 3652 25 28
10
16 AX, 250 V~ Suitable for all Berker Integro wall boxes Ø 45 mm and Ø 49 mm. For switching of 16 A socket outlets, for example.
with imprint „0“ with screw terminals
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
469
BERKER INTEGRO Order no.
Packing unit
Packing unit
Supporting plates
Rocker control switch with red lens
on page T70
Order no.
brown, matt, 2pole on/off anthracite, matt, 2pole on/off
09 3752 25 01 09 3752 25 05
10 10
grey, glossy, 2pole on/off polar white, glossy, 2pole on/off
09 3752 25 07 09 3752 25 09
10 10
brown, matt anthracite, matt grey, glossy polar white, glossy
chrome, matt, 2pole on/off
09 3752 25 68
10
Cut-out (W x H) 26,4 x 25,5 mm
Supporting plate for appliance switches with cover plate
16 AX, 250 V~ Neon lamp current 0,9 mA Suitable for all Berker Integro wall boxes Ø 45 mm and Ø 49 mm.
09 4507 25 01 09 4507 25 05 09 4507 25 07 09 4507 25 09
10 10 10 10
for appliance switches, push-buttons and pilot lamps of the series RW and RD
Rockers switches Rockers switch
with imprint „0“ with integral neon lamp for illumination and monitoring circuit with screw terminals
09 3655 25 01 09 3655 25 05 09 3655 25 07 09 3655 25 09
10 10 10 10
09 3655 25 18 09 3655 25 28 09 3655 25 38 09 3655 25 34
10 10 10 10
brown, matt, 2pole on/off anthracite, matt, 2pole on/off
09 3762 25 31 09 3762 25 35
10 10
chrome, glossy, series chrome, matt, series gold, glossy, series gold, matt, series
polar white, glossy, 2pole on/off
09 3762 25 39
10
16 AX, 250 V~
Rocker control switch 12 V with red lens
on page T70
brown, matt, series anthracite, matt, series grey, glossy, series polar white, glossy, series
Suitable for all Berker Integro wall boxes Ø 45 mm and Ø 49 mm.
5 A, 12 V= LED current 10 mA Suitable for all Berker Integro wall boxes Ø 45 mm and Ø 49 mm. For reasons of adjusting the numbers, replaced by order no. 09376225.. with imprint „0“ for illumination and monitoring circuit with integral indicator LED with screw terminals
Push-buttons Rocker push-buttons NEW
on page T70
Appliance rocker switch „USA/CANADA“
Rocker push-button brown, matt, NO contact anthracite, matt, NO contact
09 3671 25 01 09 3671 25 05
10 10
grey, glossy, NO contact polar white, glossy, NO contact
09 3671 25 07 09 3671 25 09
10 10
anthracite, matt, 2pole on/off
09 4509 25 05
10
chrome, glossy, NO contact
* 09 3671 25 18
10
polar white, matt, 2pole on/off
09 4509 25 02
10
chrome, matt, NO contact
* 09 3671 25 28
10
16 A, 250 V~ fast-on terminal size 6,3 x 0,8 mm
gold, glossy, NO contact
* 09 3671 25 38
10
Switch UL listed.
Suitable for all Berker Integro wall boxes Ø 45 mm and Ø 49 mm.
Suitable for all Berker Integro wall boxes Ø 45 mm and Ø 49 mm. with imprint „0“ and „1“ with fast-on terminal connection
470
with screw terminals
10 A, 250 V~
with screw terminals
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
BERKER INTEGRO Order no.
on page T70
Packing unit
Order no.
Rocker push-button with lighting and red lens
Push-buttons for shutters
brown, matt, NO contact anthracite, matt, NO contact
09 3772 25 01 09 3772 25 05
10 10
NEW
grey, glossy, NO contact polar white, glossy, NO contact
09 3772 25 07 09 3772 25 09
10 10
Rockers push-buttons for shutters
10 A, 250 V~ Neon lamp current 0,9 mA If multiple illuminated rocker push-buttons are used the lamp current may result in malfunctioning of the relay/remote control switch. Remedy: Insert a neutral conductor or connect a capacitor 230 V, 1 µF per 10 mA neon lamp current in parallel with the coil.
chrome, matt, 2 NO * 09 3675 25 08 contacts, common input terminal
09 3675 25 21 09 3675 25 25 09 3675 25 27 09 3675 25 29
10 10 10 10
chrome, matt, 1pole
* 09 3675 25 28
10
Follow the motor manufacturers‘ instructions! with electrical interlocking to prevent mutual activation with screw terminals
Rotary dimmers Rotary dimmer with setting knob
Rockers push-button 09 3675 25 01 brown, matt, 2 NO contacts, common input terminal 09 3675 25 05 anthracite, matt, 2 NO contacts, common input terminal 09 3675 25 07 grey, glossy, 2 NO contacts, common input terminal polar white, glossy, 2 NO 09 3675 25 09 contacts, common input terminal chrome, glossy, 2 NO * 09 3675 25 18 contacts, common input terminal
brown, matt, 1pole anthracite, matt, 1pole grey, glossy, 1pole polar white, glossy, 1pole
Suitable for all Berker Integro wall boxes Ø 45 mm and Ø 49 mm.
Rockers push-buttons NEW
Rockers push-button for shutters with imprinted symbol arrow
10 A, 250 V~
Suitable for all Berker Integro wall boxes Ø 45 mm and Ø 49 mm.
with integral neon lamp for illumination and monitoring circuit with screw terminals
Packing unit
10 on page T70
10
10
10
brown, matt anthracite, matt grey, glossy polar white, glossy chrome, glossy chrome, matt gold, glossy
09 2870 25 01 09 2870 25 05 09 2870 25 07 09 2870 25 09 09 2870 25 18 09 2870 25 28 09 2870 25 38
10 10 10 10 10 10 10
230 V~, 50 Hz 230 V incandescent and halogen lamps 40 - 200 W; Power boosters built-in/RMD max. 10; Axial dimension diameter 4 mm Suitable for all Berker Integro wall boxes Ø 45 mm (except the flat design) and Ø 49 mm.
10
1 10
10 A, 250 V~
G
J
with change-over pressure switch short-circuit and overload proof (fine-wire fuse) with spare fuse phase cut-on with screw terminals
Suitable for all Berker Integro wall boxes Ø 45 mm and Ø 49 mm. with screw terminals
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
471
BERKER INTEGRO Order no.
Packing unit
Rotary dimmer with setting knob and frame brown, matt anthracite, matt grey, glossy polar white, glossy on page T70
09 2871 25 71 09 2871 25 75 09 2871 25 77 09 2871 25 79
1 1 1 1
230 V~, 50 Hz 230 V incandescent and halogen lamps 60 - 400 W; LV power boosters Eb max. 10; Axial dimension diameter 4 mm
Packing unit
Control units 1-10 V Rotary potentiometer 1-10 V with setting knob and frame brown, matt anthracite, matt grey, glossy polar white, glossy
09 2891 25 01 09 2891 25 05 09 2891 25 06 09 2891 25 09
10 10 10 10
Not suitable for Berker Integro wall boxes, built-on installation housings and clamp rings.
230 V~, 50/60 Hz Switching current 6 A; Control current 50 mA; Installation depth 22 mm; Axial dimension diameter 4 mm
1
In case of excessive making currents use making current limiters order no. 0185.
G
J
To ensure same illumination, use only electronic ballasts and fluorescent lamps from the same manufacturers.
with change-over pressure switch short-circuit and overload proof (fine-wire fuse) with spare fuse phase cut-on for installation in switch panels with screw terminals NEW
Order no.
Possible to change fuse without removing cover. When using of LV halogen lamps we recommend Berker Tronic transformer with 1-10 V interface order no. 2977.
Rotary dimmer with setting knob 12 V DC brown, matt anthracite, matt grey, glossy polar white, glossy chrome, glossy chrome, matt gold, glossy
09 2876 25 01 09 2876 25 05 09 2876 25 07 09 2876 25 09 09 2876 25 18
* * 09 2876 25 28 * 09 2876 25 38
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
12 V= 12 V incandescent and halogen lamps 10 - 60 W; Quiescent current 3 mA; Axial dimension diameter 4 mm; Installation depth 33 mm Not suitable for Berker Integro wall boxes, built-on installation housings and clamp rings. with soft-lock with on/off pressure switch with pulse width control short-circuit and overload proof (electronic fuse) with screw terminals
Not suitable for Berker Integro wall boxes, built-on installation housings and clamp rings. Interface to DIN EN 60928 with on/off pressure switch for switching and controlling electronic ballasts and Tronic transformers with 1-10 V interface e.g. for fluorescent lamps and LV halogen lamps basic brightness programmable short-circuit and overload proof (fine-wire fuse) with spare fuse with screw terminals
Fuse protection Supporting plate for fine-wire fuse anthracite, matt
09 4516 25 25
10
6,3 A, 250 V~ Suitable for all Berker Integro wall boxes Ø 45 mm (except the flat design) and Ø 49 mm. Without fine-wire fuse. Fine-wire fuses DIN 41572 and EN 60127-2 with fuse holder for fine-wire fuses with solder connection
472
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
BERKER INTEGRO Order no.
Packing unit
Order no.
Socket outlets
SCHUKO-socket outlet 45°
SCHUKO-socket outlets
brown, matt anthracite, matt grey, matt polar white, matt
SCHUKO-socket outlet
on page T70
brown, matt anthracite, matt grey, matt polar white, matt brown, matt, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1 anthracite, matt, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1 grey, matt, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1 polar white, matt, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1
09 4778 25 01 09 4778 25 05 09 4778 25 06 09 4778 25 02 09 4779 25 01
10 10 10 10 10
09 4779 25 05
10
09 4779 25 06
10
09 4779 25 02
10
on page T70
200 200 200 200
16 A, 250 V~
Connection terminals to IEC 60884-1 for diagonal installation with screw terminals
Socket outlets without earth contact
Suitable for all Berker Integro wall boxes Ø 45 mm (except the flat design) and Ø 49 mm.
Socket outlet without earth contact
on page T70
Connection terminals to IEC 60884-1 with plug-in terminals
SCHUKO-socket outlet
on page T70
08 4185 25 21 08 4185 25 25 08 4185 25 26 08 4185 25 22
Only suitable for wall boxes order no. 0818 37, 0918 83, 0918 87, 0919 15 .., 0919 33
16 A, 250 V~
brown, matt anthracite, matt grey, matt polar white, matt brown, matt, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1 anthracite, matt, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1 grey, matt, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1 polar white, matt, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1
Packing unit
09 4185 25 01 09 4185 25 05 09 4185 25 06 09 4185 25 02 09 4195 25 01
10 10 10 10 10
09 4195 25 05
10
09 4195 25 06
10
09 4195 25 02
10
16 A, 250 V~ Suitable for all Berker Integro wall boxes Ø 45 mm (except the flat design) and Ø 49 mm. Connection terminals to IEC 60884-1 with screw terminals
brown, matt, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1 anthracite, matt, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1 grey, matt, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1 polar white, matt, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1
09 6194 25 01
10
09 6194 25 05
10
09 6194 25 06
10
09 6194 25 02
10
16 A, 250 V~ Suitable for all Berker Integro wall boxes Ø 45 mm (except the flat design) and Ø 49 mm. Connection terminals to IEC 60884-1 2pole with screw terminals
Socket outlets with earth pin Socket outlet with earth pin
on page T70
brown, matt anthracite, matt grey, matt polar white, matt brown, matt, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1 anthracite, matt, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1 grey, matt, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1 polar white, matt, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1
09 6185 25 01 09 6185 25 05 09 6185 25 06 09 6185 25 02 09 6195 25 01
10 10 10 10 10
09 6195 25 05
10
09 6195 25 06
10
09 6195 25 02
10
16 A, 250 V~ Suitable for all Berker Integro wall boxes Ø 45 mm (except the flat design) and Ø 49 mm. Connection terminals to IEC 60884-1 2pole + earth with screw terminals
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
473
BERKER INTEGRO Order no.
Packing unit
Swiss socket outlets
Order no.
Danish socket outlets
Socket outlet with earth contact, Switzerland, type 13
on page T70
brown, matt anthracite, matt grey, matt polar white, matt
Packing unit
09 6249 25 01 09 6249 25 05 09 6249 25 06 09 6249 25 02
10 10 10 10
10 A, 250 V~
Socket outlet with earth contact, Denmark
on page T70
Not suitable for fixing ring. Only suitable for wall boxes order no. 0918 83, 0918 87, 0919 15 .., 0919 33
Connection terminals to IEC 60884-1
brown, matt, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1 anthracite, matt, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1 grey, matt, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1 polar white, matt, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1
09 6272 25 01
10
09 6272 25 05
10
09 6272 25 06
10
09 6272 25 02
10
13 A, 250 V~
2pole + earth with screw terminals
Suitable for all Berker Integro wall boxes Ø 45 mm (except the flat design) and Ø 49 mm.
Italian socket outlets Standard DK/SR 107-2-D1 Connection terminals to IEC 60884-1
Socket outlet with earth contact, Italy
on page T70
brown, matt, insert white with enhanced contact protection anthracite, matt, insert white with enhanced contact protection grey, glossy, insert white with enhanced contact protection polar white, glossy, insert white with enhanced contact protection
09 6253 25 01
09 6253 25 15
10
2pole + earth with screw terminals
10
Euro-American Standard socket outlets 09 6253 25 17
09 6253 25 09
Socket outlet without earth contact „Euro-American Standard“
10
10 on page T70
16 A, 250 V~ Not suitable for fixing ring. Only suitable for wall boxes order no. 0918 83, 0918 87, 0919 15 .., 0919 33
2pole + earth with screw terminals
brown, matt, enhanced contact protection
09 6262 25 01
10
anthracite, matt, enhanced contact protection grey, matt, enhanced contact protection
09 6262 25 05
10
09 6262 25 06
10
polar white, matt, enhanced contact protection
09 6262 25 02
10
Suitable for all Berker Integro wall boxes Ø 45 mm (except the flat design) and Ø 49 mm.
474
09 6257 25 05
10
09 6257 25 06
10
09 6257 25 02
10
Connection terminals according to IEC 60884-1 Standard GB 1002 2pole with screw terminals
NEMA-socket outlets Socket outlet with earth contact, USA/CANADA, NEMA 5-15 R anthracite polar white
13 A, 250 V~
2pole + earth with screw terminals
10
Suitable for all Berker Integro wall boxes Ø 45 mm (except the flat design) and Ø 49 mm.
Socket outlet with earth contact, British Standard
Standard BS 1363
09 6257 25 01
10 A, 250 V~
British Standard socket outlets
on page T70
brown, matt, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1 anthracite, matt, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1 grey, matt, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1 polar white, matt, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1
09 6252 25 05 09 6252 25 02
10 10
15 A, 125 V~ on page T70
Suitable for all Berker Integro wall boxes Ø 45 mm (except the flat design) and Ø 49 mm. Equates to standard NEMA 5-15 R 2pole + earth with fast-on terminal connection protective earth conductor with screw connection
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
BERKER INTEGRO Order no.
Packing unit
Australian socket outlets
Packing unit
TV/audio
Socket outlet with earth contact, Australia brown, insert black anthracite grey, insert black polar white on page T70
Order no.
09 6256 25 01 09 6256 25 05 09 6256 25 06 09 6256 25 02
10 10 10 10
15 A, 250 V~ Suitable for all Berker Integro wall boxes Ø 45 mm (except the flat design) and Ø 49 mm. 2pole + earth contact screws, cross-head, size PH2 with screw terminals
Motor vehicle connecting devices Motor vehicle socket outlet brown, matt anthracite, matt grey, glossy polar white, glossy
09 4517 25 01 09 4517 25 05 09 4517 25 07 09 4517 25 09
10 10 10 10
6 - 24 V, 16 A fast-on terminal size 6,3 x 0,8 mm
Aerial sockets Aerial connection box TV brown, matt, with solder connection
09 4511 25 11
10
anthracite, matt, with solder connection
09 4511 25 15
10
grey, matt, with solder connection
09 4511 25 16
10
polar white, matt, with solder connection
09 4511 25 12
10
brown, matt, with connection in F system
09 4581 25 01
10
anthracite, matt, with connection in F system
09 4581 25 05
10
grey, matt, with connection in F system
09 4581 25 06
10
polar white, matt, with connection in F system
09 4581 25 02
10
DIN 45325
Aerial connection box SAT
Suitable for all Berker Integro wall boxes Ø 45 mm (except the flat design) and Ø 49 mm. for order no. 4637
brown, matt anthracite, matt grey, matt polar white, matt
09 4519 25 01 09 4519 25 05 09 4519 25 06 09 4519 25 02
10 10 10 10
with fast-on terminal connection with double F-socket
Motor vehicle connector black
4637
10
6 - 24 V, 8 A
Aerial connection box TV/radio polar white, matt
09 4561 25 02
10
For motor vehicle socket outlet order no. 0945 17 25 ..
with IEC and F socket with connection in F system
with solder connection
Motor vehicle power socket outlet anthracite, matt
09 4570 25 05
Aerial connection box radio/SAT 10
6 - 24 V, 20 A at 2.5 mm², 15 A at 1.5 mm² Not suitable for wall boxes. with fast-on terminal connection
09 4560 25 01 09 4560 25 05 09 4560 25 02
10 10 10
with IEC and F socket with connection in F system
Blank plates NEW
brown, matt anthracite, matt polar white, matt
Blank plate brown, matt anthracite, matt grey, glossy polar white, glossy chrome, matt
*
09 4516 25 01 09 4516 25 05 09 4516 25 07 09 4516 25 09 08 4516 25 68
10 10 10 10 200
with supporting plate
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
475
BERKER INTEGRO Order no.
Packing unit
Order no.
Data-/telecommunications
Graphics sockets
Supporting plates for modular jacks
NEW
polar white/black
anthracite, glossy grey, glossy polar white, glossy
Dimensions (W x H x D) 31 x 18 x 35 mm; Conductor cross-section max. 1,5 mm²
10 10 10 on page T62
Not suitable for hinged cover.
NEW
Modules: Panduit for Mini-Com jacks cat.3, cat.5e, cat.6, cat.6 10Gig for Mini-Com fibre-optic modules for Mini-Com BNC connector modules for Mini-Com 3.5 mm stereo connection/coupling modules for Mini-Com loudspeaker cables / banana plug modules for Mini-Com F-plug coupling modules for Mini-Com Cinch connection/coupling modules for Mini-Com S-Video connection/coupling modules for Mini-Com D-Subminiature connectors 15pole for Mini-Com dummy modules 1gang with 30° oblique outlet
on page T62
1
on page T63
Central plate order no. 1427 .. Supporting plate order no. 0945 59 ..
with cinch socket and module carrier with tool free cutting terminals
RJ45, cat.6, shielded (AWG 26)
1980
1
1984
1
* 1985
1
Central plate order no. 1427 .. Supporting plate order no. 0945 59 ..
Cat.5 DIN EN 50173-1:2003 and ISO/IEC 11801, 2nd edition Cat.6 DIN EN 50173-1:2003 and ISO/IEC 11801, 2nd edition Protective screen DIN EN 55022 class B Colour code A and B EIA/TIA 568A
Blank module Blank module
Video cinch module Conductor diameter 0,5 - 0,65 mm (AWG 24-22); Conductor cross-section 0,2 - 0,325 mm² (AWG 24-22); Dimensions (W x H x D) 15 x 18 x 35 mm
Mini jack 8pole
with cutting terminals
with 2 Cinch sockets and module carriers with tool free cutting terminals
* 1992
1
Central plate order no. 1427 .. Supporting plate order no. 0945 59 ..
black, RJ45, cat.3, ISDN-compatible RJ45, cat.5e, shielded (AWG 24-22)
Conductor diameter 0,5 - 0,65 mm (AWG 24-22); Conductor cross-section 0,2 - 0,325 mm² (AWG 24-22); Module dimensions (W x H x D) 15 x 18 x 35 mm
polar white/yellow
* 1993
Conductor diameter 0,5 - 0,65 mm (AWG 24-22); Conductor cross-section 0,2 - 0,325 mm² (AWG 24-22); Dimensions (W x H x D) 15 x 18 x 35 mm
Modular jacks NEW
Central plate order no. 1427 .. Supporting plate order no. 0945 59 ..
NEW
S-Video module
with S-Video and module carrier with tool free cutting terminals
on page T64
Cinch module set 1989
Central plate order no. 1427 .. Supporting plate order no. 0945 59 ..
polar white/black
Cinch sockets polar white/red
1
* 1994
with a 15pole D-subminiature socket SVGA compatible occupies 2 MINI-COM module spaces in the cover with screw-in lift terminals
For mini jack order no. 1980, 1984, 1985 For cinch module set order no. 1989 For blank module order no. 1990 For video cinch module order no. 1992 For S-Video module order no. 1993 For VGA module order no. 1994
on page T63
VGA module
Supporting plate for 2 MINI-COM modules 09 4559 25 05 09 4559 25 07 09 4559 25 09
Packing unit
1
polar white, 1gang
1990
1
Dimensions (W x H x D) 15 x 18 x 35 mm Central plate order no. 1427 .. Supporting plate order no. 0945 59 ..
Supporting plates for modular jacks Supporting plate for AMP modular jacks 1gang anthracite, glossy grey, glossy polar white, glossy
09 4557 25 05 09 4557 25 07 09 4557 25 09
10 10 10
Indexing dimension (W x H) approx. 14,9 x 20,7 mm Not suitable for hinged cover. MT-RJ jack: AMP; Intracom; Telena; Modular jacks: Brand-Rex; CobiNet; EFB Electronic; Schumann; Standard 110 Connect jack: AMP; SL series toolless jack: AMP; EMT modular jack: AMP for AMP modular jacks series 110 Connect cat.3, cat.5, cat.5e and cat.6
476
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
BERKER INTEGRO Order no.
Order no.
Packing unit
Packing unit
Installation instructions of IP44 covers Frame with hinged cover and imprint "IP44"
Wallbox (only if necessary)
Socket outlet
Installation aperture Sealing
Attention! IP44 protection is reached only if the installation instruction is observed.. Rocker switch/ Rocker push-button
Frame with imprint "IP44"
Covers IP44
Wallbox (only if necessary)
Frame with hinged cover and imprint „IP44“
Sealings Sealing black
09 1853
10
Not for switches/push-buttons with split rocker! For socket outlets 0841 85 .., 0941 85 .., 0941 95 .., 0947 78 .., 0947 79 .. For rocker switches/rocker push-buttons 0936 51 .., 0936 52 .., 0936 56 .., 0936 57 .., 0936 71 .., 0937 52 .., 0937 72 .. For socket outlets with earth pin order no. 0961 85 .., 0961 95 ..
IP44 for rocker switches/rocker push-buttons for SCHUKO-socket outlets and socket outlets with earth pin
brown, matt anthracite, matt grey, glossy polar white, glossy red, glossy green, glossy orange, glossy
09 1828 25 91 09 1828 25 95 09 1828 25 97 09 1828 25 99 09 1828 25 86 09 1828 25 90 09 1828 25 94
10 10 10 10 10 10 10
Protection class IP44 only guaranteed for installation with sealing 0918 53
IP44 without sealing for covering on socket outlets
Frames Frame with imprint „IP44“ brown, matt anthracite, matt grey, glossy polar white, glossy on page T70
09 1827 25 91 09 1827 25 95 09 1827 25 97 09 1827 25 99
10 10 10 10
Not for devices with split rocker! Protection class IP44 only guaranteed for installation with sealing 0918 53
IP44 without sealing for covering on rocker switches/rocker pushbuttons
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
477
BERKER INTEGRO Order no.
Packing unit
Order no.
Wall boxes
Wall box for vertical mounting 2gang Wall box, flat, Ø 45 mm grey, with cable clamp
09 1820 01
200
Installation depth 22 mm
on page T70
Packing unit
on page T70
Flame resistant according to VDE 0606-1
D
I
09 1911
100
grey, with 2x external double cable clamps
09 1911 01
100
Length 109 mm; Width 48 mm; Installation depth 45,5 mm Only suitable for 2gang frames!
only for switches and push-buttons with cable entry
Flame resistant according to VDE 0606-1
D
Wall box Ø 45 mm grey, with cable clamp
grey, with 1 external double cable clamp
09 1820
200
I
with 4 cable entries on backside 2 knock out openings
Installation depth 35,5 mm
Wall box for horizontal mounting 2gang on page T70
Flame resistant according to VDE 0606-1
D
I
for switches and socket outlets with 4 cable entries 3 knock out openings
on page T70
Wall box Ø 49 mm grey, with 1x internal double cable clamp on side
09 1887
grey, with 2x external double cable clamps
09 1912 01
100
Length 109 mm; Width 48 mm; Installation depth 45,5 mm
D
I
with 4 cable entries on backside 2 knock out openings
Flame resistant according to VDE 0606-1
I
Wall box 3gang
with 2 cable entries
grey, with 1 cable clamp
Wall box Ø 49 mm
Length 168 mm; Width 49 mm; Installation depth 38 mm
grey, with 1 external double cable clamp
09 1883
200 on page T70
Installation depth 45,5 mm
I
Restricted installation options apply if the cable clamp is mounted on the front face.
Flame resistant according to VDE 0606-1
D
Wall box 2gang 09 1915 01 09 1915 02
Length 109 mm; Width 49 mm; Installation depth 37 mm Only suitable for 2gang frames!
10
Not suitable for frames 3gang chrome, glossy order no. 0918 19 25 18
with 2 cable entries on backside 1 knock out opening
grey, with cable clamp grey, with 2 cable clamps
09 1933
All devices can optionally be arranged vertically or horizontally.
Flame resistant according to VDE 0606-1
D
on page T70
100
Flame resistant according to VDE 0606-1
on page T70
on page T70
09 1912
Only suitable for 2gang frames!
200
Installation depth 38 mm
D
grey, with 1 external double cable clamp
10 10
I
for vertical and horizontal mounting with 6 cable entries, 1 per side, top, bottom and 2 on backside 5 knock out openings
Wall box for clamping ring Ø 58 mm grey, with 1x internal cable clamp
08 1837
200
Installation depth 35 mm Flame resistant according to VDE 0606-1 for vertical and horizontal mounting with 2 cable entries 1 knock out opening
478
Flame resistant according to VDE 0606-1
D
I
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
BERKER INTEGRO Order no.
Packing unit
Order no.
Packing unit
Accessories Fixing rings Fixing clamping ring grey, material thickness 5 mm
08 1836
200
dark grey, material thickness 4 mm
08 1836 01
200
polar white, material thickness 6 mm
08 1836 02
200
Hole diameter 50 mm For Berker Integro inserts, e. g. for installation in mirrors. For wall box for clamping ring Ø 58 mm order no. 0818 37
Assembly templates Assembly template, cardboard grey
09 1844
10
For precise hole drilling for 1gang devices and for 2 and 3gang combinations.
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
479
Surfaces/frames/inserts Plastic, glossy black
similar to RAL 9005
polar white similar to RAL 9010 Decorative rings Plastic, glossy brown
similar to RAL 8011
deep black similar to RAL 9005 grey
similar to RAL 7038
polar white similar to RAL 9010
480
yellow
similar to RAL 1004
red
similar to RAL 3003
green
similar to RAL 6029
blue
similar to RAL 5013
Mobil R TWIN
Built-in system
This series can be used anywhere where extremely shallow installation depths and minimal dimensions are important. The timeless design allows you to integrate the Berker MOBIL R TWIN into any modern ambience.
■ Integrated into the planning of furniture, especially sanitary and kitchen facilities, electrical appliances and mobile homes ■ Contemporary, functional design ■ Available surfaces: polar white or black ■ Decor rings in a large number of attractive colours open up additional design options for your customers
481
MOBIL R TWIN Order no.
Packing unit
Frames
Order no.
Packing unit
Surface-mounted housings Frame 1gang polar white, glossy black, glossy brown, glossy
Built-on installation housing 1gang high design 09 1941 09 09 1941 05 09 1941 01
polar white, glossy black, glossy brown, glossy
10 10 10
09 1151 09 09 1151 05 09 1151 01
10 10 10
Dimensions (W x H x D) 59,5 x 59,5 x 41 mm on page T70
on page T70
Frame 2gang polar white, glossy black, glossy
on page T70
2 2
09 1942 09 09 1942 05
to built-on installation of devices suitable for mounting on flammable base surface with cable entry
for vertical and horizontal mounting
Built-on installation housing 1gang flat design
Special frame 1gang with 19 mm edge polar white, glossy black, glossy
09 1943 09 09 1943 05
10 10
Installation depth reduction 10 mm on page T70
on page T70
Use only in conjunction with spacer 09 1936!
for the reduction of the installation depth of the devices and surf.-mount. of switches and push-b.
Special frame 2gang with 19 mm edge polar white, glossy black, glossy
2 2
09 1944 09 09 1944 05
Installation depth reduction 10 mm on page T70
polar white, glossy, without cable clamp
09 1152 29
10
black, glossy, without cable clamp
09 1152 25
10
brown, glossy, without cable clamp
09 1152 21
10
polar white, glossy, with cable clamp
09 1152 59
10
black, glossy, with cable clamp
09 1152 55
10
polar white, glossy, with 2 cable clamps
09 1152 69
10
black, glossy, with 2 cable clamps
09 1152 65
10
Dimensions (W x H x D) 59,5 x 59,5 x 16 mm
Use only in conjunction with spacer 09 1936!
for vertical and horizontal mounting for the reduction of the installation depth of the devices and surf.-mount. of switches and push-b.
to built-on installation of switches and push-buttons suitable for mounting on flammable base surface
Switches Rocker switches
Distance rings/Decorative rings
Rocker switch
Spacer for special frame with 19 mm edge black, glossy
09 1936
10
Installation depth reduction 10 mm
on page T70
For suitable tube-entries, combination connectors and replacement for cable and duct entries refer to the dry surface-mounted range.
for the reduction of the installation depth of the devices and surf.-mount. of switches and push-b.
Decor ring/adapter polar white, glossy black, glossy brown, glossy grey, glossy yellow, glossy red, glossy green, glossy blue, glossy
09 1969 09 09 1969 05 09 1969 01 09 1969 07 09 1969 61 09 1969 62 09 1969 63 09 1969 65
10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
on page T70
polar white, glossy, change-over
09 3686 09
10
black, glossy, change-over
09 3686 05
10
16 AX, 250 V~ Suitable for all Berker Integro wall boxes Ø 45 mm and Ø 49 mm. with screw terminals
For use of all devices from the Berker Integro range.
482
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
MOBIL R TWIN Order no.
Packing unit
polar white, glossy, 2pole on/off
09 3682 09
10
black, glossy, 2pole on/off
09 3682 05
10
SCHUKO-socket outlets SCHUKO-socket outlet
16 AX, 250 V~ Suitable for all Berker Integro wall boxes Ø 45 mm and Ø 49 mm.
on page T70
For switching of 16 A socket outlets, for example.
polar white, glossy black, glossy
09 2892 09 09 2892 05
09 4198 05
10
SCHUKO-socket outlet with hinged cover
10 10
230 V~, 50 Hz 230 V incandescent and halogen lamps 40 - 200 W; Power boosters built-in/RMD max. 10; Axial dimension diameter 4 mm
on page T70
Suitable for all Berker Integro wall boxes Ø 45 mm (except the flat design) and Ø 49 mm.
G
J
09 2893 79 09 2893 75
10 10 10
09 4199 05
10
Socket outlets with earth pin Socket outlet with earth pin
1 1
230 V~, 50 Hz 230 V incandescent and halogen lamps 60 - 400 W; LV power boosters Eb max. 10; Axial dimension diameter 4 mm
on page T70
Not suitable for Mobil R TWIN wall boxes, built-on installation housings and clamping rings.
G
09 4197 09 09 4197 05 09 4199 09
Connection terminals to IEC 60884-1 when opening hinged cover, it can be arrested in end position with screw terminals
Rotary dimmer with setting knob and frame polar white, glossy black, glossy
polar white, glossy black, glossy polar white, glossy, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1 black, glossy, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1
16 A, 250 V~ Suitable for all Berker Integro wall boxes Ø 45 mm (except the flat design) and Ø 49 mm.
with change-over pressure switch short-circuit and overload proof (fine-wire fuse) with spare fuse phase cut-on with screw terminals
1
10 10 10
with screw terminals
Rotary dimmer with setting knob
on page T70
09 4196 09 09 4196 05 09 4198 09
Connection terminals to IEC 60884-1
Rotary dimmers
1
polar white, glossy black, glossy polar white, glossy, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1 black, glossy, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1
16 A, 250 V~ Suitable for all Berker Integro wall boxes Ø 45 mm (except the flat design) and Ø 49 mm.
with imprint „0“ with screw terminals
on page T70
Packing unit
Socket outlets
Rocker switch
on page T70
Order no.
polar white, glossy, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1 black, glossy, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1 16 A, 250 V~
09 6198 09
10
09 6198 05
10
Suitable for all Berker Integro wall boxes Ø 45 mm (except the flat design) and Ø 49 mm. Connection terminals to IEC 60884-1
J
2pole + earth with screw terminals
with change-over pressure switch short-circuit and overload proof (fine-wire fuse) with spare fuse phase cut-on for installation in switch panels with screw terminals
Socket outlet with earth pin and hinged cover
on page T70
10 09 6199 09 polar white, glossy, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1 10 black, glossy, enhanced 09 6199 05 contact protection IEC 60884-1 16 A, 250 V~ Suitable for all Berker Integro wall boxes Ø 45 mm (except the flat design) and Ø 49 mm. Connection terminals to IEC 60884-1 2pole + earth when opening hinged cover, it can be arrested in end position with screw terminals
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
483
Surface Frames /covers/centre inserts Splash-protected flush-mounted IP44, impact-resistant Plastic, glossy white
similar to RAL 1013
polar white similar to RAL 9010
484
brown
similar to RAL 8011
grey
similar to RAL 7035
red
similar to RAL 3003
Splash-protected flush-mounted IP44
Splash-protected Flush-mounted range
The splash-protected flush-mounted range from Berker is particularly suitable for use in swimming pools, garages, kitchens and service areas, laboratories and in outdoor areas (e.g. balconies, terraces).
■ High-impact thermoplastic matterial ■ Use of module inserts (with the exception of key switches) ■ Available surfaces: white, polar white, brown in glossy plastic
It must be ensured that the sealing lies flush. Installation spanning irregularities such as joints between tiles should be avoided.
485
Splash-protected products also available in certain flush-mounted surface ranges
Further splash-protected products are available for certain design lines. Examples of the fully assembled products from these design lines are shown below.
Berker K.1
Further IP44-compatible products - marked with can be found in the following design lines:
Berker K.1 from page 186 IP44 protection can be achieved only by using the proper sealing set.
berker k.5
Berker K.5 from page 190 IP44 protection can be achieved only by using the proper sealing set.
berker arsys ip44
Berker Arsys IP44 on page 273 IP44 protection can be achieved only by using the proper sealing set.
486
FLUSH-MOUNTED SPLASH-PROTECTED IP44 Order no.
Packing unit
Frames white, glossy, 1gang white, glossy, 2gang white, glossy, 3gang
SCHUKO-socket outlets 1328 1329 1330
10 2 2
Use only in conjunction with sealing flange order no. 1884!
SCHUKO-socket outlet with hinged cover
on page T6
for vertical and horizontal mounting
Frame with sealing
on page T67
polar white, glossy, 1gang
1328 09
10
polar white, glossy, 2gang
1329 09
2
polar white, glossy, 3gang
1330 09
2
10 10 10 10
4716 09
10
4716 01
10
with imprint with plug-in terminals
SCHUKO-socket outlet with hinged cover and frame white, glossy polar white, glossy brown, glossy
Frame with sealing 1328 01 1329 01 1330 01
10 2 2
on page T6
10 10 10
16 A, 250 V~
with imprint with sealing flange with flush-mounted box with plug-in terminals
for vertical and horizontal mounting
Accessories
SCHUKO-socket outlet with cover plate and hinged cover
Sealing flange for all splash-protected flush-mounted devices 1884
4718 4718 09 4718 01
Connection terminals IEC 60884-1
Use only in conjunction with sealing flange order no. 1884!
grey
4715 4715 09 4715 01 4716
Connection terminals IEC 60884-1
for vertical and horizontal mounting
brown, glossy, 1gang brown, glossy, 2gang brown, glossy, 3gang
white, glossy polar white, glossy brown, glossy white, glossy, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1 polar white, glossy, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1 brown, glossy, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1 16 A, 250 V~
Use only in conjunction with sealing flange order no. 1884!
on page T67
Packing unit
Socket outlets Frame with sealing
on page T67
Order no.
polar white, glossy grey, glossy
10
The sealing flange must be inserted between the supporting plate and the wall!
1 1
4211 09 4211
16 A, 250 V~ on page T6
Connection terminals IEC 60884-1 with sealing cup with flush-mounted box for single mounting without spreader claws with screw terminals
SCHUKO-socket outlet with hinged cover and labelling field white, glossy polar white, glossy brown, glossy on page T6
4719 4719 09 4719 01
10 10 10
16 A, 250 V~ Labelling field height arranged for 9 mm P-touch strips. Connection terminals IEC 60884-1 with imprint with plug-in terminals
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
487
FLUSH-MOUNTED SPLASH-PROTECTED IP44 Order no.
Packing unit
white, glossy, with differing closures
4763
polar white, glossy, with differing closures
4763 09
1
brown, glossy, with differing closures
4763 01
1
1
16 A, 250 V~ Spare keys and other closures (max. 24) on request. Connection terminals IEC 60884-1
4212 09
1
grey, glossy, with differing closures
4212
1
16 A, 250 V~ Spare keys and other closures (max. 24) on request. Connection terminals IEC 60884-1 e. g. for washing machine with sealing cup with flush-mounted box for single mounting with 2 keys without spreader claws with screw terminals
10
15 A, 125 V~
Equates to standard NEMA 5-15 R
on page T6
10 10 10
for rocker switches change-over, intermediate for rocker push-buttons for push-button BCU 1gang and group push-button BCU 1gang
Rocker with 5 lenses attached white, glossy polar white, glossy brown, glossy
1553 1553 09 1553 01
10 10 10
Rocker with red lens and „Heizung Notschalter“ imprint white, glossy polar white, glossy brown, glossy
1568 1568 09 1568 01
10 10 10
Not suitable for heating systems > 50 kW.
Socket outlet with earth contact, USA/ CANADA, NEMA 5-20 R with hinged cover 20 A, 125 V~
1629 1629 09 1629 01
Or use glass pane protected heating emergency switch.
2pole + earth without spreader claws with screw terminals
4203
for rocker switches change-over, intermediate for rocker push-buttons for push-button BCU 1gang and group push-button BCU 1gang
for rocker switches change-over, intermediate for rocker push-buttons for push-button BCU 1gang and group push-button BCU 1gang for illumination and monitoring circuit
Socket outlet with earth contact, USA/ CANADA, NEMA 5-15 R with hinged cover
white, glossy
10 10 10
Lenses with symbol for light, bell, door and neutral in clear, also neutral in red transparent.
NEMA socket outlets
on page T6
1550 1550 09 1550 01
Labelling field height arranged for 9 mm P-touch strips for labelling with names, notes etc.
polar white, glossy, with differing closures
4202
Rocker white, glossy polar white, glossy brown, glossy
white, glossy polar white, glossy brown, glossy
SCHUKO-socket outlet with cover plate, hinged cover and lock
white, glossy
Rockers
Rocker with labelling field
with imprint e. g. for washing machine with 2 keys with plug-in terminals
on page T6
Packing unit
Covers for switches / push-buttons
SCHUKO-socket outlet with hinged cover and lock
on page T6
Order no.
10
for rocker switches change-over, intermediate for rocker push-buttons for push-button BCU 1gang and group push-button BCU 1gang for monitoring circuit
Equates to standard NEMA 5-20 R 2pole + earth without spreader claws with screw terminals
488
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
FLUSH-MOUNTED SPLASH-PROTECTED IP44 Order no.
Packing unit
Emergency switch covers
Packing unit
Rockers
Centre plate with glass screen, rocker and adhesive label sheets red, glossy
Order no.
1295
10
The cover can be replaced with the standard rocker on all rocker switches and rocker push-buttons in this range. Adhesive label sheets, text white: „Notschalter“, „Rauchabzug“, „Feuerschutztür schließen“, „Feuerabschluss schließen“, „Heizung“, „Lichtkuppel“, „Hausalarm“ and „Öffnen“ supplied. Not suitable for heating systems > 50 kW. The glass window protects against incorrect usage. for rocker switches change-over, intermediate for rocker push-buttons for push-button BCU 1gang and group push-button BCU 1gang
white, glossy polar white, glossy brown, glossy
1552 1552 09 1552 01
10 10 10
for rockers switches for rockers push-buttons and group rockers pushbuttons for push-button BCU 2gang and group push-button BCU 2gang
Rockers with imprinted symbol arrow white, glossy polar white, glossy brown, glossy
1552 22 1552 29 1552 21
10 10 10
For rockers switch for shutters order no. 3035 20 For rockers push-button for shutters order no. 5035 20 For push-button BCU 2gang order no. 7514 20 00
Rockers screw-on
Rockers
Rocker screw-on
Rocker with imprint „0“ white, glossy polar white, glossy brown, glossy
1551 1551 09 1551 01
10 10 10
Rocker with red lens and imprint „0“ 1558 1558 09 1558 01
10 10 10
for rocker switch 2- and 3pole on/off for group push-button BCU 1gang for illumination and monitoring circuit
1569 1569 09 1569 01
10 10 10
Rocker screw-on with 5 lenses attached white, glossy polar white, glossy brown, glossy
1557 1557 09 1557 01
10 10 10
Lenses with symbol for light, bell, door and neutral in clear, also neutral in red transparent.
Rocker with red lens and „Heizung Notschalter“ imprint white, glossy polar white, glossy brown, glossy
1559 1559 09 1559 01
with cover plug for screw fitting for rocker switches change-over, intermediate for rocker push-buttons
for rocker switch 2- and 3pole on/off
white, glossy polar white, glossy brown, glossy
white, glossy polar white, glossy brown, glossy
10 10 10
Or use glass pane protected heating emergency switch.
with cover plug for screw fitting for rocker switches change-over, intermediate for rocker push-buttons for illumination and monitoring circuit
Rockers screw-on white, glossy polar white, glossy brown, glossy
1565 1565 09 1565 01
10 10 10
Not suitable for heating systems > 50 kW. for rocker switch 2- and 3pole on/off for group push-button BCU 1gang for illumination and monitoring circuit
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
with cover plug for screw fitting for rockers switches for rockers push-buttons and group rockers pushbuttons
489
FLUSH-MOUNTED SPLASH-PROTECTED IP44 Order no.
Packing unit
Rotary switches/rotary push-buttons for shutters
Key push-buttons Key push-button for profile half cylinders with additional earth contact
1 1 1
1529 1529 09 1529 01
Interlock disk for conversion to push-button see module inserts order no. 1861 Rotary switch for shutters order no. 3841, 3842
change-over contact, usable as NC or NO
Centre plate order no. 1505 .., 1507 .., 1519 .. Profile half cylinder see module inserts / accessories order no. 1818 01, 1818
for master-key systems without spreader claws with screw terminals
Centre plate for key switch/key push-button for shutters with additional earth contact 10 10 10
Switches for shutters Key switches for shutters
Profile half cylinders see module inserts.
Key switch for shutters for profile half cylinders with additional earth contact
For key switch for shutters order no. 3821 20 For key push-button for shutters order no. 3831 20
10 A, 250 V~
with imprint for profile half cylinders for master-key systems
1pole
on page T5
Centre plate for key switch/key push-button with additional earth contact 1519 12 1519 19 1519 11
10 10 10
for profile half cylinders for master-key systems
Key push-button for shutters for profile half cylinders with additional earth contact 1pole
on page T5
10
Profile half cylinder see module inserts / accessories order no. 1818 01, 1818
for master-key systems without spreader claws with screw terminals
Key switches Key switch for profile half cylinders with additional earth contact 10
10 A, 250 V~ Profile half cylinder see module inserts / accessories order no. 1818 01, 1818
for master-key systems without spreader claws with screw terminals
3831 20
10 A, 250 V~
Switches
on page T5
Profile half cylinder see module inserts / accessories order no. 1818 01, 1818
Push-buttons for shutters
For key switch for protection class IP44 order no. 3836 20 For key push-button for protection class IP44 order no. 3856 20
3836 20
10
Key push-buttons for shutters
Profile half cylinders see module inserts.
change-over
3821 20
with neutral-position for master-key systems with push lock function without spreader claws with screw terminals
Key switches/key push-buttons
white, glossy polar white, glossy brown, glossy
10
on page T5
Key switches/key push-buttons for shutters
1518 12 1518 19 1518 11
3856 20
10 A, 250 V~
with imprint
white, glossy polar white, glossy brown, glossy
Packing unit
Push-buttons
Centre plate with rotary knob for rotary switch for shutters white, glossy polar white, glossy brown, glossy
Order no.
Pilot lamps Centre plate for push-button and pilot lamp E10 white, glossy polar white, glossy brown, glossy
1530 1530 09 1530 01
10 10 10
Cut-out diameter 27,3 mm Push-buttons, LEDs, neon lamps and covers see module inserts. For push-button and pilot lamp E10 order no. 5101 ..
for screw cover
490
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
FLUSH-MOUNTED SPLASH-PROTECTED IP44 Order no.
Packing unit
Order no.
BLC Berker Light Control
BLC controller 180 comfort
BLC Controllers
white, glossy polar white, glossy brown, glossy
BLC controller 180 white, glossy polar white, glossy brown, glossy on page T15
1783 1783 19 1783 11
1 1 1
Nominal mounting height 1,1 m; Range frontal approx. 10 m; Range lateral each approx. 6 m; Detection field semi-oval shaped approx. 10 x 12 m; Detection angle 180 °; Detection levels 2; Switching segments 72; Response sensitivity programmable approx. 20 - 100 % ; Response brightness adjustable approx. 0 - 80 / unlimited Lux; Delay time approx. 2 min.; Operating temperature -20 - +45 °C; Dimensions assembling height 23,5 mm
on page T15
Packing unit
1784 1784 19 1784 11
1 1 1
Nominal mounting height 1,1 m; Range frontal approx. 10 m; Range lateral each approx. 6 m; Detection field semi-oval shaped approx. 10 x 12 m; Detection angle 180 °; Detection levels 2; Switching segments 72; Response sensitivity programmable approx. 20 - 100 % ; Response brightness adjustable approx. 0 - 80 / unlimited Lux; Delay time adjustable approx. 10 sec.- 30 min. ; Time to dim down 30 sec.; Step operation 0,5 sec.; Immunity time approx. 3 sec.; Operating temperature -20 - +45 °C; Dimensions assembling height 23,5 mm
Direct sunlight penetrating the upward-pointing detection plane results in failure of the movement controller. Only suitable for interiors!
Direct sunlight penetrating the upward-pointing detection plane results in failure of the movement controller. Only suitable for interiors!
Switches on for the duration of the controller delay time in case minimum response brightness level is infringed and if movement of people is detected. In conjunction with a BLC relay switch unit HVAC, the HVAC-channel is also switched on for the duration of its delay time independent of response brightness.
Switches on for the duration of the delay time set on the controller in case minimum response brightness level is infringed and if movement of people is detected. In conjunction with a BLC relay switch unit HVAC, the HVAC-channel is also switched on for the duration of its delay time independent of response brightness.
For BLC universal touch dimmer order no. 2902 For BLC touch control unit 1-10 V order no. 2903 For BLC touch dimmer LV order no. 2904 For BLC triac switch insert LV order no. 2905 for BLC relay switch insert order no. 2906 For BLC relay switch insert with potential-free contact order no. 2906 10 For BLC controller extension unit order no. 2908 For BLC relay switch insert HVAC order no. 2912 For BLC Tronic switch insert order no. 2916 For BLC stair light time switching impulse insert order no. 2934 10
U with cover to limit detection angle to 90°
For BLC universal touch dimmer order no. 2902 For BLC touch control unit 1-10 V order no. 2903 For BLC touch dimmer LV order no. 2904 For BLC triac switch insert LV order no. 2905 for BLC relay switch insert order no. 2906 For BLC relay switch insert with potential-free contact order no. 2906 10 For BLC controller extension unit order no. 2908 For BLC relay switch insert HVAC order no. 2912 For BLC Tronic switch insert order no. 2916 For BLC stair light time switching impulse insert order no. 2934 10
U microprocessor controlled mode of oper.(detection signal evaluation and interfering signal suppres.) glare-proof e.g. against a torch no switching with unforeseeable short shadows with adaptive sensitivity adjustment with teach function for response brightness step operation with immunity time (e.g. for bell) switch-on brightness in conjunction with BLC dimmer inserts can only be saved via BLC extension unit with dimming function (soft-off) when using BLC dimmer inserts with cover to limit detection angle to 90°
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
491
FLUSH-MOUNTED SPLASH-PROTECTED IP44 Order no.
Packing unit
Order no.
BLC controller 180 white, glossy polar white, glossy brown, glossy on page T15
Packing unit
BLC controller 180 comfort 1786 1786 19 1786 11
Nominal mounting height 2,2 m; Range frontal approx. 12 m; Range lateral each approx. 6 m; At assembly height 1,1 m; Range frontal approx. 6 m; Range lateral each approx. 3 m; Detection field semi-oval shaped approx. 12 x 12 m; Detection angle 180 °; Detection levels 3; Switching segments 104; Response sensitivity programmable approx. 20 - 100 % ; Response brightness adjustable approx. 0 - 80 / unlimited Lux; Delay time approx. 2 min.; Operating temperature -20 - +45 °C; Dimensions assembling height 23,5 mm No direct sunlight on upper detection plane possible. Also suitable for exteriors! Switches on for the duration of the controller delay time in case minimum response brightness level is infringed and if movement of people is detected. In conjunction with a BLC relay switch unit HVAC, the HVAC-channel is also switched on for the duration of its delay time independent of response brightness. For BLC universal touch dimmer order no. 2902 For BLC touch control unit 1-10 V order no. 2903 For BLC touch dimmer LV order no. 2904 For BLC triac switch insert LV order no. 2905 for BLC relay switch insert order no. 2906 For BLC relay switch insert with potential-free contact order no. 2906 10 For BLC controller extension unit order no. 2908 For BLC relay switch insert HVAC order no. 2912 For BLC Tronic switch insert order no. 2916 For BLC stair light time switching impulse insert order no. 2934 10
V with cover to limit detection angle to 90°
white, glossy polar white, glossy brown, glossy
1 1 1 on page T15
1787 1787 19 1787 11
1 1 1
Nominal mounting height 2,2 m; Range frontal approx. 12 m; Range lateral each approx. 6 m; At assembly height 1,1 m; Range frontal approx. 6 m; Range lateral each approx. 3 m; Detection field semi-oval shaped approx. 12 x 12 m; Detection angle 180 °; Detection levels 3; Switching segments 104; Response sensitivity programmable approx. 20 - 100 % ; Response brightness adjustable approx. 0 - 80 / unlimited Lux; Delay time adjustable approx. 10 sec.- 30 min. ; Time to dim down 30 sec.; Step operation 0,5 sec.; Immunity time approx. 3 sec.; Operating temperature -20 - +45 °C; Dimensions assembling height 23,5 mm No direct sunlight on upper detection plane possible. Also suitable for exteriors! Switches on for the duration of the delay time set on the controller in case minimum response brightness level is infringed and if movement of people is detected. In conjunction with a BLC relay switch unit HVAC, the HVAC-channel is also switched on for the duration of its delay time independent of response brightness. For BLC universal touch dimmer order no. 2902 For BLC touch control unit 1-10 V order no. 2903 For BLC touch dimmer LV order no. 2904 For BLC triac switch insert LV order no. 2905 for BLC relay switch insert order no. 2906 For BLC relay switch insert with potential-free contact order no. 2906 10 For BLC controller extension unit order no. 2908 For BLC relay switch insert HVAC order no. 2912 For BLC Tronic switch insert order no. 2916 For BLC stair light time switching impulse insert order no. 2934 10
V microprocessor controlled mode of oper.(detection signal evaluation and interfering signal suppres.) glare-proof e.g. against a torch no switching with unforeseeable short shadows with adaptive sensitivity adjustment with teach function for response brightness step operation with immunity time (e.g. for bell) switch-on brightness in conjunction with BLC dimmer inserts can only be saved via BLC extension unit with dimming function (soft-off) when using BLC dimmer inserts with cover to limit detection angle to 90°
492
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
FLUSH-MOUNTED SPLASH-PROTECTED IP44 Order no.
Packing unit
Controller system
Order no.
Intermediate rings
Controller 180 system cover white, glossy polar white, glossy brown, glossy on page T20
1715 1715 19 1715 11
Intermediate ring with hinged cover and labelling field
1 1 1
Nominal mounting height 1,1 m; Range frontal approx. 10 m; Range lateral each approx. 6 m; Detection field semi-oval shaped approx. 10 x 12 m; Detection angle 180 °; Detection levels 2; Switching segments 72; Response sensitivity programmable approx. 20 - 100 % ; Operating temperature 5 - 45 °C; Dimensions assembling height 23,5 mm
white, glossy polar white, glossy brown, glossy
1022 50 1022 59 1022 51
10 10 10
Labelling field height arranged for 9 mm P-touch strips. IP20 for central plates and centre plate 50 x 50 mm
Signalling and command units Central plate for transmitting and control device Ø 18.8 mm
Direct sunlight penetrating the upward-pointing detection plane results in failure of the movement controller. Only suitable for interiors!
white, glossy polar white, glossy
Sends signal to main device when people are detected.
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range.
Circular plug-in connector: Amphenol-Tuchel; Binder; Cannon; Farnell; Hirose; Hirschmann; Lumberg; Monacor; RS Components; Extra low voltage jack: PRO-CAR
with cover to limit detection angle to 90° for mounting extension unit insert for stair light pulse insert
Controller 180 system cover 1718 1718 19 1718 11
1 1 1
Nominal mounting height 2,2 m; Range frontal approx. 12 m; Range lateral each approx. 6 m; At assembly height 1,1 m; Range frontal approx. 6 m; Range lateral each approx. 3 m; Detection field semi-oval shaped approx. 12 x 12 m; Detection angle 180 °; Detection levels 2; Switching segments 72; Response sensitivity programmable approx. 20 - 100 % ; Operating temperature 5 - 45 °C; Dimensions assembling height 23,5 mm No direct sunlight on upper detection plane possible. Also suitable for exteriors! Sends signal to main device when people are detected. For controller system insert order no. 2939
10 10
Suitable for installation of equipotential bonding built-in socket order no. 4604
U
white, glossy polar white, glossy brown, glossy
1431 02 1431 09
Screw distance 36 mm
For controller system insert order no. 2939
on page T20
Packing unit
with supporting plate with cut-out dia. 18.8 mm without spreader claws
TV/audio Central plate for aerial socket 2-hole white polar white brown
1486 02 1486 09 1486 01
10 10 10
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range. For aerial socket 2-hole single box order no. 4502, HIFS 1B For aerial socket 2-hole throughpass socket order no. 4515
For aerial socket as per DIN 45330
V with cover to limit detection angle to 90° for mounting extension unit insert for stair light pulse insert
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
493
FLUSH-MOUNTED SPLASH-PROTECTED IP44 Order no.
Packing unit
Central plate for aerial socket 4-hole white, glossy polar white, glossy brown
1483 02 1483 09 1483 01
10 10 10
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range. Aerial sockets: Hirschmann with 2 additional SAT outputs (F-sockets)
Central plate for aerial socket 4-hole white, glossy polar white, glossy brown
1484 02 1484 09 1484 01
10 10 10
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range. For aerial socket 4-hole single box order no. 4594
Aerial sockets: Ankaro; Astro; Axing; Delta; Schwaiger with 2 additional SAT outputs (F-sockets)
1439 02 1439 09
10 10
Broadband modem socket: Wisi with additional multimedia output
1458 02 1458 09 1458 01
10 10 10
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range. For TAE socket outlet order no. 4487 .., 4500 .., 4544 .. For loudspeaker connection box order no. 4572 .., 4573 .. For FCC/TAE socket outlet order no. 4588 .. For USB data interface flush-mounted order no. 7504 00 04
EAD socket outlets: Drivex; Fröhlich + Walter; Intracom; TAE and FCC overvoltage protection sockets: Dehn; FCC socket outlets: Dätwyler; Rutenbeck
white, glossy polar white, glossy brown, glossy
# 1477 02 # 1477 09 # 1477 01
10 10 10
Identifies the 1st TAE socket outlet inside an apartment/property. Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range.
Central plate for FCC socket outlet
Central plate for TAE socket outlet 6F+N 10 10 10
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range. For TAE socket outlet order no. 4487 ..
white, glossy polar white, glossy brown, glossy
with imprint 2 knock out openings
Data-/telecommunications 1457 02 1457 09 1457 01
Central plate for TAE socket outlet 6/6FF and 6/6NF and loudspeaker connection box
Central plate for 1st TAE socket outlet (Telekom)
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range.
white, glossy polar white, glossy brown, glossy
Packing unit
for USB data interface flush-mounted 1 knock out opening
Central plate for broadband modem box white, glossy polar white, glossy
Order no.
white, glossy polar white, glossy brown, glossy
1468 02 1468 09 1468 01
10 10 10
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range.
For FCC socket outlet order no. 4538, 4568 For FCC socket outlet shielded order no. 4554, 4586, 4590
FCC socket outlets: Ackermann; AMP; BTR; Crack-IT; Rutenbeck; Telegärtner; Telena with 45° oblique outlet for 1gang socket outlet cat.3, cat.5e and cat.6
494
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
FLUSH-MOUNTED SPLASH-PROTECTED IP44 Order no.
Packing unit
Central plate FCC/E-DAT design/Telekom ISDN socket outlet white, glossy polar white, glossy brown, glossy
1469 02 1469 09 1469 01
10 10 10
For FCC socket outlet order no. 4539, 4562, 4592 For FCC socket outlet shielded order no. 4555, 4587, 4591
ISDN socket outlets (Rutenbeck): Telekom; FCC socket outlets: Ackermann; AMP; BTR; CobiNet; Corning; Crack-IT; CTI Netzwerksysteme; Dätwyler; EFB Electronic; eku Kabel & Systeme; Elmat; Rutenbeck; Setec; Süveg; Telegärtner; Telena with 45° oblique outlet for 2gang socket outlet cat.3, cat.5e and cat.6
Central plate for FCC and Telekom ISDN socket outlet (IAE) 1429 02 1429 09
10 10
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range. ISDN socket outlets (ZE Kommunikationstechnik): Telekom; FCC socket outlets: Telena; ZE Kommunikationstechnik with 25° oblique outlet for 2gang socket outlet cat.3
Central plate for FCC and Telekom ISDN socket outlet (IAE) white, glossy polar white, glossy
1430 02 1430 09
10 10
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range. ISDN socket outlets (Kräcker): Telekom; FCC socket outlets: Farnell; Kräcker with 45° oblique outlet for 2gang socket outlet cat.3
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
Packing unit
Central plate for FCC/IAE/FCC-DAT 300E socket outlet
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range.
white, glossy polar white, glossy
Order no.
white, glossy polar white, glossy brown, glossy
1446 02 1446 09 1446 01
10 10 10
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range. FCC socket outlets: BTR; Farnell; Fröhlich + Walter; Krone; Schumann; Telena with 45° oblique outlet for 1gang socket outlet cat.3 and cat.6
Central plate for FCC/IAE/Telekom ISDN socket outlet white, glossy polar white, glossy brown, glossy
1467 02 1467 09 1467 01
10 10 10
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range. ISDN socket outlets (BTR): Telekom; FCC socket outlets: BTR; EFB Electronic; Farnell; Fröhlich + Walter; Krone; Monacor; Telena with 45° oblique outlet for 2gang socket outlet cat.3
Central plate for FCC-DAT 300E socket outlet white, glossy polar white, glossy brown, glossy
1478 02 1478 09 1478 01
10 10 10
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range. FCC socket outlets: BTR; Farnell; Fröhlich + Walter; Krone; Schumann; Telena with 45° oblique outlet for 2gang socket outlet cat.6
495
FLUSH-MOUNTED SPLASH-PROTECTED IP44 Order no.
Packing unit
Central plate for FCC socket outlet white, glossy polar white, glossy
1420 02 1420 09
FCC socket outlets: Ackermann; CobiNet; Quante; Telena with 45° oblique outlet 1 knock out opening for 1gang or 2gang socket outlet cat.3
10 10
FCC socket outlets: Telegärtner; Telena with 45° oblique outlet for 1gang or 2gang socket outlet cat.5e
Central plate for FCC socket outlet 1419 02 1419 09
1495 02 1495 09
10 10
Labelling field height arranged for 6 mm P-touch strips. Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range.
Central plate for round connector Ø 30 mm
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range.
white, glossy polar white, glossy
white, glossy polar white, glossy
ACO and CO Plus inserts: AMP, order no. 0-0336627-1, 2-0336627-1, 0-0336627-3 cat.5, cat.6 and cat.7
Central plate for EMJ45 socket outlet 1422 02 1422 09
Packing unit
Central plate for AMP-ACO with labelling field 10 10
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range.
white, glossy polar white, glossy
Order no.
10 10
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range. FCC socket outlets: Brand-Rex; CobiNet; Drivex; EFB Electronic; Fröhlich + Walter; Fröschel; Intracom; OTRA; Schumann; Setec; Sevex; Siemens; Sonepar; ZE Kommunikationstechnik with 40° oblique outlet for 1gang or 2gang socket outlet cat.5, cat.5e and cat.6
white, glossy polar white, glossy
# 1433 02 # 1433 09
10 10
Cut-out diameter 30 mm; Screw distance 36 mm Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range. Signalling and command units: Kraus-Naimer; Lumitas; Schlegel; Overvoltage protection devices: Dehn, order no. NM DK 280; OBO-Bettermann, order no. KNS/IS-D with supporting plate without spreader claws
Hospital installation Central plate for double pole socket outlet for floating output white, glossy polar white, glossy
1403 02 1403 09
10 10
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range. For double pole socket outlet for floating output order no. 1061
For double pole socket outlet according to DIN 42801 with imprint
Central plate for 6pole socket outlet white, glossy polar white, glossy
1474 02 1474 09
10 10
Attention! Use only with intermediate ring for central plate from the corresponding range. Nurse call system: Ackermann, clino opt 99, order no. 71008C3; Nurse call systems: Ackermann, clino opt 90, clino phon 95, order no. 71008C; Siedle, order no. AD 306-0; 6pole socket outlets: Hirschmann, Medu 600, Medu 600 GSK
496
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
Order no.
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
Packing unit
Order no.
Packing unit
497
Housing Plastic, glossy light grey
similar to RAL 7035
polar white similar to RAL 9010 Rockers, hinged covers Plastic, matt grey
similar to RAL 7042
polar white similar to RAL 9010
498
IP44
Garten
Design: MIC Breuer
Aquatec ip44
Splash-protected and impact-resistant Surface-mounted range
The surface-mounted splash-protected Berker AQUATEC IP44 offers you the right solution in situations where IP 44 protection of installation devices is required for safety reasons.
■ Simple and economical installation ■ Housing, rocker and hinged cover made of high-impact thermoplastic ■ High chemical resistance of the housing matterial ■ Screws and hinged cover springs made of stainless steel/hinged cover hinge pins made of non-corrosive brass ■ Large connection spaces ■ Large control surfaces ■ Functional design and modern colouring
499
Installation characteristics at a glance Berker AQUATEC IP 44
With the optimised Berker Aquatec IP44 surface-mounted range, installation in areas with splashing water is now even easier. Whether for garages, cellars, laundry rooms, laboratories, workshops or outside areas – AQUATEC IP 44 products from Berker are the right choice.
Centre mark on the top and bottom for precise positioning using spirit level
Hole spacing dimensions on the bottom of the housing help you to ensure the precision of preparation work before installation.
Point supports ensure stable positioning of the lower casing on all surfaces
Matt surface of lower casing improves durability of individual labelling
Ribbed screw holes for optimum installation on uneven surfaces
500
Profiled GROUND terminal and screw with channel making it easier to connect the protective earth conductor, increase the clamping force and prevent terminals from coming loose
Wiring example Ground terminal for earthed electrical loads with switch installation
Mount for 3gang plug-in terminal for wires up to 2.5 mm 2 facilitates installation without junction box
Condensation openings easy-to-break-out openings enable flexible use and prevent the collection of condensation moisture, thereby ensuring IP 44 protection at all times Diagonally positioned oval-shaped screw holes enable quick and easy adjustment of the lower casing position during installation
Wiring example Neutral conductor where two insulated lights are connected to a series switch combined with a socket outlet
501
AQUATEC IP44 Order no.
Packing unit
Order no.
Switches
Rocker control switch with red lens
Rocker switches
light grey/grey, changeover without neon lamp unit contact reed light grey/grey, 2pole on/ off with imprint „0“
Rocker switch
on page T71
light grey/grey, change-over
3076 05
10
polar white, change-over light grey/grey, intermediate
3076 09 3077 05
10 10
light grey/grey, 2pole on/ off with imprint „0 and 1“
3072 05
10
on page T71
Rocker switch with illuminated labelling field
67 3079 05
10
10 AX, 250 V~ on page T76
Can be illuminated with area LED unit see accessories order no. 1619 01
Heating emergency switches Emergency heating control switch with red lens and imprint
with cable entry at top and bottom Wago clip-in 3-wire connection terminal for wiring with plug-in terminals
Rocker switch with illumination and red lens 3076 25
Housing screws made of stainless steel.
with cable entry at top and bottom with screw terminals
Labelling field height arranged for 9 mm P-touch strips.
10
10 AX, 250 V~ Neon lamp current 1 mA Housing screws made of stainless steel. Can be illuminated using neon and incandescent lamp units with N-terminal see module inserts order no. 1675 .., 1676 ..
with neon lamp unit with N terminal order no. 1675 for illumination with cable entry at top and bottom Wago clip-in 3-wire connection terminal for wiring with plug-in terminals
502
10 AX, 250 V~ Neon lamp current 1 mA
light grey/grey, 2pole change-over
For labelling with names, notes etc. Housing screws made of stainless steel.
on page T71
10
Rocker switch
10
10 AX, 250 V~
light grey/grey, changeover
3172 05
with neon lamp unit with N terminal order no. 1675 for monitoring circuit with cable entry at top and bottom Wago clip-in 3-wire connection terminal for wiring with plug-in terminals
with cable entry at top and bottom Wago clip-in 3-wire connection terminal for wiring with plug-in terminals
on page T71
10
Can be illuminated using neon and incandescent lamp units with N-terminal see module inserts order no. 1675 .., 1676 ..
Housing screws made of stainless steel.
3076 55
3176 05
Housing screws made of stainless steel.
10 AX, 250 V~
light grey/grey, changeover
Packing unit
on page T71
light grey/grey, change-over
3566 05
10
light grey/grey, 2pole on/ off with imprint „0“
3562 05
10
10 A, 250 V~ Neon lamp current 1 mA Or use glass pane protected heating emergency switch. Housing screws made of stainless steel. Not suitable for heating systems > 50 kW. with imprint „Heizung Notschalter“ with neon lamp unit with N terminal order no. 1675 with cable entry at top and bottom Wago clip-in 3-wire connection terminal for wiring with plug-in terminals
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
AQUATEC IP44 Order no.
Packing unit
Emergency switch covers
Rocker push-buttons
1290 05
Rocker push-button with illuminated labelling field
10
light grey/grey, changeover contact, usable as NC or NO
The cover can be replaced with the standard rocker on all rocker switches and rocker push-buttons in this range. on page T71
Housing bolts made of stainless steel.
10 A, 250 V~
Labelling field height arranged for 9 mm P-touch strips. Can be illuminated with area LED unit see accessories order no. 1619 01
In case of danger break glass and press rocker!
with cable entry at top and bottom Wago clip-in 3-wire connection terminal for wiring with plug-in terminals
for rocker switches for rocker push-buttons for push-button BCU 1gang and group push-button BCU 1gang
Rocker push-button with 5 lenses attached
Rockers switches Rockers switch 10 10
on page T71
light grey/grey, changeover contact, usable as NC or NO polar white, change-over contact, usable as NC or NO
5076 05
10
5076 09
10
10 AX, 250 V~
10 A, 250 V~
Housing screws made of stainless steel.
Housing screws made of stainless steel. Lenses with symbol for light, bell, door and neutral in clear, also neutral in red transparent.
with cable entry at top and bottom Wago clip-in 3-wire connection terminal for wiring with plug-in terminals
Can be illuminated using neon and incandescent lamp units with N-terminal see module inserts order no. 1675 .., 1676 ..
Rockers switch light grey/grey, double change-over, isolated input terminals
3078 05
10
for illumination and monitoring circuit with cable entry at top and bottom Wago clip-in 3-wire connection terminal for wiring with plug-in terminals
10 AX, 250 V~ Housing screws made of stainless steel.
Rocker push-button with red lens light grey/grey, NO, with 2 separate signalling contacts
with cable entry at top and bottom Wago clip-in 3-wire connection terminal for wiring with screw terminals
Pullcord switches 3976 15
10
10 AX, 250 V~ Pullcord connection 12 cm Housing screws made of stainless steel. with cable entry at top and bottom for wall and ceiling mounting Wago clip-in 3-wire connection terminal for wiring with plug-in terminals
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
5071 05
10
10 A, 250 V~ on page T71
Pullcord switch light grey/grey, changeover
10
Housing screws made of stainless steel.
Not suitable for heating systems > 50 kW.
3075 05 3075 09
5076 55
For labelling with names, notes etc.
Adhesive label sheets, text white: „Notschalter“, „Rauchabzug“, „Feuerschutztür schließen“, „Feuerabschluss schließen“, „Heizung“, „Lichtkuppel“, „Hausalarm“ and „Öffnen“ supplied.
light grey/grey, series polar white, series
Packing unit
Push-buttons
cover with glass screen, rocker and adhesive label sheets red
Order no.
Housing screws made of stainless steel. Can be illuminated using neon and incandescent lamp units with N-terminal see module inserts order no. 1675 .., 1676 ..
for illumination and monitoring circuit with cable entry at top and bottom Wago clip-in 3-wire connection terminal for wiring with plug-in terminals
503
AQUATEC IP44 Order no.
Packing unit
Rockers push-buttons
Key switches for shutters 5075 15
10
Housing screws made of stainless steel. with cable entry at top and bottom Wago clip-in 3-wire connection terminal for wiring with plug-in terminals
Switches for shutters Rockers switches for shutters Rockers switch for shutters with imprinted symbol arrow 3075 25
10
10 A, 250 V~ Housing screws made of stainless steel.
Rotary switches/rotary push-buttons for shutters
1
10 A, 250 V~ Housing screws made of stainless steel.
Accessories: Interlock disk for rotary switch for shutters
504
1
10 A, 250 V~ Housing screws made of stainless steel. with neutral-position with 2 keys with push lock function with cable entry at top and bottom Wago clip-in 3-wire connection terminal for wiring with screw terminals 2pole
Rockers push-button for shutters with imprinted symbol arrow light grey/grey, 1pole
5075 05
10
10 A, 250 V~ Housing screws made of stainless steel.
with cable entry at top and bottom Wago clip-in 3-wire connection terminal for wiring with plug-in terminals
Key push-buttons for shutters
with neutral-position with push lock function with cable entry at top and bottom Wago clip-in 3-wire connection terminal for wiring with screw terminals
1861
3272 15
Follow the motor manufacturers‘ instructions!
Rotary switch for shutters with rotary knob and imprint
for conversion to rotary push-button for shutters
1
Rockers push-buttons for shutters
with mechanical and electrical interlocking to prevent mutual switch on with cable entry at top and bottom Wago clip-in 3-wire connection terminal for wiring with plug-in terminals
3242 25
3272 05
Push-buttons for shutters
Follow the motor manufacturers‘ instructions!
light grey/grey, 2pole
Key switch for shutters with lock and imprint light grey/grey, 2pole, key removable in mid position light grey/grey, 2pole, key removable in 3 positions
10 A, 250 V~
light grey/grey, 1pole
Packing unit
Switches for shutters
Rockers push-button light grey/grey, 2 NO contacts, common input terminal
Order no.
10
Key push-button for shutters with lock and imprint light grey/grey, 1pole, key removable in mid position
3271 05
1
10 A, 250 V~ Housing screws made of stainless steel. with 2 keys with cable entry at top and bottom Wago clip-in 3-wire connection terminal for wiring with plug-in terminals 1pole
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
AQUATEC IP44 Order no.
Packing unit
Order no.
Combinations
Combination rocker switch with red lens/ SCHUKO-socket outlet with hinged cover
Combination switch/socket outlet
light grey/grey
Combination rocker switch/SCHUKO-socket outlet with hinged cover light grey/grey polar white on page T71
4780 05 4780 09
5 5
16 A, 250 V~ Switching current 10 AX Switches, push-buttons, pilot lamps and data connector housings can be used instead of socket outlets. Housing screws, hinged cover spring and axle made of stainless steel. for vertical mounting change-over switch and socket outlet connectable separately with hollow base with cable entry at top and bottom Wago clip-in 3-wire connection terminal for wiring with plug-in terminals
Combination rocker switch/SCHUKO-socket outlet with hinged cover light grey/grey
Packing unit
4376 05
5
16 A, 250 V~ Switching current 10 AX Switches, push-buttons, pilot lamps and data connector housings can be used instead of socket outlets. Housing screws, hinged cover spring and axle made of stainless steel. for vertical mounting change-over switch and socket outlet connectable separately with hollow base with cable entry at top and bottom with screw terminals
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
4781 05
5
16 A, 250 V~ Switching current 10 AX on page T71
Neon and incandescent lamp units with N-terminal see module inserts. Switches, push buttons, pilot lamps and data connector housings can be used instead of SCHUKO-socket outlets. Housing screws, hinged cover spring and axle made of stainless steel. Can be illuminated using neon and incandescent lamp units with N-terminal see module inserts order no. 1675 .., 1676 ..
for vertical mounting can be illuminated using neon and glow lamp unit with N-terminal for illumination and monitoring circuit change-over switch and socket outlet connectable separately with hollow base with cable entry at top and bottom Wago clip-in 3-wire connection terminal for wiring with plug-in terminals
Combination rockers switch/SCHUKO-socket outlet with hinged cover light grey/grey
4790 05
5
16 A, 250 V~ Switching current 10 AX Switches, push-buttons, pilot lamps and data connector housings can be used instead of socket outlets. Housing screws, hinged cover spring and axle made of stainless steel. for vertical mounting series switch and socket outlet connectable separately with hollow base with cable entry at top and bottom Wago clip-in 3-wire connection terminal for wiring with plug-in terminals
505
AQUATEC IP44 Order no.
Packing unit
Order no.
Socket outlets
SCHUKO-socket outlet with indicator lamp, hinged cover and labelling field
SCHUKO-socket outlets
light grey/grey
SCHUKO-socket outlet with hinged cover
on page T71
light grey/grey polar white light grey/grey, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1
4740 05 4740 09 4763 05
10 10 10
10
on page T71
Housing screws, hinged cover spring and axle made of stainless steel. Replacement neon lamp unit see module inserts / accessories order no. 1609
Housing screws, hinged cover spring and axle made of stainless steel.
Connection terminals IEC 60884-1
H with hollow base with cable entry at top and bottom Wago clip-in 3-wire connection terminal for wiring with plug-in terminals
light grey/grey
4240 05
10
16 A, 250 V~ Housing screws, hinged cover springs and axles made of stainless steel. Connection terminals IEC 60884-1
SCHUKO-socket outlets with safety device
light grey/grey
4245 05
10
16 A, 250 V~ Fine-wire fuse max. 10 A Housing screws, hinged cover spring and axle made of stainless steel.
Fine-wire fuses DIN 41572 Connection terminals IEC 60884-1
with hollow base with cable entry at top and bottom with screw terminals
H
SCHUKO-socket outlet with hinged cover and labelling field 4741 05
with neon lamp unit with hollow base with cable entry at top and bottom Wago clip-in 3-wire connection terminal for wiring with screw terminals
Without fine-wire fuse.
H
light grey/grey
H
SCHUKO-socket outlet for fine-wire fuse with hinged cover
SCHUKO-socket outlet with hinged cover
10
16 A, 250 V~ on page T71
4241 15
16 A, 250 V~ Neon lamp current 1,5 mA
16 A, 250 V~
Connection terminals IEC 60884-1
on page T71
Packing unit
Housing screws, hinged cover spring and axle made of stainless steel. Labelling field height arranged for 9 mm P-touch strips. Connection terminals IEC 60884-1
H with hollow base with cable entry at top and bottom Wago clip-in 3-wire connection terminal for wiring with plug-in terminals
with fuse holder for fine-wire fuses with cable entry at top and bottom Wago clip-in 3-wire connection terminal for wiring with screw terminals
SCHUKO-socket outlets SCHUKO-socket outlet with hinged cover, lock and labelling field light grey/grey, with differing closures
4769 05
1
light grey/grey, set of 2 with same closures
4789 05
1
16 A, 250 V~ Spare keys and other closures (max. 24) on request. Housing screws, hinged cover spring and axle made of stainless steel. Labelling field height arranged for 9 mm P-touch strips. Connection terminals IEC 60884-1
H e. g. for washing machine each with 2 keys with hollow base with cable entry at top and bottom Wago clip-in 3-wire connection terminal for wiring with plug-in terminals
506
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
AQUATEC IP44 Order no.
Packing unit
Order no.
SCHUKO-socket outlet 2gang with hinged cover, lock and labelling field light grey/grey, with same closures
4768 05
SCHUKO-socket outlet 2gang with hinged cover light grey/grey
1
4270 05
5
16 A, 250 V~
16 A, 250 V~
Switches, push-buttons, pilot lamps and data connector housings can be used instead of socket outlets.
Switches, push-buttons, pilot lamps and data connector housings can be used instead of socket outlets.
Housing screws, hinged cover springs and axles made of stainless steel.
Spare keys and other closures (max. 24) on request.
Connection terminals IEC 60884-1
Housing screws, hinged cover springs and axles made of stainless steel.
H for vertical mounting inserts wired-through with hollow base with cable entry at top and bottom 2 knock out openings for entries at bottom with screw terminals
Labelling field height arranged for 9 mm P-touch strips. Connection terminals IEC 60884-1
H e. g. for washing machine and drier for horizontal mounting each with 2 keys with hollow base with 2 cable entries at top 2 knock out openings for entries at bottom Wago clip-in 3-wire connection terminal for wiring with plug-in terminals
SCHUKO-socket outlet 2gang with hinged cover light grey/grey polar white
Packing unit
4770 05 4770 09
5 5
16 A, 250 V~ Switches, push-buttons, pilot lamps and data connector housings can be used instead of socket outlets. Housing screws, hinged cover springs and axles made of stainless steel. Connection terminals IEC 60884-1
H for vertical mounting inserts wired-through with hollow base with cable entry at top and bottom Wago clip-in 3-wire connection terminal for wiring with plug-in terminals
SCHUKO-socket outlet 2gang with hinged cover light grey/grey
4784 05
5
16 A, 250 V~ on page T71
Switches, push-buttons, pilot lamps and data connector housings can be used instead of socket outlets. Housing screws, hinged cover springs and axles made of stainless steel. Connection terminals IEC 60884-1
H for horizontal mounting inserts wired-through with hollow base with 2 cable entries at top 2 knock out openings for entries at bottom Wago clip-in 3-wire connection terminal for wiring with plug-in terminals
SCHUKO-socket outlet 2gang with hinged cover and labelling field light grey/grey
4770 15
5
16 A, 250 V~ Switches, push-buttons, pilot lamps and data connector housings can be used instead of socket outlets. Housing screws, hinged cover springs and axles made of stainless steel. Labelling field height arranged for 9 mm P-touch strips. Connection terminals IEC 60884-1
H for vertical mounting inserts wired-through with hollow base with cable entry at top and bottom Wago clip-in 3-wire connection terminal for wiring with plug-in terminals
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
507
AQUATEC IP44 Order no.
Packing unit
Order no.
SCHUKO-socket outlet 2gang with hinged cover and labelling field light grey/grey
4270 15
SCHUKO-socket outlet 3gang with hinged cover light grey/grey
5
4273 05
1
16 A, 250 V~
16 A, 250 V~ Switches, push-buttons, pilot lamps and data connector housings can be used instead of socket outlets.
on page T71
As a result of the side cable entries specially suited for installation over workbenches.
Housing screws, hinged cover springs and axles made of stainless steel.
Switches, push-buttons, pilot lamps and data connector housings can be used instead of socket outlets.
Labelling field height arranged for 9 mm P-touch strips.
Housing screws, hinged cover springs and axles made of stainless steel.
Connection terminals IEC 60884-1
Connection terminals IEC 60884-1
H
H for horizontal mounting inserts wired-through with hollow base with cable entry at top and each side with screw terminals
for vertical mounting inserts wired-through with hollow base with cable entry at top and bottom with screw terminals
Double SCHUKO-socket outlet with hinged cover
SCHUKO-socket outlet 3gang with hinged cover light grey/grey
4773 05
light grey/grey polar white
1
16 A, 250 V~ on page T71
Packing unit
As a result of the side cable entries specially suited for installation over workbenches.
4775 05 4775 09
5 5
16 A, 250 V~ on page T71
Switches, push-buttons, pilot lamps and data connector housings can be used instead of socket outlets.
As a result of the side cable entries specially suited for installation over workbenches. Housing screws, hinged cover springs and axles made of stainless steel.
Housing screws, hinged cover springs and axles made of stainless steel.
Connection terminals IEC 60884-1
H
Connection terminals IEC 60884-1
for horizontal mounting inserts wired-through with hollow base with cable entry at top and each side Wago clip-in 3-wire connection terminal for wiring with plug-in terminals
H for horizontal mounting inserts wired-through with hollow base with cable entry at top and each side Wago clip-in 3-wire connection terminal for wiring with plug-in terminals
Double SCHUKO-socket outlet with hinged cover light grey/grey
4275 05
5
16 A, 250 V~ on page T71
As a result of the side cable entries specially suited for installation over workbenches. Housing screws, hinged cover springs and axles made of stainless steel. Connection terminals IEC 60884-1
H for horizontal mounting inserts wired-through with hollow base with cable entry at top and each side with screw terminals
508
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
AQUATEC IP44 Order no.
Packing unit
Double SCHUKO-socket outlet with hinged cover and labelling field light grey/grey
5
4775 15
As a result of the side cable entries specially suited for installation over workbenches. Housing screws, hinged cover springs and axles made of stainless steel. Labelling field height arranged for 9 mm P-touch strips. Connection terminals IEC 60884-1
light grey, 1gang light grey, 2gang vertical
10 10
Wago clip-in 3-wire connection terminal for wiring
for horizontal mounting inserts wired-through with hollow base with cable entry at top and each side Wago clip-in 3-wire connection terminal for wiring with plug-in terminals
Double SCHUKO-socket outlet with hinged cover and labelling field 5
4275 15
16 A, 250 V~ on page T71
61 1960 05 61 1961 05
For rocker switch with housing top section order no. 6130 72 15, 6130 75 15, 6130 76 15, 6130 77 15 For control rocker switch with red lens and housing top section order no. 6131 72 15, 6131 76 15 For SCHUKO socket outlet with hinged cover and housing top section order no. 6147 40 15 For rocker push-button with 5 lenses attached and housing top section order no. 6150 76 15 For socket outlet with earth pin and housing top section order no. 6745 64 15
H
light grey/grey
Packing unit
Housing bottom part with screwed gland M20 x 1.5
16 A, 250 V~ on page T74
Order no.
As a result of the side cable entries specially suited for installation over workbenches. Housing screws, hinged cover springs and axles made of stainless steel.
Rocker switches Rocker switch with housing top section light grey/grey, 2pole on/ off with imprint „0 and 1“
61 3072 15
10
light grey/grey, intermediate
61 3077 15
10
light grey/grey, change-over
61 3076 15
10
10 AX, 250 V~ Housing screws made of stainless steel. For combining with lower casings order no. 6019 30 05, 6118 91 05, 6119 60 05, 6119 61 05, 6719 32 05
with plug-in terminals
Labelling field height arranged for 9 mm P-touch strips.
Rocker control switch with red lens and housing top section light grey/grey, change-over
61 3176 15
10
Connection terminals IEC 60884-1
light grey/grey, 2pole on/ off with imprint „0“
61 3172 15
10
H for horizontal mounting inserts wired-through with hollow base with cable entry at top and each side with screw terminals
10 AX, 250 V~ Housing screws made of stainless steel. Can be illuminated using neon and incandescent lamp units with N-terminal see module inserts order no. 1675 .., 1676 .. For combining with lower casings order no. 6019 30 05, 6118 91 05, 6119 60 05, 6119 61 05, 6719 32 05
Module system Housing bottom parts Housing bottom section with cable entry light grey, 1gang light grey, 2gang horizontal
61 1891 05 67 1932 05
10 10
light grey, 3gang horizontal
60 1930 05
5
For rocker switch with housing top section order no. 6130 72 15, 6130 75 15, 6130 76 15, 6130 77 15 For control rocker switch with red lens and housing top section order no. 6131 72 15, 6131 76 15 For SCHUKO socket outlet with hinged cover and housing top section order no. 6147 40 15 For rocker push-button with 5 lenses attached and housing top section order no. 6150 76 15 For socket outlet with earth pin and housing top section order no. 6745 64 15
with neon lamp unit with N terminal order no. 1675 for illumination and monitoring circuit with plug-in terminals
Rockers switches Rockers switch with housing top section light grey/grey, series
61 3075 15
10
10 AX, 250 V~ Housing screws made of stainless steel. For combining with lower casings order no. 6019 30 05, 6118 91 05, 6119 60 05, 6119 61 05, 6719 32 05
with plug-in terminals
Wago clip-in 3-wire connection terminal for wiring "#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
509
AQUATEC IP44 Order no.
Packing unit
Rocker push-buttons
61 5076 15
Push-buttons and pilot lamps Push-button and pilot lamp E10
10
light grey/grey, NO contact
Housing screws made of stainless steel.
Knob for push-button and pilot lamp E10 see module inserts order no. 1279 .. Cover for push-button and pilot lamp E10 see module inserts order no. 1280, 1281, 1282, 1283 Can be illuminated using neon lamp E10 see module inserts order no. 1601 Can be illuminated using LED lamp E10 see module inserts order no. 1678 ..
Can be illuminated using neon and incandescent lamp units with N-terminal see module inserts order no. 1675 .., 1676 .. For combining with lower casings order no. 6019 30 05, 6118 91 05, 6119 60 05, 6119 61 05, 6719 32 05
can be illuminated using neon and glow lamp unit with N-terminal for illumination and monitoring circuit with plug-in terminals
for illumination and monitoring circuit with cable entry at top and bottom Wago clip-in 3-wire connection terminal for wiring with screw terminals
SCHUKO-socket outlets SCHUKO-socket outlet with hinged cover and housing top section
Pilot lamp E 14 Pilot lamp E14
10
light grey/grey
16 A, 250 V~
For combining with lower casings order no. 6019 30 05, 6118 91 05, 6119 60 05, 6119 61 05, 6719 32 05
Cover for pilot lamp E14 see module inserts order no. 1220, 1230, 1231, 1232 Can be illuminated using incandescent lamp E14 see module inserts order no. 1610 .. Can be illuminated using LED lamp E14 see module inserts order no. 1679 ..
H with hollow base with plug-in terminals
with cable entry at top and bottom Wago clip-in 3-wire connection terminal for wiring with screw terminals
Socket outlets with earth pin Socket outlet with earth pin and housing top section 10
Rotary dimmers Rotary dimmer with soft-lock and setting knob light grey/grey
16 A, 250 V~ For combining with housing bottom section with cable entry order no. 6019 30 05, 6118 91 05, 6719 32 05 For combining with housing bottom section with bolted joint lead-in M20 x 1.5 order no. 6119 60 05, 6119 61 05
Connection terminals according to IEC 60884-1
H 2pole + earth with hollow base with screw-in lift terminals
510
10
Housing screws made of stainless steel.
Connection terminals IEC 60884-1
67 4564 15
5172 15
250 V~ Incandescent lamp power max. 3 W; Lamp base length max. 23,5 mm
Housing screws, hinged cover springs and axles made of stainless steel.
light grey/grey, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1
10
Housing screws made of stainless steel.
Lenses with symbol for light, bell, door and neutral in clear, also neutral in red transparent.
61 4740 15
5112 15
250 V~ Momentary-contact current max. 2 A; Incandescent lamp power max. 2 W
10 A, 250 V~
light grey/grey
Packing unit
Pilot lamps
Rocker push-button with 5 lenses attached and housing top section light grey/grey, changeover contact, usable as NC or NO
Order no.
on page T9
2895 05
1
230 V~, 50 Hz 230 V incandescent and halogen lamps 60 - 450 W; LV power boosters Eb max. 10; Axial dimension diameter 4 mm Housing screws made of stainless steel. Not suitable for 2- or 3gang combinations!
1
G
J
with change-over pressure switch short-circuit and overload proof (fine-wire fuse) with spare fuse phase cut-on with cable entry at top and bottom Wago clip-in 3-wire connection terminal for wiring with plug-in terminals
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
AQUATEC IP44 Order no.
Packing unit
Neon lamp units
Speed controller with setting knob
on page T8
Packing unit
Accessories
Speed controllers light grey/grey
Order no.
2970 10
1
Surface LED unit for illuminated labelling field
230 V~, 50 Hz Rated motor current and segment current, max. 0,1 - 2,3 A
polar white, 230 V~, 2,5 mA
Housing screws made of stainless steel.
When several area LED units are used the lamp current may result in malfunctioning of the relay/pulse relay. Connect a capacitor 230 V, 1 µF per 10 mA LED current in parallel with the coil.
Not suitable for 2- or 3gang combinations!
5
7
with imprinted symbol curve with rotary on/off switch for devices with motory drive additional switching contact for blade control basic speed adjustable short-circuit and overload proof (fine-wire fuse) with spare fuse phase cut-on with cable entry at top and bottom Wago clip-in 3-wire connection terminal for wiring with plug-in terminals
timers
10
For rocker switch with illuminated labelling field order no. 3076 55 For rockers switch with illuminated labelling field order no. 5076 55
Entries/connectors Combination connector light grey
1880
10
1881 1882
10 10
1889 05
10
to combine devices
Cable entry light grey, for 1 cable light grey, for 2 cables
Timers
1619 01
Mechanical timer with setting knob light grey/grey, max. 15 minutes
4227 05
1
light grey/grey, max. 120 minutes
4228 05
1
Extended cable entry light grey, for 1 cable
16 A, 250 V~ Housing screws made of stainless steel. Not suitable for 2- or 3gang combinations!
Screwed gland M20 x 1.5 mm
with time scale imprint with through terminal with cable entry at top and bottom Wago clip-in 3-wire connection terminal for wiring with screw terminals 2pole on/off
Data connector housing with labelling field
1886
10
1
Housing screws made of stainless steel. Labelling field height arranged for 9 mm P-touch strips. Attention, a different degree of protection!
Mounting plates see acessories order no. 1111 .., 1112 ..
for mounting plates with cable entry at top and bottom Wago clip-in 3-wire connection terminal for wiring
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
10 10
Thread M20 x 1,5 mm; Distance from wall to centre of pipe 21 mm
Data connector housings 4256 15
61 1963 05 1962 05
Tube entry light grey
Communication technics
light grey/grey
light grey, for 2 cables light grey, for 1 cable
Duct entry for 1 cable light grey, for cable ducts 15 x 15 mm
1804 05
1
light grey, for cable ducts 15 x 25 mm
1804 15
1
light grey, for cable ducts 15 x 30 mm
1804 25
1
Duct entry for 2 cables light grey, for cable ducts 15 x 15 mm, 15 x 25 mm, 15 x 30 mm
1805 05
1
511
DIECAST IP44 Order no.
Packing unit
Order no.
Key switches
Key push-button flush-mounted for profile half cylinders
Key switch surface-mounted for profile half cylinders 2pole change-over
4466
NO contact
with imprint with cover lock with flush-mounted box with cable entry diameter 11 mm at top and backside with screw terminals
with imprint with cover lock with cable entry diameter 22.5 mm (PG 16) at bottom with screw terminals
Key switches for shutters
Key switch flush-mounted for profile half cylinders
on page T5
4416
Key switch for shutters surface-mounted for profile half cylinder
1
2pole
16 A, 250 V~ Installation depth ⌀ 73 x 65 mm; Dimensions aluminium cover plate (W x H) 100 x 125 mm Profile half cylinder see module inserts / accessories order no. 1818 01, 1818
1
Profile half cylinder see module inserts / accessories order no. 1818 01, 1818
with imprint with cover lock with push lock function with neutral-position with cable entry diameter 22.5 mm (PG 16) at bottom with screw terminals
with imprint with cover lock with flush-mounted box with cable entry diameter 22.5 mm (PG 16) at bottom with screw terminals
Accessories: Metal cover
Key switch for shutters flush-mounted for profile half cylinders
1
2pole for order no. 4416
for replacement need without imprint aluminium
on page T5
4412
1
16 A, 250 V~ Installation depth ⌀ 73 x 65 mm; Dimensions aluminium cover plate (W x H) 100 x 125 mm Profile half cylinder see module inserts / accessories order no. 1818 01, 1818
Key push-buttons Key push-button surface-mounted for profile half cylinders NO contact
4462
16 A, 250 V~ Dimensions (W x H x D) 75 x 75 x 68 mm on page T5
1904
1
Profile half cylinder see module inserts / accessories order no. 1818 01, 1818
Profile half cylinder see module inserts / accessories order no. 1818 01, 1818
2pole change-over
4450
16 A, 250 V~ Installation depth ⌀ 59 x 61 mm; Dimensions (L x W) 75 x 75 mm
1
16 A, 250 V~ Dimensions (W x H x D) 75 x 75 x 68 mm on page T5
Packing unit
4448
1
16 A, 250 V~ Dimensions (W x H x D) 74 x 74 x 45 mm Profile half cylinder see module inserts / accessories order no. 1818 01, 1818
with imprint with cover lock with cable entry diameter 22.5 mm (PG 16) at bottom with cable entry diameter 11 mm at backside with screw terminals
with imprint with cover lock with push lock function with neutral-position with flush-mounted box with cable entry diameter 22.5 mm (PG 16) at bottom with screw terminals
Accessories: Metal cover with imprint 1903
1
for order no. 4412
for replacement need aluminium
512
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
DIECAST IP44 Order no.
Packing unit
Order no.
Packing unit
Key push-buttons for shutters Key push-button for shutters surface-mounted for profile half cylinders 1pole
4447
1
16 A, 250 V~ Dimensions (W x H x D) 74 x 74 x 45 mm Profile half cylinder see module inserts / accessories order no. 1818 01, 1818
with imprint with cover lock with neutral-position with cable entry diameter 22.5 mm (PG 16) at bottom with cable entry diameter 11 mm at backside with screw terminals
Key push-button for shutters flush-mounted for profile half cylinders 1pole
4449
1
16 A, 250 V~ Installation depth ⌀ 59 x 61 mm; Dimensions (L x W) 75 x 75 mm Profile half cylinder see module inserts / accessories order no. 1818 01, 1818
with imprint with cover lock with neutral-position with flush-mounted box with cable entry diameter 11 mm at top and backside with screw terminals
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
513
Housing Plastic, glossy dark grey
similar to RAL 7011
Rockers/hinged covers Plastic, matt yellow
514
similar to RAL 1003
ISO-Panzer IP44/IP66
Waterproof/ splash-protected Surface-mounted range
Berker ISO-Panzer IP44 / IP66 is a waterproof / splash-protected surface-mounted range for extreme environmental conditions, made of special matterials.
■ For use in difficult conditions (e.g. building sites); withstands even the toughest use ■ High chemical resistance of the housing matterial ■ Non-corrosive ■ Screws and hinged cover springs made of stainless steel/hinged cover hinge pins made of non-corrosive brass ■ C olour signalling: yellow control elements make the surface-mounted units stand out against the background even in areas with limited visibility
515
ISO-PANZER IP44 Order no.
Packing unit
Order no.
Switches
Switches for shutters
Rocker switches
Key switches for shutters
Rocker switch with clear lens dark grey/yellow, change-over
on page T71
3446
1
Key switch for shutters for profile half cylinders with imprint dark grey/yellow, 2pole
10 AX, 250 V~ Housing screws made of stainless steel.
Housing screws made of stainless steel.
for illumination and monitoring circuit with additional terminal for e.g. control switch function with cable entry at top and bottom with plug-in terminals
4386
Profile half cylinder see module inserts / accessories order no. 1818 01, 1818
for master-key systems with push lock function with cable entry at top and bottom with screw terminals
Key push-buttons for shutters key push-button for shutters for profile half cylinders with imprint
Key switch for profile half cylinders dark grey/yellow, 2pole change-over
1
dark grey/yellow, 1pole dark grey/yellow, 2pole
1 1
Housing screws made of stainless steel.
Housing screws made of stainless steel. Profile half cylinder see module inserts / accessories order no. 1818 01, 1818
Profile half cylinder see module inserts / accessories order no. 1818 01, 1818
with neutral-position for master-key systems with cable entry at top and bottom with screw terminals
for master-key systems with cable entry at top and bottom with screw terminals
Push-buttons
Combinations
Rocker push-buttons
Combination switch/socket outlet
Rocker push-button with red lens and 4 symbols attached 5041 01
1
10 A, 250 V~ Neon lamp current 2,7 mA Housing screws made of stainless steel. With light, bell, door and neutral symbols. Can be illuminated using neon and incandescent lamp units - see accessories order no. 1615, 1616, 1617, 1618, 1637
with neon lamp unit for rocker switch and rocker push-button order no. 1615 for illumination and monitoring circuit with cable entry at top and bottom with plug-in terminals
516
4391 4392
10 A, 250 V~
10 A, 250 V~
dark grey/yellow, NO, with 2 separate signalling contacts
1
Push-buttons for shutters
Key switches
on page T71
4382
10 A, 250 V~
Can be illuminated using neon and incandescent lamp units - see accessories order no. 1615, 1616, 1617, 1618, 1637
Packing unit
Combination rotary switch/SCHUKO-socket outlet with hinged cover dark grey/yellow, with change-over switch
4246
1
16 A, 250 V~ Switching current 16 AX Instead of socket outlets, any other devices from the ISO-reinforced IP44 and IP66 ranges with degree of protection IP44 can be used. Housing screws, hinged cover spring and axle made of stainless steel. for vertical mounting phase wired-through with hollow base with cable entry at top and bottom with screw terminals
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
ISO-PANZER IP44 Order no.
Packing unit
4432
Packing unit
SCHUKO-socket outlets
Combination key switch/SCHUKO-socket outlet with hinged cover dark grey/yellow, 2pole can be switched on/off
Order no.
SCHUKO-socket outlet 2gang with hinged cover
1
dark grey/yellow
16 A, 250 V~ Switching current 10 A
4370
1
16 A, 250 V~
Instead of SCHUKO-socket outlets, any other devices from the ISO-reinforced IP44 and IP66 ranges with degree of protection IP44 can be used.
on page T71
Instead of socket outlets, any other devices from the ISO-reinforced IP44 and IP66 ranges with degree of protection IP44 can be used. Housing screws, hinged cover springs and axles made of stainless steel.
Housing screws, hinged cover spring and axle made of stainless steel.
Profile half cylinder see module inserts / accessories order no. 1818 01, 1818
Connection terminals IEC 60884-1
H with imprint „0“ and „1“ for vertical mounting for master-key systems with hollow base with cable entry at top and bottom phase and neutral conductor wired-through with screw terminals
for vertical mounting inserts wired-through with hollow base with cable entry at top and bottom with screw terminals
Double SCHUKO-socket outlet with hinged cover
Socket outlets
dark grey/yellow
SCHUKO-socket outlets SCHUKO-socket outlet with hinged cover dark grey/yellow
4280
1
16 A, 250 V~
on page T71
Housing screws, hinged cover spring and axle made of stainless steel.
on page T71
As a result of the side breakout openings specially suited for installation over workbenches. Housing screws, hinged cover springs and axles made of stainless steel.
H
H with hollow base with cable entry at top and bottom with screw terminals
SCHUKO-socket outlets with safety device SCHUKO-socket outlet for fine-wire fuse with hinged cover 4281
1
Connection terminals IEC 60884-1
Connection terminals IEC 60884-1
dark grey/yellow
4322
16 A, 250 V~
for horizontal mounting inserts wired-through with hollow base with cable entry at top side knock out openings for entries with screw terminals
1
16 A, 250 V~ Fine-wire fuse max. 10 A on page T71
Housing screws, hinged cover spring and axle made of stainless steel. Without fine-wire fuse. Fine-wire fuses DIN 41572 Connection terminals IEC 60884-1
H with fuse holder for fine-wire fuses with cable entry at top and bottom with screw terminals
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
517
ISO-PANZER IP44 Order no.
Packing unit
4323
Empty housing
1
dark grey
16 A, 250 V~ on page T71
4290
1
Housing screws made of stainless steel.
As a result of the side break-out openings specially suited for mounting over workbenches.
1 knock out opening, for command unit dia. 22.5 mm with cable entry at top and bottom
For side cable entry use only extended cable gland order no. 1889 02. Instead of SCHUKO socket outlets, any other apparatus from the ISO-reinforced IP44 and IP66 ranges with IP44 protection can be used.
Centre plate for signalling and command unit Ø 22.5 mm
Housing bolts, hinged cover springs and pivot pins made of stainless steel.
Housing screws made of stainless steel.
dark grey/yellow
H
1
Safety emergency off button type: Schlegel, order no. RZ; Safety emergency off button with lock type: Schlegel, order no. RVSCH; Only for installation of emergency push-buttons with contact maker: Schlegel, order no. ETR with cut-out dia. 22.5 mm with cable entry at top and bottom
for horizontal mounting inserts wired-through with hollow base with cable entry at top side knock out openings for entries with screw terminals
NEMA-socket outlets Socket outlet with earth contact, USA/ CANADA, NEMA 5-15 R with hinged cover
Accessories
dark grey/yellow, 1gang dark grey/yellow, 2gang vertical
4286 4293
1 1
dark grey/yellow, 3gang horizontal
4324
1
Neon lamp units Neon lamp unit for rocker switch and rocker push-button white, 230 V~, 2.7 mA
1615
10
If several neon lamp units are used the lamp current may result in malfunctioning of the relay/pulse relay. Insert a neutral conductor or connect a capacitor with 1 µF per 10 mA neon lamp current in parallel with the coil.
15 A, 125 V~ Housing screws, hinged cover springs and axles made of stainless steel. Equates to standard NEMA 5-15 R
For rockers switch with clear lens order no. 3446 For rocker push-button with red lens and 4 supplied symbols order no. 5041 01
2pole + earth with hollow base with screw terminals
Incandescent lamp units Incandescent lamp unit for rocker switch and rocker push-button
Socket outlet with earth contact, USA/ CANADA, NEMA 5-20 R with hinged cover dark grey/yellow, 1gang dark grey/yellow, 2gang vertical
4288 4294
1 1
dark grey/yellow, 3gang horizontal
4325
1
brown, 6 V, 35 mA yellow, 12 V, 65 mA green, 24 V, 35 mA red, 48 V, 25 mA
Housing screws, hinged cover springs and axles made of stainless steel. Equates to standard NEMA 5-20 R
# 1616 1617 1618 1637
10 10 10 10
For rockers switch with clear lens order no. 3446 For rocker push-button with red lens and 4 supplied symbols order no. 5041 01
20 A, 125 V~
2pole + earth with hollow base with screw terminals
4291
IP44 protection is only guaranteed in conjunction with a suitable command unit!
Connection terminals IEC 60884-1
518
Packing unit
Signalling and command units
SCHUKO-socket outlet 3gang with hinged cover dark grey/yellow
Order no.
Labelling fields Slot-in labelling field dark grey
1901
10
as devices cover for clamp cover
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
ISO-PANZER IP44 Order no.
Packing unit
Order no.
Packing unit
Entries/connectors Combination connector black
1880 01
10
to combine devices
Combination connector black
1806
10
to combine IP44 devices with IP66 devices
Cable entry black, for 1 cable
1881 01
10
Cable entry with cable clamp and suspension black
2
1888
for ISO reinforced devices IP44 NEW
Screwed gland M20 x 1.5 mm black, for 1 cable
* 1962 01
10
CEE connecting devices CEE socket outlet surface-mounted 16 A with hinged cover 5pole dark grey/red
5580
5
16 A, 6 h, 400 V~, 50/60 Hz 5pole - 3 P + N + Earth ; Cable diameter 7 - 16 mm For vertical or horizontal combination installation. Lower part can be turned by 90°. IP44 with extended cable entry with screw terminals
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
519
ISO-PANZER IP66 Order no.
Packing unit
Order no.
Switches
Switches for shutters
Rotary switches
Rotary switches/rotary push-buttons for shutters
Rotary switch
on page T71
Packing unit
dark grey/yellow, change-over, 250 V~
3046
1
Rotary switch for shutters with rotary knob and imprint
dark grey/yellow, Series, 250 V~
3045
1
10 A, 250 V~
dark grey/yellow, 3pole on/off, 400 V~, with imprint „0“
3273
1
Housing screws made of stainless steel.
dark grey/yellow, 2pole
1
4342
Interlock disk for conversion to push-button see accessories order no. 1906
16 AX, 250 V~
with neutral-position with push lock function with cable entry at top and bottom with screw terminals
Housing screws made of stainless steel. Switching sequence e.g. for clockwise series switch: > 1 > 1+2 > 2 > 0
Accessories: Interlock disk for rotary switch for shutters
with cable entry at top and bottom with screw terminals
for conversion to rotary push-button for shutters
1906
10
Rotary control switch with red lens dark grey/yellow, change-over
3146
1
SCHUKO-socket outlets
16 AX, 250 V~ Neon lamp current 2,7 mA on page T71
Socket outlets SCHUKO-socket outlet with hinged cover and bayonet lock
Housing screws made of stainless steel. Can be illuminated using neon and incandescent lamp units - see accessories order no. 1611, 1612, 1613, 1614
dark grey/yellow, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1 on page T71
Connection terminals IEC 60884-1
H for SCHUKO right angle plug with bayonet lock with cable entry at top and bottom with screw terminals
1
SCHUKO-socket outlet with 45° oblique outlet and hinged cover with bayonet lock
16 AX, 250 V~ Neon lamp current 2,7 mA on page T71
dark grey/yellow
with imprint „0“ and „1“ with neon lamp unit for rotary control switch order no. 1611 for illumination and monitoring circuit with cable entry at top and bottom with screw terminals
# 4284
1
16 A, 250 V~
Housing screws made of stainless steel. Can be illuminated using neon and incandescent lamp units - see accessories order no. 1611, 1612, 1613, 1614
520
16 A, 250 V~
For SCHUKO right angle plug with bayonet lock order no. 4631
Rotary control switch with red lens 3142
1
Housing screws made of stainless steel.
with neon lamp unit for rotary control switch order no. 1611 for illumination and monitoring circuit with additional terminal for e.g. control switch function with cable entry at top and bottom with screw terminals
dark grey/yellow, 2pole on/off
4283
on page T71
Housing screws made of stainless steel. For SCHUKO right angle plug with bayonet lock order no. 4631
Connection terminals IEC 60884-1
H interlocked SCHUKO-socket outlet for SCHUKO right angle plug with bayonet lock with extended cable entry with screw terminals
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
ISO-PANZER IP66 Order no.
Packing unit
SCHUKO-plugs
Order no.
Packing unit
Combination connector
SCHUKO right angle plug with bayonet lock dark grey/yellow
black
1806
10
1
4631
16 A, 250 V~
to combine IP44 devices with IP66 devices
For SCHUKO socket outlet with hinged cover and bayonet lock order no. 4283, 4284
Cable entry
Design to DIN 49441
black, for 1 cable
1807
10
for interlocked SCHUKO-socket outlet with threaded joint dia. 15.2 mm (PG 9) with screw terminals
Pilot lamps Pilot lamp E 14 Pilot lamp E14 dark grey
1
5152
250 V~ Incandescent lamp power max. 3 W; Lamp base length max. 23,5 mm Housing screws made of stainless steel. Cover order no. 1241 .. Can be illuminated using incandescent lamp E14 see module inserts order no. 1610 03, 1610 13 Can be illuminated using LED lamp E14 see module inserts order no. 1679 ..
with cable entry at top and bottom with screw terminals
Accessories Cover for pilot lamp E14 clear transparent red transparent yellow transparent green transparent
1241 1241 01 1241 02 1241 03
10 10 10 10
For pilot lamp E14 order no. 5152
Accessories Neon lamp units Neon lamp unit for rotary control switch white, 230 V~, 2.7 mA
1611
10
For control rotary switch with red lens order no. 3142, 3146
Incandescent lamp units Incandescent lamp unit for rotary control switch brown, 6 V, 35 mA yellow, 12 V, 65 mA green, 24 V, 35 mA
# 1612 1613 1614
10 10 10
For control rotary switch with red lens order no. 3142, 3146
Entries/connectors Combination connector black
1808
10
to combine devices "#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
521
Housing/rockers Plastic, glossy white
similar to RAL 1013
polar white similar to RAL 9010
522
Surface-mounted
Range for installation in dry rooms
523
SURFACE-MOUNTED Order no.
Packing unit
Switches
Order no.
Rocker switches
Rocker switches
Rocker control switch with red lens
Rocker switch
on page T69
white, glossy, change-over
3006 40
10
white, glossy, intermediate
3007 40
10
white, glossy, 2pole on/ off with imprint „0 and 1“
3002 40
10
on page T69
polar white, change-over polar white, glossy, 2pole on/off with imprint „0“ white, change-over white, glossy, 2pole on/off with imprint „0“
3016 49 3012 49
10 10
3016 40 3012 40
10 10
10 AX, 250 V~ Neon lamp current 1 mA
10 AX, 250 V~ Self-extinguishing base plate see accessories order no. 1052 50
Self-extinguishing base plate see accessories order no. 1052 50 Can be illuminated using neon and incandescent lamp units with N-terminal see module inserts order no. 1675 .., 1676 ..
with cable and duct entry knock out opening for entry at top and bottom with plug-in terminals
with neon lamp unit with N terminal order no. 1675 for illumination and monitoring circuit with cable and duct entry knock out opening for entry at top and bottom with plug-in terminals
Rocker switch
on page T69
Packing unit
white, glossy, change-over
61 3006 40
10
polar white, glossy, change-over
61 3006 49
10
white, glossy, 2pole on/ off with imprint „0 and 1“
61 3002 40
10
white, glossy, intermediate
61 3007 40
10
polar white, glossy, 2pole on/off with imprint „0 and 1“
61 3002 49
10
Rocker switch white, glossy, 3pole on/ off with printing „0 and 1“
3003 40
10
16 AX, 400 V~ on page T69
Self-extinguishing base plate see accessories order no. 1052 50
10 AX, 250 V~ with cable and duct entry knock out opening for entry at top and bottom with screw terminals
Self-extinguishing base plate see accessories order no. 1052 50
Rocker switch
knock out opening for entry at top and bottom with plug-in terminals
white, glossy, 3pole on/ off with printing „0 and 1“
61 3003 40
10
16 AX, 400 V~
Rockers Rocker with labelling field white, glossy
1636 40
10
Labelling field height arranged for 6 mm P-touch strips for labelling with names, notes etc. The rocker can be replaced in all rocker switches and rocker push-buttons in the surface-mounted range except 2- and 3pole on/off.
on page T69
Self-extinguishing base plate see accessories order no. 1052 50
knock out opening for entry at top and bottom with screw terminals
Rockers switches Rockers switch white, glossy, series
3005 40
10
10 AX, 250 V~ Self-extinguishing base plate see accessories order no. 1052 50
with cable and duct entry knock out opening for entry at top and bottom with plug-in terminals
524
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
SURFACE-MOUNTED Order no.
Packing unit
Order no.
Rockers switch white, glossy, series polar white, glossy, series
Pullcord switch 61 3005 40 61 3005 49
10 10
10 AX, 250 V~
white, glossy, change-over
61 3906 40
10
polar white, glossy, change-over
61 3906 49
10
10 AX, 250 V~ Pullcord connection 12 cm
Self-extinguishing base plate see accessories order no. 1052 50
For wall and ceiling mounting. Self-extinguishing base plate see accessories order no. 1052 50
knock out opening for entry at top and bottom with plug-in terminals
knock out opening for entry at top and bottom with plug-in terminals
Rockers switch white, glossy, double change-over, isolated input terminals
3008 40
10
Push-buttons Rocker push-buttons
10 AX, 250 V~
Rocker push-button with 5 lenses attached
Self-extinguishing base plate see accessories order no. 1052 50
white, glossy, change-over contact, usable as NC or NO
with cable and duct entry knock out opening for entry at top and bottom with screw terminals
5006 40
10
10 A, 250 V~ on page T69
Rockers switch white, glossy, double change-over, isolated input terminals polar white, glossy, double change-over, isolated input terminals
Packing unit
61 3008 40
10
61 3008 49
10
Lenses with symbol for light, bell, door and neutral in clear, also neutral in red transparent. Self-extinguishing base plate see accessories order no. 1052 50 Can be illuminated using neon and incandescent lamp units with N-terminal see module inserts order no. 1605 10, 1675 .., 1676 ..
for illumination and monitoring circuit with cable and duct entry knock out opening for entry at top and bottom with plug-in terminals
10 AX, 250 V~ Self-extinguishing base plate see accessories order no. 1052 50
Combinations knock out opening for entry at top and bottom with screw terminals
Combination switch/socket outlet Combination rocker switch/SCHUKO-socket outlet
Pullcord switches
white, glossy white, glossy polar white, glossy
Pullcord switch white, glossy, changeover
3906 40
10 AX, 250 V~ Pullcord connection 12 cm Self-extinguishing base plate see accessories order no. 1052 50
with cable and duct entry knock out opening for entry at top and bottom for wall and ceiling mounting with plug-in terminals
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
10 on page T69
4796 40 61 4796 40 61 4796 49
5 5 5
16 A, 250 V~ Switching current 10 AX Self-extinguishing base plate see accessories order no. 1054 40
Connection terminals according to IEC 60884-1 for vertical mounting change-over switch and socket outlet connectable separately with hollow base with cable and duct entry knock out opening for entry at top and bottom with plug-in terminals
525
SURFACE-MOUNTED Order no.
Packing unit
Order no.
Combination rockers switch/SCHUKO-socket outlet white, glossy polar white, glossy
61 4794 40 61 4794 49
SCHUKO-socket outlet
5 5
16 A, 250 V~ Switching current 10 AX
on page T69
Self-extinguishing base plate see accessories order no. 1054 40
for vertical mounting series switch and socket outlet connectable separately with hollow base knock out opening for entry at top and bottom with plug-in terminals
5 5
white, glossy, without hollow base
4000 50
10
white, glossy, with hollow base, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1
4000 30
10
with cable and duct entry knock out opening for entry at top and bottom with screw terminals
SCHUKO-socket outlets with safety device SCHUKO-socket outlet with overvoltage protection and labelling field white, glossy
1
4006 41
16 A, 250 V~, 50/60 Hz
change-over switch and socket outlet connectable separately without hollow base knock out openings for entries at top, bottom and side switch with plug-in terminals, socket outlet with screw terminals
on page T33
Overvoltage protection to EN 61643-11 and VDE 0675-6, -11 Connection terminals IEC 60884-1 with imprint with indicator LED for „on/error“ with acoustic fault signal with hollow base knock out opening for entry at top and bottom with screw terminals
SCHUKO-socket outlets SCHUKO-socket outlet 4700 40 4700 49 4700 30
10 10 10
4700 39
10
Labelling field height arranged for 6 mm P-touch strips. Self-extinguishing base plate see accessories order no. 1052 50
Socket outlets
on page T69
10
Connection terminals IEC 60884-1
16 A, 250 V~ Switching current 10 AX
white, glossy polar white, glossy white, glossy, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1 polar white, glossy, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1
4000 40
Self-extinguishing base plate see accessories order no. 1052 50
Combination rocker switch/SCHUKO-socket outlets 61 4026 40 61 4026 49
white, glossy, with hollow base
16 A, 250 V~
Connection terminals according to IEC 60884-1
white, glossy polar white, glossy
Packing unit
SCHUKO-socket outlets Double SCHUKO-socket outlet
16 A, 250 V~ Self-extinguishing base plate see accessories order no. 1052 50
Connection terminals IEC 60884-1 with hollow base with cable and duct entry knock out opening for entry at top and bottom with plug-in terminals
on page T69
white, glossy polar white, glossy white, glossy, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1 polar white, glossy, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1
4721 40 4721 49 4721 30
10 10 10
4721 39
10
16 A, 250 V~ Self-extinguishing base plate see accessories order no. 1053 40
Connection terminals IEC 60884-1 for vertical and horizontal mounting with hollow base with cable and duct entry knock out opening for entry at top and bottom with plug-in terminals
526
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
SURFACE-MOUNTED Order no.
Packing unit
4040 4040 49
5 5
16 A, 250 V~
for vertical and horizontal mounting with hollow base knock out openings for entries at top, bottom and side with screw terminals
Combinations Combination switch/socket outlet Combination rocker switch/socket outlet without earth contact 5 5
Combination rockers switch/socket outlet without earth contact
Self-extinguishing base plate see accessories order no. 1054 40
socket outlet 2pole for vertical mounting series switch and socket outlet connectable separately knock out opening for entry at top and bottom with hollow base with plug-in terminals
Self-extinguishing base plate see accessories order no. 1052 50
Connection terminals according to IEC 60884-1 2pole knock out opening for entry at top and bottom with hollow base with screw terminals
white, glossy polar white, glossy
61 6721 40 61 6721 49
10 10
16 A, 250 V~ Mirror depth 5,9 mm
Connection terminals according to IEC 60884-1
socket outlet 2pole for vertical mounting change-over switch and socket outlet connectable separately knock out opening for entry at top and bottom with hollow base with plug-in terminals
16 A, 250 V~ Switching current 10 AX; Mirror depth 5,9 mm
10 10
Self-extinguishing base plate see accessories order no. 1053 40
Self-extinguishing base plate see accessories order no. 1054 40
61 6735 40 61 6735 49
61 6000 40 61 6000 49
Double socket outlet without earth contact
16 A, 250 Switching current 10 AX; Mirror depth 5,9 mm
white, glossy polar white, glossy
Socket outlet without earth contact
16 A, 250 V~ Mirror depth 5,9 mm
Connection terminals IEC 60884-1
61 6736 40 61 6736 49
Socket outlets without earth contact white, glossy polar white, glossy
Self-extinguishing base plate see accessories order no. 1055
white, glossy polar white, glossy
Packing unit
Socket outlets
SCHUKO-socket outlet 3gang white, glossy polar white, glossy
Order no.
5 5
2pole for vertical and horizontal mounting knock out opening for entry at top and bottom with hollow base with plug-in terminals
3gang socket outlet without earth contact white, glossy polar white, glossy
61 6040 61 6040 49
5 5
16 A, 250 V~ Mirror depth 4,5 mm Self-extinguishing base plate see accessories order no. 1055
Connection terminals according to IEC 60884-1 2pole for vertical and horizontal mounting knock out openings for entries at top, bottom and side with hollow base with screw terminals
Socket outlets with earth pin Socket outlet with earth pin white, glossy, enhanced contact protection IEC 60884-1
67 6006 40
10
16 A, 250 V~ Self-extinguishing base plate see accessories order no. 1052 50
Connection terminals according to IEC 60884-1 2pole + earth with hollow base with cable and duct entry with screw terminals
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
527
SURFACE-MOUNTED Order no.
Packing unit
Order no.
Pilot lamps
Accessories
Push-buttons and pilot lamps
Bottom plates
Push-button and pilot lamp E10 white, glossy, NO contact
on page T5
5100 40
Packing unit
Self-extinguishing base plate 10
250 V~ Momentary-contact current max. 2 A; Incandescent lamp power max. 2 W Self-extinguishing base plate see accessories order no. 1052 50 Knob for push-button and pilot lamp E10 see module inserts order no. 1279 .. Cover for push-button and pilot lamp E10 see module inserts order no. 1280, 1281, 1282, 1283 Can be illuminated using neon lamp E10 see module inserts order no. 1601 Can be illuminated using LED lamp E10 see module inserts order no. 1678 ..
for illumination and monitoring circuit with cable and duct entry knock out opening for entry at top and bottom with screw terminals
white, for 1gang devices white, for double socket outlets
1052 50 1053 40
10 10
white, for 2gang combinations
1054 40
10
white, for 3gang socket outlets
1055
10
with imprint suitable for mounting on flammable base surface
Entries/connectors Cable and duct entry white polar white black
1813 1813 09 1813 05
10 10 10
Also suitable for surface-mounted frames and housings from the flush-mounted ranges.
Pilot lamp E 14 for wire or 15 x 15 mm cable duct
Pilot lamp E14 white, glossy
5130 40
10
250 V~ Incandescent lamp power max. 3 W; Lamp base length max. 23,5 mm
Tube entry polar white black
Self-extinguishing base plate see accessories order no. 1052 50 Cover for pilot lamp E14 see module inserts order no. 1220, 1230, 1231, 1232 Can be illuminated using incandescent lamp E14 see module inserts order no. 1610 .. Can be illuminated using LED lamp E14 see module inserts order no. 1679 ..
1817 09 1817 05
10 10
Distance from wall to centre of pipe 16 mm Suitable tubes for surface mounted installation are available from: www.fraenkische-elektro.de Also suitable for surface-mounted frames and housings from the flush-mounted ranges. for tubes with Ø 15.2 mm (PG 9) and M 16 for tubes with coupling dia. 20.5 mm (PG 13.5) and M 20
with cable and duct entry knock out opening for entry at top and bottom with screw terminals
Communication technics Data connector housings Data connector housing with labelling field white, glossy
1115 02
10
Labelling field height arranged for 9 mm P-touch strips. Self-extinguishing base plate see accessories rder no. 1052 50 Mounting plates see acessories order no. 1111 .., 1112 ..
for mounting plates with cable and duct entry 1 knock out opening for entry at top
528
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
Order no.
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
Packing unit
Order no.
Packing unit
529
530
connecting systems
Connection boxes and connecting devices
Whether for cookers, large-scale kitchens, industry, building sites or other applications – connection boxes and connecting devices are needed everywhere. Berker offers a broad spectrum of products in response to the many and varied demands of everyday use.
Available systems: ■ Electric range connection box ■ CEE industrial connecting devices ■ SCHUKO rubber connecting devices ■ SCHUKO connecting devices
531
CONNECTING SYSTEMS Order no.
Packing unit
Range CONNECTION boxes
4478 09
Packing unit
Perilex socket outlet surface-mounted 16 A with hinged cover
Range connection box surface-mounted or flush mounted polar white
Order no.
grey 5
Conductor cross-section max. 2,5 mm²; Dimensions (L x W x H) 86 x 86 x 28 mm
5510
10
16 A, 400 V~ 5pole - 3 P + N + Earth VDE 0100/05.73 and DIN 49445-48 IP44
with 5pole double terminal, locking additional pin cover possible for screw and spread fixing in 60 and 70 box with screw terminals
with screw terminals
Perilex plug 16 A white
Range connection box flush-mounted polar white
4477 09
5
Conductor cross-section max. 2,5 mm²; Dimensions (L x W x H) 86 x 86 x 12 mm
duroplastic housing with screw terminals
flat execution with 5pole double terminal, locking for screw and spread fixing in 60 and 70 box with screw terminals
Perilex plug 16 A grey, PVC housing
Perilex socket outlet flush-mounted 16 A 10
16 A, 400 V~ 5pole - 3 P + N + Earth
IP44
white
5740
10
16 A, 400 V~ 5pole - 3 P + N + Earth
Perilex socket outlet flush-mounted 16 A with hinged cover and flush-mounted wall box 5610
10
VDE 0100/05.73 and DIN 49445-48 duroplastic housing with screw terminals
16 A, 400 V~ 5pole - 3 P + N + Earth
Perilex coupling 16 A
VDE 0100/05.73 and DIN 49445-48
white
IP44
Perilex socket outlet surface-mounted 16 A 5500
16 A, 400 V~ 5pole - 3 P + N + Earth VDE 0100/05.73 and DIN 49445-48
5800
1
16 A, 400 V~ 5pole - 3 P + N + Earth
with flush-mounted box with screw terminals
with screw terminals
VDE 0100/05.73 and DIN 49445-48
Perilex right angle plug 16 A
with screw terminals
white
10
with screw terminals
VDE 0100/05.73 and DIN 49445-48
white
5710
16 A, 400 V~ 5pole - 3 P + N + Earth
Perilex connecting devices 5600
10
VDE 0100/05.73 and DIN 49445-48
Quick-mounting with a spreader claw bolt.
white
5700
16 A, 400 V~ 5pole - 3 P + N + Earth
10
VDE 0100/05.73 and DIN 49445-48 duroplastic housing with screw terminals
Perilex coupling 16 A grey
5810
1
16 A, 400 V~ 5pole - 3 P + N + Earth IP44 protection is provided only when plug order no. 5710 and 5720 is connected. VDE 0100/05.73 and DIN 49445-48 IP44 PVC housing with screw terminals
532
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
CONNECTING SYSTEMS Order no.
Packing unit
CEE connecting devices
Order no.
Packing unit
Wall boxes
CEE socket outlet flush-mounted 16 A with hinged cover 3pole
CEE flush-mounted box
grey/blue
16 A, 6 h, 250 V~, 50/60 Hz 3pole - P + N + Earth
Flush-mounted boxes diameter 70 mm; Flush-mounted boxes installation depth 50 mm; Bolt spacing 70 mm
IP44
For CEE socket outlet flush-mounted 16 A with hinged cover order no. 5680
1
5684
suitable for cable duct, type 68 flush-mounted and hollow-wall boxes with screw terminals
CEE socket outlet surface-mounted 16 A with hinged cover 3pole grey/blue
5581
10
16 A, 6 h, 250 V~, 50/60 Hz 3pole - P + N + Earth; Cable diameter 7 - 16 mm
1
CEE connecting devices CEE socket outlet surface-mounted 16 A with hinged cover 5pole dark grey/red
5580
5
16 A, 6 h, 400 V~, 50/60 Hz 5pole - 3 P + N + Earth ; Cable diameter 7 - 16 mm For vertical or horizontal combination installation. Lower part can be turned by 90°.
For vertical or horizontal combination installation.
IP44
IP44
with extended cable entry with screw terminals
with extended cable entry with screw terminals
CEE right angle plug 16 A 5pole
CEE socket outlet built-in 16 A with hinged cover 3pole grey/blue
1830
5681
grey/red 10
16 A, 6 h, 250 V~, 50/60 Hz 3pole - P + N + Earth
5780
5
16 A, 6 h, 400 V~, 50/60 Hz 5pole - 3 P + N + Earth IP44
IP44
with extended cable entry with internal anti-kink protection can be screwed with screw terminals
built-on socket outlet suitable e.g. for switch cabinet door with screw terminals
CEE right angle plug 16 A 3pole grey/blue
5781
1
16 A, 6 h, 250 V~, 50/60 Hz 3pole - P + N + Earth
with extended cable entry with internal anti-kink protection can be screwed with screw terminals
5
Suitable hollow wall boxes: Kaiser oreder no. 9075-01 Spelsberg order no. HW70
Matching CEE flush-mounted box order no. 1830
IP44
5
with flush-mounted box with screw terminals
16 A, 6 h, 400 V~, 50/60 Hz 5pole - 3 P + N + Earth
Suitable built-in cable boxes: Tehalit item no. L5816
5682
IP44
CEE socket outlet flush-mounted 16 A with hinged cover 5pole 5680
white/red
32 A, 6 h, 400 V~, 50/60 Hz 5pole - 3 P + N + Earth ; Flush-mounted boxes diameter 80 mm; Flush-mounted boxes installation depth 60 mm
IP44
white/red
CEE socket outlet flush-mounted 32 A with hinged cover 5pole
CEE socket outlet surface-mounted 32 A with hinged cover 5pole grey/red
5582
5
32 A, 6 h, 400 V~, 50/60 Hz 5pole - 3 P + N + Earth ; Cable diameter 7 - 16 mm For vertical or horizontal combination installation. Lower part can be turned by 90°. IP44 with extended cable entry with screw terminals
also suitable for cable ducts, energy pillars with screw terminals "#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
533
CONNECTING SYSTEMS Order no.
Packing unit
CEE socket outlet built-in 32 A with hinged cover 5pole white/red
5683
Packing unit
SCHUKO right angle plug 10
32 A, 6 h, 400 V~, 50/60 Hz 5pole - 3 P + N + Earth
white
4606
20
16 A, 250 V~ Design to DIN 49441 duroplastic housing can be screwed with screw terminals
IP44 also suitable for cable ducts with screw terminals
Solid rubber SCHUKO-coupling, heavy design
CEE right angle plug 32 A 5pole grey/red
Order no.
5
5782
32 A, 6 h, 400 V~, 50/60 Hz 5pole - 3 P + N + Earth
black
4886
10
16 A, 250 V~
H IP44
non-corrosive can be screwed with screw terminals
with extended cable entry with internal anti-kink protection can be screwed with screw terminals
SCHUKO connecting devices Solid rubber SCHUKO-plug, heavy design black
4684
10
16 A, 250 V~ Design to DIN 49441
H IP44 non-corrosive with sealing collar can be screwed with screw terminals
Solid rubber SCHUKO-plug, industrial design black
4685
10
16 A, 250 V~ Design to DIN 49441
H IP44 non-corrosive with sealing collar with anti-kink protection can be screwed with screw terminals
Solid rubber SCHUKO 3-way coupling with hinged covers, heavy design black
4891
1
16 A, 250 V~
H IP44 non-corrosive with suspension with ring groove for sealing collar can be screwed with screw terminals 534
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
Order no.
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
Packing unit
Order no.
Packing unit
535
INSTRUCTIONS FOR CLEANING AND CARE
Clean the surfaces by wiping them over with a soft damp lint-free cloth.
Soap-based detergents are suitable for havier dirt. "Glass" and "aluminium" surfaces can be cleaned by using common glass cleaners.
For heavy dirt on stainless steel surfaces, special cleaners such as "Surface Shield" or "Chromol" are preferred. Please observe the corresponding instructions for use, as they may not be used on plastics and fine metallic surface finishes.
Abrasives and polishes, acid-based (scale removing) detergents and detergents containing chlorine will generally damage all surfaces. Moreover, painted/lacquered surfaces must not come in contact with detergents that contain alcohol.
537
TEST MARKS, ADMINISTRATIVE MARKS, TRADEMARKS AND SYMBOLS
RAL
Determination of colour gradations of Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification)
Application designations/symbols
12 V halogen lamp
Test mark Netherlands
Electronic data processing, designated for special circuits by red centre plate.
Test mark Austria
Trademarks/brands
Test mark Norway
Registered trademark of SCHUKOWarenzeichenverband (SCHUKO trademark association) e.V.; designates socket outlets according to DIN VDE 0620-1 and DIN 49440. Terminals are also suitable as connector terminals.
Test marks and administrative marks VDE test mark, all items of the Berker range for which this test mark is possible bear this mark.
EDV
Test mark France Test mark Denmark Test mark Italy Test mark Sweden
Incandescent lamp Fluorescent lamp
230 V halogen lamp
R
L Conventional transformer Hollow-wall box Information designations for products with separate technical data on following pages.
Registered trademark of Warenzeichenverband EDELSTAHL ROSTFREI (stainless steel trademark association).
Test mark Canada
Symbol for the type of residual electrical current. Designation for -25°C to 40°C temperature range.
Test mark Belgium Registered trademark of the European Installation Bus Association sc (EIBA), Brussels.
Test mark USA
Electronic transformer
AX
X = fluorescent lamp rated current
1 U
see S. T8
V
Flush-mounted controller, installation height 2.2 m
8
Relay with microcontact Opening diameter
7
Semiconductor circuit element
S
Earth
Test mark Poland Test mark Finland
Registered trademark of PERILEX-Gemeinschaft e.V..
Test mark Switzerland
Protection classes/types
ENEC stands for European Norms Electrical Certification. The number following the mark stands for the certifying body. For instance, VDE: 10
VDE radio suppression seal
Verification of increased voltage with stand capability for connecting devices to DIN 49400 and 49441, installation equipment made of shock-proof material for higher mechanical stress conditioning.
SV
Safety power supply (diesel unit VDE 0107:1994-10), designated by green centre plate
ZSV
Additional safety power supply (battery supported VDE 0170: 1994-10), designated by orange centre plate Furniture construction/installation Devices can be mounted on surfaces with unknown flammable properties. Flame resistant according to VDE 0606 T1: 1984-11, meets the requirements of VdS (Association of Property Insurers) for mounting on wood. All items in this catalogue falling under CE regulations bear the CE marking on the packaging label and on the product itself.
538
Protection Class 2 insulation
IP
(international protection) Designated according to DIN 40050, IEC 60529, the protection class of a device to prevent ingress of foreign objects and moisture.
IP44 Protection against contact between energised parts and wires or similar larger than 1 mm diameter and splashing water from all directions. (contact-protected from 1 mm, splash-protected)
IP55 Protection against harmful dust
deposits and against water jets from a nozzle directed toward the housing from all directions. (protected from dust and water jets)
IP66 Protection against dust deposits
and strong water jets from all directions. (dustproof, waterproof) Protection Class III Explosion protection, zone 11 IP44-compatible, protection class IP44 can be achieved only by using the proper sealing set.
Flush-mounted controller, installation height 1,1 m
Material characteristics Berker products do not contain any materials made of PVC or halogen, with the exception of the sealing membrane and slider in the splash-protected surfacemounted range as well as the wall boxes of the built-in system. Slider without halogen on request The technical specifications given here are not binding. The operating manual supplied with the products must be observed in all cases. Illustrations, particularly with regard to colour, size, equipment, performance characteristics of the products as well as circuit / connection diagrams, are not binding. We reserve the right to make technical and formal changes to our products in the interest of technical progress.
technical specifications
Switches/push-buttons/socket outlets Timer Dimmer BLC/presence detector Controller/Berker control 1-10 V technology/DALI Electronic ballasts and Tronic transformers Equipment data Overvoltage protection Thermostat RolloTec Alarm central unit Smoke detector Radio bus SCHUKO RCD socket outlet Antenna technology Data/telecommunications Dimensional drawings Equipment categories
T3-T6 T7 T8-T11 T11-T18 T19-T27 T28-T29 T29-T31 T32 T33 T34-T35 T36-T42 T43-T44 T45-T46 T47-T59 T60 T61-T62 T63-T65 T66-T72 T73
Accessories 611-613 General terms and conditions of business 614 Product summary 615
539
ILLUMINATED SWITCHES Switch lighting Tool sizes for BERKER products with combination cross-head slotted screws as fixings: - Cross-head bits, Type: Pozidriv®size 1. - Cross-head screwdriver: Type: Pozidriv®size 1. - Slotted screwdriver: Type: blade thickness 0.8 mm.
Contact screws: - Cross-head bits, Type: Pozidriv®size 2. - Cross-head screwdriver: Type: Pozidriv®size 2. - Slotted screwdriver: Type: blade thickness 1 mm. When using cordless screwdrivers, setting 1st gear, speed 1 at 0.5 Nm.
Insert here. Same neon lamp unit for illuminated switches and monitoring switches.
The neon lamp unit can be inserted from the front and replaced without removing the switch.
Illuminated rocker switches
Rear view
Rear view L N
rot
L
rot
3036 mm
11
mm
11
mm
11
3036 L
S.1/B.1 rocker with red lens for illuminated switches or monitoring switches. Neon and glow lamp units are available for light switches/push-buttons of programmes S.1/B.1/B.3/B.7 Glas, Modul 2, Arsys, K.1, K.5, Twinpoint, splash-protected flush-mounted IP44, Aquatec and ISO Panzer. Illuminated light switches not only offer effective guidance. Used as monitoring switches, they indicate active consumers. Not least, they help conserve energy and maintain security.
Rear view
L N
3036
L N
L
Detachable contact lug. (for application see wiring diagrams).
rot
Front view
Front view
Front view
L N
L N
3036
L N
3036
3036
rot
rot
Workplace Regulations The German Workplace Regulations ("ArbStattV") stipulate that existing installations must also be converted to illuminated light switches. With installation switches from the BERKER range there is no problem in this respect, as the neon lamp units are easily retrofitted and ensure the same illumination effect. In the case of splash-protected surface-mounted units the illumination cannot always be upgraded!
rot
Switch-off Permanently lit with change-over switch (Neon lamp unit permanently lit)
Switch-off Illuminated with change-over switch (Neon lamp unit lit when "Off")
Switch-off Monitoring with change-over switch (Neon lamp unit lit when "On")
Monitoring and indicator lamps such as neon units and neon lamps wired in parallel with the switching contact lead to the contact opening distance not being reached. L
Remove detachable contact lug from neon lamp unit
Remove detachable contact lug from neon lamp unit
L
Control switching for series rockers switches For series light switches in the ranges S.1/B.1/B.3/B.7 Glas, Modul 2, K.1, K.5 and Arsys, the series LED unit with N-terminal is available. Used as a control switch, it shows the loads switched on for each series. Some important uses of this are safety and monitoring energy consumption. Control series switch L N 3035
Rockers switch (series) 3035 / 303550
3035 rot
red
Switching symbol
T3 T3
Connection in series control (Series LED unit 1680 lights up per series when "On")
N-terminal
Contact springs for easy snap-in mounting.
Snap on series LED unit from the rear.
SWITCHES/PUSH-BUTTONS Switches/push-buttons Max. numbers of fluorescent lamps that can be switched. Switching capacity with 10 AX switches 40 W 65 W Uncompensated cos f ~ 0,5 23 15 Compensated cos f = 0,8 29 18 f Compensated cos ~ 1 34 22 Duo circuit 38 28 Parallel compensation 8 5 Switching capacity with 16 AX switches 40 W 65 W Uncompensated cos f ~ 0,5 33 21 Compensated cos f = 0,8 46 28 Compensated cos f ~ 1 51 33 Duo circuit 57 42 Parallel compensation 12 7
2pole on/off 16 AX L N
Rocker switch (2pole on/off 16 AX) 303212
When connecting energy-saving bulbs and electronic ballasts (EVG), consider the high inrush currents. Check suitability of equipment prior to use. Fit inrush current limiters if necessary.
303212
Switch-off 2pole
303212
Switch-off 2pole Monitoring (Neon lamp unit 160002 lit when "On")
Switch-off 2pole Permanently lit (Neon lamp unit 160002 permanently lit)
2pole on/off 10 AX
L N
L N
Rocker switch L Pullcord switch N (2pole on/off)
L N
3036 / 303650 / 3966
L N
L N
3032 / 3962 3036
red
3036 red
3036 red
3036
red
red
Switch-off monitoring Switch-off illuminated (Neon lamp unit e.g. 1675 (Neon lamp unit e.g. 1675 lit when "On") lit when "Off") Remove detachable contact lug from neon lamp unit.
Switch-off
red
blue
red
3032 blue
red
3032 blue
red
3032 blue
red
blue
red
blue
red
blue
red
blue
Switch-off 2pole Switch-off 2pole Monitoring (Neon lamp unit e.g. 1675 lit when "On")
Switch-off permanently illuminated (Neon lamp unit e.g. 1675 permanently lit) Remove detachable contact lug from neon lamp unit.
3pole on/off
Series switches L1 L2 L3
Rocker switch (3pole off)
L N
303212
1pole on/off with change-over switch Rocker switch Pullcord switch L N (off/change-over)
L N
L1 L2 L3
L1 L2 L3
Switch-off 2pole Permanently lit (Neon lamp unit e.g. 1675 permanently lit)
Mechanical timer
L Rockers switch N (series)
L N
L N
L N
3035 / 303550
303303 303303
303303
3035
303303
M
M
red
red
Series switching
Switch-off 3pole Monitoring (Neon lamp unit 1600 lit when "On")
2040 2041
3035 red
M red
Switch-off 3pole
3035
Switch-off 3pole Permanently lit (Neon lamp unit 1600 permanently lit)
Series switching permanently Connection in series Control illuminated (Series LED unit (Neon lamp unit e.g. 1675 1680 lights up per permanently lit) Remove detachable contact series when "On") lug from neon lamp unit.
Change-over switch
Switch-off 2pole
Double change-over switch
Rocker switch L Pullcord switch N (off/change-over)
L N
L N
L N
L N
3036 / 303650 / 3966 3036
red
red
3036
3036 red
3036 red
3036 red
3036 red
3036 red
3036 red
3036 red
3036 red
303808
red
Change-over switching
Change-over switching Change-over switching Monitoring illuminated (neon lamp unit e.g. 1675 lit when "On") (Neon lamp unit e.g. 1675 Remove detachable contact lit when "Off") lug from neon lamp unit.
Low cost change-over switching Advantage: Each switch box contains the phase and the lamp wire
Change-over switching with double change-over switch including neon lamp unit 160002 (neon lamp unit on double change-over switch only lit if right-hand circuit off)
Intermediate switch
L Rockers switch N (double off/changeover)
L N
Rocker switch (Intermediate)
L N
L N
3037
303808 303808
303808
Double change-over switching
303808
303808
3036 red
Double change-over switching illuminated with neon lamp unit 160002 (lit only if left-hand circuit off)
3037
3036 red
3036 red
3037
3036 red
Intermediate switching illuminated with neon lamp unit 1675 (Neon lamp unit lit when "Off")
Intermediate switching
Rocker push-buttons Rocker pushbuttons (NO)
L N
L N
L N
L N
L Rocker push-buttons N (change-over contact) 5036 / 5056 01
5031/ 503150 5031
5031
5031
5031 red
Rocker push-button (NOC) illuminated With illumination, only a limited number of switches can be wired in parallel, unless the neutral conductor is brought through.
Rocker push-button (NOC) permanently lit Remove detachable contact lug from neon lamp unit. Any number of push-buttons can be connected in parallel. The neutral conductor must be brought through.
Rocker push-button (NOC) monitoring Remove detachable contact lug from neon lamp unit.
5036 red
NOC
NCC
T4 T4
SWITCHES/PUSH-BUTTONS/KEYSWITCHES Switches/push-buttons/key switches Rocker push-buttons
Rockers push-buttons
Push-button (NOC) with L N 2 separate signalling contacts
Rocker push-button (1 NOC and 1 NCC) with separate input terminals
(NOC)
503101
(NCC)
503203 red
green
green
green
green
L N
Rockers push-buttons L (2 change-over contacts) N with separate input terminals (NOC)
503503
red
red
red
503808
(NOC)
(NOC1) (NOC2)
Group rockers pushbuttons (4 NOCs) and common input terminal
(NOC1) (NCC1)
503503
red
503501 red
red
red
(NOC)
(NOC)
(NCC)
503501 5035 red
red
red
red
2 separate signalling contacts for indicator lamp connection
Rockers push-buttons (2 NOCs) with separate input terminals
Rockers push-buttons L (1 NOC and 1 NCC) with N separate input terminals
L N
5035
503203 red
503101 red
red
Rockers push-buttons 2 NOCs and common input terminals
L N
L N
NOC1 (left lower rocker) NOC3 (right lower rocker)
503404
503808
503404
red
NOC4 (right upper rocker) NOC2 (left upper rocker)
(NCC2) (NOC2)
Pullcord switches Pullcord switch L (change-over contact) N with separate signalling contact
L N
L N
L N
L N
395619 395619
395619
grün
green
rot
green
red
395619
395619
green
red
Pullcord switch (change-over contact) illuminated With illumination, only a limited number of switches can be wired in parallel, unless the neutral conductor is brought through.
red
green
green
red
Potential-free connection for neon / glow lamp unit Remove detachable contact lug from neon lamp unit. Pullcord switch (change-over contact) Monitoring with separate signalling contacts
3-step switch
L N
L N
5101
red
Pullcord switch (change-over contact) Monitoring Remove detachable contact lug from neon lamp unit.
Pullcord switch (change-over contact) permanently illuminated Any number of push-buttons can be connected in parallel. The neutral conductor must be brought through.
Push-button and light signal E10 L N
395619
L N
5101
L N
5101
Signalling contacts
510110
L N
Step 3 Step 2 Step 1 3861
Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 3861
With illumination
Light signal
Push-button (NOC) illuminated When using neon lamp units, only a limited number of switches can be wired in parallel.
Rockers switch/push-buttons for L shutters N
Rockers switch/push-buttons for shutters 303520 303520 / 503520
red
M2
503520
Push-button (NOC) separate signalling contacts e.g. for indicator lamp connection.
Push-button (NOC) monitoring
Group rockers push-buttons as shutter pushbuttons L Group rockers push-buttons (4 NOCs)
L N
M2
NOC1 in position NOC1 in position
3841 3842 3851 3852
503404 503404
Key switch for profile half cylinder
NOC2 in position NOC2 in position Rotary switches for shutters 1pole or 2pole Key switches for shutters 1pole or 2pole
Group rockers push-buttons with 4 NOCs as dual shutter push-buttons
NOC1 in position NOC1 in position
NOC2 in position NOC2 in position Key switch/key push-button for shutters 1pole or 2pole for DIN profile half cylinder
Profile half cylinder 315 ° not locked
L N
1818 181801
Change-over contacts 1
0°
The NOC for the profile half cylinder can be adjusted by pressing in the pin on the side in 45° steps. At key bit position 315° the key bit is guided in the engaging fork of the switch. The cover is not locked and the key can only be removed in the zero position (unswitched).
Pin
382610, 383620
90° locked 33 225° locked
Change-over contacts 2 Key switch (change-over switch) 1 or 2 pole for profile half cylinder
L N
382120, 382210, 383110, 383120, 383210
red
Rockers switch for shutters Rocker s push-buttons for shutters
T5 T5
Key switch/key push-button for shutters
N
M1
3-step switch without 0-position
3-step switch with 0-position
M5
30,5 40,5
10 17
135° locked
At locking steps 90°, 135° and 225° the key bit is introduced adjacent to the engaging fork of the switch. After actuation, the key is turned back to the starting position and so can be withdrawn with the switches in any switch setting. The cover is then locked and the switch cannot be dismantled without inserting the key.
Socket outlets/hotel card switches/ HOTEL CARD SWITCHES/SOCKET OUTLETS/ loudspeaker socket outlets/operating conditions LOUDSPEAKER INSERTS/OPERATING CONDITIONS Hotel card switches The hotel card switch provides efficient energy use and a means of storing the hotel card in hotels or other locations, such as at the workplace. When the hotel card is withdrawn, power is cut to all the electrical consumers which are still in operation but no longer required, such as the lights (possibly with a delayed-off relay) and wall socket circuits (e.g. for TV etc.). For this, a load contactor is activated via the hotel card switch. When the hotel card is inserted, the contact is closed and the in-series load contactor switches the connected electrical consumers on. Additionally, a check-back can be sent to reception and the room temperature can be lowered, for example. The illumination of the hotel card switch ensures safe operation even in the dark. As a flush-mounted insert, the hotel card switch cover order no. 505601 is used with neon lamp unit order no. 1675. The neon lamp unit is lit when the hotel card is not inserted. 10 A push-button inserts for hotel card switch covers are available on request. L1 L2 L3 N
Push-button insert (change-over contact)
Grand-Hotel RAULF
505601
505601 red
red
L L1 L2 L3
Load contactor
505601
505601 505601 rot
N
Push-button insert for hotel card switch cover (change-over contact) Neon lamp unit lights up only when card removed.
Grand-Hotel 505601 RAULF rot
B
for consumers: socket outlets, lights etc.
When hotel card is not inserted, orientation lamp is on. Contact open.
When hotel card inserted, orientation lamp is off. Contact closed.
International systems
L
AM/AT/AZ/BA/BE/BF/BG/BI/BJ/BY/CF/CS/CZ/DE/ EE/EG/ER/ES/FI/GE/GL/GR/HR/HU/ID/IR/IS/IT/KR/ KZ/LB/LT/LU/LV/MD/MK/MR/MZ/NL/NO/PE/PT/ PY/RO/RU/RW/SA/SE/SI/SO/SR/SY/TJ/TR/UA/UY/UZ 2pin. + earth 250V ~, 16 A
AD/BE/CG/CI/CN/DJ/DZ/FR/GF/ GN/GP/KH/KM/MA/MG/ML/PL/ SK/SN/SY/TD/TG/TN/VN 2pin. + earth 250V ~, 16 A
N
N
DK/GL 2pin. + earth 250V ~, 13 A
L L
L
N
N(W)
L
L
CH, type 13 2pin. + earth 250V ~, 10 A
AL/CL/ET/IT/LY/SY 2pin. + earth 250V ~, 16 A
N
L
AO/NL 2pin. 250V ~, 16 A
N
N(W)
AE/AG/BN/BW/CY/GB/GD/GH/GM/ CA/GT/GY/HN/HT/KP/LA/MX/ CA/GT/GY/HN/HT/KP/LA/MX/ HK/IE/IQ/KE/KW/LR/MW/MT/MY/OM/ PA/PH/PR/SV/TH/TW/US/VE PA/PH/PR/SV/TH/TW/US/VE SL/TZ/YE/ZA/ZW NEMA 5-15 R NEMA 5-20 R BS 1363 part 2 2pin. + earth 2pin. + earth 2pin. + earth 125V ~, 15 A 125V ~, 20 A 250V ~, 13 A = Non-polarised system (no specification for connection of external and neutral conductor)
AR/AU/FJ/NZ 2pin. + earth 250V ~, 15 A
AR/AU/FJ/NZ 2pin. + earth 250V ~, 10 A
Euro-American standard CA/GT/GY/HN/HT/KP/LA/MX/ PA/PH/PR/SV/TH/TW/US/VE 2pin.
National abbreviations to ISO 3166: AD=Andorra; AE=United Arab Emirates; AG=Antigua; AL=Albania; AM=Armenia; AO=Angola; AR=Argentina; AT=Austria; AU=Australia; AZ=Azerbaijan; BA=Bosnia-Herzegovina; BE=Belgium; BF=Burkina Faso; BG=Bulgaria; BI=Burundi; BJ=Benin; BN=Brunei; BW=Botswana; BY=Byelorussia; CA=Canada; CF=Central African Republic; CG=Congo; CH=Switzerland; CI=Ivory Coast CL=Chile; CM=Cameroon; CY=Cyprus; CS=Serbia and Montenegro; CZ=Czech Republic; DE=Germany; DJ=Djibouti; DK=Denmark; DZ=Algeria; EE=Estonia; EG=Egypt; ER=Eritrea; ES=Spain; ET=Ethiopia; FI=Finland; FJ=Fiji; FR=France; GB=Great Britain; GD=Grenada; GE=Georgia; GF=French Guyana; GH=Ghana; GL=Greenland; GM=Gambia; GN=Guinea; GP=Guadeloupe; GR=Greece; GT=Guatemala; GY=Guyana; HK=Hong Kong; HN=Honduras; HR=Croatia; HT=Haiti; HU=Hungary; ID=Indonesia; IE=Ireland; IQ=Iraq; IR=Iran; IS=Iceland; IT=Italy; KE=Kenya; KH=Cambodia; KM=Comoros; KP=North Korea; KR=South Korea; KW=Kuwait; KZ=Kazakhstan; LA=Laos; LB=Lebanon; LR=Liberia; LT=Lithuania; LU=Luxemburg; LV=Latvia; LY=Libya; MA=Morocco; MD=Moldavia; MG=Madagascar; MK=Macedonia; ML=Mali; MR=Mauritania; MT=Malta; MW=Malawi; MX=Mexico; MY=Malaysia; MZ=Mozambique; NL=Netherlands; NO=Norway; NZ=New Zealand; OM=Oman; PA=Panama; PE=Peru; PH=Philippines; PL=Poland; PR=Puerto Rico; PT=Portugal; PY=Paraguay; RO=Rumania; RU=Russia; RW=Rwanda; SA=Saudi Arabia; SE=Sweden; SI=Slovenia; SK=Slovakia; SL=Sierra Leone; SN=Senegal; SO=Somalia; SR=Surinam; SV=Salvador; SY=Syria; TD=Chad; TG=Togo; TH=Thailand; TJ=Tajikistan; TM=Turkmenistan; TN=Tunisia; TR=Turkey; TW=Taiwan; TZ=Tanzania; UA=Ukraine; US=USA; UY=Uruguay; UZ=Uzbekistan; VE=Venezuela; VN=Vietnam; YE=Yemen; ZA=Zambia; ZW=Zimbabwe
Prepare the line for screwless plug-in terminals
min. 10 Necessities stripping length: 10 mm Leader diameter max.: 2,6 mm
Flexible lines 1 - 2,5 mm2, with pin cable lugs, with one pinlength from 10 mm.
For solid lines 1 - 2,5 mm2
Flexible lines 1 - 2,5 mm2 with ferule, gas tight crimps, stripping length during isolating enclosure accordingly more largely.
Loudspeaker inserts Front
450502
Example: Dolby Surround System
450502
Front
Flexible lines 1 - 2,5 mm2, ultrasonic welds
Loudspeaker socket outlet High End with 2 plug connectors, 2 banana plugs and 2 metal type cable lugs gold-plated cable lugs for cable cross-sections up to max. 10mm2 for 1 loudspeaker
457209
457209
457309
Loudspeaker and stereo loudspeaker connection box with plug-in terminals for cable cross-sections up to max. 10mm2 for 1 or 2 loudspeakers
Dolby
Rear
Rear 450501
450501
Center Subwoofer
450501
Stereo loudspeaker socket outlet with 2 integral speaker sockets to DIN 41529:1988-01 for 2 speakers
Operating conditions for electronic switches, dimmers and speed controllers Rated load capacity when installed as single unit subject to: - Ambient temperatures up to 25 °C - Installation in solid stone wall - The rated load of the Tronic transformer is always taken as the basis, not only the connected bulbs.
Differing conditions: - minus 10% per 5 °C above 25 °C - minus 15% in wood or chipboard walls - minus 10% external units in multiple combinations - minus 20% internal units in multiple combinations T6 T6
TIMER Timer Time switch
L N 2948
N 1
OFF
Twilight
2948
2 NL
L
ON
OFF
2 NL
ON
1
5035 red
Ground
Extension unit connections Phase e.g. for mechanical pushExtension Potential-free unit on/off Neutralbutton (rocker button, conductor NOC Operation with extension unit 2 NOCs) When connecting energy-saving bulbs and electronic ballasts, consider the high inrush currents. Check suitability of equipment prior to use, fit inrush current limiters if necessary.
The timer with display The timer permits programmed, timed switching of loads up to 1000 W/VA. It is also possible to switch the lighting depending on brightness using a twilight sensor. With the astronomical function adjustable by ± 1 hour 59 minutes, the switch-on and switch-off times can be adjusted to the sunrise and sunset times for the specific location. With the timer function the lighting is switched on for a pre-set time between 1 minute and 23 hrs and 59 min. By way of the extension unit inputs, a rocker button with 2 NOC (normally open) contacts can be used to switch on or off manually. Manual operation has priority at all times. Astronomical function By activating the astro programme the switch-on times that occur within the period of daylight are not executed until sunset. Pre-set switch-on times after sunset are retained. Switch-off times which occur after sunrise are executed as soon as sunrise occurs. Pre-set switch-off times after sunrise are retained. The adjacent drawing shows the astronomic curve from week number 12 to week number 40, incorporating a +1 hour adjustment for summer time (user must switch between winter and summer time). Twilight function (only with mounting with sensor connection): The twilight function is activated approximately 90 minutes before sunset (see astronomic curve). Approximately 4 minutes after the brightness has fallen below the pre-set level, the lighting is switched on. Features: Operation via 4-button control pad 2 independent programme memories for a total of 18 switching times (e.g. 9 switch-on and 9 switch-off times) Timer function (countdown function) Random function Astronomic function with individual adjustment facility ± 1 hour 59 minutes Adjustable twilight sensor Summer/winter time Operation of on/off extension unit inputs by rocker button with 2 NOCs. For intermediate and changeover switch circuits Reset to factory default possible Power reserve up to 24 hours (maintenance-free without batteries) Manual operation possible at any time
Insert for timer Order-no.: 2948 230 V~, 50/60 Hz , N conductor required 1 potential-free NOC, not suitable for isolating 230 V Incandescent lamps and halogen lamps 1000 W (ohmic) Tronic transformers 750 W (capacitive) Conv. transformers (< 85% loading) incl. transformer power loss 500 VA (inductive) Fluorescent lamps uncompensated 500 VA, parallel compensated 400 VA (inductive) Duo circuit 1000 VA (inductive) Mixed load; capacitive and inductive loads should not be mixed Power consumption 0.7 W Security via 16 A circuit breaker Radio interference suppression to EN 55015 Operating temperature 0 to 45°C Index of protection IP20 2 Terminals Screw-type terminals for max. 2.5 mm or 2 x 1.5 mm2 Usable mountings 1735.., 1736.. or 1738 .. Technical data Nominal voltage Relay output Switching capacity
Timer with display Order-no.: 1736.. or 1738.. using insert order no. 2948 min. 1 minute min. 500 ms max. 18 in 2 programme memories ± 1 minute per month approx. 24 hrs. (no batteries required) approx. 6 to 300 Lux 1 minute to 23 hrs. 59 min. ± 15 minutes adjustable by ± 1 hrs. 59 min. to EN 55015 0 to 45°C IP20
Technical data Operating voltage Switching time interval Reversing time Switching times Accuracy Power reserve Setting range for twilight sensor (1738 only) Timer function (countdown) Random generator Astro programme Radio interference suppression Operating temperature Index of protection
Astro curve for timer Summer time Week 2:00
5
10
15
20
4:00 5:00 6:00 7:00 8:00
25
30
35
40
45
50
7 7 7 : : 8 7 : 3 1 8 8 8: : 5: 4 2 9 : : 0 5 5 1 1 1 4 8 6 1
3:00
5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5: : : : : : : 5: 5 5 5 5: : 2 1 1 0 0 0 1 2 2: : 5 5 7 6 6 6 7 6 6 6 6: : 3 3 0 4 0 7 7 9 4 0 8 3 4: : 6 6 6 6 6 7 7 0 5 : : : : : : : : 7 7 5 : : : : : : : 0 4 3 1 0 4 3 1 0 1 9 7 0 2 3 4 5 0 1 5 8 3 8 2 7 2 8 4 9 0 0 1 2 3 7
Executed off time
4:00 5:00 7 : 1 7: 7 7 7 : 0 2 : 7 7 7 2 3: : 7 3 4: : 8 8 1 3 : 8 8 5 6 4 : 4 5 0 1: : : 7 5 5 3 1 8 1 1 5 8
~
20:00
9:00
16:00 1 1 6 6 1 : 1 3 : 6: 7 1 1 : 7: 7 1 7 4 5 5 : 7: 1 6 0 7 1 1 7 1 9 3 4 : 8: 8 1 0 2 5 : 8 3 0 1 2: 4 5 3
21:00
1 1 1 1 1 1 6 6 6 1 1 1 6 6 6: : : : 6: 6: 6 : : 2 2 2 2 2 2 : 4 3 4 2 2 5 9 5 5 6 9 1 5 1 8 8 : : 0 2 8 1 1 1 1 1 9 9: 8: 8: : 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 2 0 5 3 8 9 9 0 2 2 0 9 9 2 7 2 5 : : : : 0 2 2 0 : : : 2 3 4 5 1 : 0 2 0 : 0 5 3 2 7 8 9 0 2 : 0: 0 2 2 2 2 0 : 2 8 3 8 : 1: 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1: : 3 2 0 3 1 4 : 1: 1 1 1 1 1 1 1: : 0 4 6 3 5 9 3 0 3 1 2 2: : : : : 2: 2 1 0 1 2 0 3 3 3 3 6 1 3 3 0 6 0
Programmed on time 20:00
Executed on time
Darkness
22:00 23:00
8:00
~ ~Time
16:00
19:00
7:00
Daylight
Time~
18:00
6:00
Programmed off time 6:10
9:00
17:00
2:00
Darkness
3:00
5
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
45 50 Subject to time changes
Summer time
17:00 18:00 19:00 20:00 21:00 22:00 23:00
The time switch easy The time switch easy permits programmed, timed switching of loads up to 1000 W. By way of the extension unit inputs, a rocker button with 2 NOC (normally open) contacts can be used to switch on or off manually. Manual operation has priority at all times. Normal mode
P r og r a m m i n g T i m e switch Eas y +
> 20 sec. with »AU:_1« = Automatic ON »AU:_0« = Automatic OFF with + > 4 sec. Quick saving of the switch-on time for switching times 1 + 3 and deleting switch-on time for switching times 2 + 4 + > 4 sec. Quick saving of the switch-off time for switching times 1 + 3 and deleting switching times 2 + 4 The push-button functions and are available in the menus: Confirm input. Changes are saved on leaving the sub-menu. Esc to abort editing. Changes are saved, the display reverts to normal mode. After 2 minutes without any push-button activity the time switch reverts to normal mode. Time switch Easy Technical data using insert order no. 2948 Operating voltage min. 1 minute Switching time interval min. 500 ms Reversing time 2 blocks each for Mo-Fr and Sa-So (ON/OFF) Switching times ± 30 seconds per month Accuracy approx. 4 hrs. (no batteries required) Power reserve to EN 55015 Radio interference suppression 5 to 35°C Operating temperature IP20 Index of protection 1735.. Order no.:
Mo-Fr Sa-Su
long >4s Display switching time 1 ON Mo-Fr
ON OFF
> 10 s time setting hour change (delete »--:--« set or
> 20 s Reset
Current hour
Current hour
Manual operation
Current minute
Current minute
Automatic
Current year
Current year
Display switching time 2 OFF Mo-Fr
Current month
Current month
Display switching time 3 ON Sa-Su
Current day
Current day
Display switching time 3 OFF Sa-Su
Normalmode
Normalmode
Display switching time 1 OFF Mo-Fr Display switching time 2 ON Mo-Fr
Display switching time 4 ON Sa-Su Display switching time 4 OFF Sa-Su
T7 T7
ON OFF
+
> 4 s)
minute
Dimming/dimmer DIMMING/DIMMER selection SELECTION table TABEL speed SPEED controller CONTROLLER Energy saving by dimming
A distinction is made between two dimming principles:
Controlling the brightness levels of lights not only provides a pleasant ambience, it also prolongs the lives of the bulbs. In the low-voltage halogen field in particular, the compact dimensions of the bulbs can provide special design benefits for lighting which are further enhanced by dimming. A further important aspect is energy saving, because in dimming mode much less power is drawn from the system and the lives of the bulbs are also greatly prolonged (see diagram). This can save a great deal of money.
- Phase cut-on dimmer for brightness control of: Incandescent lamps, 230 V halogen lamps, fluorescent lamps 26 mm and 38 mm, and 12 V halogen lamps with conventional transformer. U
Time in which no power is drawn from the mains
t
Voltage curve of dimmed phase
Bulb life depending on voltage %
12 V halogen lamps Incandescent lamps 230 V halogen lamps
400 300 200
%
L
130 P 120 110 I 100
100
80
At the beginning of each half-wave the dimmer blocks the current flow to the lamp, it is non-conducting. Only at the end of the time set by the user does the dimmer cut in again, and current is re-applied to the connected lamps. At the next sine zero, the dimmer again blocks the current flow. This process is repeated with each sine half-wave - that is, 100 times per second (50 Hz). During the time in which the dimmer blocks the current, no power is drawn from the mains or metered.
140
150
90
e.g. Dimmer LV
80
I
60 40
P
70 10,8
L 11,4
12,0
12,6 U [V]
30
25 13,2
L = Life = Lighting current P = Power = Light yield I = Lamp current
- Phase cut-off dimmer for brightness control of: Low-voltage halogen lamps with Tronic transformers, incandescent and halogen lamps. U
5% lower voltage corresponds to 200% life
R
Load type: Standard Incandescent lamps
Standard phase cut-on dimmers
The Tronic dimmer is activated when the sine half-wave passes through zero and deactivated again after the time set by the operator. At the next sine wave zero the Tronic dimmer releases the current flow again. This process is repeated with each sine half-wave - that is, 100 times per second (50 Hz). In the time during which the Tronic dimmer blocks the current, no power is drawn from the system, and none is metered.
230 V halogen and incandescent lamps
R
12 V halogen lamps with conventional dimmable transformer
L
12 V halogen lamps with electronic transformer with capacitive C characteristics 12 V halogen lamps with electronic transformer with inductive L characteristics 12 V halogen lamps with electronic transformer with inductive or capacitive L,C characteristics Motors M
Phase cut-off dimmers
Low voltage phase cut-on dimmers R,L
R matches > OK, combination can be used! R matches > OK, combination can be used! No match > combination unsuitable No match > combination unsuitable No match > combination unsuitable No match > combination unsuitable No match > combination unsuitable
R
Voltage curve of dimmed phase
e.g. Tronic dimmer
Universal dimmers teach themselves the load type during commissioning and automatically set the correct dimming principle.
Dimmer selection table Dimmer type:
Time in which no power is drawn from the mains
t
R,C
R,L,C
R matches > OK, combination can be used! R matches > OK, combination can be used! No match > combination unsuitable C matches > OK, combination can be used! No match > combination unsuitable C matches > OK, combination can be used! No match > combination unsuitable
R matches > OK, combination can be used! R matches > OK, combination can be used! L matches > OK, combination can be used! No match > combination unsuitable L matches > OK, combination can be used! L matches > OK, combination can be used! No match > combination unsuitable
Universal dimmer
Speed controllers M
R matches > OK, combination can be used! R matches > OK, combination can be used! L matches > OK, combination can be used! C matches > OK, combination can be used! L matches > OK, combination can be used! L, C matches > OK, combination can be used! No match > combination unsuitable
No match > combination unsuitable No match > combination unsuitable No match > combination unsuitable No match > combination unsuitable No match > combination unsuitable No match > combination unsuitable M matches > OK, combination can be used!
Identifiers for dimmers and electronic switches (with semiconductor switching element) to DIN EN 60669-1/A2 and VDE 0632 part 1/A2.
µ
Identifiers for switchgear with relays with micro-contact opening width to DIN EN 60669-1/A2 and VDE 0632 part 1/A2. When using third-party transformers in conjunction with Berker Tronic dimmers and universal dimmers, malfunctions may occur because the components are not optimally attuned to each other.
Speed controller
L N
M Speed controller 296801
Setting the basic speed
L
Switch-off
M Switched, unregulated phase e.g. for slat adjustment
Technical data Motors Minimum load Maximum load Motor and segment current Control principle Noise Overheating protection Fine-wire fuse Radio interference suppression Operating temperature Terminals
Speed controller order no. 296801 (only 297010) For 230/240 V~, 50/60 Hz single-phase motors such as induction, shaded pole or universal motors 0.1 A 2.7 A (2,3 A) max. 2.7 A (max. 2,3 A) Phase cut-on Low noise cut-out; auto. restart after cooling T3,15H250 to EN 55015 -20 to 25°C (see operating conditions, Page T6) Plug-in terminals for max. 2.5 mm2 or 2 x 1.5 mm2
T8 T8
DIMMERS Rotary dimmer Technical data Nominal voltage Connected load
Rotary dimmer with rotary off switch L N
R Rotary dimmers
N
2819..
Rotary dimmer with rotary off switch, order no.2819.. 230 V~, 50 Hz 230 V Incandescent and halogen lamps 60-400 W Combinations of specified loads max. 10 Phase cut-on Low noise T 1.6 H 250 according to EN 55015 5 to 25°C (see operating conditions, Page T6) Screw-type terminals for max. 2.5 mm2 or 2 x 1.5 mm2
LV boosters built-in Control principle Noise Fine-wire fuse Radio interference suppression Operating temperature Terminals
L
L
Switch-off
Rotary dimmer with soft lock L N
L N N
Rotary dimmers
L Change-over Rotary dimmers switch
L
2875
L
L
Switch-off
LV boosters built-in Dimming principle
L
Intermediate switch
L
Changeover switching
Change-over switch
3037
2875
L
3036
red
L
Intermediate switching
(Rotary dimmer with soft-lock and setting knob Aquatec) (Order no. 289505) Noise Low noise Fine-wire fuse T 2.5 H 250 Radio interference suppression according to EN 55015 Operating temperature 5 to 25°C (see operating conditions, Page T6) Terminals Plug-in terminals for max. 2.5 mm2 or 2 x 1.5 mm2
Rotary dimmer with soft-lock Order no. 2875 230 V~, 50 Hz 230 V Incandescent and halogen lamps 60-600 W, (60-450 W) Combination of specified load types max. 10 Phase cut-on
Technical data Nominal voltage Connected load
N Rotary dimmers
3036 red
2875
L
R
L N
N
Rotary dimmer with soft lock L N
L N
Rotary dimmer
N
2885
L Rotary dimmer
L
N L
Changeover switch
Rotary dimmer
3036 red
2885 L
R
L N
N
Change-over switch Intermediate switch 3037
2885
3036
L
L
L
L
red
L
Switch-off Change-over switching
Technical data Nominal voltage Connected load
Intermediate switching
Rotary dimmer with soft-lock Short-circuit-proof
230/240 V~, 50 Hz 230 V Incandescent and halogen lamps 100-1000 W Combinations of specified loads max. 10 Phase cut-off Very low noise
LV boosters built-in Dimming principle Noise
Order no. 2885 Cut-out with auto. restart Electronic protection (no change-over) By power reduction to EN 55015 5 to 25°C (see operating conditions, page T6) Screw-type terminals 0.75 to 4 mm2
Overload protected Radio interference suppression Operating temperature Terminals
Rotary LV dimmer with soft lock L N
L N Rotary LV dimmer N L
2873
L
N L
Rotary LV dimmer 2873
In case of excessive making currents, use making current limiters order no. 0185.
L
Terminal for mains de-coupler
L
Switch-off
Changeover switch
230 V~, 50 Hz 230 V Incandescent and halogen lamps 20-500 W Conv. transformers subject to min. 85% of rated load. 20-500 VA total power output including transformer power loss must must not exceed 500 VA. Combination of specified load types max. 10
LV boosters built-in
N L
Intermediate switch
Change-over switch
Rotary LV dimmer 3036 red
3037
2873
L
L
3036
red
L
Intermediate switching
Changeover switching
Technical data Nominal voltage Connected load
R,L
L N
Order no. 2873 Rotary dimmer LV with soft lock max. 100 mA Switching current for base load mains de-coupler Phase cut-on Dimming principle Low noise Noise D 3.15 H 250 Fine-wire fuse to EN 55015 Radio interference suppression 5 to 25°C (see operating conditions, page T6) Operating temperature Plug-in terminals for max. 2.5 mm2 or 2 x 1.5 mm2 Terminals
Tronic rotary dimmer with soft lock
Tronic rotary dimmer 2874
L
N L
N L Tronic rotary dimmer
R,C
L N
L N
L N
Changeover switch
2874
N L
Intermediate switch
Change-over switch
Tronic rotary dimmer 3036 red
2874
3037
3036
L A
L
L A
L
L A
red
Terminal for mains de-coupler
Switch-off
Technical data Nominal voltage Connected load
Changeover switching
230 V~, 50 Hz 230 V Incandescent and halogen lamps 20-525 W Tronic transformers 20-525 W Combination of specified load types max. 10 à 500 W Universal booster RMD Plus max. 10 Tronic boosters built-in max. 100 mA Switching current for base load mains de-coupler Phase cut-off Dimming principle
T9 T9
Intermediate switching
Tronic rotary dimmer with soft lock Switch-on Noise Short-circuit-proof Overload protected Radio interference suppression Operating temperature Terminals
Order no. 2874 Bulb-preserving soft start-up Very low noise Cut-out with auto. restart Electronic protection (no change-over) By power reduction to EN 55015 5 to 25°C (see operating conditions, page T6) Plug-in terminals for max. 2.5 mm2 or 2 x 1.5 mm2
Dimmer/mains decoupler DIMMERS/DE-COUPLER universal UNIVERSAL series SERIES touch TOUCH dimmer DIMMER Universal rotary dimmer with soft lock and extension unit input L N Universal rotary dimmer
286110
L N
o r N
N L
N or L
L
ohmic / ind.
ohmic / ind.
ohmic / cap.
ohmic / cap.
Universal rotary dimmer
For a mixed load with inductive loads the proportion of the ohmic loads must not exceed 50%! S
L
Switch-off
S
N or L ohmic / ind.
Universal rotary dimmer extension unit
286110
The connection diagrams and the technical data are valid also for universal rotary dimmer order no 2834.. and universal rotary dimmer extension unit order no 2835..
R,L,C
L N
N L
ohmic / cap.
Universal Rotary dimmer
286210
L
S
N L
286110
L
S
Operation with extension unit
L
S
Rotary dimmer / Tronic rotary dimmer and BLC Universal touch dimmer with mains de-coupler comfort RMD
L N
L
L
Mains de-coupler comfort RMD abgekoppelt
BLC universal touch dimmer
018701
2902
L
L
N
L
L
Mains de-coupler comfort RMD
R,L,C
1 L
2874
0188
L
Mains de-coupler comfort RMD
L 1/A
abgekoppelt
L
L
L A
Control module for mains de-coupler max. 100 mA
Switch-off
To other extension units
Depending on the mains de-coupler, no more than 1 control module may be used per mains de-coupler. Press a BLC push-button for at least 200 ms in order to re-activate the mains de-coupler.
1 L
Can function with the following devices for example: Rotary dimmer with soft-lock Rotary dimmer LV with soft lock Tronic rotary dimmer with soft lock Universal rotary dimmer with soft lock and extension unit input BLC universal touch dimmer only with BLC button Electronic rotary potentiometer 1-10 V Electronic touch rotary potentiometer 1-10 V Room thermostat with NC contact, on/off switch and LED Room thermostat with change-over contact
R,C
N L
230V~50Hz
N
Control module Tronic for mains de-coupler rotary dimmers
L
2907
BLC extension unit
0188
Operation with extension units 018701
S
In order to prevent heating problems caused by mains overvoltages, there should be a 1/2 module gap between the inrush current limiters and other devices.
ohmic / cap.
L
Switch-off
L N
N L
L 1/A
abgekoppelt
ohmic / ind. Control module for mains de-coupler
o d e r
230V~50Hz
N
N L
R
N
2875
286210
Conv. transformers subject to min. 85% of rated load. Total power output, including transformer power loss, must not exceed 420 VA
Function: The mains de-couplers monitor the connected circuit and cut the mains power as soon as all consumers are switched off. The cut-off circuit is monitored with 230 V DC. This shuts off the electrical and electrical-magnetic alternating fields, as recommended by building biologists. When a consumer is switched on the mains voltage is restored.
Rotary dimmer
L
Universal rotary dimmer extension unit
Operation with extension unit
230 V~, 50/60 Hz 230 V Incandescent and halogen lamps 50-420 W (ohmic, phase cut-off) Tronic transformers 50-420 W (capacitive, phase cut-off) or conv. transformers subject to min. 85% of rated load. Total power output 50-420 VA including transformer power loss must not exceed 420 VA (inductive, phase cut-on). Mixed load of specified load types, do not mix capacitive and inductive loads! for phase cut-off max. 10 items á 500 W Universal booster RMD Plus for phase cut-on max. 5 items á 420 VA max. 10 Tronic- or LV-boosters built-in depending upon type of load approx. 0.5 W Power consumption
018701
286210
Universal rotary dimmer with soft lock Order no. 286110 Dimming principle Phase cut-on or cut-off depending on load type Switch-on Bulb-preserving soft start-up No. of extension units Universal rotary dimmer extension units max. 5 Extension unit cable length max. 100 m Noise Very low noise Short-circuit-proof Cut-out with auto. restart, Electronic protection (no change-over) Overload protected by power reduction Radio interference suppression to EN 55015 Operating temperature 5 to 25°C (see operating conditions, page T6) 2 Connecting terminals Plug-in terminals for max. 2.5 mm or 2 x 1.5 mm2
Technical data Nominal voltage Connected load
L N
Universal rotary dimmer extension unit
Order no.: Control module for mains de-coupler required 2875 2873 2874 Yes 2861.., 2834.. No, but no extension units possible 2902 Only if extension units are used Max. extension set cable length: 20 m 289110 289610 2030.. 2026..
Universal series touch dimmer N do L er
ohmic / ind.
N L ohmic / kap.
Universal series touch dimmer
N L ohmic / kap.
o dN e r L ohmic / ind.
R,L,C
L N
N do L er
ohmic / ind.
N L ohmic / kap.
Universal series touch dimmer
2901
N L ohmic / kap.
2907
2901
1 a2 L a1
1 a2 L a1
1 L
to additional extension units
Basic connection Operation with extension units For a mixed load only ohmic / inductive or ohmic / capacitive is allowed per series For a mixed load with inductive loads the proportion of the ohmic loads must not exceed 50%! Risk of destruction if load outputs series a1 and a2 are connected in parallel. Risk of destruction, the electronic overheating protection only functions when a load is connected to series a1. In all cases only the series on which the short-circuit occurred is switched off. Extension unit operation is only possible if a load is connected to series a1. Operation: The button for universal series touch dimmer is subdivided into 3 areas. Left: Operation of series 1 Right: Operation of series 2 Centre: Operation of series 1 and 2 Both series are always operated simultaneously via an extension unit. 1 1+2 Operation in the switched-off state: Press briefly above (< 400 ms): 100% brightness or if a brightness is saved the memory is called up. Long press below (> 400 ms): Dimming to minimum brightness (slumber function).
Technical data Rated voltage Connected load per series
Load distribution for asymmetric load at 25 °C
o dN e r L ohmic / ind.
2
230 V~, 50/60 Hz 230 V incandescent and halogen lamps 50-260 W (ohmic, phase cut-off) Tronic transformers 50-260 W (capacitive, phase cut-off) or conv. transformers (loaded < 85%) incl. transformer power dissipation 50-260 VA (inductive, phase cut-on) Mixed loads possible, capacitive and inductive loads must not be mixed within a series, however! Universal boosters RMD Plus is checked Tronic or LV boosters built-in according to load type max. 10 Power consumption approx. 0.7 W per series Dimming principle per series phase cut on or cut off depending upon type of load
Power series a1 (W/VA)
L N
350 330 310 290 270 250 230 210 190 170 150 130 110 90 70 50
50
70
90 110 130 150 170 190 210 230 250 270 290 310 330 350 Power series a2 (W/VA)
Operation in the switched-on state: Press briefly below (< 400 ms) light is off. Long press above/below (> 400 ms): Light is dimmed up / down. Long press over the entire surface (> 3 sec.) the current brightness is saved; the saving operation is indicated by a soft start. (Delivery configuration: 100% switch-on brightnesses)
Universal series touch dimmer Order no. 2901 Switching on Bulb-preserving soft startup Number of extension units BLC extension unit unlimited Extension unit cable length max. 100 m Noise generation very low noise Short-circuit proof Switch-off with autom. restart electron. fuse (maintenance-free) Overtemperature protection autom. switch-off Radio interference suppression according to EN 55015 Operating temperature 5 to 25°C (observe operating conditions page T6) Connecting terminals Screw terminals for max. 4 mm² or 2 x 2.5 mm²
T10 T10
DIMMERS/ Dimmer/power boosters POWER BOOSTERS LV booster built-in L N Rotary LV dimmer
N L
2873
L
N LV booster 1 built-in 600 VA
2869
L N BLC touch dimmer LV
L N
N N
N L
2904
L
N LV booster 1 built-in 600 VA
2869
N N
Above 3680 VA split phases. (ensure phase equality.) Observe the operating conditions on Page T6.
L N
In case of excessive making currents use making current limiters order no.: 0185.
1 L
To other LV boosters max. 10 in total
To other LV boosters max. 10 in total
Terminal for mains de-coupler
R,L
Technical data Rated voltage Connected load
LV power booster built-in Short-circuit proof
Order no. 2869 Switch-off with autom. restart within 7 sec. electron. fuse (maintenance-free) Overtemperature protection via autom. switch-off Radio interference suppression according to EN 55015 Operating temperature -5 to 45°C, -15% power reduction per 5°C over Connecting terminals Screw terminals 0.75–4 mm² Minimum ceiling aperture for standard ceiling height of 78 mm 63 mm Dimensions (W x H x D) 48.5 x 46 x 212 mm
230 V~, 50 Hz 230 V incandescent and halogen lamps 50-600 W conv. transformers (loaded < 85%) incl. transformer power dissipation 50-600 W VA Mixed load of the specified load types, do not mix capacitive and inductive loads! LV boosters built-in max. 10 total Dimming principle phase cut-on Switching on bulb-preserving soft startup Noise generation very low noise
Tronic touch dimmer built-in and Tronic booster built-in L N
Push-button (NOC)Push-button (NOC) 5031
1
5031
2943
To other extension sets, e.g. rocker push-buttons (NOC)
L N
Connection for boosters (No load connection)
Tronic touchdimmer built-in 700 W
1
5031
N 1
Tronic touchdimmer built-in 700 W
2943
L N
L N
To other Tronic transformers, 230 V incandescent or halogen lamps
To other Tronic transformers, 230 V incandescent or halogen lamps
To other extension sets, e.g. rocker push-buttons (NOC)
Technical data Rated voltage Connected load
Tronic touch dimmer built-in order no. 2943 230 V~, 50 Hz 230 V incandescent and halogen lamps 50-700 W | Tronic transformers 50-700 W Mixed load of the specified load types, do not mix capacitive and inductive loads! Tronic boosters built-in (universal boosters) max. 10 (max. 10 á 400 W) Dimming principle phase cut-off Switching on bulb-preserving soft startup Number of extension units BLC extension unit and push-button (NO contact) unlimited Noise generation very low noise Short-circuit proof Switch-off with autom. restart within 7 sec. electron. fuse (maintenance-free) Overtemperature protection via autom. switch-off Radio interference suppression according to EN 55015 Operating temperature -5 to 45°C, -15% power reduction per 5° C over Connecting terminals Screw terminals 0.75–4 mm² Minimum ceiling aperture for standard ceiling height of 78 mm 63 mm Dimensions (W x H x D) 48.5 x 46 x 212 mm
Universal booster RMD Plus and universal booster RMD Plus L N BLC extension unit Push-button (NOC) 2907
R,C
Push-button (NOC)
N L
5031
L 1 C1
Tronic booster built-in order no. 2868 230 V~, 50/60 Hz 230 V incandescent lamps and halogen lamps 50-700 W Tronic transformers 50-700 W Mixed load of the specified load types, do not mix capacitive and inductive loads! Tronic boosters built-in max. 10 total Dimming principle phase cut-off Switching on bulb-preserving soft startup Noise generation very low noise Short-circuit proof Switch-off with autom. restart within 7 sec. electron. fuse (maintenance-free) Overtemperature protection via autom. switch-off Radio interference suppression according to EN 55015 Operating temperature -5 to 45°C, -15% power reduction per 5°C over Connecting terminals Screw terminals 0.75–4 mm² Minimum ceiling aperture for standard ceiling height of 78 mm 63 mm Dimensions (W x H x D) 48.5 x 46 x 212 mm
5031
L 1 Z
ohmic / cap.
Universal touch dimmer RMD Plus
min. 1 TE L C C1
Universal touch dimmer RMD Plus
Universal booster RMD Plus
016701
016501
1 L 1 L
2907
N L
5031
L 1 Z
1 L
to other extension units L N Tronic rotary dimmer
N L
min. min. min. 1 TE L C C1 1 TE L C C1 1 TE L C C1
Universal touch dimmer RMD Plus
Universal booster RMD Plus
Universal booster RMD Plus
Universal booster RMD Plus
016701
016501
016501
016501
L N
2874
2902
L A
Universal booster RMD Plus
o r
N L
ohmic / ind.
ohmic / cap.
max. 5/10 boosters depending on the dimmer principle
BLC universal touch dimmer
L C C1 L
to other extension units
016701
to other extension units L N BLC extension unit Push-button (NOC)
min. min. L C C1 1 TE L C C1 1 TE L C C1 Universal booster RMD Plus
Universal booster RMD Plus
Universal booster RMD Plus
016501
016501
016501
L N N N Dimmer base loading: min. 1 Tronic transformer fully loaded or 20 W incandescent/230 V halogen lamps. Above 3680 VA split phases (ensure phase equality). Push-buttons (NOC) can only be illuminated via phase and neutral conductor.
Technical data Rated voltage Connected load
2907
L
ohmic / ind.
To other Tronic boosters, max. 10 in total
L N BLC extension unit Push-button (NOC)
o N r
Tronic booster built-in 700 W 2868
N L ohmic / ind.
o N r L ohmic / cap.
Order no.: 2874 2943 2861.. and 2834.. 2902 016701 0181 94550100 75311007 75312007 75314017
N L
o r
ohmic / ind.
N L
R,L,C
ohmsch / kap.
In mixed load configurations only ohmic/inductive or ohmic/ capacitive is permitted. For mixed loads with inductive loads, the proportion of ohmic loads may not exceed 50%! A maximum of 5/10 RMD Plus boosters may be connected to one dimmer (depending on the dimmer principle phase cut-on or phase cut-off). Keep with several dimmers and boosters a minimum distance of 1 RMD modul.
Usable dimmer types Tronic rotary dimmer with soft lock Tronic touch dimmer built-in Universal rotary dimmer with soft lock BLC universal touch dimmer Universal touch dimmer RMD Plus Universal radio dimmer built-in Radio universal dimmer RMD Universal dim actuator 1gang 50-500 W/VA RMD Universal dim actuator 2gang 2 x 300 W/VA RMD Universal dim actuator 4gang 4 x 210 W/VA RMD
max. 5/10 boosters depending on the dimmer principle
1 L
016501
Technical data Nominal voltage Connected load
Universal touch dimmer RMD Plus order no. 016701 230 V~, 50/60 Hz 230 V Incandescent and halogen lamps 50-500 W (ohmic, phase cut-off) Tronic transformers 50-500 W (capacitive, phase cut-off) or conv. transformers subject to min. 85% of rated load. Total power output 50-500 VA including transformer power loss must not exceed 500 VA (inductive, phase cut-on). Mixed load of specified load types, do not mix capacitive and inductive loads! per max. 100 m Load cable and Control cable length for phase cut-off max. 10 items á 500 W Universal booster RMD Plus for phase cut-on max. 5 items á 420 VA Phase cut-on or cut-off depending on load type Dimming principle Bulb-preserving soft start-up Switch-on BLC extension unit and push-button (NOC) unlimited No. of extension units max. 100 m Extension set cable length Very low noise Noise Cut-out with auto. restart Short-circuit-proof Electronic protection (no change-over) by means of autom. cut-out Overheating protection to EN 55015 Radio interference suppression -5 to 45°C Operating temperature Screw-type terminals 0.75 to 4 mm2 Connecting terminals 2 modules RMD 36 x 90 x 70 mm Dimensions (W x H x D) 63 mm Height from DIN rail
T11 T11
Technical data Nominal voltage Connected load
Universal booster RMD Plus order no. 016501 230 V~, 50/60 Hz 230 V Incandescent and halogen lamps 200-500 W (ohmic, phase cut-off) Tronic transformers 200-500 W (capacitive load, phase cut-off) or conv. transformers subject to min. 85% of rated load. Total power output 200-420 VA including transformer power loss must not exceed 420 VA (inductive load, phase cut-on). Mixed load of specified load types, do not mix capacitive and inductive loads! max. 100 m Load cable length max. 100 m Control cable length total for phase cut-off max. 10 items á 500 W Universal booster RMD Plus total for phase cut-on max. 5 items á 420 VA Phase cut-on or cut-off depending on activation Dimming principle Bulb-preserving soft start-up Switch-on Very low noise Noise Cut-out with auto. restart Short-circuit-proof Electronic protection (no change-over) by means of autom. cut-out Overheating protection to EN 55015 Radio interference suppression -5 to 45°C Operating temperature Screw-type terminals 0.75 to 4 mm2 Connecting terminals 2 modules RMD 36 x 90 x 70 mm Dimensions (W x H x D) 63 mm Height from DIN rail
BLC BERKER LIGHT CONTROL blc berker light control BLC button
Covers
Inserts
BLC radio button
BLC controller 180
BLC controller 180 comfort
BLC presence detector with constant light control
1783 xx xx 1786 xx xx
1784 xx xx 1787 xx xx
Switching Radio remote control Light scenes (On/Off)
Switching
Switching Step operation with immunity time Digital mode of operation
Switching Light control
Switching
Switching Radio remote control Light scenes (On/Off)
Switching
Switching Step operation with immunity time Digital mode of operation
Switching Light control
Switching
Switching Radio remote control Light scenes (On/Off)
Switching
Switching Step operation with immunity time Digital mode of operation
Switching Light control
BLC relay switch insert with Switching potential-free contact 800 W
Switching Radio remote control Light scenes (On/Off)
Switching
Switching Step operation with immunity time Digital mode of operation
Switching Light control
Switching Switching + HVAC contact with delay + HVAC contact with delay time time Radio remote control Light scenes (On/Off)
Switching + brightness-independent HVAC contact with delay time
Switching brightness-independent step operation with immunity time + brightness-independent HVAC contact with delay time Digital mode of operation
Switching + HVAC contact with delay time Light control
Switching Dimming Switch-on brightness memory
Switching Dimming Switch-on brightness memory Radio remote control Light scenes
Switching
Switching Switching Dimming Dimming with switch-off pre-warning Constant light control via 30-second dimming process Switch-on brightness memory Digital mode of operation
Switching Dimming Switch-on brightness memory
Switching Dimming Switch-on brightness memory Radio remote control Light scenes
Switching
Switching Switching Dimming Dimming with switch-off pre-warning Constant light control via 30-second dimming process Switch-on brightness memory Digital mode of operation
Switching Dimming Switch-on brightness memory
Switching Dimming Switch-on brightness memory Radio remote control Light scenes
Switching
Switching Switching Dimming Dimming with switch-off pre-warning Constant light control via 30-second dimming process Switch-on brightness memory Digital mode of operation
Switching on Switch-off pre-warning flashing
Switching on Switch-off pre-warning flashing Digital mode of operation
1761 xx xx
1760 xx xx
BLC Triac switch insert LV Switching 50-400 W/VA
0182 09
2905
BLC Tronic switch insert 50-420 W
2916
BLC relay switch insert 2300 W/VA
2906
2906 10
BLC relay switch insert 1000 W/VA | 800 W/VA
2912
BLC touch dimmer LV 20-500 W/VA
2904
BLC universal touch dimmer 50-420 W/VA
2902
BLC touch control unit 1-10 V / 700 W
2903
BLC stair light trigger insert
Switching on Switch-off pre-warning flashing
2934 10
BLC extension unit
Use only in conjunction with automatic stair light switch RMD Plus
Switching on Switch-off pre-warning flashing
Use only in conjunction with automatic stair light switch RMD Plus
Use only in conjunction with automatic stair light switch RMD Plus
Use only in conjunction with automatic stair light switch RMD Plus
As active extension unit for BLC controller 180, BLC controller 180 comfort and BLC presence detector with constant light control
As active extension unit for BLC controller 180, BLC controller 180 comfort and BLC presence detector with constant light control Digital mode of operation
As active extension unit for BLC controller 180, BLC controller 180 comfort and BLC presence detector with constant light control
Switching (Dimming) Extension unit for BLC touch dimmer, Switch inserts and touch control device 1-10 V (or "NO contact" rockers push-button) Presence function On/Off 2907 Save switch-on brightness
BLC controller extension unit
2907
T12 T12
BLC SWITCH INSERTS blc switch inserts BLC Tronic switch insert for BLC button, BLC radio button, BLC presence detector and BLC controller 180 L N
L N
N L
BLC Tronic switch insert 2916
BLC Tronic switch insert
BLC extension unit 2907
N L
2916
1 L
1 L
BLC controller extension unit
Push-button (NOC) 5031
2908
N1 L
1 L
To other extension units
Operation with extension units
Basic circuit
Technical data Nominal voltage Connected load
BLC Tronic switch insert Extension unit cable length Short-circuit-proof
230 V~, 50/60 Hz Incandescent and 230 V halogen lamps and 12 V halogen lamps with Tronic transformer and mixed load of specified load types 50-420 W approx. 1 W Bulb-preserving soft start BLC extension unit and push-button (NOC) unlimited BLC controller extension units max. 10
Power consumption Switch-on Extension units
Push-buttons (NOCs) can only be illuminated via phase and neutral conductor. Extension unit operation is only possible if there is a cover fitted on the BLC Tronic switch insert. Use BLC controller extension unit only in combination with BLC controller or BLC presence detector on the BLC Tronic switch insert.
Order no. 2916 max. 100 m Cut-out with auto. restart within 7 sec. Electronic protection (no change-over) by means of autom. cut-out to EN 55015 -20 to 25°C (see operating conditions, Page T6) Screw-type terminals for max. 2.5 mm2 or 2 x 1.5 mm2
Overheating protection Radio interference suppression Operating temperature Connecting terminals
BLC Triac switch insert LV for BLC button, BLC radio button, BLC presence detector and BLC controller 180 L N
L N
N L
BLC Triac switch insert LV 2905
BLC Triac switch insert LV
N L
2905
1 L
Push-button (NOC)
2907
5031
2908
N1 L
1 L
1 L
Basic circuit
BLC controller extension unit
BLC extension unit
To other extension units
Operation with extension units
Technical data 230 V~, 50/60 Hz Nominal voltage Incandescent and 230 V halogen lamps 40-400 W Connected load Conv. transformers (< 85% loading) incl. transformer power loss 40-400 VA (inductive) Combination of specified load types approx. 1 W Power consumption Bulb-preserving soft start Switch-on
BLC Triac switch insert LV Extension units
Push-buttons (NOCs) can only be illuminated via phase and neutral conductor. Extension unit operation is only possible if there is a cover fitted on the BLC Triac switch insert. Use BLC controller extension unit only in combination with BLC controller or BLC presence detector on the BLC Triac switch insert.
Order no. 2905 BLC extension unit and push-button (NOC) unlimited BLC controller extension units max. 10 max. 100 m T 1.6 H 250 V to EN 55015 -20 to 25°C (see operating conditions, Page T6) Screw-type terminals for max. 2.5 mm2 or 2 x 1.5 mm2
Extension unit cable length Fine-wire fuse Radio interference suppression Operating temperature Connecting terminals
BLC relay switch insert for BLC button, BLC radio button, BLC presence detector and BLC controller 180 L N
L N
N
BLC relay switch insert 2906
N
BLC relay switch insert 2906
L
N1 L
BLC extension unit 2907
L
N1 L
Basic circuit
Push-button (NOC) 5031
BLC controller extension unit 2908
N1 L
1 L
To other extension units
Operation with extension units
Technical data Nominal voltage Connected load
BLC relay switch insert Power consumption Extension units
230 V, 50/60 Hz Incandescent and 230 V halogen lamps 2300 W (ohmic) Tronic transformer 1500 W (capacitive) Conv. transformers (< 85% loading) incl. transformer power loss 1000 VA (inductive) Fluorescent lamps uncompensated 1200 VA, parallel compensated 920 VA (induktive) Duo circuit 2300 VA (inductive) Mixed load; capacitive and inductive loads should not be mixed
Extension unit cable length Fuse Radio interference suppression Operating temperature Connecting terminals
When energy-saving lamps and electronic ballasts are connected note high switch-on currents, if necessary use making current limiter order no. 0185. Push-buttons (NOCs) can only be illuminated via phase and neutral conductor. Extension unit operation is only possible if there is a cover fitted on the BLC relay switch insert. Use BLC controller extension unit only in combination with BLC controller or BLC presence detector on the BLC relay switch insert.
Order no. 2906 approx. 1.1 W BLC extension unit and push-button (NOC) unlimited BLC controller extension units max. 10 max. 100 m Via 10 A circuit-breaker to EN 55015 - 20 to 45°C (2000 W at 45°C) Screw-type terminals for max. 2.5 mm2 or 2 x 1.5 mm2
BLC relay switch insert with potential-free contact for BLC button, BLC radio button, BLC presence detector and BLC controller 180 L N
BLC relay switch insert with potential-free contact 290610
L N Potential-free NOC
L
BLC extension unit 2907
290610
The potential-free terminals should be connected from the rear
N1 L
Potential-free NOC
BLC relay switch insert with potential-free contact
Push-button (NOC) 5031
BLC controller extension unit 2908
L N1 L
N1 L
1 L
To other extension units
Operation with extension units
Basic circuit
Technical data Nominal voltage Connected load potential-free suitable for extra-low voltage function (AC) Minimum load Extension units
BLC relay switch insert HVAC Extension unit cable length Power consumption Fuse Radio interference suppression Operating temperature Connecting terminals
230 V, 50/60 Hz Incandescent lamps 800 W 230 V halogen lamps 750 W 12 V, 100 mA BLC extension units and push-button (NOC) unlimited BLC controller extension units max. 10
When energy-saving lamps and electronic ballasts are connected note high switch-on currents, if necessary use making current limiter order no. 0185. The potential-free contact is suitable for function extra-low voltage FELV (alternating current)! Push-buttons (NOCs) can only be illuminated via phase and neutral conductor. Extension unit operation is only possible if there is a cover fitted on the BLC relay switch insert with potential-free contact. Use BLC controller extension unit only in combination with BLC controller or BLC presence detector on the BLC relay switch insert with potential-free contact.
Order no. 290610 max. 100 m approx. 1.5 W Via 10 A circuit-breaker to EN 55015 5 to 35°C 2 Screw-type terminals for max. 2.5 mm or 2 x 1.5 mm2
BLC relay switch insert HVAC for BLC button, BLC radio button, BLC presence detector and BLC controller 180 L N
N L
N
L N
L
30 60
L N1 L
Basic circuit
Technical data Nominal voltage Connected power channel 1
L
L
M
BLC extension unit
Push-button (NOC)
BLC controller extension unit
2907
5031
2908
2912
2912
2 10
N
BLC relay switch insert HVAC
BLC relay switch insert HVAC
120
N
The potential-free terminals (HVAC) should be connected from the rear
2 10 120
30 60
L N1 L
1 L
Operation with extension units
230 V, 50/60 Hz Incandescent and 230 V halogen lamps 1000 W (ohmic) Tronic transformer 750 W (capacitive) Conv. transformers (< 85% loading) incl. transformer power loss 750 VA (inductive) Fluorescent lamps uncompensated 500 VA, Duo circuit 1000 VA (inductive) Mixed load, capacitive and inductive loads should not be mixed incandescent lamps 800 W Connected power HVAC channel 230 V halogen lamps 750 W Potential-free motor switching current 2.1 A
T13 T13
N1 L
To other extension units
When energy-saving lamps and electronic ballasts are connected note high switch-on currents, if necessary use making current limiter order no. 0185. The potential-free contact is suitable for function extra-low voltage FELV (alternating current)! Push-buttons (NOCs) can only be illuminated via phase and neutral conductor. Extension unit operation is only possible if there is a cover fitted on the BLC relay switch insert HVAC. Use BLC controller extension unit only in combination with BLC controller or BLC presence detector on the BLC relay switch insert HVAC.
BLC relay switch insert HVAC Order no. 2912 Power consumption approx. 1.5 W Switching OFF delay time HVAC channel approx. 2/10/30/60/120 min. Switching delay HVAC channel 3 min., can be permanently switched off with BLC push-button Extension units BLC extension units and push-button (NOC) unlimited BLC controller extension units max. 10 max. 100 m Extension unit cable length Via 10 A circuit-breaker Fuse to EN 55015 Radio interference suppression 5 to 35°C Operating temperature Screw-type terminals for max. 2,5 mm2 or 2 x 1.5 mm2 Connecting terminals
BLC DIMMER INSERTS blc dimmer inserts BLC touch dimmer LV for BLC button, BLC radio button, BLC presence detector and BLC controller 180 L N
L N
N L
N L
BLC touch dimmer LV 2904
BLC touch dimmer LV 2904
BLC extension unit 2907
1 L
1 L
Basic circuit
BLC controller extension unit
Push-button (NO) 5031
2908
1 L
N1 L
230 V~, 50/60 Hz Incandescent and 230 V halogen lamps 20-500 W Conv. transformers at min. 85% of rated load. total power output 20-500 VA including transformer power loss must must not exceed 500 VA. Combination of specified load types max. 10 approx. 1.2 W Phase cut-on
LV boosters built-in Power consumption Dimming principle
R,L
To other extension units
Operation with extension units
Technical data Nominal voltage Connected load
Switch-on brightness can only be saved power failure safe with BLC button and BLC radio button on dimmer and with BLC button via the extension unit. Push-buttons (NO contacts) can only be illuminated via L and N. Extension unit operation is only possible if there is a cover fitted on the BLC touch dimmer LV. Use BLC controller extension unit only in combination with BLC controller or BLC presence detector on the BLC touch dimmer LV. In case of excessive switch-on currents (with conv. transformers) use making current limiter order no. 0185.
BLC touch dimmer LV No. of extension units
Order no. 2904 BLC extension unit and push-button (NO) unlimited BLC controller extension units max. 10 max. 100 m Low noise T 2 H / 250 V according to EN 55015 -20 to 25°C (see operating conditions, Page T6) Screw-type terminals for max. 2.5 mm2 or 2 x 1.5 mm2
Extension unit cable length Noise Fine-wire fuse Radio interference suppression Operating temperature Terminals
BLC universal touch dimmer for BLC button, BLC radio button, BLC presence detector and BLC controller 180 L N
L N
o N r
N L
L
ohmic / ind.
o r
N L
ohmic / cap.
BLC universal touch dimmer
BLC universal touch dimmer
ohmic / ind. ohmic / cap. BLC extension unit push-button (NO)
BLC controller extension unit 5031
2907
2902
For a mixed load only ohmic / inductive or ohmic / capacitive is allowed For a mixed load with inductive loads the proportion of the ohmic loads must not exceed 50%! Switch-on brightness can only be saved power failure safe with BLC button and BLC radio button on dimmer and with BLC button via the extension unit. Push-buttons (NO contacts) can only be illuminated via L and N. Extension unit operation is only possible if there is a cover fitted on the BLC universal touch dimmer. Use BLC controller extension unit only in combination with BLC controller or BLC presence detector on the BLC universal touch dimmer. In case of excessive switch-on currents (with conv. transformers) use making current limiter order no. 0185.
N L
2908
2902
1 L
1 L
N1 L
1 L
Basic circuit
To other extension units
Operation with extension units
Technical data Nominal voltage Connected load
230 V~, 50/60 Hz Incandescent and 230 V halogen lamps 50-420 W (ohmic, phase cut-off) Tronic transformers 50-420 W (capacitive, phase cut-off) or Conv. transformers subject to min. 85% of rated load. total power output 50-420 VA including transformer power loss must not exceed 420 VA (inductive, phase cut-on) Mixed load of specified load types, do not mix capacitive and inductive loads! for phase cut-off max. 10 items à 500 W Universal booster RMD Plus for phase cut-on max. 5 items à 420 VA max. 10 Tronic- or LV-boosters built-in depending upon type of load approx. 0.7 W Power consumption Phase cut-on or cut-off depending on load type Dimming principle
BLC universal touch dimmer Switch-on
R,L,C
Order no. 2902 Bulb-preserving soft start-up BLC extension unit and push-button (NO) unlimited BLC controller extension units max. 5 max. 100 m Very low noise Cut-out with auto. restart Electronic protection (no change-over) by means of autom. cut-out according to EN 55015 -20 to 25°C (see operating conditions, Page T6) Screw-type terminals for max. 2.5 mm2 or 2 x 1.5 mm2
No. of extension units Extension unit cable length Noise Short-circuit-proof Overheating protection Radio interference suppression Operating temperature Terminals
BLC universal touch dimmers with universal boosters RMD plus R,L,C L N
BLC universal touch dimmer
o r
N L
2902
min. min. L C C1 1 TE L C C1 1 TE L C C1 Universal booster RMD Plus
Universal booster RMD Plus
Universal booster RMD Plus
016501
016501
016501
N L
ohmic / ind.
For a mixed load only ohmic / inductive or ohmic / capacitive is allowed For a mixed load with inductive loads the proportion of the ohmic loads must not exceed 50%!For mixed loads with inductive loads, the proportion of ohmic loads may not exceed 50%! A maximum of 5/10 RMD Plus boosters may be connected to the dimmer (depending on the dimmer principle phase cut-on or phase cut-off)
ohmic / cap.
1 L
Max. 5/10 boosters depending on the dimmer principle
BLC push-button control unit 1-10 V for BLC button, BLC radio button, BLC presence detector and BLC controller 180 with extension unit input for electronic ballasts and/or Tronic transformers with 1-10 V interface. L N
N L + -
Electronic ballast or Tronic transformer with 1-10V interface 230 V~ 1 - 10 V
1-10 V
BLC push-button control unit 1-10V
L N 1-10 V
BLC push-button control unit 1-10V
BLC controller extension unit
BLC extension unit
Push-button (NO)
2908
2907
5031
2903
2903
-+
-+ N1 L
N L 1-10 V+ -
Electronic ballast or Tronic transformer with 1-10V interface 230 V~
N1 L
N1 L
1 L
To other extension units Basic circuit
Technical data Nominal voltage Control voltage Max. control current Switching contact Connected load Power consumption
When connecting energy saving bulbs and electronic ballasts, consider the high inrush currents. Check suitability of equipment prior to use, fit inrush current limiters order no. 0185 if necessary. Basic brightness can only be saved with BLC button on BLC push-button control unit 1-10 V. Switch-on brightness can only be saved power failure safe with BLC button and BLC radio button on BLC push-button control unit 1-10 V and with BLC button via the extension unit. Push-buttons (NO contacts) can only be illuminated via L and N. Extension unit operation is only possible if there is a cover fitted on the BLC push-button control unit 1-10 V. Use BLC controller extension unit only in combination with BLC controller or BLC presence detector on the BLC push-button control unit 1-10 V. To example of the planning 1-10 V of a plant see side T28.
Operation with extension units
230 V~, 50/60 Hz 1-10 V 50 mA Relay 700 W incandescent and 230 V halogen lamps Electronic ballasts type-specific Tronic transformers type-specific approx. 1.8 W
BLC push-button control unit 1-10 V Extension units Extension unit cable length Open circuit protected Electrical isolation 1-10 V Fuse Radio interference suppression Operating temperature Terminals
Order no. 2903 BLC extension units and push-button (NO) unlimited BLC controller extension units max. 10 max. 100 m Yes 2 kV base installation Via 10 A circuit-breaker according to EN 55015 5 to 35°C Screw-type terminals for max. 2.5 mm2 or 2 x 1.5 mm2
T14
T14
BLC CONTROLLER 180 blc controller 180 Product features BLC controller 180
Possible combinations BLC BLC Controller Main device Extension unit
For mounting on BLC inserts Optimised detection thanks to refined lens system Detection angle 180° Scope of delivery includes cover for limiting the detection
BLC Extension unit
Push-button NOC
BLC Button
Button Rocker
area to 90°
Analogue signal processing Response brightness adjustable in the range from 0 to 80 lux / daytime operation Response sensitivity continuously adjustable from 20 to 100% via potentiometer Standardisation by means of specified delay time (2 min.) Extension of the detection area, e.g. for long corridors, through active
BLC controller extension units 2908 with BLC controllers 180 1783 ../1786 .., BLC controllers 180 comfort 1784 ../1787 .. and BLC presence detector 170109 Switching on, even outside of the detection area, through the use of passive BLC extension units 2907 or push-buttons (NOCs) Also motion-dependent, brightness-independent, time-delayed switching of fans, heaters, etc. through use with BLC relay switch insert HVAC 2912 Operating temperature range -20 to 45°C Splash-protected flush-mounted variants (IP44) available
BLC controller 180
BLC controller 180
BLC controller 180 comfort
BLC controller 180 comfort
Product features BLC controller 180 comfort For mounting on BLC inserts Optimised detection thanks to refined lens system Detection angle 180° Scope of delivery includes cover for limiting the detection area to 90° Digital signal processing Adaptive automatic sensitivity adjustment to process the effects of
interference signal sources and for adaptation to the ambient conditions --> optimised wrong operation safety --> enhanced switching accuracy for detecting persons Response sensitivity also manually continuously adjustable from 20 to 100% on potentiometer Response brightness adjustable in the range from 0 to 80 lux / daytime operation Teach function as an additional easy way to individually adjust the response brightness (without detaching the cover) Glareproof against brief light from, for example, car headlamps/torches No switching-on in case of unforeseeable short shadows Slide switch for off/automatic/on Brightness-independent step operation with immunity time 3 sec. (only in connection with BLC switch inserts, e.g. for doorbell operation) Dimming function (soft-off 30 sec.) when using a BLC dimmer insert Setting the switch-on brightness for the lighting via BLC extension unit 2907 in the BLC main dimming device (memory function) Extension of the detection area, e.g. for long corridors, through active controller extension units 2908 with BLC controllers 180 1783 ../1786 .., BLC controller 180 comfort 1784 ../1787 .. and BLC presence detector 170109 Switching on, even outside of the detection area, through the use of passive BLC extension units 2907 or push-buttons (NOCs) Also motion-dependent, brightness-independent, time-delayed switching of fans, heaters, etc. through use of the BLC relay switch insert HVAC 2912 Operating temperature range -20 to 45°C Splash-protected flush-mounted variants (IP44) available Teach function The teaching function can be used to save the current ambient brightness (response brightness). The response brightness set on the potentiometer is then no longer evaluated. Procedure: - To activate the teaching function, cover up the BLC controller 180 comfort completely briefly for approx. 1 sec.at least 3 times within a period of 9 sec. - As soon as the BLC controller 180 comfort 3 has recognised 3 light cycles, the teaching function will be active. For confirmation, if the lighting is already switched on it is then switched off and then switched on for 3 sec. If the lighting is already switched off, then it is switched on for 3 sec. - During the next minute, move away from the BLC controller 180 comfort, so that it can correctly measure and save the current ambient brightness. To confirm that it has been saved, switch the lighting on for 3 sec. - The BLC controller 180 comfort switches to the operating mode set on the slide switch. A power failure > 2 sec. reactivates the response brightness set on the potentiometer.
3 x 1 Sec.
optimal The detection rays are intersected optimally.
not optimal The detection rays are not intersected optimally. Range is limited.
wrong The detection rays are not intersected. The controller detects the object too late.
problematical There should be no sources of interference, e.g. lamps, heaters or fans in the detection field: Select suitable installation location and/or use push-on cover. Problems with sources of interference with the BLC controller 180 can generally be solved with the teachable digital BLC controller 180 comfort. The BLC controllers have no forced switch-off, i.e. constant motion in the detection area results in continuous light. The Berker control and the controller system have an integrated forced switch-off after 90 min. at the latest.
23
3 Sec.
3 Sec.
approx. 1 min. Saving the response brightness T15
Installation instructions
Extension units When using BLC controllers with BLC controller extension units, overlapping of the detection areas should be ensured, so that detection can be guaranteed.
1 Sec.
max. 9 Sec.
T15
BLC presence detector with constant light control
Dimensions Very low assembling height in comparison
blc presence detector BLC PRESENCE DETECTOR WITH CONSTANT LIGHT REGULATION with constant light control Function: The BLC presence detector with constant light control responds to heat motions caused by persons, animals or objects. It can be used for switching and dimming of the lighting in offices and common areas. The presence detector switches the lighting on when it detects motion and the brightness is below the set level. The presence detector switches the lighting off if it is no longer needed, i.e. when it is bright enough even without lighting or when there is no longer anyone present. It is also able to evaluate small motions (fine motor functions), such as those that typically occur in offices. It is mounted exclusively on ceilings, and monitors the area located below it, for example. The lighting is switched or dimmed, depending on the BLC insert used. The presence detector switches the lighting on only for as long as it is needed. To expand the detection field, the presence detector can be combined with a BLC controller extension unit insert and connected to the main device. Combination with a BLC switch insert The lighting is always switched on to maximum brightness. The lighting is switched off when one of the following cases applies: · No more motion is detected and the set delay time has elapsed · The brightness exceeds for at least 10 minutes (e.g. due to more daylight) twice the set value. The fact that the brightness is exceeded is indicated by flashing of the LED. The lighting is also switched off when there is motion. Combination with a BLC dimmer insert The presence detector first switches the lighting on to maximal brightness. After that it dims the lighting so that the brightness is held constant at the setpoint that has been set (constant light control). As daylight increases, the lighting is dimmed or switched off. As daylight decreases, the lighting is switched on or dimmed up. The constant light control is designed so that the user notices it as little as possible. The lighting is switched off when one of the following cases applies: · The presence detector detects no more motion and the set delay time has elapsed. The lighting is then dimmed to minimum brightness in at most one minute. After an additional five minutes without detection the lighting is switched off. · The presence detector has adjusted the lighting to the lowest dimming setting. Nevertheless the brightness exceeds 1.5 times the setpoint. After a waiting period of 10 minutes the lighting is switched off regardless of motion. Extension unit operation For manual operation of the presence detector, a BLC extension unit (passive extension unit) is required in combination with a BLC button or a mechanical push-button (NO contact). Notes: · When a BLC switch insert is used, no distinction is made between a short press and a long press. · With a mechanical push-button, no distinction is made between a short press and a long press. This means that dimming and changing of the temporary brightness setpoint is not possible. · Extension unit operation is only possible if there is a cover fitted on the main device. · Illuminated push-buttons must be supplied with power via a separate neutral conductor. Short press (less than 400 ms) Control surface Top, Bottom, Full surface or mech. push-button
Load off Load on The lighting is switched on to max. Lighting is switched off brightness. The delay time corresponds to for 3 minutes. the value set on the potentiometer, For more information, but is at least 2 minutes. Detected see slide show-function motions extend the delay time to the time set on the potentiometer. Information regarding dimmer inserts · After switching-on, constant light control is performed. · If the lighting was switched off via the extension unit, switching-on can be performed only via the extension unit to the last brightness value Slide show function With a BLC extension unit or a mechanical push-button (NOCs) it is possible to switch the lighting off selectively. If the presence detector detects motion in the next 3 minutes, then the switch-off time is extended. Only after 3 minutes go by without motion being detected is the slide show function ended automatically. If motion is detected now, the lighting may be switched on again, depending on the brightness situation. If you wish to end the slide show function manually, switch the lighting on again manually at the extension unit (for dimmer inserts the brightness before switching-off will be set). Temporary deactivation of the lighting control If the presence detector switched the lighting off due to sufficient extraneous light (e.g. daylight), then you can switch the lighting control off manually. To do this, switch the lighting on again at the extension unit within 1 minute after it is switched off automatically. The lighting now remains switched on as long as the presence detector detects motion. The lighting is only switched off if the presence detector does not detect any more motion and the delay time has elapsed. The lighting control is now active again. Long press (longer than 400 ms) only for BLC dimmer inserts Control surface Load off Load on Top or The lighting is switched on to Increase (dim up) the brightness Full surface minimum brightness, held for 1 s to maximum brightness. and then dimmed up to maximum brightness. Bottom The lighting is switched on to Reduce (dim down) the minimum brightness. brightness to minimum brightness. See short press. Mechanical See short press. push-button
Notes: · Each press re-starts the set delay time, but for at least 2 minutes. · Each detected motion re-starts the delay time set on the potentiometer. · In presence detector mode the dimmed brightness value is temporarily adopted as the brightness setpoint, as long as the lighting remains switched on. If the dimmer insert's own non-temporary brightness memory is changed, then a BLC button must be used temporarily for saving on the dimmer insert. · In controller operation the lamps retain the dimmed brightness as long as the lighting remains switched on. BLC presence detector in combination with BLC controller extension units. The area to be evaluated is expanded. Using up to 10 (5 with main device BLC universal touch dimmer) BLC controller extension units it is possible to evaluate even large areas. If a motion is detected by an extension unit, this is reported to the main device, and the connected load is switched on if the brightness is below the threshold value on the main device. Connection in parallel of BLC presence detectors with constant light control is not permitted. To expand the detection field, use BLC controller extension units.
Installation location · Ceiling mounting in indoor areas. · The detection area should not be limited by furniture, pillars, etc. · Vibration-free installation, because movements of the detector can also trigger a switching operation During installation, do not subject the sensor window of the presence detector to direct sunlight; this could destroy the sensor.
Sources of interference Do not install in the direct vicinity of a heat source. Cooling light bulbs and air movements from, for example, fans, heaters and open windows may be detected and lead to switching-on again. If necessary limit detection area using supplied push-on cover. The detection area should not be limited by furniture, pillars, etc. Settings The cover can be removed in order to adjust the delay time (operating mode) and brightness threshold value. This makes optimal adjustment possible without detaching the cover. Brightness sensor Delay time setting Brightness setting Test and status LEDs (brightness settings help) Fresnel lens
Mount brightness sensor on the side away from windows to avoid the effects of scattered light.
Delay time The potentiometer "time" can be used to set the delay time; a change of operating mode is indicated by flashing of the LED. time 10min Step operation: approx. 1 sec. on setting "Test" 10s Presence mode: approx. 10 min. to 30 min. 30min Test Brightness threshold value Minimum brightness in the area being monitored. When the brightness drops below this value, the presence detector switches the lighting on when a motion is lux detected. When a dimmer insert is used, in presence detector mode the minimum brightness is simultaneously used as the setpoint at which 0 the brightness is held constant. When set to marking 0 the automatic initial detection is deactivated, switching on is only possible manually via the extension units. For switch inserts the switch-off brightness (brightness setpoint) is approx. 400 lux here. Technical data Power supply Connected load Power consumption Delay time
BLC presence detector with constant light control order no. 170110 via BLC insert depending on BLC insert approx. 1 W approx. 1 sec.test operation; approx. 10 sec. - 30 min. presence detector operation; Brightness threshold valueapprox. 10 - 1000 lux / symbol "0" initial activation only via extension unit Detection angle 360 ° Detection levels 6 Number of zones 80 Number of switching segments 320 Detection area at desk level approx. Ø 5 m Detection area at floor level approx. Ø 8 m Installation height for nominal detection areas 2.5 m Number of extension units see BLC insert Extension unit cable length max. 100 m Dimensions (Ø x H) 103 x 42 mm Radio interference suppression according to EN 55015 Operating temperature 0 to 45°C
Test LED (brightness settings help) Load off Load on Monitored area too dark: LED Monitored area too Load remains switched on during motion. off dark: With no motion the switch is turned off Load is switched on when motion is detected. after the set delay time. LED Monitored area bright Monitored area light enough due to on enough: switched-on lighting. Load remains off even Load remains switched on during motion. when motion detected. With no motion the switch is turned off after the set delay time. LED Monitored area bright Monitored area very bright with lighting and flashes enough: extraneous light: Load remains off even Load switches off after approx. 10 minutes, because when motion detected. the brightness is sufficient even without lighting.
T16
T16
presence detector constant light control BLC blc PRESENCE DETECTOR WITHwith CONSTANT LIGHT REGULATION/ blc ceiling controller 360/presence detector BLC CEILING CONTROLLER 360/ PRESENCE DETECTOR SURFACE-MOUNTED 100
100
Switching on again after extraneous light switch-off during continuous presence
Re-detection (retriggering) during time to dim down or dwell time
Lighting
Lighting
Light control during presence (Expiration of the delay time not relevant in this example)
Light control during strong extraneous light: e.g. breaks in the cloud cover
off
1 0
Dwell time for strong extraneous light at least x detection Brightness 10 min. too high
Initial detection
Switch on to lowest dimming level and immediately adjust to brightness setpoint
Light adjusted to brightness setpoint during presence
} Aus
1 0
Delay time
Initial detection
Detection, Brightness too low
{
Subsequent detection: Switch on to last dimming setting and immediately adjust to brightness setpoint
Last detection
Time to dim down approx. 1 min.
Dwell time 5 min.
Limitation of the presence detector detection area using push-on cover Areas I, II and II of the push-on cover
I II
1,7 m
2,5 m
III
Detection field:
with push-on cover area II and III cut out approx. Ï Floor 6 m Desk 3.7 m
with push-on cover area II cut out approx. Ï Floor 4 m Desk 2.5 m
with push-on cover without cut out approx. Ï Floor 2.2 m Desk 1.4 m
18
Presence detectors, surface type
39
42
Presence detector with constant light control
without push-on cover approx. Ï Floor 8 m Desk 5 m
Fastening of the push-on cover by snapping in
H=2,50 m
BLC ceiling controller 360 or presence detector surface-mounted in through areas
Ensure that there are overlaps!
ca. 5 m
ca. 2,5 m
BLC ceiling controllers 360 combined with BLC controller extension units or presence detectors surface-mounted connected in parallel can also be used for automatic light switching, for example in through areas. Because they are mounted on the sealing, controllers are not immediately accessible, which makes deliberate vandalism more difficult. To ensure switching in response to motion, a detection field diameter of approx. 10 (5) m should be planned. The distance to a door should not exceed 4 (2.5) m. ( )= Presence detector surface-mounted Area of application: schools, offices, public buildings, etc.
T17 T17
ca. 20 m
ca. 12 m
BLC ceiling controller 360 The BLC ceiling controller 360 is operated together with a BLC dimming or switch insert and mounted on the ceiling. The controller switches the lighting on and off depending on motion and the ambient brightness. The controller also detects heat motions of persons, animals or objects. · Light is switched on: The brightness is below the set threshold and the someone enters the area being monitored. · Light is switched off: No more motion is detected and the delay time has expired. Detection area The diameter of the detection area depends on the installation height and the direction of motion. For an installation height of 3 m the maximum diameter at the floor is approx. 12 m when approaching and approx. 20 m when crossing. Approaching Crossing
Technical data Power supply Connected load Power consumption Delay time Response brightness Response sensitivity Detection angle Detection levels Number of zones Number of switching segments Range for approaching Range for crossing Installation height for nominal ranges Number of extension units Extension unit cable length Dimensions (Ï x H) Radio interference suppression Operating temperature
BLC ceiling controller 360 order no. 170111 via BLC insert depending on BLC insert approx. 1 W approx. 1 sec.test operation; approx. 10 sec. - 30 min. approx. 10 - 1000 lux 20 - 100% 360 ° 5 78 312 approx. Ø 12 m approx. Ø 20 m 3m see BLC insert max. 100 m 103 x 42 mm according to EN 55015 5 to 35°C
Additional features Extension of the detection field with BLC controller extension units Manual operation with BLC extension unit or button (NO contact) Daytime operation Test/step operation Saving the switch-on brightness via BLC extension unit with BLC dimmer inserts Dimming the light via BLC extension unit with BLC dimmer inserts Display LED
PRESENCE DETECTOR SURFACE-MOUNTED presence detector, surface-mounted Presence detector surface-mounted The presence detector surface-mounted is used to monitor presence in indoor areas. It is mounted exclusively on ceilings, and monitors the area located below it. It responds to heat motions caused by persons, animals or objects. It is also able to evaluate small motions (fine motor functions), such as those that typically occur in offices. When a motion is detected and the brightness is below an adjustable brightness threshold, the load is switched on. The device remains switched on as long as further motions are detected. If no more motion is detected, then the load is switched of after the set delay time. If the brightness on the monitored surface continuously exceeds double the set brightness threshold value (but at least approx. 400 lux), for example due to brighter daylight, then the red diagnosis and settings help LED flashes and the presence detector switches off after 10 minutes at the latest, even if there is motion. The presence detector surface-mounted can only be used for switching applications.
H=2,50 m
2,5 m 4m Detection field on the floor 0
1m 2m 3m 4m
Extension unit operation Load on Lighting is switched off for 3 minutes. For more information, see slide show function
Slide show function With a BLC extension unit or a mechanical push-button (NOCs) it is possible to switch the lighting off selectively. If the presence detector detects motion in the next 3 minutes, then the switch-off time is extended. Only after 3 minutes go by without motion being detected is the slide show function ended automatically. If motion is detected now, the lighting may be switched on again, depending on the brightness situation. If you wish to end the slide show function manually, switch the lighting on again manually at the extension unit (for dimmer inserts the brightness before switching-off will be set). Temporary deactivation of the brightness evaluation If the presence detector switched the lighting off due to sufficient extraneous light (e.g. daylight), then you can switch the brightness evaluation off manually. To do this, switch the lighting on again at the extension unit within 1 minute after it is switched off automatically. The lighting now remains switched on as long as the presence detector detects motion. The lighting is only switched off if the presence detector does not detect any more motion and the delay time has elapsed. The brightness evaluation is now active again. Sources of interference Do not install in the direct vicinity of a heat source. Cooling light bulbs and air movements from fans, heaters and open windows can be detected and lead to switching on again. If necessary limit detection area using supplied push-on cover
Presence detector surface-mounted L N
Brightness sensor Delay time setting Brightness setting Test and status LEDs (brightness settings help) Mount brightness sensor on the side away from windows to avoid the effects of scattered light.
Delay time The potentiometer "time" can be used for fine adjustment of the on-time. Test mode: approx. 1 sec. on setting "test" Presence mode: approx. 10 sec. to approx. 30 min. Brightness threshold value Minimum brightness in the area being monitored. When the brightness drops time 10min below the set brightness threshold value and there is motion, then the 10s 30min switch is turned on. test The potentiometer "lux" can be used to adjust the minimum brightness lux from approx.10 lux (symbol moon) to 1000 lux (symbol sun). When set to the marking 0 the presence detector can only be switched on via the 0 extension unit. In this case the switch-off brightness is 400 lux. Test LED (brightness settings help) Load off Last on Monitored area too dark: LED Monitored area too dark: Load is switched on when Load remains switched on during motion. off motion detected. With no motion the switch is turned off after the set delay time. LED Monitored area light Monitored area light enough due to switched-on on enough: lighting. Load remains off even when Load remains switched on during motion. motion detected. With no motion the switch is turned off after the set delay time. LED Monitored area light Monitored area very bright with lighting and flashes enough: extraneous light: Load remains off even when Load switches off after approx. 10 minutes, because the brightness is sufficient even without lighting. motion detected.
for illuminated push-buttons neutral conductor necessary
5031
BK BU BR GY N
µ
1 to additional extension units
Operation with extension units L N
N L
L
Settings The cover can be removed in order to adjust the delay time and brightness. Can be adjusted without dismantling.
Push-button (NOC)
N L
L
BK BU BR GY
During installation, do not subject the presence detector to direct sunlight; this could destroy the detector.
Fresnel lens
18
Load off The lighting is switched on The delay time corresponds to the value set on the potentiometer, but at least 2 minutes Detected motions extend the delay time to the time set on the potentiometer.
39
Mechanical push-button
N
µ
1
Push-button (NOC)
BK BU BR GY L
N
µ
1
5031
for illuminated push-buttons neutral conductor necessary to additional extension units
Connection in parallel (max. 5 presence detectors) with extension units
Expansion of the detection area Connection in parallel of presence detectors surface-mounted "intelligent load linking" Note: All presence detectors connection in parallel surface-mounted must be operated in the same phase. Connection in parallel does not increase the max. connected load. The built-in microprocessor, in connection with a voltage measurement on the load cable, ensures that all presence detectors connected in parallel surface-mounted detect when lighting is switched on. As long as a motion is detected by one of the presence detectors surface-mounted, the lighting remains switched on. The delay time is restarted every time a motion is detected in the respective presence detector surface-mounted. The lighting is switched off when: - none of the presence detectors is detecting movement and the last remaining on-time has expired. - for all presence detectors the brightness in their monitored area is constantly exceeds at least twice the set value. In this manner it is possible to set up a presence detector system with equal rights without mutual influence. Technical data Rated voltage Connected load
Presence detector surface-mounted order no. 170108 230 V~, 50/60 Hz 1000 W incandescent lamps and 230 V halogen lamps, ohmic load 750 W 12 V halogen lamps with Tronic transformer, capacitive load 750 VA 12 V halogen lamps with conv. transformer, inductive load 500 W Fluorescent lamps uncomp. inductive load 1000 VA fluorescent lamps in duo configuration, inductive load Mixed load, capacitive and inductive loads should not be mixed Power consumption approx. 1 W Delay time approx. 1 sec. test mode; approx. 10 sec. - 30 min. presence detector mode Brightness threshold value approx. 10 - 1000 lux / symbol "0" initial activation only via extension unit Detection angle 360° Detection levels 6 Number of zones 80 Number of switching segments 320 Detection area at desk level approx. Ø 5 m Detection area at floor level approx. Ø 8 m Installation height for nominal detection areas 2.5 m Number of extension units Push-button NO contact unlimited Extension unit cable length max. 100 m Connection in parallel possible Load cable length (with parallel connection cable) max. 100 m Dimensions (Ø x H) 103 x 57.5 mm Radio interference suppression acc. to EN 55015 Operating temperature approx. 0 - 45 °C Connecting terminals Screw terminals for max. 2.5 mm² or 2 x 1.5 mm²
T18
T18
OVERVIEW OF CONTROLLER 180 FLUSH-MOUNTED overview controller 180, flush-mounted Technical data Supply voltage Power consumption Switching contact Switching capacity - Incandescent lamps - 230 V halogen lamps - Conventional transformers at 85% load - Tronic transformers - Fluorescent lamps uncompensated parallel compensated Duo circuit - Fluorescent lamps with electronic ballast Energy saving lamps HVAC switching current Maximum inrush current Minimum load Slide switch Radio interference suppression VDE mark Index of protection Operating temp. (obs. the cond. on page T7) Delay time Response brightness Response sensitivity Recommended mounting height Detection levels Detection area limit Range reduction Fuse Order no.:
BLC triac switch insert LV 230 V~, 50/60 Hz 1W Triac
BLC tronic switch insert 230 V~, 50/60 Hz 1W MosFet
BLC relay switch insert 230 V~, 50/60 Hz 1.2 W Relay
40-400 W 40-400 W 40-400 VA -
50-420 W 50-420 W 50-420 W
2300 W 2300 W 1000 VA 1500 W
40 W see cover to EN 55015 • see cover -20 to 25°C see cover see cover see cover 1.1 or 2.2 m see cover see cover see cover T 1.6 H 250 V 2905
50 W see cover to EN 55015 • see cover -20 to 25°C see cover see cover see cover 1.1 or 2.2 m see cover see cover see cover electronic 2916
1200 VA 920 VA 2300 VA max. 200 VA 15 A 100 mA see cover to EN 55015 • see cover -20 to 45°C see cover see cover see cover 1.1 or 2.2 m see cover see cover see cover 10 A circuit breaker 2906
When connecting energy-saving bulbs and electronic ballasts (EVGs), consider the high inrush currents. Check suitability of equipment prior to use and fit inrush current limiters if necessary. Observe the operating conditions on page T6.
BLC stair light BLC relay switch trigger insert insert HVAC 230 V~, 50/60 Hz 230 V~, 50/60 Hz 0,5 W (2,5 mA) 1.5 W Relay s. auto. stair light switch RMD HVAC values, s. below* 1000 W s. auto. stair light switch RMD 1000 W 750 VA 750 W s. auto. stair light switch RMD 500 VA 1000 VA 4A 15 A 100 mA see cover to EN 55015 • see cover 5 to 35°C see cover see cover see cover 1.1 or 2.2 m see cover see cover see cover 10 A circuit breaker 2912
BLC auto. stair light switch RMD Plus 230 V~, 50 Hz Relay, ED 100% 2300 W 2300 W 1000 VA 1500 W 1200 VA 920 W 2300 W 700 W approx. 200 VA 15 A 100 mA Off/Auto/On to EN 55015 • IP20 5 to 50°C 10 sec. - 15 min. on BLC trigger insert on BLC controller -
s. auto. stair light switch RMD s. auto. stair light switch RMD s. auto. stair light switch RMD s. auto. stair light switch RMD s. auto. stair light switch RMD at auto. stair light switch RMD
to EN 55015 • see cover 5 to 45°C s. auto. stair light switch RMD
approx. 0 to 80 /" Lux on BLC controller 1.1 or 2.2 m see BLC controller on BLC controller on BLC controller 180 or comfort 293410
10 A circuit breaker 016301
*HVAC channel for BLC relay switch insert 2912 Switching capacity of incandescent lamps: 800 W Switching capacity of 230 V Halogen lamps: 750 W Switching on delay: 3 min. Switching off delay: approx. 2/10/30/60/120 min. BLC stair light trigger insert 3-wire circuit (pulsed neutral conductor)
L N 016301
Technical data Supply voltage Power consumption Switching contact Switching capacity - Incandescent lamps - 230 V halogen lamps - Conventional transformers at 85% load - Tronic transformers - Fluorescent lamps uncompensated parallel compensated Duo circuit - Fluorescent lamps with electronic ballast Energy saving lamps HVAC switching current Maximum inrush current Minimum load Slide switch Radio interference suppression VDE mark Index of protection Operating temp. (obs. the cond. on page T7.) Delay time Response brightness Response sensitivity Recommended mounting height Detection levels Detection area limit Range reduction Fuse Order no.:
BLC universal touch dimmer 230 V~, 50/60 Hz 0.7 W -
BLC toch dimmer LV 230 V~, 50/60 Hz 1.2 W -
BLC push-button control unit 1- 10 V 230 V~, 50/60 Hz 1.8 W Relay
50–420 W 50–420 W 50–420 VA 50–420 W
20–500 W 20–500 W 20–500 VA -
700 W 700 W type-dependent**
50 W see cover to EN 55015 • see cover -20 to 25°C see cover see cover see cover 1.1 or 2.2 m see cover see cover see cover electronic 2902
20 W see cover to EN 55015 • see cover -20 to 25°C see cover see cover see cover 1.1 or 2.2 m see cover see cover see cover T 2 H 250 V 2904
type-dependent type-dependent 3,04 A 15 A see cover to EN 55015 • see cover 5 to 35°C see cover see cover see cover 1.1 or 2.2 m see cover see cover see cover 10 A circuit breaker 2903 ** Tronic transformer with 1-10 V interface
When connecting energy-saving bulbs and electronic ballasts (EVGs), consider the high inrush currents. Check suitability of equipment prior to use and fit inrush current limiters if necessary. Observe the operating conditions on Page T6.
B1
3
A1
A2
6 4
BLC stair light trigger insert
Push-button (NOC)
293410
5031
8 10 2
0
B1
4
A1
Further trigger inserts or pushbuttons (NOC)
4-wire circuit (pulsed phase)
L N
016301 B1
3
A1
A2
6 4
BLC stair light trigger insert
Push-button (NOC)
293410
5031
8 10 2
0
B1
4
A1
Further trigger inserts or pushbuttons (NOC)
4-wire circuit (pulsed phase)
L N
016301 B1
3
A1
A2
6 4
BLC stair light trigger insert
Push-button (NOC)
293410
5031
8 10 2
4
0
B1
A1
1675
Further trigger inserts or push-buttons (NOC)
Control line length max. 100 m Use only BLC controllers and presence detectors from release issue R3 onwards. A slide switch of the BLC controller 180 comfort has no function. With BLC controller 180 and BLC presence detector the delay time must be set to step operation. When energy-saving lamps and electronic ballasts are connected note high switch-on currents. Check suitability of the devices before use and if necessary use making current limiter!
The BLC stair light trigger inserts can only be used in conjunction with the BLC automatic stair light switch RMD Plus. BLC controller 180, BLC controller 180 comfort, BLC presence detector or BLC button are required as covers. The permitted number is shown in the following table: BLC stair light trigger inserts 16 12 10/8/6/4/2
unilluminated push-buttons any any any
illuminated push- illuminated pushbuttons 0,4 mA buttons 1 mA 25 37/50/62/75/87
10 15/20/25/30/35
Increasing the number of illuminated push-buttons With the above circuit (4-wire circuit, pulsed phase), the terminal of the neon lamp unit is connected to the neutral conductor. (Remove contact lug on neon lamp unit) As a result, this push station is to be classified in the table as an unilluminated push-button. With a 3-wire circuit variation (pulsed neutral conductor), the neon lamp unit terminal must be connected to the phase. (Remove contact lug on neon lamp unit) As a result, this push station is to be classified in the table as an unilluminated push-button.
T19 T19
OVERVIEW OF CONTROLLERS 180 FLUSH-MOUNTED overview controller 180, flush-mounted Technical data Supply voltage Power consumption Switching contact Switching capacity - Incandescent lamps - 230 V halogen lamps - Conventional transformers at 85% load - Tronic transformers - Fluorescent lamps uncompensated parallel compensated Duo circuit - Fluorescent lamps with electronic ballast Energy saving lamps HVAC switching current Maximum inrush current Double-throw switch Radio interference suppression VDE mark Index of protection Operating temperature Delay time Response brightness Response sensitivity Recommended mounting height Detection levels Detection area limit Range reduction Fuse Order no.:
BLC controller extension unit 230 V~, 50/60 Hz see main station
BLC controller 180 via insert see insert see insert
BLC controller 180 comfort via insert see insert see insert
Controller 180 system cover via insert see insert see master device
Controller system insert 15 V= 0.06 W see power supply unit
-
see insert see insert see insert see insert
see insert see insert see insert see insert
see master device see master device see master device see master device
see power supply unit see power supply unit see power supply unit see power supply unit
see insert see insert see insert see insert see insert see insert see insert see insert see insert see insert see insert see insert Off/Auto/On to EN 55015 to EN 55015 to EN 55015 • • • see cover IP20 / IP44 IP20 / IP44 -20 to 45°C -20 to 45°C -20 to 45°C via master unit 10 sec. to 30 min. 2 min. (fixed) via master unit approx. 0 to 80 / " Lux approx. 0 to 80 / " Lux approx. 20 to 100% see cover 1.1 or 2.2 m 1.1 or 2.2 m 1.1 or 2.2 m 2 or 3 2 or 3 see cover 90° by cover 90° by cover see cover via sensitivity setting via sensitivity setting see 20 to 100% 20 to 100% cover via insert via insert T 1.6 H 250 V 1783 .. / 1786 .. 1784 .. / 1787 .. 2908
see master device see master device see master device see master device see master device see master device to EN 55015 • IP20 / IP44 5 to 45°C see master unit at master unit/insert approx. 20 to 100% 1.1 or 2.2 m 2 90° by cover via sensitivity setting 20 to 100% 1715 .. / 1718 ..
see power supply unit see power supply unit see power supply unit see power supply unit to EN 55015 • see power supply unit 5 to 45°C see power supply unit see power supply unit on system cover 1.1 or 2.2 m see system cover on system cover see system cover 2939
BLC controller IP44 for mounting height 1.1 m Direct sunlight penetrating the upward-facingdetection plane will result in failure of the movement controller. Only suitable for interior applications! BLC controller IP44 for mounting height 2.2 m Ensure no direct sunlight can fall on the upper detection plane. Also suitable for exterior applications!
Mounting instructions
System cover
BLC controller 180
optimal optimal The detection beams are optimally cut.
Side view Detection area with covers 1.1 m. Mounting height: 1.1 m.
1,1m
Side view Detection area with covers 1.1 m. Mounting height: 1.1 m.
1.1 m
10 m
not optimal The detection beams are not optimally cut. The range is reduced.
View from above Detection area with covers 1.1 m. Mounting height: 1.1 m.
wrong 2 4 8,5 12 m 3 6
wrong The detection beams are not cut. The controller detects the object too late.
12 m
Problems with sources of interference can generally be solved with the teachable digital BLC controller 180 comfort.
wrong
View from above Detection area with covers 1.1 m. Mounting height: 1.1 m.
10 m
10 m
2,2 m
wrong There should be no sources of interference, e.g. lamps, heaters or fans in the detection field: Select suitable installation location and/or use push-on cover.
12 m
12 m
not optimal
10 m
3m 6m 12 m
Side view Detection area with covers 2.2 m. Mounting height: 2.2 m.
View from above Detection area with covers 2.2 m. Mounting height: 2.2 m.
2.2 m
0.5 4,5
12 m
12 m
4.5 m 12 m
Side view Detection area with covers 2.2 m. Mounting height: 2.2 m.
View from above Detection area with covers 2.2 m. Mounting height: 2.2 m.
2,2 m
2 4 8,5 12 m 3 6
Side view Detection area with covers 2.2 m. Mounting height: 1.1 m.
Side view Detection area with covers 2.2 m. Mounting height: 1.1 m.
1.1 m
2,25
6m
T20 T20
OVERVIEW OF SURFACE-MOUNTED CONTROLLERS overview controller, surface-mounted Technical data
Controller 70 230 V~, 50/60 Hz approx. 1.1 W Relay 1000 W 1000 W 750 W 750 VA
Supply voltage Power consumption Switching contact Switching capacity incandescent lamps 230 V halogen lamps Tronic transformers Conv. transformers at 85% load Fluorescent lamps uncompensated parallel compensated Duo circuit Fluorescent lamps with electronic ballast Energy saving lamps Maximum inrush current RFI suppressed VDE mark Index of protection Operating temperature Delay time Bell pulse Forced cut-out after 90 min. Activation brightness approx. Response sensitivity Recommended mounting height Close-up range approx. Mid range approx. Remote range approx. Crawl-under protection Detection area limit Range reduction
500 VA 400 VA 1000 VA see inrush current limiter T37 15 A to EN 55015 Yes IP55 -25 to 55°C 10 sec. to 5 min. No 3 to 80 / " Lux 2.4 m 0.5 to 4 m 4 to 6 m 6 to 8 m 3-stage adjustable sticker Yes Press 1x = Delay time
System sensor cable Number of system sensors Improved approach response Additional function due to push-button (NCC) in lead: push-button = Order no. (polar white)
Automatic controller plus 110 230 V~, 50 Hz approx. 1.3 W Relay 2300 W 1000 W 1200 W 1200 VA
Berker control® 230 V~, 50/60 Hz approx. 1.1 W Relay 2300 W 2300 W 1200 W 1200 VA
1200 VA 1200 VA 920 VA 920 VA 2300 VA 2300 VA see inrush current see inrush current limiter T37 limiter T37 20 A 20 A to EN 55015 to EN 55015 Yes Yes IP54 IP55 -35 to 50°C -20 to 55°C 12 sec. to 12 min. 2 sec. to 30 min. No Yes 0.5 sec. Yes 5 to 300 / " Lux 1 to 1000 / " Lux 20 to 100% 2.5 m 2.4 m 0.5 to 1 m 0 to 3 m 1 to 5 m 3 to 7 m / 7 to 11 m 5 to 16 m 11 to 16 m -0.4 to 0 Mask and cover plates Cover elements by Tilt with reduction tilt in sensitivity Yes Yes Press 1x = Delay time Press 1x = Delay time 2x=4hrs on, 3x=4hrs off, 4x=Test
0102 09
0143 09
0190
When connecting energy-saving bulbs and electronic ballasts (EVGs), consider the high inrush currents. Check suitability of equipment prior to use and fit inrush current limiters if necessary. Ensure that there are no interference sources, e.g. lamps or heaters, in the detection range.
Dimensional drawing
90
42
62
112
125 139
120
83
134
47
Top view of detection range
109
110°
70°
220°
16m
8m
11m
168 Switching segments
20m
25m
16m 580 Switching segments
72 Switching segments
Side front view of detection range
8m 6m 4m
T21 T21
2,4m
2,5m
2,4m
Ranges
16m
5m
1m
16m
11m 7m
3m -0,4m
OVERVIEW OF CONTROLLER overview controller system Technical data
Controller system sensor 180 15 V= Supply voltage approx. 0.06 W Power consumption see system power pack Switching contact Switching capacity incandesc. lamps see system power pack see system power pack 230 V halogen lamps see system power pack Tronic transformers see system power pack Conv. transformers at 85% load Fluorescent lamps uncompensated parallel compensated Duo circuit Fluorescent lamps with elec. ballast Energy saving lamps Maximum inrush current RFI suppressed VDE mark Index of protection Operating temperature Delay time Bell pulse Forced cut-out > 90 min. Activation brightness approx. Response sensitivity Recommended mounting height Close-up range approx. Mid range approx. Remote range approx. Crawl-under protection Detection area limit Range reduction
Controller system sensor 240 15 V= approx. 0.06 W see system power pack see system power pack see system power pack see system power pack see system power pack
see system power pack see system power pack see system power pack see system power pack see system power pack see system power pack to EN 50015 Yes IP55 -25 to 55°C see system power pack see system power pack see system power pack 2.4 m 0.5 m to 3 m 3 m to 9 m 9 m to 16 m Hood By tilting
see system power pack see system power pack see system power pack see system power pack see system power pack see system power pack to EN 50015 Yes IP55 -25 to 55°C see system power pack see system power pack see system power pack 20 to 100% 2.4 m 0.1 m to 1 m 1 m to 9 m 9 m to 16 m Yes Hood Tilt with reduction in sensitivity J-Y(ST)Y 2 x 2 x 0.8 or YR 4 x 0.8 -
System sensor cable Number of system sensors Improved approach response Additional function by push-button (NC) in lead: push-button = Order no. (polar white)
Controller system power Controller system power Controller system power pack surface-mounted pack RMD 1 channel pack RMD 2 channel 230 V~, 50 Hz 230 V~, 50 Hz 230 V~, 50 Hz approx. 1.1 W approx. 1.1 W approx. 1.1 W Relay Potential-free relay 2relays, 1x pot.-free (right) 2300 W 2300 W 2300 W 2300 W 2300 W 2300 W 1200 W 1200 W 1200 W 1200 VA 1200 VA 1200 VA 1200 VA 920 VA 2300 VA see inrush current limiter 20 A to EN 50015 Yes IP55 -25 to 55°C 4 sec. to 15 min. Yes 3 to 80 / " Lux -
0152 09
0151 09
1200 VA 920 VA 2300 VA see inrush current limiter 20 A to EN 50015 Yes IP20 -25 to 55°C 4 sec. to 15 min. Yes 3 to 80 / " Lux -
1200 VA 920 VA 2300 VA see inrush current limiter 20 A to EN 50015 Yes IP20 -25 to 55°C 4 sec. to 15 min. Yes 3 to 80 / " Lux -
J-Y(ST)Y 2 x 2 x 0.8 or YR 4 x 0.8 max. 8 max. 8 1x press = 1x press = Delay time Delay time 0150 29 0155
max. 8 VA per channel 1x press = Delay time 0159
When connecting energy-saving bulbs and electronic ballasts (EVGs), consider the high inrush currents. Check suitability of equipment prior to use and fit inrush current limiters if necessary. Ensure that there are no interference sources, e.g. lamps or heaters, in the detection range.
Dimensional drawing
potential-free 38
60
66
L1
N N
94
10
LUX
240°
Order No. 0159
System power supply unit
2 10
1
10
LUX
Lx1 S1
68
180°
ca. Min.
80
- +
L1
5
1
80
110
S
ca. Min.
1
System power supply unit Lx
N 5
1
15
ca. Min.
80
80 68
Top view of detection range
System power supply unit
L1
L1
4
15
92 80
117
L1
15
27
27
5
1
L1
LUX
- +
Lx2 S2
- +
4 TE
4 TE
optimal
not optimal
wrong
The detection beams are optimally cut.
The detection beams are not optimally cut. The range is reduced.
The detection beams are not cut. The controller detects the object too late.
Controller mounting
22m
32m 20m 16m
16m 144 Switching segments
168 Switching segments
Side front view of detection range
wrong There should be no sources of interference, e.g. lamps, heaters or fans in the detection field: Select suitable installation location and/or use push-on cover.
16m
9m
3m
2,4m
2,4m
Ranges
16m
9m
wrong
Problems with sources of interference can generally be solved with the teachable digital BLC controller 180 comfort.
1m
T22 T22
BERKER CONTROL berker control Mount laterally across the direction of movement If a person moves laterally across the Berker control, switching segment 2 senses a negative jump in temperature (e.g. from 20 °C to 18 °C) and switching segment 1 senses a positive jump in temperature (e.g. from 18 °C to 20 °C). This means effective detection and stable ranging.
Berker control®stands for: digital, microprocessor-controlled operation digital detection signal evaluation digital interference signal suppression response sensitivity adjustable 4 monitoring planes detection angle 220° crawl-under protection range 16 m 145 sectors with over 580 switching segments non-weather-dependent range consistency activation brightness from 1 Lux - daytime operation adjustable glare-proof (e.g. against torches) delay time 2 sec. - 30 min. adjustable short-time service 0.5 sec. with immunity time setting additional functions, controller operation/4 hrs. On/4 hrs. Off/Test with LED detection and mode indicator limit cut-out intelligent load linking for wall and ceiling installation cable entry from all sides vertical and horizontal tilting
1 2 3
optimal
If a person moves directly towards the Berker control the temperature remains virtually constant in switching segment 2. There may perhaps be no detection. The person must approach the Berker control more closely to be 'detected'.
1 2 3
not optimal
Mounting instructions Do not mount the Berker control directly above/next to a light. As the light cools it may be detected as a change of heat and lead to reactivation. If necessary, limit the detection range of the sensor with the masking elements supplied.
16m
110°
75°
TOP
0°
110°
TOP
75°
35°
35°
0°
75°
110°
110°
110°
110°
4-2
0° 75° 35° 0°
75° 35°
75°
35°
0°
35°
0°
0°
4Plane
75° 35°
1
0°
75°
110°
110°
110°
110°
75° 35° 75°
0°
35°
35° 110° 75°
0°
110°
110°
75°
110°
0°
75°
75°
35°
Pla
35°
ne 3
35°
0°
35° 75°
0°
ne 2
75°
35°
0°
110° 110°
110°
110°
0°
75° 75°
0°
35° 35°
75°
0°
0°
Masking covers for the Berker control®
35° 0° 0°
Plane 1
ld fie e g rs rin ve ito Re on m
35° 0°
Plane 1
110° 110°
75°
35°
Pla
The masking elements supplied can be used to eliminate sources of interference by limiting the detection angle. To do so, cut the masking elements as required to the size of the individual detection planes or to the desired angle. Then detach the masking elements from the backing sheet and affix them smoothly to the sensor window.
4-2
T23
2,4m
6°
827 524 00
T23
16 m
12 m
Plane
Ceiling mounted
Plane
Mount the Berker control free of vibration, because sensor movements, such as those caused by mounting on a tree, may also trigger the switch.
Wall mounted
Plane 4-1
Rotation +70/-70°
3
-38°
If the sensor head is aligned at about 6° tilt for example (the upper edge of the housing forming a continuous line with the bottom edge of the sensor), the range will be reduced to approx. 12m.
links / left
+100°
3m - 0,4m
- falling ground - sensor head pointing upwards - mounting height more than 2.4 m - high temperature difference
R m eve on rs ito e rin fie g ld
To adapt the detection angle to onsite conditions, the sensor head can be inclined and rotated.
The range is increased by:
Tilt
Mounting instructions The flexible housing construction of the Berker control makes it suitable both for wall and ceiling installation.
11m 7m
- rising ground - inclined sensor head - mounting height less than 2.4 m - low temperature difference
rechts / right
The range is reduced by:
Pla ne
As the ambient brightness slowly decreases, motion detection is only evaluated when the brightness level has been below the pre-set activation brightness for at least 2 minutes. This prevents the controller from responding to merely short-time periods of sub-minimum brightness (such as due to a cloud).
20m
2
The Berker control offers a high degree of protection against ambient light. As the ambient brightness increases, the motion detection only ceases to be evaluated when the pre-set brightness value has been exceeded for at least 10 minutes. This excludes the possibility of tampering, such as shining a torch on to the controller to prevent it from activating.
Detection field The Berker control has a very dense, horseshoe shaped 220° detection angle of 220, comprising 4 planes with over 145 sectors and 580 switching segments, as well as additional crawl-under protection. Extent of the detection field: 16 x 20 m see diagram The 4 monitoring planes are defined as follows: 0 m to approx. 3.0 m 1st plane from approx. 3.0 m to approx. 7.0 m 2nd plane from 16m rd approx. 7.0 m to approx. 11 m 3 plane from 580 switching segments approx. 11 m to approx. 16 m 4th plane from Crawl-under protection approx. -0.4 m to 0 m The ranges relate to the recommended mounting height of 2.4 m, sensor head aligned horizontally, direction of movement laterally across the Berker control, sufficient temperature difference between moving body and surroundings on level ground.
ne
The optical alignment of the sensor head allows you to adapt the unit to specific on-site conditions. Any heat sources triggering unwanted activation can be suppressed by means of the adjustable sensitivity and the self-adhesive masking elements.
When mounting the Berker control make sure the controller lens is not pointing towards the sun (sensor may be damaged). In a horizontal position the detection beams may point directly at the sun (see illustration). It is therefore advisable to protect the sensor head against exposure to direct sunlight prior to mounting it on the terminating outlet.
Pla
Operating principle The Berker control responds to heat movement, such as that triggered by people or motor vehicles. The digital processing of movement signals in the integrated processor means interference is largely suppressed. It activates when consumers, such as lights, are detected. The unit remains on as long as movements are detected, otherwise the Berker control switches off at the end of the pre-set delay time. A short-time service of 0.5 sec. can additionally be set. This makes it possible to operate acoustic signal generators to monitor an entrance door (bell/gong) and lock it for a programmemable immunity time of 1 sec. - 10 min. until the next movement. The visual indicator signals the response of the unit. With the adjustable twilight switch you activate the switching function only as from a desired activation brightness, or you programme daytime operation.
827 524 00
BERKER CONTROL berker control
37,9 52,7
Terminating outlet The terminating outlet of the Berker control®unit is fitted with 6 cable glands, for custom cable entries from above, below, left, right and rear. Before installing the terminating outlet, open up the two condensate drains at the bottom (do not do this if installing in dusty rooms).
µ
L
N
60 88,3 103
Switch-on by timer Timer programmed switch-on of the controller. For timer programmed switch-on of the Berker control® unit a non-brightness-dependent switching operation is executed for the pre-set delay time.
L N
N
N µ L BU BR BK
Electrical connections Connections executed as plug-in terminals. (BK) black: L (phase) (BU) blue: N (neutral conductor) (BR) brown: µ (relay, lamp cable) Note: When using energy saving lamps, consider high inrush currents. If necessary use inrush current limiter order no. 0185. Controller operation/CONTINUOUSLY ON The "S" switch allows changeovers between controller operation and CONTINUOUSLY ON.
L N S
µ
L
Switch-on by timer Timer programmed activation and shutdown of the Berker control®unit. No switching operation of the Berker control®unit is performed, because only the load is switched on or off.
L N
N
µ
L
Parallel circuit with automatic staircase lighting switch or remote control switch Lighting is switched by automatic units or Berker control® units.
L N T
N
µ
L
Controller operation (monitoring)/ CONTINUOUSLY ON The "S" switch allows changeovers between controller operation and CONTINUOUSLY ON. When the Berker control®unit is switched on and CONTINUOUSLY ON is set, the neon lamp unit lights up.
L N S
N
µ
Switch off Using "S1" or "S2" switch. When switching back on, "S1" activates a switching operation of the Berker control®unit for the pre-set delay time. "S2" does not do this, as only the load is switched on or off.
S2 S1
µ
L
Operation of timer or flash relay Extension of delay time or operation of a clock relay (e.g. for flash circuit).
L N
Controller operation/CONTINUOUSLY ON changeover switching The "S" switch allows changing over between controller operation and CONTINUOUSLY ON.
S
N
µ
L
Operation of a relay or contact maker For potential-free NO and NC contacts and to increase switching capacity.
L N
Suppressor Order no. 0123
L
L N S
µ
L
L N
N
N
N
µ
L
Connection of multiple Berker control units - "with intelligent load linking" Caution: All parallel connected Berker control Intelligent units must run on the same phase. load linking T Parallel connection does not increase the max. connected load. The built-in microprocessor in conjunction with a voltmeter on the load cable means that all N µ L N µ L parallel connected Berker control units detect the switching on of a light. As long as a movement is detected by a Berker control unit, the lighting remains on. The delay time is restarted every time a movement is detected in the relevant Berker control unit. It expires only when no more movement is detected. The delay time is determined by the Berker control unit with the longest remaining time. This makes it possible to construct a controller system comprising units with equal rights, with no mutual interference. L
N
N
µ
L
With push-button (NC) Existing switches can be replaced by a push-button "T". Pressing the push-button once for min. 1 sec. activates a non-brightness-dependent switching operation for the pre-set delay time. Pressing repeatedly = additional functions.
L N T
N µ
L
Changeover switching Existing changeover switches can be replaced by push-button "T" (NO). Pressing the push-button once for min. 1 sec. activates a non-brightness-dependent switching operation for the set delay time. Pressing repeatedly = additional functions.
L N T
T
N
µ
L
With push-button (NO) Pressing push-button "T" (NO) once for min. 0.5 sec. activates a non-brightness-dependent switching operation for the pre-set delay time.
L N T
N µ
L
Auto/manual operation with series switch S1 open, S2 open: all off. S1 closed, S2 closed: CONTINUOUSLY ON S1 closed S2 open: controller operation
L N S1 S2
N
µ
L
Auto manual mode with 3-step switch 1 Controller operation 2 All Off 3 CONTINUOUS ON
L N S
123
N
µ
L
Additional functions The Berker control unit permits 4 different operating modes, using push-button (NC) in the lead cable: Press 1x: delay Press 2x: Press 3x: Press 4x:
non-brightness-dependent switch-on for the pre-set time, then brightness-dependent controller operation. the Berker control unit switches on for 4 hours, then brightness-dependent controller operation. the Berker control unit switches off for 4 hours, then brightness-dependent controller operation. test mode: brightness evaluation is disabled. The Berker control unit switches on for approx. 3 seconds when a movement is detected.
Limit cut-out Once the Berker control unit has switched on, the brightness is no longer evaluated. To prevent the lighting from remaining on when there is continuous movement in the detection range (e.g. after dawn), the unit is fitted with a limit cut-out. The delay time (time in which the light remains on after no more movement is detected) is shortened depending on the overall on time. On time Delay time Up to 60 min. Set time Up to 70 min. 4 minutes Up to 75 min. 2 minutes Up to 80 min. 1 min. Up to 85 min. 30 sec. Up to 90 min. 15 sec. 90 min. cut-out The Berker control®unit thus cuts out after 90 minutes at the latest, even if there is continuous movement in the detection field. It is switched back on if the brightness falls below the pre-set value and there is movement.
T24
T24
Controller CONTROLLER MOUNTING INSTRUCTIONS Installation instructions Operating principle Controllers respond to heat movement in the infrared light band. It is in this range that the human body radiates heat. Lamps such as incandescent and halogen lamps etc. also emit considerable amounts of heat in this range too, however. As a result, the heat movement of people, animals or light sources can trip the controller, which then switches on consumers such as lighting. The unit remains on as long as movements are detected, otherwise the controller switches off at the end of the pre-set delay time. To prevent lights installed within the detection range tripping the controller, the controller response is delayed by 3 seconds.
Important planning criteria for controller installation The mounting height of the controller as set out in the tables should be complied with, as failure to do so will result in restricted range or excessive range. At the recommended mounting height the detection height can be adjusted, depending on the controller, by means of tilting and locking and using the hoods, covers, masks and adhesive labels supplied, thereby avoiding unwanted switching. The ranges of the controllers/controller system sensors may vary due to the effects of weather conditions (fog, rain, snow). Where there is little temperature difference between the object being detected and the ambient temperature, range restrictions may occur. Extension units
BLC controller 180 flush mounted BLC controller 180 BLC controller 180 comfort Controller 180 system mounting Limitation of detection range to only 90° with masking element or by different mounting height (at 2.2 m mounting)
When using BLC controllers with BLC extension units, a generous overlap between the detection ranges should be allowed in order to ensure detection.
23
Controller surface mounted
N
L Bewegungsrichtung
Range
Controller 70 Limitation of detection range by locked settings for ranges 4, 6 or 8 m.
max. min.
~4 m
~6 m
~8 m
Adjustment of range
Automatic Controller Plus 110 16 m
Limitation of detection range with masks and and covers, also by tilting and rotating.
15 m
20 m
25 m 110° Without masks and covers
180°
15 m
90°
15 m 60° With masks and narrow covers
90° With masks and covers
Test operation 2,5 m
Test
15 m
On
12 Min
300
16 m With horizontal cover 110°
3 Min 10
7m 25° With masks and wide covers
LUX
TIME
Switch on for 1 sec.
Controller system sensors 180 and 240 Limitation of detection range as desired with hood, also by tilting and rotating. If the controller system sensor 240 is tilted, the detection angle should be reduced to 180°, otherwise excessive lateral range will occur. Lamps within the detection range The lamp being switched must not be placed in the immediate vicinity of or underneath the controller, because the radiated heat can cause unwanted switching. There should be adequate distance between the light and the controller.
Optimum mounting location For optimum detection and range for movement, Berker controllers should be installed laterally to the direction of walking. The controller's detection beams are then crossed laterally. When using multiple controllers and/or extension units, the detection ranges of the individual controllers should overlap, in order to ensure optimum monitoring. If the controller is placed such that the person being detected approaches the unit only frontally, range restriction is to be expected. For this a controller with enhanced approach response (controller 70, Berker control) should be configured.
Detection for large areas For detection in larger areas (squares, long corridors etc.) in which the detection angle of an individual controller is not sufficient, controllers with extension units, a controller system, networked Berker controls or radio controllers should be deployed, with the detection ranges of the individual devices overlapping. Parallel connection of controllers is not advisable, because it may cause so-called reciprocal action (switching back on again after a short cut-out of approx. 3 sec).
T25 T25
Tilt 95°
360°
Controller CONTROLLER MOUNTING INSTRUCTIONS Installation instructions Curtaining effect and range optimization By tilting the controller downwards its range can be steplessly adjusted. Detection then occurs only in the close-up range. When using the controller system sensor 240, detection can be further optimized by reducing the sensitivity.
Recommended responsiveness setting
-
+
-
+
-
+
2,4 m
Tilt 50°
Curtain effect 1.5 m
Installation location The controller should be protected against direct rainfall, because rain drops on the lens may cause unwanted switching. A special protective screen in front of the controller protects it against the effects of thermal influence.
30,5 21
10,5 21,2
Accessories Use of the mounting accessories allows the controllers to be fixed at difficult
60 68
During installation When installing the controller, it should be ensured that the lens is not exposed to direct sunlight (otherwise the sensor may be damaged). In a horizontal position the detection beams may point directly at the sun (see illustration). It is therefore advisable to keep the sensor head away from sunlight until it is mounted on the housing body.
31,2
Ceiling mounting angle for 2 Controllers/sensors
Mounting angle for ceiling
65 71,4 100
Mast fastening Edge mounting device
Controller system The controller system can be used wherever multiple controllers are used to switch the same load. The controller system is installed as described below. Connection: Important! Each controller system sensor has a brightness sensor, but only one brightness sensor may be connected within a system, i.e. the "Lx" terminal is assigned to only one controller system sensor. Only this controller system sensor measures the brightness and forwards this value to the controller system power section for evaluation. In figures 1 and 2 the controller system sensor with the active brightness sensor is identified by an "X".
2
1 L N
1
+ -
+ S Lx
x
Lx Lxo L
x + S Lx Lxo 2939
Lx S
N 2
1
+ S Lx Lxo
L
+ -
+ S Lx
2
Lx Lxo
. . . . . .
2939
. . . . . .
L N
Lx S
max.
N
+ S Lx
+ S Lx
+ S Lx Lxo
Connection of multiple controller system powerpacks to a single controller system sensor cable is not permissible, malfunctions will result. To increase the connected load use a contact maker.
max.
Cabling Connection in parallel as per Figure 1 or in star configuration as per Figure 2. Mixed forms are also permissible. Communication lines are recommended for connection of the controller system sensors, e.g. JY-ST-Y 2 x2x0.8 or YR 4x0.8
Connecting terminals: +,- : Power supply 15V=. S: Switch signal Lx : Brightness signal Lxo: Unconnected terminal, which can be used to loop-through the Lx signal.
1 1
max. 100 m
2 .... 8
2
System-Leistungsteil
System-Leistungsteil
max. 100 m
max. 100 m
. . . . . 8
max. 100 m
Crawl-under protection The controller system sensor 240 has separate crawl-under protection. This means that movements underneath the controller system sensor are also detected, right up to the house wall. This results in an even higher degree of security.
Diagnosis LED To enable the controller system to be tested accurately, the controller system sensors are fitted with a testing and diagnosis LED. This LED lights up in response to every movement, regardless of brightness. This enables the functioning to be checked and the detection range adjusted without switching on the load.
Limit switch-off If the controller system power pack is switched on, the response brightness is no longer evaluated. However, so that even when there is constant motion in the detection area (e.g. after dawn) the lighting does not remain switched on unnecessarily, the controller system power pack is equipped with a limit switch-off. The delay time (time in which the light still remains switched on after no more motion is detected) is automatically shortened depending on the entire on-time. The controller system power pack thus switches off (even if there is constant movement in the detection area of the controller system sensors), at the latest after 90 minutes. It switches on again when the brightness drops below the set response brightness and there is motion in the detection area.
total on-time up to 60 min. up to 70 min. up to 75 min. up to 80 min. up to 85 min. up to 90 min. 90 min.
shortening of the delay time setting 4 minutes 2 minutes 1 min. 30 sec. 15 sec. Switch-off
T26 T26
Controller CONTROLLER MOUNTING INSTRUCTIONS Installation instructions Connection diagrams Controllers/controller system power pack 230 V By combining controllers/controller systems with push-buttons or switches, different switching variants can be implemented L N
L
L
L
N
N
N S2 S1
S
N
Controller (control) / CONTINUOUSLY ON The "S" switch allows changing over between controller operation and CONTINUOUSLY ON. When the controller is switched on and CONTINUOUSLY ON is set, the neon lamp unit is lit.
S
T
S
L
N
L
Controller / CONTINUOUSLY ON The "S" switch allows changing over between controller operation and CONTINUOUSLY ON.
N
S
L
Switch off Using "S1" or "S2" switch. When switching back on, "S1" activates a switching operation of the controller for the pre-set delay time. "S2" does not, as only the load is switched on or off.
N
Controller / CONTINUOUSLY ON changeover switching The "S" switch allows changing over between controller operation and CONTINUOUSLY ON.
L
L
L
L
N
N
N
N
T
T
N
L
Changeover switching Existing changeover switches can be replaced by push-button "T" (NCC). Pressing the "T" (NCC) push-button once for min. 1 sec. activates a non-brightness-dependent switching operation for the set delay time.
T
N
L N
L
Multiple controllers / controller systems on one consumer Pressing the push-button "T" NCC for min. 1 sec. activates a non-brightness-dependent switching operation for the set delay time.
S1 S2
N
L
Auto/manual operation with series switch S1 open, S2 open: all off. S1 closed, S2 closed: CONTINUOUSLY ON S1 closed S2 open: controller operation.
L
L
L
N
N
N
L
S
1 2 3
N
L
Auto manual mode with 3-step switch 1 Controller operation 2 All Off 3 CONTINUOUS ON
L N
T T
N
L
With push-button (NCC) Pressing the "T" push-button NCC for min. 1 sec. activates a non-brightness-dependent switching operation for the pre-set delay time. L N
Suppressor Order no. 0123
N
L
Operation of a relay or contact maker For potential-free NOC and NC and to increase switching capacity.
T27 T27
N
L
Switch-on by timer Timer programmed switch-on of the controller.
N
L
Parallel circuit with automatic staircase lighting switch or remote control switch Lighting is switched by automatic units or controller / controller system.
N
L
Operation of timer or flash relay Extension of the delay time or operation of a clock relay (e.g. for flash circuit).
1-10 V/DALI TECHNOLOGY 1-10 v technology Control units 1-10 V Increasingly in lighting engineering, electronic ballasts and Tronic transformers fitted with a 1-10 V interface are being deployed to operate lighting (such as fluorescent lamps, 12V halogen lamps). If multiple devices are connected using a single control wire with 1-10 V control inputs, the 1-10 V electronic potentiometer can be used to adjust the brightness from a remote location. The push-button control unit 1-10 V built-in and the BLC can be used to adjust the lighting to individual needs from different points. In this way, extensive and complex light systems can be implemented. The control units 1-10 V (electronic rotary potentiometer, electronic touch rotary potentiometer 1-10 V and push-button control unit 1-10 V built-in) from Berker are used to switch the electronic ballast mains voltage on and off as well as for problem-free adjustment of the control voltage at the 1-10 V interface of the devices. The 1-10 V electronic potentiometer is covered by a centre plate with regulator knob and frame, in keeping with the familiar dimmer design. Electronic rotary potentiometer 1-10 V
L N
Max. 5 two-lamp electronic ballasts 10 one-lamp electronic ballasts can be switched with no additional relay/ contactor or inrush current limiters.
Example: The total of electronic ballast control currents with the electronic rotary potentiometer 1-10 V may be max. 50 mA, and the sum total of electronic ballast load currents (consider the inrush current) may be max. 6 A. Follow the ballast and lighting manufacturers' specifications regarding the control and load currents (with inrush currents). Typical: Osram electronic ballast 2 x 58 W, control current IST = 6 mA, Load current IL = 0.55 A per electronic ballast. 83 electronic ballasts are connected IST = 83 x 0.6 mA = approx. 50 mA; IL = 83 x 0.55 A = 45,7 A Result: The control contact is fully loaded. Since electronic ballasts have an electrolytic capacitor in their input circuit, high inrush currents are to be expected. If the permissible number of ballasts is exceeded (see table), a contactor must be used to switch them, or an inrush current limiter, order no. 0185 must be connected in series upstream of the respective ballast.
Electronic rotary potentiometer 1-10 V
Maximum number of electronic ballasts 58 W that can be switched without additional fittings. Electronic potentiometer 1-10 V: 5 two-lamp or 10 one-lamp Osram electronic ballasts 15 two-lamp or 30 one-lamp electronic ballasts Insta 42 W, 13 Berker Tronictransformer 20-105 W Touch control unit 1-10 V built-in: 5 two-lamp or 10 one-lamp electronic ballasts Insta 42 W
289110
Basic brightness adjustable using potentiometer
+- L 1 2 3 4
+
-
Electronic ballast
Push-button control unit 1-10V built-in
L N
L N
To other electronic ballasts and/or Tronic transformers with 1-10 V control input
Push-button (NOC)
Switch-off
Technical data Electronic rotary potentiometer 1-10 V order no. 289110 Max. control voltage UST max. 12 V Min. control voltage UST min. 0.7 W Max. control current IST 50 mA Max. switching capacity of mains switch 1380 VA or 6 A at 230/240 V~, 50/60 Hz Fine-wire fuse F 500 H 250 Operating temperature 5 to 35°C Terminals Screw-type terminals for max. 2.5 mm2 or 2 x 1.5 mm2
5031
Pushbutton (NOC)
1 a
5031
On
Technical data Nominal voltage Control voltage Max. control current IST Switching contact Ohmic load Electronic ballast, transformers Short-circuit protection No-load proof Electrical isolation 1-10 V Operating temperature Terminals Dimensions (L x W x H)
289610
+1 - 10 V Electr: ballast or Tronic transformer with 1-10V interface L 230 V= 1-10V N To other electronic ballasts and/or Tronic transformers with 1-10 V control input
ballast, Tronic trans+1-10 V Electr: former with 1-10V interface L 230 V~ 1-10 V N
Max. 8 two-lamp Osram or 16 one-lamp Osram electronic ballasts can be switched with no additional relay/ contactor or inrush current limiters.
To other extension units Operation with extension units
Basic brightness adjustable using potentiometer
ballast, Tronic trans+1-10 V Electr: former with 1-10V interface L 230 V~ 1-10 V N
ballast, Tronic trans+1-10 V Electr: former with 1-10V interface L 230 V~ 1-10 V N
1 L
+- L
Changeover-switching
2872 Basic brightness adjustable using potentiometer
2907
Memory
Electronic touch rotary potentiometer 1-10 V
2 b
Push-button control unit 1-10 V built-in
Off
Electronic touch rotary potentiometer 1-10 V e.g. two operating points L N
BLC extension unit, push-button function
Push-button control unit 1-10 V built-in Order no. 2872 230 V~, 50/60 Hz 1 -10 V 200 mA Relay 2300 W type-dependent via 10 A circuit breaker Yes 2 kV base installation 5 to 50°C Screw-type terminals for max. 2.5 mm2 or 2 x 1.5 mm2 175 x 42 x 18 mm
Tronic transformer with 1-10 V interface on push-button control unit 1-10 V built-in
Technical data Electronic touch rotary potentiometer 1-10 V order no. 289610 Max. control voltage UST max. 12 V Min. control voltage UST min. 0.7 W Max. control current IST 50 mA Max. switching capacity of mains switch 1380 VA or 6 A at 230/240 V~, 50/60 Hz Fine-wire fuse F 500 H 250 Operating temperature 5 to 35°C Terminals Screw-type terminals for max. 2.5 mm2 or 2 x 1.5 mm2
L N
Push-button (NOC)
BLC extension unit, push-button funct.
5031
2907
Push-button control unit 1-10 V built-in 2872 Basic brightness adjustable using potentiometer Memory
1 L
Operation with extension units
Off
On
ballast, Tronic trans+1-10 V Electr: former with 1-10V interface L 230 V~ 1-10 V N
To other extension units
Push-button control unit 1-10 V built-in with signal amplifier 1-10 V 5031
2907
Push-button control unit 1-10 V built-in 2872 Basic brightness adjustable using potentiometer
I
Memory
1 L
To other extension units
Off
On
BLC extension unit, push-button function
I If control currents >200mA fit a signal amplifier (e.g. type Osram DIM-SA)
A1
Check the load current ! A2 Operation with extension units
Installation contactor N
ballast, Tronic trans+1-10 V Electr: former with 1-10V interface L 230 V~ 1-10 V N I = max. 200 mA Electr: ballast, Tronic trans+1-10 V former with 1-10V interface L 230 V~ 1-10 V N
+
-
ballast, Tronic trans+1-10 V Electr: former with 1-10V interface L 230 V~ 1-10 V N ballast, Tronic trans+1-10 V Electr: former with 1-10V interface L 230 V~ 1-10 V N
Out
I
Push-button (NOC) BLC extension unit
In
L N
+
-
Signal amplifier 1-10 V N L
L1 L2 L3
To other electronic ballasts or Tronic transformers with 1-10 V interface
Push-button control unit 1-10 V built-in / daylight-sensitive control (constant light control) L N Push-button (NOC)
BLC extension unit
5031
ballast, Tronic trans+1-10 V Electr: former with 1-10V interface L 230 V~ 1-10 V N
Push-button control unit 1-10 V built-in 2872
2907
Basic brightness adjustable using potentiometer Memory Off
1 L
I1 = max. 200 mA
To other extension units Actuation of electronic ballasts and/or Tronic transformers with 1-10 V interface either for dimming using built-in touch control unit 1-10 V or for daylight-sensitive control using a mini light stabiliser. The mode is selected by the dual off/changeover multi-rocker switch. Operation with extension units
On
303808 For dual
multi-rocker switch off/ change-over with full rocker
Osram mini light stabiliser (type: DIM MICO) + I2 = max. 50 mA
I1
ballast, Tronic trans+1-10 V Electr: former with 1-10V interface L 230 V~ 1-10 V N ballast, Tronic trans+1-10 V Electr: former with 1-10V interface L 230 V~ 1-10 V N
I2
T28
T28
1-10 V TECHNOLOGY/ELECTRONIC BALLASTS dali/electronic ballast/Tronic transformer Tronic transformer with 1-10 V interface In complex modern lighting systems, lamps are increasingly being operated by way of electronic ballasts (German:"EVGs") fitted with a 1-10 V interface. This permits convenient dimming even of high power outputs from one central point or from several distributed points. This 1-10 V interface is now offered with the Tronic transformer. Up to 50 Tronic transformers with 1-10 V interface can be regulated on the control side with an electronic rotary potentiometer 1-10 V and up to 250 with the push-button control unit 1-10 V built-in. This allows electronic ballasts to be combined with 1-10 V interfaces. When dimensioning a system, the control and load currents must be considered separately!
230 V Connection
Technical data Nominal voltage Primary rated current at full load Power range Power factor Efficiency l Rated output voltage Softstart Control current Operating temperature ta
Tronic transformer with 1-10 V interface Order no. 2977 Housing temperature tc 75°C at maximum load Secondary lead max. 2 m long, min 1.5 mm2 Short-circuit protection electronic, automatic restart Overload/temp. protection Automatic power reduction Fire prevention cut-out in case of fault Open circuit Protected Dimmable via 1-10 V interface Protection class II Terminals Screw-type terminals for max. 2.5 mm2 or 2 x 1.5 mm2
12 V connection
1 -10 V interface
230 V~, 50 Hz 0.45 A 20-105 W 0.96 95% 11.8 V Bulb-preserving switch-on approx. 0.8 mA max. 50°C at maximum load
Application: e.g. in waiting rooms, outside of conference rooms, doctors' surgeries, etc. L Info pilot lamp insert N
Info pilot lamp insert
Info pilot lamp with green cover L
Surgery
N
Continuous illumination L N
Info pilot lamp insert
Changeover switch
Cutting template
55 55,7
2949
Please enter
Self-production of text and graphical signs Using a computer and appropriate software, it is possible to produce your own text and/or graphical signs.They can be printed in colour or monochrome black using an inkjet or laser printer, on transparent projector sheets.
25
Info pilot lamp The info pilot lamp is marked by uniform illumination and clear visibility (even from the side). The labelled sheet selected from the supplied range can optionally be placed above or below the factory-fitted milky cover, depending on whether the notice (or pictograph) is to be visible at all times or visible only when the light signal is on.By the use of a monitoring switch, the on state of the info pilot lamp can also be also indicated at a different location.
1-10 V control module
3036 red
2949
Technical data Rated voltage Nominal current LED power Switching frequency Service life Light colour Operating temperature Index of protection Terminals Order no.: insert Order no.: cover
Insert and info pilot lamp cover with 5 label sheets 230 V~ , 50/60 Hz approx. 25 mA approx. 800 mW any 25,000 hours white 10 to 30°C IP20 2 Screw-type terminals for max. 2.5 mm or 2 x 1.5 mm2 2949 1345 ..
Rotary potentiometer DALI (Digital Addressable Lighting Interface) L N L
Rotary potentiometer DALI
N
2897
Switch-off L N
L
Control and load cables must not be laid in the same cable conduit. The brightness of illumination when there are no DALI telegrams (PowerON-Level) and on power failure of the DALI system power (SystemFailure-Level) are saved integrally within the electronic ballast and cannot be changed by the DALI potentiometer.
Rotary potentiometer DALI 2897
N
Mains power unit
Changeover switch
Info pilot lamp insert
(DIN IEC 60929)
2
da
da
da
da
2949
3036 red
To other rotary potentiometers DALI (max.64)
Electronic ballast or Tronic da transformer with DALI interface DALI da DALI L
N
Control circuit The neon lamp lights only when the info light signal is switched on. Remove detachable contact lug from the neon lamp unit.
Changeover switching
Technical data DALI voltage (IEC 60929) Current input DALI control line length max.
Electronic ballast for T2 mini fluorescent lamps Ï 7 mm (not dimmable) Mounting hole distance = 207 mm
N L
Fine-wire fuse Operating temperature Terminals
L 3036 N
red
299906 299908 299911 299913 Switch-off
Technical data Type Order no.: Lamp length Number of lamps per electronic ballast Current input Nominal voltage (~) Nominal voltage (=) Inrush current Operating temperature Ta Housing temperature Tc Stabilisation time Housing dimensions (L x W x H) Output cable length Terminals Recommended connection lead for effective cable clamping Protection class Dimmable Protective functions/Lamp overheating Automatic cut-out for Short and open circuit Fire prevention EMC tested for Radio interference suppression
T29 T29
L N
230 V~
To other Tronic transformers or electronic ballasts with DALI interface
Rotary potentiometer DALI order no. 2897 16V= (9.5...22.5V=) less than 2 mA at 0,5 mm2 100 m 2 at 0,75 mm 100 to 150 m at 1,5 mm2 over 150 m F 500 H 250 5 to 35°C 2 Screw-type terminals for max. 2 x 2.5 mm or 1 x 4 mm2
T2 mini flurecent lamp Distance electronic ballast to the lamp approx. 1,5 m
Electronic ballast 6W 299906 219 mm 1x6W 30 mA
Electronic ballast 8W 299908 320 mm 1x8W 40 mA
Electronic ballast Electronic ballast 13W 299913 523 mm 1 x 13 W 70 mA 230/240 V~, 50/60 Hz 176 - 274 V Max. 8 A (select mains switch accordingly) max. 50°C max. 75°C approx. 1 sec. 220 x 28 x 16 mm max. 1.5 m max. 1.5 mm2 Mains lead: round cable e.g.: H05VV-F 2x0.75 flat cables e.g.: H05VV-H2-F 2x0.75 Lamp lead: round cable e.g.: H05VV-F 4x0.75 flat cables e.g.: H05VV-H2-F 2x0.75 II No Lamp ageing, lamp lighting error, excessive pin current, defect in filament Electronic cut-out input side cut-out in case of fault EN 61047, EN 61000-4-2/4/5/11, EN 55015 Cut-out to EN 55015
Electronic ballast 11W 299911 422 mm 1 x 11 W 50 mA
TRONIC-TRANSFORMER Tronic transformer Tronic transformer for 12 V halogen lamps Bulb-preserving soft startup Very low noise Short circuit proof No fuse changing Automatic restart Overload and excess temperatureproof by power reduction Input and output electrically isolated
Safety extra low voltage (SELV) Tronic dimmer, universal dimmer and Tronic transformer
are specially co-ordinated for use together (no interference)
Berker Igel also dimmable with LV dimmers Flicker free Light weight Low loss Output voltage almost independent of load
Installation dimensions, Tronic transformers Housing dimensions in mm:
B
Do not use dimmers made by other manufacturers, as a risk of fire cannot be ruled out!
Min. ceiling opening (Standard ceiling height 78 mm)
C
A
Fixing holes E D
H
F G
Type Tronic transformer 10-40 W Tronic transformer 20-70 W (square) Tronic transformer 20-105 W (flat) Tronic transformer 35-105 W (flat) Berker Igel 20-105 W Tronic transformer 20-105W / 1-10V Tronic transformer 20-150 W (flat) Tronic transformer 50-200 W (flat) Tronic touch dimmer built-in 700 W Tronic booster built-in 700 W LV booster built-in 600 VA
H 40 53 54 53 55 59 60 63 63 63 63
G 67 60 148 148 147 148 181,5 181,5 181,5 181,5
F 3,4 3,5 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8
E 3,4 3,5 4,5 4,5 3,5 4,5 4,5 4,5 4,5 4,5 4,5
D 32 32 15 33 32 36 36 36 36
C 35,5 48 42 42 50 42 42 48,5 48,5 48,5 48,5
B 73 49 175 165 105 216 176 212 212 212 212
A 18 28 18 18 29 32 38 46 46 46 46
Order no. 2915 2918 297401 2927 2921 2977 2976 2972 2943 2868 2869
Installation configurations of Tronic transformers Distance of light from Tronic transformer up to 200°C
Tronic transformer 200W
Tronic transformers 40, 70, 105 and 150 W
25
25
10
min.100
20
20
20
up to 500°C
20
20
200
40
200
200
200
200
400
Secondary cable length The maximum permissible secondary cable length is 2 m.
Star configuration distribution and equal cable lenghts should be ensured, in order to prevent differences in brightness.
N L N
N
Tronic-Trafo AC 12V~
N L
AC 230V
L
prim : AC 230V 50/60Hz sek.: AC 11,7V eff cos f = 0.97 max 12.5 A
20 - 150W 20-150 W ta = 50° 2971
Cable length < 6 x 2 m
Voltage drop on secondary cable at 40 kHz Do not use single wires if possible! Or twist pairs to reduce capacitance. Leitungstheorie
Tronic - Trafo
AC 12V~
L
AC 230V
Reasons: Compliance with DIN VDE EN 55015 (RFI suppression) Faiure to comply with the specified cable length will result in malfunctions in appliances such as radios, mobile phones, etc.. Using the 6gang distributor splits the transmitted power across several branches and minimises it.
prim : AC 230V 50/60Hz sek.: AC 11,7V eff cos f = 0.97 max 12.5 A
20 - 150W 20-150 W ta = 50° 2976
Skineffekt Low frequency 50 Hz
High frequency 40 kHz Electrons move away from the centre of the conductor to the surface, the conductor cross-section is no longer fully utilised. Consequence: increased resistance
Electron flow evenly distributed over cable cross-section.
Reactance Xc dependent on frequency f Xc 10000 9000 8000 7000 6000 5000 4000 3000 2000 1000 0 2,5 5 10 15 20 25
30
35
f 40
Tip: Choose a flexible cable!
N L N
AC 230V
L
Tronic - Trafo prim : AC 230V 50/60Hz sek.: AC 11,7V eff cos f = 0.97 max 12.5 A
20 - 150W 20-150 W ta = 50° 2971
AC 12V~
230 V
Do not allow primary and secondary cables to cross or to lie parallel to each other, otherwise the RFI suppression will not be active. To avoid noise interfering with radios, mobile phones, etc..
Overvoltage protection module
SEC AC 12 V
N
0142
Tronic rotary dimmer 2874
L
L A
Switch-off
SEC AC 12 V
L2 PRI AC 230 V
L1
L N
PRI AC 230 V
Tronic transformers are spike proof up to 1500 V. To protect against higher overvoltages (occurring for example when fluorescent lamps, gas discharge lamps and under other inductive loads for are switched off), separate load circuits should be installed for Tronic transformers and those consumers. It is advisable to install an additional overvoltage protection in systems of this kind.
1 overvoltage protection module is sufficient for 10 Tronic transformers. In dimmed installations, connect overvoltage protection module before dimmer (see wiring diagram)
Switch-off
Technical data Rated alternating voltage Leakage current Is (8/20)
230 V~, 50/60 Hz 4.5 kA (1x) 1.0 kA (100x)
Overvoltage protection module Residual voltage Is (1kA) Operating temperature Connections
Order no. 0142 approx. 1000 V -25 to 80°C Flexible cable 1.5 mm2 200 mm long
T30 T30
Rated alternating voltage Effective output voltage Mains current
Power factor l Efficiency Number of lights
Housing Housing temperature
Weight Fire / Cut-out Short-circuit-proof Restart Overload and excess temperature-proof Protective insulation Safety Radio interference suppression Cable recommended H 05 VV-F 2 x ... Open circuit Spike protection Bulb-preserving soft start Test mark
VDE
10
Suitable for installation in furniture Dimmable phase cut-off Dimmable phase cut-on
With Tronic and universal dimmers With LV dimmers
* The Berker Igel can be dimmed with the following dimmers Designation Rotary dimmer LV with soft lock Tronic rotary dimmer with soft lock Universal rotary dimmer with soft lock BLC push-button dimmer LV BLC universal touch dimmer Universal-Serientastdimmer Universal touch dimmer RMD Plus Universal booster RMD Plus Tronic touch dimmer built-in Corded slide dimmer LV Radio universal dimmer flush-mounted Radio adapter plug dimmer Radio universal corded dimmer Radio universal dimmer built-in Radio universal dimmer RMD Univ. dim actuator 1gang 50-210 W/VA flush-mounted 75341003 Univ. dim actuator 1gang 50-500 W/VA RMD Univ. dim actuator 2gang 2x300 W/VA RMD Univ. dim actuator 4gang 4x210 W/VA RMD Tronic dim actuator 1gang 20-215 W Tronic dim actuator 1gang 20-500 W
T31
Order No.: 2873 2874 286110, 283410, 283411 2904 2902 2901 016701 016501 2943 2744.. 94550200 01781009 0128 0181 94550100
75311007 75312007 75314017 75331002 75331005
X
Release version
ab R2 ab R2
35 - 105 W No.: 2927
20 - 105 W No.: 2977
20 - 150 W No.: 2976
50 - 200 W No.: 2972
X
20 - 105 W No.: 297401
Rated power / Ambient temperature
Cubic design X Screw type terminals (X) = Primary side only Cable clamp 10-40 W at ambient temp. 50°C X 20-60 W at ambient temp. 50°C 20-70 W at ambient temp. 40°C 20-70 W at ambient temp. 50°C 20-105 W at ambient temp. 50°C (45°C) 20-150 W at ambient temp. 50°C 50-200 W at ambient temp. 50°C 230 V~(also 240 V~), 50/60 Hz [230 V~, 50 Hz and 230 V=] X at 230 V~ 11.8 at 40 W, 0.18 A at 230 V~ X at 70 W, 0.33 A at 230 V~ at 105 W, 0.49 A (0.45 A) at 230 V~ at 150 W, 0.71 A at 230 V~ at 200 W, 0.95 A at 230 V~ 0.96 X 95% X 5Wx 8 10 W x 4 20 W x 2 35 W x 1 50 W x 75 W x 100 W x Fracture-proof, heat resistant X unpotted, repairable X at 40 W max. 85°C X at 60 W max. 75°C at 70 W max. 90°C at 105 W max. 75°C (80°C) [90°C] at 150 W max. 75°C at 200 W max. 65°C approx. in grams 65 Input side in case of fault X Electronic cut-out X Automatic after elimination of fault X by power reduction X Protection class II X VDE 0860 (07 12/24) X VDE 0875 part 2 X secondary: max. 2 m (1 m), min. 2 x mm2 0.75 Protected X to VDE 0712 part 25 X No current spikes X X X
20 - 105 W No.: 2921
Design
10 - 40 W No.: 2915
Tronic transformer
20 - 70 W No.: 2918
TRONIC TRANSFORMERS IN SUMMARY overview Tronic transformer
X X X
X X X
X (X) X
X X X
X X X
X X X
(X)
X
X
X
X X
X X (X) 11.7 11.3
(X) 11.8
X 50Hz X 11.8 11.8 11.7
(X)
(X)
X [X] 11.5
X (X)
X X
X X 17 7 3 2 1
X X
X 92% 21 10 5 3 2 1 1 X X
X X 21 10 5 3 2 1 1 X X
X X 21 10 5 3 2 1 1 X X
X X 21 10 5 3 2 1 1 X X
[X]
(X)
(X)
X
X X 30 15 7 4 3 2 1 X X
X X X 40 20 10 5 4 2 2 X X
X X X 70 160 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X 0.75 1.5 X X X X X X X X X X X X X *
*
150 X X X X X X X (1.5) X X X X X X X
Production date (from week / year) 22 02
150 X X X X X X X 1.5 X X X X X X X
220 X X X X X X X 1.5 X X X
190 X X X X X X X (2.5) X X X X X X X
X 420 X X X X X X X 2.5 X X X X X X X
Details Igel Minimum load 50 W Igel Minimum load 50 W
Igel Minimum load 50 W
22 02 22 02
T32
TRONIC DIMMING TRANSFORMER Tronic dimming transformers Tronic dimming transformer Tronic dimming transformer boosters
Tronic dimming transformer Tronic dimming transformer booster Rocker push-button (NOC)
Tronic dimming transformer 2856 or 2858
5031
N L
Tronic-Dimm-Trafo 35 - 105 W primär:
2856
AC 230 V~ 50 / 60 Hz 0,48A l = 0,95 11,7 V~ eff. 35-105W max. 8,5A ta < 50°C
sekundär: 100
M
M
SELV
tc = 80°C
IP30
SEC AC 12V~
L N
PRI AC 230V~
Made in Germany
Tronic dimming transformer booster 2857 or 2859 Tronic-Dimm-Trafo Leistungserweiterung 50 - 150 W primär:
2859
SEC AC 12V~
PRI AC 230V~
AC 230 V~ 50 / 60 Hz 0,68A l = 0,95
sekundär: 100
11,7 V~ eff. max. 12,5A M
50-150W ta < 50°C
M
SELV Made in Germany
IP20
Tronic dimming transformer booster 2857 or 2859 PRI AC 230V~
N L
Tronic-Dimm-Trafo Leistungserweiterung 35 - 105 W
primär:
2857
AC 230 V~ 50 / 60 Hz 0,48A l = 0,95 11,7 V~ eff. 35-105W max. 8,5A ta < 50°C
sekundär: 100
M
M
SELV
tc = 80°C
IP30
SEC AC 12V~
to further extension sets push-button (NOC)
N L
tc = 70°C
Made in Germany
Tronic dimming transformer booster 2857 or 2859 PRI AC 230V~
tc = 70°C
N L
Tronic-Dimm-Trafo Leistungserweiterung 50 - 150 W primär:
2859
SEC AC 12V~
Tronic dimming transformers and Tronic dimming transformer boosters are suitable for operating low volt halogen lamps. The Tronic dimming transformers can be switched on and dimmed using one or more push-buttons NOC. Pressing the button briefly switches the Tronic dimming transformer on and off. Pressing and holding the button makes the light brighter or darker steplessly. The brightness memory retains the last brightness setting until the next time the lights are switched on. Up to 5 Tronic dimming transformer boosters can be connected to the Tronic dimming transformer by connecting the control input of the booster with the control output of the Tronic dimming transformers. Every booster also has one control output to which up to 5 boosters can be connected. The maximum dimmable power is limited by the local power company and the circuit breaker. Please contact the power company for more information. All devices must be connected to the same phase. The maximum length of the various control wires between the devices must not exceed 20 m. 230 V and control wires must be laid separately from the secondary wires, i.e. they must not cross over or be laid parallel to each other.
AC 230 V~ 50 / 60 Hz 0,68A l = 0,95
sekundär: 100
11,7 V~ eff. max. 12,5A M
50-150W ta < 50°C
M
SELV Made in Germany
IP20
Tronic dimming transformer booster 2857 or 2859 primär:
AC 230 V~ 50 / 60 Hz 0,68A l = 0,95
sekundär: 100
11,7 V~ eff. max. 12,5A M
SELV Made in Germany
Tronic dimming transformer booster 2857 or 2859
sekundär: 100
M
M
SELV
tc = 80°C
IP30
SEC AC 12V~
AC 230 V~ 50 / 60 Hz 0,48A l = 0,95 11,7 V~ eff. 35-105W max. 8,5A ta < 50°C
PRI AC 230V~
N L
primär:
N L
tc = 70°C
PRI AC 230V~
Tronic-Dimm-Trafo 35 - 105 W 2856
Tronic-Dimm-Trafo Leistungserweiterung 50 - 150 W primär:
2859
AC 230 V~ 50 / 60 Hz 0,68A l = 0,95
sekundär: 100
11,7 V~ eff. max. 12,5A M
50-150W ta < 50°C
M
SELV Made in Germany
IP20
Made in Germany
SEC AC 12V~
Tronic-Dimm-Trafo 2856 oder 2858
5031
50-150W ta < 50°C
M
IP20
Rocker push-button (NOC)
SEC AC 12V~
PRI AC 230V~
L N
tc = 70°C
N L
Tronic-Dimm-Trafo Leistungserweiterung 50 - 150 W
2859
Tronic dimming transformer booster 2857 oder 2859
100
AC 230 V~ 50 / 60 Hz 0,48A l = 0,95 11,7 V~ eff. 35-105W max. 8,5A ta < 50°C
M
M
SELV
tc = 80°C
IP30
Use of the overvoltage protection module L N
Made in Germany
0142
Max. 5 Tronic dimming transformer boosters
2857
primär:
sekundär: 100
AC 230 V~ 50 / 60 Hz 0,48A l = 0,95 11,7 V~ eff. 35-105W max. 8,5A ta < 50°C
M
M
SELV
tc = 80°C
IP30
N L
5031
SEC AC 12V~
PRI AC 230V~
N L
Tronic-Dimm-Trafo Leistungserweiterung 35 - 105 W
Tronic dimming transformer 2856 or 2858
Rocker push-button (NOC)
Made in Germany
sekundär: 100
AC 230 V~ 50 / 60 Hz 0,48A l = 0,95 11,7 V~ eff. 35-105W max. 8,5A ta < 50°C
M
M
SELV
tc = 80°C
IP30
SEC AC 12V~
PRI AC 230V~
N L
primär:
primär:
AC 230 V~ 50 / 60 Hz 0,48A l = 0,95 11,7 V~ eff. 35-105W max. 8,5A ta < 50°C
sekundär: 100
M
M
tc = 80°C
IP30
N L
PRI AC 230V~
Tronic dimming transformer booster 2857 oder 2859 2857
Tronic-Dimm-Trafo 35 - 105 W 2856
SELV Made in Germany
Tronic dimming transformer booster 2857 or 2859
Max. 5 Tronic dimming transformer boosters Tronic-Dimm-Trafo Leistungserweiterung 35 - 105 W
PRI AC 230V~
Tronic dimming transformer booster 2857 oder 2859
SEC AC 12V~
sekundär:
2857
Tronic-Dimm-Trafo Leistungserweiterung 35 - 105 W
primär:
sekundär: 100
IP30
SEC AC 12V~
Tronic-Dimm-Trafo Leistungserweiterung 35 - 105 W
primär:
SEC AC 12V~
PRI AC 230V~
to further extension sets push-button (NOC)
N L
2857
AC 230 V~ 50 / 60 Hz 0,48A l = 0,95 11,7 V~ eff. 35-105W max. 8,5A ta < 50°C
M
M
tc = 80°C
SELV Made in Germany
Max. 5 Tronic dimming transformer boosters per control output Overvoltage protection module is sufficient for 1 Tronic dimming transformer and 9 boosters.
Made in Germany
sekundär: 100
AC 230 V~ 50 / 60 Hz 0,48A l = 0,95 11,7 V~ eff. 35-105W max. 8,5A ta < 50°C
M
M
SELV
tc = 80°C
IP30
190
44 38
Tronic-Dimm-Trafo Leistungserweiterung 35 - 105 W
primär:
2856 and 2857
42
PRI AC 230V~
N L
2857
SEC AC 12V~
Tronic dimming transformer booster 2857 oder 2859
25
Max. 5 Tronic dimming transformer boosters
2858 and 2859
min.500
61
Min. ceiling opening
for standard intermediate ceiling height 78 mm = 61 mm 51 mm for a height of 200 mm and upwards
200
Made in Germany
PRI AC 230V~
tc = 70°C
N L
2859
Tronic-Dimm-Trafo Leistungserweiterung 50 - 150 W
primär:
AC 230 V~ 50 / 60 Hz 0,68A l = 0,95
sekundär:
11,7 V~ eff. max. 12,5A
100
IP20
M
M
50-150W ta < 50°C
SEC AC 12V~
Tronic dimming transformer booster 2857 oder 2859
25
Max. 5 Tronic dimming transformer boosters 50
215
min.500
68
Min. ceiling opening
for standard intermediate ceiling height 78 mm = 68 mm 66 mm for a height of 225 mm and upwards
200
SELV Made in Germany
Max. 5 Tronic dimming transformer boosters
Technical data Order no. Rated voltage Rated power Primary current Output voltage Max. ambient temperature Max. housing temperature Secondary cable length max. Distance from earthed surfaces Power factor l Weight
Tronic dimming transformer 2856 2558 230 V~, 50/60 Hz 230 V~, 50/60 Hz 35-105 W 50-150 W 0.48 A 0.68 A 11.7 V~ eff, 40 kHz 11.7 V~ eff, 40 kHz ta < 50°C ta < 50°C tc = 80°C tc = 70°C 2m 2m 40 cm 40 cm 0.95 0.95 199 g 302 g
Tronic dimming transformer booster 2857 2859 230 V~, 50/60 Hz 230 V~, 50/60 Hz 35-105 W 50-150 W 0.48 A 0.68 A 11.7 V~ eff, 40 kHz 11.7 V~ eff, 40 kHz ta < 50°C ta < 50°C tc = 80°C tc = 70°C 2m 2m 40 cm 40 cm 0.95 0.95 199 g 302 g
T32 T32
overvoltagePROTECTION/ protection/ OVERVOLTAGE start-up INRUSH current CURRENT limiters LIMITER A/
IB =
k 100
µs
S = 30
a
m
a
a = 10 m: 80 KV U a = 1m: 8 kV a = 0.1m: 800 kV
Current test curve 8/20 µs and voltage test curve 1.2/50 µs are used to test the overvoltage protection.
I
0
100 90
0
SCHUKO socket with overvoltage protection The applications for the SCHUKO socket with overvoltage protection are in power supply unit protection e.g. for IT systems, medical equipment, instrumentation and control equipment, and TV, video and audio equipment. The basic circuit comprises a combination of varistors and gas filled surge arresters. Varistors can be overloaded by excessive or frequent overvoltage. The consequence is an increase in leakage current through the components, and an associated increase in heat. For this reason the varistors are monitored by a thermal cut-out and isolated from the mains power before they become too hot; the mains voltage remains connected. The cut-out is signalled by the red indicator lamp on the socket cover. At the same time an acoustic fault alarm (buzzer) is activated. Unplugging the appliance stops the acoustic alarm. The visual signal is not dependent on whether a plug is in the socket or not. The lamps incorporated into the socket have the following meanings: Green lamp lit: mains voltage present Red lamp lit (buzzer sounds): the thermal cut-out has tripped, the overvoltage protection function is no longer operational. The SCHUKO socket with overvoltage protection needs to be replaced.
Inductively or capacitively inserted overvoltages are discharged against neutral and ground conductors with the aid of thermally monitored varistors and gas arresters. Temperature monitoring to DIN VDE 0845 Part 1
I : 8/20 µs
50 10 8
t µs
20
Its flat design means that the BERKER Schuko socket with overvoltage protection fits any appliance socket to DIN 49 073 Part 1:
Frames Display
Combination with SCHUKO sockets Overvoltage protection is only beneficial when upstream coarse and medium protection is fitted.
The max. permissible distance from the SCHUKO socket with overvoltage protection to the last through-wired and also protected socket is 4m. Thereafter further SCHUKO sockets with overvoltage protection must be installed.
Socket cover
4108 .. 4152 ..
SCHUKO socket with overvoltage protection ÜSS 1
L
L
u
ÜSS 1
ÜSS 1
ÜSS 1
grün 230 V
rot
!
IN
OUT
N PE
N PE
Technical data Rated voltage Rated current IN Operating current IC at Ur Arrester rated voltage Ur Leakage current to ground conductor at Ur Rated discharge current Isn (8/20) µs: sym / asym Max. discharge current Is max (8/20) µs: sym / asym
4108 .. 4152 .. ÜSS 1
L PE N
230 V~, 50/60 Hz 16 A < 2.3 mA 255 V~ < 1 µA 1.5 kA (100x) 4.5 kA (1x)
To other sockets that are also protected.
SCHUKO socket with overvoltage protection Protection level: phase/neutral (phase/ground; neutral/ground) < 1.2 kV (1.5 kV) Response time ta: sym / asym 25 ns / 100 ns Arrester of requirement class D Overvoltage protection to EN 61643-11 and VDE 0675 part 6-11 arrester type 3, One Port Connecting terminals: screwed connection (rigid) 2.5 mm2 Temperature range -5 to 40°C Order no.: 4108 .., 4152 ..
Overvoltage protection module L N
2874
SEC AC 12 V ~
PRI AC 230 V ~
L2
L
L A
N
Switch-off
SEC AC 12 V ~
L1
0142
Tronic rotary dimmer
PRI AC 230 V ~
Tronic transformers are spike proof up to 1500 V. To protect against higher overvoltages (occurring when fluorescent lamps and gas discharge lamps are switched off and under other inductive loads for example), separate load circuits should be installed for Tronic transformers and those consumers. It is advisable to install an additional overvoltage protection in systems of this kind.
1 overvoltage protection module is sufficient for 10 Tronic transformers. In dimmed installations, connect overvoltage protection module before dimmer (see wiring diagram)
Switch-off
Technical data Rated alternating voltage Leakage current Is (8/20)
230 V~, 50/60 Hz 4.5 kA (1x) 1.0 kA (100x)
Inrush current limiter
Overvoltage protection module Residual voltage Is (1kA) Operating temperature Connections
Order no. 0142 approx. 1000 V -25 to 80°C flexible cable 1.5 mm2 200 mm long
L N
~
0185
N Problem load e.g. energy-saving lamps L max. 200 VA lamp load
BLC relay switch insert 2906
N1 L
The inrush current limiter limits the lamp inrush current of problem loads such as energy-saving lamps (this is 32 A per lamp for the Osram Dulux EL), compact fluorescent lamps and fluorescent lamps with electronic ballast (up to 25 A per lamp) to a level that can be carried by a mechanical switch contact (relay). The inrush current limiter is connected in series with the lamp(s). Not suitable for dimmers or electronic switches such as BLC Triac or Tronic switch insert!
T33 T33
Basic circuit with inrush current limiter
Technical data Connected load Max. operating temperature Dimensions (L x W x H)
Inrush current limiter order no. 0185 max. 200 VA max. 65°C 45 x 25 x 12 mm (for 60 mm flush-mounted wall box)
THERMOSTAT thermostat Room thermostat The room thermostat regulates the temperature in enclosed premises such as homes, schools, workshops, etc.. Installation location Installation opposite the heat source on an interior wall is to be preferred.
5
6
3 2
When installed at an appropriate location, the scaling on the thermostats corresponds to: = approx. 5°C 2 = approx. 10°C 3 = approx. 15°C
= approx. 20°C 5 = approx. 25°C 6 = approx. 30°C
Mounting height approx. 1.5 m above the floor. Avoid exterior walls and draughts from windows and doors. Do not install thermostat inside shelf units or behind curtains or similar coverings. Ambient heat will influence the control accuracy. Direct sunlight, proximity to TV and radio equipment, heaters, lamps, chimneys and heating pipes should be avoided. If the thermostat is installed in one switch frame together with a dimmer, the distance between the two should be as large as possible. If arranged one on top of the other, the thermostat must be under the dimmer. Electrical connections All wires must be connected as per the associated wiring diagram. The neutral conductor N must be connected to terminal N. If it is not, major temperature fluctuations will result, because the thermostat will not operate without the thermal feedback. The function depends only on the bimetal. No grounding conductor is required, because the device is totally insulated. Short designation in wiring diagrams L = External conductor N = Neutral conductor = Load connection RF = Resistor for thermal feedback TA = Resistor for night lowering of room temperature = Additional timer (or switch) for night temperature lowering NTC = Connection for floor temperature sensor T> = Bimetal contact (temperature evaluation) Room thermostat with change-over contact
Floor temperature thermostat The floor thermostat regulates the temperature in underfloor heating systems. The desired floor temperature is set with the adjuster knob. If the floor temperature falls below the pre-setting, the control unit requests heat and indicates the fact by way of a red LED. The heating is switched on and off with the mains power switch. By way of an additional connection, the night lowering facility can be activated by means of an upstream timer or monitoring switch. This is indicated by the green LED on the adjuster knob lighting up. The temperature reduction is approx. 5°C . For temperature measurement, the sensor in the floor is installed in a protective conduit. The sensor cable can be extended as necessary with a 2-wire cable with 1.5 mm2 cross-section, without affecting the accuracy of the thermostat. When laying in cable ducts or close to power lines, a shielded cable should be used. Sensor characteristic data: Measuring device Ri > 1 MOhm 05°C 85.279 k Ohm 10°C 66.785 k Ohm 15°C 52.330 k Ohm 20°C 41.272 k Ohm 25°C 33.000 k Ohm 30°C 26.281 k Ohm 35°C 21.137 k Ohm 40°C 17.085 k Ohm 45°C 13.846 k Ohm 50°C 11.277 k Ohm The resistance values can only be measured with the sensor disconnected. The floor sensor is installed in an empty conduit in the floor, such that it is positioned between 2 heating pipes.
L N Load
N
RF
Heating
Load
L
Cooling
Sensor dimensions
4m 0161 7.8 mm
T 5.9 mm
202600
Room thermostat with change-over contact 5 to 30°C 250 V~, 50/60 Hz 10 A (4 A cos f=0,6) 5 A (2 A cos f=0,6) 2.2 kW 1.1 kW 0.15 W approx. 0.5°C 2026..
Technical data Temperature range Nominal voltage Nominal current heating cooling Switching capacity heating cooling Power consumption Switching temperature difference Order No.:
Floor thermostat with NOC, on/off switch and 2 LEDs L N Mains 0/1 L N NTC
Load Heating
L N Load
RF
Heating
Night lowering
L
T
230 V U=
TA
Room thermostat with NCC, on/off switch and lamp
N
20 mm
TA
203000 and 203100
Technical data Temperature range Nominal voltage Nominal current Switching capacity Power consumption Switching temperature difference Temperature reduction Order No.:
230 V room thermostat, with NC, on/off switch 5 to 30°C 250 V~, 50/60Hz 10 A (4 A cos f=0,6) 2.2 kW 0.15 W (with night lowering 0.3 W) approx. 0.5°C approx. 4°C 2030..
Technical data Temperature range Nominal voltage Nominal current Switching capacity Power consumption Switching temperature difference Temperature reduction Order No.:
24 V room thermostat, with NC, on/off switch.. 5 to 30°C 24 V~, 50/60Hz; 24 V = 10 A at ~, 4.1 A at = 240 W at ~, 100 W at = 14.4 mW (with night lowering 28.8 mW) approx. 0.5°C approx. 4°C 2031..
203400
Technical data Temperature range Nominal voltage Switching current Switching capacity Power consumption Switch / single pole LED display Contacts (relay) Temperature reduction Switching temperature difference Sensor element Sensor cable Cable length Index of protection Order No.:
Floor temperature thermostat 10 to 50°C 230 V~, 50/60 Hz; 230 V= 10 A (ohmic load /cos phi= 1) 2.3 kW 0.14 W (with night lowering 0.28 W) On / Off Heating on "red" / Night lowering on "green" 1 NOC (for heating), not potential-free approx. 5°C approx. 1°C NTC 2 PVC (2 x 0.75 mm ) 4m IP67 to EN 60529 2034..
T34 T34
thermostat,TIME time-controlled THERMOSTAT CONTROLLED with change-over contact WITH CHANGE-OVER CONTACT Thermostat time controlled with changeover contact The thermostat time controlled regulates the temperature in enclosed premises such as homes, schools, workshops, etc.. Weekly programme Daily programme Manual operation Party function Holiday Set time/day Set switching times Set temperatures !
Days Extra daily programme Morning AM Midday Afternoon Evening Night Comfort temperature Standard temperature Reducing temperature
1234567d
:
d
: Mode
! Protection against unauthorized access / sensor defect Heating is currently on Cooling mode
-
1 2 3
!
+ OK 0/
Reset
Features of thermostat time controlled
Standard programmes P1, P2, P3, P4, P5 and pre-programmed switching times Programme Switching times
P1 P2 P3 P4 P5
6 4 4 4 2
1
2
3
21°C 18°C 15°C 21°C 18°C 15°C 28°C 18°C 18°C 21°C 18°C 18°C 21°C 18°C 18°C
Control mode Room heating Underfloor heating using room temperature control Underfloor heating using floor temperature control, e.g. in bathroom Room heating Room heating
Weekly programme
Daily programme d
Start time Temperature Start time Temperature Temperature Start Mo-Th Fri P1,P2 P3 P4 P5 Sat Su P1,P2 P3 P4 P5 time P1,P2 P3 P4 P5 Day Early morn. 6:00 6:00 21°C 28°C 21°C 21°C 7:00 7:00 21°C 28°C 21°C 21°C 7:00 21°C 28°C 21°C 21°C 8:30 8: 30 18°C 18°C 18°C 10:00 10:00 18°C 18°C 18°C 10:00 18°C 18°C 18°C Morning 12:00 12:00 21°C 12:00 12:00 21°C 12:00 21°C Midday 14:00 14:00 18°C 14:00 18°C Afternoon 14:00 14:00 18°C 17:00 17:00 21°C 28°C 21°C 17:00 17:00 21°C 28°C 21°C 17:00 21°C 28°C 21°C Evening 22:00 23:00 15°C 15°C 18°C 18°C 23:00 22:00 15°C 15°C 18°C 18°C 23:00 15°C 15°C 18°C 18°C Night
Installation location Installation opposite the heat source on an interior wall is to be preferred. Mounting height approx. 1.5 m above the floor.
For room heating, e.g. boiler or control valve actuation
Avoid exterior walls and draughts from windows and doors.
For underfloor heating by way of room temperature control with floor temperature limitation using floor temperature sensor / remote sensor For underfloor heating using floor temperature control with floor temperature sensor / remote sensor Fuzzy controller, with PWM (Pulse Width Modulation) output
Do not install thermostat inside shelf units or behind curtains or similar coverings (except with sensor). Ambient heat will influence the control accuracy. Direct sunlight, proximity to TV and radio equipment, heaters, lamps, chimneys and heating pipes should be avoided.
Can also be used as two-point controller (e.g. for oil/gas boilers) Self-teaching heating curve (the desired temperature is attained at the pre-set time), can be switched off 5 pre-set programmes (3 x room heating, underfloor heating and underfloor heating with limitation) 3 programmable temperatures (comfort, standard, night)
If the thermostat is installed in one switch frame together with a dimmer, the distance between the two should be as large as possible. If arranged one on top of the other, the thermostat must be under the dimmer. Connection diagram
L N
2, 4 or 6 freely selectable times for each day as a weekly programme; every time of day can be assigned to one of the 3 temperatures.
230 V U=
Extra daily programme (for special occasions such as holidays) Sensor
Manual operation for - Change of temperature until next programme start - Permanent change of temperature Cooling
Coming/going function for manual activation of temperature reduction Unauthorised protection (locking room temperature controller using key combination) Holiday programme can be set for 1 - 99 days (e.g. frost protection) then continuation of weekly programme Party function (the evening temperature is retained for an additional 3 hours) with manual temperature adjustment Operating hours meter (1 to 9999 hours, heat request time is recorded) Pump valve protection (the output is activated daily for 3 minutes), with disable facility Display of room or target temperature, switchable Adjustment of temperature display is possible (for individual needs) Switchover of heating and cooling (for floor cooling, no self-teaching heating curve for cooling) Clear LCD display with simultaneous display of room temperature, time, day, mode, time zone, temperature zone Floor temperature sensor / remote sensor connectable: This allows the thermostat to be installed in a different room.
Temperature/time diagram Temp. 23 22 1 21 20 19 2 18 17 16 3 15 14 13
Time bands 1
2
3
4
5
6
Early morning Morning
Heating
Installation temperature sensor/remote sensor The floor temperature/remote sensor is installed in conjunction with underfloor heating systems, in an empty conduit in the floor, such that it is positioned between two heating pipes. When the floor temperature sensor / remote sensor is connected the temperature measured there is displayed. (For sensor values see floor hermostat)
Midday Afternoon Evening 0
2
4
6
8
10 12 14 16 18
20 22 24
Time
Night
Display of 3 temperatures over 6 time bands (switching times). The device automatically detects when heating needs to begin in order to attain the desired room temperature at the pre-set time (self-teaching heating curve).
T35 T35
2043
Thermostat time controlled order no. 2043 Technical data 230 V~, 50/60 Hz Nominal voltage 0°C to 40°C Temperature range < 3VA Power consumption approx. 4 hours Power reserve 1 change-over contact, potential-connected Contacts (relay) 8A (cos phi=1), 2A (cos phi=0.6) Switching current max. 10 items Switching capacity of elec. actuators, 3W 5 to 40°C, in 0.5K increments Required air temperature setting 5 to 50°C in 0.5K increments Required floor temperature setting 10 to 49°C in 1K increments Floor temperature limitation 0 to 60°C in 0.1K increments Actual temperature display Fuzzy (similar to PID) / 2-point Control algorithm 15 seconds Measurement interval Pulse width modulated / 2-point Output signal 5° to 40°C adjustable for 1 - 199 days Holiday function LCD display with simultaneous display of time, room temperature, Display day, mode, time zone and temperature zone 24 hours, minutes Scope of display 10 minutes Minimum switching time NTC ( in device) Temperature sensor Order no. 0161 (type F 193720) connectable Remote sensor (For dimensions see floor temperature sensor) 4m, extendable to max. 10m Length of remote sensor cable: 1 to 9999 hours Operating hours meter IP20 Index of protection Condensation not permitted Humidity class
The floor temperature sensor/remote sensor can also be installed in a separate
room from the thermostat time-controlled. This is done by installing the sensor in a sensor insert order no. 75940402 in a suitable mounting location.
Sensor dimensions
4m 0161 7,8 mm 5,9 mm
20 mm
ROLLOTEC CUT-OFF RELAY rollotec cutoff relay No parallel switching of conventional tubular motors! When the switch is operated, both drives are started in the same direction. When drive 1 has reached the end position, limit switch E2 opens. Drive 2 is still in operation, and by means of a reverse voltage via its capacitor starts drive 1 moving again in the opposite direction. As a result, E2 is closed again within a short time. This causes drive 1 to run in the original direction again until contact E2 is opened again. These switching cycles are recognisable by the pendulum movement of the shutter. As the reverse voltage can be up to 1000 V, and numerous changes of position occur in a short time, limit switch E2 becomes overloaded. This inevitably leads to the contacts welding together. As a result, the limit cut-out in this direction is then disabled. The result: destruction of the motor or the shutter.
Drive 1
E1
Drive 2
E2
E3
N PE
N PE
Remedy: use RolloTec system or cut-off relays.
Wrong !
Tip: electronic tubular motors, such as those from Becker, Elero and Selve, can be switched in parallel. (Check the max. connected load.)
L
RolloTec standard insert with RolloTec cut-off relay
RolloTec standard insert with RolloTec cut-off relay RMD
N PE
M1 M2
N
Technical data Rated voltage Switching current
2931
2+PE 3+PE
To other cut-off relays
L
RolloTec cut-off relay and cut-off relay RMD Order no. 2930 and 2931 Switching time up/down min. 0.5 sec. Terminals Screw-type terminals 0.5 to 2.5 mm2 or 2 x 1.5 mm2 50 x 52 x 22 mm Dimensions (W x H x D) flush-mounted / surface mounted 45 x 71 x 42 mm RMD
Parallel connection of RolloTec cut-off relays
Installation diagram for RolloTec insert with RolloTec cut-off relay
4+PE
L
N
230 V~, 50/60 Hz at cos ϕ = 0.6 max. 3 A at cos ϕ =1 max. 8 A 10 mA 100%
Current consumption (operation) Switch-on time ED
M1 M2 R1-H-230
N
To other cut-off relays
L
5
2925
2930
L
N PE
Central command: RolloTec standard insert
Maximum 6-8 motors on one overload cut-out (consider power of motors!). When extending the system fit additional overload cut-outs.
2925
N
Maximum 6-8 motors on one overload cut-out (Check the current consumption). When extending the system, fit additional overload cut-outs. Ensure phase balance..
To other cut-off relays e.g. timer + RolloTec standard insert
3+PE
Drive 1
N PE
Reverse voltage path
N PE N PE
Central command: RolloTec standard insert
E4
2925
Drive 2
M
M
M
2930
4 N
L N Z Z
L N Z Z
L
PE
PE L N
N
L N
mains 230 V~
mains 230 V~
mains 230 V~
M 2930
L
To other cut-off relays
Dimensions: RolloTec cut-off relay
90 mm
45 4292
The RolloTec cut-off relay RMD can be installed on a 35 mm DIN rail.
The RolloTec cut-off relay can be mounted in deep flush-mounted boxes, e.g. behind a blanking plate or a RolloTec insert. 42 50
45
22 M1 M2
M1 M2
2930
2930
52
M1 M2
2930
R1-H-230
2931
71
The RolloTec cut-off relay can be installed in the waterproof junction box order no. 4292.
2931
T36 T36
ROLLOTEC rollotec RolloTec combinations with 9 covers for 4 inserts RolloTec button comfort with sensor connection
RolloTec button Comfort
RolloTec memory button
RolloTec memory button with sensor connection
RolloTec radio button with sensor connection
RolloTec radio button
RolloTec easy timer
RolloTec timer with sensor connection
RolloTec timer
PROG Mo Di Mi Do Fr Sa So MAN AUTO
Aut./Man.
RolloTec comfort insert with extension unit inputs
2925
N
L
RolloTec standard insert without neutral conductor connection
2975
1
2N
L
RolloTec comfort insert for DC drives
L N
A 24 V= SELV power supply with protective isolation must be used to supply the RolloTec comfort insert for DC drives and to activate the extension unit inputs. RolloTec comfort insert for DC drives
Terminal is supplied with the covers with sensor connection.
1
297501
1
2
M
Individual control DC motors may be connected in parallel. However the maximum switching current of the RolloTec comfort insert for DC drives of 3 A must not be exceeded.
297501
1
Power supply 24 V=
M
2
Magnet/Glass Sun/Twilight Ground
L
No connection to 230 V extension units.
297501
RolloTec comfort insert with extension unit inputs for DC drives
2911
2
M
M
M
24 V= reverse polarity extension unit signal
+ - = + -
RolloTec standard insert without extension unit inputs
Set
=
Individual control
- + Supply
Extension unit Motor Up = = Up - + - + Down = = Down
Group control
Individual control
Individual control
297501
297501
- + - +
297501
L N
M 1
Master control
2
1
M
2
M 1
M
2
M
L N
297501
L N
Individual control
Extension unit
297501
503520
M 1
2
M
Additional
A shutter rocker button extension unit must be supplied from the same power supply as the RolloTec insert.
1
2
M
Group control
+
~
+
*
Individual control
297501
Individual control
297501
Power supply 24 V=
M 1
Power supply 24 V=
2
M
1
2
M 1
M
2
M
Additional
+
Individual control with mechanical extension unit
*
Individual control
297501
297501
M 1
2
M
1
2
M
A RolloTec insert extension unit can be supplied from a different power supply to the RolloTec insert main stations.
Power supply 24 V= Individual control with RolloTec extension unit
Power supply 24 V=
Disconnect wires for new supply
Master control with RolloTec extension unit Extension unit
L N
-
As long as an up command 1 and 2 is present at the extension unit input, the drive on the unit itself cannot be operated either manually or automatically.
L N
Power supply 24 V=
297501
Technical data RolloTec comfort insert for DC drives Nominal voltage 24 V=, +/- 10% including ripple Current consumption (idle) approx. 30 mA Current consumption (operation) approx. 100 mA Relay contacts 2 reverse polarity changeover relays Switching current max. 3 A Reversing time min. 1 sec. Extension unit inputs for 24 V= reverse polarity signals Sensor cable length with shielded cable extendable to max. 20 m Terminals Screw-type terminals for max. 2.5 mm2 or 2 x 1.5 mm2 5 to 35°C Operating temperature 297501 Order no.:
RolloTec standard insert without neutral conductor connection Checking the suitability of motors with mechanical limit switches: To replace a mechanical shutter switch/push-button with the RolloTec standard insert without a neutral conductor, first check the suitability of the motor. The RolloTec insert has no neutral conductor connection and draws its power supply from the motor. Some motors develop such a high voltage during operation that the insert could be destroyed. The check should therefore be performed with a shutter switch/push-button and not with the RolloTec standard insert without neutral conductor connection.
253 V 250 V
Example (blue arrow): The measured mains voltage (UN) is 221 V. Connect the value 221 V on the left-hand axis in the diagram through the mid point (M) to the right-hand axis with the motor voltage (UM). This gives a max. permitted motor voltage (UM) of 404 V. Checking the suitability of motors with electronic limit switches: Motors with electronic limit switches operate according to different principles depending on the manufacturer. The insert cannot normally be destroyed by motors with electronic limit switches. Make sure that you check the function of the RolloTec standard insert without neutral conductor connection in conjunction with this type of motor.
T37 T37
L N
Individual control 2911
400 V
240 V 230 V
Measure the mains voltage (UN) and the motor voltage (UM) in up and down directions using a voltmeter. Compare the measured values for the up and down directions and the measured mains voltage using the following diagram. Locate the measured mains voltage (UN) on the left-hand axis. Connect the measured value in the diagram through the mid point (M) to the right-hand axis (motor voltage UM). If your values measured on the motor do not exceed the maximum motor voltage given in the diagram, the motor can be used in combination with the RolloTec standard insert without neutral conductor.
380 V 390 V
M
M
410 V 420 V
L
UM
430 V 220 V 210 V 207 V (UN) Mains voltage
UN
440 V 450 V
Individual control
460 V (UM) Max. motor voltage
No extension unit operation possible. Unit can only be used in conjunction with a shutter/roller motor with limit switch (mechanical or electronic).
Technical data RolloTec standard insert without neutral conductor connection Nominal voltage 230 V~, 50 Hz Relay contacts 2 potential carrying NOC (mutually interlocked) Switching current max. 1 motor 1000 W Reversing time min. 1 sec. Circuit breaker max.16 A Radio interference suppression to EN 55015 2 Terminals Screw-type terminals for max. 2.5 mm or 2 x 1.5 mm2 5 to 35°C Operating temperature 2911 Order no.:
ROLLOTEC rollotec Individual control with RolloTec inserts RolloTec standard insert without extension unit inputs
RolloTec comfort insert with extension unit inputs L Extension unit connections also N for external sensors e.g.: wind, precipitation, temperature, controller, etc.
Individual control
1
RolloTec comfort insert
Terminal is supplied with the covers with sensor connection.
2N
2911
M
L
N
2911
2925
N
L
L
L
Magnet/Glass Sun/Twilight Ground
Phase Extension unit Phase Motor Down Up Motor Neutral Extension unit connections Extension unit Motor conductor Up Up also for external sensors Down Motor e.g.: wind, precipitation, Neutral conductor Down temperature, controller, etc.
M L
L
Technical data RolloTec standard and comfort insert Nominal voltage 230 V~, 50/60 Hz, N conductor required Switching capacity max. 1 motor 1000 W Relay output 2 potential carrying NOC (mutually interlocked) Extension unit inputs (comfort insert only) 230 V~ (do not lay low current line) Reversing time min. 1 sec. Circuit breaker max.16 A Radio interference suppression according to EN 55015 Terminals Screw-type terminals for max. 2.5 mm2 or 2 x 1.5 mm2 5° to 35°C Operating temperature 2925, 2975 Order No.:
RolloTec standard insert without neutral conductor connection
RolloTec standard insert
2975
1
Individual control
2925
M 2N
RolloTec standard insert without neutral conductor connection L N
Individual control
2975
To extension units: e.g. key switch for shutters Rocker push-button for shutters Group push-button with 4 NOCs etc.
RolloTec inserts
L N
Phase Motor Motor Down Up
Individual control with RolloTec comfort insert and extension unit
L N
Function: RolloTec comfort insert does not latch, rocker push-button for shutters must be pressed until shutter is at end position.
Function: RolloTec comfort insert latches at each point if pressed for more than 1 sec., shutter runs automatically to end position. L N
Individual control
Extension unit Shutter rocker push-buttons
503520 red
2975
1
2N
M
L
Individual control
Extension unit: RolloTec standard insert
2925
N
Other extension units: e.g. key switch for shutters Rocker push-button for shutters Group push-button with 4 NOCs etc. Operation with extension unit
2975
1
L
2N
M
L
Operation with extension unit
RolloTec inserts: Master control and individual control in one phase L N Master control
Individual control
Individual control
Individual control
Individual control
2975
2975
2975
2975
2925
N
1
L
2N
M
L
1
2N
M
L
1
2N
M
L
1
2N
M
L
Consider current consumption of motors! Use new supply if necessary. 3
5
5
5 M
5
M
4
M
4
M
4
4
RolloTec flush-mounted insert
A 5-wire connection between the master and individual controls is adequate even if sensor commands are sent from the master point to the individual controls. The motor reverse voltage means that no motor can be connected to the master control!
RolloTec inserts: Master and group control in different phases
Master control
L1 L2 L3 N
Group control
2925
N
L
Individual control
Individual control
2975
2975
2975
1
2N
L
1
2N
M
L
1
2N
M
L
to other individual controls Group control Consider current consumption of motors! Use new supply if necessary.
Individual control
Individual control
2975
2975
2975
1
2N
L
1
2N
L
M
1
2N
L
M
to other individual controls
T38 T38
ROLLOTEC rollotec RolloTec inserts: operation at several RCDs L N
Master control
Individual control
Individual control
2975
2975
2925
To avoid unwanted tripping of the RCDs, the circuits must be decoupled. N
L
1
Cut-off relay
2N
M
L
1
2N
M
L
Sensor connection options to RolloTec inserts Sensors must not be connected in parallel to multiple RolloTec inserts.
2911 2925
2975
Terminal block
Terminal block L
N
L
a)
Magnet/Glass Brightness Ground Connect wire marked grey to ground
1
b)
2N
L
Magnet/Glass Brightness Ground Connect wire marked grey to ground
c)
Various options are available for connecting the sensors (brightness sensor / magnetic contact / glass breakage sensor): a) The sensor cable can be routed easily from the flush-mounted wall box through the tunnel in the RolloTec insert as far as the terminal block and securely connected. b) The sensor cable can be fed through the cable duct between the base plate and the flush-mounted wall box and fixed to the terminal block. c) For mounting, the sensor cable connector can be plugged into the lower sensor connection. This connection can be detached at any time in order to prevent unwanted lowering (e.g. of balcony door shutters) (not with magnetic contact).
RolloTec glass breakage sensor The glass breakage sensor is affixed to the window pane. If the glass is broken, the shutter is automatically lowered, thereby protecting the property from the weather and from unauthorised intrusion. The shutter remains closed until an Up command is sent from the associated control mounting. Master commands are not executed, and brightness values are not processed. Attachment: clean the surface of the glass with spirit or methyl alcohol etc., and affix the sensor to the window pane with special LOCTITE adhesive (see operating instructions) Technical data Contact Switching capacity Action radius Contact resistance No load Alarm condition Alarm duration Connection cable Temperature range Index of protection Max. number Cable length Order No.:
T39 T39
RolloTec glass breakage sensor 1pole NCC contact max. 350 mW 2 metres max. 30 Ohm min. 1 MOhm approx. 0.5 - 5 sec. LIYY 2 x 0.14 mm2 -30 to 70°C IP66 10 units (in series) 2 m, extendable to approx. 10 m with telephone cable J-Y(ST)Y 2 x 2 x 0.6 mm, connect shield to ground. 0170
Brightness sensor for suction attachment 2m 25 mm
0169
Lay the sensor cable as far from 230 V cables as possible.
Ø 45 mm
27
External brightness sensor
0184
25
Technical data RolloTec brightness sensor Maximum sensitivity of diode at l approx. 850 nm Sunlight brightness values Comfort push-button with radio button sensor connection approx. 5000 to 80 000 Lux, prog. Memory button with sensor connection approx 20 000 Lux, fixed Timer with sensor connection approx. 1000 to 76 000 Lux, programmable Twilight brightness values (only timer 1775..) approx. 6 to 300 Lux, programmable Temperature range -30 to 70°C Index of protection IP54 Cable length 2 m, extendable to approx. 10 m with telephone cable J-Y(ST)Y 2 x 2 x 0.6 mm, connect shield to ground! Order No.: 0169
RolloTec brightness sensors
84,5
Sun protection function: with brightness sensor order no. 0169 If the sunlight value (20,000 Lux or programmable - see technical data) is exceeded by 2 minutes, the shutter automatically moves down until the sensor is concealed; then moves up a little until the sensor is exposed once more. If the brightness remains below the pre-set level for 15 minutes, the shutter is raised again. The sun protection function is only activated when the shutter has been moved to its end position by a continuous run operation. To attach, clean the glass with meths or similar, and the sensor with washing up liquid. Rinse the sensor in clean water and affix it to the window glass. Twilight function: The twilight function (only with timer) is activated approx. 90 minutes before sunset (see astronomical curve). The shutter is lowered about 5 minutes after the brightness has fallen below the programmed level.
2925
N
61
L
By connecting the RolloTec brightness sensors surface-mounted to the RolloTec insert the sun protection function can be implemented. If the pre-set Lux value is exceeded, the shutter is lowered such that slits of light still come through.
RolloTec glass breakage sensor 2m
37 mm
Lay sensor cable as far from 230 V cables as possible. Mounted on window pane
19 mm 0170
Height 12 mm For attaching to the window pane, we recommend the glass to metal adhesive set made by Loctite.
20 mm
The glass breakage sensor can be connected in three different ways. (See sensor connection options) 2975
1
2975
1
2N
L
2N
L
0-20 mm
ROLLOTEC rollotec Technical data Contact Number of wires Operating distance Switching voltage Switching capacity Switching current Index of protection
Magnetic contact order no. 925101/02 1pole NCC contact 2 5 to 12 mm Max. 40 V= max. 10 W max. 0.5 A IP67 925102/925101
Magnetic contact When the window is opened the shutter is closed. An up command on the associated individual control is the only way to move the shutter back up. Effective break-in protection is achieved by series connection of magnet contacts and glass breakage sensors. Magnetic contact connection
Magnetic contact 40 mm
40 mm
3 m
925102/925101
2975
15 mm
15 mm 44 mm
2925
44 mm
15 mm
1
N
The adapter serves as an extension and to connect the connecting cables for a brightness sensor and a glass breakage sensor. Technical data Number of sensors on connector
RolloTec wind speed sensor interface
0173
1
Settings for the RolloTec wind speed sensor interface Sensor switch for type setting: 1 = Berker / order no.:0172 (obsolete type) 2 = Berker / order no.:0172 01 and Thies / order no.:4.3515.50.000 (heated) The rotary switch sets the limit value: Position of rotary switch wind speed 1 Test 2 Test 3 3 Bft - approx. 3.3 m/s - 12 km/h 4 4 Bft - approx. 5.5 m/s - 20 km/h 5 5 Bft - approx. 8.0 m/s - 29 km/h 6 6 Bft - approx. 11.0 m/s - 40 km/h 7 7 Bft - approx. 14.1 m/s - 51 km/h 8 8 Bft - approx. 17.2 m/s - 62 km/h 9 9 Bft - approx. 20.8 m/s - 75 km/h 0 10 Bft - approx. 24.5 m/s - 88 km/h Bft = Beaufort scale Function test: Select rotary switch position 1 or 2 (test), start the wind sensor in rotation, the LED will flash. After 15 seconds continuous rotation (e.g. with a hair dryer) the contact will close.
Test-LED
Sensor switch
Terminal pair for looping through sensor heating
Phase Neutral conductor Sensor connection
RolloTec comfort insert with RolloTec wind speed sensor interface and wind speed sensor L N Wind sensor
Wind sensor interface
0173 2975
017201
- Do not mount the install RolloTec wind sensor in wind shadow. - Ensure correct attachment position - The wind controller is weather-resistant and can be exposed to constant direct sunlight. The wind alarm has the top priority, i.e. the shutter is always raised and locked in the event of a wind alarm until the wind has dropped for at least 15 minutes.
M
12 7
1
1
2N
L
Type or cable: recommendation: JY-St-Y 2x0.6 Connect shield to "negative" to prevent interference. Lay the sensor cable min. 10 cm away from 230 V cables.
Response time: Shutter is raised after 15 sec. above set value.
RolloTec comfort insert with room thermostat
RolloTec comfort insert with RolloTec precipitation sensor L N Precipitation sensor
L N
Individual control
Room thermostat
2975
1
2N
Ground
0171
7 Wind alarm signal
Sun
Ground
Rotary switch for limit value setting
12
Glass
5m
Ground
Supply for potential-free contact
L
RolloTec adapter for sensor
RolloTec adapter for sensors order no. 0171 Max. 1 brightness sensor and max. 1 glass breakage sensor
Order no. 017201
2N
L
L
Individual control
202600
Switching temperature difference = 0.5°C
M
2975
1
2N
M L
With mounting angle for 70° tilted mounting.
018301
By connecting a precipitation sensor to extension unit input 2, in the event of precipitation the shutter (or awning or suchlike) is retracted and locked shut until the precipitation stops (after approx. 2 minutes the moisture on the heated precipitation sensor has evaporated and it is unlocked).
By connecting a room thermostat with changeover contact to the extension unit inputs, the shutter is raised or lowered depending on the temperature (e.g. in a winter garden). Use only extension unit input 1ë or 2ê as desired.
RolloTec in combination with key switch for shutters and controller / controller system L N
Controller system
Individual control
0155
383620 N
L1
2975 L1
System-Leistungsteil Lx
S
-
+
M
4
1
1
2N
L
The key switch (key switch for shutters 2pole) activates the controller / controller system, causing the shutters to be closed in the event of any unauthorised approach to the building. On arrival of the occupants, the shutters are raised by operating the key switch. A RolloTec timer can be used as a master control, automatically raising the shutters every morning while the occupants are away.
T40 T40
ROLLOTE rollotec Awning control with RolloTec wind/brightness and precipitation sensor
Priority:
L N Wind sensor interface
When the pre-set brightness is exceeded the shutter is lowered. In the event of precipitation and/or excessive wind, the shutter is retracted and locked until the precipitation stops and/or the wind drops. Wind and rain before manual and brightness sensor command.
Precipitation sensor
Individual control
0173
Wind sensor 017201
Brightness sensor surface mounted
2975
1
12
M
2N
L
0184
7
Function:
1
018301
RolloTec memory button The memory button contains two functions: Push-button mode and automatic memory mode. Simply pressing the push-button (up/down) raises or lowers the shutter. An up and/or down command can be taught-in and updated at any time by new ones. These commands are then executed automatically at the same time every day in memory mode. When a manual action is performed in memory mode a short beep sounds indicating the set mode. (For settings see adjacent diagram) Technical data Switching times Connection Order No.:
RolloTec memory button modes
Short tones
Activate both directions Blind adjustment
Continuous tone Minimum operation Latching
Maximum operation Storage
Activation of one direction Memory mode (Automatic) ON
RolloTec memory button max. 2 (1 up and 1 down time) Plug into RolloTec insert 1756.., 1757.. (with sensor connection)
Memory mode (Manual) OFF Reset
oR
0 1 2 3 3,5 4 5 7 Function only with memory button and memory button with sensor connection
10 sec.
RolloTec Easy timer The RolloTec Easy timer can be viewed as a simple individual or master control for roller blinds, shutters or awnings. The timer can be programmed for one up time and one down time, for Monday to Friday and Saturday to Sunday respectively. The Easy timer can be programmed for a period of 6 hours after removal from the RolloTec insert. Manual operation is possible at any time, of course.
If a time of movement of 00:00 is set during programming, it is not executed. This means, for example, that by programming 7:00 ê and 00:00 ë, the shutter is only raised in the morning. The shutter must then be lowered manually in the evening. Quick programming permits the up and/or down times to be entered speedily and efficiently. This makes programming the switching times even easier. Press and hold down button ê and Prog simultaneously. The current time is stored as the up time for the current part of the week (Mo-Fr or Sa+Su, whichever is the case). If the button ë and the Prog. button are pressed simultaneously, the same is set for the down time.
The Easy timer does not process any extension and sensor signals or master commands. The RolloTec Easy timer comprises two modes: Automatic: The programmed up/down time is executed automatically. Manual: In this mode, the up/down time is ignored and operation is only possible manually using the up/down buttons. Programming RolloTec Easy timer START Normal operation
Prog
Set
Time
time
Configure
Hour
Prog
Minute
Prog
Up time Mo-Fr Configure Hour
Prog
Up time Mo-Fr Configure Minute
Prog
Down time Mo-Fr Configure Hour
Prog
Product details of the RolloTec timer comfort Operation via 4-button control pad Display the next time of movement with all active functions and the current time 3 programme memories , and for up to 18 times of movement Factory pre-set programmed times of movement in 2 programme memories ( , ) Random function (programmed times of movement are displaced by up to ± 15 minutes) Astronomical function (enables an automatic upwards movement of the shutter at daybreak and downwards movement at nightfall Adjusting the astronomical function by shifting the astronomical time ± hours. Random and astro functions can be combined Automatic summer / winter time changeover (can be switched off) Individual motor running time adjustable 1 sec. to 6 min. Blade positioning time adjustable 0.1 to 5 sec. Evaluation of extension units the down direction can be switched off (protection against being locked out) Power reserve approx. 4 hrs. Programmed times of movement saved in non-volatile memory. Date and time remain saved for about 4 hours maintenance-free due to use of special capacitor. Wind alarm connected via extension unit (only with the RolloTec insert with extension unit function) Additional product details of the RolloTec timer comfort with sensor connection Sunlight protection function (evaluates external and internal sensors) Separate running time adjustment when using external sensor Twilight function (twilight-related lowering of shutters in connection with brightness sensors, dawn-related raising of shutters only in connection with surface-mounted brightness sensor). Glass breakage function When a glass breakage sensor or combination of glass breakage sensor and sun sensor is fitted, a reduction in the power reserve should be expected."
T41 T41
Down time Mo-Fr Configure Minute
Prog
Abzeit Up time Mo.-Fr. Sa+Su Configure einstellen Hour Stunde
Prog
Up time Sa+Su Configure Minute
Prog
Down time Sa+Su Configure Hour
End
Prog
Down time Normal Sa+Su Configure operation Minute Prog
RolloTec timer comfort display Individual running time External extension unit Random Astronomical
Protection against the sun Twilight
Next direction of movement
Time of next movement
Program memory
Summer time
Push-button assignments
Technical data Reversing time Accuracy Power reserve Switching times Random generator Astro programme Running time programmable Connection Operating temperature Order No.:
Current time
RolloTec timer min. 1 sec. ± 1 min. per month approx. 4 hrs. (no battery required) max. 18 ( in 3 programme memories) ± 15 minutes Adjustable by ± 2 hrs. 1 sec. to 6 min. (default 2 min.) Plug into RolloTec insert 0 to 45°C 1774.., 1775.. (with sensor connection)
ROLLOTEC rollotec Astronomic curve for RolloTec timer with adjustment for summer and winter time Summer time Week
5
10
15
20
2:00
25
30
35
40
45
50 2:00
Darkness
3:00 4:00
3:00 4:00
5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5: : : 0: 0: : : 5: 5 5 0 1 5 5: 3: 2 1 1 2 : : 5: 5 7 6 6 6 7 6 6 6 6: : 3 0 0 4 0 7 7 9 4 0 2 : 6 6 6 6 6 7 7 6 8 3 5 9 : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 6 7 4 7 5 0 4 3 1 0 4 3 1 0 1 7 0 2 3 4 5 0 1 2 : 6 6 4 5 8 3 8 2 7 2 8 9 0 0 1 2 3 7 5 3 : 7 6 4 5: 1: 7 7 7 7 8 0 : 7: 7 7 : 1: 2 3 : 7 8 8 7 : 3 1 3 4 : : 8: 8 8 8 8 8: : 5: 4 2 9 : : 4 5 : : 1 0 5 5 0 1 1 1 1 4 5 3 1 1 1 Execute sunrise 5 8 8 6 Programmed sunrise 06:10
5:00 6:00 7:00 8:00 9:00
5:00 6:00 7:00 8:00 9:00
If the programmed run time is in a period of darkness, the command is not executed until the astronomical sunrise or sunset
Time ~ ~
~Time ~
Daylight
16:00
Saved astronomical times relate to the reference site of Würzburg. To adapt the astronomical times to the exact sunrise / sunset times for the geographical location, the complete astronomic curve can be shifted by ± 2 hours. 1 1 1 1 6 1 1 Programmed sunset 20:00 6 6 1 1 6 6 6: : : : : 6 1 1 Executed sunset 6 : 1 7 : 3 2 2 3 4 : 7 1 1 4 1 7 9 4 7 5 5 : 7: 7 1 1 1 7 : 0: 5 5 6 : 7: 7 1 6 0 7 : 2 8 5 1 7 1 : 3 1 : 8: 8 1 1 9 3 0 4 5 5 : 8: 8 2 5 2 3 0 : 4 1 2 1 1 5 3 3 1 9 9: 7 1 9 : 0 1 1 2 2 : 2 7 9 9: 0 2 2 0 9 2 : 2 0 : : 3 0 2 5 8 2 4 5 1: : 0 2 2 : 0 0 2 0 : 2 3 2 8 9 0 2 : 0: 0 2 2 8 : 1: 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1: : 3 2 0 3 1 4 : 1: 1 1 1 1 1 1 1: : 0 4 6 3 5 9 3 0 3 1 2 2: : : : : 2: 2 1 1 0 2 0 3 3 3 3 6 1 3 3 0 6 0
17:00 18:00 19:00 20:00 21:00 22:00
16:00 1 1 1 1 6 6 6 6 : : : 2 2 2 2: 2 2 5 9
17:00 18:00 19:00 20:00 21:00 22:00
Darkness
23:00
5
Week
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
23:00
45
Subject to timing changes
50
Summer time
P r ogr am m i n g t h e R o l l o T ec timer co mf o rt Normal operation The push-button functions Set and Esc are available in the menus : to confirm inputs. Press Set On exiting a submenu the changes are saved. to abort editing Press Esc Changes are not saved, the display reverts to normal mode. After 2 minutes without any push-button activation the timer reverts to normal mode.
Calling up programming menus The menus can be selected by pressing the push-buttons as follows: Press push-button Prog to programme the memory (A, B, C or manual mode). Press push-button Prog to programme travel times. Press push-button Funktion to programme the switch on and switch off functions. Press push-button Funktion for more than 3 s to programme the functions. Press push-button Prog + Funktion to change over between summer and winter to reset to factory settings
long >3s
short <3s
Programme memory A
Programmme memory B
Set
Set
short <3s
long >3s
Set Extension
External
Setting the running time
Set
Set
Set
Set
Set
New Switching time
Input Running time in seconds
Shift Sunrise hours/ minutes
Input Sun Protection value
Input Set twilight
Set
Set*
Set*
Programme memory C
2. 3....18. or 1. Switching time Switching time change/ clear dow Set
Direction Up / Down Set
Hour Set
Minute
18 switching times are available. They can be distributed as desired across program memories A, B or C. If the display indicates "Full", all 18 switching times have been assigned. In this case clear down any switching times no longer required, or overwrite them with new ones.
Set
Set
Weekday Sunday
Set
Weekday OK / change Set
Fixed Switching time Switching Set* time Saved
unit
Programme memory B
Set Random
Prog C aktive Set
Programme memory C
Set time
function
Astronomical time shift
Set
Set Running
Setting the slats
Sun proSet tection function
Twilight function*
Astronomical Functions Set*
Twilight function* Set*
Current Time
Sensor*
Shift Sunset hours/ minutes
Set Set Manual aktive Mode
Hand-
Sun protection function*
Set
Exterior or Interior Set
Set*
Input Running time in seconds
> 10 s
Set
Summer/ Winter Changeover
Input Setting time in seconds Set*
Set
Current Minute
Set
Current Month
Set
Setting the slats
> 20 s = Reset to factory setting New Current setting Hour Set Time
Set
Current Minute
Set
Input Setting time in seconds Set*
Normal operation
Set
Current Hour
Setting the running time
Set* Set
Day Monday
Programme memory A
Prog B aktive Set
Set
Set Switching time cleared down
Prog A aktive Set
Set
Current Month
Set
Current Date (Day)
Set
Current Day
Set*
Set
Current date (day) Set
Current Day Set*
Normal operation
*) Function only when cover with sensor connection fitted Set*
Settings are saved
T42 T42
WIRED ALARM CENTRE alarm central unit, wired Motion detector 90° wired to alarm centre
External
Ar m
Ne t Ex te rio r In te rio r 24 h Sa bo ta ge
24h
The wired alarm centre permits the setup of a low-cost alarm system using only wired components, e.g. to protect apartments or smaller properties. Technical data Operating voltage Current input Emergency power supply Output voltage for external devices Fuse for outputs flashing light and siren Loading capacity of the 12 V outputs Load capacity of alarm, status outputs Buzzer volume Pulse length for inputs Input switching
Internal
Armed / Not armed
Siren duration Arm/alarm delay Operating temperature Index of protection Dimensions (W x H x D) Order no.: 9155
Wired alarm centre
GND
915501
F1 = T1A
GND GND
GND not armed Armed L4, Sabo
Sabo
Alarm system wired 230 V~, 50 Hz or 12 V= 10 mA~ or 70 mA= possible with Li battery pack: 14.4 V=, order no.: 921401 12 V= T 1.25 A L max. 1 A max. 10 mA 85 dBA at distance of 0.1 m min. 0.4 sec. Closed < 4 kOhm Open > 100 kOhm 0 to 180 sec., adjustable 0 to 60 sec., adjustable 0 to 50°C IP20 165 x 215 x 48 mm 9020
+ 12 V
Ext
Int
+ 12 V Status Siren
L3, 24 h L2, internal
Flash -
L1, external
Siren -
K2
AC 230 V~ K1 9020
Max. 5 motion detectors 90° with a total cable length of max. 100 m white
~ ~ 915501
~ ~
Alarm
NCC
9155
Sabotage 12 VDC
E
TAMP
+ 12 V
S
AL
T
Wired motion detector 90°
Alarm Sabotage
AL
SAB SAB S/U
12 VDC
GT
Motion detector 90°
Potential-free alarm contact and sabotage contact with 4-stage sensitivity to enhance functional safety.
GND
+
915501
Alarm
NCC
Sabotage 12 VDC
E
TAMP
+ 12 V
S
T
Wired motion detector 90° For individual connection wiring see continuous line. For multiple connections open up at point | and wire (see dotted line).
Burglar alarm systems are used to signal attempts to break in as early as possible. They supplement mechanical security measures.
All property protection is based on mechanical security measures such as strong doors and windows, additional bolts etc., which provide the greatest possible resistance against burglars.
Burglar alarm systems should be installed in such a way that they detect and signal the attempts to break in, e.g. damage to doors and windows, as quickly as
possible. The control centre must be housed in a specially secured location.
Burglar alarm systems must be installed in such a way that no false alarms are possible:
- Every false alarm weakens a security system as it loses credibility. - False alarms can result in call-out costs.
Measures for prevention of false alarms:
- Positive operation when armed, with alarm delay time: The alarm delay time means that, upon entering the property, you have time (adjustable between 0 and 60 seconds) to disarm the alarm centre before the alarm is triggered. - Selecting the position of motion detectors: Motion detectors should not be directed towards heating or air-conditioning equipment, fax machines, automatic lights, windows or areas with strong air movement. Temperature differences in these areas can trigger an alarm. - Passive glass breakage detectors on single glazing (these detectors are triggered when a coin is tapped against the window)
All alarm system components accessible from outside must be protected against sabotage. Alarm sensors should be installed so as to be clearly visible but out of reach. Switching devices should be electronically protected against sabotage.
T43 T43
WIRED ALARM CENTRE alarm central unit, wired Key switch magnetic contacts and glass breakage sensors at wired alarm centre Max. total cable length 1000m
Sabo
GND
GND
GND
GND
Disarm
+ 12 V
Arm
+ 12 V
L4, Sabo
Status
F1 = T1A Ext
Int
9253.. 9251..
9251..
9251..
Magnetic contacts and glass breakage sensors connected in series
L3, 24 h
Alarm
L2, Internat
Flashing -
L1, External
Siren -
K2
AC 230 V~
Key switch as push-button
K1
Key switch as push-button Disconnect if key switch is connected in parallel
9020
Wired alarm centre 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
Sabo
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
~ 910301
20 21
Summer
Relay for RolloTec and/or panic lighting at alarm centre
Sabo
Relay 12 V
GND
GND
GND
Disarm
+ 12 V
Arm
+ 12 V
L4, Sabo
Status
Smoke detector with relay module at alarm centre Wired alarm centre
F1 = T1A Ext
Int Sabo
Use normally closed contact NCC
Alarm
L3, 24 h L2, internal
Flashing -
L1, external
Siren -
K2
20 21
Summer
Wired alarm centre GND
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
Sabo
AC 230 V~
GND
GND
GND
Disarm
+ 12 V
Arm
+ 12 V
L4, Sabo
Status
F1 = T1A Ext
Int
Alarm
L3, 24 h
NC
K1
GND
L2, internal
Flashing -
L1, external
Siren -
K2
AC 230 V~ K1
NO
9020
9020
If several smoke detectors are installed, the contacts should be connected in series.
External siren with flashing lights and automatic telephone dialler, AWAG wired to alarm centre Flash- Exterior light siren
GND
GND
GND
GND
Disarm
+ 12 V
Arm
+ 12 V
6
5
4
- +- +
3
2
1
Sabotage
Ext
Int
9255
Telephone
Alarm
L3, 24 h 7
A1 A2 A3 A4 ÖA
Status
L4, Sabo 8
M
F1 = T1A
}
Sabo
9
Automatic telephone dialler, AWAG La Lb W E a2 b2 M1 M2 M3 M4
Breaking Cover cord contact
L2, internal
Flashing -
L1, external
Siren -
AC 230 V~
K2
K1 9020
Wired alarm centre 905150
Recommended cable types for connection of wired components to wired alarm centre Motion detector 90° Key switch JY(ST)Y 6 x 2 x 0.6
JY(ST)Y 4 x 2 x 0.6
Max. cable length 1000 m
Max. cable length 100 m
9103
915501
Automatic telephone dialler, AWAG
9155
Wired alarm centre
h
ge
arf
ta
24
bo
Sc h
Sa
Ne tz Au ße n In ne n
ACTIVE DEVICES
JY(ST)Y 4 x 2 x 0.6 JY(ST)Y 2 x 2 x 0.6
Glass breakage sensor
Max. cable length 100 m Max. cable length 1000 Extern
9255
9253..
Intern
Scharf / Unscharf
External siren with flashing light
9020
JY(ST)Y 4 x 2 x 0.6
JY(ST)Y 2 x 2 x 0.6
Magnetic contact
Max. cable length 15 m 9251.. 905150
Max. cable length 1000 m
T44 T44
SMOKE DETECTORS RM.1 smoke detector RM.1 Around 600 people (1/3 of them children) die every year in Germany as a direct result of fires, most of them in private households. 95% of those killed by fire die of smoke poisoning when the fire is smouldering, by inhaling imperceptible gases such as carbon monoxide and carbon dioxide while asleep. The greatest risk is at night, as around 70% of those killed in fires die in their sleep. The above figures does not take into account the number of deaths due to indirect consequences, which experts estimate to be around 7000 to 8000. The main causes of the 200,000 fires in Germany each year are a lack of technical equipment, human mistakes and arson. Without preventive measures such as VdS tested smoke detectors, these fires can lead to disaster. In Germany, only around 5% of private households are fitted with smoke detectors. In public and commercial buildings, smoke detectors have established themselves as standard life-savers. The VdS approved RM.1 smoke detector works on the tried and tested scattered light principle (Tyndall effect) and responds to even barely distinguishable smoke, e.g. when smouldering or open fires first start. The loud integrated Piezo siren raises the alarm immediately, allowing the occupants to escape to safety in time. Smoke build-up is measured and the automatic self-test function executed in a 40-second cycle. The light guide rod test button and LED display means that the function of the RM.1 can be checked manually at any time. The 9 V power pack battery supplied is necessary to operate and install the smoke detector. Battery power loss is signalled for at least 30 days by a recurring beep every 40 seconds and a flashing LED.
Additional instructions The RM.1 smoke detector has been designed as a domestic smoke detector, for
use in self-contained living areas such as flats and single family houses.
Replace all RM.1 smoke detectors after 10 years at the latest! If smoke detectors are installed over openings in the ceiling or under false ceilings,
the smoke detector function may be impaired by draughts or dirt. Therefore fit the seal supplied between smoke detector and ceiling. This can be re-ordered for spares purposes as order no. 0191 53.
Function test The procedure for the recommended monthly function test is as follows: Check whether the LED is flashing. Press the light guide rod test button for at least 1 s. If the signal tone sounds, the device is operating correctly. If no signal tone sounds, replace the battery. Repeat the function test.
Smoke detector (top view)
To protect your hearing, ensure a minimum distance of 50 cm.
For cable-linked networked smoke detectors (see next page), all devices must emit a signal tone.
Smoke entry apertures
Light guide rod
How it works Normal status
Smoke entry Photo receiver
Photo receiver
Smoke
Smoke
Planning examples Optotransmitter
Alarm LED
Insect screen
The smoke detector sensors work on the optical principle, i.e. light beams are emitted every 40 seconds in the measuring chamber, which are not directed to the photo receiver in the normal status.
Optotransmitter Alarm LED
If a certain concentration of smoke enters the measuring chamber, the light beams emitted are scattered by the suspended particles of smoke and some light is de-flected to the photo receiver. The smoke is thus detected and triggers an immediate acoustic and visual alarm. When the measuring chamber is once again free of smoke, the alarm ceases automatically.
Installation locations Ceiling mounted At or as near as possible to the centre of the room Within acoustic range of all occupants The RM.1 is also suitable for installation on boats and in caravans. Unsuitable installation locations To prevent false alarms / malfunctions, do not install the smoke detector: In rooms with high levels of steam, dust or smoke, e.g. kitchen, bathroom, garage, workshop or stables. Close to fireplaces and open chimneys. In places where draughts may keep smoke away from the smoke detector, e.g. windows / ventilation flues. Close to fluorescent / energy saving lamps, because the electric fields caused by the starter can trigger a false alarm when switching on -> min. distance to a lamp 50 cm. In 3D corners (e.g. roof gables) or directly adjacent to walls. In case of fire, smoke-free air can accumulate at these locations and prevent the smoke from being detected. -> min. distance to a wall / corner 50 cm. In rooms with a height exceeding 6 m. In rooms with prevailing temperatures below -10 °C or above +60 °C. When using the radio networking module close to metal items, as this impairs the transmission and reception range of the module. Installing the smoke detector Consider the following when installing: The smoke detector may not be contaminated by drilling dust etc. Connect the block battery to the battery connection and place the battery in the holder. Plug the smoke detector into the socket and lock it in place by turning it slightly clockwise. Then carry out a function test. The RM.1 smoke detector only locks into the socket if the block battery is not inserted!
T45 T45
House
Minimum protection Flat Increased protection
Insect screen
Device socket
Smoke detector
Attic
Bedroom
Korridor
Bedroom
Living room
Kitchen
Cellar
Cellar
Garage
Recommendations RM.1 smoke detectors should be installed near to or within bedrooms as minimum protection, so that the occupants are woken up by a smoke alarm at night. In buildings with several floors, at least one RM.1 smoke detector should also be installed in the corridor on each floor. In larger living areas, use several networked smoke detectors to protect the entire living area. For installation in long corridors, the distance between two smoke detectors should not be longer than 8 m. When smoke is detected, the RM.1 smoke detector that detects the smoke triggers the alarm signal on all other smoke detectors. This means that you will be woken up by a networked smoke detector in your bedroom at night if the smoke detector in the attic detects smoke. Technical data Smoke detector RM.1 order no. 019109. Detection principle Tyndall effect Alarm display Visual (red LED) and acoustic (signal tone) Short signal tone/flashing LED (every 40s) on smoke detector Change batteries Signal tone Piezo, > 85 dB(A)/3 m Monitoring area max. 60 m2 to max. 6 m height -10 to 60°C Operating temperature Max. 10 years Recommended usage period IP43 Index of protection G 203023 VdS approval 100 x 35 mm Dimensions without socket (Ø x H) 100 x 51 mm Dimensions with socket (Ø x H)
SMOKE DETECTORS RM.1 smoke detector RM.1 The RM.1 can optionally be operated individually or in a network. The following optional modules are available for cable and/or radio linked networking:
Extension components
Relay module
Smoke detector (bottom)
Relay module (order no.: 0191 51)
*
AiS
Networking terminal
Radio networking module Socket board Extension slot
N O
Connection of external signal generators via relay module When connecting external signal inputs, note that: max. 30 V DC /2 A
33 V 16 V N A-6SA N PA 2S TQ Q202 JA 517 10 AT
- for connection of external signal generators - for connection to and networking via instabus KNX/EIB - for activation of Radio Bus and Rollotec components and Radio networking modules (order no.: 0191 50) - for radio-controlled networking (e.g. forwarding of alarm/service signals) - for creation of "signalling groups" (in a rented property, smoke detectors can be grouped together, e.g. within each flat)
sirens, warning lights etc. must have their own
Cable-linked networking Cable-linked networking uses the networking terminal incorporated in the RM.1 smoke detector. The devices are connected in parallel using two-core cables (e.g. telephone cable J-Y(St)Y 2x2x0.6 mm). Up to 40 smoke detectors can be networked with one another using this method. The total cable length of the smoke detector network must not exceed 450 m.
N C
separate power supplies.
Ensure correct polarity (as illustrated)!
Connection to instabus KNX/EIB via relay module The KNX/EIB universal interface 8gang can be used to connect the smoke detector to instabus KNX/EIB and networked via the relay module. Take into account the following:
Universal interface 8gang comfort 7564 80 01 Area GND 1 2 3 4
Line TL-Nr.
Ensure correct polarity! If the cable-linked networking is run in conduits, the conduit seal supplied with the RM.1 smoke detector should be used.
5 6 7 8
Programming button
The following example shows cable-linked networking. The smoke detector in the attic is extended with a relay module, to which an external signal generator (acoustic warning signal) can be connected.
A maximum of 4 networked smoke detectors
can be connected to the universal interface.
NO
The relay module is connected to the smoke
detector input and the network terminal to the output side. The maximum cable length between the universal interface and the smoke detector is 10m.
Warning signal
NO
With RM.1 module optionally with relay module Smoke detector RM.1
NO
Note: When the KNX/EIB alarm centre is activated it is recommended that networking is omitted, for reasons of detector identification.
NO
Networking Optional
Technical data Contact type Switching voltage Switching current (ohmic) Switching capacity Operating temperature Index of protection Dimensions (without contact pins)
Relay module order no. 019151 Potential-free changeover contact Max. 30 V= max. 2 A max. 60 W -10 to 60°C IP43 mounted in RM.1 54 x 22 x 5 mm
Radio-controlled networking using radio networking modules When the RM.1 smoke detector is combined with the radio networking module, it is essential to fit the 9 V lithium battery pack supplied.The radio networking module allows wireless transmission and networking of smoke detectors into so-called signalling groups. If one device in a networked group detects a fire, it triggers an alarm. This alarm is received by the other smoke detectors in the signalling group and they then also trigger an alarm (fault messages and low battery signals are also forwarded within a signalling group). The four slide switches allow up to 8 signalling groups and one repeater function to be set up when the radio networking module is taken off. The following example shows radio-controlled networking. A flat with a ground and first floor (light grey walls) is protected by smoke detectors in signalling group 1. The other flat with ground floor, cellar and extension (dark grey walls) is covered independently by detectors from signalling group 2, with the RM.1 in the entrance hall set as an amplifier using the slide switch on the module.
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
RM.1 equipped with optional radio networking module (e.g. with signalling group 2)
1
2
2 Entrance
2
Extension
The planning instructions in the operating instructions and those relating to Radio Bus must be observed!
Combined cable-linked and radio-controlled networking The two networking methods described can be combined. The following example shows a combination of cable-linked and radio-controlled networking. The advantage of this installation is the wireless integration of the cable-networked RM.1 smoke detector in the cellar into the overall RM.1 smoke detector system. Advantages: Wire-based bridging of a radio barrier, e.g. through steel-reinforced concrete, use of more economical wire-based networking in the cellar where there are less visual demands.
Smoke detector RM.1 wire-networked RM.1 equipped with radio networking module Smoke detector RM.1 cable-networked, optionally with relay module, e.g. for activating alarm systems
Technical data Operating voltage Current consumption in transmission mode Transmission power Transmission frequency Channel bandwidth (interference immunity) Signalling groups R&TTE approval (for EU and EFTA states) Range (free field) Operating temperature Index of protection Dimensions (without contact pins and aerial)
radio networking module order no. 019150 5 - 12 V approx. 40 mA max. 20 mW ERP 868 MHz ±64 kHz 8 using slide switches yes approx. 200 m -10 to 60°C IP43 mounted in RM.1 54 x 22 x 5 mm
T46 T46
OVERVIEW OF RADIO BUS overview radio bus 9420..
01740109
018209
Radio controller 180 flat When switch in use, switch on at brightness approx. 1 - 80 / " Lux programmable, with delay time 1 minute, retriggering
Radio controller 180 When switch in use, switch on at brightness < 80 Lux, with 1 minute delay time, retriggering
Radio presence detector surface-mounted Only for BLC radio buttons with imprint R2 or higher
When dimmer in use, switch on saved memory value at brightness approx. 1 - 80 / " Lux programmable, with delay time 1 minute, retriggering
For dimmer inserts: switch to saved memory value when brightness < 80 Lux, with 1 minute delay time, retriggering
Transmitter
Receiver
1760..
Switching On/Off depending on brightness and movement, switch-on time and required brightness value programmabler With BLC dimmer inserts constant light control
BLC radio button 0128 / 0181 / 01781009 / 94550100 / 94550200 Switch on saved memory value at brightness approx. 1 - 80 / " Lux programmable, with delay time 1 minute, retriggering Prog
1 Funk-Universaldimmer Eb 0181
L
AC 230V~ 50/60Hz 50 - 315VA
Universal radio dimmer built-in 94550100 On/Prog
50-400 W/VA 230V~ 50/60Hz
FunkUniversaldimmer Up
Only for radio universal dimmers with imprint R2 Switch to saved memory value when brightness < 80 Lux, with 1 minute delay time (or higher) and RMD , retriggering Switching On/Off depending on brightness and movement, switch-on time and required brightness value programmabler Constant light control
9455 02 00
L
AC 230/240 V AC 50-210 W/VA 50/60 Hz
1 L
oder
+BK
BN
Radio universal dimmer Switch on saved memory value at brightness approx. 1 - 80 / " Lux programmable, with delay time 1 minute, retriggering
0180 / 94650100
N
-
µ
+
N
L
L
ere teu -S nk Fu 80 V~
01 230 AC A 10
inh
1-10V RMD radio unit 94650100
Switch to saved memory value when Only for radio control units with imprint R2 or brightness < 80 Lux, with 1 minute delay time higher (except RMD) , retriggering Switching On/Off depending on brightness and movement, switch-on time and required brightness value programmabler
eit
µ 8A 230V~ 50/60Hz 1-10V/max.15mA
Constant light control
0V
1-1 Eb og Pr
-
+-
+
Radio control units 1-10 V Switch on at brightness approx. 1 - 80 / " Lux programmable, with delay time 1 minute, retriggering
0179 / 0129 / 0125 / 017809 / 94500100 / 94500200 ON/OFF N Funk-Schaltaktor Eb 1 0125 AC 230 V~ L 10A
Funk-Schaltaktor Up
0179
µ
L
Funk-Schaltaktor 2fach Up 0129 AC 230V~ 4sec
BN BK
50/60Hz 2x350W
Antenne
Prog. 1 sec
A B A+B -
RD GN RD GN
INSTA 57608 R2
L A LB L PK
GY
BK
1
Only for radio switch actuator with imprint R2 or higher (except RMD) Switch on/off depending on brightness and movement, switch-on time and required brightness value programmable
N
Radio switch actuators 94500100 µ 10A 230V~ 50/60Hz
P ro g
N
BU BN
On/Prog
ON/OFF AC 230V~ 50/60Hz 1000 W
L
µ
Prog.
Switch on at brightness < 80 Lux, with 1 minute delay time, retriggering
+-
N
BU
Radio switch actuators 017950 / 012550
µ
Switch Switch on at brightness approx. 3 - 80 Lux programmable, with programmable delay time 10 sec. - 15 min. retriggering
P ro g ON/OFF
N
Switch on at brightness approx. 3 - 80 Lux programmable, with programmable delay time 10 sec. - 15 min. retriggering
2300W µ
0179 50
L
BN BK
Antenne
BU BN
Impulse with adjustable brightness approx. 1 - 80 lux, not after-triggering
N Funk-Tastaktor Eb 1 0125 50 AC 230 V~ L 50/60Hz
Funk-Tastaktor Up Prog. ON/OFF AC 230V~ 50/60Hz 1000 W
Impulse with adjustable brightness approx. 1 - 80 lux, not after-triggering
Radio push-button actuators 017509
Funkbus
Funk-Wächterleistungsteil Ap
Radio controller power pack surface-mounted 1758.. / 1759.. / 0127 / 94600100 L
N
Funk-Jalousieaktor Up 4sec
0127 Prog
AC 230V~ 50/60 Hz 700W
1sec |-| |-
RD GN
N BU
BN
PK
L
Flush-mounted radio shutter 94600100 µ 6A 230V~ 50/60Hz
BK
+-
RolloTec radio button Radio shutter actuator flush-mounted and RMD
T47 T47
Only for radio controller power pack with imprint R2 or higher Switch on at brightness < 3-80 Lux programmable, with programmable delay time 10 sec. - 15 min. retriggering
OVERVIEW OF RADIO BUS overview radio bus 2766 / 2769
2764 / 2721.. / 2722.. / 2723.. / 2724.. A
B
1
0126
012410 Radio push-button interface 4gang flush-mounted
C
Antenne
2
0126
TOP
Radio transmitter flushmounted with L lead 0124 10
3 4
Funk-WandsenderEinsatz
5
2764
6
E4 PK
open
7 Batt. OFF LS1/Alles Aus LS2/LS3 LS4/LS5
8
5
3
1
<
2
<
1 4
E3 GY
E2 GN
E1
>1sec Modus ändern
YE
>0,5sec Modus anzeigen
9 87 65 43 21 ON K1 K2 +/K3 +/+/-
AC 230V~ 50/60Hz
5x 1 blinken --> 2 Kanal Dimmen(Toggle) 5x 2 blinken --> 2 Kanal Schalten 5x 3 blinken --> 1 Kanal Jalousie
E1 E2 N L Gy
2
BN
BU BK
Radio hand-held transmitter comfort / mini
Radio wall transmitters, flat Radio transmitter insert
Radio push-button interface 4gang flush-mounted
Radio transmitter with L phase flush-mounted
Switching
Depending on setting
Depending on setting
Depending on setting
Dimming
Switching
Switching
Switching
Comfort hand-held transmitter only
Dimming
Dimming
Dimming
Retrieve light scenes
Retrieve light scenes (Storage can be blocked in flat transmitter)
Retrieve light scenes
Master dimming function All on/off central functions
All on/off central functions
All on/off central functions Switching
Depending on setting
Depending on setting
Depending on setting
Dimming
Switching
Switching
Switching
Comfort hand-held transmitter only
Dimming
Dimming
Dimming
Retrieve light scenes
Retrieve light scenes (Storage can be blocked in flat transmitter)
Retrieve light scenes
Master dimming function
All on/off central functions
All on/off central functions
All on/off central functions Switching
Depending on setting
Depending on setting
Depending on setting
Dimming
Switching
Switching
Switching
Comfort hand-held transmitter only
Dimming
Dimming
Dimming
Retrieve light scenes
Retrieve light scenes (Storage can be blocked in flat transmitter)
Retrieve light scenes
Master dimming function All on/off central functions
All on/off central functions
All on/off central functions Switching
Depending on setting
Depending on setting
Switch setting
Comfort hand-held transmitter only
Switching
Switching
Switching
Retrieving light scenes (on/off)
Retrieve light scenes (Storage can be blocked in flat transmitter)
Buttons (see bell operation)
Buttons (see bell operation)
All on/off central functions All on/off central functions
Retrieving light scenes (on/off) All on/off central functions
Actuator contacts close for the duration of the Actuator contacts close for the duration of the Actuator contacts close for the duration of the Actuator contacts close for the duration of the activation max. 12 seconds activation max. 12 seconds activation max. 12 seconds activation max. 12 seconds
Switch on for delay time
Depending on setting
Depending on setting
Switch setting
Switch ON/OFF for 2 hours (party function)
Switch on for delay time
Switch on for delay time
Switch on for delay time
Switch ON/OFF for 2 hours (party function))
Switch ON/OFF for 2 hours (party function)
Switch ON/OFF for 2 hours (party function)
Open close shutter
Depending on setting
Depending on setting
Depending on setting
Blind adjustment
Open close shutter
Open close shutter
Open close shutter
Comfort hand-held transmitter only
Blind adjustment
Blind adjustment
Blind adjustment
Retrieve light scenes open/close end positions
Retrieve light scenes open/close end positions
Retrieve light scenes open/close end positions
All OPEN/CLOSE end position central functions
All OPEN/CLOSE end position central functions
All OPEN/CLOSE end position central functions
T48 T48
radioBUS bus RADIO planning tips PLANNING INSTRUCTIONS Free field definition Transmitter
approx. 100 m
Receiver
> 20 m Funk-Schaltaktor 1Kanal Up
0124
0179
µ
0m
L
L
N
N
>2
Distance from interMounting height > 2 m fering objects
> 20 m
Level floor
L
>2
0m
Distance from interMounting height > 2 m fering objects
Dependence of transmission range on mounting height Theoretical Receiver transmission range mounting height 100 m >2m 56 m 1.5 m 34 m 1.0 m 28 m 0.8 m 23 m 0.6 m 18 m 0.4 m 13 m 0.2 m
Preconditions for measurement of the free field range - level floor. - horizontal distance of interfering objects from any point along the straight-line transmitter - receiver path > 20 m. - height of transmitter/receiver > 2 metres above the floor. - optimum alignment of aerial (stretched out straight). - damp ground.
In every property in which the Radio Bus is to be installed there are favourable and unfavourable locations for the installation of appliances. In borderline cases the selection of the installation location can be decisive in determining the proper functioning of a radio link. Consequently, the following criteria should be taken into account in planning and installation: Material Penetration Wood, plaster, unlaminated glass approx. 90% Brick, pressboard panels approx. 70% Reinforced concrete approx. 30% Metal, metal grilles, aluminium laminations approx. 10% Rain, snow approx. 0 - 40% � The link between the transmitter and the receiver should be chosen such that it runs for as short a distance as possible through masonry or other attenuating materials. Wall niches, in particular, should be avoided.
� The distance to large metal surfaces, e.g. metal doors and frames, aluminium
blinds or metal cupboards should be as large as possible (several decimetres). Transmitter
Metal
� Penetration of radio signals
ing
ow ad er Sh ceiv re
Transmitter
mind. 20 cm Receiver
Receiver
Effective wa ll thickness 24 cm
Effective wa ll thickness 55 cm
n tio w ua Lo ten t a
N 1 L
Funk-Schaltaktor Eb 0125
Antenne
AC 230 V~ 10A µ
Receiver
� Do not install transmitters and receivers behind metallic or conductive surfaces,
e.g. anti-static floor, insulation with metal laminating, cable lines, metal louvered ceilings, panels containing carbon fibres, hot water heaters, electric underfloor heating systems etc. Remedy: If possible lead the aerial through the material.
Hig ha tte nu ati on
� Windows with heat insulating glass based on metal insulation severely attenuate
Receiver
or reflect radio signals.
Receiver
� The mounting height of transmitters and receivers should not be below 50 cm. � The distance between transmitters and receivers should be at least 1 m and at
least 10 cm between receivers.
� As far as possible all transmitter and receiver aerials should be aligned vertically or
horizontally.
� Do not shorten, extend or strip the aerials as they are precisely co-ordinated to
the wavelength of the signal frequency.
� A minimum distance of 3 m should be maintained to radio components of other
function groups, e.g. radio headphones or radio telephones.
� Computers, audio/video systems, microwaves or electronic transformers and
ballasts are high-frequency interference sources. Maintain a minimum distance of 50 cm to these units wherever possible.
� Transmitters or receivers which handle centralised tasks building-wide
(e.g. ALL OFF or central shutter control) should also be placed at a central location whenever possible. Unfavourable links running diagonally through the entire building should be avoided.
� If reception is irregular, it is often sufficient to move the transmitter or receiver by
just a few centimetres. This reception interference often occurs due to partitioning, obliteration or reflection of the radio signal, as is familiar from car radios and mobile phones for example.
� Damp in ceiling and walls, or snow in outdoor areas, severely attenuates or
reflects radio signals.
� Radio reception can be checked at any time prior to installation using a transmitter
and a receiver. The state of completion of the building should be taken into account, e.g. dryness of plaster and floor paving or presence of doors and cladding.
� To prevent superimposition of telegrams, radio actuators may not be used to
actuate any other radio transmitters.
� Radio telegrams within a "radio zone" should only be repeated using a radio signal
amplifier as otherwise telegram superimposition can occur. The signal amplifier should be a minimum distance of 1 m from transmitters and receivers to prevent overloads.
� No more than 8 radio presence detectors should be used within a "radio zone".
If there is constant presence in the detection range, the telegram frequency could result in telegram superimposition in the radio channel.
� The radio presence detector may only be operated with alkaline batteries, as they
are the only ones with sufficient pulse current carrying capacity.
� The connecting cables for the radio push-button interface may only by extended
to a maximum of 5 m using twisted pair cables with a cross-section of approx. 0.2 mm2 per channel.
Radio signal amplifier If a link is subject to a high degree of attenuation, or if the 100 metre radio range is insufficient, rendering transmission of the radio signals impossible, a radio signal amplifier can be installed at around half range as a repeater. It can amplify up to 60 transmission channels. All radio telegrams of the Radio Bus system are understood, but only the taught-in ones are amplified. Cascading of radio signal amplifiers is not possible. That is to say, radio signal amplifiers do not amplify radio telegrams from other radio signal amplifiers. 38 0177 09
The Radio Bus planning instructions must be followed
Radio signal amplifier
N L
Antenne
ON
110
T49 T49
OFF
94
Technical data Radio signal amplifier order no. 017709 Power supply unit 230 V~, 50/60 Hz Standby power consumption approx. 1.10 W Transmission frequency 433.42 MHz, (ASK) Transmission range max. 100 m (free field) Transmission power < 10 mW R&TTE approval (for EU and EFTA states) Yes Radio codes (assigned once per channel) > 1 billion Number of radio codes (channels) to amplify 60 Radio interference suppression according to EN 55015 Operating temperature -20 to 55°C Index of protection IP20 Terminals Screw-type terminals for max. 2.5 mm2 or 2 x 1.5 mm2 110 x 38 x 94 mm Dimensions (L x W x H)
radio RADIO bus BUS transmitters/receivers TRANSMITTER/RECEIVER Radio Bus control centre HM 1801
Unit summary
The unit is used as a radio control centre for all Radio Bus transmitters and actuators (except radio controller power pack and EIB radio receiver). The HM 1801 expands the radio installation, e.g. to include timer controlled and automated functions for lighting and shutter/awning control. Radio Bus components can be actuated and linked. Data backup and any software updates are carried out using chip cards - additional connections permit future functions to be added. Functions Commissioning assistant Menu-driven operation with function keys Save and retrieve the last status by using the coming in / going out function. Easy operation and short messages via text-based illuminated display Accurate time controls with integrated radio clock (DCF77) Indication of time and room temperature Integrated Piezo buzzer with adjustable volume Key lock similar to mobile phone Save and load configurations/programmes using chip card Integrated radio signal amplifier function Transmitters and receivers can be taught in battery mode Emergency power supply Master functions such as ALL ON and ALL OFF (panic button) Switch and call up dimmer values Rapid selection of light scenes using number keys Easy configuration thanks to pre-set texts Teaching-in and testing of Radio Bus transmitters Battery low display for Radio Bus transmitters Lock and unlock radio control sections by time or radio transmitter Random time control, e.g. to simulate presence in building Time control for shutters with running time setting Time-dependent controller monitoring Configuration lock for reprogramming using PIN
17:22 Sonntag
Always follow the Radio Bus planning instructions!
The range always depends on the local conditions. When choosing the mounting location, ensure that the display can be read without glare and that there is a DCF77 reception.
4 function keys
Master button
12 number keys (standard assignment)
Housing
RJ45 interface
Temperature sensor (backside of unit)
Chip card reader Interlock
Digital input
Mains connection
Display (initial display) Time
Weekday
17:22 Sunday
Transmission / Reception indication Temperature indication
max. 100 m
5
HM 1801 RT 20,5°C Funk-Zentrale
Short message
RT
HM 1801 Radio control 20,5°C centre
Main menu
Coming / Going Menu item
The garden lighting is to be operated by the controller after a particular time: Using the menu system in the display, specify a time as a condition in the HM 1801 linking function. In addition, set the delay time for the actuator.
Funk-Schaltaktor Up
5
Prog.
Hauptmenü
N
Funk-Schaltaktor Up
0179
Prog.
N
BN BK
BU BN
Radio switch actuator flush-mounted
BU BN
0179
ON/OFF AC 230V~ 50/60Hz 1000 W
L
0179
ON/OFF AC 230V~ 50/60Hz 1000 W
max. 100 m
Funk-Schaltaktor Up
µ
DCF77 Reception indication Key lock
Hauptmenü
N
5
Mains connection
17:22 Sonntag
BU BN
DCF77 field strength indication
Battery display
HM 1801 RT 20,5°C Funk-Zentrale 17:22 Sonntag
ON/OFF AC 230V~ 50/60Hz 1000 W
Display
Hauptmenü
Example of use: time-dependent controller monitoring
Ranges / mounting location
Prog.
5
HM 1801 RT 20,5°C Funk-Zentrale
µ
µ
L
BN BK
L
BN BK
Radio switch actuator flush-mounted
Radio controller 180
Radio switch actuator flush-mounted
Technical data Power supply unit 230 V~, 50/60 Hz Emergency power supply (batteries) 5 x Micro Alkaline (LR 03) Battery life approx. 6 hours in continuous operation without the mains Symbol flashing battery in display Change batteries Transmission frequency 433.42 MHz, (ASK) Transmission range max. 100 m (free field) Transmission power < 10 mW R&TTE approval (for EU and EFTA countries) Yes Number of channels 32 transmitters / 32 receivers System radio codes > 1 billion Signal amplifier Integrated, max. 100 m, not cascadable Mains cable H 03 V V-F, 2 x 0.75
Controls Display Radio clock Buzzer Interfaces Radio interference suppression Operating temperature Index of protection Dimensions (L x W x H) Additional HM1801 master card Order No.:
Radio Bus control centre HM 1801 order no. 2700 4 function keys, master button, 12 number keys LC, 7 lines x 20 characters, illuminated DCF 77 Piezo, < 65 dB(A) Chip card reader RJ45 socket according to EN 55015 4 to 40°C IP20 230 x 140 x 50 mm 2700 01
Mini hand-held radio transmitter The Mini hand-held radio transmitter permits cordless remote control. When a key is pressed, an encrypted radio telegram is sent, which is understood by all the radio receivers in the Radio Bus system. 2 channels can be used for on/off, brighter/darker or up/down commands Mini hand-held radio transmitter <
2769
<
1
1
2
2
The Radio Bus planning instructions must be followed.
Transmit LED
Technical data Power supply unit Batteries Battery life Transmission frequency Transmission range Transmission power R&TTE approval (for EU and EFTA states) Number of channels Radio codes (assigned once per channel) Operating temperature Dimensions (L x W x H)
Mini hand-held radio transmitter order no. 2769 3 V= 1 x lithium coin cell (type CR20 32) approx. 3 years 433.42 MHz, (ASK) max. 30 m (free field) < 10 mW Yes 2 > 1 billion 0 to 55°C 73 x 40 x 19 mm
Channel keys
T50 T50
RADIO BUS TRANSMITTERS radio bus transmitter Radio hand-held transmitters comfort
B
1
C
2
5
Radio wall transmitter flat The flat radio wall transmitter flat permits cordless, permanently installed remote control in electrical installations.
4
When using BLC dimmer inserts with BLC radio buttons, radio dimmers built-in or radio button control unit 1-10 V, the master dimming push-button is used to make an entire light scene lighter/darker or switch it off.
3
fixed dimming value for lighting (approx. 10% to 100% brightness), and/or fixed switching state of a load (e.g. fan, light on/off), and/or fixed end position of a shutter (shutter up / down).
7
A light scene may be composed of:
6
With the radio hand-held transmitter comfort, 5 light scenes can be stored and retrieved.
Master dimming push-button for light scenes
ALL OFF key
8 3 2 5 4
Touch functions are called up for on/off, brighter/darker or up/down commands or special functions "All Off" or "Light Scene".
Group keys Channel keys 1
Three groups (A, B, C) are available, each with 8 channels (1, .., 8), meaning 24 radio channels can be used for on/off, lighter/darker or up/down commands.
ALL ON key Group/Transmit LED A
Radio hand-held transmitters permit cordless remote control. When a key is pressed, an encrypted radio telegram is sent which is understood and evaluated by all the radio receivers in the Radio Bus system.
Radio hand-held transmitter comfort
Light scene keys The Radio Bus planning instructions must be followed.
Technical data Radio hand-held transmitter comfort order no. 2766 Power supply unit 6 V= Battery 4 x micro, alkaline (LR 03) Battery life approx. 3 years Repeated flashing of all LEDs when transmitting batteries flat, replace Transmission frequency 433.42 MHz, (ASK) Transmission range max. 100 m (free field) Transmission power < 10 mW R&TTE approval (for EU and EFTA states) YES Number of channels 24 in 3 groups A, B, C Radio codes (assigned once per channel) > 1 billion Light scenes 5 Operating temperature 0 to 55°C Dimensions (L x W x H) 192 x 53 x 23 mm
Radio wall transmitter flat Simple expansion of combinations by surfacemounted installation
When a key is pressed, the flat transmitter sends an encrypted radio telegram, which is understood and evaluated by all the radio receivers in the Radio Bus system. The keys can operate in pairs as rockers (for on/off, brighter/darker or up/down commands) or activate special "All Off" or "Light Scene" functions. The Radio wall transmitter flat is fitted with a 4gang function switch "S", which is used to select the push-button function and to save the light scenes (see illustration). The Radio wall transmitter flat can be screwed or stuck to a flat base (wood, plaster, glass, mirror etc.) as well as to appliance sockets with a frame. When fitting on glass, adhesive foil order no. 9498 xx xx can be fitted to the backside as a sight screen.
S LS1/All Off
light scenes, saving barred
K3 +/enabled
Function switch
Radio transmitter insert wall-mounted Flush-mounted installation depth 12 mm
The Radio Bus planning instructions must be followed.
In flat surfacemounted frame Antenna
TOP
Wall-mounted radio transmitter insert
2764
When a key is pressed, the Radio transmitter wall-mounted sends an encrypted radio telegram, which is understood and evaluated by all the radio receivers in the Radio Bus system.
K2 +/-
4
LS4/LS5
K1 +/N
LS2/LS3
3
The Radio transmitter insert wall-mounted permits cordless but permanently installed remote control in electrical installations. It can be operated in combination with EIB push-buttons (1, 2 or 4gang) of the S.1, MODUL 2, B.1, B.3, B.7 Glas, K.1, K.5, ARSYS, and TWINPOINT ranges.
CR 2032 3V
2
Radio transmitter insert wall-mounted
The Radio Bus planning instructions must be followed.
1
Technical data Radio wall transmitter flat order no. 2721.., 2722.., 2724,. Power supply unit 3 V= Battery 1 x lithium coin cell (type CR20 32) Battery life approx. 3 years Repeated flashing of all LEDs when transmitting battery flat, replace Transmission frequency 433.42 MHz, (ASK) Transmission range max. 100 m (free field) Transmission power < 10 mW R&TTE approval (for EU and EFTA states) Yes Number of channels 1, 2, 3 or 4 depending on the type Radio codes (assigned once per channel) > 1 billion Light scenes 1, 3 or 5 depending on setting and type Operating temperature 0 to 55°C Index of protection IP20
Batt. OFF LS1/All off
open Batt. OFF LS1/All off LS2/LS3 LS4/LS5
ON K1 K2 +/K3 +/+/-
S ON
LS2/LS3
K1 +/-
LS4/LS5
K2 +/K3 +/-
The keys can operate in pairs as rockers (for on/off, brighter/darker or up/down commands) or activate special "All Off" or "Light Scene" functions. The Radio transmitter wall-mounted is fitted with a 4gang function switch "S", which is used to select the push-button function (see illustration). The Radio transmitter wall-mounted can be installed in flush-mounted wall boxes, cavity wall sockets or flat surface-mounted housings with frames. To achieve the maximum transmission range, the aerial should be exposed and fully stretched out, and be as far as possible from the wall-mounted radio transmitter.
T51 T51
30
Function switch
Technical data Radio wall transmitter insert order no. 2764 Power supply unit 6 V= Batteries 2 x lithium coin cells (type:CR2032) Battery life approx. 3 years Repeated flashing of all LEDs when transmitting batteries flat, replace Transmission frequency 433.42 MHz, (ASK) Transmission range max. 100 m (free field) Transmission power < 10 mW R&TTE approval (for EU and EFTA states) Yes Number of channels 1, 2, 3 or 4 depending on push-button Radio codes (assigned once per channel) > 1 billion Light scenes 5 according to setting Operating temperature 4 to 55°C Index of protection IP20 Insertion depth 12.3 mm
RADIO BUS TRANSMITTERS radio bus transmitter Radio transmitter with phase conductor flush-mounted The Radio transmitter with phase conductor is used to expand existing installations by permitting the wireless transmission of switching, pushing, dimming and shutter commands. The radio telegram is understood and evaluated by all the radio receivers in the Radio Bus system. The Radio transmitter with phase conductor has 4 operating modes: Mode A: 2-channel dimming single-surface operation (toggling), application: series dimmers The Radio transmitter with phase conductor sends one dimming/toggle command per channel, with a rocker button with 2 NO contacts for example. Short actuation (< 1s): switch on/off Long actuation (> 1 s): brighter/darker Note: the telegram type (on/off, brighter/darker) is toggled in the transmitter. The Radio transmitter with phase conductor may therefore have to be actuated twice in order to obtain the desired reaction after it is been operated on the receiver or by a different transmitter. Mode B: 2-channel switching; application: series switch The flush-mounted radio transmitter with L conductor sends each channel a switch-on command when the voltage is connected, and a switch-off command when it is disconnected. Activation e.g. by: series switch = series switching. If activated by a time switch, a presence can be simulated. Mode B: 2-channel switching; application: push-button / bell operationThe flush-mounted radio transmitter with L conductor sends an ON command when the push-button (NO contact) is pressed and an OFF command when it is released. Note: This operating mode is not suitable for activation of radio push-button actuators. Mode C: 1-channel dimming two-surface operation Application: 2-push-button dimmer The Radio transmitter with phase conductor sends on/off dimming telegrams (brighter/darker) for one channel. Activation: e.g. rocker button with 2 NO contacts Actuation: E1 < 1 s: switch on E1 > 1 s: brighter E2 < 1 s: switch off E2 > 1 s: darker Note: a long actuation (> 1 s) when the load is switched off causes switching on to minimum brightness (night light). Mode D: 1 channel shutter Application: shutter control The flush-mounted radio transmitter with L conductor sends up/down shutter telegrams (short-term / long-term mode) for one channel. Activation: e.g. by RolloTec insert Activation: E1 > 1 s: move up E1 < 1 s: blind adjustment upwards E2 > 1 s: move down E2 < 1 s: blind adjustment downwards Note: The Radio transmitter with phase conductor must not be connected in parallel to a shutter motor. Radio push-button interface 4gang flush-mounted The Radio push-button interface 4gang flush-mounted upgrades an existing installation by cordless transmission of dimming, switching, shutter control and light scene commands. Inputs E1-E4 are activated via potential-free switching and/or push contacts. The radio telegram is understood and evaluated by all the radio receivers in the Radio Bus system. Activation: switches; application: 2 series switches The Radio push-button interface 4gang flush-mounted sends a switch-on command to each channel when the switch is closed and a switch-off command when it is opened. Activation e.g. by 2 series switches produces 2 series connections. The special "bell operation" function is possible with a push-button. Activation: push-buttons; application: 4gang push-button or TS system. The Radio push-button interface 4gang flush-mounted sends the switching, dimming, shutter control or light scene commands for channels depending on the DIP switch setting (see table).
Flush-mounted radio transmitter with L conductor L N
Application: series switches
Applications: - series dimmer - 2-push-button dimmer - Bell operation
Radio transmitter with phase conductor flush-mounted
012410
>1sec Change mode
AC 230 V~ 50/60Hz
>0,5sec Display mode
BN
5x 1 flash --> 2 channel dimming 5x 2 flash --> 2 channel switching 5x 3 flash --> 1 channel blinds
E1 E2 N L
BU BK
Gy
grey
brown
BN
E1 E2 N L
BU BK
Gy
grey
brown
brown
blue
blue
blue
black
black
black
e.g. with series switch in deep flush-mounted socket.
AC 230 V~ 50/60Hz
>0,5sec Display mode
5x 1 flash --> 2 channel dimming 5x 2 flash --> 2 channel switching 5x 3 flash --> 1 channel blinds
E1 E2 N L Gy
012410
>1sec Change mode
AC 230 V~ 50/60Hz
>0,5sec Display mode
5x 1 flash --> 2 channel dimming 5x 2 flash --> 2 channel switching 5x 3 flash --> 1 channel blinds
grey
Radio transmitter with phase conductor flush-mounted
Radio transmitter with phase conductor flush-mounted
012410
>1sec Change mode
Application: Shutter control
e.g. with RolloTec® insert in deep flush-mounted socket.
BN
BU BK
The Radio Bus planning instructions must be followed. The radio transmitter with L conductor must not be connected in parallel with a shutter motor.
Flush-mounted radio transmitter with N conductor, order no. 012410 Technical data 230 V~, 50/60 Hz Power supply unit approx. 0.49 W Standby power consumption 433.42 MHz, (ASK) Transmission frequency max. 100 m (free field) Transmission range < 10 mW Transmission power Yes R&TTE approval (for EU and EFTA states) 1 or 2 depending on operating mode Number of channels > 1 billion Radio codes (assigned once per channel) according to EN 55015 Radio interference suppression -20 to 55°C Operating temperature IP20 Index of protection approx. 210 mm Conductor length 52 x 23 mm Dimensions (Ø x H)
Radio push-button interface 4gang flush-mounted Radio push-button interface 4gang flush-mounted
Radio push-button interface 4gang flush-mounted in conjunction with system TS
0126 E4 PK
E3
E2
GY
GN
E1
Radio push-button interface 4gang flush-mounted
0126 E4
YE
PK
9 87 65 43 21
E3 GY
E2
E1
GN
YE
9 87 65 43 21
Front
Page
pink grey green
1x CR2032
+ Tx
yellow open
Low Batt
On OFF 1 2 3 4 5
Technical data Radio push-button interface 4gang flush-mounted order no. 0126 Power supply unit 3 V= Battery 1 x lithium coin cell (type CR20 32) Battery life approx. 3 years Transmission frequency 433.42 MHz, (ASK) Transmission range max. 100 m (free field) Transmission power < 10 mW R&TTE approval (for EU and EFTA states) Yes Number of channels 2 or 4 depending on mode Radio codes (assigned once per channel) > 1 billion Light scenes max. 4 depending on setting Operating temperature 5 to 55°C Index of protection IP20 Conductor length approx. 290 mm, extendable to max. 5 m Dimensions (L x W x H) 44 x 40 x 11mm
Nr. Dip1 Dip2 Dip3 Dip4 Dip5 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 2 0 0 1 0 0 3 0 0 1 1 0 4 0 1 0 0 0 5 0 1 0 0 1 6 0 1 0 1 1 7 0 1 0 1 1
Input 1 (E1)
Rear
Radio push-button interface 4gang flush-mounted E4 PK
The Radio Bus planning instructions must be followed. No function with EIB surfacemounted radio receiver
Input 2 (E2) Input 3 (E3) 1-area Switching/Dimming E1=K1, E2=K2, E3=K3, E4=K4 2-area Switching/Dimming/Shutters E1+E2=K1; E3+E4=K2 1-area Switching E1=K1, E2=K2, E3=K3, E4=K4 1-area Switching E1=K1, E2=K2, E3=K3, E4=K4 All ON All OFF Light scene 1 All OFF Light scene 1 Light scene 2 All OFF Light scene 3 Light scene 4 Light scene 1 Light scene 2 Light scene 3
503404
0126
E3
E2
GY
GN
E1 YE
9 87 65 43 21
Radio push-button interface 4gang flush-mounted in conjunction with rocker button with 4 NO contacts
Input 4 (E4)
Activation Push-button Push-button
Switch Switch Light scene 2 Light scene 3 Light scene 5 Light scene 4
Push-button Push-button Push-button Push-button
T52 T52
RADIO BUS ACTUATORS radio bus actuators BLC radio button The lighting can be switched on/off manually at the radio button or via a radio transmitter with BLC switch inserts, and it can also be made brighter/darker with BLC touch dimmers. The desired switch-on brightness can be stored in touch dimmers, and is retrieved for every switch-on command (memory value). Light scene operation is also possible with the radio hand-held transmitter comfort or radio wall transmitter, or the radio push-button interface 4gang flush-mounted and HM 1801. If light scenes are assigned (taught-in) to the BLC radio button, the desired brightness value in BLC touch dimmers and the switching state in BLC switch inserts can be stored and set when a light scene is called up. Pressing the ALL OFF / ALL ON push-button on a taught-in hand-held radio transmitter comfort, a radio transmitter wall-mounted or flat or the radio push-button interface 4gang flush-mounted and HM1801 switches the load on or off. When a radio signal is received by the radio controller, it is switched on for approx. 1 minute (retriggering), and in BLC touch dimmers the memory value is set.
Radio universal cord dimmer / radio universal dimmer built-in The lighting can be switched on/off manually at the device or via a radio transmitter or via BLC extension units, and made brighter/darker via a radio transmitter and BLC extension unit. The desired switch-on brightness can be stored in touch dimmers, and is retrieved each time a switch-on command is given (memory value). Light scene operation is also possible with the radio hand-held transmitter comfort or radio wall transmitter, or the radio push-button interface 4gang flush-mounted and HM 1801. If light scenes are assigned (taught-in) to the radio cord dimmer / built-in radio universal dimmer, the desired brightness value can be stored and set when a light scene is called up. Pressing the ALL OFF / ALL ON push-button on a taught-in hand-held radio transmitter comfort, a radio transmitter wall-mounted or flat or the radio push-button interface 4gang flush-mounted and HM1801 switches the load on or off. When a radio signal is received by the radio controller, the memory value is set for approx. 1 minute (retriggering). The radio universal cord dimmer and the radio universal dimmer built-in are protected against short-circuit by an electronic circuit-breaker with automatic restart following elimination of the fault. They are protected against overload by low-noise power reduction and have a bulb-preserving soft start function.
BLC radio button e.g. with BLC universal touch dimmer L N
BLC extension unit
BLC universal touch dimmer
Push-button (NOC) 5031
2907
2902
N
or
AC 230 V
N AC 230 V
L
L ohmic / ind.
ohmic / cap.
1 L
1 L
to other extension units Operation with extension unit The Radio Bus planning instructions must be followed.
Technical data Power supply unit Standby power consumption Reception frequency Radio transmitter with teach-in facility Radio codes (assigned once per channel) Distance from transmitter in teach-in mode R&TTE approval (for EU and EFTA states) Light scenes Operating temperature Index of protection
BLC radio button order No. 1760.. from flush-mounted insert approx. 0.68 W 433.42 MHz, (ASK) 30 > 1 billion 0.5 to 5 m Yes 5 4 to 55°C IP20
Radio universal cord dimmer L N PE PE PE
PE N 1 L
Basic circuit
N
o r
N L ohmic / ind.
0128
N L ohmic / cap.
The Radio Bus planning instructions must be followed.
L N PE BLC extension unit
Function with extension unit push-button (NOC) not possible.
2907 PE PE
PE N 1 L
1 L
N
o r
N L
N L ohmic / cap.
ohmic / ind.
0128
Operation with BLC extension unit
Radio universal dimmer built-in L N BLC extension unit 2907
N L
o r
ohmic / ind.
N L ohmic / cap.
Function with extension unit push-button (NOC) not possible. The Radio Bus planning instructions must be followed. Radio universal dimmer built-in 0181
1 L
1 L
AC 230V~ 50/60Hz 50 - 315VA
Prog
Operation with BLC extension unit
Technical data Power supply unit Connected load
Radio universal dimmer built-in order no. 0181 230 V~, 50/60Hz 230 V Incandescent and halogen lamps 50-315 W (ohmic, phase cut-off) Tronic transformers 50-315 W (capacitive, phase cut-off) Conv. transformers (min. 85% load) Total load 50-315 W including transformer power loss may not exceed 315 VA (inductive load, phase cut-on). Mixed loads of specified load types (no combination of capacitive and inductive loads) max. 10 Tronic- or LV-boosters built-in depending upon type of load Phase cut-on or cut-off depending on load type Dimming principle approx. 0.65 W Standby power consumption Bulb-preserving soft start Switch-on Any number of BLC extension units No. of extension units Very low noise Noise 433.42 MHz, (ASK) Reception frequency 30 Radio transmitter with teach-in facility > 1 billion Radio codes (assigned once per channel) 0.5 to 5 m Distance from transmitter in teach-in mode Yes R&TTE approval (for EU and EFTA states) 5 Light scenes Cut-out with auto. restart Short-circuit-proof Electronic protection (no change-over) Overheating protection by means of autom. cut-out to EN 55015 Radio interference suppression 0 to 55°C Operating temperature IP20 Index of protection 2 Screw-type terminals for max. 2.5 mm or 2 x 1.5 mm2 Terminals 188.5 x 28 x 28 mm Dimensions (L x W x H)
T53 T53
Technical data Power supply unit Connected load
Radio universal cord dimmer order no. 0128 230 V~, 50/60Hz 230 V Incandescent and halogen lamps 50-315 W (ohmic, phase cut-off) Tronic transformers 50-315 W (capacitive, phase cut-off) Conv. transformers (min. 85% load) Total load 50-315 W including transformer power loss may not exceed 315 VA (inductive load, phase cut-on). Mixed loads of specified load types (no combination of capacitive and inductive loads) max. 10 Tronic- or LV-boosters built-in depending upon type of load Phase cut-on or cut-off depending on load type Dimming principle approx. 0.63 W Standby power consumption Bulb-preserving soft start Switch-on Any number of BLC extension units No. of extension units Very low noise Noise 433.42 MHz, (ASK) Reception frequency 30 Radio transmitter with teach-in facility > 1 billion Radio codes (assigned once per channel) 0.5 to 5 m Distance from transmitter in teach-in mode Yes R&TTE approval (for EU and EFTA states) 5 Light scenes Cut-out with auto. restart Short-circuit-proof Electronic protection (no change-over) Overheating protection by means of autom. cut-out to EN 55015 Radio interference suppression 0 to 55°C Operating temperature IP20 Index of protection 2 Screw-type terminals for max. 2.5 mm or 2 x 1.5 mm2 Terminals 125.7 x 59.6 x 29.6 mm Dimensions (L x W x H)
RADIO BUS ACTUATORS radio bus actuators Radio universal dim actuator flush-mounted
Radio universal dim actuator flush-mounted
The lighting can be switched on/off manually on the device or via radio transmitter, and dimmed via radio transmitter. The desired switch-on brightness value can be saved, and is called up with every switch-on command (memory value).
R,L,C
L N N do L er
ohmic / ind.
FunkUniversaldimmer Up
N L
9455 02 00 R,L,C
ohmic / cap.
FunkUniversaldimmer Up
L
9455 02 00
The radio hand-held transmitter comfort, wall-transmitter, push-button interface flush-mounted 4gang and HM 1801 can be used for light scene operation. If light scenes have been assigned (taught) to the radio universal dimmer flush-mounted, then the desired brightness value can be saved, which is set when a light scene is called up.
R,L,C
L
BK
AC 230/240 V AC 50-210 W/VA 50/60 Hz
BK
AC 230/240 V AC 50-210 W/VA 50/60 Hz BN
black brown
BN
Basic connection
Please observe the radio bus planning instructions!
Pressing the ALL OFF button/ALL ON button of a taught radio hand-held transmitter, radio wall transmitter, radio push-button interface flush-mounted 4gang and HM 1801 causes the load to be switched off/on. When a taught radio signal of the radio controller is received, the memory value is set for approx. 1 min. (retriggering). Technical data Power supply Connected load
Radio universal dimmer flush-mounted Order no. 94550200 Radio codes (assign uniquely for each channel) > 1 billion Distance to transmitter in teaching mode 0.5 to 5 m R&TTE approval (for EU and EFTA countries) Yes Light scenes 5 Short-circuit proof Switch-off with autom. restart electron. fuse (no change-over) Overheating protection autom. switch-off Radio interference suppression according to EN 55015 Operating temperature 0 to 45°C Operating humidity approx. 15 to 50 % Protection class IP20 Conductor length approx. 210 mm Dimensions (Ï x H) 52.5 x 27.5 mm
Radio adapter plug universal dimmer
Technical data Power supply unit Connected load
230 V~, 50/60Hz 230 V incandescent lamps and halogen lamps 50-210 W (ohmic, phase cut-off) Tronic transformers 50-210 W (capacitive, phase cut-off) or conv. transformers (loaded < 85%) incl. transformer power dissipation 50-210 VA (inductive, phase cut-on) Mixed loads, capacitive and inductive loads may not be mixed! Phase cut-on or cut-off according to load type Dimming principle approx. 0.63 W Power consumption, standby bulb-preserving soft start Switching on very low noise Noise generation 433.42 MHz, (ASK) Reception frequency 30 Teachable radio transmitters
The lighting can be activated on the device manually or using the radio transmitter. It can be dimmed using the radio transmitter. The desired switch-on brightness can be stored in touch dimmers, and is retrieved each time a switch-on command is given (memory value). Light scene operation is also possible with the radio hand-held transmitter comfort or radio wall transmitter, or the radio push-button interface 4gang flush-mounted and HM 1801. If light scenes are assigned (taught-in) to the radio adapter universal dimmer, the desired brightness value can be stored and set when a light scene is called up. Pressing the ALL OFF / ALL ON push-button on a taught-in hand-held radio transmitter comfort, a radio transmitter wall-mounted or flat or the radio push-button interface 4gang flush-mounted and HM1801 switches the load on or off. When a taught-in radio signal is received by the radio controller, the memory value is set for approx. 1 minute (retriggering). Radio adapter plug universal dimmer
70
34,5
R,L,C
Radio adapter universal dimmer order no. 01781009 230 V~, 50/60Hz Incandescent and 230 V halogen lamps 50-420 W (ohmic, phase cut-off) Tronic transformers 50-420 W (capacitive, phase cut-off) Conv. transformers (min. 85% load) Total load 50-420 W including transformer power loss may not exceed 420 VA (inductive load, phase cut-on). Mixed loads of specified load types (no combination of capacitive and inductive loads) Phase cut-on or cut-off depending on load type Dimming principle approx. 0.63 W Standby power consumption Yes Increased child protection as per VDE 0620 part 1 Bulb-preserving soft start Switch-on Very low noise Noise 433.42 MHz, (ASK) Reception frequency 30 Radio transmitter with teach-in facility > 1 billion Radio codes (assigned once per channel) 0.5 to 5 m Distance from transmitter in teach-in mode Yes R&TTE approval (for EU and EFTA states) 5 Light scenes Cut-out with auto. restart Short-circuit-proof Electronic protection (no change-over) by means of autom. cut-out Overheating protection to EN 55015 Radio interference suppression 5 to 35°C Operating temperature IP20 Index of protection
On/Prog
The Radio Bus planning instructions must be followed.
136
Radio control unit 1-10 V built-in The lighting can be activated on the device manually or using the radio transmitter, and made brighter/darker. The desired switch-on brightness can be stored in touch dimmers, and is retrieved each time a switch-on command is given (memory value).
Radio control unit 1-10 V built-in
The Radio Bus planning instructions must be followed.
L N N
Light scene operation is also possible with the radio hand-held transmitter comfort or radio wall transmitter, or the radio push-button interface 4gang flush-mounted and HM 1801. If light scenes are assigned (taught-in) to the radio control unit 1-10 V built-in, the desired brightness value can be stored and set when a light scene is called up.
Radio control unit 1-10 V built-in 0180
AC 230V~ 10A
µ L
1 2 3 4
+
Prog
EVG
-
+
L1 N
Pressing the ALL OFF / ALL ON push-button on a taught-in hand-held radio transmitter comfort, a radio transmitter wall-mounted or flat or the radio push-button interface 4gang flush-mounted and HM1801 switches the load on or off. When a radio signal is received by the radio controller, the memory value is set for approx. 1 minute (retriggering).
Basic circuit
To other electronic ballasts or Tronic transformers with 1-10 V interface
For dimensioning of switching power and control current, see Technical Information, 1-10 V devices. Technical data Power supply unit 230 V~, 50/60 Hz Standby power consumption approx. 1,22 W Control voltage 1-10 V Max. control current 15 mA Switching contact; Ohmic load; Relay; 1800 W; type-dependent Electronic ballast, transformer approx. 12 single-lamp-, 6 two-lamp electronic ballasts Reception frequency 433.42 MHz, (ASK) Radio transmitter with teach-in facility 30 > 1 billion Radio codes (assigned once per channel)
Radio control unit 1-10 V built-in Order no. 0180 Distance from transmitter in teach-in mode 0.5 to 5 m R&TTE approval (for EU and EFTA states) Yes Light scenes 5 Fuse Via 10 A circuit breaker Radio interference suppression to EN 55015 Operating temperature 0 to 55°C Index of protection IP20 Terminals Screw-type terminals for max. 2.5 mm2 or 2 x 1.5 mm2 188.5 x 28 x 28 mm Dimensions (L x W x H)
T54 T54
RADIO BUS ACTUATORS radio bus actuators Radio switch actuator built-in
Radio switch actuator built-in with extension unit push-button (NOC) The Radio Bus planning instructions must be followed.
In conjunction with taught-in radio transmitters, the Radio switch actuator built-in enables network-operated devices to be switched remotely. It switches electrical loads (230 V / 10 A) as soon as it has received a corresponding (taught-in) radio signal. The Radio switch actuator built-in can be operated via a BLC extension set or a push-button (NOC) as an extension unit.
L N
N Radio switch actuator O NP ro/ OgF F 1 built-in 0125 230 V~ L AC 10A
N L
Light scene operation (switching only) is also possible with the radio hand-held transmitter comfort or radio wall transmitter, or the radio push-button interface 4gang flush-mounted and HM 1801. If a light scene is assigned (taught-in) to the radio switch actuator, a desired switching state (On/Off) can be stored and set when the light scene is called up.
Push-button NO optional
Antenna
Prog
µ
Basic circuit
Technical data Power supply unit Switching contact Switching capacity
The special "bell operation" function is possible in conjunction with the radio transmitter with phase conductor flush-mounted or the radio push-button interface 4gang flush-mounted.
Radio switch actuator built-in order no. 0125 230 V~, 50/60 Hz Relay 230 V Incandescent and halogen lamps 2300 W (ohmic) Tronic transformers 1500 W (capacitive) Conv. transformers (< 85% loading) incl. transformer power loss 1000 VA (inductive) Fluorescent lamps uncomp. 1200 VA, parallel comp. with 47 µF 920 VA (induktive) Duo circuit 2300 VA (induktive) Mixed load; capacitive and inductive loads should not be mixed Any number of BLC extension units or push-buttons (NOC) Number of extension units approx. 0.71 W Standby power consumption 433.42 MHz, (ASK) Reception frequency 30 Radio transmitter with teach-in facility > 1 billion Radio codes (assigned once per channel) 0.5 to 5 m Distance from transmitter in teach-in mode Yes R&TTE approval (for EU and EFTA states) 5 Light scenes Via 16 A circuit breaker Fuse to EN 55015 Radio interference suppression -20 to 55 °C Operating temperature IP20 Index of protection 2 Screw-type terminals for max. 2,5 mm or 2 x 1,5 mm2 Terminals 175 x 42 x 18 mm Dimensions (L x W x H)
Radio switch actuator flush-mounted
Radio switch actuator flush-mounted
Pressing the ALL OFF / ALL ON push-button on a taught-in hand-held radio transmitter comfort, a radio transmitter wall-mounted or flat or the radio push-button interface 4gang flush-mounted and HM1801 switches the load on or off. When a taught-in radio signal is received by the radio controller, it switches on for approx. 1 minute (retriggering).
Radio switch actuator flush -mounted
In conjunction with taught-in radio transmitters, the radio switch actuator flush-mounted enables network-operated devices to be switched remotely..
Prog.
0179
ON/OFF AC 230V~ 50/60Hz 1000 W
Light scene operation (switching only) is also possible with the radio hand-held transmitter comfort or radio wall transmitter, or the radio push-button interface 4gang flush-mounted and HM 1801. If a light scene is assigned (taught-in) to the switch actuator, a desired switching state (On/Off) can be stored and set when the light scene is called up.
N
BU BN
µ
L
BN BK
blue brown brown black
L N N
Pressing the ALL OFF / ALL ON push-button on a taught-in hand-held radio transmitter comfort, a radio transmitter wall-mounted or flat or the radio push-button interface 4gang flush-mounted and HM1801 switches the load on or off.
Radio switch actuator flush -mounted
L
Prog.
0179
ON/OFF AC 230V~ 50/60Hz 1000 W
When a taught-in radio signal is received by the radio controller, it switches on for approx. 1 minute (retriggering).
N
BU BN
µ
The Radio Bus planning instructions must be followed.
L
BN BK
Basic circuit
The special "bell operation" function is possible in conjunction with the radio transmitter with phase conductor flush-mounted or the radio push-button interface 4gang flush-mounted. Radio switch actuator flush-mounted Radio transmitters with teach-in facility Radio codes (assigned once per channel) Distance from transmitter in teach-in mode R&TTE approval (for EU and EFTA states) Light scenes Fuse Radio interference suppression Operating temperature Index of protection Conductor length Dimensions (D x H)
Technical data Rated voltage Switching contact Switching capacity
230 V~, 50/60 Hz Relay NO potential-free (FELV) 230 V Incandescent lamps and halogen lamps 1000 W (ohmic) Tronic transformers 750 W (capacitive) Conv. transformers (< 85% loading) incl. transformer power loss 750 VA (inductive) Fluorescent lamp uncomp. 500 VA, parallel comp. 400 VA (induktive) Duo circuit 1000 W (induktive) Mixed load; capacitive and inductive loads should not be mixed approx. 0.56 W Standby power consumption 433.42 MHz, (ASK) Reception frequency
Order no. 0179 7 per channel > 1 billion 0.5 to 5 m Yes 5 Via 10 A circuit-breaker to EN 55015 -20 to 55°C IP20 approx. 210 mm 52 x 21 mm
Radio Bus System RMD L N electronic ballast or Tronic transformer with 1-10V 230 V~ interface
M
1-10V
N L
N L
ohmic / cap
1 - 10 V
N L +
N
o dN e r L ohmic / ind
N
L
L
N
N
L
L
Ensure compliance with the max. connected load per phase. Always follow the Radio Bus planning instructions!
Extension unit input for NO
Antenna for radio receiver RMD is additionally required e.g. for metal partitions or also for increasing the range.
94050100
L
+-
1
N
L
N
Radio switch actuator RMD 94500100
Radio shutter actuator RMD 94600100
µ 10A 230V~ 50/60Hz
µ 6A 230V~ 50/60Hz
+-
+-
L
1
L
N
+
A1 A2
Radio universal dimmer RMD 94550100
Radio control unit 1-10 V 94650100
50-400 W/VA 230V~ 50/60Hz
µ 8A 230V~ 50/60Hz 1-10V/max.15mA
ON/OFF/Prog.
A3 A4
L
N
Radio switch actuator 4gang RMD 94500200 µ 10A 230V~ 50/60Hz
+-
+-
+-
RMD data lead to EN 301489-1, max. length 3m, for connecting the radio receiver RMD with max. 30 RMD actuators. The connection is made using the EIB terminal (check the connection polarity). The RMD data lead should be a shielded twisted-pair cable such as YCM 2x2x0.8 or J-Y(St)Y 2x2x0.8..
T55 T55
RADIO BUS ACTUATORS radio bus actuators Radio switch actuator 2gang flush-mounted In conjunction with taught-in radio transmitters, the radio switch actuator 2gang flush-mounted enables network-operated devices to be switched remotely.
Radio switch actuator 2gang flush-mounted Prog. 1 sec
The radio switch actuator 2gang flush-mounted is especially suitable for installation of a series connection from an existing switch-off without additional cable.
Pressing the ALL OFF / ALL ON push-button on a taught-in hand-held radio transmitter comfort, a radio transmitter wall-mounted or flat or the radio push-button interface 4gang flush-mounted and HM1801 switches the load on or off.
PK
230 V~, 50/60 Hz 2 relays for every 1 NO 230 V Incandescent lamps 350 W (ohmic) 230 V halogen lamps 300 W (ohmic) Tronic transformers 300 W (capacitive) Conv. transformers (< 85% loading) incl. transformer power loss 350 VA (inductive). Fluorescent lamp uncomp. 350 VA (induktive) Mixed load; capacitive and inductive loads should not be mixed approx. 0.37 W Standby power consumption 433.42 MHz, (ASK) Reception frequency
Radio adapter plug switch actuator The radio adapter plug switch actuator in conjunction with taught-in radio transmitters permits remote switching of mains powered appliances (e.g. standard lamp, table top lamp, ventilator fan, stereo system etc.) with a mains plug. Light scene operation (switching only) is also possible with the radio hand-held transmitter comfort or radio wall transmitter, or the radio push-button interface 4gang flush-mounted and HM 1801. If a light scene is assigned (taught-in) to the switch actuator, a desired switching state (on/off) can be stored and set when the light scene is called up. Pressing the ALL OFF / ALL ON push-button on a taught-in hand-held radio transmitter comfort, a radio transmitter wall-mounted or flat or the radio push-button interface 4gang flush-mounted and HM1801 switches the load on or off. When a taught-in radio signal is received by the radio controller, it switches on for approx. 1 minute (retriggering). The special "bell operation" function is possible in conjunction with the radio transmitter with phase conductor flush-mounted or the radio push-button interface 4gang flush-mounted.
GY
BK
N
BU
pink grey black blue L N N L Prog. 1 sec
N
The Radio Bus planning instructions must be followed!
Radio switch actuator 2gang flush-mounted 0129 AC 230V~
4sec
50/60 Hz 2x350W
A B A+B -
RD GN RD GN
L
INSTA 57608 R2
L A LB L PK
GY
N
BK
BU
Basic circuit
Radio switch actuator 2gang flush-mounted Radio transmitters with teach-in facility Radio codes (assigned once per channel) Distance from transmitter in teach-in mode R&TTE approval (for EU and EFTA states) Light scenes Security Radio interference suppression Operating temperature Index of protection Dimensions (Ø x H)
Order no. 0129 7 per channel >1 billion 0.5 to 5 m Yes 5 Via 10 A circuit breaker to EN 55015 -20 to 55°C IP20 52 x 23 mm
Radio adapter plug switch actuator
70
34,5
Technical data Nominal voltage Switching contacts Switching capacity
INSTA 57608 R2
L A LB L
When a taught-in radio signal is received by the radio controller, it switches on for approx. 1 minute (retriggering). The special "bell operation" function is possible in conjunction with the radio transmitter with phase conductor flush-mounted or the radio push-button interface 4gang flush-mounted.
50/60 Hz 2x350W
A B A+B -
RD GN RD GN
On/Prog
Light scene operation (switching only) is also possible with the radio hand-held transmitter comfort or radio wall transmitter, or the radio push-button interface 4gang flush-mounted and HM 1801. If a light scene is assigned (taught-in) to the radio switch actuator 2gang flush-mounted, a desired switching state (on/off) can be stored and set when the light scene is called up.
Radio switch actuator 2gang flush-mounted 0129 AC 230V~
4sec
The Radio Bus planning instructions must be followed!
136
Technical data Power supply unit Switching contact Switching capacity
Radio adapter plug switch actuator order no. 017809 230 V~, 50/60 Hz Relay 230 V Incandescent and halogen lamps 1000 W (ohmic) Tronic transformer 750 W (capacitive) Conv. transformers (< 85% loading) incl. transformer power loss 750 VA (inductive) Fluorescent lamps uncomp. 500 VA, parallel comp. with 47 µF 400 VA (induktive) Duo circuit 1000 VA (induktive) Mixed load; capacitive and inductive loads should not be mixed approx. 0.43 W Standby power consumption Yes Increased child protection as per VDE 0620 part 1 433.42 MHz, (ASK) Reception frequency 30 Radio transmitter with teach-in facility > 1 billion Radio codes (assigned once per channel) 0.5 to 5 m Distance from transmitter in teach-in mode Yes R&TTE approval (for EU and EFTA states) 5 Light scenes T6.3 A Fine-wire fuse to EN 55015 Radio interference suppression -20 to 55°C Operating temperature IP20 Index of protection
Radio shutter actuator flush-mounted In conjunction with taught-in radio transmitters, the radio shutter actuator enables network-operated devices to be switched remotely. Pressing a radio transmitter push-button < 1 sec. adjusts the blinds; > 1 sec. sends the drive into continuous operation for 2 minutes. It is particularly well suited to setting up a master and/or group control system from existing individual controls without additional wiring. They are flush-mounted in junction boxes, wall boxes, or in water-tight junction boxes in the shutter unit. Light scene mode (end positions only) is possible with the radio hand-held transmitter comfort, the radio transmitter wall-mounted or flat or the radio push-button interface 4gang flush-mounted and HM1801. If a light scene is assigned (taught-in) to the radio shutter actuator flush-mounted, the desired end position (open/closed) of the blind can be stored and set when the light scene is called up.
Radio shutter actuator flush-mounted L N Radio shutter actuator flush-mounted 4sec Prog
0127
AC 230V~ 50/60 Hz 700W
1sec
Radio shutter actuator flush-mounted 4sec Prog
|-| |-
RD GN
N BU
blue brown pink
BN
PK
L
BK
0127
AC 230V~ 50/60 Hz 700W
M
1sec |-| |-
RD GN
N BU
BN
PK
L
BK
The Radio Bus planning instructions must be followed!
black Basic circuit
For further applications, see following page
Integration into the All OFF / ALL ON function (end positions only) is also possible. Technical data Nominal voltage Switching contacts Switching capacity Standby power consumption Locking time Reception frequency Radio transmitters with teach-in facility Radio codes (assigned once per channel)
230 V~, 50/60 Hz 2 NOC mutually interlocked max. 1 motor 700 W approx. 0.40 W approx. 1 sec. 433.42 MHz, (ASK) 14 > 1 billion
Radio shutter actuator flush-mounted Distance from transmitter in teach-in mode R&TTE approval (for EU and EFTA states) Light scenes (only end positions) Fuse Radio interference suppression Operating temperature Index of protection Dimensions (Ø x H)
Order no. 0127 0.5 to 5 m Yes 5 Via 10 A circuit breaker to EN 55015 -20 to 55°C IP20 52 x 21 mm
T56 T56
ROLLOTEC/RADIO BUS rollotec/radio bus Upgrade possible with RolloTec and Radio Bus with existing 230 V cable in shutter unit. Group/master control 3
3 M
4
0127
Funk-Jalousieaktor Up
Funk-Jalousieaktor Up 4sec
The Radio Bus planning instructions must be followed!
0127 Prog
M
4
0127 4sec
AC 230V~ 50/60 Hz 700W
0127 Prog
AC 230V~ 50/60 Hz 700W
1sec
1sec
|-| |-
|-| |-
N BU
BN
PK
N
L
BU
BK
PK
L
BK
2721xx
Master control 2925
012410 Radio transmitter with phase conductor flush-mounted
012410
>1sec Change mode
N
L
AC 230 V~ 50/60Hz
>0,5sec Display mode
5x 1 flash --> 2 channel dimming 5x 2 flash --> 2 channel switching 5x 3 flash --> 1 channel blinds
E1 E2 N L
RolloTec timer
grey
Gy
BN
BU BK
brown
C B A
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
2 5 3
In many properties, a 230 V cable has been laid in the shutter unit in the course of renovation work. To then implement a control system, the following installation variant is possible: Install a radio shutter actuator flush mounted in a water-proof connection box, in the shutter box. Control of the shutters can be achieved by teaching-in the radio transmitter wall-mounted or flat and/or radio hand-held transmitter to the radio shutter actuator. Master control can be easily implemented with the radio transmitter with phase conductor flush-mounted e.g. in combination with a RolloTec timer (recommended: deep flush-mounted socket). This transmitter is taught-in to any radio shutter actuator in the shutter box. Prior to installation the radio signal range should be tested.
L1
1
N
4
2721xx
BN
blue
RolloTec standard insert with RolloTec radio button and radio shutter actuator: master and group control by radio L2
N
L1
N
N
L3 N
L2
Individual control
Individual control
Individual control
2911
2911
2925
Individual control Funk-Jalousieaktor Up
Group control by radio signal Radio wall transmitters, 1gang, flat
4sec Prog
0127
AC 230V~ 50/60 Hz 700W
1sec
L
L
N
|-| |-
L
RD GN
N BU
RolloTec Radio button
RolloTec Radio button
RolloTec Radio button
BN
PK
L
BK
Radio shutter actuator
2721xx
L2
N
L2
N
L1
Individual control
Individual control
Individual control
2911
2925
2911
N
L3 N
Individual control Funk-Jalousieaktor Up
Group control by radio signal Radio wall transmitters, 1gang, flat
4sec Prog
0127
AC 230V~ 50/60 Hz 700W
1sec
L
N
L
L
|-| |-
RD GN
N BU
RolloTec Radio button
RolloTec Radio button
RolloTec Radio button
BN
PK
L
BK
Radio shutter actuator flush-mounted
2721xx
N
L1
Master control by radio signal 2925
The Radio Bus planning instructions must be followed!
012410 Radio transmitter with phase conductor flush-mounted
012410
>1sec Change mode
N
L
AC 230 V~ 50/60Hz
>0,5sec Display mode
5x 1 flash --> 2 channel dimming 5x 2 flash --> 2 channel switching 5x 3 flash --> 1 channel blinds
E1 E2 N L
RolloTec timer
grey
Gy
BN
BU BK
brown
The radio transmitter wall-mounted as a group control and the radio transmitter with phase conductor flush-mounted as a central control are taught-in to the allocated individual controls (radio buttons) and radio shutter actuators. The group and master control commands are transmitted by radio signal.
blue black
RolloTec radio button The radio button is a component of the RolloTec system. In conjunction with the RolloTec insert, it permits remote and manual operation of a tubular motor. The ê button raises the shutter, the ë button lowers it. The system can be controller using a radio hand-held transmitter, radio transmitter wall-mounted, radio push-button interface 4gang flush-mounted, radio transmitter with phase conductor flush-mounted and HM 1801. If a light scene is assigned (taught-in) to the button, a desired end position (open/closed) of the shutter can be stored and moved to when the scene is called up.
T57 T57
Technical data Power supply unit Standby power consumption Sunlight brightness value (only 1759..) Reception frequency Radio transmitter with teach-in facility Radio codes (assigned once per channel) Distance from transmitter in teach-in mode R&TTE approval (for EU and EFTA states) Change-over time on change of direction Light scenes (only end positions) Operating temperature Index of protection
RolloTec radio button order no. 1758.., 1759,. from RolloTec insert 2911, 2925, 2975, 2975 01 approx. 1.21 W approx. 5000 to 80 000 Lux 433.42 MHz, (ASK) 30 > 1 billion 0.5 to 5m Yes approx. 1 sec. 5 4 to 55°C IP20
For connection to master, group and individual control see RolloTec.
RADIO BUS PRESENCE DETECTOR radio bus presence detector Examples of combination options for radio presence detectors surface-mounted and Radio Bus components Radio presence detectors Surfacemounted can only be operated with Radio Bus actuators version R2 or higher The Radio Bus planning instructions must be followed.
BLC touch dimmer with BLC radio button
Radio switch actuators
Radio presence detectors surface-mounted
2902
ecting as presence det control constant light
018209
Radio switch actuator flush-mounted
as presence switch
Prog.
g ctin l ete e d ontro c n c se ght li pre as stant con
N
µ
L
BN BK
as sw pre itc sen h ce
Radio controller power pack surface-mounted
e
as p swit resence ch
senc as pre h switc
as co pre ns se tan nc t li e d gh ete t c ct on ing tro l
BU BN
On/Prog
Universal radio cord dimmer or universal radio dimmer built-in
0179
ON/OFF AC 230V~ 50/60Hz 1000 W
1 L
Radio bus
Surface-mounted radio controller output stage
Radio control unit 1-10 V built-in N
L
BLC switch insert with BLC radio button
Radio control unit 1-10 V built-in 0180
µ
AC 230V~ 10A
Prog
+
2905
P ro g ON/OFF
Radio switch actuator built-in N Radio switch actuator 1 built-in 0125 AC 230 V~ L 10A
aerial
Prog
1 L
µ
Radio presence detectors surface-mounted in an office Do not mount radio presence detector surface-mounted in the immediate vicinity of lights or ventilator fans. May only be operated with alkaline batteries, as they are the only ones with sufficient pulse current carrying capacity. The Radio Bus planning instructions must be followed.
H=2,50 m 2,5 m
4m
Radio presence detectors surface-mounted can only be taught into radio actuators version R2 or higher; a corresponding R2 designation is printed on the device. As soon as a radio presence detector surface-mounted has been taught into a radio actuator, the corresponding actuator internally switches to light control mode and changes its behaviour. Switching on by a brief press (> 1s) locally or by radio control initially switches the associated actuator on for 2 minutes. If no presence is detected during this time, it is switched off again. Switching off by a brief press (> 1s) locally or by radio control initially switches the associated actuator off for 2 minutes. During this time, switching on is prevented by presence detection and is only possible manually (e.g. for slide show). With a dimming actuator (e.g. BLC universal touch dimmer insert with BLC radio button, radio universal cord dimmer, radio control unit 1-10 V built-in etc.) a constant light control system can be set up. In this case, the target brightness value set on the radio presence detector surface-mountedis compared with the actual value and evaluated in the dimmer. On dimming actuators, the brightness can be changed by holding down the local or radio buttons, similar to a normal dimming operation. The brightness value determined is temporarily used as the target brightness value until the next switch off, i.e. the radio presence detector attempts to keep this new value constant. Only one switch on or off is possible in conjunction with radio switch actuators. To prevent the occurrence of light oscillation (device constantly switches on and off) it may be necessary to increase the target brightness value by turning the brightness adjuster on the radio presence detector towards the symbol sun . In general, the radio presence detector should not be installed too close to lamps, to minimise this effect. The brighter the lamp to be switched on is, the more significant the effect described above. Technical data Power supply unit Batteries Battery life (depending on load) 10x flashing for transmit operation Detection angle Size of detection range at desk height Size of detection range at floor level Mounting height for nominal detection ranges Switching period Detection levels Number of zones
6 V= 4 x 1.5 V Micro Alkaline (LR 03) approx. 3 years Batteries flat, replace 360° Ø approx. 5 m Ø approx. 8 m 2.5 m approx. 2 min. to 60 min. 6 80
Radio presence detector surface-mounted Number of switching segments Response sensitivity Target brightness value for light control Transmission frequency Transmission range Transmission power Radio codes (assigned once per channel) R&TTE approval (for EU and EFTA states) Operating temperature Index of protection Dimensions (Ø x H)
Order no. 018209 320 20 to 100% approx. 3 Lux to 1000 Lux 433.42 MHz, (ASK) max. 100 m (free field) < 10 mW > 1 billion YES 0 to 45°C IP20 103 x 42 mm
T58 T58
RADIO BUS CONTROLLER/SYSTEM radio bus controller/system Radio controller 180 flat The radio controller 180 flat with integral brightness measurement allows the extension of existing installations by wireless transmission of switching commands. On detecting movement, the radio controller 180 flat sends an encrypted radio-telegram, which is understood and evaluated by all radio receivers in the radio bus system.
Radio controller 180 flat Combination extension available using flat surface-mounted installation.
32 20 CR 3V
The radio controller 180 flat is provided on the backside with two potentiometers, allowing the response sensitivity and activation brightness to be set. Setting the activation brightness: - Position brightness-independent - Adjustment range approx. 1 to 80 Lux - Position corresponds to approx. 80 Lux. This setting should be selected when using the radio controller power section; the activation brightness and the delay time can be set at the power section.
Supporting plate
Always follow the Radio Bus planning instructions! The life of the battery is halved, if the potentiometer is set to Lux.
In connection with other radio bus receivers (BLC radio buttons, radio switch actuator adapters and built-in / radio switch actuators flush-mounted etc.) the controller triggers switching the load on for 1 minute (retriggering).
The radio controller system is a cordless system, and is particularly suitable for upgrading existing installations. A maximum of 30 radio controllers can be taught-in to a radio controller power pack surface-mounted. The radio controllers can also be taught-in to other Radio Bus receivers (BLC radio button, radio adapter plug switch actuator and radio switch actuators built-in/flush-mounted etc.), where they activate the load for 1 minute (retriggering). A radio controller can be taught-in to any number of radio receivers. The response sensitivity of each radio controller unit can be adjusted to varying detection conditions. A push-button (NCC contact) in the lead of the radio controller power pack surface-mounted can be used to activate additional functions. These functions can also be used with a taught-in hand-held or wall-mounted radio transmitter as follows. Short press of button ^ON for pre-set time Short press of button v OFF (automatic mode remains active) Long press of button (>1sec.) ^ ON for 2 hours Long press of button (>1sec.) v OFF for 2 hours Radio controller power pack surface-mounted order no. 017509 230 V~, 50/60 Hz Relay contact 230 V Incandescent lamps and halogen lamps 2300 W (ohmic) Tronic transformer 1500 W (capacitive) Conv. transformers (< 85% loading) incl. transformer power loss 1000 VA (inductive) Fluorescent lamps uncompensated 1200 VA, parallel compensated 920 VA (induktive) duo circuit 2300 VA (induktive) Mixed load; capacitive and inductive loads should not be mixed max. 20 A Inrush current approx. 1.10 W Standby power consumption ± 10% approx. 10 sec. to 15 min. Delay time approx. 3 to 80 Lux ± 10% Brightness with push-button (NCC contact) Additional functions 600 ms Time between touch pulses 1 x press = ON for on time 1st function 2 x press = ON for 2 hrs ± 10% 2nd function 3 x press = OFF for 2 hrs ± 10% 3rd function 433.42 MHz, ASK Reception frequency 30 Radio transmitters with teach-in facility > 1 billion Radio codes (assigned once per channel) Yes R&TTE approval (for EU and EFTA states) according to EN 55015 Radio interference suppression -25 to 55°C Operating temperature IP55 Index of protection Screw-type terminals for max. 2.5 mm2 or 2 x 1.5 mm2 Terminals 110 x 38 x 94 mm Dimensions (L x W x H) Technical data Rated voltage Switching contact Switching capacity
Assembly
·
The radio controller 180 flat can be screwed or stuck to a flat surface (wood, plaster, glass, mirror etc.) as well as to appliance sockets with a frame.
Radio controller/system
Setting response brightness
TOP
·
Technical data Radio controller 180 flat order no. 9420.. Power supply unit 3 V= Battery type 1 x lithium coin cell (type CR 2450 N) Battery life approx. 2-3 years Rapid flashing of the red LED (approx. 1 s after sending) battery flat, change it Transmission frequency 433.42 MHz, (ASK) Transmission range max. 60 m (free field) Transmission power < 10 mW Radio codes (assigned once) > 1 billion R&TTE approval (for EU and EFTA states) Yes Number of channels 1 Detection angle 180° Detection field semi-oval approx. 10 x 12 m Recommended mounting height 1.1 m Response sensitivity approx. 20 to 100 % Response brightness approx. 1 to 80 / " Lux Operating temperature 5 to 35°C Index of protection IP20 Installation height approx. 23 mm
Setting response sensitivity
Funk-Wächter 180 flach 9420 Batt.: 1x CR2450N Sens.
Controller mounting Ensure that there are no interference sources, e.g. lamps or heaters, in the detection range. For optimum detection the radio controller 180 should be mounted laterally to the direction of movement.
optimal
not optimal
The detection beams are optimally cut.
wrong
The detection beams are not optimally cut. The range is reduced.
The detection beams are not cut. The controller detects the object too late.
Radio controller 180 Sensitivity setting 20 - 100%
Always follow the Radio Bus planning instructions! Because of the Low Power Technology, the controller takes approx. 1 min. to become ready for operation.
SENS.
Status LED red (flashes when sending) Flashing: confirmation of sending Rapid flashing: low battery
Rotating and tilting possible 95°
360°
Radio controller 180 order no. 01740109. 9 V alkaline block battery 6LR61 approx. 3 years Daytime operation 0.14 mW Night time operation 0.27 mW Radio transmission 27 mW 433.42 MHz, ASK approx. 100 m free field < 10 mW > 1 billion Yes 180° 16 m x 32 m approx. 2.40 m 20 to 100% 3 to 200 Lux ± 50% less than 80 Lux to 200 Lux -25 to 55°C IP55
Technical data Battery type Service life of alkaline battery Power consumption Transmission frequency Transmission range Transmission power Radio codes (assigned once per channel) R&TTE approval (for EU and EFTA states) Detection angle Detection field Mounting height Response sensitivity Brightness operating range Sensor, activation brightness Sensor, night triggering Operating temperature Index of protection
Radio controller power pack surface-mounted Always follow the Radio Bus planning instructions!
Radio bus
Surface-mounted radio controller output stage Lux
Phase connection Load connection
L
N Min.
Neutral conductor connection Brightness setting approx. 3 - 80 Lux
OFF
On time approx. 10 sec. - 15 min. Teach-in switch
T59 T59
ON
schuko outlet with RCD/ SCHUKO SOCKET WITHsocket RCD PROTECTION SWITCH/ residual current SWITCH device RCD PROTECTION SCHUKO socket outlet with RCD protection switch / RCD protection switch The SCHUKO socket outlet with RCD protection switch and the RCD protection switch must be used anywhere that the use of residual-current protective devices according to VDE 0664 is specified. According to DIN VDE 0100-410: 2007-06, alternating current systems must be provided with additional protection by means of residual-current protective devices ≥ 30 mA. This applies to socket outlets with a rated current not greater than 20 A that are intended for use by non-experts and for general use. Exceptions are socket outlets that are constructed exclusively for connecting a specific piece of equipment, and socket outlets that are monitored with a residual-current monitor (RCM) by qualified electricians or persons with electrotechnical training, such as in one's own commercial or industrial systems, for example. The protection goal "Protection against direct contact" according to DIN VDE 0100 Part 410 is achieved. Socket outlets connected to the residual-current protected outgoing terminals (outgoing feeders) are likewise protected. Thus all loads connected to it are equipped with additional protection according to DIN VDE 0100 Part 410. Triggering is ensured in the event of AC fault currents, and pulsating DC fault currents ≥ 30 mA. The test button "T" can be used to test the electrical and mechanical functioning. The integrated switch lever can be used to switch the SCHUKO socket outlet with RCD protection switch and the RCD protection switch on again after triggering (when testing or after eliminating the fault). Technical data Rated voltage Rated current RCD-protected outgoing conductor Rated fault current Switch off time Surge energy capacity Rated short circuit capacity Rated switching capacity Im I2t-proof Dynamic current capacity IP Mounting orientation Wall box Attachment Intended use Operating temperature Index of protection Terminals Insertion depth Supply package
SCHUKO socket with RCD protection switch / RCD protection switch to VDE 0664 Use in the entire household has been specified since June 2007. Garden sockets
Swimming pool Wells
Terrace
Living room Appliances
SCHUKO socket with RCD protection switch 230 V~, 45-60 Hz 16 A Phase, neutral 30 mA AC and pulsating DC 30 ms 250 A (8/20) μs (DIN VDE 0432 part 2) 3 kA with back-up fuse 20 A filament lamp 500 A 2.5 kA2s 1.7 kA any to DIN 49073 part 1:1990-02 Claw or screw fixing EN 61008 part 1 and 2-1: 1994 -25 to 40°C IP20 Plug-in terminals for max. 2.5 mm2 or 2 x 1.5 mm2 32 mm SCHUKO socket with RCD protection switch, increased child-protection and centre plate
Hobby
Bedroom
Bath
Child
Sauna Shower WC
Child
Kitchen Entrance Larder
Compulsory
SCHUKO socket with RCD protection switch Connection diagram TN-C mains L PEN
Connection diagram TN-S or TT mains
Optional additional terminal for TN-C systems to VDE 0100 part 540
Plug-in terminals
L N PE
4708..
-25°
4708..
I r=30 mA
outgoing terminals
I r=30 mA
outgoing terminals
All other connected sockets are also protected!
32
device layout/circuit sketch L N PE
L N PE
L N
Connection diagram TN-C mains Only in plants with existing inventory protection permissible.
Connection diagram TT mains
I r=30 mA
25
All other connected sockets are also protected!
RCD protection switch Connection diagram TN-S mains
Test button
Manual operation On - Off
Top edge of frame Plug-in terminals
Permissible earthing resistance for 30 mA RCD protection switches for a highest permissible electric shock of: - 25 V : 833 V - 50 V : 1666 V
L PEN
Stranded outgoing conductors are only suitable for screw terminals!
outgoing conductors
outgoing conductors
Technical data Rated voltage Rated current RCD-protected outgoing conductor Rated fault current Switch off time Surge energy capacity Rated short circuit capacity Mounting orientation Wall box Attachment Intended use Operating temperature Index of protection Outgoing conductors Terminals Insertion depth
outgoing conductors
outgoing conductors
RCD protection switch order no. 2844 230 V~, 45-60 Hz 16 A Phase, neutral 30 mA AC and pulsating DC 30 ms 250 A (8/20) μs (DIN VDE 0432 part 2) 3 kA with back-up fuse 16 A filament lamp any to DIN 49073 part 1:1990-02 Screw fixing EN 61008 part 1 and 2-1: 1994 -25 to 40°C IP21 stranded 2 x 1.5 mm2, approx. 20 cm plug-in terminals for max. 2.5 mm2 or 2 x 1.5 mm2 32 mm
T60 T60
AERIAL SYSTEMS antenna technology Antenna technology terms Tap: for connecting one or more branch cables to a continuous trunk cable. The level of the branched signal is dependent on the attenuation of the branch. ADR (Astra Digital Radio): digital audio radio programmes on a subcarrier analog TV transponder. Azimuth: azimuth means the alignment of the south-facing satellite aerial (horizontal angle) Band: band denotes a frequency range between two specified values. Ku-Band: satellite transmission frequency band SAT-bands: (SAT-IF, Input-IF) intermediate frequency bands used by satellite receivers: 950 - 1,750 MHz (standard band) 950 - 2,050 MHz (extended band) 700 - 2,050 MHz (further extended band) High band frequency range 11.7 to 12.75 GHz of a satellite. Here mostly only digital programmes are broadcast. Low band frequency range 10.7 to 11.7 GHz of a satellite. Systems with older LNBs cannot receiver the whole range of the band (typically only 10.950 to 11.7 GHz analog). CATV bands BK bands Band I (VHF), channel 2 - 4 Band II (UKW), frequency 87.5 - 108 MHz USB Band, Lower Special Channel Range (VHF), channels S2 - S10 Band III (VHF), channels 5 - 12 OSB Band, Upper Special Channel Range (VHF), channels S11 - S20 Hyperband (VHF), channels S21 - S38 Bands IV and V (UHF), channels 21 - 69 Bandwidth: expression for a range of frequencies contained with a specific band. BER (Bit error rate): denotes the quality of a data signal after it has been receives and demodulated. The lower the rate, the better the signal. CATV: abbreviation for Community Antenna Television. Reception of radio and TV programmes using a community aerial. Used internationally in cable TV networks as cable television or broadband cable networks. Conditional Access (CA) System: controls the access by users to services and programmes which are encrypted for copyright or commercial reasons. Common Interface (CI): uniform interface for digital set-top boxes for PCMCIA modules with card readers for smart-card by practically all Pay-TV companies. DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting): designation for digital radio. The system offers additionally capacity for data transmission. Data compression is carried out using MPEG-2. Data Rate: data bits transmitted per second. Is expressed in kbit/s or Mbit/s. The higher the data rate the better the transmitted signal. Data Reduction: compression of image and sound signals. Redundant information is left out. Attenuation loss: measurement in dB (decibel) resulting from the cabling and components. Attenuation adjustment: to compensate for the frequency-dependant cable attenuation dB - decibel: value often used to express the attenuation of a cable or a stage, or also the gain of an amplifier, aerial etc. d-box: digital set-top box for Premiere World. DiSEqCTM (Digital Satellite Equipment Control): Switching signal generated by the satellite receiver, for controlling and switching LNB and multi-switches. This allows several satellite positions for rotary and multi-feed systems to be controlled. DiSEqC is a trade mark of the European Satellite Organization (EUTELSAT) and arose out of cooperation between EUTELSAT and Phillips. Dolby Digital Sound Processing: this enables a digital surround sound to be reproduced in a home cinema system. Pass-through attenuation: reduction in the signal level at each output, e.g. at distributors, aerial sockets etc. DVB (Digital Video Broadcasting): transmission of video and sound signals in digital form. DVB-S stands for satellite cable transmission, DVB-T for terrestrial cable transmission and DVB-C for cable transmission. Single-cable system: matrix for distributing 1.SAT-ZF satellite programmes using a cable network in a tree structure. Elevation: by elevation is meant the vertical angle (inclination) of the aerial EPG (Electronic Programme Guide): electronic program guide Decoupling attenuation (directional attenuation) attenuation of the output sockets relative to each other FEC (Forward Error Correction): a technique for reducing the error rate in a data transmission. Additional bits are inserted into the data stream so that error correction algorithms can be used on reception. Field strength meter: an instrument used by technical staff to measure the signal strength of a radio or TV channel. The same instrument can be used for precise alignment of the aerial so that the maximum signal strength is achieved and for the checking the signal level at connections to community systems. Free-to-Air: free-to-air receivers receive exclusively free (non-encrypted) programmes. Gain: unit of measurement expressed in dB for the amplification capabilities of a parabolic aerial or an amplifier. Gain is the opposite of attenuation. The gain of an aerial depends on the diameter of the parabolic mirror and its efficiency. The larger the better! Coaxial cable: shielded cable with inner and outer conductor, insulated from each other by a material (solid PE / cellular PE), which ensures a very small signal loss. The outer conductor (shield) serves to protect the inner conductor against external interference, and thus minimises the signal loss on the inner conductor. Cable recommendation for satellite reception: low attenuation approx. 27 dB/100m at 2,000 MHz and shielding class > 90 dB (class A). LNB - Low Noise Block converter: a feed system also known as LNC. Reception unit at the focus of the parabolic mirror, which converts the high-frequency satellite downlink into a 1.Sat intermediate frequency suitable for the receiver. The main distinctions are: Single Universal LNB for 1 subscriber high band and low band Twin Universal LNB for 2 subscribers (twin receiver) high band and low band Quattro Switch LNB for 4 subscribers high band and low band Quattro Switch LNB with 1 terrestrial input for 4 subscribers high band, low band and terrestrial Quattro Universal LNB for multi-switch with 4 outputs (horizontal / vertical / high band / low band) Octo Switch LNB for 8 subscribers high band and low band LNB Skew (LNB Tilt): LNB Skew denotes the rotation of the LNB in relation to its vertical position in the bracket. This allows precise positioning of the LNB to obtain the best possible reception quality (e.g. in Germany 42° East is required for Tüksat). LOF (Local Oscillator Frequency): stated in MHz or GHz, varies depending on the LNB and reception frequency range. In the Ku band the relationship is: transmission frequency of the satellite - LOF = receiver reception frequency
MPEG-2: data compression process for images and sound. In contrast to conventional analog technology (where 25 full images with all information are transmitted per second) the MPEG process deals with only the actual changes in the image. Multi-feed: a technique that allows reception of multiple satellites using one a single fixed aerial. Multi-switch: conventional distributors are insufficient to distribute satellite signals. Each subscriber must be able to switch between different reception levels, frequency ranges and even different satellites. Only by this means is reception of all programmes possible. For this, an electronic changeover switch is required, which is called a multi-switch (up to 100 subscribers). Many models also allow a feed of conventional terrestrial programmes. When receiving from 2 or more satellites the DiSEqC switch is required, which controls multi-switches and also receivers. Network Search: some transponders receive within the digital data stream a list with the data for other transponders, so as for example to facilitate a search for all programmes of a provider, which may occupy several transponder frequencies. Data transmitted in this way are however often incorrect or incomplete. Aperture angle: the aperture angle of a SAT aerial can be regarded as denoting the "angle of view" of the SAT aerial towards the satellite. It is expressed in degrees and depends on the design and size of the SAT aerial. To prevent interference from nearby satellites it is recommended that the aperture angle should where possible be less than 3 degrees. SAT aerials of diameters from 60 cm offer this capability. List of the most used designs for parabolic mirror satellite (reception) aerials. Concentrates the electromagnetic waves in the feed system (LNB). Signal Level Adjuster: for reducing levels that are too high (cable equalisation) Polarisation: this is plane of the electrical components of an electromagnetic wave (direction of oscillation). For satellite transmission two different planes are used: the horizontal and the vertical (linear polarisation), the better to exploit the frequency spectrum. The system is based the bands for two adjacent channels being positioned so they partially overlap each other. The interference that could result is prevented by polarising the two channels in different planes. QAM (Quadrature Amplitude Modulation): digital modulation process with phase shift keying, used for transmission in cable networks. QPSK (Quadrature Phase Shift Keying): digital modulation process used for satellite transmission. Return Channel: projected interactive applications such as home shopping or Internet access require a return channel. This can for example be provided by a modem incorporated within the digital receiver. SMATV (Satellite delivered Master Antenna Television System): communal system that has been extended for the reception of satellite signals. SR (Symbol Rate): parameter that must be entered to allow manual searching of the receiver. (e.g. 22000, 27500) Terrestrial: denotes all radio services on the surface of the earth with the exception of space and astronomical broadcasting. A "normal" (terrestrial) domestic aerial can receive TV and radio programmes. Tone-Burst: a type of Mini-DiSEqC has been defined as an economical way of extending old systems to a wider circuit configuration (in addition to 14/18 Volt and 22 kHz). This is often referred to as Simple DiSEqC or as Tone-Burst. This merely modulates a sequence of bits "0" (satellite A) or "1" (satellite B) to the 22 kHz signal. The Tone-Burst signal was developed to permit simple changing over between two LNBs and is suitable for controlling relays (two inputs at one output) and for the new Monoblock LNB. For SAT position A the 22 kHz signal is sent continuously, for SAT position B it is pulsed. A Tone-Burst signal lasts for about 12.5 ms. Transponder frequency containing multiple channels. In analog systems a TV program and multiple sound channels can be transmitted for each transponder. In digital systems (QPSK) is the transmission capacity is 6-10 TV programmes with sound channels. Carrier: wave at very high frequency, which by means of modulation is able to convey a radio or TV signal over a very great distance. Carrier/Noise: describes the signal quality of the aerial that is forwarded to the receiver. (also C/N ratio). The C/N ratio is measured in dB and must always be above the threshold level (> 6 dB) of the receiver. Twin-Receiver: satellite receiver with two separate independent reception components in one box (e.g. for independent connection of a TV receiver and a video recorder) Triple play capability to use broadband cable for broadcasts (television), telephone and Internet. Twin receiver satellite receiver with two separate, independent receivers in a single housing (e.g. for independent connection of a TV receiver and a video recorder). USB-Box: external box which is connected to the PC through the USB port (Universal Serial Bus). This external box allows digital radio and TV programmes, and also multi-media services to be received by satellite. Power Supply: the satellite receiver supplies the LNB with power via the coaxial cable. The voltage of the supply also determines which polarisation plane is returned by the LNB. 14 Volt = vertical, 18 Volt = horizontal polarisation planes. Distributor: for distributing the energy of an incoming main trunk cable into two or more trunk cables. Amplifier: for increasing the aerial signal level Video bit rate: quantity of data transmitted per second by a digital video signal. Switch: for combining or splitting frequency ranges and individual channels.
Instructions for coaxial cables Stripping length for aerial socket 18
r>5xd
8 The bending radius "r" of the cable for a one-time load must not be less than 5 x the cable diameter "d". ( r > 5 x d)
d
Attenuation types Transmission loss Attenuation for through-sockets between trunk input and trunk output
Attenuation For through-sockets and single sockets.Attenuation between trunk input and the output sockets.
Trunk input in
Trunk output out Trunk input in
Decoupling internal Attenuation between plug output and socket output. Directional attenuation Attenuation between trunk output out and the output sockets Decoupling Attenuation between two aerial sockets.
Cabling structures Tree structure
T61 T61
Star structure
Floor star structure
Trunk output out
TV
RF
antenna technology/ AERIAL SYSTEMS data communication SAT aerial system with 2 squinting single universal LNBs e.g. for Astra and Eutelsat reception For analog and digital reception.
Planning recommendations Terminal boxes have no decoupling, and are always branched with splitters. The connection at a branch is also called a spur, and only here can a terminal box be connected. At the through passage of a splitter, on the other hand, only through-sockets or other splitters may be connected. Distributors (too little decoupling) only throughsockets can be connected, because only in this manner will the de-coupling be sufficient. The last through-socket must be terminated with a 75 ohm terminating resistor.
1: Aerial socket 3-hole single socket order no. 4522 2: DiSEqC switch 4: Aerial socket 4-hole single socket order no. 4594 4-hole aerial socket for viewing one channel and recording another.
Noise factor C/N The signal-to-noise ratio is the ratio, expressed in decibels, of the signal power to the noise power. The noise factor indicates how much smaller the signal-to-noise ratio at the output of an active module (e.g. amplifier) is than the signal-to-noise ratio at the input. Signal-to-noise ratio < 46 dB 37 dB 30 dB < 26 dB
Noise not visible visible, but not annoying clearly visible, annoying outweighs
1: Aerial socket 3-hole pass-through socket order no. 4593 2: Aerial socket 3-hole single socket order no. 4522
1
C/N: 25 dB; BER: < 2.0 E-4 (before Viterbi FEC 3/4) | MER: 24 dB
Function: If both aerial sockets are used at once, the plane (horizontal or vertical) is determined at the first aerial socket and so only this is available to be received at the second aerial socket.
2
C/N: 44 dB
Aerial system SAT with Quattro universal LNB for analog and digital reception of a satellite, e.g. Astra.
BER: 2.0 E-7 MER: 30 dB
1: Multi-switch with amplifier 2: Aerial socket 3-hole single socket order no. 4522 3: Aerial socket 4-hole single socket order no. 4594 alternatively 4-hole aerial socket for viewing one channel and recording another. 4: optional switch or amplifier only when the terrestrial input is being used.
C/N: 44 dB
C/N: 15 dB at 27 MHz C/N: 12 dB at 36 MHz C/N: 11 dB; BER: 2.0 E-4 (before Viterbi FEC 3/4) MER: 15 dB
BK
1
1 2
3
4
BK
UHF
3 4 4
alternatively
3
UKW
UHF
4 1
2 alternativ
alternativ
UKW
6
1
3
2
1: SAT antenna from Hirschmann type: CS 400 2: Amplifier from Hirschmann type: GNS 320 3: Digital single-cable system device from Hirschmann type: CEF 211 D 5 4: Distributor 4gang from Hirschmann type: VFC 0741 SF 5: Aerial socket 3-hole throughpass socket order no. 4523 6: Terminating resistor order no. 4503 Functional only with the specified types.
3
4
UKW
SAT aerial system with single universal LNB for analog and digital reception of a satellite.
UHF
1: Aerial socket 3-hole single socket order no. 4522 2: Switch for insertion of terrestrial signals e.g. for regional FM/TV 1 reception. 1
2 1
1
1: SAT antenna from Hirschmann type: CS 400 2: Amplifier from Hirschmann type: GNS 320 3: Distributor from Hirschmann type: VFC 0421 4: Distributor from Hirschmann type: VFC 0421 SF 5: Digital single-cable system device from Hirschmann type: CEF 211 D 6: Multiswitch from Hirschmann type: CKR 5041 7: Distributor from Hirschmann type: VFC 0631 SF 8: Aerial socket 3-hole single box Order no.: 4522 9: Aerial socket 3-hole throughpass socket Order no.: 4523 10: Aerial socket 4-hole single box order no. 4594 11: Terminating resistor order no. 4503 Functional only with the specified types.
1
UHF
Low 2 3
5
4
UKW
1 UHF
Low
High
2 3
4 6
6
High
Antenna system SAT single-cable solution in combination Multiswitch on Quattro Switch LNB for digital reception of a satellite, e.g. Astra or Eutelsat.
UKW
Aerial system terrestrial and/or broadband cable BK in tree structure/radial structure
2
Antenna system SAT single-cable solution with Quattro Switch LNB for digital reception of a satellite, e.g. Astra or Eutelsat.
BK
3
4 1
By cascadable multi-switches and taps/ distributors expandable to > 100 subscribers optionally with terrestrial input as an alternative. 3
UKW
If only 1 aerial socket is available in a broadband cable system, a through box with terminating resistor must be used.
1: Amplifier 2: Distributor 3: Aerial socket 2-hole pass-through socket order no. 4515 4: Terminal resistor order no. 4503
1: Multi-switch with amplifier 2: Aerial socket order no. 4522 (single socket) 3: Aerial socket order no. 4594 (single socket) alternatively 4-hole aerial socket for viewing one channel and recording another. 4: optional switch or amplifier only when the terrestrial input is being used e.g. for regional FM/TV 1 reception. 1.
~ =
UHF
UHF
SAT aerial system with 2 squinting Quattro universal LNBs for analog and digital reception of two satellites e.g. Astra and Eutelsat.
UHF
2
UKW
By cascadable multi-switches and taps/distributors expandable to > 100 subscribers optionally with terrestrial input as an alternative.
UKW
Aerial system terrestrial and/or broadband cable BK in radial structure 1: Amplifier 2: Tap 3. Aerial socket 2-hole Single socket order no. 4502 4: Terminal resistor order no. 4503
2
Aerial system SAT with single universal LNB for approx. 3 aerial sockets. For analog and digital reception of a satellite. Also for use behind a multi-switch!
C/N: 38 dB Mono C/N: 48 dB Stereo
3
alternatively
3
1
LCD, plasma and 100 Hz televisions need larger signal-to-noise ratios for a visually less noisy picture (50 dB). The level should not exceed 74 dB. Execute the system as a star topology if possible Install splitters and distributors in accessible spaces Install coaxial cables in ductwork systems Observe bending radii of the coaxial cables Install amplifiers in dry spaces with their own power supply Provide a ductwork connection to basement storage Connect building distribution network to building equipotential bonding Frequency range broadband cable network BC: 47 - 862 MHz Frequency range SAT-IF: 950 - 2400 MHz Dimension aerial sockets for broadband Shielding efficiency building distribution network min. 75 dB better according to Class A Use return path compatible components for connection to the backbone
1: Amplifier 2: Aerial socket 2-hole Pass-through socket order no. 4515 3: Terminal resistor order no. 4503
1
1: Aerial socket 3-hole Single socket order no. 4522 2: Aerial socket 4-hole Single socket order no. 4594
noise factor/Quality/ bit error rate
Aerial system terrestrial and/or broadband cable BK in tree structure
2
SAT aerial system with Quattro switch LNB e.g. for 4 receivers, e.g.4 x Astra. For analog and digital reception of a satellite.
picture quality very good good unsatisfactory unusable
Level recommendation at the aerial sockets based on EN 50083-7: Level in dBµV (unsensitiv) Frequency Slope min. max. (measuring device setting) max. UKW 50 70 87,5 - 108 MHz 15 (FM) Terrestrial analogue 60 80 87,5 - 108 MHz 12 (VSB-AM) Terrestrial digital 45 70 47 - 862 MHz 12 (COFDM) CATV analogue 60 80 12 47 - 862 MHz (VSB-AM) CATV digital 47 67 12 47 - 862 MHz (64-QAM) SAT-IF analogue 47 77 15 950 - 2150 MHz (55) (70) (7) (FM) SAT-IF digital 47 77 15 950 - 2150 MHz (53) (70) (7) (QPSK)
2 1
5
7
8 10
alternativ
9
11
SAT aerial system with twin universal LNB for 2 receivers or twin receiver for viewing one channel and recording another, UKW e.g. 2 x Astra. For analog and digital reception of a satellite. 1: Aerial socket 3-hole Single socket order no. 4522 2: Aerial socket 4-hole Single socket order no. 4594 3: Switch for insertion of terrestrial signals e.g. for regional FM/TV reception.
UHF
3 1
2
2
SAT aerial system with 2 squinting single universal LNBs e.g. for Astra and Eutelsat reception For analog and digital reception of two satellites. 1: Aerial socket 3-holeSingle socket order no. 4522 2: DiSEqC switch 3: Switch for insertion of terrestrial signals e.g. for regional FM/TV reception.
UKW UHF
2 3
2 1
1
T62 T62
DATA COMMUNICATION/ data/telecommunications TELECOMMUNICATIONS VGA module The VGA module is used to connect display devices to a graphics card. VGA cables can, depending on their quality, even at lengths of less than 5 m be susceptible interference, or may still transmit a good signal a more than 30 m. Cables suitable for high frequency cables with a coaxial construction are advantageous for the colour channels. 5
1
10
6 15
14
SHL
13
4,10,11
12
5
SHL
11
PIN 1 2 3 4* 5 6 7 8 9 10* 11* 12 13 14 15 SHL
Transfer signal Red Green Blue Monitor ID Bit 2 Earth Red earth Green earth Blue shield Not assigned Synch, earth Monitor ID Bit 0 or digital earth Monitor ID Bit 1 Horizontal synchronisation Vertical synchronisation Monitor ID Bit 3 Housing shielding
Conductor Coaxial conductor Coaxial conductor Coaxial conductor Twisted pair conductor (optional connection) Twisted pair conductor Coaxial shield Coaxial shield Coaxial shield Not contacted Twisted pair conductor Twisted pair conductor (optional connection) Twisted pair conductor (optional connection) Conductor 1 Conductor 2 Not contacted Outer shielding
* are connected together to a terminal. 1
6
2
7
3
8
S-Video module
Cinch module Cinch (RCA) designates a standardised connector for transmission of electrical signals, preferably via coaxial cables. The use of other types of cables is not widespread, but is possible.
The S-Video (also known as Separate Video, Y/C) module is used in order to transmit brightness (luminance) and colour (chrominance) information separately. The cable length should not exceed 10 m. PIN Transfer signal 1 Luminance (Y) earth 2 Chrominance (C) earth 3 Intensity (luminance) Y 4* Colour (chrominance) C
4 2
4 2 1 3
-
3
-
+
-
+
+
1
- +
4 2 1 3
- +
Arrangement in cable in star 4 configuration Older labelling with colours e.g. A-2Y(St)2Y 2x2x0,6 ST III Bd
Marking with rings e.g. for J-2Y(St)Y 2x2x0.6 Bd
1a 2b
2a
17 mm 1b
Colour coding rd = red bk = black wt = white ye = yellow gn = green bl = blue
Marking with colours e.g. J-Y(St)Y 2x2x0.6 Lg new (old)
ye
rd
1a
rd
bk
1b
gn
wt
2a
bl
ye
2b
Pair 1
Pair 2
17 mm
34 mm
TAE connector Connection with 4-core cable
Connection with 7-core cable (Connector viewed from rear)
(Connector view from rear) green brown white
yellow
grey
blue
green
brown white
yellow
La, Lb = Lead incoming a2, b2 = Outgoing lead (N-coded devices, e.g. fax forward to next N-box) W = additional call device, e.g. bell (connection to W and Lb) E = Earth/ground connection TAE box view
green - La blue - E grey - W yellow - Lb brown - b2 white - a2
green - W brown - Lb white - La yellow - E
W3
4E
W3
4E
Lb 2
5 b2
Lb 2
5 b2
La 1
6 a2
La 1
F-coding
6 a2 N coding
TAE socket outlets F+N
UAE8(6) / TAE 6F+N 1 2 3 4 5 6 6
1
6 5 4 3 2 1
4 5 6
3 2 1
4488..
3 2 1
N
F
For 1 telephone set. and 2 other devices 1 exchange line
N
TAE 2 x 6/6NFF
F
F
1 2 3 4 5 6
4 5 6
3 2 1
4 5 6
4487..
For 1 telephone set. 1 exchange line
For 1 telephone set. 2 exchange line
N
TAE 3 x 6NFN 1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 5 6
6 5 4 3 2 1 5 3 1 6 4 2
F+N
TAE 6F+N
2b 1b 1a 2a
3 2 1
4 5 6
6 5 4 3 2 1 4500.. For 1 telephone set and 1 add-on unit and 1 separate telephone set. 2 exchange lines
4500..
3 2 1
4 5 6
Wiring diagrams are represented respectively in the not stuck condition.
Connection variants on ISDN-S0 bus 230V~
NTBA a b 1a
230V~ 1b 2a
2b
a b 1a
ISDN line
ISDN line
1 . . . 2 . . to . 12
1 . . . 2 . . to . 6
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 8 1 FCC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 8 1 FCC
S -bus 0 max. 120 m length
1 2 3 4 TR5 6 7 8 FCC 8 1 TR
Maximum 12 FCC socket outlets 1gang, with a total of 8 terminal devices connected. (max. 4 telephones and 4 other devices)
T63 T63
NTBA
230V~ 1b 2a
2b
NTBA a b 1a
1b 2a
2b
ISDN line
8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 8 1 FCC
8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 8 1 FCC
8
1 2 3 4 TR5 6 7 8 FCC 1 8 1
S -bus 0 max. 120 m length
TR
Maximum 12 FCC socket outlets 1gang, with a total of 8 terminal devices connected. (max. 4 telephones and 4 other devices)
1 . . . 2 . . to . 12 Sockets
1 2 3 4 5 6 8
1 8
1
7 8 FCC
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 8 1 FCC
8
S -bus 0
NTBA = Network termination (Network Terminator Basic Access)
max. 120 m length
FCC = Universal connecting unit
1 2 3 4 TR5 6 7 8 FCC 1 8 1 TR
Maximum 12 FCC sockets, with a total of 8 terminal devices connected. (max. 4 telephones and 4 other devices)
1 - La 2 - Lb 3-W 4-E 5 - b2 6 - a2
TR = Terminal resistor for every 100 Ohm 1/4 W The FCC socket outlets with switchable resistors order no. 4592 can be used as the termination socket.
DATA COMMUNICATION/TELECOMMUNICATIONS data/telecommunications ISDN system
ISDN exchange line
S0 bus lead
NTBA
8
8
1
U PN
8
1
S0 telephone
8
1
8
1
1
Fax group 4
PC with S0 card
a/b
8
1
P
"Normal" or cordless telephones with analogue connection
System telephones Pin assignment of FCC socket outlets FCC 8(4) 2b 1b 1a 2a 6 5 4 3
2b 1b 1a 2a 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
UAE 8/8
FCC 2x8 (4) with switchable resistors
FCC 2x8 (4)
FCC 8
2b 1b 1a 2a 6 5 4 3
Fax group 3
FCC 2x8
2b 1b 1a 2a 6 5 4 3
8
2b 6
7
1b 5
1a 4
8
2a 3
2
6
8 7 4
6 5
8 3
5
7
2
4
6
6 1
3
6
4 5
3
6
4 5
5
3
6
4
5
3
* Bridging can be plugged in 8
6 3
1
6 3
6 3
6 3
*
8
4 3
6 7
2
4 5
3
8
1
1
6
8
4
2
4 5
3
3
8
1
1
8
1
1 8
1
* 6
8 6 3
7
8 7
Notes on Cat. 5 and 6 cables
1
2
5
7
2b 1b 1a 2a 6 5 4 3 2
7
1
2
4 5
3
1
6 5 4 3 2 1 2b 1b 1a 2a
Contact assignment FCC RJ45 13
The twisted pairs must not be untwisted more than 13 mm, otherwise the transmission properties will change. For shielded cables, connect the screen.
mm
d
The bend radius " r " of the cable must not be less than 4 x the cable diameter "d". ( r > 4 x d)
r>4xd
Terminal designation of FCC/pin Pair TIA/EIA-568-A TIA/EIA-568-B Gigabit Ethernet
10Base-T unshielded
Analog terminal IEC Analog terminal, Siemens Analog terminal, T-Com S0-ISDN-terminal 1a/1b transmit, 2a/2b receive (from Network Terminator NTBA) UP0-ISDN terminal W b 2a
1 3a 1 1 X X TX+ TX+ TX+ AS400 TX2 3b 2 2 X X TXRX+ ws 3 2a 3 3 X RX+ RX+ TXRX+ E a a E 1a a rt 4 1a 4 4 X TX+ TXTX+ U-R2a sw 5 1b 5 5 X TX- TX+ b b W 1b b TX- U-R2a ge 6 2b 6 6 X RX- RX- RXRX- W E a 2b 7 4a 7 7 X X RX+ DSL modem output Token Ring 10Base-T and 100Base-TX 8 4b 8 8 X X RX3270 Splitter output TP-PMD ATM Wire colours when using installation cable J-Y (St) U 2x2x0.6 Lg
Network technology: Example of 4 terminals with switch 5 port, RMD with patch panel 6 port, RMD and FCC socket outlets The application-neutral network for new installations In the case of a new installation, structures should be installed even now that will also reliably cover future applications. Therefore a data box will be required at all possible communication interfaces – both present ones and those conceivable in the future. These include not just the locations where telephone or PC applications will be operated, but also locations where television or video applications will be used later or music is desired. This installation is based on the central component, the patch panel 6-port, RMD in connection with classic FCC socket outlets 8pole shielded. with auto sensing
The data rate of 10/100 Mbit/s is automatically detected for the relevant port
with auto negotiation
The data rate of 10/100 Mbit/s is automatically switched over for the relevant port
with automatic
mode switchover (Full/Half Duplex) at all ports
with auto-partitioning
max. 90 m
L N 1995 L
Switch 6 Port REG 1995
N
10/100 FDX/COL Link/Act
x1
x3
x4
with MDI/MDIx
1996
x1
x2
Faults at the ports (internal and external) are detected automatically and the affected ports are switched off. The remaining ports continue to operate.
Patchpanel 6 Port Patch panel and FCC socket outlets REG 1996 with LSA+ connecting terminals x2
x3
x4
x5
x6
Crossed or uncrossed patch cables can be used on every port as required. Special uplink ports, e.g. for cascading, not required.
Cascadable as required (4096 IP addresses)
with more than 5 terminals in the application, multiple switches can be interconnected with no loss in performance. Up to 4096 terminals in a system can be managed using these switches.
x5
Store and forward principle
max. 90 m
Designation LED 1 (gr) LED 2 (yel.) LED 3 (gr) 1
10 / 100 FDX /COL LINK / ACT
LED = ON LED = OFF3 LED = Flashing Function: Function: Function: 100 Mbit/s 10 Mbit/s Full Duplex Half Duplex Collision1 Down-Link Activity2 UP-Link
No function at this port Device transmitting / receiving data 3 All LEDs off = no power supply / device defective 2
To other switches/PC
The most up to date method of switching. The data received is initially buffered in the device and only forwarded when complete. Defective data is therefore detected at this point and is not forwarded. This does not unnecessarily increase the data load on the system.
In order to meet the general safety regulations for telecommunications systems and prevent interference, DIN VDE 0100 Part 520, Section 12 must be observed. For unsheathed insulated single leads, a distance of < 10 mm must be maintained between signal leads and power leads.
T64 T64
DATA COMMUNICATION/TELECOMMUNICATIONS data/telecommunications Router with DSL modem RMD in a network, ADSL analog Internet access service (transmission speed 768/1500 kB/s)
Network operator Analog Telephone (system)
Subdistribution
Work stations / rooms
L N 7
P
max. 90 m
1998
8 0
Splitter 1.TAE
L
N
ACT
Data
Link
Online
x1
Router mit DSLModem REG 1998
L
Switch 6 Port REG 1995
N
10/100 FDX/COL Link/Act
Power
x1
x2
PC with network card
1996
1995
Patchpanel 6 Port REG 1996 x1
x2
x3
x4
x2
x3
x4
x5
PC with network card
x6
x5
PC with network card
Alternative fixed connection for splitter max. 20 m
to other switches (computers)
max. 90 m
Router with DSL modem RMD in a network, DSL ISDN Internet access service (transmission speed 768/1500 kB/s)
Network operator ISDN telephone (system)
Subdistribution
1998
NTBA Splitter
L
N
ACT
Data
Link
Online
x1
1.TAE
Work stations / rooms max. 90 m
L N
Router mit DSLModem REG 1998
1995
L x1
x2
Switch 6 Port REG 1995
N
10/100 FDX/COL Link/Act
Power
1996
x1
x2
x3
x4
PC with network card
Patchpanel 6 Port REG 1996 x2
x3
x4
x5
PC with network card
x6
x5
PC with network card
Alternative fixed connection for splitter max. 20 m
to other switches (computers)
max. 90 m
Router RMD in a network, ISDN Internet access service (without DSL transmission speed 64 kB/s) Network operator
Subdistribution
ISDN telephone (system)
Work stations / rooms
L N
max. 90 m
1999
1995
L
NTBA
ACT
Data
1.TAE
L
x2
Power
x1
x3 x2
Switch 6 Port REG 1995
N
10/100 FDX/COL Link/Act
Online
Link
x1
Router REG 1999
N
PC with network card
1996 Patchpanel 6 Port REG 1996 x1
x2
x3
x4
x2
x3
x4
x5
PC with network card
x6
x5
PC with network card
Alternative fixed connection for NTBA max. 20 m
to other switches (computers)
max. 90 m
Router RMD in a network, ADSL analog Internet access service (transmission speed 768/1500 kB/s)
Network operator
Subdistribution L N
Analog Telephone (system) P
7
1999
8 0
L
Splitter
Data
1.TAE
1995
L
x2
x1
x3
Switch 6 Port REG 1995
N
10/100 FDX/COL Link/Act
Power
Online
Link
x1
Router REG 1999
N
ACT
DSL Modem
Work stations / rooms max. 90 m 1996
x1
x2
x3
x4
PC with network card
Patchpanel 6 Port REG 1996 x2
x3
x4
x5
PC with network card
x6
x5
PC with network card
Alternative fixed connection for ADSL modedm max. 20 m
to other switches (computers)
max. 90 m
Router with DSL modem RMD in a network, DSL ISDN Internet access service (transmission speed 768/1500 kB/s)
Network operator
Subdistribution
ISDN telephone (system)
1999
NTBA
L
Splitter
Data
1995
L
x2
x3
Switch 6 Port REG 1995
N
10/100 FDX/COL Link/Act
Power
Online
Link
x1
Router REG 1999
N
ACT
DSL Modem
Work stations / rooms max. 90 m
L N
x1
x2
1996
x1 x3
x4
PC with network card
Patchpanel 6 Port REG 1996 x2
x3
x4
x5
PC with network card
x6
x5
1.TAE
PC with network card
Alternative fixed connection for DSL modem max. 20 m
T65 T65
max. 90 m
to other switches (computers)
dimensional DIMENSIONAL DRAWINGSdrawings MODUL 2/ modul 2/berker s.1/b.1/b.3/b.7 BERKER S.1/B.1/B.3/B.7 glas GLAS MODUL 2
81
55
3gang L = 222,5 mm 4gang L = 293,5 mm 5gang L = 364,5 mm
Rocker 10 14,5
52 81
71 152
BERKER S.1 11,7
111,1 136,5
80,5
52 80,5
18,1 27,65
3gang L = 223 mm 4gang L = 294 mm 5gang L = 365 mm
Rocker 9,5 14,8
56
71 151,5
9,5 13,85
55,4 80,5
27,65
5
BERKER B.1
81,1
81,1
111,1 137,1
71 152,1
11,7
Rocker 71 161
9,5 14,8
52 56 90
3gang horizontal L = 232 mm 4gang horizontal L = 303 mm 5gang horizontal L = 374 mm
90
9,5 13,85
55,4 90
3gang vertical L = 223,1 mm 4gang vertical L = 294,1 mm 5gang vertical L = 365,1 mm
11,7
27,65
9,5
90,7
56 81,1
3gang L = 223,1 mm 4gang L = 294,1 mm 5gang L = 365,1 mm
111,1 137,1
R190
BERKER B.3
Rocker R190
9,5 14,8
52 90,7
71 152,1
9,5
55,4 91
9,5 13,85
11,7
111,1 146
85
56 90
3gang L = 232 mm 4gang L = 303 mm 5gang L = 384 mm
141
90
27,65
4 6,5
BERKER B.7 GLAS
Rocker
52 95
14,8
9,6
71 161
55,4 95
9,6 13,85
T66 T66
dimensional drawings serie 1930 porzellan made by DIMENSIONAL DRAWINGS rosenthal/serie 1930/glasserie/palazzo/splash-protected SERIE 1930 POZELLAN MADE BY ROSENTHAL/ flush-mounted ip44/twinpoint SERIE 1930/GLASSERIE/PALAZZO/WG UP IP44/TWINPOINT SERIE 1930 PORZELLAN MADE BY ROSENTHAL / SERIE 1930 4gang L = 293 mm 5gang L = 364 mm ......
9 20,9
45 80
71 151
71
71 222
49,5 88
35,3
Surface-mounted frame
71
9
71
Combination 2 - X gang surface mounted only possible with combination connector and 1gang frame
49,5 86
222
1,8
GLASSERIE
5,8 20,9
4
10 80
5,8 21,2
71 151
71
71 222 4gang L = 293 mm 5gang L = 364 mm ......
1,8
5,8 20,9
4
45 80
71
71
71 151
222
PALAZZO
9,5
8
8
227 4gang L = 298 mm 5gang L = 369 mm ......
8
45 65 85
8 20,9
71 156
71
49 65
3gang L = 227 mm
12 17
85
71 156
TWINPOINT
3gang L = 222,5 mm 4gang L = 293,5 mm 5gang L = 364,5 mm 55
66 62
9,3 80,5
71 227
WG UP IP 44
T67 T67
71
71
71 156
21,2
65 85
71 151,5
drawings DIMENSIONALdimensional DRAWINGS BERKER Q.1/ berker k.1/k.5/arsys/berker TS BERKER K.1/K.5/BERKER ARSYS/BERKER TS BERKER Q.1
80,5
19,15 29,25 117,5 139,5
3gang L = 222,5 mm 4gang L = 293,5 mm 5gang L = 364,5 mm
Rocker 52 59,5 80,5
71 151,5
1,6 9,9 14,6
9,9 12,25
58,5 80,5
56,5 80,5
71 151,5
111,1 136,3
27,65
BERKER K.1/K.5
Rocker
52 71,5 87
71 158
9,9 14,3
3gang horizontal L = 229 mm 4gang horizontal L = 300 mm 5gang horizontal L = 371 mm
9,9 14,35
70,5 87
3gang vertical L = 222,5 mm 4gang vertical L = 293,5 mm 5gang vertical L = 364,5 mm
52,5 56,2
71 151,5
BERKER ARSYS
Rocker 71 151,5
9,5 13,6
55 71 80,5
3gang L = 222,5 mm 4gang L = 293,5 mm 5gang L = 364,5 mm
BERKER TS Glass cover plate 6gang
26 78
5
64 86
26
7
26
9 Wall boxes Wall box flush-mounted, oval order no. 1850 68,5 41,7
120,35 71
139
120,35 71
26 78
Hollow wall box, oval order no. 1824 47,5 68
133
Glass cover plate 4gang
43,4
Glass cover plate 2gang
120,6 160
Glass cover plate 1gang
25 4,
R3
5
5,
R3
86
Glass cover plate 8gang
26 78
Glass cover plate 4gang
43,4
120,6 138 160
Glass cover plate 2gang
65,8
Glass cover plate 1gang
T68 T68
dimensional DIMENSIONAL DRAWINGS BERKER TSdrawings SENSOR/ berker TS sensor/B.IQ/surface-mounted B.IQ/SURFACE-MOUNTED BERKER GLASS SENSOR AND GLASS SENSOR WITH ROOM THERMOSTAT Glas-Sensor
71 138,4 148,9
31 93
76
23 160
Mounting with adapter ring
15 24,5 14,5 48,5 86
5
60 74,9
Glass sensor with room thermostat
10,7
Mounting with adapter ring
31 93 160 15
R3
5,
B.IQ
24,5 7,5
60 86
5
5
2 5,6
115,3
71 115,3
37
27
Wall box 2gang for glass sensor (with room thermostat) and Crystal Ball order no. 1870 68 75
4 5,7
10,7
4 5,7
31,1 44,5
118,1
88,5 3gang 118,1 4gang 147,7 5gang
8
Plastic polar white
88,5 88,5
33,9 88,5
Push-button 4gang Light scene Push-button 8gang 1,3 5,7
1,3 5,7
Plastic polar white
IR receiver
(IR) push-buttons with room thermostat and display 3gang to 5gang
15
Push-button 1-to 3gang
151,6
1,3 5,7
glas and stainless steel
44,5
16,65
glas and stainless steel
151,6
Surface can be written on
144,2
138,9
114,6
109,3
85
79,7
151,6
28,9 Surface can be written on
Labeling field for B.IQ push-button 1gang, 2gang, 3gang
28,9
Labeling field for B.IQ push-button 4gang Surface can be written on
28,9
Labeling field for B.IQ push-button 5gang
117
102
SURFACE-MOUNTED
38 61
35 40
38 61
47
38 61
T69 T69
41,5 47
38 61
47
dimensional DIMENSIONAL drawings DRAWINGS berker integro/mobil BERKER INTEGRO/MOBIL r R twin TWIN BERKER INTEGRO
,5
42
9
59,5
59,5
59,5
Rotary dimmer with setting knob 400 W 41,4
Attention! To fasten the inserts, use flat headed screws of size M3 or M3.5.
Sockets
59,3
21
4
Surface-mounted spacer ring
59,5
,2
Surface-mounted housing
16
32
4
50
50
Rocker switch / push-button
21
4
41,4
33
10
9
System SCHUKO-socket Socket with earth pin Socket without earth contact Danish socket Swiss socket, type 13 USA / Canada socket Italien socket Australien socket Euro-Amerikanischer standard socket British Standard socket
Rotary dimmer with setting knob 200 W
42,5 55,5
32,7
42,5 55,5
Insertion depth 32,7 mm 29,2 mm 30,0 mm 28,0 mm 27,5 mm 31,0 mm 28,0 mm 16,5 mm 18,5 mm 21,0 mm
41
10
42,5
14,5
BERKER INTEGRO and MOBIL R TWIN Wall box
50
09 1883
09 1887 01
45
45
42,5
46
09 1820 09 1820 02
35,5
22
49
09 1820 01 09 1820 03
49
Installation cut-out Ø 46 mm oder Ø 50 mm depending on wall box
38 45,5
09191501 09191502
38
09 1933
59,5
39
59,5
12 49
42,5
49,5
42,5
12
59,5 109
38
168
Spacer for spezial frame with 19 mm edge
MOBIL R TWIN
Spezial frame with 19 mm edge
Rotary dimmer with setting knob 200 W
55,8
50
,5
33
51
21
4
50,5
59,5
42,5
59,5
9
Rotary dimmer with setting knob 400 W
19
11,5
Rocker switch / push-button
50,5
42,5 55,5
50
4
32
21
4
Sockets
10 15,5 42,5 55,5
Surface-mounted housing
16
41
System SCHUKO sockets Socket with earth pin
32,5
9
Insertion depth 32,7 mm 29,2 mm
Other socket systems can be used with Berker Integro and decorative ring/adapter inserts
T70 T70
dimensionalDRAWINGS drawings DIMENSIONAL aquatec/iso-panzer AQUATEC/ISO-PANZER Combination rocker switch/ SCHUKO-socket with hinged cover
58,5
IP44
58,5
SCHUKO 2gang socket with hinged cover
135 152,6
57,5 75,1
57,5
IP44
SCHUKO-double socket with hinged cover
58,5
52,3
Rocker switch / push-button
57,5 75,1
AQUATEC
57,5 75,1
128,5 146,1
135
75,1
152,6 SCHUKO socket with hinged cover
58,5
SCHUKO 3gang socket with hinged cover IP44
57,5 75,1
57,5
58,5
57,5 75,1
57,5 75,1 212,5
75,1
230,1
ISO-PANZER Rotary switches SCHUKO socket with 45° oblique outlet and hinged cover with bayonet lock
56
32
IP66
58
Rocker switch / push-button
SCHUKO 2gang socket with hinged cover
42
80
42
131,5 152,5
IP44
108
54 75 54 75
59
54 75
SCHUKO socket with hinged cover and bayonet lock
72
SCHUKO-double socket with hinged cover
54 75
IP66
42 75 90
131,5 155
74 85 100
IP 44 SCHUKO socket with hinged cover
IP
66
59
54
54 75
42 75
SCHUKO 3gang socket with hinged cover
54
59 209 230
T71 T71
59
3,1 12
12
12
For further information, please see our online catalogue at www.berker.de
3,1
3,1
dimensional DIMENSIONAL drawings DRAWINGS mounting MOUNTING plates PLATES
20 25
28,7 33,3
42,7 47 D-Subminiature connector 25pin order no. 1111 01
D-Subminiature connector 9pin order no. 1111 03
16
24
16,7 24,5
20 26
15,4
3,1
D-Subminiature connector 15pin order no. 1111 02
25,6
IBM data plug order no. 1111 04
19,5 27
XLR built-in socket C-series order no. 1111 05
XLR built-in plug C-series order no. 1111 06
16,5 22,2 Diode built-in plug/socket for screw fixing order no. 1111 09
2 x BNC TNC built-in socket/plug order no. 1112 13
19,3
19,3
9,1
24
2 x BNC / TNC built-in socket/plug order no. 1112 12
15
9,8
11
12,9 24,5
20,7
16
UHF-socket and N connector order no. 1111 07
10,1
11,9
15,2
3,2
2 x microphone socket 4pin order no. 1112 17
3,1
26,2
14,7
14
24 Modular jack order no. 1111 15
for 2 x fibre-optic couplings Simplex ST order no. 111220
25,9 30,5
for 2 x fibre-optic couplings Duplex SC order no. 1112 21
2,5
2,2
2 11,5
9,8 8 20
for 2 x Modular jack order no. 1112 18
9,5
Modular jack order no. 1111 16
25,5
2 x BNC / TNC built-in socket/plug for soldered connection order no. 1112 14
24
32,5 40 for cold sleeve/connector for cold condition order no. 1111 21
T72 T72
EQUIPMENT CATEGORIES equipment categories As a matter of principle, residential buildings shall always conform at least to equipment category 1. This corresponds to the current minimum requirements for needs-based electrical installation. It also applies to Instabus EIB installations in residential buildings.
HEA
(revised), Hauptberatungsstelle für Elektrizitätsanwendungen e.V. (Central Advisory Office for Electricity Applications) Living room 3) Dining area/ room Kitchen 4)5)19)
Without dining area < 18 m 2 With dining area < 20 m 2 < 8 m2 > 8 * 12m 2 > 12 * 20 m 2 Without breakfast bar With breakfast bar
DIY room 4)5) Hobby room < 8m 2 1-or 3) > 8 * 12 m 2 2 Bedroom 3) 3) > 12 * 20 m 2 Parent/child Bath 5)6)7)8) WC 5)6)8)9) Corridor Length * 2.5 m 10) Hallway Length > 2.5 m 11) Outdoor seating Width * 3 m Loggia Width > 3 m Balcony Terrace Store room above 3 m2 Adjoining cellar/basement 13) Communal cellar/basement Cellar corridor / basement corridor Bell/gong Door opening system Intercom system Alarm system (GMA) Lighting and socket outlet circuit Sub-circuit distribution board Equipment circuit
Extracts from DIN 18015 part 2: 1)20)
4 5 2 3 4 3 5
1 2
1
1
1
-
-
2
-
-
3
1
-
-
1
-
-
2 3 4 3 1 1 1 1 114) -
Equipment category 1
Equipment category 2
1)
1)
2)3)
2 1 1 1 1 12) 1 1 1 15) 1 16)
4 5 2 3 4 6 7 7 3 3 4 5 3 1
-
-
-
-
1
-
-
1
-
-
1 1 1 50m2=3, plus 25m2 1 p.f. 2-series
[ ]
2)3)
1 2
1
1
1
-
-
2 3
-
-
1
-
-
1
-
1
2 1
-
-
1
-
-
-
-
-
-
1 12)
1 1
1 1 1
114) -
1 15) 116) 1 1 1 4 2-series
8 10 4 6 8 10 12 9 5 5 7 9 4 1 1 2 1
2 3
1
1
-
2 3 4 2
-
-
1
-
2 3 1
1 -
-
2
1
-
-
-
-
-
3)
-
-
1
0
2
1
2 1
1 1
114) -
1 15) 1 16)
2)3)
2 4
1
2
-
1
1
1
-
-
2
1
1 2
4 2
-
-
3
1
-
-
-
-
-
2 3 <4 <5 3 2
1
<3
2
2 2 1 14) -
1 1 115) 1 16)
1 1
1 1
1 17) 7 3-series
1 17) 1 18) 9 4-series
[ ]
Or junction boxes for consumer equipment below 2 kW. For more than 4 rooms fit 2 aerial sockets, more than 5 rooms fit 3 aerial sockets. The sockets assigned to the beds must be configured at least as 2gang sockets, the sockets next to aerial sockets must be configured as at least 3gang sockets. They are classified according to the table as 1gang sockets. 4) The working areas should be illuminated so as to avoid as far as possible shadowing or glare. 5) Additionally 1 outlet for fan/extractor unit, if individual room ventilation is to be provided. 6) One of which is permitted to be combined with the light over the washbasin; in bathrooms up to 4 m2 only an outlet over the washbasin. 7) Of which one socket/outlet for one heater. 8) In windowless bathrooms or WCs, fit a delayed-off fan via the general room lighting. 9) In WCs with a washbasin fit a wall socket. 10) Switchable from one position. 11) Switchable from two positions. 12) For usable areas greater than 8 m2. 13) Does not apply to cellar and basement rooms formed by grille type partitions, e.g. wire mesh. 14) For aerial amplifiers, required only once per aerial system. 15) For usable areas greater than 20 m2, fit two lights. 16) In corridors above 6 m in length one outlet per 6 m section or part thereof. 17) With multiple internal communication points. 18) In detached and semi-detached houses. 19) For rooms with dining alcoves the number of outlets and sockets should each be increased by 1. 20) Sockets in bedheads, on working surfaces in kitchens, cooking alcoves and utility rooms, together with sockets in connection units for telecommunications should be at least 2gang socket combinations; those alongside aerial sockets should be at least 3gang socket combinations. They each count however according to the table as one outlet. 2)
-
1)
< 10 < 12 <5 <7 < 10 < 12 < 15 < 11 <7 <6 <8 < 11 <5 <2 <2 <3 <2
2
-
E
1)
Equipment category 3
2)3)
[ ]
E Key SCHUKO socket Light, general Telecoms socket Aerial socket Electric hob Built-in electric hob Built-in oven Refrigerator Freezer Fridge/freezer Dishwasher Washing machine Washer-drier Hot water heater
no other hot water [ ] ifsupply appliances, E Electrical general
A telephone wall socket should be combined with the aerial sockets. If the number of sockets, outlets and connections is increased, the number of circuits must also be increased. If electric doors, gates, blinds and shutters are installed, the number of circuits must be increased. In rooms with more than one door or in stairwells the lighting should be operable from at least two points. Access paths, building main doors including doorbell panels and steps, must be adequately lit. If there is no permanent lighting in hours of darkness, additional facilities such as controllers or comparable automatic switching devices should be fitted. Light systems for stairwells, lift areas in apartment blocks and lobbies should be fitted with programmable automatic cut-outs. To avoid sudden darkness, the automatic cut-out must provide a warning, such as dimming. The switches and push-buttons in these rooms must be identifiable in darkness, e.g. by means of a built-in lamp. Power sockets installed in the open air should be protected against unauthorised use, e.g. by a lock mechanism or cut-out. To permit subsequent deployment of Instabus EIB, it is recommended to install a ready made-up bus cable or unoccupied conduit system during electrical installation. In rooms for special uses, such as hobby rooms, separate circuits should be configured for lighting and wall sockets where appropriate. Cellar and basement rooms forming part of the dwelling must be protected by additional circuits. A doorbell must be provided for each dwelling, for buildings with more than two dwellings a door opening system should also be fitted in conjunction with an intercom.
T73
T73
[ ]
ACCESSORIES Order no.
Packing unit
Order no.
Packing unit
Mounting plates
Mounting plate for 2 x microphone jack
Blank plates
black
1112 17
10
Mounting plate unperforated black
1111 00
10
For data connector housing order no. 1110 .., 1115 02, 1119 .., 1126 .., 4256 15
For data connector housing order no. 1110 .., 1115 02, 1119 .., 1126 .., 4256 15 on page T72
for customised cut-outs or holes when installing special solutions
TV/audio Mounting plate for XLR built-in jack C-series black
1111 05
10
Mounting plate for UHF jack and N-connector
For data connector housing order no. 1110 .., 1115 02, 1119 .., 1126 .., 4256 15 on page T72
black
XLR-circular plug-in connector: Binder; Cannon; Conrad Electronic; Farnell; Hirose; Lumberg; Monacor; RS Components; XLR circular plug-in connector: Neutrik with cut-out dia. 24.5 mm
1111 06
1111 07
10
For data connector housing order no. 1110 .., 1115 02, 1119 .., 1126 .., 4256 15 on page T72
Mounting plate for XLR built-in plug P-series black
Microphone jack 4pole: Cannon; Conrad Electronic; Dr. Ing. Sieger; Farnell; Lumberg; Monacor; RS Components with cut-out dia. 16 mm
10
UHF socket N connector: Amphenol-Tuchel; Cannon; Conrad Electronic; Farnell; Hirose; Lumberg; Monacor; RS Components; UHF jack N connector: Dr. Ing. Sieger; Neutrik with cut-out dia. 16 mm
For data connector housing order no. 1110 .., 1115 02, 1119 .., 1126 .., 4256 15 on page T72
Data-/telecommunications Mounting plate for D-Subminiature connectors 9pole
XLR-circular plug-in connector: Binder; Cannon; Conrad Electronic; Farnell; Hirose; Lumberg; Monacor; RS Components; XLR circular plug-in connector: Neutrik with cut-out dia. 19.5 mm
black
1111 09
10
D-subminiature connectors see module inserts. on page T72
For data connector housing order no. 1110 .., 1115 02, 1119 .., 1126 .., 4256 15 For D-subminiature connector order no. 1839
for socket or plug connector
Mounting plate for D-Subminiature connectors 15pole
Mounting plate for diodes built-in plug/jack black
1111 03
black
10
1111 02
10
D-subminiature connectors see module inserts. For data connector housing order no. 1110 .., 1115 02, 1119 .., 1126 .., 4256 15 on page T72
Circular plug-in connector: Cannon; Conrad Electronic; Farnell; Lumberg; Monacor; RS Components with cut-out dia. 16.5 mm
on page T72
For data connector housing order no. 1110 .., 1115 02, 1119 .., 1126 .., 4256 15 For D-subminiature connector order no. 1835
for socket or plug connector
Bruttopreise nicht kartelliert . ohne MwSt. . Rabattgruppen beachten . "#" Auslauf beachten . "*" Neukennung beachten
611
ACCESSORIES Order no.
Packing unit
Order no.
Mounting plate for D-Subminiature connectors 25pole
Mounting plate for modular jack
black
Indexing dimension (W x H) approx. 15 x 19,3 mm
1111 01
black
10
D-subminiature connectors see module inserts. on page T72
For data connector housing order no. 1110 .., 1115 02, 1119 .., 1126 .., 4256 15 For D-subminiature connector order no. 1834
on page T72
Mounting plate for 2 x BNC/TNC built-in jack/ plug black
1112 14
10
For data connector housing order no. 1110 .., 1115 02, 1119 .., 1126 .., 4256 15 For BNC built-in jack order no. 1840
with cut-out dia. 9.8 mm for sockets/plugs with solder connection
Mounting plate for 2 x BNC built-in jack/plug black
1112 13
1111 16
10
For data connector housing order no. 1110 .., 1115 02, 1119 .., 1126 .., 4256 15 For modular jack order no. 1829, 1833, 1854 01
Modular jacks: AMP, order no. 216000-2, 216005; Asyco; Dätwyler; Dr. Ing. Sieger; Drivex; EFB Electronic; Erni; Hubbell; Intracom; Radiall; Setec; Eline 600 GG45 jacks: Kerpen; LANmark 5, 6 and 7 (only with with Keystone-Clip): Nexans; Keystone Jack: Kerpen
for socket or plug connector
on page T72
Packing unit
10
Mounting plate for 2 x modular jack black
For data connector housing order no. 1110 .., 1115 02, 1119 .., 1126 .., 4256 15
1112 18
10
Indexing dimension (W x H) approx. 14,7 x 20,7 mm
on page T72
with cut-out dia. 11 mm
Mounting plate for 2 x BNC/TNC built-in jack/ plug black
on page T72
1112 12
on page T72
Modular jacks: AMP, order no. 554908, 554909
10
Mounting plate for 2 x fibre-optic couplings Simplex ST
For data connector housing order no. 1110 .., 1115 02, 1119 .., 1126 .., 4256 15
black
with cut-out dia. 12.9 mm
Mounting plate for IBM data plug black
1111 04
on page T72
10
For data connector housing order no. 1110 .., 1115 02, 1119 .., 1126 .., 4256 15 on page T72
Data plug: Dr. Ing. Sieger; IBM; Telena
Mounting plate for modular jack black
1111 15
For data connector housing order no. 1110 .., 1115 02, 1119 .., 1126 .., 4256 15
10
1112 20
10
For data connector housing order no. 1110 .., 1115 02, 1119 .., 1126 .., 4256 15
Fibre-optic couplings: Ackermann; AMP; Anixter; Brand-Rex; BTR; CobiNet; Diamond; Drahtex; Huber+Suhner; Krone; Telegärtner
Indexing dimension (W x H) approx. 14 x 19,3 mm
on page T72
For data connector housing order no. 1110 .., 1115 02, 1119 .., 1126 .., 4256 15
Modular jacks: AMP, order no. 554171
612
Bruttopreise nicht kartelliert . ohne MwSt. . Rabattgruppen beachten . "#" Auslauf beachten . "*" Neukennung beachten
ACCESSORIES Order no.
Packing unit
Order no.
Packing unit
Mounting plate for 2 x fibre-optic couplings Duplex SC black
on page T72
1112 21
10
For data connector housing order no. 1110 .., 1115 02, 1119 .., 1126 .., 4256 15
Fibre-optic couplings: Ackermann; AMP; Brand-Rex; BTR; CobiNet; Diamond; Drahtex; FiberCraft; Huber+Suhner; Krone; Quante; Telegärtner
Connectors for cold condition Mounting plate for plug/jack for cold conditions black
on page T72
1111 21
10
For data connector housing order no. 1110 .., 1115 02, 1119 .., 1126 .., 4256 15
Non-heating appliance plugs/jacks: Conrad Electronic; Farnell; RS Components
Bruttopreise nicht kartelliert . ohne MwSt. . Rabattgruppen beachten . "#" Auslauf beachten . "*" Neukennung beachten
613
general terms and conditions of business General Terms and Conditions of Business (status 3/04) (on the basis of the ZVEI e.V. recommendation on conditions) 1. General provisions The written declarations by both parties are deemed authoritative in respect of the scope of the deliveries or services (hereinafter Deliveries). In addition these General Terms and Conditions of Business apply. General terms and conditions of the Buyer shall only apply insofar as the Supplier or the party rendering the service (hereinafter Supplier) has expressly approved of such conditions in writing. In other respects the regulations of Verband Deutscher Elektrotechniker apply insofar as they are taken into consideration in respect of the safety of deliveries or services. These General Terms and Conditions of Business also apply to all future transactions with the Buyer. The Supplier reserves unrestricted ownership and copyright utilisation rights to cost estimates, drawings and other offer documents (hereinafter Documents). These may not be made available to third parties without approval by the Supplier and on request they are to be returned without delay if the order is not placed. This applies accordingly to the Buyer’s documents. However, these may be made available to third parties to whom the Supplier is permitted and intends to assign deliveries. The Buyer enjoys the non-exclusive right to use standard and individual software with the agreed performance factors in an unaltered form on the agreed equipment. The Buyer may not assign or make this software available to third parties for use. Partial deliveries are permitted. In the case of order-related production, excess or short deliveries in each case of 10% are permitted. 2. Securities The Buyer’s creditworthiness is the prerequisite for an obligation to deliver. As a general rule the Supplier is entitled to demand advance payments, securities or cash payments insofar as it considers this necessary. If the Buyer remains in arrears in respect of honouring its payment obligations, or if it does not answer questions regarding its creditworthiness, the Supplier reserves the right to withdraw from the contract and, if applicable, demand claims for damages as a result of non-performance. In such cases goods that have already been delivered are to be returned to the Supplier in their original condition. Furthermore in the event of enforcement by writ in respect of the Buyer’s assets, composition or bankruptcy proceedings, discontinuation of business operations or the transfer of a business as well as seizure, all the Supplier’s accounts receivable shall fall due without delay. The Supplier is to be informed without delay of any considerable deterioration in the financial position (e.g. enforcement by writ, discontinuation of payment, composition, bankruptcy, discontinuation of business operations, the transfer of a business, seizure or the transfer of goods, inventories or outstanding items as a guarantee). 3. Delivery periods Details in the confirmation of order are authoritative in respect of the delivery period. Adherence to the period is conditional on the following: the timely receipt of all documents, licences and releases to be obtained by the Buyer; self-deliveries; adherence to the terms of payment specified by the Supplier, and other obligations. The period shall be extended accordingly if these basic requirements are not met in good time. The period is deemed adhered to if the goods have been dispatched, or collected, within the agreed delivery period. If the delivery is delayed for reasons for which the Buyer is responsible, the time agreed upon shall be deemed complied with on notification of the readiness to dispatch. If the non-adherence to the period for deliveries is proven to be attributable to force majeure, industrial disputes or unforeseeable obstructions, the period shall be extended accordingly. In the event that the agreed or extended delivery period is not adhered to, the Buyer may, insofar as it furnishes proof that it has suffered damage as a result of the delay, demand compensation for delayed performance for each full week of delay from _% to a total of 5% of the value of the part of the delivery that is delivered late. Further-reaching claims for compensation on the part of the Buyer are excluded. This does not apply insofar as mandatory liability
614
applies in cases of intent or gross negligence. This shall not affect the Buyer’s right to withdraw following the lapse of a reasonable extension granted to the Supplier. 4. Passing of risk Risk shall also pass to the Buyer in the case of a carriage-paid delivery if the goods have been dispatched or collected. Shipping shall be carried out according to the Buyer’s instructions or according to the Supplier’s best judgement without responsibility for the most cost-effective forwarding. At the request, and cost, of the Buyer, the Supplier shall insure the consignment against customary transport risks. If the shipping is delayed at the Buyer’s request, or for reasons for which the Buyer is responsible, the risk shall pass to the Buyer from the day on which the goods are ready for dispatch. In such a case the Supplier shall be under obligation to bring about the insurance policies requested by Buyer at the Buyer’s cost. If goods are taken back, the Buyer shall bear the risk up to the receipt at the Supplier’s premises. 5. Reservation of title The delivery items (reserved goods) shall remain the Supplier’s property until all the claims against the Buyer to which it is entitled from the business association are met. Prior to this pledging or ownership transfer by way of security are prohibited. The Buyer may only sell the reserved goods, regardless of their condition, to resellers during the ordinary course of business subject to the proviso that it is not in arrears with payments due to the Supplier and that it assigns to the Supplier at this point in time claims, including all accessory rights, to which it is entitled from such a sale. The assignment of such claims is restricted to the amount of all the claims to which the Supplier is entitled resulting from the business association. The Buyer is also entitled to collect these claims following such an assignment. This shall not affect the Supplier’s authority to collect such claims. On request the Buyer is to disclose to the Supplier the amounts and debtors in relation to the assigned claims, to make available to the Supplier without delay all documents required for collection, and to inform the debtor in writing of the assignment. Treating and finishing the reserved goods shall by carried on behalf of the Supplier without the Supplier being under obligation. If the goods are combined or blended with other items, the Buyer shall assign to the Supplier at this point in time its property or co-ownership rights to the new items. It shall store these with commercial diligence on behalf of the Supplier. In the event of a sale of the new items, the Buyer hereby assigns to the Supplier its claims and accessory rights resulting from such a sale for safety’s sake. If the Buyer finishes the goods with other goods that are not the Supplier’s property, the Supplier shall be entitled to part-ownership of the new item in proportion of the value of the reserved goods. In the case of conduct on the part of the Buyer in breach of contract, in particular in the case of default in payment, the Supplier shall be entitled to take back the reserved goods. At the Supplier’s request the Buyer shall be under obligation to surrender without delay. Taking goods back and the seizure of the reserved goods by the Supplier do not constitute any kind of declaration of withdrawal. The Buyer is to undertake all the necessary measures at its own cost to avoid a detrimental effect on or the loss of the rights to the delivered goods to which the Supplier is entitled. The Buyer is to ward off or inform the Supplier without delay of cases of seizure or other intervention by third parties. The Buyer shall be responsible for possible disadvantages it suffers as a result of it not observing this obligation. 6. Prices The prices are stated in euros. They are ex works prices and exclude packaging and are to be construed plus the respective valid statutory value added tax. In the case of goods purchased in a single order in excess of € 1,000.00 we shall deliver free of charge, carriage paid, to the receiving station excluding packaging. In the case of such an order in excess of € 2,500.00 we shall deliver free of charge, carriage-paid, to the receiving station including packaging. 7. Terms and conditions of payment Payments are to be effected within 30 days from the date of invoice without any deduction ex paying agent of the Supplier. A trade discount of 2% shall be granted in the case
of payment within 10 days following the date of invoice. Payment arrears or payment by bill of exchange rule out the deduction of a trade discount. Cheques shall only be accepted subject to the customary reservations, while bills of exchange shall only be accepted following a special agreement and if they comply with the acquisition conditions of the European Central Bank (ECB). Discount charges, fees and tax on notes and bills of exchange shall be borne by the Buyer. These are to be paid upon issuing the bill of exchange to the Supplier. In the case of all kinds of payment the day of performance shall be deemed the day on which the Supplier can dispose of the amount. In the event that the term of payment is exceeded, or the delivery is delayed, at the Buyer’s request by more than 30 days once the goods are ready for dispatch, the Supplier shall be entitled, without the necessity of issuing a special warning, to charge interest on arrears of 3% p.a. above the respective main refinancing rate of the ECB as from the due date, at least, however, amounting in each case to the interest rates charged by major Rhine-Westphalian banks for unsecured credits. The Supplier reserves the right to assert a claim on the grounds of greater damage. In other respects in the case of default in payment the Supplier shall be entitled to demand the surrender of the goods and claim for damages as a result of nonperformance. The Buyer may only set off undisputed or res judicata claims against the Supplier’s claims. 8. Liability for defects The Supplier guarantees that the sold goods do not contain defects at the time of the passing of risk. Insofar as parts proven to have been procured from the Supplier contained defects prior to the passing of risk, the Supplier shall be liable to the Buyer as follows: 1. The Buyer shall only be entitled to the warranty rights below if it has met in a proper manner the requirement to give notice of defects incumbent upon the Buyer by way of written notification of the identified defects, and it has returned to the Supplier the goods for which a complaint has been lodged. 2. All the parts or services whose usefulness is considerably impaired within 12 months, without consideration given to the operating period, calculated from the day on which the risk passes, as a result of an incident prior to the passing of risk, are to be subsequently improved at the Supplier’s discretion free of charge, or new ones are to be supplied or new services are to be rendered. 3. If the Buyer provides notification of defects in relation to the delivered goods or service, this shall only constitute a right to retain payment if the existence of a defect is res judicata or is not disputed by the Supplier. In this respect the retained payment must be commensurate with the respective faults. 4. The Buyer is to use its reasonable discretion to grant the Supplier appropriate time and opportunity to rectify defects. If it refuses to do this the Supplier shall be released from the liability for defects.
per alterations or repair work, no warranty shall apply to these and the consequences resulting from them. 8. The warranty period for subsequent improvements and replacement deliveries is 3 months. It shall apply at least until expiry of the warranty period for the goods for which a complaint has been lodged. 9. Further-reaching claims on the part of the Buyer against the Supplier and its vicarious agents are excluded, in particular claims for compensation of damage not caused to the delivery item. This does not apply insofar as mandatory liability applies in accordance with the Product Liability Act, with the restriction in accordance with sub-section 7, or in cases of intent, gross negligence or the lack of warranted characteristics 10. All kinds of liability are excluded in the case of defects in software products. It is expressly stated that no warranty is provided for functions, suitability, usefulness, nonviolation or other expected characteristics. Accordingly liability for any kind of damage or consequential damage caused by the software in respect of the user or third parties is excluded. If mandatory legal norms do not allow for this comprehensive exemption from liability for software in certain cases, it shall nevertheless remain in place for all other cases. 9. Industrial property rights, copyrights 1. Insofar as a third party lodges justified claims against the Buyer as a result of violation of an industrial property right /copyright (hereinafter Copyrights) by way of products delivered by the Supplier and used as per agreement, the Supplier shall be liable to the Buyer as follows: a) The Supplier shall, at its own discretion, bring about a utilisation right for the product, alter the product or replace it or if this is not possible under reasonable conditions take back the product subject to reimbursement of the purchase price. Further-reaching claims against the Supplier are excluded. b) The aforementioned obligation of the Supplier shall only apply if the Buyer informs the Supplier without delay of the claims lodged by third parties; does not recognise a violation of industrial property rights, and the Supplier is reserved the right to conduct all defensive measures and hold composition negotiations. 2. Claims by the Buyer shall be excluded insofar as it is responsible for the violation of an industrial property right or if such a violation is caused by the Buyer’s special parameters or unforeseeable application or alteration or blending with other products. 10. Impossibility, contractual adjustment 1. If it becomes impossible for the Supplier to honour the delivery incumbent upon the Supplier for reasons, which are its responsibility, the Buyer shall be entitled to request as compensation up to 10% of the value of the products that have not been delivered. 2. Insofar as events outside the Supplier’s sphere of influence considerably change the economic significance or the content of the delivery, of have an effect on the Supplier’s operations, the Supplier shall be entitled to withdraw from the contract or to adjust the contact in agreement with the Buyer.
5. If the Supplier allows a reasonable extension granted to the Supplier to lapse without rectifying the defect, or if the subsequent improvement is impossible or the Supplier refuses this, the Buyer may assert a right to reduce the purchase price. The Buyer may also demand conversion if an agreement n respect of abatement is not reached between the Buyer and Supplier.
11. Other claims for damages The following claims for damages lodged by the Buyer are excluded: claims on the grounds of a positive breach of contract, violation of obligations in the case of contractual negotiations and on the basis of unlawful acts. This does not apply insofar as mandatory liability applies by law, in particular in the case of intent, gross negligence and the lack of warranted characteristics.
6. The Buyer’s right to assert claims resulting from defects shall in any case fall under the statute of limitations in 6 months from the time of notification of defects. However, this shall not be before the warranty has elapsed. If no agreement is reached within this period, the Supplier and Buyer may agree upon an extension of this period of limitation.
12. Place of jurisdiction Hagen i.W. is deemed the place of general jurisdiction for all disputes resulting directly or indirectly from the contractual relationship. German law applies to the contractual relations. The Hague Convention of 01.07.1964 and the UN Sales Convention of 11.04.1980 shall not be applied.
7. The liability for defects does not apply to natural wear-and-tear and furthermore not to damage that occurs following the passing of risk as a result of faulty or negligent treatment, excessive or improper use, unsuitable operating resources, faulty construction work and similar external influences that were not presupposed as per agreement, and non reproducible software faults. If the Supplier is rendered liable for damage as a joint debtor by a third party for one of these reasons, the Buyer irrevocably assumes the liability at this point in time by way of internal arrangements.
13. Binding force of contract Even in the case of the legal invalidity of individual items, the binding force of the contract shall further apply to the other items of the contract.
If the Buyer or third parties carry out impro-
PRODUCT SUMMARY
615
PRODUCT SUMMARY Order no.
Packing Page Order no. unit
0102 09 1 0123 1 0124 10 1 0125 1 0126 1 0126 1 0126 1 0127 1 0128 1 0129 1 0140 1 0142 1 0143 05 1 0143 09 1 0148 1 0149 09 1 0150 29 1 0151 09 1 0152 09 1 0154 1 0155 1 0158 1 0159 1 0161 1 0162 1 0163 01 1 0165 01 1 0167 01 1 0169 1 0170 1 0171 1 0172 01 1 0173 1 0174 01 09 1 0174 01 09 1 0175 09 1 0175 09 1 0177 09 1 0178 09 1 0178 10 09 1 0179 1 0179 50 1 0180 1 0181 1 0182 09 1 0182 09 1 0183 01 1 0184 1 0185 1 0187 00 1 0187 01 1 0188 1 0190 1 0191 09 1 0191 09 1 0191 50 1 0191 50 1 0191 51 1 0191 51 1 08 4185 25 21 200 08 4185 25 22 200 08 4185 25 25 200 08 4185 25 26 200 08 4516 25 68 * 200 09 1151 25 01 10 09 1151 25 05 10 09 1151 25 07 10 09 1151 25 09 10 09 1151 25 11 * 10 09 1151 25 15 * 10 09 1151 25 17 * 10 09 1151 25 19 * 10 09 1152 25 25 10 09 1152 25 29 10 09 1152 25 55 10 09 1152 25 59 10 09 1152 25 65 10 09 1152 25 69 10 09 1803 25 05 10
616
332 42 343 346 308 329 343 347 348 347 50 50 332 332 338 338 337 337 337 339 338 339 338 50 49 42 44 44 53 54 54 55 55 334 345 334 345 344 347 349 346 347 350 349 336 344 54 53 42 43 43 43 333 56 462 57 462 56 462 473 473 473 473 475 468 468 468 468 468 468 468 468 469 469 469 469 469 469 468
Packing Page unit
09 1803 25 07 09 1803 25 09 09 1803 25 68 * 09 1803 25 76 * 09 1803 25 90 09 1803 25 94 09 1819 25 07 09 1819 25 11 09 1819 25 15 09 1819 25 18 * 09 1819 25 19 09 1819 25 68 09 1819 25 70 * 09 1819 25 74 * 09 1819 25 76 * 09 1825 25 06 09 1825 25 11 09 1825 25 12 09 1825 25 15 09 1825 25 68 * 09 1826 25 07 09 1826 25 11 09 1826 25 15 09 1826 25 18 09 1826 25 19 09 1826 25 28 09 1826 25 38 09 1826 25 70 * 09 1826 25 74 * 09 1826 25 76 * 09 1827 25 01 09 1827 25 05 09 1827 25 07 09 1827 25 09 09 1827 25 18 09 1827 25 28 09 1827 25 34 09 1827 25 38 09 1827 25 70 * 09 1827 25 74 * 09 1827 25 76 * 09 1828 25 01 09 1828 25 05 09 1828 25 07 09 1828 25 09 09 1828 25 18 09 1828 25 28 09 1828 25 34 09 1828 25 38 09 1828 25 70 * 09 1828 25 74 * 09 1828 25 76 * 09 2870 25 01 09 2870 25 05 09 2870 25 07 09 2870 25 09 09 2870 25 18 09 2870 25 28 09 2870 25 38 09 2871 25 71 09 2871 25 75 09 2871 25 77 09 2871 25 79 09 2876 25 01 09 2876 25 05 09 2876 25 07 09 2876 25 09 09 2876 25 18 * 09 2876 25 28 * 09 2876 25 38 * 09 2891 25 01 09 2891 25 05 09 2891 25 06 09 2891 25 09 09 3651 25 01 09 3651 25 05 09 3651 25 07 09 3651 25 09 09 3651 25 18
10 10 10 10 10 10 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 10 10 10 10 10 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
468 468 468 468 468 468 468 468 468 468 468 468 468 468 468 469 469 469 469 469 468 468 468 468 468 468 468 468 468 468 468 468 468 468 468 468 468 468 468 468 468 468 468 468 468 468 468 468 468 468 468 468 471 471 471 471 471 471 471 472 472 472 472 472 472 472 472 472 472 472 472 472 472 472 469 469 469 469 469
Order no.
Packing Page Order no. unit
09 3651 25 28 09 3652 25 01 09 3652 25 05 09 3652 25 07 09 3652 25 09 09 3652 25 28 09 3655 25 01 09 3655 25 05 09 3655 25 07 09 3655 25 09 09 3655 25 18 09 3655 25 28 09 3655 25 34 09 3655 25 38 09 3656 25 01 09 3656 25 05 09 3656 25 07 09 3656 25 09 09 3656 25 18 09 3656 25 28 09 3656 25 34 09 3656 25 38 09 3657 25 01 09 3657 25 05 09 3657 25 07 09 3657 25 09 09 3671 25 01 09 3671 25 05 09 3671 25 07 09 3671 25 09 09 3671 25 18 * 09 3671 25 28 * 09 3671 25 38 * 09 3675 25 01 09 3675 25 05 09 3675 25 07 09 3675 25 08 * 09 3675 25 09 09 3675 25 18 * 09 3675 25 21 09 3675 25 25 09 3675 25 27 09 3675 25 28 * 09 3675 25 29 09 3752 25 01 09 3752 25 05 09 3752 25 07 09 3752 25 09 09 3752 25 68 09 3762 25 31 09 3762 25 35 09 3762 25 39 09 3772 25 01 09 3772 25 05 09 3772 25 07 09 3772 25 09 09 4185 25 01 09 4185 25 02 09 4185 25 05 09 4185 25 06 09 4195 25 01 09 4195 25 02 09 4195 25 05 09 4195 25 06 09 4507 25 01 09 4507 25 05 09 4507 25 07 09 4507 25 09 09 4509 25 02 09 4509 25 05 09 4511 25 11 09 4511 25 12 09 4511 25 15 09 4511 25 16 09 4516 25 01 09 4516 25 05 09 4516 25 07 09 4516 25 09 09 4516 25 25
10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
469 469 469 469 469 469 470 470 470 470 470 470 470 470 469 469 469 469 469 469 469 469 469 469 469 469 470 470 470 470 470 470 470 471 471 471 471 471 471 471 471 471 471 471 470 470 470 470 470 470 470 470 471 471 471 471 473 473 473 473 473 473 473 473 470 470 470 470 470 470 475 475 475 475 475 475 475 475 472
09 4517 25 01 09 4517 25 05 09 4517 25 07 09 4517 25 09 09 4519 25 01 09 4519 25 02 09 4519 25 05 09 4519 25 06 09 4559 25 05 09 4559 25 07 09 4559 25 09 09 4560 25 01 09 4560 25 02 09 4560 25 05 09 4561 25 02 09 4570 25 05 09 4581 25 01 09 4581 25 02 09 4581 25 05 09 4581 25 06 09 4778 25 01 09 4778 25 02 09 4778 25 05 09 4778 25 06 09 4779 25 01 09 4779 25 02 09 4779 25 05 09 4779 25 06 09 6185 25 01 09 6185 25 02 09 6185 25 05 09 6185 25 06 09 6194 25 01 09 6194 25 02 09 6194 25 05 09 6194 25 06 09 6195 25 01 09 6195 25 02 09 6195 25 05 09 6195 25 06 09 6249 25 01 09 6249 25 02 09 6249 25 05 09 6249 25 06 09 6252 25 02 09 6252 25 05 09 6253 25 01 09 6253 25 09 09 6253 25 15 09 6253 25 17 09 6256 25 01 09 6256 25 02 09 6256 25 05 09 6256 25 06 09 6257 25 01 09 6257 25 02 09 6257 25 05 09 6257 25 06 09 6262 25 01 09 6262 25 02 09 6262 25 05 09 6262 25 06 09 6272 25 01 09 6272 25 02 09 6272 25 05 09 6272 25 06 1001 01 1001 09 1002 00 02 1002 00 02 1002 00 62 1002 00 65 # 1002 00 69 1002 00 69 1002 00 69 1002 90 04 1002 90 11 1004 90 04 1004 90 11
Packing Page unit
10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 10 10
475 475 475 475 475 475 475 475 476 476 476 475 475 475 475 475 475 475 475 475 473 473 473 473 473 473 473 473 473 473 473 473 473 473 473 473 473 473 473 473 474 474 474 474 474 474 474 474 474 474 475 475 475 475 474 474 474 474 474 474 474 474 474 474 474 474 298 298 355 369 371 371 355 369 371 369 369 260 260
Unverbindlic"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
PRODUCT SUMMARY Order no.
1005 00 01 1005 00 02 1005 00 69 1005 09 # 1005 62 # 1005 65 # 1005 70 02 1005 70 04 1005 70 06 * 1005 70 09 1005 70 24 * 1007 14 04 1007 16 06 1007 19 09 1007 99 09 1009 02 1009 09 1009 14 04 1009 14 14 1009 16 06 1009 16 16 1009 19 09 1009 19 19 1009 20 1009 21 1009 60 79 * 1009 60 89 * 1009 89 12 1009 89 19 1009 89 82 1009 89 89 1010 00 1010 70 00 1010 70 00 1010 71 00 1010 71 00 1010 72 00 1010 72 00 1011 02 1011 09 1011 14 04 1011 16 06 1011 19 09 1011 22 1011 29 1011 30 04 1011 30 46 1011 39 04 1011 45 1011 60 19 * 1011 60 45 * 1011 60 62 * 1011 60 89 * 1011 62 1011 64 04 # 1011 64 14 * 1011 66 06 # 1011 66 16 * 1011 69 09 1011 72 1011 89 12 1011 89 19 1011 89 62 1011 89 82 1011 89 89 1011 99 09 1011 99 19 1011 99 45 1012 02 1012 09 1012 14 04 1012 16 06 1012 19 09 1012 22 1012 29 1012 30 04 1012 30 46 1012 39 04 1012 60 19 *
Packing Page Order no. unit
10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 1 1 1 1 20 20 20 10 20 10 20 10 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 10 1 1 1 1 1 1 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 2 2 10 10 10 10
260 260 260 289 289 289 221 221 221 221 221 360 360 360 360 71 71 126 127 126 127 126 127 303 303 166 166 127 127 126 126 273 157 197 157 197 157 197 60 60 102 102 102 60 60 108 108 108 60 158 158 158 158 60 112 112 112 112 112 60 96 96 96 96 96 96 96 96 60 60 102 102 102 60 60 108 108 108 158
1012 60 62 * 1012 60 89 * 1012 62 1012 64 04 # 1012 64 14 * 1012 66 06 # 1012 66 16 * 1012 69 09 1012 72 1012 89 12 1012 89 19 1012 89 62 1012 89 82 1012 89 89 1012 99 09 1012 99 19 1013 02 1013 09 1013 14 04 1013 16 06 1013 19 09 1013 22 1013 29 1013 30 04 1013 30 46 1013 39 04 1013 60 19 * 1013 60 62 * 1013 60 89 * 1013 62 1013 64 04 # 1013 64 14 * 1013 66 06 # 1013 66 16 * 1013 69 09 1013 89 12 1013 89 19 1013 89 62 1013 89 82 1013 89 89 1013 99 09 1013 99 19 1014 02 1014 09 1014 14 04 1014 16 06 1014 19 09 1014 30 04 1014 30 46 1014 39 04 1014 60 19 * 1014 60 62 * 1014 60 89 * 1014 62 1014 64 04 # 1014 64 14 * 1014 66 06 # 1014 66 16 * 1014 69 09 1014 89 62 1014 89 82 1014 89 89 1014 99 09 1015 02 1015 09 1015 14 04 1015 16 06 1015 19 09 1015 30 04 1015 30 46 1015 39 04 1015 60 19 * 1015 60 62 * 1015 60 89 * 1015 62 1015 64 04 # 1015 64 14 * 1015 66 06 # 1015 66 16 *
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
Packing Page unit
10 10 10 5 5 5 5 5 2 10 10 2 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 2 2 10 10 10 10 2 2 10 5 5 5 5 5 10 10 2 10 10 10 10 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 10 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1
158 158 60 112 112 112 112 112 60 96 96 96 96 96 96 96 60 60 102 102 102 60 60 108 108 108 158 158 158 60 112 112 112 112 112 96 96 96 96 96 96 96 60 60 102 102 102 108 108 108 158 158 158 60 112 112 112 112 112 96 96 96 96 60 60 102 102 102 108 108 108 158 158 158 60 112 112 112 112
Order no.
1015 69 09 1015 89 62 1015 89 82 1015 89 89 1015 99 09 1019 02 1019 09 1019 14 04 1019 16 06 1019 19 09 1019 60 89 * 1019 89 82 1019 89 89 1021 12 1021 22 1021 32 1022 1022 09 1022 14 04 1022 16 06 1022 19 09 1022 60 19 * 1022 89 12 1022 89 19 1022 99 19 1023 14 04 1023 16 06 1023 19 09 1023 60 19 * 1023 89 12 1023 89 19 1023 99 19 1024 14 04 1024 16 06 1024 19 09 1024 60 19 * 1025 14 04 1025 16 06 1025 19 09 1025 60 19 * 1029 00 01 1029 00 02 1029 00 02 1029 00 62 1029 00 62 1029 00 62 1029 00 65 1029 00 65 1029 00 69 1029 00 69 1029 00 69 1029 90 04 1029 90 11 1030 00 01 1030 00 02 1030 00 02 1030 00 62 1030 00 62 1030 00 62 1030 00 65 # 1030 00 69 1030 00 69 1030 00 69 1030 90 04 1030 90 11 1031 00 01 1031 00 02 1031 00 02 1031 00 62 1031 00 62 1031 00 62 1031 00 65 # 1031 00 69 1031 00 69 1031 00 69 1031 90 04 1031 90 11 1033 02 1033 09
Packing Page Order no. unit
1 2 2 2 2 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 10 10
112 96 96 96 96 82 82 140 140 140 176 140 140 31 31 31 80 80 102 102 102 158 96 96 96 102 102 102 158 96 96 96 102 102 102 158 102 102 102 158 237 60 237 60 237 276 60 276 60 237 276 237 237 237 60 237 60 237 277 277 60 237 277 237 237 237 61 237 61 237 277 277 61 237 277 237 237 82 82
1033 14 04 1033 16 06 1033 19 09 1033 60 89 * 1033 89 12 1033 89 19 1034 00 01 1034 00 02 1034 00 04 1035 00 01 1035 00 02 1035 00 69 1035 01 01 1035 01 02 1035 01 69 1035 09 # 1035 62 # 1035 65 # 1035 70 02 1035 70 04 1035 70 06 * 1035 70 09 1035 70 24 * 1037 1037 01 1039 20 1039 21 1040 1040 01 1041 14 04 1041 16 06 1041 16 06 1041 19 09 1041 19 09 1041 70 02 1041 70 04 1041 70 06 * 1041 70 09 1041 70 24 * 1041 89 82 1041 89 89 1041 99 09 1042 14 04 1042 16 06 1042 16 06 1042 19 09 1042 19 09 1042 70 02 1042 70 04 1042 70 06 * 1042 70 09 1042 70 24 * 1042 89 82 1042 89 89 1042 99 09 1043 14 04 1043 16 06 1043 16 06 1043 19 09 1043 19 09 1043 70 02 1043 70 04 1043 70 06 * 1043 70 09 1043 70 24 * 1043 89 82 1043 89 89 1043 99 09 1044 00 01 1044 00 02 1044 00 04 1044 09 # 1044 62 # 1044 65 # 1045 00 01 1045 00 02 1045 00 69 1045 01 01 1045 01 02
Packing Page unit
10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 10 10
140 140 140 176 140 140 260 260 260 260 260 260 260 260 260 290 290 290 221 221 221 221 221 304 304 303 303 304 304 102 102 108 102 108 189 192 189 189 189 97 97 97 103 103 109 103 109 189 192 189 189 189 97 97 97 103 103 109 103 109 189 192 189 189 189 97 97 97 246 246 246 280 280 280 246 246 246 246 246
617
PRODUCT SUMMARY Order no.
1045 01 69 1045 70 02 1045 70 04 1045 70 06 * 1045 70 09 1045 70 24 * 1045 71 02 1045 71 06 * 1045 71 09 1045 71 24 * 1052 14 04 1052 16 06 1052 19 09 1052 70 02 1052 70 04 1052 70 06 * 1052 70 09 1052 70 24 * 1053 14 04 1053 16 06 1053 19 09 1053 70 02 1053 70 04 1053 70 06 * 1053 70 09 1053 70 24 * 1056 00 1057 00 1058 00 1061 1062 14 04 1062 16 06 1062 19 07 1062 19 09 1063 14 04 1063 16 06 1063 19 09 1064 20 1064 21 1066 14 04 # 1066 16 06 # 1066 19 09 # 1067 09 # 1067 62 # 1067 65 # 1070 01 01 1070 01 02 1070 01 04 1071 01 01 1071 01 02 1071 01 04 1071 09 # 1071 62 # 1071 65 # 1072 09 # 1072 62 # 1072 65 # 1076 09 1076 09 1077 00 01 1077 00 02 1077 00 69 1077 01 01 1077 01 02 1077 01 04 1077 29 # 1077 62 # 1077 65 # 1077 71 02 1077 71 04 1077 71 06 * 1077 71 09 1077 71 24 * 1079 00 01 1079 00 02 1079 00 69 1079 01 01 1079 01 02 1079 01 69
618
Packing Page Order no. unit
10 20 20 20 20 20 10 10 10 10 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 10 2 2 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
246 209 209 209 209 209 209 209 209 209 103 103 103 189 192 189 189 189 103 103 103 189 193 189 189 189 237 237 237 30 138 138 138 138 138 138 138 303 303 149 149 149 292 292 292 258 258 258 259 259 259 289 289 289 292 292 292 335 381 245 245 245 245 245 245 280 280 280 207 207 207 207 207 245 245 245 245 245 245
1079 02 01 1079 02 02 1079 02 69 1079 03 01 1079 03 02 1079 03 04 1079 04 01 1079 04 02 1079 04 04 1079 05 01 1079 05 02 1079 05 04 1079 71 02 1079 71 04 1079 71 06 * 1079 71 09 1079 71 24 * 1079 72 02 1079 72 04 1079 72 06 * 1079 72 09 1079 72 24 * 1079 73 02 1079 73 04 1079 73 06 * 1079 73 09 1079 73 24 * 1080 02 1080 09 1080 14 04 1080 16 06 1080 19 09 1080 60 89 * 1080 89 82 1080 89 89 1081 02 1081 09 1081 14 04 1081 16 06 1081 19 09 1081 60 89 * 1081 89 82 1081 89 89 1082 02 1082 09 1082 19 09 1082 32 1082 60 89 * 1082 89 82 1082 89 89 1083 02 1083 09 1083 19 09 1083 60 89 * 1083 89 82 1083 89 89 1084 02 1084 09 1084 14 04 1084 16 06 1084 19 09 1084 60 89 * 1084 89 82 1084 89 89 1087 00 01 1087 00 02 1087 00 69 1087 01 01 1087 01 02 1087 01 04 1087 19 # 1087 62 # 1087 65 # 1087 71 02 1087 71 04 1087 71 06 * 1087 71 09 1087 71 24 * 1088 00 01
Packing Page unit
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
245 245 245 245 245 245 245 245 245 245 245 245 208 208 208 208 208 208 208 208 208 208 208 208 208 208 208 70 70 125 125 125 165 125 125 70 70 126 126 126 165 126 126 70 70 126 70 165 126 126 70 70 126 165 126 126 69 69 125 125 125 165 125 125 245 245 245 245 245 245 280 280 280 207 207 207 207 207 245
Order no.
1088 00 02 1088 00 69 1088 01 01 1088 01 02 1088 01 04 1088 71 02 1088 71 04 1088 71 06 * 1088 71 09 1088 71 24 * 1089 19 # 1089 29 # 1089 59 # 1089 62 # 1089 65 # 1089 72 # 1089 75 # 1089 82 # 1089 85 # 1090 1090 10 1090 11 1090 12 1091 1091 10 1091 11 1091 12 1092 1092 10 1092 11 1092 12 1093 1093 10 1093 11 1093 12 1094 1094 10 1094 11 1094 12 1095 1095 10 1095 11 1095 12 1096 02 1096 09 1096 14 04 1096 16 06 1096 19 09 1096 60 89 * 1096 89 82 1096 89 89 1102 1108 00 01 1108 00 02 1108 00 69 1108 01 01 1108 01 02 1108 01 69 1108 70 02 1108 70 04 1108 70 06 * 1108 70 09 1108 70 24 * 1108 71 02 1108 71 04 1108 71 06 * 1108 71 09 1108 71 24 * 1108 90 04 1108 90 11 1108 91 04 1108 91 11 1109 02 1109 09 1109 14 04 1109 14 14 1109 16 06 1109 16 16 1109 19 09
Packing Page Order no. unit
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 10 1 1 10 10 1 1 1 10 1 1 1 10 10 1 10 10 1 1 1 10 10 1 10 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
245 245 245 245 245 207 207 207 207 207 280 280 280 280 280 280 280 280 280 299 300 300 300 299 300 300 300 299 300 300 300 299 300 300 300 299 300 300 300 299 300 300 300 69 69 125 125 125 165 125 125 299 257 257 257 257 257 257 219 219 219 219 219 219 219 219 219 219 257 257 257 257 80 80 137 137 137 137 137
1109 19 19 1109 60 79 * 1109 60 89 * 1109 89 82 1109 89 89 1109 90 82 * 1109 90 89 * 1110 14 04 1110 16 06 1110 19 09 1110 60 89 * 1110 89 82 1110 89 89 1116 00 01 1116 00 02 1116 00 69 1116 02 1116 09 1116 14 04 1116 16 06 1116 19 09 1116 71 02 1116 71 04 1116 71 06 1116 71 09 1116 71 24 1116 89 82 1116 89 89 1116 90 04 1116 90 11 1119 02 1119 09 1124 14 04 1124 16 06 1124 19 09 1124 60 89 * 1124 89 82 1124 89 89 1126 00 01 1126 00 02 1126 00 69 1126 09 # 1126 62 # 1126 65 # 1126 70 02 1126 70 04 1126 70 06 * 1126 70 09 1126 70 24 * 1126 90 04 1126 90 11 1127 09 # 1127 62 # 1127 65 # 1130 02 1130 09 1130 89 82 1130 89 89 1130 99 09 1134 00 01 1134 00 02 1134 00 04 1134 00 21 1134 00 22 1134 00 24 1135 00 01 1135 00 02 1135 00 21 1135 00 22 1135 00 69 1135 00 89 1135 09 # 1135 62 # 1135 65 # 1135 70 02 1135 70 04 1135 70 06 * 1135 70 09 1135 70 24 *
Packing Page unit
10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
137 175 175 137 137 137 137 150 150 150 182 150 150 253 253 253 76 76 134 134 134 216 216 216 216 216 134 134 253 253 89 89 127 127 127 166 127 127 268 268 268 292 292 292 229 229 229 229 229 268 268 288 288 288 72 72 99 99 99 248 248 248 248 248 248 248 248 248 248 248 248 281 281 281 211 211 211 211 211
Unverbindlic"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
PRODUCT SUMMARY Order no.
1135 72 02 1135 72 04 1135 72 06 * 1135 72 09 1135 72 24 * 1137 02 1137 09 1137 14 04 1137 14 24 1137 16 06 1137 16 26 1137 19 09 1137 19 29 1137 22 1137 29 1137 60 69 * 1137 60 79 * 1137 60 89 * 1137 89 22 1137 89 29 1137 89 82 1137 89 89 1139 09 # 1139 36 # 1139 37 # 1139 62 # 1139 63 # 1139 64 # 1139 65 # 1139 66 # 1139 67 # 1139 68 # 1140 00 01 1140 00 02 1140 00 69 1140 90 04 1140 90 11 1141 00 01 1141 00 02 1141 00 69 1141 90 04 1141 90 11 1143 02 1143 09 1146 02 1146 09 1146 14 04 1146 16 06 1146 19 09 1146 60 89 * 1146 89 82 1146 89 89 1147 00 01 1147 00 02 1147 00 69 1147 70 02 1147 70 06 * 1147 70 09 1147 70 24 * 1147 90 04 1147 90 11 1149 02 1149 02 1149 09 1149 09 1150 00 01 1150 00 02 1150 00 69 1150 02 1150 09 1150 10 01 1150 10 02 1150 10 04 1150 14 04 1150 16 06 1150 19 # 1150 19 09 1150 60 89 * 1150 62 #
Packing Page Order no. unit
10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 1 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
211 211 211 211 211 72 72 129 129 129 129 129 129 72 72 167 167 167 129 129 129 129 276 276 276 276 276 276 276 276 276 276 257 257 257 257 257 257 257 257 257 257 80 80 69 69 125 125 125 165 125 125 245 245 245 207 207 207 207 245 245 69 91 69 91 243 243 243 68 68 243 243 243 123 123 279 123 165 279
1150 65 # 1150 71 02 1150 71 04 1150 71 06 * 1150 71 09 1150 71 24 * 1150 89 82 1150 89 89 1153 00 01 1153 00 02 1153 00 69 1153 14 04 1153 16 06 1153 19 09 1153 70 02 1153 70 04 1153 70 06 * 1153 70 09 1153 70 24 * 1153 90 04 1153 90 11 1154 00 01 1154 00 02 1154 00 69 1154 10 01 1154 10 02 1154 10 04 1154 71 02 1154 71 04 1154 71 06 * 1154 71 09 1154 71 24 * 1155 00 01 1155 00 02 1155 00 69 1155 01 01 1155 01 02 1155 01 69 1155 10 01 1155 10 02 1155 10 04 1155 91 04 1155 91 11 1165 00 01 1165 00 02 1165 00 69 1165 01 01 1165 01 02 1165 01 04 1165 70 02 1165 70 04 1165 70 06 * 1165 70 09 1165 70 24 * 1167 00 01 1167 00 02 1167 00 69 1167 70 02 1167 70 04 1167 70 06 * 1167 70 09 1167 70 24 * 1167 90 04 1167 90 11 1168 09 # 1168 62 # 1168 65 # 1169 09 # 1169 62 # 1169 65 # 1170 02 1170 09 1170 14 04 1170 16 06 1170 19 09 1170 60 89 * 1170 70 02 1170 70 04 1170 70 06 *
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
Packing Page unit
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
279 207 207 207 207 207 123 123 267 267 267 148 148 148 228 228 228 228 228 267 267 258 258 258 258 258 258 219 219 219 219 219 258 258 258 258 258 258 258 258 258 258 258 247 247 247 246 246 246 209 209 209 209 209 247 247 247 209 209 209 209 209 247 247 280 280 280 280 280 280 87 87 147 147 147 181 227 227 227
Order no.
1170 70 09 1170 70 24 * 1177 00 01 1177 00 02 1177 00 69 1177 90 04 1177 90 11 1180 02 1180 09 1181 02 1181 09 1181 14 04 1181 16 06 1181 19 09 1181 60 89 * 1181 89 82 1181 89 89 1182 00 01 1182 00 02 1182 00 69 1182 70 02 1182 70 04 1182 70 06 * 1182 70 09 1182 70 24 * 1182 90 04 1182 90 11 1184 00 01 1184 00 02 1184 00 04 1184 70 02 1184 70 04 1184 70 06 * 1184 70 09 1184 70 24 * 1185 00 01 1185 00 02 1185 00 69 1185 09 # 1185 62 # 1185 65 # 1186 00 01 1186 00 02 1186 00 04 1186 70 02 1186 70 04 1186 70 06 * 1186 70 09 1186 70 24 * 1187 00 01 1187 00 02 1187 00 69 1187 09 # 1187 62 # 1187 65 # 1196 02 1196 09 1196 14 04 1196 16 06 1196 19 09 1196 60 89 * 1196 89 82 1196 89 89 1197 02 1197 09 1197 14 04 1197 16 06 1197 19 09 1197 60 89 * 1197 89 82 1197 89 89 1198 02 1198 09 1198 14 04 1198 16 06 1198 19 09 1198 60 89 * 1198 89 82 1198 89 89
Packing Page Order no. unit
10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
227 227 267 267 267 267 267 87 87 87 87 148 148 148 181 148 148 266 266 266 228 228 228 228 228 266 266 259 259 259 220 220 220 220 220 259 259 259 289 289 289 259 259 259 220 220 220 220 220 259 259 259 289 289 289 81 81 139 139 139 176 139 139 81 81 139 139 139 176 139 139 71 71 127 127 127 166 127 127
1200 02 1200 09 1201 00 01 1201 00 02 1201 00 69 1201 01 01 1201 01 02 1201 01 69 1201 09 # 1201 62 # 1201 65 # 1201 70 02 1201 70 04 1201 70 06 * 1201 70 09 1201 70 24 * 1202 00 01 1202 00 02 1202 00 04 1203 14 04 1203 16 06 1203 19 09 1203 60 89 * 1203 89 82 1203 89 89 1204 00 02 1204 00 69 1204 49 1204 60 89 * 1204 70 02 1204 70 09 1204 89 82 1204 89 89 1204 90 04 1204 99 09 1216 00 02 1216 00 69 1216 49 1216 60 89 * 1216 70 02 1216 70 09 1216 89 82 1216 89 89 1216 90 04 1216 99 09 1217 00 02 1217 00 69 1217 49 1217 60 89 * 1217 70 02 1217 70 09 1217 89 82 1217 89 89 1217 90 04 1217 99 09 1218 00 02 1218 00 69 1218 49 1218 60 89 * 1218 71 02 1218 71 09 1218 89 82 1218 89 89 1218 90 04 1218 99 09 1219 00 02 1219 00 69 1219 49 1219 60 89 * 1219 70 02 1219 70 09 1219 89 82 1219 89 89 1219 90 04 1219 99 09 1220 1221 1222 1223 00 02
Packing Page unit
10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
81 81 260 260 260 259 259 259 289 289 289 221 221 221 221 221 259 259 259 139 139 139 176 139 139 269 269 89 183 230 230 150 150 269 150 270 270 90 183 231 231 151 151 270 151 270 270 90 183 230 230 151 151 270 151 270 270 90 183 230 230 151 151 270 151 270 270 90 183 231 231 151 151 270 151 20 302 302 270
619
PRODUCT SUMMARY Order no.
1223 00 69 1223 49 1223 60 89 * 1223 71 02 1223 71 09 1223 89 82 1223 89 89 1223 90 04 1223 99 09 1224 00 02 1224 00 69 1224 90 04 1225 1225 01 1226 1227 1229 1229 02 1230 1231 1232 1233 00 02 1233 00 69 1233 49 1233 60 89 * 1233 70 02 1233 70 09 1233 89 82 1233 89 89 1233 90 04 1233 99 09 1234 02 1234 09 1235 02 1235 09 1236 00 02 1236 00 69 1236 49 1236 60 89 * 1236 70 02 1236 70 09 1236 89 82 1236 89 89 1236 90 04 1236 99 09 1238 00 02 1238 00 69 1238 90 04 1242 00 02 1242 00 69 1242 90 04 1244 00 02 1244 00 69 1244 49 1244 60 89 * 1244 71 02 1244 71 09 1244 89 82 1244 89 89 1244 90 04 1244 99 09 1247 00 04 1248 19 00 * 1248 60 89 * 1248 70 02 * 1248 70 04 * 1248 70 06 * 1248 70 09 * 1248 70 24 * 1249 00 02 1249 00 69 1249 49 1249 60 89 * 1249 70 02 1249 70 09 1249 89 82 1249 89 89 1249 90 04 1249 99 09
620
Packing Page Order no. unit
10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
270 90 184 231 231 152 152 270 152 270 270 270 302 302 302 302 302 302 20 20 20 271 271 91 184 231 231 152 152 271 152 71 71 71 71 271 271 91 184 231 231 152 152 271 152 269 269 269 269 269 269 269 269 89 183 230 230 151 151 269 151 247 127 166 209 209 209 209 209 271 271 90 184 231 231 152 152 271 152
1251 00 02 1251 00 69 1251 49 1251 60 89 * 1251 70 02 1251 70 09 1251 89 82 1251 89 89 1251 90 04 1251 99 09 1252 00 02 1252 00 69 1252 49 1252 60 89 * 1252 70 02 1252 70 09 1252 89 82 1252 89 89 1252 90 04 1252 99 09 1253 00 02 1253 00 69 1253 49 1253 60 89 * 1253 70 02 1253 70 09 1253 89 82 1253 89 89 1253 90 04 1253 99 09 1279 1279 02 1279 03 1280 1281 1282 1283 1288 02 1288 09 1288 12 1288 19 1288 19 09 1288 19 19 1288 19 29 1288 19 39 1288 19 49 1288 19 59 1288 19 69 1288 22 1288 29 1288 32 1288 39 1288 42 1288 49 1288 52 1288 59 1288 62 1288 69 1288 89 12 1288 89 19 1288 89 22 1288 89 29 1288 89 32 1288 89 39 1288 89 42 1288 89 49 1288 89 52 1288 89 59 1288 89 82 1288 89 89 1289 1289 03 1290 05 1297 00 00 1298 00 02 1298 00 69 1298 49 1298 60 89 * 1298 70 02
Packing Page unit
10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
270 270 90 183 231 231 151 151 270 151 270 270 90 183 231 231 152 152 270 152 271 271 90 184 231 231 152 152 271 152 19 19 19 19 19 19 19 91 91 91 91 153 153 153 153 153 153 153 91 91 91 91 91 91 92 92 92 92 153 153 153 153 153 153 153 153 153 153 153 153 20 20 453 243 269 269 89 183 230
Order no.
1298 70 09 1298 89 82 1298 89 89 1298 90 04 1298 99 09 1299 00 02 1299 00 69 1299 49 1299 60 89 * 1299 71 02 1299 71 09 1299 89 82 1299 89 89 1299 90 04 1299 99 09 1300 00 02 1300 00 69 1300 49 1300 60 89 * 1300 71 02 1300 71 09 1300 89 82 1300 89 89 1300 90 04 1300 99 09 1301 00 02 1301 00 69 1301 49 1301 60 89 * 1301 71 02 1301 71 09 1301 89 82 1301 89 89 1301 90 04 1301 99 09 1302 00 02 1302 00 69 1302 90 04 1305 00 02 1305 00 69 1305 49 1305 60 89 * 1305 70 02 1305 70 09 1305 89 82 1305 89 89 1305 90 04 1305 99 09 1308 00 02 1308 00 69 1308 49 1308 60 89 * 1308 89 82 1308 89 89 1308 90 04 1308 99 09 1309 14 04 1309 16 06 1309 19 09 1309 30 04 1309 30 46 1309 39 04 1309 60 89 * 1309 64 04 1309 64 14 * 1309 66 06 1309 66 16 * 1309 69 09 1309 70 02 1309 70 04 1309 70 06 * 1309 70 09 1309 70 24 * 1309 89 82 1309 89 89 1309 99 09 1311 1312 09 # 1312 62 #
Packing Page Order no. unit
10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 1 1 1 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 1 1 1 1 1 1 10 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 10 10 10 1 10 10
230 150 150 269 150 271 271 91 184 231 231 152 152 271 152 271 271 91 184 232 232 152 152 271 152 271 271 91 184 232 232 152 152 271 152 272 272 272 269 269 89 183 230 230 151 151 269 151 271 271 90 184 152 152 271 152 102 102 102 108 108 108 158 113 112 113 112 112 188 192 188 188 189 96 96 96 308 276 276
1312 65 # 1312 80 # 1312 81 # 1313 00 01 1313 00 02 1313 00 62 1313 00 69 1313 70 02 1313 70 04 1313 70 06 * 1313 70 09 1313 70 24 * 1314 00 01 1314 00 02 1314 00 04 1321 1322 09 # 1322 62 # 1322 65 # 1322 80 # 1322 81 # 1323 00 01 1323 00 02 1323 00 62 1323 00 69 1323 70 02 1323 70 04 1323 70 06 * 1323 70 09 1323 70 24 * 1324 00 01 1324 00 02 1324 00 04 1331 11 1331 19 1332 09 # 1332 62 # 1332 65 # 1332 80 # 1332 81 # 1333 00 01 1333 00 02 1333 00 69 1333 70 02 1333 70 04 1333 70 06 * 1333 70 09 1333 70 24 * 1334 00 01 1334 00 02 1334 00 04 1341 1342 09 # 1342 62 # 1342 65 # 1342 80 # 1342 81 # 1343 00 01 1343 00 02 1343 00 69 1343 70 02 1343 70 04 1343 70 06 * 1343 70 09 1343 70 24 * 1344 00 01 1344 00 02 1344 00 04 1345 00 01 1345 00 02 1345 00 69 1345 02 1345 09 1345 14 04 1345 16 06 1345 19 # 1345 19 09 1345 60 89 * 1345 62 #
Packing Page unit
10 1 1 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 1 2 2 2 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 10 10 2 2 2 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 2 2 2 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
276 276 276 236 236 237 236 188 192 188 188 188 236 236 236 308 276 276 276 276 276 236 236 237 236 188 192 188 188 188 236 236 236 298 298 276 276 276 276 276 236 236 236 188 192 188 188 188 236 236 236 308 276 276 276 276 276 236 236 236 188 192 188 188 188 236 236 236 247 247 247 71 71 127 127 281 127 166 281
Unverbindlic"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
PRODUCT SUMMARY Order no.
1345 65 # 1345 70 02 1345 70 04 1345 70 06 * 1345 70 09 1345 70 24 * 1345 89 82 1345 89 89 1345 90 04 1345 90 11 1352 09 # 1352 62 # 1352 65 # 1352 80 # 1352 81 # 1353 00 01 1353 00 02 1353 00 69 1353 70 02 1353 70 04 1353 70 06 * 1353 70 09 1353 70 24 * 1354 00 01 1354 00 02 1354 00 04 1363 00 01 1363 00 02 1363 00 62 1363 00 69 1363 70 02 1363 70 04 1363 70 06 * 1363 70 09 1363 70 24 * 1364 00 01 1364 00 02 1364 00 04 1366 1373 00 01 1373 00 02 1373 00 69 1373 70 02 1373 70 04 1373 70 06 * 1373 70 09 1373 70 24 * 1374 00 01 1374 00 02 1374 00 04 1381 01 1381 09 1381 21 1381 29 1381 31 1381 39 1381 41 1381 49 1381 51 1381 59 1381 65 * 1381 69 * 1383 00 01 1383 00 02 1383 00 69 1383 70 02 1383 70 04 1383 70 06 * 1383 70 09 1383 70 24 * 1384 00 01 1384 00 02 1384 00 04 1388 1391 1392 1393 00 01 1393 00 02 1393 00 69
Packing Page Order no. unit
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 10 10 2 2 2 2 10 10 10 10 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 2 2 2
281 210 210 210 210 210 127 127 247 247 276 276 276 276 276 236 236 236 188 192 188 188 188 236 236 236 236 236 237 236 188 192 188 188 188 236 236 236 308 236 236 236 188 192 188 188 188 236 236 236 298 298 298 298 298 298 298 298 298 298 297 297 236 236 236 188 192 188 188 188 236 236 236 308 308 308 236 236 236
1393 70 02 1393 70 04 1393 70 06 * 1393 70 09 1393 70 24 * 1394 1394 00 01 1394 00 02 1394 00 04 1403 02 1403 02 1403 02 1403 02 1403 09 1403 09 1403 09 1403 09 1403 14 04 1403 14 04 1403 16 06 1403 16 06 1403 19 09 1403 19 09 1403 19 09 1404 00 01 1404 00 02 1404 00 04 1404 00 10 1404 03 01 1404 03 02 1404 03 04 1405 00 01 1405 00 02 1405 00 69 1405 03 01 1405 03 02 1405 03 69 1405 29 # 1405 39 # 1405 62 # 1405 65 # 1405 70 02 1405 70 04 1405 70 06 * 1405 70 09 1405 70 24 * 1405 71 02 1405 71 04 1405 71 06 * 1405 71 09 1405 71 24 * 1405 72 # 1405 75 # 1407 1407 00 01 1407 00 02 1407 00 69 1407 01 1407 14 04 1407 16 06 1407 19 09 1407 60 89 * 1407 70 02 1407 70 04 1407 70 06 * 1407 70 09 1407 70 24 * 1407 89 82 1407 89 89 1408 00 01 1408 00 02 1408 00 04 1409 1409 00 01 1409 00 02 1409 00 69 1409 01 1409 14 04 1409 16 06
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
Packing Page unit
2 2 2 2 2 1 2 2 2 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
188 192 188 188 188 308 236 236 236 89 150 230 268 89 150 230 268 150 230 150 230 150 182 230 242 242 242 244 244 244 244 242 242 242 244 244 244 278 279 278 278 204 204 204 204 204 206 206 206 206 206 279 279 304 261 261 261 304 141 141 141 177 222 222 222 222 222 141 141 261 261 261 304 262 262 262 304 141 141
Order no.
1409 19 09 1409 60 89 * 1409 70 02 1409 70 04 1409 70 06 * 1409 70 09 1409 70 24 * 1409 89 82 1409 89 89 1410 00 01 1410 00 02 1410 00 04 1411 02 1411 02 1411 02 1411 02 1411 09 1411 09 1411 09 1411 09 1411 14 04 1411 14 04 1411 16 06 1411 16 06 1411 19 09 1411 19 09 1412 02 1412 02 1412 02 1412 02 1412 09 1412 09 1412 09 1412 09 1412 14 04 1412 14 04 1412 16 06 1412 16 06 1412 19 09 1412 19 09 1412 89 # 1413 02 1413 02 1413 02 1413 02 1413 09 1413 09 1413 09 1413 09 1413 14 04 1413 14 04 1413 16 06 1413 16 06 1413 19 09 1413 19 09 1414 00 10 1415 00 01 1415 00 02 1415 00 69 1415 02 01 1415 02 02 1415 02 69 1415 29 # 1415 62 # 1415 65 # 1415 70 02 1415 70 04 1415 70 06 * 1415 70 09 1415 70 24 * 1415 71 02 1415 71 04 1415 71 06 * 1415 71 09 1415 71 24 * 1416 00 01 1416 00 02 1416 00 04 1416 02 01
Packing Page Order no. unit
10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
141 177 223 223 223 223 223 141 141 262 262 262 88 150 229 268 88 150 229 268 150 229 150 229 150 182 81 139 220 259 81 139 220 259 139 220 139 220 139 176 289 84 142 224 263 84 142 224 263 142 224 142 224 142 179 244 243 243 243 243 243 243 278 278 278 205 205 205 205 205 205 205 205 205 205 243 243 243 243
1416 02 04 1417 00 01 1417 00 02 1417 00 69 1417 19 # 1417 62 # 1417 65 # 1417 71 02 1417 71 04 1417 71 06 * 1417 71 09 1417 71 24 * 1417 72 # 1418 00 01 1418 00 02 1418 00 04 1419 02 1419 02 1419 02 1419 02 1419 09 1419 09 1419 09 1419 09 1419 14 04 1419 14 04 1419 16 06 1419 16 06 1419 19 09 1419 19 09 1419 89 # 1420 02 1420 02 1420 02 1420 02 1420 09 1420 09 1420 09 1420 09 1420 14 04 1420 14 04 1420 16 06 1420 16 06 1420 19 09 1420 19 09 1421 02 # 1421 02 # 1421 02 # 1421 02 # 1421 09 # 1421 09 # 1421 09 # 1421 09 # 1421 19 09 # 1422 02 1422 02 1422 02 1422 02 1422 09 1422 09 1422 09 1422 09 1422 14 04 1422 14 04 1422 16 06 1422 16 06 1422 19 09 1422 19 09 1422 89 # 1423 02 1423 02 1423 02 1423 02 1423 09 1423 09 1423 09 1423 09 1423 14 04 1423 14 04
Packing Page unit
10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
243 243 243 243 279 279 279 205 205 205 205 205 279 243 243 243 85 144 225 264 85 144 225 264 144 225 144 225 144 179 291 84 143 224 263 84 143 224 263 143 224 143 224 143 179 84 143 225 264 84 143 225 264 143 84 143 225 264 84 143 225 264 143 225 143 225 143 179 291 85 143 225 264 85 143 225 264 143 225
621
PRODUCT SUMMARY Order no.
1423 16 06 1423 16 06 1423 19 09 1423 19 09 1424 00 01 1424 00 02 1424 00 04 1424 10 04 1425 00 01 1425 00 02 1425 00 69 1425 19 # 1425 62 # 1425 65 # 1425 71 02 1425 71 04 1425 71 06 * 1425 71 09 1425 71 24 * 1426 00 01 1426 00 02 1426 00 69 1426 19 # 1426 62 # 1426 65 # 1426 70 02 1426 70 04 1426 70 06 * 1426 70 09 1426 70 24 * 1427 02 1427 02 1427 02 1427 02 1427 09 1427 09 1427 09 1427 09 1427 14 04 1427 14 04 1427 16 06 1427 16 06 1427 19 09 1427 19 09 1428 19 # 1428 62 # 1428 65 # 1429 02 1429 02 1429 02 1429 02 1429 09 1429 09 1429 09 1429 09 1429 14 04 1429 14 04 1429 16 06 1429 16 06 1429 19 09 1429 19 09 1429 89 # 1430 02 1430 02 1430 02 1430 02 1430 09 1430 09 1430 09 1430 09 1430 14 04 1430 14 04 1430 16 06 1430 16 06 1430 19 09 1430 19 09 1430 89 # 1431 02 1431 02
622
Packing Page Order no. unit
10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
143 225 143 179 243 243 243 273 243 243 243 279 279 279 205 205 205 205 205 242 242 242 278 278 278 204 204 204 204 204 85 144 226 265 85 144 226 265 144 226 144 226 144 179 279 279 279 83 142 223 262 83 142 223 262 142 223 142 223 142 178 290 83 142 224 263 83 142 224 263 142 224 142 224 142 178 291 80 138
1431 02 1431 02 1431 04 1431 04 1431 09 1431 09 1431 09 1431 09 1431 14 04 1431 14 04 1431 16 06 1431 16 06 1431 19 09 * 1431 19 09 * 1432 02 1432 02 1432 02 1432 02 1432 04 1432 04 1432 07 1432 07 1432 07 1432 07 1432 07 1432 09 1432 09 1432 09 1432 09 1432 14 04 1432 14 04 1432 16 06 1432 16 06 1432 19 09 * 1432 19 09 * 1433 02 # 1433 02 # 1433 02 # 1433 02 # 1433 09 # 1433 09 # 1433 09 # 1433 09 # 1434 00 01 1434 00 02 1434 00 04 1434 00 10 1434 01 01 1434 01 02 1434 01 04 1434 03 01 1434 03 02 1434 03 04 1435 00 01 1435 00 02 1435 00 69 1435 01 01 1435 01 02 1435 01 69 1435 03 01 1435 03 02 1435 03 69 1435 19 # 1435 39 # 1435 62 # 1435 65 # 1435 70 02 1435 70 04 1435 70 06 * 1435 70 09 1435 70 24 * 1435 71 02 1435 71 04 1435 71 06 * 1435 71 09 1435 71 24 * 1435 72 # 1435 72 02 1435 72 04
Packing Page unit
10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
220 258 220 258 80 138 220 258 138 220 138 220 138 175 81 138 220 259 220 259 81 138 175 220 259 81 138 220 259 138 220 138 220 138 175 88 149 229 268 88 149 229 268 244 244 244 244 244 244 244 244 244 244 244 244 244 244 244 244 244 244 244 279 279 279 279 206 206 206 206 206 206 206 206 206 206 279 206 206
Order no.
1435 72 06 * 1435 72 09 1435 72 24 * 1435 75 # 1436 00 01 1436 00 02 1436 00 04 1436 10 04 1437 00 01 1437 00 02 1437 00 69 1437 70 02 1437 70 04 * 1437 70 06 * 1437 70 09 1437 70 24 * 1439 02 1439 02 1439 02 1439 02 1439 09 1439 09 1439 09 1439 09 1439 14 04 1439 14 04 1439 16 06 1439 16 06 1439 19 09 1439 19 09 1439 89 # 1441 02 1441 02 1441 02 1441 02 1441 04 1441 04 1441 09 1441 09 1441 09 1441 09 1441 14 04 * 1441 14 04 * 1441 16 06 * 1441 16 06 * 1441 19 09 * 1441 19 09 * 1446 01 1446 02 1446 02 1446 02 1446 02 1446 04 1446 04 1446 09 1446 09 1446 09 1446 09 1446 11 1446 14 04 1446 14 04 1446 16 06 1446 16 06 1446 19 09 1446 19 09 1446 62 # 1446 65 # 1446 89 # 1457 01 1457 02 1457 02 1457 02 1457 02 1457 04 1457 04 1457 09 1457 09 1457 09 1457 09
Packing Page Order no. unit
10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
206 206 206 279 242 242 242 273 244 244 244 206 206 206 206 206 81 139 221 260 81 139 221 260 139 221 139 221 139 176 289 87 147 227 266 227 266 87 147 227 266 147 227 147 227 147 181 263 83 142 224 263 224 263 83 142 224 263 263 142 224 142 224 142 178 291 291 291 261 82 140 221 261 221 261 82 140 221 261
1457 11 1457 14 04 * 1457 14 04 * 1457 16 06 * 1457 16 06 * 1457 19 09 * 1457 19 09 * 1457 62 # 1457 65 # 1457 89 # 1458 01 1458 02 1458 02 1458 02 1458 02 1458 04 1458 04 1458 09 1458 09 1458 09 1458 09 1458 11 1458 14 04 1458 14 04 1458 16 06 1458 16 06 1458 19 09 1458 19 09 1458 62 # 1458 65 # 1458 89 # 1461 01 1461 02 1461 02 1461 02 1461 02 1461 04 1461 04 1461 09 1461 09 1461 09 1461 09 1461 11 1461 14 04 1461 14 04 1461 16 06 1461 16 06 1461 19 09 * 1461 19 09 * 1462 02 1462 02 1462 02 1462 02 1462 09 1462 09 1462 09 1462 09 1462 14 04 1462 14 04 1462 16 06 1462 16 06 1462 19 09 * 1462 19 09 * 1463 01 1463 02 1463 02 1463 02 1463 02 1463 04 1463 04 1463 09 1463 09 1463 09 1463 09 1463 11 1463 14 04 1463 14 04 1463 16 06 1463 16 06
Packing Page unit
10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
261 140 221 140 221 140 177 290 290 290 261 82 140 222 261 222 261 82 140 222 261 261 140 222 140 222 140 177 290 290 290 265 85 144 226 265 226 265 85 144 226 265 265 144 226 144 226 144 180 86 146 227 266 86 146 227 266 146 227 146 227 146 180 265 86 145 226 265 226 265 86 145 226 265 265 145 226 145 226
Unverbindlic"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
PRODUCT SUMMARY Order no.
1463 19 09 * 1463 19 09 * 1464 02 1464 02 1464 02 1464 02 1464 09 1464 09 1464 09 1464 09 1464 14 04 1464 14 04 1464 16 06 1464 16 06 1464 19 09 * 1464 19 09 * 1465 00 01 1465 00 02 1465 00 69 1465 70 02 1465 70 04 1465 70 06 * 1465 70 09 1465 70 24 * 1465 90 04 1465 90 11 1467 01 1467 02 1467 02 1467 02 1467 02 1467 04 1467 04 1467 09 1467 09 1467 09 1467 09 1467 11 1467 14 04 1467 14 04 1467 16 06 1467 16 06 1467 19 09 1467 19 09 1467 62 # 1467 65 # 1467 89 # 1468 01 1468 02 1468 02 1468 02 1468 02 1468 04 1468 04 1468 09 1468 09 1468 09 1468 09 1468 11 1468 14 04 1468 14 04 1468 16 06 1468 16 06 1468 19 09 1468 19 09 1468 62 # 1468 65 # 1468 89 # 1469 01 1469 02 1469 02 1469 02 1469 02 1469 04 1469 04 1469 09 1469 09 1469 09 1469 09
Packing Page Order no. unit
10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
145 180 86 146 227 266 86 146 227 266 146 227 146 227 146 180 244 244 244 206 206 206 206 206 244 244 263 84 142 224 263 224 263 84 142 224 263 263 142 224 142 224 142 178 291 291 291 262 83 141 222 262 222 262 83 141 222 262 262 141 222 141 222 141 177 290 290 290 262 83 141 223 262 223 262 83 141 223 262
1469 11 1469 14 04 1469 14 04 1469 16 06 1469 16 06 1469 19 09 1469 19 09 1469 62 # 1469 65 # 1469 89 # 1470 01 1470 02 1470 02 1470 02 1470 02 1470 04 1470 04 1470 09 1470 09 1470 09 1470 09 1470 11 1470 14 04 1470 14 04 1470 16 06 1470 16 06 1470 19 09 1470 19 09 1472 02 1472 02 1472 02 1472 02 1472 09 1472 09 1472 09 1472 09 1472 14 04 1472 14 04 1472 16 06 1472 16 06 1472 19 09 * 1472 19 09 * 1474 02 1474 02 1474 02 1474 02 1474 04 1474 04 1474 09 1474 09 1474 09 1474 09 1474 14 04 1474 14 04 1474 16 06 1474 16 06 1474 19 09 1474 19 09 1474 62 # 1474 65 # 1474 89 # 1476 02 # 1476 02 # 1476 02 # 1476 02 # 1476 09 # 1476 09 # 1476 09 # 1476 09 # 1477 01 # 1477 02 # 1477 02 # 1477 02 # 1477 02 # 1477 04 # 1477 04 # 1477 09 # 1477 09 # 1477 09 #
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
Packing Page unit
10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
262 141 223 141 223 141 178 290 290 290 268 89 150 229 268 229 268 89 150 229 268 268 150 229 150 229 150 182 85 144 226 265 85 144 226 265 144 226 144 226 144 180 89 150 230 269 230 269 89 150 230 269 150 230 150 230 150 182 292 292 292 89 151 230 269 89 151 230 269 261 82 140 222 261 222 261 82 140 222
Order no.
1477 09 # 1477 11 # 1477 14 04 # 1477 14 04 # 1477 16 06 # 1477 16 06 # 1477 19 09 # 1477 19 09 # 1478 01 1478 02 1478 02 1478 02 1478 02 1478 04 1478 04 1478 09 1478 09 1478 09 1478 09 1478 11 1478 14 04 1478 14 04 1478 16 06 1478 16 06 1478 19 09 1478 19 09 1478 62 # 1478 65 # 1478 89 # 1480 01 1480 02 1480 02 1480 02 1480 02 1480 04 1480 04 1480 09 1480 09 1480 09 1480 09 1480 11 1480 14 04 1480 14 04 1480 16 06 1480 16 06 1480 19 09 * 1480 19 09 * 1483 01 1483 02 1483 02 1483 02 1483 02 1483 04 1483 04 1483 09 1483 09 1483 09 1483 09 1483 11 1483 14 04 1483 14 04 1483 16 06 1483 16 06 1483 19 09 1483 19 09 1484 01 1484 02 1484 02 1484 02 1484 02 1484 04 1484 04 1484 09 1484 09 1484 09 1484 09 1484 11 1484 14 04 1484 14 04
Packing Page Order no. unit
10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
261 261 140 222 140 222 140 177 263 84 142 224 263 224 263 84 142 224 263 263 142 224 142 224 142 178 291 291 291 268 88 149 229 268 229 268 88 149 229 268 268 149 229 149 229 149 182 260 81 139 221 260 221 260 81 139 221 260 260 139 221 139 221 139 176 260 81 139 221 260 221 260 81 139 221 260 260 139 221
1484 16 06 1484 16 06 1484 19 09 1484 19 09 1487 00 1488 00 62 1488 71 15 1489 02 # 1489 02 # 1489 02 # 1489 02 # 1489 09 # 1489 09 # 1489 09 # 1489 09 # 1492 02 1492 02 1492 02 1492 02 1492 09 1492 09 1492 09 1492 09 1492 14 04 1492 14 04 1492 16 06 1492 16 06 1492 19 09 * 1492 19 09 * 1493 01 1493 02 1493 02 1493 02 1493 04 1493 04 1493 09 1493 09 1493 09 1493 11 1493 14 04 1493 14 04 1493 16 06 1493 16 06 1493 19 09 1493 19 09 1494 02 1494 02 1494 02 1494 02 1494 09 1494 09 1494 09 1494 09 1494 14 04 1494 14 04 1494 16 06 1494 16 06 1494 19 09 1494 19 09 1495 02 1495 02 1495 02 1495 02 1495 09 1495 09 1495 09 1495 09 1495 14 04 1495 14 04 1495 16 06 1495 16 06 1495 19 09 1495 19 09 1496 70 02 1496 70 04 1496 70 06 * 1496 70 09 1496 70 24 * 1498 02
Packing Page unit
10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
139 221 139 176 243 243 205 84 143 225 264 84 143 225 264 88 148 228 267 88 148 228 267 148 228 148 228 148 182 246 126 208 246 208 246 126 208 246 246 126 208 126 208 126 166 87 148 228 267 87 148 228 267 148 228 148 228 148 181 88 148 228 267 88 148 228 267 148 228 148 228 148 181 205 205 205 205 205 87
623
PRODUCT SUMMARY Order no.
1498 02 1498 02 1498 02 1498 09 1498 09 1498 09 1498 09 1498 14 04 1498 14 04 1498 16 06 1498 16 06 1498 19 09 * 1498 19 09 * 1499 00 02 * 1499 00 04 * 1499 00 69 * 1499 01 01 * 1499 14 04 1499 16 06 1499 19 09 1499 42 1499 49 1499 89 82 1499 89 89 1504 00 11 1504 00 12 1504 00 79 1504 09 # 1504 62 # 1504 65 # 1504 71 02 1504 71 04 1504 71 06 * 1504 71 09 1504 71 24 * 1504 90 14 1504 90 21 1505 00 11 1505 00 12 1505 00 79 1505 09 # 1505 62 # 1505 65 # 1505 70 02 1505 70 04 1505 70 06 * 1505 70 09 1505 70 24 * 1505 90 14 1505 90 21 1506 12 1506 14 04 1506 16 06 1506 19 1506 19 09 1506 60 89 * 1506 89 82 1506 89 89 1507 12 1507 14 04 1507 16 06 1507 19 1507 19 09 1507 60 89 * 1507 89 82 1507 89 89 1511 14 04 1511 16 06 1511 19 09 1512 14 04 1512 16 06 1512 19 09 1513 14 04 1513 16 06 1513 19 09 1516 14 04 1516 16 06 1516 19 09 1521 14 04
624
Packing Page Order no. unit
10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
147 227 266 87 147 227 266 147 227 147 227 147 181 259 259 259 259 139 139 139 81 81 139 139 246 246 246 280 280 280 208 208 208 208 208 246 246 246 246 246 280 280 280 208 208 208 208 208 246 246 70 126 126 70 126 166 126 126 70 126 126 70 126 166 126 126 145 145 145 145 145 145 146 146 146 147 147 147 149
1521 16 06 1521 19 09 1522 14 04 1522 16 06 1522 19 09 1523 14 04 1523 16 06 1523 19 09 1533 14 04 1533 16 06 1533 19 09 1537 02 1537 09 1538 14 04 1538 16 06 1538 19 09 1538 89 82 1538 89 89 1570 02 1570 09 1570 14 04 1570 16 06 1570 19 09 1571 02 1571 09 1571 14 04 1571 16 06 1571 19 09 1572 02 1572 09 1572 14 04 1572 16 06 1572 19 09 1573 02 1573 09 1573 14 04 1573 16 06 1573 19 09 1577 02 1577 09 1577 14 04 1577 16 06 1577 19 09 1600 1600 02 1601 1605 10 * 1605 14 * 1609 1610 03 1610 13 1620 02 1620 09 1620 14 04 1620 14 14 1620 16 06 1620 16 16 1620 19 09 1620 19 19 1620 22 1620 29 1620 60 49 * 1620 60 59 * 1620 60 69 * 1620 60 79 * 1620 60 89 * 1620 89 12 1620 89 19 1620 89 82 1620 89 89 1621 12 1621 14 04 1621 16 06 1621 19 1621 19 02 1621 19 09 1621 60 69 * 1621 60 79 * 1621 60 89 *
Packing Page unit
10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 100 10 10 10 100 100 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
149 149 147 147 147 149 149 149 144 144 144 87 87 147 147 147 147 147 68 68 124 124 124 68 68 124 124 124 68 68 124 124 124 68 68 124 124 124 68 68 124 124 124 16 16 19 16 16 30 19 19 67 67 122 124 122 124 122 124 68 68 163 163 163 164 162 124 124 122 122 67 122 122 67 123 122 163 163 163
Order no.
1621 89 02 1621 89 82 1621 89 89 1622 02 1622 09 1622 14 04 1622 16 06 1622 19 09 1622 60 89 * 1622 89 82 1622 89 89 1623 02 1623 09 1623 14 04 1623 16 06 1623 19 09 1623 60 89 * 1623 89 82 1623 89 89 1624 02 1624 09 1624 14 04 1624 16 06 1624 19 09 1624 60 89 * 1624 89 82 1624 89 89 1625 02 1625 09 1625 14 04 1625 16 06 1625 19 09 1625 60 89 * 1625 89 82 1625 89 89 1626 02 1626 09 1626 14 04 1626 16 06 1626 19 09 1626 60 89 * 1626 89 82 1626 89 89 1627 02 1627 09 1627 14 04 1627 16 06 1627 19 09 1627 60 89 * 1627 89 82 1627 89 89 1628 02 1628 09 1628 14 04 1628 16 06 1628 19 09 1628 60 79 * 1628 60 89 * 1628 89 82 1628 89 89 1632 02 1632 09 1632 14 04 1632 16 06 1632 19 09 1632 60 89 * 1632 89 82 1632 89 89 1633 02 1633 09 1633 14 04 1633 16 06 1633 19 09 1633 60 89 * 1633 89 82 1633 89 89 1634 00 01 1634 00 02 1634 00 69
Packing Page Order no. unit
10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
123 122 122 67 67 123 123 123 164 123 123 68 68 123 123 123 164 123 123 67 67 123 123 123 164 123 123 68 68 124 124 124 164 124 124 67 67 122 122 122 162 122 122 68 68 123 123 123 164 123 123 67 67 123 123 123 163 163 123 123 71 71 128 128 128 167 128 128 71 71 128 128 128 167 128 128 247 247 247
1634 01 01 1634 01 02 1634 01 04 1634 19 # 1634 62 # 1634 65 # 1634 71 02 1634 71 04 1634 71 06 * 1634 71 09 1634 71 24 * 1635 00 01 1635 00 02 1635 00 69 1635 01 01 1635 01 02 1635 01 04 1635 19 # 1635 62 # 1635 65 # 1635 71 02 1635 71 04 1635 71 06 * 1635 71 09 1635 71 24 * 1640 02 1640 09 1640 14 04 1640 16 06 1640 19 09 1640 60 89 * 1640 89 82 1640 89 89 1641 00 01 1641 00 02 1641 00 69 1641 09 # 1641 62 # 1641 65 # 1641 71 02 1641 71 04 1641 71 06 * 1641 71 09 1641 71 24 * 1641 90 04 1641 90 11 1644 02 1644 09 1644 14 04 1644 16 06 1644 19 09 1644 29 # 1644 60 89 * 1644 62 # 1644 65 # 1644 89 82 1644 89 89 1647 * 1647 01 * 1647 65 * 1647 65 * 1647 69 * 1647 69 * 1651 19 49 1651 19 59 1651 19 69 1651 49 1651 59 1651 60 49 * 1651 60 59 * 1651 60 69 * 1651 69 1651 71 02 1651 71 09 1651 72 02 1651 72 09 1651 73 02 1651 73 09 1661 19 49
Packing Page unit
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 1 1 1 1 1 1 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
247 247 247 281 281 281 210 210 210 210 210 247 247 247 247 247 247 281 281 281 210 210 210 210 210 69 69 125 125 125 165 125 125 244 244 244 279 279 279 207 207 207 207 207 244 244 68 68 124 124 124 279 164 279 279 124 124 301 301 297 301 297 301 124 125 125 69 69 164 165 165 69 206 206 207 207 207 207 124
Unverbindlic"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
PRODUCT SUMMARY Order no.
1661 49 1661 60 49 * 1661 71 02 1661 71 09 1665 14 04 1665 16 06 1665 19 09 1665 60 89 * 1665 89 82 1665 89 89 1670 00 01 1670 00 02 1670 00 69 1670 02 1670 09 1670 14 04 1670 16 06 1670 19 # 1670 19 09 1670 60 89 * 1670 62 # 1670 65 # 1670 71 02 1670 71 04 1670 71 06 1670 71 09 1670 71 24 1670 89 82 1670 89 89 1670 90 04 1670 90 11 1671 00 01 1671 00 02 1671 00 69 1671 02 1671 09 1671 14 04 1671 16 06 1671 19 # 1671 19 09 1671 60 89 * 1671 62 # 1671 65 # 1671 71 02 1671 71 04 1671 71 06 1671 71 09 1671 71 24 1671 89 82 1671 89 89 1671 90 04 1671 90 11 1672 00 01 1672 00 02 1672 00 69 1672 02 1672 09 1672 14 04 1672 16 06 1672 19 # 1672 19 09 1672 60 89 * 1672 62 # 1672 65 # 1672 71 02 1672 71 04 1672 71 06 1672 71 09 1672 71 24 1672 89 82 1672 89 89 1672 90 04 1672 90 11 1674 14 04 1674 16 06 1674 19 09 1674 60 89 * 1674 89 82 1674 89 89
Packing Page Order no. unit
10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 10 10 10 10 10 10
69 164 206 206 123 123 123 164 123 123 252 252 252 76 76 133 133 285 133 172 285 285 215 215 215 215 215 133 133 252 252 252 252 252 75 75 133 133 285 133 172 285 285 215 215 215 215 215 133 133 252 252 252 252 252 76 76 133 133 285 133 173 285 285 215 215 215 215 215 133 133 252 252 128 128 128 167 128 128
1675 1675 04 1676 * 1676 01 * 1676 02 * 1676 03 * 1678 * 1678 01 * 1678 02 * 1678 03 * 1678 04 * 1679 * 1679 01 * 1679 02 * 1679 03 * 1679 04 * 1680 * 1681 05 1681 07 1681 09 1682 05 1682 07 1682 09 1683 05 1683 07 1683 09 1684 05 1684 07 1684 09 1685 78 1691 05 1691 07 1691 09 1692 05 1692 07 1692 09 1693 05 1693 07 1693 09 1694 05 1694 07 1694 09 1696 14 04 1696 16 06 1696 19 09 1696 60 79 * 1696 60 89 * 1696 89 82 1696 89 89 1701 08 1701 10 1701 11 1703 09 # 1703 62 # 1703 65 # 1704 09 # 1704 62 # 1704 65 # 1705 01 04 1705 09 # 1705 62 # 1705 65 # 1733 14 04 1733 16 06 1733 19 09 1735 00 01 1735 00 02 1735 00 69 1735 02 1735 09 1735 14 04 1735 16 06 1735 19 09 1735 60 89 * 1735 70 02 1735 70 04 1735 70 06 * 1735 70 09 1735 70 24 *
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
Packing Page unit
10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 1 1 1 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
16 16 15 15 15 15 19 19 19 19 19 20 20 20 20 20 16 326 326 326 326 326 326 327 327 327 327 327 327 319 326 326 326 326 326 326 327 327 327 327 327 327 123 123 123 163 163 123 123 335 335 333 289 289 289 289 289 289 268 292 292 292 127 127 127 247 247 247 71 71 128 128 128 167 210 210 210 210 210
Order no.
1735 89 82 1735 89 89 1735 90 04 1735 90 11 1736 00 01 1736 00 02 1736 00 69 1736 02 1736 09 1736 14 04 1736 16 06 1736 19 09 1736 29 # 1736 62 # 1736 65 # 1736 71 02 1736 71 04 1736 71 06 * 1736 71 09 1736 71 24 * 1736 89 82 1736 89 89 1736 90 04 1736 90 11 1738 00 01 1738 00 02 1738 00 69 1738 02 1738 09 1738 14 04 1738 16 06 1738 19 09 1738 29 # 1738 62 # 1738 65 # 1738 71 02 1738 71 04 1738 71 06 * 1738 71 09 1738 71 24 * 1738 89 82 1738 89 89 1738 90 04 1738 90 11 1754 19 # 1754 62 # 1754 65 # 1755 19 # 1755 62 # 1755 65 # 1756 00 11 1756 00 12 1756 00 79 1756 12 1756 14 04 1756 16 06 1756 19 09 1756 29 # 1756 49 1756 60 89 * 1756 70 02 1756 70 04 1756 70 06 * 1756 70 09 1756 70 24 * 1756 72 # 1756 75 # 1756 89 82 1756 89 89 1756 90 12 1756 90 14 1756 90 21 1757 00 01 1757 00 02 1757 00 11 1757 00 12 1757 00 69 1757 00 79 1757 02
Packing Page Order no. unit
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
128 128 247 247 248 248 248 72 72 128 128 128 281 281 281 210 210 210 210 210 128 128 248 248 248 248 248 72 72 129 129 129 281 281 281 211 211 211 211 211 129 129 248 248 288 288 288 288 288 288 255 255 255 78 135 135 135 287 78 174 217 217 217 217 217 287 287 135 135 255 255 255 256 256 255 255 256 255 79
1757 09 1757 12 1757 14 04 1757 16 06 1757 19 # 1757 19 09 1757 29 # 1757 49 1757 60 89 * 1757 62 # 1757 65 # 1757 70 02 1757 70 04 1757 70 06 * 1757 70 09 1757 70 24 * 1757 72 # 1757 75 # 1757 89 82 1757 89 89 1757 90 04 1757 90 11 1757 90 12 1757 90 14 1757 90 21 1758 00 11 1758 00 11 1758 00 12 1758 00 12 1758 00 79 1758 00 79 1758 12 1758 12 1758 14 04 1758 14 04 1758 16 06 1758 16 06 1758 19 09 1758 19 09 1758 29 # 1758 29 # 1758 49 1758 49 1758 60 89 * 1758 60 89 * 1758 70 02 1758 70 02 1758 70 04 1758 70 04 1758 70 06 1758 70 06 1758 70 09 1758 70 09 1758 70 24 1758 70 24 1758 72 # 1758 72 # 1758 75 # 1758 75 # 1758 89 82 1758 89 82 1758 89 89 1758 89 89 1758 90 12 1758 90 12 1758 90 14 1758 90 14 1758 90 21 1758 90 21 1759 00 01 1759 00 01 1759 00 02 1759 00 02 1759 00 11 1759 00 11 1759 00 12 1759 00 12 1759 00 69 1759 00 69
Packing Page unit
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
79 78 136 136 287 136 287 78 174 287 287 218 218 218 218 218 287 287 136 136 256 256 255 255 255 254 366 254 366 254 366 77 353 135 356 135 356 135 356 286 370 77 353 173 361 217 363 217 363 217 363 217 363 217 363 286 370 286 370 135 356 135 356 254 366 254 366 254 366 255 366 255 366 255 366 255 366 255 366
625
PRODUCT SUMMARY Order no.
1759 00 79 1759 00 79 1759 02 1759 02 1759 09 1759 09 1759 12 1759 12 1759 14 04 1759 14 04 1759 16 06 1759 16 06 1759 19 # 1759 19 # 1759 19 09 1759 19 09 1759 29 # 1759 29 # 1759 49 1759 49 1759 60 89 * 1759 60 89 * 1759 62 # 1759 62 # 1759 65 # 1759 65 # 1759 70 02 1759 70 02 1759 70 04 1759 70 04 1759 70 06 1759 70 06 1759 70 09 1759 70 09 1759 70 24 1759 70 24 1759 72 # 1759 72 # 1759 75 # 1759 75 # 1759 89 82 1759 89 82 1759 89 89 1759 89 89 1759 90 04 1759 90 04 1759 90 11 1759 90 11 1759 90 12 1759 90 12 1759 90 14 1759 90 14 1759 90 21 1759 90 21 1760 00 01 1760 00 01 1760 00 02 1760 00 02 1760 00 04 1760 00 04 1760 00 11 1760 00 11 1760 00 12 1760 00 12 1760 00 69 1760 00 69 1760 02 1760 02 1760 09 1760 09 1760 14 04 1760 14 04 1760 16 06 1760 16 06 1760 19 # 1760 19 # 1760 19 09 1760 19 09 1760 60 89 *
626
Packing Page Order no. unit
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
255 366 78 353 78 353 78 353 135 356 135 356 287 370 135 356 286 370 78 353 174 361 287 370 287 370 217 363 217 363 217 363 217 363 217 363 286 370 286 370 135 356 135 356 255 366 255 366 255 366 255 366 255 366 249 366 249 366 249 366 249 366 249 366 249 366 73 353 73 353 130 356 130 356 282 370 130 356 168
1760 60 89 * 1760 62 # 1760 62 # 1760 65 # 1760 65 # 1760 70 02 1760 70 02 1760 70 04 1760 70 04 1760 70 06 1760 70 06 1760 70 09 1760 70 09 1760 70 24 1760 70 24 1760 89 82 1760 89 82 1760 89 89 1760 89 89 1761 00 01 1761 00 02 1761 00 04 1761 00 11 1761 00 12 1761 00 69 1761 02 1761 09 1761 14 04 1761 16 06 1761 19 # 1761 19 09 1761 60 89 * 1761 62 # 1761 65 # 1761 70 02 1761 70 04 1761 70 06 * 1761 70 09 1761 70 24 * 1761 89 82 1761 89 89 1762 00 01 1762 00 02 1762 00 69 1762 02 1762 09 1762 14 04 1762 16 06 1762 19 09 1762 29 # 1762 62 # 1762 65 # 1762 71 02 1762 71 04 1762 71 06 * 1762 71 09 1762 71 24 * 1762 89 82 1762 89 89 1762 90 04 1762 90 11 1765 00 01 1765 00 02 1765 00 04 1765 00 11 1765 00 12 1765 00 69 1765 02 * 1765 09 * 1765 14 04 * 1765 16 06 * 1765 19 09 * 1765 29 # 1765 60 89 * 1765 62 # 1765 65 # 1765 70 02 * 1765 70 04 * 1765 70 06 *
Packing Page unit
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
361 282 370 282 370 212 363 212 363 212 363 212 363 212 363 130 356 130 356 249 249 249 249 249 249 73 73 129 129 282 129 167 282 282 211 211 211 211 211 129 129 256 256 256 79 79 136 136 136 288 288 288 218 218 218 218 218 136 136 256 256 248 248 248 248 248 248 73 73 129 129 129 281 167 281 281 211 211 211
Order no.
1765 70 09 * 1765 70 24 * 1765 89 82 * 1765 89 89 * 1770 00 11 1770 00 12 1770 00 79 1770 12 1770 14 04 1770 16 06 1770 19 09 1770 29 # 1770 49 1770 60 89 * 1770 70 02 1770 70 04 1770 70 06 * 1770 70 09 1770 70 24 * 1770 72 # 1770 75 # 1770 89 82 1770 89 89 1770 90 12 1770 90 14 1770 90 21 1771 00 01 1771 00 02 1771 00 11 1771 00 12 1771 00 69 1771 00 79 1771 02 1771 09 1771 12 1771 14 04 1771 16 06 1771 19 # 1771 19 09 1771 29 # 1771 49 1771 60 89 * 1771 62 # 1771 65 # 1771 70 02 1771 70 04 1771 70 06 * 1771 70 09 1771 70 24 * 1771 72 # 1771 75 # 1771 89 82 1771 89 89 1771 90 04 1771 90 11 1771 90 12 1771 90 14 1771 90 21 1774 00 01 1774 00 02 1774 00 69 1774 02 1774 09 1774 14 04 1774 16 06 1774 19 09 1774 60 89 * 1774 70 02 1774 70 04 1774 70 06 * 1774 70 09 1774 70 24 * 1774 89 82 1774 89 89 1774 90 04 1774 90 11 1775 00 01 1775 00 02 1775 00 69
Packing Page Order no. unit
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
211 211 129 129 253 253 253 77 134 134 134 285 77 173 216 216 216 216 216 285 285 134 134 253 253 253 254 254 254 254 254 254 77 77 77 135 135 286 135 286 77 173 286 286 217 217 217 217 217 286 286 135 135 254 254 254 254 254 256 256 256 79 79 136 136 136 174 218 218 218 218 218 136 136 256 256 257 257 257
1775 02 1775 09 1775 14 04 1775 16 06 1775 19 09 1775 60 89 * 1775 70 02 1775 70 04 1775 70 06 * 1775 70 09 1775 70 24 * 1775 89 82 1775 89 89 1775 90 04 1775 90 11 1783 00 01 1783 00 02 1783 00 69 1783 02 1783 09 1783 14 04 1783 16 06 1783 19 09 1783 29 # 1783 60 89 * 1783 61 89 * 1783 62 # 1783 65 # 1783 70 02 1783 70 04 1783 70 06 * 1783 70 09 1783 70 24 * 1783 89 82 1783 89 89 1783 90 04 1783 90 11 1784 00 01 1784 00 02 1784 00 69 1784 02 1784 09 1784 14 04 1784 16 06 1784 19 09 1784 29 # 1784 60 89 * 1784 61 89 * 1784 62 # 1784 65 # 1784 70 02 1784 70 04 1784 70 06 * 1784 70 09 1784 70 24 * 1784 89 82 1784 89 89 1784 90 04 1784 90 11 1786 00 01 1786 00 02 1786 00 69 1786 02 1786 09 1786 14 04 1786 16 06 1786 19 09 1786 29 # 1786 60 89 * 1786 61 89 * 1786 62 # 1786 65 # 1786 70 02 1786 70 04 1786 70 06 * 1786 70 09 1786 70 24 * 1786 89 82 1786 89 89
Packing Page unit
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
80 80 137 137 137 175 219 219 219 219 219 137 137 257 257 249 249 249 73 73 130 130 130 282 168 170 282 282 212 212 212 212 212 130 130 249 249 250 250 250 74 74 131 131 131 283 169 170 283 283 213 213 213 213 213 131 131 250 250 250 250 250 74 74 131 131 131 283 168 171 283 283 213 213 213 213 213 131 131
Unverbindlic"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
PRODUCT SUMMARY Order no.
1786 90 04 1786 90 11 1787 00 01 1787 00 02 1787 00 69 1787 02 1787 09 1787 14 04 1787 16 06 1787 19 09 1787 29 # 1787 60 89 * 1787 61 89 * 1787 62 # 1787 65 # 1787 70 02 1787 70 04 1787 70 06 * 1787 70 09 1787 70 24 * 1787 89 82 1787 89 89 1787 90 04 1787 90 11 1800 1809 1811 10 1811 12 1811 13 1812 1812 01 1813 05 1813 09 1817 05 1817 09 1818 1818 01 1823 05 1823 09 1824 1829 1833 1834 1835 1839 1840 1841 1842 1847 1848 1854 01 1857 1857 1857 1861 1861 1866 00 01 1867 00 01 1868 00 01 1870 1885 1895 10 1895 12 1895 13 1905 00 02 1905 00 02 1905 00 02 1905 00 69 1905 00 69 1905 00 69 1905 00 69 1905 02 1905 69 1905 70 04 1905 70 04 1913 1964 00 01 1965 02 03 1965 02 08
Packing Page Order no. unit
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 10 50 10 10 10 1 1 10 10 10 10 1 1 10 10 50 5 5 1 1 1 10 1 1 10 10 1 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 1 25 1 1 1 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 50 1 1 1
250 250 251 251 251 75 75 132 132 132 284 169 171 284 284 214 214 214 214 214 132 132 251 251 21 308 308 308 308 301 301 298 298 298 298 30 30 298 298 308 26 26 29 29 29 29 29 29 31 31 26 308 329 352 18 301 242 242 242 329 304 308 308 308 137 219 258 137 175 219 258 80 80 219 258 31 314 314 314
1966 02 15 1980 1980 1984 1984 1985 * 1989 1989 1990 1992 * 1992 * 1993 * 1993 * 1994 * 1994 * 1995 # 1996 # 1997 # 1998 # 1999 # 2026 00 01 2026 00 02 2026 00 69 2026 02 * 2026 09 * 2026 14 04 * 2026 16 06 * 2026 19 # 2026 19 09 * 2026 60 89 * 2026 62 # 2026 65 # 2026 71 02 * 2026 71 04 * 2026 71 06 * 2026 71 09 * 2026 71 24 * 2026 89 82 * 2026 89 89 * 2026 90 04 2026 90 11 2030 00 01 2030 00 02 2030 00 69 2030 02 * 2030 09 * 2030 14 04 * 2030 16 06 * 2030 19 # 2030 19 09 * 2030 60 89 * 2030 62 # 2030 65 # 2030 71 02 * 2030 71 04 * 2030 71 06 * 2030 71 09 * 2030 71 24 * 2030 89 82 * 2030 89 89 * 2030 90 04 2030 90 11 2031 00 01 2031 00 02 2031 00 69 2031 02 * 2031 09 * 2031 14 04 * 2031 16 06 * 2031 19 # 2031 19 09 * 2031 60 89 * 2031 62 # 2031 65 # 2031 71 02 * 2031 71 04 * 2031 71 06 * 2031 71 09 * 2031 71 24 *
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
Packing Page unit
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 10 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
314 26 476 26 476 26 21 476 31 21 476 22 476 21 476 29 29 29 30 30 252 252 252 76 76 133 133 285 133 172 285 285 215 215 215 215 215 133 133 252 252 251 251 251 75 75 132 132 284 132 172 284 284 214 214 214 214 214 132 132 251 251 251 251 251 75 75 132 132 284 132 172 284 284 214 214 214 214 214
Order no.
2031 89 82 * 2031 89 89 * 2031 90 04 2031 90 11 2034 00 01 2034 00 02 2034 00 69 2034 02 * 2034 09 * 2034 14 04 * 2034 16 06 * 2034 19 # 2034 19 09 * 2034 60 89 * 2034 62 # 2034 65 # 2034 71 02 * 2034 71 04 * 2034 71 06 * 2034 71 09 * 2034 71 24 * 2034 89 82 * 2034 89 89 * 2034 90 04 2034 90 11 2040 2041 2043 00 01 2043 00 02 2043 00 69 2043 02 * 2043 09 * 2043 14 04 * 2043 16 06 * 2043 19 09 * 2043 71 02 * 2043 71 04 * 2043 71 06 * 2043 71 09 * 2043 71 24 * 2043 89 82 * 2043 89 89 * 2043 90 04 2043 90 11 2700 2700 01 2721 00 02 2721 00 69 2721 02 2721 09 2721 10 06 2721 10 09 2721 14 04 # 2721 16 06 # 2721 19 09 # 2721 70 04 2721 70 06 2721 70 09 2721 70 24 2721 90 04 2721 90 11 2722 00 02 2722 00 69 2722 02 2722 09 2722 10 06 2722 10 09 2722 14 04 # 2722 16 06 # 2722 19 09 # 2722 70 04 2722 70 06 2722 70 09 2722 70 24 2722 90 04 2722 90 11 2723 10 06 2723 10 09 2723 70 04
Packing Page Order no. unit
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
132 132 251 251 252 252 252 76 76 133 133 285 133 172 285 285 215 215 215 215 215 133 133 252 252 16 16 253 253 253 76 76 134 134 134 216 216 216 216 216 134 134 253 253 342 342 367 367 354 354 357 357 358 358 358 364 364 364 364 367 367 367 367 354 354 357 357 358 358 358 364 364 364 364 367 367 358 358 365
2723 70 06 2723 70 09 2723 70 24 2724 00 02 2724 00 69 2724 02 2724 09 2724 14 04 # 2724 16 06 # 2724 19 09 # 2724 90 04 2724 90 11 2742 2742 09 2742 18 2743 2743 09 2743 18 2744 2744 09 2744 18 2764 2766 2769 2779 2819 01 2819 02 2819 02 2819 09 2819 09 2819 89 82 2819 89 82 2819 89 89 2819 89 89 2819 99 09 2819 99 09 2830 10 2834 10 2834 11 2835 10 2835 11 2844 2856 2857 2858 2859 2860 10 2861 10 2862 10 2866 10 2867 10 2868 2869 2872 2873 2874 2875 2885 2891 10 2896 10 2897 2901 * 2902 2903 2904 2905 2906 2906 10 2907 2908 2911 2912 2915 2916 2918 2921 2925 2926 10 2927
Packing Page unit
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 10 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 10 1
365 365 365 368 368 355 355 358 358 358 368 368 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 343 342 342 41 34 34 72 34 72 34 99 34 99 34 99 34 302 302 302 302 50 48 49 49 49 34 36 36 35 35 45 45 37 35 35 34 35 37 37 37 36 39 38 38 39 40 40 41 41 52 41 46 39 46 46 51 46 47
627
PRODUCT SUMMARY Order no.
Packing Page Order no. unit
2927 10 2928 10 2930 2931 2934 10 2939 2943 2948 2948 10 2949 2951 * 2952 * 2968 01 2972 2974 01 2975 2975 01 2976 2977 2999 06 # 2999 08 # 2999 11 # 2999 13 # 3031 3032 3032 12 3033 03 3035 3035 20 3035 50 3036 3036 50 3037 3038 08 33 4171 14 04 * 33 4171 16 06 * 33 4171 19 09 * 33 4207 80 09 * 33 4208 80 09 * 33 4209 80 09 * 33 4213 14 04 * 33 4213 16 06 * 33 4213 19 09 * 33 4214 14 04 * 33 4214 16 06 * 33 4214 19 09 * 3541 02 3541 09 3542 02 3543 12 3543 19 3811 3811 01 3812 3812 01 3822 10 3826 10 3831 10 3832 10 3838 00 * 3841 3842 3846 00 * 3851 3852 3856 20 3861 3861 01 3862 3862 01 3875 00 * 3876 00 * 3877 00 * 3893 00 * 3956 19 3962 3966 4105 02 4105 09
628
10 40 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 1 1 1 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 1 1 1 1 10 10 10 10 1 10 10 1 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 1 1 1 1 10 10 10 10 10
47 48 55 55 42 42 44 56 55 20 20 20 36 48 47 52 53 48 47 50 50 50 50 14 14 14 14 14 18 14 14 14 14 14 121 121 121 204 204 204 122 122 122 122 122 122 70 70 70 70 70 301 301 301 301 18 15 19 19 301 18 18 301 18 18 18 15 15 15 15 301 301 301 301 17 15 15 62 62
4108 02 4108 09 4108 14 04 4108 16 06 4108 19 09 4108 19 62 4108 60 62 * 4108 60 89 * 4108 62 4108 89 62 4108 89 82 4108 89 89 4114 00 01 4114 00 04 4114 09 # 4114 62 # 4114 65 # 4115 00 01 4115 00 02 4115 00 69 4115 70 02 4115 70 04 4115 70 06 * 4115 70 09 4115 70 24 * 4123 4123 14 04 4123 16 06 4123 19 09 4123 60 89 * 4123 89 82 4123 89 89 4124 03 4124 13 4124 14 4124 19 03 4124 19 07 4124 60 03 * 4124 60 07 * 4124 89 03 4124 89 07 4126 00 73 4126 00 77 4126 71 13 4126 71 14 4134 00 01 4134 00 02 4134 00 04 4135 00 01 4135 00 02 4135 00 69 4135 09 # 4135 62 # 4135 65 # 4135 70 02 4135 70 04 4135 70 06 * 4135 70 09 4135 70 24 * 4143 02 4143 09 4143 14 04 4143 16 06 4143 19 09 4143 19 12 4143 19 13 4143 19 14 4143 60 12 * 4143 60 13 * 4143 60 14 * 4143 60 89 * 4143 89 12 4143 89 13 4143 89 14 4143 89 82 4143 89 89 4144 89 82 4144 89 89 4145 20
Packing Page unit
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
63 63 118 118 118 118 160 160 63 118 118 118 238 238 277 277 277 238 238 238 198 198 198 198 198 61 116 116 116 159 116 116 62 62 62 118 118 160 160 118 118 239 239 199 199 238 238 238 238 238 238 277 277 277 198 198 198 198 198 61 61 116 116 116 116 116 116 159 159 159 159 116 116 116 116 116 119 119 303
Order no.
4145 21 4147 00 01 4147 00 02 4147 00 69 4149 14 04 4149 16 06 4149 19 09 4149 60 89 * 4149 89 82 4149 89 89 4150 14 04 4150 16 06 4150 19 09 4152 00 01 4152 00 02 4152 00 69 4152 71 02 4152 71 04 4152 71 06 * 4152 71 09 4152 71 15 4152 71 24 * 4152 90 04 4159 02 4159 03 4159 09 4159 14 04 4159 16 06 4159 19 09 4159 19 13 4159 19 14 4159 60 13 * 4159 60 14 * 4159 60 89 * 4159 62 4159 89 13 4159 89 14 4159 89 82 4159 89 89 4161 00 01 4161 00 02 4161 00 69 4161 01 82 4161 70 02 4161 70 04 * 4161 70 06 * 4161 70 09 4161 70 24 * 4161 71 13 4161 71 14 4162 00 01 4162 00 04 4166 02 4166 09 4166 19 09 * 4166 60 89 * 4166 89 82 * 4166 89 89 * 4167 00 02 4167 00 69 4167 90 04 4167 90 11 4168 02 4168 09 4168 19 09 * 4168 60 89 * 4168 89 82 * 4168 89 89 * 4169 00 02 4169 00 69 4169 90 04 4169 90 11 4170 4170 00 01 4170 00 02 4170 00 69 4171 02 4171 09 4174 00 01
Packing Page Order no. unit
10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
303 240 240 240 117 117 117 160 117 117 103 103 103 239 239 239 200 200 200 200 200 200 239 62 62 62 118 118 118 118 118 160 160 160 62 118 118 118 118 239 239 239 239 199 199 199 199 199 200 200 239 239 67 67 121 162 121 121 242 242 242 242 67 67 121 162 121 121 242 242 242 242 67 242 242 242 67 67 242
4174 00 04 4306 4468 4470 4487 02 4487 05 4487 09 4500 02 4500 05 4500 09 4502 4503 4505 4505 4505 01 4505 02 4508 20 4508 21 4515 4522 4523 4538 4539 4540 01 4540 02 4540 03 4540 04 4541 01 4541 03 4541 04 4541 05 4541 06 # 4541 07 4544 02 4544 05 4544 09 4554 4555 4562 4568 4572 06 4572 09 4573 06 4573 09 4577 4579 4586 4587 4588 02 4588 05 4588 09 4590 4591 4592 4593 4594 4604 4605 4637 4703 4703 09 4708 02 4708 09 4708 19 09 4708 60 89 * 4708 70 02 4708 70 04 * 4708 70 06 * 4708 70 09 4708 70 24 * 4708 89 82 4708 89 89 4714 00 01 4714 00 02 4714 00 04 4714 09 # 4714 62 # 4714 65 # 4714 72 #
Packing Page unit
10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 1 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 1 1 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 1 1 10 1 1 1 1 10 10 10 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
242 63 20 20 23 23 23 24 24 24 22 23 21 28 21 21 303 303 22 22 23 24 25 27 27 27 28 27 27 28 28 28 28 24 24 24 25 25 24 24 20 20 20 20 28 28 25 26 24 24 24 25 26 25 23 23 30 30 475 61 61 63 63 119 160 200 200 200 200 200 119 119 238 238 238 277 277 277 277
Unverbindlic"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
PRODUCT SUMMARY Order no.
4715 00 01 4715 00 02 4715 00 62 4715 00 69 4715 00 73 4715 00 77 4715 00 82 4715 70 02 4715 70 04 4715 70 06 * 4715 70 09 4715 70 13 4715 70 14 4715 70 15 4715 70 24 * 4715 71 13 4715 71 14 4715 71 15 4720 02 4720 09 4720 60 89 * 4720 89 82 4720 89 89 4720 99 09 4722 02 4722 09 4722 89 82 4722 89 89 4722 99 09 4723 02 4723 03 4723 04 4723 09 4723 14 04 4723 16 06 4723 19 09 4723 19 14 4723 19 59 4723 60 59 * 4723 60 89 * 4723 89 14 4723 89 52 4723 89 59 4723 89 82 4723 89 89 4727 02 4727 09 4727 14 04 4727 16 06 4727 19 09 4727 60 89 * 4727 89 82 4727 89 89 4728 00 01 4728 00 02 4728 00 69 4728 71 02 * 4728 71 04 * 4728 71 06 * 4728 71 09 * 4728 71 24 * 4729 00 01 4729 00 02 4729 00 69 4729 02 4729 09 4729 14 04 4729 16 04 4729 16 06 4729 19 09 4729 60 89 * 4729 70 02 4729 70 04 4729 70 06 * 4729 70 09 4729 70 24 * 4729 89 82 4729 89 89 4729 90 04
Packing Page Order no. unit
10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 5 5 5 5 5 5 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
238 238 238 238 238 238 238 198 198 198 198 198 198 198 198 198 198 198 64 64 161 98 98 98 63 63 97 97 97 61 61 61 61 116 116 116 116 116 159 159 116 116 116 116 116 61 61 117 117 117 159 117 117 238 238 238 199 199 199 199 199 240 240 240 64 64 103 103 103 103 161 202 202 202 202 202 98 98 240
4729 90 11 4729 99 09 4734 00 01 4734 00 02 4734 00 04 4735 00 01 4735 00 02 4735 00 69 4735 09 # 4735 39 # 4735 62 # 4735 65 # 4735 70 02 4735 70 04 4735 70 06 * 4735 70 09 4735 70 24 * 4735 72 # 4735 75 # 4738 00 01 4738 00 02 4738 00 69 4738 09 # 4738 62 # 4738 65 # 4738 70 02 4738 70 04 4738 70 06 * 4738 70 09 4738 70 24 * 4739 00 01 4739 00 02 4739 00 62 4739 00 63 4739 00 69 4739 09 # 4739 62 # 4739 65 # 4739 70 02 4739 70 04 4739 70 06 * 4739 70 09 4739 70 13 4739 70 14 4739 70 15 4739 70 24 * 4739 71 13 4739 71 14 4739 71 15 4739 90 04 4742 02 4742 09 4742 89 82 4742 89 89 4742 99 09 4743 02 4743 03 4743 04 4743 05 4743 09 4743 13 4743 14 4743 14 04 4743 16 06 4743 19 03 4743 19 07 4743 19 09 4743 19 12 4743 19 13 4743 19 14 4743 19 22 4743 19 59 4743 60 03 * 4743 60 07 * 4743 60 09 * 4743 60 12 * 4743 60 13 * 4743 60 14 * 4743 60 22 *
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
Packing Page unit
10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
240 98 238 238 238 238 238 238 277 278 277 277 198 198 198 198 198 278 278 239 239 239 277 277 277 199 199 199 199 199 239 239 239 239 239 277 277 277 199 199 199 199 199 199 199 199 199 199 199 239 63 63 97 97 97 61 61 61 61 61 61 61 116 116 117 117 116 116 116 116 117 116 159 159 159 159 159 159 159
Order no.
4743 60 39 * 4743 60 49 * 4743 60 59 * 4743 60 79 * 4743 60 89 * 4743 89 03 4743 89 07 4743 89 12 4743 89 13 4743 89 14 4743 89 22 4743 89 52 4743 89 59 4743 89 82 4743 89 89 4744 02 4744 09 4744 14 04 4744 16 06 4744 19 09 4744 19 49 4744 49 4744 60 49 * 4744 60 89 * 4744 89 82 4744 89 89 4745 20 4745 21 4746 02 4746 09 4746 14 04 4746 16 06 4746 19 09 4746 60 89 * 4746 89 82 4746 89 89 4747 00 01 4747 00 02 4747 00 69 4747 71 02 4747 71 04 4747 71 06 * 4747 71 09 4747 71 24 * 4748 00 01 4748 00 02 4748 00 69 4748 71 02 4748 71 04 4748 71 06 * 4748 71 09 4748 71 24 * 4749 02 4749 03 4749 04 4749 05 4749 09 4749 14 04 4749 15 4749 16 06 4749 19 09 4749 60 89 * 4749 89 82 4749 89 89 4750 14 04 4750 16 06 4750 19 02 4750 19 03 4750 19 07 4750 19 09 4750 19 13 4750 19 14 4750 19 15 4750 60 02 * 4750 60 03 * 4750 60 07 * 4750 60 13 * 4750 60 14 * 4750 60 15 *
Packing Page Order no. unit
10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
159 159 159 159 159 117 117 116 116 116 117 116 116 116 116 63 63 119 119 119 120 63 161 161 119 119 303 303 63 63 119 119 119 161 119 119 240 240 240 201 201 201 201 201 240 240 240 202 202 202 202 202 62 62 62 62 62 117 62 117 117 159 117 117 117 117 117 117 117 117 118 118 118 159 159 159 160 160 160
4750 89 02 4750 89 03 4750 89 07 4750 89 13 4750 89 14 4750 89 15 4750 89 82 4750 89 89 4751 19 09 4751 60 79 * 4751 60 89 * 4751 71 02 4751 71 04 4751 71 06 * 4751 71 09 4751 71 24 * 4751 72 02 4751 72 04 4751 72 06 * 4751 72 09 4751 72 24 * 4751 89 82 4751 89 89 4752 60 89 * 4752 71 02 4752 71 04 4752 71 06 * 4752 71 09 4752 71 24 * 4752 72 02 4752 72 04 4752 72 06 * 4752 72 09 4752 72 24 * 4753 00 01 4753 00 02 4753 00 69 4753 70 02 4753 70 04 4753 70 06 * 4753 70 09 4753 70 24 * 4754 02 4754 09 4754 14 04 4754 16 06 4754 19 09 4754 89 82 4754 89 89 4754 99 09 4755 4755 01 4756 02 4756 09 4757 00 01 4757 00 02 4757 00 04 4758 00 01 4758 00 02 4758 00 04 4758 10 04 4758 20 04 4758 30 04 4766 02 4766 09 4766 19 09 4786 19 49 4786 49 4786 71 02 4786 71 09 5031 5031 01 5031 50 5032 03 5034 04 5034 04 5035 5035 01 5035 03
Packing Page unit
10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 5 5 5 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
117 117 117 118 118 118 117 117 119 161 161 200 200 200 200 200 201 201 201 201 201 119 119 161 201 201 201 201 201 201 201 201 201 201 240 240 240 202 202 202 202 202 64 64 103 103 103 98 98 98 303 303 62 62 240 240 240 240 240 240 273 273 273 64 64 98 119 63 202 202 16 16 17 16 17 18 17 17 17
629
PRODUCT SUMMARY Order no.
Packing Page Order no. unit
5035 20 5036 5038 08 5051 02 5051 03 5052 01 5056 01 51 6001 14 04 * 51 6001 16 06 * 51 6001 19 09 * 51 6002 14 04 * 51 6002 16 06 * 51 6002 19 09 * 5101 5101 10 5104 5104 01 5131 02 61 1026 00 01 61 1026 00 02 61 1026 00 69 61 1026 09 # 61 1026 62 # 61 1026 65 # 61 1026 70 02 61 1026 70 06 * 61 1026 70 09 61 1026 70 24 * 61 1026 90 04 61 1026 90 11 61 1036 02 61 1036 09 61 1036 14 04 61 1036 16 06 61 1036 19 09 61 1036 60 89 * 61 1036 89 82 61 1036 89 89 61 3032 61 3035 61 3036 61 3037 61 3038 08 61 3962 61 3966 61 3966 02 61 3966 09 61 4160 61 4160 09 61 4355 02 61 4355 09 61 4355 19 49 61 4355 89 42 61 4355 89 49 61 4356 02 61 4356 09 61 4356 19 49 61 4356 89 42 61 4356 89 49 61 4365 02 61 4365 09 61 4365 89 82 61 4365 89 89 61 4366 02 61 4366 09 61 4366 89 82 61 4366 89 89 61 4730 02 61 4730 09 61 4730 89 82 61 4730 89 89 61 4730 99 09 61 4743 02 61 4743 09 61 4743 19 09 61 4743 89 82 61 4743 89 89 61 4754 02 61 4754 09 61 4754 89 82
630
10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 1 1 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 5 5 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
18 16 17 17 17 17 17 122 122 122 122 122 122 19 19 302 302 19 261 261 261 290 290 290 222 222 222 222 261 261 82 82 141 141 141 177 141 141 14 14 14 14 15 15 15 69 69 64 64 64 64 97 97 97 64 64 97 97 97 65 65 98 98 65 65 98 98 64 64 98 98 98 61 61 116 116 116 64 64 98
Packing Page unit
61 4754 89 89 61 4754 99 09 61 5031 61 6102 02 61 6102 09 61 6103 02 61 6103 09 61 6103 60 89 * 61 6114 00 01 61 6114 00 04 61 6114 01 01 61 6114 01 04 61 6115 00 01 61 6115 00 02 61 6115 00 69 61 6115 01 01 61 6115 01 02 61 6115 01 69 61 6155 00 01 61 6155 00 02 61 6155 00 69 61 6160 61 6160 09 61 6172 02 61 6172 09 61 6175 09 # 61 6175 62 # 61 6175 65 # 61 6176 02 61 6176 09 61 6703 19 09 61 6703 60 89 * 61 6703 89 82 61 6703 89 89 61 6715 70 02 61 6715 70 04 61 6715 70 06 * 61 6715 70 09 61 6715 70 24 * 61 6733 14 04 61 6733 16 06 61 6733 19 09 61 6733 60 89 * 61 6754 02 61 6754 09 61 6754 14 04 61 6754 16 06 61 6754 19 09 61 6754 89 82 61 6754 89 89 61 6754 99 09 63 3023 6347 00 01 * 6347 00 02 * 6347 00 69 * 6347 02 * 6347 09 * 6347 14 04 * 6347 16 06 * 6347 19 09 * 6347 70 02 * 6347 70 04 * 6347 70 06 * 6347 70 09 * 6347 70 24 * 6347 90 04 * 6347 90 11 * 6391 24 04 6391 99 09 6392 24 04 6392 99 09 67 1009 02 67 1009 09 67 1009 14 04 67 1009 16 06 67 1009 19 09 67 1009 20 67 1009 21 67 1009 60 89 * 67 1009 89 82
10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 5 5 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
98 98 17 65 65 65 65 162 241 241 241 241 241 241 241 241 241 241 241 241 241 66 66 65 65 278 278 278 65 65 120 162 120 120 202 202 202 202 202 120 120 120 162 65 65 104 104 104 99 99 99 15 242 242 242 66 66 121 121 121 204 204 204 204 204 242 242 109 99 109 99 71 71 126 126 126 303 303 166 126
Order no.
Packing Page Order no. unit
67 1009 89 89 67 1025 00 02 67 1025 00 69 67 1025 70 02 67 1025 70 04 67 1025 70 06 * 67 1025 70 09 67 1025 70 24 * 67 1025 90 04 67 1025 90 11 67 1044 00 01 67 1044 00 04 67 1045 00 01 67 1045 00 02 67 1045 00 69 67 1045 70 02 67 1045 70 04 67 1045 70 06 * 67 1045 70 09 67 1045 70 24 * 67 1103 02 67 1103 09 67 1103 14 04 67 1103 16 06 67 1103 19 09 67 1103 60 89 * 67 1103 89 82 67 1103 89 89 67 3039 09 67 6380 60 89 * 67 6572 02 67 6572 09 67 6574 00 01 67 6574 00 04 67 6575 00 01 67 6575 00 02 67 6575 00 62 67 6575 00 63 67 6575 00 69 67 6575 09 # 67 6575 62 # 67 6575 65 # 67 6575 70 02 67 6575 70 04 67 6575 70 06 * 67 6575 70 09 67 6575 70 24 * 67 6576 00 62 67 6576 00 63 67 6576 01 67 6576 02 67 6576 09 67 6576 14 04 67 6576 16 06 67 6576 19 09 67 6576 60 12 * 67 6576 60 13 * 67 6576 60 14 * 67 6576 60 89 * 67 6576 89 62 67 6576 89 63 67 6576 89 82 67 6576 89 89 67 6577 71 02 67 6577 71 04 67 6577 71 06 * 67 6577 71 09 67 6577 71 24 * 67 6579 67 6579 01 67 6583 60 89 * 67 6872 02 * 67 6872 09 * 67 6874 00 01 * 67 6874 00 04 * 67 6875 00 01 * 67 6875 00 02 * 67 6875 00 62 * 67 6875 00 63 * 67 6875 00 69 *
10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
126 261 261 222 222 222 222 222 261 261 246 246 246 246 246 209 209 209 209 209 82 82 141 141 141 177 141 141 14 162 66 66 241 241 241 241 241 241 241 278 278 278 203 203 203 203 203 120 120 66 66 66 120 120 120 162 162 162 162 120 120 120 120 203 203 203 203 203 303 303 162 66 66 241 241 241 241 241 241 241
Packing Page unit
67 6875 09 # 67 6875 62 # 67 6875 65 # 67 6875 70 02 * 67 6875 70 04 * 67 6875 70 06 * 67 6875 70 09 * 67 6875 70 24 * 67 6876 00 62 * 67 6876 00 63 * 67 6876 01 * 67 6876 02 * 67 6876 09 * 67 6876 14 04 * 67 6876 16 06 * 67 6876 19 09 * 67 6876 89 62 * 67 6876 89 63 * 67 6876 89 82 * 67 6876 89 89 * 67 6877 71 02 * 67 6877 71 04 * 67 6877 71 06 * 67 6877 71 09 * 67 6877 71 24 * 67 6879 * 67 6879 01 * 73 4123 09 * 73 4123 14 04 * 73 4123 16 06 * 73 4123 19 09 * 73 4123 19 14 * 73 4123 60 89 * 73 4123 89 82 * 73 4123 89 89 * 73 4134 00 01 * 73 4134 00 04 * 73 4135 00 02 * 73 4135 00 69 * 73 4135 00 77 * 73 4135 09 * 73 4135 70 02 * 73 4135 70 04 * 73 4135 70 06 * 73 4135 70 09 * 73 4135 70 14 * 73 4135 70 24 * 7500 00 04 7500 00 05 7500 00 07 7500 00 08 7501 00 02 7501 00 09 7501 00 10 7501 00 12 7501 00 13 7501 00 14 7501 00 15 * 7501 00 16 * 7502 00 01 7504 00 01 7504 00 02 7504 00 03 7504 00 04 7506 00 12 7506 00 19 7506 00 29 * 7506 00 42 7506 00 43 7506 00 44 7506 00 49 7506 00 52 7506 00 59 7506 00 65 # 7506 00 66 # 7506 00 69 # 7506 00 72 7506 00 73 7506 00 74 * 7506 00 75 *
10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 5 50 10 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
278 278 278 203 203 203 203 203 121 121 66 66 66 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 203 203 203 203 203 303 303 61 117 117 117 117 159 117 117 238 238 238 238 238 277 198 198 198 198 198 198 376 376 376 376 375 374 374 375 375 375 374 375 377 376 377 377 375 402 402 420 436 436 436 436 409 409 443 443 443 427 427 427 427
Unverbindlic"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
PRODUCT SUMMARY Order no.
7506 00 79 7506 00 83 7506 00 85 7506 00 89 7506 01 12 7506 01 19 7506 01 29 * 7506 01 42 7506 01 43 7506 01 44 7506 01 49 7506 01 52 7506 01 59 7506 01 65 # 7506 01 66 # 7506 01 69 # 7506 01 72 7506 01 73 7506 01 74 * 7506 01 75 * 7506 01 79 7506 01 83 7506 01 85 7506 01 89 7514 10 00 7514 11 00 7514 12 29 * 7514 13 29 * 7514 20 00 7514 21 00 7514 22 29 * 7514 23 29 * 7514 32 29 * 7514 33 29 * 7514 42 29 * 7514 43 29 * 7516 10 12 7516 10 12 7516 10 19 7516 10 19 7516 10 42 7516 10 42 7516 10 43 7516 10 43 7516 10 44 7516 10 44 7516 10 49 7516 10 49 7516 10 65 # 7516 10 65 # 7516 10 66 # 7516 10 66 # 7516 10 69 # 7516 10 69 # 7516 10 83 # 7516 10 83 # 7516 10 85 # 7516 10 85 # 7516 10 89 # 7516 10 89 # 7516 10 91 7516 10 93 7516 10 99 7516 11 12 7516 11 12 7516 11 19 7516 11 19 7516 11 42 7516 11 42 7516 11 43 7516 11 43 7516 11 44 7516 11 44 7516 11 49 7516 11 49 7516 11 83 # 7516 11 83 # 7516 11 85 # 7516 11 85 # 7516 11 89 #
Packing Page Order no. unit
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
427 409 409 409 402 402 420 436 436 436 436 409 409 443 443 443 427 427 427 427 427 409 409 409 376 376 421 421 376 376 421 422 421 422 421 422 355 403 355 403 368 437 368 437 368 437 368 437 371 443 371 443 371 443 359 411 359 411 359 411 447 447 447 355 403 355 403 368 437 368 437 368 437 368 437 359 411 359 411 359
7516 11 89 # 7516 13 70 7516 13 70 7516 13 73 7516 13 73 7516 13 74 * 7516 13 74 * 7516 13 75 * 7516 13 75 * 7516 13 80 7516 13 80 7516 13 85 7516 13 85 7516 15 91 7516 15 93 7516 15 99 7516 16 12 7516 16 19 7516 16 42 7516 16 43 7516 16 44 7516 16 49 7516 16 83 # 7516 16 85 # 7516 16 89 # 7516 17 70 7516 17 73 7516 17 74 * 7516 17 75 * 7516 17 80 7516 17 85 7516 20 12 7516 20 12 7516 20 19 7516 20 19 7516 20 42 7516 20 43 7516 20 43 7516 20 44 7516 20 44 7516 20 49 7516 20 49 7516 20 65 # 7516 20 65 # 7516 20 66 # 7516 20 66 # 7516 20 69 # 7516 20 69 # 7516 20 83 # 7516 20 83 # 7516 20 85 # 7516 20 85 # 7516 20 89 # 7516 20 89 # 7516 20 91 7516 20 93 7516 20 99 7516 21 12 7516 21 12 7516 21 19 7516 21 19 7516 21 42 7516 21 42 7516 21 43 7516 21 43 7516 21 44 7516 21 44 7516 21 49 7516 21 49 7516 21 83 # 7516 21 83 # 7516 21 85 # 7516 21 85 # 7516 21 89 # 7516 21 89 # 7516 23 70 7516 23 70 7516 23 73 7516 23 73 7516 23 74
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
Packing Page unit
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
411 365 428 365 428 365 428 365 428 359 410 359 410 447 447 447 404 404 438 438 438 438 412 412 412 429 429 429 429 411 411 355 403 355 403 438 368 438 368 438 368 438 371 443 371 443 371 443 359 411 359 411 359 411 447 447 447 355 403 355 403 368 437 368 437 368 437 368 437 359 411 359 411 359 411 365 428 365 428 365
Order no.
7516 23 74 7516 23 75 * 7516 23 75 * 7516 23 80 7516 23 80 7516 23 85 7516 25 91 7516 25 93 7516 25 99 7516 26 12 7516 26 19 7516 26 42 7516 26 43 7516 26 44 7516 26 49 7516 26 83 # 7516 26 85 # 7516 26 89 # 7516 27 70 7516 27 73 7516 27 74 * 7516 27 75 * 7516 27 80 7516 27 85 7516 30 91 7516 30 93 7516 30 99 7516 33 70 7516 33 70 7516 33 73 7516 33 73 7516 33 74 * 7516 33 74 * 7516 33 75 7516 33 75 7516 33 80 7516 33 80 7516 33 85 7516 33 85 7516 35 91 7516 35 93 7516 35 99 7516 37 70 7516 37 73 7516 37 74 * 7516 37 75 * 7516 37 80 7516 37 85 7516 40 12 7516 40 12 7516 40 19 7516 40 19 7516 40 42 7516 40 42 7516 40 43 7516 40 43 7516 40 44 7516 40 44 7516 40 49 7516 40 49 7516 40 65 7516 40 65 7516 40 66 # 7516 40 66 # 7516 40 69 # 7516 40 69 # 7516 40 83 # 7516 40 83 # 7516 40 85 # 7516 40 85 # 7516 40 89 # 7516 40 89 # 7516 40 91 7516 40 93 7516 40 99 7516 41 12 7516 41 12 7516 41 19 7516 41 19 7516 41 42
Packing Page Order no. unit
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
428 365 428 359 410 410 448 448 448 404 404 438 438 438 438 413 413 413 429 429 429 429 412 412 447 447 447 365 428 365 428 365 428 365 428 359 410 359 410 448 448 448 429 429 429 429 412 412 355 403 355 403 368 438 368 438 368 438 368 438 371 443 371 443 371 443 359 411 359 411 359 411 447 447 447 355 403 355 403 368
7516 41 42 7516 41 43 7516 41 43 7516 41 44 7516 41 44 7516 41 49 7516 41 49 7516 41 83 # 7516 41 83 # 7516 41 85 # 7516 41 85 # 7516 41 89 # 7516 41 89 # 7516 43 70 7516 43 70 7516 43 73 7516 43 73 7516 43 74 * 7516 43 74 * 7516 43 75 7516 43 75 7516 43 80 7516 43 80 7516 43 85 7516 43 85 7516 45 91 7516 45 93 7516 45 99 7516 46 12 7516 46 19 7516 46 42 7516 46 43 7516 46 44 7516 46 49 7516 46 83 # 7516 46 85 # 7516 46 89 # 7516 47 70 7516 47 73 7516 47 74 * 7516 47 75 * 7516 47 80 7516 47 85 7516 84 19 7516 84 83 # 7516 84 85 # 7516 84 89 # 7516 86 91 7516 86 93 7516 86 99 7516 87 12 * 7516 87 19 * 7516 87 42 7516 87 43 7516 87 44 7516 87 49 7516 87 83 # 7516 87 85 # 7516 87 89 # 7516 88 70 7516 88 73 7516 88 74 * 7516 88 75 * 7516 88 80 7516 88 85 7519 10 00 7519 11 00 7519 20 00 7519 21 00 7521 20 06 7521 30 06 7521 40 06 7521 40 07 7521 40 08 7521 60 01 7521 60 01 7521 80 01 7526 11 12 7526 11 19 7526 11 42
Packing Page unit
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
437 368 437 368 437 368 437 359 411 359 411 359 411 365 428 365 428 365 428 365 428 359 410 359 410 448 448 448 404 404 438 438 438 438 413 413 413 429 429 429 429 412 412 405 414 414 414 448 448 448 404 404 439 439 439 439 413 413 413 430 430 430 430 413 413 452 452 452 453 379 381 379 379 377 310 378 377 406 406 440
631
PRODUCT SUMMARY Order no.
7526 11 43 7526 11 44 7526 11 49 7526 11 52 7526 11 59 7526 11 65 # 7526 11 66 # 7526 11 69 # 7526 11 72 7526 11 73 7526 11 74 * 7526 11 75 * 7526 11 79 7526 11 83 7526 11 85 7526 11 89 7526 12 12 7526 12 19 7526 12 29 * 7526 12 42 7526 12 43 7526 12 44 7526 12 49 7526 12 52 7526 12 59 7526 12 65 # 7526 12 66 # 7526 12 69 # 7526 12 72 7526 12 73 7526 12 74 * 7526 12 75 * 7526 12 79 7526 12 83 7526 12 85 7526 12 89 7526 13 65 # 7526 13 66 # 7526 13 69 # 7526 14 65 # 7526 14 66 # 7526 14 69 # 7526 15 12 7526 15 19 7526 15 29 * 7526 15 42 7526 15 43 7526 15 44 7526 15 49 7526 15 52 7526 15 59 7526 15 72 7526 15 73 7526 15 74 * 7526 15 75 * 7526 15 79 7526 15 83 7526 15 85 7526 15 89 7526 16 12 7526 16 19 7526 16 29 * 7526 16 42 7526 16 43 7526 16 44 7526 16 49 7526 16 52 7526 16 59 7526 16 72 7526 16 73 7526 16 74 * 7526 16 75 * 7526 16 79 7526 16 83 7526 16 85 7526 16 89 7526 20 01 7526 20 01 7526 40 01 7526 40 01
632
Packing Page Order no. unit
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
440 440 440 417 417 444 444 444 433 433 433 433 433 417 417 417 407 407 425 441 441 441 441 418 418 445 445 445 434 434 434 434 434 418 418 418 445 445 445 446 446 446 406 406 425 441 441 441 441 417 417 433 433 433 433 433 417 417 417 407 407 426 442 442 442 442 418 418 434 434 434 434 434 418 418 418 336 380 336 380
7531 00 02 7531 10 07 7531 20 07 7531 20 08 * 7531 20 12 * 7531 30 05 7531 40 11 7531 40 13 7531 40 15 7531 40 16 7531 40 17 7531 40 18 7531 40 19 * 7531 60 02 7531 60 03 7531 80 03 7531 80 04 7531 80 05 7531 80 08 * 7533 00 01 7533 60 01 7534 10 01 7534 10 02 7534 10 03 7534 20 01 7541 40 03 7541 40 04 7542 40 04 7543 10 01 7544 11 12 7544 11 19 7544 11 42 7544 11 43 7544 11 44 7544 11 49 7544 11 52 7544 11 59 7544 11 65 # 7544 11 66 # 7544 11 69 # 7544 11 72 7544 11 73 7544 11 74 * 7544 11 75 * 7544 11 79 7544 11 83 7544 11 85 7544 11 89 7544 12 12 7544 12 19 7544 12 29 * 7544 12 42 7544 12 43 7544 12 44 7544 12 49 7544 12 52 7544 12 59 7544 12 72 7544 12 73 7544 12 74 * 7544 12 75 * 7544 12 79 7544 12 83 7544 12 85 7544 12 89 7549 00 01 * 7549 20 01 7550 00 02 7551 40 01 7552 40 01 7563 00 04 7564 20 01 7564 20 01 7564 20 01 7564 20 34 * 7564 20 35 * 7564 20 39 * 7564 21 34 * 7564 21 35 * 7564 21 39 *
Packing Page unit
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
389 392 392 386 396 393 390 391 386 387 393 390 389 387 395 388 387 388 391 396 395 385 390 391 386 383 381 382 381 405 405 440 440 440 440 416 416 444 444 444 432 432 432 432 432 416 416 416 405 405 424 439 439 439 439 416 416 432 432 432 432 432 416 416 416 382 381 394 394 394 397 309 328 378 325 325 325 325 325 325
Order no.
7564 30 34 * 7564 30 35 * 7564 30 39 * 7564 31 34 * 7564 31 35 * 7564 31 39 * 7564 40 01 7564 40 01 7564 40 01 7564 80 01 7564 80 01 7564 80 01 7566 01 12 7566 01 19 7566 01 29 * 7566 01 42 7566 01 43 7566 01 44 7566 01 49 7566 01 52 7566 01 59 7566 01 72 7566 01 73 7566 01 74 * 7566 01 75 * 7566 01 79 7566 01 83 7566 01 85 7566 01 89 7566 03 12 * 7566 03 19 * 7566 03 29 * 7566 03 42 * 7566 03 43 * 7566 03 44 * 7566 03 49 * 7566 03 52 * 7566 03 59 * 7566 03 72 * 7566 03 73 * 7566 03 74 * 7566 03 75 * 7566 03 79 * 7566 03 83 * 7566 03 85 * 7566 03 89 * 7566 27 29 * 7566 27 70 7566 27 73 7566 27 74 * 7566 27 75 * 7566 27 80 7566 27 85 7566 35 91 7566 35 93 7566 35 99 7566 36 91 7566 36 93 7566 36 99 7566 37 29 * 7566 37 70 7566 37 73 7566 37 74 * 7566 37 75 * 7566 37 80 7566 37 85 7566 41 65 # 7566 41 66 # 7566 41 69 # 7566 45 91 7566 45 93 7566 45 99 7566 46 91 7566 46 93 7566 46 99 7566 55 91 7566 55 93 7566 55 99 7566 56 91 7566 56 93
Packing Page Order no. unit
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
325 325 325 325 325 325 309 328 378 310 329 379 402 402 420 436 436 436 436 410 410 428 428 428 428 428 410 410 410 403 403 421 437 437 437 437 409 409 427 427 427 427 427 409 409 409 423 430 430 430 430 414 414 449 449 449 450 450 450 423 431 431 431 431 415 415 443 443 443 449 449 449 451 451 451 450 450 450 451 451
7566 56 99 7566 57 29 * 7566 57 70 7566 57 73 7566 57 74 * 7566 57 75 * 7566 57 80 7566 57 85 7566 80 65 # 7566 80 66 # 7566 80 69 # 7570 00 01 # 7570 00 02 # 7570 00 10 # 7570 00 11 7571 00 03 7571 00 04 * 7572 00 10 7572 00 11 7573 00 01 7573 00 01 7573 00 02 # 7573 00 03 # 7573 00 10 7573 00 10 7574 00 02 # 7574 00 03 # 7574 00 09 7574 00 12 * 7574 00 13 * 7586 00 12 7586 00 19 7586 00 29 * 7586 00 42 7586 00 43 7586 00 44 7586 00 49 7586 00 52 7586 00 59 7586 00 72 7586 00 73 7586 00 74 * 7586 00 75 * 7586 00 79 7586 00 83 7586 00 85 7586 00 89 7590 00 08 # 7590 00 09 7590 00 09 7590 00 09 7590 00 12 7590 00 17 7590 00 19 7590 00 20 7590 00 21 7590 00 31 7590 00 32 7590 00 46 7590 00 47 7590 00 48 7590 00 49 7590 00 50 7590 00 52 7590 00 53 7590 00 54 7590 00 55 7590 00 57 7590 00 60 7590 00 66 * 7590 00 67 * 7590 00 68 * 7590 00 72 7590 00 72 7590 00 73 7590 00 73 7590 00 74 7590 00 74 7590 00 75 7590 00 75
Packing Page unit
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
451 424 431 431 431 431 415 415 443 443 443 400 400 401 401 397 397 396 396 398 463 400 400 398 460 400 400 399 399 399 408 408 426 442 442 442 442 419 419 435 435 435 435 435 419 419 419 401 398 463 463 401 401 394 401 399 328 328 383 380 380 380 384 384 385 385 385 384 401 374 374 374 51 395 51 395 51 395 51 395
Unverbindlic"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
PRODUCT SUMMARY Order no.
7590 00 76 7590 00 76 7590 00 77 7590 00 77 7590 00 80 7590 00 81 7590 00 82 7591 00 01 7591 00 02 7594 00 03 7594 00 04 7594 00 05 7594 00 09 7594 01 01 * 7594 01 03 * 7594 02 12 7594 02 19 7594 02 29 * 7594 02 42 7594 02 43 7594 02 44 7594 02 49 7594 02 52 7594 02 59 7594 02 65 # 7594 02 66 # 7594 02 69 # 7594 02 72 7594 02 73 7594 02 74 * 7594 02 75 * 7594 02 79 7594 02 83 7594 02 85 7594 02 89 7594 04 02 7594 04 02 7594 04 02 7594 04 02 7594 04 02 7594 04 02 7594 04 02 7594 04 02 7594 04 02 7594 04 03 7594 04 03 7594 04 03 7594 04 03 7594 04 04 7594 04 04 7594 04 09 7594 04 09 7594 04 09 7594 04 09 7594 04 09 7594 04 09 7594 04 09 7594 04 09 7594 04 09 7594 04 83 7594 04 83 7594 04 83 7594 04 85 7594 04 85 7594 04 85 7594 04 89 7594 04 89 7594 04 89 7594 10 01 7594 10 01 7596 00 01 7596 00 02 7596 00 03 7596 00 04 7596 00 05 7596 00 06 7599 10 00 7599 11 00 7599 12 00 7599 13 00
Packing Page Order no. unit
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 10 10 1 1 1 1 1 1 10 10 10 10
51 394 51 395 452 452 452 383 380 400 400 400 400 399 399 408 408 426 442 442 442 442 419 419 446 446 446 435 435 435 435 435 419 419 419 77 134 216 253 405 416 424 432 440 216 253 432 440 253 440 77 134 216 253 405 416 424 432 440 134 216 416 134 216 416 134 173 416 50 377 405 405 439 439 439 439 453 453 453 453
7599 20 00 7599 21 00 7599 22 00 87 2928 10 9020 9050 9051 50 9103 01 9103 02 9107 9108 9155 9200 01 9200 01 9209 9214 01 9251 01 9251 01 9251 02 9251 02 9252 9253 01 9253 02 9254 9255 9259 9405 01 00 9420 00 02 9420 00 69 9420 02 9420 09 9420 14 04 9420 16 06 9420 19 09 9420 60 89 * 9420 70 02 9420 70 04 9420 70 06 9420 70 09 9420 70 24 9420 89 82 9420 89 89 9420 90 04 9420 90 11 9430 01 00 * 9450 01 00 9450 02 00 9455 01 00 9455 02 00 * 9460 01 00 9465 01 00 9490 01 00 9498 02 02 9498 11 02 9498 11 30 9498 27 30 9498 28 02 9498 33 02 9498 33 30 BE RTT0 1 HE 450 HI FS1B
"#" Articles marked with this sign will phase out . "*" New
Packing Page unit
10 10 10 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 10 10 10
Order no.
Packing Page Order no. unit
Packing Page unit
453 453 453 48 460 463 462 464 464 465 464 461 398 460 352 460 54 461 54 461 461 461 461 465 463 465 350 367 367 354 354 357 357 357 362 364 364 364 364 364 357 357 367 367 343 350 351 352 348 351 352 350 360 369 369 360 360 365 365 24 304 22
633
All locations you can see in this catalogue are real. That means: We photographed our switches and systems exclusively in real existing reference objects, whose owners or architects decided consciously for Berker: Penthouse Rheda, Haus Schmidhuber, Haus Wetter, Langer Eugen, Haus Seelen, Peek&Cloppenburg, Bulthaup Leadstore, Vigilius Mountain Resort, Bauhaus, Appartment Bothe, Haus der Gegenwart, Yacht von Hallberg-Rassy. If you also know an interesting reference object with Berker switches and systems or maybe even plan one by yourself, please let us know. We are pleased about each reference and support you gladly when planning. www.berker.de/kontakt Photos: Eva Herrmann, Jochen Helle, Florian Holzherr, Werner Huthmacher, Wolfram Schroll, Mark Seelen, Peter Szamer, Ulli Würth
This catalogue is intended as procedure documentation for dealers. Our terms of payment, sales and delivery shall apply. Our publications are intended to provide informattion to the best of our knowledge and are in no way intended to be legally binding. Illustrations are not binding, especially with regard to colour, size and equipment of the products shown. Industrial property rights exist for many of the products. We reserve the right to make technical and formal changes to our products in the interest of technical progress. All items in this catalogue which are subject to CE regulations bear the CE mark on their packaging label and on the product itself.
Berker GmbH & Co. KG Klagebach 38, 58579 Schalksmühle/Germany Telephone + 49 (0) 23 55/9 05-0, Fax + 49 (0) 23 55/ 9 05-1 12 export@berker.com www.berker.com Order no.: 0301 01
BERKER INSTALLATION PROGRAMME 2009 hightech and design. the programme of the future.
CATALOGUE 2009